JP7815664B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

In modern gaming machines, movable members are moved while the display means is executing display effects in various games. For example, the movable members are driven to notify players that a special symbol game will develop into a super reach or special reach, and when a special symbol game notifies players that a regular jackpot has been reached, the movable members are driven during that special symbol game and during the jackpot game that is executed after the special symbol game has ended.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2021-41229

However, when moving the movable member, there is room for improvement in the operation method, etc.

The object of the present invention is to provide an amusement machine in which a movable member is moved, which can more appropriately control the movable member.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A plurality of starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area;
A winning/losing lottery means (41) for performing a winning/losing lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
a display control means (51) for determining and executing one specific effect to be executed on a display means (341) provided in the game area from a plurality of effect display modes (effect patterns) according to the lottery result of the winning/losing lottery means (41);
a movement control means (51) provided in the game area, for determining one of a plurality of movement modes (movement modes A to D) of the movement means (37) that operates while the display means (341) displays the one specific effect, and for executing the movement control means (51);
A gaming machine comprising:
The moving control means (51) causes the moving means (37) to perform a series of specific actions (for example, up-down movement, reciprocating movement) based on specific information (driving data 1 to 5) set in correspondence with the one moving mode (moving modes A to D) determined from the plurality of moving modes, based on the establishment of predetermined operating conditions (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability variable promotion, 16R probability variable non-promotion),
The movable means (37) is controlled to move between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1) which is an initial position side in the series of specific operations, and a second position (operating position) which is the most moved position,
the series of specific actions is configured to execute a predetermined action to position the movable means at the first position (operation position) or in the vicinity of the first position (intermediate operation position 1) a plurality of times,
The movable control means (51)
a determination means (51) for determining whether or not a condition for ending the series of specific actions is met (completion of all processes based on the drive data 1, button operation) when the predetermined action is executed during the movement control of the series of specific actions based on the specific information;
a termination means (51) for stopping the movement of the movable means (37) located at the first position or in the vicinity of the first position when it is determined based on the determination means (51) that the termination condition is satisfied, and terminating the series of specific operations;
The present invention is characterized by comprising:

1 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 2 is a development view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a development view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a gaming board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a gaming board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a gaming board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. A block diagram showing an example of a general map reservation storage area in the memory area of the main control device shown in Figure 8. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a game information storage area in the memory area of the main control device. FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a performance information display device of a main control device. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display on a performance display monitor of the performance information display device. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display on a setting value display unit of the performance information display device. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the start winning processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of Figure 17. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the first special chart hold command setting process executed in the start winning process of Figure 18. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a through gate process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17; 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by the main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for regular game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the general map data setting process executed in the general map game control process of Figure 22. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal map fluctuation start processing executed in the normal map game control processing of Figure 22. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal winning game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special chart data setting processing executed in the special chart game control processing of Figure 26. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special chart change start processing executed in the special chart game control processing of Figure 26. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game setting value change process executed in the main process of FIG. 21 . 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. 21 . FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36 . 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 21 . 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 21 . 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 21 . 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 21 . 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a sub-timer interrupt process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation detection process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42 . 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation button operation detection process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 43 . 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation detection pattern determination process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 43 . 10 is a table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation situations. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42; 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42; A figure showing an example of a variation type table used to set the variation type (presentation pattern type) to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of Figure 47. A figure showing an example of a variation type table used to set the variation type (presentation pattern type) to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of Figure 47. Figure 51 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the color of the decorative pattern, and Figure 51 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the first stop pattern selection table used when a variable pattern command is received in the command determination process of Figure 47. Figure 52 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first pending image display section, a variable image display section, and a previously variable image display section that are set in the pattern display section in the normal game state, and Figure 52 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second pending image display section and a variable image display section that are set in the pattern display section in the special game state and the time-saving game state. A figure showing an example of a change in the pending image in the first pending image display section. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game presentation control processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 42. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the conventional performance execution sequence for a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the order in which effects are executed in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an allocation table used when allocating jackpot types by the main control device of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed by a voice lamp control device of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for a command determination process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for a command determination process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a screen in a symbol display section of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the hold continuous presentation processing executed in the command determination processing of Figure 59. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing a continuous hold effect. A figure showing an example of a table used in the hold continuous presentation processing of Figure 62. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a stopping pattern combination of decorative patterns displayed in a variable manner on the pattern display unit. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special effect processing executed in the command determination processing of Figure 59. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the change type (presentation pattern) setting process executed in the command determination process of Figure 60. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a variation type (presentation pattern). A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a variation type (presentation pattern). A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a variation type (presentation pattern). A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a variation type (presentation pattern). A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the change type (presentation pattern) setting process executed in the command determination process of Figure 60. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the stop pattern combination setting process executed in the command determination process of Figure 60. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for setting a stop symbol combination. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the order in which effects are executed in a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart for explaining differences between a command determination process according to a third embodiment of the present invention and the second embodiment; 10 is a flowchart for explaining differences between a command determination process according to a third embodiment of the present invention and the second embodiment; 10 is a flowchart for explaining the differences between the second special chart special effect setting process of the third embodiment of the present invention and the second embodiment. A flowchart for explaining the differences between the second embodiment and the third embodiment of the present invention in the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process. A flowchart for explaining the differences from the second embodiment in the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process. A flowchart for explaining the differences from the second embodiment in the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process. FIG. 11 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. A cross-sectional view showing the main parts of the feather device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 82. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view showing the main parts of the feather device. A diagram showing an example of a table etc. used in the main control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 82. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by the main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal map variation start processing executed in the normal map game control processing in the main processing of Figure 88. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special chart change start processing executed in the special chart game control processing in the main processing of Figure 88. A time chart showing an example of game progress in a small win game executed on the gaming machine shown in Figure 82. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for small win game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 88. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for small win game control processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for small win game control processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for small win game control processing. A diagram showing an example of game flow (transition of game state) in the gaming machine shown in Figure 82. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 88. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a game state transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a game state transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a game state transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a game state transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a game state transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a game state transition process. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in Fig. 82. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the change type (presentation pattern) setting process executed in the command determination process of Figure 104. A figure showing an example of a presentation pattern (a second time-shortened game state continuation presentation pattern and a third time-shortened game state transition presentation pattern) for special chart play executed in the second time-shortened game state. A figure showing an example of the screen of the pattern display section in special pattern play executed in the second time-saving play state. A figure showing an example of the screen of the pattern display section in special pattern play executed in the second time-saving play state. A figure showing an example of the screen of the pattern display section in special pattern play executed in the second time-saving play state. A figure showing an example of the screen of the pattern display section in special pattern play executed in the second time-saving play state. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the stop symbol combination setting process executed in the command determination process of Figure 104. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the number of time-saving games and the combination of decorative symbols displayed; A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for time-saving counter processing executed in the command determination processing of Figure 104. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in a main control device of a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the variation type (presentation pattern) in the command determination process executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 82. A figure showing an example of a presentation pattern (first presentation pattern and second presentation pattern) in the second time-shortened game state. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a stop symbol combination setting process executed in the command determination process. A figure showing an example of setting the number of time-saving games when transitioning to the third time-saving game state in a gaming machine related to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for game state transition processing in the main processing executed by the main control device of a gaming machine according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in a main control device of a gaming machine according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of the screen of the pattern display section in special pattern play executed in the second time-saving play state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in a voice lamp control device of a gaming machine according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of the screen of the pattern display section in special pattern play executed in the second time-saving play state. A diagram showing a game flow of a gaming machine according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention. A timing chart showing an example of the end timing of a first special game started in a time-shortened game state. FIG. A block diagram showing an example of a special chart reservation storage area provided in the RAM of the main control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. A flowchart showing the steps of the first special chart hold command setting process executed in the start winning process of Figure 18. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a through gate process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17; A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for regular game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal map data setting process executed in the normal map game control process of Figure 132. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal map fluctuation start processing executed in the normal map game control processing of Figure 132. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal winning game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the first special chart data setting process executed in the special chart game control process of Figure 136. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the first special symbol game start processing executed in the special symbol game control processing of Figure 136. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the first special chart game termination processing executed in the special chart game control processing of Figure 136. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special chart data setting process executed in the special chart game control process of Figure 136. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special symbol game start processing executed in the special symbol game control processing of Figure 136. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special chart game termination processing executed in the special chart game control processing of Figure 136. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42; 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42; A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the time-saving game count counter processing executed in the command determination processing of Figure 149. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the first variation type (presentation pattern) setting process executed in the command determination process of Figure 149. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a screen on a pattern display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a screen on a pattern display unit. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the second variation type (presentation pattern) setting process executed in the command determination process of Figure 149. Figure 155 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the first time attack effect termination processing executed in the command determination processing of Figure 149, and Figure 155 (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second time attack effect termination processing executed in step S4432 in the command determination processing of Figure 149. A figure showing an example of a table used in a main control device of a gaming machine according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 23 is a front view showing an example of a gaming board of a gaming machine according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 23 is a front view showing an example of a gaming board of a gaming machine according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 23 is a front view showing an example of a gaming board of a gaming machine according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a front view showing an example of the operation of the first rotating accessory member provided on the game board. FIG. 2 is a side view showing the periphery of the first rotating accessory member with a portion cut away. A figure showing an example of how the first rotating device element performs a performance on its own. FIG. 23 is a front view showing an example of a gaming board of a gaming machine according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a front view showing an example of operation of the left second rotating accessory member and the right second rotating accessory member provided on the game board. FIG. 23 is a front view showing an example of a gaming board of a gaming machine according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. A side view showing the first rotating accessory member and the left second rotating accessory member (right second rotating accessory member) and their surroundings with some parts broken away. A front view showing an example of operation of the first rotating accessory member, the left second rotating accessory member, and the right second rotating accessory member. A table showing the types of notification modes by the first rotating accessory member, the left second rotating accessory member, and the right second rotating accessory member. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of a gaming machine according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a time chart showing an example of the operation of a rotating accessory component in a special game. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42; A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the operation of a rotating role element in the command determination process of Figure 171. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special game presentation control processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 42. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special game presentation control processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 42. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of the main parts of a gaming machine system including a gaming machine according to an eleventh embodiment of the present invention. 22 is a time chart showing an example of a jackpot signal output from a gaming machine according to an eleventh embodiment of the present invention to a hall computer. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by the main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal winning game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 178. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 178. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 178. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 178. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 178. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot signal output processing executed in the main processing of Figure 178. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot signal output processing executed in the main processing of Figure 178. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42; 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42; 10A to 10C are diagrams for explaining examples of images such as background images on the symbol display section in various game states. 10A to 10C are diagrams for explaining examples of images such as background images on the symbol display section in various game states. 10 is a time chart showing another example of the output of the jackpot signal output to the hall computer. 10 is a time chart showing another example of the output of the jackpot signal output to the hall computer. A front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to a twelfth embodiment of the present invention. A cross-sectional view showing the main parts of the feather device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 192. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view showing the main parts of the feather device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the start winning processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of Figure 17. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the first special chart hold command setting process executed in the start winning process of Figure 200. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special chart hold command setting process executed in the start winning process of Figure 200. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by the main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal map variation start processing executed in the normal map game control processing in the main processing of Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal winning game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal winning game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the special chart data setting process executed in the special chart game control process of Figure 208. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special chart change start processing executed in the special chart game control processing of Figure 208. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special chart change pattern setting process B executed in the special chart change start process of Figure 210. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special chart change pattern setting process B executed in the special chart change start process of Figure 210. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special chart change pattern setting process B executed in the special chart change start process of Figure 210. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for small win game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for small win game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for small win game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 203. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 203. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42; 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42; 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42; A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the fluctuation type (fluctuation pattern) performed in the command determination process of Figure 223. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing examples of screens of the symbol display section in various game states. A figure showing an example of a one-shot announcement effect for a RUSH effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a battle effect of the RUSH effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a battle effect of the RUSH effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a result effect and a branch effect. A front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. A front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. A front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a front view showing an example of the operation of a movable rotating accessory member provided on the game board. FIG. 2 is a side view showing the periphery of a movable rotating accessory member with a portion cut away. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in Figure 230. A block diagram showing an example of a memory area of the main control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 230. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. A block diagram showing an example of a general map reservation storage area in the memory area of the main control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by the main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for normal game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 241. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal map data setting process executed in the normal map game control process of Figure 242. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal map fluctuation start processing executed in the normal map game control processing of Figure 242. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal winning game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 241. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 241. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the special chart data setting process executed in the special chart game control process of Figure 246. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special chart change start processing executed in the special chart game control processing of Figure 246. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 241. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 241. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 241. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 241. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a sub-timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation detection processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 243. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the operation button operation detection process executed in the operation detection process of Figure 254. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process executed in the operation detection process of Figure 254. 10 is a table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation situations. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 243. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 243. A figure showing an example of a first stop pattern selection table used when a variable pattern command is received in the command determination process of Figure 259. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a stop pattern combination executed in the command determination process of Figure 259. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the special game performance setting process executed in the command determination process of Figure 259. A figure showing an example of a variation type table used to set the variation type (presentation pattern type) to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of Figure 259. A figure showing an example of a variation type table used to set the variation type (presentation pattern type) to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of Figure 259. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the timing of movement of the movable rotating accessory member. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining the movable state of the movable rotating accessory member. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining the drive pattern of the movable rotating accessory member. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining the drive pattern of the movable rotating accessory member. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining drive data for driving a movable rotating accessory member. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining the drive pattern and drive data of the movable rotating accessory member. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining the drive pattern and drive data of the movable rotating accessory member. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining the drive pattern of the movable rotating accessory member. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining drive data for driving a movable rotating accessory member. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining the drive pattern and drive data of the movable rotating accessory member. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the special game effect setting process executed in the special game effect setting process of Figure 262. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the button effect setting process executed in the special game effect setting process of Figure 262. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining button effects. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special game presentation control processing executed by the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 243. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the movable rotating device control processing executed in the special game presentation control processing of Figure 278. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the movable rotating device control processing executed in the special game presentation control processing of Figure 278. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the movable rotating device control processing executed in the special game presentation control processing of Figure 278. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the movable rotating device control processing executed in the special game presentation control processing of Figure 278. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the movable rotating device control processing executed in the special game presentation control processing of Figure 278. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the movable rotating device control processing executed in the special game presentation control processing of Figure 278. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the movable rotating device control processing executed in the special game presentation control processing of Figure 278. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the movable rotating device control processing executed in the special game presentation control processing of Figure 278. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for button effect control processing executed in the special game effect control processing of Figure 278. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for button effect control processing executed in the special game effect control processing of Figure 278. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game presentation control processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 243. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining drive data for driving a movable rotating accessory member. A front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram for explaining the special large prize winning device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 291. A diagram for explaining the special large prize winning device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 291. Figure 294 (A) is a block diagram showing an example of part of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in Figure 291, Figure 294 (B) is a diagram showing the prize balls in the various winning slots, and Figure 294 (C) is a diagram showing the types of signals output to the outside of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the output forms of various signals output to the outside of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the output forms of various signals output to the outside of the gaming machine. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a through gate process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of transition of a game state. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by the main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for normal game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting normal map data executed in the normal map game control process of Figure 301. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal map fluctuation start processing executed in the normal map game control processing of Figure 301. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal winning game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the special chart data setting process executed in the special chart game control process of Figure 305. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special chart change start processing executed in the special chart game control processing of Figure 305. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for managing the number of times special charts are played, which is executed in the main processing of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for managing the number of times special charts are played, which is executed in the main processing of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special chart jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special chart jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special chart jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special chart jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special electric start control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for V-winning jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 300. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for signal output processing executed in the main processing of Figure 300. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42; 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42; 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a screen on a pattern display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a screen on a pattern display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a screen on a pattern display unit.

Each embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings to aid in understanding the present invention. Furthermore, each of the following embodiments is merely an example of how the present invention is embodied, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[General configuration of gaming machine 10]
1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIGS. 4 to 6 are front views of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions front, back, left, right, and up and down used in this embodiment are defined by the front-back direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS. 1 to 3.

As shown in Figures 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine comprising a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in an amusement hall by fixing the outer frame 14 to the hall's island equipment (not shown). Note that, in this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines such as reel-type gaming machines (slot machines), arrange ball gaming machines, and jankyu gaming machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 is rotatably supported at its left end by the outer frame 14, allowing it to be opened and closed relative to the outer frame 14. The inner frame 12 is rotatably supported at its left end by the front frame 11, allowing it to be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. The back pack unit 13 is rotatably supported at its left end by the inner frame 12, allowing it to be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection/determination section 21, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an illumination section 27.

The operation button 20 is located in front of the upper tray 23. The operation button 20 is equipped with an operation switch 20a (see Figure 7) that switches the input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 (described below) depending on whether the button is pressed. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to determine the operation state (operation or no operation) of the operation button 20. This operation button 20 is operated to execute an operation button effect that is executed in response to a player's operation of the operation button 20 during a predetermined operation acceptance period in a special game effect that is executed in a special game that clearly shows the player the results of the jackpot lottery.

The location of the operation button 20 is not limited to being in front of the upper tray 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 that is accessible to the player. The number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. The operation button 20 may also be equipped with a jog dial. In this case, by operating the jog dial, desired options (items) can be provisionally selected from various setting screens when configuring various game settings, such as the performance stage (background performance), characters, and music during jackpot play, as well as game settings such as the frequency of selection of specified effects and the likelihood of a jackpot, and the provisionally selected option (item) can then be selected by operating the operation button 20.

Furthermore, there may be one or more operating means, such as an operating button 20, that accepts operation by the player. Examples of the operating means include, in addition to the operating button 20, a rotatable handle, a rotatable lever, a push-in member that can move back and forth or up and down (reciprocating), a touch panel provided on the symbol display unit 341 or sub-movable display unit 38 described below, or a combination of two or more of these operating means (for example, an operating means that can rotate and move back and forth), and the operating button 20 may be provided on these operating means (for example, an operating means in which the operating button 20 or touch panel is provided on a handle or lever).

The selection decision unit 21 is operated by the player and is a push button that is used when the player presses it, for example, in a standby state where no game is being played, to set various game settings. Examples of various game settings include settings for characters that appear in game effects, settings for the frequency of various effects such as button effects, and settings for the likelihood of a jackpot for various effects. The selection decision unit 21 includes multiple selection buttons 21A and a decision button 21B.

The multiple selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to provisionally select a desired item from options (items) on various setting screens, for example, when configuring various game settings. They include the up selection button 211, the down selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214. Here, provisional selection means that the provisional selection is confirmed (stored in RAM 512) by operating the confirm button 21B. As shown in FIG. 7, each of these selection buttons 211-214 includes an up selection operation switch 211a, a down selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch 211d, which switch the input signal to the voice and lamp control device 5. These switches 211a-211d are connected to the input/output I/F of the voice and lamp control device 5. Therefore, the voice and lamp control device 5 can determine whether each selection button 211-214 has been operated based on the input signal of each switch 211a-211d.

In addition, in this embodiment, when it is detected that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has begun, it is determined that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed. Of course, it may also be determined that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed when it is detected that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is continuing or has ended.

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to confirm the provisionally selected item. The decision button 21B also has a decision operation switch 21Ba that switches the input signal to the voice and lamp control device 5, which will be described later. The decision operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input/output I/F of the voice and lamp control device 5. Therefore, the voice and lamp control device 5 can determine whether the decision operation switch 21Ba has been operated based on the input signal of the decision operation switch 21Ba.

In addition, instead of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the decision button 21B, the symbol display unit 341 and the sub-movable display unit 38 described below may be equipped with a touch panel that accepts player operation, and the touch panel may be provided as the operating means. In addition, instead of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214), a rotating member such as a jog dial may be provided. The selection switches 211a-211d and the decision operation switch 21Ba (see Figure 7) are contact switches, but they may also be, for example, piezoelectric elements, as long as they can be used to detect whether or not a player has operated them.

The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle that the player operates to launch game balls. In the gaming machine 10, basic gameplay is carried out by launching game balls from the game ball launch mechanism 32 (described below) with a force that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, when the player is operating the launch handle 22, the game ball launch mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the play area every 0.6 seconds.

The upper tray 23 is located below the panel 25 and is used to store game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 132 of the dispensing mechanism 130 (described below) and to guide the stored game balls in a single row to the game ball launching mechanism 32. The lower tray 24 is located further below the upper tray 23 and is used to store game balls that are surplus to the upper tray 23.

The panel 25 is made of colorless, transparent, or colored, transparent glass or synthetic resin, allowing the player to view the game board 31 in the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers located on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front frame 11, and produce an audio output effect. Note that the installation location of the speakers 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. The illumination unit 27 also incorporates a light source such as an indicator lamp or LED, and produces a lamp effect by changing its color, flashing on or off, or other flashing modes.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. As described above, the inner frame 12 is rotatably supported at its left end by the front frame 11, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Therefore, the game board 31, the game ball launching mechanism 32, and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Note that the surface of the game board 31 is not shown in FIG. 2 to simplify the illustration.

The control unit 33 is located on the rear side of the gaming board 31 and has a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, commands (control signals) are sent in one direction from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 to instruct the control content. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub-control unit 332 will be described later.

As shown in Figure 4, the game board 31 is provided with an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, through gates 317L and 317R, an outlet 318, a variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, a sub-movable display section 38, and a movable accessory member 39.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the game area on the surface of the game board 31. After being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that do not enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the outlet 318.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launch rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and guides game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 23 one by one onto the launch rail 321. The solenoid 323 is a driving means that launches game balls supplied onto the launch rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 onto the game board 31. Note that the game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that launches game balls using other driving means, such as a motor, instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4, the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the outlet 318 have openings formed that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-to-rear direction. Furthermore, on the back side of the game board 31, ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see Figure 7) that can individually detect the entry of game balls are provided corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. Furthermore, game balls that pass through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the outlet 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31 and are detected by the outlet ball sensor 318a (see Figure 7), which will be described later. The through gates 317L and 317R are vertically penetrating gates through which game balls can pass, and are equipped with ball entry sensors 317La and 317Ra (see FIG. 7) that can individually detect game balls passing through the through gates 317L and 317R. On the game board 31, a game ball launched into the left region of the game board 31 may pass through the through gate 317L, and a game ball launched into the right region of the game board 31 may pass through the through gate 317R. When the ball entry sensors 317La and 317Ra (see FIG. 7) detect the passage of a game ball, a regular winning lottery is executed to determine whether or not to open the second winning slot 315. If the result of the regular winning lottery is a winning one, the opening of the electric device 315b (described below) allows the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315. That is, in the gaming machine 10, it is possible to cause a gaming ball to enter the second winning slot 315 not only in the probability variation gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), but also in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) by shooting the gaming ball into the left area of the gaming board 31.

In addition, the high probability mode has a high probability of resulting in a jackpot as a result of the jackpot lottery (see Figure 9(B)), and is a mode in which it is easy to transition to a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is played, whereas the low probability mode has a low probability of resulting in a jackpot as a result of the jackpot lottery (see Figure 9(A)), and is a mode in which it is difficult to transition to a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is played. Also, the high frequency support mode has a high probability of resulting in a normal jackpot as a result of the normal jackpot lottery (see Figure 12(B)), and is a mode in which it is easy to allow a game ball to enter the second winning slot 315 due to the high frequency of operation of the electric device 315b described below. In contrast, the low frequency support mode has a low probability of resulting in a normal jackpot as a result of the normal jackpot lottery (see Figure 12(A)), and is a mode in which it is difficult to allow a game ball to enter the second winning slot 315 due to the low frequency of operation of the electric device 315b.

The entrance ball sensors 313a-316a, 317La, 317Ra, and the out ball sensor 318a (see Figure 7) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the entrance ball sensors 313a-316a, 317La, 317Ra, and the out ball sensor 318a are input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) sends a command to the payout control device 7 to pay out game balls based on the detection results of the entrance ball sensors 313a-316a. Hereinafter, the detection of an entrance ball by the entrance ball sensors 313a-316a may be referred to as a winning ball. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) also counts the number of out balls based on the detection results of the out ball sensor 318a. The number of out balls counted here corresponds to the number of launched game balls launched onto the game board 31 by the game ball launching mechanism 32.

Note that the ball entry sensors 313a-316a, 317La, 317Ra, and the out ball sensor 318a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may also be any sensors capable of individually detecting game ball entry using other detection methods.

The second winning opening 315 is also provided with an electric device (electric device) 315b that switches between restricting and restricting the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315. The electric device 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the gaming board 31. On the gaming board 31, opening the electric device 315b allows game balls to enter the second winning opening 315, and closing the electric device 315b restricts the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315.

Furthermore, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319 that switches whether or not game balls are restricted from entering the variable winning opening 316. The opening/closing door 319 is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. On the game board 31, opening the opening/closing door 319 allows game balls to enter the variable winning opening 316, and closing the opening/closing door 319 restricts game balls from entering the variable winning opening 316. Note that the opening/closing door 319 is moved to a position that opens the variable winning opening 316 during round play in the opening/closing execution mode in jackpot play, and is otherwise kept waiting in a position that closes the variable winning opening 316. As a result, game balls shot into the right area of the game board 31 during round play in jackpot play can enter the variable winning opening 316.

In the gaming machine 10, when the ball entry sensor 314a or the ball entry sensor 315a detects the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, the main control unit 331 conducts a jackpot lottery. The main control unit 331 then controls the display on the main display unit 36 according to the results of the jackpot lottery. The results of the lottery by the main control unit 331 are also transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, which then controls the display on the variable display unit 34 according to the results of the lottery.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the ball entry sensors 313a-316a detect the entry of game balls into the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316, a preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when a ball enters the general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when a ball enters the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is 3, and the number of prize balls when a ball enters the variable winning opening 316 is 10. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, if the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the machine transitions to a jackpot game state, and the round game described below in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 or 16 times), so that a large number of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Furthermore, when a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, a jackpot lottery is held. If the lottery results in a win, the game transitions to a predetermined jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R variable probability jackpot gaming state) and a 16R variable probability jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot gaming state is a gaming state that includes an open/close execution mode in which the variable winning slot 316 is opened and five rounds of play are played until a predetermined time has elapsed or until the maximum number of gaming balls (e.g., nine) or more enters the variable winning slot 316. The 16R jackpot game state is a game state that includes an open/close execution mode in which 16 rounds of play are played, and is more advantageous to the player than the 5R jackpot game state, as it is expected to pay out more prize balls than the 5R jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a symbol display section 341, such as an LCD display, that is visible through an opening 31A formed in the approximate center of the game board 31. This symbol display section 341 displays still or moving images, and the display content of the symbol display section 341 is controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the symbol display section 341 displays various image effects, such as a decorative symbol variable display effect corresponding to the result of a jackpot lottery conducted by the main control unit 331 in response to a ball entering the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, and a special symbol game effect that is executed in conjunction with the variable display effect. The symbol display section 341 may also have a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of an LCD display or plasma display and an organic EL display, or may further have a touch panel that accepts touch operations by the player.

For example, the decorative pattern variable display effect in the pattern display unit 341 is performed by scrolling multiple types of decorative patterns numbered "1" to "9" in order vertically, horizontally, diagonally, etc. Note that secondary patterns such as other letters or designs may be displayed between the decorative patterns. In this embodiment, there are no secondary patterns, and there are nine types of decorative patterns numbered "1" to "9."

In the gaming machine 10, during special symbol play, the decorative symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all decorative symbols stops after a preset variation display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341. More specifically, in the decorative symbol variation display, all decorative symbols first vary in a preset variation direction (for example, horizontally, vertically, etc.), and then the variation of multiple decorative symbols stops in sequence. Then, once the variation of the decorative symbols on all lines has stopped and a predetermined time has elapsed, the variation display of the decorative symbols ends.

When the display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341 has finished changing, the symbol display unit 341 will display the decorative symbols lined up on one or more active lines. At this time, the stopped state of the decorative symbols will clearly indicate or suggest the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, if the lottery result is a "5R jackpot," a "16R jackpot," or a "5R regular jackpot," decorative symbols of the same type lined up on active lines will be displayed, clearly indicating that a jackpot has occurred. Furthermore, the type of jackpot may be indicated by the combination of decorative symbols on active lines, but this is not always the case. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result is a "16R jackpot," a decorative symbol combination such as "777," which is set as a symbol combination indicating a 16R jackpot, will be displayed lined up on active lines, or a combination of the same decorative symbols other than "777" will be displayed lined up on active lines. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "5R probability variable jackpot," a combination of decorative symbols, such as "333," which has been set as a symbol combination indicating a 5R probability variable jackpot, is displayed lined up on the active line, or a combination of the same decorative symbols, such as "777" or "333," other than the symbol combinations indicating a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot, is displayed lined up on the active line. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot," a combination of the same decorative symbols, such as "222" or "444," which has been set as a symbol combination indicating a normal jackpot, is displayed lined up on the active line. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "loss," a different combination of decorative symbols (such as "323" or "723") is displayed lined up on the active line.

In addition, the symbol display unit 341 displays a special symbol game effect that suggests the likelihood of the lottery result being a jackpot, along with the display of changing decorative symbols during special symbol play. If the lottery result is a "16R probability jackpot" and a jackpot symbol combination other than the decorative symbol combination indicating a 16R probability jackpot is displayed lined up on an active line, a suggestion effect is executed as a special symbol game effect, suggesting that the jackpot is a 5R probability jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot. In this case, an upgrade effect is executed in the jackpot game effect, clearly indicating that the lottery result for the special symbol game is a 16R probability jackpot. Similarly, if the lottery result is a "5R probability jackpot" and a jackpot symbol combination other than the decorative symbol combination indicating a probability jackpot is displayed lined up on an active line, a suggestion effect is executed as a special symbol game effect, suggesting that the jackpot is a 5R regular jackpot. In this case, during the jackpot game presentation, an upgrade presentation will be executed to clearly indicate that the lottery result for that special game is a 5R probability jackpot.

Furthermore, when the game state transitions to a jackpot game state, the symbol display unit 341 displays jackpot game effects including an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect.

The sub-movable display unit 38 is equipped with a display device 381 such as an LCD display, and is located in the left area in front of the symbol display unit 341. This sub-movable display unit 38 is connected to the MPU 61 via the input/output I/F 62 of the display control device 6 (see Figure 7), and image effects are executed on the display device 381 together with the symbol display unit 341 during special symbol games and jackpot games under the control of the MPU 61 based on display variation pattern commands sent from the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5.

The display device 381 may be a dot matrix display, plasma display, organic EL display, etc., or may be a combination of an LCD display or plasma display with an organic EL display. Furthermore, in addition to the display device 381, the sub-movable display unit 38 may further include a touch panel that accepts touch operations by the player.

The sub-movable display unit 38 can also move in the left-right direction D3 between the standby position (position shown in Figure 4) shown by the phantom lines in Figure 5 and the operating position shown by the solid lines in Figure 5.

Here, as shown in FIG. 7, the gaming machine 10 has a motor 38a that supplies driving force to the sub-movable display unit 38 and a return detection unit 38b that detects when the sub-movable display unit 38 has returned to its standby position. The motor 38a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, or the like, and the return detection unit 38b is an optical sensor, a contact sensor, or the like. The sub-movable display unit 38 and the motor 38a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and depending on the direction of rotation of the motor 38a, the sub-movable display unit 38 is moved to the right (operation direction) from the standby position (see FIG. 4) toward the activation position (solid line position in FIG. 5) or to the left (return direction) from the activation position (solid line position in FIG. 5) toward the standby position (see FIG. 4). For example, the sub-movable display unit 38 is moved from the standby position (see Figure 4) to the operating position (solid line position in Figure 5) by rotating the motor 38a in the forward direction, and conversely, is moved from the operating position (solid line position in Figure 5) to the standby position (see Figure 4) by rotating the motor 38a in the reverse direction.

The gaming machine 10 also includes a motor driver 38c to which the motor 38a and recovery detection unit 38b are connected. The motor driver 38c is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice and lamp control device 5. The motor driver 38c controls the motor 38a in accordance with control instructions from the voice and lamp control device 5. The motor driver 38c is also capable of acquiring the detection results of the recovery detection unit 38b and transmitting them to the voice and lamp control device 5. The motor driver 38c may be omitted, and the motor 38a and recovery detection unit 38b may be directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice and lamp control device 5 and controlled by the voice and lamp control device 5.

Such a sub-movable display unit 38 operates to execute effects related to the results of the jackpot lottery during special symbol games and jackpot games. For example, in special symbol games, the sub-movable display unit 38 operates as a jackpot confirmation effect indicating that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, as well as a chance-up effect that increases the likelihood of the lottery result being a jackpot. Furthermore, in jackpot games, the sub-movable display unit 38 operates as an advancement effect (a round number advancement effect executed in jackpot games or an advancement effect from a normal jackpot to a probability jackpot) that indicates that the actual lottery result is more favorable to the player than the lottery result suggested by the special symbol game effect. It can also operate as a reserved consecutive win confirmation effect that notifies the player that the results of the jackpot lottery include a jackpot while the right to play the special symbol game, which is executed after the end of the jackpot game, is reserved.

The standby position and operating position of the sub-movable display unit 38 are not limited to the left area on the front side of the pattern display unit 341, and may be elsewhere. The number of sub-movable display units 38 is not limited to one, and may be multiple, and the multiple sub-movable display units 38 may cooperate, be linked, be driven, or follow. The sub-movable display unit 38 may also be movable in other directions in addition to, or instead of, the left-right direction D3. For example, the sub-movable display unit 38 may be movable in the up-down direction D2, diagonally, etc., and may further be rotatable in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction, etc. The sub-movable display unit 38 may be omitted, and one or more immovable display devices may be provided instead of the sub-movable display unit 38.

As shown in Figure 4, the main display unit 36 includes a normal symbol display unit 361, a first special symbol display unit 362, a second special symbol display unit 363, a first special symbol reserved number display unit 364, and a second special symbol reserved number display unit 365, all located in the upper right corner of the game board 31.

The normal symbol display unit 361 includes a pair of LEDs representing the normal symbol (normal symbol), and displays the result of the normal symbol lottery, which determines whether or not to open the electric device 315b, which is triggered by winning through gates 317L and 317R, by a combination of the LEDs lighting on and off. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the LED pair to flash (displaying a changing normal symbol) when a win is won through gates 317L and 317R, and displays the result of the normal symbol lottery by turning each LED on or off (displaying a stationary normal symbol) after the display time has elapsed. Note that displaying the result of the normal symbol lottery by displaying the changing and stationary normal symbols (normal symbol) is referred to as "normal symbol play" or "normal symbol play."

The first special symbol display unit 362 includes a 7-segment display device as the first special symbol (first special symbol), and displays the results of the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) triggered by a win in the first winning slot 314, which determines whether or not a jackpot game will be played, by combining the lighting and extinguishing of seven segments on the 7-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the seven segments of the 7-segment display device to flash (variably display the first special symbol) in response to a win in the first winning slot 314, and displays the results of the jackpot lottery by lighting or extinguishing each segment (statically displaying the first special symbol) after the variably display time has elapsed. Displaying the results of the jackpot lottery by the varying and static display of the first special symbol (first special symbol) is referred to as the "first special symbol game" or "first special symbol game."

The second special symbol display unit 363 includes a 7-segment display device as the second special symbol (second special symbol), and displays the results of the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) triggered by a win at the second winning slot 315, which determines whether or not a jackpot game will be played, by combining the lighting and extinguishing of seven segments on the 7-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the seven segments of the 7-segment display device to flash (variably display the second special symbol) in response to a win at the second winning slot 315, and displays the results of the jackpot lottery by lighting or extinguishing each segment (statically displaying the second special symbol) after the variable display time has elapsed. Displaying the results of the jackpot lottery by the variable and static display of the second special symbol (second special symbol) is referred to as the "second special symbol game" or "second special symbol game."

In the following, the first special symbol (first special symbol) and the second special symbol (second special symbol) may be referred to as "special symbols" or "special symbols," and the first special symbol game (first special symbol game) and the second special symbol game (second special symbol game) may be referred to as "special symbol game" or "special symbol game."

The first special symbol reserved number display unit 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the first special symbol reserved number N, which is the number of reserved rights to play the first special symbol game generated by winning at the first winning slot 314, by the number of lit LEDs.

The second special symbol reserved number display unit 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the second special symbol reserved number M, which is the number of reserved rights to play the second special symbol game generated by winning at the second winning slot 315, by the number of lit LEDs.

The movable gadget element 39 is movable vertically along the surface of the symbol display element 341 between a predetermined standby position (shown by phantom lines in Figure 6) located above the symbol display element 341, as shown in Figure 4, and an operating position (shown by solid lines in Figure 6) set below the standby position. The operating position (see solid lines in Figure 6) is closer to the center of the symbol display element 341 than the standby position (see Figure 4). Furthermore, when the movable gadget element 39 is in the operating position (see solid lines in Figure 6), it covers a higher percentage of the symbol display element 341's surface than when it is in the standby position (see Figure 4). Furthermore, multiple lamps 391 are arranged in a circular ring around the periphery of the movable gadget element 39. In this embodiment, 15 lamps 391 are arranged on the movable gadget element 39, and each lamp 391 can be individually turned on and off. Furthermore, each of the multiple lamps 391 is, for example, an LED lamp, and can be lit in multiple colors, including white, yellow, green, red, or a combination of these colors. Because each lamp 391 can be individually turned on and off and can be lit in multiple colors, for example, when the movable role member 39 is activated, the lighting pattern, lighting color, and number of lit lamps 391 can indicate the likelihood of a jackpot being the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the special game, or can clearly indicate that the lottery result is a jackpot. For example, the lighting colors can be set to increase the likelihood of a jackpot in the order of white, yellow, green, and red. Furthermore, by appropriately setting the lighting pattern and lighting color, it is possible to create a rainbow lamp effect to clearly indicate that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the movable accessory member 39 is exposed from the opening 31A when in the standby position (see FIG. 4), and it is also possible to use the lamps 391 exposed from the opening 31A to implement an effect that suggests the likelihood of the lottery result being a jackpot. For example, in this embodiment, the four lamps 391 located on the lower side are exposed from the opening 31A (see FIG. 4), and it is possible to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot by which of these lamps 391 is lit. Furthermore, in addition to the four lamps 391 located on the lower side, it is also possible to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot by the image displayed on the symbol display section 341.

The movable gadget element 39 may be entirely hidden in the standby position, without being exposed through the opening 31A. The gaming machine 10 may also be equipped with multiple movable gadget elements 39. Furthermore, the movable gadget element 39 may be a combination of multiple separate movable elements, a movable gadget element that can be transformed into two or more forms, or an element equipped with a display such as an LCD display device. Of course, the movable gadget element 39 is not limited to one that covers part of the display screen of the symbol display unit 341, but may also cover the entire display screen. The center of the movable gadget element 39 may also be configured as an illumination element that can be turned on and off. In this case, by lighting or flashing the illumination element, it is possible to implement effects that suggest the likelihood of a jackpot or clearly indicate a jackpot.

Such movable accessory member 39 is operated to execute effects related to the results of the jackpot lottery in special symbol games and jackpot games. For example, in special symbol games, the movable accessory member 39 operates as a jackpot confirmation effect indicating that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, as well as a chance-up effect that increases the likelihood of the lottery result being a jackpot. Furthermore, in jackpot games, the movable accessory member 39 operates as an advancement effect (such as a round number advancement effect executed in jackpot games or an advancement effect from a normal jackpot to a probability jackpot) that indicates that the actual lottery result is more favorable to the player than the result suggested by the special symbol game effect. It can also operate as a reserved consecutive win confirmation effect that notifies the player that the results of the jackpot lottery include a jackpot while the right to play the special symbol game, which is executed after the end of the jackpot game, is reserved.

As shown in FIG. 7, the gaming machine 10 has a motor 39a that supplies driving force to the movable gadget member 39, and a return detection unit 39b that detects when the movable gadget member 39 has returned to its standby position. The motor 39a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, or the like, and the return detection unit 39b is an optical sensor, a contact sensor, or the like. The movable gadget member 39 and the motor 39a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and depending on the direction of rotation of the motor 39a, the movable gadget member 39 is moved downward (in the operating direction) from the standby position (see FIG. 4) to the operating position (see the solid line in FIG. 6), or upward (in the return direction) from the operating position (see the solid line in FIG. 6) to the standby position (see FIG. 4). For example, the movable accessory member 39 is moved from the standby position (see Figure 4) to the operating position (see solid line in Figure 6) by rotating the motor 39a in the forward direction, and conversely, is moved from the operating position (see solid line in Figure 6) to the standby position (see Figure 4) by rotating the motor 39a in the reverse direction.

The gaming machine 10 also includes a motor driver 39c to which the motor 39a and recovery detection unit 39b are connected. The motor driver 39c is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice and lamp control device 5. The motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a in accordance with control instructions from the voice and lamp control device 5. The motor driver 39c is also capable of acquiring the detection results of the recovery detection unit 39b and transmitting them to the voice and lamp control device 5. The motor driver 39c may be omitted, and the motor 39a and recovery detection unit 39b may be directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice and lamp control device 5 and controlled by the voice and lamp control device 5.

In addition, each lamp 391 on the movable accessory member 39 is individually connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5, and the audio lamp control device 5 can individually turn each lamp 391 on and off, and can also light up in multiple colors.

It is also possible to provide a magnetic sensor or a radio wave sensor (neither shown) on the game board 31. The magnetic sensor is provided, for example, near the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316. The magnetic sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the magnetic sensor are input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent behavior in the event of an attempt to fraudulently use a magnet to guide a game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316. On the other hand, a radio wave sensor is provided, for example, near the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the radio wave sensor are input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent behavior in the event of an attempt to fraudulently input radio waves to the ball entry sensors 314a, 315a, resulting in a false detection of a game ball entry. The radio wave sensor is capable of detecting radio waves, for example, from 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140 .

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores game balls supplied from the arcade's island equipment (not shown), and a payout device 132 that pays out game balls from the tank 131 onto the upper tray 23. When the upper tray 23 is saturated with game balls, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out onto the lower tray 24.

The peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in response to operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts the power supplied from the island equipment (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level and supplies it to the control devices and drive means provided within the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control unit 331]
7, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that mainly controls the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transitioning to a preset jackpot game state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. It also has built-in ROM 411 and RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing in accordance with control programs stored in ROM 411 and elsewhere. Some or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may also be performed by electronic circuits.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main control unit 4 and outputs control signals from the main control unit 4. The input/output I/F 42 is also connected to ball entry sensors 313a-316a, 317La, 317Ra, and out ball sensor 318a. Based on the detection signals from the ball entry sensors 313a-316a, 317La, and 317Ra, the MPU 41 determines whether game balls have entered the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316, and whether game balls have passed through the through gates 317L and 317R. The MPU 41 also counts the number of out balls (number of shot balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 318a. The input/output I/F 42 is also connected to the sound lamp control unit 5, payout control unit 7, shooting control unit 8, and power supply control unit 9.

The MPU 41 then outputs commands to the audio lamp control device 5, such as a normal symbol change pattern command, an electric device opening command, an electric device closing command, a special symbol change pattern command, a first special symbol hold command, a second special symbol hold command, a special symbol shift command, a jackpot game start command, an opening start command, an opening end command, an opening/closing execution mode start command, a round game start command, a round game end command, an interval start command, an interval end command, an opening/closing execution mode end command, an ending start command, an ending end command, a jackpot game end command, and a game setting value change command.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the normal symbol fluctuation display time (normal symbol fluctuation pattern) during normal symbol play and the lottery results for the normal symbol winning lottery. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern command is set in step S1709 of the normal symbol fluctuation start processing in Figure 24, described below, based on the information stored in the normal symbol reserve storage area 412c (see Figure 11), described below, when starting the normal symbol fluctuation display in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display unit 36. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern command may also be a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of only the normal symbol fluctuation display time (normal symbol fluctuation pattern) during normal symbol play. In this case, the command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery results for the normal symbol winning lottery is set as a command separate from the normal symbol fluctuation pattern command.

The electric feature release command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric feature 315b will be released (activated). The electric feature release command is set in step S1809 of the normal winning game control processing in Figure 25, which will be described later, when the electric feature 315b is released (activated).

The electric feature close command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the electric feature 315b will be closed (restored). The electric feature close command is set in step S1816 of the normal winning game control processing in Figure 25, which will be described later, when the electric feature 315b is closed (restored).

The special symbol change pattern command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of the time for which the special symbol changes during special symbol play and the result of the jackpot lottery, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it also includes information regarding the type of jackpot. The special symbol change pattern command is set in step S2105 of the special symbol change start processing in Figure 28 (described below) based on the information stored in the special symbol reserve storage area 412b (see Figure 8) (described below) when the special symbol change display begins in the first special symbol display section 362 or second special symbol display section 363 of the main display unit 36. Note that the special symbol change pattern command includes information that can identify the type of special symbol when the change begins, but the special symbol change pattern command when the first special symbol changes and the special symbol change pattern command when the second special symbol changes may be set as separate special symbol change commands. The special symbol variation pattern command may also be a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and only of the special symbol during special symbol play. In this case, the command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery results and type of jackpot is set as a separate command from the special symbol variation pattern command.

The first special symbol hold command and second special symbol hold command are commands that, when a game ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, increasing the first special symbol hold number N or the second special symbol hold number M stored in the special symbol hold storage area 412b (see Figure 8) described below, notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery results for the jackpot draw for the increased hold, the special symbol variable display time (special symbol variable pattern), and the first special symbol hold number N or the second special symbol hold number M. When there is an increase in the number of reserved first special symbols N or the number of reserved second special symbols M, the first special symbol reserve command and the second special symbol reserve command are set in the first special symbol reserve command setting process of step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. 18 described below (step S1207 or S1209 of the first special symbol reserve command setting process of FIG. 19 described below) or the second special symbol reserve command setting process of step S1110 based on the information stored in the special symbol reserve storage area 412b (see FIG. 8) described below.

The special symbol shift command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the special symbol win/loss information, which indicates the result of the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA, or the first special symbol reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB (see Figure 8), has shifted when the first special symbol reserve number N or the second special symbol reserve number M decreases due to the start of special symbol game (variable display of special symbols). The special symbol shift command is set in step S2008 of the special symbol data setting process in Figure 27, which will be described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that a jackpot game has begun, i.e., that the game state is transitioning to a jackpot game state. When transitioning to the jackpot game state, this command is set in step S2204 of the jackpot game control processing in Figure 29, which will be described later.

The opening start command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game is about to begin, and is set in step S2208 of the jackpot game control processing in Figure 29 described below when the opening of the jackpot game is about to begin. Note that the opening start command can be omitted, as it is possible to notify the audio and lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game is about to begin using the jackpot game start command.

The opening end command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game is to end, and is set in step S2214 of the jackpot game control processing in Figure 30, which will be described later, when the opening of the jackpot game is to end.

The open/close execution mode start command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the open/close execution mode for jackpot play will begin, and is set in step S2216 of the jackpot play control processing in Figure 30 (described below) when the open/close execution mode for jackpot play begins.

The round game start command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 of the start of each round game in the open/close execution mode during jackpot game play, and of round number information indicating which round the round game is. When each round game starts, it is set in step S2217 of the jackpot game control processing in Figure 30, which will be described later. Note that, separate from the round game start command, a command indicating the round number of the round game that is about to start may be set at the start of the round game, and this command may be sent to the audio and lamp control device 5.

The round play end command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the round play is ending in the open/close execution mode during jackpot play, and is set in step S2229 of the jackpot play control processing in Figure 31 (described below) when each round play ends.

The interval start command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 of the start of an interval between rounds of play in the open/close execution mode during jackpot play, and is set in step S2233 of the jackpot play control processing in Figure 31, which will be described later, when the interval starts.

The interval end command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the interval between rounds of play is ending in the open/close execution mode during jackpot play, and is set in step S2239 of the jackpot play control processing in Figure 32 (described below) when the interval ends.

The open/close execution mode end command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the open/close execution mode for jackpot play is ending, and is set in step S2241 of the jackpot play control processing in Figure 31 described below when the open/close execution mode is ending.

The ending start command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the ending of a jackpot game is about to begin, and is set in step S2242 of the jackpot game control processing in Figure 31, which will be described later, when the ending is to begin.

The ending end command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the ending of the jackpot game is to end, and is set in step S2248 of the jackpot game control processing in Figure 32 described below when the ending is to end.

The jackpot game end command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is ending, and is set in step S2250 of the jackpot game control process in Figure 29 described below when the jackpot game ends.

The game setting value change command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and of the changed game setting value. When the game setting value is changed, this command is set in step S2408 of the game setting value change process in Figure 35, which will be described later.

Note that commands other than those mentioned above may be output from the main control unit 4 to the voice and lamp control unit 5, but their explanation will be omitted.

The main control unit 4 also includes an oscillator circuit and a frequency divider circuit as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41. The oscillator circuit outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and the frequency divider circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillator circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 (described below) is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency divider circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the divider circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (e.g., 4 msec), and the MPU 41 activates and executes the main timer interrupt process described below each time the clock signal rises (or falls). Note that oscillator circuits and divider circuits are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and peripheral control unit 140 as needed, and supply operating clocks for the main controls in the sub-control unit 332 and peripheral control unit 140. A clock signal may also be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 and peripheral control unit 140.

ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are pre-stored. RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by MPU 41. For example, RAM 412 is used to set commands to be sent to the voice lamp control device 5, etc. Note that RAM 412 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

Here, referring to Figure 8, we will explain the memory areas used by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform the jackpot lottery and regular symbol lottery. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses counter information stored in the lottery counter memory area 412a, special symbol reserve storage area 412b, and regular symbol reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412 to set the jackpot lottery results and the variable display time of the special symbol, as well as the regular symbol lottery results and the variable display time of the regular symbol.

The lottery counter memory area 412a stores a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3 as lottery counters. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the jackpot lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot game will be played. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine the loss type when the jackpot lottery result is a loss. The lottery counter memory area 412a also stores a jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and a special symbol variation type counter CS1. The jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The special symbol variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the variable display time of the special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36. Furthermore, the lottery counter memory area 412a stores the following lottery counters: a normal win random number counter C4, a normal win type random number counter C5, a normal win random number initial value counter CIN2, and a normal symbol variation type counter CS2. The normal win random number counter C4 is used in the normal symbol win lottery to determine whether the electric role device 315b of the second winning slot 315 will be in an electric role open state. The normal win type random number counter C5 is used to assign the normal symbol win type (short open or long open) when the result of the normal symbol win lottery is a normal symbol win. The normal win random number initial value counter CIN2 is used to set the initial value of the normal win random number counter C4. The normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is used to determine the normal symbol variation display time in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display unit 36.

The MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value of each lottery counter C1-C5, CIN1, CIN2, CS1, and CS2 at short intervals, and each counter is used as a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in each lottery counter C1-C5, CIN1, CIN2, CS1, and CS1, and are referenced by the MPU 41 when setting the jackpot lottery results, the variable display time for special symbols, the jackpot type and loss type, the regular symbol lottery results, the variable display time for regular symbols, and the regular symbol win type.

The special symbol reserve storage area 412b includes a first special symbol reserve storage area REA, a second special symbol reserve storage area REB, and a special symbol execution area AE. The first special symbol reserve storage area REA includes a first reserve area REA1, a second reserve area REA2, a third reserve area REA3, a fourth reserve area REA4, and a first special symbol reserve number storage area NAA. The second special symbol reserve storage area REB includes a first reserve area REB1, a second reserve area REB2, a third reserve area REB3, a fourth reserve area REB4, and a second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB.

When a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and special symbol variation type counter CS1 stored in RAM 412 is acquired as special symbol win/loss information used in the jackpot lottery and stored in one of the first reserve areas REA1 to REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA. When a gaming ball enters the second winning slot 315, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and special symbol variation type counter CS1 stored in RAM 412 is acquired as special symbol win/loss information used in the jackpot lottery and stored in one of the first reserve areas REB1 to REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB. In addition, a lottery counter memory area 412a (such as a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, and a special chart change type counter CS1) may be provided separately for each of the first special chart reserve storage area REA and the second special chart reserve storage area REB.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, the special symbol change type counter CS1 is stored in one of the first reserve area REA1 to fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA, and the first reserve area REB1 to fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB.

Therefore, in addition to the results of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, which is executed based on the special symbol win/loss information stored in the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA and the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB, it is possible to determine in advance the display time (special symbol change pattern) for the special symbol (decorative symbol in the symbol display unit 341) on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 during the special symbol game.

Specifically, when a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314, the special symbol win/loss information is stored in the first special symbol reserve storage area REA in the order of priority: first reserve area REA1, second reserve area REA2, third reserve area REA3, and fourth reserve area REA4, whichever is available. The first special symbol reserve number storage area NAA stores the number of first reserve areas REA1 to REA4 in which special symbol win/loss information is stored as the first special symbol reserve number N.

In addition, when a gaming ball enters the second winning slot 315, the special symbol win/loss information is stored in the available area of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB in the order of priority: first reserve area REB1, second reserve area REB2, third reserve area REB3, and fourth reserve area REB4. The second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB stores the number of first reserve area REB1 to fourth reserve area REB4 in which special symbol win/loss information is stored as the second special symbol reserve number M.

In other words, the gaming machine 10 can store up to four pieces of special symbol win/loss information as winning history for the first winning slot 314 and the second winning slot 315, using a total of eight memory areas corresponding to the maximum number of reserves in the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA and the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB.

In another embodiment, a holding area with a maximum holding capacity of eight is provided in both the first winning slot 314 and the second winning slot 315, and in this case, it is possible to hold a total of up to eight pieces of special winning/losing information as winning history. The special winning/losing information is stored by the MPU 41 by executing processing in accordance with the control program.

The special symbol execution area AE is a memory area used to move the special symbol win/loss information stored in the first reserve area REA1 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA or the first reserve area REB1 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB when the variable display of the special symbol begins in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36. Specifically, the special symbol win/loss information in the first reserve area REB1 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB is moved to the special symbol execution area AE with priority, and when there is no special symbol win/loss information in the first reserve area REB1 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB and the second special symbol reserve number M stored in the second special symbol reserve number memory area NAB is 0, the special symbol win/loss information in the first reserve area REA1 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA is moved to the special symbol execution area AE. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the second special symbol game is executed in priority over the first special symbol game, and in the high-frequency support mode of the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state, the second special symbol game is mainly executed by executing a right hit, which is a game ball shot into the right area of the game board 31.

In addition, in another embodiment, if the difference between the first special symbol reservation number N stored in the first special symbol reservation number memory area NAA of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA and the second special symbol reservation number M stored in the second special symbol reservation number memory area NAB of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB is 2 or more, the value of the reservation area with the larger number is given priority and moved to the special symbol execution area AE.In another embodiment, the special symbol win/loss information of the first reservation area REA1 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA and the first reservation area REB1 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB is moved alternately to the special symbol execution area AE.

At the start of a single special symbol game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery and the like based on the numerical information stored as special symbol win/loss information in the special symbol execution area AE. At this time, if the first reserved area REA1 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA is moved to the special symbol execution area AE, the special symbol win/loss information stored in the second reserved area REA2 shifts to the first reserved area REA1, the special symbol win/loss information stored in the third reserved area REA3 shifts to the second reserved area REA2, and the special symbol win/loss information stored in the fourth reserved area REA4 shifts to the third reserved area REA3.

Similarly, when the first reserved area REB1 of the second special chart reserved storage area REB is moved to the special chart execution area AE, the special chart win/loss information stored in the second reserved area REB2 shifts to the first reserved area REB1, the special chart win/loss information stored in the third reserved area REB3 shifts to the second reserved area REB2, and the special chart win/loss information stored in the fourth reserved area REB4 shifts to the third reserved area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in Figure 17 (described below) by incrementing it by one within the range of 0 to 637, for example, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Furthermore, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated in the same way as the jackpot random number counter C1. The first to fourth reserve areas REA1 to REA4 and REB1 to REB4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA1 or the second special symbol reserve storage area REA2 store the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the time the gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315.

The random number value that results in a jackpot is set to two types according to the win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area in ROM 411, corresponding to the low probability mode, which is the normal game mode or time-limited game mode, and the high probability mode, which is the special game mode. Here, Figure 9 (A) shows an example of the low probability mode win/loss table corresponding to the low probability mode, and Figure 9 (B) shows an example of the high probability mode win/loss table corresponding to the high probability mode.

In the examples shown in Figures 9(A) and 9(B), a plurality of low-probability mode win/loss tables and high-probability mode win/loss tables are provided, each with a different probability of the lottery result in a jackpot (jackpot probability) depending on the game setting value. The low-probability mode win/loss table and high-probability mode win/loss table each include six win/loss tables corresponding to the six game setting values 1 to 6. The jackpot probability of the lottery result in a jackpot increases in the order of game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1, providing an advantage to the player.

For game setting value 1, of the 65,536 random number values between 0 and 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 206 (0-205) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 821 (0-820) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, for game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/318.1 (206/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/79.9 (820/65,536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

For game setting value 2, of the 65,536 random number values between 0 and 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 212 (0-211) for the low probability mode win/lose table and 845 (0-844) for the high probability mode win/lose table. In other words, for game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/309.1 (212/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/77.6 (845/65,536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

For game setting value 3, of the 65,536 random number values between 0 and 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 218 (0-217) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 869 (0-868) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, for game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/300.6 (218/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/75.4 (869/65,536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

At game setting value 4, of the 65,536 random number values between 0 and 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 224 (0-223) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 893 (0-892) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/292.6 (224/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/73.4 (893/65,536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

At game setting value 5, of the 65,536 random number values between 0 and 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 230 (0-229) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 917 (0-916) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/284.9 (230/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/71.5 (917/65,536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

At game setting value 6, of the 65,536 random number values between 0 and 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 236 (0-235) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 941 (0-940) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/277.7 (236/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/69.6 (941/65,536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a random number other than the ones that result in a jackpot win, the result of the jackpot lottery will be a loss.

Here, the low probability mode win/lose table and the high probability mode win/lose table share the same random numbers that result in a jackpot in a jackpot lottery for the same game setting value, but it is also possible that the random numbers that result in a jackpot are not the same. Furthermore, the random numbers that result in a jackpot may not be consecutive values, but may be partially or entirely discrete values.

Furthermore, six low-probability mode win/loss tables and six high-probability mode win/loss tables are provided, corresponding to the six game setting values, but there only needs to be one win/loss table for each mode. In other words, the game setting values are not limited to six levels. It is also possible to provide multiple low-probability mode win/loss tables corresponding to multiple game setting value levels, while providing one high-probability mode win/loss table. In other words, it is also possible to provide multiple game setting value levels for the low probability mode, and not provide multiple game setting value levels for the high probability mode, with a uniform jackpot probability. Of course, it is also possible to provide a uniform jackpot probability in the low probability mode, and multiple game setting value levels for the high probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by one within the range of 0 to 19, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the special symbol reserve storage area 412b when a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two jackpot types, special jackpot and normal jackpot, is set by the allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area in ROM 411.

Here, Figure 9(C) is a diagram showing an example of an allocation table. In the example shown in Figure 9(C), when the type of special symbol game is a first special symbol game triggered by winning the first winning slot 314, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R special symbol jackpot is 10 numbers from 0 to 9, the number of random numbers that result in a 16R special symbol jackpot is 5 numbers from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that result in a 5R regular jackpot is 5 numbers from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of special symbol game is a second special symbol game triggered by winning the second winning slot 315, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R special symbol jackpot is 5 numbers from 0 to 4, the number of random numbers that result in a 16R special symbol jackpot is 10 numbers from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that result in a 5R regular jackpot is 5 numbers from 15 to 19. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is set to the same at 75%, but the probability of a 16R jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than in the first special symbol game. That is, in the jackpot game state (high probability mode and high-frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric device 315b) and the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode), the expected number of game balls to be acquired if the lottery results in a jackpot is set higher than in the normal game state (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode with a low probability of opening the electric device 315b).

In either the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variable jackpot, the game will transition to a probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the jackpot game ends. The gaming machine 10 does not have an upper limit on the number of special symbol games that can be executed in the probability variable game state, and is configured as a so-called loop probability variable machine.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the game will transition to a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the jackpot game ends. In the gaming machine 10, an upper limit (100 times in this embodiment) is set for the number of special symbol games (number of time-saving games) that can be played in the time-saving game state, and if the result of the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot within this upper limit of special symbol games, the game will transition to a normal game state, which is a low frequency support mode, after the upper limit of special symbol games has been played. Note that the number of special symbol games in the time-saving game state is not limited to 100 and may be any other number.

The transition from the probability variable game state to the normal game state is not limited to when the maximum number of special symbol games is played, but may also be performed when, for example, a state transition lottery (fall-down lottery) is won. In this case, the probability variable game state will not transition (fall) to the normal game state until a predetermined number of special symbol games have been played, and it is possible to guarantee that the minimum number of special symbol games played in the probability variable game state will be the predetermined number. This prevents the number of special symbol games played in the probability variable game state from decreasing significantly.

In this embodiment, individual allocation tables are set for the first winning slot 314, which triggers the execution of the first special symbol game upon winning, and the second winning slot 315, which triggers the execution of the second special symbol game upon winning. The allocation probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, but it is also possible for the allocation probability of the jackpot type to be the same for the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop probability variable machine, and it is also possible for it to be configured as an ST machine, including a V-ST machine, or a type 1/2 mixed machine.

Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the special chart execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R variable jackpot," a "16R variable jackpot," a "5R normal jackpot," or a "miss."

Here, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened in a predetermined manner and round play is repeated five times during the jackpot game. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which round play is repeated 16 times during the jackpot game. Note that, as an example of the opening mode of the variable winning opening 316 during each round of play, it is conceivable that the variable winning opening 316 is opened once. Naturally, it is also conceivable that the variable winning opening 316 is opened multiple times during some or all of the rounds of play.

In the case of a 5R or 16R probability jackpot, after the jackpot play ends, the game transitions to a probability jackpot game state, which is a high probability mode with a high probability of winning a jackpot and a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric device 315b. In this embodiment, the probability jackpot game state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R probability jackpot," "16R probability jackpot," or "5R normal jackpot."

On the other hand, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a time-saving game state, which is a low-probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is low and a high-frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric device 315b is high. In this embodiment, the time-saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) continues until the results of a predetermined number of jackpot lottery draws, such as 100, have been notified to the player, or ends when the player is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery draws has been a jackpot before the specified number of draws has elapsed.

Another possible embodiment is to hold a lottery to transition from the special game mode to the time-limited game mode or the regular game mode during special game play. Note that if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, the special game mode will not transition to the jackpot game mode or the time-limited game mode. In this embodiment, an example is given in which the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpots: a 5R special jackpot, a 16R special jackpot, and a 5R regular jackpot. However, this is not limiting, and other jackpot types, such as a 2-round special jackpot, a 2-round regular jackpot, or a 16R regular jackpot, are also possible.

Furthermore, in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in Figure 17 (described below), the reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated by being incremented by 1 within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The value of the reach random number counter C3 at the time the gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315 is stored in the first to fourth holding areas REA1 to REA4 and REB1 to REB4 of the first special symbol holding storage area REA1 or the second special symbol holding storage area REA2.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stopping result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss. Specifically, the miss type table stored in the miss type table storage area in ROM 411 sets the values of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to three types of misses: a front-to-back miss reach, in which the final stopping symbol stops just one symbol before or after the reach symbol after a reach has occurred; a non-front-to-back miss reach, in which the final stopping symbol stops anywhere other than before or after the reach symbol after a reach has occurred; and a complete miss, in which no reach occurs.

Here, Figure 9 (D) is a diagram showing an example of a miss type table. In the example shown in Figure 9 (D), the random number value for a front or rear miss reach is 0 to 8, the random number value for a reach other than a front or rear miss is 9 to 38, and the random number value for a complete miss is 39 to 238. Note that in special symbol games where a 5R special symbol jackpot, 16R special symbol jackpot, or 5R normal jackpot is won, i.e., in special symbol games where the game transitions to a jackpot game state, the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Here, "reach" refers to a variable state in which a decorative symbol combination indicating a jackpot is likely to occur between the time when the variable symbol display on the symbol display unit 341 begins and the time when the symbol is statically displayed. In one example, the same symbol is statically displayed at two of the three decorative symbol stop positions on the pay line on the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining stop position changes. Furthermore, during the variable reach state on the symbol display unit 341, a story presentation process is executed in which a video of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, and a player-participation operation presentation process is executed in which the player's operation of the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation. Note that during these presentation processes, the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged form.

The special symbol variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 199, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Specifically, the special symbol variation type counter CS1 determines the special symbol variation pattern type (special symbol variation display time) indicating the variation display time of the special symbol (decorative symbol in symbol display unit 341) in the first special symbol display unit 362 or second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery. By determining the special symbol variation pattern type in this way, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the variation type (presentation pattern) for general special symbol play, such as high-speed variation effects (basic effect, non-reach effect), normal reach effect, super reach effect, and special reach effect, depending on the special symbol variation pattern type (special symbol variation display time). The special symbol change type counter CS1 is updated at least once in step S1402 each time the MPU 41 executes the main processing shown in FIG. 21 (described below), and is also repeatedly updated in step S1414 during the remaining time within the main processing. The value of the special symbol change type counter CS1 at the time the gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315 is stored in the first to fourth holding areas REA1 to REA4 and REB1 to REB4 of the first special symbol holding storage area REA1 or the second special symbol holding storage area REA2.

The MPU 41 then determines the special symbol variation pattern, which indicates the variable display time of the special symbol, based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and a variation table (see Figures 10(A) to 10(C)) that is preset according to the result of the jackpot lottery. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the special symbol variation pattern type by referring to the normal jackpot variation table (see Figure 10(A)), the special jackpot variation table (see Figure 10(B)), or the miss variation table (see Figure 10(C)) that are pre-stored in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these variation tables may be provided separately for the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Furthermore, separate special jackpot variation tables may be provided for the 5R special jackpot and the 16R special jackpot.

Here, Figures 10(A), 10(B), and 10(C) are diagrams showing examples of variation tables. In the normal jackpot variation table shown in Figure 10(A), the special jackpot variation table shown in Figure 10(B), and the loss variation table shown in Figure 10(C), special jackpot variation patterns are pre-associated with the value of the special jackpot variation type counter CS1. The MPU 41 then refers to the normal jackpot variation table shown in Figure 10(A) when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R normal jackpot," the special jackpot variation table shown in Figure 10(B) when the result is a "5R special jackpot" or a "16R special jackpot," and the loss variation table shown in Figure 10(C) when the result is a "loss," to identify the type of special jackpot variation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in Figures 10(A) and 10(B), in the normal jackpot variation table and the special jackpot variation table, one of the special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected depending on the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. If special symbol variation pattern "01" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the normal reach presentation pattern, with a variation display time of 30 seconds, as the variation type (presentation pattern type), and the special game presentation is executed in accordance with the normal reach presentation pattern on the symbol display unit 341, etc. The normal reach presentation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the special symbol game presentation is a normal reach presentation. Furthermore, if special symbol variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the super reach presentation pattern, with a variation display time of 60 seconds, as the variation type (presentation pattern type), and the special game presentation is executed in accordance with the super reach presentation pattern on the symbol display unit 341, etc. The super reach presentation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the special symbol game presentation is a super reach presentation. Furthermore, when the special symbol variation pattern "03" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the special reach presentation pattern as the variation type (presentation pattern), which has the longest variation display time of 90 seconds, and the special game presentation is executed in accordance with the special reach presentation pattern on the symbol display unit 341, etc. The special reach presentation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the special symbol game presentation is a special reach presentation.

As shown in Figure 10 (C), the miss variation table defines a correspondence between the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the special symbol variation pattern in accordance with the type of decorative symbol stop display at the time of a miss (reach for a front-to-back miss, reach for anything other than a front-to-back miss, or complete miss) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. More specifically, if the type of decorative symbol stop display at the time of a miss is reach for a front-to-back miss or reach for anything other than a front-to-back miss, one of the special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. On the other hand, if the type of decorative symbol stop display at the time of a miss is complete miss, one of the special symbol variation patterns "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. Note that if special symbol variation pattern "04" is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach presentation pattern (7-second non-reach presentation pattern) with a variation display time of 7 seconds as the variation type (presentation pattern type), and the special symbol game presentation is executed according to the 7-second non-reach presentation pattern in the symbol display unit 341, etc. Furthermore, when special symbol variation pattern "05" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a variation type (performance pattern type) as a no-reach performance pattern (10-second non-reach performance pattern) with a variation display time of 10 seconds, and the special symbol game performance is executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., according to the 10-second non-reach performance pattern.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, as a variation display at the time of a loss corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern "04," a variation display of a loss pattern is executed in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped at a combination of loss symbols without any advance notice such as the display of characters, messages, etc. Also, in the gaming machine 10, as a variation display at the time of a loss corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern "05," a variation display of a loss pattern is executed in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped at a combination of loss symbols accompanied by advance notice such as the display of characters, messages, etc. Also, when a variation display at the time of a loss corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern "05," a player-participation operation display that reflects the player's operation of the operation button 20 may be executed as a preview effect.

Note that the types of special chart variation patterns are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 10(A), 10(B), and 10(C).

For example, in gaming machine 10, multiple types of normal reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to special chart variation pattern "01," and one of these normal reach effects selected will be executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of super reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the super reach effects executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to special chart variation pattern "02," and one of these super reach effects is selected and executed. The super reach effect is a reach effect with a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, and is executed to suggest to the player that the probability (expectation) of the lottery result being a jackpot is higher than with the normal reach effect, but lower than with the special reach effect.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 provides multiple types of special reach effects with different characters and stories as special reach effects that are executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to special chart variation pattern "03," and one of these special reach effects is selected and executed. A special reach effect is a reach effect with a longer variation time than a normal reach effect, and is an effect that develops from, for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. A special reach effect is executed to suggest to the player that the probability (expectation level) of winning a jackpot is higher than with a normal reach effect or a special reach effect.

Note that the presentation patterns corresponding to the special chart variation patterns may include player-participation type presentations, such as presentations in which the operation status of the player on the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation, such as a single operation presentation in which a single operation is reflected in the presentation, a rapid-fire operation presentation in which the player's rapid pressing of the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation, and a long-press operation presentation in which the player's long-press operation of the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation.

Then, when the MPU 41 identifies the variable display time of the special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 (the variable display time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display section 341), it inputs the special symbol variable display time and a special symbol variable pattern command indicating the result of the jackpot lottery to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, if the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot," the MPU 41 outputs one of the special symbol variable pattern commands "A01" to "A03," with "A" added before the special symbol variable pattern "01" to "03," indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," the MPU 41 outputs one of the special symbol variable pattern commands "B01" to "B03," with "B" added before the special symbol variable pattern "01" to "03," indicating that it is a 5R special jackpot. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "16R probability variable jackpot," the MPU 41 outputs one of the special symbol variation pattern commands "C01" to "C03," in which a "C" indicating a 16R probability variable jackpot is added before the special symbol variation pattern "01" to "03." Also, if the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 outputs one of the special symbol variation pattern commands "D01" to "D05," in which a "D" indicating a miss is added before the special symbol variation pattern "01" to "05." In other words, the special symbol variation pattern command includes not only the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol game time), which is the variable display time of the special symbol, but also information specifying the result of the jackpot lottery. Based on the special symbol variation pattern command, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine not only the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol play time), which is the variation display time of the special symbol, but also the result of the jackpot lottery. Based on the variation display time of the special symbol (special symbol play time) and the result of the jackpot lottery, it determines details such as the variation type (presentation pattern) displayed on the symbol display unit 341 and the combination of stationary display of decorative symbols. Based on the determined details such as the variation type (presentation pattern), the audio lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to display the varying and stationary display of decorative symbols, and executes image effects in accordance with the varying display of the decorative symbols. Furthermore, in accordance with the varying display of the decorative symbols, it executes audio effects via the speaker 26, and executes illumination effects (lamp effects) via the illumination unit 27.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process that determines the variable display time of the decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341 based on the special symbol variable type counter CS1 and the variable table. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured with an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the jackpot lottery. Furthermore, because the details of the variable mode of the decorative symbols actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variable modes.

The fluctuation tables shown in Figures 10(A) to 10(C) are commonly used in various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, and probability variable game state), but individual fluctuation tables may be set for each game state, or individual fluctuation tables may be set for the high-frequency support mode (time-saving game state and probability variable game state) and the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, when individual fluctuation tables are set for each game state or support mode, the average value of the fluctuation display time is set longer, for example, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode) than in the time-saving game state and probability variable game state (high-frequency support mode). Furthermore, when different fluctuation tables are set for the time-saving game state and probability variable game state, the average value of the fluctuation display time may be set longer in the time-saving game state than in the probability variable game state, or may be set longer in the probability variable game state than in the time-saving game state.

Here, Figure 11 is a block diagram showing an example of the general map reservation storage area 412c in the memory area of the main control device 4 shown in Figure 8. As shown in Figure 11, the general map reservation storage area 412c includes a first general map reservation area SE1, a second general map reservation area SE2, a third general map reservation area SE3, a fourth general map reservation area SE4, a general map variable reservation number storage area SNA, and a general map execution area SAE.

Regular lottery first reserve area SE1 to regular lottery fourth reserve area SE4 are memory areas that store the regular lottery win random number counter C4, regular lottery win type random number counter C5, and regular lottery win type counter CS2, which are obtained as regular lottery win/loss information used in the regular lottery win lottery when a gaming ball passes through through gates 317L and 317R.

The regular map variable reserve number storage area SNA stores the number of regular map first reserve areas SE1 to SE4 in which regular map win/loss information is stored. In other words, the regular map variable reserve number storage area SNA is a storage area that stores the number of reserved rights to play regular map games.

The normal symbol execution area SAE is a memory area used to move the normal symbol win/loss information in the first normal symbol holding area SE1 when the display of normal symbol fluctuations begins in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display unit 36. At the start of a normal symbol game, the MPU 41 performs a normal symbol win lottery using the normal symbol win/loss table (see Figures 12(A) and 12(B)) and the normal symbol win type allocation table (see Figures 12(C) and 12(D)) described below, based on the numerical information (values of the normal symbol win random number counter C4, the normal symbol type random number counter C5, and the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2) stored in the normal symbol execution area SAE, and determines the normal symbol fluctuation display time for the normal symbol using the normal symbol fluctuation table (not shown). At this time, if the normal map correct/incorrect information stored in the normal map first holding area SE1 is moved to the normal map execution area SAE, the normal map correct/incorrect information stored in the normal map second holding area SE2 is shifted to the normal map first holding area SE1, the normal map correct/incorrect information stored in the normal map third holding area SE3 is shifted to the normal map second holding area SE2, and the normal map correct/incorrect information stored in the normal map fourth holding area SE4 is shifted to the normal map third holding area SE3.

Normal win random number counter C4 is periodically updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in Figure 17 (described below), for example by being incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 299, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The value of normal win random number counter C4 at the time when the game ball enters through gates 317L, 317R is stored in normal win random number counter C4 first hold area SE1 to normal win random number counter C4 fourth hold area SE4 of normal win hold storage area 412c. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing, a normal win lottery is held to determine whether or not electric device 315b will be opened for a predetermined period of time based on the value of normal win random number counter C4 stored in normal win hold storage area 412c.

Here, Figures 12(A) and 12(B) are diagrams showing examples of normal winning/losing tables. In this embodiment, two types of normal winning/losing tables are set: a low-frequency support mode normal winning/losing table shown in Figure 12(A), and a high-frequency support mode normal winning/losing table shown in Figure 12(B). In other words, in this embodiment, as described below, the probability of winning a normal winning is different between low-frequency support mode and high-frequency support mode, and the probability of winning a normal winning is set higher in high-frequency support mode than in low-frequency support mode.

The low-frequency support mode normal winning probability table shown in Figure 12(A) is a table used in the normal winning lottery in the normal game mode, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 12(A), the low-frequency support mode normal winning probability table is set so that a normal winning probability occurs when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0, and a loss occurs when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is between 1 and 299. In other words, in the normal game mode (low-frequency support mode), the probability of a normal winning probability is set to 1/300, and the operation frequency of the electric device 315b is low.

The high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table shown in Figure 12 (B) is a table used in the normal win lottery in the high-frequency support mode, which is the probability variable play state and the time-limited play state. As shown in Figure 12 (B), the high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table is the opposite of the low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table; a loss occurs when the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is 0, and a normal win occurs when the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is 1 to 299. In other words, in the probability variable play state and the time-limited play state (high-frequency support mode), the probability of a normal win is set to 299/300, which is higher than the normal play state (low-frequency support mode), and the operation frequency of the electric device 315b is increased.

Note that the probability of winning a normal low-frequency support mode map and the probability of winning a normal high-frequency support mode map are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 12(A) and 12(B) and can be changed as appropriate.

The normal win type random number counter C5 is periodically updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in Figure 17 (described below) by incrementing it by one within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The normal win type random number counter C5 value at the time the game ball enters the through gate 317L, 317R is stored in the normal win first reserve area SE1 to normal win fourth reserve area SE4 of the normal win reserve storage area 412c. Furthermore, if the value of the normal win type random number counter C4 stored in the normal win first reserve area SE1 to normal win fourth reserve area SE4 indicates a normal win, the type of normal win (short-open normal win or long-open normal win), i.e., the opening time of the electric device 315b, is determined by the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 stored in the normal win first reserve area SE1 to normal win fourth reserve area SE4.

Here, Figures 12(C) and 12(D) are diagrams showing examples of regular map win type allocation tables. In this embodiment, two types of regular map win type allocation tables are set: a low-frequency support mode regular map win type allocation table shown in Figure 12(C) and a high-frequency support mode regular map win type allocation table shown in Figure 12(D). In other words, in this embodiment, as described below, the allocation probability of regular map win types (short-open regular map wins and long-open regular map wins) differs between low-frequency support mode and high-frequency support mode.

Here, in the case of a short-open normal win, the electric device 315b opens for a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds), resulting in a short-open normal win game in which the game ball can enter the second winning slot 315 for a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds). In this short-open normal win game, the short opening time of the electric device 315b makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315, and in many cases, the game ball does not enter the second winning slot 315.

On the other hand, in the case of a long-opening normal winning game, the electric device 315b is open for a longer period of time (e.g., six seconds) than in a short-opening normal winning game, resulting in a long-opening normal winning game in which the game ball can enter the second winning slot 315 for a longer period of time (e.g., six seconds) than in a short-opening normal winning game. In this long-opening normal winning game, the electric device 315b is open for a longer period of time, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315, and it is possible to reserve up to an upper limit of the right to play the second special winning game (e.g., four).

The low-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table shown in Figure 12 (C) is a table used in the normal win lottery in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 12 (C), the low-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table is set so that when the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is between 0 and 99, a short-open normal win occurs, and when the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is between 100 and 199, a long-open normal win occurs. In other words, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the allocation ratio between short-open normal wins and long-open normal wins is set to 1:1. Of course, the distribution ratio between short-open normal wins and long-open normal wins in normal game mode (low frequency support mode) does not necessarily have to be 1:1 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is possible to set the distribution ratio for long-open normal wins to zero (zero values in the normal win type random number counter C5 for long-open normal wins) or approximately zero (one or two values in the normal win type random number counter C5 for long-open normal wins).

The high-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table shown in Figure 12(D) is a table used in the normal win lottery in the high-frequency support mode, which is the probability variable play state and the time-limited play state. As shown in Figure 12(D), the high-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table is set so that a short-open normal win occurs when the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is 0, and a long-open normal win occurs when the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is 1 to 199. In other words, in the probability variable play state and the time-limited play state (high-frequency support mode), long-open normal wins are more likely to be allocated than short-open normal wins. Of course, the allocation ratio between short-open normal wins and long-open normal wins in the probability variable play state and the time-limited play state (high-frequency support mode) is not limited to the example shown in Figure 12(D) and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is possible to set the allocation ratio for short-open normal wins to zero (the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 for short-open normal wins is zero).

The opening of the electric device 315b is not limited to once per game per normal map, but may occur multiple times. In this case, the opening time and opening interval (interval between openings) of each electric device 315b per game per normal map may be one type or multiple types.

The normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 is incremented by one in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and is updated at least once in step S1402 each time the main processing in FIG. 21 described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated in step S1414 during the remaining time in the main processing. The value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 at the time when the game ball enters the through gates 317L, 317R is stored in the normal map first holding area SE1 to normal map fourth holding area SE4 of the normal map holding storage area 412c. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing, the normal map fluctuation display time is determined by referring to a normal map fluctuation display table (not shown) based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 stored in the normal map holding storage area 412c.

The normal map change display table (not shown) includes, for example, a high-frequency support mode normal map change table that is referenced when in high-frequency support mode, and a low-frequency support mode normal map change display table that is referenced when in low-frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode normal map change display table and the low-frequency support mode normal map change display table, multiple normal map change display times are set, for example, corresponding to the value of the normal map change type counter CS2. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode normal map change display table is typically set to have a shorter average normal map change display time than the low-frequency support mode normal map change display table. For example, some of the change display times set in the high-frequency support mode normal map change display table may be set to be longer than some of the change display times set in the low-frequency support mode normal map change display table, or all of the change display times set in the high-frequency support mode normal map change display table may be set to be longer than all of the change display times set in the low-frequency support mode normal map change display table.

In addition, a common normal map change display table may be set for both the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, and the normal map change display time set in at least one of the high-frequency support mode normal map change display table and the low-frequency support mode normal map change display table may be one type. Also, the normal map change display time may be set according to the number of reserved normal map changes X; for example, the normal map change display time may be set to be shorter the more reserved normal map changes X there are, and the normal map change display time may be set to be longer the less reserved normal map changes X there are.

Here, Figure 13 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 of the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine shown in Figure 1. The game information storage area 412d stores game information related to game history, ball payout performance, etc. In this embodiment, the game information storage area 412d stores the following game information: "Number of Out Balls," "Number of Balls Paid from General Winning Port," "Number of Balls Paid from First Winning Port," "Number of Balls Paid from Second Winning Port," "Number of Balls Paid from Variable Winning Port," "Setting Value," "Base Information," "Continuous Device Ratio Information," "Device Ratio Information," "Cumulative Number of Jackpot Draws," "Number of Unit Jackpot Draws," "Number of Jackpots," and "Number of Consecutive Misses." Of this game information, the "Game Setting Value," "Base Information," "Continuous Device Ratio Information," "Device Ratio Information," and "Number of Unit Jackpot Draws" correspond to game information (performance information) related to ball payout performance.

The "number of out balls" is the cumulative number of game balls fired onto the game board 31 in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of out balls" is stored as a count of the out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process in Figure 17, which will be described later.

The "number of balls paid out from the general prize opening" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a win at the general prize opening 313 in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). When a win at the general prize opening 313 is detected by the ball entry sensor 313a in normal game mode, this "number of balls paid out from the general prize opening" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current win when setting the prize ball command to cause the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to a win at the general prize opening 313 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main processing of Figure 21 described below.

The "number of balls paid out from the first winning slot" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a win at the first winning slot 314 in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). When a win at the first winning slot 314 is detected by the ball entry sensor 314a in normal game mode, this "number of balls paid out from the first winning slot" is updated to a value adding the number of balls paid out for the current win when setting the prize ball command to cause the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the win at the first winning slot 314 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main processing of Figure 21 described below.

The "Number of balls paid out from the second winning slot" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a win at the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving play mode (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). When a win at the second winning slot 315 is detected by the ball entry sensor 315a in the time-saving play mode, this "Number of balls paid out from the second winning slot" is updated to a value adding the number of balls paid out for the current win when setting the prize ball command to cause the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the win at the second winning slot 315 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main processing of Figure 21 described below.

The "number of balls paid out from variable prize opening" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a prize into the variable prize opening 316 during a jackpot game state. When a prize into the variable prize opening 316 is detected by the ball entry sensor 316a during a jackpot game state, this "number of balls paid out from variable prize opening" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out for the current prize when setting the prize ball command to cause the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to a prize into the variable prize opening 316 during the prize ball command setting process in step S1403 of the main processing in Figure 21, which will be described later.

The "game setting value" is used to select the low-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9(A)) and high-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9(B)) used in the jackpot lottery (win/lose determination). In other words, the "game setting value" determines the jackpot probability in low-probability mode and high-probability mode. In this embodiment, six setting values (six types of low-probability mode win/lose tables (see Figure 9(A)) and high-probability mode win/lose tables (see Figure 9(B)) with different jackpot probabilities) are prepared, as described below. The "game setting value" is updated during the game setting value change process in Figure 35, described below.

The "base information" is information about the "base," which is the payout rate (ball output rate) in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "base" is the ratio of the combined number of balls paid out (number of balls paid out from the general prize slot) and the "number of balls paid out from the first prize slot) to the "number of balls out" in normal game mode. The mathematical formula for "base" is "base" = 100 x (number of balls paid out from the general prize slot + number of balls paid out from the first prize slot) / number of balls out. The "base information" includes information about the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the two-previous 60,000 ball base B2. The previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the two-previous 60,000 ball base B2 are updated each time the number of balls out reaches 60,000 in the specific performance information update process of Figure 36 described below (steps S2505 and S2506). Specifically, the "base" when the most recent number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls is set as the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the "base" when the previous number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls is set as the second-to-last 60,000 ball base B2, and each is saved as "base information" in the game information storage area of RAM 412. Furthermore, until the counter value for the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls, it is calculated as the current base BL (step S1804), and the current base BL is saved as "base information" in the game information storage area of RAM 412. Furthermore, when the counter value for the number of out balls is calculated as the current base BL until it reaches 60,000 balls, the "base information" stores the "number of balls paid out from the general prize slot," "number of balls paid out from the first prize slot," and "number of out balls" for base calculation, in addition to the "number of balls paid out from the general prize slot," "number of balls paid out from the first prize slot," and "number of out balls" described above.

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes the "current base BL," the "previous 60,000 ball base B1," and the "previously previous 60,000 ball base B2," and the past two 60,000 ball bases are kept as history, but it is also possible to keep the past three or more 60,000 ball bases as history. Furthermore, the "base information" may also include the cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present.

The "continuous feature ratio information" is information relating to the "continuous feature ratio," which is the ratio of the number of balls paid out from variable prize slots to the total number of balls paid out from all prize slots that pay out prize balls (general prize slot 313, first prize slot 314, second prize slot 315, and variable prize slot 316). The "continuous feature ratio" can be expressed mathematically as "continuous feature ratio" = 100 x "number of balls paid out from variable prize slots" / "total number of balls paid out." The "continuous feature ratio information" is updated, for example, during the specific performance information update process shown in Figure 36, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the "continuous feature ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous feature ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. Note that "continuous feature ratio information" may be the consecutive feature ratio for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (e.g., 100), the period until a certain number of jackpot draws are executed in normal gaming mode (e.g., 1,000), or the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, "continuous feature ratio information" may include both the cumulative consecutive feature ratio and the consecutive feature ratio for a certain period.

The "role ratio information" is information relating to the "role ratio," which is the ratio of the combined number of balls paid out from the second prize slot to the total number of balls paid out from all prize slots that pay out prize balls (general prize slot 313, first prize slot 314, second prize slot 315, and variable prize slot 316). The "role ratio" can be expressed mathematically as follows: "role ratio" = 100 x (number of balls paid out from second prize slot + number of balls paid out from variable prize slot) / total number of balls paid out. The "role ratio information" is updated, for example, during the specific performance information update process shown in Figure 36, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the "role ratio information" is stored as the cumulative role ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "role ratio information" may be the role ratio for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (e.g., 100), the period until a certain number of jackpot draws are executed in normal gaming mode (e.g., 1,000), or the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "continuous role ratio information" may include both the cumulative role ratio and the role ratio for a certain period of time.

The "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is the number of jackpot draws that have been performed in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) since the gaming machine 10 was first activated before the opening of the gaming hall. In other words, the "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is also the cumulative number of times that the first special symbol display in the first special symbol display area 362 of the main display unit 36 has been displayed in response to a winning entry into the first winning slot 314 in normal game mode. The "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is incremented by one each time the first special symbol or second special symbol display in the first special symbol display area 362 or second special symbol display area 363 of the main display unit 36 is displayed in step S2106 of the special symbol display start processing in Figure 28 (described below). The "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "unit number of jackpot draws" is the number of jackpot draws triggered by a winning entry into the first winning slot 314 (the number of times the symbol change display in the first special symbol display unit of the main display unit 36 is executed) per a certain number of minus ball difference in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). In this embodiment, the certain number is "250 balls," and the difference balls is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the "number of balls paid out to the normal winning slot" and the "number of balls paid out to the first winning slot" from the "number of balls out." In other words, the "unit number of jackpot draws" is the number of times the first special symbol change display in the first special symbol display unit 362 occurs (the number of jackpot draws) per 1,000 yen when 250 balls are loaned for 1,000 yen at an amusement parlor. Note that the "unit number of jackpot draws" may also be the number of jackpot draws triggered by a certain number of minus ball difference in normal game mode. The "number of unit jackpot draws" is updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the "number of unit jackpot draws" is stored as the cumulative number of unit jackpot draws since the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall up to the present. The "number of unit jackpot draws" may also be for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpot draws (e.g., 100 draws), a period until a certain number of jackpot draws (e.g., 1,000 draws) are executed in normal gaming mode, or a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, both the cumulative number of unit jackpot draws and the number of unit jackpot draws over a certain period may also be stored as gaming information as the "number of unit jackpot draws."

The "number of jackpots" is the number of times that a jackpot has been drawn in the jackpot lottery held from the time the gaming machine 10 was first started before the opening of the amusement hall until the present. The "number of jackpots" is incremented by one each time a jackpot game is started, for example, in the jackpot game control process shown in Figure 29 below. In addition, the "number of jackpots" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "number of consecutive losses" is the number of consecutive losses in the jackpot lottery in the normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and is cleared to 0 if the lottery result is a jackpot. When the variable display of the first or second special symbol is started in the first special symbol display section 362 or second special symbol display section 363 of the main display unit 36 in step S2106 of the special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 28 described below, the "number of consecutive losses" is incremented by one if the result of the win/loss determination based on the low probability mode win/loss table in step S2103 is a miss, and is cleared to 0 if the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot. In this embodiment, the "number of consecutive losses" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the "number of consecutive losses" may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 14, the performance information display device 4A displays "base information" and "setting values" stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in RAM 412. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a setting value display unit 45, a setting value change operation unit 46, and a ROM 47. Here, Figure 15 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 15, the performance display monitor 43 displays the "base information" of the gaming machine 10 and is located in a position that is visible when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see FIG. 3). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of multiple (four in this embodiment) 7-segment displays 431-434 and is known as a 4-digit 7-segment display. While the performance display monitor 43 is preferably located on the main control device 4, it may also be located on a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, or on another component of the game other than the main control unit 331. It is also possible to display the "base information" using the first special symbol display section 362 and/or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36.

The seven-segment displays 431-434 are capable of displaying the numbers "0" through "9" and the letters "A" through "F." When displaying the letter "B" on the seven-segment displays 431-434, a dot is lit to display "8." to distinguish it from the number "8," and when displaying the letter "D," a dot is lit to display "0." to distinguish it from the number "0." Furthermore, when displaying any of the letters "A" through "F," it is also possible to light up a dot to clearly indicate that it is a letter.

Of the four seven-segment displays 431-434, the performance display monitor 43 has four seven-segment displays: the left two 7-segment displays 431, 432, which are identification segments that display the "base type" as an abbreviation, and the right two 7-segment displays 433, 434, which are ratio segments that display the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41. For example, if the current base BL is 31%, the left two 7-segment displays 431, 432, which are identification segments, display the abbreviation "BL" for the current base BL as "8." and "L," while the right two 7-segment displays 433, 434, which are ratio segments, display the base value "31" as "3" and "1." In other words, the four seven-segment displays 431-434, from left to right, display "8.", "L," "3," and "1."

The performance display switch 44, when pressed, turns the power to the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431-434) on and off collectively, and is located in a position that allows easy operation when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see Figure 3). In the illustrated example, pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44 turns the power on, and pressing the lower half turns the power off. When the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn the power on, power is supplied to the four 7-segment displays 431-434, allowing the display of base information on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn the power off, power is cut off to the four 7-segment displays 431-434, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. The performance display switch 44 may be located somewhere other than the main control unit 4.

Here, Figure 15(A) is an example of a display on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in Figure 15(A), when the performance display switch 44 is off, the seven-segment displays 431-434 are off, and the base information is not displayed. As shown in Figures 15(B) to 15(D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the "base information" is displayed in a loop of the current base BL → previous 60,000 ball base B1 → previous 60,000 ball base B2 → current base BL, with each base being displayed at regular intervals. The example shown in Figure 15(B) indicates that the current base BL is 28%, the example shown in Figure 15(C) indicates that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%, and the example shown in Figure 15(D) indicates that the previous 60,000 ball base B2 is 32%. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 15 (A), when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the seven-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed.

The programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, such as programs that calculate the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2, and programs that display the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 in sequence at regular intervals on the performance display monitor 43, are stored in ROM 47 provided in the main control unit 4 separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41. This reduces the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has sufficient capacity, the programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in ROM 411. The programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may also be stored in a storage device such as a ROM provided separately from the main control unit 4.

Furthermore, the performance display monitor 43 may display other performance information stored in the game information storage area 412d, such as "continuous feature ratio information" or "feature ratio information," instead of or in addition to "base information."

Furthermore, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured with other types of display, such as a dot matrix display, liquid crystal display, or organic EL display.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 14, the setting value display unit 45 displays the above-mentioned game setting values for selecting the low-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9 (A)) and high-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9 (B)) to be referenced in the jackpot lottery, and is configured with a 7-segment display. Note that the setting value display unit 45 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured with other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display, LCD display, or organic EL display, and the game setting values may be displayed using the performance display monitor 43.

The set value change operation unit 46 switches the power of the 7-segment display on and off when pressed, and allows the set value to be changed when rotated when the 7-segment display is on. The set value change operation unit 46 functions as a contact switch that is turned on and off when pressed, and as a rotary switch that switches contacts when rotated (by a predetermined angle). Figure 16 shows an example of the display on the set value display unit 45 of the main control unit 4.

As shown in FIG. 16(A), when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the setting value display unit 45 is off, the seven-segment display is energized and a number is displayed on the setting value display unit 45. The number displayed at this time is the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412 and indicates the current setting value. In the illustrated example, the setting value is "1." On the other hand, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the setting value display unit 45 is on, the power to the seven-segment display is cut off and the setting value display unit 45 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 16 (B), when the setting value display unit 45 is lit and the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated, the number displayed in the setting value display unit 45 changes. In the illustrated example, rotating the setting value display unit 45 to the right increases the number displayed in the setting value display unit 45, and rotating the setting value display unit 45 to the left decreases the number displayed in the setting value display unit 45. When the number displayed in the setting value display unit 45 is changed by rotating the setting value display unit 45, the changed number is saved as the setting value in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412. Therefore, if the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the number corresponding to the desired setting value is displayed in the setting value display unit 45 and the power to the 7-segment display is turned off, the number displayed immediately before the power was turned off is determined as the setting value. This allows the MPU 41 to perform a jackpot lottery based on the low-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9(A)) or the high-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9(B)) selected according to the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412.

The method for changing the setting value is not limited to rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 and then turning off the power to the setting value display unit 45. For example, the setting value may be determined by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), or by repeatedly pressing or holding the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) to change the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 and then turning off the power to the setting value display unit 45, or by inserting a key into a keyhole provided on the main control unit 4 or the like and turning the key to change the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 and then removing the key.

Here, the performance information display device 4A equipped with the setting value display unit 45 is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. The control unit 33 is also provided on the rear side of the gaming board 31 and can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Therefore, the setting value display unit 45 is provided on the rear side of the gaming board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 together with the gaming board 31 relative to the front frame 11, it is possible to select between a state where it is visible from outside the gaming machine 10 (the front side of the front frame 11) and a state where it is not visible. In other words, by closing the gaming board 31 (control unit 33) relative to the front frame 11, the setting value display unit 45 cannot be seen, whereas by opening the gaming board 31 (control unit 33) relative to the front frame 11, the setting value display unit 45 can be seen. As a result, when a player plays on the gaming machine 10, the setting value display unit 45 is not visible unless the gaming board 31 is opened, preventing the player from learning the setting value from the numbers displayed on the setting value display unit 45. When the setting value display unit 45 is lit, it is turned off by pressing the setting value change operation unit 46. Therefore, by keeping the setting value display unit 45 turned off during the gaming hall's business hours, it is possible to prevent the player from learning the setting value from the setting value display unit 45, even if the setting value display unit 45 becomes visible when the gaming board 31 is opened due to a ball jam on the gaming machine 10, etc.

On the other hand, when the setting value display unit 45 is off, pressing the setting value change operation unit 46 turns it on, and the numbers corresponding to the game setting values are hidden. Therefore, outside of the gaming hall's business hours, by opening the gaming board 31 to the front frame 11 and pressing the setting value change operation unit 46, the setting value display unit 45 turns on, allowing the game setting values to be confirmed based on the numbers displayed on the setting value display unit 45, and the game setting values can be changed by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46. This ensures the confidentiality of the setting values during business hours, while allowing the setting values to be changed outside of business hours with a simple operation.

In this embodiment, the performance information display device 4A is provided in the main control device 4, but the performance information display device 4A may also be provided separately from the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, or separately from the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in Figure 7, the sub-control unit 332 is equipped with a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and performs pattern variation display and performance display in the pattern display section 341 based on control signals input from the main control unit 331.

[Audio and lamp control device 5]
The voice and lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51 and an input/output I/F 52. The MPU 51 is a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 51 also includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are pre-stored. ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds and lamp flashing patterns used in special game presentations, jackpot game presentations, etc. RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by MPU 51. Note that RAM 512 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

The audio lamp control device 5 inputs commands (control signals) to the display control device 6 based on commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4 by using the MPU 51 to execute processing in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM 511, thereby controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341. The audio lamp control device 5 also controls the playback audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, when executing the special symbol game presentation and jackpot game presentation described below, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the playback audio output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the audio lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Commands such as a special chart change pattern command, a first special chart hold command, a second special chart hold command, and a special chart shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the audio lamp control device 5. The audio lamp control device 5 also outputs display change pattern commands and the like to the display control device 6. Another possible embodiment is one in which the display control device 6 receives commands from the main control device 4 and inputs those commands to the audio lamp control device 5. Another possible embodiment is one in which the sub-control unit 332 includes a single control device that has the functions of both the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The input/output I/F 52 is also connected to the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27. In the audio and lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 controls the audio output from the speaker 26 and the flashing pattern of the illumination unit 27 based on commands input from the main control device 4. The input/output I/F 52 is also connected to the operation switch 20a. This allows the MPU 51 to detect when an operation is performed on the operation button 20, and based on the detection results, it can also control image game effects executed by the pattern display unit 341, audio output effects in which audio is output from the speaker 26, and lamp effects based on the flashing pattern of the illumination unit 27.

The MPU 51 performs predetermined calculations based on commands input from the main control unit 4, such as a normal game pattern command, an electric reel opening command, an electric reel closing command, a special game pattern command, a first special game hold command, a second special game hold command, a special game shift command, a jackpot game start command, an opening start command, an opening end command, an opening/closing execution mode start command, a round game start command, a round game end command, an interval start command, an interval end command, an opening/closing execution mode end command, an ending start command, an ending end command, a jackpot game end command, and a game setting value change command.

Specifically, when a special symbol variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines a special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern command, sends a display variation pattern command corresponding to that special symbol variation pattern to the display control device 6 (see step S3107 in the command determination process of Figure 47), and starts displaying the symbol variation in the symbol display unit 341. At this time, if the special symbol variation pattern command indicates a miss, the symbol display unit 341 displays a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the miss.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display unit 341 based on commands (control signals) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display unit 341 based on display variation pattern commands input from the voice lamp control device 5, thereby executing pattern variation display and performance display.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62, to which the voice and lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected. Note that two-way communication may be possible between the voice and lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and has built-in ROM 611 and RAM 612. The display control device 6 also has built-in other circuits, such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing in accordance with control programs stored in the ROM 611 and elsewhere. Some or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may also be executed by electronic circuits.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 stores multiple types of images, such as decorative symbols and other variable symbols used in the variable symbol display on the symbol display unit 341, preview effect images, reach effect images, jackpot effect images, and miss effect images. The images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 include still images and videos. The ROM 611 also stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the type of image to be used, the display timing, and the variable display time of the variable symbol. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays images on the symbol display unit 341 in accordance with the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing the variable symbol display and effect display.

RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by MPU 61. Note that RAM 612 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Dispensing control device 7]
The dispensing control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71 and an input/output I/F 72. The MPU 71 is a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 also has a built-in ROM 711 and RAM 712.

ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are pre-stored. RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by MPU 71. RAM 712 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the payout control device 7 and outputs control signals from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the input/output I/F 72 is connected to the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100.

As mentioned above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and is equipped with a drive unit 132a, such as a motor, that drives a ball stopping member that switches between paying out and not paying out game balls, and a payout sensor 132b that detects each game ball being paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out any number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection results from the payout sensor 132b. The payout control device 7 also has a state recovery switch 73. The state recovery switch 73 is operated, for example, to clear the ball jam (return to normal operation) when a payout error such as ball jamming occurs in the payout device 132.

The ball dispensing device 100 is installed in an island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball dispensing device 100 can dispense and lend to a player a number of gaming balls equivalent to a preset amount within the range of amounts stored on a recording medium such as a card inserted into the ball dispensing device 100 in response to the operation of a ball dispensing operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. Specifically, when a control signal indicating the dispensing of a predetermined number of gaming balls is input from the ball dispensing device 100 to the payout control device 7, the MPU 71 controls the payout device 132 to dispense the predetermined number of gaming balls. The recording medium is not limited to a card; it may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium with an integrated IC chip. The ball dispensing device 100 may also be capable of dispensing a predetermined number of gaming balls according to the amount of cash inserted.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the operation of the game ball launching mechanism 32. Specifically, while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeder 322 of the game ball launching mechanism 32, thereby supplying game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launch rail 321. The launch control IC 81 then detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launching mechanism 32 in accordance with the amount of operation, thereby launching the game balls on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeder 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset cycle (e.g., 0.6 seconds) as a drive signal. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the play area every 0.6 seconds.

The launch handle 22 is also equipped with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation by the player, and a voltage is input to the launch control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 adjusts the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 based on the voltage value input according to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 so that the greater the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22, the stronger the launch strength of the game balls from the game ball launch mechanism 32.

The launch handle 22 is also provided with a touch sensor 21a for detecting whether the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b that the player operates to stop the launch of the game balls at will. Using the touch sensor 21a and ball stop switch 21b, the launch control IC 81 stops the launch of the game balls by the game ball launch mechanism 32 when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is detected to be operated by the player. This prevents play when the launch handle 22 is not being touched, for example, by fixing the launch handle 22 in a rotating position. The player can also stop the launch of the game balls by operating the ball stop switch 21b with their thumb or other device at any time while rotating the launch handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors, drive units, etc., and a +5V voltage for the logic used in the control device. The power supply control device 9 then supplies the generated +12V or +5V voltage to the main control device 4, audio and lamp control device 5, display control device 6, payout control device 7, launch control device 8, etc.

The power supply control device 9 is also provided with a power switch 90 for turning the power supply to the gaming machine 10 ON/OFF, and a RAM erase switch 91 that is operated to return the gaming machine 10 to its initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

The power supply control device 9 is also equipped with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means that are charged with power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is retained for a predetermined period of time using power discharged from the capacitor. Also, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be operated for a predetermined period of time using power discharged from the secondary battery.

Furthermore, if the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply has been cut off, it inputs a power outage signal to the main control device 4, voice lamp control device 5, dispensing control device 7, etc. For example, if the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset 24V DC voltage based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, it will determine that a power outage has occurred if that DC voltage falls below the preset 22V. Note that when the main control device 4, voice lamp control device 5, dispensing control device 7, etc. receive a power outage signal from the power supply control device 9, they will interrupt the control they are currently performing and execute a specified NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main control device 4]
Next, with reference to Figures 17 to 41, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 executes a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, and an NMI interrupt process that is executed in the event of a power outage. Note that in this embodiment, a description of the startup process, NMI interrupt process, etc. will be omitted, and only the main timer interrupt process and main process will be described. Furthermore, in the startup process, it is confirmed whether the RAM 412 is operating normally, and execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on the condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main control device 4]
17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure for main timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, every 2 msec. The main timer interrupt processing will be described below with reference to FIG. 17.

<Step S1001>
17, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process to determine the detection status of sensors connected to the main control device 4. For example, the MPU 41 determines the detection status of the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, and 317Ra, the out ball sensor 318a, and the like. If the MPU 41 detects a game ball entering any of the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, and 317Ra, it stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information. Furthermore, if the out ball sensor 318a detects an out ball, the MPU 41 adds one to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to update the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 executes updating of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal jackpot random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal jackpot random number initial value counter CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Step S1003>
Next, in step S1003, the MPU 41 executes updates of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the normal win random number counter C4, and the normal win type random number counter C5. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to each of the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the normal win random number counter C4, and the normal win type random number counter C5, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches its maximum value.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
Thereafter, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process in response to a win in the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315 (step S1004), and executes a launch control process (step S1005). Details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 18.

The launch control process enables the launch of game balls on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch has not been operated. The launch control process also disables the launch of game balls when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b has been operated. When the launch of game balls is enabled, the MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game balls.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, when the game ball passes through the through gates 317L and 317R, the MPU 41 executes a through gate process to update the information stored in the normal game ball reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412, and ends the main timer interrupt process. Details of the through gate process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20.

[Start-up winning process]
Here, Fig. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of Fig. 17. The start winning process will be described below with reference to Fig. 18.

<Step S1101>
18, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a win has been made at the first winning slot 314. If the MPU 41 determines that a win has been made at the first winning slot 314 (step S1101: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1102, and if the MPU 41 determines that a win has not been made at the first winning slot 314 (step S1101: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the first special symbol reservation number N stored in the first special symbol reservation number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum reservation number (4 in this embodiment). If the first special symbol reservation number N is the maximum reservation number (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1106. On the other hand, if the first special symbol reservation number N is not the maximum reservation number (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 executes an update process of adding 1 to the first special symbol reservation number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 acquires the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt processing of Figure 17, and the special chart change type counter CS1, which is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 in the main processing of Figure 21 described below, and stores the counter values in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special chart reserve storage area REA of the special chart reserve storage area 412b in RAM 412.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 checks the content of the special symbol hit/miss information for the first special symbol hold acquired in step S1104 before it becomes the target for determining whether or not it is a jackpot in step S2102 or S2103 in the special symbol change start processing in Fig. 28 described later, and executes a first special symbol hold command setting process to set the first special symbol hold command in RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Note that the details of the first special symbol hold command setting process will be described later with reference to Fig. 19.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a win has been made at the second winning slot 315. If the MPU 41 determines that a win has been made at the second winning slot 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and if the MPU 41 determines that a win has not been made at the second winning slot 315 (step S1106: No), the process ends the initial winning process.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether the second special symbol reservation number M stored in the second special symbol reservation number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum reservation number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the second special symbol reservation number M is the maximum reservation number (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process. On the other hand, if the second special symbol reservation number M is not the maximum reservation number (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 executes a process of adding 1 to the second special symbol reservation number M as an update process (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 acquires the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt processing of Figure 17, and the special chart change type counter CS1, which is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 in the main processing of Figure 21 described below, and stores the counter values in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special chart reserve storage area REB of the special chart reserve storage area 412b in RAM 412.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 checks the content of the special symbol hit/miss information for the second special symbol reservation acquired in step S1109 before it becomes the subject of jackpot hit/miss judgment in step S2102 or S2103 in the special symbol variation start processing of FIG. 28 described later, and executes a second special symbol reservation command setting process to set a second special symbol reservation command in RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Here, the second special symbol reservation command setting process is similar to the first special symbol reservation command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 19, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that the second special symbol reservation command setting process can be performed by replacing the "first special symbol reservation command" with the "second special symbol reservation command" and the "first special symbol reservation number N" with the "second special symbol reservation number M" in the first special symbol reservation command setting process of FIG. 19.

[First special drawing hold command setting process]
Here, Fig. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol reserve command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process of Fig. 18. The first special symbol reserve command includes information indicating that the command is the first special symbol reserve command, as well as information such as the result of the jackpot lottery (jackpot type or loss), the special symbol variable display time, and the number of first special symbols reserved N. Hereinafter, the first special symbol reserve command setting process will be described with reference to Fig. 19.

<Step S1201>
As shown in Figure 19, the MPU 41 reads the number N of reserved first special charts from the number memory area NAA of reserved first special charts in the storage area REA for storing first special charts, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each reserved first special chart from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether the game is in the high probability mode. If the game is in the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1203. On the other hand, if the game is not in the high probability mode (step S1202: No), i.e., if the game is in the low probability mode, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether the game is in the high probability mode based on a probability variable game state flag. The probability variable game state flag indicates whether the game is in the probability variable game state, i.e., whether the game is in the high probability mode. In the game state transition process described below, the probability variable game state flag is set to ON in step S2317 of FIG. 34 when the game state transitions from the probability variable game state to the probability variable game state, and is set to OFF in step S2309 of FIG. 33 when the game state transitions from the probability variable game state to the probability variable game state or the normal jackpot game state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads out a high-probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 9B) stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S2410 in the game setting value change processing of FIG. 35 described later, and performs a hit/miss determination based on the high-probability mode hit/miss table to determine whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out in step S1201 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads out a low-probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 9A) stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S2410 in the game setting value change processing of FIG. 35 described later, and performs a hit/miss determination based on the low-probability mode hit/miss table to determine whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out in step S1201 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win.

In steps S1203 and S1204, the hit/miss determination is made based on the high probability mode hit/miss table or low probability mode hit/miss table saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 of the game setting value change process in Figure 35 described below. However, in steps S1203 or S1204, the game setting value saved in step S2408 of the game setting value change process in Figure 35 described below may be read, and the hit/miss determination may be made by selecting the high probability mode hit/miss table or low probability mode hit/miss table corresponding to that game setting value one by one.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win. If the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 does not correspond to a jackpot win (step S1205: No), i.e., if the win is a miss, the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads out the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the special symbol win/loss information is stored in the third reserved area REA3 in step S1104 in the start-up winning process of Fig. 18, the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 included in the special symbol win/loss information stored in the third reserved area REA3 are read out. Note that the reserved area in which the special symbol win/loss information is stored in step S1104 in the start-up winning process of Fig. 18 among the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 can be determined by the value of the reserved number N stored in the first special symbol reserve number storage area NAA.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the special symbol variation type counter CS1, and the first special symbol reservation number N in the first special symbol reservation command. In this way, since the first special symbol reservation command includes the first special symbol reservation number N read out in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first special symbol reservation command can recognize which of the first special symbol reservation areas REA1 to REA4 stores the first special symbol win/loss information that the first special symbol reservation command corresponds to by referring to the reservation number N included in the first special symbol reservation command.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a miss, the special symbol variation type counter CS1, and the first special symbol reservation number N in the first special symbol reservation command (step S1209).

The first special symbol hold command set in step S1207 or S1209 of the first special symbol hold command setting process is stored in RAM 412, and is erased after being sent to the voice lamp control device 5 along with other commands in step S1401 of the main process in FIG. 21, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Furthermore, the content of the first special symbol hold command described here is merely an example, and is not limited to what is described here, as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp content similar to that of the first special symbol hold command. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first special symbol hold command may be included in another command.

[Through gate processing]
20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the through gate processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1006 of the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 17. In the through gate processing, when a gaming ball passes through the through gates 317L and 317R, the MPU 41 updates the information stored in the regular ball reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412. The through gate processing will be described below with reference to FIG. 20.

<Step S1301>
20, in the through gate processing, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301). Whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 317L is determined based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17. If the MPU 41 determines that the gaming ball has passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1303. If the MPU 41 determines that the gaming ball has not passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301: No), the process proceeds to step S1302.

<Step S1302>
When the MPU 41 determines that the gaming ball has not passed through the left-side through gate 317L (step S1301: No), it determines whether the gaming ball has passed through the right-side through gate 317R (step S1302). Whether the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 317R is determined based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of Fig. 17. When the MPU 41 determines that the gaming ball has passed through the right-side through gate 317R (step S1302: Yes), it proceeds to step S1303, and when it determines that the gaming ball has not passed through the right-side through gate 317R (step S1302: No), it terminates the through gate process.

<Step S1303>
When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the left-side through gate 317L (step S1301: Yes), or when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the right-side through gate 317R (step S1302: Yes), it determines whether the normal map change reserve number X stored in the normal map change reserve number memory area SNA set in the normal map reserve storage area 412c of RAM 412 is the maximum reserve number (4 in this embodiment) (step S1303). If the normal map change reserve number X is the maximum reserve number (step S1303: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the through gate processing, and if the normal map change reserve number X is not the maximum reserve number (step S1303: No), the processing proceeds to step S1304.

<Steps S1304 and S1305>
If the number of reserved normal map variations X is not the maximum number (step S1303: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reserved normal map variations X (step S1304), obtains the counter values of the normal hit random number counter C4 and the normal hit type random number counter C5 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17, and the value of the normal map variation type counter CS2 updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main processing in Figure 21 described below, and stores the counter values in the first empty reservation area among the first normal map reservation area SE1 to the fourth normal map reservation area SE4 in the normal map reservation storage area 412c in RAM 412 (step S1305), and terminates the through gate processing.

[Main processing of main control device 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to Figure 21. In the main processing, main control processing for the progress of the normal game, the special game, and the jackpot game is executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1401 to S1411 is executed as a periodic processing, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S1413 and S1414 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing of steps S1401 to S1411 until the next cycle.

<Step S1401>
21, in step S1401, the MPU 41 executes external output processing to transmit output data, such as commands set in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 17 or the previous main processing, to a control device such as the sub-control unit 332 or the peripheral control unit 140. For example, if commands such as a normal game pattern command, an electric accessory open command, an electric accessory close command, a special game pattern command, a first special game hold command, a second special game hold command, a special game shift command, a jackpot game start command, an opening start command, an opening end command, an opening/closing execution mode start command, a round game start command, a round game end command, an interval start command, an interval end command, an opening/closing execution mode end command, an ending start command, an ending end command, a jackpot game end command, or a game setting value change command are set in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 transmits the commands to the audio lamp control device 5. Also, if a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting processing of step S1403 described later in the main processing, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 updates the values of the special chart fluctuation type counter CS1 and the regular chart fluctuation type counter CS2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the special chart fluctuation type counter CS1 and the regular chart fluctuation type counter CS2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether a prize has been won in the general prize opening 313, the first prize opening 314, the second prize opening 315, the variable prize opening 316, etc., based on the winning detection information stored in RAM 412. If a prize has been won, the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with that prize. At this time, in the normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), if a prize has been won in the general prize opening 313 or the first prize opening 314, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the general prize opening or the number of balls paid out from the first prize opening, which is stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412, to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current prize. Furthermore, in the time-saving game mode (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the guaranteed variable game mode (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), if a win occurs in the second winning slot 315, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the second winning slot stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out from the current winning. Furthermore, in the jackpot game mode, if a win occurs in the variable winning slot 316, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the variable winning slot stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out from the current winning.

<Step S1404>
In step S1404, the MPU 41 executes a normal game control process for controlling the progress of the normal game. Details of the normal game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24.

<Step S1405>
In step S1405, the MPU 41 executes a normal winning game control process that controls the progress of the normal winning game, which is executed when the result of the normal winning lottery is a win. Details of the normal winning game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

<Step S1406>
In step S1406, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol game control process that controls the progress of the special symbol game. Details of the special symbol game control process will be described later with reference to Figures 26 to 28. In the special symbol game control process, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, a special symbol variation pattern command required for the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variable display time in the RAM 412 based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of Figure 17, and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of this process.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of a jackpot game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Details of the jackpot game control process will be described later with reference to Figures 29 to 32.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process that controls transitions among various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, probability variable game state, probability variable jackpot game state, and normal jackpot game state). Details of the game state transition process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

<Step S1409>
In step S1409, the MPU 41 executes a game setting value change process. In this game setting value change process, a process is executed to display or hide a setting value or to control a change of the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d in accordance with an operation on the setting value change operation unit 46. Details of the game setting value change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game setting value change process is executed during the main process, but it is also possible to limit its execution to the startup process that is activated when the power is turned on, or the period from the startup process until the game ball starts being shot. This prevents the game setting values from being changed after the player starts playing until the next time the power is turned on, preventing the game setting values from being changed during the game hall's business hours.

<Step S1410>
In step S1410, the MPU 41 executes a process for updating specific performance information included in the game information. In this embodiment, base information and the like are updated as the specific performance information. Details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

<Step S1411>
In step S1411, the MPU 41 executes display control processing for the performance display monitor 43. In this display control processing for the performance display monitor 43, processing is executed to display the base information updated in the specific performance information update processing in step S1410 on the performance display monitor 43. Details of the display control processing for the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41.

<Step S1412>
In step S1412, the MPU 41 determines whether the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. If the MPU 41 determines that the timing for executing the next main process has arrived (step S1412: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1401 and executes the processes from step S1401 onward. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the timing for executing the next main process has not arrived (step S1412: No), the MPU 41 repeatedly executes steps S1413 and S1414 until the timing for executing the next main process arrives, i.e., for the remaining time until the timing for executing the next main process arrives (step S1412: Yes), until the MPU 41 determines that the timing for executing the next main process has arrived.

<Step S1413>
In step S1413, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal win random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal win random number initial value counter CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Step S1414>
In step S1414, the MPU 41 updates the special chart variation type counter CS1 and the regular chart variation type counter CS2. Specifically, the counter values of the special chart variation type counter CS1 and the regular chart variation type counter CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values, the counter values are cleared to 0. After updating the special chart variation type counter CS1 and the regular chart variation type counter CS2, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1412.

[General game control processing]
Here, Figure 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol game control process executed in step S1404 in the main process of Figure 21. In the normal symbol game control process, processes are executed to control the variable display and stop display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36. Hereinafter, the normal symbol game control process will be described with reference to Figure 22.

<Step S1501>
As shown in Figure 22, in the normal game control process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal symbol variable display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol is being displayed (normal game is being executed), is on (step S1501). The normal symbol variable display flag is set to on in step S1711 when the normal symbol variable display (normal game) starts in the normal symbol variable start process of Figure 24 described later, and is set to off in step S1510 in the normal game control process when the normal symbol is displayed stationary (normal game ends).

If the normal map change display flag is on (step S1501: Yes), i.e., if a normal map game is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1507. On the other hand, if the normal map change display flag is off (step S1501: No), i.e., if a normal map game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1502.

<Step S1502>
If the normal map variable display flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, if the normal map game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the electric device open flag, which indicates that the electric device 315b is open (a normal map winning game is being played), is on (step S1502). The electric device open flag is set to on in step S1811 when the electric device 315b is opened in the normal map winning game control process of FIG. 25 described later, and is set to off in step S1818 when the electric device 315b is closed.

If the electric feature open flag is on (step S1502: Yes), i.e., if a normal winning game is being played, the MPU 41 ends the normal game control process. On the other hand, if the electric feature open flag is off (step S1502: No), i.e., if a normal winning game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1503.

<Step S1503>
If the electric accessory opening flag is OFF (step S1502: No), i.e., if a normal jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being played, is ON (step S1503). The jackpot game in progress flag is set ON in step S2206 when a jackpot game starts in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 described later, and is set OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1503: Yes), and a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 terminates the normal game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, normal game play does not start while a jackpot game is being played.

Of course, normal game play may be started while a jackpot game is being played. In this case, the win/loss determination for the normal lottery is made based on the win/loss information (values of the normal lottery win random number counter C4, the normal lottery win type random number counter C5, and the normal lottery win type counter CS2) moved from the normal lottery first reserve area SE1 in the normal lottery reserve storage area 412c to the normal lottery execution area SAE, according to the type of support mode (high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode) before the jackpot game was started, i.e., according to the game state before the transition to the jackpot game state. In other words, if the game state before the jackpot game is executed is a high-frequency support mode, which is a probability variable game state or a time-limited game state, the normal game lottery (normal game win or loss), normal game win type (long-open normal game win or short-open normal game win), and normal game change display time are set based on the normal game win/loss table (see FIG. 12(B)), normal game win type table (see FIG. 12(D)), and normal game change table (not shown) for the high-frequency support mode. On the other hand, if the game state before the jackpot game is executed is a low-frequency support mode, which is a normal game state, the normal game lottery (normal game win or loss), normal game win type (long-open normal game win or short-open normal game win), and normal game change display time are set based on the normal game win/loss table (see FIG. 12(A)), normal game win type table (see FIG. 12(C)), and normal game change table (not shown) for the low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1503: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions to step S1504.

<Step S1504>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal map variable reserve number X stored in the normal map variable reserve number memory area SNA set in the normal map reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412 is 0 (step S1504). If the normal map variable reserve number X is 0 (step S1504: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the normal map game control process, and if the normal map variable reserve number X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the process proceeds to step S1505.

<Step S1505>
If the number of reserved normal map changes X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the MPU 41 executes the normal map data setting process for the normal map correctness information stored in the normal map reserved storage area 412c (step S1505), and proceeds to step S1506. Details of the normal map data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1506>
In step S1506, the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol variation start process to cause the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 to execute a normal symbol variation display based on the information stored in the normal symbol reserve storage area 412c, and ends the normal symbol game control process. Details of the normal symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

<Step S1507>
If the normal map variable display flag is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, if a normal map game is being played, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being played, is on (step S1507). The jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S2206 when a jackpot game starts in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 described later, and is set to off in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1507: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1507: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1507: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal symbol variable display time has elapsed since the start of the normal symbol variable display (step S1508). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to stop the normal symbol variable display in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (to end the normal symbol game).

If the normal symbol variable display time has elapsed (step S1508: Yes), i.e., if it is time to stop the normal symbol displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ending normal symbol play), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variable display time has not elapsed (step S1508: No), i.e., if it is not time to stop the normal symbol displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ending normal symbol play), the MPU 41 ends the normal symbol play control process.

<Steps S1509 to S1511>
If the normal symbol variable display flag is on (step S1501: Yes) and the jackpot game flag is on (step S1507: Yes), that is, if a jackpot game starts during normal symbol game play, or if the normal symbol variable display time for the normal symbol has elapsed (step S1508: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop the variable display of the normal symbol (end normal symbol game), the MPU 41 stops the normal symbol display on the symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol winning lottery corresponding to the normal symbol game (step S1509), and sets the normal symbol variable display flag indicating that the normal symbol variable display is in progress (normal symbol game is being executed) to OFF (step S1510). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol variable stop display flag to ON (step S1511), indicating that the normal symbol has stopped display, that is, that the normal symbol game has ended, and ends the normal symbol game control process.

The normal map fluctuation stop display flag is referenced in step S1801 of the normal map winning game control processing in Figure 25 described below to determine whether it is time to start normal map winning game (open the electric device 315b).

In addition, in this embodiment, the timing for the normal symbol variable display time to elapse and the variable normal symbol to be displayed in a static state (normal symbol game ending) is not limited to when the normal symbol variable display time for the normal symbol has elapsed, but also when a jackpot game is started while normal symbol game is being played, the variable normal symbol will be displayed in a static state (normal symbol game ending). In other words, when a jackpot game is started, normal symbol game is forcibly ended before the normal symbol variable display time for the normal symbol has elapsed. Of course, normal symbol game may be continued until the normal symbol variable display time for the normal symbol has elapsed, even when a jackpot game is started.

[General map data setting process]
Here, Figure 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the general map data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1505 of Figure 22. In the general map data setting process, the contents stored in the general map reserve storage area 412c in the memory area of the main control device 4 of Figure 11 are updated. Below, the general map data setting process will be explained with reference to Figure 23.

<Steps S1601 to S1603>
As shown in FIG. 23, in the normal map data setting process, first, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the normal map change reserve number X stored in the normal map change reserve number storage area SNA (step S1601), and then moves the normal map correct/incorrect information from the normal map first reserve area SE1 to the normal map execution area SAE (step S1602). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the normal map correct/incorrect information stored in the normal map second reserve area SE2 to the normal map fourth reserve area SE4 one by one (step S1603). Specifically, in step S1603, the normal map correct/incorrect information in the normal map second reserve area SE2 is moved to the normal map first reserve area SE1, the normal map correct/incorrect information in the normal map third reserve area SE3 is moved to the normal map second reserve area SE2, and the normal map correct/incorrect information in the normal map fourth reserve area SE4 is moved to the normal map third reserve area SE3.

[General map change start processing]
Here, Figure 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal map variation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1506 of Figure 22. In the normal map variation start processing, the normal pattern variation display in the normal pattern display unit 361 starts, and various commands and flags are set based on the lottery results in the normal map winning lottery. Below, the normal map variation start processing will be explained with reference to Figure 24.

<Step S1701>
As shown in Fig. 24, in the normal game change start process, the MPU 41 determines whether a high frequency support mode flag indicating a high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state) is on (step S1701). The high frequency support mode flag is set to on in step S2313 of Fig. 34 when a jackpot game ends in the game state transition process described later, and is set to off in step S2307 of Fig. 33 when the game state transitions from a probability variable game state or time-limited game state to a probability variable jackpot game state or a normal jackpot game state, or in step S2326 of Fig. 34 when the game state transitions from a time-limited game state to a normal game state.

If the high-frequency support mode flag is on (step S1701: Yes), i.e., the game is in a high-frequency support mode, such as a guaranteed variable play state or a time-limited play state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1702; if the high-frequency support mode flag is off (step S1701: No), i.e., the game is in a low-frequency support mode, such as a normal play state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1703.

<Steps S1702 and S1703>
If the high-frequency support mode is in a probability variable game state or a time-saving game state (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a normal win/loss judgment based on the high-frequency support mode (step S1702). Specifically, the MPU 41 performs a normal win/loss judgment based on the high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see FIG. 12 (B)) and the high-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table (see FIG. 12 (D)). The normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c is stored in the normal win/loss information area SAE. The MPU 41 determines whether the values of the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5 are values corresponding to the normal win.

On the other hand, if the game is in normal game mode, which is low-frequency support mode (step S1701: No), a normal win determination is made based on the low-frequency support mode (step S1703). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal win random number counter C4 and normal win type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c, are values corresponding to a normal win, based on the low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see FIG. 12(A)) and the low-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table (see FIG. 12(C)).

<Steps S1704 and S1705>
When the MPU 41 determines whether or not the winning ticket is a regular winning ticket (step S1702 or S1703), it determines whether or not the result of the winning/losing determination is a long-open regular winning ticket in which the second winning slot 315 is long-open (step S1704). If the result of the winning/losing determination is a long-open regular winning ticket (step S1704: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the long-open regular winning ticket flag, which indicates that the result of the winning/losing determination is a long-open regular winning ticket, to on (step S1705), and proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the winning/losing determination is not a long-open regular winning ticket (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1706.

<Steps S1706 and S1707>
If the result of the hit/miss judgment is not a long-opening normal winning (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the hit/miss judgment is a short-opening normal winning (step S1706) in which the second winning port 315 is short-opened. If the result of the hit/miss judgment is a short-opening normal winning (step S1706: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the short-opening normal winning flag, which indicates that the result of the hit/miss judgment is a short-opening normal winning (step S1707), to on, and proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss judgment is not a short-opening normal winning (step S1706: No), that is, if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708.

<Steps S1708 and S1709>
If the long-open normal winning flag is set to on (step S1705), if the short-open normal winning flag is set to on (step S1707), or if the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss (step S1706: No), the MPU 41 executes a normal winning pattern setting process to set a normal winning pattern, which is the normal winning pattern display time in the normal winning pattern display section 361 of the main display unit 36 during normal winning game play, by referring to a normal winning pattern display table (not shown). As described above, the normal winning pattern display table (not shown) includes a high-frequency support mode normal winning pattern table that is referenced when in high-frequency support mode, and a low-frequency support mode normal winning pattern display table that is referenced when in low-frequency support mode. Therefore, in the normal winning pattern setting process, the normal winning pattern is set based on the normal winning pattern display table corresponding to the support mode type. In addition, the high frequency support mode normal symbol variation display table is set so that the average time for displaying normal symbol variations is shorter than that of the low frequency support mode normal symbol variation display table, so in the high frequency support mode, the time for normal symbol play is shorter than in the low frequency support mode.

Then, in addition to the normal map fluctuation pattern set in step S1708, the MPU 41 sets a normal map fluctuation pattern command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the result of the win/loss judgment in step S1702 or S1703 (the result of the normal map winning lottery) and the type of support mode (high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode) (step S1709), and proceeds to step S1710.

The normal symbol variation pattern command is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. In response, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341, etc., to execute an effect corresponding to normal symbol play, such as an effect indicating that normal symbol play is being played or an effect indicating the result of a normal symbol winning lottery, based on the normal symbol variation pattern command.

Furthermore, the normal map fluctuation pattern command is sufficient as long as it is a command that at least notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the normal map fluctuation pattern, and the result of the normal map winning lottery or the type of support mode does not necessarily have to be notified to the voice lamp control device 5 as a normal map fluctuation pattern command. For example, the result of the normal map winning lottery may be notified to the voice lamp control device 5 by setting a normal map winning lottery result command when a win/loss determination is made in step S1702 or S1703, and the type of support mode may be notified to the voice lamp control device 5 by setting a support mode type command that can identify the type of support mode after transition when transitioning to high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode.

<Steps S1710 and S1711>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (step S1710). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol variable display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol is being variably displayed, i.e., that a normal symbol game is being executed, to ON (step S1711), and ends the normal symbol variable start process.

The normal symbol variation display flag is referenced in step S1501 of the normal symbol game control process in Figure 22 to determine whether normal symbol gameplay is in progress (normal symbol variation display).

[Normal winning game control processing]
Here, Figure 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal winning game control process executed in step S1405 in the main process of Figure 21. In the normal winning game control process, when the result of the normal winning lottery is a win, a process is executed to switch between an allowable state that allows the game ball to enter the second winning opening 315 and a restricted state that restricts it by controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory 315b. Below, the normal winning game control process will be explained with reference to Figure 25.

<Step S1801>
As shown in Figure 25, in the normal symbol winning game control process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol has stopped and displayed (the normal symbol game has ended), is on (step S1801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to start the normal symbol winning game. The normal symbol variation stop display flag is set to on in step S1511 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol game control process of Figure 22.

If the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start a normal map winning game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1802. On the other hand, if the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), i.e., if it is not time to start a normal map winning game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1813.

<Step S1802>
If the normal game variation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, if it is time to start a normal game, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being executed, is on (step S1802). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 described later, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S2206 when a jackpot game starts, and is set to off in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1802: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 terminates the normal jackpot game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, if the process is forced to terminate due to the start of a jackpot game, the normal jackpot game will not start even if the result of the normal jackpot lottery for that normal game is a normal jackpot. In other words, in this embodiment, a normal jackpot game will not start while a jackpot game is being played. Of course, a new normal jackpot game may be started while a jackpot game is being played.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1802: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions to step S1803.

<Step S1803>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1802: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the long-opening normal winning flag is set to on (step S1803). The long-opening normal winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the normal winning lottery is a long-opening normal winning. If the result of the normal winning lottery is a long-opening normal winning, it is set to on in step S1705 of the normal winning lottery start processing of FIG. 24. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a long-opening normal winning. If the long-opening normal winning flag is set to on (step S1803: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1804. If the long-opening normal winning flag is set to off (step S1803: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1806.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
If the long-open normal winning flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), i.e., if the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a long-open normal winning, the MPU 41 sets the opening time counter to a value corresponding to 6 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric device 315b in the long-open normal winning game (the time during which a game ball can enter the second winning slot 315) (step S1804). The opening time counter is referenced in step S1815 of the normal winning game control process to determine the return timing of the electric device 315b. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long-open normal winning flag to OFF (step S1805) and proceeds to step S1809.

<Step S1806>
If the long-opening regular winning flag is set to OFF (step S1803: No), that is, if the result of the regular winning lottery for the completed regular game is not a long-opening regular winning, the MPU 41 determines whether the short-opening regular winning flag is set to ON (step S1806). The short-opening regular winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the regular winning lottery is a short-opening regular winning, and if the result of the regular winning lottery is a short-opening regular winning, it is set to ON in step S1707 of the regular game change start processing in FIG. 24. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the regular winning lottery for the completed regular game is a short-opening regular winning. If the short-open regular winning flag is set to on (step S1806: Yes), the MPU 41 transfers processing to step S1807, and if the short-open regular winning flag is set to off (step S1806: No), that is, if the result of the regular winning lottery for the completed regular game is a loss, the MPU 41 transfers processing to step S1812.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
If the short-open normal winning flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), that is, if the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a short-open normal winning, the MPU 41 sets the value of the opening time counter to a value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric device 315b in the short-open normal winning game (the time during which the game ball can enter the second winning slot 315) (step S1807).Then, the MPU 41 sets the short-open normal winning flag to OFF (step S1808), and proceeds to step S1809.

<Steps S1809 to S1811>
If the result of the regular prize lottery is a win and the flag indicating the type of regular prize (long-open regular prize flag or short-open regular prize flag) is set to OFF (step S1805 or S1808), the MPU 41 activates the electric device 315b (step S1809). This opens the second prize opening 315, allowing the second prize opening 315 to enter an allowable state in which a game ball can enter. The MPU 41 then sets an electric device open command to notify the sound and lamp control device 5 that the electric device 315b has been opened (step S1810), sets an electric device open flag indicating that the electric device 315b has been opened to ON (step S1811), and proceeds to step S1812.

The electric reel release command is sent to the audio and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. Based on this, the audio and lamp control device 5 can initiate a performance that indicates to the symbol display unit 341, for example, that the electric reel 315b has been released, based on the electric reel release command.

<Step S1812>
When the result of the regular symbol winning lottery is a winning one and a process such as opening the electric device 315b is executed (steps S1803 to S1811), or when the long opening regular symbol winning flag and the short opening regular symbol winning flag are both set to off (when the result of the regular symbol winning lottery is a losing one) (both steps S1803 and S1806 are No), the MPU 41 sets to off the regular symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the regular symbol has stopped being displayed (the regular symbol game has ended) (step S1812), and terminates the regular symbol winning game control process.

<Step S1813>
If the normal map variable stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the electric device open flag, which is set to on when the electric device 315b is opened in step S1811 of the normal map winning game control processing, is set to on (step S1813). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a normal map winning game is being played. If the electric device open flag is set to on (step S1813: Yes), that is, if a normal map winning game is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1814. On the other hand, if the electric device open flag is set to off (step S1813: No), that is, if a normal map winning game is not being played, the MPU 41 terminates the normal map winning game control processing.

<Steps S1814 and S1815>
If the electric role open flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, if a normal winning game is being played, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the open time counter set in step S1804 or S1807 of the normal winning game control process (step S1814), and determines whether the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the electric role 315b. If the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric role 315b, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1816. On the other hand, if the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), that is, if it is not time to return the electric role 315b, the MPU 41 terminates the normal winning game control process.

<Steps S1816 to S1818>
If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric device 315b, the MPU 41 returns the electric device 315b (step S1816). This closes the second winning opening 315, restricting the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315. The MPU 41 then sets an electric device closing command that notifies the sound and lamp control device 5 that the electric device 315b has been closed (step S1817), and sets the electric device open flag, which indicates that the electric device 315b is open, to OFF (step S1818), thereby terminating the normal winning game control process.

The electric reel close command is sent to the audio and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio and lamp control device 5 can end the performance indicating that the electric reel, executed in the pattern display unit 341, for example, has been opened, based on the electric reel close command.

[Special game control processing]
Here, Fig. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of Fig. 21. In the special symbol game control process, the memory contents of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated, and the progress of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, for example, the variable display and stationary display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363, are controlled. Hereinafter, the special symbol game control process will be described with reference to Fig. 26.

<Step S1901>
26, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being executed, is on. In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 described later, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S2206 when a jackpot game starts, and is set to off in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1901: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, if a jackpot game is being played, the special symbol game will not start. Of course, the special symbol game may also be started while a jackpot game is being played.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1901: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1901: No), i.e., if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether a special symbol change display flag, which indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being changed (the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is being executed), is on (step S1902). The special symbol change display flag is set on in step S2107 when the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the special symbol change start processing of FIG. 28 described later, and is set off in step S1909 when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed stationary in the special symbol game control processing.

If the special symbol variable display flag is on (step S1902: Yes), i.e., if the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1906. On the other hand, if the special symbol variable display flag is off (step S1902: No), i.e., if the jackpot game is not being played but the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
If the special pattern change display flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, if the special pattern is not being displayed in a changing manner when a jackpot game is not being played (special pattern game is being played), the MPU 41 determines whether both the first special pattern reserved number N stored in the first special pattern reserved number memory area NAA of the special pattern reserved storage area 412b and the second special pattern reserved number M stored in the second special pattern reserved number memory area NAB are 0 (step S1903).

If both the first special symbol reserved number N and the second special symbol reserved number M are 0 (step S1903: Yes), i.e., if neither the right to play the first special symbol game nor the right to play the second special symbol game is reserved, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process. On the other hand, if either the first special symbol reserved number N or the second special symbol reserved number M is not 0 (step S1903: No), i.e., if at least one of the right to play the first special symbol game and the right to play the second special symbol game is reserved, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If either the first special symbol reserved number N or the second special symbol reserved number M is not 0 (step S1903: No), that is, if at least one of the reserved right to play the first special symbol game and the reserved right to play the second special symbol game is present, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol data setting process for the data of the special symbol win/loss information (special symbol data) stored in the special symbol reserved storage area 412b (step S1904), and proceeds to step S1905. Details of the special symbol data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

<Step S1905>
In step S1905, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol variation start process to start the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 (to execute the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game), and then ends the special symbol game control process. Details of the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

<Step S1906>
If the special symbol variation display flag is on (step S1902: Yes), that is, if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed (a special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol variation display time for the first special symbol or the second special symbol set in the special symbol variation pattern setting process of step S2104 in the special symbol variation start process of Fig. 28 described later has elapsed since the start of the display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game (step S1906). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to stop the display of the special symbol being displayed and end the special symbol game.

If the special symbol variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first or second special symbol (step S1906: Yes), i.e., if it is time to stop the display of the currently variable special symbol and end the special symbol game, the processing proceeds to step S1907. On the other hand, if the variable display time has not elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first or second special symbol (step S1906: No), i.e., if it is not time to stop the display of the currently variable special symbol and end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 ends the special symbol game control processing.

<Steps S1907 to S1909>
When the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first or second special symbol (step S1906: Yes), i.e., when it is time to stop the variable display of the special symbol and end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 stops the special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 in a manner corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game (step S1907).The MPU 41 then sets a special symbol variable stop flag indicating that the first or second special symbol has been stopped and displayed (step S1908) and sets a special symbol variable display in progress flag indicating that the first or second special symbol is being displayed (the special symbol game is being executed) to off (step S1909), thereby ending the special symbol game control process.

[Special drawing data setting process]
27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special image data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1904 of Fig. 26. In the special image data setting process, the memory contents of the special image reserved storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the special image data setting process will be described with reference to Fig. 27.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 27 , in step S2001, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of second special symbols reserved M for the second special symbol game is 0. If the number of second special symbols reserved M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), i.e., there are no second special symbols reserved for the second special symbol game but there are first special symbols reserved for the first special symbol game (see step S1903 in the special symbol game control processing of FIG. 26 ), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2002. On the other hand, if the number of second special symbols reserved M is not 0 (step S2001: No), i.e., there are second special symbols reserved for the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2005. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of second special symbols reserved M for the second special symbol game is 0, thereby prioritizing the start of the second special symbol game over the first special symbol game.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol game is started before the first special symbol game, but the first special symbol game may be started before the second special symbol game. Alternatively, the special symbol games may be started in the order in which the game balls enter the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315 (in the order in which they are reserved), and either the first or second special symbol game may be executed. Furthermore, without prioritizing the start of the first and second special symbol games, the first and second special symbol games may be executed independently of each other, and the first and second special symbol games may be executed simultaneously (so-called simultaneous special symbol fluctuations).

<Steps S2002 to S2004>
If the second special symbol reservation number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol reservation number N stored in the first special symbol reservation number memory area NAA of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA (step S2002), and moves the special symbol hit/miss information from the first reservation area REA1 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA to the special symbol execution area AE (step S2003). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol hit/miss information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA one by one (step S2004). Specifically, in step S2004, the special symbol winning/losing information of the second reserved area REA2 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA is moved to the first reserved area REA1, the special symbol winning/losing information of the third reserved area REA3 is moved to the second reserved area REA2, and the special symbol winning/losing information of the fourth reserved area REA4 is moved to the third reserved area REA3. When the processing of step S2004 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2008.

<Steps S2005 to S2007>
If the second special symbol reservation number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the second special symbol reservation number M stored in the second special symbol reservation number memory area NAB of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB (step S2005), and moves the special symbol win/loss information from the first reservation area REB1 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB to the special symbol execution area AE (step S2006). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol win/loss information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB one by one (step S2007). Specifically, in step S2007, the special drawing win/loss information in the second reserved area REB2 is moved to the first reserved area REB1, the special drawing win/loss information in the third reserved area REB3 is moved to the second reserved area REB2, and the special drawing win/loss information in the fourth reserved area REB4 is moved to the third reserved area REB3. When the processing of step S2007 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2008.

<Step S2008>
In step S2008, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol shift command in the RAM 412, which indicates that the special symbol win/loss information of the first special symbol reserve area REA1 to the fourth special symbol reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA, or the first special symbol reserve area REB1 to the fourth special symbol reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB, and ends the special symbol data setting process. This special symbol shift command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can change the number of reserved symbols displayed in the symbol display unit 341 corresponding to the first special symbol reserve or the second special symbol reserve, based on the special symbol shift command.

[Special chart change start processing]
Here, Fig. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol variation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1905 of Fig. 26. In the special symbol variation start processing, the first special game or the second special symbol game (special symbol game) is started by starting the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363, and various processes associated with the start of the special symbol game are executed. The special symbol variation start processing will be described below with reference to Fig. 28.

<Step S2101>
As shown in Fig. 28, in step S2101, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state is a high probability mode, i.e., a high probability mode. Whether the gaming state is a high probability mode or not is determined by whether a high probability mode gaming state flag, which indicates that the gaming state is a high probability mode, is set to on. The high probability mode gaming state flag is set to on when the gaming state is transitioned from a high probability mode jackpot gaming state to a high probability mode gaming state in step S2317 of Fig. 34 in the gaming state transition process described below, and is set to off when the gaming state is transitioned from a high probability mode gaming state to a high probability mode jackpot gaming state or a normal jackpot gaming state in step S2309 of Fig. 33.

If the game state is a high-probability mode, or a variable-rate game state (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S2102. If the game state is not a high-probability mode, or a variable-rate game state (step S2101: No), i.e., if the game state is a low-probability mode, or a time-limited game state or a normal game state, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S2103.

<Steps S2102 and S2103>
If the game state is a high probability mode, which is a special game state (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 reads out the high probability mode hit/miss table (see Figure 9 (B)) saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 of the game setting value change processing of Figure 35 described below, and performs a hit/miss judgment based on the high probability mode hit/miss table (step S2102).

On the other hand, if the game state is not a high-probability mode, or a guaranteed bonus game state (step S2101: No), that is, if the game state is a low-probability mode, or a time-limited game state, or a normal game state, the MPU 41 reads out the low-probability mode hit/miss table (see Figure 9 (A)) saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 of the game setting value change processing in Figure 35 described below, and performs a hit/miss determination based on that low-probability mode hit/miss table (step S2103).

In steps S2102 and S2103, the hit/miss determination is made based on the high probability mode hit/miss table or low probability mode hit/miss table saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 of the game setting value change process in Figure 35 described below. However, in steps S2102 and S2103, the game setting value saved in step S2408 of the game setting value change process in Figure 35 described below may be read, and the hit/miss determination may be made by selecting the high probability mode hit/miss table or low probability mode hit/miss table corresponding to that game setting value one by one.

<Step S2104>
When a win/loss determination is made in step S2102 or S2103, the MPU 41 sets the variable display time of the first special pattern or the second special pattern in the first special pattern display section 362 or the second special pattern display section 363 of the main display section 36 during that special pattern game as the special pattern variable pattern (step S2104).

The variation display time (special symbol variation pattern) of the first or second special symbol is set based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 10(A)) if the result of the hit/miss determination in step S2102 or S2103 is a normal jackpot; it is set based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 10(B)) if the result of the hit/miss determination in step S2102 or S2103 is a special jackpot; and it is set based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the special jackpot variation table (see FIG. 10(C)) if the result of the hit/miss determination in step S2102 or S2103 is a miss.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a special symbol variation pattern command including the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, which is the result of the win/loss determination in step S2102 or S2103, and the special symbol variation pattern set in step S2104, and proceeds to step S2106. The special symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main processing (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to execute a special symbol game presentation on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the special symbol variation pattern command.

As mentioned above, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "normal jackpot," the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a special chart variation pattern command one of "A01" to "A03," in which "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is added to the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03," as a special chart variation pattern command. Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R variable probability jackpot," the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a special chart variation pattern command one of "B01" to "B03," in which "B" indicating that it is a 5R variable probability jackpot is added to the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03." Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "16R variable probability jackpot," the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a special chart variation pattern command one of "C01" to "C03," in which "C" indicating that it is a 16R variable probability jackpot is added to the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03." Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "miss," the MPU 41 sets one of the special chart variation patterns "01" to "08" with a "D" added to indicate a miss, "D01" to "D08," as a special chart variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "miss," the MPU 41 includes information indicating the type of miss (reach for a miss before or after, reach for a miss other than a miss before or after, or complete miss) in the special chart variation pattern command.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 41 starts the special pattern game by starting the changing display of the special pattern in the first special pattern display section 362 or the second special pattern display section 363 of the main display section 36, and then proceeds to step S2107.

When the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the special symbol, it adds 1 to the "cumulative number of jackpot draws" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss determination based on the low probability mode win/loss table in step S2103 is a miss, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "number of consecutive losses" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and if the result is a jackpot, it clears the "number of consecutive losses" to 0.

<Step S2107>
In step S2107, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol variable display flag, which indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (a special symbol game is being executed), to ON, and proceeds to step S2108. The special symbol variable display flag is referenced in step S1902 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 26 to determine whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (a special symbol game is being executed) in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol change stop flag, which indicates that the change of the special symbol has stopped (the special symbol game has ended), to OFF, and proceeds to step S2109. The special symbol change stop flag is set to ON when the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 is stopped and displayed in step S1908 of the special symbol game control processing in Fig. 26, and is referenced to determine whether or not it is the timing to start a jackpot game in step S2202 of the jackpot game control processing in Fig. 29 described later.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 41 determines whether a time-saving game state flag indicating a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) is on. The time-saving game state flag is set to on when a normal jackpot game ends in step S2321 of Fig. 34 in the game state transition process described below, and is set to off when the game state transitions from the time-saving game state to a jackpot game state or a normal game state in step S2310 of Fig. 33 or step S2325 of Fig. 34.

If the time-saving game state flag is on (step S2109: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2110. On the other hand, if the time-saving game state flag is off (step S2109: Yes), i.e., if the game is not in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 terminates the special chart variation start process.

<Step S2110>
If the time-saving game state flag is on (step S2109: Yes), that is, if the game is in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special game plays that can be executed in the time-saving game state (step S2110), and ends the special game change start process. The time-saving count counter is set when the game state is transitioned from the jackpot game state to the time-saving game state in step S2320 of the game state transition process in Figure 34, which will be described later.

In this embodiment, the time-saving counter is set when the game state transitions from a jackpot game state to a time-saving game state, but the time-saving counter may also be set when the game state transitions from a jackpot game state to a probability variable game state. In other words, by setting the maximum number of special game plays executed in the probability variable game state to a finite number, the gaming machine 10 can be configured as a so-called ST machine.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can also be configured to transition from the jackpot game state to the normal game state without transitioning to the time-saving game state when the normal jackpot game ends, which is executed based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a normal jackpot. In this case, the time-saving count counter will not be set after the normal jackpot game ends.

[Jackpot Game Control Processing]
29 to 32 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control process executed in step S1407 of the main process in Fig. 21. In the jackpot game control process, processes are executed to control the progress of the jackpot game, such as controlling the opening and closing of the opening and closing door 319 provided in the variable winning opening 316. The jackpot game control process will be described below with reference to Figs. 29 to 32.

<Step S2201>
29, in step S2201, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being executed, is on. The jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S2206 of the jackpot game control processing when a jackpot game is started, and is set to off in step S2252 of the jackpot game control processing when the jackpot game is ended.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S2201: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2211. On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S2201: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2202.

<Step S2202>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S2201: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether a special symbol variation stop flag, which indicates that a special symbol has been statically displayed, is on. The special symbol variation stop flag is set to on in step S1908 of the special symbol game control processing in Fig. 26 when a special symbol has been statically displayed, and is set to off in step S2108 of the special symbol variation start processing in Fig. 28 when the variable display of the special symbol has begun. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether the timing is right to start a jackpot game by determining whether a special symbol game that was started when a jackpot game was not being executed has ended.

If the special symbol variation stop flag is on (step S2202: Yes), i.e., if the jackpot game can be started because the special symbol is statically displayed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2203. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation stop flag is off (step S2202: No), i.e., if the jackpot game cannot be started because the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

In this embodiment, the jackpot game does not start (execute) when the special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner (while the special symbol game is being executed), but it may be possible to start (execute) the jackpot game while the special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner (while the special symbol game is being executed). For example, the jackpot game may be started (executed) while the first special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner, and conversely, the jackpot game may be started (executed) while the second special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner. Specifically, by allowing the first and second special symbols to change simultaneously as described above, the second special symbol game may be executed while the jackpot game for the first special symbol game is being executed, and the first special symbol game may be executed while the jackpot game for the second special symbol game is being executed. Furthermore, the jackpot game for the first special symbol game and the jackpot game for the second special symbol game may be executed simultaneously, or if the start condition for one of the jackpot games for the first special symbol game and the jackpot game for the second special symbol game is met while the other jackpot game is being executed, the other jackpot game may start after the completion of one jackpot game.

<Step S2203>
If the special symbol variation stop flag is on (step S2202: Yes), that is, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot. Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot is determined based on the special symbol win/loss information for the jackpot lottery stored in the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b set in the RAM 41, for example.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2204. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is not a jackpot (step S2203: No), i.e., if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Step S2204>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command that notifies the sound and lamp control device 5 of the start of the jackpot game and the type of jackpot game (probability jackpot game or normal jackpot game) (step S2204), and proceeds to step S2205. The jackpot game start command is transmitted to the sound and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound and lamp control device 5 to execute a jackpot game presentation according to the type of jackpot game based on the jackpot game start command.

<Step S2205>
In step S2205, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is to be started, to ON, and proceeds to step S2206. The jackpot game start flag is referenced when determining whether to transition the game state to a variable jackpot game state or a normal jackpot game state in step S2301 of the game state transition process in FIG. 33, which will be described later.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being executed, to ON, and proceeds to step S2207. The jackpot game in progress flag is referenced in step S2201 of the jackpot game control process, as well as in step S1503 of the regular game control process in FIG. 22 and step S1901 of the special game control process in FIG. 26, in order to determine whether a jackpot game is being executed.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 41 sets a round number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds of play in the open/close execution mode, and proceeds to step S2208. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round number counter to "5" if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, and sets the round number counter to "16" if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot.

<Step S2208>
In step S2208, the MPU 41 sets an opening start command to notify the voice and lamp control device 5 that an opening of a jackpot game has started, and proceeds to step S2209. The opening start command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to start an opening effect in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the opening start command.

<Step S2209>
In step S2209, the MPU 41 sets an opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening, and proceeds to step S2210. The opening time counter is referenced in step S2213 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 30 to determine whether it is time to end the opening.

<Step S2210>
In step S2210, the MPU 41 sets an opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed to ON, and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening flag is referenced in step S2211 in the jackpot game control process to determine whether the opening is being executed.

<Step S2211>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S2201: Yes), i.e., if the jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the opening in progress flag, which indicates that the opening is being played, is on (step S2211).

If the opening flag is on (step S2211: Yes), i.e., if opening is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2212 in FIG. 30. On the other hand, if the opening flag is off (step S2211: No), i.e., if opening is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2222.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
If the opening flag is on (step S2211: Yes), that is, if the opening is being performed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening (step S2212), and determines whether the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2213), as shown in Fig. 30. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to end the opening.

If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2213: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the opening, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2214. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2213: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the opening, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2214 and S2215>
If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2213: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the opening, the MPU 41 sets an opening end command to notify the voice and lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game has ended (step S2214). The opening end command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to end the opening effect executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the opening end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the opening in progress flag to OFF, indicating that opening is in progress (step S2215), and proceeds to step S2216.

<Step S2216>
In step S2216, the MPU 41 sets an opening and closing execution mode start command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that an opening and closing execution mode in which multiple rounds (5 or 16 rounds) of play will be started, and proceeds to step S2217. The opening and closing execution mode start command is sent to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to start the opening and closing execution mode presentation executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the opening and closing execution mode start command.

<Step S2217>
In step S2217, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command to notify the voice and lamp control device 5 that a round game is about to start, and proceeds to step S2218. The round game start command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to start a round game presentation corresponding to each round game, including a round number display, on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the round game start command.

In this embodiment, a round game effect is executed individually for each round game, but the round game effect may be executed as a series of effects in the open/close execution mode, and the number of rounds in each round game may be displayed. In this case, interval effects may not be executed between round games, or an interval effect may be executed to display the number of rounds in the next round game to be executed.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
In step S2218, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the round number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds to be played in the open/close execution mode, and then opens the variable winning opening 316 by operating the open/close door 319 (step S2219), and proceeds to step S2220.

<Steps S2220 and S2221>
In step S2220, the MPU 41 sets the round game in progress flag, which indicates that a round game is being played, to ON, and further sets a round game time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the round game (step S2221), and ends the jackpot game control process. The round game time counter is referenced in step S2224 of the jackpot game control process in Figure 31 to determine whether it is time to end the round game (return the opening/closing door 319 and close the variable winning opening 316) due to the elapse of a specified time.

<Step S2222>
29 , if the opening flag is OFF (step S2211: No), i.e., if the opening is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the round game flag, which indicates that a round game is being executed, is set ON (step S2222).

If the round play in progress flag is on (step S2222: Yes), i.e., if a round play is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2223 in FIG. 31. On the other hand, if the round play in progress flag is off (step S2222: No), i.e., if a round play is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2226.

<Steps S2223 and S2224>
If the round game in progress flag is on (step S2222: Yes), that is, if a round game is being played, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the round game time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the round game, as shown in Fig. 31. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2224). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to end the round game (close the variable winning opening by returning the opening/closing door 319) due to the elapse of a specified time.

If the value of the round play time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2224: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the round play due to the passage of the specified time (the variable winning opening is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2228. On the other hand, if the value of the round play time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2224: No), that is, if it is not time to end the round play due to the passage of the specified time (the variable winning opening is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2225.

<Step S2225>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2224: No), that is, if it is not time to end the round game due to the passage of the specified time (the variable winning opening is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning opening 316 (step S2225). Whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning opening 316 is determined based on the winning detection information stored in RAM 412 when a game ball has entered the ball entry sensor 316a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17.

If a gaming ball has entered the variable winning opening 316 (step S2225: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2226; if a gaming ball has not entered the variable winning opening 316 (step S2225: No), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2226 and S2227>
If a game ball has entered the variable winning opening 316 (step S2225: Yes), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the ball number counter, which indicates the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning opening 316 in that round of play (step S2226).The MPU 41 then determines whether the value of the ball number counter after the increment has reached 10 (step S2227), i.e., whether it is time to end the round of play due to the upper limit number of game balls having entered the variable winning opening 316 (the variable winning opening is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319).

If the value of the ball entry counter after addition reaches 10 (step S2227: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the round of play due to the upper limit number of game balls entering the variable winning opening 316 (the variable winning opening is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2228. On the other hand, if the value of the ball entry counter after addition does not reach 10 (step S2227: No), that is, if it is not time to end the round of play due to the upper limit number of game balls entering the variable winning opening 316 (the variable winning opening is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Step S2228>
If the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2224: Yes), or if the value of the ball number counter reaches 10 (step S2227: Yes), the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening by returning the opening/closing door 319 (step S2228), and proceeds to step S2229. That is, when it is time to end the round game because a specified time has elapsed or the upper limit number of game balls has entered the variable winning opening 316, the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening 316 and ends the round game.

<Steps S2229 to S2231>
In step S2229, the MPU 41 sets a round game end command to notify the voice and lamp control device 5 that the round game is ending. The round game end command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice and lamp control device 5 can end the round game presentation executed in the symbol display unit 341 and the like based on the round game end command.

Then, the MPU 41 clears the ball entry counter, which indicates the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning opening 316 during that round of play (step S2230), sets the round play in progress flag, which indicates that a round of play is in progress, to OFF (step S2231), and proceeds to step S2232.

<Step S2232>
In step S2232, the MPU 41 determines whether the round number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds of play in the opening and closing execution mode is 0 (step S2232), i.e., whether it is time to end the opening and closing execution mode (whether there are any unexecuted rounds of play).

If the round number counter is 0 (step S2232: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the open/close execution mode, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2241. On the other hand, if the round number counter is not 0 (step S2232: No), i.e., if there is an unexecuted round of play, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2233.

<Step S2233>
If the round number counter is not 0 (step S2232: No), that is, if there is an unexecuted round of play, the MPU 41 sets an interval start command to notify the voice and lamp control device 5 of the start of an interval between rounds of play (step S2233), and proceeds to step S2234. The interval start command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This enables the voice and lamp control device 5 to start interval presentation in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the interval start command.

In this embodiment, interval effects are executed during the intervals between rounds of play, but the interval effects may be omitted and the round effect for the previously executed round of play may be continued during the interval, or the round effect for the next round of play may be executed.

<Steps S2234 and S2235>
In step S2234, the MPU 41 sets an interval flag to ON, which indicates that an interval between rounds of play is being executed. Then, the MPU 41 sets an interval time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the interval (step S2235), and ends the jackpot game control process. The interval time counter is referenced in step S2238 of FIG. 32 in the jackpot game control process to determine whether it is time to end the interval (start a round of play).

<Step S2236>
29, if the round game in progress flag is OFF (step S2222: No), i.e., if a round game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the interval in progress flag, which indicates that an interval between round games is being played, is ON (step S2236). The interval in progress flag is set ON in step S2234 of Fig. 31 in the jackpot game control processing when an interval starts, and is set OFF in step S2240 of Fig. 32 in the jackpot game control processing when the interval ends.

If the interval flag is on (step S2236: Yes), i.e., if an interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2237 in FIG. 32. On the other hand, if the interval flag is off (step S2236: No), i.e., if an interval between rounds is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2245.

<Steps S2237 and S2238>
If the interval flag is on (step S2236: Yes), i.e., if an interval between rounds is being played, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the interval time counter indicating the remaining time of the interval (step S2237), as shown in Fig. 32. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2238), i.e., whether it is time to end the interval (start a round of play).

If the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2238: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the interval and start a round of play, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2239. On the other hand, if the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2238: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the interval (start a round of play), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2239 and S2240>
If the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2238: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the interval and start a round of play, the MPU 41 sets an interval end command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that the interval will end. The interval end command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to end the interval presentation executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the interval end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the interval flag, indicating that an interval between rounds of play, to OFF (step S2240), and proceeds to step S2217 described above. By proceeding to step S2217 in FIG. 30 described above, steps S2217 to S2221 related to the start of rounds of play are executed, and the jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Step S2241>
31 , if the round number counter is 0 (step S2232: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 41 sets an opening and closing execution mode end command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that the opening and closing execution mode for the jackpot game is to be ended (step S2241), and proceeds to step S2242. The opening and closing execution mode end command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21 ) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to end the round game presentation (opening and closing execution mode presentation) executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the opening and closing execution mode end command.

<Step S2242>
In step S2242, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command to notify the voice and lamp control device 5 that the ending of the jackpot game will start, and proceeds to step S2243. The ending start command is sent to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to start an ending presentation in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the ending start command.

<Steps S2243 and S2244>
In step S2243, the MPU 41 sets an ending flag to ON, which indicates that the ending is being executed. Then, the MPU 41 sets an ending time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the ending (step S2244), and ends the jackpot game control process. The ending time counter is referenced in step S2247 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 32 to determine whether it is time to end the ending (jackpot game).

<Step S2245>
Returning to Figure 29, if the interval flag is off (step S2236: No), i.e., if the interval between rounds is not being executed, it is determined whether the ending flag, which indicates that the ending is being executed, is on (step S2245).

If the ending in progress flag is on (step S2245: Yes), i.e., if the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2246 in FIG. 32. On the other hand, if the ending in progress flag is off (step S2245: No), i.e., if the ending is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2250.

<Steps S2246 and S2247>
If the ending flag is on (step S2245: Yes), i.e., if the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the ending time counter indicating the remaining time of the ending (step S2246), as shown in Fig. 32. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2247). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to end the ending (jackpot game).

If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2247: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2248. On the other hand, if the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2247: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2248 and S2249>
If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2247: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 sets an ending end command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that the ending of the jackpot game is to end. The ending end command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to end the ending presentation executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the ending end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending flag, which indicates that the ending is being executed, to OFF (step S2249), and ends the jackpot game control process.

<Step S2250>
29 , if the ending flag is off (step S2245: No), that is, if the game is not in the opening mode, the round mode, the interval mode, or the ending mode, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game end command to notify the sound and lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is ending (step S2250), and proceeds to step S2251. The jackpot game end command is transmitted to the sound and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21 ) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound and lamp control device 5 to end the jackpot game presentation executed in the symbol display unit 341 and the like based on the jackpot game end command.

<Steps S2251 and S2252>
In step S2251, a jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game has ended is set to ON. The jackpot game end flag is referenced in step S2312 of the game state transition process in FIG. 34 described later to determine whether to transition from the jackpot game state to the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state).

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being played, to OFF (step S2252), and ends the jackpot game control process.

[Game status transition processing]
33 and 34 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main process in Fig. 21. In the game state transition process, a process for controlling the transition of various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, probability variable game state, probability variable jackpot game state, and normal jackpot game state) is executed. The game state transition process will be described below with reference to Figs. 33 and 34.

<Step S2301>
33, in step S2301, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game start flag, which indicates the start of a jackpot game, is on. In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, the jackpot game start flag is set to on in step S2205 when a jackpot game is to be started, and is set to off in step S2252 when the jackpot game is to be ended.

If the jackpot game start flag is on (step S2301: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2302. On the other hand, if the jackpot game start flag is off (step S2301: No), i.e., if it is not time to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2312 in FIG. 34.

<Steps S2302 and S2303>
If the jackpot game start flag is on (step S2301: Yes), that is, when starting a jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to off (step S2302) and determines whether the jackpot game to be started is a variable probability jackpot game (step S2303).Whether the jackpot game to be started is a variable probability jackpot game is determined based on the special symbol win/loss information stored in the special symbol execution area AE (see FIG. 8) of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b set in the RAM 412.

If the MPU 41 determines that a special jackpot game is to be started (step S2303: Yes), it proceeds to step S2304. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that a special jackpot game is not to be started (step S2303: No), i.e., if a regular jackpot game is to be started, it proceeds to step S2305.

<Step S2304>
When starting a probability variable jackpot game (step S2303: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a probability variable jackpot game state flag to ON (step S2304), indicating that the probability variable jackpot game is in a probability variable jackpot game state in which the probability variable jackpot game is executed, and proceeds to step S2305. The probability variable jackpot game state flag is referenced in step S2315 of the game state transition process in FIG. 34 to determine whether the game state should be transitioned to a probability variable game state or a normal game state when the jackpot game is ended.

<Steps S2305 and S2306>
In step S2305, the MPU 41 determines whether a normal gaming state flag indicating a normal gaming state is on. The normal gaming state flag is set to on in step S2324 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. 34 when transitioning from the time-limited gaming state to the normal gaming state, and is set to off in step S2306 of the gaming state transition process when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state (probable jackpot gaming state or normal jackpot gaming state).

If the normal game state flag is on (step S2305: Yes), i.e., if the game is in normal game state, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to off (step S2306) and terminates the game state transition process. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is off (step S2305: No), i.e., if the game is not in normal game state but in high-frequency support mode (high-variable game state or time-limited game state), the MPU 41 transitions to step S2307.

<Step S2307>
If the normal game state flag is off (step S2305: No), that is, if the game is not in the normal game state but in the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency game state or time-limited game state), the MPU 41 sets the high-frequency support mode flag, which indicates that the game is in the high-frequency support mode, to off (step S2307), and proceeds to step S2308.

<Steps S2308 and S2309>
In step S2308, the MPU 41 determines whether a probability variable game state flag indicating a probability variable game state is on. In the game state transition process, the probability variable game state flag is set to on in step S2317 of Figure 34 when transitioning from a probability variable jackpot game state to a probability variable game state, and is set to off in step S2309 when transitioning from a probability variable game state to a jackpot game state (probability variable jackpot game state or normal jackpot game state).

If the high probability game state flag is on (step S2308: Yes), i.e., if the game is in a high probability game state, the MPU 41 sets the high probability game state flag to off (step S2309) and terminates the game state transition process. On the other hand, if the high probability game state flag is off (step S2308: No), i.e., if the game is not in a normal game state or a high probability game state but in a time-limited game state, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S2310.

<Steps S2310 and S2311>
If the probability variable game state flag is OFF (step S2308: No), that is, if the game is in the time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 sets the time-shortened game state flag indicating the time-shortened game state to OFF (step S2310). Then, the MPU 41 clears the time-shortened game counter indicating the remaining number of time-shortened games that can be executed in the time-shortened game state (step S2311), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S2312>
If the jackpot game start flag is OFF (step S2301: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a jackpot game end flag, which indicates that the jackpot game is to be ended, is ON (step S2312), as shown in Fig. 34. When the jackpot game is to be ended, the jackpot game end flag is set ON in step S2251 of the jackpot game control process in Fig. 29.

If the jackpot game end flag is on (step S2312: Yes), i.e., if the jackpot game is to end, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2313. On the other hand, if the jackpot game end flag is off (step S2312: No), i.e., if it is not the time to end the jackpot game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2322.

<Steps S2313 and S2314>
If the jackpot game end flag is on (step S2312: Yes), i.e., when the jackpot game is to end, the MPU 41 sets the high frequency support mode flag, which indicates that the high frequency support mode is in effect, to on (step S2313), and sets the jackpot game end flag, which indicates that the jackpot game is to end, to off (step S2314), and proceeds to step S2315.

<Step S2315>
In step S2315, the MPU 41 determines whether a probability variable jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a probability variable jackpot game state in which a probability variable jackpot game is executed, is on. The probability variable jackpot game state flag is set to on in step S2304 of Figure 33 when a transition is made from a probability variable game state, a normal game state, or a time-limited game state to a probability variable jackpot game state in the game state transition process, and is set to off in step S2318 when a transition is made from a probability variable jackpot game state to a probability variable game state.

If the probability variable jackpot gaming state flag is on (step S2315: Yes), i.e., if the game is in a probability variable jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2316. On the other hand, if the probability variable jackpot gaming state flag is off (step S2315: No), i.e., if the game is in a normal jackpot gaming state rather than a probability variable jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2319.

<Step S2316>
If the probability variable jackpot gaming state flag is on (step S2315: Yes), i.e., if the probability variable jackpot gaming state is in effect, the MPU 41 sets a probability variable gaming state command that notifies the sound and lamp control device 5 that the probability variable gaming state is in effect (step S2316), and proceeds to step S2317. The probability variable gaming state command is sent to the sound and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main processing (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound and lamp control device 5 to execute special symbol effects corresponding to the probability variable gaming state in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the probability variable gaming state command.

<Step S2317>
In step S2317, the MPU 41 sets a probability variable game state flag indicating that the game is in a probability variable game state to ON, and proceeds to step S2318. The probability variable game state flag is referenced in step S2308 of FIG. 33 in the game state transition process to identify the game state when the jackpot game starts.

<Step S2318>
In step S2318, the MPU 41 sets the probability variable jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a probability variable jackpot game state, to OFF, and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S2319>
If the probability variable jackpot gaming state flag is off (step S2315: No), i.e., if the game is in a normal jackpot gaming state rather than a probability variable jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 sets a time-saving gaming state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game is in a time-saving gaming state (step S2319), and proceeds to step S2320. The time-saving gaming state command is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main processing (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to execute a special symbol effect corresponding to the time-saving gaming state on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the time-saving gaming state command.

<Steps S2320 and S2321>
In step S2320, the MPU 41 sets a time-saving count counter that indicates the remaining number of special symbols that can be executed in the time-saving game state. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving count counter to the upper limit of the number of special symbols that can be executed in the time-saving game state (100 in this embodiment). The time-saving count counter is decremented by one in step S2110 of the special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 28 each time a special symbol game is started in the time-saving game state, and is referenced in step S2323 of the game state transition processing to determine whether or not to transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state after the specified number of special symbol games have been executed.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag to ON, indicating that the game is in the time-saving game state (step S2321), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S2322>
If the jackpot game end flag is off (step S2312: No), i.e., if it is not the time to end the jackpot game, the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state, is on (step S2322).

If the time-shortened game state flag is on (step S2322: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S2323. On the other hand, if the time-shortened game state flag is off (step S2322: No), i.e., if the game is not in the time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S2323>
If the time-saving game state flag is on (step S2322: Yes), that is, if the game is in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the time-saving number counter, which indicates the remaining number of special symbol games that can be executed in the time-saving game state, is 0 (step S2323). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state will transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state by executing the specified number of special symbol games.

If the value of the time-saving count counter is 0 (step S2323: Yes), i.e., if the time-saving game state will transition to the normal game state after the specified number of special game plays have been performed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2324. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving count counter is not 0 (step S2323: No), i.e., if the time-saving game state will not transition to the normal game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S2324 to S2326>
If the value of the time-saving count counter is 0 (step S2323: Yes), that is, if the time-saving game state is transitioned to the normal game state by executing the specified number of special symbol games, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state to ON (step S2324).Then, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag indicating the time-saving game state to OFF (step S2325), and sets the high-frequency support mode flag indicating the high-frequency support mode to OFF (step S2326), and ends the game state transition process.

[Game setting value change processing]
Here, Fig. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game setting value change process executed in step S1409 of the main process of Fig. 21. In the game setting value change process, a process is executed to display or hide setting values or to control changes to game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d in accordance with an operation on the setting value change operation unit 46. The setting value change process will be described below with reference to Fig. 35.

<Step S2401>
35, in step S2401, the MPU 41 determines whether a game setting value display flag is on, which indicates that a game setting value is being displayed on the setting value display unit 45. The game setting value display flag is set on in step S2405 (described later) in the game setting value change process when the power of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on, thereby displaying a game setting value on the setting value display unit 45, and is set off in step S2412 (described later) in the game setting value change process when the power of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off, thereby hiding a game setting value on the setting value display unit 45.

If the game setting value display flag is on (step S2401: Yes), i.e., if a game setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2406. On the other hand, if the game setting value display flag is off (step S2401: No), i.e., if a game setting value is not displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2402.

<Step S2402>
If the game setting value display flag is off (step S2401: No), i.e., if the game setting value is not displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S2402), i.e., whether an operation has been performed on the setting value change operation unit 46 to turn on the power of the setting value display unit 45.

If the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S2402: Yes), i.e., if an operation to turn on the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 is performed using the setting value change operation unit 46, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2403. On the other hand, if the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 is not switched from off to on (step S2402: No), i.e., if an operation to turn on the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 is not performed using the setting value change operation unit 46, the MPU 41 terminates the game setting value change process.

<Steps S2403 to S2405>
When the power of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S2402: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2403) and displays the numbers indicating the read game setting values on the setting value display unit 45 (step S2404). This allows the user to check the current game setting values. The MPU 41 then sets a setting value display flag to on, indicating that the game setting values are being displayed on the setting value display unit 45 (step S2405), and terminates the setting value change process.

<Step S2406>
If the setting value display flag is set to ON (step S2401: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated a predetermined angle (step S2406). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a rotation operation to change a game setting value has been performed. If the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated a predetermined angle (step S2406: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2407. If the setting value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated (step S2406: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2409.

<Steps S2407 and S2408>
When the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S2406: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process (step S2407) to change the display on the setting value display unit 45. For example, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the right, the MPU 41 displays a number that is one larger than the number that was displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before the rotation. Conversely, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the left, the MPU 41 displays a number that is one smaller than the number that was displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before the rotation.

If the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before rotation is "6" and the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 will change to "1." If the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before rotation is "1" and the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 will change to "6." Also, if the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is "6," it may be configured to not rotate further to the right, and if the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is "1," it may be configured to not rotate further to the left.

The MPU 41 then overwrites and saves the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 as the game setting value in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412 (step S2408), and terminates the setting value change process. As a result, when the power to the setting value change operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the game setting value stored in RAM 412 immediately before the power was turned off is finally saved as the valid game setting value in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412. Therefore, by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 to change the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the game setting value stored in RAM 412 is changed. Then, the game setting value can be confirmed by turning off the power to the setting value display unit 45 while the number corresponding to the desired game setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45.

In step S2408, the MPU 41 sets a game setting value change command to notify the audio and lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value.

<Step S2409>
If the setting value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S2406: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S2409), i.e., whether or not an operation to turn off the power of the setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the setting value change operation unit 46. If the power of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S2409: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2410, and if the power of the setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from on to off (step S2409: No), the MPU 41 ends the setting value change process.

<Steps S2410 to S2412>
When the power of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S2409: Yes), the MPU 41 selects a low probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9 (A)) and a high probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9 (B)) corresponding to the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 and stores them in the RAM 412 (step S2410).

Here, in step S2410, a low probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9(A)) and a high probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9(B)) are selected according to the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412. In other words, win/loss tables with the same game setting values are selected for the low probability mode win/loss table and the high probability mode win/loss table, making it easy to change the game setting values. However, it is also possible to make it possible to change the setting values for the low probability mode and the high probability mode individually. In this case, it is possible to set different levels (numerical values) of setting values for the low probability mode and the high probability mode, for example, setting the setting value for the low probability mode to "1" and the setting value for the high probability mode to "6."

Then, the MPU 41 hides the number corresponding to the game setting value on the setting value display unit 45 (step S2411), sets the setting value display flag to OFF (step S2412), and terminates the setting value change process.

[Specific performance information update process]
Here, Fig. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for specific performance information update processing executed in step S1410 in the main processing of Fig. 21. In the specific performance information update processing, specific performance information such as base information is updated. Also, Fig. 37 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update processing of Fig. 36. The specific performance information update processing will be described below with reference to Figs. 36 and 37.

<Steps S2501 to S2503>
As shown in Figure 36, in step S2501, the MPU 41 reads various payout ball numbers for current base calculations from the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412, for example, the "number of balls paid out from the general winning slot" and the "number of balls paid out from the first winning slot" in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and further reads the "number of balls out" in normal game mode for current base calculations from the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412 (step S2502). Then, based on the "number of balls paid out from the general winning slot,""number of balls paid out from the first winning slot," and "number of balls out" in the normal game state for current state base calculation, the MPU 41 calculates the "current state base BL," which is the ratio of the combined number of balls paid out of the "number of balls paid out from the general winning slot" and the "number of balls paid out from the first winning slot" to the "number of balls out" in the normal game state, updates the "current state base BL" stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412 (step S2503), and proceeds to step S2504.

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of out balls in the normal game state for the current base calculation, which was read in step S2502 from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, has reached 60,000. If the number of out balls in the normal game state for the current base calculation has reached 60,000 (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2505, and if the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 (step S2504: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2509.

<Steps S2505 to S2508>
If the number of balls released in the normal game state for calculating the current base number has reached 60,000 (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the various base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (steps S2505 to S2507). Specifically, as shown in Figures 37(A) and 37(B), the MPU 41 shifts the base information from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the base information for the game before last (step S2505), shifts the current base number BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S2506), and clears the current base number BL to 0 (step S2507).

Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of balls paid out from the general winning slot, the number of balls paid out from the first winning slot, and the number of balls out in the normal game state for base calculation, which are stored as base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, to 0 (step S2508), and proceeds to step S2509.

<Step S2509>
When the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412 is updated (steps S2505 to S2508), or when the number of balls out has not reached 60,000 (step S2504: No), the MPU 51 reads the information necessary for calculating other specific performance information other than the base information (e.g., the number of unit jackpot draws, consecutive feature ratio, feature ratio) from the game information storage area 412d, calculates the other specific performance information based on the read information, updates the values of the other specific performance information stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412 (step S2509), and terminates the specific performance information update process.

[Display control process for performance display monitor]
38 to 41 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1411 of the main process of Fig. 21. The display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described below with reference to Figs. 38 to 41.

<Step S2601>
38, in step S2601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a BL display flag indicating that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43 is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is set to ON in step S2606 (to be described later) in the display control process or in step S2630 in FIG. 41 when display of the current base BL starts on the performance display monitor 43.

If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S2601: Yes), i.e., if the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2608 in FIG. 39. On the other hand, if the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S2601: No), i.e., if the current base BL is not displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2602.

<Step S2602>
If the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S2601: No), i.e., if the current base BL is not displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 determines whether the B1 display flag, which indicates that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, is set to ON (step S2602). Here, the B1 display flag is set to ON in step S2612 of FIG. 39 described later in the display control process when the display of the previous 60,000 ball base B1 starts on the performance display monitor 43.

If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S2602: Yes), i.e., if the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2617 in FIG. 40. On the other hand, if the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S2602: No), i.e., if the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is not displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2603.

<Step S2603>
If the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S2602: No), i.e., if the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is not displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 determines whether the B2 display flag, which indicates that the performance display monitor 43 is displaying the 60,000 ball base B2 before last, is set to ON (step S2603). Here, the B2 display flag is set to ON in step S2621 of FIG. 40 described later in the display control process when the performance display monitor 43 starts displaying the 60,000 ball base B2 before last.

If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S2603: Yes), i.e., if the performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2626 in FIG. 41. On the other hand, if the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S2603: No), i.e., if the performance display monitor 43 does not display the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2604.

<Step S2604>
If the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S2603: NO), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from OFF to ON (step S2604). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from OFF to ON (step S2604: YES), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2605. If the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from OFF to ON (step S2604: NO), the MPU 41 ends the display control process.

<Steps S2605 to S2607>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from OFF to ON (step S2604: Yes), the MPU 41 displays the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2605). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 37A, the four 7-segment indicators 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43 display "8.", "L,""2," and "9," indicating that the current base BL is 29%. If the base information is the example shown in FIG. 37B, the four 7-segment indicators 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43 display "8.", "L,""0," and "0," indicating that the current base BL is 0%. Then, the MPU 41 sets a BL display flag to ON, indicating that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2606). Furthermore, in order to display the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time, the MPU 41 sets a BL display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2607), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S2608 and S2609>
If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S2601: Yes), i.e., if the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter, which indicates the remaining display time of the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 and is set in step S2607 of Fig. 38 (step S2608), as shown in Fig. 39, and determines whether the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2609). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1.

If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2609: Yes), i.e., if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2610. On the other hand, if the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2609: No), i.e., if it is not time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2614.

<Steps S2610 to S2613>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2609: Yes), that is, if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag, which indicates that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, to off (step S2610), and displays the previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2611). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 37(A), the four 7-segment indicators 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43 will display "8.", "1,""3," and "3," indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 33%. If the base information is the example shown in FIG. 37(B), the four 7-segment indicators 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43 will display "8.", "1,""2," and "9," indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 29%. The MPU 41 then sets a B1 display flag to "ON," indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2612). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a B1 display time counter, which indicates the remaining display time of the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43, to display the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S2613), and then terminates the display control process.

<Step S2614>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2609: No), that is, if it is not time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2614). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2614: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2615, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S2614: No), the display control process ends.

When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2614: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off power to the 7-segment displays 431-434, causing the letters and numbers indicating the current base BL to turn off.

<Steps S2615 and S2616>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S2614: Yes), the MPU 41 sets OFF the BL display flag (step S2615), which indicates that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43. Furthermore, the MPU 41 clears the value of the BL display time counter, which indicates the remaining display time of the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43, to 0 (step S2616), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S2617 and S2618>
38, if the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S2602: Yes), that is, if the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter, which indicates the remaining display time of the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 and is set in step S2613 of Fig. 39 (step S2617), and determines whether the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2618). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the 60,000 ball base B2 before last.

If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2618: Yes), i.e., if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base B2, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2619. On the other hand, if the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2618: No), i.e., if it is not time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base B2, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2623.

<Steps S2619 to S2622>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2618: Yes), that is, if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous previous 60,000 ball base B2, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag, indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, to off (step S2619), and displays the previous previous 60,000 ball base B2, which is included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412, on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2620). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Figure 37(A), "8.", "2", "3", "2", indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 of the second previous game is 32%, are displayed on the four seven-segment indicators 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43, and if the base information is the example shown in Figure 37(B), "8.", "2", "3", "3", indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 of the second previous game is 33%, are displayed on the four seven-segment indicators 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag, which indicates that the 60,000 ball base B2 of the second previous game is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, to on (step S2621). Furthermore, in order to display the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2622), and terminates the display control process.

<Step S2623>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2618: No), that is, if it is not time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous previous 60,000 ball base B2, the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2623). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2623: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2624. If the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S2623: No), the display control process ends.

When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2623: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off power to the 7-segment displays 431-434, and the letters and numbers indicating the previous 60,000 ball base B1 are turned off.

<Steps S2624 and S2625>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2623: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag, which indicates that the 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed last time on the performance display monitor 43, to off (step S2624), clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S2625), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S2626 and S2627>
38, when the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S2603: Yes), that is, when the performance display monitor 43 is displaying the 60,000 ball base B2 from the second previous time, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter, which indicates the remaining display time of the 60,000 ball base B2 from the second previous time on the performance display monitor 43 and is set in step S2622 of Fig. 40 (step S2626), and determines whether the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2627). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000 ball base B2 from the second previous time to the current base BL.

If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2627: Yes), i.e., if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time to the current base BL, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2628. On the other hand, if the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2627: No), i.e., if it is not time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time to the current base BL, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2632.

<Steps S2628 to S2631>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2627: Yes), that is, if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time to the current base BL, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag, indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, to off (step S2628), and displays the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2629). 37(A), the four seven-segment indicators 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43 display "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29%, and the four seven-segment indicators 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43 display "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that the current base BL is 0% when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 37(B). The MPU 41 then sets on a BL display flag indicating that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2630), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S2631), and terminates the display control process.

<Step S2632>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2627: No), that is, if it is not time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time to the current base BL, the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2632). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2632: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2633. If the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S2632: No), the display control process ends.

When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2632: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off power to the 7-segment displays 431-434, and the letters and numbers indicating the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous round are turned off.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, the base information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. However, the base information may be displayed constantly on the performance display monitor 43 while the gaming machine 10 is powered on, or may be displayed on the performance display monitor 43 while the front frame 11 is open.

<Steps S2633 and S2634>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S2632: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag, which indicates that the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous game is being displayed, to OFF (step S2633). Furthermore, the MPU 41 clears the value of the B2 display time counter, which indicates the remaining display time of the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous game, to 0 (step S2634), and ends the display control process.

[Processing of the voice and lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the voice and lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to Figures 42 to 54.

In another embodiment, some or all of the processing performed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 in this embodiment may be performed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In addition, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also performs control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, startup processing when the voice lamp control device 5 is started up, and NMI interrupt processing in the event of a power outage, but a description of these processes will be omitted.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of voice lamp control device 5]
42 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes the sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process with a cycle of 1 msec, for example.

As shown in FIG. 42, in the sub-timer interrupt processing, the MPU 51 executes counter update processing (step S2701), operation detection processing (step S2702), command determination processing (step S2703), special game presentation control processing (step S2704), and jackpot game presentation control processing (step S2705).

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2701), the MPU 51 updates the effect pattern type counter, the first stop symbol type counter, the variable display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the effect type counter and the first stop symbol type counter, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values. The effect pattern type counter is used to determine the variable type (effect pattern) based on the special symbol variable pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. The first stop symbol type counter is used to determine the type of decorative symbol that will be stopped first based on the special symbol variable pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Meanwhile, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the variable display counter. This variable display counter is used to measure the variable display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time reaches 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variation display counter, it is possible to know the remaining variation display time, whether a variation is in progress, whether the variation display on the pattern display section 341 has ended, and so on.

[Operation detection process]
Next, a description will be given of an example of the procedure of the operation detection process executed in step S2702 of the sub timer interrupt process in Fig. 42. Here, Fig. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection process.

As shown in FIG. 43, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 executes operation button operation detection process (step S2801), operation detection pattern determination process (step S2802), selection button operation detection process (step S2803), selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), decision button operation detection process (step S2805), and decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806).

[Operation button operation detection process]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2801 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 41, whereby whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated is determined at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt period of the sub-timer interrupt process. Here, FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIG. 44.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
44, in the operation button operation detection process, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag (step S2901). Next, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag (step S2902). Thereafter, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the third detection flag to the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a (step S2903), and ends the operation detection process.

In this way, in the operation button operation detection process, steps S2901 to S2903 are executed, and the operation states of the most recent three operations at 1 msec intervals are stored in RAM 512 as the operation history of the operation button 20 as the first to third detection flags. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the operation state two operations ago is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern determination process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 43 , in the operation detection pattern determination process of step S2802 in the operation detection process, an operation pattern flag is set to determine the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. The operation pattern flags consist of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of on and off of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 is continuing (see FIG. 46A ). When only the second operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has started (see FIG. 46A ). When only the third operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has ended (see FIG. 46A ). When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has not been performed (see FIG. 46A ). Fig. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the operation detection pattern determination process. Fig. 46A is a table showing the relationship between the detection pattern and the operation status for the operation button 20. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to Figs. 45 and 46A.

<Step S3001>
60 , in the operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines whether a first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three operations ago is set to ON (step S3001). If the first operation detection flag is ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3002, and if the first operation detection flag is OFF (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
If the first operation detection flag is on (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether a second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two operations ago is set to on (step S3002). If the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3003, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
If the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is set to on (step S3003). If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3004, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3003: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3004>
If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to on and the second and third operation pattern flags to off (step S3004), and terminates the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation patterns "ON,""ON," and "ON" occur as three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to on and sets the second and third operation pattern flags to off (see FIG. 46A ). The first operation pattern flag can be used as an indicator for determining whether the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to on, the MPU 41 may set a continuation operation button operation command in the RAM 412 and transmit this operation button operation continuation command to the voice lamp control device 5. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to determine that the operation of the operation button 20 is continuing, and therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine how long the operation button 20 has been continuously operated based on the number of consecutive transmissions of the operation button operation continuation command. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 20 based on the time that the operation button 20 has been continuously operated, making it possible to execute an operation button performance based on a long press operation.

<Step S3005>
If the first operation detection flag is off (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether a second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two operations ago is on (step S3005). If the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3006, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
If the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is on (step S3006). If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3007, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to on and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to off (step S3007). That is, when the operation patterns of "OFF,""ON," and "ON" occur as three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to on and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to off (see FIG. 46(A)), and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the operation button 20 has started). In this way, by using the second operation pattern flag to determine whether the operation button 20 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, three operation states of the operation button 20 are reflected, thereby preventing erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as radio waves or static electricity, and preventing the start of operation of the operation button 20 from being reflected in the performance display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S3008>
If the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is on (step S3008). If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3009.

<Step S3009>
If the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to on and the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to off (step S3009), and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation patterns of "ON,""OFF," and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to on and sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to off (see FIG. 46A). The third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (whether operation of the operation button 20 has ended).

<Step S3010>
If the third operation detection flag is off (step S3003: No), if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No), or if the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to off (step S3010) and terminates the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, if an operation pattern other than "OFF,""OFF," and "OFF" occurs as the three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third operation pattern flags to off (see FIG. 46A). Note that if all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operated state.

[Selection button operation detection process]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 43, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes up selection button operation process, down selection button operation process, left selection button operation process, and right selection button operation process.

<Up selection button operation processing>
In the up selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the up selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the up selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 44 , so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the up selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "up selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 44 .

<Down selection button operation processing>
In the lower selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, the lower selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 44 , so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the lower selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "lower selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 44 .

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the left selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of Fig. 44, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the left selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "left selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of Fig. 44.

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the right selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 44, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the right selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "right selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 44.

[Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process]
Returning to the explanation of Figure 43, in the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), the MPU 41 executes an up selection operation detection pattern determination process, a down selection operation detection pattern determination process, a left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and a right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Up Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process>
In the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets an up operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the up selection button 211 from the operation history of the up selection button 211 determined based on the first up selection operation detection flag, the second up selection operation detection flag, and the third up selection operation detection flag. Here, the up selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 45 , and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "up selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "up selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 45 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), in the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, if the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs as three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the first up selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second up selection operation pattern flag and the third up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first up selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator for determining whether the operation state of the up selection button 211 is continuing.

In addition, when the operation patterns "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the second up selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first up selection operation pattern flag and the third up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second up selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the up selection button 211 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the up selection button 211 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the third up selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first up selection operation pattern flag and the second up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third up selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator for determining whether the up selection button 211 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether operation of the up selection button 211 has ended).

Furthermore, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF," "OFF," and "OFF," occurs as the three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third up selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third up selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the up selection button 211 is in a non-operated state.

<Down Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process>
In the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a down operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the down selection button 212 from the operation history of the down selection button 212 determined based on the first down selection operation detection flag, the second down selection operation detection flag, and the down selection operation detection flag. Here, the down selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 45 , and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "down selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "down selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 45 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 46 (C), in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs as three operation states of the down selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the first down selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second down selection operation pattern flag and the third down selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first down selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator for determining whether the operation state of the down selection button 212 is continuing.

In addition, when the operation patterns "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the lower selection button 212 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the lower selection button 212 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the lower selection button 212 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (whether operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended).

In addition, if the three operation patterns of the lower selection button 212 are "OFF," "OFF," "OFF," or any other operation pattern other than those described above, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third lower selection operation detection flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in a non-operated state.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the left selection button 213 from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. Here, the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 45 , and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "left selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "left selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 45 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 46 (D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, if the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the first left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first left selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continuing.

In addition, when the operation patterns "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the left selection button 213 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (whether operation of the left selection button 213 has ended).

Furthermore, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF," "OFF," and "OFF," occurs as the three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operated state.

<Right Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the right selection button 214 from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 45 , and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "right selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" can be read as the "right selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 45 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 46 (E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, if the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the first right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first right selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator for determining whether the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continuing.

In addition, when the operation patterns "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the right selection button 214 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (whether operation of the right selection button 214 has ended).

Furthermore, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF," "OFF," and "OFF," occurs as the three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in a non-operated state.

[Decision button operation detection process]
Returning to the explanation of Fig. 43, in the decision button operation detection process (step S2805), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the decision button 21B and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the decision button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 44, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the decision button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "decision button operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57.

[Decision Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process]
In the deciding operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806), the MPU 41 sets an operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the deciding button 21B from the operation history of the deciding button 21B determined based on the first deciding operation detection flag, the second deciding operation detection flag, and the third deciding operation detection flag. Here, the deciding operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 45 , and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the deciding operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "deciding operation detection flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 45 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 46 (F), in the decision operation detection pattern determination process, if the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs as three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the first decision operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second decision operation pattern flag and the third decision operation pattern flag to OFF. The first decision operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator for determining whether the operation state of the decision button 21B is continuing.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the Confirm button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the second Confirm operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and third Confirm operation pattern flags to OFF. The second Confirm operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the Confirm button 21B has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the Confirm button 21B has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the Confirm button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the third Confirm operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first Confirm operation pattern flag and the second Confirm operation pattern flag to OFF. The third Confirm operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator for determining whether the Confirm button 21B has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (whether operation of the Confirm button 21B has ended).

Furthermore, if the three operation states of the decision button 21B are "OFF," "OFF," "OFF," or any other operation pattern other than those described above, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the decision button 21B is in a non-operated state.

[Command Determination Processing]
Next, there will be described an example of the procedure for the command determination process executed in step S2703 of the sub-timer interrupt process in Fig. 42. Here, Fig. 47 and Fig. 48 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the command determination process.

<Step S3101>
47, in the command determination process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4 (step S3101). If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S3101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3102. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S3101: No), the command determination process ends.

Note that commands received from the main control unit 4 are stored in the unprocessed command storage area of RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received by referencing the unprocessed command storage area. Furthermore, if a command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have been received in step S3101 and is to be processed, it is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area and stored, for example, in a processing work storage area.

<Step S3102>
When a command is received (step S3101: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command (step S3102). The special symbol variation pattern command is a command that indicates the variation display time of the special symbol (special symbol variation pattern) in the special symbol game and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery.

Here, if the received command is a special chart variation pattern command (step S3102: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3103; if the received command is not a special chart variation pattern command (step S3102: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3107.

<Steps S3103 and S3104>
If the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command (step S3102: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a variation type (effect pattern) setting process (step S3103) and a stop symbol combination setting process (step S3104) based on the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Details of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process and the stop symbol combination setting process will be described below.

[Variation type (performance pattern) setting process]
In the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process, the special symbol game presentation to be executed by the various presentation means (the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, the movable role member 39, the sub-movable display unit 38) in the special symbol game is set. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the variation type (presentation pattern) and the variation display time by referring to the variation type table (see FIG. 49) based on the special symbol variation pattern command, and further sets the presentation pattern type based on the presentation pattern type selection table (see FIG. 50) corresponding to the variation type (presentation pattern).

Here, Figure 49 shows an example of a variation type table referenced by the MPU 51 when determining the variation type (effect pattern).

As shown in Figure 49, the variation type table defines the variation display time and variation type (presentation pattern) corresponding to the special chart variation pattern command. For example, the special chart variation pattern command "A01," for which the lottery result is a "normal jackpot" and the special chart variation pattern is "01," is associated with a variation display time of "30 seconds" and a variation type of "normal reach presentation pattern." Furthermore, the special chart variation pattern command "B02," for which the lottery result is a "5R certain jackpot" and the special chart variation pattern is "02," is associated with a variation display time of "60 seconds" and a variation type of "super reach presentation pattern." Furthermore, the special chart variation pattern command "C03," for which the lottery result is a "16R certain jackpot" and the special chart variation pattern is "03," is associated with a variation display time of "90 seconds" and a variation type of "special reach presentation pattern." Furthermore, the special chart fluctuation pattern command "D04", where the lottery result is "miss" and the special chart fluctuation pattern is "04", is associated with a fluctuation display time of "7 seconds" and a fluctuation type of "non-reach presentation pattern", and the special chart fluctuation pattern command "D05", where the lottery result is "miss" and the special chart fluctuation pattern is "05", is associated with a fluctuation display time of "10 seconds" and a fluctuation type of "non-reach presentation pattern".

Furthermore, Figures 50(A) to 50(C) are diagrams showing examples of effect pattern type selection tables. The effect pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (effect pattern). Specifically, Figure 50(A) is a normal reach effect pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual effect type in the special game effect is a normal reach effect, Figure 50(B) is a super reach effect pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual effect type in the special game effect is a super reach effect, and Figure 50(C) is a special reach effect pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual effect type in the special game effect is a special reach effect.

In this embodiment, an example is given in which there are five types of effect types corresponding to each variation type, but there may be six or more types of effect types. Also, in Figure 50, the effect type table for when the variation type is not a reach is omitted.

In the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table shown in Figure 50 (A), "presentation pattern X1" to "presentation pattern X5" are defined as presentation pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the presentation pattern type counter depending on the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R special jackpot, 16R special jackpot, or miss). If the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (presentation pattern) is a normal reach presentation pattern, it selects the presentation pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the presentation pattern type counter from the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table depending on the lottery result. Presentation patterns X1 to X3 included in the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table are presentations in which, for example, a normal reach presentation is executed in which the decorative symbols reach a reach state after a high-speed variation presentation in which the decorative symbols rapidly fluctuate ends, and the final individual presentation type is a normal reach presentation.

In addition, the super reach effect pattern type selection table shown in Figure 50 (B) defines "effect pattern Y1" to "effect pattern Y5" as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter depending on the lottery results. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is a super reach effect pattern, it selects the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter from the super reach effect pattern type selection table depending on the lottery results. Here, effect patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super reach effect pattern type selection table are, for example, effects in which a normal reach effect is executed after the end of a high-speed variation effect, and further develops into a super reach effect as the final individual effect type, which has a higher probability of winning than a normal reach effect and a longer effect execution time than a normal reach effect. The super reach effect pattern type selection table may also include a super reach effect pattern effect that develops into a super reach effect after the end of a high-speed variation effect without going through a normal reach effect.

Furthermore, the special reach presentation pattern type selection table shown in Figure 50 (C) defines "presentation pattern Z1" through "presentation pattern Z5" as presentation pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the presentation pattern type counter based on the lottery results. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (presentation pattern) is a special reach presentation pattern, it selects the presentation pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the presentation pattern type counter from the special reach presentation pattern type selection table based on the lottery results. Here, presentation patterns Z1 through Z3 included in the special reach presentation pattern type selection table are presentations in which, for example, a normal reach presentation and a super reach presentation are executed after the end of a high-speed variation presentation, and the final individual presentation type develops into a special reach presentation, which has a higher jackpot expectation than a normal reach presentation or a super reach presentation and a longer presentation execution time than a normal reach presentation. The special reach presentation pattern type selection table may also include special reach presentation patterns that develop into a special reach presentation after the end of a high-speed variation presentation or a normal reach presentation, without passing through at least one of a normal reach presentation or a super reach presentation.

[Stop symbol combination setting process]
In the stop symbol combination setting process, a symbol combination is set when a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) displayed variably on the symbol display unit 341 in a special symbol game are stopped and displayed on an active line. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the stop symbol combination by referring to the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 51(B)) based on the special symbol variable pattern command.

Figure 51 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between decorative symbol types and decorative symbol colors. As shown in Figure 51 (A), in this embodiment, the numbers "1" through "9" are set as decorative symbols, and of these numbers, "3" and "7" are red, "1," "5," and "9" are green, and "2," "4," "6," and "8" are red. In this embodiment, the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is announced by the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on one or more active lines set in the symbol display unit 341. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, decorative symbols of the same number are stopped and displayed on the active line in a doublet, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, decorative symbols other than doublets are stopped and displayed on the active line.

It is also possible to set different types of decorative symbols (numbers, colors) that offer different advantages to players. For example, odd numbers may be more advantageous to players than even numbers, and among odd numbers, the red "3" and "7" may be more advantageous to players than the green "1," "5," and "9." In this case, if the result of a jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the type of jackpot may be clearly indicated or suggested by the combination of decorative symbols that stop and display. For example, a "777" symbol combination may indicate a 16R jackpot, a "333" symbol combination may indicate a jackpot, and an even number combination may indicate a 5R regular jackpot. Furthermore, if the result of a jackpot lottery is a miss, the combination of decorative symbols that stop and display may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot being drawn for a specific reserved special game played after that special game (jackpot expectation probability). For example, in special gameplay until a special game for a specific reserved symbol is executed, scattered symbols of the same color may be displayed as so-called chance symbols, and the color of the scattered symbols (chance symbols) may be used to clearly indicate or suggest the likelihood of a jackpot as a so-called pre-reading effect. Specifically, the likelihood of a jackpot in special gameplay for a specific reserved symbol may be set to be highest for red scattered symbols (chance symbols), next highest for green scattered symbols (chance symbols), and lowest for blue scattered symbols, and scattered symbols (chance symbols) of a color corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the special game for a specific reserved symbol and hit/miss information may be displayed as stopped symbols.

In this embodiment, the decorative symbol combination consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the decorative symbol that is first displayed in a stopped state on the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is the decorative symbol that is second displayed in a stopped state, and the final stop symbol is the symbol that is last displayed in a stopped state.

Here, Figure 51(B) is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table. As shown in Figure 51(B), the first stop symbol selection table determines the decorative symbol (first stop symbol) that is first displayed in the symbol display unit 341. Note that Figure 51(B) assumes that the decorative symbols are "1" to "9," that "333" is a symbol combination indicating a probability jackpot (either a 5R probability jackpot or a 16R probability jackpot), that "777" is a symbol combination indicating a 16R probability jackpot, and that any number other than "333" or "777" is a symbol combination indicating a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability jackpot, or a 16R probability jackpot.

If the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot," the first stopping symbol is not "3" or "7," and the first stopping symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from decorative symbols other than "3" and "7." In other words, if the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot," the symbol combinations "333" or "777," which indicate a 5R probability variable jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot (probability variable jackpot), will not be displayed.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "5R jackpot," there is no allocation of "7" as the first stopping symbol, and the first stopping symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from decorative symbols other than "7." In other words, when the lottery result is a "5R jackpot," the "777" symbol combination, which indicates a 16R jackpot, will not be displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is a "5R jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "333" symbol combination, which indicates a 5R jackpot, may be displayed. In other words, even when the lottery result is a "5R jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "333" symbol combination, which indicates a 5R regular jackpot, may be displayed as a decorative symbol. If the lottery result is a "5R probability variable jackpot," and a decorative symbol other than "3" and excluding "7" is determined as the first stopping symbol, the MPU 51 will execute a 5R probability variable promotion effect in the jackpot game, indicating that it is a 5R probability variable jackpot.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "16R probability jackpot," all decorative symbols from "1" to "9" are allocated, and the first stopping symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. In other words, even if the lottery result is a "16R probability jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "777" symbol combination indicating a 16R probability jackpot may be displayed as a stopped symbol. In other words, even if the lottery result is a "16R probability jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "777" symbol combination indicating a 5R probability jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot may be displayed as a stopped symbol. Then, when the lottery result is a "16R probability jackpot" and "7" is determined as the first stopping symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R probability jackpot promotion effect during the jackpot game, indicating that the jackpot is a 16R probability jackpot.

Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol if the lottery result is a jackpot, it determines the second and final stop symbols to be the same as the previously determined first stop symbol. This determines the combination of stop symbols that will be displayed on the pay line of the symbol display unit 341 during that special symbol game.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is a "miss," all decorative symbols from "1" to "9" are allocated, and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a "miss," it determines the second stop symbol based on the loss type selected based on the loss type table (see Figure 9 (D)) and the previously determined first stop symbol. For example, if the loss type is a front-to-back miss reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. Furthermore, if the loss type is a reach other than a front-to-back miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol and the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. Furthermore, if the loss type is a complete loss, the second stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first and second stop symbols. The stop symbol combination of decorative symbols may be determined by the display control device 6, or only the first stop symbol may be determined by the sound and lamp control device 5, and the second and final stop symbols may be determined by the display control device 6.

<Step S3105>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in Fig. 47, in step S3105, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the received special symbol variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the special symbol variable pattern command. The variable display counter is then decremented by one in the counter update process of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt process of Fig. 42, and the MPU 51 can determine whether the symbol variable display is in progress, the remaining time of the variable display time, etc., based on the variable display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variable display has ended when the variable display counter reaches 0.

<Step S3106>
In step S3106, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 for specifying the effect pattern type set in step S3103 of the command determination process and the details of the stopped symbol combination of decorative symbols determined in step S3104, and then ends the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the effect pattern type and the stopped symbol combination of decorative symbols. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores variable images and effect images of decorative symbols corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes variable display and effect display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the stopped symbol combination, variation type, and effect type of decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variable display of multiple decorative symbols (e.g., three) until a preset variable display time has elapsed, and causes the multiple decorative symbols to display statically in sequence. While the variable decorative symbols are being displayed, various effects corresponding to the type of variation (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27, etc.

In addition, when the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, it sets, for example, a special game performance flag to ON. This special game performance flag is a flag that indicates that a special game performance is being executed.

<Step S3107>
If the received command is not a special symbol variation pattern command (step S3102: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol shift command (step S3107). The special symbol shift command is a command indicating that the special symbol win/loss information indicating the result of the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA or the first special symbol reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB (see FIG. 8) has shifted when the first special symbol reserve number N or the second special symbol reserve number M decreases due to the start of a special symbol game (special symbol variation display).

If the received command is a special drawing shift command (step S3107: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3108; if the received command is not a special drawing shift command (step S3107: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3110.

<Steps S3108 and S3109>
If the received command is a special drawing shift command (step S3107: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a special drawing data setting process (step S3108) and a special drawing data image display process (step S3109), and terminates the command determination process.

Here, the special chart data setting process executed in step S3108 is a process of shifting (updating) the data (special chart data) of special chart success/failure information stored in the special chart pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) set in RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5. The special chart pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) is an area corresponding to the special chart pending storage area 412b (see Figure 8) set in RAM 412 of the main control device 4, and stores special chart data equivalent to that of the special chart pending storage area 412b. The special chart pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) includes a first special chart pending storage area corresponding area, a second special chart pending storage area corresponding area, and a special chart execution area corresponding area, which correspond respectively to the first special chart pending storage area REA, the second special chart pending storage area REB, and the special chart execution area AE (see Figure 8) of the special chart pending storage area 412b. Furthermore, the area corresponding to the first special chart reserve storage area includes areas corresponding to the first to fourth special chart reserve areas (not shown) corresponding to the first to fourth reserve areas REA1 to REA4 (see FIG. 8) of the first special chart reserve storage area REA in the special chart reserve storage area 412b, and an area corresponding to the first special chart reserve number memory area (see FIG. 8). Furthermore, the area corresponding to the second special chart reserve storage area includes areas corresponding to the second special chart reserve areas 1 to 4 corresponding to the first to fourth reserve areas REB1 to REB4 (see FIG. 8) of the second special chart reserve storage area REB in the special chart reserve storage area 412b, and an area corresponding to the second special chart reserve number memory area (see FIG. 8).

On the other hand, the special chart data image display process executed in step S3109 is a process of shifting the image related to the special chart data (special chart data image) (see Figures 52 and 53) displayed on the pattern display unit 341 based on the special chart data stored in the area corresponding to the special chart reserve storage area (not shown) of RAM 512 that was shifted (updated) in step S3108.

Here, Figure 52 is a diagram showing examples of special symbol data images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 before and after receiving a special symbol shift command. Specifically, Figure 52 (A1) and Figure 52 (A2) are diagrams showing examples of special symbol data images before receiving a special symbol shift command, Figure 52 (B1) is an example of a special symbol data image after receiving a special symbol shift command for a first special symbol game in the display state of the special symbol data image shown in Figure 52 (A1), and Figure 52 (B2) is an example of a special symbol data image after receiving a special symbol shift command for a second special symbol game in the display state of the special symbol data image shown in Figure 52 (A2).

As shown in Figures 52 (A1) and 52 (A2), the special chart data images are displayed in special chart data image display areas 75, 76, and 77 set in the pattern display unit 341. The special chart data image display areas 75, 76, and 77 correspond to the special chart execution area corresponding area (not shown), the first special chart reserved storage area corresponding area, and the second special chart reserved storage area corresponding area of the above-mentioned special chart reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) set in RAM 512, and include the special chart variable image display area 75, the first special chart reserved image display area 76, and the second special chart reserved image display area 77.

The special symbol variable image display area 75 is an area that displays the special symbol game image for the special symbol game based on the special symbol data stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the special symbol reserve storage area corresponding area described above, which corresponds to the special symbol execution area AE (see Figure 8) of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control unit 4. When special symbol data is stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding area, the special symbol game image is displayed in the special symbol variable image display area 75. However, when special symbol data is not stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding area, the special symbol game image is not displayed. In other words, the special symbol game image is displayed while the special symbol is changing and is hidden when the special symbol is stopped. In other words, the display of the special symbol game image indicates that the special symbol game is in progress, and the non-display of the special symbol game image indicates that the special symbol game has ended.

In the examples shown in Figures 52 (A1) and 52 (A2), special chart data is stored in the area corresponding to the special chart execution area, and the special chart game image (the cross-hatched circle) is displayed in the special chart variable image display area 75.

The first special symbol reserved image display area 76 is an area that displays the first special symbol reserved image for the first special symbol game based on the special symbol data stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area described above, which corresponds to the first special symbol reserved storage area REA (see FIG. 8) of the special symbol reserved storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control unit 4. This first special symbol reserved image display area 76 includes a first special symbol reserved image first display area 761, a first special symbol reserved image second display area 762, a first special symbol reserved image third display area 763, and a first special symbol reserved image fourth display area 764, which correspond to the first special symbol first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown) of the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area in the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area described above. The first special symbol reserved image display area 76 displays the first special symbol reserved image when special symbol data is stored in any of the first special symbol first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown), but does not display the first special symbol reserved image when special symbol data is not stored in any of the first special symbol first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown). In other words, when there is a reserved symbol for the first special symbol game, the number of first special symbol reserved images corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number N is displayed, and when there is no reserved symbol for the first special symbol game, no first special symbol reserved image is displayed. In other words, the first special symbol reserved number N for the first special symbol game is clearly indicated based on the number of first special symbol reserved images displayed.

In the example shown in Figure 52 (A1), the first special chart reserved image is displayed in the first special chart first to third reserved image display areas 761 to 763, and the first special chart reserved image is not displayed in the first special chart fourth reserved image display area 764. In other words, in the example shown in Figure 52 (A1), special chart data is stored in the first special chart first to third reserved area corresponding areas of the first special chart first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown), and no special chart data is stored in the first special chart fourth reserved area corresponding area, indicating that the number N of first special chart reserved for the first special chart game is 3.

The second special symbol reserved image display area 77 is an area that displays the second special symbol reserved image for the second special symbol game based on the special symbol data stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area described above, which corresponds to the second special symbol reserved storage area REB (see FIG. 8) of the special symbol reserved storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control unit 4. This second special symbol reserved image display area 77 includes a second special symbol reserved image first display area 771, a second special symbol reserved image second display area 772, a second special symbol reserved image third display area 773, and a second special symbol reserved image fourth display area 774, which correspond to the second special symbol first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown) of the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area in the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area described above. The second special symbol reserved image display area 77 displays a second special symbol reserved image when special symbol data is stored in any of the second special symbol first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown), but does not display a second special symbol reserved image when special symbol data is not stored in any of the second special symbol first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown). In other words, when there is a reserved symbol for the second special symbol game, second special symbol reserved images are displayed in a number corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number M, and are not displayed when there is no reserved symbol for the second special symbol game. In other words, the second special symbol reserved number M for the second special symbol game is clearly indicated based on the number of second special symbol reserved images displayed.

In the example shown in Figure 52 (A2), second special chart reserved images are displayed in second special chart 1-2 reserved image display areas 771-772, and second special chart reserved images are not displayed in second special chart 3-4 reserved image display areas 773-774. In other words, in the example shown in Figure 52 (A2), special chart data is stored in the second special chart 1-2 reserved area corresponding areas of the second special chart 1-4 reserved area corresponding areas (not shown), and special chart data is not stored in the second special chart 3-4 reserved area corresponding areas, indicating that the number of second special chart reserved M for second special chart play is 2.

In the special chart data image display process, if the received special chart shift command is for the first special chart, i.e., if the first special chart game is started, the special chart game image is displayed in the special chart variable image display area 75 based on the special chart data stored in the special chart execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the special chart reserve storage area corresponding area, and further, the first special chart reserve image is displayed in the first special chart reserve image display area 76 based on the special chart data stored in the first special chart reserve storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special chart reserve storage area corresponding area. For example, when the number of first special charts reserved N for the first special chart shown in Figure 52 (A1) is 3 and the number of second special charts reserved M for the second special chart is 0, if a new first special chart game starts as a result of the special chart game ending, as shown in Figure 52 (B1), the special chart game image is displayed in the special chart variable image display area 75, and the first special chart reserved image is displayed in the first special chart first to second reserved image display areas 761 to 762 of the first special chart reserved image display area 76. That is, as shown in Figures 52 (A1) and 52 (B1), when a new first special symbol game is started, the first special symbol reserved image that was displayed in the first special symbol reserved image display area 761 of the first special symbol reserved image display area 76 before the start of the first special symbol game is shifted to the special symbol variable image display area 75 as the special symbol game image, and each of the first special symbol reserved images that were displayed in the first special symbol second to third reserved image display areas 762-763 of the first special symbol reserved image display area 76 before the start of the first special symbol game is shifted to the first special symbol first to second reserved image display areas 761-762 of the first special symbol reserved image display area 76.

On the other hand, in the special chart data image display process, if the received special chart shift command is for the second special chart, i.e., when the second special chart game is started, the special chart game image is displayed in the special chart variable image display area 75 based on the special chart data stored in the special chart execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the special chart reserve storage area corresponding area, and further, the second special chart reserve image is displayed in the second special chart reserve image display area 77 based on the special chart data stored in the second special chart reserve storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special chart reserve storage area corresponding area. For example, in a state where the number of first special charts reserved N for the second special chart shown in Figure 52 (A2) is 1 and the number of second special charts reserved M for the second special chart is 2, when a special chart game ends and a new second special chart game begins, as shown in Figure 52 (B2), the special chart game image is displayed in the special chart variable image display area 75, and the second special chart reserved image is displayed in the second special chart first reserved image display area 771 of the second special chart reserved image display area 77. That is, as shown in Figures 52 (A2) and 52 (B2), when a new second special symbol game is started, the second special symbol reserved image that was displayed in the second special symbol reserved image first display area 771 of the second special symbol reserved image display area 77 before the start of the second special symbol game is shifted to the special symbol variable image display area 75 as the special symbol game image, and the second special symbol reserved image that was displayed in the second special symbol reserved image second display area 772 of the second special symbol reserved image display area 77 before the start of the second special symbol game is shifted to the second special symbol reserved image first display area 771 of the second special symbol reserved image display area 77.

The special chart data images in the special chart data image display sections 75, 76, and 77 may be continuously displayed from the start of the special chart game until its end, or may be hidden for a portion of the time the special chart game is being played. For example, if a super reach effect or special reach effect is executed during the special chart game, the special chart data image may be hidden while the super reach effect or special reach effect is being executed so as not to obstruct the visibility of these effects. In this case, the special chart data image may be redisplayed before or after the end of the super reach effect or special reach effect, or may remain hidden. Furthermore, when the special chart data image is hidden, it is also possible to display an image such as a number indicating the first special chart reserved number N for the first special chart game or the second special chart reserved number M for the second special chart game while the special chart data image is hidden.

The special data images in the special data image display units 75, 76, and 77 may, depending on their display mode, clearly indicate or suggest the degree of expectation (jackpot expectation) that the jackpot lottery result for that special game or a reserved special game will be a jackpot. For example, multiple display modes (such as color, shape, pattern, effect, or a combination of two or more of these) corresponding to the jackpot expectation may be set as special data images, and a predetermined display mode for the special data image may be set from the multiple display modes based on the result of the jackpot lottery. Furthermore, when the jackpot expectation is clearly indicated or suggested based on the display mode of the special data image, the display mode of the special data image may be changed (a so-called reserved change) until the special game for the special data image is completed. In this case, the display mode of the special data image may be changed so that the jackpot expectation remains the same or increases (is upgraded), and changes that decrease (degrade) the jackpot expectation may not be made. Of course, when a change (downgrade change) in the display mode of the special data image that lowers the likelihood of a jackpot is executed, it is also possible to increase the likelihood of a jackpot. There are also no particular restrictions on the timing of changing the display mode of the special data image, and possible times include the start of the special data game (when the special data image shifts), after a certain period of time has passed since the start of the special data game (for example, from the start of the special data game until the start of the reach effect, during the reach effect, or before or after the development into a reach effect with a higher likelihood of a jackpot).

In the example shown in FIG. 52, three types of special symbol data image display areas 75, 76, 77 are set: the special symbol variable image display area 75, the first special symbol reserved image display area 76, and the second special symbol reserved image display area 77. However, it is also possible to change the display content of the special symbol data image display areas 75, 76, 77 depending on the game state. For example, in normal game mode, the second special symbol reserved image display area 77 is not displayed, and the special symbol variable image display area 75 and the first special symbol reserved image display area 76 are displayed; and in the probability variable game mode and time-saving game mode, the first special symbol reserved image display area 76 is not displayed, and the special symbol variable image display area 75 and the second special symbol reserved image display area 77 are displayed.

<Step S3110>
47, if the received command is not a special symbol shift command (step S3107: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a first special symbol reservation command (step S3110). The first special symbol reservation command includes information indicating that the first special symbol reservation number N for the first special symbol game will increase, information about the first special symbol reservation number N after the increase, and information about the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) for the increased first reservation and the result of the jackpot lottery.

If the received command is a first special drawing hold command (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3111; if the received command is not a first special drawing hold command (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3113.

<Steps S3111 and S3112>
If the received command is a first special drawing reservation command (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a first special drawing reservation information update process (step S3111) and a first special drawing reservation image display process (step S3112), and terminates the command determination process.

Here, the first special chart reserved information update process executed in step S3111 is a process of adding (updating) special chart hit/miss information data (special chart data) to the first special chart reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the above-mentioned special chart reserved storage area corresponding area. Specifically, in the first special chart reserved information update process, the special chart data corresponding to the special chart hit/miss information stored in the first empty reserved area among the first reserved areas REA1 to REA4 (see FIG. 8) of the first special chart reserved storage area REA of the special chart reserved storage area 412b in RAM 412 of the main control unit 4 is stored in the first special chart first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown) set corresponding to the first reserved areas REA1 to REA4 in which the special chart hit/miss information is stored. For example, when special chart win/loss information is stored in the second reserve area REA2 (see FIG. 8) of the first special chart reserve storage area REA in the special chart reserve storage area 412b, the special chart data is stored in a first special chart second reserve area corresponding area (not shown) set in correspondence with the second reserve area REA2. Also, in the first special chart reserve information update process, 1 is added to the first special chart reserve number N stored in the first special chart reserve number memory area corresponding area (not shown) of the special chart reserve storage area corresponding area.

On the other hand, the first special chart reserved image display process executed in step S3112 adds the first special chart reserved image to the first special chart reserved image display area 76 based on the special chart data added (updated) to the first special chart reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S3112.

Here, Figure 53 shows examples of special symbol data images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 before and after receiving the first special symbol hold command or the second special symbol hold command. Specifically, Figure 53(A) shows an example of a special symbol data image before receiving the first special symbol hold command or the second special symbol hold command, and Figure 53(B) is an example of a special symbol data image after receiving the first special symbol hold command for the first special symbol game in the display state of the special symbol data image shown in Figure 53(A).

Figure 53 (A) shows the special symbol variable image being displayed, with one first special symbol reserved image and two second special symbol reserved images being displayed. In other words, the example shown in Figure 53 (A) shows that the special symbol game is currently being played, the number of first special symbols reserved N for the first special symbol game is 1, and the number of second special symbols reserved M for the second special symbol game is 2.

Then, in the first special chart reserved image display process that is executed when a first special chart reserved command is received in the special chart data display state shown in Figure 53 (A), that is, when the number of reserved items for the first special chart game increases to two, the first special chart reserved image is displayed in the first special chart second reserved image display area 762 of the first special chart reserved image display area 76, as shown in Figure 53 (B), based on the special chart data stored in the first special chart second reserved area corresponding area (not shown) in the first special chart reserved storage area corresponding area in the special chart reserved storage area corresponding area.

<Step S3113>
If the received command is not a first special symbol reservation command (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a second special symbol reservation command (step S3113). The second special symbol reservation command includes information indicating that the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game will increase, information about the second special symbol reservation number M after the increase, and information about the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) for the increased second reservation and the result of the jackpot lottery.

If the received command is a second special drawing hold command (step S3113: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3114; if the received command is not a second special drawing hold command (step S3113: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3116.

<Steps S3114 and S3115>
If the received command is a second special drawing reservation command (step S3113: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a second special drawing reservation information update process (step S3114) and a second special drawing reservation image display process (step S3115), and terminates the command determination process.

Here, the second special chart reserved information update process executed in step S3114 is a process of adding (updating) special chart win/loss information data (special chart data) to the second special chart reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the above-mentioned special chart reserved storage area corresponding area. Specifically, in the second special chart reserved information update process, the special chart data corresponding to the special chart win/loss information stored in the first empty reserved area among the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 (see FIG. 8) of the second special chart reserved storage area REB in the special chart reserved storage area 412b in RAM 412 of the main control unit 4 is stored in the second special chart first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown) set corresponding to the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 in which the special chart win/loss information is stored. For example, when special chart win/loss information is stored in the third reserve area REB3 (see FIG. 8) of the second special chart reserve storage area REB in the special chart reserve storage area 412b, the special chart data is stored in the first special chart third reserve area corresponding area (not shown) set in correspondence with the third reserve area REB3. Also, in the second special chart reserve information update process, 1 is added to the second special chart reserve number M stored in the second special chart reserve number memory area corresponding area (not shown) of the special chart reserve storage area corresponding area.

On the other hand, the second special chart reserved image display process executed in step S3115 adds a second special chart reserved image to the second special chart reserved image display area 77 based on the special chart data added (updated) to the second special chart reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S3114.

Here, Figure 53 (C) is an example of a special chart data image after a second special chart hold command for a second special chart game is received in the display state of the special chart data image shown in Figure 53 (A).

In the second special chart reserved image display process that is executed when a second special chart reserved command is received in the special chart data display state shown in Figure 53 (A), i.e., when the number of reserved items for the second special chart game increases to three, the second special chart reserved image is displayed in the second special chart third reserved image display area 773 of the second special chart reserved image display area 77, as shown in Figure 53 (C), based on the special chart data stored in the second special chart third reserved area corresponding area (not shown) in the second special chart reserve storage area corresponding area in the special chart reserve storage area corresponding area.

<Step S3116>
If the received command is not the second special symbol hold command (step S3113: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S3116). The jackpot game start command is a command indicating the start of a jackpot game, and is set when a jackpot game is started in step S2204 of the jackpot game control process of Fig. 29 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3117; if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3119.

<Steps S3117 and S3118>
If a jackpot game start command is received (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a jackpot game presentation setting process (step S3117), sets the jackpot game in progress flag to on (step S3118), and terminates the command determination process.

The jackpot game effect setting process involves setting the jackpot effects, including the opening effect, open/close execution mode effect (round game effect and interval effect), and ending effect, that are executed during jackpot play.

The jackpot game in progress flag indicates that a jackpot game is currently being played, and is referenced in step S3201 of the jackpot game presentation control processing in Figure 54, which will be described later, to determine whether a jackpot game is currently being played, i.e., whether to control the progress of the jackpot game presentation.

<Step S3119>
If the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening start command (step S3119). The opening start command is a command indicating the start of the opening of a jackpot game, and is set when the opening is started in step S2208 of the jackpot game control process of Fig. 29 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is an opening start command (step S3119: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3120; if the received command is not an opening start command (step S3119: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3121.

<Step S3120>
If an opening start command is received (step S3119: Yes), the MPU 52 sets an opening effect start flag to ON (step S3120) and terminates the command determination process. The opening effect start flag is a flag that starts the opening effect of a jackpot game, and is referenced in step S3202 of the jackpot game effect control process in Figure 54 described later to determine whether or not to start the opening effect.

<Step S3121>
If the received command is not an opening start command (step S3119: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening end command (step S3121). The opening end command is a command indicating that the opening of a jackpot game is to be ended, and is set when the opening is to be ended in step S2214 of the jackpot game control process of Fig. 30 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is an opening end command (step S3121: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3122; if the received command is not an opening end command (step S3121: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3123 in FIG. 48.

<Step S3122>
If an opening end command is received (step S3121: Yes), the MPU 41 sets an opening effect end flag to ON (step S3122) and ends the command determination process. The opening effect end flag is a flag that ends the opening effect of a jackpot game, and is referenced in step S3205 of the jackpot game effect control process in Figure 54 described later to determine whether or not to end the opening effect.

<Step S3123>
If the received command is not an opening end command (step S3121: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command (step S3123), as shown in Fig. 48. The round game start command indicates the start of a round game in the opening/closing execution mode and indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time, and is set when a round game in the opening/closing execution mode is to be started in step S2217 of the jackpot game control process in Fig. 30 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is a round play start command (step S3123: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3124; if the received command is not a round play start command (step S3123: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3126.

<Steps S3124 and S3125>
If a round game start command is received (step S3123: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a round game effect start flag to ON (step S3124), sets round number information indicating which round the round game is in in the RAM 512 (step S3125), and ends the command determination process. The round game effect start flag is referenced to determine whether or not to start each round game effect of the open/close execution mode effect in step S3208 of the jackpot game effect control process in FIG. 54 described later.

<Step S3126>
If the received command is not a round game start command (step S3123: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command (step S3126). The round game end command is a command indicating that the round game in the open/close execution mode is to be ended, and is set when the round game is to be ended in step S2229 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 31 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is a round game end command (step S3126: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3127; if the received command is not a round game end command (step S3126: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3128.

<Step S3127>
If the round game end command is received (step S3126: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S3127) and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referenced when determining whether or not to end the round game effect in step S3211 of the jackpot game effect control process in FIG. 54, which will be described later.

<Step S3128>
If the received command is not a round game end command (step S3126: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval start command (step S3128). The interval start command is a command that indicates the start of an interval between round games in the open/close execution mode, and is set when an interval is to be started in step S2233 of the jackpot game control process of Figure 31 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

Here, if the received command is an interval start command (step S3128: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3129; if the received command is not an interval start command (step S3128: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3130.

<Step S3129>
If the received command is an interval start command (step S3128: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect start flag to ON (step S3129) and ends the command determination process. The interval effect start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to start the interval effect in step S3214 of the jackpot game effect control process in FIG. 54, which will be described later.

<Step S3130>
If the received command is not an interval start command (step S3128: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval end command (step S3130). The interval end command is a command indicating the end of the interval between rounds of play in the open/close execution mode, and is set when the interval is to be ended in step S2239 of the jackpot game control process of Fig. 32 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

Here, if the received command is an interval end command (step S3130: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3131; if the received command is not an interval end command (step S3130: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3132.

<Step S3131>
If the received command is an interval end command (step S3130: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect end flag to ON (step S3131) and ends the command determination process. The interval effect end flag is referenced when determining whether or not to end the interval effect in step S3217 of the jackpot game effect control process in FIG. 54, which will be described later.

<Step S3132>
If the received command is not an interval end command (step S3130: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command (step S3132). The ending start command is a command that indicates the start of an ending in a jackpot game, and is set when starting an ending in step S2242 of the jackpot game control process in Figure 31 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

Here, if the received command is an ending start command (step S3132: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3133; if the received command is not an ending start command (step S3132: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3134.

<Step S3133>
If the received command is an ending start command (step S3132: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag to ON (step S3133) and ends the command determination process. The ending effect start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to start the ending effect in step S3220 of the jackpot game effect control process in Figure 54, which will be described later.

<Step S3134>
If the received command is not an ending start command (step S3132: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending end command (step S3134). The ending end command is a command indicating that the ending of the jackpot game is to end, and is set when the ending is to be ended in step S2248 of the jackpot game control process of Fig. 32 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

Here, if the received command is an ending end command (step S3134: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3135; if the received command is not an ending end command (step S3134: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3136.

<Step S3135>
If the received command is an ending end command (step S3134: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect end flag to ON (step S3135) and ends the command determination process. The ending effect end flag is referenced when determining whether or not to end the ending effect in step S3223 of the jackpot game effect control process in Figure 54, which will be described later.

<Step S3136>
If the received command is not an ending end command (step S3134: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S3136). The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set when the jackpot game is to be ended in step S2250 of the jackpot game control process of Fig. 29 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S3136: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3137; if the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S3136: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3139.

<Step S3137>
If the received command is a command to end a jackpot game (step S3136: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is currently being played, to off (step S3137), and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3138>
If the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S3136: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4 (step S3138) and terminates the command determination processing.

[Jackpot game presentation control processing]
Next, an example of the procedure for the jackpot game presentation control process executed in step S2705 of the sub-timer interrupt process in Fig. 42 will be described. In the jackpot game presentation control process, a process is executed to control the jackpot game presentation according to the progress of the jackpot game based on the jackpot game presentation set in the jackpot game presentation setting process in step S3117 of the command determination process in Fig. 47. Here, Fig. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game presentation control process. Below, the jackpot game presentation control process will be described with reference to Fig. 54.

<Step S3201>
54, in the jackpot game presentation control process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3201). The jackpot game in progress flag is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed, and is set to ON when a jackpot game start command is received in step S3118 of the command determination process in FIG. 47. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a jackpot game is being executed.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3202. On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 51 terminates the jackpot game presentation control process.

<Step S3202>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the opening effect start flag is set to ON (step S3202). The opening effect start flag is a flag that starts the opening effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when an opening start command is received in step S3120 of the command determination process of Fig. 47. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the opening effect.

If the opening performance start flag is set to on (step S3202: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start the opening performance, the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S3203. On the other hand, if the opening performance start flag is set to off (step S3202: No), i.e., if it is not time to start the opening performance, the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S3205.

<Steps S3203 and S3204>
If the opening effect start flag is set to ON (step S3202: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the opening effect, the MPU 51 executes a process to start the opening effect set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S3117 in the command determination process of Fig. 47 (step S3203). Then, the MPU 51 sets the opening effect start flag to OFF (step S3204), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S3205>
If the opening effect start flag is set to OFF (step S3202: No), i.e., if it is not the timing to start the opening effect, the MPU 51 determines whether the opening effect end flag is set to ON (step S3205). The opening effect end flag is a flag that ends the opening effect of a jackpot game, and is set to ON when an opening end command is received in step S3122 of the command determination process of Figure 47. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the timing to end the opening effect.

If the opening performance end flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the opening performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3206. On the other hand, if the opening performance end flag is set to OFF (step S3205: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the opening performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3208.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
If the opening effect end flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the opening effect, the MPU 51 executes a process to end the opening effect (step S3206).Then, the MPU 51 sets the opening effect end flag to OFF (step S3207), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S3208>
If the opening effect end flag is set to OFF (step S3205: No), that is, if it is not the time to end the opening effect, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect start flag is set to ON (step S3208). The round game effect start flag is a flag that starts the round game effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when a round game start command is received in step S3124 of the command determination process of FIG. 48. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the time to start the round game effect.

If the round game effect start flag is set to ON (step S3208: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start the round game effect, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3209. On the other hand, if the round game effect start flag is set to OFF (step S3208: No), i.e., if it is not time to start the round game effect, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3211.

<Steps S3209 and S3210>
If the round game effect start flag is set to ON (step S3208: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the round game effect, the MPU 51 executes a process to start the round game effect of the jackpot game effect set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S3117 in the command determination process of Fig. 47 (step S3209). Then, the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to OFF (step S3210), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S3211>
If the round game effect start flag is set to OFF (step S3208: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the round game effect, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect end flag is set to ON (step S3211). The round game effect end flag is a flag that ends the round game effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when a round game end command is received in step S3127 of the command determination process of FIG. 48. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the round game effect.

If the round game effect end flag is set to ON (step S3211: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the round game effect, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3212. On the other hand, if the round game effect end flag is set to OFF (step S3211: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the round game effect, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3214.

<Steps S3212 and S3213>
If the round game effect end flag is set to ON (step S3211: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the round game effect, the MPU 51 executes a process to end the round game effect (step S3212).Then, the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to OFF (step S3213), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S3214>
If the round game effect end flag is set to OFF (step S3211: No), that is, if it is not the time to end the round game effect, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the interval effect start flag is set to ON (step S3214). The interval effect start flag is a flag that starts the interval effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when an interval start command is received in step S3129 of the command determination process in Fig. 48. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the time to start the round game effect.

If the interval performance start flag is set to on (step S3214: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start the interval performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3215. On the other hand, if the interval performance start flag is set to off (step S3214: No), i.e., if it is not time to start the interval performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3217.

<Steps S3215 and S3216>
If the interval effect start flag is set to ON (step S3214: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the interval effect, the MPU 51 executes a process to start the interval effect of the jackpot game effect set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S3117 in the command determination process of Fig. 47 (step S3215). Then, the MPU 51 sets the interval effect start flag to OFF (step S3216), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S3217>
If the interval effect start flag is set to OFF (step S3214: No), that is, if it is not the time to start the interval effect, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the interval effect end flag is set to ON (step S3217). The interval effect end flag is a flag that ends the interval effect of a jackpot game, and is set to ON when an interval end command is received in step S3131 of the command determination process of Fig. 48. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the time to end the interval effect.

If the interval performance end flag is set to on (step S3217: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S3218. On the other hand, if the interval performance end flag is set to off (step S3217: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S3220.

<Steps S3218 and S3219>
If the interval effect end flag is set to ON (step S3217: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the interval effect, the MPU 51 executes a process to end the interval effect (step S3218).Then, the MPU 51 sets the interval effect end flag to OFF (step S3219), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S3220>
If the interval presentation effect end flag is set to OFF (step S3217: No), i.e., if it is not the time to end the interval presentation effect, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending presentation effect start flag is set to ON (step S3220). The ending presentation effect start flag is a flag that starts the ending presentation effect of a jackpot game, and is set to ON when an ending start command is received in step S3133 of the command determination process of FIG. 48. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the time to start the ending presentation effect.

If the ending performance start flag is set to ON (step S3220: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start the ending performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3221. On the other hand, if the ending performance start flag is set to OFF (step S3220: No), i.e., if it is not time to start the ending performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3223.

<Steps S3221 and S3222>
If the ending effect start flag is set to ON (step S3220: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 executes a process to start the ending effect of the jackpot game effect set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S3117 in the command determination process of Fig. 47 (step S3221). Then, the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag to OFF (step S3222), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S3223>
If the ending effect start flag is set to OFF (step S3220: No), that is, if it is not the time to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 determines whether the ending effect end flag is set to ON (step S3223). The ending effect end flag is a flag that ends the ending effect of a jackpot game, and is set to ON when an ending end command is received in step S3135 of the command determination process of FIG. 48. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the time to end the ending effect.

If the ending effect end flag is set to ON (step S3223: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the ending effect, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3224. On the other hand, if the ending effect end flag is set to OFF (step S3223: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the ending effect, the MPU 51 terminates the jackpot game effect control process.

<Steps S3224 and S3225>
If the ending effect end flag is set to ON (step S3223: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the ending effect, the MPU 51 executes a process to end the ending effect (step S3224).Then, the MPU 51 sets the ending effect end flag to OFF (step S3225), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

Other Embodiments
Other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. In the following other embodiments, the same configurations and steps as those of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment will not be described. It should be noted that the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment and the other embodiments described below can be selected and combined as desired.

Second Embodiment
As mentioned above, some gaming machines reserve the right to play a game with a first special symbol (first special symbol game) triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning slot. In such gaming machines, when a predetermined hold occurs (for example, a hold where the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot or a hold with a long variable display time), the same, similar, or similar effect (continuous hold effect) that clearly indicates or suggests the expectation that the jackpot lottery result for the predetermined hold will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation) is executed consecutively for a predetermined number of first special symbol games for a predetermined number of holds at the time the predetermined hold occurs.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, some gaming machines are equipped with a second winning slot into which a gaming ball can enter by opening an electric device such as an electric tulip, and a game using a second special symbol (second special symbol game) triggered by a gaming ball entering the second winning slot is executed in priority over a first special symbol game for a gaming ball entering the first winning slot. Here, the reason that the second special symbol game is executed in priority over the first special symbol game is that the second special symbol game can provide greater benefits to the player than the first special symbol game (for example, a higher probability of a special bonus, a larger average number of rounds played), while the first special symbol game can result in disadvantages not present in the second special symbol game (for example, a fall back to normal play state).

Some gaming machines of this type execute a special effect (second special effect) that clearly indicates or suggests that a special bonus (for example, the execution of a special jackpot game after the second special game has ended) will be awarded when a jackpot symbol stops or a reach occurs during the second special game.

However, in a gaming machine where the second special symbol game is executed with priority over the first special symbol game and the second special symbol special effect is executed in the second special symbol game, if the consecutive hold effects are scheduled to be executed consecutively for multiple first special symbol games (Special 1 relevant variation + Special 1 reserve 1 + Special 1 reserve 2) as shown in Figure 55 (A), and a game ball enters the second winning slot while the Special 1 relevant variation is being executed as shown in Figure 55 (B), the second special symbol game will be executed after the variation (Special 1 relevant variation) for which the consecutive hold effects are being executed has ended as shown in Figure 55 (C), and the second special symbol special effect will be executed in the second special symbol game, causing the consecutive hold effects to be interrupted midway.

As shown in Figure 55 (D), if the first special symbol game is played after the second special symbol game has ended and the scheduled consecutive hold effect for the first special symbol game is not performed (Pattern 1), and the player remembers that the consecutive hold effect was played before the second special symbol special effect was played, there is a concern that the player will feel uncomfortable that the consecutive hold effect was not played, which will reduce their interest in the game. In particular, if the number of times the second special symbol game (second special symbol special effect) has been played is small, there is a high possibility that the player will remember that the consecutive hold effect was played before the second special symbol special effect was played, and therefore there is a high possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable that the consecutive hold effect was not played after the second special symbol game (second special symbol special effect) has ended.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 55 (E), when the first special symbol game is played after the second special symbol game has ended and the reserved continuous effect is resumed (pattern 2), if the player has forgotten that the reserved continuous effect was played before the second special symbol special effect was played, there is a concern that the player will feel uncomfortable about the reserved continuous effect being played and that their interest in the game will decrease. In particular, if the second special symbol game (second special symbol special effect) is played many times, it will take a long time for the reserved continuous effect to be resumed, making it more likely that the player will have forgotten that the reserved continuous effect was played before the second special symbol special effect was played, and therefore more likely that the player will feel uncomfortable about the reserved continuous effect being resumed after the second special symbol game (second special symbol special effect) has ended.

In contrast, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the opening mode of the second winning opening by the electric device is set to a first opening, which is a first time (a short opening in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning opening), and a second opening, which is a second time in which the opening time of the second winning opening by the electric device is longer than the first time (a long opening in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second winning opening).

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when a continuous hold effect is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, if it is scheduled that the continuous hold effect will be executed consecutively in the next first special symbol game that is on hold (for example, Special 1 relevant variation + Special 1 hold 1 + Special 1 hold 2 (see Figure 55 (A))), when a game ball enters the second winning port due to a short opening of the second winning port, as shown in Figure 56 (A), the continuous hold effect that was being executed in the first special symbol game will continue to be executed in the second special symbol game that is executed after the end of the first special symbol game as the variation. That is, in this embodiment, when a reserve continuous effect is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, if the reserve continuous effect is scheduled to be executed consecutively in the next reserved first special symbol game, even if a game ball enters the second prize entry port due to a short opening of the second prize entry port, the second special symbol special effect will not be executed in the second special symbol game triggered by the game ball entering the second prize entry port when the second prize entry port is short-opened, and the reserve continuous effect will continue to be executed. Therefore, when a reserve continuous effect is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, if the reserve continuous effect is scheduled to be executed consecutively in the next reserved first special symbol game, the player will not feel uncomfortable that the reserve continuous effect will not be executed after the end of the second special symbol game triggered by the game ball entering the second prize entry port when the second prize entry port is short-opened. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the reserve continuous effect not being executed in the first special symbol game executed after the end of the second special symbol game.

In particular, when the second winning opening is short-open, it is more difficult for game balls to enter the second winning opening (fewer balls enter) than when the second winning opening is long-open, and there is a high possibility that the player will remember that the continuous hold effect was executed before the second special symbol game was played. Therefore, when the second winning opening is short-open, the effect of the continuous hold effect continuing to be executed without the second special symbol special effect being executed in the second special symbol game when a game ball enters the second winning opening is great.

Furthermore, in a short opening where it is difficult for game balls to enter the second winning opening, it is expected that the number of game balls that enter the second winning opening will be small. Therefore, even if the continuous hold effect is continuously executed in a second special symbol game due to a game ball entering the second winning opening when the second winning opening is short, the number of continuous executions of the continuous hold effect will not increase significantly, so it is unlikely that players will feel uncomfortable with the continuous execution of the continuous hold effect in the second special symbol game. In fact, by continuously executing the continuous hold effect in the second special symbol game, the continuous hold effect can be effectively utilized in the second special symbol game.

In this embodiment, if the second special symbol special effect is not executed during the second special symbol game due to a game ball entering the second special symbol opening when the second special symbol opening is partially open and the continuous hold effect continues to be executed, the continuous hold effect will be resumed during the first special symbol game that is executed after the second special symbol game ends, but it is not necessary to resume the continuous hold effect during the first special symbol game.

The continuous hold effect may be executed as an effect clearly indicating that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. For example, if a specified continuous hold effect is executed for a specified number of consecutive special symbol games (e.g., four times), the result of the jackpot lottery for the specified number of special symbol games may be clearly indicated as a jackpot. On the other hand, if the second prize winning slot is partially open and the continuous hold effect is executed continuously without the second special symbol special effect being executed in a second special symbol game in which a game ball enters the second prize winning slot, the continuous hold effect may be executed in more than the specified number of special symbol games. Therefore, if the continuous hold effect is executed continuously without the second special symbol special effect being executed in a second special symbol game in which a game ball enters the second prize winning slot in which the second prize winning slot is partially open, and if the continuous hold effect corresponds to a specified continuous hold effect, the specified continuous hold effect will be executed more than the specified number of times. In other words, if a predetermined continuous hold effect is scheduled to be executed consecutively in multiple first special symbol games, and the predetermined continuous hold effect is executed continuously in a second special symbol game, there is a possibility that a discrepancy will arise between the result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the predetermined continuous hold effect (that it is a jackpot) and the actual result of the jackpot lottery.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, if a situation arises in which a discrepancy occurs between the result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the predetermined continuous hold effect (that it is a jackpot) and the actual result of the jackpot lottery, processing is executed to prevent the number of consecutive special symbol games in which the predetermined continuous hold effect is executed from reaching the predetermined number. For example, in special symbol games before the number of consecutive special symbol games in which the predetermined continuous hold effect is executed reaches the predetermined number, or in special symbol games in which the predetermined number of consecutive special symbol games has been reached, the predetermined continuous hold effect is not executed, and instead is changed to a continuous hold effect other than the predetermined continuous hold effect and executed.

In this way, in this embodiment, if a situation arises in which a contradiction occurs between the result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the specified continuous hold effect (that it is a jackpot) and the actual result of the jackpot lottery, the type of continuous hold effect is changed and executed so that the number of consecutive special symbol games in which the specified continuous hold effect is executed does not reach the specified number, thereby preventing a contradiction from occurring between the result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the specified continuous hold effect (that it is a jackpot) and the actual result of the jackpot lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the hold continuous effect is scheduled to be executed consecutively in multiple first special symbol games (for example, Special 1 relevant variation + Special 1 hold 1 + Special 1 hold 2 (see FIG. 55(A))), when a game ball enters the second winning port due to the long opening of the second winning port, the second special symbol special effect is executed in the second special symbol game executed after the end of the first special symbol game (Special 1 relevant variation), as shown in FIG. 56(B). At the time of execution of this second special symbol special effect, it is clearly indicated or suggested that a hold continuous effect was executed before the execution of the second special symbol special effect. For example, on the image display means that displays the second special symbol special effect as an image, the type of hold continuous effect that was executed before the execution of the second special symbol special effect is displayed as a captured image, etc. Of course, at the time of execution of the second special symbol special effect, the clear indication or suggestion that a hold continuous effect was executed before the execution of the second special symbol special effect is not limited to displaying a captured image of the hold continuous effect on the image display means, and other methods may be used, as described below.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol special effect is executed, it is explicitly or implied that the hold continuous effect was executed before the execution of the second special symbol special effect. This prevents the player from forgetting that the hold continuous effect was executed before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and allows the player to understand that the hold continuous effect will resume after the second special symbol special effect ends. Therefore, even if the hold continuous effect resumes after the end of the second special symbol special effect, the player is significantly less likely to feel uncomfortable about the hold continuous effect being executed after the end of the second special symbol special effect. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the hold continuous effect that was executed before the execution of the second special symbol special effect resuming after the end of the second special symbol special effect.

In particular, when the second winning slot is long-opened in a game where a long-opening regular symbol is won, the player will be absorbed for a longer period of time in determining whether or not the game ball will land in the second winning slot, compared to when the second winning slot is short-opened in a game where a short-opening regular symbol is won. This increases the likelihood that the player will forget that a continuous hold effect was being executed before the second special symbol game was played. Furthermore, when the second winning slot is long-opened in a game where a long-opening regular symbol is won, it is easier for the game ball to land in the second winning slot (more balls enter), compared to when the second winning slot is short-opened in a game where a short-opening regular symbol is won, so the number of second special symbol games in which the second special symbol special effect is executed is greater (the execution time of the second special symbol special effect is longer). Therefore, the time between the end of the continuous hold effect before the execution of the second special symbol effect (the start of the second special symbol effect) and the resumption of the continuous hold effect due to the end of the second special symbol effect is longer, and players pay more attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game in which the second special symbol effect is executed is a jackpot, compared to when the first special symbol game is executed. Thus, when the second winning slot 315 is long-opened in a long-open normal symbol game, compared to when the second winning slot 315 is short-opened in a short-open normal symbol game, players are more likely to forget that the continuous hold effect was executed before the execution of the second special symbol game. Therefore, the effect of clearly indicating or suggesting, during the execution of the second special symbol effect, that the continuous hold effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol effect is significant.

This embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 57 to 81.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Sort table]
While the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above was configured as a so-called loop probability variable machine, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as an ST machine. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment uses a different allocation table used by the main control device 4 to allocate jackpot types when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Here, Figure 57 is a diagram showing an example of an allocation table used by the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.

In the example shown in FIG. 57, when the type of special symbol game is a first special symbol game triggered by winning the first winning slot 314, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R special symbol jackpot is 10 from 0 to 9, the number of random numbers that result in a 16R special symbol jackpot is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that result in a 5R regular jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of special symbol game is a second special symbol game triggered by winning the second winning slot 315, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R special symbol jackpot is 10 from 0 to 9, the number of random numbers that result in a 16R special symbol jackpot is 10 from 10 to 19, and there is no random number that results in a 5R regular jackpot. In other words, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a special symbol jackpot in the first special symbol game is 75%, while the probability of a special symbol jackpot in the second special symbol game is 100%. Therefore, when second winning slot 315 is opened long due to a long-open normal winning, if the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot in the second special winning game for game ball 99 entering second winning slot 315, it will be a 100% probability jackpot. In other words, if a jackpot is announced during the hold charge release described below (see Figures 61(B) and 61(C)), when the hold for the second special winning game for a long-open normal winning is released, it will be a probability jackpot.

In either the first or second special symbol game, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability jackpot, the game will transition to a probability jackpot game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the jackpot game ends. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, an upper limit (100 in this embodiment) is set for the number of special symbol games (ST count) that can be executed in the probability jackpot game state, and if the result of the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot within this upper limit of special symbol games, the game will transition to a normal game state after the execution of the upper limit of special symbol games. Note that the number of special symbol games in the probability jackpot game state is not limited to 100 and may be any other number.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the game will transition to a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the jackpot game ends. In this embodiment, an upper limit (100 times in this embodiment) is set for the number of special symbol games (time-saving number of times) that can be played in the time-saving game state, and if the result of the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot within this upper limit of special symbol games, the game will transition to a normal game state after the upper limit of special symbol games has been played. Note that the number of special symbol games in the time-saving game state is not limited to 100 and may be any other number.

The transition from the special game state to the normal game state is not limited to when a special game with the upper limit value is executed, but may also be executed, for example, when a state transition lottery (fall-down lottery) is won.

[Processing of the voice and lamp control device 5]
In this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 5 executes sub-timer interrupt processing and the like in the same manner as in the first embodiment, but the command determination processing of this embodiment differs in part from that of the first embodiment. Below, the command determination processing of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 58 to 60, focusing on the differences from the command determination processing of the first embodiment.

[Command Determination Processing]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, a process is executed to control the effects to be executed in the symbol display unit 341 and the like depending on the type of the received command.

Here, Figures 58 to 60 are flowcharts showing an example of the command determination processing procedure of this embodiment.

<Step S3301>
58, in the command determination process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received (step S3301). If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3302. If the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S3301: No), the command determination process ends.

<Step S3302>
When a command is received (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a normal map fluctuation pattern command (step S3302). When a normal map fluctuation pattern command is received (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3303. When the received command is not a normal map fluctuation pattern command (step S3302: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3307.

The normal symbol variation pattern command includes information regarding the normal symbol variation display time in the normal symbol display unit 361, the lottery results for the normal symbol winning lottery, and the type of support mode (high frequency support mode, low frequency support mode).

<Step S3303>
When a normal map fluctuation pattern command is received (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the mode is high-frequency support mode or not based on information regarding the type of support mode (high-frequency support mode or low-frequency support mode) contained in the received normal map fluctuation pattern command (step S3303).

If the MPU 51 is in high frequency support mode (step S3303: Yes), it terminates the command determination process. Note that if the MPU 51 is in high frequency support mode (step S3303: Yes), it may set the high frequency support mode flag, which indicates high frequency support mode, to on and then terminate the command determination process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 41 is not in high-frequency support mode (step S3303: No), i.e., if the MPU 41 is in low-frequency support mode, it proceeds to step S3304. Note that if the MPU 51 is in low-frequency support mode (step S3303: No) and the high-frequency support mode flag is set to on, it may set the high-frequency support mode flag to off and then terminate the command determination process.

<Step S3304>
If the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (step S3303: No), i.e., if the mode is the low-frequency support mode, the MPU 51 determines whether a jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being executed, is set to ON (step S3304). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S2206 when a jackpot game starts, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3304: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S3304: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3305.

<Step S3305>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is set to off (step S3304: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the regular map winning lottery for the regular map game being started this time is a long-open winning lottery based on information regarding the result of the regular map winning lottery contained in the received regular map variation pattern command (step S3305).

If the result of the regular winning lottery for the regular game being started this time is a long opening win (step S3305: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3306. On the other hand, if the result of the regular winning lottery for the regular game being started this time is not a long opening win (step S3305: No), that is, if the result of the regular winning lottery is a short opening win or a miss, the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

<Step S3306>
If the result of the normal winning lottery for the normal game being started this time is a long opening win (step S3305: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the long opening flag to ON (S3306) and terminates the command determination process. That is, the long opening flag indicates that the result of the normal winning lottery for the normal game in the normal game mode (low frequency support mode), not during a jackpot game or in a high frequency support mode (probability change game mode, time-saving game mode), is a long opening win, in which a long opening normal game is executed, allowing the game ball 99 to enter the second winning slot 315 by the long opening of the electric device 315b. This long opening flag is referenced in step S3308, described below, when determining whether the opening mode of the second winning slot 315 in a normal winning game in the normal game mode is a long opening.

<Step S3307>
If the received command is not a normal map variation pattern command (step S3302: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an electric device opening command indicating that the opening of the electric device 315b will allow the game ball 99 to enter the second winning slot 315 (starting a normal map winning game) (step S3307).

If the received command is a normal map fluctuation pattern command (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3308; if the received command is not a normal map fluctuation pattern command (step S3307: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3312 in FIG. 59.

<Step S3308>
If the received command is a normal map variation pattern command (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the long opening flag, which indicates that the result of the normal map winning lottery is a long opening winning lottery, is set on (step S3308).

If the long release flag is set to on (step S3308: Yes), i.e., if the result of the regular winning lottery is a long release win, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3309. On the other hand, if the long release flag is set to off (step S3308: No), i.e., if the result of the regular winning lottery is a short release win, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
If the long opening flag is set to on (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the long opening flag to off (step S3309), executes processing to start the long opening performance of the electric role device (step S3310), and transitions to step S3311.

The "During Long Opening of Electric Reel" effect is an effect that clearly indicates to the player on the symbol display unit 341 or the like that the electric reel 315b is fully opened. Figure 61(A) shows an example screen on the symbol display unit 341 while the "During Long Opening of Electric Reel" effect is being executed. In the example of Figure 61(A), while the "During Long Opening of Electric Reel" effect is being executed, the symbol display unit 341 displays a text image that reads "Pending Charge Chance in Progress," indicating that the second winning slot 315 is fully opened, and a text image that reads "Put the ball in the tulip below," encouraging the player to shoot the game ball 99 toward the second winning slot 315. Of course, the "During Long Opening of Electric Reel" effect is not limited to the example of Figure 61(A) and may take other forms. For example, the performance during the long opening of the electric role device may display other images such as character images instead of or in addition to text images, and may also execute audio performance using the speaker 26 instead of or in addition to the performance on the pattern display unit 341.

The process for starting the long opening effect of the electric device is executed when the long opening flag is set to on. However, as mentioned above, the long opening flag is not set to on in the jackpot game state, the high probability game state, or the time-limited game state (high frequency support mode). In other words, the long opening effect of the electric device is executed when the second winning slot 315 is long-opened in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), but is not executed when the second winning slot 315 is short-opened in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), in the jackpot game state, the high probability game state (high frequency support mode), or the time-limited game state. Of course, the long opening effect of the electric device may be executed when the second winning slot 315 is short-opened in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), as well as in the high probability game state or the time-limited game state.

<Step S3311>
58, in step S3311, the MPU 51 sets the electric accessory long open flag, which indicates that the electric accessory 315b is long open, to ON, and ends the command determination process. Note that, when the game ball 99 enters the second winning slot 315, the electric accessory long open flag is referenced in step S3319 in FIG. 59 described later to determine whether the ball has entered the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315.

<Step S3312>
If the received command is not a normal symbol variation pattern command (step S3307: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol shift command (step S3312), as shown in Fig. 59. As described above, the special symbol shift command is a command indicating that the special symbol win/loss information indicating the result of the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA, or the first special symbol reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB (see Fig. 8), has shifted when the first special symbol reserve number N or the second special symbol reserve number M decreases due to the start of the special symbol game (special symbol variation display).

If the received command is a special drawing shift command (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3313; if the received command is not a special drawing shift command (step S3312: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3317.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
If the received command is a special drawing shift command (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a special drawing data setting process (step S3313) and a special drawing data image display process (step S3314), and proceeds to step S3315. The special drawing data setting process (step S3313) and the special drawing data image display process (step S3314) of this embodiment are executed in the same manner as the special drawing data setting process (step S3108) and the special drawing data image display process (step S3109) in the command determination process of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above.

<Steps S3315 and S3316>
In step S3315, the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the long opening winning counter is 0. The value of the long opening winning counter indicates the number of unexecuted second special symbol games among the second special symbol games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 while the second winning hole 315 is long-open (during the execution of the long opening normal symbol winning game).

If the value of the long opening winning counter is 0 (step S3315: Yes), that is, if there are no unexecuted second special symbol games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 while the second winning port 315 is long open (while a long opening normal symbol winning game is being executed), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3317. On the other hand, if the value of the long opening winning counter is not 0 (step S3315: No), that is, if there are unexecuted second special symbol games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 while the second winning port 315 is long open (while a long opening normal symbol winning game is being executed), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the long opening winning counter (step S3316) and terminates the command determination process.

<Steps S3317 and S3318>
If the value of the long opening winning counter is 0 (step S3315: Yes), that is, if there are no unexecuted second special symbol games among the second special symbol games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 while the second winning hole 315 is long-open (during the execution of the long opening normal symbol winning game), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the short opening winning counter is 0 (step S3317). Note that the value of the short opening winning counter indicates the number of unexecuted second special symbol games among the second special symbol games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 while the second winning hole 315 is short-open (during the execution of the short opening normal symbol winning game).

If the value of the short-open winning counter is 0 (step S3317: Yes), that is, if there are no unexecuted second special symbol games among the second special symbol games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 while the second winning port 315 is short-open (during the execution of a short-open normal symbol winning game), the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the value of the short-open winning counter is not 0 (step S3317: No), that is, if there are unexecuted second special symbol games among the second special symbol games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 while the second winning port 315 is short-open (during the execution of a short-open normal symbol winning game), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the short-open winning counter (step S3318) and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3319>
If the received command is not a special symbol shift command (step S3312: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a first special symbol reservation command (step S3319). As described above, the first special symbol reservation command includes information indicating that the first special symbol reservation number N for the first special symbol increases, information about the reservation number N after the increase, and information about the fluctuation pattern (variation display time and the result of the jackpot lottery) for the increased reservation.

If the received command is a first special drawing hold command (step S3319: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3320; if the received command is not a first special drawing hold command (step S3319: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3323.

<Steps S3320 to S3322>
If the received command is a first special chart reserve command (step S3319: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a first special chart reserve information update process (step S3320) and a first special chart reserve image display process (step S3321). Note that the first special chart reserve information update process (step S3320) and the first special chart reserve image display process (step S3321) in this embodiment are executed in the same manner as the first special chart reserve information update process (step S3111) and the first special chart reserve image display process (step S3112) in the command determination process of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above.

Furthermore, the MPU 51 executes the hold continuous effect setting process (step S3322) and terminates the command determination process.

Here, the hold continuous effect setting process is a process for setting a hold continuous effect that is executed consecutively for a predetermined hold in the first special symbol hold, in a predetermined number of first special symbol games up to the first special symbol game in which the predetermined hold changes, or in a second special symbol game for a predetermined number of holds executed before the predetermined hold, with the same, similar, or similar effect that clearly indicates or suggests the likelihood of the lottery result being a jackpot. Details of the hold continuous effect setting process will be explained later with reference to Figures 62 to 65.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a consecutive hold effect is executed for a predetermined number of consecutive first special symbol games, if the effect executed in each first special symbol game is executed in a single first special symbol game for a single hold executed before the predetermined hold, this does not technically qualify as a "consecutive effect," but for convenience it will be included in the consecutive hold effect.

<Step S3323>
If the received command is not a first special symbol reservation command (step S3319: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a second special symbol reservation command (step S3323). As described above, the second special symbol reservation command includes information indicating that the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game will increase, information about the reservation number M after the increase, and information about the fluctuation pattern for the increased reservation (variation display time and result of jackpot lottery).

If the received command is a second special drawing hold command (step S3323: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3324; if the received command is not a second special drawing hold command (step S3323: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3330 in FIG. 60.

<Steps S3324 and S3325>
If the received command is a second special chart reserve command (step S3323: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a second special chart reserve information update process (step S3324) and a second special chart reserve image display process (step S3325), and proceeds to S3326. Note that the second special chart reserve information update process (step S3324) and the second special chart reserve image display process (step S3325) in this embodiment are executed in the same manner as the second special chart reserve information update process (step S3114) and the second special chart reserve image display process (step S3115) in the command determination process of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above.

<Step S3326>
In step S3326, the MPU 51 determines whether the electric accessory long opening flag is set to ON. The electric accessory long opening flag is a flag indicating that the second winning slot 315 is long opening (a long opening normal winning game is being executed). Therefore, if the electric accessory long opening flag is set to ON when the MPU 51 receives the second special symbol hold command, it can determine that the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 was triggered by the long opening of the second winning slot 315 (execution of a long opening normal winning game). On the other hand, if the electric device long opening flag is set to off when the MPU 51 receives the second special symbol hold command, it can determine that the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 was not triggered by the long opening of the second winning port 315 (execution of a game that wins on a long opening normal symbol), but rather by the short opening of the second winning port 315 (execution of a game that wins on a short opening normal symbol).

If the electric reel length open flag is set to on (step S3326: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3327; if the electric reel length open flag is set to off (step S3326: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3329.

<Step S3327>
If the electric device long opening flag is set to ON (step S3326: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the long opening winning counter (step S3327) and proceeds to step S3328. Thus, the value of the long opening winning counter is incremented by 1 when the second winning slot 315 is long open (a long opening normal winning game is being played) and the reserved number M for the second special winning game has not reached the upper limit, and a game ball 99 enters the second winning slot 315. On the other hand, as described above, the value of the long opening winning counter is decremented by 1 when the second special winning game is played in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 when the second winning slot 315 is long open (a long opening normal winning game is being played). In other words, the value of the long-open winning counter indicates the number of unexecuted second special symbol games among the second special symbol games triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second winning symbol port 315 while the second winning symbol port 315 is long-open (while a long-open normal symbol winning game is being executed).

<Step S3328>
In step S3328, the MPU 51 executes a second special symbol special effect setting process to execute a second special symbol special effect in a second special symbol game.

Here, the second special symbol special effect is executed on the condition that the electric device long opening flag is set to ON. On the other hand, as mentioned above, the electric device long opening flag is not set to ON in the jackpot game state, the probability variation game state, or the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode), but is set to ON when the result of the normal symbol winning lottery in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) is a long opening win. In other words, the second special symbol special effect is executed when game ball 99 enters second winning slot 315 in a long opening normal symbol winning game, which is executed based on the result of the normal symbol winning lottery in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) being a long opening win.

Of course, the performance during the long opening of the electric device may be executed based on the game ball 99 entering the second winning slot 315 during the short opening of the second winning slot 315 in the normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), or during the opening of the second winning slot 315 in the probability variation game mode or the time-limited game mode.

Here, Figures 61(B) and 61(C) are diagrams showing example screens on the symbol display unit 341 while the second special symbol special effect is being executed. Specifically, Figure 61(B) is an example screen on the symbol display unit 341 while the second special symbol special effect is being executed when a continuous hold effect is not executed after the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and Figure 61(C) is an example screen on the symbol display unit 341 while the second special symbol special effect is being executed when a continuous hold effect is executed before the execution of the second special symbol special effect and a continuous hold effect is executed after the execution of the second special symbol special effect (see Figure 56(B)).

In the examples of Figures 61(B) and 61(C), while the second special symbol special effect is being executed, the symbol display section 341 displays the text image "Reserved charge being released" and the text image "If you hit the jackpot while reserved charge is released, you will enter a special bonus!".

The text image "Reserved charge opening" clearly indicates to the player that the variable display is being executed in response to the game ball 99 entering the second winning slot 315 when the second winning slot 315 is long-opened during a long-open normal winning game in normal play mode. This text image "Reserved charge opening" is displayed in an area of the pattern display unit 341 adjacent to the top of the special symbol variable image display area 75 and second special symbol reserved image display area 77, which does not obstruct the variable display of the decorative symbols. This makes it possible to clearly indicate or suggest to the player that the second special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol data images (the special symbol game image and second special symbol reserved image) displayed in the special symbol variable image display area 75 and second special symbol reserved image display area 77 is a second special symbol game in response to the game ball 99 entering the second winning slot 315 during long opening, without obstructing the variable display of the decorative symbols.

The text image "If you hit a jackpot while the reserved charge is released, you will enter a special bonus!" is displayed on the condition that the decorative symbols stop and display as a jackpot symbol (for example, a double number) during the special game, and clearly indicates to the player that if this condition is met, the jackpot type will be a special bonus jackpot. This text image "If you hit a jackpot while the reserved charge is released, you will enter a special bonus!" is displayed in an area adjacent to the top of the symbol display section 341 that does not obstruct the display of the changing decorative symbols.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, in the jackpot lottery that is executed when the gaming ball 99 enters the second winning slot 315, if the lottery result is a jackpot, there is no allocation of a normal jackpot, and it is always a probability jackpot (see Figure 57). Therefore, in this embodiment, as the second special symbol special effect that is executed when the gaming ball enters the second winning slot 315 in a long-open normal symbol win game in normal play mode, if the lottery result in a jackpot game is a jackpot, it is possible to clearly indicate that the jackpot type is a probability jackpot without interfering with the display of the changing decorative symbols.

In the examples shown in Figures 61 (B) and 61 (C), when the second special symbol special effect is executed, the special symbol data image (the special symbol game image and the second special symbol reserved image) is displayed in the special symbol variable image display area 75 and the second special symbol reserved image display area 77 in the symbol display unit 341. The special symbol game image displayed in the special symbol variable image display area 75 among the special symbol data images indicates that it is a variable display for the second special symbol game, and the second special symbol reserved image displayed in the second special symbol reserved image display area 77 among the special symbol data images indicates that the right to execute the second special symbol game is reserved. It is conceivable that the special symbol data images displayed in the special symbol variable image display area 75 and the second special symbol reserved image display area 77 may be displayed in a manner different from the special symbol data image when the second special symbol special effect is not executed. That is, the special chart data image when the game ball 99 enters the second winning slot 315 during a long opening may be displayed in a different manner than the special chart data image when the game ball 99 enters the second winning slot 315 during a short opening. In this case, not only is the second special chart special effect executed, but the display manner of the special chart data image also makes it possible to clearly indicate to the player that the variable display and hold for the game ball 99 entering the second winning slot 315 during a long opening are being displayed, making it easy to distinguish from the variable display and hold for the game ball 99 entering the second winning slot 315 during a short opening.

Furthermore, unlike the second special symbol special effect shown in Figure 61(B), the second special symbol special effect shown in Figure 61(C) displays a capture image 78 in the lower left area (area adjacent to the decorative symbol variable display area) which does not obstruct the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display section 341.

As will be described later, the capture image 78 is the presentation screen of the continuous hold effect that was being executed on the symbol display unit 341 during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol effect, and in this embodiment, it is displayed as a reduced image (an image with a changed size) of that presentation screen while maintaining the appearance of that presentation screen. This capture image 78 is displayed when a continuous hold effect was executed during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol effect, and a continuous hold effect is being executed during the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol effect (see FIG. 56 (B)). In other words, the capture image 78 clearly indicates or suggests, during the execution of the second special symbol special effect, that a continuous hold effect was executed during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and that a continuous hold effect will be executed during the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect.

In this way, in this embodiment, the capture image 78 clearly indicates or suggests that a hold continuous effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and that a hold continuous effect will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect. This significantly reduces the likelihood that the player will forget that a hold continuous effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and allows the player to understand that a hold continuous effect will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect. Therefore, even if a hold continuous effect is resumed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect, the player is significantly less likely to feel uncomfortable about the hold continuous effect being executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the hold continuous effect that was executed before the execution of the second special symbol special effect being resumed after the end of the second special symbol special effect.

In particular, when the second winning slot 315 is long-opened in a game that wins a long-open normal symbol, the player will be preoccupied for a longer period of time with whether or not the game ball 99 will land in the second winning slot 315 than when the second winning slot 315 is short-opened in a game that wins a short-open normal symbol. This increases the likelihood that the player will forget that the continuous hold effect was being executed before the second special symbol game was played. Furthermore, when the second winning slot 315 is long-opened in a game that wins a long-open normal symbol, the game ball 99 is more likely to land in the second winning slot 315 (more balls will land), and therefore the number of second special symbol games in which the second special symbol special effect is executed is greater (the execution time of the second special symbol special effect is longer) than when the second winning slot 315 is short-opened in a game that wins a short-open normal symbol. Therefore, the time between the end of the continuous hold effect before the execution of the second special symbol effect (the start of the second special symbol effect) and the resumption of the continuous hold effect due to the end of the second special symbol effect is longer, and players pay more attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game in which the second special symbol effect is executed is a jackpot, compared to when the first special symbol game is executed. Thus, when the second winning slot 315 is long-opened in a long-open normal symbol game, compared to when the second winning slot 315 is short-opened in a short-open normal symbol game, players are more likely to forget that the continuous hold effect was executed before the execution of the second special symbol game. Therefore, the effect of clearly indicating or suggesting, during the execution of the second special symbol effect, that the continuous hold effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol effect is significant.

Furthermore, because the image is a reduced version of the screen of the reserved continuous effect that was being executed on the symbol display unit 341 during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, the type of reserved continuous effect that was being executed during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect is clearly indicated or suggested, and the type of reserved continuous effect that will be executed during the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol special effect is clearly indicated or suggested. For example, in this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, four types of reserved continuous effects are set: same-color symbol effect, chance eye effect, mini-character effect, and zone effect (mode effect) (see Figures 64 and 65). However, the captured image 78 shown in Figure 61(C) clearly indicates or suggests that a chance eye effect in which the decorative symbol stopped and displayed with the chance eye "113" (see Figure 65), was executed as a reserved continuous effect during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect. This not only allows the player to understand that a consecutive hold effect was being executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol effect, and that a consecutive hold effect will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol effect, but also allows the player to understand the type of consecutive hold effect. This further reduces the player's sense of discomfort when the consecutive hold effect is resumed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol effect, and further prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the consecutive hold effect that was being executed before the execution of the second special symbol effect after the end of the second special symbol special effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the captured image 78 is displayed in a reduced size in the lower left area of the symbol display unit 341, but it is preferable to display the captured image on the entire symbol display unit 341 for a certain period of time at either or both the end of the second special symbol effect and the start of the consecutive hold effect that is executed after the end of the second special symbol effect. For example, the captured image may be displayed as a so-called stage change effect, in which the stage effect (background effect) from the previous special symbol game is changed for the current special symbol game. In this way, by displaying the captured image on the entire symbol display unit 341 for a certain period of time at either or both the end of the second special symbol effect and the start of the consecutive hold effect that is executed after the end of the second special symbol effect, it is possible to smoothly and seamlessly transition from the execution of the second special symbol special effect in the second special symbol game to the execution of the consecutive hold effect in the first special symbol game.

In this embodiment, the captured image 78 is displayed as a reduced image in the lower left area of the pattern display unit 341, but it may also be displayed in another area, for example, outside the area where the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner other than the lower left area. In this way, by displaying the captured image 78 as a reduced image outside the area where the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner, the display of the captured image 78 is prevented from interfering with the visibility of the display of the variable decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the capture image 78 may be displayed in its original form without being displayed as a reduced image, as long as the visibility of the changing display of the decorative symbols is not obstructed. For example, as described below, if the continuous hold effect is executed by the stop display of a specific complete miss (same color symbol) or a predetermined complete miss (chance symbol), the specific complete miss (same color symbol) or the predetermined complete miss (chance symbol) can be displayed behind the decorative symbols, thereby preventing the visibility of the changing display of the decorative symbols from being obstructed even if the capture image 78 is displayed in its original form without being reduced. Furthermore, when the capture image 78 is displayed in its original form without being reduced, the size of the capture image 78 is set large, making it easy for the player to understand that the capture image 78 is being displayed.

Furthermore, the captured image 78 may be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in the second special symbol game as an image with a lower density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) than the image of the first special symbol continuous effect, for example, as an image with a lower density than the decorative symbol, preferably at a density that allows images in layers below the captured image 78 to be visible, or an image with a density that allows the back side of the captured image 78 to be visible. In other words, the captured image 78 may be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as a modified image of the reserved continuous effect that was executed in the first special symbol game, just as when it is displayed as a reduced image. In this way, by displaying the captured image 78 as an image with a lower density than the image of the first special symbol continuous effect, i.e., by displaying it as a modified image of the reserved continuous effect that was executed in the first special symbol game, it becomes possible to display the captured image 78 without being restricted by the variable display area of the decorative symbol on the pattern display unit 341. This makes it possible to superimpose the decorative pattern displayed in the pattern display unit 341 and the captured image 78 during the second special symbol game, not just outside the variable area of the decorative pattern displayed in the pattern display unit 341. By superimposing the decorative pattern displayed in the pattern display unit 341 and the captured image 78, the player can easily view the captured image 78 even when the player is focusing their attention on the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, by displaying the capture image 78 on the pattern display unit 341 during the second special pattern game with a density that allows images in layers below the capture image 78 to be visible, or an image with a density that allows the back side of the capture image 78 to be visible, it becomes possible to see the changing display of the decorative pattern even if the capture image 78 is displayed in front of or behind the decorative pattern. This makes it possible for the player to easily see the capture image 78 even when the player is focusing on the changing display of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, since the captured image 78 can be displayed without being restricted by the decorative pattern changing display area in the pattern display unit 341, it becomes possible to view the decorative pattern changing display even when the reduction ratio of the captured image 78 is set high, and it also becomes possible to view the decorative pattern changing display even when the captured image 78 is displayed as is without being reduced. As a result, even when the captured image 78 is displayed as an image with a lower density than the image of the first special pattern continuous performance, the size of the captured image 78 can be set large, making it possible to ensure sufficient visibility of the captured image 78.

When the capture image 78 is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in a second special symbol game with a density that allows images in layers below the capture image 78 to be visible, or with a density that allows the back side of the capture image 78 to be visible, it is also possible to display only the outline of the capture image 78. For example, when the first special symbol continuous effect is displayed using a combination of decorative symbols that are displayed in a stopped state, such as a chance eye effect or a same-color symbol effect (see FIG. 65), the capture image 78 may be configured to display only the outline of the decorative symbol (only the outline of the number) that allows the type of decorative symbol to be recognized. In this way, when the capture image 78 is displayed with an outline that allows the type of decorative symbol to be recognized, the changing display of the decorative symbol can be seen even if the capture image 78 is displayed in front of or behind the decorative symbol. This makes it possible for the player to easily view the capture image 78, even when the player is focusing on the changing display of the decorative symbol.

Furthermore, the capture image 78 need only clearly indicate or suggest that a hold continuous effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and that a hold continuous effect will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and there are no particular restrictions on the capture timing in the hold continuous effect. For example, the capture timing in the hold continuous effect may be at the start of the hold continuous effect (when the decorative symbols start to change), during execution (while the decorative symbols are displaying their change), or at the end (when the decorative symbols stop changing).

Furthermore, the explicit indication or suggestion that a continuous hold effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol effect, and that a continuous hold effect will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol effect, is not limited to displaying the captured image 78, and may be any other method as long as the method allows for a visible display of the changing decorative symbols. For example, the explicit indication or suggestion may be displayed as a specific image different from the captured image 78, such as a text image, an icon image, a character image, or a combination of two or more of these, indicating that a continuous hold effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol effect, and that a continuous hold effect will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect. In other words, the explicit indication or suggestion may be displayed as an image that has been changed to a different image from the effect image of the continuous hold effect executed in the first special symbol game. In this way, the explicit indication or suggestion is displayed as an image that has been changed to a different image from the effect image of the pending continuous effect that was being executed in the first special symbol game, making it possible to display it in various positions on the symbol display unit 341 without obstructing the visibility of the changing display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341.

Furthermore, the type of specific image may be associated with the type of hold continuous effect. In this way, by associating the type of specific image with the type of hold continuous effect, not only can it be determined that a hold continuous effect was being executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, but it is also possible to determine the type of hold continuous effect that was being executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect from the type of specific image displayed.

Furthermore, even when a specific image is displayed to clearly indicate or suggest that a continuous hold effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, or that a continuous hold effect will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect, the specific image may be displayed as an image with a lower density than the decorative symbol, preferably an image with a density that allows the image in a layer below the capture image 78 to be visible, or an image with a density that allows the back side of the capture image 78 to be visible, or as an image with only the outline.Furthermore, even when the specific image is displayed in these display modes, the specific image may be displayed on the front or back of the decorative symbol that is displayed in a variable manner during the second special symbol game, superimposed on the decorative symbol, or may be displayed outside the variable area of the decorative symbol.

Furthermore, the capture image 78 and the specific image may be displayed throughout the entire period during which the second special symbol game is being played, or may be displayed for a portion of the period during which the second special symbol game is being played, for example, only for a certain period from the start of the second special symbol game, only for a certain period before the end of the second special symbol game, or both for a certain period from the start of the second special symbol game and a certain period before the end of the second special symbol game. There are no particular limitations on the display period for the capture image 78 and the specific image. Furthermore, when the second special symbol game is played multiple times in succession, the capture image 78 and the specific image do not need to be displayed during all second special symbol games. For example, they may be displayed only during the first second special symbol game played among multiple second special symbol games, only during the last second special symbol game played, or during both the first and last second special symbol games played. The number of second special symbol games during which the capture image 78 and the specific image are displayed may differ from the number of second special symbol games during which the second special symbol special effect is played.

Furthermore, the second special symbol special effect is not limited to the examples shown in Figures 61(B) and 61(C) and may take other forms. For example, the second special symbol special effect may display other images, such as character images, instead of or in addition to text images, or may execute a predetermined audio effect via the speaker 26 instead of or in addition to the effect on the symbol display unit 341.

Furthermore, the second special symbol special effect may be any effect that clearly indicates or suggests that a player will receive a bonus if a predetermined condition is met, and does not necessarily have to be an effect in which the jackpot type is a probability jackpot when the decorative symbols stop and display as a jackpot symbol (e.g., a doublet). Examples of predetermined conditions include the decorative symbols becoming a reach or a specific effect being executed. In other words, the present invention can be applied to gaming machines other than those in which the jackpot type is always a probability jackpot when the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning slot 315 is a jackpot. For example, the present invention can be applied to loop probability jackpot machines such as the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above, as well as ST machines such as V-ST machines and type 1/2 hybrid machines in which the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of a gaming ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 includes wins other than probability jackpots.

<Step S3329>
59, if the electric device long opening flag is set to OFF (step S3326: No), that is, if the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 is triggered by a short opening (the execution of a short opening normal game), the value of the short opening winning counter is incremented by 1 (step S3329), and the command determination process is terminated. In this way, the value of the short opening winning counter is incremented by 1 when the game ball 99 enters the second winning slot 315 while the reserved number M for the second special game has not reached the upper limit when the second winning slot 315 is short opening (the execution of a short opening normal game). On the other hand, the value of the short opening winning counter, as will be described in detail later, is used in the variation type (presentation pattern) for setting the variation type (presentation pattern) to be executed in the special pattern game when the number of special pattern games in which the hold continuous presentation is executed is increased by the game ball 99 entering the second winning port 315 during short opening, in order to avoid the inconvenience of the chance eye presentation being executed consecutively as a hold continuous presentation in four or more special pattern games (the jackpot confirmation presentation being executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss) (see step S3655 in Figure 71 and step S3664 in Figure 72).

<Step S3330>
If the received command is not a second special symbol hold command (step S3323: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an electric role closing command, as shown in Fig. 60. The electric role closing command is a command indicating that the electric role 315b has been closed, and is set in step S1817 of the normal symbol winning game control process of Fig. 25 executed by the main control device 4 when the electric role 315b is closed.

If the received command is an electric reel close command (step S3330: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3331; if the received command is not an electric reel close command (step S3330: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3335.

<Step S3331>
If the received command is an electric device close command (step S3330: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the electric device long open flag is set to ON (step S3331). The electric device long open flag indicates that the electric device 315b is long open due to the execution of a long open normal game, and is set to ON in step S3311 of the command determination process when the electric device open command is received.

If the electric reel length open flag is set to on (step S3331: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3332; if the electric reel length open flag is set to off (step S3331: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3334.

<Steps S3332 and S3333>
If the electric device long open flag is set to on (step S3331: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process to end the electric device long open presentation (see Figure 61 (A)) which clearly indicates or suggests to the player that the electric device 315b has been long opened due to the execution of a long open normal game (step S3332), and sets the electric device long open flag to off (step S3333), and ends the command determination process.

<Step S3334>
If the electric device long opening flag is set to OFF (step S3331: No), the MPU 51 sets the short opening close flag to ON (step S3334) and terminates the command determination process. The short opening close flag indicates that the electric device 315b, which was short-open during a short-open normal game, has been closed. This short opening close flag is used to determine whether a chance eye effect will be executed in four or more consecutive special game plays in step S3652 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of FIG. 71 when the game ball 99 enters the second winning slot 315 due to the short opening of the electric device 315b.

<Step S3335>
If the received command is not a command to close an electric reel (step S3330: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command. If the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command (step S3335: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3336. On the other hand, if the received command is not a special symbol variation pattern command (step S3335: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands (step S3340) and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3335>
If the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command (step S3335: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a variation type (effect pattern) setting process to set the variation type (effect pattern) to be executed in the special symbol game (step S3336), and proceeds to step S3337. Details of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 67 to 72.

<Step S3337>
In step S3337, the MPU 51 executes a stop symbol combination setting process for setting a stop display combination of decorative symbols in the special symbol game, and then proceeds to step S3338. Details of the stop symbol combination setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S3338>
In step S3338, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern command in the variable display counter, and proceeds to step S3339. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the variable pattern command. The variable display counter is then decremented by one in the counter update process of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42, and the MPU 51 can determine whether the variable pattern display is in progress, the remaining time of the variable display time, and the like, based on the variable display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the variable pattern display has ended when the variable display counter reaches 0.

<Step S3339>
In step S3339, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 for specifying the variation type (effect pattern type) in the symbol display unit 341 and the details of the stopped symbol combination of the decorative symbols, and ends the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the variation type (effect pattern type) set in step S3336 and the stopped symbol combination of the decorative symbols set in step S3337. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores effect images and decorative symbol variation images corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the effect display and variation display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the variation type (effect pattern) and the stopped symbol combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variable display of multiple decorative symbols (e.g., three) until a preset variable display time has elapsed, and sequentially stops and displays the variable decorative symbols. While the variable decorative symbols are being displayed, various effects corresponding to the content of the variable type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variable pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27, etc.

[Hold continuous performance setting processing]
Next, an example of the procedure for the hold continuous performance setting process executed in step S3322 of the command determination process of Fig. 59 will be described with reference to Figs. 62 to 65. The hold continuous performance setting process is a process for setting the type of hold continuous performance in a situation where it is possible to start the hold continuous performance. Here, Figs. 62 and 63 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the hold continuous performance setting process.

<Step S3401>
In the pending continuous effect setting process, in step S3401, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the jackpot game is in progress, i.e., whether or not the first special symbol game is executable. The jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON when it is determined in the command determination process that a jackpot game start command has been received (step S3118 in FIG. 47), and is set to OFF when it is determined that a jackpot game end command has been received (step S3137 in FIG. 48).

If the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the pending continuous effect setting process. On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S3401: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3402.

<Step S3402>
If the jackpot game is not being played (step S3401: No), the MPU 51 determines whether a high-frequency support mode flag indicating the high-frequency support mode is set to ON (step S3402). That is, in this step S3402, the MPU 51 determines whether the high-frequency support mode is being played.

In addition, during the game state transition process, the high frequency support mode flag is set to ON in step S2313 of FIG. 34 when a jackpot game ends, and is set to OFF in step S2307 of FIG. 33 when the game state transitions from a special probability game state or a time-limited game state to a special probability jackpot game state or a regular jackpot game state, or in step S2326 of FIG. 34 when the game state transitions from a time-limited game state to a regular game state.

Here, the reason for determining whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in step S3402 is to set the hold continuous effect to be executed in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, and not to be executed in the high-frequency support mode, which is the special probability game state or the time-limited game state. Of course, the hold continuous effect may also be executed in either or both of the high-frequency support mode, which is the special probability game state or the time-limited game state.

If the high-frequency support mode flag is set to on (step S3402: Yes), i.e., if the system is in high-frequency support mode, the MPU 51 terminates the hold continuous performance setting process. On the other hand, if the high-frequency support mode flag is set to off (step S3402: No), i.e., if the system is in low-frequency support mode rather than high-frequency support mode, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3403.

<Step S3403>
If the frequency support mode flag is set to OFF (step S3402: No), i.e., if the mode is the low frequency support mode rather than the high frequency support mode, the MPU 51 determines whether the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3403). The pending continuous effect execution flag is a flag indicating that the pending continuous effect has started, and is set to ON in step S3611 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in Figure 68 described later when the pending continuous effect is scheduled to be executed in the first special symbol game that is executed consecutively after the first special symbol game in which the pending continuous effect starts.

If the hold continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the hold continuous performance setting process because there is no need to set the hold continuous performance since the hold continuous performance is already being executed. On the other hand, if the hold continuous performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S3403: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3404.

<Step S3404>
If the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3403: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second special symbol special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3404). The second special symbol special effect execution flag is a flag indicating that the second special symbol special effect has started, and is set to ON in step S3636 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in Figure 68 of Figure 70 described later when the second special symbol special effect is scheduled to be executed in the second special symbol game executed consecutively after the second special symbol game in which the second special symbol special effect starts.

If the second special symbol special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3404: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the pending continuous effect setting process because there is no need to set the pending continuous effect since the second special symbol special effect is being executed. On the other hand, if the second special symbol special effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3404: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3405.

<Step S3405>
If the second special symbol special effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3404: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols N after the increase is 2 or more when the reserved number of rights to play the first special symbol game increases due to the game ball 99 entering the first winning port 314. That is, the MPU 51 sets the reserved continuous effect, with one of the conditions being that there is at least one reserved right for the first special symbol game when the game ball 99 enters the first winning port 314.

If the increased number of reserved first special symbols N is 2 or more (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3406. In other words, the continuous reserved effect can be initiated when a game ball 99 enters the first winning slot 314 when the number of reserved first special symbols N is 1 to 3.

On the other hand, if the first special symbol reserved number N after the increase due to the game ball 99 entering the first winning slot 314 is not 2 or more (step S3405: No), the MPU 51 terminates the reserved continuous effect setting process. In other words, the reserved continuous effect will not be initiated when the game ball 99 enters the first winning slot 314 when the reserved number N is 0.

<Step S3406>
If the increased number N of reserved first special symbols is 2 or more (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the variable display time of the reserved first special symbol game is 30 seconds or more based on information about the variable pattern (variable display time and result of the jackpot lottery) for the increased reserved number included in the first special symbol reserve command. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the reserved symbol that may be the trigger for starting the continuous reserved effect is a first special symbol game in which an effect involving a reach should be executed.

If the variable display time of the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is 30 seconds or more (step S3406: Yes), that is, if the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is one in which a reach-related effect should be executed, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3407.

On the other hand, if the variable display time of the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is not 30 seconds or more (step S3406: No), that is, if the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is one that should result in a complete miss without a reach, the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S3410.

<Steps S3407 to S3409>
If the variable display time of the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is 30 seconds or more (step S3406: Yes), that is, if the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is one in which a performance involving a reach should be executed, the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is a jackpot based on information regarding the variable pattern for the increased hold (variable display time and result of the jackpot lottery) contained in the first special symbol hold command (step S3407).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased number of reserved symbols is a jackpot (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a continuous reserved symbol effect setting process based on the continuous reserved symbol effect pattern type setting table for the jackpot effect (see FIG. 64) described below, in accordance with the number of reserved first special symbols N (step S3408), and proceeds to step S3411 in FIG. 63.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased number of reserved symbols is not a jackpot (step S3407: No), i.e., if a miss reach effect should be executed, the MPU 51 executes a hold continuous effect setting process based on the hold continuous effect pattern type setting table for miss reaches (see Figure 64) described below, in accordance with the number N of first special symbol reserved symbols (step S3409), and proceeds to step S3411 in Figure 63.

<Step S3410>
If the variable display time of the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is not 30 seconds or more (step S3406: No), that is, if the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is one in which a complete miss effect without a reach should be executed, the MPU 51 executes a hold continuous effect setting process based on the hold continuous effect pattern type setting table for a complete miss reach (see Figure 64) described below, according to the number N of first special symbol holds, and proceeds to step S3411 of Figure 63.

Here, Figures 64(A) to 64(C) are diagrams showing examples of hold continuous presentation pattern type setting tables. Specifically, Figure 64(A) is a hold continuous presentation pattern type setting table used when the increased number of first special charts on hold N is 4, Figure 64(B) is a hold continuous presentation pattern type setting table used when the increased number of first special charts on hold N is 3, and Figure 64(C) is a hold continuous presentation pattern type setting table used when the increased number of first special charts on hold N is 2.

As shown in Figures 64(A) to 64(C), there are four types of consecutive reserved display patterns: same-color symbol display, chance symbol display, mini-character display, and zone display (mode display). Note that in Figures 64(A) to 64(C), "three same-color symbol displays" means that the same-color symbol display is executed in three consecutive first special symbol displays; "two same-color symbol displays" means that the same-color symbol display is executed in two consecutive first special symbol displays; and "one same-color symbol display" means that the same-color symbol display is executed only in one first special symbol display. Similarly, "X chance symbol displays" (where X is an integer from 1 to 4), "X mini-character displays" (where X is an integer from 1 to 3), and "X zone displays" (where X is an integer from 1 to 3) mean that the chance symbol display, mini-character display, or zone display is executed in X first special symbol displays. In other words, "XX times" means that a single type of consecutive hold effect is executed in succession over a predetermined number of first special symbol games. Of course, consecutive hold effects are not limited to a single type of consecutive hold effect being executed in succession over a predetermined number of first special symbol games; multiple types of consecutive hold effects (for example, a mini character effect and a zone effect) may be executed simultaneously in one first special symbol game, as long as the combination is executable as an effect.

Regarding the number N of reserved first special symbols, the chance eye effect is set to be the most likely to be set compared to other reserved continuous effects such as same-color symbol effects. On the other hand, the zone effect (mode effect) is set to be the least likely to be set among the reserved continuous effects.

Also, in Figures 64 (A) to 64 (C), a "-" means that no consecutive hold effects are set. A "-" where no consecutive hold effects are set accounts for the majority of the random number allocation, regardless of the number N of reserved first special symbols. Therefore, the frequency (probability) of consecutive hold effects being executed is lower than the frequency (probability) of consecutive hold effects not being executed. Furthermore, a "-" where no consecutive hold effects are set is set so that the smaller the number N of reserved first special symbols, the more random number allocation is set. In other words, the smaller the number N of reserved first special symbols, the lower the frequency (probability) of consecutive hold effects being executed, and the higher the number N of reserved first special symbols, the higher the frequency (probability) of consecutive hold effects being executed.

Here, the same-color symbol effect, chance eye effect, mini-character effect, and zone effect (mode effect) are effects that clearly indicate or suggest the likelihood that the result of the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol game for the hold that triggered the continuous hold effect will be a jackpot. For example, the "Chance Eye 4 Times" effect, in which the chance eye effect is executed for four consecutive first special symbol games, can only be set if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot when the number of first special symbol holds N is 4 (see Figure 64 (A)).It is not set if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss (a miss reach or a complete miss), so "Chance Eye 4 Times" is a confirmed jackpot effect that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.On the other hand, all continuous hold effects other than "Chance Eye 4 Times" are effects that suggest the likelihood of a jackpot. In other words, even if the same color symbol effect, mini character effect, and zone effect (mode effect), which are consecutive pending effects other than "4 chances", are executed four or more times, they will not become a confirmed jackpot effect that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

In this way, the effect clearly indicates or suggests the likelihood that the result of the jackpot lottery in the first special game for the hold that triggered the start of the consecutive hold effect will be a jackpot. This allows players to enjoy the game while hoping that the consecutive hold effect will be displayed, and when the consecutive hold effect is displayed, players can enjoy the game while focusing on whether the result of the jackpot lottery will transition them to a special game state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, with the exception of "four chances" which clearly indicate a jackpot, when the number of first special symbol games in which the consecutive hold effects are executed is the same, the jackpot expectancy for the consecutive hold effects is set lowest for the mini character effects, set to the same level (the same or nearly the same) for the same color symbol effects and chance symbol effects, and highest for the zone effects (mode effects).

In this embodiment, when the consecutive hold effects are scheduled to be executed in multiple consecutive first special symbol games, in the second special symbol game that is executed based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 due to the execution of a short-open normal symbol game, the consecutive hold effects continue to be executed without the second special symbol special effect being executed. In this case, if the number of first special symbol games in which the consecutive hold effects are executed and the number of second special symbol games in which the consecutive hold effects are executed are added together, the number of special symbol games in which the consecutive hold effects are executed may be four or more.

Here, if a chance eye effect is being executed as a hold continuous effect, and the number of times the special symbol game in which the hold continuous effect is executed reaches four or more times, the hold continuous effect will become a jackpot confirmation effect, indicating that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, as described above. Therefore, if the results of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game executed from the fourth time onwards after the chance eye effect as a specified hold continuous effect has started do not include a jackpot, if the chance eye effect is executed four or more times in a row, an inconsistency will occur between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the hold continuous effect.

In this embodiment, if a chance eye effect is being executed as the hold consecutive effect and the number of special symbol games in which the hold consecutive effect is executed is four or more, before the chance eye effect is executed in four consecutive special symbol games, the hold consecutive effect is changed to an effect other than a chance eye effect, for example, a same-color pattern effect that does not become a jackpot confirmation effect indicating that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, even if it is executed four or more times. This prevents inconsistencies from occurring between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the hold consecutive effect.

As mentioned above, even if a hold continuous effect other than a chance eye effect is executed four or more times in a row in the first special symbol game, it will not result in a confirmed jackpot effect, but will be executed as an effect suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot. Therefore, even if the number of special symbol games in which a hold continuous effect is executed is four or more, if an effect other than a chance eye effect is executed as a hold continuous effect, the same type of hold continuous effect will continue to be executed without changing the type of hold continuous effect. Of course, even if a hold continuous effect of a type that will not cause any problems if executed consecutively in a predetermined number of special symbol games (for example, four times) or more, the type of hold continuous effect may be changed before the scheduled number of special symbol games are executed.

Here, the jackpot expectation rates for the chance eye effect, which is the predetermined consecutive hold effect before the change, and the same-color pattern effect, which is the specific consecutive hold effect after the change, are set to be the same or approximately the same. For example, the difference in jackpot expectation rates between the chance eye effect and the same-color pattern effect is set to be between -5% and +5%, and the difference in jackpot expectation rates between the chance eye effect and the same-color pattern effect is set to be between -2.5% and +2.5%. In other words, in this embodiment, the jackpot expectation rates for the predetermined consecutive hold effect before the change and the specific consecutive hold effect after the change are set to be the same or approximately the same.

In this way, by setting the jackpot expectation rate for the specified hold continuous performance before the change and the specific hold continuous performance after the change to be the same or nearly the same, when the type of hold continuous performance is changed, for example when it is changed from a chance eye performance to a same color pattern performance, the jackpot expectation rate for the hold continuous performance after the change does not drop significantly. This prevents a decrease in player interest due to a decrease in jackpot expectation rate caused by a change in the hold continuous performance, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game.

As mentioned above, the selection rate for the chance eye effect, which is a predetermined consecutive hold effect, is set higher than the selection rate for the same color symbol effect, which is a specific consecutive hold effect. In other words, in this embodiment, the selection rate for the predetermined consecutive hold effect before the change is set higher than the selection rate for the specific consecutive hold effect after the change. In this way, by setting the selection rate for the predetermined consecutive hold effect before the change higher than the selection rate for the specific consecutive hold effect after the change, inconveniences caused by the consecutive display of predetermined consecutive hold effects (for example, chance eye effects), which have a high probability of causing inconveniences, are appropriately avoided.

In addition to cases where the type of hold continuous presentation is changed to prevent inconsistencies between the results of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the hold continuous presentation, when the type of hold continuous presentation is changed, if the variable display time for the hold of the first special symbol game that triggered the start of the hold continuous presentation is long, i.e., if the result of the jackpot lottery for that hold is a jackpot or a reach presentation with a high jackpot expectation is executed, the type of hold continuous presentation may be changed so that the new specific hold continuous presentation type has a higher jackpot expectation than the previous specific hold continuous presentation type. For example, if the previous specific hold continuous presentation was a mini-character presentation with the lowest jackpot expectation, the new specific hold continuous presentation may be set to a chance eye presentation, a same-color pattern presentation, or a zone presentation (mode presentation) with a higher jackpot expectation than the mini-character presentation. Alternatively, if the previous specific hold continuous presentation was a chance eye presentation or a same-color pattern presentation, the new specific hold continuous presentation may be set to a zone presentation (mode presentation) with a higher jackpot expectation than the chance eye presentation and the same-color pattern presentation. In this case, the difference in the likelihood of winning between the specific consecutive hold effects after the change and the specific consecutive hold effects before the change is set to, for example, 10% or more, and preferably 25% or more.

In this way, by changing the type of continuous hold performance so that the new specific continuous hold performance has a higher chance of winning than the previous predetermined continuous hold performance, the change in the type of continuous hold performance increases the player's chance of winning. This allows players to enjoy playing the game while hoping that the type of specific continuous hold performance will change when a predetermined continuous hold performance is displayed, and when the type of continuous hold performance is changed from a predetermined continuous hold performance to a specific continuous hold performance, players can enjoy playing the special game with high hopes that the jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot in the special game where the new specific continuous hold performance is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Here, in this embodiment, the zone effect (mode effect) with the highest jackpot expectation has the lowest selection rate among the consecutive hold effects. In other words, in this embodiment, when the type of consecutive hold effect is changed to a specific consecutive hold effect with a high jackpot expectation, such as when the type of consecutive hold effect is changed from a predetermined consecutive hold effect such as a chance eye effect or a same color pattern effect to a specific consecutive hold effect such as a zone effect (mode effect), the selection rate of the predetermined consecutive hold effect with a low jackpot expectation before the change is high, and the selection rate of the specific consecutive hold effect with a high jackpot expectation after the change is set high.

By setting the selection rate of the predetermined consecutive hold performance with a low expectation of a jackpot before the change high and the selection rate of the specific consecutive hold performance with a high expectation of a jackpot after the change high, setting the selection rate of the predetermined consecutive hold performance before the change high increases the frequency with which the predetermined consecutive hold performance before the change is executed, increasing the number of opportunities for players to expect the consecutive hold performance to be changed to the specific consecutive hold performance with a high expectation of a jackpot, further increasing the enjoyment of the game; and by setting the selection rate of the specific consecutive hold performance after the change low, the frequency with which the specific consecutive hold performance with a high expectation of a jackpot is executed decreases, further increasing the player's enjoyment when the consecutive hold performance is changed to the specific consecutive hold performance with a high expectation of a jackpot, further increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The timing for changing the type of continuous hold effect can be any time that does not result in an inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the specified continuous hold effect. For example, it can be any time between the special symbol game played after the special symbol game played at the time when it becomes clear that an inconsistency may occur between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the continuous hold effect, and the special symbol game in which an inconsistency occurs between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the continuous hold effect (for example, the special symbol game played for the fourth time since the start of the specified continuous hold effect). In other words, the timing for changing the type of continuous hold effect can be either the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, as long as an inconsistency does not occur between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the continuous hold effect.

Here, if the timing for changing the type of the reserved continuous effect is during the first special symbol game, by continuously executing the reserved continuous effect, any inconvenience that may arise in the first special symbol game that resumes after the second special symbol game has ended can be avoided.

Furthermore, by changing the type of the reserved continuous performance in the first special symbol game that resumes after the end of the second special symbol game, if continuing to execute the reserved continuous performance before the change would cause inconvenience, the number of special symbol games in which the reserved continuous performance before the change is displayed consecutively is maximized. In this way, by maximizing the number of special symbol games in which the reserved continuous performance before the change is displayed consecutively, the player can enjoy the reserved continuous performance before the change to the fullest extent, even if continuing to execute the reserved continuous performance before the change would cause inconvenience.

On the other hand, if the timing for changing the type of reserved continuous performance is during second special symbol play, and if an inconvenience occurs due to the consecutive execution of the specified reserved continuous performance before the change, the inconvenience will be avoided if it occurs during second special symbol play. Also, even if an inconvenience occurs during first special symbol play, which resumes after the end of second special symbol play, the inconvenience will be avoided in advance before first special symbol play resumes.

In addition, if the timing for changing the type of hold continuous performance is such that an inconsistency may occur between the results of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the specified hold continuous performance, and the special game is executed after that special game, the inconvenience will be avoided immediately after it is recognized that an inconvenience will occur if the specified hold continuous performance is executed consecutively.

On the other hand, in special gameplay where the timing of the change in the type of consecutive hold effects causes a mismatch between the results of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the specified consecutive hold effects, the player's expectations can be maximized by the consecutive display of the specified consecutive hold effects. Therefore, the loss of interest in the player's game due to the change from the specified consecutive hold effects to a specific consecutive hold effect is reduced, preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

Of course, the type of continuous hold effect may also be changed when a continuous hold effect other than a chance eye effect is being executed and the number of special symbol games in which the continuous hold effect is executed exceeds a predetermined number (for example, four times). In other words, the type of continuous hold effect may be changed even when a single type of continuous hold effect is executed more than a predetermined number of times in succession without causing any inconvenience. In this way, by changing the type of continuous hold effect when a single type of continuous hold effect is executed more than a predetermined number of times in succession without causing any inconvenience, it is possible to prevent players from feeling bored when a single type of continuous hold effect is executed in succession in many special symbol games, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to a single type of continuous hold effect being executed in succession in many special symbol games.

In addition, there are no restrictions on the combination of the type of hold continuous performance before the change and the type of hold continuous performance after the change, as long as it is determined within a range that does not cause inconsistencies between the results of the jackpot lottery and the hold continuous performance. For example, if a same-color pattern performance is set as the hold continuous performance, and the number of special symbol games in which the hold continuous performance is executed exceeds a predetermined number (for example, four or more times), the hold continuous performance may be changed to a performance other than a same-color pattern performance, such as a chance eye performance.

In addition, the change in the continuous hold effect is not limited to one time, but may be made multiple times.

Here, the same color symbol effect is an effect in which all decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are the same color, and the decorative symbol combinations displayed are specific complete misses other than jackpot symbol combinations (for example, double numbers where all decorative symbols are the same) and miss reach combinations (for example, symbol combinations where the left and right symbols are the same but only the center symbol is different).

For example, as shown in Figure 51(A) above, if the "3" and "7" decorative symbols are set to red, the odd-numbered decorative symbols other than "3" and "7" ("1"), "5," and "9") are set to green, and the even-numbered decorative symbols ("2," "4," "6," and "8") are set to blue, there are many possible combinations of same-color symbols that result in a complete mismatch. However, it is preferable that the specific combination of same-color symbols that results in a complete mismatch in the same-color symbol effect be a distinctive combination. For example, as shown in Figure 65, a possible combination of same-color symbols that results in a specific complete mismatch in the same-color symbol effect is one in which the left and center symbols have the same number, and the right symbol is different from the left and center symbols. In this way, because the specific complete mismatch as a combination of same-color symbols that results in a complete mismatch in the same-color symbol effect is a distinctive combination, the player can easily recognize that the same-color symbol effect has been executed. Additionally, in the same-color symbol effect, when a specific combination of same-color symbols that is a complete miss is displayed, a specific special sound that is unique to the execution of the same-color symbol effect may be output from the speaker 26. This also allows the player to easily recognize that the same-color symbol effect has been executed.

The chance eye effect is an effect in which a chance eye is displayed as a decorative symbol that is not the same color and is a predetermined complete miss. For the same reasons as in the same-color symbol effect, the predetermined complete miss (chance eye) displayed in the chance eye effect is preferably a distinctive symbol combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 65, a predetermined complete miss (chance eye) displayed in the chance eye effect could be a symbol combination in which all decorative symbols are odd numbers, the left and center symbols have the same number, and the right symbol is different from the left and center symbols. Furthermore, in the chance eye effect, when a predetermined complete miss (chance eye) is displayed, a specific, predetermined special sound may be output from speaker 26 when the chance eye effect is being executed, so that the player can easily recognize that the chance eye effect has been executed.

A mini-character effect is an effect in which a mini-character (mini character) is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. A mini-character may be, for example, a miniature representation of a character that appears in the effects of the gaming machine 10, or a representation of the character with an enlarged head, such as by making the character two-headed. There are no particular restrictions on the display format of the mini-character in a mini-character effect, but when a mini-character effect is executed in an effect other than a continuous hold effect, it is preferable that the mini-character be displayed in a manner that is distinguishable from other mini-character effects. Examples of mini-character effects in continuous hold effects include effects in which a mini-character crosses the symbol display unit 341 left and right, up and down, or diagonally. Furthermore, when a hold display image is displayed for the first hold of a first special symbol game, a mini-character may be displayed near the hold display image to suggest that the mini-character effect is an effect related to the first hold for the first special symbol game.

A zone effect (mode effect) is an effect that indicates that a reach effect or an effect with a high probability of winning will be executed by executing a special background effect (for example, a background effect including a text image such as "XX Zone" ("XX Mode")) executed in the zone effect (mode effect) as a background effect of a decorative pattern.

In this embodiment, the consecutive hold effects include same-color symbol effects and chance symbol effects. Same-color symbol effects and chance symbol effects are effects in which decorative symbols (for example, numbers) are stopped and displayed at specific, completely different numbers as same-color symbols, or at predetermined different numbers as chance symbols. Since the player can easily understand that a consecutive hold effect is being executed based on the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed, when a consecutive hold effect is executed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the consecutive hold effects will be executed consecutively, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when a continuous hold effect is executed by stopping the display of a specific complete miss or a predetermined complete miss, if the display of the capture image 78 clearly indicates or suggests that a continuous hold effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, as described above, the capture image 78 can be displayed in a variety of ways without obstructing the visibility of the changing decorative symbols in the second special symbol game. For example, the capture image 78 can display the image of the continuous hold effect in the first special symbol game in its original form, or it can display the image of the continuous hold effect in the first special symbol game as a reduced image, an image with reduced density, an outline image, etc. This allows a variety of effects to clearly indicate or suggest that a continuous hold effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game and improving the enjoyment of the game.

<Step S3411>
Returning to the explanation of the procedure for the hold continuous performance setting process, when the setting process of any of steps S3408 to S3410 is completed, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a setting to execute a hold continuous performance has been made in the setting process (step S3411), as shown in Fig. 63. If a setting to execute a hold continuous performance has been made (step S3411: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3412, and if a setting to execute a hold continuous performance has not been made (step S3411: No), the MPU 51 terminates the hold continuous performance setting process.

<Step S3412>
If the setting for executing the hold continuous performance has been made (step S3411: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a hold continuous performance setting flag indicating that the setting for executing the hold continuous performance has been made to ON (step S3412), and proceeds to step S3413. The hold continuous performance setting flag is referenced in step S3602 of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process of FIG. 67 to determine whether or not this is the first special symbol game that starts the hold continuous performance.

<Step S3413>
In step S3413, the MPU 51 sets a reserved continuous effect execution count counter that indicates the remaining number of first special symbol games for executing the reserved continuous effect. For example, if "X chances" (X is a positive integer from 1 to 4) is set as the reserved continuous effect, the MPU 51 sets "X" as the value of the reserved continuous effect execution count counter.

<Steps S3414 and S3415>
When the hold continuous effect execution count counter is set, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a chance eye effect is set as the hold continuous effect (step S3414). If a chance eye effect is set as the hold continuous effect (step S3414: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a chance eye flag indicating that a chance eye effect is set as the hold continuous effect to ON (step S3415), and ends the hold continuous effect setting process. On the other hand, if a chance eye effect is not set as the hold continuous effect (step S3414: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3416.

<Steps S3416 and S3417>
If the chance eye effect is not set as the hold continuous effect (step S3414: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the same color pattern effect is set as the hold continuous effect (step S3416). If the same color pattern effect is set as the hold continuous effect (step S3416: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a same color pattern flag indicating that the same color pattern effect is set as the hold continuous effect to ON (step S3417), and ends the hold continuous effect setting process. On the other hand, if the same color pattern effect is not set as the hold continuous effect (step S3416: No), that is, if the mini character effect or zone effect (mode effect) is set as the hold continuous effect, the MPU 51 ends the hold continuous effect setting process.

[Second special effect setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the second special symbol special effect setting process executed in step S3228 of the command determination process of Fig. 59 will be described with reference to Fig. 66. The second special symbol special effect setting process is a process for enabling the second special symbol special effect to be started in the second special symbol game that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315 by the long opening of the electric device 315b in the long opening normal symbol game in the normal game state that is the low frequency support mode. Here, Fig. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special symbol special effect setting process.

<Step S4201>
As shown in Fig. 66, in the second special symbol special effect setting process, in step S3501, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the second special symbol special effect setting flag is set to ON. The second special symbol special effect setting flag is a flag for enabling the second special symbol special effect to be started in the second special symbol game, and is set to ON in step S3503 described later. In addition, the second special symbol special effect setting flag is referenced in step S3635 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in Fig. 70 described later to determine whether or not to start the second special symbol special effect in the second special symbol game.

If the second special symbol special effect setting flag is set to on (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the second special symbol special effect setting process; if the second special symbol special effect setting flag is set to off (step S3501: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3502.

<Steps S3502 and S3503>
If the second special symbol special effect setting flag is set to OFF (step S3501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second special symbol special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3502). The second special symbol special effect execution flag is a flag indicating that the second special symbol special effect will be started, and when the second special symbol special effect is executed in the next second special symbol game, it is set to ON in step S3636 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in Figure 70 described later.

If the second special symbol special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3502: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the second special symbol special effect setting process. On the other hand, if the second special symbol special effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3502: No), the MPU 51 sets the second special symbol special effect setting flag to ON (step S3503) and terminates the second special symbol special effect setting process. By setting the second special symbol special effect setting flag to ON in this way, in step S3642 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in FIG. 70 described below, it becomes possible to set a second special symbol special effect for the second special symbol game that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning slot 315 as a result of the electric device 315b being long-opened during a long-open normal symbol game in the normal game mode.

[Variation type (performance pattern) setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure for the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process executed in step S3336 of the command determination process in Fig. 60 will be described with reference to Fig. 67 to Fig. 72. The variation type (presentation pattern) setting process is a process for setting the variation type (presentation pattern) for the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game that is executed when a variation pattern command is received. Here, Fig. 67 to Fig. 72 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the variation type (presentation pattern).

<Step S3601>
67, in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process, in step S3601, the MPU 51 first determines whether the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game is 0. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, if there is a reservation for the second special symbol game, the second special symbol game is executed in priority to the first special symbol game. That is, by determining whether the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game is 0, the MPU 51 determines whether to execute the second special symbol game or the first special symbol game. Then, if the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game is 0 (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3602 and executes a process to set the effect for the first special symbol game. On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols M for the second special symbol game is not 0 (step S3601: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3635 of FIG. 70 and executes a process to set the effects for the second special symbol game.

<Step S3602>
If the second special symbol reserved number M for the second special symbol game is 0 (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the reserved continuous effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3602). The reserved continuous effect setting flag is a flag indicating that the setting for executing the reserved continuous effect has been made, and is set to ON in step S3412 when the setting for executing the reserved continuous effect has been made in the reserved continuous effect setting process of FIG. 63 that is executed when the first special symbol reserved command is received.

If the pending continuous effect setting flag is set to on (step S3602: Yes), i.e., if the first pending continuous effect is executed in the first special symbol game, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3605 in FIG. 68. On the other hand, if the pending continuous effect setting flag is set to off (step S3602: No), i.e., if the first pending continuous effect is not executed in the first special symbol game, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3603.

<Step S3603>
If the pending continuous effect setting flag is set to OFF (step S3602: No), that is, if the first pending continuous effect is not executed in the first special symbol game, the MPU 51 determines whether the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3603). The pending continuous effect execution flag is a flag indicating that a pending continuous effect has started, and is set to ON in step S3611 described later in the variation (effect pattern) type setting process of FIG. 68 when a pending continuous effect is scheduled to be executed in the first special symbol game executed consecutively after the first special symbol game in which the pending continuous effect is started.

If the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), i.e., if a pending continuous effect is to be executed in the first special symbol game executed as the change, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3620 in FIG. 69. On the other hand, if the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3603: No), i.e., if a pending continuous effect is not to be executed in the first special symbol game, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3604.

<Step S3604>
If the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to off (step S3603: No), i.e., if pending continuous performance is executed in the first special chart game, the normal performance is set, i.e., the same variation type (performance pattern type) as in the first embodiment described above is set, and the variation type (performance pattern) setting process is terminated.

<Steps S3605 to S3608>
If the pending continuous effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), i.e., when the first pending continuous effect is executed in the first special symbol game, as shown in FIG. 68, the MPU 51 sets the pending continuous effect setting flag to OFF (step S3605) and sets the pending continuous effect set in one of steps S3408 to S3410 of FIG. 62 as the pending continuous effect for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game (step S3606). Then, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the pending continuous effect execution count counter, which indicates the remaining number of executions of the pending continuous effect (step S3607), and determines whether the value of the pending continuous effect execution count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3608). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is the last first special symbol game in which the pending continuous effect is executed.

If the value of the pending continuous effect execution counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3608: Yes), i.e., if the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is the last first special symbol game in which the pending continuous effect is executed, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3614. On the other hand, if the value of the pending continuous effect execution counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3608: No), i.e., if the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is not the last first special symbol game in which the pending continuous effect is executed, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3609.

<Steps S3609 and S3610>
If the value of the reserved continuous effect execution counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3608: No), that is, if the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is not the last first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous effect is executed, the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is a jackpot or not (step S3609). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether a jackpot game will be executed after the special symbol game ends, or whether the reserved first special symbol game will be executed.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3609: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is executed after the special symbol game ends, the MPU 51 clears the reserved continuous effect execution count counter, which indicates the remaining number of times the reserved continuous effect will be executed (step S3610), so that the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game will be the last first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous effect will be executed, and proceeds to step S3614. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3609: No), i.e., if the reserved first special symbol game will be executed after the special symbol game ends, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3611.

<Step S3611>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3609: No), that is, if the first special symbol game that was reserved after the special symbol game ended is executed, the MPU 51 sets the reserved continuous performance execution flag to on, indicating that the reserved continuous performance has started (step S3611), and proceeds to step S3612.

<Steps S3612 and S3613>
When the hold continuous effect execution flag indicating that the hold continuous effect has started is set to ON, the MPU 51 determines whether the chance eye flag is set to ON (step S3612). The chance eye flag is a flag indicating that the chance eye effect is set as the hold continuous effect, and is set to ON when the chance eye effect is set as the hold continuous effect in step S3415 of the hold continuous effect setting process of FIG. 63 which is executed when the first special symbol hold command is received.

If the chance eye flag is set to on (step S3612: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the chance eye count counter, which indicates the number of first special symbol plays of the chance eye effect executed as the pending continuous effect (step S3613), and ends the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

In this embodiment, the upper limit on the number of first special symbol games in which the chance eye effect is executed consecutively is four if the result of the reserved jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that triggered the execution of the reserved continuous effect is a jackpot, and three if it is a miss (see Figure 64). Therefore, by referencing the value of the chance eye count counter, inconsistencies are prevented between the result of the reserved jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that triggered the execution of the reserved continuous effect and the number of first special symbol games in which the chance eye effect is executed as the reserved continuous effect.

On the other hand, if the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3612: No), the MPU 51 terminates the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

<Steps S3614 to S3616>
If the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is the last first special symbol game in which a pending continuous performance is executed (step S3608 or step S3610), that is, if the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter indicating the remaining number of times the pending continuous performance is executed is 0, it is determined whether or not the chance eye flag indicating that a chance eye performance is set as the pending continuous performance is set on (step S3614).

If the chance eye flag is set to ON (step S3614: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance eye flag to OFF (step S3615), and sets the final chance eye flag to ON (step S3616), indicating that the chance eye effect executed as a pending continuous effect in that special symbol game is the last chance eye effect, and ends the variation type (effect pattern) setting process. The final chance eye flag is referenced in step S3702 of the stop symbol combination setting process in Figure 73 described below to determine whether or not to set a chance eye as a stop symbol combination.

On the other hand, if the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3614: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3617.

<Steps S3617 to S3619>
If the chance eye flag is set to OFF (step S3614: No), it is determined whether a same-color symbol flag indicating that a same-color symbol effect is set as the reserved continuous effect is set to ON (step S3617). If the same-color symbol flag is set to ON (step S3617: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the same-color symbol flag to OFF (step S3618) and sets the final same-color symbol flag indicating that the same-color symbol effect executed as the reserved continuous effect in the special symbol game is the final same-color symbol effect to ON (step S3619), thereby terminating the variable type (effect pattern) setting process. The final same-color symbol flag is referenced to determine whether or not to set a same-color symbol as the stopped symbol combination in step S3706 of the stopped symbol combination setting process of FIG. 73 described below.

On the other hand, if the same-color symbol flag is set to off (step S3617: No), that is, if the last pending continuous effect executed in the special symbol game is not a chance eye effect or a same-color symbol effect, the MPU 51 terminates the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

<Step S3620>
If the hold continuous performance execution flag indicating that the hold continuous performance has started is set to on (step S3603: Yes), that is, if the hold continuous performance is executed in the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game, as shown in FIG. 69, the MPU 51 sets the hold continuous performance for the special symbol game (step S3620) and proceeds to step S3621.

The reserved continuous effect set in one of steps S3408-S3410 of the reserved continuous effect setting process in FIG. 62 is set as the reserved continuous effect for that special symbol game. However, as described below, if a fourth chance eye effect executed as a jackpot confirmation effect can be set even if the result of the jackpot lottery for that special symbol game is a miss, a process is executed to change the reserved continuous effect executed for that special symbol game from a chance eye effect to a same-color pattern effect to prevent inconsistencies between the result of the jackpot lottery and the reserved continuous effect (step S3662 in FIG. 72).

<Step S3621>
When a pending continuous effect is set for the special game (step S3620), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the chance eye flag, which indicates that a chance eye effect is set as the pending continuous effect, is set on (step S3621), and if the chance eye flag is set on (step S3621: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S3622, and if the chance eye flag is set off (step S3621: No), the processing proceeds to step S3625.

<Steps S3622 to S3624>
If the chance eye flag indicating that the chance eye effect is set as the reserved continuous effect is set on (step S3621: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the chance eye count counter indicating the number of times the first special symbol game has executed the chance eye effect as the reserved continuous effect (step S3622), and determines whether the value of the chance eye count counter after the addition is 4 (step S3623). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the special symbol game is a first special symbol game in which the fourth chance eye effect is executed as the reserved continuous effect.

If the value of the chance symbol counter after the increment is 4 (step S3623: Yes), the chance symbol temporary stop flag is set to ON (step S3624), and processing proceeds to step S3628. On the other hand, if the value of the chance symbol counter after the increment is not 4 (step S3623: No), processing proceeds to step S3625.

As mentioned above, the upper limit of the chance eye count counter value (the number of first special symbol games in which the chance eye effect is executed consecutively as a hold consecutive effect) is four if the result of the hold jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that triggered the execution of the chance eye effect as a hold consecutive effect is a jackpot. On the other hand, the upper limit of the hold for the first special symbol game is four, and the number of first special symbol games in which the hold consecutive effect is executed consecutively is also four. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a double-digit number in which all decorative symbols are the same is displayed, and a chance eye cannot be displayed. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to execute the chance eye in four consecutive first special symbol games, for example, in the fourth first special symbol game that notifies the user that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a chance eye is temporarily displayed in a high-speed variable game before the reach effect is executed, and then a double-digit number is displayed via the reach effect. Thus, in this embodiment, if the result of the reserved jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that triggered the execution of the reserved continuous effect is a jackpot, and the chance eye effect as the reserved continuous effect is executed four times in a row in the first special symbol game, the chance eye is temporarily displayed before the decorative symbol is displayed as a double-digit number in the fourth first special symbol game. Therefore, in step S3624, the chance eye temporary stop flag is set on to temporarily display the chance eye before the decorative symbol is displayed as a double-digit number. This chance eye temporary stop flag is referenced in step S3709 of FIG. 74 when setting the decorative symbol stop display combination for the fourth first special symbol game when the chance eye effect as the reserved continuous effect is executed four times in a row in the first special symbol game.

<Step S3625>
If the chance eye flag is set to OFF (step S3621: No), or if the value of the chance eye count counter after the increment is not 4 (step S3623: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game, which is the special symbol game, is a jackpot (step S3625). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether a jackpot game will be executed after the special symbol game ends, or whether the reserved first special symbol game will be executed, as in step S3609 of FIG. 68 described above.

Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3625: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game will be executed after the special symbol game ends, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3628. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3625: No), i.e., if the first special symbol game that was put on hold will be executed after the special symbol game ends, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3626.

<Steps S3626 and S3627>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3625: No), that is, if a reserved first special symbol game is executed after the end of the special symbol game, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved continuous effect execution count counter, which indicates the remaining number of executions of the reserved continuous effect (step S3626).The MPU 51 then determines whether the value of the reserved continuous effect execution count counter after the subtraction is 0, that is, whether the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is the last first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous effect is executed (step S3627).

If the value of the pending continuous effect execution counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3627: Yes), i.e., if the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is the last first special symbol game in which the pending continuous effect is executed, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3629. On the other hand, if the value of the pending continuous effect execution counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3627: No), i.e., if the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is not the last first special symbol game in which the pending continuous effect is executed, the MPU 51 terminates the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

<Step S3628>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3625: Yes), that is, if a jackpot game is executed after the end of the special symbol game, the MPU 51 clears the hold continuous effect execution count counter, which indicates the remaining number of times the hold continuous effect will be executed (step S3628), so that the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game will be the last first special symbol game in which the hold continuous effect will be executed, and proceeds to step S3629.

<Step S3629>
If the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3627: Yes), or if the pending continuous performance execution count counter indicating the remaining number of times the pending continuous performance will be executed is cleared (step S3628), that is, if the first special chart game executed as the special chart game is the last first special chart game in which the pending continuous performance will be executed, the MPU 51 sets the pending continuous performance execution flag, which indicates that the pending continuous performance has started, to off (step S3629), and proceeds to step S3630.

<Step S3630>
In step S3630, the MPU 51 determines whether a chance eye flag indicating that a chance eye effect is set as the reserved continuous effect is set. If the chance eye flag is set to on (step S3630: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3631, and if the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3630: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3633.

<Steps S3631 and S3632>
If the chance eye flag is set to on (step S3630: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance eye flag to off (step S3631), clears the chance eye count counter (step S3632), and terminates the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process.

<Steps S3633 and S3634>
If the chance eye flag is set to OFF (step S3630: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the same color symbol flag, which indicates that the same color symbol effect is set as the reserved continuous effect, is set to ON (step S3633). If the same color symbol flag is set to ON (step S3633: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the same color symbol flag to OFF (step S3634), and ends the variable type (effect pattern) setting process.

On the other hand, if the same-color symbol flag is set to off (step S3633: No), that is, if the pending continuous effect is not a chance eye effect or a same-color symbol effect, but a mini-character effect or a zone effect (mode effect), the MPU 51 terminates the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

<Step S3635>
If it is determined in step S3601 of Fig. 67 that the number of reserved second special symbols M for the second special symbol game is not 0 (step S3601: No), that is, if there is a reserved second special symbol game, as shown in Fig. 70, the MPU 51 determines whether the second special symbol special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3635). The second special symbol special effect setting flag is a flag for starting the second special symbol special effect (see Figs. 61(B) and 61(C)) in the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game. This second special symbol special effect setting flag is set to ON in step S3503 of the second special symbol special effect setting process of Fig. 66 when a second special symbol reservation command transmitted in response to the game ball 99 entering the second winning hole 315 due to the long opening of the second winning hole 315 in a long-open normal symbol game is received.

If the second special effect setting flag is set to on (step S3635: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3636; if the second special effect setting flag is set to off (step S3635: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3641.

<Steps S3636 and S3637>
If the second special chart special effect setting flag is set to on (step S3635: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the second special chart special effect execution flag to on (step S3636), indicating that the second special chart special effect has started, and sets the second special chart special effect setting flag to off (step S3637), and proceeds to step S3638.

<Step S3638>
In step S3638, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the electric accessory long open flag, which indicates that the second winning port 315 is long open (a long open normal winning game is being executed), is set to on. If the electric accessory long open flag is set to on (step S3638: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3639, and if the electric accessory long open flag is set to off (step S3638: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3642.

<Steps S3639 and S3640>
If the electric reel length opening flag is set to on (step S3638: Yes), the MPU 51 executes processing to end the electric reel length opening performance (see FIG. 87(A)) (step S3639), sets the electric reel length opening flag to off (step S3640), and proceeds to step S3642. That is, the electric reel length opening performance (see FIG. 87(A)) is ended when either the start of the second special symbol special performance (see FIG. 61(A)) or the chain of the electric reel 315b is satisfied. In other words, the second special symbol special performance is executed with priority over the electric reel length opening performance.

<Step S3641>
If it is determined in step S3635 that the second special chart special effect setting flag is set to off (step S3635: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second special chart special effect execution flag, which is set to on in step S3636 when the second special chart special effect is started, is set to on (step S3641).

If the second special symbol special effect execution flag is set to on (step S3641: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3642; if the second special symbol special effect execution flag is set to off (step S3641: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3652 in FIG. 71.

<Steps S3642 and S3643>
In step S3642, the MPU 51 sets a second special symbol game effect for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3643). The pending continuous effect execution flag is a flag indicating that a pending continuous effect has started, and is set to ON in step S3611 of FIG. 68 above when a pending continuous effect is scheduled to be executed in the first special symbol game executed next to the first special symbol game in which the pending continuous effect was executed. That is, in this step S3643, it is determined whether the pending continuous effect will be resumed in the first special symbol game executed after the end of all second special symbol games in which the second special symbol special effect is executed.

If the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to on (step S3643: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3644; if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to off (step S3643: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3645.

<Step S3644>
If the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to on (step S3643: Yes), the MPU 51 sets capture image display information in the display variation pattern command sent from the sound lamp control device 5 to the display control device 6 to display a capture image 78 (see FIG. 61C) on the symbol display unit 341 in the second special symbol game effect, which clearly indicates or suggests that the hold continuous effect will resume in the first special symbol game that is executed after the end of all second special symbol games in which the second special symbol special effect is executed (step S3644), and proceeds to step S3645. As a result, the capture image 78 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the second special symbol game effect (see FIG. 61C).

Note that if the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3643: No), that is, if a pending continuous effect is not executed in the first special symbol game that is executed after the completion of all second special symbol games in which a second special symbol special effect is executed, the processing of step S3644 is skipped. Therefore, if a pending continuous effect is not executed in the first special symbol game that is executed after the completion of all second special symbol games in which a second special symbol special effect is executed, the capture image 78 is not displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in the second special symbol game effect (see FIG. 61 (B)).

Here, the captured image is displayed as a reduced image of the screen of the hold continuous effect that was being executed on the symbol display unit 341 during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect. This captured image 78 is displayed when a hold continuous effect was executed during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and a hold continuous effect is being executed during the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect (see FIG. 61 (B)). In other words, the captured image 78 clearly indicates or suggests, during the execution of the second special symbol special effect, that a hold continuous effect was executed during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and that a hold continuous effect will be executed during the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect.

In this way, in this embodiment, the capture image 78 clearly indicates or suggests that a hold continuous effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and that a hold continuous effect will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect. This significantly reduces the likelihood that the player will forget that a hold continuous effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and allows the player to understand that a hold continuous effect will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect. Therefore, even if a hold continuous effect is resumed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect, the player is significantly less likely to feel uncomfortable about the hold continuous effect being executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the hold continuous effect that was executed before the execution of the second special symbol special effect being resumed after the end of the second special symbol special effect.

In particular, when the second winning slot 315 is long-opened in a game that wins a long-open normal symbol, the player will be preoccupied for a longer period of time with whether or not the game ball 99 will land in the second winning slot 315 than when the second winning slot 315 is short-opened in a game that wins a short-open normal symbol. This increases the likelihood that the player will forget that the continuous hold effect was being executed before the second special symbol game was played. Furthermore, when the second winning slot 315 is long-opened in a game that wins a long-open normal symbol, the game ball 99 is more likely to land in the second winning slot 315 (more balls will land), and therefore the number of second special symbol games in which the second special symbol special effect is executed is greater (the execution time of the second special symbol special effect is longer) than when the second winning slot 315 is short-opened in a game that wins a short-open normal symbol. Therefore, the time between the end of the continuous hold effect before the execution of the second special symbol effect (the start of the second special symbol effect) and the resumption of the continuous hold effect due to the end of the second special symbol effect is longer, and players pay more attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game in which the second special symbol effect is executed is a jackpot, compared to when the first special symbol game is executed. Thus, when the second winning slot 315 is long-opened in a long-open normal symbol game, compared to when the second winning slot 315 is short-opened in a short-open normal symbol game, players are more likely to forget that the continuous hold effect was executed before the execution of the second special symbol game. Therefore, the effect of clearly indicating or suggesting, during the execution of the second special symbol effect, that the continuous hold effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol effect is significant.

Furthermore, by displaying the captured image 78 as a reduced image of the screen of the reserved continuous effect that was being executed on the symbol display unit 341 during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol effect, the type of reserved continuous effect that was being executed during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol effect is clearly indicated or suggested, and the type of reserved continuous effect that will be executed during the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol effect is clearly indicated or suggested. For example, in this embodiment, four types of reserved continuous effects are set: same-color symbol effect, chance eye effect, mini-character effect, and zone effect (mode effect) (see FIG. 64). However, the captured image 78 shown in FIG. 61(C) clearly indicates or suggests that a chance eye effect in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a chance eye "113" (see FIG. 65), was executed as a reserved continuous effect during the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol effect. This not only allows the player to understand that a consecutive hold effect was being executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol effect, and that a consecutive hold effect will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol effect, but also allows the player to understand the type of consecutive hold effect. This further reduces the player's sense of discomfort when the consecutive hold effect is resumed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol effect, and further prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the consecutive hold effect that was being executed before the execution of the second special symbol effect after the end of the second special symbol special effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the captured image 78 is displayed in a reduced size in the lower left area of the pattern display unit 341, but the captured image may be displayed across the entire pattern display unit 341 for a certain period of time at either or both the end of the second special symbol effect and the start of the consecutive hold effect that is executed after the end of the second special symbol effect. For example, the captured image may be displayed as a so-called stage change effect, in which the stage effect (background effect) from the previous special symbol game is changed for the current special symbol game. In this way, by displaying the captured image across the entire pattern display unit 341 for a certain period of time at either or both the end of the second special symbol effect and the start of the consecutive hold effect that is executed after the end of the second special symbol effect, the transition from the execution of the second special symbol special effect in the second special symbol game to the execution of the consecutive hold effect in the first special symbol game can be carried out smoothly and without any discomfort.

<Step S3645>
If the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S3643: No), or if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S3643: Yes), the MPU 51 sets capture image display information in the display variation pattern command (step S3644), and the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3645). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether a jackpot game will be executed after the execution of the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game.

Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3645: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game will be executed after the second special symbol game ends, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3646. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3645: No), i.e., if a jackpot game will not be executed after the second special symbol game ends, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3649.

<Step S3646>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3645: Yes), the MPU 51 clears the long-open winning counter (step S3646) and proceeds to step S3647. Here, the value of the long-open winning counter indicates the number of unexecuted second special symbol games among the second special symbol games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second prize opening 315 while the second prize opening 315 is long-open (during the execution of the long-open normal symbol winning game). In other words, if a jackpot game is executed after the end of the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game, the MPU 51 sets the number of unexecuted second special symbol games to 0.

<Steps S3647 and S3648>
In step S3647, the MPU 51 determines whether a hold continuous performance execution flag indicating that the hold continuous performance has started is set to ON (step S3647). If the hold continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S3647: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the hold continuous performance execution flag to OFF (step S3648) and proceeds to step S3651. If the hold continuous performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S3648: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3651.

<Steps S3649 and S3650>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3645: No), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the long opening prize winning counter (step S3649) and determines whether the value of the long opening prize winning counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3650). If the value of the long opening prize winning counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3650: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3651, and if the value of the long opening prize winning counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3650: No), the MPU 51 terminates the effect setting process.

Here, if the value of the long-open winning counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3650: Yes), that is, if the second special symbol game in question is the last second special symbol game in which a second special symbol special effect is executed, the processing of steps S3647 and S3648 is not executed, and processing proceeds to step S3651. As a result, if the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to on, the pending continuous effect execution flag is not set to off. As a result, the pending continuous effect is resumed in the first special symbol game executed after the last second special symbol game in which a second special symbol special effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the hold continuous effect is resumed in the first special symbol game that is executed after the last second special symbol game in which the second special symbol special effect is executed. However, if the value of the long open winning counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3650: Yes), processing may be transitioned to step S3647, so that the hold continuous effect is not resumed in the first special symbol game that is executed after the last second special symbol game in which the second special symbol special effect is executed.

<Step S3651>
In step S3651, the MPU 51 sets the special effect execution flag indicating that the second special effect has started to OFF, and ends the variable type (effect pattern) setting process. As a result, the second special effect executed in the second special effect game executed as the special effect game is executed as the last second special effect game.

<Steps S3652 and S3653>
If it is determined in step S3641 that the second special effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3641: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the short-opening closing flag, which indicates that the electric device 315b that was short-open during the short-opening normal winning game has been closed, is set to ON (step S3652), as shown in Fig. 71. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the entry of the game balls 99 into the second winning opening 315 has been restricted due to the end of the short-opening normal winning game, and the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning opening 315 has not increased.

If the short open/close flag is set to on (step S3652: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the short open/close flag to off (step S3653) and proceeds to step S3654. On the other hand, if the short open/close flag is set to off (step S3652: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3658 in FIG. 72.

<Step S3654>
When the short-opening closing flag is set to ON (step S3652: Yes), or when the short-opening closing flag is set to OFF (step S3653), the MPU 51 determines whether the chance eye flag is set to ON (step S3654). The chance eye flag is a flag indicating that a chance eye effect is set as a reserved continuous effect. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether a chance eye effect is set as a reserved continuous effect when the electric device 315b that was short-opened in a short-opening normal winning game is closed, thereby determining whether a chance eye effect is executed as a reserved continuous effect in the second special symbol game that is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 in a short-opening normal winning game.

If the chance eye flag is set to on (step S3654: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3655; if the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3654: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3658 in FIG. 72.

<Steps S3655 and S3656>
If the chance eye flag is set to on (step S3654: Yes), the MPU 51 adds the value of the chance eye count counter, the value of the pending continuous performance count counter, and the value of the short opening winning counter (step S3655), and determines whether the added value is 4 or greater (step S3656).

Here, the value of the chance eye count counter is the number of first special symbol games in which the chance eye effect was executed as a hold continuous effect, and the value of the hold continuous effect count counter is the number of remaining first special symbol games in which the hold continuous effect will be executed. Therefore, the sum of the value of the chance eye count counter and the value of the hold continuous effect count counter is the number of first special symbol games in which the initially set hold continuous effect will be executed. Furthermore, the value of the short opening winning counter is the number of second special symbol games executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 in a short opening normal symbol winning game, and is also the number of second special symbol games in which the hold continuous effect will be executed. Therefore, the sum of the value of the chance eye count counter, the value of the hold continuous effect count counter, and the value of the short opening winning counter is the maximum number of special symbol games (first special symbol games, second special symbol games) in which the chance eye effect as a hold continuous effect will be executed consecutively.

On the other hand, as mentioned above, if the chance eye effect is executed as a consecutive hold effect four or more times in a special symbol game, it will become a confirmed jackpot effect that clearly indicates a jackpot. Therefore, if the chance eye effect is set as a consecutive hold effect and the second special symbol game is executed in response to the entry of game ball 99 into second winning slot 315 in a short-open normal symbol game, if the result of the jackpot lottery for each special symbol game in which the chance eye effect is executed is a miss, there may be an inconsistency between the result clearly indicated by the consecutive execution of the chance eye effect as a consecutive hold effect and the result of the jackpot lottery.

When a chance eye effect is set as the reserved consecutive effect, by determining whether the sum of the value of the chance eye count counter, the value of the reserved consecutive effect count counter, and the value of the short-open winning counter is 4 or greater, it becomes possible to determine in advance whether an inconsistency may occur between the result indicated by the consecutive execution of the chance eye effect as the reserved consecutive effect and the result of the jackpot lottery.

If the sum of the value of the chance eye count counter, the value of the pending continuous performance count counter, and the value of the short opening winning counter is 4 or greater (step S3656: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3657; if the sum is not 4 or greater (step S3656: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3658 in FIG. 72.

<Step S3657>
If the sum of the value of the chance eye count counter, the value of the pending continuous effect count counter, and the value of the short-open winning counter is 4 or more (step S3656: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the results of the jackpot lottery for all special symbol games executed thereafter, including the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game, are misses (step S3657). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether the results of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol games executed thereafter, including the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game, include a jackpot.

If the results of the jackpot lottery for all subsequent special symbol games, including the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game in question, are losses (step S3657: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3660 in FIG. 72. On the other hand, if the results of the jackpot lottery for all subsequent special symbol games, including the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game in question, are not losses (step S3657: No), and if the results of the jackpot lottery for subsequent special symbol games, including the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game in question, include a jackpot, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3658 in FIG. 72.

<Steps S3658 and S3659>
If the short-opening/closing flag is set to OFF (step S3652: No), if the chance eye flag is set to OFF (step S3654: No), if the sum of the chance eye count counter, the pending continuous effect count counter, and the short-opening winning counter is not 4 or greater (step S3656: No), or if a jackpot is included in the results of the jackpot lottery for all subsequent special symbol games, including the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game (step S3657: No), as shown in FIG. 72, the MPU 51 executes the processing of step S3658. That is, if there is no problem with the chance eye effect being executed as a pending continuous effect in four or more consecutive special symbol games, the MPU 51 determines in step S3658 whether the pending continuous effect execution flag, which indicates that a pending continuous effect has started, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether to set a pending continuous effect as an effect for the second special symbol game executed as the variation.

If the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to on (step S3658: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the pending continuous effect as the effect for the second special symbol game executed as the corresponding special symbol game (step S3659), and executes the processing of steps S3625 to S3634 in FIG. 69 described above.

On the other hand, if the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to off (step S3658: No), i.e., if the pending continuous effect is not set as the effect for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3604 in FIG. 67 described above, sets a normal effect as the effect for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game (setting the effect in the same way as in the first embodiment described above), and ends the setting of the variation type (effect pattern).

In this way, when the hold continuous effect execution flag is set to on (step S3658: Yes), by setting the hold continuous effect as the effect for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game (step S3659), when the hold continuous effect is being executed in the first special symbol game as the special symbol game, and it is scheduled that the hold continuous effect will be executed consecutively in the next first special symbol game that has been put on hold, even if the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315 due to a short opening of the second winning port 315, in the second special symbol game in which the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315 when the second winning port 315 is short opened, the second special symbol special effect will not be executed and the hold continuous effect will continue to be executed. For this reason, when a reserved continuous effect is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, and the reserved continuous effect is scheduled to be executed consecutively in the next reserved first special symbol game, the player will not feel uncomfortable that the reserved continuous effect is not executed after the end of the second special symbol game, which is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 when the second special symbol game is short-opened. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the reserved continuous effect not being executed in the first special symbol game, which is executed after the end of the second special symbol game.

In particular, when second winning opening 315 is short-opened, it is more difficult for game balls 99 to enter second winning opening 315 (fewer balls enter) than when second winning opening 315 is long-opened, and there is a high possibility that the player will remember that the continuous reserved effect was executed before the second special symbol game was played. Therefore, when second winning opening 315 is short-opened and a game ball 99 enters second winning opening 315, the effect of the continuous reserved effect being executed without the second special symbol special effect being executed in the second special symbol game is significant.

Furthermore, in a short opening where it is difficult for game balls 99 to enter second winning opening 315, it is expected that the number of game balls 99 that enter second winning opening 315 will be small. Therefore, even if the continuous hold effect continues to be executed in a second special symbol game when game balls 99 enter second winning opening 315 when second winning opening 315 is short-open, the number of continuous executions of the continuous hold effect will not increase significantly, so the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable about the continuous execution of the continuous hold effect in second special symbol game. On the contrary, the continuous execution of the continuous hold effect in second special symbol game allows the continuous hold effect to be effectively utilized in second special symbol game.

<Steps S3660 and S3661>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for all subsequent special symbol games, including the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game, is a miss (step S3657 in Figure 71: Yes), that is, if there is a possibility of an inconsistency between the result indicated by the successive execution of chance symbol effects as a pending continuous effect and the result of the jackpot lottery, the MPU 51 sets the chance symbol flag to off (step S3660) and clears the value of the chance symbol count counter (step S3661), thereby restricting the chance symbol effects from being continuously executed.

<Steps S3662 and S3663>
When the process for restricting the continuous execution of the chance eye effect has been executed (steps S3660 and S3661), the MPU 51 sets the same color pattern effect as the reserved continuous effect for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game (step S3662), sets the same color pattern indicating that the same color pattern has been set as the reserved continuous effect to ON (step S3663), and proceeds to step S3664. That is, the MPU 51 changes the reserved continuous effect for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game from the chance eye effect to the same color pattern effect.

Here, as mentioned above, the chance eye effect becomes a jackpot confirmation effect when it is executed in four or more consecutive special symbol games. Therefore, by changing the hold consecutive effect for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game from a chance eye effect to a same-color pattern effect, the chance eye effect is prevented from being executed in four or more consecutive special symbol games. This prevents inconsistencies from occurring between the results indicated by the chance eye effect being executed in succession as a hold consecutive effect and the result of the jackpot lottery. On the other hand, as mentioned above, the same-color pattern effect is an effect that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot, and does not become a jackpot confirmation effect even if it is executed in four or more consecutive special symbol games. Therefore, by changing the hold consecutive effect for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game from a chance eye effect to a same-color pattern effect, even if the same-color pattern effect is executed in four or more consecutive special symbol games, the hold consecutive effect does not indicate that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, so there is no inconsistency between the hold consecutive effect and the result of the jackpot lottery.

In this embodiment, when the reserved continuous display changes from a chance eye display to a same-color symbol display, the reserved continuous display is executed continuously for multiple special symbol games. However, the reserved continuous display may be interrupted by executing a special symbol game in which an image of a completely missing symbol other than a chance eye or a same-color symbol is displayed before the chance eye display is changed to a same-color symbol display. In this case, the player is prevented from feeling uneasy about the reserved continuous display being executed in four or more special symbol games. Furthermore, by interrupting the reserved continuous display, the player is given the illusion that a new same-color symbol display has begun as a reserved continuous display after the chance eye display as a reserved continuous display has ended. This allows the change from the chance eye display to the same-color symbol display to be executed smoothly and without any sense of incongruity, and also makes it possible to make it appear as if the change from the chance eye display to the same-color symbol display had not occurred. Furthermore, by making it appear as if the change from the chance eye display to the same-color symbol display had not occurred, inconveniences caused by the consecutive execution of the chance eye display can be avoided without the player realizing it. Incidentally, if a change is made from a chance eye effect to a same-color pattern effect to avoid the inconvenience of the chance eye effect being executed four or more times in a row in a special symbol game, the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the changed same-color pattern effect is executed will be a miss. Therefore, when a change is made from a chance eye effect to a same-color pattern effect, there is a concern that the player will realize that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the changed same-color pattern effect is executed will be a miss. Therefore, by disguising it as if the change from the chance eye effect to the same-color pattern effect had not occurred, it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the changed same-color pattern effect is executed will be a miss.

<Step S3664>
If the pending continuous performance for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is changed from a chance eye performance to a same color pattern performance, the MPU 51 adds the value of the short opening winning counter to the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter (step S3664).

Here, the value of the pending continuous performance execution counter indicates the remaining number of special symbol games in which the pending continuous performance will be executed. Furthermore, the value of the short-open winning counter is the number of game balls 99 that enter the second winning port 315 when the second winning port 315 is short-open (a short-open normal symbol winning game is being executed) and the number of reserved balls M for the second special symbol game has not reached the upper limit. Therefore, by adding the value of the short-open winning counter to the value of the pending continuous performance execution counter, the MPU 51 resets the value of the pending continuous performance execution counter, which indicates the remaining number of special symbol games in which the pending continuous performance will be executed, to a value that includes the number of pending continuous performances executed in the second special symbol game.

<Steps S3665 and S3666>
When the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter is reset (step S3664), the MPU 51 clears the value of the short opening winning counter (step S3665), sets the short opening closing flag to off (step S3666), executes the processing of steps S3625 to S3634 in the aforementioned Figure 69, and terminates the performance type setting processing.

[Stop symbol combination setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure for the stop symbol combination setting process executed in step S3337 of the command determination process in Fig. 60 will be described with reference to Fig. 73 and Fig. 74. The stop symbol combination setting process is a process for setting a symbol combination when a decorative symbol that is variably displayed in a first special symbol game or a second special symbol game is stopped and displayed. Here, Fig. 73 and Fig. 74 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the stop symbol combination setting process.

<Step S3701>
73, in the stop symbol combination setting process, in step S3701, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a chance symbol flag indicating that a chance symbol effect is set as the reserved continuous effect is set. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to set a chance symbol (see FIG. 65) as the stop symbol combination.

If the chance eye flag is set to on (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3704; if the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3701: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3702.

<Steps S3702 and S3703>
If the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3701: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the final chance eye flag, which indicates that the chance eye effect executed as a pending continuous effect in the special chart game is the last chance eye effect, is set to on (step S3702).

If the final chance eye flag is set to on (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the final chance eye flag to off (step S3703) and proceeds to step S3704. On the other hand, if the final chance eye flag is set to off (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3705.

<Step S3704>
If the chance eye flag is set to on (step S3701: Yes), or if the final chance eye flag that was set to on is set to off (step S3703), the MPU 51 sets the chance eye (see Figure 65) as the decorative pattern combination to be displayed as stopped, and terminates the stopped pattern combination setting process.

The type of chance symbol to be displayed when the special symbol game is played can be determined by, for example, setting a chance symbol type selection table that associates a chance symbol type counter with an individual chance symbol, and then setting the chance symbol from the chance symbol type selection table based on the value of the chance symbol type counter when setting the stop symbol combination.

<Step S3705>
If the chance symbol flag and the final chance symbol flag are set to OFF (step S3702: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the same color symbol flag, which indicates that the same color symbol effect is set as the reserved continuous effect, is set to ON (step S3705). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to set the same color symbol (see FIG. 65) as the stopped symbol combination.

If the same-color pattern flag is set to on (step S3705: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3708; if the same-color pattern flag is set to off (step S3705: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3706.

<Steps S3706 and S3707>
If the same color pattern flag is set to off (step S3705: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the final same color pattern flag, which indicates that the same color pattern effect executed as a pending continuous effect in the special pattern game is the last same color pattern effect, is set to on (step S3706).

If the final same-color pattern flag is set to on (step S3706: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the final same-color pattern flag to off (step S3707) and proceeds to step S3708. On the other hand, if the final same-color pattern flag is set to off (step S3706: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3709 in FIG. 74.

<Step S3708>
If the same color pattern flag is set to on (step S3705: Yes), or if the final same color pattern flag that was set to on is set to off (step S3707), the MPU 51 sets the same color pattern (see Figure 65) as the decorative pattern combination to be displayed in a stopped state (step S3708), and terminates the stopped pattern combination setting process.

The type of same-color pattern to be stopped and displayed during this variation can be determined, for example, by setting a same-color pattern type selection table that associates same-color pattern type counters with individual same-color patterns, and then selecting a same-color pattern from the same-color pattern type selection table based on the value of the same-color pattern type counter when setting the stopped pattern combination.

<Step S3709>
If a chance symbol and a symbol of the same color are not set as the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the chance symbol temporary stop flag is set to ON (step S3709), as shown in Fig. 74. The chance symbol temporary stop flag is a flag for temporarily displaying a chance symbol before the decorative symbol is stopped (for example, when the decorative symbol is rapidly fluctuating before a win) when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is a jackpot and the fourth chance symbol effect is executed as a reserved continuous effect in the special symbol game.

If the chance eye temporary stop flag is set to on (step S3709: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3710; if the chance eye temporary stop flag is set to off (step S3709: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3713.

<Steps S3710 to S3712>
If the chance symbol temporary stop flag is set to ON (step S3709: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a chance symbol as the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped (step S3710), and sets a doublet as the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped (step S3711).Then, the MPU 51 sets the chance symbol temporary stop flag to OFF (step S3712), and ends the stop symbol combination setting process.

The chance numbers to be displayed as temporary stops can be set in the same manner as in step S3704 described above. The double numbers to be displayed as temporary stops can be set in the same manner as in step S3104 of the command determination process in FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above.

<Step S3713>
If chance symbols and same-color symbols are not set as the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and chance symbols are not set as the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped, the MPU 51 sets the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped normally (setting the combination of decorative symbols in the same way as in the first embodiment described above) and terminates the process of setting the combination of stopped symbols.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the opening mode of the second winning opening 315 by the electric device 315b is set to either a short opening, in which it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315, or a long opening, in which the opening time of the second winning opening 315 by the electric device 315b is longer than the short opening, making it easier for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the second special symbol for the second reservation is executed with priority over the first special symbol game for the first reservation.

In this embodiment, when a continuous hold effect is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, and it is planned that the continuous hold effect will be executed consecutively in the next first special symbol game that is held, if the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 due to the short opening of the second winning opening 315, the continuous hold effect that was being executed in the first special symbol game will continue to be executed in the second special symbol game that is executed after the end of the first special symbol game as the variation. In other words, in this embodiment, when a continuous hold effect is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, and it is planned that the continuous hold effect will be executed consecutively in the next first special symbol game that is held, even if the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 due to the short opening of the second winning opening 315, the second special symbol special effect will not be executed and the continuous hold effect will continue to be executed in the second special symbol game that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 when the second winning opening 315 is short opened. For this reason, when a reserved continuous effect is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, and the reserved continuous effect is scheduled to be executed consecutively in the next reserved first special symbol game, the player will not feel uncomfortable that the reserved continuous effect is not executed after the end of the second special symbol game, which is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 when the second special symbol game is short-opened. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the reserved continuous effect not being executed in the first special symbol game, which is executed after the end of the second special symbol game.

In particular, when second winning opening 315 is short-opened, it is more difficult for game balls 99 to enter second winning opening 315 (fewer balls enter) than when second winning opening 315 is long-opened, and there is a high possibility that the player will remember that the continuous reserved effect was executed before the second special symbol game was played. Therefore, when second winning opening 315 is short-opened and a game ball 99 enters second winning opening 315, the effect of the continuous reserved effect being executed without the second special symbol special effect being executed in the second special symbol game is significant.

Furthermore, in a short opening where it is difficult for game balls 99 to enter second winning opening 315, it is expected that the number of game balls 99 that enter second winning opening 315 will be small. Therefore, even if the continuous hold effect continues to be executed in a second special symbol game when game balls 99 enter second winning opening 315 when second winning opening 315 is short-open, the number of continuous executions of the continuous hold effect will not increase significantly, so the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable about the continuous execution of the continuous hold effect in second special symbol game. On the contrary, the continuous execution of the continuous hold effect in second special symbol game allows the continuous hold effect to be effectively utilized in second special symbol game.

In addition, in this embodiment, if it is determined that a chance eye effect, which becomes a jackpot confirmation effect when executed in four or more consecutive special symbol games, will be executed in four or more consecutive special symbol games, and the results of the jackpot lottery for all special symbol games from the first special symbol game in which the chance eye effect was started are losses, before the number of special symbol games in which the chance eye effect is executed reaches four, the pending consecutive effect is changed from a chance eye effect to a same-color pattern effect, which does not become a jackpot confirmation effect even if executed in four or more consecutive special symbol games. This prevents the chance eye effect from being executed in four or more consecutive special symbol games, thereby preventing inconsistencies between the results indicated by the chance eye effect being executed in succession as a pending consecutive effect and the results of the jackpot lottery.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a hold continuous effect is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, and it is scheduled to be executed consecutively in the next held first special symbol game, if the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 due to the long opening of the second winning opening 315, the second special symbol special effect is executed in the second special symbol game executed after the first special symbol game as the variation ends, and a captured image 78 of the hold continuous effect executed in the first special symbol game is displayed. In other words, the captured image 78 clearly indicates or suggests that a hold continuous effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and that a hold continuous effect will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect. This significantly reduces the possibility that the player will forget that a hold continuous effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and allows the player to understand that a hold continuous effect will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect. Therefore, even if the reserved continuous effect resumes in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect, the player's sense of discomfort about the reserved continuous effect being executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect is significantly reduced. As a result, a decrease in interest in the game due to the reserved continuous effect being executed before the execution of the second special symbol special effect being resumed after the end of the second special symbol special effect is prevented.

In particular, when the second winning slot 315 is long-opened in a game that wins a long-open normal symbol, the player will be preoccupied for a longer period of time with whether or not the game ball 99 will land in the second winning slot 315 than when the second winning slot 315 is short-opened in a game that wins a short-open normal symbol. This increases the likelihood that the player will forget that the continuous hold effect was being executed before the second special symbol game was played. Furthermore, when the second winning slot 315 is long-opened in a game that wins a long-open normal symbol, the game ball 99 is more likely to land in the second winning slot 315 (more balls will land), and therefore the number of second special symbol games in which the second special symbol special effect is executed is greater (the execution time of the second special symbol special effect is longer) than when the second winning slot 315 is short-opened in a game that wins a short-open normal symbol. Therefore, the time between the end of the continuous hold effect before the execution of the second special symbol effect (the start of the second special symbol effect) and the resumption of the continuous hold effect due to the end of the second special symbol effect is longer, and players pay more attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game in which the second special symbol effect is executed is a jackpot, compared to when the first special symbol game is executed. Thus, when the second winning slot 315 is long-opened in a long-open normal symbol game, compared to when the second winning slot 315 is short-opened in a short-open normal symbol game, players are more likely to forget that the continuous hold effect was executed before the execution of the second special symbol game. Therefore, the effect of clearly indicating or suggesting, during the execution of the second special symbol effect, that the continuous hold effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol effect is significant.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first embodiment described above are possible, to the extent applicable.

[Third embodiment]
In the second embodiment described above, in a gaming machine in which the opening mode of the second winning port by the electric device is set to a first opening (short opening) which is a first time, and a second opening (long opening) which is a second time in which the opening time of the second winning port by the electric device is longer than the first time, if a game ball enters the second winning port when it is scheduled that the continuous hold effect will be executed continuously for a predetermined number of first special symbol games, in the case of a short opening, the continuous hold effect will continue to be executed in the second special symbol game when the game ball enters the second winning port, while in the case of a long opening, the second special symbol special effect will be executed, and at the time the second special symbol special effect is executed, it will be made clear or suggested that the continuous hold effect had been executed before the execution of the second special symbol special effect.

However, the opening mode of the second winning opening by the electric device in the gaming machine can be set to a short opening or a long opening, and there are various other opening modes. For example, the opening mode of the second winning opening can be set to a single opening time, a mode in which the second winning opening is opened multiple times for one normal winning win, or a mode in which the opening time of the second winning opening differs between low-frequency support mode and high-frequency support mode. The opening mode of the second winning opening is not necessarily set to a short opening or a long opening.

In addition, in gaming machines, the opening mode of the second winning port generally includes a mode that makes it easy for game balls to enter the second winning port, such as the long opening mode in the second embodiment described above. However, even during play, situations can arise in which game balls do not flow down the playing area of the gaming board. For example, when a reach effect is being executed or when the reserve for the first special design has reached its upper limit, the player may stop shooting game balls, or when the game balls do not reach the playing area of the gaming board due to improper shooting of the game balls, resulting in a situation in which game balls do not flow down the playing area of the gaming board. Therefore, even when the second winning port is opened in a mode that makes it easy for game balls to enter, the number of game balls that enter the second winning port may be low due to a delay in the player's shooting of the game balls or improper shooting of the game balls. For example, even if the second winning opening is opened so that the reserved number for the second special game can reach the upper limit, it is possible that the reserved number for the second special game will not reach the upper limit, and the number of game balls that enter the second winning opening will be a small number of two or less, similar to the number of balls that enter the second winning opening when it is short-open.

In the second embodiment described above, if the opening mode of the second winning opening is long opening, regardless of the number of balls that enter the second winning opening, the second special symbol special effect is executed in the second special symbol game when a game ball enters the second winning opening, corresponding to the second winning opening being long opening. On the other hand, as described above, even if the opening mode of the second winning opening is long opening, it is possible that the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol game does not reach the upper limit, and the number of game balls that enter the second winning opening becomes a small number of two or less, similar to the number of balls that enter the second winning opening when it is short opening. Therefore, even though the opening mode of the second winning opening is short opening, the situation is similar to the effect being executed when the opening mode of the second winning opening is long opening. In other words, a mismatch essentially occurs between the opening mode of the second winning opening and the effect.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when a continuous hold effect is being executed in the first special symbol game as the special symbol game, and it is scheduled that the continuous hold effect will be executed consecutively in the next first special symbol game that was held (for example, Special 1 relevant variation + Special 1 hold 1 + Special 1 hold 2 (see Figure 55 (A))), regardless of the release mode of the electric device, when a game ball enters the second winning opening by opening the second winning opening, the effect in the second special symbol game that is executed in response to the game ball entering the second winning opening differs depending on whether the number of balls entering the second winning opening is a predetermined number greater than 0 (for example, 1 or 2) or greater than the predetermined number (for example, 3 or more). Specifically, as shown in Figure 75 (A), when the number of balls entering the second winning opening is a predetermined number greater than 0 (for example, 1 or 2), the continuous hold effect continues to be executed in the second special symbol game, as with the short opening of the second winning opening in the second embodiment described above. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 75 (B), if the number of balls entering the second winning slot exceeds a predetermined number (three or more), a second special symbol special effect is executed in the second special symbol game, just as when the second winning slot is fully opened in the second embodiment described above, and it is clearly indicated or suggested that a hold continuous effect was executed before the execution of the second special symbol special effect when the second special symbol special effect is executed.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the continuous hold effect is scheduled to be executed for a predetermined number of first special symbol games in succession, if a game ball enters the second prize entry port as a result of the opening of the second prize entry port, the effect executed in the second special symbol game differs depending on whether the number of balls entering the second prize entry port is a predetermined number greater than 0 or less, or whether the number of balls entering the second prize entry port exceeds the predetermined number. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the continuous hold effect not being executed in the first special symbol game executed after the end of the second special symbol game, even on gaming machines other than those in which the opening mode of the second prize entry port by the electric device is set to a short opening, which makes it difficult for game balls to enter the second prize entry port, and a long opening, which makes it easy for game balls to enter the second prize entry port, regardless of the opening mode of the second prize entry port. This also prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the continuous hold effect being executed in the first special symbol game executed after the end of the second special symbol game being resumed after the end of the second special symbol special effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a continuous hold effect is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, and it is scheduled that the continuous hold effect will be executed consecutively in the next first special symbol game that was put on hold, if game balls enter the second prize entry port by opening the second prize entry port, the effect executed in the second special symbol game will be different depending on whether the number of balls entering the second prize entry port is a predetermined number greater than 0 or less, or whether the number of balls entering the second prize entry port exceeds the predetermined number.This makes it possible to deal with cases where a small number of game balls enter the second prize entry port when the second prize entry port is opened in an opening/closing mode that makes it easy for game balls to enter.

This embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the second embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 76 to 81.

This embodiment differs from the second embodiment in that, when a continuous hold effect is being executed in a first special symbol game as the special symbol game, and the continuous hold effect is scheduled to be executed consecutively in the next first special symbol game that was held, if a game ball enters the second prize entry port as a result of the opening of the second prize entry port, regardless of the opening mode, the effect in the second special symbol game that is executed in response to the game ball entering the second prize entry port is set to be different depending on whether the number of balls entering the second prize entry port is a predetermined number greater than 0 (for example, 1 or 2) or greater than the predetermined number (3 or more). Therefore, this embodiment differs from the second embodiment in some of the processing procedures in the command determination process, second special symbol special effect setting process, and effect type setting process.

[Command Determination Process]
The command determination process of this embodiment differs from that of the second embodiment described above in the processing when a second special chart hold command and an electric role object close command are received.

Here, Figures 76 and 77 are flowcharts explaining the differences in command determination processing from the second embodiment described above.

<Step S3801>
76, in the command determination process of this embodiment, when a second special symbol reservation command is received (step S3323: Yes), as in the second embodiment described above, when the second special symbol reservation information update process (step S3324) and the second special symbol reservation image display process (step S3325) are executed, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the electric role opening winning counter (step S3801) and terminates the command determination process. That is, in the command determination process of this embodiment, instead of counting the number of balls entering the second winning port 315 by distinguishing between short opening and long opening as in the second embodiment described above, the number of balls entering the second winning port 315 is counted in the electric role opening winning counter without distinguishing between short opening and long opening. Furthermore, in this embodiment, unlike the second embodiment described above, even if a second special chart hold command is received, the second special chart special effect setting process is not executed, and is executed in step S3802 of Figure 77 described below, provided that an electric role device close command is received (step S3330: Yes).

The electric role opening winning counter is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the second special symbol special effect in step S3901 of the second special symbol special effect setting process in Figure 78, which will be described later.

<Step S3802>
77, in the command determination process of this embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives an electric role object close command (step S3330: Yes), it executes the second special symbol special effect setting process when the electric role object is closed, without distinguishing between the short opening and the long opening (step S3802). That is, in this embodiment, the second special symbol special effect setting process that was executed when the second special symbol hold command was received in the second embodiment described above is set when the electric role object close command is received.

[Second special effect setting process]
The second special chart special effect setting process of this embodiment differs from the second embodiment described above in that whether or not to execute the second special chart special effect is determined based on the number of balls that enter the second winning port 315 until the electric device 315b is closed, and in that whether or not to execute the second special chart special effect is determined based on whether the opening is short or long.

Here, Figure 78 is a flowchart explaining the differences between the second special chart special effect setting process of this embodiment and the second embodiment described above.

<Steps S3901 to S3903>
As shown in FIG. 78, when the electric device 315b is closed, if both the second special chart special effect setting flag and the second special chart special effect execution flag are set to off (No in both steps S3501 and S3502), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the electric device opening winning counter, which indicates the number of game balls 99 that have entered the second winning port 315, is 3 or greater (step S3901).

If the value of the electric role opening winning counter is 3 or greater (step S3901: Yes), the second special symbol special effect setting flag is set to ON to start the second special symbol special effect (step S3902), and the second special symbol special effect setting process is terminated.

If the value of the electric role opening winning counter is not 3 or greater (step S3901: No), i.e., if the value of the electric role opening winning counter is 2 or less, the second special symbol special effect non-setting flag is set to ON, indicating that the second special symbol special effect will not be initiated (step S3903), and the second special symbol special effect setting process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol effect is executed when the value of the electric role opening prize winning counter is 3 or greater, but the second special symbol effect may also be executed when the value of the electric role opening prize winning counter is 4 or greater, or when the value of the electric role opening prize winning counter is 2 or greater, etc.

[Variation type (performance pattern) setting process]
The process of setting the variation type (effect pattern) in this embodiment differs from the second embodiment described above in that, when the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning port 315 is three or more, a second special symbol special effect is set for the second special symbol game as the special symbol game, regardless of the opening/closing state of the electric device 315b. In this case, a second special symbol special effect is set for the second special symbol game as the special symbol game when the electric device 315b is fully opened, regardless of the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning port 315.

Here, Figures 79 to 81 are flowcharts explaining the differences between the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of this embodiment and the second embodiment described above.

<Steps S4001 to S4003>
79, when the second special symbol special effect is set for the second special symbol game as the special symbol game, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game as the special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3645: Yes), the MPU 51 clears the value of the electric role opening prize winning counter (step S4001). On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game as the special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3645: No), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the electric role opening prize winning counter (step S4002), and determines whether the value of the electric role opening prize winning counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4003).

In other words, in this embodiment, instead of the short opening winning counter and long opening winning counter of the second embodiment, an electric role opening winning counter common to both short opening and long opening is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, instead of the processing related to the long opening winning counter in the second embodiment, the processing of steps S4001 to S4003 related to the electric role opening winning counter is executed.

<Step S4004>
If it is determined in step S3641 that the second special symbol special effect setting flag is set to OFF (step S3641: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4004 in Fig. 80 and determines whether or not the second special symbol special effect non-setting flag, which indicates that the second special symbol special effect will not be started, is set to ON. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second special symbol game as the special symbol game is the second special symbol game that is executed first when two or fewer game balls 99 enter the second winning port 315.

Then, if the second special symbol special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S4004: Yes), that is, if the second special symbol game as the special symbol game is the first second special symbol game to be executed when two or fewer game balls 99 enter the second winning slot 315, the MPU 51 sets the second special symbol special effect setting flag to OFF (step S4005) and proceeds to step S3654.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol special effect setting flag is set to off (step S4004: No), that is, if the second special symbol game as the special symbol game in question is not the first second special symbol game to be executed when two or fewer game balls 99 enter the second winning slot 315, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3658 in FIG. 81, and thereafter executes the same processing as in the second embodiment described above.

<Steps S4005 to S4008>
If the second special chart special effect non-setting flag, which indicates that the second special chart special effect will not be started, is set to on (step S4004: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the second special chart special effect setting flag to off (step S4005) and transitions processing to step S3654, thereby performing processing similar to that of the second embodiment described above.

However, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, instead of the short opening winning counter and long opening winning counter of the second embodiment, an electric role opening winning counter common to both short and long openings is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, instead of the processing related to the long opening winning counter in the second embodiment, the processing of step S4006 related to the electric role opening winning counter and the processing of steps S4007 and S4008 in FIG. 81 are executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the number of balls entering the second winning opening 315 is less than or equal to a predetermined number greater than 0 (for example, 1 or 2), the continuous hold effect is continuously executed in the second special symbol game, similar to when the second winning opening 315 is short-opened in the second embodiment described above. On the other hand, if the number of balls entering the second winning opening 315 exceeds the predetermined number (3 or more), the second special symbol special effect is executed in the second special symbol game, similar to when the second winning opening 315 is long-opened in the second embodiment described above. Therefore, even in gaming machines other than those in which the opening mode of the second winning opening 315 by the electric device 315b is set to a short opening that makes it difficult for gaming balls to enter the second winning opening 315 and a long opening that makes it easy for gaming balls to enter the second winning opening 315, that is, regardless of the opening/closing mode of the second winning opening 315, a decrease in interest in the game due to the hold continuous effect not being executed in the first special symbol game that is executed after the second special symbol game has ended is prevented, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the hold continuous effect that was executed before the execution of the second special symbol special effect being resumed after the second special symbol special effect has ended is prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a continuous hold effect is being executed in the first special symbol game as the special symbol game, if the second winning opening 315 is opened and a game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315, the effect executed in the second special symbol game differs depending on whether the number of balls entering the second winning opening 315 is equal to or less than a predetermined number greater than 0, or whether the number of balls entering the second winning opening 315 exceeds the predetermined number. This makes it possible to deal with cases where a small number of game balls enter the second winning opening 315 when the second winning opening 315 is opened in an opening/closing mode that makes it easy for game balls to enter.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first and second embodiments described above are possible, to the extent applicable.

In addition, various modifications are possible in the second and third embodiments described above. For example, in the second and third embodiments described above, a reduced image of the image of the pending continuous effect being executed in the first special symbol game was displayed as the capture image 78 in the lower left area of the symbol display unit 341, but the capture image 78 may be displayed in other ways as long as the method allows the display of the changing decorative symbols to be visible. For example, the capture image 78 may be displayed behind the decorative symbols as a background effect across the entire symbol display unit 341, or may be displayed in front of the decorative symbols at a density (transparency) that allows the decorative symbols to be visible, or only the outline may be displayed in front of or behind the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, the explicit indication or suggestion that a continuous hold effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol effect, and that a continuous hold effect will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol effect, is not limited to displaying the capture image 78, and may be any other method as long as the method allows the display of the decorative symbol changes to be visible. For example, the explicit indication or suggestion may be displayed as a specific image different from the capture image 78, such as an icon image, a character image, or an image combining two or more of these, to indicate that a continuous hold effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol effect, and that a continuous hold effect will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol effect.

Furthermore, the capture image 78 may be displayed throughout the entire period during which the second special symbol game is being played, or may be displayed for a portion of the period during which the second special symbol game is being played, for example, only for a certain period from the start of the second special symbol game, only for a certain period before the end of the second special symbol game, or both for a certain period from the start of the second special symbol game and a certain period before the end of the second special symbol game; there are no particular limitations on the display period of the capture image 78. Furthermore, when the second special symbol game is played multiple times in succession, the capture image 78 does not need to be displayed during all second special symbol games; for example, it may be displayed only during the first second special symbol game played, only during the last second special symbol game played, or during the first and last second special symbol games played; the number of second special symbol games during which the capture image 78 is displayed may differ from the number of second special symbol games during which the second special symbol special effect is played.

In addition, the explicit indication or suggestion that a continuous hold effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol effect, such as a captured image, and that a continuous hold effect will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol effect may be displayed on a display means other than the symbol display unit 341 where the decorative symbols are displayed variably. For example, such explicit indication or suggestion may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 which displays a non-set value, which is a game setting value other than the set value, which is a game setting value set in the gaming machine 10. Furthermore, if a display means for executing image effects, such as a sub-LCD display unit other than the symbol display unit 341 where the decorative symbols are displayed variably or image effects are executed, is provided, such indication may be displayed on this sub-LCD display unit or other display means. In this way, by displaying on a separate display means, such as a sub-LCD display unit, separate from the symbol display unit 341 on which the image effects are displayed, the explicit indication or indication that a continuous hold effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol effect, and that a continuous hold effect will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol effect, can be displayed on the separate display means without interfering with the display of the decorative symbol changes or image effects on the symbol display unit 341. This allows both the change display or image effects and the explicit indication or indication to be displayed reliably and appropriately without interfering with each other's visibility.

Furthermore, the second special symbol special effect is not limited to the examples shown in Figures 61(B) and 61(C) and may take other forms. For example, the second special symbol special effect may display other images, such as character images, instead of or in addition to text images, or may execute a predetermined audio effect via the speaker 26 instead of or in addition to the effect on the symbol display unit 341.

Furthermore, the second special symbol special effect need only be an effect that clearly indicates or suggests that a player will receive a bonus if a predetermined condition is met. The condition is that the decorative symbols stop and display as a jackpot symbol (e.g., a doublet), and the jackpot type when the condition is met does not necessarily have to be a probability jackpot. Examples of predetermined conditions include the decorative symbols becoming a reach or a specific effect being executed. In other words, the present invention can be applied to gaming machines other than those in which the jackpot type when the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 is always a probability jackpot. For example, the present invention can be applied to loop probability jackpot machines such as the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above, as well as ST machines such as V-ST machines and type 1/2 mixed machines in which the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 includes wins other than probability jackpots.

In addition, in the second and third embodiments described above, the hold continuous effects and second special symbol special effects were executed in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, and were set up so that the hold continuous effects and second special symbol special effects were not executed in the high-frequency support mode, which is the probability variable game state and time-limited game state. However, the hold continuous effects and second special symbol special effects may be executed in both or either of the probability variable game state and time-limited game state, which are the high-frequency support mode.

In addition, in the second and third embodiments described above, when a continuous hold effect is executed in a predetermined number of consecutive first special symbol games, a single type of continuous hold effect is executed in each first special symbol game, except in the case of avoiding inconsistencies caused by a chance eye effect being executed in four or more consecutive special symbol games. However, different continuous hold effects may be executed in each first special symbol game, and multiple types of continuous hold effects (for example, a mini character effect and a zone effect) may be executed simultaneously in one first special symbol game, as long as the combination is executable as an effect.

Furthermore, in the second and third embodiments described above, the timing for changing the type of continuous hold effect may be any timing that does not result in an inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the specified continuous hold effect. For example, it may be any timing between the special symbol game executed next to the special symbol game executed at the time when it becomes clear that an inconsistency may occur between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the continuous hold effect, and the special symbol game in which an inconsistency occurs between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the continuous hold effect (for example, the special symbol game executed for the fourth time since the start of the specified continuous hold effect). In other words, the timing for changing the type of continuous hold effect may be either the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, as long as it is any timing that does not result in an inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the continuous hold effect.

Of course, the type of continuous hold effect may also be changed when a continuous hold effect other than a chance eye effect is being executed and the number of special symbol games in which the continuous hold effect is executed exceeds a predetermined number (for example, four times). In other words, the type of continuous hold effect may be changed even when a single type of continuous hold effect is executed more than a predetermined number of times in succession without causing any inconvenience. In this way, by changing the type of continuous hold effect when a single type of continuous hold effect is executed more than a predetermined number of times in succession without causing any inconvenience, it is possible to prevent players from feeling bored when a single type of continuous hold effect is executed in succession in many special symbol games, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to a single type of continuous hold effect being executed in succession in many special symbol games.

In addition to cases where the type of hold continuous presentation is changed to prevent inconsistencies between the results of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the hold continuous presentation, when the type of hold continuous presentation is changed, if the variable display time for the hold of the first special symbol game that triggered the start of the hold continuous presentation is long, i.e., if the result of the jackpot lottery for that hold is a jackpot or a reach presentation with a high jackpot expectation is executed, the type of hold continuous presentation may be changed so that the new specific hold continuous presentation type has a higher jackpot expectation than the previous specific hold continuous presentation type. For example, if the previous specific hold continuous presentation was a mini-character presentation with the lowest jackpot expectation, the new specific hold continuous presentation may be set to a chance eye presentation, a same-color pattern presentation, or a zone presentation (mode presentation) with a higher jackpot expectation than the mini-character presentation. Alternatively, if the previous specific hold continuous presentation was a chance eye presentation or a same-color pattern presentation, the new specific hold continuous presentation may be set to a zone presentation (mode presentation) with a higher jackpot expectation than the chance eye presentation and the same-color pattern presentation. In this case, the difference in the likelihood of winning between the specific consecutive hold effects after the change and the specific consecutive hold effects before the change is set to, for example, 10% or more, and preferably 25% or more.

In addition, the change in the continuous hold effect is not limited to one time, but may be made multiple times.

Furthermore, in each embodiment, it is also possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments to the extent applicable.

[Other Modifications]
In the above-described embodiments and modifications, the outer frame 14 of the gaming machine 10 is generally made of wood, but may also be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may also be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In the above-described embodiments and modifications, the inner frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 may also be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may also be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In the above-described embodiments and modifications, the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10 may also be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may also be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments and modified examples, the inner frame 12 is openable and closable relative to the front frame 11, and the back pack unit 13 is openable and closable relative to the inner frame 12, but the gaming machine 10 may use a locking means such as a single cylinder lock to lock the inner frame 12 so that it cannot be opened relative to the front frame 11, and lock the back pack unit 13 so that it cannot be opened relative to the inner frame 12, or a locking means that makes the inner frame 12 unopenable relative to the front frame 11 and a locking means that makes the back pack unit 13 unopenable relative to the inner frame 12 may be provided separately. Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments and modified examples, the left end of the inner frame 12 as viewed from the front is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, thereby allowing the inner frame 12 to be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11, but a configuration may also be adopted in which the right end of the inner frame 12 as viewed from the front is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, thereby allowing the inner frame 12 to be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiments and modifications, the left end of the back pack unit 13 as viewed from the front is pivotally supported on the inner frame 12, thereby enabling the back pack unit 13 to be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12. However, a configuration in which the right end of the back pack unit 13 as viewed from the front is pivotally supported on the inner frame 12, thereby enabling the back pack unit 13 to be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12, may also be adopted. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiments and modifications, the game board 31 provided in the gaming machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiments and modifications, the gaming machine 10 is configured to include an upper tray 23 and a lower tray 24. However, a configuration in which the lower tray 24 is omitted and only the upper tray 23 is provided may also be adopted. Furthermore, while the above-described embodiments and modifications employ a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on the right side as viewed from the front, a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on another location, such as the left side as viewed from the front, may also be employed. Furthermore, a configuration in which multiple launch handles 22 are provided, such as a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on both the right and left sides as viewed from the front, may also be employed. Furthermore, the above-described embodiments and modifications employ a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided with a touch sensor 21a that can detect whether or not the player is touching the launch handle 22 (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the launch handle 22), but a configuration in which the touch sensor 21a is omitted from the launch handle 22 may also be employed. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiments and modifications, various configurations may be employed as the launching means for launching the gaming ball. For example, a configuration in which the gaming ball is launched using the elastic force of a spring or the like, or a configuration in which the gaming ball is launched using the wind pressure generated when compressed gas is ejected, may also be employed. In addition, in the above-described embodiments and modified examples, when the launch handle 22 is rotated clockwise a predetermined amount, one game ball is launched, for example, every 0.6 seconds (100 game balls per minute). However, the game may be configured to launch fewer than 100 game balls per minute (e.g., 60 balls), or to launch 100 or more game balls per minute (e.g., 200 balls). Furthermore, the game balls may be launched when the launch handle 22 is rotated counterclockwise a predetermined amount. Alternatively, the game balls may be launched one by one by flicking a lever. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiments and modified examples, a configuration including a speaker 26 as a means for outputting sound is employed, but a configuration including an earphone jack in addition to or instead of the speaker 26 may be employed. According to this configuration, by connecting earphones or headphones that the player brings with him/her to the earphone jack, the player can fully enjoy the sound of the gaming machine 10 that he/she is playing without being disturbed by the sound of the gaming machine 10 around him/her. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiments and modified examples, a configuration including a 7-segment display device was employed as means capable of displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol that begins to change when the gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315. However, other configurations may be employed as means capable of displaying the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol. For example, a configuration including a plurality of LED lamps arranged in a row or matrix, a configuration including a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL display, or a configuration including a halogen lamp may also be employed. Furthermore, in the second and third embodiments, the predetermined suggestive information was a capture image 78 or the like displayed on the symbol display unit 341 where decorative symbols are displayed in a changing manner, but the predetermined suggestive information may be displayed on a display device other than the symbol display unit 341. In this case, it is conceivable to provide a dedicated display means for displaying the predetermined suggestive information as the display means, or to utilize a display means already provided in the gaming machine 10. That is, the predetermined suggestive information may be displayed, for example, on the 7-segment display unit 39 that displays non-set values, which are game setting values other than the set values, which are game setting values set in the gaming machine 10, or on the main display unit 36 (the normal symbol display unit 361, the first special symbol display unit 362, the second special symbol display unit 363, the first special symbol reserved number display unit 364, and the second special symbol reserved number display unit 365). Also, while the above-described embodiments and modifications employ a configuration including two LED lamps as means capable of displaying normal symbols that begin to vary based on the passage of the gaming ball through the through gates 317L and 317R, other configurations may be employed as means capable of displaying normal symbols. For example, a configuration including three or more LED lamps arranged in a row or matrix, a configuration including a 7-segment display device, a display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device, or a configuration including a halogen lamp may be employed. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiments and modified examples, various configurations can be employed as display means, such as the symbol display unit 341 capable of displaying decorative symbols. For example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescent (EL) display device, an LED display device, a plasma display device, a rotating drum display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or a combination of two or more of these may be employed. Furthermore, in the second and third embodiments described above, when predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed by continuously displaying the captured image 78 displayed on the symbol display unit 341. However, the displayed suggestive information is not limited to the captured image 78 and may be other information. For example, the information may be information displayed in the first special symbol game in which the consecutive chance eye effects were displayed or in the first special symbol game immediately before the second special symbol game was executed. It may also be the entire screen of the first special symbol game or a text description of the image displayed on that screen. In such cases, regardless of the continuously displayed effects, the information may be the type of continuously displayed effects at that time, the number of jackpots, the number of changes since the end of the jackpot, the number of reserved balls, the number of shot balls, etc., or a combination of multiple of these, or just one of these. Furthermore, in the second and third embodiments described above, a combination of stop symbols, such as a chance eye effect, was used as the continuous pending effect. However, this is not limited to this, and any other effect may be used as long as the player can visually recognize the continuity of the effect. For example, the display object displayed behind the changing symbol may be a continuous display over multiple first special symbol games, such as a specific character, text indicating continuous display, a display object displayed as part of the background image, or the background itself. The same applies to the changed effect, as long as the player can visually recognize that the continuous effect has been changed, such as a change to an effect displaying a specific character. Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments and variations, the decorative symbols are not limited to numbers, and various letters, figures, symbols, pictures, and combinations of two or more of these can be used. For example, the decorative symbols may include alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, and combinations of two or more of these. Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments and variations, the number of symbol rows through which the decorative symbols scroll is not limited to three, but may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In addition, when a configuration in which there is only one decorative symbol row is adopted, a configuration in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative symbol (e.g., "7") stops may be adopted. Furthermore, when a configuration in which there are two or four or more decorative symbol rows is adopted, a configuration in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative symbol stops on a specific line (effective line) may be adopted. Furthermore, in the second and third embodiments described above, a zone effect (mode effect) with a high jackpot expectation was set as the hold continuous effect, but the hold continuous effect may also include a background effect other than the zone effect (mode effect). That is, multiple background effects may be set as the hold continuous effect, and in this case, the jackpot expectation of the multiple background effects may be set to different values. Furthermore, when multiple background effects with different jackpot expectation are set as the hold continuous effect, if a low-expectation background effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed as the hold continuous effect, it is also possible to change the low-expectation background effect to a high-expectation background effect with a higher jackpot expectation. Of course, the multiple background effects may have the same degree of expectation of winning a jackpot, for example, multiple low-expectation background effects with a low expectation of winning a jackpot, and the background effects may be changed between the low-expectation background effects. Also, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, various configurations may be adopted for the special motorized device such as the opening and closing door 319 that opens and closes the large prize opening such as the variable prize opening 316. For example, a configuration in which a rotating shaft extending substantially horizontally is provided below a plate-like member and the plate-like member rotates forward around the rotating shaft to open the large prize opening, a configuration in which the large prize opening is opened and closed by a plate-like member that can slide in the front-to-rear direction of the game board 31, or a configuration in which the large prize opening is opened and closed by the rotation of a blade member in the left-to-right direction (clockwise and counterclockwise) may be adopted. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiments and modified examples, so-called loop probability variable machines have been described. However, in gaming machines such as V-ST machines that transition to a game state advantageous to the player, such as a probability variable game state, after the end of a jackpot game, provided that a V prize is won during the jackpot game, a V prize opening is provided in the large prize opening, such as the variable prize opening 316. The V prize opening may always allow a prize when the large prize opening is open, or may be configured to open only when certain conditions are met. Examples of certain conditions include the execution of a specific round of play (e.g., the first round of play or the final round of play). Furthermore, when the V prize opening is configured to open only when certain conditions are met, a movable member capable of opening and closing the V prize opening can be provided in the V prize opening, and the V prize opening can be opened and closed by controlling the operation of the movable member. Furthermore, when the V prize opening is opened only when certain conditions are met, the V prize opening may be closed when a game ball enters the V prize opening or after a certain period of time has elapsed. In addition, the effect (reserved continuous effect) that is changed may be the type of decorative symbol used in the first special symbol game, the color tone of the background of the first special symbol game, a portion of the background of the first special symbol game, or the entire background of the first special symbol game. The timing of the change may be at the start of the first special symbol game change, during the change, when a specific event occurs during the change (e.g., a reach completion, a super reach development, or a special reach development), or when the symbol stops. For example, a portion or the entire background effect (a specific effect image) before a specific event occurs may be changed to a different type of background (a predetermined effect image) when a specific event occurs (e.g., a reach completion, a super reach development, or a special reach development). Furthermore, multiple large prize slots may be provided, and for example, a large prize slot with a V prize slot and a large prize slot without a V prize slot may be separately provided. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variant examples, various configurations can be adopted for ordinary electric devices such as the electric device 315b that switches whether or not to restrict the entry of game balls into a starting winning port such as the second winning port 315.For example, a tulip-shaped ordinary electric device (so-called electric chute) in which a pair of movable valves (vane members) can be opened to the left and right, a configuration in which a rotating shaft extending approximately horizontally is provided below a plate-shaped member and the starting winning port can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward around the rotating shaft, a configuration in which the starting winning port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the forward and backward directions of the game board 31, and a configuration in which the starting winning port is opened and closed by rotating the vane members in the left and right directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variant examples, the number of prize balls set for each winning slot (general winning slot 313, first winning slot 314, second winning slot 315, variable winning slot 316, etc.) is an example, and by appropriately changing the number of prize balls set for each winning slot, it is possible to realize multiple types of gaming machines 10 with different specifications.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a type 1 gaming machine, a so-called loop probability variable machine, was described. In addition to loop probability variable machines, there are also other gaming machines, such as type 1/type 2 hybrid machines. In type 1/type 2 hybrid machines, two types of jackpot games can be played: type 1 jackpot game and type 2 jackpot game. For example, if the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, the type 1 jackpot game is played after the special game that clearly indicates that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. Furthermore, after the type 1 jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a time-saving game state, which is a profitable state and facilitates the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning slot. Meanwhile, type 2 jackpot game is played if the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning slot in the time-saving game state is a small jackpot, and the small jackpot game based on the small jackpot results in a small jackpot.

In addition, gaming machines with various specifications may be able to transition to a time-saving game mode if the jackpot lottery result is a miss. For example, if the jackpot lottery result is a miss, the type of miss could be a time-saving symbol stop miss, in which a time-saving symbol is displayed in a stopped state, or if the jackpot lottery result is a miss consecutively in a predetermined number of jackpot draws in low probability mode (for example, 2.5 to 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) (the so-called ceiling).

In gaming machines, it is important to increase the player's interest and motivation in the game. In other words, when adopting a configuration in which the conditions for time-saving play are met when a time-saving symbol stops and the machine transitions to a time-saving play state, it is important to provide new gameplay features that can increase the player's interest and motivation in the game.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine has a "game condition fulfillment" as the first or second trigger, a "profit state" as the predetermined state executed by the predetermined state execution means, a "low profit state" as the first state and a "high profit state" as the second state executable by the state execution means, and a "state in which the high profit condition is fulfilled" as a specific state.

The first trigger and second trigger may be triggers that fulfill the game conditions at different times. Examples of the first trigger and second trigger include a predetermined result in a predetermined lottery, a gaming ball entering a predetermined area, a lottery being held when a detector detects a gaming ball entering a predetermined area, a trigger for a predetermined lottery being fulfilled, a predetermined gaming state being fulfilled, a specific gaming state occurring as a result of the fulfillment of a specific gaming state, the end of a specific gaming state, and any combination thereof.

The predetermined state may be a profit state that awards a profit for a predetermined period of time, or a profit state that is highly likely to award a profit. Examples of predetermined states include a time-saving game state for a predetermined number of times, a probability variable game state for a predetermined number of times, a time-saving game state for a predetermined period, a probability variable game state for a predetermined period, a specific jackpot state for a predetermined period, a small jackpot state for a predetermined period, or any combination thereof.

The first and second states may be controlled to at least two advantageous states: one in which a predetermined event is controlled in a manner advantageous to the player, and the other in which the predetermined event is controlled in a manner more advantageous to the player than this state, so long as there is a relative difference in the benefit to the player. Examples of the first and second states include having a predetermined movable object perform a predetermined action, improving the probability of having a predetermined movable object perform a predetermined action, setting the probability of having a predetermined movable object perform a predetermined action to 100%, holding a lottery with a predetermined probability to have a predetermined movable object perform a predetermined action, improving the time it takes for a predetermined movable object to perform a predetermined action, and any combination thereof.

In addition, in this gaming machine, a specific value is determined when a second trigger occurs in a predetermined state. The specific value may be any numerical value that can determine the execution period. Examples of specific values include the number of times a predetermined gaming state is executed, a reference value that serves as the basis for that execution, specific time data, a specific random number value, or any combination thereof.

The specific state may be a state in which a high-profit condition is met, making it possible to determine that a high profit will be awarded when a predetermined profit is awarded. Examples of high-profit conditions include a predetermined number of times exceeding or falling below a threshold, a predetermined time exceeding or falling below a threshold, a predetermined judgment result being achieved, or predetermined information being stored. Furthermore, any feasible method may be used to determine whether a high-profit condition is met, such as determination by software, determination by hardware circuitry, or a combination thereof.

The execution period may be any period determined based on a specific value. Examples of execution periods include the number of special symbol games, the execution period of the game, the number of times game balls enter various winning slots, the number of times game balls pass through the through gate, the number of times variable winning slots are opened, the time it takes for various variable symbols to change, the display time for the results of various variable symbols stopping, the time for which profits are awarded as a result of various variable symbols stopping, and any combination thereof.

Here, the gaming machine according to this embodiment includes a big win, a small win, and a miss as the results of a big win lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the second winning slot, which can be won with the support of an electric device. Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment includes, as time-saving game states, a short-open time-saving game state (second time-saving game state) in which the opening time of the electric device is short, which is a low-profit state, and a long-open time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) in which the opening time of the electric device is long, which is a high-profit state.

The short-open time-saving game state (second time-saving game state) is entered after the end of a Type 1 jackpot game in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) when the conditions for the second time-saving game are met, and as a profitable state, the opening time of the second prize slot is set to a short time (e.g., 0.6 seconds) that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the second prize slot. In this way, in the short-open time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), not only is it difficult to play a small jackpot game because it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second prize slot, making it difficult to win the second special jackpot lottery, but it is also a low-profit state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter the V prize slot, which provides the opportunity to play a Type 2 jackpot game during a small jackpot game. As a result, in the short-open time-saving game state, Type 2 jackpot game is difficult to play, or is virtually impossible to play.

On the other hand, the long-opening time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) is entered when the specified conditions described below are met in the short-opening time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), and the opening time of the second prize opening is set to a long period (e.g., 3 seconds) that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the second prize opening. In this way, in the long-opening time-saving game state, it is easy for a game ball to enter the second prize opening, making it easier to win the second special jackpot lottery and thus easier to play a small jackpot game. It is also possible for a game ball to enter the V prize opening, which provides an opportunity to play a type 2 jackpot game during a small jackpot game. Therefore, the long-opening time-saving game state makes it easier to play a type 2 jackpot game, and is a more profitable state that is advantageous to the player than the short-opening time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the results of the second special chart jackpot lottery, which is triggered by a gaming ball entering the second winning slot, include jackpots, small wins, and misses as described above, but a miss is set as a time-saving symbol stop miss, in which a time-saving symbol that can transition to a long-time-saving game state is displayed after the second special chart game ends. When this time-saving symbol stop miss is set, the conditions for time-saving game play are met, and there is a possibility of transitioning to the time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, the aforementioned predetermined conditions for transitioning from a low-profit short-open time-shortened game state (second time-shortened game state) to a high-profit long-open time-shortened game state (third time-shortened game state) are, first, the result of the jackpot lottery in the short-open time-shortened game state is a missed time-shortened symbol stop, and, second, the number of time-shortened game plays (specific value) in the time-shortened game state set for the missed time-shortened symbol stop is greater than the remaining number of time-shortened game plays (predetermined unexecuted value) in the short-open time-shortened game state (the fulfillment of the specific condition). In this case, the high-profit condition is fulfilled, and the game is transitioned to a high-profit long-open time-shortened game state (third time-shortened game state). For example, if the number of time-saving plays in the time-saving play state set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is 50, if the number of time-saving plays remaining in the short-open time-saving play state is 49 or less, the high-profit condition is met and the game will transition to a long-time-saving play state (second state), which is a high-profit state; however, if the number of time-saving plays remaining in the short-open time-saving play state is 50 or more, the high-profit condition is not met and the game will not transition to the long-time-saving play state, but will continue to remain in the short-time-saving play state (second time-saving play state), which is a low-profit state.

In this way, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, in order to transition to a time-shortened game state (in this embodiment, the third time-shortened game state, which is the long-open time-shortened game state) which is a high-profit state in which a type 2 jackpot game can be played via a small jackpot game, the condition for transitioning to a time-shortened game state (in this embodiment, the second time-shortened game state, which is the short-open time-shortened game state) as a low-profit state, which is transitioned to when the conditions for time-shortened game are met after the end of a type 1 jackpot game, is met; furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the short-open time-shortened game state (second time-shortened game state) as a low-profit state is a miss for the time-shortened symbol stop, and the upper limit (specified number of times) of the number of time-shortened games set for the miss for the time-shortened symbol stop is greater than the remaining number of time-shortened games in that time-shortened game state (second time-shortened game state), the conditions for transitioning to the high-profit state are met and the machine will transition. In other words, the gaming machine according to this embodiment has stricter conditions for transitioning to a long-open time-saving game state, a highly profitable state in which a type 2 jackpot game can be executed, than conventional type 1/2 hybrid machines. Furthermore, it also provides new gameplay features by utilizing the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving game plays set for a time-saving symbol stop miss. As a result, in this embodiment, players can enjoy playing in the short-open time-saving game state, a low-profit state to which they transition when the conditions for time-saving game are met after a type 1 jackpot game ends, while hoping for the time-saving symbol to be displayed still. Furthermore, players can enjoy playing by noting whether the game will transition to a long-open time-saving game state, a highly profitable state in which a type 2 jackpot game can be executed, when the time-saving symbol is displayed still. This increases the attention and interest in the game in a type 1/2 hybrid machine, thereby enhancing the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning from a short-open time-shortened game state (second time-shortened game state) as a low-profit state to a long-open time-shortened game state (third time-shortened game state) as a high-profit state are that the result of the jackpot lottery in the short-open time-shortened game state as a low-profit state is a miss in the time-shortened pattern stop, and the upper limit (specified number of times) of the number of time-shortened games set for the miss in the time-shortened pattern stop is greater than the remaining number of time-shortened games in the short-open time-shortened game state, thereby establishing the conditions for a high-profit state. In this way, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the short-opening time-shortening game state as a low-profit state is a miss in the time-shortening pattern stop, and the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-shortening games as a specific value set for the miss in the time-shortening pattern stop is greater than the remaining number of time-shortening games in the short-opening time-shortening game state, the conditions for a high-profit state are met and a transition is made from the short-opening time-shortening game state as a low-profit state to the long-opening time-shortening game state as a high-profit state, the fewer the remaining number of time-shortening games in the short-opening time-shortening game state as a low-profit state (the more times special gameplay is executed in the short-opening time-shortening game state), the more likely it is that the game will be transitioned to the long-opening time-shortening game state as a high-profit state. As a result, as the number of remaining time-saving games in the short-open time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state, decreases (as the number of times special symbol games are played in the second time-saving game increases), expectations for the time-saving symbol to be displayed still and attention to whether or not the game will transition to the long-open time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state, increases, further increasing the level of attention and interest in the game and further improving the player's motivation to play.

This embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 82 to 113, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above. However, important points in this embodiment may be explained again even if they have already been explained in the first embodiment described above.

[Configuration of gaming machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to Figures 82 to 84. Here, Figure 82 is a front view showing an example of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and Figures 83 and 84 are cross-sectional views showing the main part of a feather role device 83 provided on the gaming board 31 shown in Figure 82.

As shown in FIG. 82, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is provided with two through gates 317L, 317R, similar to the first embodiment described above. The through gate 317L is provided in the left region of the gaming board 31, and gaming balls shot into the left region of the gaming board 31 can pass through. This left through gate 317L has a ball entry sensor 317La (see FIG. 7), which determines whether a gaming ball has passed through the through gate 317L. The through gate 317R is provided in the right region of the gaming board 31, and gaming balls shot into the right region of the gaming board 31 can pass through. This right through gate 317R has a ball entry sensor 317Ra (see FIG. 7), which determines whether a gaming ball has passed through the through gate 317R.

In this way, by providing through gates 317L, 317R in the left and right regions of the gaming board 31, whether a gaming ball is launched into the left or right region of the gaming board 31, the conditions for the normal lottery are met when the gaming ball passes through through gates 317L, 317R, and the normal winning lottery is executed. If the result of the normal winning lottery is a win, the normal winning game is executed, and in this normal winning game, the electric device 315b is opened, allowing the gaming ball 99 to enter the second winning slot 315. In other words, in this embodiment, by launching the gaming ball 99 into the left region of the gaming board 31, it is possible to have the gaming ball enter the second winning slot 315 not only in the time-saving game state, which is the high-frequency support mode, but also in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode.

Furthermore, unlike the first embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured as a type 1/type 2 mixed machine rather than a loop probability variable machine, and is equipped with a feather role device 83 provided in the right area of the gaming board 31. The feather role device 83 is activated in a small jackpot game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second special symbol game is a small jackpot, and provides an opportunity to execute a type 2 jackpot game when a gaming ball enters the V winning slot 833 (described below) during the small jackpot game.

The feather device 83 is located above the variable winning opening 316 and to the right of the symbol display unit 341. As shown in Figure 83, the feather device 83 has an inlet 831 for introducing the game ball 99 into the feather device 83, and a movable wing 832 that is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between a closed position (solid line position in Figure 83) that closes the inlet 831 and an open position (dashed line position in Figure 83) that opens the inlet 831. When the movable wing 832 is in the standby position and the inlet 831 is closed by the movable wing 832, the game ball 99 cannot be introduced into the feather device 83. On the other hand, as shown in Figures 84(A) and 84(B), when the movable wing 832 is in the open position and the inlet 831 is open, the movable wing 832 can receive the game ball 99. The game balls 99 received by the movable blade portion 832 can be introduced into the inside of the feather device 83 through the introduction port 831. When the result of the lottery in the big win lottery triggered by a win at the second winning port 315 is a small win (see Figures 87(A) and 87(B)), the movable blade portion 832 is actuated to the open position and opens the introduction port 831 for a predetermined time, for example, the time it takes for one to three game balls 99 to enter the feather device 83 (1.8 seconds or less). Of course, the opening time of the introduction port 831 in the event of a small win can be set as appropriate and is not limited to the time shown above.

The interior of the feather device 83 is provided with a V winning opening 833, a normal winning opening 834, and a V winning opening opening/closing unit 835. The V winning opening 833 and the normal winning opening 834 are each provided with a ball entry sensor (not shown), which detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning opening 833 or the normal winning opening 834. The V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between a closed position (see Figure 84(A)) that closes the V winning opening 833 and an open position (see Figure 84(B)) that opens the V winning opening 833. The V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 normally waits in the closed position that closes the V winning opening 833, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win, it is activated at a predetermined timing to open the V winning opening 833.

Here, the predetermined timing for operating the V prize opening opening/closing unit 835 is set according to the game state in which a jackpot lottery was executed that resulted in a small prize, as described below. Specifically, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the short-open time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state and second time-shortened game state) described below is a small prize (see FIG. 87(A)), the predetermined timing is set to the opening (first opening) of the first small prize game executed by the small prize (see FIG. 91(A) and FIG. 91(C)). The first opening of the first small prize game is executed before the execution of the movable wing operation game in which the movable wing unit 832 is operated to open the introduction port 831. Therefore, if the predetermined timing for operating the V prize opening opening/closing unit 835 in the first small prize game is set to the first opening, the game ball 99 will not enter the V prize opening 833. Therefore, in the first small prize game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state is a small prize, the game ball 99 will not enter the V prize opening 833, and in the short-open time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state and second time-shortened game state), the type 2 jackpot game described below will not be executed based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a small prize.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the long-open time-shortened game state (third time-shortened game state) described below is a small jackpot (see Figure 87 (B)), the specified timing for operating the V prize opening opening/closing unit 835 is set to a movable wing operation game of the second small jackpot game executed by that small jackpot (see Figures 91 (B) and 91 (C)). In the movable wing operation game, the movable wing 832 is operated to open the inlet 831, allowing the game ball 99 to enter the interior of the feather device 83 through the inlet 831. Therefore, when the specified timing for operating the V prize opening opening/closing unit 835 is set to a movable wing operation game, the game ball 99 that has entered the interior of the feather device 83 can enter the V prize opening 833. Therefore, in the second small prize game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the long-open time-shortened game state (third time-shortened game state) is a small prize, the game ball 99 can enter the V prize opening 833, and in the third time-shortened game state, a type 2 jackpot game, described below, can be executed based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a small prize.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, various tables and the like used in the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 85 to 87.

[Regular winning/losing table, etc.]
Here, Figure 85 is a diagram showing an example of a normal winning/losing table, etc. In this embodiment, two types of normal winning/losing tables are set: a normal game state normal winning/losing table shown in Figure 85 (A) and a time-saving game state normal winning/losing table shown in Figure 85 (B). That is, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the normal winning probability differs between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state is set to have a higher normal winning probability than the normal game state.

The normal game state normal winning/losing table shown in Figure 85 (A) is a table used in the normal game state winning lottery in the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 85 (A), the normal game state normal winning/losing table is set so that a normal winning lottery is determined when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0, and a loss is determined when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is between 1 and 299. In other words, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the probability of a normal winning lottery is set to 1/300, making it a low-profit state in which the second winning slot 315 is unlikely to open.

The time-saving play state normal winning/losing table shown in Figure 85 (B) is a table used in the normal winning lottery in the time-saving play state, which is the high-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 85 (B), the time-saving play state normal winning/losing table is the opposite of the normal play state normal winning/losing table; a loss occurs when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0, and a normal winning occurs when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is between 1 and 299. In other words, in the time-saving play state (high-frequency support mode), the probability of a normal winning in the normal winning lottery is set to 299/300, which is higher than the normal play state (low-frequency support mode), and it is a highly profitable state in which the second winning slot 315 is more likely to open.

As such, in a gaming state in low frequency support mode, the second winning slot 315 is unlikely to open, and therefore the player is unlikely to gain any significant benefit from the second winning slot 315 being opened.

In this embodiment, as described below, the first, second, and third time-saving game states are set as the time-saving game states, but the normal winning probability is set the same in all of the first, second, and third time-saving game states. Of course, the normal winning probability may be set differently depending on the type of time-saving game state. Furthermore, the normal winning probability in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode) and the normal winning probability in the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode) are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 85 (A) and 85 (B), and can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the short game state normal winning table may be referenced in the special game probability variable state or the time-saving game state.

Here, Figure 85 (C) shows an example of the relationship between the type of game state and the opening mode (opening time) of the electric device 315b in a normal winning game that is executed when the result of the normal winning lottery is a normal winning game.

As shown in Figure 85 (C), if the result of the regular winning lottery is a regular winning lottery, the electric device 315b is opened in the regular winning game as described above, allowing the game ball 99 to enter the second winning slot 315, but the opening form (opening time) of the electric device 315b in the regular winning game is set according to the game state in which the regular winning lottery is executed.

Specifically, in the normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode, the first time-saving game state (see Figure 96) which is triggered by a time-saving symbol stopping and missing in the normal game state, and the second time-saving game state (see Figure 96) which is triggered by a Type 1 jackpot, the opening time of the electric device 315b is set to 0.6 seconds (short opening), which is the same as the interval between the launch of game balls 99. In this short opening, the expected number of balls that will enter when game balls 99 are shot out consecutively is set to one or less; for example, for three to five normal symbol hits, approximately one game ball 99 will enter the second winning slot 315.

On the other hand, the third time-saving game state (see Figure 96), which can be entered when in the second time-saving game state, is a highly profitable state in which the opening time of the electric device 315b is set to 3 seconds (long opening), which is five times the interval between launches of the game balls 99. In this long opening, the expected number of balls that will enter when game balls 99 are shot out continuously is set to one or more, and for example, approximately one to three game balls 99 will enter the second winning slot 315 for one normal win.

Also, even if the game state when the game ball 99 enters the through gates 317L and 317R is the normal game state (low frequency support mode), if the game state when the variable display of normal symbols starts is one of the various time-saving game states, the variable time and the opening time of the electric device 315b are determined by the conditions of the time-saving game state. Also, even if the game state when the game ball 99 enters the through gates 317L and 317R is one of the various time-saving game states, if the game state when the variable display of normal symbols starts is the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the variable time and the opening time of the electric device 315b are determined by the conditions of the normal game state.

For example, if game ball 99 enters through gates 317L and 317R while a normal symbol is changing during the time-saving game mode (high frequency support mode), resulting in one ball being reserved, and the game state when the normal symbol that was already changing is still in the time-saving game mode (high frequency support mode), the change of the normal symbol corresponding to the reserved game ball will begin after various lotteries are held under the conditions of the time-saving game mode (high frequency support mode). However, if the game state has switched to the normal game mode (low frequency support mode) before the changing normal symbol stops, the change of the normal symbol corresponding to the reserved game ball will begin after various lotteries are held under the conditions of the normal game mode (low frequency support mode).

Furthermore, if game ball 99 enters through gates 317L, 317R while a normal symbol is fluctuating during normal game play (low frequency support mode), resulting in one ball being reserved, and if the game state when the fluctuating normal symbol stops is still normal game play (low frequency support mode), the normal symbol corresponding to the reserved game ball will begin to fluctuate through various lotteries held under the conditions of the normal game play (low frequency support mode), which is a low-profit state. However, if the game state has switched to the time-saving game play (high frequency support mode) by the time the fluctuating normal symbol stops, and a high-profit condition has been met, the normal symbol corresponding to the reserved game ball will begin to fluctuate through various lotteries held under the conditions of the time-saving game play (high frequency support mode), which is a high-profit state.

The opening time of the electric device 315b during normal winning play in the normal play state, first time-saving play state, second time-saving play state, and third time-saving play state is not limited to the example shown in Figure 85 (C) and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 85 (C), only one type of opening time for the electric device 315b is set for normal winning play for each game state, but multiple types of opening time for the electric device 315b for normal winning play may be set for at least one game state among the normal game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state.

[First Special Chart Big Win Table]
The first special chart jackpot winning/losing table is used for the first special chart jackpot lottery, which is executed when the conditions for the special chart lottery are met when the game ball 99 enters the first winning slot 314. Here, Figure 86 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the first special chart jackpot winning/losing table.

As shown in Figure 86 (A), the first special chart jackpot win/loss table includes six jackpot win/loss tables corresponding to the six levels of game setting values 1 to 6. In each jackpot win/loss table, the lottery result for the first special chart jackpot lottery is selected as either a jackpot or a loss, depending on the value (random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1. Also, in the first special chart jackpot win/loss table, the probability of the lottery result in the first special chart jackpot lottery being a jackpot increases in the order of game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1 (in descending order of game setting value), providing an advantage to the player.

In the first special chart jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 1, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 ranging from 0 to 65,535, 206 random numbers ranging from 0 to 205 correspond to jackpots, and the other random numbers correspond to losses, with the jackpot probability set at approximately 1/318.1 (206/65,536).

In the first special chart jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 2, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 between 0 and 65,535, 202 random numbers between 0 and 211 correspond to jackpots, and the other random numbers correspond to losses, with the jackpot probability set at approximately 1/309.1 (212/65,536).

In the first special chart jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 3, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 between 0 and 65,535, 218 random numbers between 0 and 217 correspond to jackpots, and the other random numbers correspond to losses, with the jackpot probability set at approximately 1/300.6 (218/65,536).

In the first special chart jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 4, of the 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) between 0 and 65,535, 224 random numbers between 0 and 223 correspond to jackpots, and the other random numbers correspond to losses, with the jackpot probability set at approximately 1/292.6 (224/65,536).

In the first special chart jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 5, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 between 0 and 65,535, 230 random numbers between 0 and 229 correspond to jackpots, and the other random numbers correspond to losses, with the jackpot probability set at approximately 1/284.9 (230/65,536).

In the first special chart jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 6, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 ranging from 0 to 65,535, 236 random numbers ranging from 0 to 235 correspond to jackpots, and the other random numbers correspond to losses, with the jackpot probability set at approximately 1/277.7 (236/65,536).

Then, when the first special jackpot lottery is conducted based on the jackpot win/lose table selected according to the game setting value, the jackpot game is executed if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 indicates a jackpot.

In the first special chart jackpot win/loss table of this embodiment, the jackpot random number values are continuous, but the jackpot random number values may not be continuous and some or all of them may be discrete values.

Furthermore, six first special chart jackpot win/loss tables are provided corresponding to six levels of game setting values, but at least one first special chart jackpot win/loss table is sufficient, and the game setting values are not limited to six levels.

[First special chart, type 1 jackpot distribution table]
The first special chart type 1 jackpot type allocation table is used to allocate the type of the first special chart type 1 jackpot when the lottery result in the first special chart jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Here, Figure 86 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the first special chart type 1 jackpot type allocation table.

As shown in Figure 86 (B), in the first special chart type 1 jackpot type allocation table, of the 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random numbers) from 0 to 19, 19 random numbers from 0 to 18 are short jackpots during 2R short opening, and the single random number of 19 is a short jackpot during 16R short opening. In other words, in this embodiment, two types of first special chart type 1 jackpots are set: short jackpots during 2R short opening and short jackpots during 16R short opening, with the allocation rate for short jackpots during 2R short opening set to 95% and short jackpots during 16R short opening set to 5%.

If the result of the first special jackpot lottery is a 2R short-time opening jackpot, the conditions for the jackpot game are met, and an open/close execution mode is executed in which two rounds of play are repeated in which the variable prize slot 316 is opened, as a profitable state for the jackpot win. If the result of the first special jackpot lottery is a 16R short-time opening jackpot, the conditions for the jackpot game are met, and an open/close execution mode is executed in which 16 rounds of play are repeated in which the variable prize slot 316 is opened, as a profitable state for the jackpot win. After the jackpot game based on either a 2R short-time opening jackpot or a 16R short-time opening jackpot ends, the profitable state is transitioned to the second time-shortened play state, which is one of the high-frequency support modes. Furthermore, during either jackpot, the execution periods for the variable display time of the normal symbols, the fixed display time, and the opening time of the electric device 315b are controlled in the low-frequency support mode. In this second time-saving game state, the electric device 315b opens frequently because the probability of a normal winning lottery, which is executed when the game ball 99 passes through the through gates 317L and 317R, is high (see Figure 85 (B)). However, because the time that the electric device 315b is open is short (0.6 seconds), it is a short-open time-saving game state in which it is not possible to expect many game balls 99 to enter the second winning slot 315 (see Figure 85 (C)).

In addition, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, which is entered after the end of a jackpot game based on a Type 1 jackpot on the first special chart, is set to the number of times that can be played with the game balls (expected ball payout value or expected ball difference value) that the player can acquire through a 2R short-open time-saving jackpot game, for example. This allows the player to play the prescribed number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state with the game balls acquired through a 2R short-open time-saving jackpot game without significantly reducing their ball holdings. This prevents the player from being significantly disadvantaged by the transition to the second time-saving game state, while providing the player with the opportunity to transition to the third time-saving game state (described below), which allows for a transition to a Type 2 jackpot game state via a small jackpot game state.

Note that if the upper limit on the number of game balls that can enter the variable winning slot 316 during each round of play is set to 10, and the number of winning balls resulting from game balls entering the variable winning slot 316 is set to 10, the expected number of balls dispensed in a 2R short-open short-time jackpot game will be 200. Therefore, in this embodiment, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) on the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is set to 100, which is the number of times that can be played by shooting out approximately 150 to 200 game balls.

In this way, if the result of the first special jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the entry of game ball 99 into first winning slot 314, is a jackpot, a Type 1 jackpot game is executed in which a predetermined number of rounds of play are executed as a profit state granted in response to the jackpot win, and a Type 1 jackpot game state is initiated after the Type 1 jackpot game ends.

[First special chart change table]
The first special chart fluctuation table is used to set the special chart fluctuation pattern (variation display time) of the first special chart in the first special chart game executed for the first special chart jackpot lottery when the lottery result in the first special chart jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Here, Figure 86 (C) is a diagram showing an example of the first special chart fluctuation table.

As shown in Figure 86 (C), in the first special chart variation table, special chart variation patterns are pre-associated with the value of the special chart variation type counter CS1. In this first special chart variation table, one of the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected depending on the value (random number) of the special chart variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special chart variation table, of the 200 special chart variation type counter CS1 values from 0 to 199, 10 random number values from 0 to 9 correspond to special chart variation pattern "01," which has a variation display time of 30 seconds; 110 random number values from 10 to 119 correspond to special chart variation pattern "02," which has a variation display time of 60 seconds; and 80 random number values from 120 to 199 correspond to special chart variation pattern "03," which has a variation display time of 90 seconds.

Here, if special symbol variation pattern "01" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the variation type (presentation pattern type) as a normal reach presentation pattern in which the special symbol variation display time is 30 seconds, and the normal reach presentation pattern is executed on the symbol display unit 341, etc. The normal reach presentation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the special symbol game presentation is a normal reach presentation. Also, if special symbol variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the variation type (presentation pattern type) as a super reach presentation pattern in which the special symbol variation display time is 60 seconds, and the super reach presentation pattern is executed on the symbol display unit 341, etc. The super reach presentation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the special symbol game presentation is a super reach presentation. Furthermore, if special symbol variation pattern "03" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the variation type (presentation pattern) as a special reach presentation pattern in which the special symbol variation display time is the longest at 90 seconds, and the special reach presentation pattern is executed on the symbol display unit 341, etc. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the special chart game effect is a special reach effect.

[First special drawing miss type allocation table]
The first special chart loss type allocation table is used to allocate the type of loss when the lottery result in the first special chart jackpot lottery is a loss. Here, Figure 86 (D) is a diagram showing an example of the first special chart loss type allocation table.

As shown in Figure 86 (D), the first special symbol loss type allocation table prescribes loss types according to the value (random number value) of the reach random number counter C3. Specifically, in the first special symbol loss type allocation table, of the 239 reach random number counter C3 values from 0 to 238, 9 random number values from 0 to 8 are reach for a front or rear miss, 30 random number values from 9 to 38 are reach for a non-front or rear miss, 199 random number values from 39 to 237 are complete misses, and one random number value of 238 is a time-saving symbol stop miss.

Here, "reach" refers to a variable state in which a decorative symbol combination indicating a jackpot is likely to occur between the time when the variable display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341 begins and the time when the decorative symbols are statically displayed. In one example, the same decorative symbol is statically displayed at two of the three stop positions on the pay line on the symbol display unit 341, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the remaining stop position changes. Furthermore, during the variable reach state on the symbol display unit 341, a story presentation process is executed in which a video of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the level of expectation, or a player-participation operation presentation process is executed in which the player's operation of the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation. Note that during the execution of these presentation processes, the variable display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged form.

A front-to-back miss is a miss in which, after a decorative symbol reaches, the final stopping symbol stops just one symbol before or after the reach symbol, while a non-front-to-back miss is a miss in which, after a decorative symbol reaches, the final stopping symbol stops anywhere other than before or after the reach symbol. Complete misses and time-saving symbol stop misses are misses in which a decorative symbol reaches does not occur (non-reach misses). A time-saving symbol stop miss is a miss in which a specific symbol combination (time-saving symbol combination) (see Figure 112) from among the non-reach symbol combinations is displayed as stopped, and after this specific symbol combination (time-saving symbol combination) is displayed as stopped, the game transitions to the first time-saving game state described below. This first time-saving game state is one of the high-frequency support modes, but is a short-open time-saving game state in which the opening time of the electric device 315b is short (see Figures 85(B) and 85(C)). A complete miss is a miss in which a non-reach symbol combination other than a specific symbol combination (time-saving symbol combination) is displayed.

[First special chart deviation variation table]
The first special chart miss variation table is used to set the first special chart variation pattern (variation display time) of the first special chart in the first special chart game executed for the first special chart jackpot lottery when the lottery result in the first special chart jackpot lottery is a miss. Here, Figure 86 (E) is a diagram showing an example of the first special chart miss variation table.

As shown in Figure 86 (E), the first special symbol miss variation table specifies the special symbol variation pattern (variation display time) of the first special symbol according to the miss type and the value (random number value) of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. This first special symbol miss variation table includes a miss first special symbol miss variation table for miss reaches (front and rear miss reaches and reaches other than front and rear misses), a first special symbol miss variation table for complete misses, and a first special symbol miss variation table for time-saving symbol stop misses.

In the first special chart miss variation table for miss reaches (front and rear miss reaches and reaches other than front and rear misses), one of the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected depending on the value (random number) of the special chart variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special chart miss variation table for miss reaches (front and rear miss reaches and reaches other than front and rear misses), of the 200 special chart variation type counter CS1 values from 0 to 199, 100 random number values from 0 to 99 correspond to special chart variation pattern "01," which has a special chart variation display time of 30 seconds, 50 random number values from 100 to 149 correspond to special chart variation pattern "02," which has a special chart variation display time of 60 seconds, and 50 random number values from 150 to 199 correspond to special chart variation pattern "03," which has a special chart variation display time of 90 seconds.

In the first special chart miss variation table for complete misses, either special chart variation pattern "04" or "05" is selected depending on the value (random number) of the special chart variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special chart miss variation table for complete misses, of the 200 special chart variation type counter CS1 values from 0 to 199, 150 random number values from 0 to 149 correspond to special chart variation pattern "04," which has a special chart variation display time of 7 seconds, and 50 random number values from 150 to 199 correspond to special chart variation pattern "05," which has a special chart variation display time of 10 seconds.

In the first special symbol stop variation table for when the time-saving symbol stop is missed, one of the special symbol variation patterns "04" to "07" is selected depending on the value (random number) of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special symbol stop variation table for when the time-saving symbol stop is missed, of the 200 special symbol variation type counter CS1 values from 0 to 199, 100 random number values from 0 to 99 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "04," which has a special symbol variation display time of 7 seconds, 50 random number values from 100 to 149 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "05," which has a special symbol variation display time of 10 seconds, 30 random number values from 150 to 179 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "06," which has a special symbol variation display time of 15 seconds, and 20 random number values from 180 to 199 correspond to special symbol variation pattern "05," which has a special symbol variation display time of 20 seconds. In other words, when the time-saving pattern stops, the special pattern variation pattern with the shorter special pattern variation display time is more likely to be selected.

Here, after the first special symbol game ends and the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, the game transitions from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state (see Figure 96). The first special symbol miss variation table for time-saving symbol stop misses specifies an upper limit (prescribed number) for the number of time-saving games in the first time-saving game state, which is the short-open time-saving game state, in accordance with the special symbol change pattern (special symbol change display time) set according to the value (random number) of the special symbol change type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special symbol miss variation table for time-saving symbol stop misses, the upper limit (prescribed number) for the number of time-saving games in the first time-saving game state corresponds to 5 times for special symbol change pattern "04," 10 times for special symbol change pattern "05," 20 times for special symbol change pattern "06," and 30 times for special symbol change pattern "07." Furthermore, as mentioned above, when a time-saving symbol stop miss occurs, the shorter the special symbol change pattern display time, the more likely it is to be selected. Therefore, the lower the number of time-saving play attempts (prescribed number of attempts) in the first time-saving play state, the more likely it is to be selected as the upper limit (prescribed number of attempts) for the number of time-saving play attempts in the first time-saving play state. Furthermore, by including a time-saving symbol stop miss as a miss in the first special symbol jackpot lottery, it becomes possible to transition from the normal play state, which is a low-frequency support mode, to the first time-saving play state, which is a high-frequency support mode (short-open time-saving play state). In this way, by being able to transition from the normal play state to the first time-saving play state, which is a high-frequency support mode, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the normal play state, which tends to lead to monotonous progress, and prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

In this way, if the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery, which is executed in response to the entry of game ball 99 into first winning slot 314, is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, the first time-saving game state will occur after the end of the first special chart game in which the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop.

In this embodiment, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of times time-saving games can be played in the first time-saving game state is determined by the first special symbol miss variation table for time-saving symbol stop misses, but this upper limit (prescribed number of times) may also be set by an allocation table that is provided separately from the first special symbol miss variation table for time-saving symbol stop misses. Also, in this embodiment, the type of special symbol change pattern (special symbol change display time) when the time-saving symbol stop misses and the prescribed number of times time-saving games can be set regardless of the special symbol change pattern (special symbol change display time). Also, time-saving symbol stop misses may be excluded as misses in the first special symbol jackpot lottery results.

[Short Open 2nd Special Big Win Table]
The short-opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table is used for the second special chart jackpot lottery, which is executed when the electric device 315b is short-opened and the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315. In other words, the short-opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table is used for the second special chart jackpot lottery, which is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315, based on the result of the regular chart win lottery in the normal game state, the first time-limited game state, and the second time-limited game state being a regular chart win. Here, Figure 87 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the short-opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table.

As shown in Figure 87 (A), the short-release second special chart jackpot win/loss table is set commonly for six game setting values 1 to 6. In the short-release second special chart jackpot win/loss table, the lottery result for the second special chart jackpot lottery is selected as a jackpot, small win, or miss depending on the value (random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1. In other words, the second special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the game ball 99 entering the second winning slot 315 during short release differs from the first special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the game ball 99 entering the first winning slot 314 in that the lottery result includes a small win that activates the feather device 83 (see Figures 83 and 84). Specifically, in the short-open second special chart jackpot win/loss table, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 ranging from 0 to 65,535, 0 to 205 correspond to a jackpot, 206 to 58,980 correspond to a small win, and 58,981 to 65,535 correspond to a miss. In other words, in the second special chart jackpot lottery, which is triggered when the electric device 315b is short-opened and the game ball 99 enters the second winning slot 315, the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/318.1, the small win probability is set to approximately 1/1.15, and the miss probability is set to approximately 1/10.

[Long Open 2nd Special Big Win Table]
The long opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table is used for the second special chart jackpot lottery that is executed when the electric device 315b is long opened and the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315. In other words, the long opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table is used for the second special chart jackpot lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315 based on the result of the normal chart win lottery in the third time-saving game state being a normal chart win. Here, Figure 87 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the long opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table.

As shown in Figure 87 (B), the long-open second special chart jackpot win/loss table is set commonly for six game setting values 1 to 6. In the long-open second special chart jackpot win/loss table, the lottery result for the second special chart jackpot lottery is selected as a jackpot, small win, or miss depending on the value (random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1. In other words, the second special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the game ball 99 entering the second winning slot 315 during long opening differs from the first special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the game ball 99 entering the first winning slot 314 in that the lottery result includes a small win that activates the feather device 83 (see Figures 83 and 84). Specifically, in the long-open second special chart jackpot win/loss table, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 ranging from 0 to 65,535, 0 to 205 correspond to a jackpot, 206 to 65,529 correspond to a small win, and 65,530 to 65,535 correspond to a miss. That is, in the second special chart jackpot lottery, which is triggered when the electric device 315b is long-opened and the game ball 99 enters the second prize slot 315, the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/318.1, the small win probability is set to approximately 1/1.003, and the miss probability is set to approximately 1/318.1. Compared to the short-open second special chart jackpot win/loss table, the miss probability is set lower and the small win probability is set higher accordingly.

In this embodiment, a single short-opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table and a single long-opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table are provided in common for six game setting values, but one or both of the short-opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table and the long-opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table may be set for each game setting value. It is also possible to set a single second special chart jackpot win/loss table by sharing the short-opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table and the long-opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table.

[Second special chart fluctuation table]
The second special symbol winning variation table is used to set the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game executed for the second special symbol winning lottery when the lottery result in the second special symbol jackpot lottery triggered by the game ball 99 entering the second winning slot 315 is a win (jackpot or small win). Here, Figure 87 (C) is a diagram showing an example of the second special symbol winning variation table.

As shown in Figure 87 (C), the second special chart win variation table is provided according to the type of win (big win or small win), and includes a second special chart win variation table for big wins and a second special chart win variation table for small wins.

In the second special chart variation table for jackpots, special chart variation patterns are pre-associated with the value of the special chart variation type counter CS1. In this second special chart variation table for jackpots, either special chart variation pattern "01" or "06" is selected depending on the value (random number) of the special chart variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the second special chart variation table for jackpots, of the 200 special chart variation type counter CS1 values from 0 to 199, 100 random number values from 0 to 99 correspond to special chart variation pattern "01," which has a special chart variation display time of 30 seconds, and 100 random number values from 100 to 199 correspond to special chart variation pattern "06," which has a special chart variation display time of 15 seconds.

In the second special chart variation table for small wins, special chart variation pattern "05" is selected regardless of the value (random number value) of the special chart variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the second special chart variation table for small wins, all 200 special chart variation type counter CS1 values from 0 to 199 correspond to special chart variation pattern "05," which has a special chart variation display time of 10 seconds.

In the second special chart winning variation table of this embodiment, one type of special chart variation pattern (special chart variation display time) for the second special chart is set when the result of the second special chart big win lottery is a small win, but multiple types of such special chart variation patterns (special chart variation display time) may also be set.

[2nd Special Chart Out-of-Range Variation Table]
The second special symbol miss variation table is used to set the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game executed for the second special symbol jackpot lottery when the lottery result in the second special symbol jackpot lottery triggered by the game ball 99 entering the second winning port 315 is a miss. Here, Figure 87 (D) is a diagram showing an example of the second special symbol miss variation table.

As shown in Figure 87 (D), in the second special chart out-of-range variation table, the special chart variation pattern (special chart variation display time) is associated with the value (random number value) of the special chart variation type counter CS1, and one of the special chart variation patterns "04" to "07" is selected depending on the value (random number value) of the special chart variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the second special chart miss variation table, of the 239 special chart variation type counter CS1 values from 0 to 238, 167 random number values from 0 to 166 correspond to special chart variation pattern "04", where the special chart variation display time is 7 seconds, 36 random number values from 167 to 202 correspond to special chart variation pattern "05", where the special chart variation display time is 10 seconds, 24 random number values from 203 to 226 correspond to special chart variation pattern "06", where the special chart variation display time is 15 seconds, and 12 random number values from 227 to 238 correspond to special chart variation pattern "07", where the special chart variation display time is 20 seconds.

In the second special chart miss variation table of this embodiment, four types of special chart variation patterns (special chart variation display time) for the second special chart when the lottery result in the second special chart jackpot lottery is a miss are set, but the special chart variation pattern (special chart variation display time) may be set to a number other than four, for example, one type.

[Time-saving game number allocation table]
The time-saving game number allocation table is used to determine whether to transition to the third time-saving game state after the second special game executed for the second special jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 in the second time-saving game state as will be described later, in the case where the lottery result is a miss, and is used to set the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state. Here, Figure 87 (E) is a diagram showing an example of the time-saving game number allocation table.

As shown in Figure 87 (E), in the time-saving game count allocation table, the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving game counts is associated with the value (random number) of the special symbol fluctuation type counter CS1, and one of 10, 30, 50, or 100 times is selected depending on the value (random number) of the special symbol fluctuation type counter CS1. The time-saving game count allocation table uses the special symbol fluctuation type counter CS1, which sets the special symbol fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation display time), to set the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving game counts, and associates the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving game counts with the type of special symbol fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation display time).

Specifically, in the time-saving play number allocation table, of the 239 values of the special chart change type counter CS1 from 0 to 238, 167 random number values from 0 to 166 correspond to 10 times as the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving play for special chart change pattern "04," which has a special chart change display time of 7 seconds; 36 random number values from 167 to 202 correspond to 30 times as the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving play for special chart change pattern "05," which has a special chart change display time of 10 seconds; 24 random number values from 203 to 226 correspond to 50 times as the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving play for special chart change pattern "06," which has a special chart change display time of 15 seconds; and 12 random number values from 227 to 238 correspond to 100 times as the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving play for special chart change pattern "07," which has a special chart change display time of 20 seconds. In other words, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving games is set at approximately 70% for 10 times, approximately 15% for 30 times, approximately 10% for 50 times, and approximately 5% for 100 times, with the higher the prescribed number of times, the less likely it is to be selected.

In the time-saving game count allocation table of this embodiment, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving games is set in accordance with the type of special symbol fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation display time), but the upper limit (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving games does not have to correspond to the type of special symbol fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation display time). Also, in the time-saving game count allocation table of this embodiment, if the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a miss, the time-saving symbol stop miss is always obtained, but it is also possible to make it so that some of the cases where the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a miss are also a time-saving symbol stop miss.

In addition, in the time-saving game count allocation table of this embodiment, four types of upper limit values (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving games are set according to the value (random number value) of the special chart variation type counter CS1, but the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving games may be set to a number other than four, for example, one type.

In addition, in the time-saving game count allocation table of this embodiment, the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games is associated with the value (random number) of the special chart variation type counter CS1, and the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games is set using the variation type counter, but it is also possible to set an allocation counter for allocating the number of time-saving games, and use this allocation counter to set the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games.

[Third Time-Shortened Game State Jackpot Type Allocation Table]
The third time-saving game state jackpot type allocation table is used to allocate the type of jackpot in the third time-saving game state. Jackpots in the third time-saving game state include a Type 1 jackpot when the result of the second special jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and a Type 2 jackpot that occurs when the game ball 99 enters the V winning slot 833 of the feather device 83 in a small jackpot game that is executed when the result of the second special jackpot lottery is a small jackpot. In the third time-saving game state, a common third time-saving game state jackpot type allocation table is used to allocate the type (number of rounds) of Type 1 jackpot and Type 2 jackpot. Here, Figure 87 (F) is a diagram showing an example of a third time-saving game state jackpot type allocation table.

As shown in Figure 87 (F), in the third time-shortened game state win type allocation table, of the 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random number values) ranging from 0 to 19, five random number values ranging from 0 to 4 are 16R long opening short-time jackpots, and 15 random number values ranging from 5 to 19 are 5R long opening short-time jackpots. In other words, in this embodiment, two types of jackpots are set for both Type 1 and Type 2 jackpots in the third time-shortened game state: 16R long opening short-time jackpots and 5R long opening short-time jackpots, with the allocation rate for 16R long opening short-time jackpots set to 25% and the allocation rate for 5R long opening short-time jackpots set to 75%.

Here, if the jackpot type is a 16R long opening time shortened jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in the jackpot game, in which round play in which the variable prize winning port 316 is opened is repeated 16 times, and if the jackpot type is a 5R long opening time shortened jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which round play in which the variable prize winning port 316 is opened is repeated 5 times. After the jackpot game executed based on either a 16R long opening time shortened jackpot or a 5R long opening time shortened jackpot ends, the game returns to the third time shortened game state, which is one of the high frequency support modes. In this third time-saving game state, the electric device 315b is opened frequently (see Figure 85 (B)) because the probability of a normal winning lottery being held when the game ball 99 passes through the through gates 317L and 317R is high, and because the electric device 315b is open for a long time (3 seconds), this is a long-open time-saving game state in which many game balls 99 can be expected to enter the second winning slot 315 (see Figure 85 (C)).

In this way, if the result of the second special jackpot lottery, which is executed in response to the entry of game ball 99 into second winning slot 315 during the third time-saving game state, is a jackpot, a type 1 jackpot game is executed in which a predetermined number of rounds of play are executed, and the third time-saving game state occurs after the type 1 jackpot game ends.

In the third time-saving game state, a common allocation table is used for Type 1 and Type 2 jackpots as the jackpot type allocation table, but different allocation tables may be used for Type 1 and Type 2 jackpots.

[2nd Special Chart Type 1 Jackpot Type Allocation Table]
The second special chart type 1 jackpot type allocation table is used to allocate the type of the second special chart type 1 jackpot when the lottery result in the second special chart type 1 jackpot in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is a jackpot. Here, Figure 87 (G) is a diagram showing an example of the second special chart type 1 jackpot type allocation table.

As shown in Figure 87 (G), in the second special chart type 1 jackpot type allocation table, of the 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random numbers) from 0 to 19, 19 random numbers from 0 to 18 are short jackpots during 2R short opening, and the single random number of 19 is a short jackpot during 16R short opening. In other words, in this embodiment, two types of second special chart type 1 jackpots are set: short jackpots during 2R short opening and short jackpots during 16R short opening, with the allocation rate for short jackpots during 2R short opening set to 95% and short jackpots during 16R short opening set to 5%.

Here, if the result of the second special jackpot lottery in the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state is a 2R short-opening time-shortened jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in the jackpot game, in which round play in which the variable prize opening 316 is opened is repeated twice; and if the result of the second special jackpot lottery in the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state is a 16R short-opening time-shortened jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in the jackpot game, in which round play in which the variable prize opening 316 is opened is repeated 16 times. Then, in both the 2R short-opening time-shortened jackpot and the 16R short-opening time-shortened jackpot, after the jackpot game executed based on these jackpots ends, the game transitions to the second time-shortened game state, which is one of the high-frequency support modes. In this second time-saving game state, the electric device 315b opens frequently because the probability of a normal winning lottery, which is executed when the game ball 99 passes through the through gates 317L and 317R, is high (see Figure 85 (B)). However, because the time that the electric device 315b is open is short (0.6 seconds), it is a short-open time-saving game state in which it is not possible to expect many game balls 99 to enter the second winning slot 315 (see Figure 85 (C)).

In this way, if the result of the second special jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the entry of game ball 99 into second winning slot 315 in the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state, is a jackpot, a type 1 jackpot game in which a predetermined number of rounds of play are played is executed as a profit state for winning the jackpot, and the second time-saving game state occurs after the type 1 jackpot game ends.

[Processing of main control device 4]
Next, with reference to Figures 88 to 103, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4 will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the main timer interrupt processing is the same as in the first embodiment, but some processing of the main processing is different from the main processing of the first embodiment (see Figure 21). Here, Figure 88 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing of the main control unit 4 of this embodiment.

[Main processing of main control device 4]
As shown in Figure 88, the main processing of the main control device 4 of this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that some of the processing of the normal game control processing (step S1404), the special game control processing (step S1406), and the game state transition processing (step S1408) differs from the first embodiment described above, and the small win game control processing (step S1407-1) is executed. Below, we will explain the procedures (steps) in the normal game control processing (step S1404) and the special game control processing (step S1406) that are different from the first embodiment described above, and the entire procedure of the small win game control processing (step S1407-1) and the game state transition processing (step S1408) will be explained.

[General game control processing]
In this embodiment, the normal game control process executed in step S1404 in the main process of Fig. 88 is different from the first embodiment in the normal game fluctuation start process. Below, with reference to Fig. 89, the normal game fluctuation start process of this embodiment will be described.

[General map change start processing]
In the normal symbol variation start process of this embodiment, variation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 361 is started, and various flags are set based on the results of the normal symbol winning lottery.

<Step S3301>
As shown in Figure 89, in the normal symbol variation start process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal game state flag indicating that the normal game state is set to on (step S3301). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state when starting the normal symbol variation display (normal symbol game) is the normal game state. In other words, when the normal symbol variation starts, it determines whether the normal symbol wins, which is the low frequency support mode, or the high frequency support mode, which is the time-saving game state, and determines whether the normal symbol wins, based on the support mode at the start of the normal symbol variation.

In addition, in the game state transition process described below, when a transition is made from another game state to the normal game state, the normal game state flag is set to ON in step S3629 of FIG. 98, step S3649 of FIG. 99, step S3667 of FIG. 100, or step S3701 of FIG. 102, while when a transition is made from the normal game state to another game state, the normal game state flag is set to OFF in step S3608, S3612, or S3616 of FIG. 97.

If the normal game state flag is set to on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3302. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3301: No), i.e., if the game is in one of the first to third time-saving game states, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3305.

<Steps S3302 to S3304>
If the normal game state flag is set to on (step S3301: Yes), i.e., if the low frequency support mode is selected, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state normal game state win/loss table (see Figure 85 (A)) is a win/loss determination for the normal game state win lottery (step S3302), and determines whether the result of the win/loss determination is a normal game state win (step S3303).

Whether or not the result of the win/loss determination is a normal win is determined based on the normal win random number counter C4, which is obtained when the game ball 99 enters the through gates 317L and 317R and stored as a specific value in the normal win reserve storage area 412c (see Figure 11).

If the result of the win/loss determination based on the normal game state normal win table is a normal win (step S3303: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the short-open normal win flag to on (step S3304) and proceeds to step S3309. The short-open normal win flag is a flag that indicates that the result of the normal win lottery is a short-open win, and is referenced in step S1806 of the normal win game control processing in Figure 25 of the first embodiment described above when determining whether to set the value of the opening counter to the time corresponding to the short opening as the opening time of the electric device 315b.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss determination based on the normal game state normal hit/miss table is not a normal hit (step S3303: No), i.e., if the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3309.

<Steps S3305 and S3306>
If the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3301: No), that is, if the game is in one of the first to third time-saving game states, which are high-frequency support modes, the MPU 41 makes a win/loss judgment for the normal winning lottery based on the time-saving game state normal winning/loss table (see Figure 85 (B)) (step S3305), and determines whether the result of the win/loss judgment is a normal winning or not (step S3306).

Whether or not the result of the win/loss determination is a normal win is determined based on the value of the normal win random number counter C4, which is obtained when the game ball 99 enters the through gates 317L and 317R, as in step S3302 described above, and is stored as a specific value in the normal win reserve storage area 412c (see Figure 11).

If the result of the hit/miss determination based on the time-limited game state normal hit/miss table is a normal hit (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3307; if the result of the hit/miss determination is not a normal hit (step S3306: No), i.e., if the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3309.

<Steps S3307 and S3308>
If the result of the judgment based on the time-saving game state normal symbol win/loss table is a normal symbol win (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the third time-saving game state flag indicating the third time-saving game state is set to ON (step S3307). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state when starting the variable display of the normal symbol (normal symbol game) is the third time-saving game state.

In addition, in the game state transition process described below, the third time-reduced game state flag is set to ON in step S3644 of FIG. 99, step S3694 of FIG. 101, or step S3723 of FIG. 103 when transitioning from another game state to the third time-reduced game state, and is set to OFF in step S3657, S3661, or S3668 of FIG. 100 when transitioning from the third time-reduced game state to another game state.

If the third time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the long-open normal win flag to ON (step S3308) and proceeds to step S3309. The long-open normal win flag is a flag that indicates that the result of the normal win lottery is a long-open win, and is referenced in step S1803 of the normal win game control processing in Figure 25 of the first embodiment described above when determining whether to set the value of the opening counter to the time corresponding to the long-open as the opening time of the electric device 315b.

On the other hand, if the third time-shortened game state flag is set to OFF (step S3307: No), i.e., if the game is in the first time-shortened game state or the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to the aforementioned step S3304, sets the short-open normal winning flag to ON, and proceeds to step S3309.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
If the result of the regular symbol winning lottery is a miss (step S3303 or S3306: No), if the short-open regular symbol winning flag is set to on (step S3304) or if the long-open regular symbol winning flag is set to on (step S3308), the MPU 41 starts the normal symbol variable display in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (step S3309). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the normal symbol variable display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol is being displayed variably, i.e., that a regular symbol game is being executed (step S3310), and ends the normal symbol variable start processing.

When the normal symbol display unit 361 starts displaying a changing normal symbol, the execution period for the normal symbol changing display time, the fixed display time, or the opening time of the electric device 315b is set based on the normal symbol winning random number counter C4, the normal symbol change type counter CS2, and various time-saving game state flags, which are obtained when the game ball 99 enters each winning slot 314, 315 and are stored in the normal symbol reserve storage area 412c (see Figure 11), as explained in the first embodiment above. The normal symbol changing display time when the normal symbol display unit 361 starts displaying a changing normal symbol is determined by reference to the game state when the normal symbol changing display starts, i.e., the various time-saving game state flags.

[Special game control processing]
In this embodiment, the special symbol game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of Fig. 88 is different from the first embodiment in the special symbol variation start process. Here, Fig. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol variation start process. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation start process of this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 90.

[Special chart change start processing]
In the special pattern change start processing of this embodiment, the change display and stop display of the first special pattern of the first special pattern display section 362 in the first special pattern game, or the second special pattern of the second special pattern display section 363 in the second special pattern game, are controlled.

<Step S3401>
90, in step S3401, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol game to be started is the first special symbol game. Whether the special symbol game to be started is the first special symbol game is determined based on the win/loss information moved to the special symbol execution area AE (see FIG. 8) of the special symbol reserved storage area 412b set in the RAM 412, for example, in step S2003 or S2006 in the special symbol data setting process of FIG. 27 in the first embodiment.

If the special symbol game to be started is the first special symbol game (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3402. On the other hand, if the special symbol game to be started is not the first special symbol game (step S3401: No), i.e., if the special symbol game to be started is the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3403.

<Step S3402>
If the special symbol game to be started is the first special symbol game (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game has been won based on the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table (see FIG. 86(A)) and the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as the win/loss information (numerical information) stored in the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b (step S3402), and proceeds to step S3406. The result of the win/loss determination in step S3402 is stored in the RAM 413.

<Steps S3403 to S3405>
If the special symbol game to be started is not the first special symbol game (step S3401: No), that is, if the special symbol game to be started is the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a third time-shortened game state flag indicating the third time-shortened game state is on (step S3403). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state when the second special symbol game is started is the third time-shortened game state.

In addition, the third time-reduced gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3644 of FIG. 99 or step S3694 of FIG. 101 when transitioning from another gaming state to the third time-reduced gaming state in the gaming state transition process described below, and is set to OFF in step S3657, S3661 or S3668 of FIG. 100 when transitioning from the third time-reduced gaming state to another gaming state.

If the third time-saving game state flag is on (step S3403: Yes), i.e., if the game state when starting the second special symbol game is the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 makes a win/loss determination based on the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the win/loss information (numerical information) stored in the long-open second special symbol jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 87 (B)) and the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b (step S3404), and proceeds to step S3406. The win/loss determination result in step S3404 is stored in RAM 413.

On the other hand, if the third time-saving game state flag is off (step S3403: No), that is, if the game state when starting the second special symbol game is the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 makes a hit/miss determination based on the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hit/miss information (numerical information) stored in the short-release second special symbol jackpot hit/miss table (see FIG. 87 (A)) and the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b (step S3405), and proceeds to step S3406. The hit/miss determination result in step S3405 is stored in RAM 413.

<Step S3406>
When the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is on in step S3402, S3404, or S3405, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state when the special symbol game is started is the normal game state or one of the first to third time-saving game states.

In addition, in the game state transition process described below, the normal game state flag is set to ON in step S3629 of FIG. 98, step S3650 of FIG. 99, step S3667 of FIG. 100, or step S3701 of FIG. 102 when transitioning from another game state to the normal game state, while it is set to OFF in step S3608, S3612, or S3616 of FIG. 97 when transitioning from the normal game state to another game state.

If the normal game state flag is on (step S3406: Yes), i.e., if the game state when special game play starts is the normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3413. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is off (step S3406: No), i.e., if the game state when special game play starts is one of the first to third time-saving game states, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3407.

<Step S3407>
If the normal game state flag is off (step S3406: No), that is, if the game state when starting special game play is one of the first to third time-shortened game states, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-shortened game count counter indicating the remaining number of time-shortened game plays in the time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state, or third time-shortened game state) (step S3407), and proceeds to step S3408.

The time-saving count counter is set in step S3605 of FIG. 97 when the normal game state or any of the jackpot game states is transitioned to one of the first to third time-saving game states, and in steps S3672, S3679, S3686, and S3693 of FIG. 101, and in step S3643 of FIG. 101 when the second time-saving game state is transitioned to the third game state. However, when special symbol game is started in one of the first to third time-saving game states, the counter is decremented by one in step S3407 of the special symbol variation start processing.

<Step S3408>
In step S3408, the MPU 41 determines whether a second time-shortened game state flag indicating the second time-shortened game state is on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state when the special symbol game is started is the second time-shortened game state.

The second time-reduced gaming state flag is set to ON in steps S3673, S3680, S3687 of FIG. 101 or step S3711 of FIG. 102 when a transition is made from another gaming state to the second time-reduced gaming state in the gaming state transition process described below, while it is set to OFF in steps S3636, S3640, S3647 or S3651 of FIG. 99 when a transition is made from the second time-reduced gaming state to another gaming state.

If the second time-shortened game state flag is on (step S3408: Yes), i.e., if the game state when special game play is started is the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3409. On the other hand, if the second time-shortened game state flag is off (step S3408: No), i.e., if the game state when special game play is started is not the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3413.

<Step S3409>
If the second time-saving game state flag is on (step S3408: Yes), that is, if the game state when starting the special pattern game is the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game is a miss or a miss for the time-saving pattern stop based on the result of the win/loss judgment in step S3402 or step S3405 (step S3409).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop (step S3409: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3410; if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop (step S3409: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3413.

<Steps S3410 and S3411>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a miss with the time-saving symbol stop (step S3409: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts the value of the time-saving number counter (the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state) from the number of time-saving games set for the miss with the time-saving symbol stop (see Figures 86(E) and 87(E)) (step S3410), and determines whether the subtracted value exceeds 0 (step S3411). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of time-saving games set for the miss with the time-saving symbol stop is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state. If the subtracted value exceeds 0 (S3411: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to S3412. If the subtracted value is equal to or less than 0 (S3411: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to S3413.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the subtraction value obtained by subtracting the value of the time-shortening number counter (the remaining number of time-shortening games in the second time-shortening game state) from the number of time-shortening games set for the time-shortening symbol stop miss (see Figures 86 (E) and 87 (E)) is greater than 0, a transition from the second time-shortening game state to the third time-shortening game state occurs; if the subtraction value is less than 0, a transition to the third time-shortening game state does not occur, and the remaining number of time-shortening games in the second time-shortening game state remains unchanged.

In this embodiment, the game state is transitioned from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state when the subtraction value exceeds 0. However, the game state may be transitioned from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state not only when the subtraction value exceeds 0 but also when the subtraction value is 0. In other words, the game state may be transitioned from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state when the subtraction value is 0 or greater.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the subtraction value is 0 or less, the remaining number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state remains unchanged; however, when the subtraction value is 0 or less, the remaining number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state may be changed. For example, the remaining number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state may be changed to the sum of the number of time-shortened games set for the time-shortened symbol stop miss, or may be changed to (or replaced with) the number of time-shortened games set for the time-shortened symbol stop miss.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, whether the special symbol game started in the second time-shortened game state is the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-shortened symbol stop, the second time-shortened game state is transitioned to the third time-shortened game state after the end of the special symbol game, provided that the subtraction value exceeds 0. However, it may be possible to transition from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state after the end of the special symbol game only if the special symbol game started in the second time-shortened game state is the second special symbol game. In other words, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-shortened symbol stop, if the jackpot lottery is for the first special symbol game, it may be possible to prevent a transition from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state. Additionally, the time-saving symbol stop miss may be omitted from the types of cases where the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game is a miss. In that case, if the special symbol game that starts in the second time-saving game state is the first special symbol game, there will be no transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state after the first special symbol game ends.

As explained in the first embodiment above, the execution periods, such as the variable display time and fixed display time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 in the first special symbol game, or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 in the second special symbol game, or the opening period (number of rounds) of the variable winning slot 316, are obtained upon the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, and are set based on the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2, which are specific values stored in the special symbol reserve storage area 412b, and various time-saving game state flags. Note that the variable display time of each special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 is started is determined by reference to the game state when the variable display of each special symbol is started, i.e., the various time-saving game state flags. Even if the game state when the game ball 99 enters each winning slot 314, 315 is the normal game state (low frequency support mode), if the game state when the variable display of each special symbol begins is one of the various time-saving game states, the execution periods such as the variable time of the special symbol and the opening period (number of rounds) of the variable winning slot 316 are determined by the conditions of the time-saving game state. Also, even if the game state when the game ball 99 enters each winning slot 314, 315 is one of the various time-saving game states, if the game state when the variable display of each special symbol begins is the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the execution periods such as the variable time of the special symbol and the opening period (number of rounds) of the variable winning slot 316 are determined by the conditions of the normal game state.

For example, if a game ball 99 enters each winning slot 314, 315 while a special symbol is changing during the time-saving game mode (high frequency support mode) and one corresponding ball is placed on hold, and the game state when the already-changing special symbol stops is still in the time-saving game mode (high frequency support mode), the special symbol corresponding to the held game ball will begin to change after various lotteries are held under the conditions of the time-saving game mode (high frequency support mode). However, if the game state has switched to the normal game mode (low frequency support mode) before the changing special symbol stops, the special symbol corresponding to the held game ball will begin to change after various lotteries are held under the conditions of the normal game mode (low frequency support mode).

In addition, if a game ball 99 enters each winning slot 314, 315 while a special symbol is changing during normal game play (low frequency support mode), resulting in one reserved ball, and if the game state when the changing special symbol stops is still normal game play (low frequency support mode), the special symbol corresponding to the reserved game ball will begin to change after various lotteries are held under the conditions of the normal game play (low frequency support mode). However, if the game state has switched to the time-saving game play state (high frequency support mode) before the changing special symbol stops, the high-profit condition will be met, and the special symbol corresponding to the reserved game ball will begin to change under the conditions of the time-saving game play state (high frequency support mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, each time the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-shortened game state is a miss with a time-shortened symbol stop, the subtraction value is calculated in relation to the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-shortened game plays set for that miss with a time-shortened symbol stop. However, if there are one or more jackpot lottery results in the second time-shortened game state prior to that miss with a time-shortened symbol stop that result in the subtraction value at that time being 0 or less, it may be determined whether to transition to the third time-shortened game state based on whether the value obtained by subtracting the value of the time-shortened number of times counter from the value obtained by adding the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-shortened game plays set for that miss with a time-shortened symbol stop to the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-shortened game plays set for that miss with a time-shortened symbol stop exceeds 0. That is, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, the determination of whether to transition to the third time-saving game state may be based on whether the value obtained by subtracting the value of the time-saving number counter from the value obtained by adding the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games set for the miss for the time-saving symbol stop to the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games set for the previous miss for the time-saving symbol stop in the second time-saving game state exceeds 0. In other words, the establishment of the high-profit condition may be determined not only based on the result of the miss for the time-saving symbol stop in the jackpot lottery, but also on the results of the previous jackpot lottery. In this case, the more times the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, the higher the likelihood that the subtraction value will exceed 0 and transition to the third time-saving game state will occur. This increases the player's attention to the time-saving symbol stop display in the second time-saving game state, further enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

<Step S3412>
If the subtraction value exceeds 0 (S3411: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a third time-shortened game state transition flag to ON (step S3412) to transition the game state from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state. This third time-shortened game state transition flag is referenced in step S3641 of the game state transition process in FIG. 99 (described later) to determine whether to transition the game state from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state.

<Step S3413>
In step S3413, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) of the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern of the special symbol game in the special symbol variation display time counter based on the result of the hit/miss determination in step S3402, S3404, or S3405. Specifically, if the result of the hit/miss determination in step S3402 is a jackpot, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) of the first special symbol display unit 362 in the special symbol variation display time counter based on the first special symbol type 1 jackpot variation table (see FIG. 86(C)), and if the result of the hit/miss determination in step S3402 is a miss, based on the first special symbol miss variation table (see FIG. 86(E)) corresponding to the miss type. In addition, if the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S3404 or step S3405 is a big hit or a small hit, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation display time) of the second special symbol display unit 363 in the special symbol fluctuation display time counter based on the second special symbol hit fluctuation table (see Figure 87 (C)) corresponding to the type of hit, or if the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S3404 or step S3405 is a miss, based on the second special symbol miss fluctuation table (see Figure 87 (D)).

<Step S3414>
In step S3414, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol variation pattern command in the RAM 412, which includes the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in step S3402, S3404, or S3405 and the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) set in step S3413. As a result, in step S1401 of the external output process in the next main process (see FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 41, the special symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute a special symbol game presentation in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the special symbol variation pattern command.

If the lottery result is a "short-time jackpot during 2R short opening," the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a special chart variation pattern command either "A01" to "A03" or "A06," in which "A" indicating a short-time jackpot during 2R short opening is added to the special chart variation pattern "01" to "03" or "06." If the lottery result is a "short-time jackpot during 16R short opening," the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a special chart variation pattern command either "B01" to "B03" or "B06," in which "B" indicating a short-time jackpot during 16R short opening is added to the special chart variation pattern "01" to "03" or "06." If the lottery result is a "small win," the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a special chart variation pattern command either "C05," in which "C" indicating a small win is added to the special chart variation pattern "05." Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 sets one of the special chart variation patterns "01" to "07" with a "D" added to indicate a miss, "D01" to "D07," as a special chart variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 includes information in the special chart variation pattern command as to whether the result is a reach for a front-to-back miss, a reach other than a front-to-back miss, a complete miss, or a miss with a time-saving pattern stop.

<Steps S3415 and S3416>
In step S3405, the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363, and further sets the special symbol variable display in progress flag to on (step S3416), indicating that the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (special symbol game is being executed), and terminates the variable start processing.

The special symbol variable display flag is referenced in step S1902 of the special symbol game control process of FIG. 26 in the first embodiment described above to determine whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the special symbol display areas 362, 363 of the main display unit 36 (whether or not special symbol game is being played).

[Small win game control processing]
In the small win game control process executed in step S1407-1 of the main process of FIG. 88 in this embodiment, a process is executed to control the operation of the feather role device 83 in a small win game that is executed based on the result of the lottery in the jackpot lottery that is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 being a small win. The small win game in this embodiment includes a first small win game that is executed when the result of the lottery in the second special jackpot lottery in the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state is a small win, and a second small win game that is executed when the result of the lottery in the second special jackpot lottery in the third time-shortened game state is a small win. Here, FIG. 91 is a time chart showing an example of the progress of a small win game.

As shown in Figures 91(A) and 91(B), the small prize game (first small prize game or second small prize game) includes an opening (first opening or second opening) in which the inlet 831 of the feather device 83 is kept closed, and a movable wing operation game in which the inlet 831 is opened by operating the movable wing 832 of the feather device 83. The first opening time of the first small prize game (e.g., 3 to 10 seconds) is set longer than the second opening time of the second small prize game (e.g., 2 to 9 seconds). The difference between the first opening time of the first small prize game and the second opening time of the second small prize game (e.g., 1 to 3 seconds) is set longer than the operation time of the V prize opening opening/closing unit 835 (described below) (e.g., 0.1 to 1 second).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 91(C), in small prize games, the operation timing and operation time (opening time) of the V prize opening opening/closing unit 835 are set to be the same regardless of the type of time-saving game state in which the second special jackpot lottery is executed. Of course, one or both of the operation timing and operation time (opening time) of the V prize opening opening/closing unit 835 may be set based on the type of time-saving game state in which the second special jackpot lottery is executed, and do not necessarily have to be set to be the same regardless of the type of time-saving game state. For example, it is conceivable that one or both of the operation timing and operation time (opening time) of the V prize opening opening/closing unit 835 in the first small prize game executed based on the second special jackpot lottery in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state could be set to be different from that in the second small prize game executed based on the second special jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state.

In addition, in small prize games, the execution time of the movable wing operation game (operation time of the movable wing 832) is set to the same regardless of the type of time-saving game state in which the second special jackpot lottery is executed. Of course, the execution time of the movable wing operation game (operation time of the movable wing 832) can be set differently depending on the type of time-saving game state in which the second special jackpot lottery is executed. For example, it is conceivable to set the execution time of the movable wing operation game of the first small prize game, which is executed based on the second special jackpot lottery in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, to be shorter than the execution time of the movable wing operation game of the second small prize game, which is executed based on the second special jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable wing activation game in the small win game is executed for a fixed time (certain time) regardless of whether the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 833, but the movable wing activation game may be configured to end before the fixed time has elapsed if the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 833.

In addition, in the small win game of this embodiment, no ending is set, but the ending may be executed after the movable wing operation game has ended. In this case, it is also possible to notify, via the pattern display unit 341 or the like, whether or not the game ball 99 has entered the V winning hole 833 at the ending.

Also, as shown in Figures 91(A) and 91(C), in the first small jackpot game, which is executed when the result of the second special jackpot lottery in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is a small jackpot, the operation timing of the V prize opening/closing section 835 of the feather device 83 is set to the first opening. In the first opening, as described above, the inlet 831 of the feather device 83 remains closed, so that the game ball 99 is not introduced into the feather device 83. Therefore, in the first small jackpot game, the game ball 99 does not enter the V prize opening 833, and a type 2 jackpot game does not occur. As a result, in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is a small jackpot and the first small jackpot game is executed, a type 2 jackpot game is not executed.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 91(B) and 91(C), in the second small jackpot game, which is executed when the result of the second special jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a small jackpot, the activation timing of the V prize opening/closing section 835 of the feather device 83 is set to a movable wing activation game. In the movable wing activation game, as described above, the movable wing 832 is activated to open the inlet 831, allowing the game ball 99 to be introduced into the feather device 83. Therefore, in the second small jackpot game, a type 2 jackpot game can be generated by the game ball 99 entering the V prize opening 833. As a result, in the third time-saving game state, a type 2 jackpot game can be executed based on the execution of the second small jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small jackpot. In other words, while small wins are included as a result of the jackpot lottery in all of the first through third time-saving game states, only the third time-saving game state can result in a type 2 jackpot. As a result, as will be explained in more detail below, a new gameplay feature is added in which the game transitions from the second time-saving game state, which is entered after the end of a type 1 jackpot game, to the third time-saving game state, which can result in a type 2 jackpot game, thereby increasing attention and interest in the game and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In the first small prize game of this embodiment, the operation timing of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather device 83 is set to the first opening, thereby preventing the game ball 99 from entering the V prize opening 833. However, some or all of the operation timing of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 may be set to the movable feather operation game. Specifically, in the first small prize game, the operation timing of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather device 83 may be set to straddle the first opening and the movable feather operation game, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V prize opening 833. Furthermore, in the first small prize game, all of the operation timing of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 may be set to the movable feather operation game, and the operation time of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 may be set to a short time (for example, 0.02 seconds to 0.1 seconds) to make it impossible or difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V prize opening 833. Here, the effect of making it impossible for the game ball 99 to enter the V prize opening 833 in the first small prize game is as described above, but on the other hand, if it is impossible for the game ball 99 to enter the V prize opening 833 in the first small prize game, there is a concern that the player's attention and interest in the small prize game will decrease. On the other hand, if it is made difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V winning hole 833 during the first small win game, there is a possibility that the game ball 99 will enter the V winning hole 833 during the first small win game, which prevents the player's attention and interest in the small win game from declining.

Next, we will explain the specific processing steps for the small win game control processing in this embodiment. Figures 92 to 95 are flowcharts showing an example of the small win game control processing steps.

<Step S3501>
92, in the small win game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not a special symbol variation stop flag indicating that the first or second special symbol has been stopped and displayed is set to ON (step S3501). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the timing for starting a small win game has arrived by the first or second special symbol being stopped and displayed. The special symbol variation stop flag is set to ON when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in step S1908 of the special symbol game control process of FIG.

If the special chart variation stop flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start a small win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3502. On the other hand, if the special chart variation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3501: No), i.e., if it is not time to start a small win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3510 in FIG. 93.

<Step S3502>
When the special symbol variation stop flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, when it is time to start a small win game, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the big win lottery for the special symbol game is a small win or not (step S3502). Whether the result of the big win lottery is a small win or not is determined based on the result of the big win lottery stored in the RAM 413 when a win/loss determination is made in step S3402, S3404, or S3405 in the special symbol variation start processing of FIG.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a small win (step S3502: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3503; if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a small win (step S3502: No), the MPU 41 terminates the small win game control process.

<Steps S3503 and S3504>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a small jackpot (step S3502: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V prize opening/closing unit operation standby flag to ON (step S3503). The V prize opening/closing unit operation standby flag indicates that the V prize opening/closing unit 835 of the feather device 83 is not yet activated and is waiting to activate. This V prize opening/closing unit operation standby flag is referenced in step S3510 of FIG. 93 during the small jackpot game control process to determine whether the V prize opening/closing unit 835 is still activated. The MPU 41 then sets a V prize opening/closing unit operation standby time counter indicating the time remaining until the V prize opening/closing unit 835 begins operating (step S3504), and proceeds to step S3505.

The V prize opening opening/closing section operation waiting time counter is decremented by one in step S3511 of FIG. 93 each time the small prize game control process is executed, and is referenced in step S3512 of FIG. 93 during the small prize game control process to determine whether it is time to start operating the V prize opening/closing section 835.

<Step S3505>
In step S3505, the MPU 41 determines whether the third time-shortened game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the third time-shortened game state, is set to ON (step S3505). Here, if the result of the big win lottery is a small win, the first small win game is executed in the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state (see FIG. 93(A)), and the second small win game is executed in the third time-shortened game state (see FIG. 93(B)). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the small win game starts as the first small win game or the second small win game for the small win.

In addition, in the game state transition process described below, the third time-reduced game state flag is set to ON in step S3644 of FIG. 99, step S3694 of FIG. 101, or step S3719 or S3723 of FIG. 103 when transitioning from another game state to the third time-reduced game state, and is set to OFF in step S3657, S3661, or S3668 of FIG. 100 when transitioning from the third time-reduced game state to another game state.

If the third time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S3505: Yes), i.e., if the second small win game is to be started because the game is in the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3506. On the other hand, if the third time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3505: No), i.e., if the first small win game is to be started because the game is in the first time-shortened game state or the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3508.

<Steps S3506 and S3507>
If the third time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S3505: Yes), that is, if the second small win game is to be started because the game is in the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 sets the second opening flag, which indicates that the second opening of the second small win game (see Figure 93 (B)) is being executed, to on (step S3506), and sets the second opening time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the second opening time (the time until the movable wing operation game of the second small win game (see Figure 93 (B)) starts) (step S3507), and terminates the small win game control processing.

The second opening flag is referenced in step S3526 of FIG. 94 to determine whether the second opening of the second small win game is being executed. The second opening time counter is decremented by one in step S3527 of FIG. 94 each time the small win game control process is executed, and is referenced in step S3528 of FIG. 94 to determine whether it is time to end the second opening (start the movable wing operation game of the second small win game).

<Steps S3508 and S3509>
If the third time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3505: No), that is, if the first small win game is started because the first time-shortened game state or the second time-shortened game state is in effect, the MPU 41 sets the first opening flag, which indicates that the first opening of the first small win game (see Figure 93 (A)) is being executed, to on (step S3508), and sets the first opening time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the first opening time (the time until the movable wing operation game of the first small win game (see Figure 93 (A)) starts) (step S3509), and terminates the small win game control processing.

The first opening flag is referenced in step S3522 of FIG. 94 to determine whether the first opening of the first small win game is being executed. The first opening time counter is decremented by one in step S3523 of FIG. 94 each time the small win game control process is executed, and is referenced in step S3524 of FIG. 94 to determine whether it is time to end the first opening (start the movable wing operation game of the first small win game).

<Step S3510>
If the special symbol variation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3501: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start a small prize game, the MPU 41 determines whether the V prize opening/closing unit 835 of the feather role device 83 has not yet been activated and the V prize opening/closing unit 835 is waiting to activate, and indicates that the V prize opening/closing unit operation standby flag is set to ON (step S3510), as shown in Figure 93. If the V prize opening/closing unit operation standby flag is set to ON (step S3510: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3511, and if the V prize opening/closing unit operation standby flag is set to OFF (step S3510: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3517.

<Steps S3511 and S3512>
If the V prize opening opening/closing section operation standby flag is set to ON (step S3510: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the V prize opening opening/closing section operation standby time counter, which indicates the time remaining until the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 starts operating (step S3511), and determines whether the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation standby time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3512). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to start the operation of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 and open the V prize opening 833.

If the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation standby time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3512: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start operation of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 and open the V prize opening 833, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3513. On the other hand, if the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation standby time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3512: No), i.e., if it is not time to start operation of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 (open the V prize opening 833), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3522 in FIG. 94.

<Steps S3513 to S3516>
If the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation waiting time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3512: Yes), that is, if it is time to start operating the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 and open the V prize opening 833, the MPU 41 activates the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 (step S3513) and sets the V prize opening opening/closing section operation flag, which indicates that the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 is operating, to on (step S3514).

The V prize opening/closing section operation flag is referenced in step S3517 of the small prize game control processing described below to determine whether the V prize opening/closing section 835 is operating.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the V prize opening/closing section operation time counter, which indicates the remaining operation time of the V prize opening/closing section 835 (step S3515), sets the V prize opening/closing section operation standby flag to off (step S3516), and transitions to step S3522 in FIG. 94.

The V prize opening opening/closing section operation time counter is decremented by one each time the small prize game control process is executed in step S3518 of the small prize game control process, which will be described later, and is referenced in step S3519 of the small prize game control process, which will be described later, to determine whether it is time to restore the V prize opening/closing section 835 (close the V prize opening 833).

<Step S3517>
If the V prize opening opening/closing section operation standby flag is set to OFF (step S3510: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V prize opening opening/closing section operation flag, which indicates that the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 is operated, is set to ON (step S3517). If the V prize opening opening/closing section operation flag is set to ON (step S3517: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2018, and if the V prize opening opening/closing section operation flag is set to OFF (step S3517: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3522 in FIG.

<Steps S3518 and S3519>
If the V prize opening opening/closing section operation flag is set to ON (step S3517: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the V prize opening opening/closing section operation time counter which indicates the remaining operation time of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 (step S3518), and determines whether the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3519). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to restore the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 (close the V prize opening 833).

If the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3519: Yes), i.e., if it is time to return the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather device 83 (close the V prize opening 833), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3520. On the other hand, if the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3519: No), i.e., if it is not time to return the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather device 83 (close the V prize opening 833), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3522 in FIG. 94.

<Steps S3520 and S3521>
If the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3519: Yes), that is, if it is time to restore the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 (close the V prize opening 833), the MPU 41 restores the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 (step S3520), sets the V prize opening opening/closing section operation flag indicating that the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 is operated to off (step S3521), and proceeds to step S3522 of Figure 94.

<Step S3522>
94, in step S3522, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a first opening flag indicating that the first opening of the first small win game (see FIG. 91(A)) is being executed is set to ON. Note that, when the first opening of the first small win game is started, the first opening flag is set to ON in step S3509 of FIG. 92 in the small win game control processing.

If the first opening flag is set to ON (step S3522: Yes), i.e., if the first opening of the first small win game is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3523. On the other hand, if the first opening flag is set to OFF (step S3522: No), i.e., if the first opening of the first small win game is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3526.

<Steps S3523 to S3525>
If the first opening flag is set to on (step S3522: Yes), that is, if the first opening of the first small win game is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the first opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the first opening time (the time until the start of the movable wing operation game of the first small win game (see FIG. 91(A))) (step S3523), and determines whether the first opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3524). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to end the first opening and start the movable wing operation game (see FIG. 91(A)) in the first small win game.

If the first opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3525: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the first opening and start the movable wing operation game in the first small win game, the MPU 41 sets the first opening flag, which indicates that the first opening is being executed, to OFF (step S3525), and proceeds to step S3530. On the other hand, if the first opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3524: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the first opening or start the movable wing operation game in the first small win game, the MPU 41 terminates the small win game control process.

<Step S3526>
If the first opening flag of the first small win game is set to OFF (step S3522: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the second opening flag indicating that the second opening of the second small win game (see FIG. 91(B)) is being executed is set to ON. Note that, when the second opening of the second small win game (see FIG. 91(B)) starts, the second opening flag is set to ON in step S3507 of FIG. 92 in the small win game control processing.

If the second opening flag is set to ON (step S3526: Yes), i.e., if the second opening of the second small win game is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3527. On the other hand, if the second opening flag is set to OFF (step S3526: No), i.e., if the second opening of the second small win game is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3533 in FIG. 95.

<Steps S3527 to S3529>
If the second opening flag is set to on (step S3526: Yes), that is, if the second opening of the second small win game is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the second opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the second opening time (the time until the start of the movable wing operation game of the second small win game (see FIG. 91(B))) (step S3527), and determines whether the second opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3528). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to end the second opening and start the movable wing operation game (see FIG. 91(B)) in the second small win game.

If the second opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3528: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the second opening and start the movable wing operation game in the second small win game, the MPU 41 sets the second opening flag, which indicates that the second opening is being executed, to OFF (step S3529), and proceeds to step S3530. On the other hand, if the second opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3529: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the second opening or start the movable wing operation game in the second small win game, the MPU 41 terminates the small win game control process.

<Step S3530>
When the first opening flag of the first small win game or the second opening flag of the second small win game is turned off (step S3525 or S3529), that is, when it is time to end the opening in the first small win game or the second small win game and start the movable wing operation game, the MPU 41 starts the movable wing operation game by activating the movable wing 832 of the feather device 83 (step S3530), and proceeds to step S3531.

In addition, in the movable wing operation game, by operating the movable wing 832 of the feather device 83, the inlet 831 of the feather device 83 is opened, allowing the game ball 99 to enter the inside of the feather device 83.

<Steps S3531 and S3532>
In step S3531, the MPU 41 sets the movable wing operation flag, which indicates that the movable wing 832 is being operated (a movable wing operation game is being executed), to ON (step S3531).Then, the MPU 41 sets the movable wing operation time counter, which indicates the remaining operation time of the movable wing 832 (the remaining time of the movable wing operation game) (step S3532), and ends the small win game control process.

The movable wing operation flag is referenced in step S3533 of FIG. 95 during the small win game control process to determine whether the movable wing 832 is activated (a movable wing operation game is being executed). The movable wing operation time counter is decremented by one in step S3534 of FIG. 95 during the small win game control process each time the small win game control process is executed, and is referenced in step S3535 of FIG. 95 during the small win game control process to determine whether it is time to return the movable wing 832 (end the movable wing operation game).

<Step S3533>
If the second opening flag is set to OFF (step S3522: No), i.e., if neither the first opening nor the second opening is being executed, as shown in FIG. 95, the MPU 41 determines whether the movable wing operation flag, which indicates that the movable wing 832 is being activated (a movable wing operation game is being executed), is set to ON (step S3533). If the movable wing operation flag is set to ON (step S3533: Yes), i.e., if a movable wing operation game is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3534. On the other hand, if the movable wing operation flag is set to OFF (step S3533: No), i.e., if a movable wing operation game is not being executed, the MPU 41 terminates the small win game control process.

<Steps S3534 and S3535>
If the movable wing operation flag is set to ON (step S3533: Yes), i.e., if a movable wing operation game is being played, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the movable wing operation time counter, which indicates the remaining operation time of the movable wing 832 (remaining time for the movable wing operation game) (step S3534).The MPU 41 then determines whether the value of the movable wing operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3535).In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the movable wing 832 and close the introduction port 831 to end the movable wing operation game (small win game).

If the value of the movable wing operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3533: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the movable wing 832 (the movable wing operation game (small win game)) to its original state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3536. On the other hand, if the value of the movable wing operation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3533: No), that is, if it is not time to return the movable wing 832 (the movable wing operation game (small win game)) to its original state, the MPU 41 terminates the small win game control process.

<Steps S3536 and S3537>
If the value of the movable wing operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3533: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the movable wing 832 (to end the movable wing operation game (small win game)), the MPU 41 ends the movable wing operation game (small win game) by returning the movable wing 832 (step S3536).The MPU 41 then sets the movable wing operation flag, which indicates that the movable wing 832 is being operated (that the movable wing operation game is being executed), to OFF (step S3536), and ends the small win game control process.

[Game state transition processing]
In the game state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main process of Fig. 88 of this embodiment, a process for transitioning various game states is executed. Here, Fig. 96 is a diagram showing an example of transition of game states (game flow) in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 96, in this embodiment, the gaming states include a normal gaming state, a first time-saving gaming state, a second time-saving gaming state, a third time-saving gaming state, a first-type jackpot gaming state, a second-type jackpot gaming state, and a small jackpot gaming state.

The normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the electric device 315b is operated for a short time at a low frequency (see Figures 85(A) and 85(C)), the first special jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the first winning slot 314 is executed based on the first special jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 86(A)), and the second special jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 is executed based on the short-open second special jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 87(A)).

The normal game state is entered when the results of the jackpot lottery are announced a specified number of times (the specified number of special symbol games are executed) without transitioning from the first to third time-saving game states to the jackpot game state. Furthermore, if a transition to the small jackpot game state is made based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state being a small jackpot, the game state will return to the normal game state if the game ball 99 does not enter the V entry port 833 of the feather device 83 in the small jackpot game state (V non-entry).

On the other hand, from the normal gaming state, if the result of the jackpot lottery indicates a jackpot, the game will transition to a type 1 jackpot gaming state; if the result of the jackpot lottery indicates a small jackpot, the game will transition to a small jackpot gaming state; and if the result of the jackpot lottery indicates a miss for the time-saving symbol stop (time-saving symbol stop), the game will transition to a first time-saving gaming state. Note that the normal gaming state does not transition to the second time-saving gaming state, the third time-saving gaming state, or the type 2 jackpot gaming state.

The first time-saving gaming state is a gaming state in which the second winning port 315 is opened frequently by frequently operating the electric device 315b for short periods of time (see Figures 85(B) and 85(C)), the first special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the first winning port 314 is executed based on the first special chart jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 86(A)), and the second special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the second winning port 315 is executed based on the short-open second special chart jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 87(A)).

The first time-saving game state is entered when, in the normal game state, the result of the jackpot lottery indicates that the time-saving symbol stop has not been achieved (time-saving symbol stop). Furthermore, the first time-saving game state is entered when the small win game state is entered based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the first time-saving game state being a small win, and the game state is returned to from the small win game state when the game ball 99 does not enter the V winning slot 833 of the feather device 83 in the small win game state (V non-winning).

On the other hand, from the first time-limited game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery is notified as a jackpot, the game state will transition to Type 1 jackpot game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery is notified as a small jackpot, the game state will transition to Small jackpot game state, and if the result of the jackpot lottery for the specified number of times is notified (special symbol game play is executed the specified number of times) without transitioning to the jackpot game state, the game state will transition to the normal game state. Note that the first time-limited game state does not transition to the second time-limited game state, the third time-limited game state, or the type 2 jackpot game state.

The first time-saving game state may be omitted, and at least two types of time-saving game states may be set: the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state. If the first time-saving game state is omitted, the time-saving symbol stop miss will be omitted from the miss types in the first special symbol miss allocation table (see Figure 86 (D)) used for the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning slot 314.

The second time-saving game state, like the second time-saving game state, is a game state in which the second winning port 315 is opened frequently by frequently operating the electric device 315b for short periods of time (see Figures 85(B) and 85(C)), the first special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning port 314 is executed based on the first special chart jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 86(A)), and the second special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 is executed based on the short-open second special chart jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 87(A)).

The profitable second short-play state is entered when a transition to Type 1 jackpot game is made based on the result of a jackpot lottery in the normal game state or the first short-play state, and the conditions for time-limited game are met after the end of Type 1 jackpot game. Furthermore, when a transition to a small jackpot game state is made based on the result of a jackpot lottery in the second short-play state, and the game is returned to from the small jackpot game state when the game ball 99 does not enter the V entry port 833 of the feather device 83 in the small jackpot game state (V non-entry), the game returns to the small jackpot game state.

On the other hand, from the second time-saving play state, as will be described in detail below, if the result of the jackpot lottery is notified that the time-saving symbol stop does not meet the specified conditions, the game will transition to the third time-saving play state. Furthermore, from the second time-saving play state, if the result of the jackpot lottery is notified that it is a jackpot, the game will transition to a type 1 jackpot play state, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is notified that it is a small jackpot, the game will transition to a small jackpot play state. Furthermore, from the second time-saving play state, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the specified number of times is notified (special symbol play is executed the specified number of times), the game will transition to the normal play state without transitioning to either the jackpot play state or the third time-saving play state. Furthermore, from the second time-saving play state, the game will not transition to the first time-saving play state or the type 2 jackpot play state.

The third time-shortened game state differs from the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state in that the second winning port 315 is opened frequently due to the long-term operation of the electric device 315b (see Figures 85 (B) and 85 (C)), and the first special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning port 314 is executed based on the first special chart jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 86 (A)), and the second special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 is executed based on the short-open second special chart jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 87 (B)). In the third time-saving game state, the electric device 315b is operated for a longer period of time than in the first and second time-saving game states, making it easier for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning slot 315. Therefore, this time-saving game state is more advantageous to the player than the first and second time-saving game states, in which the electric device 315b is operated for a shorter period of time.

The third short-time play state is entered when the result of the second special jackpot lottery in the second short-time play state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop that satisfies a predetermined condition. Furthermore, if the small-win play state is entered based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the third short-time play state being a small win, the third short-time play state is returned to when the game ball 99 does not enter the V entry port 833 of the feather device 83 in the small-win play state (V non-entry). The predetermined condition here is that the number of short-time play cycles (see Figure 87 (E)) set for a miss for the time-saving symbol stop that is the result of the second special jackpot lottery in the second short-time play state exceeds the remaining number of short-time play cycles in the second short-time play state (see steps S3409 to S3412 in the special symbol change start processing in Figure 90).

On the other hand, from the third time-saving game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery is notified as a jackpot, the game state will transition to a type 1 jackpot game state, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is notified as a small jackpot, the game state will transition to a small jackpot game state. Furthermore, from the third time-saving game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the specified number of times is notified (special symbol game play is executed a specified number of times) without transitioning to either the type 1 jackpot game state or the type 2 jackpot game state via the small jackpot game state, the game state will transition to the normal game state. Furthermore, from the third time-saving game state, there is no transition to the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the type 2 jackpot game state.

Next, we will explain the specific processing steps for the game state transition processing in this embodiment. Figures 97 to 103 are flowcharts showing an example of the game state transition processing steps.

<Step S3601>
97, in the game state transition process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not a normal game state flag indicating that the game is in the normal game state is set to ON (step S3601). In the game state transition process, the normal game state flag is set to ON in step S3629 of Fig. 98, step S3650 of Fig. 99, step S3667 of Fig. 100, or step S3701 of Fig. 102 when a game state is transitioned from another game state to the normal game state, while it is set to OFF in step S3608, S3612, or S3616 of Fig. 97 when a game state is transitioned from the normal game state to another game state.

If the normal game state flag is set to on (step S3601: Yes), i.e., if the game is in normal game mode, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3602. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3601: No), i.e., if the game is in a game mode other than normal game mode, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3617 in FIG. 98.

<Step S3602>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), that is, in the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the variably displayed special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has stopped (the special symbol game has ended), is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the timing is right to transition from the normal game state to another game state (type 1 jackpot game state, small jackpot game state, or first time-saving game state) because the special symbol has stopped being displayed (the special symbol game has ended).

The special symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON in step S1908 of the special symbol game control processing of the first embodiment described above in Figure 26 when the variable-displayed special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is displayed as stopped.

If the special chart variation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), i.e., if it is time to transition from the normal game state to another game state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3603. On the other hand, if the special chart variation stop display flag is set to OFF (step S3602: No), i.e., if it is not time to transition from the normal game state to another game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3603>
If the special pattern variation stop display flag is set to on (step S3602: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to transition from the normal game state to another game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game that ended with the stop display of the special pattern is a miss for the time-saving pattern stop (step S3603).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3604; if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a miss for the time-saving symbol stop (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3609.

<Steps S3604 to S3608>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state (step S3604). Then, the MPU 41 sets the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the special symbol game executed in the first time-saving game state (see FIG. 86(E)) in the time-saving number counter (step S3605) and sets the first time-saving game state flag indicating the first time-saving game state to ON (step S3606). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the first time-saving game state transition command (step S3607), sets the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state to OFF (step S3608), and terminates the game state transition process.

The first time-shortened game state transition command is a command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that the game state is transitioning from the normal game state to the first time-shortened game state, and is sent to the voice and lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the external output processing of the main processing in FIG. 88. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to execute a presentation corresponding to the first time-shortened game state in special game play based on the first time-shortened game state transition command.

<Step S3609>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is not a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S3603: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a type 1 jackpot (step S3609). If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is a type 1 jackpot (step S3609: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3610, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a type 1 jackpot (step S3609: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3613.

<Steps S3610 to S3612>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is a Type 1 jackpot (step S3609: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the normal game state to the Type 1 jackpot game state (step S3610).Then, the MPU 41 sets a normal Type 1 jackpot game state flag to ON (step S3611), indicating that the game state has been transitioned from the normal game state to the Type 1 jackpot game state, and also sets a normal game state flag to OFF (step S3612), indicating that the game state is in the normal game state, and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3613>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is not a Type 1 jackpot (step S3609: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a small jackpot (step S3613). If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is a small jackpot (step S3613: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3614. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a small jackpot (step S3613: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss other than a miss with the time-saving symbol stopped (a miss or a complete miss), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3614 to S3616>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is a small jackpot (step S3613: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the normal game state to the small jackpot game state (step S3614).Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal small jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game state has been transitioned from the normal game state, to ON (step S3615), and sets the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game state is normal, to OFF (step S3616), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3617>
If the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3601: No), i.e., if the game state is other than the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 98, the MPU 41 determines whether the first time-shortened game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the first time-shortened game state, is set to on, i.e., whether the game state is the first time-shortened game state (step S3617).

The first time-shortened gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3606 of FIG. 97 when the gaming state transition process transitions from the normal gaming state to the first time-shortened gaming state.

If the first time-shortened game state flag is set to ON (step S3617: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the first time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3618. On the other hand, if the first time-shortened game state flag is set to OFF (step S3617: No), i.e., if the game is not in the first time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3631 in FIG. 99.

<Step S3618>
If the first time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3617: Yes), i.e., if the first time-saving game state is in effect, the MPU 41 determines whether a special symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the variably displayed special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has stopped (the special symbol game has ended), is set to ON. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether the timing is right to transition from the first time-saving game state to another game state (a type 1 jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, or a normal game state) because the special symbol has stopped being displayed (the special symbol game has ended).

The special symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON in step S1908 of the special symbol game control processing of the first embodiment described above in Figure 26 when the variable-displayed special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is displayed as stopped.

If the special chart variation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3618: Yes), and it is time to transition from the first time-limited game state to another game state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3619. On the other hand, if the special chart variation stop display flag is set to OFF, i.e., it is not time to transition from the first time-limited game state to another game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3619>
If the special pattern variation stop display flag is set to on (step S3618: Yes), and it is the timing to transition from the first time-saving game state to another game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game that ended with the stop display of the special pattern is a type 1 jackpot (step S3619).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stopped display of the special symbol is a Type 1 jackpot (step S3619: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3620; if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a Type 1 jackpot (step S3619: No), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3623.

<Steps S3620 to S3622>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is a Type 1 jackpot (step S3619: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the first time-limited game state to the Type 1 jackpot game state (step S3620).The MPU 41 then sets the first time-limited Type 1 jackpot game state flag to ON (step S3621), indicating that the game state has been transitioned from the first time-limited game state to the Type 1 jackpot game state, and sets the first time-limited game state flag to OFF (step S3622), indicating that the game state transition process is complete.

<Step S3623>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stopped display of the special symbol is not a type 1 jackpot (step S3619: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a small jackpot (step S3623). If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stopped display of the special symbol is a small jackpot (step S3623: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3624, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a small jackpot (step S3623: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3627.

<Steps S3624 to S3626>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is a small jackpot (step S3623: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the first time-shortened game state to a small jackpot game state (step S3624).Then, the MPU 41 sets the first time-shortened small jackpot game state flag to ON (step S3625), indicating that the game state has been transitioned to the small jackpot game state from the first time-shortened game state, and sets the first time-shortened game state flag to OFF (step S3616), indicating that the game state is the first time-shortened game state, and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3627>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stopped display of the special symbol is not a small jackpot (step S3623: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the time-saving number counter, which indicates the number of remaining time-saving games in the first time-saving game state, is 0 (step S3627). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether to transition from the first time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the time-saving number counter for the first time-saving game state.

The time-saving count counter for the first time-saving game state is set in step S3605 of FIG. 97 when the game state transition process transitions from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state, and is decremented each time a special game (first special game or second special game) is started in step S3407 of the special game change start process of FIG. 90.

If the value of the time-saving count counter for the first time-saving game state is 0 (step S3627: Yes), i.e., if the special symbol game has been played the maximum number of times (prescribed number of times) of time-saving games in the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3628. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving count counter is not 0 (step S3627: No), i.e., if the special symbol game has not been played the maximum number of times (prescribed number of times) of time-saving games in the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3628 to S3630>
If the value of the time-saving count counter for the first time-saving game state is 0 (step S3627: Yes), that is, if the special symbol game has been executed the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving game plays in the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the first time-saving game state to the normal game state (step S3628).Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state to ON (step S3629), and sets the first time-saving game state flag indicating the first time-saving game state to OFF (step S3630), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3631>
If the first time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3617: No), i.e., if the game is not in the first time-shortened game state, as shown in FIG. 99, the MPU 41 determines whether the second time-shortened game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the second time-shortened game state, is set to on (step S3631).

The second time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3673 of Figure 101 (described below) when the gaming state transition process transitions from a type 1 jackpot gaming state to a second time-saving gaming state.

If the second time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S3631: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3632. On the other hand, if the second time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3631: No), i.e., if the game is not in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3652 in FIG. 100.

<Step S3632>
If the second time-shortened game state flag is set to ON (step S3631: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 determines whether a special symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the variably displayed special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has stopped (the special symbol game has ended), is set to ON. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether the timing is right to transition from the second time-shortened game state to another game state (a type 1 jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a third time-shortened game state, or a normal game state) because the special symbol has stopped being displayed (the special symbol game has ended).

The special symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON in step S1908 of the special symbol game control processing of the first embodiment described above in Figure 26 when the variable-displayed special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is displayed as stopped.

If the special chart variation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), i.e., if it is time to transition from the second game state to another game state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3633. On the other hand, if the special chart variation stop display flag is set to OFF (step S3602: No), i.e., if it is not time to transition from the second game state to another game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3633>
If the special pattern change stop display flag is set to on (step S3602: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to transition from the second game state to another game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game that ended with the stop display of the special pattern is a type 1 jackpot (step S3633).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stopped display of the special symbol is a Type 1 jackpot (step S3633: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3634. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a Type 1 jackpot (step S3633: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3637.

<Steps S3634 to S3636>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is a Type 1 jackpot (step S3633: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the second time-shortened game state to the Type 1 jackpot game state (step S3634).Then, the MPU 41 sets the second time-shortened Type 1 jackpot game state flag to ON (step S3635), indicating that the game state has been transitioned from the second time-shortened game state to the Type 1 jackpot game state, and sets the second time-shortened game state flag to OFF (step S3636), indicating that the game state transition process is complete.

<Step S3637>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stopped display of the special symbol is not a type 1 jackpot (step S3633: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a small jackpot (step S3637).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stopped display of the special symbol is a small jackpot (step S3637: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3638; if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a small jackpot (step S3637: No), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3641.

<Steps S3638 to S3640>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is a small jackpot (step S3637: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the second time-shortened game state to the small jackpot game state (step S3638).Then, the MPU 41 sets the second time-shortened small jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game state has been transitioned from the second time-shortened game state, to ON (step S3639), and sets the second time-shortened game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the second time-shortened game state, to OFF (step S3640), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3641>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is not a small jackpot (step S3637: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a third time-shortened game state transition flag that transitions the game state from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state is set to ON (step S3641). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to transition the game state from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state.

When the result of the jackpot lottery for a special game that ended with the special symbol stopping is a missed stop for the time-saving symbol, if the number of times the time-saving symbol stops that is set for that missed stop (see FIG. 87(E)) minus the value of the time-saving number counter indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving symbol stops in that second time-saving game state is greater than 0 (if the number of times the time-saving symbol stops that is set for that missed stop is greater than the remaining number of times the time-saving symbol stops in that second time-saving game state), the third time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3412 of the variation start processing in FIG. 90.

If the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to on (step S3641: Yes), i.e., if the game state is to be transitioned from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3642. On the other hand, if the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to off (step S3641: No), i.e., if the game state is not to be transitioned from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3648.

<Steps S3642 and S3643>
If the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set on (step S3641: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state (step S3642), sets the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the special game to be executed in the third time-shortened game state to the time-shortened number counter (step S3643), and transitions processing to step S3644.

Here, the value of the time-saving count counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving games selected if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 87(E), the MPU 41 sets the value of the time-saving count counter to "10" if 10 times is selected as the number of time-saving games, to "30" if 30 times is selected as the number of time-saving games, to "50" if 50 times is selected as the number of time-saving games, and to "100" if 100 times is selected as the number of time-saving games. In other words, the number of time-saving games when transitioning from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is updated to the number of time-saving games selected if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop.

As mentioned above, the third time-saving game state is a more advantageous time-saving game state for the player than the first and second time-saving game states, in which the operating time of the electric device 315b is shorter, because the electric device 315b is operated for a longer period of time than in the first and second time-saving game states, making it easier for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning slot 315. Furthermore, in the first and second time-saving game states, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small prize, the game ball 99 cannot enter the V winning slot 833 of the feather device device 83 in the small prize game, whereas in the third time-saving game state, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small prize, the game ball 99 can enter the V winning slot 833 of the feather device device 83 in the small prize game. Therefore, the third time-saving game state is different from the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state in that it allows for the execution of a type 2 jackpot game based on the game ball 99 entering the V winning slot 833 of the feather device 83 during a small jackpot game, making it a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state.

In this way, the number of time-saving plays when transitioning from the second time-saving play state to the third time-saving play state is updated to the number of time-saving plays selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving play state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, thereby making effective use of the value of the number of time-saving plays determined due to the miss for the time-saving symbol stop.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-shortened game state is a miss for the time-shortened symbol stop, and the number of time-shortened games set for that miss is greater than the number of time-shortened games remaining in the second time-shortened game state, a transition to the third time-shortened game state is made. This creates a gameplay feature in which the fewer the number of time-shortened games remaining in the second time-shortened game state, the more likely it is to transition to the third time-shortened game state. This increases attention and interest in the game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-shortened game state is a miss on the time-shortened symbol stop and the number of time-shortened games set for that miss is equal to or less than the remaining number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state, the number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state remains unchanged. However, for example, the number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state may be determined by adding the number of time-shortened games set for that miss on the time-shortened symbol stop to the remaining number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state. This increases the number of jackpot lotteries used to determine whether to transition from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state, thereby maintaining for a longer period the possibility of transitioning to the third time-shortened game state, which is more advantageous to the player. This increases the number of jackpot lotteries used to determine whether to transition from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state, thereby increasing the player's attention to and interest in the game and improving the enjoyment of the game.

<Steps S3644 and S3645>
In step S3644, the MPU 41 sets the third time-shortened game state flag to on, indicating that the game is in the third time-shortened game state, and further sets a third time-shortened game state A transition command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game is being transitioned from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state (step S3645), and then transitions processing to step S3646.

The command to transition to the third time-shortened gaming state A is sent to the voice and lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the main processing in FIG. 88. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to execute a presentation corresponding to the third time-shortened gaming state.

<Steps S3646 and S3647>
In step S3646, the MPU 41 sets the third time-shortened game state transition flag to off, which transitions to the third time-shortened game state, and further sets the second time-shortened game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the second time-shortened game state, to off (step S3647), and terminates the game state transition processing.

<Step S3648>
If the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to off (step S3641: No), that is, if the game state is not to be transitioned from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the time-shortened game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-shortened game plays in the second time-shortened game state, is 0 (step S3627).

The time-saving count counter for the second time-saving game state is set in step S3672, S3679 or S3686 of FIG. 101 when a transition is made from a Type 1 jackpot game state to the second time-saving game state during the game state transition process, and is decremented each time a special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) is started in step S3407 of the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 90.

If the value of the time-saving count counter for the second time-saving game state is 0 (step S3648: Yes), i.e., if the special symbol game has been played the maximum number of times (prescribed number of times) of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3649. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving count counter is not 0 (step S3649: No), i.e., if the special symbol game has not been played the maximum number of times (prescribed number of times) of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3649 to S3651>
If the value of the time-saving count counter for the second time-saving game state is 0 (step S3648: Yes), that is, if the special symbol game has been executed the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving game plays in the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the second time-saving game state to the normal game state (step S3648).Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state to ON (step S3650), and sets the second time-saving game state flag indicating the second time-saving game state to OFF (step S3651), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3652>
If the second time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3631: No), i.e., if the game is not in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the third time-shortened game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the third time-shortened game state, is set to on, as shown in FIG. 100 (step S3652).

The third time-reduced gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3644 in FIG. 99, step S3694 in FIG. 101, or step S3719 or S3723 in FIG. 103 when a transition from another gaming state to the third time-reduced gaming state occurs during the gaming state transition process.

If the third time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S3652: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3653. On the other hand, if the third time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3652: No), i.e., if the game is not in the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3669 in FIG. 89.

<Step S3653>
If the third time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3652: Yes), i.e., in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the variably displayed special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has stopped (the special symbol game has ended), is set to ON. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether the timing is right to transition from the third time-saving game state to another game state (type 1 jackpot game state, small jackpot game state, normal game state) because the special symbol has stopped being displayed (the special symbol game has ended).

The special symbol variation stop display flag is set to ON in step S1908 of the special symbol game control processing of the first embodiment described above in Figure 26 when the variable-displayed special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is displayed as stopped.

If the special chart variation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3653: Yes), i.e., if it is time to transition from the third game state to another game state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3654. On the other hand, if the special chart variation stop display flag is set to OFF (step S3653: No), i.e., if it is not time to transition from the third game state to another game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3654>
If the special pattern change stop display flag is set to on (step S3653: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to transition from the third game state to another game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game that ended with the stop display of the special pattern is a type 1 jackpot (step S3654).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stopped display of the special symbol is a Type 1 jackpot (step S3654: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3655. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a Type 1 jackpot (step S3654: No), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3658.

<Steps S3655 to S3657>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is a Type 1 jackpot (step S3655: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the third time-saving game state to the Type 1 jackpot game state (step S3655).Then, the MPU 41 sets the third time-saving Type 1 jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game state has been transitioned from the third time-saving game state, to ON (step S3656), and sets the third time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the third time-saving game state, to OFF (step S3657), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3658>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stopped display of the special symbol is not a Type 1 jackpot (step S3654: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a small jackpot (step S3658). If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stopped display of the special symbol is a small jackpot (step S3658: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3659. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a small jackpot (step S3658: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3662.

<Steps S3659 to S3661>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is a small jackpot (step S3658: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the third time-shortened game state to the small jackpot game state (step S3659).Then, the MPU 41 sets the third time-shortened small jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game state has been transitioned from the third time-shortened game state, to ON (step S3660), and sets the third time-shortened game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the third time-shortened game state, to OFF (step S3661), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3662>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is not a small jackpot (step S3658: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop (step S3662).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop (step S3662: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3663. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a miss for the time-saving symbol stop (step S3662: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3665.

<Step S3663>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop (step S3662: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process of resetting the time-saving number counter for the third time-saving game state (step S3663) and proceeds to step S3664. In this resetting process, if the number of time-saving games (prescribed number) (see FIG. 87(E)) selected for the miss for the time-saving symbol stop is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, for example, the MPU 41 resets the value of the time-saving number counter for the third time-saving game state to the prescribed number of time-saving games.

In this way, if the number of time-saving games (prescribed number) selected in response to a missed time-saving symbol stop (see Figure 87 (E)) is greater than the number of remaining time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, resetting the value of the time-saving number counter to the number of time-saving games (prescribed number) increases the number of jackpot draws (number of special symbol games) executed in the third time-saving game state, making it possible to enjoy a greater benefit from the third time-saving game state, i.e., the benefit of being able to execute a type 2 jackpot game based on the game ball 99 entering the V winning slot 833 of the feather device 83 in a small jackpot game.

In addition, the processing of the time-saving number counter when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop may be reset regardless of the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop. For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, the number of time-saving games (prescribed number) selected for the miss for the time-saving symbol stop (see FIG. 87(E)) may be changed to the number of time-saving games (prescribed number) selected for the miss for the time-saving symbol stop, regardless of whether it is more or less than the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state. Of course, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-shortened game state is a miss for the time-shortened symbol stop, the number of time-shortened games (prescribed number) (see Figure 87 (E)) selected for the miss for the time-shortened symbol stop may be maintained without resetting the remaining number of time-shortened games in the third time-shortened game state, regardless of whether it is more or less than the remaining number of time-shortened games in the third time-shortened game state.

<Step S3664>
In step S3664, the MPU 41 sets a time-saving count counter reset command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the time-saving count counter reset process has been executed (step S3664), and then terminates the game state transition process. The time-saving count counter reset command includes information not only that the time-saving count counter reset process has been executed, but also, if the value of the time-saving count counter has been changed, information regarding the number of time-saving game plays after the change. The time-saving count counter reset command is then sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. 76 , and upon receiving the time-saving count counter reset command, the voice lamp control device 5 resets the value of the time-saving count counter.

<Step S3665>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game that ended with the special pattern stopping is not a time-saving pattern stopping error (step S3662: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving number counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, is 0 (step S3665).

The time-saving count counter for the third time-saving game state is set in step S3643 of FIG. 99, step S3693 of FIG. 101, or step S3724 of FIG. 103 when a transition is made from the second time-saving game state, the first-type jackpot game state, or the second-type jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state during the game state transition process, and is decremented each time a special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) is started in step S3407 of the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 90.

If the value of the time-saving count counter for the third time-saving game state is 0 (step S3665: Yes), i.e., if the maximum number of times of time-saving game play (prescribed number of times) of special symbol games has been played in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3666. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving count counter is not 0 (step S3649: No), i.e., if the maximum number of times of time-saving game play (prescribed number of times) of special symbol games has not been played in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3666 to S3668>
If the value of the time-saving count counter for the third time-saving game state is 0 (step S3665: Yes), that is, if the special game has been played the maximum number of times (prescribed number) of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the third time-saving game state to the normal game state (step S3666).Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state to ON (step S3667), and sets the third time-saving game state flag indicating the third time-saving game state to OFF (step S3668), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3669>
If the third time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3652: No), i.e., if the game is not in the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to on (step S3669), as shown in FIG. 101.

The normal type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state has been transitioned from the normal gaming state to the type 1 jackpot gaming state, and is set to ON in step S3611 of FIG. 97 during the gaming state transition process when the gaming state is transitioned from the normal gaming state to the type 1 jackpot gaming state.

If the normal type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3669: Yes), i.e., if the game is in a type 1 jackpot gaming state transitioned from the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3670. On the other hand, if the normal type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3669: No), i.e., if the game is not in a type 1 jackpot gaming state transitioned from the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3676.

<Step S3670>
If the normal type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3669: Yes), that is, if the type 1 jackpot gaming state is entered after the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 determines whether the type 1 jackpot gaming has ended (step S3670). Whether the type 1 jackpot gaming has ended is determined based on the jackpot gaming end flag, which is set to ON when the jackpot gaming is ended in the jackpot gaming control processing of step S1407 in the main processing of Fig. 88 (see step S2251 of the jackpot gaming control processing of Fig. 29 in the first embodiment described above).

If the Type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3670: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3671; if the Type 1 jackpot game has not ended (step S3670: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition processing.

<Steps S3671 and S3672>
When the first type jackpot game has ended (step S3670: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the first type jackpot game state to the second time-shortened game state (step S3671), sets the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the special chart game executed in the second time-shortened game state to the time-shortened number counter (step S3672), and transitions processing to step S3673.

Here, the value of the time-saving count counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving play modes selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game mode is a jackpot. Specifically, when a transition is made from a Type 1 jackpot game mode, which is made based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game mode, to a Type 2 time-saving game mode, the MPU 41 sets the value of the time-saving count counter to "100" (see Figures 86 (B) and 87 (G)).

<Steps S3673 to S3675>
In step S3673, the MPU 41 sets a second time-shortened game state flag to ON, indicating that the game state is in the second time-shortened game state, and further sets a second time-shortened game state transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state will be transitioned to the second time-shortened game state (step S3674). This second time-shortened game state transition command includes information indicating that the game state will be transitioned to the second time-shortened game state, as well as information regarding the number of time-shortened game plays (prescribed number of times) in the second time-shortened game state, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the main processing of FIG. 88. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the number of time-shortened game plays (prescribed number of times) based on the second time-shortened game state transition command and can execute effects corresponding to the second time-shortened game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal type 1 jackpot gaming state flag to OFF, indicating that the game has transitioned from the normal gaming state to the type 1 jackpot gaming state (step S3675), and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Step S3676>
If the normal type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to off (step S3669: No), that is, if the game is not in a type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from a normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the first time-reduced type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to on (step S3676).

The first time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state has been transitioned to from the first time-saving gaming state, and is set to ON in step S3621 of FIG. 98 during the gaming state transition process when the gaming state is transitioned from the first time-saving gaming state to the type 1 jackpot gaming state.

If the first time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3676: Yes), i.e., if the gaming state is a type 1 jackpot gaming state transitioned from the first time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3677. On the other hand, if the first time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3676: No), i.e., if the gaming state is not a type 1 jackpot gaming state transitioned from the first time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3683.

<Step S3677>
If the first time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3676: Yes), that is, if the gaming state is a type 1 jackpot gaming state transitioned from the first time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 determines whether the type 1 jackpot gaming has ended (step S3677). Whether the type 1 jackpot gaming has ended is determined based on the jackpot gaming end flag, which is set to ON when the jackpot gaming end process is executed in the jackpot gaming control process in the main processing of FIG. 88 (see step S2251 of the jackpot control process in FIG. 29 of the first embodiment described above).

If the Type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3677: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the processing to step S3678; if the Type 1 jackpot game has not ended (step S3677: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition processing.

<Steps S3678 and S3679>
When the first type jackpot game has ended (step S3677: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the first type jackpot game state to the second time-shortened game state (step S3678), sets the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the special chart game executed in the second time-shortened game state to the time-shortened number counter (step S3679), and transitions processing to step S3680.

Here, the value of the time-saving count counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving play modes selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the first time-saving play state is a jackpot. Specifically, when a transition is made from a Type 1 jackpot play state, which is made based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the first time-saving play state, to a second time-saving play state, the MPU 41 sets the value of the time-saving count counter to "100" (see Figures 86 (B) and 87 (G)).

<Steps S3680 to S3682>
In step S3680, the MPU 41 sets a second time-shortened game state flag to ON, indicating that the game state is in the second time-shortened game state, and further sets a second time-shortened game state transition command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state will be transitioned to the second time-shortened game state (step S3681). This second time-shortened game state transition command includes information indicating that the game state will be transitioned to the second time-shortened game state, as well as information regarding the number of time-shortened game plays (prescribed number of times) in the second time-shortened game state, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the main processing of FIG. 88. As a result, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the second time-shortened game state transition command, it can grasp the number of time-shortened game plays (prescribed number of times) and can execute an effect corresponding to the second time-shortened game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the first time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag to OFF, indicating that the game has transitioned from the first time-saving gaming state to the type 1 jackpot gaming state (step S3682), and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Step S3683>
If the first time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to off (step S3676: No), that is, if the game is not in a type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the second time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to on (step S3683).

The second time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a type 1 jackpot gaming state transitioned from the second time-saving gaming state, and is set to ON in step S3636 of FIG. 99 when the gaming state transitions from the second time-saving gaming state to the type 1 jackpot gaming state.

If the second time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3683: Yes), i.e., if the game is in a type 1 jackpot gaming state transitioned from the second time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3684. On the other hand, if the second time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3683: No), i.e., if the game is not in a type 1 jackpot gaming state transitioned from the second time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3690.

<Step S3684>
If the second time-saving type 1 jackpot game status flag is set to ON (step S3684: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3684). Whether the type 1 jackpot game has ended is determined based on the jackpot game end flag, which is set to ON when the jackpot game end process is executed in the jackpot game control process in the main process of Fig. 88 (see step S2251 of the jackpot control process in Fig. 29 of the first embodiment).

If the Type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3684: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3685; if the Type 1 jackpot game has not ended (step S3684: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3685 and S3686>
When the first type jackpot game has ended (step S3684: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the first type jackpot game state to the second time-shortened game state (step S3685), sets the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the special chart game executed in the second time-shortened game state to the time-shortened number counter (step S3686), and transitions processing to step S3687.

Here, the value of the time-saving count counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving play modes selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving play state is a jackpot. Specifically, when transitioning from a Type 1 jackpot play state, which is transitioned to based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving play state, to the second time-saving play state, the MPU 41 sets the value of the time-saving count counter to "100" (see Figures 86 (B) and 87 (G)).

<Steps S3687 to S3689>
In step S3687, the MPU 41 sets a second time-shortened game state flag to ON, indicating that the game state is in the second time-shortened game state, and further sets a second time-shortened game state transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state will be transitioned to the second time-shortened game state (step S3688). This second time-shortened game state transition command includes information indicating that the game state will be transitioned to the second time-shortened game state, as well as information regarding the number of time-shortened game plays (prescribed number of times) in the second time-shortened game state, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the main processing of FIG. 88. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the number of time-shortened game plays (prescribed number of times) based on the second time-shortened game state transition command and can execute effects corresponding to the second time-shortened game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the second time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag to OFF, indicating that the game has transitioned from the second time-saving gaming state to the type 1 jackpot gaming state (step S3689), and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Step S3690>
If the second time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to off (step S3683: No), that is, if the game is not in a type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the third time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to on (step S3690).

The third time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a type 1 jackpot gaming state transitioned from the third time-saving gaming state, and is set to ON in step S3656 of FIG. 88 when the gaming state transitions from the third time-saving gaming state to a type 1 jackpot gaming state.

If the third time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to on (step S3690: Yes), i.e., if the game is in a type 1 jackpot gaming state transitioned from the third time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3691. On the other hand, if the second time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to off (step S3690: No), and the game is not in a type 1 jackpot gaming state transitioned from the third time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3697 in FIG. 102.

<Step S3691>
If the third time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3691: Yes), that is, if the type 1 jackpot gaming state is entered after the third time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 determines whether the type 1 jackpot gaming has ended (step S3691). Whether the type 1 jackpot gaming has ended is determined based on the jackpot gaming end flag, which is set to ON when the jackpot gaming end process is executed in the jackpot gaming control process in the main process of FIG. 88 (see step S2251 of the jackpot control process in FIG. 29 of the first embodiment).

If the Type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3691: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3692. If the Type 1 jackpot game has not ended (step S3691: No), i.e., if the game is not in the Type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3692 and S3693>
When the first type jackpot game has ended (step S3691: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the first type jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state (step S3692), sets the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the special chart game executed in the third time-saving game state to the time-saving number counter (step S3693), and transitions processing to step S3694.

Here, the value of the time-saving count counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving play modes selected if the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving play state is a jackpot. Specifically, when transitioning from a Type 1 jackpot play state, which is transitioned to based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving play state, to the third time-saving play state, the MPU 41 sets the value of the time-saving count counter to "50" (see Figure 87 (F)).

<Steps S3694 to S3696>
In step S3694, the MPU 41 sets the third time-shortened game state flag to ON, indicating that the game state is in the third time-shortened game state, and further sets a third time-shortened game state B transition command to notify the sound and lamp control device 5 that the game state is transitioning from the jackpot game state to the third time-shortened game state (step S3695). This third time-shortened game state B transition command includes information indicating that the game state is transitioning from the jackpot game state to the third time-shortened game state, as well as information regarding the number of time-shortened game plays (prescribed number of times) in the third time-shortened game state, and is transmitted to the sound and lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the main processing of FIG. 88. As a result, the sound and lamp control device 5 can grasp the number of time-shortened game plays (prescribed number of times) based on the third time-shortened game state B transition command and can execute effects corresponding to the third time-shortened game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the third time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag to OFF, indicating that the game state has been transitioned to from the third time-saving gaming state (step S3696), and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Step S3697>
If the second time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to off (step S3690: No), and if the game state is not a type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from the third time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 102, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal small jackpot game state flag is set to on (step S3697).

The normal small win gaming state flag is a flag that indicates that the gaming state has transitioned from the normal gaming state to the small win gaming state, and when the gaming state transitions from the normal gaming state to the small win gaming state, it is set to ON in step S3615 of FIG. 97 during the gaming state transition process.

If the normal small win game state flag is set to on (step S3697: Yes), i.e., if the game state is a small win game state transitioned from the normal game state, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3698. On the other hand, if the normal small win game state flag is set to off (step S3697: No), i.e., if the game state is not a small win game state transitioned from the normal game state, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3702.

<Step S3698>
If the normal small win game state flag is set to ON (step S3697: Yes), that is, if the game state is a small win game state transitioned from the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the small win game has ended (step S3698). Whether the small win game has ended is determined based on the small win game end flag that is set to ON when the movable wing portion 832 of the wing device 83 is returned in step S3536 of the small win game control process in FIG. 95.

If the small win game has ended (step S3698: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3699; if the small win game has not ended (step S3698: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3699 to S3701>
When the small win game is over (step S3698: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal small win game state flag to OFF (step S3699), and transitions the game state from the small win game state to the normal game state (step S3700).Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state to ON (step S3701), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3702>
If the normal small win game state flag is set to off (step S3697: No), that is, if the game state is not a small win game state transitioned from the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the first time-reduced small win game state flag is set to on (step S3702).

The first time-shortened small win gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a small win gaming state to which a transition from the first time-shortened gaming state has occurred, and is set to ON in step S3625 of FIG. 98 during the gaming state transition process when the gaming state transitions from the first time-shortened gaming state to a small win gaming state.

If the first time-shortened small win gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3702: Yes), i.e., if the gaming state is a small win gaming state transitioned from the first time-shortened gaming state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3703. On the other hand, if the first time-shortened small win gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3702: No), i.e., if the gaming state is not a small win gaming state transitioned from the first time-shortened gaming state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3707.

<Step S3703>
If the first time-shortened small win game state flag is set to ON (step S3702: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the small win game has ended (step S3703). Whether the small win game has ended is determined based on the small win game end flag that is set to ON when the movable wing portion 832 of the wing device 83 is returned in step S3036 of the small win game control process of FIG. 95.

If the small win game has ended (step S3703: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3704; if the small win game has not ended (step S3703: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3704 to S3706>
When the small win game is over (step S3703: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first time-shortened small win game state flag to OFF (step S3704), and transitions the game state from the small win game state to the first time-shortened game state (step S3705).Then, the MPU 41 sets the first time-shortened game state flag to ON (step S3706), which indicates that the game state is the first time-shortened game state, and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3707>
If the first time-shortened small win game state flag is set to off (step S3702: No), that is, if the game state is not a small win game state transitioned from the first time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the second time-shortened small win game state flag is set to on (step S3707).

The second time-shortened small win gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a small win gaming state to which a transition from the second time-shortened gaming state has occurred, and is set to ON in step S3639 of FIG. 99 during the gaming state transition process when the gaming state transitions from the second time-shortened gaming state to a small win gaming state.

If the second time-shortened small win gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3707: Yes), i.e., if the gaming state is a small win gaming state transitioned from the second time-shortened gaming state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3708. On the other hand, if the second time-shortened small win gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3707: No), i.e., if the gaming state is not a small win gaming state transitioned from the second time-shortened gaming state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3712 in FIG. 103.

<Step S3708>
If the second time-shortened small win game state flag is set to ON (step S3707: Yes), that is, if the game state is a small win game state transitioned from the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the small win game has ended (step S3708). Whether the small win game has ended is determined based on the small win game end flag that is set to ON when the movable wing portion 832 of the wing device 83 is returned in step S3036 of the small win game control process of FIG. 95.

If the small win game has ended (step S3708: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3709; if the small win game has not ended (step S3708: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3709 to S3711>
When the small win game is over (step S3708: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second time-shortened small win game state flag to OFF (step S3709), and transitions the game state from the small win game state to the second time-shortened game state (step S3710).Then, the MPU 41 sets the second time-shortened game state flag to ON (step S3711), indicating that the game state is the second time-shortened game state, and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3712>
If the second time-shortened small win game state flag is set to off (step S3707: No), that is, if the game state is not a small win game state transitioned from the second time-shortened game state, as shown in FIG. 103, the MPU 41 determines whether the third time-shortened small win game state flag is set to on (step S3712).

The third time-shortened small win gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a small win gaming state to which a transition from the third time-shortened gaming state has occurred, and is set to ON in step S3660 of FIG. 100 during the gaming state transition process when the gaming state transitions from the third time-shortened gaming state to a small win gaming state.

If the third time-shortened small win gaming state flag is set to on (step S3712: Yes), i.e., if the gaming state is a small win gaming state transitioned from the third time-shortened gaming state, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3713. On the other hand, if the third time-shortened small win gaming state flag is set to off (step S3712: No), i.e., if the gaming state is not a small win gaming state transitioned from the third time-shortened gaming state, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3720.

<Step S3713>
If the third time-shortened small win game state flag is set to ON (step S3712: Yes), that is, if the game state is a small win game state transitioned from the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the small win game has ended (step S3713). Whether the small win game has ended is determined based on the small win game end flag that is set to ON when the movable wing portion 832 of the wing device 83 is returned in step S3036 of the small win game control process of FIG. 95.

If the small win game has ended (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3714; if the small win game has not ended (step S3713: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3714 and S3715>
When the small win game has ended (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the third time-shortened small win game status flag to OFF (step S3714). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather role device 83 (step S3715). Whether the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather role device 83 is determined based on the V winning flag, which is set to ON when a ball entry sensor (not shown) detects that the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 833, for example, in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main process of FIG. 88.

If the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 833 of the feather device 83 (step S3715: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3716; if the game ball 99 does not enter the V winning opening 833 of the feather device 83 (step S3715: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3718.

<Steps S3716 and S3717>
When the game ball 99 enters the V winning port 833 of the feather device 83 (step S3715: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the small win game state to the type 2 jackpot game state (step S3716), sets the type 2 jackpot game state flag to on, indicating that the game state is the type 2 jackpot game state (step S3717), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3718 and S3719>
If the game ball 99 does not enter the V winning port 833 of the feather device 83 (step S3715: No), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the small win game state to the third time-shortened game state (step S3718), sets the third time-shortened game state flag to on, indicating that the game state is the third time-shortened game state (step S3719), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3720>
If the third time-shortened small win gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3712: No), that is, if the gaming state is not a small win gaming state transitioned from the third time-shortened gaming state, the MPU 41 determines whether the type 2 jackpot gaming state flag, which indicates a type 2 jackpot gaming state, is set to ON (step S3720). The type 2 jackpot gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3717 when the gaming state transitions from the third time-shortened gaming state to the type 2 jackpot gaming state.

If the Type 2 jackpot gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3720: Yes), i.e., if the game is in a Type 2 jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3721. On the other hand, if the Type 2 jackpot gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3720: No), i.e., if the game is not in a Type 2 jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 terminates the gaming state transition process.

<Step S3721>
If the Type 2 jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3720: Yes), that is, if the type 2 jackpot game state is in, the MPU 41 determines whether the type 2 jackpot game has ended (step S3721). Whether the type 2 jackpot game has ended is determined based on the jackpot game end flag, which is set to ON when the process for ending the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot game control process in the main process of Fig. 88 (see step S2251 of the jackpot control process in Fig. 29 of the first embodiment described above).

If the Type 2 jackpot game has ended (Step S3721: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to Step S3722; if the Type 2 jackpot game has not ended (Step S3721: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3722 to S3724>
When the second-type jackpot game is over (step S3721: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the second-type jackpot game state to the third time-shortened game state (step S3722), sets the third time-shortened game state flag indicating the third time-shortened game state to ON (step S3723), sets the time-shortened count counter (step S3724), and proceeds to step S3725.

Here, the value of the time-saving count counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving games selected when a jackpot game is executed in the third time-saving game state. Specifically, when transitioning from a type 2 jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 sets the value of the time-saving count counter to "50" (see Figure 87 (F)).

<Steps S3725 and S3726>
In step S3725, the MPU 41 sets a third time-shortened game state B transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state will be transitioned from the jackpot game state to the third time-shortened game state, and further sets the type 2 jackpot game state flag to off, indicating that the game state is a type 2 jackpot game state (step S3726), and terminates the game state transition process.

Here, the transition command to the third time-shortened gaming state B includes information indicating that the gaming state will be transitioned from the jackpot gaming state to the third time-shortened gaming state, as well as information regarding the number of time-shortened games (prescribed number of times) in the third time-shortened gaming state, and is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the main processing of FIG. 88. As a result, the voice and lamp control device 5 can determine the number of time-shortened games (prescribed number of times) based on the transition command to the third time-shortened gaming state B, and can execute effects corresponding to the third time-shortened gaming state.

[Processing of the voice and lamp control device 5]
104 to 113, the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. In this embodiment, part of the command determination processing of the voice lamp control device 5 is different from the first embodiment.

[Command Determination Process]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, a command received from the main control device 4 is determined and a process corresponding to the command is executed, but this differs from the command determination process of the first embodiment in that a process for setting and managing the number of time-shortened games in various time-shortened game states is executed. Here, Fig. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the command determination process executed in step S2703 of the sub-timer interrupt process in the first embodiment shown in Fig. 42.

<Step S3801>
104, in the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a command has been received (step S3801). If the MPU 41 has received a command (step S3801: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3802. If the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S3801: No), the command determination process ends.

<Step S3802>
When a command is received (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a first time-shortened gaming state transition command (step S3802). The first time-shortened gaming state transition command is a command indicating that the gaming state will transition from the normal gaming state to the first time-shortened gaming state based on the result of a jackpot lottery in the normal gaming state being a time-shortened symbol stop miss. This first time-shortened gaming state transition command is set when the gaming state transitions from the normal gaming state to the first time-shortened gaming state in step S3607 of FIG. 97 during the gaming state transition process.

If the received command is a first time-shortened game state transition command (step S3802: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S3803; if the received command is not a first time-shortened game state transition command (step S3802: No), the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S3805.

<Steps S3803 and S3804>
If the received command is the first time-shortened game state transition command (step S3802: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a first time-shortened game state flag indicating the first time-shortened game state to ON (step S3803).Then, the MPU 51 sets a time-shortened game number counter based on information regarding the number of time-shortened game plays included in the first time-shortened game state transition command (step S3804), and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3805>
If the received command is not a first time-shortened game state transition command (step S3802: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a second time-shortened game state transition command (step S3805). The second time-shortened game state transition command is a command indicating that the game state will transition from a type 1 jackpot game state to a second time-shortened game state. This second time-shortened game state transition command is set when the game state transitions from a type 1 jackpot game state to a second time-shortened game state in step S3674, S3681, or S3688 of FIG. 101 during the game state transition process.

If the received command is a second time-shortened game state transition command (step S3805: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S3806; if the received command is not a second time-shortened game state transition command (step S3805: No), the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S3808.

<Steps S3806 and S3807>
If the received command is a second time-shortened game state transition command (step S3805: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a second time-shortened game state flag indicating the second time-shortened game state to ON (step S3806).Then, the MPU 51 sets a time-shortened game number counter based on information regarding the number of time-shortened game plays included in the second time-shortened game state transition command (step S3807), and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3808>
If the received command is not the second time-shortened game state transition command (step S3805: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the third time-shortened game state A transition command (step S3808). The third time-shortened game state A transition command is a command indicating that the game state is transitioning from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state. This third time-shortened game state A transition command is set when the game state is transitioning from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state in step S3645 of FIG. 99 in the game state transition processing.

If the received command is a command to transition to the third time-shortened game state A (step S3808: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3809; if the received command is not a command to transition to the third time-shortened game state A (step S3808: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3812.

<Steps S3809 to S3811>
If the received command is a command to transition to the third time-shortened gaming state A (step S3808: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a third time-shortened gaming state flag indicating the third time-shortened gaming state to ON (step S3809).Then, the MPU 51 sets a time-shortened gaming count counter based on information regarding the number of time-shortened gaming plays included in the command to transition to the third time-shortened gaming state A (step S3810).

Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the third time-shortened game state transition flag to ON (step S3811), indicating that the game state will transition from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state, and terminates the command determination process. The third time-shortened game state transition flag is referenced in step S3904 of the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process in Figure 105, described below, to determine whether to set a third time-shortened game state transition presentation (see Figures 106 (B) and 110 (D)) that clearly indicates a transition to the third time-shortened game state.

<Step S3812>
If the received command is not a third time-shortened gaming state A transition command (step S3808: No), it is determined whether the received command is a third time-shortened gaming state B transition command (step S3812). The third time-shortened gaming state B transition command is a command indicating that the gaming state will transition from a jackpot gaming state to a third time-shortened gaming state. This third time-shortened gaming state B transition command is set when the gaming state transitions from a jackpot gaming state to the third time-shortened gaming state in step S3695 of FIG. 101 during the gaming state transition process.

If the received command is a command to transition to the third time-shortened game state B (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3813; if the received command is not a command to transition to the third time-shortened game state B (step S3812: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3815.

<Steps S3813 and S3814>
If the received command is a command to transition to the third time-shortened gaming state B (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a third time-shortened gaming state flag indicating the third time-shortened gaming state to ON (step S3813).Then, the MPU 51 sets a time-shortened gaming number counter based on information regarding the number of time-shortened games included in the command to transition to the third time-shortened gaming state B (step S3814), and ends the command determination process.

<Step S3815>
If the received command is not a command to transition to the third time-shortened gaming state B (step S3812: No), it is determined whether the received command is a time-shortened count counter reset command (step S3815). The time-shortened count counter reset command is a command that notifies the determination of whether or not to reset the number of time-shortened games in the third time-shortened gaming state, and if the number of time-shortened games in the third time-shortened gaming state is reset, it includes information about the changed number of time-shortened games. This time-shortened count counter reset command is set when the number of time-shortened games in the third time-shortened gaming state is reset in step S3664 of FIG. 100 during the gaming state transition processing.

If the received command is a time-saving count counter reset command (step S3815: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3816; if the received command is not a time-saving count counter reset command (step S3815: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3817.

<Step S3816>
If the received command is a time-shortening counter reset command (step S3815: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process of resetting the time-shortening counter (step S3816). In this process of resetting the time-shortening counter, if the time-shortening counter reset command includes information about the number of time-shortening games after the change, the value of the time-shortening game counter is changed, but if the time-shortening counter reset command does not include information about the number of time-shortening games after the change, the value of the time-shortening game counter is not changed.

<Step S3817>
If the received command is not a time-saving counter reset command (step S3815: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command (step S3817). The special symbol variation pattern command is a command that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game and the special symbol variation pattern (variation display time). This special symbol variation pattern command is set when setting the variation display time of the special symbol (special symbol variation pattern) in step S3414 of FIG. 90 during the special symbol variation start processing.

If the received command is a special chart variation pattern command (step S3817: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3818; if the received command is not a special chart variation pattern command (step S3817: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3823.

<Steps S3818 to S3820>
If the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command (step S3817: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a performance type setting process (step S3818) and a stop symbol combination setting process (step S3819), and then proceeds to step S3820.

Details of the procedure for setting the effect type will be described later with reference to Figures 105 to 110. In this process, the effects to be executed by the symbol display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27, etc. are set according to the game status, etc. In addition, details of the procedure for setting the stopped symbol combination will be described later with reference to Figures 111 and 112. In this process, the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is set based on the results of the jackpot lottery, etc.

<Steps S3820 and S3821>
In step S3820, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time of the decorative symbols based on the special symbol variable pattern (variable display time) included in the special symbol variable pattern command (step S3820).Then, the MPU 51 transmits to the display control device 6 a display variable pattern command for specifying the variable type (presentation pattern) set in step S3818 and the content of the stopped symbol combination of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 set in step S3819 (step S3821), and proceeds to step S3822.

The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the variation type (effect pattern) set in step S3818 and the stopping symbol combination of decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 set in step S3819. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores effect images and decorative symbol variation images corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and effect display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the stopping symbol combination of decorative symbols and the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

<Step S3822>
In step S3822, the MPU 51 executes a time-saving count counter process and ends the command determination process. The details of the procedure of the time-saving count counter process will be described later with reference to FIG. 113. In this time-saving count counter process, a time-saving count counter indicating the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state is managed.

<Step S3823>
If the received command is not a special chart variation pattern command (step S3817: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands, including the processing of steps S3107 to S3134 in the command determination processing shown in Figures 47 and 48 in the first embodiment described above (step S3823), and terminates the command determination processing.

[Variation type (performance pattern) setting process]
In the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process executed in step S3818 when a special symbol variation pattern is received in the command determination process of Fig. 104, the effects to be executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, etc. are set according to the game state, etc. Here, Fig. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process.

<Steps S3901 and S3902>
In the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 105, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a first time-shortened gaming state flag indicating that the game is in the first time-shortened gaming state is set to ON (step S3901). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game is in the first time-shortened gaming state. Note that the first time-shortened gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3803 when a first time-shortened gaming state transition command is received in the command determination process of Fig. 104.

If the first time-shortened game state flag is set to ON (step S3901: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the first time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 sets the first time-shortened game state presentation that has been preset for the first time-shortened game state based on the information included in the special chart variation pattern command (variation display time, jackpot lottery result) (step S3902), and terminates the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process. On the other hand, if the first time-shortened game state flag is set to OFF (step S3901: No), i.e., if the game is not in the first time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3903.

<Step S3903>
If the first time-shortened gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3901: No), the MPU 51 determines whether a second time-shortened gaming state flag, which indicates that the game is in the second time-shortened gaming state, is set to ON (step S3903). The second time-shortened gaming state flag, that is, the MPU 51 determines whether the game is in the second time-shortened gaming state. Note that the second time-shortened gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3806 when a second time-shortened gaming state transition command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 104.

If the second time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S3903: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3904. On the other hand, if the second time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3903: No), i.e., if the game is not in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3907.

<Step S3904>
If the second time-shortened game state flag is set to ON (step S3903: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 determines whether a third time-shortened game state transition flag, which indicates that the game state will be transitioned from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state, is set to ON based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a time-shortened symbol stop failure that satisfies a predetermined condition (step S3904). Note that the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3811 when the MPU 51 receives a third time-shortened game state A transition command, which indicates that the game state will be transitioned from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state, in the command determination process of FIG. 104.

If the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to on (step S3904: Yes), i.e., if the game state is transitioning from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state, processing proceeds to step S3906. On the other hand, if the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to off (step S3904: No), i.e., if the game state is not transitioning from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state (if the second time-shortened game state continues), processing proceeds to step S3905.

<Steps S3905 and S3906>
If the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to off (step S3904: No), that is, if the game state does not transition from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state (if the second time-shortened game state continues), the MPU 51 sets a second time-shortened game state continuation presentation as the second time-shortened game state presentation, which indicates that the second time-shortened game state will continue (step S3905), and terminates the presentation type setting process.

On the other hand, if the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to on (step S3904: Yes), that is, if the game state is transitioning from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 sets, as the second time-shortened game state presentation, a third time-shortened game state transition presentation that clearly indicates that the game state is transitioning from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state (step S3906), and terminates the presentation type setting process.

Here, Figure 106(A) is a diagram showing an example of a second time-shortened play state continuation presentation pattern, which is a second time-shortened play state presentation, and Figure 106(B) is a diagram showing an example of a third time-shortened play state transition presentation pattern, which is a second time-shortened play state presentation.

As shown in Figures 106(A) and 106(B), the second time-shortened play state presentation (the second time-shortened play state continuation presentation and the third time-shortened play state transition presentation) is executed as a battle presentation between the main character and the enemy character. Of course, the second time-shortened play state presentation (the second time-shortened play state continuation presentation and the third time-shortened play state transition presentation) does not have to be a battle presentation, and may be, for example, a mission presentation (e.g., a presentation that clearly shows or suggests the result of a jackpot lottery depending on whether the character succeeds or fails in completing a mission given to them).

Furthermore, Figure 107 is a diagram showing an example screen of the symbol display unit 341 to explain the second time-saving game state presentation. Specifically, Figure 107(A) is a diagram showing an example screen at the start of a battle, Figure 107(B) is an enlarged view of the HP display unit 75 on the screen at the start of a battle, and Figures 107(C) to 107(E) are diagrams showing example images of the gauge display unit 75.

As shown in FIG. 107(A), the screen of the symbol display unit 341 at the start of a battle includes a text image of "Battle Begins," indicating that the battle is about to begin, and an HP image showing hit points (HP) that represent the damage that the enemy character can withstand. The enemy character's HP ranges from 0 to 100, and an enemy character's HP of 0 means that the enemy character will be defeated, i.e., the ally character will win. In addition, the screen of the symbol display unit 341 at the start of a battle includes a text image of "Enter RUSH when enemy HP reaches 0," indicating that when the enemy character's HP reaches 0, the game will enter a third time-saving game state (RUSH), which can transition to a type 2 jackpot game state via a small jackpot game.

The HP image is then displayed in the HP display section 75, which is set in the upper right corner of the design display section 341. The HP display section 75 displays an HP gauge 76 and an HP counter 77 that indicate the enemy character's HP.

As shown in Figure 107(B), the HP gauge 76 indicates the HP of the enemy character as a gauge, and includes a large gauge 761 and a small gauge 762. The large gauge 761 has 10 HP per gauge. The small gauge 762 has 1 HP per gauge. In the example shown in Figure 107(B), the large gauge 761 is 9 gauges and the small gauge 762 is 9 gauges, which means that the HP of the enemy character is 99. In the example shown in Figure 107(C), the large gauge 761 is 3 gauges and the small gauge 762 is 1 gauge, so the HP of the enemy character is 31. In the example shown in Figure 107(D), the large gauge 761 is 1 gauge and the small gauge 762 is 0 gauge, so the HP of the enemy character is 1. Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 107 (E), both the large gauge 761 and the small gauge 762 are at 0, which indicates that the enemy character's HP is 0 and that the ally character has defeated the enemy character, i.e., the game state will transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state.

On the other hand, the HP counter 77 indicates the HP of the enemy character as a number. In the example shown in FIG. 107(B), the HP counter 77 shows the number "99," meaning that the enemy character's HP is 99. In the example shown in FIG. 107(C), the HP counter 77 shows the number "31," meaning that the enemy character's HP is 31, and in the example shown in FIG. 107(D), the HP counter 77 shows the number "1," meaning that the enemy character's HP is 1. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 107(E), the HP counter 77 shows the number "0," meaning that the enemy character's HP is 0 and the ally character has defeated the enemy character, i.e., the game state will transition from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state.

In this embodiment, the HP value of the enemy character displayed at the start of the battle corresponds to the maximum number of remaining times of time-shortened play, including the relevant fluctuation, in the second time-shortened play state. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 107(A), this means that the maximum number of remaining times of time-shortened play, including the relevant special symbol play, in the second time-shortened play state is 99. In this way, the HP value of the enemy character displayed at the start of the battle corresponds to the maximum number of remaining times of time-shortened play, including the relevant fluctuation, in the second time-shortened play state, and the player can ascertain the maximum number of remaining times of time-shortened play, including the relevant fluctuation, in the second time-shortened play state from the HP of the enemy character displayed at the start of the battle.

Returning to Figure 106(A), the second time-shortened play state continuation effect is an effect that indicates that the second time-shortened play state will continue. In the example shown in Figure 106(A), eight effect patterns, patterns A1 to A8, are set as second time-shortened play state continuation effect patterns. In each of patterns A1 to A8, the second time-shortened play state continuation effect is an effect that indicates that the second time-shortened play state will continue, so the final result of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character will be a draw (tied) rather than a victory for the ally character. Furthermore, the enemy character's HP after the battle will not reach 0, but will ultimately maintain the value it had at the start of the battle.

In addition, in patterns A1 to A4, the ally character launches a preemptive attack in battle (see Figure 96 (A)). In patterns A1 and A2, the enemy character defends against the ally character's attack (see Figure 108 (A)). At this time, the enemy character's HP does not change. On the other hand, in patterns A3 and A4, the ally character's attack hits the enemy character (see Figure 108 (C)). At this time, the enemy character's HP is either halved (pattern A3) or remains at 1 (pattern A4).

In addition, in patterns A5 to A8, the enemy character launches a preemptive attack in battle (see Figure 109 (A)). In patterns A5 and A6, the ally character defends against the enemy character's attack (see Figure 109 (B)). On the other hand, in patterns A7 and A9, the enemy character's attack hits the ally character (see Figure 109 (C)). In patterns A5 to A8, since the enemy character launches a preemptive attack, the enemy character's HP does not change.

In addition, in patterns A2 to A8, excluding pattern A1, a button effect is executed. Examples of such button effects include a long press effect (see FIG. 110(A)) that prompts the player to press and hold the operation button 20 and reduces the enemy character's HP based on the player's long press of the operation button 20, and a rapid press effect (see FIG. 110(B)) that prompts the player to press and hold the operation button 20 repeatedly and reduces the enemy character's HP based on the player's rapid press of the operation button 20. Of course, the button effect may also be a single press effect (single press effect) that prompts the player to press and hold the operation button 20 once and displays a draw as the result of the battle with the enemy character based on the player's single press of the operation button 20.

In pattern A1, no button effects are executed, and the enemy character's HP remains the same as at the start of the battle, along with an image indicating that the final result of the battle is a draw (see Figure 110 (C)).

On the other hand, the third time-shortened game state transition effect shown in Figure 106 (B) is an effect indicating that the game state will transition from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state. In the example shown in Figure 106 (B), eight effect patterns, patterns B1 to B8, are set as the third time-shortened game state transition effect patterns. Since each of patterns B1 to B8 indicates that the third time-shortened game state transition effect can transition from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state, the final result of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character is a victory for the ally character, and the enemy character's HP after the battle ultimately becomes 0 (see Figure 110 (D)).

In addition, patterns B1 to B8 correspond to patterns A1 to A8, but differ from patterns A1 to A8 in that the final result of a battle between an ally character and an enemy character is a victory for the ally character, and the enemy character's HP ultimately becomes 0 after the battle ends.

If the special symbol play is the last special symbol play in the second time-saving play state, the final screen in patterns A1 to A8 (or patterns B1 to B8) will display an image of an ally character being defeated by an enemy character, along with an image indicating the end of the second time-saving play state (see Figure 110 (E)).

<Step S3907>
Returning to the explanation of the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process in Fig. 105, if the second time-shortened gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3903: No), i.e., if the game is not in the second time-shortened gaming state, it is determined whether the third time-shortened gaming state flag, which indicates that the game is in the third time-shortened gaming state, is set to ON (step S3907). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the game is in the third time-shortened gaming state. Note that the third time-shortened gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3809 when a command to transition to the third time-shortened gaming state A is received in the command determination process in Fig. 104.

If the third time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S3907: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3908. On the other hand, if the third time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3907: No), i.e., if the game is in the normal game state rather than the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3909.

<Step S3908>
If the third time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S3907: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 sets the third time-shortened game state presentation that is pre-set for the third time-shortened game state based on the information contained in the special chart change pattern command (special chart change pattern (special chart change display time), result of the jackpot lottery) (step S3908), and terminates the presentation type setting process.

<Step S3909>
If the third time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3907: No), that is, if the game is in the normal game state and not the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 sets the normal game state presentation (see Figure 50) that is pre-set for the normal game state based on the information contained in the special chart change pattern command (special chart change pattern (special chart change display time), result of the jackpot lottery) (step S3909), and terminates the presentation type setting process.

[Stop symbol combination setting process]
In the stop symbol combination setting process executed in step S3819 when a special symbol variation pattern is received in the command determination process of Fig. 104, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is set based on the result of a big win lottery, etc. Here, Fig. 111 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the stop symbol combination setting process.

<Steps S4001 and S4002>
In the stop symbol combination setting process of this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 111, the MPU 51 first determines whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S4001). Whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is a time-saving symbol stop miss is determined based on the result of the hit/miss judgment included in the special symbol variation pattern command, for example.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4003 and sets the time-saving symbol set for the time-saving symbol stop miss as the stop symbol combination (see FIG. 112). On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is not a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S4001: No), the MPU 51 sets a stop symbol combination other than the time-saving symbol based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation display time) and the result of the jackpot lottery (step S4002), and terminates the stop symbol combination setting process.

Here, Figure 112 is a diagram showing the relationship between the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set when the time-saving symbol stops and the stopping symbol combination (time-saving symbol) when the time-saving symbol stops and fails. As shown in Figure 112, in this embodiment, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games is set to 5, 10, 20, 30, 50, and 100 (see Figures 86 (E) and 87 (E)). The stop pattern combinations (time-saving patterns) for missed time-saving pattern stops are: 5 times, which is the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of time-saving play, corresponds to "443" and "445", 10 times to "665" and "667", 20 times to "998" and "991", 30 times to "554" and "556", 50 times to "332" and "334", and 100 times to "775" and "778".

In addition, the stopping pattern combination (time-saving pattern) when the time-saving pattern does not stop is a combination in which the left and center patterns have the same number, and the right pattern is one number shifted from the left and center patterns, resulting in a characteristic combination with a certain regularity. In this way, the time-saving pattern is a characteristic combination, allowing the player to easily understand that the time-saving pattern has stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when the time-saving pattern stops and displayed, a specific special sound unique to the time-saving pattern may be output. This also allows the player to easily understand that the time-saving pattern has stopped and displayed.

Of course, the time-saving symbols are not limited to the example shown in Figure 112, and may be other distinctive combinations, or do not necessarily have to be distinctive combinations. Furthermore, it is not necessary for two combinations of time-saving symbols to correspond to one upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of times time-saving games can be played; one combination may be used, or three or more combinations may be used, and it is not necessary for the same number of time-saving symbols to correspond to all upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of times time-saving games can be played.

<Steps S4003 and S4004>
111, if the result of the lottery for the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is a miss of the time-saving symbol stop (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of times of time-saving games set for the miss of the time-saving symbol stop is 5 or not (step S4003).Whether the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of times of time-saving games set for the miss of the time-saving symbol stop is 5 or not is determined based on, for example, the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) included in the special symbol variation pattern command and the result of the jackpot lottery.

If the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is 5 (step S4003: Yes), the MPU 51 sets "443" or "445" (see FIG. 112), which corresponds to 5 times of time-saving games, as the stopped symbol combination (step S4004), and ends the stopped symbol combination setting process. On the other hand, if the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is not 5 (step S4003: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4005.

<Steps S4005 and S4006>
If the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stop miss is not 5 times (step S4003: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stop miss is 10 times (step S4005).

If the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is 10 (step S4005: Yes), the MPU 51 sets "665" or "667" (see FIG. 112), which corresponds to 10 times of time-saving games, as the stopped symbol combination (step S4006), and ends the stopped symbol combination setting process. On the other hand, if the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is not 10 (step S4005: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4007.

<Steps S4007 and S3508>
If the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stop miss is not 10 times (step S4005: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stop miss is 20 times (step S4007).

If the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is 20 (step S4007: Yes), the MPU 51 sets "998" or "991" (see FIG. 112), which corresponds to 20 times of time-saving games, as the stopped symbol combination (step S4008), and ends the stopped symbol combination setting process. On the other hand, if the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is not 20 (step S4007: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4009.

<Steps S4009 and S4010>
If the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stop miss is not 20 times (step S4007: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stop miss is 30 times (step S4009).

If the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is 30 (step S4009: Yes), the MPU 51 sets "554" or "556" (see FIG. 112), which corresponds to 30 times of time-saving games, as the stopped symbol combination (step S4010), and ends the stopped symbol combination setting process. On the other hand, if the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is not 30 (step S4009: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4011.

<Steps S4011 and S4012>
If the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stop miss is not 30 times (step S4009: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stop miss is 50 times (step S4011).

If the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is 50 (step S4011: Yes), the MPU 51 sets "332" or "334" (see FIG. 112), which corresponds to 50 times of time-saving games, as the stopped symbol combination (step S4012), and ends the stopped symbol combination setting process. On the other hand, if the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is not 50 (step S4011: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4013.

<Step S4013>
If the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stop miss is not 50 times (step S4011: No), the MPU 51 can determine that the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games is 100 times, and therefore sets "775" or "778" (see Figure 112), which corresponds to 100 times of time-saving games, as the stopping pattern combination (step S4013), and terminates the stopping pattern combination setting process.

[Time-saving counter processing]
In the command determination process of Fig. 104, when a special pattern variation pattern is received, a time-saving count counter process is executed in step S3822, in which a process for managing the time-saving count counter is executed. Here, Fig. 113 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the time-saving count counter process.

<Step S4101>
In the time-shortening count counter process of this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 113, the MPU 51 first determines whether a first time-shortening game state flag indicating the first time-shortening game state is set to ON (step S4101). The first time-shortening game state flag, that is, the MPU 51 determines whether the first time-shortening game state is set to ON. Note that the first time-shortening game state flag is set to ON in step S3803 when a first time-shortening game state transition command is received in the command determination process of Fig. 104.

If the first time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S4101: Yes), i.e., if the first time-shortened game state is in effect, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4102. On the other hand, if the first time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S4101: No), i.e., if the first time-shortened game state is not in effect, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4105.

<Steps S4102 to S4104>
If the first time-shortened game state flag is set to ON (step S4101: Yes), that is, if the first time-shortened game state is active, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-shortened game counter, which indicates the number of remaining special game plays in the time-shortened game state (step S4102), and determines whether the value of the time-shortened game counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4103). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether this is the last special game play in the first time-shortened game state.

If the value of the time-saving count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4103: Yes), i.e., if this is the last special symbol game in the first time-saving game state, the MPU 51 sets the first time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4104) and terminates the time-saving count counter processing. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4103: No), i.e., if this is not the last special symbol game in the first time-saving game state, the MPU 51 terminates the time-saving count counter processing.

<Step S4105>
If the first time-shortened gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4101: No), i.e., if the game is not in the first time-shortened gaming state, the MPU 51 determines whether the second time-shortened gaming state flag, which indicates that the game is in the second time-shortened gaming state, is set to ON (step S4105). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the game is in the second time-shortened gaming state. Note that the second time-shortened gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3806 when a second time-shortened gaming state transition command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 104.

If the second time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S4105: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4106. On the other hand, if the second time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S4105: No), i.e., if the game is not in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4109.

<Steps S4106 to S4108>
If the second time-shortened game state flag is set to ON (step S4105: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-shortened game count counter, which indicates the number of remaining special game plays in the time-shortened game state (step S4106), and determines whether the value of the time-shortened game count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4107). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether this is the last special game play in the second time-shortened game state.

If the value of the time-saving count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4107: Yes), i.e., if this is the last special symbol game in the second time-saving game state, the MPU 51 sets the second time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4108) and terminates the time-saving count counter processing. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4107: No), i.e., if this is not the last special symbol game in the second time-saving game state, the MPU 51 terminates the time-saving count counter processing.

<Step S4109>
If the second time-shortened game state flag is set to OFF (step S4105: No), i.e., if the game is not in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 determines whether the third time-shortened game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the third time-shortened game state, is set to ON (step S4109). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the game is in the third time-shortened game state. Note that the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3811 when the MPU 51 receives a third time-shortened game state A transition command, which indicates that the game state is transitioning from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state, in the command determination process of FIG. 104.

If the third time-shortened game state flag is set to ON (step S4109: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4110. On the other hand, if the third time-shortened game state flag is set to OFF (step S4109: No), i.e., if the game is not in the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 terminates the time-shortened count counter process.

<Steps S4110 to S4112>
If the third time-shortened game state flag is set to ON (step S4109: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-shortened game counter, which indicates the number of remaining special game plays in the time-shortened game state (step S4110), and determines whether the value of the time-shortened game counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4111). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether this is the last special game play in the third time-shortened game state.

If the value of the time-saving count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4111: Yes), i.e., if this is the last special symbol game in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 51 sets the third time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4112) and terminates the time-saving count counter processing. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4111: No), i.e., if this is not the last special symbol game in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 51 terminates the time-saving count counter processing.

As described above, in this embodiment, transition to the third time-saving game state, a high-profit state in which a Type 2 jackpot game can be played via a small jackpot game, requires transition to the second time-saving game state, a low-profit state in which the conditions for time-saving game play are met after the end of a Type 1 jackpot game. Furthermore, the high-profit condition is met when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state, a low-profit state, is a miss with a time-saving symbol stop that is greater than the remaining number of time-saving game plays in the second time-saving game state, as the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving game plays. In other words, in this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning to the third time-saving game state, a high-profit state in which a Type 2 jackpot game can be played, are stricter than those of conventional Type 1/2 hybrid machines. Furthermore, a new game feature is provided, utilizing the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving game plays that is set for a miss with a time-saving symbol stop as a transition condition to the third time-saving game state, a high-profit state. As a result, in this embodiment, players can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the time-saving symbols will be displayed in the second time-saving game state, a low-profit state to which they are transferred when the conditions for time-saving gameplay are met after the end of a Type 1 jackpot game.Furthermore, when the time-saving symbols are displayed in the second time-saving game state, players can enjoy playing the game while paying attention to whether they will be transferred to the third time-saving game state, a high-profit state in which a Type 2 jackpot game can be played.This increases the attention and interest in the game, and improves the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in this embodiment, the high-profit condition for transitioning from the second time-shortened game state (short-open time-shortened game state) as a low-profit state to the third time-shortened game state (long-open time-shortened game state) as a high-profit state is a state in which the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-shortened game state as a low-profit state is a miss of the time-shortened pattern stop that is greater than the remaining number of time-shortened game plays in the second time-shortened game state, as the upper limit (specified number of times) of the number of time-shortened game plays. In this way, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-shortened game state (low-profit state) is a miss with a time-shortened symbol that is greater than the remaining number of time-shortened game plays in the second time-shortened game state, as the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-shortened game plays, and a transition is made from the second time-shortened game state (low-profit state) to the third time-shortened game state (high-profit state), the fewer the remaining number of time-shortened game plays in the second time-shortened game state (the more special symbol games are played in the second time-shortened game state), the more likely it is that the game will be transitioned to the third time-shortened game state (high-profit state). As a result, as the remaining number of time-shortened game plays in the second time-shortened game state (low-profit state) decreases (the more special symbol games are played in the second time-shortened game state), expectations for the time-shortened symbol to be stopped and attention to whether or not the game will be transitioned to the third time-shortened game state (high-profit state) increase, thereby further increasing attention and interest in the game and further improving the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state to which the conditions for time-saving gameplay are met after the end of a jackpot game based on a Type 1 jackpot on the first special chart, is set to the number of times that can be played (the number of times that the player's balls will not decrease) with the game balls (expected ball payout value) that the player can acquire through a 2R short-open time-saving jackpot game. This allows the player to play the prescribed number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state without significantly reducing their balls, preventing a significant disadvantage to the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state, while providing the player with the opportunity to transition to the third time-saving game state, a high-profit state that allows transition to a Type 2 jackpot game state via a small jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to third embodiments described above are possible, to the extent applicable.

Fifth Embodiment
In the fourth embodiment described above, when the condition for time-saving play is met after the end of a Type 1 jackpot play and the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving play state to which the player is transitioned is a miss in the time-saving pattern stop, if the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving play cycles set for the miss in the time-saving pattern stop is greater than the number of time-saving play cycles remaining in the second time-saving play state, the player is transitioned to a third time-saving play state which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving play state in that it allows the player to transition to a Type 2 jackpot play state via a small win play state.

Furthermore, in the aforementioned fourth embodiment, multiple types (four types) of upper limits (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving games are set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the game ball 99 entering the first winning slot 314 is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, and when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the game ball 99 entering the second winning slot 315 in the second or third time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, were described.

Furthermore, in the aforementioned fourth embodiment, a case was described in which the second time-shortened game state effect executed in the second time-shortened game state is a second time-shortened game state continuation effect that indicates that the second time-shortened game state will continue, or a third time-shortened game state transition effect that indicates that the game state will transition from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state.

In contrast, this embodiment is similar to the fourth embodiment described above in that, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-shortened game state is a miss for the time-shortened symbol stop, and the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-shortened game plays set for that miss is greater than the number of time-shortened game plays remaining in the second time-shortened game state, the game will transition to a third time-shortened game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-shortened game state.

Furthermore, this embodiment differs from the aforementioned fourth embodiment in that the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games that is set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of game ball 99 into second winning slot 315 in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop is one type, N times (50 times in this embodiment).

Furthermore, this embodiment differs from the aforementioned fourth embodiment in that, as the second time-saving play state effect, a first effect is executed from the transition to the second time-saving play state until a predetermined number of special symbol plays have been played, and a second effect, which differs from the first effect, is executed from the transition to the second time-saving play state until a predetermined number of special symbol plays have been played.

As mentioned above, the second time-shortened game state is entered when the conditions for time-shortened game play are met after the end of a type 1 jackpot game, which is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state (or the first time-shortened game state) is a jackpot (see Figure 96), and the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-shortened game play in the second time-shortened game state is set to a fixed number, M times (100 times in this embodiment) (see Figure 86 (B)). Therefore, if the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving games set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of game ball 99 into second winning slot 315 in the second time-saving game state is a miss on the time-saving symbol stop, and there is only one type (N times), then from the transition to the second time-saving game state until "M-N" times of special symbol play have been played, the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving games set for a miss on the time-saving symbol stop in the second time-saving game state will not be greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, and the game will not transition to the third time-saving game state. On the other hand, if more than "M-N" times of special symbol play are played after the transition to the second time-saving game state, the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving games set for a miss on the time-saving symbol stop in the second time-saving game state may be greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, and the game may transition to the third time-saving game state.

For this reason, in this embodiment, in the time-saving play state, a new gameplay feature is provided in which it is more important whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop after more than "M-N" special symbol games have been played since the transition to the second time-saving play state than whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop before "M-N" special symbol games have been played since the transition to the second time-saving play state. This increases the player's attention and interest in the special symbol game in the second time-saving play state, and improves the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the second time-shortened game state, even in the second time-shortened game state effects executed by the symbol display unit 341, etc., the period after the transition to the second time-shortened game state has been completed more than "M-N" times is more important. In other words, by executing different effects between the period from the transition to the second time-shortened game state until a predetermined number of special symbol games (e.g., "M-N") have been played and the period after the predetermined number of special symbol games have been played, it is possible to clearly indicate or suggest to the player the unimportant and important periods in the second time-shortened game state. For example, while a pinch effect indicating whether the second time-shortened game state will be maintained can be executed as the first effect during all or part of the unimportant period in the second time-shortened game state, it is also possible to execute a chance effect indicating whether the transition to the third time-shortened game state will be executed as the second effect during all or part of the important period in the second time-shortened game state. This increases the player's attention and interest in the special symbol games in the second time-shortened game state, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the "predetermined number of times" that special symbol games are played after transitioning to the second time-shortened game state, in which the second time-shortened game state effect switches between the first effect and the second effect, matches the "M-N" number of times that a transition to the third time-shortened game state becomes possible when the time-shortened symbol stops and does not appear. In this way, when the "predetermined number of times" and the "M-N" number of times match, the player can determine the special symbol game that will enable a transition to the third time-shortened game state in the second time-shortened game state based on the second time-shortened game state effect changing from the first effect to the second effect. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game while noticing the second time-shortened game state effect changing from the first effect to the second effect, and, when the second effect is changed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while noticing the second effect, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The "predetermined number of times" and the "M-N" number of times do not have to match, but it is preferable for the difference between the "predetermined number of times" and the "M-N" number of times to be small, and the absolute value of that difference is set, for example, to 20% or less of the upper limit (specified number of times) of the number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state, preferably 10% or less, and more preferably 5% or less. Thus, if the "predetermined number of times" and the "M-N" number of times do not match, the player will not be able to accurately grasp the special symbol game that will enable a transition to the third time-shortened game state in the second time-shortened game state. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on at what stage the special symbol game that will enable a transition to the third time-shortened game state in the second time-shortened game state is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Of course, the features of this embodiment can also be applied to the aforementioned fourth embodiment, in which there are multiple types of upper limit values (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving games that are set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop. In this way, by applying the features of this embodiment to a case in which there are multiple types of upper limit values (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving games that are set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, it is not possible to accurately determine the special symbol game that will enable a transition to the third time-saving game state in the second time-saving game state. Therefore, just as when the "predetermined number of times" and the "M-N" number of times do not match, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on at what stage the special symbol game that allows the second time-shortened game state to transition to the third time-shortened game state is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second time-shortened game state is entered when the conditions for time-shortened gameplay are met after the end of a Type 1 jackpot game, which is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state (or the first time-shortened game state) is a jackpot. The upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state is set to a fixed number, M (100 in this embodiment) (see FIG. 86 (B)). However, multiple upper limits (prescribed numbers) of the number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state may be set. In this way, by setting multiple upper limits (prescribed numbers) of the number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state, gameplay is provided in which the size of the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state is important, not just the number of special symbol games executed from the time of entry into the second time-shortened game state until the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-shortened symbol stop.

Furthermore, when multiple upper limits (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state are set, it is also possible to set all of the multiple upper limits (prescribed number of times) M to a number greater than the upper limit (prescribed number of times) N for one type of time-saving game, which is set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of game ball 99 into second winning slot 315 in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop. This provides gameplay in which the size of the upper limit (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is important, without compromising gameplay in which the timing of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state in which the time-saving symbol stop is a miss is important.

This embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the fourth embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 114 to 117.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
As mentioned above, this embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that there is only one upper limit (prescribed number) for the number of time-saving games (when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop. Specifically, this embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that the second special symbol miss variation table used when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss. Here, FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of the second special symbol miss variation table used when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss.

[2nd Special Chart Out-of-Range Variation Table]
As shown in FIG. 114, in this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss, all the results are misses for the time-saving symbol stop. If the result is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games is set to 50.

[Processing of the voice and lamp control device 5]
As described above, this embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that, as the second time-saving game state presentation, a first presentation is executed from the transition to the second time-saving game state until a predetermined number of special symbol games have been played, and a second presentation different from the first presentation is executed from the transition to the second time-saving game state and from the special symbol games that exceed the predetermined number of times. Specifically, this embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process of step S3318, which is executed when a special symbol variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 104, and the stop symbol combination setting process of step S3319.

[Variation type (performance pattern) setting process]
In the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process of this embodiment, the first presentation is set as the second time-shortened game state presentation when the number of unexecuted time-shortened games is 50 or more, and the second presentation different from the first presentation is set when the number of unexecuted time-shortened games is less than 50. Here, Figure 115 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process executed in step S3318 of the command determination process of Figure 104.

<Steps S4201 and S4202>
In the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 115, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the second time-shortened gaming state flag indicating the second time-shortened gaming state is set to ON (step S4201). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second time-shortened gaming state is in effect.

If the second time-shortened game state flag is set to ON (step S4201: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4202 and sets either the first effect or the second effect as the second time-shortened game state effect based on the remaining number of time-shortened game plays in the second time-shortened game state.

On the other hand, if the second time-shortened game state flag is set to OFF (step S4201: No), i.e., if the game is not in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 sets a presentation other than the second time-shortened game state presentation based on the game state, jackpot lottery result, special chart variation pattern (special chart variation display time), etc. (step S4202), and terminates the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process.

Here, Figure 116(A) is a diagram showing an example of a first effect pattern as a second time-shortened play state effect, and Figure 116(B) is a diagram showing an example of a second effect pattern as a second time-shortened play state effect.

As shown in Figures 116(A) and 116(B), the second time-shortened play state presentation (first presentation and second presentation) is executed as a battle presentation between the main character and the enemy character. In the second time-shortened play state presentation (first presentation and second presentation), one of the ally character and enemy character attacks, and either the attack of one character is defended by the other character, or the attack of one character hits the other character, and ultimately the outcome of the battle is displayed.

As shown in Figure 116(A), the first effect as the second time-saving game state effect is executed when the number of remaining time-saving game plays in the second time-saving game state is 50 or more, as described below. This first effect explicitly or implies that the second time-saving game state will not transition to the third time-saving game state after the special game play ends, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss (when a symbol combination corresponding to a time-saving symbol stop miss is displayed). In the example shown in Figure 116(A), the first effect includes eight effect patterns, C1 to C8. In each of patterns C1 to C8, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss, the battle results in a draw, thereby explicitly or implying that the game state will not transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, even if the symbol combination corresponds to a time-saving symbol stop miss. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (big win or small win), the result of the battle will be a victory for the ally character, which will clearly indicate or suggest that it is a win. Of course, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (big win or small win), the result of the battle may also be a draw. In this case, the result of the jackpot lottery will be clearly indicated or suggested by the combination of symbols that stop, rather than the result of the battle.

Furthermore, in patterns C2, C4, and C6 to C8, after an attack and defense between an ally character and an enemy character, a button effect such as a long press effect or a rapid-fire effect (see Figures 110(A) and 110(B)) is executed, and then the result of the battle is displayed.

Furthermore, in patterns C7 and C8, after an enemy character's preemptive attack hits an ally character, a display is displayed indicating that the ally character is in a pinch (see Figure 116 (C)). This pinch display is unique to the first effect, which is executed when the number of remaining time-saving plays in the second time-saving play state is equal to or exceeds the predetermined number of 50 plays, and is not displayed in the second effect. Of course, the pinch display may also be displayed in the second effect.

The first effect patterns C1 to C8 are set, for example, based on the result of the jackpot lottery. Furthermore, patterns C7 and C8, which display a pinch, are likely to be set when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a miss for the time-saving symbol stop (a big win or a small win), and are unlikely to be selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop. This allows the player to understand that when a pinch display is displayed, the likelihood of the jackpot lottery result being a miss for the time-saving symbol stop is low.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (big win or small win) that does not result in a time-saving symbol stop miss, an effect other than patterns C1 to C8 may be executed. In other words, patterns C1 to C8 may be set as exclusive effects when the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss.

As shown in Figure 116(B), the second effect as the second time-saving game state effect is executed when the number of remaining time-saving game plays in the second time-saving game state is less than 50, as described below. In this second effect, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss (when a symbol combination corresponding to a time-saving symbol stop miss is displayed), it is clearly indicated or suggested that the second time-saving game state will transition to the third time-saving game state after the special symbol play ends. In the example shown in Figure 116(B), the second effect includes eight effect patterns, patterns D1 to D8. In each of patterns D1 to D8, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss, the result of the battle is a victory for the ally character, thereby clearly indicating or suggesting that the game state will transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (big win or small win), the result of the battle is a draw, thereby clearly indicating or suggesting that it is a win. Of course, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (big win or small win), the result of the battle may be a victory for the ally character. In this case, the result of the jackpot lottery is indicated or suggested by the combination of symbols that stop, rather than the result of the battle.

In addition, in patterns D2, D4, and D6 to D8, after an attack and defense between an ally character and an enemy character, a button effect such as a long press effect or a rapid-fire effect (see Figures 110(A) and 110(B)) is executed, and then the result of the battle is displayed.

Furthermore, in patterns D7 and D8, after an ally character's preemptive attack hits an enemy character, a display is displayed indicating that the ally character has a chance (see Figure 116 (D)). This chance display is unique to the second effect, which is executed when the number of remaining time-saving plays in the second time-saving play state is less than the predetermined number of 50 plays, and is not displayed in the first effect. Of course, the chance display may also be displayed in the first effect.

The second effect patterns D1 to D8 are set, for example, based on the results of the jackpot lottery. Furthermore, patterns D7 and D8, which display a chance, are likely to be set when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, and are unlikely to be selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a miss for the time-saving symbol stop (a big win or a small win). This allows the player to understand that when a chance display is displayed, there is a high chance that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a miss for the time-saving symbol stop.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (big win or small win) that does not result in a time-saving symbol stop miss, an effect other than patterns D1 to D8 may be executed. In other words, patterns D1 to D8 may be set as exclusive effects when the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss.

<Steps S4203 to S4205>
Returning to the explanation of the procedure for the variable type (presentation pattern) setting process in Figure 115, if the second time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S4201: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 determines the number of unexecuted time-shortened games excluding the special game in question in the second time-shortened game state based on the value of the time-shortened game count counter (step S4203), and determines whether the remaining number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state is 50 or more (step S4204).

If the number of remaining time-saving play times in the second time-saving play state is 50 or more (step S4204: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the first effect (see Figure 116 (A)) from patterns C1 to C8 based on the results of the jackpot lottery (step S4205), and terminates the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

On the other hand, if the number of remaining time-saving play times in the second time-saving play state is less than 50 (step S4204: No), that is, if the number of remaining time-saving play times in the second time-saving play state is less than 50, the MPU 51 sets the second effect (see FIG. 116 (B)) from patterns D1 to D8 based on the result of the jackpot lottery (step S4206), and terminates the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

[Stop symbol combination setting process]
In the stop symbol combination setting process of this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, a time-saving symbol is set as the stop symbol combination, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a miss for the time-saving symbol stop (if it is a big win or a small win), a symbol other than the time-saving symbol is set. Here, Figure 117 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the stop symbol combination setting process executed in step S3819 of the command determination process of Figure 104.

<Step S4301>
In the stop symbol combination setting process of this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 117, the MPU 51 first determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S4301). If the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4302. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S4301: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss other than a time-saving symbol stop miss, a big win, or a small win, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4303.

<Step S4302>
If the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a time-saving symbol as the stop symbol combination. Here, in this embodiment, the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games set when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol stop miss is one type, 50 times. Therefore, the time-saving symbol displayed in the second time-saving game state only needs to be of at least one type, and may be of one type or multiple types.

<Step S4303>
If the result of the jackpot lottery is not a miss with a time-saving symbol stop (step S4301: No), and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss other than a miss with a time-saving symbol stop, a big win, or a small win, a combination of symbols other than the time-saving symbol is set as the stop symbol combination according to the result of the jackpot lottery. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss other than a miss with a time-saving symbol stop, a stop symbol combination according to the type of miss is set, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, a doublet is set as the stop symbol combination, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win, a miss symbol or a combination other than a doublet is set as the stop symbol combination.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the time-shortened game state, it is more important whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-shortened symbol stop after the special symbol game has been played more than a specific number of times (50 times) since the transition to the second time-shortened game state, which is a low-profit state, than whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-shortened symbol stop before the special symbol game has been played a specific number of times (50 times) since the transition to the second time-shortened game state, which is a low-profit state. This provides a new gameplay feature, which increases the player's attention and interest in the special symbol game in the second time-shortened game state, and improves the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, even in the second time-shortened game state presentation in which the second time-shortened game state, which is a low-profit state, is executed using the symbol display unit 341 or the like, the period from when the low-profit second time-shortened game state is transitioned to the low-profit second time-shortened game state until a specific number of special symbol games (50 times) have been played is more important. In other words, by executing different presentations between when the low-profit second time-shortened game state is transitioned to the low-profit second time-shortened game state and when a specific number of special symbol games (50 times) have been played and when a specific number of special symbol games have been played, it is possible to clearly indicate or suggest to the player the unimportant and important periods in the low-profit second time-shortened game state. During the unimportant period in the low-profit second time-shortened game state, a pinch presentation is executed as the first presentation to determine whether the low-profit second time-shortened game state will be maintained, while during the important period in the low-profit second time-shortened game state, a chance presentation is executed as the second presentation to determine whether the high-profit third time-shortened game state will be transitioned to. This will increase the player's attention and interest in the special game during the second time-saving game state, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of times special symbol play is performed after transitioning to the second time-shortened play state, in which the second time-shortened play state transitions between the first and second effects, matches the number of times transition to the third time-shortened play state becomes possible due to a missed time-shortened play state. In this way, the timing of the transition to the second time-shortened play state coincides with the timing at which transition to the third time-shortened play state, which is a highly profitable state. Therefore, based on the change from the first effect to the second effect in the second time-shortened play state, it becomes possible to understand that a transition to the third time-shortened play state, which is a highly profitable state, is possible. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game while noticing the second time-shortened play state transition from the first effect to the second effect, and, when the second effect is changed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while noticing the second effect, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to fourth embodiments described above are possible, to the extent applicable.

Sixth Embodiment
In the fourth embodiment described above, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-shortened game state, which is entered after the end of a type 1 jackpot game when the conditions for time-shortened game are met, is a miss in the time-shortened pattern stop, and the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-shortened games set for the miss in the time-shortened pattern stop is greater than the remaining number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state (when a predetermined condition is met), the player is entered into a third time-shortened game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-shortened game state in that it is possible to enter a type 2 jackpot game state via a small jackpot game state.

Furthermore, in the aforementioned fourth embodiment, the transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is executed after the specified condition is met and the special game play ends.

Furthermore, we have explained a case where the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving play times in the third time-saving play state is set to the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving play times set for a missed time-saving symbol stop.

In contrast, this embodiment is similar to the fourth embodiment described above in that, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-shortened game state is a miss for the time-shortened symbol stop, and the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-shortened game plays set for that miss is greater than the number of time-shortened game plays remaining in the second time-shortened game state, the game will transition to a third time-shortened game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-shortened game state.

Here, Figure 118 shows an example of the setting of the third time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 118(A), in this embodiment, the transition from the second time-shortened gaming state to the third time-shortened gaming state is executed after the number of times the special symbol game has been executed in the second time-shortened gaming state has reached a specified number. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the upper limit value K of the number of time-shortened games in the third time-shortened gaming state (specified number K) is set to a value (J-L) obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-shortened games L in the second time-shortened gaming state from the upper limit value J of the number of time-shortened games (specified number J) set for a time-shortened symbol stop miss that satisfies the specified condition. For example, as shown in FIG. 118(B), if the upper limit J (prescribed number J) of the number of time-saving games set when the time-saving symbol stops and the predetermined condition is met is 50, and the remaining number L of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is 20, then K = J - L = 50 - 20 = 30, and so the upper limit K (prescribed number K) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is set to 30.

In this embodiment, the transition from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state is executed after the number of times the special symbol game has been executed in the second time-shortened game state has reached a specified number. Here, as described above, the upper limit (specified number) of the number of times the time-shortened game can be executed in the second time-shortened game state is set to the number of times (the number of times the player's balls will not decrease) that can be executed based on the number of game balls (expected ball payout value) that the player can acquire through, for example, a 2R short-open time-shortened jackpot game. Therefore, by executing the transition from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state after the number of times the special symbol game has been executed in the second time-shortened game state has reached the specified number, it is possible to ensure a large number of games from the transition to the second time-shortened game state until the first Type 2 jackpot game executed based on a small win in the third time-shortened game state, and therefore it is possible to suppress a sudden increase in the number of balls issued or balls held after the transition to the second time-shortened game state. This makes it possible to suppress the gambling nature of the gaming machine 10.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving plays in the third time-saving play state is set to a value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-saving plays in the second time-saving play state from the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving plays set for a time-saving symbol stop miss that satisfies the specified condition. Therefore, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving plays in the third time-saving play state increases the higher the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving plays set for a time-saving symbol stop miss that satisfies the specified condition, and the lower the remaining number of time-saving plays at the time of execution of the special symbol game that satisfies the specified condition, making the situation in the third time-saving play state more favorable for the player. In other words, this embodiment provides a gameplay in which the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving plays set for a time-saving symbol stop miss that satisfies the specified condition and the timing at which the specified condition is satisfied are important, thereby increasing attention and interest in the game and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, when transitioning from the second time-shortening game state to the third time-shortening game state, the initial setting value for the number of time-shortening game plays in the third time-shortening game state is set to a value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-shortening game plays in the second time-shortening game state from the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-shortening game plays set for a time-shortening symbol stop miss that satisfies the specified condition. However, the initial setting value may be set to the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-shortening game plays set for a time-shortening symbol stop miss that satisfies the specified condition, or may be set to the remaining number of time-shortening game plays in the second time-shortening game state.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the fourth embodiment described above, with reference to Figure 119.

[Processing of main control device 4]
This embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in the procedure for transitioning to the third time-shortened game state in the game state transition process and the procedure for setting the number of time-shortened games in the third time-shortened game state. Here, FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for part of the game state transition process of this embodiment.

[Game status transition processing]
In the game state transition process of this embodiment, when the number of times that special symbol games are executed in the second time-shortened game state reaches a specified number of times, the game state transitions to the third time-shortened game state, and a process is executed in which the upper limit value of the number of time-shortened games in the third time-shortened game state is set to a value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-shortened games L in the second time-shortened game state from the upper limit value of the number of time-shortened games set for a time-shortened symbol stop miss that satisfies the specified condition.

<Step S4401>
In the game state transition process of this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 119, when the game state is the second time-shortened game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stopped display of the special symbol is neither a type 1 jackpot nor a small jackpot (step S3637: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4401). The third time-shortened game state transition flag is a flag indicating that a predetermined condition for transitioning from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state has been met, and is set to ON in step S3412 of the special symbol variation start process of Fig. 90.

If the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to on (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4402; if the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to off (step S4401: No), the MPU 51 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S4402 and S4403>
If the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to on (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the third time-shortened game state transition flag to off (step S4402) and determines whether the value of the time-shortened game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-shortened game plays in the second time-shortened game state, is 0 (step S4403).

If the value of the time-saving count counter is 0 (step S4403: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4404; if the value of the time-saving count counter is not 0 (step S4403: No), the MPU 51 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S4404 to S4406>
If the value of the time-shortening counter is 0 (step S4403: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the game state from the second time-shortening game state to the third time-shortening game state (step S4404).The MPU 51 then sets a third time-shortening game state flag indicating the third time-shortening game state to ON (step S4405), sets a second time-shortening game state flag indicating the second time-shortening game state to OFF (step S4406), and transitions to step S4407.

<Step S4407>
In step S4407, the MPU 51 sets an upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-shortened games in the third time-shortened game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-shortened games in the third time-shortened game state to a value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state (value of the time-shortened number counter) from the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-shortened games set for the time-shortened symbol stop miss that triggered the transition from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state.

In this embodiment, the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games when transitioning to the third time-saving game state after the end of a type 2 jackpot is set to a fixed number of 50, as in the fourth embodiment described above (see Figure 87 (F)). However, the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games when transitioning to the third time-saving game state after the end of a type 2 jackpot may be the same as the initial setting value set when transitioning from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, or may be set from multiple types of time-saving game counts that are set.

As described above, in this embodiment, the transition from the second time-shortened game state, which is a low-profit state, to the third time-shortened game state, which is a high-profit state, is executed after the number of times special gameplay is executed in the second time-shortened game state, which is a low-profit state, reaches a specified number. Here, as mentioned above, the upper limit (specified number) of the number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state, which is a low-profit state, is set to the number of times that can be executed (the number of times that the player's balls do not decrease) based on the game balls (expected ball payout value) that the player can acquire through, for example, a 2R short-open time-shortened jackpot game. Therefore, the transition from the second time-shortened game state (low-profit state) to the third time-shortened game state (high-profit state) is executed after the number of times special game plays in the second time-shortened game state (low-profit state) has reached a specified number, thereby ensuring a large number of games from the transition to the second time-shortened game state (low-profit state) until the first type 2 jackpot game executed based on a small jackpot in the third time-shortened game state (high-profit state), and thereby suppressing a sudden increase in balls played or balls held after the transition to the second time-shortened game state. This makes it possible to suppress the gambling nature of the gaming machine 10.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the transition condition to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state, is met, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is set to a value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state from the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for a time-saving symbol stop miss that satisfies the transition condition. Therefore, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state, becomes higher the higher the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for a time-saving symbol stop miss that satisfies the transition condition, and the fewer the remaining number of time-saving games at the time of execution of the special symbol game that satisfies the transition condition, making the situation in the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state, advantageous for the player. In other words, in this embodiment, gameplay is provided in which the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving gameplays set in response to a time-saving symbol stop miss that satisfies the transition condition, and the timing at which the predetermined condition is met, are important, which increases attention and interest in the game, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to fifth embodiments described above are possible, to the extent applicable.

Seventh Embodiment
In the fourth embodiment described above, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-shortened game state, which is entered after the end of a type 1 jackpot game when the conditions for time-shortened game are met, is a miss in the time-shortened pattern stop, and the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-shortened games set for the miss in the time-shortened pattern stop is greater than the remaining number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state (when a predetermined condition is met), the player is entered into a third time-shortened game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-shortened game state in that it is possible to enter a type 2 jackpot game state via a small jackpot game state.

Furthermore, in the aforementioned fourth embodiment, a case was described in which the probability of a small win (approximately 1/1) in the big win lottery, which is triggered by the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the second winning slot 315, is set higher than the probability of a loss (see Figures 87(A) and 87(B)).

In contrast, this embodiment is similar to the fourth embodiment described above in that, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-shortened game state is a miss for the time-shortened symbol stop, and the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-shortened game plays set for that miss is greater than the number of time-shortened game plays remaining in the second time-shortened game state, the game will transition to a third time-shortened game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-shortened game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, contrary to the fourth embodiment described above, the probability of losing in the big prize lottery that is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second prize slot 315 in the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state is set higher than the probability of winning a small prize; for example, the probability of losing is set to approximately 1/1.

In this embodiment, the probability of losing the jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the game ball 99 entering the second winning slot 315 in the second time-shortened game state, is set higher than the probability of winning a small jackpot, making it easier to transition to the third time-shortened game state than the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above. On the other hand, the probability of losing the jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the game ball 99 entering the second winning slot 315 in the third time-shortened game state, is set higher than the probability of winning a small jackpot, making it more difficult to execute a type 2 jackpot game than the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above. Therefore, in this embodiment, after transitioning to the third time-shortened game state, the gameplay is added, in which the player must win a small jackpot in the jackpot lottery. This increases attention and interest in the game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

This embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the fourth embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 120 to 123.

[Processing of main control device 4]
In this embodiment, the allocation of the jackpot lottery, which is executed in response to the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the second winning slot 315, differs from the fourth embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 120 is a diagram showing an example of a second special symbol jackpot win/loss table of this embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 120(A) is a diagram showing an example of a short-open second special symbol jackpot win/loss table in a state other than the third time-shortened gaming state (normal gaming state, first time-shortened gaming state, and second time-shortened gaming state), and FIG. 120(B) is a diagram showing an example of a second special symbol jackpot win/loss table in the long-open third time-shortened gaming state.

As shown in Figure 120 (A), the short-release second special chart jackpot win/loss table of this embodiment is set commonly for six game setting values 1 to 6. In this short-release second special chart jackpot win/loss table, the lottery result for the jackpot lottery is selected as a jackpot, small win, or miss, depending on the value (random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1. In other words, the second special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 during short release differs from the first special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the first winning slot 314 in that the lottery result includes a small win that activates the feather role device 83 (see Figures 82 to 84). Specifically, in the short-open second special chart jackpot win/loss table, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 ranging from 0 to 65,535, 0 to 205 correspond to a jackpot, 206 to 207 correspond to a small win, and other random numbers correspond to a loss. In other words, in the jackpot lottery that is executed when the electric device 315b is short-opened and the game ball 99 enters the second winning slot 315, the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/318.1, the small win probability is set to approximately 1/32,768, and the loss probability is set to approximately 1/1.003, meaning that the vast majority of jackpot lottery results are losses.

As shown in Figure 120 (B), the long release second special chart jackpot win/loss table is set commonly for six game setting values 1 to 6. In the long release second special chart jackpot win/loss table, the lottery result for the jackpot lottery is selected as a jackpot, small win, or miss depending on the value (random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1. In other words, the second special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 during long release differs from the first special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning slot 314 in that the lottery result includes a small win that activates the feather role device 83 (see Figures 82 to 84). Specifically, in the long-open second special chart jackpot win/loss table, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 ranging from 0 to 65,535, 0 to 205 correspond to a jackpot, 206 to 65,529 correspond to a small win, and other random numbers correspond to a loss. In other words, in the second special chart jackpot lottery, which is triggered when the electric device 315b is long-opened and the game ball 99 enters the second winning slot 315, the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/318.1, the small win probability is set to approximately 1/30, and the loss probability is set to approximately 1/1.038, meaning that the vast majority of jackpot lottery results are losses.

In this embodiment, one common table for determining whether a second special symbol is a jackpot for the short opening and one common table for determining whether a second special symbol is a jackpot for the long opening are provided for six game setting values, but one or both of the tables for determining whether a second special symbol is a jackpot for the short opening and the one common table for determining whether a second special symbol is a jackpot for the long opening may be set for each game setting value.

[Processing of the voice and lamp control device 5]
The processing of the voice lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is the same as that in the aforementioned fourth embodiment, but the second time-shortened game state presentation and the third time-shortened game state presentation are different from those in the aforementioned fourth embodiment.

<Second time-saving game state presentation>
The second time-shortened game state presentation is executed as a mission presentation in which an ally character acquires a special move, and clearly indicates that the ally character's acquisition of the special move will result in a transition to the third time-shortened game state. Here, FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example screen on the symbol display unit 341 during the second time-shortened game state presentation. Specifically, FIG. 121(A) is an example screen at the start of a special move acquisition mission, FIG. 121(B) is an example screen during the mission challenge, FIG. 121(C) is an example screen when the special move acquisition is successful (mission successful), and FIG. 121(D) is an example screen when the special move acquisition fails (mission failed).

As shown in Figure 121 (A), at the start of the special move acquisition mission, a text image of the mission content, "Destroy the large rock and acquire the special move," and a text image of the mission content, "Enter RUSH by acquiring the special move," which is acquired upon success, are displayed.

As shown in Figure 121 (B), during a mission challenge, an image of an ally character punching a large rock and the words "Deadly Punch!" are displayed.

As shown in Figure 121 (C), if the special move is successfully acquired (mission successful), an image of the text "Special move acquired" indicating that the special move has been acquired, an image of the text "Entering RUSH" indicating that the player will enter RUSH, and an image of an ally character smiling due to the acquisition of the special move are displayed.

As shown in Figure 121 (D), if a player fails to acquire a special move (mission failure), the text images "Failed" and "Special move not acquired" are displayed to indicate that the player failed to acquire the special move, along with an image of an ally character looking sad due to the failure to acquire the special move.

<Third time-saving game state presentation>
The third time-shortened game state presentation is executed as a battle presentation between an ally character and an enemy character, and when the ally character defeats the enemy character, it is made clear that the result of the big win lottery is a small win. Furthermore, in the third time-shortened game state presentation, when the ally character attacks with a special move, the result of the big win lottery is determined to be a small win.

Here, Figure 122(A) is a diagram showing an example of a pattern of the third time-saving game state presentation when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, and Figure 122(B) is a diagram showing an example of a pattern of the third time-saving game state presentation when the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (big win or small win).

As shown in Figures 122 (A) and 122 (B), the third time-shortened play state presentation (miss third time-shortened play state presentation and hit third time-shortened play state presentation) is executed as a battle presentation between the main character and the enemy character. In the third time-shortened play state presentation (miss third time-shortened play state presentation and small hit third time-shortened play state presentation), one of the ally character and enemy character attacks, and either the attack of one character is defended by the other character, or the attack of one character hits the other character, and ultimately the result of the battle is displayed, indicating whether the third time-shortened play state will continue.

As shown in FIG. 122(A), the miss third time-limited play state effect is an effect that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-limited play state effect is a miss, and it clearly indicates or suggests that after the special game ends, a small jackpot game will not be executed and the third time-limited play state will be maintained. Here, in the third time-limited play state, the majority of jackpot lottery results are misses (1 in 1.038) (see FIG. 120(B)). Therefore, the miss third time-limited play state effect is executed in the majority of the third time-limited play state. In the example shown in FIG. 122(A), the miss third time-limited play state effect includes eight effect patterns, patterns E1 to E8, and in each of patterns E1 to E8, the result of the battle to determine whether the third time-limited play state will continue is ultimately displayed as "continue," clearly indicating or suggesting that the third time-limited play state will be maintained without transitioning to a small jackpot play state (see FIG. 123(B)).

Furthermore, in patterns E2, E4, and E6-E8, after an attack and defense between an ally character and an enemy character, a button effect such as a long press effect or a rapid-fire effect (see Figure 123 (A)) is executed, and then the result of the battle is displayed as "Continue."

As shown in Figure 122 (B), the winning third time-limited play state presentation is a presentation that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-limited play state presentation is a win (jackpot or small win), and it clearly indicates or suggests that a jackpot play or small win play will be executed after the special game play ends. In the example shown in Figure 122 (B), the winning third time-limited play state presentation includes eight presentation patterns, F1 to F8, and in each of patterns F1 to F8, the result of the battle, which ultimately determines whether the third time-limited play state will continue or not, is displayed as "win," thereby clearly indicating or suggesting that a transition will be made to a jackpot play state or small win play state (see Figure 123 (C)).

Furthermore, in patterns F2, F4, and F6 to F8, after an attack and defense between an ally character and an enemy character, a button effect such as a long press effect or a rapid-fire effect (see Figure 123 (A)) is executed, and then the result of the battle is displayed as "Victory."

As described above, in this embodiment, the probability of losing the jackpot lottery triggered by the game ball 99 entering the second winning slot 315 in the second time-shortened game state, which is a low-profit state, is set higher than the probability of winning a small jackpot. This makes it easier to transition to the third time-shortened game state, which is a high-profit state, than the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above. On the other hand, the probability of losing the jackpot lottery triggered by the game ball 99 entering the second winning slot 315 in the third time-shortened game state, which is a high-profit state, is set higher than the probability of winning a small jackpot. This makes it more difficult to execute a type 2 jackpot game than the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above. Therefore, in this embodiment, after transitioning to the third time-shortened game state, the gameplay feature of winning a small jackpot in the jackpot lottery is added. This can increase attention and interest in the game, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to sixth embodiments described above are possible, to the extent applicable.

In addition, in the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, the probability of winning a normal game is set to be the same in all of the first to third time-saving game states, but the probability of winning a normal game may be set to differ depending on the type of time-saving game state.

In addition, in the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, a time-saving symbol stop miss is included as a type of miss in the jackpot lottery results in the normal game state, but a time-saving symbol stop miss may be omitted as a type of miss in the jackpot lottery results in the normal game state. In this case, the first time-saving game state is omitted as a time-saving game state.

In addition, in the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, a single short-opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table and a single long-opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table were provided in common for six game setting values, but one or both of the short-opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table and the long-opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table may be set for each game setting value. It is also possible to set a single second special chart jackpot win/loss table by sharing the short-opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table and the long-opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table.

In addition, in the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) on the number of time-saving games was set in accordance with the type of special symbol fluctuation pattern (variable display time), but the upper limit (prescribed number of times) on the number of time-saving games does not have to correspond to the type of special symbol fluctuation pattern (variable display time). In addition, in the time-saving symbol stop miss type allocation table of this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, the time-saving symbol stop miss is always obtained, but it is also possible to make it so that some of the cases when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss are time-saving symbol stop misses.

Furthermore, in the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, if the subtraction value of the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state from the upper limit (prescribed number) of time-saving games set for a missed time-saving symbol stop in the second time-saving game state is less than 0, the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is maintained unchanged; however, if the subtraction value is less than 0, the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state may be changed. For example, the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state may be changed to the sum of the number of time-saving games set for a missed time-saving symbol stop, or may be changed to (or replaced with) the number of time-saving games set for a missed time-saving symbol stop.

Furthermore, in the small prize games of the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, the execution time of the movable wing operation game (operation time of the movable wing 832) is set to the same regardless of the type of time-saving game state in which the second special jackpot lottery is executed. Of course, the execution time of the movable wing operation game (operation time of the movable wing 832) can be made different depending on the type of time-saving game state in which the second special jackpot lottery is executed. For example, it is conceivable to set the execution time of the movable wing operation game for the small prize game executed based on the second special jackpot lottery in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state to be shorter than the execution time of the movable wing operation game for the small prize game executed based on the second special jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in the first small prize game in the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, the operation timing of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather device 83 was set to the first opening, thereby preventing the game ball 99 from entering the V prize opening 833. However, some or all of the operation timing of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 may be set to the movable feather operation game. Specifically, in the first small prize game, the operation timing of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather device 83 may be set to straddle the first opening and the movable feather operation game, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V prize opening 833. Furthermore, in the first small prize game, all of the operation timing of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 may be set to the movable feather operation game, and the operation time of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 may be set to a short time (for example, 0.02 seconds to 0.1 seconds) to make it impossible or difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V prize opening 833. Here, the effect of making it impossible for the game ball 99 to enter the V prize opening 833 in the first small prize game is as described above, but on the other hand, if it is impossible for the game ball 99 to enter the V prize opening 833 in the first small prize game, there is a concern that the player's attention and interest in the small prize game will decrease. On the other hand, if it is made difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V winning hole 833 during the first small win game, there is a possibility that the game ball 99 will enter the V winning hole 833 during the first small win game, which prevents the player's attention and interest in the small win game from declining.

Furthermore, in the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-shortened game state is a miss for the time-shortened symbol stop and the number of time-shortened games set for the miss is equal to or less than the remaining number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state, the number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state remains unchanged. However, for example, the number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state may be determined by adding the number of time-shortened games set for the miss to the remaining number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state. This increases the number of jackpot lotteries used to determine whether to transition from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state, thereby maintaining for a longer period the possibility of transitioning to the third time-shortened game state, which is advantageous to the player. This can increase attention and interest in the game and improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, if the number of time-saving plays (prescribed number) selected for a time-saving symbol stop miss is greater than the remaining number of time-saving plays in the third time-saving play state, the number of time-saving plays is reset to the number of time-saving plays (prescribed number). However, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving play state is a time-saving symbol stop miss, the number of time-saving plays may be reset regardless of the remaining number of time-saving plays in the third time-saving play state if the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving play state is a time-saving symbol stop miss. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving play state is a time-saving symbol stop miss, the number of time-saving plays selected for a time-saving symbol stop miss may be changed to the number of time-saving plays (prescribed number) selected for a time-saving symbol stop miss, regardless of whether it is greater or less than the remaining number of time-saving plays in the third time-saving play state. Of course, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-shortened game state is a miss for the time-shortened symbol stop, the number of time-shortened games (prescribed number) selected for the miss for the time-shortened symbol stop may be maintained without resetting the remaining number of time-shortened games in the third time-shortened game state, regardless of whether it is more or less than the remaining number of time-shortened games in the third time-shortened game state.

Eighth Embodiment
As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine has a "starting ball entry" as a starting condition, "variable play" as a play operation, a "game control unit" as a play means, a "display" as a predetermined display means, a "profit play state" as a predetermined play state, and an "award value for play results" as a play value.

The start condition may be any trigger that initiates a game that is executed by various actions. Examples of start conditions include triggering the execution of a variable display to notify the results of a predetermined lottery. Specifically, start conditions that can achieve the purpose of this invention include the entry of a game ball into various winning slots, the execution of a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined winning slot, the passage (entry) of a game ball through a predetermined area, the execution of a predetermined lottery when a game ball passes (entries) through a predetermined area, the entry of a game ball into first winning slot 314, the execution of a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters first winning slot 314, the entry of a game ball into second winning slot 315, the execution of a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters second winning slot 315, the passage of a game ball through through gate 317, the execution of a regular lottery when a game ball passes through through gate 317, and any combination thereof.

The game operation may be a game executed by various operations. Examples of game operations that can achieve the purpose of this invention include, for example, a big win game or a small win game in which a predetermined winning slot such as variable winning slot 316 is opened, a normal winning game executed by the variable display of a normal symbol on normal symbol display unit 361, a normal winning game in which electric device 315b provided on second winning slot 315 is activated, a first special symbol game executed by the variable display of a first special symbol on first special symbol display unit 362, a second special symbol game executed by the variable display of a second special symbol on second special symbol display unit 363, and any combination thereof.

The gaming means may be any means capable of controlling the operations required for various games. As long as the intent of the present invention can be realized, examples of gaming means include an MPU 41 that controls the display of changing normal symbols on the normal symbol display unit 361, the display of changing first special symbols on the first special symbol display unit 362, the display of changing second special symbols on the second special symbol display unit 363, the display of the number of reserved first special symbols N on the first special symbol reserved number display unit 364, the display of the number of reserved second special symbols M on the second special symbol reserved number display unit 365, the operation of the electric device 315b, the operation of the opening/closing door 319 of the variable winning opening 316, etc.; an MPU 51 that controls the display of changing first decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol and second decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol on the symbol display unit 341, the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, and the illumination unit 27, and various effects executed by the speaker 26 and illumination unit 27; and any combination thereof, as long as the gaming means can achieve the intent of the present invention.

The predetermined display means may be any means capable of performing predetermined displays, such as displaying changing symbols in various games. Examples of predetermined display means that can achieve the spirit of the present invention include a main display unit 36 equipped with a normal symbol display unit 361, a first special symbol display unit 362, a second special symbol display unit 363, etc., a symbol display unit 341 that displays changing decorative symbols, or any combination thereof.

The predetermined game state may be any game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state in some way. Examples of predetermined game states that can achieve the purpose of this invention include a jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state in which movable members such as the opening/closing door 319 that are not activated in the normal game state are activated; a time-saving game state (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, and time-saving game state c described below) that is a high-frequency support mode in which the electric device 315b is more likely to be activated than in the normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode, making it easier for game balls to enter the second winning slot 315; a probability-changing game state in which the probability of a jackpot is higher than in the normal game state; and any combination thereof.

The gaming value may be any value that is significant in the progression of the game. Examples of gaming value include direct or indirect value related to the acquisition of gaming balls or predetermined lotteries, value related to effects executed by the symbol display unit 341, or any combination thereof. Specifically, as long as the intent of the present invention can be realized, gaming value may include, for example, the execution of a jackpot game in which a large number of balls can be expected to be won (opening of the variable winning slot 316), the execution of a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game, the execution of a regular winning game in a time-saving game state (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, and time-saving game state c described below) (long opening of the second winning slot 315), the execution of a regular winning game in a normal game state (short opening of the second winning slot 315), and so on. These include the execution of a regular winning lottery to determine whether or not to execute a regular winning game in a time-saving game state (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, and time-saving game state c described below), the execution of a regular winning lottery in the normal game state, transition to a time-saving game state (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, and time-saving game state c described below), the execution of an effect with a high probability of winning a jackpot on the symbol display unit 341, an effect that confirms a jackpot, an effect that confirms a premium, and any combination thereof.

Here, in the first embodiment described above, a gaming machine configured as a loop probability variable machine was described in which the first special symbol game as a variable game triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning slot 314 as a starting ball entry and the second special symbol game as a variable game triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning slot 315 as a starting ball entry are not executed in parallel (overlapping), and the second special symbol game is executed in priority over the first special symbol game.

In addition, because the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above is configured as a loop probability variable machine, after the end of a jackpot game, it transitions to a time-saving game state (so-called time-saving game state A), which is a more advantageous game state than the normal game state, and a jackpot is guaranteed in that time-saving game state.

In addition, the gaming machine may be configured so that, when a specific symbol (a so-called time-saving symbol) displayed on a display such as the main display unit 36 or the symbol display unit 341 fails to stop, it transitions to a time-saving gaming state (a so-called C time-saving gaming state) as a reward for the special symbol game result.

In gaming machines, it is important to increase the player's interest and attention to the game, thereby enhancing their motivation to play. In other words, when adopting a configuration that transitions to time-saving game state C as a reward for the special game result when a time-saving symbol stops and fails, it is important to provide new gameplay features that can increase the player's interest and attention to the game, thereby enhancing their motivation to play.

In contrast, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is a simultaneous variable game machine in which a first special symbol game as a variable game in which the first special symbol game is changed based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning slot 314 as the starting ball entry, and a second special symbol game as a variable game in which the second special symbol game is changed based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning slot 315 as the starting ball entry, can be executed in parallel (in parallel) on the main display unit 36 as the display device under the control of the MPU 41 as the game control unit. Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment transitions to a time-saving game state (time-saving game state a) as a profitable game state more advantageous than the normal game state after the end of a jackpot game, but an upper limit (maximum number of time-saving games a) is set for the number of special symbol games as variable games in the time-saving game state a, and is configured as an ST machine that transitions to the normal game state when the maximum number of time-saving game games a has been executed in the time-saving game state a. In this embodiment, as described below, the probability of winning in the time-saving game state A, which is a profitable game state, is 1/150, the maximum number of time-saving game states A is set to 200, and the expected probability of winning in the time-saving game state A is 73.8%.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game as a variable game can be triggered by a miss in the time-saving symbol stop display on the main display unit 36 as a display device, and the game can transition to the time-saving c game state as a value awarded for the special symbol game result. Like the time-saving a game state, the time-saving c game state has an upper limit (maximum number of time-saving c games) on the number of special symbol games, but the maximum number of time-saving c games is set to a number that essentially guarantees a jackpot in the time-saving c game state. In other words, the time-saving c game state is a profitable game state that is more advantageous than the time-saving a game state in which a jackpot is not guaranteed, in that a jackpot is essentially guaranteed. Note that, in this embodiment, as described below, the jackpot probability in the time-saving c game state as a profitable game state is 1/150, the maximum number of time-saving a games is set to 2000, and the expected probability of a jackpot in the time-saving c game state is 99.9998%.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a time-saving symbol is displayed as a static symbol on the main display unit 36 as a display in the normal game state, a transition to the time-saving game state c is made as the value awarded for the special game result, whereas if a time-saving symbol is displayed as a static symbol on the main display unit 36 as a display in the time-saving game state a, the time-saving game state a is maintained without a transition to the time-saving game state c. Note that even if a time-saving symbol is displayed as a static symbol on the main display unit 36 as a display in the time-saving game state b or time-saving game state c described below, the current game state, the time-saving game state b or time-saving game state c, is maintained.

In addition, this embodiment includes a gaming machine capable of executing a second special symbol game as a variable game for a maximum number of time-saving games (a variable display time of the first special symbol on the main display unit 36 as a display device) when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game as a variable game started in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop. In other words, the gaming machine according to this embodiment can execute a second special symbol game as a variable game for a maximum number of time-saving games (a variable game) during the execution of the first special symbol game that notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game as a variable game started in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop. Furthermore, if a second special symbol game is played as a variable game for a maximum of a number of time-saving games during the execution of a first special symbol game, which indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game as a variable game started in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, the game state transitions from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state. As a result, the first special symbol game as a variable game started in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state ends in the normal game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, the value awarded for the result of the first special symbol game started in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state can be transitioned to the time-saving game state c, in which a jackpot is essentially guaranteed.

In this way, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, when a first special symbol game is started in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state that transitions to the normal game state by executing a special symbol game as a variable game up to the maximum number of times (the number of time-saving games a), if the result of the jackpot lottery for that first special symbol game is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, the game will transition to the time-saving game state c, in which a jackpot is substantially guaranteed, which is more advantageous than the normal game state and the time-saving game state a, provided that the first special symbol game ends after transitioning from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state. Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, players can enjoy playing while hoping that the first special symbol game, in which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable game, will begin in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state that is transitioned to after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a first special symbol game in which a time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed is started in the time-saving game state a, the second special symbol game is executed the maximum number of times, which is the end condition for the time-saving game state a, before the first special symbol game ends, so that the game state transitions from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state while the first special symbol game is being executed, i.e., after the transition from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state, the first special symbol for the first special symbol game is stopped and displayed, and a new game feature is realized in which a game ball enters the second winning slot 315 to execute the second special symbol game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game as a variable game started in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed as the value awarded for the special symbol game result. In other words, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state, it is also possible to expect that a jackpot game will be executed if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game as a variable game started during the execution of the first special symbol game as a variable game is a jackpot. In other words, in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state, the same interest as in the time-saving game state a of conventional gaming machines is maintained, in that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery can be expected to be a jackpot. In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when a second special symbol game is executed as a variable game during the execution of a first special symbol game as a variable game in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a miss, the player can continue to expect a transition to the time-saving game state c, in which a jackpot is essentially guaranteed, and if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a jackpot, the player can enjoy the benefit of the jackpot game being executed as the value awarded for the second special symbol game result. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when a second special symbol game is executed as a variable game during the execution of a first special symbol game as a variable game in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state, whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a jackpot or a miss, the player can expect the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery to be a jackpot, just like in the time-saving game state a of conventional gaming machines, and can enjoy the benefit according to the lottery result, realizing a new gameplay.

As described above, the gaming machine of this embodiment utilizes the time-saving game state a, which is a profitable game state to which the player is shifted after a jackpot game ends and which allows the player to play a maximum number of time-saving games, the time-saving game state c, which is essentially guaranteed to result in a jackpot and which can be shifted to when a time-saving symbol stop is not displayed, and the characteristic of a simultaneous variable game machine in which the first and second special symbols can change simultaneously on the main display unit 36 as a display device, to achieve the aforementioned new gameplay that increases the enjoyment of the game, while also maintaining the gameplay of the time-saving game state a of conventional gaming machines in which the jackpot game is expected to be played based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a jackpot.

This embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 124 to 155.

[Gameplay of the gaming machine 10]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured as a so-called simultaneous variation machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 (see FIG. 126) of the main display section 36 and the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363 (see FIG. 126) of the main display section 36 can be executed simultaneously. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game can be executed in parallel at the same time. And, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, new gameplay that utilizes the characteristics of a simultaneous variation machine and that enhances the enjoyment of the game is realized.

Here, Figure 124 is a diagram showing the game flow of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment. Below, the game flow of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figure 124.

As shown in FIG. 124, the gaming machine 10 can execute a normal gaming state, a jackpot gaming state, and a time-saving gaming state.

The normal gaming state is a low-frequency support mode in which the electric device 315b provides low support for the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315. In this low-frequency support mode, the electric device 315b operates less frequently (probability of operation) than in the high-frequency support mode (see Figure 12 (A)), and the operation time when the electric device 315b operates is set to be shorter (see Figure 12 (C)). In other words, the normal gaming state is a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315.

The jackpot game state is entered in the normal game state or the time-limited game state after the special symbol game in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot has ended (after the special symbol has stopped and been displayed), and the jackpot game is executed. In the jackpot game, a predetermined number of rounds of play are executed in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened by operating the opening/closing door 319, making it possible to win a large number of game balls. Therefore, the jackpot game state is an advantageous state for the player compared to the normal game state or the time-limited game state in that a large number of game balls can be won.

The time-saving game state is a high-frequency support mode in which the electric device 315b provides high support for the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315. In this high-frequency support mode, the electric device 315b operates more frequently (probability of operation) than in the low-frequency support mode (see Figure 12 (B)), and the operation time of the electric device 315b when it operates is set to be longer (see Figure 12 (D)). In other words, the time-saving game state is a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot 315. Therefore, the time-saving game state is a more advantageous game state than the normal game state in that it increases the chances of winning a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, an upper limit is set on the number of times (number of time-saving games) that special game (time-saving game) can be played in the time-saving game state. Furthermore, in this embodiment, time-saving game states A, B, and C are set as time-saving game states, each with a different transition trigger.

The time-saving game state a is the game state to which the player transitions after a jackpot game ends. In the time-saving game state a, the maximum number of times that the player can play time-saving games (special symbol games) (number of time-saving games) is set to 200. Meanwhile, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is set to 1/150 (see FIG. 128(A)), so the probability of winning a jackpot in the time-saving game state a is approximately 73.8%, and there is a high probability of winning a jackpot in the time-saving game state a. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state a, the probability of not winning a jackpot is approximately 26.2%, so winning a jackpot in the time-saving game state a is not guaranteed. Furthermore, if the maximum number of special symbol games (200 in this embodiment) are played in the time-saving game state a without winning a jackpot, the game will transition to the regular game state, which is a low-frequency support mode.

The b time-saving game state is a game state to which the player enters when a specified number of special game plays have been performed in the normal game state without winning a jackpot. The specified number of times to enter the b time-saving game state is selected, for example, from a range of 2.5 to 3.0 times the denominator of the jackpot probability. In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability is 1/150, the specified number of times to enter the b time-saving game state is selected from a range of 375 to 450 times, and in one example is set to 400 times.

On the other hand, in the b time-shortened game state, the upper limit on the number of time-shortened games (special symbol games) that can be played (number of time-shortened games) is set to a number that essentially guarantees winning a jackpot in the b time-shortened game state. In this embodiment, the upper limit on the number of time-shortened games (special symbol games) that can be played (number of time-shortened games) in the b time-shortened game state is set to 2000. On the other hand, in this embodiment, because the jackpot probability is set to 1/150 (see Figure 128 (A)), the probability of winning a jackpot in the b time-shortened game state is approximately 99.9998%, and a jackpot is essentially guaranteed in the b time-shortened game state.

In addition, if the maximum number of special game plays (2000 in this embodiment) is played without winning a jackpot in time-saving game state b, the game will transition to the regular game state, which is a low-frequency support mode, just as in time-saving game state a. However, since a jackpot is essentially guaranteed in time-saving game state b, a transition from time-saving game state b to the regular game state is essentially impossible.

In addition, the upper limit on the number of times (number of times) time-shortened games (special symbol games) that can be played in the b time-shortened game state (number of times time-shortened games) can be set to a number that essentially guarantees winning a jackpot in the b time-shortened game state, and is not limited to 2000 times. Of course, it is also possible to set the upper limit on the number of times (number of times time-shortened games) that can be played in the b time-shortened game state (special symbol games) that can be played to a number that essentially guarantees winning a jackpot in the b time-shortened game state.

The time-saving c game state is a game state to which a player enters the normal game state when a time-saving symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the first special symbol display section 362 (see FIG. 126) of the main display section 36. In other words, regardless of the time of the jackpot lottery notified as a game result of the first special symbol game or the game state at the start of the first special symbol game, a game state to which a player enters the time-saving c game state is entered when the game state at the end of the first special symbol game notifying that the result of the jackpot lottery as a game result is a time-saving symbol stop miss (see FIG. 128 (C) and FIG. 128 (D)), which is a type of miss, is the normal game state, which has the lowest profit. In other words, a transition to the time-saving c game state is a profit awarded in the normal game state, which has the lowest profit.

In addition, in the time-shortened game state c, the upper limit on the number of times (number of time-shortened games) that can be played (special game) is set to a number that essentially guarantees winning a jackpot in the time-shortened game state c, just like the time-shortened game state b. In this embodiment, the upper limit on the number of times (number of time-shortened games) that can be played (special game) in the time-shortened game state c is set to 2000, just like the time-shortened game state b, and the probability of winning a jackpot in the time-shortened game state c is approximately 99.9998%, just like the time-shortened game state b, so that a jackpot is essentially guaranteed in the time-shortened game state c.

In addition, if the maximum number of special game plays (2000 in this embodiment) is played without winning a jackpot in time-saving game state c, the game will transition to the normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode, just like time-saving game state a and time-saving game state b. Since a jackpot is essentially guaranteed in time-saving game state c, transitioning from time-saving game state c to the normal game state is essentially impossible.

On the other hand, even if a time-saving symbol is displayed as a static symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 (see FIG. 126), if the game state in which the time-saving symbol is displayed as a static symbol is a jackpot game state or a time-saving game state (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, or time-saving game state c), which are more advantageous than the normal game state, the game will not transition to time-saving game state c, and the game state in which the time-saving symbol is displayed as a static symbol will be maintained. For example, if the time-saving symbol is displayed as a static symbol in the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state will be maintained; if the time-saving symbol is displayed as a static symbol in time-saving game state a, time-saving game state a will be maintained; if the time-saving symbol is displayed as a static symbol in time-saving game state b, time-saving game state b will be maintained; and if the time-saving symbol is displayed as a static symbol in time-saving game state c, time-saving game state c will be maintained.

As mentioned above, in the gaming machine 10, the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 (see FIG. 126) and the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 (see FIG. 126) can be executed simultaneously. Therefore, the game state may differ between when the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 starts to change and when it stops changing.

Here, Figures 125(A) and 125(B) are timing charts showing an example of the end timing of a first special game started in the time-saving game state a. Note that in Figures 125(A) and 125(B), the pulse-like rectangular wave corresponds to one special game, and the rectangular wave for the second special game executed in the time-saving game state a is shown without the number. As shown in Figure 125(A), when the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 (see Figure 126) starts in the time-saving game state a, if the variable display time of the first special symbol in the variable display (the execution time of the first special symbol game) is shorter than the total time for which the second special symbol game is executed for the remaining number of time-saving game plays, the first special symbol game ends in the time-saving game state a. Therefore, even if the first special symbol game notifies the player that the time-saving symbol stop has been missed as a result of the jackpot lottery, the time-saving game state a will be maintained even after the first special symbol game has ended. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 125(B), when the first special symbol display unit 362 (see FIG. 126) starts displaying the first special symbol in the time-saving game state a, if the display time of the first special symbol in the display (the execution time of the first special symbol game) is longer than the total time for which the second special symbol game is executed for the remaining number of time-saving games up to the upper limit, the game state will have transitioned from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state, and the first special symbol game will end in the normal game state. Therefore, if the first special symbol game notifies the player that the time-saving symbol stop has been missed as a result of the jackpot lottery, the time-saving game state c will be transitioned to after the first special symbol game has ended.

In this embodiment, as described above, when the variable display of the first special symbol begins in the time-saving game state a, and the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game in which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the time-saving game state a is a miss, the time-saving game state a is maintained, and in this case, a benefit may be awarded to the player. As a result, even if the first special symbol game in response to a miss in the time-saving symbol stops ends in the time-saving game state a, the time-saving game state a is maintained without transitioning to the time-saving game state c. This makes it possible to alleviate such discomfort by awarding a benefit, and also to increase the player's interest in the game, preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Here, possible benefits that can be awarded to the player if the time-saving game state a is maintained when the time-saving symbol stop is not successful include, for example, the opening of the variable winning slot 316 by operating the opening/closing door 319, the opening of the second winning slot 315 by operating the electric device 315b, the execution of a small win game, the display of a premium image on the symbol display unit 341, the release of a premium song as a song that can be output from the speaker 26 during a big win game, and the explicit or suggested game setting values that determine the probability of a big win (see Figures 9 (A) and 9 (B)).

In this way, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, when the first special symbol game is started in the time-saving game state a, which transitions to the normal game state after the maximum number of special symbol games have been played, and the result of the jackpot lottery for that first special symbol game is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, the game will transition to the time-saving game state c, which is more advantageous than the normal game state and the time-saving game state a, and in which a jackpot is essentially guaranteed, provided that the first special symbol game ends after transitioning from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, players can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the first special symbol game, in which the time-saving symbol is displayed in a stopped state, will begin in the time-saving game state a, which transitions to after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a first special symbol game in which a time-saving symbol is displayed in a stopped state is started in the time-saving game state a, the second special symbol game is executed the maximum number of times, which is the end condition for the time-saving game state a, before the first special symbol game ends, so that the game state transitions from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state while the first special symbol game is being executed, i.e., after the transition from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state, the first special symbol for the first special symbol game is displayed in a stopped state, and a new game feature is realized in which a game ball enters the second winning slot 315 to execute the second special symbol game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game started in the time-saving game state a is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed. That is, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, in the time-saving game state a, it is expected that the jackpot game will be executed if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game started during the execution of the first special symbol game is a jackpot. In other words, in the time-saving game state a, the same interest as in the time-saving game state a of conventional gaming machines is maintained, in that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery can be expected to be a jackpot. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, when a second special symbol game is executed during execution of a first special symbol game in the time-saving game state a, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a miss, the player can continue to expect a transition to the time-saving game state c, where a jackpot is essentially guaranteed, and if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a jackpot, the player can enjoy the benefits of the jackpot game being executed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, when a second special symbol game is executed during execution of a first special symbol game in the time-saving game state a, whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a jackpot or a miss, the player can expect the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery to be a jackpot, just as in the time-saving game state a of conventional gaming machines, and can enjoy the benefits corresponding to the lottery result, realizing new gameplay characteristics.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment utilizes the time-saving game state a, which is entered after the end of a jackpot game and allows the player to play a maximum number of time-saving games, the time-saving game state c, which is entered when a time-saving symbol stop is not displayed and in which a jackpot is essentially guaranteed, and the characteristic of a simultaneous variable game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can change simultaneously, to achieve the aforementioned new gameplay that increases the enjoyment of the game, while also maintaining the gameplay of the time-saving game state a of conventional gaming machines, in which a jackpot game is expected to be played based on the result of a jackpot lottery.

The upper limit on the number of times (number of times) time-shortened games (special symbol games) that can be played in the c time-shortened game state can be set to a number that essentially guarantees winning a jackpot in the c time-shortened game state, and is not limited to 2000 times, nor does it necessarily have to be set to the same number as in the b time-shortened game state. Of course, it is also conceivable that the upper limit on the number of times (number of times time-shortened games) that can be played in the c time-shortened game state can be set to a number that essentially guarantees winning a jackpot in the c time-shortened game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving symbol stop miss is set for the first special symbol game but not for the second special symbol game (see Figures 128(C) to 128(E)), so the time-saving symbol is not displayed as a stopped symbol as a result of the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display section 363 (see Figure 126) of the main display section 36. Of course, the time-saving symbol stop miss may be set for the second special symbol game, so that the time-saving symbol can be displayed as a stopped symbol as a result of the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display section 363 (see Figure 126). Then, when a time-saving pattern is displayed stopped on the second special pattern display section 363 (see FIG. 126) as a result of the second special pattern game, the player may be given some kind of benefit, such as the opening of the variable winning opening 316 by operating the opening/closing door 319, the opening of the second winning opening 315 by operating the electric device 315b, the execution of a small win game, the display of a premium image on the pattern display section 341, the opening of a premium song as a song that can be output from the speaker 26 in a big win game, or the explicit or suggested game setting value (see FIG. 9(A) and FIG. 9(B)) that determines the probability of a big win.

In addition, in this embodiment, a normal game state and a time-saving game state are set, and a game state equivalent to the probability variable game state in the first embodiment described above is not set. However, for example, a probability variable game state may be set in place of the time-saving game state a. In other words, the gaming machine 10 may set the probability of a jackpot in at least a portion of the high-frequency support mode higher than in the low-frequency support mode, rather than maintaining a constant jackpot probability between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode. In this case, whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a time-saving symbol stop miss may be determined by referring to the game state at the time the jackpot lottery is executed or at the start of the special symbol game that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery (when the special symbol starts to change). However, it is more preferable to determine the result by referring to the game state at the end of the special symbol game (when the special symbol stops and displays). In this embodiment, the gaming machine 10 executes the start and stop display of the first special symbol (execution of the first special symbol game) and the start and stop display of the second special symbol (execution of the second special symbol game) independently, simultaneously, and in parallel. Therefore, when one special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol (the end of one special symbol game), it is expected that the game state during the display of the other special symbol's change (during the execution of the other special symbol game) will be different from the state when the other special symbol started to change (the start of the other special symbol game). Therefore, when determining the result of the jackpot lottery by referring to the game state at the end of the special symbol game (when the special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol), even if the game state differs between the start and end of the special symbol game, the result of the jackpot lottery only needs to be determined once. This simplifies the process of determining the result of the jackpot lottery and improves the reliability of the process.

In addition, in this embodiment, three types of time-saving game states are set: time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, and time-saving game state c. However, it is also possible to omit time-saving game state b and set two types: time-saving game state a and time-saving game state c.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
Here, Figure 126 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment. As shown in Figure 126, the game board 31 is provided with an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, an outlet 318, and a variable display unit 34 (symbol display section 341) similar to those in the first embodiment described above. The game board 31 is also common to the first embodiment described above in that it is provided with a main display section 36, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, and a through gate 317, but these differ from those in the first embodiment described above.

Note that the gaming board 31 in Figure 126 has many nails driven into it, but these have been omitted from the drawing. Also, the gaming board 31 in Figure 126 does not include the sub-movable display unit 38 and the movable accessory member 39 that were provided on the gaming board 31 of the first embodiment described above, but one or both of these may be provided on the gaming board 31.

The main display unit 36 is located on the lower right side of the game board 31 and includes a normal symbol display unit 361, a first special symbol display unit 362, a second special symbol display unit 363, a first special symbol reserved number display unit 364, and a second special symbol reserved number display unit 365.

The normal symbol display unit 361 includes a pair of LEDs representing normal symbols (normal symbols), and each LED is turned on and off during normal symbol play, which is triggered by the game ball passing through the through gate 317. The normal symbol play is executed to notify the result of the normal symbol winning lottery, which is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 317. If the result of the normal symbol winning lottery is a normal symbol winning, a normal symbol winning game is executed in which the second winning port 315 is opened by the operation of the electric device 315b.

The turning on and off of the LED pairs (normal symbols) in the normal symbol display section 361 is controlled by the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) based on the results of the normal symbol lottery. Specifically, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the LED pairs to flash (display a changing normal symbol) when the game ball passes through the through gate 317, and after the normal symbol variable display time set at the time of the normal symbol lottery has elapsed, the normal symbol game is executed by turning each LED on or off (displaying a stationary normal symbol) according to the results of the normal symbol lottery.

The first special symbol display unit 362 includes a 7-segment display device capable of displaying numbers, letters, and other symbols as the first special symbol (first special symbol). The 7-segment display device includes seven segments, each of which is lit and extinguished during the first special symbol game, which is triggered by a gaming ball entering the first winning port 314. The first special symbol game is executed to notify the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery, which is triggered by a gaming ball entering the first winning port 314. If the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning port 316 is opened by operating the opening/closing door 319.

The lighting and extinguishing of each segment of the 7-segment display device in the first special symbol display section 362 is controlled by the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) based on the results of the first special symbol jackpot lottery. Specifically, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the seven segments of the 7-segment display device to flash (variably display the first special symbol) when a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314, and after the first special symbol variable display time set at the time of the first special symbol jackpot lottery has elapsed, the first special symbol game is executed by lighting or extinguishing each segment (statically displaying the first special symbol) according to the results of the first special symbol jackpot lottery.

Here, in this embodiment, the results of the first special symbol jackpot lottery include jackpots and misses, as described below (see Figure 128 (A)). Jackpots include 5R jackpots and 16R jackpots (see Figure 128 (A)). Misses as a result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery include, as in the first embodiment described above, a front-to-back miss reach, a reach other than a front-to-back miss, and a complete miss reach, and also include a time-saving symbol stop miss (see Figures 128 (C) and 128 (D)). Then, in the first special symbol display unit 362, the first special symbol game is started by starting the variable display of the symbol (first special symbol) based on the execution of the first special symbol jackpot lottery, and after the first special symbol variable display time set for the first special symbol game has elapsed, the first special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is stopped and displayed. For example, if the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery is a 5R jackpot, the numbers "1," "5," or "9" are displayed; if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R jackpot, the numbers "3" or "7" are displayed; if the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery is a reach for a front or rear miss, the numbers "2" or "4" are displayed; if the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery is a reach for a front or rear miss, the numbers "6" or "8" are displayed; if the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving pattern stop, the number "0" is displayed; and if the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery is a complete miss, a number other than a number is displayed. That is, in this embodiment, the number "0" corresponds to the time-saving pattern.

The correspondence between the results of the first special jackpot lottery and the type of first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 is not limited to the example described above. For example, if the result of the first special jackpot lottery is a complete miss, a number may be displayed, or the result of the first special jackpot lottery may be displayed in alphabetical order. The number (type) of special symbols corresponding to the type of result of the first special jackpot lottery is not limited to the example described above, and multiple types of time-saving symbols may be set.

The second special symbol display unit 363 includes a 7-segment display device capable of displaying numbers, letters, and other symbols as the second special symbol (second special symbol). The 7-segment display device includes seven segments, each of which is lit and extinguished during the second special symbol game, which is triggered by a gaming ball entering the second winning port 315. The second special symbol game is executed to notify the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery, which is triggered by a gaming ball entering the second winning port 315. If the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning port 316 is opened by operating the opening/closing door 319.

The lighting and extinguishing of each segment of the 7-segment display device in the second special symbol display section 363 is controlled by the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) based on the results of the second special symbol jackpot lottery. Specifically, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the seven segments of the 7-segment display device to flash (variably display the second special symbol) when a gaming ball enters the second winning slot 315, and after the second special symbol variable display time set at the time of the second special symbol jackpot lottery has elapsed, the second special symbol game is executed by lighting or extinguishing each segment (statically displaying the second special symbol) according to the results of the second special symbol jackpot lottery.

Here, in this embodiment, the results of the second special chart jackpot lottery include 5R jackpots and 16R jackpots (see Figure 128 (A)), just like the results of the first special chart jackpot lottery, but the time-saving pattern stop miss is not set as a miss, and like the first embodiment described above, it includes a front-to-back miss reach, a reach other than a front-to-back miss, and a complete miss reach (see Figure 128 (E)). Then, in the second special chart display unit 363, the second special chart game is started by starting the variable display of the pattern (second special chart) based on the execution of the second special chart jackpot lottery, and after the second special chart variable display time set for the second special chart game has elapsed, the second special chart corresponding to the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery is stopped and displayed. For example, if the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery is a 5R jackpot, the numbers "1", "5" or "9" will be displayed; if the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery is a 5R jackpot, the numbers "3" or "7" will be displayed; if the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery is a reach for a miss before or after, the numbers "2" or "4" will be displayed; if the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery is a reach for a miss other than a miss before or after, the numbers "6" or "8" will be displayed; and if the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery is a complete miss, a number other than a number will be displayed.

The correspondence between the result of the second special jackpot lottery and the type of second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 is not limited to the example described above. For example, if the result of the second special jackpot lottery is a complete miss, a number may be displayed, or the result of the second special jackpot lottery may be displayed in alphabetical order, and the number of special symbols corresponding to the type of result of the second special jackpot lottery is not limited to the example described above.

Here, as described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 is executed regardless of whether the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 is currently being executed, while the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 is executed regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 is currently being executed. In other words, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game can be executed simultaneously and in parallel independently of each other.

In addition, the display of the normal symbol (normal symbol) variations in the normal symbol display unit 361 is executed to notify the results of the normal symbol winning lottery, which is different from the jackpot lottery, and therefore can be executed independently, simultaneously and in parallel with the display of the first special symbol variations in the first special symbol display unit 362 and the display of the second special symbol variations in the second special symbol display unit 363.

The first special symbol reserved number display unit 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the first special symbol reserved number N, which is the number of reserved rights to play the first special symbol game generated by winning at the first winning slot 314, by the number of lit LEDs.

The second special symbol reserved number display unit 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the second special symbol reserved number M, which is the number of reserved rights to play the second special symbol game generated by winning at the second winning slot 315, by the number of lit LEDs.

The main display unit 36 of this embodiment may be located in the upper right-hand corner of the game board 31, similar to the main display unit 36 of the first embodiment described above, or may be located in another position.

The first winning slot 314 provides a chance for the first special jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball. In this embodiment, the first winning slots 314 include a central first winning slot 314C and a right first winning slot 314R.

The central first winning opening 314C is located below the symbol display unit 341 (below the center of the gaming board 31), similar to the first winning opening 314 in the first embodiment described above. This central first winning opening 314C is equipped with a ball entry sensor (not shown), which detects the entry of a gaming ball into the central first winning opening 314C.

In this embodiment, although not clearly shown in the drawings, gaming balls that are shot into the left area of the gaming board 31 and flow down the left side of the symbol display section 341 can enter the central first winning opening 314C, but gaming balls that are shot into the right area of the gaming board 31 and flow down the right side of the symbol display section 341 cannot or will have difficulty entering the opening. In other words, in order to trigger the first special jackpot lottery when a gaming ball enters the central first winning opening 314C, so-called left-handed shots, in which gaming balls are shot into the left area of the gaming board 31, are encouraged.

The right first winning opening 314R is located to the right of the symbol display unit 341 (the center right side of the gaming board 31). This right first winning opening 314R is equipped with a ball entry sensor (not shown), which detects the entry of a gaming ball into the right first winning opening 314R.

In this embodiment, although not clearly shown in the drawings, game balls that are shot into the right region of the game board 31 and flow down the right side of the symbol display section 341 can enter the right first winning opening 314R. However, the frequency (probability) of game balls shot into the right region of the game board 31 entering the right first winning opening 314R is made lower than the frequency (probability) of game balls shot into the left region of the game board 31 entering the central first winning opening 314C by adjusting the arrangement of nails driven into the periphery of the right first winning opening 314R. For example, the frequency (probability) of game balls shot into the right region of the game board 31 entering the right first winning opening 314R is set to about one or two during the period until the specified number of second special symbol games (200 in this embodiment) are played in the time-saving game mode a. This is because if game balls are likely to enter the right first winning slot 314R, one or more first special symbol reserves will accumulate due to game balls entering the right first winning slot 314R during the time-saving game state a, preventing continuous execution of first special symbol games in the time-saving game state a. This reduces the possibility that a first special symbol game started in the time-saving game state a will end in the normal game state, preventing an easy transition to the time-saving game state c. Furthermore, to prevent an easy transition to the time-saving game state c, it is also possible to shorten the time of the first special symbol game (first special symbol variable display time) triggered by a game ball entering the central first winning slot 314C in the time-saving game state a. This allows for countermeasures against strategic play by combining right-handed and left-handed shots during the time-saving game state a. Specifically, by appropriately hitting from the left in time-saving game state a, it is possible to maintain the accumulation of first special symbol reserves and continuously play first special symbol games, while by hitting from the right, it is possible to execute second special symbol games and reduce the number of remaining time-saving game plays in time-saving game state a. However, by shortening the time for first special symbol game (first special symbol variable display time) triggered by the game ball entering central first winning slot 314C, for example by setting it to 0.5 seconds or less, it is possible to prevent the accumulation of first special symbol reserves, preventing continuous execution of first special symbol games and enabling a strategy of playing strategically by combining right and left hits during time-saving game state a.

On the other hand, it is impossible or difficult for a gaming ball that is shot into the left area of the gaming board 31 and flows down the left side of the symbol display section 341 to enter the right first winning slot 314R. In other words, in order to trigger the first special jackpot lottery when a gaming ball enters the right first winning slot 314R, a so-called right shot, in which the gaming ball is shot into the right area of the gaming board 31, is encouraged.

In this way, to get the game ball to enter the central first winning slot 314C, a so-called left hit is encouraged, in which the game ball is shot into the left area of the game board 31, while to get the game ball to enter the right first winning slot 314R, a so-called right hit is encouraged, in which the game ball is shot into the right area of the game board 31.

In this embodiment, the game state is a normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode in which the probability of winning is low (see Figure 12 (A)) and the electric device 315b is less likely to be activated. Furthermore, it is more difficult for game balls to enter the right first winning slot 314R than the central first winning slot 314C. Therefore, in the normal game state in which the electric device 315b is less likely to be activated, players are encouraged to shoot game balls into the left side area of the game board 31, or hit from the left, in order to have the game ball enter the central first winning slot 314C, which is more likely to be entered than the right first winning slot 314R.

The second winning slot 315 provides an opportunity for a second special jackpot lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball. In this embodiment, the second winning slot 315 is located directly above the right first winning slot 314R to the right of the symbol display section 341, and is capable of receiving gaming balls that are shot into the right area of the gaming board 31 and flow down the right side of the symbol display section 341.

The second winning opening 315 is also equipped with a ball entry sensor (not shown), which detects the entry of a game ball into the right-hand first winning opening 314R. The second winning opening 315 is also equipped with an electric device 315b that switches between a state in which game ball entry into the second winning opening 315 is restricted and a state in which game ball entry is permitted. The electric device 315b is activated during a normal winning game, which is executed when the result of a normal winning lottery, which is executed when a game ball passes through the through gate 317, is a normal winning game. In other words, the electric device 315b restricts game ball entry into the second winning opening 315 except when a normal winning game is being executed, and permits game balls to enter the second winning opening 315 during a normal winning game.

In this embodiment, the game state is set to a time-saving game state, which is a high-frequency support mode in which the probability of winning a normal symbol is high (see Figure 12 (B)) and the electric device 315b is likely to be activated, and the second winning slot 315 is capable of receiving a game ball that is shot into the right area of the game board 31 and flows down the right side of the symbol display section 341. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, in order to enjoy the benefits of the high-frequency support mode, so-called right-hand shots, in which game balls are shot into the right area of the game board 31, are encouraged.

Variable winning opening 316 is a slot through which game balls can enter during a jackpot game that is played when the result of the first special jackpot lottery or the second special jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319, which is operated during a jackpot game to open variable winning opening 316 and allow game balls to enter variable winning opening 316.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable winning opening 316 is located below the right-hand area of the gaming board 31. When the variable winning opening 316 is opened during a jackpot game, although this is not clearly shown in the drawings, gaming balls shot into the right-hand area of the gaming board 31 can enter the variable winning opening 316, but gaming balls shot into the left-hand area of the gaming board 31 cannot. Therefore, during a jackpot game, so-called right-hand shots, which aim to shoot gaming balls into the right-hand area of the gaming board 31, are encouraged.

The variable winning opening 316 is not limited to being located in the right area of the gaming board 31, and may also be located, for example, in the left area of the gaming board 31 or below the first central winning opening 314C. In this case, when the variable winning opening 316 is opened during a jackpot game, gaming balls shot into the left area of the gaming board 31 can enter the variable winning opening 316. The variable winning opening 316 may also be located so that both gaming balls shot into the left area of the gaming board 31 and gaming balls shot into the right area of the gaming board 31 can enter the variable winning opening 316.

The through gate 317 triggers a regular winning lottery, which determines whether or not to activate the electric device 315b (whether or not to execute a regular winning game) based on the passage of the gaming ball. In the first embodiment described above, the through gate 317L is provided in the left region of the gaming board 31, and the through gate 317R is provided in the right region of the gaming board 31, resulting in two through gates 317L, 317R. However, in this embodiment, only one through gate 317 is provided directly above the second winning opening 315 to the right of the symbol display section 341, allowing gaming balls that are shot into the right region of the gaming board 31 and flow down the right side of the symbol display section 341 to pass through. In addition, the second winning opening 315 is provided with a ball entry sensor (not shown), which detects the passage of a gaming ball through the through gate 317.

As mentioned above, in the time-saving game mode, in order to enjoy the benefits of the high-frequency support mode in which the electric device 315b operates frequently, players are encouraged to shoot the game ball into the right area of the game board 31, i.e., hit to the right. The through gate 317 allows game balls that are shot into the right area of the game board 31 and flow down the right side of the symbol display section 341 to pass through. Based on the game ball passing through the through gate 317, a regular winning lottery is held to determine whether the electric device 315b will be activated (opening the second winning slot 315). Therefore, in the time-saving game mode, by shooting the game ball into the right area of the game board 31, i.e., hitting to the right, not only can the game ball pass through the through gate 317, but it can also enter the second winning slot 315. Therefore, players can maximize the benefits of the time-saving game mode by continuously hitting to the right, without having to alternate between hitting to the right and hitting to the left.

In this embodiment, in normal play mode, left-handed hits are encouraged to cause the game ball to enter the central first winning opening 314C; in time-saving play mode, right-handed hits are encouraged to cause the game ball to pass through the through gate 317 and enter the second winning opening 315 when the electric device 315b is activated; and in jackpot play mode, right-handed hits are encouraged to cause the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316 when the opening/closing door 319 is activated.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, with reference to Figures 127 to 129, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Special drawing reservation storage area 412b]
While the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above was configured as a so-called loop probability variable machine, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a simultaneous variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed simultaneously. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the special symbol reservation storage area 412b. Here, Figure 127 is a block diagram showing an example of the special symbol reservation storage area 412b provided in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, and Figures 128 and 129 are diagrams showing examples of tables used in the main control device 4.

The gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a simultaneous variable game machine, and therefore, unlike the first embodiment described above, special game execution areas AEA, AEB are provided separately for the special game reserve storage areas REA, REB. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127, a first special game execution area AEA is provided for the first special game reserve storage area REA, and a second special game execution area AEB is provided for the second special game reserve storage area REB. When the first special game pattern display unit 362 of the main display unit 36 starts displaying the first special game pattern, the first special game pattern win/loss information stored in the first reserve area REA1 of the first special game pattern reserve storage area REA is moved to the first special game pattern execution area AEA. In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol begins in the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36, the second special symbol win/loss information stored in the first reserved area REB1 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB is moved to the second special symbol execution area AEB.

[Jackpot Win/Loss Table]
In this embodiment, a gaming state (probability variable gaming state) corresponding to the high probability mode of the first embodiment is not set, and instead, a normal gaming state and a time-limited gaming state are set, in which the probability of a jackpot lottery result being a jackpot (jackpot probability) is the same. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128(A), in this embodiment, a single jackpot win/loss table is used in the jackpot lottery, and this jackpot win/loss table is used in common in both the normal gaming state and the time-limited gaming state. In the jackpot win/loss table, of the 65,536 jackpot random number counter values (random number values) ranging from 0 to 65,535, 437 random number values ranging from 0 to 436 are defined as jackpots, and the remaining random number values are defined as losses. In other words, the jackpot probability in this embodiment is unified at approximately 1/150.

[Jackpot type distribution table]
In this embodiment, no jackpot corresponding to the variable probability jackpot of the first embodiment is set, and only a jackpot corresponding to the normal jackpot of the first embodiment is set. In other words, in this embodiment, only a jackpot that transitions to a time-saving game state after the end of a jackpot game is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128(B), in this embodiment, two jackpot types are set: a 5R jackpot and a 16R jackpot. In the jackpot type allocation table, of the 20 jackpot type counter values from 0 to 19, 10 values from 0 to 9 are defined as 5R jackpots, and 10 values from 10 to 19 are defined as 16R jackpots. In other words, in this embodiment, the allocation ratio between 5R jackpots and 16R jackpots is 1:1.

If the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R jackpot, a 5R jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened and closed five times by the operation of the opening/closing door 319, and after the 5R jackpot game is completed, the game system transitions to the time-saving game state a. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R jackpot, a 16R jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened and closed 16 times by the operation of the opening/closing door 319, and after the 16R jackpot game is completed, the game system transitions to the time-saving game state a.

As mentioned above, in the time-saving game state "a," the electric device 315b frequently supports the entry of game balls into the second winning slot 315 (see FIG. 12(B)), and the operating time of the electric device 315b is set to be long (see FIG. 12(D)), making it easier for game balls to enter the second winning slot 315. Therefore, the time-saving game state "a" is a more advantageous game state than the normal game state in that it increases the chances of winning a jackpot. In this embodiment, the upper limit on the number of time-saving games (special game games) that can be played in the time-saving game state "a" (number of time-saving games) is set to 200.

In addition, in this embodiment, a common jackpot type table is used when the result of the first special jackpot lottery is a jackpot and when the result of the second special jackpot lottery is a jackpot; however, different jackpot type tables may be provided when the result of the first special jackpot lottery is a jackpot and when the result of the second special jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

[Defective type sorting table]
In this embodiment, three types of miss type allocation tables are set: a normal game state first special chart miss type allocation table (see Figure 128 (C)) used for misses in the first special chart jackpot lottery in the normal game state; a time-saving game state first special chart miss type allocation table (see Figure 128 (D)) used for misses in the first special chart jackpot lottery in the time-saving game state; and a second special chart miss type allocation table (see Figure 128 (E)) used for misses in the second special chart jackpot lottery.

As shown in Figures 128(C) and 128(D), in this embodiment, the types of misses in the first special chart jackpot lottery are set as in the first embodiment described above: front-to-back miss reach, non-front-to-back miss reach, and complete miss. Additionally, a time-saving symbol stop miss, which was not set in the first embodiment described above, is set. Here, a time-saving symbol stop miss is signaled as a miss in the first special chart jackpot lottery result by the display of a specific symbol set as a time-saving symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display unit 36. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, when a time-saving symbol stop miss is signaled as a miss in the normal game mode in the first special chart jackpot lottery (when a time-saving symbol is displayed in the first special symbol display section 362 in the normal game mode), the game mode is transitioned to the time-saving game mode c.

In addition, in the normal play state first special symbol miss type allocation table shown in Figure 128 (C), the allocation rate for time-saving symbol stop misses is set to 0.42%, while in the time-saving play state first special symbol miss type allocation table shown in Figure 128 (D), the allocation rate for time-saving symbol stop misses is set to 50.21%. In other words, the probability of a time-saving symbol stop miss in the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the normal play state is low, and the probability of a time-saving symbol stop miss in the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the time-saving play state is set high. In other words, if the normal play state is in effect when the first special symbol jackpot lottery is drawn, the lottery result is unlikely to be a time-saving symbol stop miss, and if the time-saving play state is in effect when the first special symbol jackpot lottery is drawn, the lottery result is likely to be a time-saving symbol stop miss. As a result, it is unlikely that the game will transition to time-saving play state c based on a first special symbol jackpot lottery in the normal play state.

As mentioned above, the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the time-saving game state is likely to be a missed stop of the time-saving symbol, but in order to transition to the time-saving game state c, the condition is that the time-saving symbol is displayed stationary in the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display unit 36 in the normal game state. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state b, the number of time-saving games is set to 2000 (see Figure 124), and a jackpot is essentially guaranteed, so the maximum number of special symbol games will never be played in the time-saving game state b, and as a result, there is essentially no transition from the time-saving game state b to the normal game state. Therefore, even if the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the time-saving b game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, the first special symbol game that started in the time-saving b game state to notify the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery will not end in the normal game state; in other words, the first special symbol that started to change display in response to the first special symbol jackpot lottery will not be displayed as a stopped symbol in the normal game state. As a result, there is essentially no transition to the time-saving c game state based on the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the time-saving b game state.

Of course, the number of time-saving play sessions that can be performed in time-saving play state b can be set to a range in which a jackpot is not guaranteed in time-saving play state b, just like time-saving play state a, and a transition to time-saving play state c can be made based on the first special chart jackpot lottery in time-saving play state b. In other words, even when transitioning to time-saving play state b, it is possible to provide the same gameplay as when transitioning to time-saving play state a.

Furthermore, the allocation rate for time-saving symbol stop misses when the first special symbol jackpot lottery results in a miss is not limited to the example of the first special symbol miss type allocation table shown in Figures 128(C) and 128(D), and can be modified in various ways. For example, it is conceivable to set the allocation rate for time-saving symbol stop misses when the first special symbol jackpot lottery executed in the normal game mode results in a miss to approximately the same as the jackpot probability (1/150 = 0.67%). In this case, in the normal game mode, the gameplay is given by determining which lottery result will be obtained first: a jackpot or a time-saving symbol stop miss, which have approximately the same probability. Furthermore, it is conceivable to set the allocation rate for time-saving symbol stop misses when the first special symbol jackpot lottery executed in the time-saving game mode results in a miss to 100% or close to 100%. In this case, when the first special symbol game is started in the time-saving game state a, there is a 100% or nearly 100% chance that the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game will be a missed time-saving symbol stop, so you can enjoy playing in the time-saving game state a by focusing only on the timing when the first special symbol stops and is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a common time-saving game state first special symbol miss type allocation table is set for all time-saving game states (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, and time-saving game state c), but a first special symbol miss type allocation table may also be set for each time-saving game state. Alternatively, a common first special symbol miss type allocation table may be set for two of the three time-saving game states, and a different first special symbol miss type allocation table may be set for the remaining time-saving game state. For example, a miss type allocation table with a low allocation rate for time-saving symbol stop misses, such as the time-saving game state first special symbol miss type allocation table shown in FIG. 128(D), may be set for time-saving game state a, and a miss type allocation table with a low allocation rate for time-saving symbol stop misses, similar to the normal game state first special symbol miss type allocation table shown in FIG. 128(C), may be set for time-saving game state b and time-saving game state c.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 128 (E), the types of misses in the second special chart jackpot lottery are set to be a front-to-back miss reach, a reach other than a front-to-back miss, and a complete miss, as in the first embodiment described above, and a time-saving symbol stop miss is not set. In other words, in this embodiment, a time-saving symbol stop miss is set as a result of the first special chart jackpot lottery, and is not set as a result of the second special chart jackpot lottery. Therefore, the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning slot 315 does not trigger a transition to time-saving game state c.

[Jackpot fluctuation table]
In this embodiment, one type of jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. 129(A) is set, which differs from the first embodiment described above in which two types of jackpot fluctuation tables (see FIGS. 10(A) and 10(B)) are provided according to the jackpot type (normal jackpot and special jackpot). In other words, in this embodiment, only jackpots equivalent to the normal jackpots of the first embodiment described above are set, and jackpots equivalent to the special jackpots of the first embodiment described above are not set, so there is only one jackpot fluctuation table. In this embodiment, the jackpot fluctuation table is shared between the 5R jackpot and the 12R jackpot.

Furthermore, in the jackpot variation table of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, three types of special chart variation patterns are set: special chart variation pattern "01," with a special chart variation display time of 30 seconds; special chart variation pattern "02," with a special chart variation display time of 60 seconds; and special chart variation pattern "03," with a special chart variation display time of 90 seconds. In the jackpot variation table of this embodiment, special chart variation patterns with longer special chart variation display times are more likely to be selected. Specifically, in the jackpot variation table, the allocation rates for each special chart variation pattern are set as follows: special chart variation pattern "01" is 5%, special chart variation pattern "02" is 25%, and special chart variation pattern "03" is 70%. In this way, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, special chart variation patterns with longer special chart variation display times are more likely to be selected, and therefore, the longer the special chart variation display time, the higher the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot.

[Outlier fluctuation table]
In this embodiment, there are four types of loss fluctuation tables shown in Figures 129(B) to 129(D) that are used when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, which is different from the first embodiment described above in which there is only one type of loss fluctuation table (see Figure 10(C)). Specifically, in this embodiment, four types of loss fluctuation tables are set: a first special symbol loss fluctuation table A used when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the normal game state, b time-saving game state, and c time-saving game state shown in Figure 128(B) is a loss; a first special symbol loss fluctuation table B used when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the a time-saving game state shown in Figure 128(C) is a loss; a normal game state second special symbol loss fluctuation table used when the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery in the normal game state shown in Figure 128(D) is a loss; and a time-saving game state second special symbol loss fluctuation table used when the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery in the time-saving game state shown in Figure 128(E) is a loss. In the miss variation table of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the special chart variation display time for a miss reach before or after, a reach other than a miss before or after, and a complete miss is set as the special chart variation pattern, and the special chart variation pattern for a miss reach before or after and a reach other than a miss before or after is the same as in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 10 (C)).

Furthermore, unlike the first embodiment described above, in the first special chart miss variation table A and the first special chart miss variation table B shown in Figures 129 (B) and 129 (C), the special chart variation display time for a time-saving pattern stop miss is set as the special chart variation pattern. However, in the first special chart miss variation table A and the first special chart miss variation table B, the special chart variation pattern for a time-saving pattern stop miss is set to be a complete miss. This makes it impossible to determine from the special chart variation pattern (special chart variation display time) whether the miss type is a complete miss or a time-saving pattern stop miss.

Furthermore, in the first special chart miss variation table A shown in Figure 129 (B), the special chart variation patterns are set so that the special chart variation display time for complete misses and time-saving pattern stop misses is shorter than for before-and-after miss reaches and reaches other than before-and-after misses. Specifically, for complete misses and time-saving pattern stop misses, special chart variation pattern "04" with a special chart variation display time of 7 seconds, special chart variation pattern "05" with a special chart variation display time of 10 seconds, and special chart variation pattern "06" with a special chart variation display time of 15 seconds are set, and the special chart variation display time for all of special chart variation patterns "04" to "06" is set shorter than the special chart variation display time for before-and-after miss reaches and reaches other than before-and-after misses.

On the other hand, in the first special chart miss variation table B shown in Figure 129 (C), the special chart variation patterns are set so that the special chart variation display time for complete misses and time-saving pattern stop misses is longer than in the first special chart miss variation table A shown in Figure 129 (B). Specifically, for complete misses and time-saving pattern stop misses, special chart variation pattern "07" with a special chart variation display time of 50 seconds, special chart variation pattern "08" with a special chart variation display time of 100 seconds, and special chart variation pattern "09" with a special chart variation display time of 150 seconds are set, and the special chart variation display times for all of special chart variation patterns "07" to "09" are set longer than the special chart variation display time for complete misses and time-saving pattern stop misses in the first special chart miss variation table A shown in Figure 129 (B).

As mentioned above, a transition to the time-saving c game state is unlikely based on a first special symbol jackpot lottery in the normal game state, and a transition to the time-saving c game state is not actually possible based on a first special symbol jackpot lottery in the time-saving b game state. Furthermore, a transition to the time-saving c game state is not possible based on a first special symbol jackpot lottery in the time-saving c game state. Furthermore, if there is a complete miss, it is determined early on from the execution of the first special symbol game that there will not be a jackpot. Therefore, in the first special symbol miss variation table A shown in Figure 129 (B), which is used when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the normal game state, the time-saving b game state, and the time-saving c game state is a miss, special symbol variation patterns "04" to "06," which have a short special symbol variation display time, are set in order to end the first special symbol game early for complete misses and time-saving symbol stop misses, which make it unlikely that a transition to the time-saving c game state or a jackpot will occur.

In contrast, as mentioned above, in the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the time-saving play state a, compared to the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the normal play state and the time-saving play state b, there is a higher expectation of transitioning to the time-saving play state c based on the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery being a time-saving miss. Therefore, in the first special symbol miss variation table B used in the time-saving play state a shown in Figure 129 (C), for time-saving symbol stop misses that are expected to result in transition to the time-saving play state c, special symbol variation patterns "07" to "09" with long special symbol variation display times are set to increase the sense of expectation during the variation display in the first special symbol play. Furthermore, in the case where the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the time-saving play state a is a miss, special symbol variation patterns "07" to "09" with long special symbol variation display times are set even for complete misses, so that it is impossible to determine whether the miss type is a time-saving symbol stop miss or a complete miss.

Furthermore, in the first special symbol miss variation table B, special symbol variation patterns "07" to "09" with long special symbol variation display times are set, which, as described below, increases the likelihood that the first special symbol game that started in the time-saving game state a will end in the normal game state to which it transitions after the time-saving game state a ends.

Furthermore, in the second special chart miss variation tables (second special chart miss variation table in normal game mode and second special chart miss variation table in time-saving game mode) used for the second special chart jackpot lottery shown in Figures 129 (D) and 129 (E), time-saving chart stop miss is not set as the miss type when the second special chart jackpot lottery is a miss (see Figure 128 (E)), so no special chart variation pattern is set for time-saving chart stop misses, and as with the first embodiment described above, the special chart variation display times for front and rear miss reaches, reaches other than front and rear misses, and complete misses are set as special chart variation patterns.

In the second special symbol miss variation table for normal game mode shown in Figure 129 (D), special symbol variation pattern "06" is set for a complete miss, with the special symbol variation display time being 15 seconds, and except for the fact that there are three types of special symbol variation pattern "06" set for complete misses, it is the same as the miss variation table of the first embodiment described above (see Figure 10 (C)).

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the second winning opening 315 is provided in the right-hand region of the gaming board 31, and the right-hand first winning opening 314R is provided in the right-hand region of the gaming board 31. However, in the normal gaming state, the frequency of support by the electric device 315b for the game ball to enter the second winning opening 315 is low and the operating time of the electric device 315b is short, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning opening 315. Also, since it is more difficult for the ball to enter the right-hand first winning opening 314R than the central first winning opening 314C, in the normal gaming state, left-handed shots are encouraged, which shoot the game ball into the left-hand region of the gaming board 31, in order to progress the game by having the game ball enter the central first winning opening 314C. In this way, in this embodiment, measures are taken against right-handed hits in normal game mode by increasing the disadvantage of making a right-handed hit that launches the game ball into the right area of the game board 31 in normal game mode. However, it is also possible to take measures against right-handed hits in normal game mode by lengthening part or all of the variable display time of the second special symbol in second special symbol game in normal game mode, thereby increasing the disadvantage of right-handed hits.

On the other hand, the time-saving game state second special chart miss variation table shown in Figure 129 (E) has only one special chart variation pattern set for a complete miss, which differs from the normal game state second special chart miss variation table shown in Figure 129 (D), which has three special chart variation patterns set for a complete miss, and the miss variation table of the first embodiment described above (see Figure 10 (C)), which has two special chart variation patterns set for a complete miss.

Furthermore, in the time-saving play state second special chart miss variation table, as in the first embodiment described above, three types of special chart variation patterns are set for the front-to-back miss reach and the reach other than the front-to-back miss: special chart variation pattern "01" with a special chart variation display time of 30 seconds, special chart variation pattern "02" with a special chart variation display time of 60 seconds, and special chart variation pattern "03" with a special chart variation display time of 90 seconds. In the time-saving play state second special chart miss variation table of this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a front-to-back miss reach or a reach other than the front-to-back miss, the special chart variation pattern with a shorter special chart variation display time is more likely to be selected, and the special chart variation pattern with a longer special chart variation display time is less likely to be selected. Specifically, in the time-saving play state second special chart miss variation table, the allocation rates for each special chart variation pattern are set as follows: special chart variation pattern "01": 50%, special chart variation pattern "02": 30%, and special chart variation pattern "03": 20%.

Here, in the jackpot variation table described above with reference to Figure 129 (A), special chart variation patterns with longer special chart variation display times are more likely to be selected. In other words, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, special chart variation patterns with longer special chart variation display times are more likely to be selected, and the longer the special chart variation display time, the higher the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. In contrast, in the time-saving play state second special chart miss variation table described above with reference to Figure 129 (E), if the result of the jackpot lottery is a reach for a miss before or after or a reach for a non-miss before or after, special chart variation patterns with shorter special chart variation display times are more likely to be selected, and special chart variation patterns with longer special chart variation display times are less likely to be selected. Therefore, in second special chart play started in the time-saving play state, the longer the variation display time of the second special chart, the higher the expectation that the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery will be a jackpot.

As mentioned above, the time-saving game state includes the time-saving game state a to which the game is transitioned after the end of a jackpot game. However, if a first special symbol game that is started in the time-saving game state a and in which the time-saving symbol is displayed frozen is displayed frozen in the normal game state to which the game transitions after the time-saving game state a ends due to the execution of the maximum number of special symbol games, the game will transition to the time-saving game state c, which is more advantageous than the normal game state and the time-saving game state a and in which a jackpot is essentially guaranteed. Furthermore, if a first special symbol game in which the time-saving symbol is displayed frozen is started in the time-saving game state a, if the variable display time of the second special symbol game that is started during the execution of the first special symbol game is long, the number of times the second special symbol game can be executed during the execution of the first special symbol game will be reduced. As a result, the longer the variable display time of the second special symbol game in the second special symbol game that is started during the execution of the first special symbol game in the time-saving game state a, the lower the possibility that the second special symbol game can be executed for the remaining number of time-saving games up to the upper limit number in the time-saving game state a during the execution of the first special symbol game and transition to the normal game state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the longer the variable display time of the second special symbol, the higher the expectation that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. In this way, the longer the variable display time of the second special symbol game that starts during the execution of the first special symbol game, the higher the expectation that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. This realizes a new type of gameplay in which the gameplay in the time-saving game state a benefits from transitioning to the time-saving game state c based on playing the second special symbol game the remaining number of time-saving plays up to the upper limit of the time-saving game state a while the first special symbol game is being played (a gameplay in which the timing of transitioning from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state when the first special symbol game in which the time-saving symbol is statically displayed is started in the time-saving game state a is important), to a gameplay in which the benefit of playing a jackpot game is achieved based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a jackpot, just like the time-saving game state a on conventional gaming machines (a gameplay in which the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game is important).

In addition, in this embodiment, the longer the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game that starts during the execution of the first special symbol game in the time-shortened game state a, the lower the possibility of transitioning to the advantageous time-shortened game state c, but the higher the expectation that the jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot. Therefore, in this embodiment, the longer the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game that starts during the execution of the first special symbol game in the time-shortened game state a, the lower the possibility of transitioning to the advantageous time-shortened game state c. This can be suppressed by increasing the expectation of a jackpot. This suppresses a decrease in interest in playing in the time-shortened game state c, and a decrease in interest in playing the game.

Furthermore, the time-saving game state second special symbol miss variation table only sets special symbol variation pattern "10," in which the special symbol variation display time is significantly shorter than a complete miss at 0.5 seconds. On the other hand, as mentioned above, when the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a miss, the distribution rate for complete misses is high (see Figure 128 (E)). Therefore, in time-saving game states (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, and time-saving game state c) in which the support of the electric device 315b makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315, many second special symbol games can be executed in a short period of time. As a result, for example, in time-saving game state b and time-saving game state c, which have a high upper limit of 2,000 time-saving game plays, it is possible to shorten the time required from the transition to these time-saving game states until the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. This allows players to continue playing without feeling too much stress until the jackpot is achieved, even if it takes a long time for the special jackpot lottery result to be a jackpot.

In this embodiment, when a time-saving symbol is displayed in a static manner in the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36 during the normal game state transitioned from the time-saving game state a by executing a specified number (200) of special symbol games in the time-saving game state a, the game transitions to the time-saving game state c, which is more advantageous than the time-saving game state a and the normal game state. In other words, in this embodiment, when a first special symbol game in which a time-saving symbol is displayed in a static manner is initiated during the time-saving game state a, the timing of the transition from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state is important. Therefore, when a first special symbol game in which a time-saving symbol is displayed in a static manner is initiated during the time-saving game state a, it is important to execute a second special symbol game during the variable display of the first special symbol until the maximum number of times in the time-saving game state a is reached, and to transition from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state before the time-saving symbol is displayed in a static manner in the first special symbol display section 362. Specifically, in the time-saving game state a, for the first special symbol game in which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the longer the variable display time of the first special symbol, the more times the second special symbol game will be executed during the variable display, and the higher the possibility of transitioning to the normal game state when the first special symbol stops, so a longer variable display time is preferable. On the other hand, for the second special symbol, whose variable display begins in the time-saving game state a, the shorter the variable display time, the shorter the time until the maximum number of special symbol games in the time-saving game state a is executed, i.e., the shorter the time until transitioning to the normal game state, so a shorter variable display time of the second special symbol is preferable.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol miss variation table B used in the time-saving game state a shown in Figure 129 (C) has a long setting for the variable display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a complete miss or a time-saving symbol stop miss (50 seconds, 100 seconds, or 150 seconds), while the time-saving game state second special symbol miss variation table used in the time-saving game state including the time-saving game state a shown in Figure 129 (E) has a significantly short setting for the variable display time of the second special symbol when the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a complete miss (0.5 seconds). Therefore, in this embodiment, a long first special symbol variable display time is selected for the first special symbol whose variable display begins in the time-saving game state a, while a short variable display time is selected for the second special symbol whose variable display begins in the time-saving game state a. As a result, in this embodiment, it is realistic that the variable display of the first special symbol that began in the time-saving game state a will be stopped and displayed in the normal game state transitioned from the time-saving game state a by playing the special symbol game the specified number of times (200 times) in the time-saving game state a.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game started in the time-saving game state a is a complete miss or a time-saving symbol stop miss, the longest first special symbol variation display time is 150 seconds for special symbol variation pattern "09," whereas the second special symbol variation display time if the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game started in the time-saving game state a is a complete miss is 0.5 seconds (special symbol variation pattern "10"). If 0.5 seconds is selected as the second special symbol variation display time for all second special symbol games in the time-saving game state a and the specified number of second special symbol games are played consecutively, that is, the shortest time for the time-saving game state a is 100 seconds (= 0.5 seconds x 200 times), which is shorter than the 150 seconds for special symbol variation pattern "09" that can be set for the first special symbol game started in the time-saving game state a. Therefore, in this embodiment, if 150 seconds is selected as the variable display time for the first special symbol game that starts in the time-shortened game state a, there is a possibility that the first special symbol game will end in the normal game state at that point. In this way, by setting multiple variable display times for the first special symbol game that starts in the time-shortened game state a, including one that is longer than the shortest time in the time-shortened game state a, when the first special symbol game starts in the time-shortened game state a, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the longest special symbol variable display time will be selected, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game in the time-shortened game state a.

The time attack effect will be described in detail later, but it is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game started in the time-saving play state a does not result in a time-saving symbol stop. In this time attack effect, the symbol display unit 341 displays a first decorative symbol 78 in response to the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game started in the time-saving play state a, and a second decorative symbol 79 in response to the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game started during the execution of the first special symbol game. Furthermore, a remaining time image corresponding to the remaining variable display time (remaining time) of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game and a remaining spins image corresponding to the remaining number of time-saving games (remaining spins) until the maximum number of time-saving games in the time-saving play state a is reached are displayed (see Figures 153 (A) to 153 (F)).

In this way, in this embodiment, if the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game started in the time-saving game state a is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, a time attack effect is executed. In the time attack effect, the player can focus on the remaining time image, the remaining spins image, the changing and stopped display of the first decorative symbol 78, and the changing and stopped display of the second decorative symbol 79, and enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the time attack effect executed in the time-saving game state a.

Specifically, when a time attack effect is executed, by checking the remaining time image relative to the remaining time, the player can grasp the variable display time of the first special symbol (first decorative symbol 78) in that first special symbol game, allowing the player to enjoy estimating the likelihood of transitioning the game state from time-saving game state a to normal game state before the first special symbol game ends. For example, if it can be confirmed that special symbol variable pattern "09," which has the longest variable display time of 150 seconds for that first special symbol game, has been set based on the remaining time image at the start of the time attack effect, it can be determined that there is a high probability that the game state will transition from time-saving game state a to normal game state before the first special symbol game ends, and therefore, when the time attack effect begins, the player can enjoy watching the game progress while focusing on the remaining time image.

Furthermore, after the time attack effect is executed, for example, by focusing on the first decorative symbol 78, the player can confirm that the first special symbol game has not ended, and by checking the remaining time image, the player can confirm the time remaining until the first special symbol game ends. Meanwhile, by focusing on the second decorative symbol 79, the player can confirm that the second special symbol game has started or ended, and by checking the remaining spins image, the player can confirm the number of second special symbol games required to transition the game state from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state. Therefore, by focusing on the second decorative symbol 79 and confirming that the second special symbol game has started or ended while making sure that the first decorative symbol 78 is not displayed stationary, the player can confirm that the second special symbol game has ended while the first special symbol game is being executed (while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner), and that the remaining spins image indicates that the remaining points have decreased. This allows the player to enjoy the game while anticipating that the second decorative symbol 79 will change while the first decorative symbol 78 is changing, and that the second decorative symbol 79 will stop changing and be displayed in a short time.

Furthermore, after the time attack effect has begun, the remaining variable display time of the first special symbol during the first special symbol game can be confirmed based on the remaining time image, and the number of second special symbol games required before transitioning to normal game mode can be confirmed based on the remaining spins image. Therefore, based on the remaining time image and remaining spins image, the player can enjoy the game while hoping that the rate at which the remaining spins decrease will be higher than the rate at which the remaining time decreases, and can also enjoy the game while predicting the possibility of transitioning to normal game mode during the execution of the first special symbol game. In particular, as the remaining time confirmed based on the remaining time image and the remaining spins confirmed based on the remaining spins image decrease and approach zero, the player can enjoy the game while paying attention to which of the remaining time or the remaining spins will reach zero first.

Furthermore, if a long display time is set for the second special symbol in the second special symbol game after the time attack effect has begun, and the player focuses on the second decorative symbol 79, the second decorative symbol 79 takes a long time to stop and be displayed, which can cause the player to feel annoyed that the remaining spins are not being subtracted. Furthermore, the longer the second decorative symbol 79, the lower the possibility of transitioning to the normal game mode, and this annoyance can lead to a decrease in interest in the game while the time attack effect is being executed. In contrast, in this embodiment, the longer the display time for the second special symbol in the second special symbol game that starts during the execution of the first special symbol game in the time-saving game mode a, the higher the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game will be a jackpot. This can prevent the player's interest in the game while the time attack effect is being executed from decreasing due to the second decorative symbol 79 taking a long time to stop and be displayed.

[Processing of main control device 4]
Unlike the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, which is configured as a loop probability variable machine, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a simultaneous variable game machine in which a probability variable game state is not set and the first and second special symbols can change simultaneously. Furthermore, as described above, part of the configuration of the game board 31 differs from that of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment differs from the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in some of the processing executed by the main control device 4. Specifically, the processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment differs from that of the first special symbol hold command setting processing, through gate processing, normal symbol game control processing, normal symbol winning game control processing, special symbol game control processing, jackpot game control processing, and game state transition processing. These processing steps will be described below with reference to FIGS. 130 to 147.

[First special drawing hold command setting process]
Here, Fig. 130 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol reserve command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process of Fig. 18. The first special symbol reserve command includes information indicating that the command is a first special symbol reserve command, as well as information such as the result of the jackpot lottery (jackpot type or loss), the special symbol variable display time, and the number of first special symbols reserved N. Hereinafter, the first special symbol reserve command setting process will be described with reference to Fig. 130.

<Step S3301>
As shown in FIG. 130, the MPU 41 reads the number N of reserved first special symbols from the number memory area NAA of reserved first special symbols in the storage area REA of the first special symbol, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each reserved first special symbol from the RAM 412 (step S3301).

<Step S3302>
In step S3302, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery for the reserved first symbol is a jackpot based on whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win. Here, if the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3303. On the other hand, if the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot win (step S3302: No), i.e., if the result is a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3305.

<Step S3303>
If the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3303). For example, if the first special symbol win/loss information is stored in the third reserved area REA3 in step S1104 of the start-up winning process of FIG. 18, the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 included in the first special symbol win/loss information stored in the third reserved area REA3 are read. Note that the reserved area in which the first special symbol win/loss information is stored in step S1104 of the start-up winning process of FIG. 18 among the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 can be determined by the value of the reserved number N stored in the first special symbol reserve number storage area NAA.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the special symbol variation type counter CS1, and the first special symbol reservation number N in the first special symbol reservation command, and ends the first special symbol reservation command setting process. In this way, since the first special symbol reservation command includes the first special symbol reservation number N read out in step S3301, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first special symbol reservation command can recognize which of the first special symbol reservation areas REA1 to REA4 stores the first special symbol win/loss information that the first special symbol reservation command corresponds to by referring to the reservation number N included in the first special symbol reservation command.

<Steps S3305 and S3306>
If the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot win (step S3302: No), that is, if it is a miss, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3305). Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a miss, the special symbol variation type counter CS1, and the first special symbol reservation number N in the first special symbol reservation command (step S3306), and ends the first special symbol reservation command setting process.

The first special symbol hold command set in step S3304 or S3306 of the first special symbol hold command setting process is stored in RAM 412, and is erased after being sent to the voice lamp control device 5 along with other commands in step S1401 of the main process in FIG. 21, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Furthermore, the content of the first special symbol hold command described here is merely an example, and is not limited to what is described here, as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp content similar to that of the first special symbol hold command. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first special symbol hold command may be included in another command.

Furthermore, the second special symbol reserve command setting process is similar to the first special symbol reserve command setting process, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. However, the second special symbol reserve command setting process can be performed by replacing the "first special symbol reserve command" with the "second special symbol reserve command" and the "first special symbol reserve number N" with the "second special symbol reserve number M" in the first special symbol reserve command setting process.

[Through gate processing]
In this embodiment, only one through gate 317 is provided, which differs from the first embodiment described above in that two through gates 317L and 317R are provided, and therefore the through gate processing differs from the first embodiment described above. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the through gate processing. In the through gate processing of this embodiment, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 317, the MPU 41 updates the information stored in the regular ball reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412. The through gate processing will be explained below with reference to FIG. 131.

<Step S3401>
131, in the through gate processing of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 317 (step S3401). Whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 317 is determined based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of Fig. 17. If the MPU 41 determines that the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 317 (step S3401: Yes), it proceeds to step S3402, and if it determines that the gaming ball has not passed through the through gate 317 (step S3401: No), it terminates the through gate processing.

<Step S3402>
When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the through gate 317 (step S3401: Yes), it determines whether the normal map variable reserve number X stored in the normal map variable reserve number memory area SNA set in the normal map reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserve number (4 in this embodiment) (step S3402). When the normal map variable reserve number X is the maximum reserve number (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the through gate processing, and when the normal map variable reserve number X is not the maximum reserve number (step S3402: No), the processing proceeds to step S3403.

<Steps S3403 and S3404>
If the number of reserved normal map variations X is not the maximum number (step S3402: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reserved normal map variations X (step S3403), obtains the counter values of the normal hit random number counter C4 and the normal hit type random number counter C5 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17, and the value of the normal map variation type counter CS2 updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main processing in Figure 21 described below, and stores the counter values in the first empty reservation area among the first normal map reservation area SE1 to the fourth normal map reservation area SE4 in the normal map reservation storage area 412c in RAM 412 (step S3404), and terminates the through gate processing.

[General game control processing]
Here, Fig. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal symbol game control process executed in step S1404 in the main process of Fig. 21. In the normal symbol game control process, processes are executed to control the variable display and stop display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36. Hereinafter, the normal symbol game control process will be described with reference to Fig. 132.

<Step S1501>
As shown in Fig. 132, in the normal game control process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal symbol variable display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol is being displayed (normal game is being executed), is on (step S1501). The normal symbol variable display flag is set to on in step S1711 when the normal symbol variable display (normal game) starts in the normal symbol variable start process of Fig. 134 described later, and is set to off in step S1510 in the normal game control process when the normal symbol is displayed stationary (normal game ends).

If the normal map change display flag is on (step S1501: Yes), i.e., if a normal map game is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1507. On the other hand, if the normal map change display flag is off (step S1501: No), i.e., if a normal map game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1502.

<Step S1502>
If the normal map variable display flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, if the normal map game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the electric device open flag, which indicates that the electric device 315b is open (a normal map winning game is being played), is on (step S1502). The electric device open flag is set to on in step S1811 when the electric device 315b is opened in the normal map winning game control process of FIG. 135 described later, and is set to off in step S1818 when the electric device 315b is closed.

If the electric feature open flag is on (step S1502: Yes), i.e., if a normal winning game is being played, the MPU 41 ends the normal game control process. On the other hand, if the electric feature open flag is off (step S1502: No), i.e., if a normal winning game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1503.

<Step S1503>
If the electric accessory opening flag is OFF (step S1502: No), that is, if a normal jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being played, is ON (step S1503). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, the jackpot game in progress flag is set ON in step S2206 when a jackpot game starts, and is set OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1503: Yes), and a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 terminates the normal game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, normal game play does not start while a jackpot game is being played.

Of course, normal game play may be started while a jackpot game is being played. In this case, the win/loss determination for the normal lottery is made based on the win/loss information (values of the normal lottery win random number counter C4, the normal lottery win type random number counter C5, and the normal lottery win type counter CS2) moved from the normal lottery first reserve area SE1 in the normal lottery reserve storage area 412c to the normal lottery execution area SAE, according to the type of support mode (high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode) before the jackpot game was started, i.e., according to the game state before the transition to the jackpot game state. In other words, if the game state before the jackpot game is executed is a high-frequency support mode, which is a probability variable game state or a time-limited game state, the normal game lottery (normal game win or loss), normal game win type (long-open normal game win or short-open normal game win), and normal game change display time are set based on the normal game win/loss table (see FIG. 12(B)), normal game win type table (see FIG. 12(D)), and normal game change table (not shown) for the high-frequency support mode. On the other hand, if the game state before the jackpot game is executed is a low-frequency support mode, which is a normal game state, the normal game lottery (normal game win or loss), normal game win type (long-open normal game win or short-open normal game win), and normal game change display time are set based on the normal game win/loss table (see FIG. 12(A)), normal game win type table (see FIG. 12(C)), and normal game change table (not shown) for the low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1503: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions to step S1504.

<Step S1504>
If the electric device opening flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, if a normal winning game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal variable reserve number X stored in the normal variable reserve number memory area SNA set in the normal reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412 is 0 (step S1504). If the normal variable reserve number X is 0 (step S1504: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the normal game control process, and if the normal variable reserve number X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the process proceeds to step S1505.

<Step S1505>
If the number of reserved normal map changes X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the MPU 41 executes the normal map data setting process for the normal map correctness information stored in the normal map reserved storage area 412c (step S1505), and proceeds to step S1506. Details of the normal map data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1506>
In step S1506, the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol variation start process to cause the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 to execute a normal symbol variation display based on the information stored in the normal symbol reserve storage area 412c, and ends the normal symbol game control process. Details of the normal symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1507>
If the normal map variable display flag is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, if a normal map game is being played, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being played, is on (step S1507). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S2206 when a jackpot game starts, and is set to off in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1507: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1507: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1507: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal symbol variable display time has elapsed since the start of the normal symbol variable display (step S1508). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to stop the normal symbol variable display in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (to end the normal symbol game).

If the normal symbol variable display time has elapsed (step S1508: Yes), i.e., if it is time to stop the normal symbol displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ending normal symbol play), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variable display time has not elapsed (step S1508: No), i.e., if it is not time to stop the normal symbol displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ending normal symbol play), the MPU 41 ends the normal symbol play control process.

<Steps S1509 to S1511>
If the normal symbol variable display flag is on (step S1501: Yes) and the jackpot game flag is on (step S1507: Yes), that is, if a jackpot game starts during normal symbol game play, or if the normal symbol variable display time for the normal symbol has elapsed (step S1508: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop the variable display of the normal symbol (end normal symbol game), the MPU 41 stops the normal symbol display on the symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol winning lottery corresponding to the normal symbol game (step S1509), and sets the normal symbol variable display flag indicating that the normal symbol variable display is in progress (normal symbol game is being executed) to OFF (step S1510). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol variable stop display flag to ON (step S1511), indicating that the normal symbol has stopped display, that is, that the normal symbol game has ended, and ends the normal symbol game control process.

The normal map fluctuation stop display flag is referenced in step S1801 of the normal map winning game control processing in Figure 135 to determine whether it is time to start normal map winning game (open the electric device 315b).

In addition, in this embodiment, the timing for the normal symbol variable display time to elapse and the variable normal symbol to be displayed in a static state (normal symbol game ending) is not limited to when the normal symbol variable display time for the normal symbol has elapsed, but also when a jackpot game is started while normal symbol game is being played, the variable normal symbol will be displayed in a static state (normal symbol game ending). In other words, when a jackpot game is started, normal symbol game is forcibly ended before the normal symbol variable display time for the normal symbol has elapsed. Of course, normal symbol game may be continued until the normal symbol variable display time for the normal symbol has elapsed, even when a jackpot game is started.

[General map data setting process]
Here, Figure 133 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the general map data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1505 of Figure 132. In the general map data setting process, the contents stored in the general map reserve storage area 412c in the memory area of the main control device 4 in Figure 11 are updated. Below, the general map data setting process will be explained with reference to Figure 133.

<Steps S1601 to S1603>
As shown in FIG. 133, in the normal map data setting process, first, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the normal map change reserve number X stored in the normal map change reserve number storage area SNA (step S1601), and then moves the normal map correct/incorrect information from the normal map first reserve area SE1 to the normal map execution area SAE (step S1602). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the normal map correct/incorrect information stored in the normal map second reserve area SE2 to the normal map fourth reserve area SE4 one by one (step S1603). Specifically, in step S1603, the normal map correct/incorrect information in the normal map second reserve area SE2 is moved to the normal map first reserve area SE1, the normal map correct/incorrect information in the normal map third reserve area SE3 is moved to the normal map second reserve area SE2, and the normal map correct/incorrect information in the normal map fourth reserve area SE4 is moved to the normal map third reserve area SE3.

[General map change start processing]
Here, Figure 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal map variation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1506 of Figure 132. In the normal map variation start processing, the normal pattern variation display in the normal pattern display unit 361 is started, and various commands and flags are set based on the results of the normal map winning lottery. Below, the normal map variation start processing will be explained with reference to Figure 134.

<Step S1701>
134, in the normal game fluctuation start processing, the MPU 41 determines whether a time-shortened game state flag indicating a time-shortened game state (time-shortened game state a, time-shortened game state b, or time-shortened game state c) in the high-frequency support mode is on (step S1701). Here, the time-shortened game state flag includes a time-shortened game state flag a indicating the time-shortened game state a, a time-shortened game state flag b indicating the time-shortened game state b, and a time-shortened game state c indicating the time-shortened game state c. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether any of the time-shortened game state flag a, the time-shortened game state flag b, and the time-shortened game state flag c is set on. In addition, the time-shortened game state flag a is set to on when the game state is transitioned to the time-shortened game state a in step S4319 in the game state transition processing of Figure 144, the time-shortened game state flag b is set to on when the game state is transitioned to the time-shortened game state b in step S4303 in the game state transition processing of Figure 144, and the time-shortened game state flag c is set to on when the game state is transitioned to the time-shortened game state c in step S4308 in the game state transition processing of Figure 144.

If the time-saving game state flag is on (step S1701: Yes), i.e., the game is in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1702; if the time-saving game state flag is off (step S1701: No), i.e., the game is in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1703.

<Steps S1702 and S1703>
If the time-saving game state flag is on (step S1701: Yes), that is, if the time-saving game state is in, the MPU 41 performs a normal win/loss judgment based on the high-frequency support mode (step S1702). Specifically, the MPU 41 performs a normal win/loss judgment based on the high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see FIG. 12 (B)) and the high-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table (see FIG. 12 (D)). The MPU 41 determines whether the values of the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5 included as numerical information in the normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c are values corresponding to a normal win.

On the other hand, if the time-saving game state flag is off (step S1701: No), that is, if the game is in normal game mode, which is low-frequency support mode, a normal win determination is made based on the low-frequency support mode (step S1703). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal win random number counter C4 and normal win type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c, are values corresponding to a normal win, based on the low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see FIG. 12(A)) and the low-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table (see FIG. 12(C)).

<Steps S1704 and S1705>
When the MPU 41 determines whether or not the winning ticket is a regular winning ticket (step S1702 or S1703), it determines whether or not the result of the winning/losing determination is a long-open regular winning ticket in which the second winning port 315 is long-open (step S1704). If the result of the winning/losing determination is a long-open regular winning ticket (step S1704: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the long-open regular winning ticket flag, which indicates that the result of the winning/losing determination is a long-open regular winning ticket, to on (step S1705), and proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the winning/losing determination is not a long-open regular winning ticket (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1706.

<Steps S1706 and S1707>
If the result of the hit/miss judgment is not a long-opening normal winning (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the hit/miss judgment is a short-opening normal winning (step S1706) in which the second winning port 315 is short-opened. If the result of the hit/miss judgment is a short-opening normal winning (step S1706: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the short-opening normal winning flag, which indicates that the result of the hit/miss judgment is a short-opening normal winning (step S1707), to on, and proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss judgment is not a short-opening normal winning (step S1706: No), that is, if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708.

<Steps S1708 and S1709>
If the long-open normal winning flag is set to on (step S1705), if the short-open normal winning flag is set to on (step S1707), or if the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss (step S1706: No), the MPU 41 executes a normal winning pattern setting process to set a normal winning pattern, which is the normal winning pattern display time in the normal winning pattern display section 361 of the main display unit 36 during normal winning game play, by referring to a normal winning pattern display table (not shown). As described above, the normal winning pattern display table (not shown) includes a high-frequency support mode normal winning pattern table that is referenced when in high-frequency support mode, and a low-frequency support mode normal winning pattern display table that is referenced when in low-frequency support mode. Therefore, in the normal winning pattern setting process, the normal winning pattern is set based on the normal winning pattern display table corresponding to the support mode type. In addition, the high frequency support mode normal symbol variation display table is set so that the average time for displaying normal symbol variations is shorter than that of the low frequency support mode normal symbol variation display table, so in the high frequency support mode, the time for normal symbol play is shorter than in the low frequency support mode.

Then, in addition to the normal map fluctuation pattern set in step S1708, the MPU 41 sets a normal map fluctuation pattern command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the result of the win/loss judgment in step S1702 or S1703 (the result of the normal map winning lottery) and the type of support mode (high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode) (step S1709), and proceeds to step S1710.

The normal symbol variation pattern command is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. In response, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341, etc., to execute an effect corresponding to normal symbol play, such as an effect indicating that normal symbol play is being played or an effect indicating the result of a normal symbol winning lottery, based on the normal symbol variation pattern command.

Furthermore, the normal map fluctuation pattern command is sufficient as long as it is a command that at least notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the normal map fluctuation pattern, and the result of the normal map winning lottery or the type of support mode does not necessarily have to be notified to the voice lamp control device 5 as a normal map fluctuation pattern command. For example, the result of the normal map winning lottery may be notified to the voice lamp control device 5 by setting a normal map winning lottery result command when a win/loss determination is made in step S1702 or S1703, and the type of support mode may be notified to the voice lamp control device 5 by setting a support mode type command that can identify the type of support mode after transition when transitioning to high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode.

<Steps S1710 and S1711>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (step S1710). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol variable display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol is being variably displayed, i.e., that a normal symbol game is being executed, to ON (step S1711), and ends the normal symbol variable start process.

The normal symbol variation display flag is referenced in step S1501 of the normal symbol game control process in Figure 22 to determine whether normal symbol gameplay is in progress (normal symbol variation display).

[Normal winning game control processing]
Here, Figure 135 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal winning game control process executed in step S1405 in the main process of Figure 21. In the normal winning game control process, when the result of the normal winning lottery is a win, a process is executed to switch between an allowable state that allows the game ball to enter the second winning opening 315 and a restricted state that restricts it by controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory 315b. Below, the normal winning game control process will be explained with reference to Figure 135.

<Step S1801>
As shown in Figure 135, in the normal symbol winning game control process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol has stopped and been displayed (the normal symbol game has ended), is on (step S1801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to start the normal symbol winning game. The normal symbol variation stop display flag is set to on in step S1511 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol game control process of Figure 132.

If the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start a normal map winning game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1802. On the other hand, if the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), i.e., if it is not time to start a normal map winning game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1812.

<Step S1802>
If the normal game variation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, if it is time to start a normal game, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being executed, is on (step S1802). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S2206 when a jackpot game starts, and is set to off in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1802: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 terminates the normal jackpot game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, if the process is forced to terminate due to the start of a jackpot game, the normal jackpot game will not start even if the result of the normal jackpot lottery for that normal game is a normal jackpot. In other words, in this embodiment, a normal jackpot game will not start while a jackpot game is being played. Of course, a new normal jackpot game may be started while a jackpot game is being played.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1802: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions to step S1803.

<Step S1803>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1802: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the long-opening normal winning flag is set to on (step S1803). The long-opening normal winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the normal winning lottery is a long-opening normal winning. If the result of the normal winning lottery is a long-opening normal winning, it is set to on in step S1705 of the normal winning lottery start processing of FIG. 134. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a long-opening normal winning. If the long-opening normal winning flag is set to on (step S1803: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1804. If the long-opening normal winning flag is set to off (step S1803: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1806.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
If the long-open normal winning flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), i.e., if the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a long-open normal winning, the MPU 41 sets the opening time counter to a value corresponding to 6 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric device 315b in the long-open normal winning game (the time during which a game ball can enter the second winning slot 315) (step S1804). The opening time counter is referenced in step S1815 of the normal winning game control process to determine the return timing of the electric device 315b. The MPU 41 then sets the long-open normal winning flag to OFF (step S1805) and proceeds to step S1809.

<Step S1806>
If the long-opening regular winning flag is set to OFF (step S1803: No), that is, if the result of the regular winning lottery for the completed regular game is not a long-opening regular winning, the MPU 41 determines whether the short-opening regular winning flag is set to ON (step S1806). The short-opening regular winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the regular winning lottery is a short-opening regular winning, and if the result of the regular winning lottery is a short-opening regular winning, it is set to ON in step S1707 of the regular game change start processing in FIG. 134. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the regular winning lottery for the completed regular game is a short-opening regular winning. If the short-open regular winning flag is set to on (step S1806: Yes), the MPU 41 transfers processing to step S1807, and if the short-open regular winning flag is set to off (step S1806: No), that is, if the result of the regular winning lottery for the completed regular game is a loss, the MPU 41 transfers processing to step S1812.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
If the short-open normal winning flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), that is, if the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a short-open normal winning, the MPU 41 sets the value of the opening time counter to a value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric device 315b in the short-open normal winning game (the time during which the game ball can enter the second winning slot 315) (step S1807).Then, the MPU 41 sets the short-open normal winning flag to OFF (step S1808), and proceeds to step S1809.

<Steps S1809 to S1811>
If the result of the regular prize lottery is a win and the flag indicating the type of regular prize (long-open regular prize flag or short-open regular prize flag) is set to OFF (step S1805 or S1808), the MPU 41 activates the electric device 315b (step S1809). This opens the second prize opening 315, allowing the second prize opening 315 to enter an allowable state in which a game ball can enter. The MPU 41 then sets an electric device open command to notify the sound and lamp control device 5 that the electric device 315b has been opened (step S1810), sets an electric device open flag indicating that the electric device 315b has been opened to ON (step S1811), and proceeds to step S1812.

The electric reel release command is sent to the audio and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. Based on this, the audio and lamp control device 5 can initiate a performance that indicates to the symbol display unit 341, for example, that the electric reel 315b has been released, based on the electric reel release command.

<Step S1812>
When the result of the regular symbol winning lottery is a winning one and a process such as opening the electric device 315b is executed (steps S1803 to S1811), or when the long opening regular symbol winning flag and the short opening regular symbol winning flag are both set to off (when the result of the regular symbol winning lottery is a losing one) (both steps S1803 and S1806 are No), the MPU 41 sets to off the regular symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the regular symbol has stopped being displayed (the regular symbol game has ended) (step S1812), and terminates the regular symbol winning game control process.

<Step S1813>
If the normal map variable stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the electric device open flag, which is set to on when the electric device 315b is opened in step S1811 of the normal map winning game control processing, is set to on (step S1813). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a normal map winning game is being played. If the electric device open flag is set to on (step S1813: Yes), that is, if a normal map winning game is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1814. On the other hand, if the electric device open flag is set to off (step S1813: No), that is, if a normal map winning game is not being played, the MPU 41 terminates the normal map winning game control processing.

<Steps S1814 and S1815>
If the electric role open flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, if a normal winning game is being played, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the open time counter set in step S1804 or S1807 of the normal winning game control process (step S1814), and determines whether the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the electric role 315b. If the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric role 315b, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1816. On the other hand, if the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), that is, if it is not time to return the electric role 315b, the MPU 41 terminates the normal winning game control process.

<Steps S1816 to S1818>
If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric device 315b, the MPU 41 returns the electric device 315b (step S1816). This closes the second winning opening 315, restricting the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315. The MPU 41 then sets an electric device closing command that notifies the sound and lamp control device 5 that the electric device 315b has been closed (step S1817), and sets the electric device open flag, which indicates that the electric device 315b is open, to OFF (step S1818), thereby terminating the normal winning game control process.

The electric reel close command is sent to the audio and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio and lamp control device 5 can end the performance indicating that the electric reel, executed in the pattern display unit 341, for example, has been opened, based on the electric reel close command.

[Special game control processing]
In the special symbol game control process of this embodiment, since the gaming machine 10 is configured as a simultaneous variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be varied simultaneously, the control process for the first special symbol game and the control process for the second special symbol game are executed separately, which is different from the special symbol game control process of the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol game control process of this embodiment.

<Step S3501>
136, in step S3501, the MPU 41 determines whether a first special symbol variable display flag, which indicates that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the first special symbol game is being executed), is on. The first special symbol variable display flag is set to on in step S3706 when the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol game start process in FIG. 138 described later, and is set to off in step S3823 when the first special symbol is displayed in a static manner in the first special symbol game end process in FIG.

If the first special symbol variable display flag is on (step S3501: Yes), i.e., the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (first special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3507. On the other hand, if the first special symbol variable display flag is off (step S3501: No), i.e., the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (first special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3502.

<Step S3502>
If the first special chart variable display flag is off (step S3501: No), that is, if the first special chart is not being displayed in a variable manner (first special chart game is not being executed), the MPU 41 determines whether the number N of first special charts reserved is 0 or not (step S3502) stored in the first special chart reserved number memory area NAA (see Figure 127) of the special chart reserved storage area 412b.

If the number of reserved first special symbols N is 0 (step S3502: Yes), i.e., if the right to play the first special symbol game is not reserved, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3508. On the other hand, if the number of reserved first special symbols N is not 0 (step S3502: No), i.e., if the right to play the first special symbol game is reserved, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3503.

<Step S3503>
If the number N of reserved first special symbols is not 0 (step S3502: No), that is, if the right to play the first special symbol game is reserved, the MPU 41 executes a first special symbol data setting process for the data of the first special symbol win/loss information (first special symbol data) stored in the reserved special symbol storage area 412b (see FIG. 127) (step S3503), and proceeds to step S3504. Details of the first special symbol data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 137.

<Step S3504>
In step S3504, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being executed, is set to ON. The jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON when a jackpot game is started in step S2206 of the jackpot game control processing of FIG. 29, and is set to OFF when a jackpot game is ended in step S2252 of the jackpot game control processing of FIG. 29.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3504: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3505. On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S3504: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3506.

<Step S3505>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on (step S3504: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 executes the first special chart execution area data rewrite process, and then transitions to step S3506 to execute the first special chart start process.

Here, in the first special symbol execution area data rewrite process, the first special symbol variable display time of the first special symbol data stored in the first special symbol execution area AEA (see FIG. 127) of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b is rewritten to 7 seconds (see FIG. 129), the shortest variable display time set for the first special symbol. Of course, in the first special symbol execution area data rewrite process, it is also possible to rewrite the first special symbol variable display time to a time other than 7 seconds, for example, an extremely short time of 1 second or less.

Furthermore, when the first special symbol execution area data rewrite process is executed, the first special symbol start process of step S3506 is executed, and the first special symbol game is executed even if a jackpot game is currently being played. As mentioned above, if the game transitions to time-saving game state a after the end of a jackpot game, the reserved first special symbol game is carried over to time-saving game state a, preventing consecutive execution of first special symbol game in time-saving game state a. Furthermore, by shortening the first special symbol variable display time through the first special symbol execution area data rewrite process, it is more reliably prevented from carrying over reserved first special symbol game to time-saving game state a. This prevents a strategy that makes it easier to end the first special symbol game in the normal game state that transitions to the end of time-saving game state a by intentionally reserving the right to play the first special symbol game before or during the start of a jackpot game. Additionally, as a countermeasure against strategic play, as mentioned above, if the first special symbol game is initiated in time-saving game mode a when a game ball enters the first central winning slot 314C, it is possible to set the variable display time of the first special symbol game to a short time.

<Step S3506>
If the first special symbol execution area data rewrite process is executed during execution of a jackpot game (step S3506), or if a jackpot game is not being executed (step S3504: No), the MPU 41 executes a first special symbol game start process to start the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 (start the first special symbol game) (step S3506), and proceeds to step S3508. Details of the first special symbol game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 138.

<Step S3507>
If the first special symbol variable display flag is on (step S3501: Yes), that is, if the first special symbol is being displayed variably (the first special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 executes a first special symbol game termination process to stop the first special symbol display unit 362 from displaying the first special symbol (terminating the first special symbol game) (step S3507), and then proceeds to step S3508. Details of the first special symbol game termination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 139.

<Step S3508>
When the first special symbol game start process of step S3506 or the first special symbol game end process of step S3507 is executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a second special symbol variable display flag indicating that the second special symbol is being displayed (the second special symbol game is being executed) is on (step S3508). The second special symbol variable display flag is set to on in step S4005 when the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol game start process of FIG. 141 described later, and is set to off in step S4116 when the second special symbol is displayed stationary in the first special symbol game end process of FIG. 142 described later.

If the second special symbol variable display flag is on (step S3508: Yes), i.e., the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (second special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3513. On the other hand, if the second special symbol variable display flag is off (step S3508: No), i.e., the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (second special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3509.

<Step S3509>
If the second special chart variable display flag is off (step S3508: No), that is, if the second special chart is not being displayed in a variable manner (second special chart game is not being executed), the MPU 41 determines whether the second special chart reserved number M stored in the second special chart reserved number memory area NAB (see Figure 127) of the special chart reserved storage area 412b is 0 (step S3509).

If the number of reserved second special symbols M is 0 (step S3509: Yes), i.e., if the right to play the second special symbol game is not reserved, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process. On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols M is not 0 (step S3509: No), i.e., if the right to play the second special symbol game is reserved, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3510.

<Step S3510>
If the number M of reserved second special symbols is not 0 (step S3509: No), that is, if the right to play the second special symbol game is reserved, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game in progress flag indicating that a jackpot game is being played is set to ON (step S3510). The jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON when a jackpot game is started in step S2206 of the jackpot game control processing of FIG. 29, and is set to OFF when a jackpot game is ended in step S2252 of the jackpot game control processing of FIG. 29.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3510: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process. In other words, if a jackpot game is in progress, the second special symbol game will not begin. Therefore, the reserved right to play the second special symbol game is carried over to the time-shortened game state a, which is entered after the jackpot game ends. This is because even if the reserved right to play the second special symbol game is carried over to the time-shortened game state a, it does not result in a strategy like when the reserved right to play the first special symbol game is carried over to the time-shortened game state a. Rather, by carrying over the reserved right to play the second special symbol game to the time-shortened game state a, when the time-shortened game state a is entered, the second special symbol game will begin before the first ball enters the second winning slot 315, which provides the player with the benefit of being able to end the time-shortened game state a little earlier.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S3510: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not currently being played, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3511.

<Step S3511>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S3510: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 executes a second special symbol data setting process for the data of the second special symbol win/loss information (second special symbol data) stored in the special symbol reserve storage area 412b (see FIG. 127) (step S3511), and proceeds to step S3512. Details of the second special symbol data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 140.

<Step S3512>
In step S3512, the MPU 41 executes a second special symbol game start process to start the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 (start the second special symbol game) (step S3512), and ends the special symbol game control process. Details of the second special symbol game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 141.

<Step S3513>
If the second special symbol variable display flag is on (step S3508: Yes), that is, if the second special symbol is being displayed variably (the second special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 executes a second special symbol game termination process (step S3513) to stop the second special symbol display unit 363 (terminate the first special symbol game), and terminates the special symbol game control process. Details of the second special symbol game termination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 142.

[First special drawing data setting process]
Here, Fig. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the first special symbol data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3503 in the special symbol game control process of Fig. 136. In the first special symbol data setting process, the memory contents of the special symbol reserved storage area 412b (see Fig. 127) set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the first special symbol data setting process will be described with reference to Fig. 137.

<Steps S3601 to S3604>
137, in step S3601, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol reservation number N stored in the first special symbol reservation number memory area NAA of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA, and further moves the first special symbol win/loss information from the first reservation area REA1 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA to the first special symbol execution area AEA (step S3602). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the first special symbol win/loss information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA one by one (step S3603). Specifically, in step S3603, the first special symbol win/loss information of the second reserved area REA2 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA is moved to the first reserved area REA1, the first special symbol win/loss information of the third reserved area REA3 is moved to the second reserved area REA2, and the first special symbol win/loss information of the fourth reserved area REA4 is moved to the third reserved area REA3. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a first special symbol shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the first special symbol win/loss information of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA has been shifted, and ends the first special symbol data setting process. This first special symbol shift command is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can change the number of hold displays corresponding to the first special symbol hold displayed on the pattern display unit 341 based on the first special symbol shift command.

[First special game start processing]
138 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the first special symbol game start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3506 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 136. In the first special symbol game start process, a process is executed to start the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 (to start the first special symbol game). Hereinafter, the first special symbol game start process will be described with reference to FIG. 138.

<Steps S3701 and S3702>
138, in step S3701, the MPU 41 reads the jackpot winning/losing table (see FIG. 128(A)) and executes a winning/losing determination based on the jackpot winning/losing table. Furthermore, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the winning/losing determination is a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S3702).

If the result of the judgment is that the time-saving symbol stop is not a miss (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3703; if the result of the judgment is that the time-saving symbol stop is not a miss (step S3702: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3704.

<Step S3703>
If the result of the judgment is that the time-saving symbol stop is a miss (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a time-saving symbol stop miss flag indicating that the result of the judgment is that the time-saving symbol stop is a miss to ON (step S3703), and proceeds to step S3704. The time-saving symbol stop miss flag is referenced to determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving game state a in step S3806 of FIG. 139 described below.

<Step S3704>
If the time-saving pattern stop miss flag is set to on (step S3703), or if the result of the judgment is that the time-saving pattern stop miss is not (step S3702: No), the MPU 41 sets the variable display time of the first special pattern in the first special pattern display section 362 of the main display section 36 in the first special pattern game as the first special pattern variable pattern (step S3704), and proceeds to step S3705.

The first special symbol variation display time (first special symbol variation pattern) is set based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the jackpot variation table (see Figure 129 (A)) if the result of the hit/miss determination in step S3701 is a jackpot, and is set based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the first special symbol miss variation table A (see Figure 129 (B)) or the first special symbol miss variation table B (see Figure 129 (C)) selected depending on the game status at the start of the first special symbol game.

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a first special symbol variation pattern command including the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game, which is the result of the win/loss determination in step S3701, and the first special symbol variation pattern set in step S3704, and proceeds to step S3706. The first special symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main processing (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute a special symbol game presentation on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the first special symbol variation pattern command.

<Step S3706>
In step S3706, the MPU 41 starts the first special symbol game by starting the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36, and then proceeds to step S3707.

<Step S3707>
In step S3707, the MPU 41 sets a first special symbol variable display flag indicating that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the first special symbol game is being executed) to ON, and proceeds to step S3708. The first special symbol variable display flag is referenced in step S3501 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 136 to determine whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display unit 36 (the first special symbol game is being executed).

<Step S3708>
In step S3708, the MPU 41 sets the first special pattern change stop flag to OFF, which indicates that the first special pattern change has stopped (the first special pattern game has ended), and ends the first special pattern change start processing.

[First special game end processing]
139 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the first special symbol game termination process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3507 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 136. In the first special symbol game termination process, a process is executed to stop displaying the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 (terminating the first special symbol game). Hereinafter, the first special symbol game termination process will be described with reference to FIG. 138.

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 139, in step S3801, the MPU 41 determines whether the first special symbol variation display time set as the first special symbol variation pattern in the first special symbol variation pattern setting process of step S3704 in the first special symbol game start process of FIG. 138 has elapsed, i.e., whether it is time to end the first special symbol game.

If the first special symbol variable display time has elapsed (step S3801: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the first special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3802. On the other hand, if the first special symbol variable display time has not elapsed (step S3801: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the first special symbol game, the MPU 41 ends the first special symbol game end process.

<Step S3802>
When the first special symbol variable display time has elapsed (step S3801: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the first special symbol game, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3802). Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special symbol game is a jackpot is determined based on the win/loss determination information in the first special symbol data stored in the first special symbol execution area AEA (see FIG. 127) of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b, for example.

If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3802: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3803; if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3802: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3805.

<Steps S3803 and S3804>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3802: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a first special symbol jackpot flag to ON, indicating that the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery notified by the started first special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3803). The first special symbol jackpot flag is referenced to determine whether or not to start a jackpot game in step S4201 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 143, which will be described later.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 clears the ceiling count counter, which indicates the number of times special symbol games have been played in the normal game state (step S3804), and proceeds to step S3820. Note that the ceiling count counter is referenced in step S3911 of the first special symbol game termination processing or step S4109 of the second special symbol game termination processing of FIG. 143 described below, to determine whether to transition to time-saving game state b based on the specified number of times (450 times in this embodiment) that special symbol games have been played.

<Step S3805>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3802: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a normal game state flag indicating a normal game state is set to ON (step S3805). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state at the end of the first special symbol game is the normal game state.

If the normal game state flag is set to on (step S3805: Yes), i.e., if the game state at the end of the first special symbol game is the normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3806. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3805: No), i.e., if the game state at the end of the first special symbol game is not the normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3813.

<Step S3806>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3805: Yes), that is, if the game state at the end of the first special symbol game (when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed) is the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving symbol stop miss flag, which indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss, is set to ON (step S3806). That is, if the game state at the end of the first special symbol game (when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed) is the normal game state, it determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss. That is, in this embodiment, whether to transition to the time-saving game state c is determined based on the game state at the end of the first special symbol game (when the first special symbol stops changing), rather than the start of the first special symbol game (when the first special symbol starts changing).

If the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to on (step S3806: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3807; if the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to off (step S3806: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3810.

<Steps S3807 to S3809>
If the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to ON (step S3805: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time-saving symbol stop miss flag to ON (step S3807) to transition the game state from the normal game state to the time-saving symbol stop miss flag, and also sets the time-saving symbol stop miss flag to OFF (steps S3807 and S3808).Then, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving symbol stop miss flag to OFF (step S3809) and ends the first special symbol game end process.

<Steps S3810 to S3812>
If the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to OFF (step S3806: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the ceiling number counter (step S3810). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ceiling number counter after the addition is 450 (step S3811), that is, whether the number of times the special symbol game has been executed in the normal game state has reached the specified number (450 times).

If the value of the ceiling count counter after the increment is 450 (step S3811: Yes), i.e., if the number of times special symbol games have been played in the normal game state reaches the specified number (450 times), the MPU 41 sets the b time-saving game state flag to ON (step S3812), which transitions the game state from the normal game state to the b time-saving game state, and transitions processing to step S3820. The b time-saving game state flag is referenced in step S4302 of the game state transition processing in FIG. 144 to determine whether or not to transition the game state from the normal game state to the b time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if the value of the ceiling count counter after the increment is not 450 (step S3811: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3820.

<Steps S3813 and S3814>
If the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3805: No), that is, if the game state at the end of the first special pattern game is not the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving pattern stop miss flag, which indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving pattern stop miss, is set to on (step S3813).

If the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to on (step S3813: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time-saving symbol stop miss flag to off (step S3814) and proceeds to step S3815. On the other hand, if the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to off (step S3813: No), the MPU 41 skips step S3814 and proceeds to step S3815.

<Step S3815>
When the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to OFF (step S3814), or when the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to OFF (step S3813: No), the MPU 41 determines whether a time-saving game state flag indicating a time-saving game state is set to ON (step S3815). Here, the time-saving game state flag includes a time-saving game state flag a indicating a time-saving game state, a time-saving game state flag b indicating a time-saving game state, and a time-saving game state flag c indicating a time-saving game state. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether any of the time-saving game state flag a, the time-saving game state flag b, and the time-saving game state flag c is set to ON. In addition, the time-shortened game state flag a is set to on when the game state is transitioned to the time-shortened game state a in step S4319 in the game state transition processing of Figure 144, the time-shortened game state flag b is set to on when the game state is transitioned to the time-shortened game state b in step S4303 in the game state transition processing of Figure 144, and the time-shortened game state flag c is set to on when the game state is transitioned to the time-shortened game state c in step S4308 in the game state transition processing of Figure 144.

If the time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S3815: Yes), i.e., if the game is in time-shortened game state a, time-shortened game state b, or time-shortened game state c, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3816. If the time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3815: No), i.e., if the game is not in time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3820.

<Steps S3816 and S3817>
If the time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3815: Yes), that is, if the game is in the a time-saving game state, the b time-saving game state, or the c time-saving game state, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving counter indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving game state (step S3816). Furthermore, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3817). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether to transition the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of the specified number of special game plays.

If the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3817: Yes), i.e., if the game state is to transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of the specified number of special game plays, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3818. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3817: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3820.

<Steps S3818 and S3819>
If the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3817: Yes), that is, if the game state is to transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of the specified number of special symbol games, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag indicating the time-saving game state to OFF (step S3818).Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to ON (step S3819), which transitions the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, and proceeds to step S3820.

<Steps S3820 to S3823>
In step S3820, the MPU 41 stops and displays the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36 in a manner corresponding to the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery corresponding to the first special symbol game (step S3820). Then, the MPU 41 sets a first special symbol variation stop flag indicating that the first special symbol has been stopped and displayed to ON (step S3821), sets a first special symbol variation stop command notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the first special symbol has been stopped and displayed to OFF (step S3823), and ends the first special symbol game control process.

[Second special image data setting process]
Here, Fig. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special symbol data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3511 in the special symbol game control process of Fig. 136. In the second special symbol data setting process, the memory contents of the special symbol reserved storage area 412b (see Fig. 127) set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the first special symbol data setting process will be described with reference to Fig. 140.

<Steps S3901 to S3904>
140, in step S3901, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the second special symbol reservation number M stored in the second special symbol reservation number memory area NAB of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB, and further moves the second special symbol win/loss information from the first reservation area REB1 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB to the second special symbol execution area AEB (step S3902). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the second special symbol win/loss information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB one by one (step S3903). Specifically, in step S3903, the second special symbol win/loss information in the second reserved area REB2 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB is moved to the first reserved area REB1, the second special symbol win/loss information in the third reserved area REB3 is moved to the second reserved area REB2, and the second special symbol win/loss information in the fourth reserved area REB4 is moved to the third reserved area REB3. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a second special symbol shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the second special symbol win/loss information in the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB has been shifted, and ends the second special symbol data setting process. This second special symbol shift command is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to change the number of hold displays corresponding to the second special symbol hold displayed on the pattern display unit 341 based on the second special symbol shift command.

[Second special game start processing]
141 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special symbol game start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3512 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 136. In the second special symbol game start process, a process is executed to start the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 (start the second special symbol game). Hereinafter, the second special symbol game start process will be described with reference to FIG. 141.

<Steps S4001 and S4002>
141, in step S4001, the MPU 41 reads out the jackpot winning/losing table (see FIG. 128(A)) and executes a winning/losing judgment based on the jackpot winning/losing table. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 in the second special symbol game as the second special symbol variable pattern (step S4002), and proceeds to step S4003.

The second special symbol variation display time (second special symbol variation pattern) is set based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the jackpot variation table (see Figure 129 (A)) if the result of the hit/miss determination in step S4001 is a jackpot, and is set based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the normal game state second special symbol miss variation table (see Figure 129 (D)) or the time-saving game state second special symbol miss variation table (see Figure 129 (E)) selected depending on the game state at the start of the second special symbol game.

<Step S4003>
In step S4003, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a second special symbol variation pattern command including the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game, which is the result of the win/loss determination in step S4001, and the second special symbol variation pattern set in step S4002, and proceeds to step S4004. The second special symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main processing (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to execute a special symbol game presentation on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the second special symbol variation pattern command.

<Step S4004>
In step S4004, the MPU 41 starts the second special symbol game by starting the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36, and then proceeds to step S4005.

<Step S4005>
In step S4005, the MPU 41 sets a second special symbol variable display flag, which indicates that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the second special symbol game is being executed), to ON, and proceeds to step S4006. The second special symbol variable display flag is referenced in step S3508 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 136 to determine whether the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display unit 36 (the second special symbol game is being executed).

<Step S4006>
In step S4006, the MPU 41 sets the second special pattern change stop flag to OFF, which indicates that the second special pattern change has stopped (the second special pattern game has ended), and ends the second special pattern change start processing.

[Second special game end processing]
142 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special symbol game termination process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3513 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 136. In the second special symbol game termination process, a process is executed to stop the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 (to terminate the second special symbol game). Hereinafter, the second special symbol game termination process will be described with reference to FIG. 142.

<Step S4101>
As shown in FIG. 142, in step S4101, the MPU 41 determines whether the second special chart variation display time set as the second special chart variation pattern set in the second special chart variation pattern setting process of step S4102 in the second special chart game start process of FIG. 141 has elapsed, i.e., whether it is the timing to end the second special chart game.

If the second special symbol variable display time has elapsed (step S4101: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4102. On the other hand, if the second special symbol variable display time has not elapsed (step S4101: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 ends the second special symbol game end process.

<Step S4102>
When the second special symbol variable display time has elapsed (step S4101: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the second special symbol game is a jackpot (step S4102). Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the second special symbol game is a jackpot is determined based on the win/loss determination information in the second special symbol data stored in the second special symbol execution area AEB (see FIG. 127) of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b, for example.

If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game is a jackpot (step S4102: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4103; if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S4102: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4105.

<Steps S4103 and S4104>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the second special symbol game is a jackpot (step S4102: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a second special symbol jackpot flag to ON, indicating that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery notified by the second special symbol game to be started is a jackpot (step S4103). The second special symbol jackpot flag is referenced to determine whether or not to start a jackpot game in step S4204 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 143, which will be described later.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 clears the ceiling count counter, which indicates the number of times special symbol games have been played in the normal game state (step S4104), and proceeds to step S4117. Note that the ceiling count counter is referenced in step S3911 of the first special symbol game end processing in FIG. 139 or step S4109 of the second special symbol game end processing to determine whether to transition to time-saving game state b based on the specified number of times (450 times in this embodiment) that special symbol games have been played.

<Steps S4105 and S4106>
If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S4102: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving symbol stop miss flag, which indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss, is set on (step S4105).

If the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to on (step S4105: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time-saving symbol stop miss flag to off (step S4106) and proceeds to step S4107. On the other hand, if the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to off (step S4105: No), the MPU 41 skips step S4106 and proceeds to step S4107.

<Step S4107>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the second special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S4102: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a normal game state flag indicating a normal game state is set to ON (step S4107). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state at the end of the second special symbol game is the normal game state.

If the normal game state flag is set to on (step S4107: Yes), i.e., if the game state at the end of the second special symbol game is the normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4108. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to off (step S4107: No), i.e., if the game state at the end of the second special symbol game is not the normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4112.

<Steps S4108 to S4111>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4107: Yes), that is, if the game state at the end of the second special symbol game (when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed) is the normal game state, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the ceiling number of times counter (step S4108). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ceiling number of times counter after the addition is 450 (step S4109), that is, whether the number of times the special symbol game has been executed in the normal game state has reached the specified number (450 times).

If the value of the ceiling count counter after the addition is 450 (step S4109: Yes), i.e., if the number of times special symbol play has been executed in the normal play state reaches the specified number (450 times), the MPU 41 sets the b time-saving play state flag to on (step S4110), which transitions the play state from the normal play state to the b time-saving play state, and then clears the ceiling count counter (step S4111) and transitions processing to step S4117. The b time-saving play state flag is referenced in step S4302 of the play state transition processing in FIG. 144 to determine whether or not to transition the play state from the normal play state to the b time-saving play state.

On the other hand, if the value of the ceiling count counter after the increment is not 450 (step S4107: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4117.

<Step S4112>
If the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4107: No), that is, if the game state at the end of the second special symbol game is not the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the time-shortened game state flag indicating the time-shortened game state is set to ON (step S4112). Here, the time-shortened game state flag includes a time-shortened game state flag indicating the time-shortened game state a, a time-shortened game state flag indicating the time-shortened game state b, and a time-shortened game state c. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether any of the time-shortened game state flag a, the time-shortened game state flag b, and the time-shortened game state flag c is set to ON. In addition, the time-shortened game state flag a is set to on when the game state is transitioned to the time-shortened game state a in step S4319 in the game state transition processing of Figure 144, the time-shortened game state flag b is set to on when the game state is transitioned to the time-shortened game state b in step S4303 in the game state transition processing of Figure 144, and the time-shortened game state flag c is set to on when the game state is transitioned to the time-shortened game state c in step S4308 in the game state transition processing of Figure 144.

If the time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S4112: Yes), i.e., if the game is in time-shortened game state a, time-shortened game state b, or time-shortened game state c, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4113. If the time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S4112: No), i.e., if the game is not in time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4117.

<Steps S4113 and S4114>
If the time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4112: Yes), that is, if the game is in the a time-saving game state, the b time-saving game state, or the c time-saving game state, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving counter indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving game state (step S4113). Furthermore, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4114). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether to transition the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of the specified number of special game plays.

If the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4114: Yes), i.e., if the game state is to transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of the specified number of special game plays, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4115. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4114: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4117.

<Steps S4115 and S4116>
If the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4114: Yes), that is, if the game state is to transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of the specified number of special symbol games, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag indicating the time-saving game state to OFF (step S4115).Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to ON (step S4116), which transitions the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, and proceeds to step S4116.

<Steps S4117 to S4120>
In step S4117, the MPU 41 stops and displays the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display unit 36 in a manner corresponding to the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery corresponding to the second special symbol game (step S4117). Then, the MPU 41 sets a second special symbol variation stop flag indicating that the second special symbol has been stopped and displayed to ON (step S4118), sets a second special symbol variation stop command notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the second special symbol has been stopped and displayed to OFF (step S4120), and ends the second special symbol game control process.

[Jackpot Game Control Processing]
143 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control process executed in step S1407 of the main process in Fig. 21. In the jackpot game control process, a process is executed to control the progress of the jackpot game, such as controlling the opening and closing of the opening and closing door 319 provided in the variable winning opening 316. The jackpot game control process will be described below with reference to Fig. 143.

<Step S4201>
143, in step S4201, the MPU 41 first determines whether the first special symbol jackpot flag is set to ON. The first special symbol jackpot flag is a flag indicating that the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery for the completed first special symbol game is a jackpot, and is set to ON if the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery for the completed first special symbol game is a jackpot in step S3803 of the first special symbol game termination processing in FIG.

If the first special jackpot flag is set to on (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4202; if the first special jackpot flag is set to off (step S4201: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4203.

<Step S4202>
If the first special chart jackpot flag is set to on (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first special chart jackpot flag to off (step S4102) and proceeds to step S4205.

<Step S4203>
If the first special symbol jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S4201: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the second special symbol jackpot flag is set to ON (step S4203). The second special symbol jackpot flag is a flag indicating that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery for the completed second special symbol game is a jackpot, and is set to ON if the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery for the completed second special symbol game is a jackpot in step S4103 of the second special symbol game termination processing in FIG.

If the second special jackpot flag is set to on (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4204; if the second special jackpot flag is set to off (step S4203: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4208.

<Step S4204>
If the second special chart jackpot flag is set to on (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second special chart jackpot flag to off (step S4104) and proceeds to step S4205.

<Step S4205>
In step S4205, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game in progress flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is on (step S4205). If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4206, and if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S4205: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2204 in FIG. 29 and executes processing to start a jackpot game.

<Steps S4206 and S4207>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S4205: Yes), a jackpot game pending flag is set to on (step S4206) to execute a jackpot game based on the result of a jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game that ended during the execution of the jackpot game after the end of the currently executing jackpot game, and 1 is added to the value of the jackpot pending counter, which indicates the number of pending jackpot games (step S4207). Note that the jackpot game pending flag is referenced in step S4209 of the jackpot game control processing shown in FIG. 143 below to determine whether there is an unexecuted jackpot game, and the jackpot pending counter is decremented when a pending jackpot game is started in step S4210 of the jackpot game control processing. Then, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2211 of FIG. 29 and executes processing to continue the jackpot game.

In addition, if the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery for the first special chart game that starts during the execution of a jackpot game is a jackpot, it is also possible to rewrite the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery as a miss.

<Step S4208>
If the second special symbol jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S4203: No), the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being executed, is ON (step S4208). If the jackpot game in progress flag is ON (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2211 in FIG. 29 and executes processing to continue the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is OFF (step S4208: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4209.

<Step S4209>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S4208: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game pending flag is set on to execute a jackpot game based on the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game that ended during the execution of the jackpot game being a jackpot after the currently executing jackpot game has ended (step S4209).

If the jackpot game pending flag is set to ON (step S4209: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4210; if the jackpot game pending flag is set to OFF (step S4209: No), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S4210 to S4212>
If the jackpot game pending flag is set to on (step S4209: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot pending counter, which indicates the number of pending jackpot games (step S4210), and determines whether the value of the jackpot pending counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4211).

If the value of the jackpot pending counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4210: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot pending flag to OFF (step S4212), proceeds to step S2204 in FIG. 29, and executes processing to start the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot pending counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4210: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2204 in FIG. 29, and executes processing to start the jackpot game.

[Game status transition processing]
144 to 147 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main process in Fig. 21. In the game state transition process, a process for controlling the transition of various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, and jackpot game state) is executed. The game state transition process will be explained below with reference to Figs. 144 to 147.

<Step S4301>
144, in step S4301, the MPU 41 first determines whether a normal gaming state flag indicating a normal gaming state is set to ON. If the normal gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4302. If the normal gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4301: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4317.

<Step S4302>
If the normal game state flag is set to on (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a b time-shortened game state transition flag for transitioning to the b time-shortened game state is set to on (step S4302). If the b time-shortened game state transition flag is set to on (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4303, and if the b time-shortened game state transition flag is set to off (step S4302: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4307.

<Steps S4303 to S4306>
If the b time-shortened game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the b time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game is in the b time-shortened game state ON (step S4303), and sets the b time-shortened game state command notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the game has been transitioned to the b time-shortened game state (step S4304). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the b time-shortened game state transition flag OFF (step S4305), and sets the normal game state flag indicating that the game is in the normal game state OFF (step S4306), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S4307>
If the b time-shortened game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4302: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the c time-shortened game state transition flag for transitioning to the c time-shortened game state is set to ON (step S4307). If the c time-shortened game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4308, and if the c time-shortened game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4307: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4312.

<Steps S4308 to S4311>
If the time-shortened game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game is in the time-shortened game state ON (step S4308), and sets a time-shortened game state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the game has been transitioned to the time-shortened game state C (step S4309). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the time-shortened game state transition flag to OFF (step S4310), and sets the normal game state flag indicating that the game is in the normal game state OFF (step S4311), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4312>
If the time-shortened game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4307: No), the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game will start is set to ON (step S4312). If the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4312: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4313, and if the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S4312: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S4313 to S4316>
If the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4312: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag indicating that the game is in a jackpot game state ON (step S4313), and sets a jackpot game state transition command to notify the audio and lamp control device 5 that the game has been transitioned to the jackpot game state (step S4314). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag OFF (step S4315), and sets the normal game state flag OFF (step S4316), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4317>
If the normal gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4301: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a jackpot gaming state flag indicating a jackpot gaming state is set to ON (step S4317). If the jackpot gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4317: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4318, and if the jackpot gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4317: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4322 in FIG.

<Step S4318>
If the jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S4317: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game is ended is set to ON (step S4318). If the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S4318: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4319, and if the jackpot game end flag is set to OFF (step S4318: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S4319 to S4321>
If the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S4318: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the a-time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game is in the a-time-shortened game state to ON (step S4319), and sets the a-time-shortened game state command notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the game has been transitioned to the a-time-shortened game state (step S4320). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag to OFF (step S4321), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4322>
If the jackpot gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4317: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time-shortened gaming state flag indicating the time-shortened gaming state is set to ON (step S4322), as shown in Fig. 145. If the time-shortened gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4322: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4323, and if the time-shortened gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4322: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4333 in Fig. 146.

<Step S4323>
If the time-shortened gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4322: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether a normal gaming state transition flag for transitioning to a normal gaming state is set to ON (step S4323). If the normal gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S4323: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4324, and if the normal gaming state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4323: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4328.

<Steps S4324 to S4327>
If the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4323: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating that the game is in the normal game state ON (step S4324), and sets a normal game state transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game has been transitioned to the normal game state (step S4325). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag OFF (step S4326), and sets the time-saving game state flag A OFF (step S4327), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4328>
If the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4323: No), the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game will start is set to ON (step S4328). If the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4328: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4329, and if the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S4328: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S4329 to S4332>
If the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4328: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag indicating that the game is in a jackpot game state ON (step S4329), and sets a jackpot game state transition command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the game has been transitioned to the jackpot game state (step S4330). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag OFF (step S4331), and sets the time-saving game state flag A OFF (step S4332), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4333>
If the time-shortened gaming state flag a is set to OFF (step S4322: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time-shortened gaming state flag b, which indicates that the game is in the time-shortened gaming state b, is set to ON (step S4333), as shown in Fig. 146. If the time-shortened gaming state flag b is set to ON (step S4333: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4334, and if the time-shortened gaming state flag b is set to OFF (step S4333: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4344 in Fig. 147.

<Step S4334>
If the time-shortened gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4333: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether a normal gaming state transition flag for transitioning to a normal gaming state is set to ON (step S4334). If the normal gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S4334: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4335, and if the normal gaming state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4334: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4339.

<Steps S4335 to S4338>
If the normal gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S4334: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state flag indicating that the game is in the normal gaming state to ON (step S4335), and sets a normal gaming state transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game has been transitioned to the normal gaming state (step S4336). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state transition flag to OFF (step S4337), and sets the b time-saving gaming state flag to OFF (step S4338), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4339>
If the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4334: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game will start is set to ON (step S4339). If the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4339: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4340, and if the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S4339: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S4340 to S4343>
If the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4339: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag indicating that the game is in a jackpot game state ON (step S4340), and sets a jackpot game state transition command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the game has been transitioned to the jackpot game state (step S4341). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag OFF (step S4342), and sets the b time-saving game state flag OFF (step S4343), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4344>
If the b time-shortened gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4333: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the c time-shortened gaming state flag indicating the c time-shortened gaming state is set to ON (step S4344), as shown in Fig. 147. If the c time-shortened gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4344: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4345, and if the c time-shortened gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4344: No), the MPU 41 terminates the gaming state transition process.

<Step S4345>
If the time-shortened gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4344: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether a normal gaming state transition flag for transitioning to a normal gaming state is set to ON (step S4345). If the normal gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S4345: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4346, and if the normal gaming state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4345: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4350.

<Steps S4346 to S4349>
If the normal gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S4345: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state flag indicating that the game is in the normal gaming state to ON (step S4346), and sets a normal gaming state transition command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the transition to the normal gaming state (step S4347). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state transition flag to OFF (step S4348), and sets the c time-saving gaming state flag to OFF (step S4349), and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Step S4350>
If the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4345: No), the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game will start is set to ON (step S4350). If the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4350: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4351, and if the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S4350: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S4351 to S4354>
If the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4350: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag indicating that the game is in a jackpot game state ON (step S4351), and sets a jackpot game state transition command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the game has been transitioned to the jackpot game state (step S4352). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag OFF (step S4353), and sets the c time-saving game state flag OFF (step S4354), and ends the game state transition process.

[Processing of the voice and lamp control device 5]
In this embodiment, the processing of the voice lamp control device 5 differs from that of the first embodiment described above in that part of the command determination processing procedure is different from that of the first embodiment, since the gaming machine 10 is a simultaneous variable machine in which the first special chart and the second special chart can change simultaneously.

[Command Determination Processing]
148 and 149 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the command determination process executed in step S2703 of the sub-timer interrupt process in Fig. 42. Hereinafter, the game state transition process will be described with reference to Figs. 148 and 149.

<Step S4401>
In the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not a command has been received in step S4401. If a command has been received (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4402. If a command has not been received (step S4401: No), the MPU 41 ends the command determination process.

<Steps S4402 and S4403>
When a command is received (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a normal game state transition command indicating a transition to the normal game state (step S4402). If the received command is a normal game state transition command (step S4402: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a normal game state flag indicating the normal game state to ON (step S4403) and terminates the command determination process. Note that the normal game state flag is referenced in step S4901 of the first variation type (presentation pattern) setting process of FIG. 151 to determine whether the game is in the normal game state. On the other hand, if the received command is not a normal game state transition command (step S4402: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4404.

<Steps S4404 and S4405>
If the received command is not a normal gaming state transition command (step S4402: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot gaming state transition command indicating a transition to a jackpot gaming state (step S4404). If the received command is a jackpot gaming state transition command (step S4404: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a jackpot gaming state flag indicating a jackpot gaming state to ON (step S4405) and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the received command is not a jackpot gaming state transition command (step S4404: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4406.

<Steps S4406 to S4408>
If the received command is not a jackpot game state transition command (step S4404: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an a-time-shortened game state transition command indicating a transition to the a-time-shortened game state (step S4406). If the received command is an a-time-shortened game state transition command (step S4406: Yes), the MPU 51 sets an a-time-shortened game state flag indicating the a-time-shortened game state (step S4407). Note that the a-time-shortened game state flag is referenced in step S4501 of the time-shortened game count counter processing of FIG. 150 or step S4603 of the first variation type (presentation pattern) setting processing of FIG. 151 to determine whether the a-time-shortened game state is in the a-time-shortened game state. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets an a-time-shortened game count counter indicating the remaining number of time-shortened game plays in the a-time-shortened game state (step S4408), and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the received command is not a time-shortened game state transition command (step S4406: No), the MPU 51 transfers the processing to step S4409.

<Steps S4409 to S4411>
If the received command is not a time-shortened game state transition command (step S4406: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a time-shortened game state transition command b, indicating a transition to the time-shortened game state b (step S4409). If the received command is a time-shortened game state transition command b (step S4409: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a time-shortened game state flag b, indicating that the game is in the time-shortened game state b, to on (step S4410). Note that the time-shortened game state flag b is referenced in step S4505 of the time-shortened game count counter processing in FIG. 150 or step S4605 of the first variation type (presentation pattern) setting processing in FIG. 151 to determine whether the game is in the time-shortened game state b. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets a time-shortened game count counter b, indicating the remaining number of time-shortened game plays in the time-shortened game state b (step S4411), and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the received command is not a b time-shortened game state transition command (step S4409: No), the MPU 51 transfers the processing to step S4412.

<Steps S4412 to S4414>
If the received command is not a b time-shortened game state transition command (step S4409: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a c time-shortened game state transition command indicating a transition to the c time-shortened game state (step S4412). If the received command is a c time-shortened game state transition command (step S4412: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a c time-shortened game state flag indicating the c time-shortened game state (step S4413). Note that the c time-shortened game state flag is referenced in step S4509 of the time-shortened game count counter process of FIG. 150 to determine whether the c time-shortened game state is in effect. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets a c time-shortened game count counter indicating the remaining number of time-shortened game plays in the c time-shortened game state (step S4414), and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the received command is not a c time-shortened game state transition command (step S4412: No), the MPU 51 transitions the processing to step S4415 in FIG.

<Step S4415>
If the received command is not a c time-shortened game state transition command (step S4412: No), as shown in Fig. 149, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a first special symbol variation pattern command (step S4415). If the received command is a first special symbol variation pattern command (step S4415: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4416, and if the received command is not a first special symbol variation pattern command (step S4415: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4421.

<Step S4416>
If the received command is the first special symbol variation pattern command (step S4415: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a time-saving game counter process for managing the time-saving game counter (step S4416), and proceeds to step S4417. The time-saving game counter process will be described below with reference to FIG.

[Time-saving game count counter processing]
Here, Figure 150 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the time-saving game count counter processing executed in the command determination processing of Figure 149.

<Step S4501>
In the time-shortened game counter process of this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 150, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the time-shortened game state flag a, which indicates that the game is in the time-shortened game state a, is set to ON (step S4501). Note that the time-shortened game state flag a is set to ON in step S4407 when the time-shortened game state transition command a is received in the command determination process of Fig. 148.

If the time-shortened game state flag a is set to on (step S4501: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the time-shortened game state a, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4502. On the other hand, if the time-shortened game state flag a is set to off (step S4501: No), i.e., if the game is not in the time-shortened game state a, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4505.

<Steps S4502 to S4504>
If the time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4501: Yes), that is, if the time-saving game state is the a-time state, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special game plays in the time-saving game state a (step S4502), and determines whether the value of the time-saving game count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4503). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether this is the last special game in the time-saving game state a.

If the value of the time-saving play counter a after the subtraction is 0 (step S4503: Yes), i.e., if this is the last special game in the time-saving play state a, the MPU 51 sets the time-saving play state flag a to off (step S4504) and terminates the time-saving play count counter processing. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving play counter a after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4503: No), i.e., if this is not the last special game in the time-saving play state a, the MPU 51 terminates the time-saving play count counter processing.

<Step S4505>
If the time-shortened gaming state flag a is set to OFF (step S4501: No), that is, if the game is not in the time-shortened gaming state a, it is determined whether the time-shortened gaming state flag b, which indicates that the game is in the time-shortened gaming state b, is set to ON (step S4505). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the game is in the time-shortened gaming state b. Note that the time-shortened gaming state flag b is set to ON in step S4410 when a time-shortened gaming state transition command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 148.

If the b time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S4505: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the b time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4506. On the other hand, if the b time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S4505: No), i.e., if the game is not in the b time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4509.

<Steps S4506 to S4508>
If the b time-shortened game state flag is set to ON (step S4505: Yes), that is, if the game is in the b time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the b time-shortened game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special game plays in the b time-shortened game state (step S4506), and determines whether the value of the b time-shortened game count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4507). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether this is the last special game in the b time-shortened game state.

If the value of the b time-shortened play counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4507: Yes), i.e., if this is the last special symbol play in the b time-shortened play state, the MPU 51 sets the b time-shortened play state flag to OFF (step S4508) and terminates the time-shortened play count counter processing. On the other hand, if the value of the b time-shortened play counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4507: No), i.e., if this is not the last special symbol play in the b time-shortened play state, the MPU 51 terminates the time-shortened play count counter processing.

<Step S4509>
If the b time-shortened gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4505: No), i.e., if the game is not in the b time-shortened gaming state, it is determined whether the c time-shortened gaming state flag indicating the c time-shortened gaming state is set to ON (step S4509). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the game is in the c time-shortened gaming state. Note that the c time-shortened gaming state transition flag is set to ON in step S4413 when the MPU 51 receives a c time-shortened gaming state transition command indicating that the game state is transitioning from the a time-shortened gaming state to the c time-shortened gaming state in the command determination process of FIG. 148.

If the c time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S4509: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the c time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4510. On the other hand, if the c time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S4509: No), i.e., if the game is not in the c time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 terminates the time-shortened game count counter process.

<Steps S4510 to S4512>
If the c time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4509: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the c time-saving game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special game plays in the c time-saving game state (step S4510), and determines whether the value of the c time-saving game count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4511). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether this is the last special game in the c time-saving game state.

If the value of the c time-saving game counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4511: Yes), i.e., if this is the last special game in the c time-saving game state, the MPU 51 sets the c time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4512) and terminates the time-saving game count counter processing. On the other hand, if the value of the c time-saving game counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4511: No), i.e., if this is not the last special game in the c time-saving game state, the MPU 51 terminates the time-saving game count counter processing.

<Steps S4417 and S4418>
Returning to the explanation of Fig. 149, in step S4417, the MPU 51 executes a first variation type (effect pattern) setting process to set an effect to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like for the first special symbol game. Details of the first variation type (effect pattern) setting process will be described later with reference to Fig. 151. Then, the MPU 51 executes a process to set a stopped symbol combination of the first decorative symbol 78 (see Fig. 152) that is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game and is stopped and displayed in response to the stopped display of the first special symbol (step S4418). For example, as the stopping pattern combination of the first decorative pattern 78, if the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery announced by the first special chart is a jackpot, a double number is set, if the reach is a miss, a combination is set in which the numbers of the left and right patterns are the same but the numbers of the middle pattern are different, if the time-saving pattern stop is a miss, a specific combination of scattered numbers (a distinctive combination such as an ascending order such as "123" or a descending order such as "321") is set, and if it is a complete miss, a scattered number other than the specific combination is set.

Here, Figures 152 and 153 are diagrams showing example screens on the symbol display unit 341. Specifically, Figure 152 (A) is a diagram showing an example screen on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal game state, and Figure 152 (B) is a diagram showing an example screen on the symbol display unit 341 in the time-shortened game state (time-shortened game state a, time-shortened game state b, and time-shortened game state c).

In normal game mode, left-handed hits that launch the game ball into the left area of the game board 31 are encouraged, and if a left-handed hit is made, the second special symbol game is not executed, and the first special symbol game is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152 (A), in normal game mode, the first decorative symbol 78, which changes and changes in response to the changing display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game and is displayed as a stopped symbol corresponding to the stopped display of the first special symbol, is displayed large in the center of the symbol display section 341. However, when the second special symbol game is executed in normal game mode, the second decorative symbol 79, which changes and changes in response to the changing display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game and is displayed as a stopped symbol corresponding to the stopped display of the second special symbol, is displayed smaller than the first decorative symbol 78 in the upper right corner of the symbol display section 341.

On the other hand, in the time-saving game states (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, and time-saving game state c), right-handed hits that launch the game ball into the right area of the game board 31 are encouraged, and when a right-handed hit is made in the time-saving game state, the support of the electric device 315b makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315, making it easier to play the second special symbol game. On the other hand, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right first winning slot 314R, which is located in the right area of the game board 31, so when a right-handed hit is made, it is difficult to play the first special symbol game. Therefore, in the time-shortened game state, hitting to the right mainly executes the second special symbol game, and the first special symbol game is executed less frequently than the second special symbol game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152 (B), except during the execution of the time attack effect described below executed in the time-shortened game state a, in the time-shortened game state including the time-shortened game state a, as a general rule, the changing and stationary displays of the second decorative symbol 79 corresponding to the second special symbol that is changed and stationary displayed mainly in the second special symbol game that is executed are prominently displayed in the center of the symbol display section 341, and the changing and stationary displays of the first decorative symbol 78 corresponding to the first special symbol that is changed and stationary displayed in the less frequently executed first special symbol game are displayed less prominently than the changing and stationary displays of the first decorative symbol 78 in the upper right corner of the symbol display section 341.

In addition, in the time-shortened play states (time-shortened play state a, time-shortened play state b, and time-shortened play state c), an image is displayed indicating the number of time-shortened play games remaining until the maximum number of time-shortened play games in the time-shortened play state is reached. In the example shown in Figure 152 (B), the text image "120 remaining" displayed in the upper right corner of the symbol display section 341 indicates the number of time-shortened play games remaining until the maximum number of time-shortened play games in the time-shortened play state is reached. The image indicating the number of time-shortened play games remaining until the maximum number of time-shortened play games in the time-shortened play state is not limited to the example shown in Figure 152 (B), and may be in other forms. For example, it may be "120 remaining," "LAST 120 times," "ST 120 times," "120 times," "120," or the like.

In addition, in the time-saving play states (time-saving play state a, time-saving play state b, and time-saving play state c), the second decorative symbol 79 is displayed larger than the first decorative symbol 78 in an easily visible central position on the symbol display section 341, but the display positions of the first decorative symbol 78 and the second decorative symbol 79 may be reversed, or the first decorative symbol 78 may be displayed larger than the second decorative symbol 79 so that the first decorative symbol 78 stands out more. Furthermore, the first decorative symbol 78 and the second decorative symbol 79 may be displayed side by side in a vertical, horizontal, or diagonal direction, or the first decorative symbol 78 and the second decorative symbol 79 may be displayed with approximately the same size.

<Steps S4419 and S4420>
Returning to the explanation of Fig. 149, in step S4419, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol variable display counter based on the first special symbol variable pattern information included in the received first special symbol variable pattern command. The first special symbol variable display counter is then decremented by one in the counter update process of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt process of Fig. 42, and the MPU 51 can determine whether the symbol variable display is in progress, the remaining time of the variable display time, etc., based on the first special symbol variable display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variable display has ended when the first special symbol variable display counter reaches 0.

Then, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 to identify the effect pattern type set in step S4417 of the command determination process and the details of the stopped symbol combination of the first decorative symbol 78 set in step S4418 (step S4420), and terminates the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the effect pattern type and the stopped symbol combination of the first decorative symbol 78. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores variation images and effect images of the first decorative symbol 78 corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes variation display and effect display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the stopped symbol combination, variation type, and effect type of the first decorative symbol 78 corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

<Step S4421>
If the received command is not the first special symbol variation pattern command (step S4415: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the second special symbol variation pattern command (step S4421). If the received command is the second special symbol variation pattern command (step S4421: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4422, and if the received command is not the second special symbol variation pattern command (step S4421: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4427.

<Step S4422>
If the received command is a second special symbol variation pattern command (step S4421: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a time-saving game counter process for managing the time-saving game counter (step S4422), and proceeds to step S4423. The time-saving game counter process in step S4422 is the same as the time-saving game counter process in step S4416 described with reference to FIG. 150, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Steps S4423 and S4424>
In step S4423, the MPU 51 executes a second variation type (effect pattern) setting process to set the effect to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like for the second special symbol game. Details of the second variation type (effect pattern) setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 154. The MPU 51 then executes a process to set a stop symbol combination for the second decorative symbol 79 (see FIG. 152) that is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the second special symbol and stopped in response to the stopped display of the second special symbol (step S4425). For example, as the stop symbol combination for the second decorative symbol 79, if the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery notified by the second special symbol is a jackpot, a double number is set; if the result is a reach miss, a combination in which the numbers on the left and right symbols are the same but the numbers on the center symbol are different is set; and if the result is a complete miss, a spread number is set.

<Steps S4425 and S4426>
In step S4425, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol variable display counter based on the second special symbol variable pattern information included in the received second special symbol variable pattern command. The second special symbol variable display counter is decremented by one in the counter update process of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt process of Fig. 42, and the MPU 51 can determine whether the symbol variable display is in progress, the remaining time of the variable display time, etc., based on the second special symbol variable display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variable display has ended when the second special symbol variable display counter reaches 0.

The MPU 51 then outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 to identify the effect pattern type set in step S4423 of the command determination process and the details of the stopped symbol combination of the second decorative symbol 79 set in step S4424 (step S4426), and terminates the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the effect pattern type and the stopped symbol combination of the second decorative symbol 79. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores variation images and effect images of the second decorative symbol 79 corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes variation display and effect display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the stopped symbol combination, variation type, and effect type of the second decorative symbol 79 corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

<Step S4427>
If the received command is not the second special symbol variation pattern command (step S4421: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a first special symbol variation stop command (step S4427). The first special symbol variation stop command is set when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in step S3822 of the first special symbol variation end process of FIG. 139.

If the received command is a first special symbol variation stop command (step S4421: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4428; if the received command is not a first special symbol variation stop command (step S4427: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4430.

<Step S4428>
If the received command is a first special symbol variation stop command (step S4427: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether a time attack effect flag indicating that a time attack effect described later is being executed is on (step S4428). The time attack effect flag is set to on in step S4607 of the first variation type (effect pattern) setting process in Fig. 151 when a first special symbol game is started in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss in the time-saving game state a, and is set to off in step S4803 of the first time attack effect in Fig. 155 (A) or step S4903 of the second time attack effect in Fig. 155 (B) when the time attack effect is to be ended.

If the time attack effect flag is on (step S4428: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4429; if the time attack effect flag is off (step S4428: No), the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process.

<Step S4429>
If the time attack effect flag is on (step S4428: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a first time attack effect end process for ending the time attack effect based on the stop display of the first special symbol (end of the first special symbol game) (step S4429), and ends the command determination process. Details of the first time attack effect end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 155(A).

<Step S4430>
If the received command is not the first special symbol variation stop command (step S4427: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the second special symbol variation stop command (step S4430). The second special symbol variation stop command is set when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in step S4119 of the second special symbol variation end process in FIG. 142.

If the received command is a second special chart change stop command (step S4430: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4431; if the received command is not a second special chart change stop command (step S4430: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4433.

<Step S4431>
If the received command is a second special symbol variation stop command (step S4430: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether a time attack effect flag indicating that a time attack effect described later is being executed is on (step S4431). The time attack effect is set to on when the time attack effect starts in step S4607 of the first variation type (effect pattern) setting process of FIG. 151.

If the time attack effect flag is on (step S4431: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4432; if the time attack effect flag is off (step S4431: No), the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process.

<Steps S4432 and S4433>
If the time attack effect flag is on (step S4431: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the a-time shortening game counter, which indicates the remaining number of time shortening games that can be executed in the a-time shortening game state, is 0 (step S4432). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the second special symbol game to be ended this time is the last special symbol game in the a-time shortening game state.

If the value of the a-time-shortened game counter is 0 (step S4432: Yes), i.e., if the second special symbol game that is ending this time is the last special symbol game in the a-time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 executes second time attack effect termination processing to terminate the time attack effect based on the stopped display of the second special symbol (end of the a-time-shortened game state) (step S4433), and terminates the command determination processing. Details of the second time attack effect termination processing will be described later with reference to Figure 155 (B). On the other hand, if the value of the a-time-shortened game counter is not 0 (step S4432: Yes), i.e., if the second special symbol game that is ending this time is not the last special symbol game in the a-time-shortened game state and the a-time-shortened game state will continue, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination processing.

<Step S4434>
If the received command is not the second special chart variation stop command (step S4430: No), the MPU 51 executes processing for other commands (step S4433) and terminates the command determination process.

[First variation type (performance pattern) setting process]
Here, Figure 151 is a flowchart showing an example of the steps of the first variation type (presentation pattern) setting process executed in step S4417 in the command determination process of Figure 149.

<Step S4601>
151, in the first variation type (effect pattern) setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a normal game state flag indicating a normal game state is set to on (step S4601). If the normal game state flag is set to on (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4602, and if the normal game state flag is set to off (step S4601: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4603.

<Step S4602>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the normal game state effect (step S4602) and ends the first variation type (effect pattern) setting process. The normal game state effect is the same as that in the first embodiment described above.

<Step S4603>
If the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4601: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game is in the time-shortened game state is set to ON (step S4603). If the time-shortened game state flag is set to ON (step S4603: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4604, and if the time-shortened game state flag is set to OFF (step S4603: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4609.

<Step S4604>
If the time-saving game state flag is set to on (step S4603: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the time-saving game state effect (step S4604) and proceeds to step S4605. In the time-saving game state effect processing, for example, the setting of a background effect specific to the time-saving game state, the setting related to the display of the remaining number of time-saving game plays, the setting related to the display of the remaining time of the first special symbol game, and the setting related to the variable display position of the first decorative symbol 78 are executed. The display of the remaining number of time-saving game plays is set by referring to the value of the time-saving game count counter a, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving game plays in the time-saving game state a, managed by the time-saving game count counter processing of FIG. 150. Furthermore, the display of the remaining time of the first special symbol game is set by referring to the first special symbol variable display counter, which is set for the variable display time in step S4419 of the command determination processing of FIG. 149.

<Step S4605>
In step S4605, the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game to be started is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop. Whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop is determined based on information regarding the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game, which is included in the first special symbol variation pattern command.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game to be started is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop (step S4605: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4606; if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game to be started is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop (step S4605: No), the MPU 51 terminates the first variation type (presentation pattern) setting process.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game that is started is a jackpot, a reach for a miss before or after, or a reach for a non-miss before or after, a reach effect (see Figure 50) may be executed in the same way as the normal game state effect.

<Steps S4606 and S4607>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game that is started is a miss in the time-saving pattern stop (step S4605: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a time attack effect (see Figure 153) (step S4606), sets a time attack effect flag to on, indicating that a time attack effect has been set (step S4607), and proceeds to step S4608.

In this way, if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game that begins in the time-saving game state a is a miss, the time attack effect is executed, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a miss, the time attack effect is not executed. Therefore, when the time attack effect begins, the player can understand that they are in a situation where they can expect to transition to the time-saving game state c, which is more advantageous than the time-saving game state a. As a result, when the time attack effect begins, the player can enjoy playing while hoping to transition to the time-saving game state c.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game started in the time-saving game state a is a miss, a time attack effect is executed, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a miss, no time attack effect is executed. As a result, if the time attack effect does not start when the first special symbol game is started in the time-saving game state a, the player can choose to stop shooting game balls until the first special symbol game ends. This prevents the time-saving game state a from ending by playing the second special symbol game up to the upper limit in the time-saving game state a during the execution of a first special symbol game, which does not have the possibility of transitioning to the time-saving game state c, and makes it possible to leave open the possibility of transitioning to the time-saving game state c. Furthermore, if a time attack effect does not begin when a first special symbol game is started in the time-saving game state a, the player can choose to play a certain number of second special symbol games before the end of the first special symbol game, thereby adjusting the remaining number of time-saving games up to the upper limit in the time-saving game state a, and then stopping the shooting of game balls until the end of the first special symbol game. This increases the likelihood that, when a new first special symbol game is started in the time-saving game state a that is maintained even after the end of the first special symbol game, the player will be able to play the remaining number of time-saving games up to the upper limit in the time-saving game state a before the new first special symbol game ends.

Here, Figure 153 is a diagram showing an example screen on the symbol display unit 341 when a time attack effect is executed in time-saving game mode a. Specifically, Figures 153(A) and 153(B) are example screens at the start of the time attack effect, Figure 153(C) is an example screen during the time attack effect, Figure 153(D) is an example screen when the time attack is successful, and Figures 153(E) and 153(F) are example screens when the time attack is unsuccessful.

As shown in Figures 153(A) to 153(F), the time attack effect is an effect that is executed in a time attack format to determine whether or not the second special symbol game has been played up to the maximum number of times in the time-saving game state a during the execution of the first special symbol game that starts in the time-saving game state a. In this time attack effect, a success effect is executed if the second special symbol game has been played up to the maximum number of times in the time-saving game state a during the execution of the first special symbol game that starts in the time-saving game state a (Figures 153(A) to 153(D)), and a failure effect is executed if the second special symbol game has not been played up to the maximum number of times in the time-saving game state a during the execution of the first special symbol game that starts in the time-saving game state a (Figures 153(A) to 153(C), 153(E), and 153(F)).

As shown in Figures 153 (A) to 153 (F), in the time attack presentation, the symbol display unit 341 displays a remaining time image corresponding to the remaining variable display time (remaining time) of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game started in the time-saving game state a, and a remaining spins image corresponding to the number of time-saving games (remaining spins) that can be played in the time-saving game state a at the time the first special symbol game started. The remaining time image is displayed from the upper center to the right of the symbol display unit 341. The remaining spins image is displayed directly below the remaining time image on the symbol display unit 341. This makes it easy to view the remaining time image and the remaining spins image simultaneously.

In the remaining time image, the remaining time is displayed using a remaining time seconds counter and a remaining time gauge. As the remaining time decreases, the number displayed in seconds on the remaining time seconds counter decreases and the length of the remaining time gauge shortens. If the remaining time reaches 0 before the remaining number of rotations, the remaining time image will display the number displayed in seconds on the remaining time seconds counter and the length of the remaining time gauge as 0 (Figures 153 (E) and 153 (F)).

On the other hand, the remaining rotation count image displays the remaining rotation count using a remaining rotation count counter and a remaining rotation count gauge. As the remaining rotation count decreases, the value displayed on the remaining rotation count counter decreases and the length of the remaining rotation count gauge shortens. If the remaining rotation count reaches 0 before the remaining time, the remaining rotation count image displays the value displayed on the remaining rotation count counter and the length of the remaining rotation count gauge as 0 (see Figure 153 (D)).

Here, the time attack presentation includes both success and failure presentations, but the display of the progress is the same for success and failure presentations (see Figures 153(A) to 153(C)) until the time attack results are announced (see Figures 153(E) and 153(F)).

As shown in Figure 153(A), in the time attack performance, an explanatory image for time attack is displayed in the center of the symbol display section 341 as the start screen, along with an image of the remaining time and the number of remaining spins. In the example shown in Figure 153(A), the explanatory image for time attack is displayed as a text image that reads, "Reduce the number of remaining spins to 0 before the remaining time gauge reaches 0." Note that the explanatory image for time attack is not limited to the form shown in Figure 153(A) and may be other.

As shown in Figure 153(B), in the time attack presentation, an explanatory image for the time attack is displayed as the start screen, followed by a time attack start image indicating that the time attack will begin. In the example shown in Figure 153(B), the time attack start image is displayed as a text image of "TIME ATTACK START." Note that the time attack start image is not limited to the form shown in Figure 153(B), and may be other, or may be omitted.

As shown in Figure 153 (C), in the time attack presentation, an image is displayed encouraging the player to hit the ball to the right and to place the game ball into the second winning slot 315. In the example shown in Figure 153 (C), the text image "Hit right" is displayed directly below the image of the remaining number of spins, and the text image "Put the balls in!" is displayed directly above the second special chart reserved image display area 77. Note that the image encouraging the player to hit the ball to the right and the image encouraging the player to place the game ball into the second winning slot 315 may be displayed in other ways or may be omitted.

Furthermore, the first decorative symbol 78, which changes and is displayed as a still image in response to the changing and stationary display of the first special symbol, is displayed large in the center of the symbol display unit 341, and the second decorative symbol 79, which changes and is displayed as a still image in response to the changing and stationary display of the second special symbol, is displayed smaller than the changing display of the first decorative symbol 78 in the lower left of the symbol display unit 341. As a result, in a time attack performance, the changing display of the first decorative symbol 78 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed more prominently than the changing display of the second decorative symbol 79 corresponding to the second special symbol. Here, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, when a first special symbol game in which a time-saving symbol is displayed as a still image is started in the time-saving game state a, the timing of the transition from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state is important. In other words, in this embodiment, when a first special symbol game in which a time-saving symbol is displayed as a still image is started in the time-saving game state a, the timing of the first decorative symbol 78 being displayed as a still image is important. Therefore, in the time attack performance, contrary to the basic display of the first decorative symbol 78 and the second decorative symbol 79 in the time-saving game state described above, the changing display of the first decorative symbol 78 is displayed more prominently than the changing display of the second decorative symbol 79.

As shown in Figure 153 (D), if the remaining spins reach 0 before the remaining time, i.e., if the second special symbol game is played up to the maximum number of times in time-saving game state a during the execution of the first special symbol game that starts in time-saving game state a, a success effect is executed to notify that the time attack has been successful. Specifically, in this success effect, the second decorative symbol 79 is displayed as stopped upon the completion of the second special symbol game, the remaining spins image is displayed as 0, the remaining spins display value of the remaining spins counter is displayed as 0, and the length of the remaining spins gauge is displayed as 0.

Furthermore, in the success presentation, a success notification image is displayed in the center of the symbol display section 341 to notify the player that they have succeeded in the time attack. In the example shown in Figure 153 (D), the success notification image is displayed as a text image reading "Success! Long time reduction obtained!" Here, "long time reduction" refers to the time reduction state c, which has a higher upper limit number of times than the time reduction state a and is essentially guaranteed to result in a jackpot. By displaying "long time reduction obtained," it is notified that a transition to a game state with a greater number of time reductions than the time reduction state a has been confirmed. Note that the notification of a transition to the time reduction state c is not limited to the text image "long time reduction obtained," and may be a text image of another type, or may be another method, such as an audio notification.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 153(E) and 153(F), if the remaining time reaches 0 before the number of remaining spins, i.e., if the second special symbol game is not played up to the maximum number of times in time-saving game state a during the execution of the first special symbol game that starts in time-saving game state a, a failure effect will be executed to notify the player that the time attack has failed. Specifically, as shown in Figure 153(E), in this failure effect, upon the completion of the first special symbol game, the first decorative symbol 78 is displayed as a stopped time-saving symbol ("123" in the example shown in Figure 153(E)), and the remaining time image displays 0 as the number of seconds displayed on the remaining time seconds counter, and the length of the remaining time gauge is displayed as 0.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 153 (F), in the failure presentation, after the first decorative symbol 78 has stopped and displayed, a failure notification image is displayed in the center of the symbol display section 341 to notify the player that they have failed the time attack. In the example shown in Figure 153 (F), the failure notification image is displayed as a text image that reads "Failed! Time-saving continues!" Here, "time-saving continues" means that the time-saving game state a will be maintained. Note that the notification that the time-saving game state a will continue is not limited to the text image "time-saving continues," and may be a text image of another type, or may be another method such as an audio notification.

In this way, in this embodiment, if the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game started in the time-saving game state a is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, a time attack effect is executed. In the time attack effect, the player can focus on the remaining time image, the remaining spins image, the changing and stopped display of the first decorative symbol 78, and the changing and stopped display of the second decorative symbol 79, and enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the time attack effect executed in the time-saving game state a.

Specifically, when a time attack effect is executed, by checking the remaining time image relative to the remaining time, the player can grasp the variable display time of the first special symbol (first decorative symbol 78) in that first special symbol game, allowing the player to enjoy estimating the likelihood of transitioning the game state from time-saving game state a to normal game state before the first special symbol game ends. For example, if it can be confirmed that special symbol variable pattern "09," which has the longest variable display time of 150 seconds for that first special symbol game, has been set based on the remaining time image at the start of the time attack effect, it can be determined that there is a high probability that the game state will transition from time-saving game state a to normal game state before the first special symbol game ends, and therefore, when the time attack effect begins, the player can enjoy watching the game progress while focusing on the remaining time image.

Furthermore, after the time attack effect is executed, for example, by focusing on the first decorative symbol 78, the player can confirm that the first special symbol game has not ended, and by checking the remaining time image, the player can confirm the time remaining until the first special symbol game ends. Meanwhile, by focusing on the second decorative symbol 79, the player can confirm that the second special symbol game has started or ended, and by checking the remaining spins image, the player can confirm the number of second special symbol games required to transition the game state from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state. Therefore, by focusing on the second decorative symbol 79 and confirming that the second special symbol game has started or ended while making sure that the first decorative symbol 78 is not displayed stationary, the player can confirm that the second special symbol game has ended while the first special symbol game is being executed (while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner), and that the remaining spins image indicates that the remaining points have decreased. This allows the player to enjoy the game while anticipating that the second decorative symbol 79 will change while the first decorative symbol 78 is being displayed, and that the second decorative symbol 79 will stop changing and be displayed in a short time.

Furthermore, after the time attack effect has begun, the remaining variable display time of the first special symbol during the first special symbol game can be confirmed based on the remaining time image, and the number of second special symbol games required before transitioning to normal game mode can be confirmed based on the remaining spins image. Therefore, based on the remaining time image and remaining spins image, the player can enjoy the game while hoping that the rate at which the remaining spins decrease will be higher than the rate at which the remaining time decreases, and can also enjoy the game while predicting the possibility of transitioning to normal game mode during the execution of the first special symbol game. In particular, as the remaining time confirmed based on the remaining time image and the remaining spins confirmed based on the remaining spins image decrease and approach zero, the player can enjoy the game while paying attention to which of the remaining time or the remaining spins will reach zero first.

Furthermore, if a long display time is set for the second special symbol in the second special symbol game after the time attack effect has begun, and the player focuses on the second decorative symbol 79, the second decorative symbol 79 takes a long time to stop and be displayed, which can cause the player to feel annoyed that the remaining spins are not being subtracted. Furthermore, the longer the second decorative symbol 79, the lower the possibility of transitioning to the normal game mode, and this annoyance can lead to a decrease in interest in the game while the time attack effect is being executed. In contrast, in this embodiment, the longer the display time for the second special symbol in the second special symbol game that starts during the execution of the first special symbol game in the time-saving game mode a, the higher the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game will be a jackpot. This can prevent the player's interest in the game while the time attack effect is being executed from decreasing due to the second decorative symbol 79 taking a long time to stop and be displayed.

In this embodiment, in the time attack performance, the first decorative pattern 78 is displayed larger than the second decorative pattern 79 in a central position on the pattern display unit 341 where it is easily visible, but the display positions of the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 may be reversed, or the second decorative pattern 79 may be displayed larger than the first decorative pattern 78 so that the second decorative pattern 79 stands out more. Furthermore, the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 may be displayed side by side, vertically, horizontally, diagonally, etc., and the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 may be displayed with approximately the same size.

Furthermore, in the time attack presentation, just as the time attack presentation is not executed in a time-saving play state including the time-saving play state a, an image indicating the remaining number of time-saving play plays until the maximum number of time-saving play plays in the time-saving play state is reached (the text image of "120 plays remaining" in Figure 152 (B)) may also be displayed. In this case, in the time attack presentation, it is also possible to display an image (remaining spins image (remaining spins display, remaining spins gauge) (see Figure 153)) indicating the remaining number of plays of the second special symbol game that should be completed during the execution of the first special symbol game necessary to transition to the time-saving play state c in a more emphasized manner than the image indicating the remaining number of time-saving play plays (the text image of "120 plays remaining" in Figure 152 (B)). For example, the remaining spins image could be displayed in larger letters than the image showing the remaining number of time-saving games (the "120 spins remaining" text image in Figure 152 (B)), the remaining spins image could be displayed in a conspicuous color such as red or gold, or effects could be added to the remaining spins image. In this way, by displaying the remaining spins image in a more emphasized manner than the image showing the remaining number of time-saving games (the "120 spins remaining" text image in Figure 152 (B)), the remaining spins image is easier to see, and the player can more easily predict the remaining number of games of the second special symbol game that should be completed during the execution of the first special symbol game, which is necessary to transition to the time-saving game state c, based on visually obtained information, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the time attack presentation, the remaining spins image, which indicates the number of time-saving plays (remaining spins) remaining until the maximum number of time-saving plays in time-saving play state a is reached, can be displayed in a more emphasized manner than the remaining time image (remaining time seconds counter, remaining time gauge) indicating the remaining time for the first special game. For example, the remaining spins image can be displayed in larger letters than the remaining time image, or in a conspicuous color such as red or gold, and effects can be added to the remaining spins image. In this way, by displaying the remaining spins image in a more emphasized manner than the remaining time image, the remaining spins image is easier to see, making it easier for the player to predict the number of time-saving plays (remaining spins) remaining until the maximum number of time-saving plays in time-saving play state a is reached based on visually obtained information, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Conversely, in a time attack presentation, the remaining time image (remaining time seconds counter, remaining time gauge) indicating the remaining time for the first special symbol game can be displayed in a more emphasized manner than the remaining spins image, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving games (remaining spins) until the maximum number of time-saving games in time-saving game state a is reached. For example, the remaining time image could be displayed in larger letters than the remaining spins image, or in a conspicuous color such as red or gold, or effects could be added to the remaining time image. In this way, displaying the remaining time image in a more emphasized manner than the remaining spins image makes the remaining time image easier to see, making it easier for the player to predict the remaining time for the first special symbol game based on visually obtained information, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, a time attack effect is executed when the first special symbol game is started in the time-saving game state a, which notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, but the time attack effect may also be executed in some or all of the cases when the first special symbol game is started in the time-saving game state a, which notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery is a complete miss. In this way, by having a time attack effect executed in some or all of the cases in which the first special symbol game, which notifies players that the result of the jackpot lottery is a complete miss, is started in the time-saving game state a, the game ball is intentionally not allowed to enter the second winning slot 315 when the number of time-saving games remaining until the upper limit of the number of time-saving games that can be played in the time-saving game state a is reached is small, and by actively allowing the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315 when the first special game begins, a second special symbol game is played with the number of time-saving games remaining while the first special symbol game is being played, thereby making it possible to implement a strategy play countermeasure that increases the likelihood that the first special symbol game will end after transitioning to the normal game state.

Furthermore, if a time attack effect is executed during some or all of the times when a first special symbol game is started in the time-saving game state a, which indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a complete miss, the time attack effect may clearly indicate or suggest the likelihood that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game will be a miss for the time-saving symbol stop. The likelihood that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game will be a miss for the time-saving symbol stop may be clearly indicated or suggested by the display manner (e.g., color, presence or absence of an effect, size of the effect, color of the effect) of one or more of the various images displayed in the time attack effect, such as the remaining time image (remaining time seconds counter, remaining time gauge), remaining spins image (remaining spins display, remaining spins gauge), first decorative symbol 78, second decorative symbol 79, the "Hit right" text image, and the "Send the ball in!" text image. Furthermore, when indicating or suggesting the degree of expectation, the display mode of the various images may be designed to change at a predetermined timing, for example, when the number of remaining time-saving play periods available in time-saving play state a reaches a specific number. Alternatively, the degree of expectation may be indicated or suggested by executing a specific effect, such as a cut-in effect or a mini-character effect, when the number of remaining time-saving play periods available in time-saving play state a reaches a specific number, and the degree of expectation may be indicated or suggested depending on the type of effect. In this way, by indicating or suggesting the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game will be a miss with the time-saving symbol stop, based on the indication or suggestion of the degree of expectation, the player can enjoy the progress of the time attack effect while hoping that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game will be a miss with the time-saving symbol stop, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the display of the remaining time for the first special symbol game may correspond to the actual remaining time, but it is also possible to display the remaining time for the first special symbol game as shorter than the actual remaining time. In this case, the first special symbol game will continue even when the remaining time display for the first special symbol game reaches zero, making it difficult to know when the first special symbol game will end. Therefore, players can enjoy the game while hoping that the first special symbol game will continue for as long as possible after the remaining time display for the first special symbol game reaches zero.

Furthermore, the remaining time for the first special symbol game does not necessarily have to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341; for example, it is also possible to provide a display device other than the symbol display unit 341 and display the time on this display device.

Furthermore, the time attack presentation is not limited to the example described with reference to FIG. 153 and may take other forms. For example, a countdown timer such as [○○:○○:○○] may be displayed as the remaining time image. Other time attack presentations, for example, may indicate or suggest the remaining time of the first special symbol game, which starts in the time-saving game state a, using something other than numbers or a gauge, such as a battle presentation or mission presentation. Specifically, in the case of a battle presentation, for example, an ally character and an enemy character may battle, and the remaining time of the first special symbol game may be displayed as the ally's hit points (HP). The initial value of the ally's HP may indicate the variable display time set for the first special symbol game. Furthermore, when an ally character is damaged by an enemy character's attack, the ally's HP may decrease, and when the ally's HP finally reaches 0, the first special symbol game may end (the first special symbol and first decorative symbol 78 may be displayed stationary).

<Step S4608>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 151, in step S4608, the MPU 51 executes a variable display position change setting process to change the variable display position of the first decorative pattern 78 set in step S4604 from the upper right region of the pattern display unit 341 (see FIG. 152(B)) to the central region of the pattern display unit 341 (see FIG. 153(C)), and also executes a process to change the variable display position of the second decorative pattern 79 from the central region of the pattern display unit 341 (see FIG. 152(B)) to the lower left region of the pattern display unit 341 (see FIG. 153(C)), thereby terminating the first variable type (presentation pattern) setting process. As a result, the variable display positions of the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 are changed from the positions shown in FIG. 152(B) to the display positions for the time attack presentation shown in FIG. 153(C), and the first decorative pattern 78 is displayed in a manner that is more noticeable than the second decorative pattern 79. That is, in the time attack performance, since the timing at which the first decorative symbol 78 stops is important as described above, the first decorative symbol 78 is displayed in a more conspicuous manner than the second decorative symbol 79 .

<Step S4609>
If the time-shortened gaming state flag a is set to OFF (step S4603: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the time-shortened gaming state flag b, which indicates that the game is in the time-shortened gaming state b, is set to ON (step S4609). If the time-shortened gaming state flag b is set to ON (step S4605: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4610, and if the time-shortened gaming state flag b is set to OFF (step S4605: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4611.

<Step S4610>
If the b time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S4609: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the b time-shortened game state presentation. In the b time-shortened game state presentation processing, for example, the setting of a background presentation specific to the b time-shortened game state, the setting related to the display of the remaining number of time-shortened game plays, the setting related to the display position of the first decorative pattern 78, etc. are executed. The display of the remaining number of time-shortened game plays is set by referring to the value of the b time-shortened game play counter that indicates the remaining number of time-shortened game plays in the b time-shortened game state, which is managed by the time-shortened game play count counter processing of FIG. 150.

<Step S4611>
If the b time-shortened game state flag is set to OFF (step S4609: No), that is, the game is not in the normal game state, the a time-shortened game state, or the b time-shortened game state, and therefore it can be determined that the game is in the c time-shortened game state. Therefore, the MPU 51 sets the c time-shortened game state presentation. In the c time-shortened game state presentation processing, for example, the setting of a background presentation specific to the c time-shortened game state, the setting related to the display of the remaining number of time-shortened game plays, the setting related to the display position of the first decorative pattern 78, and the like are executed. The display of the remaining number of time-shortened game plays is set by referring to the value of the c time-shortened game count counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-shortened game plays in the c time-shortened game state and is managed by the time-shortened game count counter processing of FIG. 150.

[Second variation type (performance pattern) setting process]
Here, Figure 154 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second variation type (presentation pattern) setting process executed in step S4423 in the command determination process of Figure 149.

<Step S4701>
154, in the second variation type (presentation pattern) setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a normal game state flag indicating a normal game state is set to ON (step S4701). If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4701: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4702. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4601: No), i.e., if the game is in a time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4703.

<Step S4702>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4701: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the normal game state effect (step S4702) and ends the second variation type (effect pattern) setting process. In the normal game state effect setting process, settings regarding the display position of the second decorative symbol 79 and the like are executed.

<Step S4703>
If the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4701: No), i.e., if the game is in the time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 sets a time-shortened game state presentation (step S4703) and proceeds to step S4704. In the time-shortened game state presentation processing, for example, the setting of a background presentation specific to the time-shortened game state, the setting related to the display of the remaining number of time-shortened game plays, the setting related to the display position of the second decorative pattern 79, etc. are executed. The display of the remaining number of time-shortened game plays is set by referring to the value of the time-shortened game play counter managed by the time-shortened game play counter processing of FIG. 150, for example.

<Step S4704>
In step S4704, the MPU 51 determines whether a time attack effect flag indicating that a time attack effect is being executed is set to ON. The time attack effect flag is set to ON in step S4607 of the first variation type (effect pattern) setting process in Fig. 151 when a first special symbol game is started in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss in the time-saving game state a, and is set to OFF in step S4803 of the first time attack effect in Fig. 155(A) or step S4903 of the second time attack effect in Fig. 155(B) when the time attack effect is to be ended.

If the time attack effect flag is set to on (step S4704: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4705; if the time attack effect flag is set to off (step S4704: No), the MPU 51 terminates the second variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

<Step S4705>
If the time attack effect flag is set to on (step S4704: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process to change and set the variable display position of the second decorative pattern 79 in the second special symbol game from the central area (see FIG. 152(B)) of the symbol display unit 341 set in step S4703 to the lower left area (see FIG. 153(C)) of the symbol display unit 341 (step S4705), and ends the second variable type (effect pattern) setting process. As a result, in the time attack effect, the variable display of the second decorative pattern 79 is set to the lower left area (see FIG. 153(C)) of the symbol display unit 341.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game that is started is a jackpot, a reach for a miss before or after, or a reach for a non-miss before or after, a reach effect (see Figure 50) may be executed in the same way as the normal game state effect.

[First Time Attack Effect End Processing]
Here, Figure 155 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the first time attack effect ending processing executed in step S4429 in the command determination processing of Figure 149.

The first time attack effect termination process is a process that executes a time attack effect, and is executed when the time attack effect flag is set to on upon receiving a first special symbol variation stop command (Yes in both steps S4427 and S4428 in the command determination process of FIG. 149). In other words, the first time attack effect termination process is executed when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game while a time attack effect is being executed in the time-saving game state a. In other words, if the second special symbol game has not been executed up to the maximum number of times in the time-saving game state a by the time the first special symbol game (variable display of the first special symbol) that started in the time-saving game state a ends, the time attack effect will end due to a failed time attack.

<Step S4801>
As shown in Figure 155 (A), in the first time attack effect termination processing, the MPU 51 first displays a time attack failure image (the text image of "Failed, time reduction continues!" in Figure 153 (F)) on the pattern display unit 341 indicating that the time attack has failed (step S4801), and then proceeds to step S4802.

<Steps S4802 and S4803>
In step S4802, the MPU 51 executes the time attack performance setting end process (step S4802), and further sets the time attack performance flag to on, indicating that the time attack performance is being executed (step S4803), and ends the first time attack performance end process.

The time attack effect end setting process sets the time until the time attack failure image is erased on the pattern display unit 341, and changes the display positions of the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 on the pattern display unit 341 to the positions they would be in if the time attack effect were not being executed (see Figure 152 (B)).

[Second Time Attack Effect End Processing]
Here, Figure 155 (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second time attack effect ending processing executed in step S4432 in the command determination processing of Figure 149.

The second time attack effect termination process is a process that executes a time attack effect, and is executed when the second special symbol variation stop command is received, the time attack effect flag is set to on, and the a time-saving play count counter is 0 (steps S4430 to S4432 are all Yes in the command determination process of FIG. 149). In other words, the second time attack effect termination process is executed when a time attack effect is being executed in the a time-saving play state, and the second special symbol play that is ending this time is the last special symbol play in the a time-saving play state. In other words, if the second special symbol play has been executed up to the maximum number of times in the a time-saving play state by the time the second special symbol play (second special symbol variation display) that started in the a time-saving play state ends, the time attack effect will end due to a successful time attack.

<Step S4901>
As shown in Figure 155 (B), in the second time attack performance end processing, the MPU 51 first displays a time attack success image (the text image of "Success! Long time reduction obtained!" in Figure 153 (D)) on the pattern display unit 341 indicating that the time attack has been successful (step S4901), and then proceeds to step S4902.

<Steps S4902 and S4903>
In step S4902, the MPU 51 executes a time attack performance end setting process, and further sets a time attack performance flag to on, indicating that a time attack performance is being executed (step S4903), and ends the second time attack performance end process.

The time attack effect end setting process sets the time until the time attack success image is erased from the pattern display unit 341 (see Figure 153 (A)).

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a simultaneous variable game machine in which a first special symbol game as a variable game in which the first special symbol game is varied based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning slot 314 as the starting ball entry, and a second special symbol game as a variable game in which the second special symbol game is varied based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning slot 315 as the starting ball entry, can be executed in parallel (in parallel) on the main display unit 36 as the display device under the control of the MPU 41 as the game control unit. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as an ST machine in which an upper limit (maximum number of a time-saving games) is set for the number of special symbol games as variable games in the a time-saving game state as the profitable game state to which the machine transitions after the end of a jackpot game, and which transitions to the normal game state when the maximum number of time-saving games a has been played is reached in the a time-saving game state. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game as a variable game can be triggered by a miss in the time-saving symbol stop display of a specific symbol (time-saving symbol) on the main display unit 36 as a display device, and can transition to the time-saving symbol c state as an award value for the special symbol game result.

In this way, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, when a first special symbol game is started in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state that transitions to the normal game state by executing a special symbol game as a variable game up to the maximum number of times (the number of time-saving games a), if the result of the jackpot lottery for that first special symbol game is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, the game will transition to the time-saving game state c, in which a jackpot is substantially guaranteed, which is more advantageous than the normal game state and the time-saving game state a, provided that the first special symbol game ends after transitioning from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state. Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, players can enjoy playing while hoping that the first special symbol game, in which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable game, will begin in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state that is transitioned to after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a first special symbol game in which a time-saving symbol is displayed in a stopped state is started in the time-saving game state a, the second special symbol game is executed the maximum number of times, which is the end condition for the time-saving game state a, before the first special symbol game ends, so that the game state transitions from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state while the first special symbol game is being executed, i.e., after the transition from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state, the first special symbol for the first special symbol game is displayed in a stopped state, and a new game feature is realized in which a game ball enters the second winning slot 315 to execute the second special symbol game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game as a variable game started in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed as the value awarded for the special symbol game result. In other words, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state, it is also possible to expect that a jackpot game will be executed if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game as a variable game started during the execution of the first special symbol game as a variable game is a jackpot. In other words, in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state, the same interest as in the time-saving game state a of conventional gaming machines is maintained, in that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery can be expected to be a jackpot. In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when a second special symbol game is executed as a variable game during the execution of a first special symbol game as a variable game in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a miss, the player can continue to expect a transition to the time-saving game state c, in which a jackpot is essentially guaranteed, and if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a jackpot, the player can enjoy the benefit of the jackpot game being executed as the value awarded for the second special symbol game result. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when a second special symbol game is executed as a variable game during the execution of a first special symbol game as a variable game in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state, whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a jackpot or a miss, the player can expect the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery to be a jackpot, just like in the time-saving game state a of conventional gaming machines, and can enjoy the benefit according to the lottery result, realizing a new gameplay.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment utilizes the time-saving game state a, which is a profitable game state to which the player is transferred after a jackpot game ends and which allows the player to play a maximum number of time-saving games, the time-saving game state c, which is essentially guaranteed to result in a jackpot and which can be entered when a time-saving symbol stop is not displayed, and the characteristic of a simultaneous variable game machine in which the first and second special symbols can change simultaneously on the main display unit 36 as a display device, to achieve the above-mentioned new gameplay that increases the enjoyment of the game, while also maintaining the gameplay of the time-saving game state a of conventional gaming machines in which the jackpot game is expected to be played based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a jackpot.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to seventh embodiments described above are possible, to the extent applicable.

Ninth Embodiment
In this embodiment, a part of the variable display time set in the jackpot variable table and the time-saving game state second special chart miss variable table is different from that in the eighth embodiment described above.

[Jackpot fluctuation table]
As shown in FIG. 156(A), in the jackpot fluctuation table of this embodiment, the fluctuation display times that can be selected when the result of the jackpot lottery announced in the special symbol game is a jackpot include special symbol fluctuation pattern "01" with a 30-second special symbol fluctuation display time, special symbol fluctuation pattern "02" with a 60-second special symbol fluctuation display time, and special symbol fluctuation pattern "03" with a 90-second special symbol fluctuation display time, as well as special symbol fluctuation pattern "11." The special symbol fluctuation pattern "11" has a special symbol fluctuation display time of 200 seconds, which is longer than the maximum fluctuation display time set when announcing that the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss by the first special symbol game in the time-saving game state a, i.e., the special symbol fluctuation display time of special symbol fluctuation pattern "09," which is 150 seconds (see FIG. 129(C)). In other words, it is longer than any of the special symbol fluctuation display times set for the first special symbol game that announces a miss in the time-saving game state a. In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation table of this embodiment, the allocation rate of the special chart fluctuation pattern "11" is set to 10%.

[Time-saving game state second special chart missing fluctuation table]
156(B), in the time-saving game state second special chart miss variation table of this embodiment, as the variation display time that can be selected when the result of the jackpot lottery announced in the special chart game is a miss, the special chart variation pattern "11" in which the special chart variation display time is 200 seconds is set, similar to the jackpot variation table shown in FIG. 156(A). Also, in the time-saving game state second special chart miss variation table of this embodiment, the allocation rate of the special chart variation pattern "11" is set to an extremely low value of 0.5%.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, if a first special symbol game started in the time-saving game state a notifies the player that the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, and the first special symbol game ends after the time-saving game state a has ended and transitioned to the normal game state, the gameplay feature is such that the game transitions to the time-saving game state c, which is more advantageous than the normal game state or the time-saving game state a. Furthermore, if a first special symbol game started in the time-saving game state a notifies the player that the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, a time attack effect (see FIG. 153) is executed. Therefore, if the variable display time set for the second special symbol in the second special symbol game started during the execution of the time attack effect is long, it will be disadvantageous to end a first special symbol game started in the time-saving game state a, in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, in the normal game state. In particular, if the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game that starts during the execution of the first special symbol game is set to 200 seconds, which is the longest variable display time of the second special symbol in the time-saving game state a, the second special symbol game cannot end during the execution of the first special symbol game, which has a longest variable display time of 150 seconds, and it becomes impossible to end the first special symbol game in the normal game state. In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game in the time-saving game state that includes the time-saving game state a includes a variable display time that makes it impossible to end the second special symbol game that starts during the execution of the first special symbol game during the execution of the first special symbol game.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the allocation rate for special symbol variation pattern "11" in the jackpot variation table is set to 10%, while the allocation rate for special symbol variation pattern "11" in the time-saving play state second special symbol miss variation table is set to an extremely low value of 0.5%. Therefore, in time-saving play state a, if special symbol variation pattern "11", which has a special symbol variation display time of 200 seconds, is selected as the special symbol variation display time for the second special symbol game, the likelihood that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game will be a jackpot increases. In other words, if the longest variation display time in time-saving play state a is set as the variation display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game started during the execution of a time attack performance, the likelihood that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game will be a jackpot increases.

In this way, in the time-saving game state a, if the second special symbol game is started during the execution of a time attack effect based on the initiation of the first special symbol game, which notifies the player that the jackpot lottery result is a missed time-saving symbol stop, if the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is long, it is disadvantageous in that the first special symbol game ends in the normal game state and the game transitions to the advantageous time-saving game state c. However, the likelihood of a jackpot increases if special symbol variation pattern "11" is selected. Therefore, during the execution of a time attack effect, in a situation where the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is long and is disadvantageous to the player and could reduce their interest in the game, by increasing the likelihood of a jackpot for the second special symbol game, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game during the execution of the time attack effect. Rather, the enjoyment of the game is enhanced because the player can enjoy the game while hoping for a jackpot even in an unfavorable situation during the execution of the time attack effect.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to eighth embodiments described above are possible, to the extent applicable.

Tenth Embodiment
As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine is equipped with an "illuminant" as a light-emitting means, an "information acquisition process" as an information acquisition means, a "judgment process" as a judgment means, a "rotating body" as a rotation means which is either the first rotation means or the second rotation means, and a "visible state" which is either the first state or the second state.

The light-emitting means may be any means capable of emitting light visible when viewed from the front of the gaming board, and may be capable of emitting light toward the front, or may be capable of emitting light in a direction other than the front (for example, in a direction along the surface of the gaming board (for example, horizontally such as left and right, vertically such as up and down, or diagonally)). Examples of light-emitting means that can achieve the spirit of the present invention include liquid crystal displays, dot matrix displays, plasma displays, organic EL displays, the pixels (dots) of these displays, various lamps such as LED lamps, and any combination thereof.

The information acquisition means may be any process that acquires information in order to execute some kind of process. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, examples of information acquisition means include processes that acquire commands sent from the main control unit, processes that acquire commands sent from the audio lamp control unit, processes that acquire detection information from various sensors and switches, processes that acquire a regular hit random number counter, processes that acquire a regular hit type counter, processes that acquire a regular hit random number initial value counter, processes that acquire a regular hit variation type counter, processes that acquire a jackpot random number counter, processes that acquire a jackpot type counter, processes that acquire a reach random number counter, processes that acquire a jackpot random number initial value counter, processes that acquire a special hit variation type counter, and any combination thereof.

The determination means may be a determination process executed based on various information. As long as the determination means can achieve the spirit of the present invention, examples of such processes include a process for determining the type of command sent from the audio lamp control device, a process for determining the detection content of various sensors and switches, a process for determining the value of a regular hit random number counter (a process for determining whether or not a regular hit has occurred), a process for determining the value of a regular hit type counter (a process for determining the type of regular hit), a process for determining the value of a regular hit random number initial value counter (a process for determining the initial value of a regular hit random number counter), a process for determining the value of a regular hit variation type counter (a process for determining the regular hit variation display time), a process for determining the value of a jackpot random number counter (a process for determining whether or not a jackpot has occurred), a process for determining the value of a jackpot type counter (a process for determining the type of jackpot), a process for determining the value of a reach random number counter (a process for determining whether or not a reach has been executed, and the type of reach if a reach has been executed), a process for determining the value of a jackpot random number initial value counter (a process for determining the initial value of a jackpot random number counter), a process for determining the value of a special hit variation type counter (a process for determining the special hit variation display time), and any combination thereof.

The rotation means may be any means capable of rotation. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, examples of rotation means include those that can rotate at one fixed position, those that can rotate at multiple positions, those with a constant rotation speed, those with a non-constant rotation speed, those that can rotate in one direction, those that can rotate in multiple directions, those that are movable, those that are immovable, those that can move along one path, those that can move along multiple paths, those that can move linearly, those that can move non-linearly, those that can rotate while moving, those that can be deformed such as by expanding or contracting, those that can change shape by connecting, combining, or separating, those that are entirely translucent, those that are partially translucent, those that are not translucent, those that are rotated by control means such as an MPU, those that are rotated by interference from another object such as a game ball, those that are rotated by interference from a game ball such as a windmill, and any combination thereof.

The state may be any state that can be seen by the player. As long as the intent of this invention can be realized, examples of states include a state in which the shape of the rotating means is changed, a light-emitting state of one or more light-emitting means, a rotational state of one or more rotating means, a movement state of one or more rotating means, a light-emitting state of a light-emitting means visible through a rotating means, a state in which a rotating means blocks light emitted from a light-emitting means, a state in which one rotating means is visible through another rotating means, a movement state of one or more rotating means, a state in which one rotating means is close to another rotating means, a state in which one rotating means is separated from another rotating means, and any combination thereof.

Incidentally, conventional gaming machines have rotating bodies or other decorative features on the gaming board, which rotate as needed during the display of the special symbols (decorative symbols) in special symbol games or during jackpot games.

However, many rotating objects have an illuminant integrated into the backside, and when the rotating object is in operation, the illuminant rotates while emitting light, but in this state the backside of the rotating object is not visible. As a result, decorations using conventional rotating objects are only made on the rotating object itself, which leaves the decorativeness of the object insufficient.

In contrast, the present invention can create a first visible state in which the light from the light-emitting element is visible through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating element, and a second visible state in which the second rotating element moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion, blocking the light and making the second rotating element visible through the rotating plate portion. This makes it possible to create a highly decorative effect using two rotating elements, the first rotating element and the second rotating element.

In this embodiment, there is a first visible state in which the light of a specific area of the pattern display unit 341, which is constituted by an LCD display or the like as an illuminant, is visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37 as the first rotating body; and a second visible state in which the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R as the second rotating body moves to the back side of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37 as the first rotating body, causing the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R as the second rotating body to block the light of the specific area of the pattern display unit 341 as an illuminant, making the left second rotating body or the right second rotating body as the second rotating body visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37 as the first rotating body. In this way, the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating part can move to the back side of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating part. Therefore, the operation of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating part and the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating part can result in two states, a first visible state and a second visible state, which are visible to the player. Therefore, the decorations that are produced by the operation of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating part and the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating part are diversified.

For example, in this embodiment, in the first viewing state in which the light of a specific area of the pattern display unit 341, which is constituted by an LCD display or the like as an illuminant, is visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37 as the first rotating body, a performance can be executed according to the viewing pattern of the light of the specific area of the pattern display unit 341 as viewed through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37. Specifically, depending on the visibility of the light in a specific area of the pattern display unit 341 as an illuminant visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating device member 37 as the first rotating body, it is possible to execute decorations that provide the player with information about the game, such as decorations that notify the player that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot (one-shot announcement effect), decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the likelihood that the jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot, decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the type of jackpot when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the type of decoration to be executed later, and decorations that notify the player that the jackpot lottery result includes a jackpot while the right to play a special symbol game that is executed after the jackpot game has ended is reserved (reserved consecutive win confirmation effect).

In addition, when the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R, which serves as the second rotating body, moves to the back side of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating role member 37, which serves as the first rotating body, the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R blocks the light from a specific area of the pattern display section 341, which is constituted by an LCD display or the like, which serves as an illuminant, and in this second viewing state, the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R is visible through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating role member 37. In this state, a performance can be performed according to the viewing pattern of the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R as viewed through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating role member 37. Specifically, depending on the visibility of the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R, which is visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body, it is possible to execute decorations that provide the player with information about the game, such as decorations that notify the player that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot (one-shot announcement effect), and it is also possible to execute effects that clearly indicate or suggest the likelihood of the jackpot lottery result being a jackpot.It is also possible to execute decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the type of jackpot when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, and it is also possible to execute decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the type of decoration to be executed later.It is also possible to execute reserved consecutive win confirmation decorations that notify the player that the jackpot lottery result includes a jackpot while the right to play a special game to be executed after the jackpot game has ended is reserved.

As described above, in this embodiment, there are two types of visual recognition states: a first visual recognition state in which light from a specific area of the pattern display unit 341, which is configured as an illuminant such as a liquid crystal display, is visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating device member 37 as the first rotating body; and a second visual recognition state in which the left second rotating device member 38L or the right second rotating device member 38R, which is the second rotating device, moves to the back side of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating device member 37 as the first rotating body, thereby causing the left second rotating device member 38L or the right second rotating device member 38R to move. and a second visible state in which R blocks light from a specific area of the pattern display section 341, which is constituted by an LCD display or the like as an illuminant, so that the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R is visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37. This diversifies the decorations performed by the operation of the first rotating role member 37 as the first rotating body and the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R as the second rotating body, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

This embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 157 to 173.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
157 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 157, the game board 31 is provided with a plurality of nails (reference numerals omitted), a windmill 310, an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, through gates 317L and 317R, an outlet 318, a variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, a first rotating accessory member 37, a left second rotating accessory member 38L, and a right second rotating accessory member 38R.

The nails are driven into the periphery of the variable display unit 34 on the gaming board 31, which is molded from transparent resin, and define the path of the gaming ball that is launched onto the gaming board 31 and flows down along the gaming board 31. The gaming balls are launched by the launching device at 0.6 second intervals, so when a player plays a game of continuous ball play, multiple gaming balls flow down the gaming board 31. The gaming ball launched into the left side area of the gaming board 31 collides with nails and other objects driven into the left side area of the gaming board 31, and flows down while rotating along various paths, such as a path that can pass through the through gate 317L, a path that interferes with the windmill 310, a path that can enter the general winning slot 313, or a path that can enter the first winning slot 314. Here, a gaming ball shot into the left area of the gaming board 31 flows down the gaming board 31, passing through or without passing through the through gate 317, and branches into a gaming ball that enters the general winning opening 313 and a gaming ball that flows down toward the windmill 310. When a gaming ball enters the general winning opening 313, a preset number of gaming balls are paid out as prize balls by a payout device. Gaming balls that flow down toward the windmill 310 flow down toward the windmill 310 from multiple positions above the windmill 310. The gaming balls that are sorted into different paths by the windmill 310 branch into a gaming ball that flows down toward the first winning opening 314 and a gaming ball that flows down toward the second winning opening 315. A gaming ball that flows down toward the first winning opening 314 flows down a random trajectory due to multiple nails that have been driven in, and either enters the first winning opening 314 or flows downward. A gaming ball flowing down toward second winning opening 315 follows a random trajectory due to the multiple nails driven in, and if electric device 315b is activated, the ball enters second winning opening 315. If electric device 315b is not activated, the ball flows down and enters outlet 318 without entering second winning opening 315. On the other hand, a gaming ball launched into the right area of game board 31 collides with nails driven in the right area of game board 31, and flows down while rotating along various paths, such as a path that can pass through through gate 317R, a path that can enter variable winning opening 316 when opening/closing door 319 is activated, and a path that can enter second winning opening 315 when electric device 315b is activated. If the ball enters first winning opening 314 or second winning opening 315, a jackpot lottery is held depending on the game status. That is, in this embodiment, the multiple nails are driven so that left-handed hits that launch game balls into the left region of the game board 31 are advantageous in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, and right-handed hits that launch game balls into the right region of the game board 31 are advantageous in the high-frequency support mode, the high-chance game state, and the time-limited game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, left-handed hits are encouraged in the normal game state, and right-handed hits are encouraged in the high-chance game state and the time-limited game state.

The windmill 310 is integrally molded from transparent resin, including a bearing (not shown), a front rotating plate (placed on the front side of the gaming machine when installed), and multiple contact plates with which the gaming balls come into contact. One windmill is located in the center of the left side of the gaming board 31. Because the windmill 310 is molded from transparent resin, the back side of the front rotating plate (not shown) is visible when viewed from the front. The switching of light from the decorative light emitters on the gaming board and the light emitters for lighting the gaming board (not shown) on the back side of the gaming board is visible through the front rotating plate of the windmill 310. In other words, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, if there is nothing on the back side of the front rotating plate, the light emission state on the back side of the front rotating plate is visible. The front rotating plate (not shown) is partially painted, cut out, or otherwise decorated, and although it is integrally molded from transparent resin, it is configured to have different light transmittances. The windmill 310 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise as viewed from the front due to the interference of game balls. Game balls flowing down from above the windmill 310 toward the windmill 310 follow random trajectories due to nails driven into the game board 31, and strike one of the contact plates of the windmill 310 from multiple directions. Depending on the timing, multiple game balls may flow down toward the windmill 310 at the same time and strike one of the contact plates. When a game ball strikes a contact plate, the kinetic energy of the game ball is transmitted to the windmill 310, and the transmitted kinetic energy causes the entire windmill 310 to rotate around its axis. The multiple contact plates (not shown) of the windmill 310 distribute game balls that flow down from the upper left of the game board 31 and strike one of the contact plates of the windmill 310 to the left or right of the windmill 310's rotation axis. At this time, because the windmill 310 is molded from a transparent resin, it is possible to see from the front side of the gaming machine how the gaming balls flow down from the area outside the front rotating plate portion, flow down to the back side of the front rotating plate portion, and abut against the abutment plate portion, and how the windmill 310, rotated by the kinetic energy of the gaming balls, distributes the gaming balls. The gaming balls distributed to the left side by the windmill 310 travel along a path that cannot enter the first winning hole 314. On the other hand, the gaming balls distributed to the right side by the windmill 310 can travel along a path that can enter the first winning hole 314. In other words, the windmill 310 distributes gaming balls that flow down from the upper left of the gaming board 31 and interfere with the windmill 310 to either the left path, which is disadvantageous to the player because the ball cannot enter the first winning hole 314, or the right path, which includes a path that is advantageous to the player because the ball can enter the first winning hole 314. When the kinetic energy transmitted from the gaming ball reaches zero, the windmill 310 stops rotating and enters a stationary state. Because the windmill 310 is molded from transparent resin, multiple viewing states are possible through the front rotating plate portion, whose back side is visible: a viewing state in which the illuminated state of the gaming board is visible, a viewing state in which the light on the gaming board is turned off, and a viewing state in which the gaming ball is moving to the back side of the front rotating plate portion.

The arrangement of the multiple nails is not limited to the example shown in Figure 157 and can be modified as appropriate. Furthermore, the number and arrangement of the windmills 310 are not limited to the example shown in Figure 157 and can be modified as appropriate. For example, multiple windmills 310 may be provided, and in addition to or instead of being provided on the left side of the gaming board 31, they may be provided on the right side of the gaming board 31. Furthermore, the windmills 310 are always rotatable. Therefore, they can rotate at any time if a gaming ball comes into contact with them, and when a player is playing a pinball game, they may rotate even during a jackpot, variable play, or when the variable play is stopped.

The variable display unit 34 is controlled by the sub-control unit 332 and includes a pattern display unit 341 that displays still images and videos visible when viewed from the front. The pattern display unit 341 is configured to include, for example, a liquid crystal display, a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, etc. In other words, the pattern display unit 341 may be any device that can display still images and videos by emitting light toward the front.

In this embodiment, the light-emitting means of the present invention is configured as a pattern display unit 341 capable of emitting light toward the front side, but the light-emitting means of the present invention may be anything that is capable of emitting light that is visible when viewed from the front of the gaming board, and may be anything that is capable of emitting light toward the front side, or anything that is capable of emitting light in a direction other than the front side (for example, a direction along the surface of the gaming board (for example, a horizontal direction such as left and right, a vertical direction such as up and down, or a diagonal direction)).

Here, Figures 158 to 161 are drawings to be referred to in order to explain the first rotating accessory member 37. Specifically, Figure 158 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 when the first rotating accessory member 37 is in a contracted state and in the operating position, Figure 159 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 when the first rotating accessory member 37 is in an expanded state and in the operating position, Figure 160 is a front view showing an example of the operation of the first rotating accessory member 37, and Figure 161 is a side view showing the periphery of the first rotating accessory member 37 with a portion cut away.

As shown in Figures 158 to 161, the first rotating role element 37, details of which will be described later, can move up and down, rotate, and expand and contract by the first rotating role element drive mechanism 37a (see Figure 169), and in special game and jackpot games, it operates alone or in cooperation with the left second rotating role element 38L and the right second rotating role element 38R described below to perform effects that provide the player with specified information regarding the game. Examples of predetermined information related to games include information that explicitly or implies that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game is a jackpot, information that explicitly or implies the type of jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game is a jackpot, information that explicitly or implies the likelihood that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game will be a jackpot, information that explicitly or implies that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the reserved special game played after the end of the special game when the right to play the special game is reserved is a jackpot (reserved pre-read information), and information that explicitly or implies that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the reserved special game played after the end of the jackpot game when the right to play the special game is reserved is a jackpot (information that explicitly or implies so-called reserved consecutive wins).

In this embodiment, the first rotating accessory element 37 is used in conjunction with the left second rotating accessory element 38L and the right second rotating accessory element 38R during special symbol play to indicate or suggest the type of jackpot (5R normal jackpot, 5R special jackpot, 16R special jackpot) and whether or not there is a pending consecutive win.

The first rotating device member 37 has a flower-like shape when viewed from the front in the contracted state, and is located in front of the symbol display unit 341. The location of the first rotating device member 37 is not limited to the front of the symbol display unit 341, and it may be located above the ball path, for example. In this case, nails may be used to protect the first rotating device member 37 from collisions with balls. Of course, protection from balls when the first rotating device member 37 is located above the ball path may be achieved by materials other than nails, such as resin. Furthermore, the first rotating device member 37 may be subject to action from balls when located above the ball path. In other words, the first rotating device member 37 may or may not be subject to action from balls. The first rotating device member 37 includes multiple plate-like members 370, 371, a rotation axis 372, and multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373.

The multiple plate-shaped members 370, 371 have a shape resembling flower petals and include a first plate-shaped member 370 and a second plate-shaped member 371. Each plate-shaped member 370, 371 is formed entirely from, for example, resin.

The first plate-shaped member 370 has a translucent region 370A that is circular in front view and has translucency that allows the rear side to be seen. The translucent region 370A is formed to have higher translucency than other regions of the first plate-shaped member 370. When the entire first plate-shaped member 370 is formed from resin, the translucent region 370A is formed from, for example, a transparent resin or a translucent resin. Note that the regions of the first plate-shaped member 370 other than the translucent region 370A may be formed so that the rear side is visible, or so that the rear side is not or is difficult to see.

Such translucent region 370A can be formed, for example, by forming a transparent resin molded product, which is a pre-processed product of first plate-shaped member 370, by resin molding, and then painting the resin molded product in areas other than those that will become translucent region 370A. Translucent region 370A can also be formed by insert molding a member that is circular in front view and made of transparent or translucent resin, for example.

The translucent region 370A has higher translucency than other regions of the first plate-shaped member 370 and may be either colored transparent or colorless transparent, as long as it has translucency that allows the rear side to be seen. Furthermore, the shape of the translucent region 370A when viewed from the front is not limited to being circular, and may be other shapes. Furthermore, the translucent region 370A may be formed as a through-hole. Forming the translucent region 370A as a through-hole in this way makes it easier to form the translucent region 370A than forming the translucent region 370A by insert molding.

The translucent region 370A may also be formed as a magnifying lens. When the translucent region 370A is formed as a magnifying lens in this way, the display of predetermined information visible through the translucent region 370A is enlarged, making it easier for the player to grasp the predetermined information. For example, when the information display units 383L, 384L of the left second rotating role member 38L or the information display units 383R, 384R of the right second rotating role member 38R are visible through the translucent region 370A, the information presented by the information display units 383L, 384L, 383R, 384R (e.g., the type of jackpot, whether or not there is a pending consecutive win) is enlarged. Furthermore, when a predetermined region of the symbol display unit 341 is visible through the translucent region 370A, the information presented in the predetermined region (e.g., the results of the jackpot lottery) is enlarged. This makes it possible to execute a so-called one-shot announcement effect in special gameplay, clearly indicating that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first plate-shaped member 370 is provided with a translucent region 370A that has higher translucency than the surrounding area, but it is not necessary to provide a translucent region 370A. For example, the first plate-shaped member 370 may be formed so that the entire translucency is uniform or approximately uniform.

On the other hand, the second plate-shaped member 371 has a similar appearance to the first plate-shaped member 370, so a detailed description will be omitted. However, it differs from the first plate-shaped member 370 in that it does not have a translucent region 370A. Furthermore, the second plate-shaped member 371 can be modified in the same way as the first plate-shaped member 370, within the applicable range.

The rotation shaft 372 is the part to which rotational drive force is input from the first rotating role member drive mechanism 37a (see Figure 169), which will be described later, and extends in the front-to-rear direction of the game board 31 toward the symbol display unit 341. The rotation shaft 372 is set to a predetermined rotational state when rotational force is input from the first rotating role member drive mechanism 37a under the control of the MPU 51, and is set to a non-rotating state (predetermined stopped state) when the input of rotational force from the first rotating role member drive mechanism 37a is stopped under the control of the MPU 51.

The rotational speed of the rotating shaft 372 (multiple plate-like members 370, 371) in a given rotational state, i.e., the rotational speed of the first rotating accessory member 37, is not particularly limited and may be constant or variable, and the rotational speed and direction may also be variable.

Multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 are fixed radially to the rotation shaft 372 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 can rotate around the rotation shaft 372 as the rotation shaft 372 rotates. The rotation shaft 372 is rotatably supported by a support ring 375 fixed to the lift shaft 374, and its movement in the front-to-back direction is restricted by a restricting ring 376. The lift shaft 374 moves the rotation shaft 372 up and down, and the lift shaft 374 moves the rotation shaft 372 up and down by a driving force input from the first rotating accessory member drive mechanism 37a (see Figure 169), described below. As a result, the first rotating accessory member 37 can move as a whole up and down as the rotation shaft 372 moves up and down. That is, the first rotating accessory member 37 can move closer to the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R by moving downward, and can move away from the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R by moving upward.

Each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 supports one plate-like member 370, 371 and is capable of sliding the supported plate-like member 370, 371 along the radial direction of the rotation shaft 372. Each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 converts the rotational force input from, for example, the first rotating accessory member drive mechanism 37a (see FIG. 169) described below into a linear force, thereby sliding the supported plate-like member 370, 371 along the radial direction of the rotation shaft 372. Each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 can be a known mechanism for converting rotational force into a linear force. Specifically, each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 can be an actuator including one or more components such as a rack, screw shaft, ball screw, endless belt, wire, chain, various gears such as spur gears and bevel gears, and rollers. Each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 may also utilize magnetic or electromagnetic force.

In this way, in the first rotating role member 37, the rotation axis 372 is rotatably supported by the lifting shaft 374, and the plate-like members 370, 371 are slidably supported by multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 arranged radially from the rotation axis 372. Therefore, the first rotating role member 37 can move up and down on the front side of the pattern display unit 341, can rotate around the rotation axis 372, and can expand and contract around the rotation axis 372.

Here, Figure 169 is a block diagram showing an example of the main parts of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 169, the first rotating accessory member 37 is controlled for up and down movement, rotation, and expansion/contraction via a first rotating accessory member drive mechanism 37a controlled by an MPU 51. The first rotating accessory member drive mechanism 37a is connected to the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 via an input/output I/F 52. This first rotating accessory member drive mechanism 37a has, for example, multiple motors, a return detection unit for detecting that the first rotating accessory member 37 has returned to the standby position, and a motor driver.

The multiple motors are, for example, stepping motors, DC motors, etc., and the return detection unit is, for example, an optical sensor, a contact sensor, etc. Each motor is connected to the rotation shaft 372, multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373, and lift shaft 374 of the first rotating role member 37 via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear, and driving force is input to the rotation shaft 372, multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373, and lift shaft 374. By inputting driving force from the lift shaft 374, the first rotating role member 37 can be moved up and down in front of the pattern display unit 341 between a predetermined standby position (position shown by phantom lines in Figure 157) in which the first rotating role member 37 is exposed from the opening 31A, and an operating position (shown by solid lines in Figure 158) set below the standby position and in which the entire first rotating role member 37 is exposed. As shown in FIG. 160 , the first rotating role member 37 can rotate counterclockwise on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 by inputting a rotational force to the rotation shaft 372. The rotation position of the first rotating role member 37 can be anywhere between the standby position and the operating position. In this embodiment, the first rotating role member 37 rotates in the operating position. Furthermore, the first rotating role member 37 can expand and contract by inputting a driving force to the expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373, causing the plate-shaped members 370 and 371 to slide in the radial direction of the rotation shaft 372 on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. The first rotating role member 37 can rotate on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 in either the contracted state (see FIG. 160A) or the expanded state (see FIG. 160B).

In addition, the motor driver of the first rotating accessory member drive mechanism 37a is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. The motor driver controls each motor according to control instructions from the voice lamp control device 5. The motor driver is also capable of acquiring the detection results of the return detection unit and transmitting them to the voice lamp control device 5. Note that the motor driver may be omitted, with each motor and return detection unit directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5 and controlled by the voice lamp control device 5.

There are no particular restrictions on the configuration of the first rotating accessory member drive mechanism 37a, and similarly, there are no particular restrictions on the configuration of the first rotating accessory member drive mechanism 37a. In other words, there are no particular restrictions on the configuration for moving the first rotating accessory member 37 up and down, rotating, and expanding and contracting.

In addition, in this embodiment, the driving force for rotating and expanding/contracting the first rotating device member 37 is not limited to that provided by a motor, but may be obtained by a solenoid or by the action of game balls. Specifically, the driving force for rotating and expanding/contracting the first rotating device member 37 may be power obtained from out balls discharged to the back side of the game board 31 via the outlet 318, or power obtained from game balls other than out balls flowing down the game board 31. As an example, a rotating body such as a gear may be constantly rotated by the action of game balls moving on the front or back side of the game board 31, and the rotational force of the rotating body may be transmitted to the first rotating device member 37 by connecting the rotating body to the first rotating device member 37 as needed, thereby rotating and expanding/contracting the first rotating device member 37. As another example, the driving force for rotating and expanding/contracting the first rotating accessory member 37 could be electricity obtained by the action of a gaming ball moving along the front or back side of the gaming board 31. For example, electricity could be generated by the rotation of a rotating body due to the action of the gaming ball, or by the deformation of a piezoelectric element due to the collision of a gaming ball with the piezoelectric element. Furthermore, the electricity obtained by the action of the gaming ball may be stored or used. Specifically, the electricity obtained by the action of the gaming ball could be stored in a battery, and the electricity stored in this battery could be used to rotate and expand/contract the first rotating accessory member 37.

In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when the first rotating role member 37 is in an expanded state in the operating position, the left second rotating role member 38L and the right second rotating role member 38R, which are located on the back side of the first rotating role member 37 and in front of the pattern display section 341, can move to the operating position and thus move behind the multiple plate-shaped members 370, 371 of the first rotating role member 37 (see Figures 165 to 167). Therefore, when the first rotating role member 37 is in an expanded state in the operating position, the left second rotating role member 38L and the right second rotating role member 38R move behind the multiple plate-shaped members 370, 371 of the first rotating role member 37, blocking the light of a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 to the front side, and the left second rotating role member 38L and the right second rotating role member 38R become visible through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating role member 37 (see Figure 167). On the other hand, when the left second rotating role member 38L and the right second rotating role member 38R are not behind the multiple plate-like members 370, 371 of the first rotating role member 37, light from a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 toward the front can be seen through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37.

As such, in this embodiment, there are two states: one in which the light of a specific area emitted from the symbol display unit 341 toward the front side is visible through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating role member 37; and one in which the light of a specific area emitted from the symbol display unit 341 toward the front side is blocked, making the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R visible through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating role member 37. This allows for two different states depending on the first rotating role member 37 and the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R, thereby diversifying the effects performed by the operation of the first rotating role member 37 and the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R. For example, in a state where the light of a specific area emitted from the symbol display unit 341 to the front side is visible through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-like member 370 in the first rotating role member 37, it is possible to execute an effect according to the visibility of the light of the specific area visible through the translucent area 370A. Specifically, it is possible to execute an effect that provides the player with predetermined information about the game (for example, information about the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game or the reserved special symbol game) according to the visibility of the light of the specific area visible through the translucent area 370A. On the other hand, when the light of a specific area emitted from the symbol display unit 341 toward the front side is blocked and the left second rotating symbol member 38L or the right second rotating symbol member 38R is visible through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating symbol member 37, it is possible to execute an effect that provides the player with predetermined information about the game (for example, information about the results of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game or the reserved special symbol game) depending on the visibility of the left second rotating symbol member 38L or the right second rotating symbol member 38R through the translucent area 370A.

In the two states realized by the first rotating accessory member 37 and the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R, effects that provide the player with predetermined information about the game include, for example, effects that clearly indicate or suggest that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game is a jackpot, effects that clearly indicate or suggest the type of jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game is a jackpot, effects that clearly indicate or suggest that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game is a jackpot, and effects that clearly indicate that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game is a jackpot. Examples of such effects include effects that clearly indicate or suggest the likelihood of a jackpot, effects that clearly indicate or suggest that the result of a jackpot lottery announced by a reserved special symbol game that is executed after the end of a special symbol game when the right to play the special symbol game is reserved is a jackpot (reserved pre-reading effects), and effects that clearly indicate or suggest that the result of a jackpot lottery announced by a reserved special symbol game that is executed after the end of a special symbol game when the right to play the special symbol game is reserved is a jackpot (effects that clearly indicate or suggest a reserved consecutive win).In this way, by having two types of states realized by the first rotating symbol member 37 and the left second rotating symbol member 38L or the right second rotating symbol member 38R, the effects realized by the operation of the rotating symbol members 37, 38L, and 38R are diversified, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The first rotating role member 37 can also, by itself, execute an effect that provides the player with predetermined information about the game. For example, by displaying an image corresponding to the predetermined information on the symbol display unit 341 and making the image visible through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating role member 37, an effect can be executed that provides the player with predetermined information about the game. In this case, it is also possible to execute an effect that provides the player with predetermined information about the game by displaying multiple images corresponding to the predetermined information about the game to the player and making one of these images visible through the translucent region 370A.

Here, Figures 162(A) to 162(C) are diagrams showing visual examples when the first rotating accessory member 37 alone executes a roulette effect in special symbol play that notifies whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or not. Specifically, Figure 162(A) is an example image of the symbol display unit 341 in the roulette effect, Figure 162(B) is a visual example when the result of the jackpot lottery in the roulette effect is notified that it is a jackpot, and Figure 162(C) is a visual example when the result of the jackpot lottery in the roulette effect is notified that it is a miss.

As shown in Figure 162(A), when the first rotating role member 37 alone executes a roulette effect in special symbol play to notify the player whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or not, multiple notification images 40A-40E (five in the illustrated example) are displayed on the symbol display unit 341. The multiple notification images 40A-40E include two jackpot notification images 40A, 40B that notify the player of a jackpot and three loss notification images 40C-40E that notify the player of a loss. The jackpot notification images 40A, 40B and the loss notification images 40C-40E are displayed in a distinguishable manner. In the example shown in Figure 162(A), the jackpot notification images 40A, 40B are displayed as black circles, and the loss notification images 40C-40E are displayed as white circles, making them distinguishable.

Note that the jackpot notification images 40A, 40B and the loss notification images 40C-40E may be displayed in a distinguishable manner, and may be displayed in shapes other than circular, and in colors other than black or white. Furthermore, the jackpot notification images 40A, 40B and the loss notification images 40C-40E may be displayed with text or symbols to distinguish them. For example, the jackpot notification images 40A, 40B may be displayed as images that clearly indicate or suggest a jackpot, such as "WIN," "WIN," or "○," while the loss notification images 40C-40E may be displayed as images that clearly indicate or suggest a loss, such as "LOSE," "LOSE," or "X." Furthermore, instead of or in addition to the multiple notification images 40A-40E, an image indicating the likelihood of a jackpot may be displayed. For example, in addition to text images such as "Chance," "Big Chance," "Hot Pot," or "Guaranteed" (indicating a jackpot), the likelihood of a jackpot may be displayed as "XX%."

Furthermore, the multiple notification images 40A-40E are displayed on the rotation trajectory of the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 when the first rotating role member 37 is in a reduced state. In the example shown in FIG. 162(A), the multiple notification images 40A-40E are displayed at equal intervals on the arc in the lower half of the rotation trajectory. As a result, by stopping the first rotating role member 37, which is rotating in a reduced state, at a position corresponding to one of the multiple notification images 40A-40E, it is possible to make one of the jackpot notification images 40A, 40B and the loss notification images 40C-40E visible through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370. In other words, five stopping positions of the first rotating role member 37 in the roulette effect are set at which one of the multiple notification images 40A-40E can be visible through the translucent region 370A.

For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the first rotating device element 37, which rotates in a reduced state, is stopped in a position (see FIG. 162(B)) where the jackpot notification images 40A and 40B are visible through the light-transmitting area 370A of the first plate-shaped element 370. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the first rotating device element 37, which rotates in a reduced state, is stopped in a position (see FIG. 162(C)) where the loss notification images 40C to 40E are visible through the light-transmitting area 370A of the first plate-shaped element 370.

In this embodiment, multiple notification images 40A-40E are displayed on the rotation trajectory of the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 when the first rotating role member 37 is in a reduced state. However, multiple notification images 40A-40E may also be displayed on the rotation trajectory of the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 when the first rotating role member 37 is in an expanded state. In this case, by controlling the stopping position of the first rotating role member 37 rotating in an expanded state, it is possible to make any of the jackpot notification images 40A, 40B and the loss notification images 40C-40E visible through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370.

In addition, in this embodiment, five notification images 40A-40E are arranged at equal intervals around the lower half of the rotational trajectory of the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370. However, the number of notification images 40A-40E is not particularly limited as long as they include two or more types that can notify different information, such as jackpot notification images 40A and 40B and loss notification images 40C-40E. Furthermore, the multiple notification images 40A-40E do not necessarily have to be arranged at equal intervals. Furthermore, the multiple notification images 40A-40E are not limited to the lower half of the rotational trajectory of the translucent region 370A, and may be displayed in a range different from the example shown in FIG. 162(A), such as the upper half, left half, right half, or entire circumference of the rotational trajectory.

Here, Figure 162(D) is a diagram showing an example of the rotation pattern (the order in which the notification images 40A-40E are visible through the translucent area 370A) of the first rotating device element 37 in a roulette effect in which the first rotating device element 37 alone notifies whether the result of the jackpot lottery in special symbol play is a jackpot or not. Note that "40A", "40B", etc. in Figure 162(D) mean that the first rotating device element 37 is temporarily stopped or stopped in a position where the notification image 40A-40E corresponding to that code can be seen through the translucent area 370A. Also, Figure 162(E) is a diagram showing an example of a stop pattern in a roulette effect.

As shown in Figure 162 (D), in this embodiment, six types of rotation patterns, A to F, are set for the first rotating role element 37 in the roulette effect. Details of rotation patterns A to F will be described later. Which of rotation patterns A to F will be executed is determined randomly, for example, based on a predetermined lottery. In addition, which of the multiple notification images 40A to 40E will ultimately be visible through the light-transmitting region 370A, i.e., the final stopping position of the first rotating role element 37, is determined by a predetermined lottery, for example, based on the results of a jackpot lottery.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 162(E), in this embodiment, four types of stop patterns, A to D, are set for the roulette effect. That is, in the roulette effect, after any of rotation patterns A to F is executed, any of stop patterns A to D is executed, causing the first rotating device member 37 to stop at a predetermined final position, and the result of the jackpot lottery, whether it is a jackpot or a loss, is notified based on the type of notification image 40A to 40E visible through the translucent region 370A.

In rotation pattern A shown in Figure 162 (D), the initial stopping position of the first rotating device member 37 is a position where the jackpot notification image 40A is visible through the translucent area 370A (see Figure 162 (B)), and then the first rotating device member 37 is rotated intermittently clockwise by a predetermined angle (e.g., 45°) so that the jackpot notification image 40B, miss notification image 40C, miss notification image 40D, and miss notification image 40E are sequentially visible through the translucent area 370A. Furthermore, in rotation pattern A, the first rotating device member 37 is rotated clockwise by a specific angle (for example, 180°), causing the jackpot notification image 40A to become visible again through the light-transmitting area 370A, and then, as necessary, is rotated intermittently clockwise by a specific angle (for example, 45°), causing one of the notification images 40A-40E to stop or temporarily stop in a state where it is visible through the light-transmitting area 370A, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery.

In rotation pattern B, similar to rotation pattern A, the initial stopping position of the first rotating gadget element 37 is a position where the jackpot notification image 40A is visible through the light-transmitting region 370A (see FIG. 162(B)). The first rotating gadget element 37 is then intermittently rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle (e.g., 45°), thereby sequentially making the jackpot notification image 40B, the loss notification image 40C, the loss notification image 40D, and the loss notification image 40E visible through the light-transmitting region 370A. Furthermore, in rotation pattern B, contrary to rotation pattern A, the first rotating gadget element 37 is intermittently rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (e.g., 45°) as needed, thereby stopping or temporarily stopping one of the notification images 40A-40E in a state where it is visible through the light-transmitting region 370A, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery.

In rotation pattern C, the initial stopping position of the first rotating role element 37 is a position where the miss notification image 40E is visible through the translucent area 370A (see Figure 162 (C)), and then the first rotating role element 37 is rotated intermittently counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (e.g., 45°) so that the miss notification image 40D, the miss notification image 40C, the jackpot notification image 40B, and the jackpot notification image 40A are sequentially visible through the translucent area 370A. Furthermore, in rotation pattern C, the first rotating device member 37 is rotated counterclockwise by a specific angle (for example, 180°), causing the miss notification image 40E to become visible again through the translucent region 370A, and then, as necessary, is rotated intermittently counterclockwise by a specific angle (for example, 45°), causing one of the notification images 40A-40E to stop or temporarily stop in a state where it is visible through the translucent region 370A, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery.

In rotation pattern D, similar to rotation pattern C, the initial stopping position of the first rotating gadget element 37 is a position where the loss notification image 40E is visible through the translucent region 370A (see FIG. 162(C)). The first rotating gadget element 37 is then intermittently rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (e.g., 45°), thereby sequentially making the loss notification image 40D, loss notification image 40C, jackpot notification image 40B, and jackpot notification image 40A visible through the translucent region 370A. Furthermore, in rotation pattern D, contrary to rotation pattern C, the first rotating gadget element 37 is intermittently rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle (e.g., 45°) as needed, thereby stopping or temporarily stopping one of the notification images 40A-40E in a state where it is visible through the translucent region 370A, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery.

In rotation pattern E, the first rotating accessory member 37 rotates clockwise at high speed, and then stops or temporarily stops while one of the notification images 40A-40E is visible through the translucent region 370A.

In rotation pattern F, the first rotating element 37 rotates counterclockwise at high speed, and then stops or temporarily stops while one of the notification images 40A-40E is visible through the translucent region 370A.

Stop pattern A shown in Figure 162 (E) is a pattern in which the first rotating accessory member 37 stops directly at a predetermined final stop position and does not rotate again thereafter.

Stop pattern B is a pattern in which, before the final stop, the first rotating part member 37 alternately rotates a predetermined angle (e.g., 45°) clockwise or counterclockwise between a position where the jackpot notification image 40B is visible through the translucent region 370A and a position where the loss notification image 40C is visible through the translucent region 370A, and then stops at the predetermined final stop position, where the jackpot notification image 40B is visible through the translucent region 370A or the loss notification image 40C is visible through the translucent region 370A. This stop pattern B is executed when the final stop position is determined to be a position where the jackpot notification image 40B is visible through the translucent region 370A or a position where the loss notification image 40C is visible through the translucent region 370A.

Stop pattern C and stop pattern D can be executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the final stop position is determined to be a position where the jackpot notification image 40B is visible through the translucent area 370A. Specifically, in stop pattern C, the first rotating device member 37 is temporarily stopped at a position where the miss notification image 40C is visible through the translucent area 370A, and then the first rotating device member 37 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (e.g., 45°), thereby stopping the first rotating device member 37 at a position where the jackpot notification image 40B is visible through the translucent area 370A. On the other hand, in stop pattern D, similar to stop pattern C, the first rotating part member 37 is temporarily stopped at a position where the miss notification image 40C can be seen through the translucent area 370A, and then the first rotating part member 37 is rotated clockwise by a specific angle (e.g., 135°), thereby stopping the first rotating part member 37 at a position where the jackpot notification image 40B can be seen through the translucent area 370A.

In this way, the roulette effect using the first rotating device member 37 is made more diverse and colorful by combining the rotation patterns A-F and stop patterns A-D of the first rotating device member 37. Furthermore, when the roulette effect is being executed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the notification images 40A-40E that are ultimately visible through the translucent area 370A of the first rotating device member 37, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

Note that the rotation and stopping patterns in the roulette effect using the first rotating device member 37 are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 162 (D) and 162 (E), and can be modified in various ways.

In addition, in this embodiment, the roulette effect in which the first rotating accessory element 37 alone notifies whether the result of the jackpot lottery in special symbol games is a jackpot or a miss has been described. However, the roulette effect using the first rotating accessory element 37 may also be executed as an effect in special symbol games that notifies whether the result is a special jackpot or a regular jackpot, or may be executed as an upgrade effect in jackpot games that notifies that the result is a special jackpot when a regular jackpot is notified in special symbol games.

In addition, in the roulette presentation of this embodiment, notification images 40A-40E displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are visible through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating role member 37. However, instead of making the notification images 40A-40E displayed on the symbol display unit 341 visible, multiple lamps such as LEDs may be arranged on the back side of the first rotating role member 37, and the light emission mode of the lamps visible through the translucent region 370A, such as color, on, off, flashing, etc., may be used to indicate whether or not a jackpot has occurred and the type of jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first rotating accessory member 37 is movable along a linear path in the vertical direction, but it may also be movable in directions other than the vertical direction, such as left and right or diagonally, or it may be movable along a non-linear path such as a serpentine path or an arc-shaped path, or it may be movable along multiple different paths. Furthermore, the first rotating accessory member 37 may also be immovable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the standby position of the first rotating role member 37 is set to a position where it is partially exposed from the opening 31A, and the operating position of the first rotating role member 37 is set to the center of the pattern display unit 341, but this standby position and this operating position are not particularly limited and may be set, for example, around the pattern display unit 341 when viewed from the front, directly above or inside the various winning openings 313-316, or around the windmill 310 as a rotating body. Furthermore, at least one of the standby positions and operating positions of the first rotating role member 37 may be set multiple times.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first rotating accessory member 37 can be expanded and contracted by sliding the multiple plate-shaped members 370, 371, but the first rotating accessory member 37 may not be expanded and contracted, or may consist of only one plate-shaped member.

Here, Figures 163 to 167 are drawings for explaining the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R. Specifically, Figure 163 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 when the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are in the operating position, Figure 164 is a front view showing an example of the rotation of the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R, and Figure 165 is a front view showing an example of the rotation of the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R when the first rotating accessory member 37 is in the expanded state in the operating position. FIG. 166 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 when the rotating accessory member 38R is in the operating position; FIG. 166 is a side view with a portion cut away showing the first rotating accessory member 37 and the left second rotating accessory member 38L (right second rotating accessory member 38R); and FIG. 167 is a front view of the game board 31 showing an example of operation of the first rotating accessory member 37, the left second rotating accessory member 38L, and the right second rotating accessory member 38R.

As shown in Figures 163 to 167, the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are positioned on the front side of the pattern display unit 341, and as will be described in detail below, they can be moved up and down and rotated independently on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 by the left second rotating accessory member drive mechanism 38La or the right second rotating accessory member drive mechanism 38Ra (see Figure 169), and in special symbol games and jackpot games, they work in cooperation with the first rotating accessory member 37 to perform effects that provide the player with predetermined game information related to the game.

The installation locations of the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are not limited to the front side of the symbol display unit 341 and can be changed. For example, they may be installed on the path of the game balls. In this case, it is possible to protect the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R with nails to prevent game balls from colliding with them. Of course, when the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are placed on the path of the game balls, protection from game balls may be achieved not only by nails but also by materials such as resin. Furthermore, when the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are placed on the path of the game balls, they may be subjected to the action of game balls. In other words, the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R may or may not be subjected to the action of game balls.

The left second rotating accessory member 38L cooperates with the first rotating accessory member 37 to present predetermined game information related to the special game and jackpot game. Specifically, in this embodiment, it is used when the result of the jackpot lottery in the special game is a 5R jackpot, and is used to clearly indicate the type of 5R jackpot (5R variable jackpot or 5R regular jackpot). This left second rotating accessory member 38L includes a main rotating portion 381L and a rotation axis 382L.

The rotating main body part 381L is formed in a plate shape that is oval in front view and is arranged on the front side of the pattern display part 341. The rotating main body part 381L has an information display part 383L at one end and an information display part 384L at the other end. At least the information display part 383L at one end and the information display part 384L at the other end of the rotating main body part 381L are formed so that the back side is invisible or difficult to see. This allows the information display parts 383L and 384L to block light emitted toward the front side of the pattern display part 341. Note that the entire rotating main body part 381L may be formed so that the back side is invisible or difficult to see, or only the information display parts 383L and 384L may be formed so that the back side is invisible or difficult to see, with the rest of the rotating main body part 381L being translucent.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 383L at one end displays "SMALL," and the information display unit 384L at the other end displays "small." As will be described in detail below, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R guaranteed jackpot, the word "SMALL" on the information display unit 383L is visible through the light-transmitting area 370A of the first rotating device member 37, which has stopped in a predetermined position, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R regular jackpot, the word "small" on the information display unit 384L is visible through the light-transmitting area 370A of the first rotating device member 37, which has stopped in a predetermined position (see FIG. 168).

In other words, in this embodiment, the letters visible through the translucent area 370A are the alphabets "SMALL" and "small," which indicates a 5R jackpot, and whether the letters are uppercase or lowercase makes it possible to distinguish between a special jackpot and a regular jackpot.

In this embodiment, whether a jackpot is a special jackpot or a regular jackpot can be distinguished by whether the characters visible through translucent region 370A are uppercase or lowercase letters of the alphabet. However, whether a jackpot is a special jackpot or a regular jackpot may also be distinguished by the type of kanji, hiragana, numbers, or symbols. Also, whether a jackpot is a special jackpot or a regular jackpot may be distinguished by the color of the characters or symbols visible through translucent region 370A. For example, a special jackpot may be indicated when the color of the characters or symbols visible through translucent region 370A is rainbow-colored, and a regular jackpot may be indicated when the color of the characters or symbols visible through translucent region 370A is a color other than rainbow-colored (for example, black).

In addition, the information display sections 383L, 384L of the main rotating part 381L of the left second rotating accessory member 38L can be easily formed by painting, etc., but may also be formed using various display devices such as LCD displays, organic EL displays, and dot matrix displays. In this case, the display modes of the information display sections 383L, 384L are diversified, making it possible to provide the player with more diverse information about the game using the left second rotating accessory member 38L. This allows for more diversity in the effects executed using the left second rotating accessory member 38L, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The rotating shaft 382L is the part to which a rotational drive force is input from the left second rotating role member drive mechanism 38La (see Figure 169), which will be described later. This rotating shaft 382L is fixed to the center of the rear side of the main rotating part 381L, on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, so as to extend in the front-to-rear direction toward the symbol display unit 341. The rotating shaft 382L is placed in a rotating state when a rotational force is input from the left second rotating role member drive mechanism 38La under the control of the MPU 51, and is placed in a non-rotating state when the input of rotational force from the left second rotating role member drive mechanism 38La is stopped under the control of the MPU 51. This allows the main rotating part 381L to rotate together with the rotating shaft 382L around the rotating shaft 382L, and the entire left second rotating role member 38L to be rotatable. That is, the left second rotating accessory member 38L can move closer to the first rotating accessory member 37 by moving upward, and can move away from the first rotating accessory member 37 by moving downward.

The rotation speed of the rotating shaft 382L (main rotating part 381L) in a given rotation state, i.e., the rotation speed of the second left rotating accessory member 38L, is not particularly limited and may be constant or variable, and the rotation speed and direction may also be variable.

The rotating shaft 382L is rotatably supported by a support ring 386L fixed to the lifting shaft 385L, and its movement in the forward and backward directions is restricted by a restricting ring 387L. The lifting shaft 385L can raise and lower the rotating shaft 382L in front of the symbol display unit 341 by the driving force input from the left second rotating role member drive mechanism 38La (see FIG. 169), which will be described later. This allows the left second rotating role member 38L to move up and down between a standby position (see FIGS. 157 and 158) where it is visible without passing through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating role member 37, and an operating position (see FIG. 163) where it is partially visible through the translucent region 370A.

As shown in FIG. 169, the left second rotating accessory member 38L has its up/down movement and rotation controlled via the left second rotating accessory member drive mechanism 38La, which is controlled by the MPU 51. The left second rotating accessory member drive mechanism 38La is connected to the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 via the input/output I/F 52. This left second rotating accessory member drive mechanism 38La has, for example, multiple motors, a return detection unit for detecting that the left second rotating accessory member 38L has returned to the standby position, and a motor driver.

The multiple motors are, for example, stepping motors, DC motors, etc., and the return detection unit is, for example, an optical sensor, a contact sensor, etc. Each motor is connected to the rotation shaft 382L and lift shaft 385L of the left second rotating role member 38L via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear, and driving force is input to the rotation shaft 382L and lift shaft 385L. The left second rotating role member 38L is movable up and down between a standby position (see Figure 158) and an operating position (see Figure 163) by inputting driving force from the motor to the lift shaft 385L. Furthermore, the left second rotating role member 38L is rotatable counterclockwise in front of the symbol display unit 341 by rotating the rotation shaft 382L when driving force is input from the motor to the rotation shaft 382L. The rotation position of the left second rotating accessory member 38L can be anywhere between the standby position and the operating position, but in this embodiment, the left second rotating accessory member 38L rotates in the operating position.

In addition, the motor driver for the left second rotating accessory member drive mechanism 38La is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. The motor driver controls each motor according to control instructions from the voice lamp control device 5. The motor driver is also capable of acquiring the detection results from the return detection unit and transmitting them to the voice lamp control device 5. Note that the motor driver may be omitted, with each motor and return detection unit directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5 and controlled by the voice lamp control device 5.

There are no particular limitations on the configuration of the left second rotating accessory member drive mechanism 38La. In other words, there are no particular limitations on the configuration for moving the left second rotating accessory member drive mechanism 38La up and down and rotating it.

Furthermore, the rotating main body part 381L is positioned on the front side of the pattern display part 341 closer to the pattern display part 341 than the multiple plate-like members 370, 371 of the first rotating role member 37. Therefore, as will be described later, when the rotating main body part 381L is in an expanded state when the first rotating role member 37 is lowered to its operating position (see Figure 159), and when the left second rotating role member 38L is raised to its operating position (see Figure 163), the information display part 383L at one end and the information display part 384L at the other end can be positioned on the rear side of the translucent region 370A of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37 on the front side of the pattern display part 341 (see Figures 165 and 166). That is, when the first rotating role member 37 rotates in an expanded state at the operating position, and the rotating main body part 381L rotates at the operating position (see FIGS. 165 and 166), the rotation trajectory of the light-transmitting area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating role member 37 and the rotation trajectory of the information display parts 383L, 384L of the rotating main body part 381L in the left second rotating role member 38L intersect, so that at a predetermined timing of a special game or a jackpot game, the light-transmitting area By stopping the first rotating role member 37 and the left second rotating role member 38L in a predetermined state at the position where 370A intersects with the information display units 383L and 384L, the light emitted toward the front side of the pattern display unit 341 is blocked by the left second rotating role member 38L, and the display on the information display units 383L and 384L of the left second rotating role member 38L located behind the translucent area 370A can be seen through the translucent area 370A (see Figure 167 (A)).

The right-hand second rotating accessory member 38R cooperates with the first rotating accessory member 37 to present predetermined game information related to the special symbol game and jackpot game. Specifically, in this embodiment, it is used when the result of the jackpot lottery in the special symbol game is a 16R jackpot. This right-hand second rotating accessory member 38R includes a rotating main body portion 381R and a rotation axis 382R.

The rotating main body part 381R is formed in a plate shape that is oval when viewed from the front, and is arranged on the front side of the pattern display part 341. The rotating main body part 381R has an information display part 383R at one end and an information display part 384R at the other end. The rotating main body part 381R is formed so that at least the information display part 383R at one end and the information display part 384R at the other end are invisible or difficult to see on the back side. This allows the information display parts 383R and 384R to block light emitted toward the front side of the pattern display part 341. Note that the entire rotating main body part 381R may be formed so that the back side is invisible or difficult to see, or only the information display parts 383R and 384R are formed so that the back side is invisible or difficult to see, with the rest of the rotating main body part 381R being translucent.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 383R at one end displays "BIG," and the information display unit 384R at the other end displays "big." As will be described in detail below, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R guaranteed jackpot, and if the reserved rights to play special games include a jackpot, the letters "BIG" on the information display unit 383R are visible through the translucent region 370A of the first rotating device member 37, which is stopped in a predetermined position (see FIG. 168). In other words, the letters "BIG" on the information display unit 383R are used to clearly indicate or suggest that there is a 16R jackpot and a reserved series of jackpots. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R regular jackpot, and the reserved rights to play special games do not include any jackpots for which the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, the word "big" on the information display unit 384R will be visible through the translucent region 370A of the first rotating device member 37, which has stopped in a predetermined position (see FIG. 168). In other words, the word "big" on the information display unit 384R is used to clearly indicate or suggest that there is a 16R jackpot and no reserved consecutive wins.

In other words, in this embodiment, the letters visible through the translucent area 370A are the alphabets "BIG" and "big," which indicates a 16R jackpot, and whether or not there is a pending consecutive win can be distinguished by whether the letters are uppercase or lowercase.

In this embodiment, the presence or absence of a pending consecutive win can be distinguished depending on whether the characters visible through the translucent region 370A are uppercase or lowercase letters of the alphabet. However, the presence or absence of a pending consecutive win may also be distinguished depending on the type of kanji, hiragana, numbers, or symbols. The presence or absence of a pending consecutive win may also be distinguished depending on the color of the characters or symbols visible through the translucent region 370A. For example, if the color of the characters or symbols visible through the translucent region 370A is rainbow-colored, a pending consecutive win will be executed, and if the color of the characters or symbols visible through the translucent region 370A is a color other than rainbow-colored (e.g., black), a notification may be issued that a pending consecutive win will not be executed.

In addition, the information display sections 383R, 384R of the main rotating part 381R of the right-hand second rotating device member 38R can be easily formed by painting, etc., but may also be formed using various display devices such as LCD displays, organic EL displays, and dot matrix displays. In this case, the display modes on the information display sections 383R, 384R are diversified, making it possible to provide the player with more diverse information about the game using the right-hand second rotating device member 38R. This allows for more diversity in the effects executed using the right-hand second rotating device member 38R, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The rotating shaft 382R is the part to which a rotational drive force is input from the right second rotating role member drive mechanism 38La (see Figure 169), which will be described later. This rotating shaft 382R is fixed to the center of the rear side of the main rotating part 381R, on the front side of the symbol display part 341, so as to extend in the front-to-rear direction toward the symbol display part 341. The rotating shaft 382R is placed in a predetermined rotational state when a rotational force is input from the right second rotating role member drive mechanism 38Ra under the control of the MPU 51, and is placed in a non-rotating state (predetermined stopped state) when the input of rotational force from the right second rotating role member drive mechanism 38Ra is stopped under the control of the MPU 51. This allows the main rotating part 381R to rotate together with the rotating shaft 382R around the rotating shaft 382R, and the entire right second rotating role member 38R is rotatable.

The rotation speed of the rotating shaft 382R (main rotating part 381R) in a given rotation state, i.e., the rotation speed of the right second rotating accessory member 38R, is not particularly limited and may be constant or variable, and the rotation speed and direction may also be variable.

The rotating shaft 382R is rotatably supported by a support ring 386R fixed to the lifting shaft 385R, and its movement in the forward and backward directions is restricted by a restricting ring 387R. The lifting shaft 385R can raise and lower the rotating shaft 382R in front of the symbol display unit 341 by a driving force input from the right-side second rotating role member drive mechanism 38Ra (see FIG. 169), which will be described later. This allows the right-side second rotating role member 38R to move up and down between a standby position (see FIGS. 157 and 158) where it is visible without passing through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating role member 37, and an operating position (see FIG. 163) where it is partially visible through the translucent region 370A. That is, the right second rotating accessory member 38R can move closer to the first rotating accessory member 37 by moving upward, and can move away from the first rotating accessory member 37 by moving downward.

As shown in FIG. 169, the right second rotating accessory member 38R has its up/down movement and rotation controlled via the right second rotating accessory member drive mechanism 38Ra, which is controlled by the MPU 51. The right second rotating accessory member drive mechanism 38Ra is connected to the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 via the input/output I/F 52. This right second rotating accessory member drive mechanism 38Ra has, for example, multiple motors, a return detection unit for detecting that the right second rotating accessory member 38R has returned to the standby position, and a motor driver.

The multiple motors are, for example, stepping motors, DC motors, etc., and the return detection unit is, for example, an optical sensor, a contact sensor, etc. Each motor is connected to the rotation shaft 382R and lift shaft 385R of the right second rotating role member 38R via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear, and driving force is input to the rotation shaft 382R and lift shaft 385R. The right second rotating role member 38R is movable up and down between the standby position (see Figure 158) and the operating position (see Figure 163) by inputting driving force from the motor to the lift shaft 385R. Furthermore, the right second rotating role member 38R is rotatable counterclockwise in front of the symbol display unit 341 by rotating the rotation shaft 382R by inputting driving force from the motor to the rotation shaft 382R. The rotation position of the right second rotating accessory member 38R can be anywhere between the standby position and the operating position, but in this embodiment, the right second rotating accessory member 38R rotates in the operating position.

In addition, the motor driver for the right second rotating accessory member drive mechanism 38Ra is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. The motor driver controls each motor according to control instructions from the voice lamp control device 5. The motor driver is also capable of acquiring the detection results from the return detection unit and transmitting them to the voice lamp control device 5. Note that the motor driver may be omitted, with each motor and return detection unit directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5 and controlled by the voice lamp control device 5.

There are no particular limitations on the configuration of the right-side second rotating accessory member drive mechanism 38Ra. In other words, there are no particular limitations on the configuration for moving the right-side second rotating accessory member drive mechanism 38Ra up and down and rotating it.

Furthermore, the rotating main body part 381R is positioned on the front side of the pattern display part 341 closer to the pattern display part 341 than the multiple plate-like members 370, 371 of the first rotating role member 37. Therefore, as will be described later, when the rotating main body part 381R is in an expanded state when the first rotating role member 37 is lowered to its operating position (see Figure 159), and when the right second rotating role member 38R is raised to its operating position (see Figure 163), the information display part 383R at one end and the information display part 384R at the other end can be positioned on the back side of the translucent region 370A of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37 on the front side of the pattern display part 341 (see Figures 165 and 166). That is, when the first rotating accessory member 37 rotates in an expanded state at the operating position, and the rotating main body portion 381R rotates at the operating position (see FIGS. 165 and 166), the rotation trajectory of the light-transmitting area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating accessory member 37 and the rotation trajectory of the information display units 383R and 384R of the rotating main body portion 381R in the right second rotating accessory member 38R intersect, so that at a predetermined timing of a special game or a jackpot game, the light-transmitting area By stopping the first rotating role member 37 and the right second rotating role member 38R in a predetermined state at the position where 370A intersects with the information display units 383R and 384R, the light emitted toward the front side of the pattern display unit 341 by the right second rotating role member 38R is blocked, and the display on the information display units 383R and 384R of the right second rotating role member 38R located behind the translucent area 370A becomes visible through the translucent area 370A (see Figure 167 (B)).

In this manner, in this embodiment, at a predetermined timing during a special game or a jackpot game, the first rotating device element 37, which rotates in its operating position, is stopped in a predetermined state, while the left second rotating device element 38L and the right second rotating device element 38R, which also rotate in their operating positions, are stopped in a predetermined state. This allows the display of the information display elements 383L, 384L of the left second rotating device element 38L or the information display elements 383R, 384R of the right second rotating device element 38R to be visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped element 370 of the first rotating device element 37 (see FIG. 167(B)). Therefore, in this embodiment, predetermined information regarding the game (such as the type of jackpot or information regarding the presence or absence of a pending consecutive win) is presented and can be understood by the player based on the type of information display elements 383L, 384L, 383R, 384R visible through the translucent region 370A. Therefore, when the first rotating accessory member 37, the left second rotating accessory member 38L, and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are activated during special symbol games or jackpot games, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the types of information display units 383L, 384L, 383R, and 384R that are visible through the translucent area 370A, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are movable in the vertical direction, and although they are movable along a linear path in the vertical direction, they may also be movable in directions other than vertical, such as left and right or diagonally, or they may be movable along a non-linear path such as a serpentine path or an arc-shaped path, or they may be movable along multiple different paths.

In addition, in this embodiment, the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R can rotate in one direction, counterclockwise. However, the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R may also be rotatable in one direction, clockwise, instead of counterclockwise, or the direction of rotation may change mid-rotation.

Here, Figure 168 is a table showing the notification modes for the first rotating accessory member 37, the left second rotating accessory member 38L, and the right second rotating accessory member 38R.

In this embodiment, as described above, when the first rotating role member 37, the left second rotating role member 38L, and the right second rotating role member 38R are stopped at predetermined positions, the information display units 383L and 384L of the left second rotating role member 38L and the information display units 383R and 384R of the right second rotating role member 38R are visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating role member 37 (see FIG. 167). Furthermore, since the left second rotating role member 38L has two information display units 383L and 384L and the right second rotating role member 38R has two information display units 383R and 384R, there are four possible modes that can be viewed through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating role member 37. Therefore, in this embodiment, there are four types of notification modes for predetermined information related to games.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 168, the types of notification modes for predetermined information regarding a game include notification mode A, notification mode B, notification mode C, and notification mode D.

In notification mode A, the information display section 383R of the second right rotating device member 38R is visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating device member 37, allowing the letters "BIG" to be seen through the translucent region 370A. In this notification mode A, by allowing the player to see the letters "BIG" during a special symbol game, the player is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 16R guaranteed jackpot, and that the reserved right to play the special symbol game at the start of the special symbol game includes the result of the jackpot lottery being a jackpot.

In notification mode B, the information display section 384R of the second right rotating device member 38R is visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating device member 37, making the word "big" visible through the translucent region 370A. In this notification mode B, by allowing the player to see the word "big" during special symbol play, the player is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol play is a 16R guaranteed jackpot.

In notification mode C, the information display section 383L of the second left rotating device member 38L is visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating device member 37, making the word "SMALL" visible through the translucent region 370A. In this notification mode C, by allowing the player to see the word "SMALL" during special symbol play, the player is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol play is a 5R probability jackpot.

In notification mode D, the information display section 384L of the second left rotating device member 38L is visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating device member 37, making the word "small" visible through the translucent region 370A. In notification mode C, by allowing the player to see the word "small" during special symbol play, the player is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol play is a 5R regular jackpot.

In this embodiment, the first rotating role element 37, the left second rotating role element 38L, and the right second rotating role element 38R are rotatable by drive mechanisms 37a, 38La, and 38Ra controlled by the MPU 51. However, it is also possible to set at least one of the first rotating role element 37, the left second rotating role element 38L, and the right second rotating role element 38R to a predetermined rotation state when a game ball interferes with them. In this way, by setting at least one of the first rotating role element 37, the left second rotating role element 38L, and the right second rotating role element 38R to a predetermined rotation state when a game ball interferes with them, the player can grasp the timing at which at least one of the first rotating role element 37, the left second rotating role element 38L, and the right second rotating role element 38R will be set to a predetermined rotation state. This allows the player to focus on the movement of the game ball and at least one of the first rotating role member 37, the left second rotating role member 38L, and the right second rotating role member 38R, and thereby determine when the information display units 383L, 384L of the left second rotating role member 38L or the information display units 383R, 384R of the right second rotating role member 38R become visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating role member 37. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the movement of the game ball and at least one of the left second rotating role member 38L and the right second rotating role member 38R, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R are activated in a special symbol game that announces the results of a jackpot lottery that is executed when a game ball serving as a rotating body enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315. Here, in a special symbol game, the result of the jackpot lottery for that special symbol game is announced when the decorative symbol that is displayed changes position and is temporarily stopped (a state in which the decorative symbol moves slightly without being completely stopped) and then stopped (a state in which the decorative symbol is completely stopped). Below, an example of the operation of the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R will be explained with reference to Figure 170, which is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R in a special symbol game.

As shown in Figure 170(A), when a special symbol game is initiated in response to a game ball entering the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, the display of the varying decorative symbols begins, and if the result of the jackpot lottery for that special symbol game is a jackpot, the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed as a doublet, as shown in Figure 170(B), and then the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed as a doublet, as shown in Figure 170(F). In such a special symbol game, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 170(C) to 170(E), the rotating role members 37, 38L, and 38R are activated at a timing between the time when the decorative symbols shown in Figure 170(B) are temporarily displayed as a doublet and the time when the decorative symbols shown in Figure 170(F) are temporarily displayed as a doublet. That is, in this embodiment, after the result of the jackpot lottery in the special symbol game is first announced as a jackpot, the type of jackpot is announced by activating the rotating role members 37, 38L, 38R, and then the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby definitively announcing the result of the jackpot lottery.

Specifically, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, which is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, is a jackpot, as shown in Figures 170(B) and 170(C), after the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed as doublets, the first rotating device element 37 is moved downward from its standby position to its operating position (see Figure 158), while the left-rotating device element 38L and the right-rotating device element 38R are moved upward from their standby positions to their operating positions (see Figure 163). Then, as shown in Figure 170(C), the first rotating device element 37 is expanded in its expanded state, and the expanded first rotating device element 37, the left-rotating device element 38L, and the right-rotating device element 38R each rotate in their operating positions (see Figure 165). Also, as shown in Figure 170 (C), after rotation time T2 has elapsed since the start of operation of each rotating part member 37, 38L, 38R, the rotation of the expanded first rotating part member 37, the left rotating part member 38L, and the right rotating part member 38R is stopped (see Figure 165 (D)). Then, after return wait time T3 has elapsed since the rotation of each rotating part member 37, 38L, 38R has stopped, the first rotating part member 37 is reduced and returned to its standby position, and the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R are returned to their standby positions (see Figure 165 (E)).

Here, the stopping position of the first rotating device element 37 is determined by the type of jackpot announced by the special symbol game. For example, when the type of jackpot announced by the special symbol game is a 5R jackpot (5R variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot), the stopping position of the first rotating device element 37 is set at a position where the rotation trajectory of the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped element 370 on the first rotating device element 37 intersects with the rotation trajectory of the information display units 383L, 384L of the left second rotating device element 38L, thereby realizing notification mode C or D (see Figures 167(B) and 168). In other words, when the type of jackpot announced by the special symbol game is a 5R jackpot (5R variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot), the stopping position of the first rotating role member 37 is set to a position where the information display section 383L (the characters "SMALL") or the information display section 384L (the characters "small") of the left second rotating role member 38L is visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating role member 37.

On the other hand, when the type of jackpot announced by the special symbol game is a 16R guaranteed jackpot, the stopping position of the first rotating device element 37 is set at a position where the rotation trajectory of the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped element 370 in the first rotating device element 37 intersects with the rotation trajectory of the information display sections 383R, 384R of the right second rotating device element 38R, and the translucent area 370A is stopped at a position where announcement mode A or B can be realized (see Figures 167(A) and 168). In other words, when the jackpot type announced by the special symbol game is a 16R variable jackpot, the stopping position of the first rotating device member 37 is set to a position where the information display section 383R (the letters "BIG") or the information display section 384R (the letters "big") of the right second rotating device member 38R is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating device member 37.

The stopping position of the left second rotating device element 38L is determined by the type of jackpot announced by the special symbol game. For example, when the type of jackpot announced by the special symbol game is a 5R variable jackpot, the stopping position of the left second rotating device element 38L is set at a position where the rotation trajectory of the information display element 383L of the left second rotating device element 38L intersects with the rotation trajectory of the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped element 370 on the first rotating device element 37, thereby realizing notification mode C (see Figures 167(B) and 168). In other words, when the jackpot type announced by the special symbol game is a 5R variable jackpot, the stopping position of the left second rotating device member 38L is set to a position where the information display section 383L (the letters "SMALL") is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 on the first rotating device member 37.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type indicated by the special symbol game is a 5R normal jackpot, the stopping position of the left second rotating device member 38L is set at a position where the rotation trajectory of the information display unit 384L of the left second rotating device member 38L intersects with the rotation trajectory of the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating device member 37, thereby realizing notification mode D (see Figures 167(B) and 168). In other words, when the jackpot type indicated by the special symbol game is a 5R normal jackpot, the stopping position of the left second rotating device member 38L is set at a position where the information display unit 384L (the letter "small") is visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating device member 37.

If the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 16R probability jackpot, there are no particular restrictions on the stopping position of the second left rotating device member 38L, and it may be determined as appropriate.

The stopping position of the right-hand second rotating device element 38R is determined by the type of jackpot announced by the special symbol game and whether or not a series of reserved jackpots is active. For example, if the type of jackpot announced by the special symbol game is a 16R probability jackpot and a series of reserved jackpots is active, the stopping position of the right-hand second rotating device element 38R is set at a position where the rotation trajectory of the information display element 383R of the right-hand second rotating device element 38R intersects with the rotation trajectory of the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped element 370 on the first rotating device element 37, thereby enabling notification mode A (see Figures 167(A) and 168). In other words, when the jackpot type announced by the special symbol game is a 16R probability jackpot and a reserved consecutive win is executed, the stopping position of the right second rotating device member 38R is set to a position where the information display section 383R (the letters "BIG") can be seen through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating device member 37.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type indicated by the special symbol game is a 16R probability jackpot and a series of reserved consecutive wins is not being executed, the right second rotating device element 38R is stopped at a position where the rotation trajectory of the information display element 384R of the right second rotating device element 38R intersects with the rotation trajectory of the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped element 370 of the first rotating device element 37, and the information display element 383R is stopped at a position where notification mode B can be realized (see Figures 167(A) and 168). In other words, when the jackpot type indicated by the special symbol game is a 16R probability jackpot and a series of reserved consecutive wins is not being executed, the right second rotating device element 38R is stopped at a position where the information display element 384R (the letters "big") is visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped element 370 of the first rotating device element 37.

In addition, if the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 5R jackpot (5R special jackpot or 5R regular jackpot), there are no particular restrictions on the stopping position of the right second rotating accessory member 38R, and it may be determined as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rotating role members 37, 38L, 38R are described as being activated to notify the type of jackpot and whether or not there is a consecutive hold, but they may also be activated to notify (explicitly or suggest) other information as predetermined information for the game, such as an effect to be executed later (that a super reach effect or special reach effect will be executed, the type of super reach effect or special reach effect), or the likelihood of a jackpot.

In addition, while this embodiment describes a case where the rotating role elements 37, 38L, and 38R are activated between the temporary stop display and the stop display of the decorative symbols during special symbol play, they may also be activated at other times during special symbol play. For example, the rotating role elements 37, 38L, and 38R may be activated at the start of special symbol play, during the execution of high-speed variable effects (basic effects, non-reach effects) until the start of a reach effect, or at the start and during the execution of various reach effects. In other words, the notification of the type of jackpot by the rotating role elements 37, 38L, and 38R is not limited to after the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols indicates that a jackpot has occurred, but may also be activated before the jackpot has been indicated.

In addition, while this embodiment describes the case where the rotating device elements 37, 38L, and 38R are activated during special symbol gameplay, they may also be activated during jackpot gameplay. In this case, the information display areas 383L and 384L of the left second rotating device element 38L and the information display areas 383R and 384R of the right second rotating device element 38R become visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped element 370 of the first rotating device element 37, thereby providing predetermined information for the game, such as the fact that a so-called reserve consecutive win will be executed after the end of the jackpot game, or that the jackpot type indicated to the player during the special symbol game is more advantageous to the player. In other words, the rotating device elements 37, 38L, and 38R can be used to execute reserve consecutive win confirmation effects and effects that upgrade the jackpot type from a normal jackpot to a special jackpot. Furthermore, there are no particular restrictions on the timing at which the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R are activated during a jackpot game, and they may be activated at the opening, round, or ending of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first rotating role element 37 and the left second rotating role element 38L or the right second rotating role element 38R cooperate to produce effects based on four notification modes (see FIG. 168). However, as mentioned above, the first rotating role element 37 can also produce effects such as roulette effects by itself (see FIG. 162). Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can also be configured with only the first rotating role element 37, omitting the left second rotating role element 38L or the right second rotating role element 38R.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first rotating role element 37 and both the left second rotating role element 38L and the right second rotating role element 38R can move from their standby positions to their operating positions to produce effects based on four notification modes (see FIG. 168). However, it is also possible to produce effects based on four notification modes (see FIG. 168) by moving either the first rotating role element 37 or the left second rotating role element 38L or the right second rotating role element 38R from their standby positions to their operating positions. In other words, the left second rotating role element 38L or the right second rotating role element 38R may be located anywhere so long as it can move relative to the back side of the first rotating role element 37 to block the light of a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341.

[Processing of the voice and lamp control device 5]
Next, with reference to Figures 171 to 174, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5 will be described.

This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above, which includes a sub-movable display unit 38 and a movable device member 39 as the performance devices, in that it includes a first rotating device member 37, a left second rotating device member 38L, and a right second rotating device member 38R as the performance devices. Therefore, the processing related to the operation control of the first rotating device member 37, the left second rotating device member 38L, and the right second rotating device member 38R as the performance devices differs from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, part of the command determination processing and special symbol game performance control processing in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42 executed by the sound lamp control device 5 differs from that of the first embodiment described above. Below, the command determination processing and special symbol game performance control processing of this embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Command Determination Processing]
First, there will be described an example of the procedure for the command determination process executed in step S2703 of the sub-timer interrupt process in Fig. 42. Here, Fig. 171 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the command determination process.

As shown in FIG. 171, in the command determination process of this embodiment, when a special symbol variation pattern command is received, steps S3101 to S3106 are executed as in the first embodiment described above, and a rotating role member operation effect setting process is executed (step S3301) to set the rotating role member operation effect that is executed by operating the first rotating role member 37, the left second rotating role member 38L, and the right second rotating role member 38R.

[Rotating role member operation performance setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the rotating accessory member operation performance setting process executed in step S3301 of the command determination process in Fig. 171 will be described. Here, Fig. 172 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the rotating accessory member operation performance setting process.

<Step S3401>
172, in the process of setting the rotating role member operation effect of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special symbol game is a 16R probability variable jackpot (step S3401). Whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot is determined based on the win/loss information for the jackpot lottery included in the special symbol variation pattern command.

If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 16R probability variable jackpot (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3402; if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is not a 16R probability variable jackpot (step S3401: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3405.

<Step S3402>
If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 16R probability jackpot (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the reserved rights to play the special symbol game at the start of the special symbol game include a jackpot result in the jackpot lottery, i.e., whether or not a so-called reserved consecutive win will be executed (step S3402).Whether or not the reserved rights to play the special symbol game at the start of the special symbol game include a jackpot result in the jackpot lottery is determined based on the special symbol win/loss information data (special symbol data) stored in the aforementioned special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5.

If the reserved rights to play the special symbol game at the start of the game include a jackpot that results in a jackpot (step S3402: Yes), i.e., if a so-called reserved consecutive win is to be executed, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3403. On the other hand, if the reserved rights to play the special symbol game at the start of the game do not include a jackpot that results in a jackpot (step S3402: No), i.e., if a so-called reserved consecutive win is not to be executed, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3404.

<Step S3403>
If the reserved rights to play the special symbol game at the start of the special symbol game include a jackpot that results from the jackpot lottery (step S3402: Yes), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 16R guaranteed jackpot and a so-called reserved consecutive win is executed, the MPU 51 sets notification mode A as the rotating role element operation presentation (step S3403) and proceeds to step S3409. As mentioned above, notification mode A is a mode in which the information display section 383R (the letters "BIG") of the right-hand second rotating role member 38R is visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating role member 37, and it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special symbol game is a 16R guaranteed jackpot, and that the reserved rights to play the special symbol game at the start of the special symbol game include those for which the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (see Figure 168).

<Step S3404>
If the reserved rights to play the special symbol game at the start of the special symbol game do not include a jackpot lottery result that results in a jackpot (step S3402: No), i.e., if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 16R probability jackpot and a so-called reserved consecutive jackpot is not being executed, the MPU 51 sets notification mode B as the rotating device member activation presentation (step S3404) and proceeds to step S3409. As described above, notification mode B is a mode in which the information display section 384R (the word "big") of the right second rotating device member 38R is visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating device member 37, and the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 16R probability jackpot (see FIG. 168).

<Step S3405>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special symbol game is not a 16R probability variable jackpot (step S3401: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special symbol game is a 5R probability variable jackpot (step S3405). Whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot is determined based on the win/loss information for the jackpot lottery included in the special symbol variation pattern command.

If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 5R probability variable jackpot (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3406; if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is not a 5R probability variable jackpot (step S3405: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3407.

<Step S3406>
If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 5R probability variable jackpot (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 sets notification mode C as the rotating role member operation presentation (step S3406) and proceeds to step S3409. As described above, notification mode C is a mode in which the information display section 383L (the letters "SMALL") of the left second rotating role member 38L is visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating role member 37, and it is announced that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 5R probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 168).

<Step S3407>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special symbol game is not a 5R variable jackpot (step S3405: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special symbol game is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3407). Whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot is determined based on the win/loss information for the jackpot lottery included in the special symbol variation pattern command.

If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 5R regular jackpot (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3408. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is not a 5R regular jackpot (step S3407: No), i.e., if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, the MPU 51 ends the rotating role element activation effect setting process without setting the rotating role element activation effect.

<Step S3408>
If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 sets notification mode D as the rotating role member operation presentation (step S3408) and proceeds to step S3409. As described above, notification mode D is a mode in which the information display section 384L (the character "small") of the left second rotating role member 38L is visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating role member 37, and it is announced that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 5R normal jackpot (see FIG. 168).

<Step S3409>
When any of notification modes A to D is set as the rotating role member operation effect (steps S3403, S3404, S3406, or S3408), the MPU 51 sets a rotating role member operation effect setting flag indicating that the rotating role member operation effect has been set to ON (step S3409), and proceeds to step S3410. The rotating role member operation effect setting flag is referenced in step S3501 of the special symbol game effect control process in FIG. 173 described below to determine whether the rotating role members 37, 38L, and 38R are in a standby state for operation.

<Steps S3410 and S3411>
In step S3410, the MPU 51 identifies the variation type (presentation pattern) set for the special symbol game in the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process of step S3103, which is executed when a special symbol variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of Fig. 171, and further sets an operation standby counter according to the identified variation type (presentation pattern) (step S3410), and terminates the rotating symbol member operation presentation setting process. The operation standby counter indicates the remaining time until the operation of each rotating symbol member 37, 38L, 38R begins, and is set to a value corresponding to the standby time T1 (see Fig. 170) from the timing of the start of the variation of the decorative symbol according to the variation type (presentation pattern) set for the special symbol game.

[Special game performance control processing]
Next, an example of the procedure of the special symbol game presentation control process executed in step S2704 of the sub-timer interrupt process of Fig. 42 will be described. Here, Fig. 173 and Fig. 174 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol game presentation control process.

<Step S3501>
As shown in Figure 173, in the special game presentation control process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the rotating role member operation presentation setting flag, which indicates that the rotating role member operation presentation is set, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the rotating role members 37, 38L, and 38R are in a standby state for operation.

If the rotating role operation display setting flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), i.e., if the rotating role members 37, 38L, and 38R are waiting to operate, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3502. On the other hand, if the rotating role operation display setting flag is set to OFF (step S3501: No), i.e., if the rotating role members 37, 38L, and 38R are not waiting to operate, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3509 in FIG. 174.

<Steps S3502 to S3504>
If the rotating role member operation performance setting flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, if each of the rotating role members 37, 38L, and 38R is in a standby state for operation, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the operation standby counter set in step S3411 of the rotating role member operation performance setting process of Fig. 172 (step S3502), and determines whether the value of the operation standby counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3503). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is time to start operating each of the rotating role members 37, 38L, and 38R.

If the value of the operation standby counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3503: Yes), i.e., if it is time for each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R to start operating, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3505. On the other hand, if the value of the operation standby counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3503: No), i.e., if it is not time for each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R to start operating, the MPU 51 executes other processing for the special symbol game presentation other than control of the operation of each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3504), and terminates the special symbol game presentation control processing.

<Steps S3505 to S3508>
If the value of the operation standby counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3503: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the operation of each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R, the MPU 51 starts the operation of each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3505). Specifically, the MPU 51 moves the first rotating role member 37 from the standby position to the operating position, expands the first rotating role member 37 (see FIGS. 158 and 159), and further rotates the first rotating role member 37 counterclockwise (see FIGS. 160 and 165). In addition, the MPU 51 moves the left second rotating role member 38L and the right second rotating role member 38R from the standby position to the operating position, and rotates the left second rotating role member 38L and the right second rotating role member 38R counterclockwise.

The first rotating role element 37, the left second rotating role element 38L, and the right second rotating role element 38R may start operating simultaneously, or they may start operating with a time lag. For example, after the first rotating role element 37 is expanded in the operating position, the left second rotating role element 38L and the right second rotating role element 38R may start moving upward. Furthermore, the left second rotating role element 38L and the right second rotating role element 38R may start rotating simultaneously, or there may be a time lag.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the reel rotation operation flag, which indicates that each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is rotating, to ON (step S3506), and sets the reel rotation operation counter, which indicates the remaining rotation time T2 (see Figure 170) until the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is stopped (step S3507). Note that the reel rotation operation flag is referenced in step S3509 of Figure 174, described below, to determine whether each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is rotating.

The MPU 51 also sets the rotating role element operation effect setting flag to OFF (step S3508), executes other processing for the special symbol game effect other than control of the operation of each rotating role element 37, 38L, 38R (step S3504), and terminates the special symbol game effect control processing.

<Step S3509>
If the rotating role member operation performance setting flag is set to OFF (step S3501: No), that is, if the rotating role members 37, 38L, 38R are not in a standby state for operation, the MPU 51 determines whether the role member rotation operation flag is set to ON (step S3509), as shown in Fig. 174. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the rotating role members 37, 38L, 38R are rotating.

If the reel rotation operation flag is set to ON (step S3509: Yes), i.e., if each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is rotating, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3510. On the other hand, if the reel rotation operation flag is set to OFF (step S3509: No), i.e., if each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is not rotating, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3516.

<Steps S3510 and S3511>
If the reel rotation operation flag is set to ON (step S3509: Yes), that is, if each of the rotating reel members 37, 38L, 38R is rotating, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the reel rotation operation counter set in step S3507 of Fig. 173 (step S3510), and determines whether the value of the reel rotation operation counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3511). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is time to stop the rotation of each of the rotating reel members 37, 38L, 38R.

If the value of the reel rotation operation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3511: Yes), i.e., if it is time to stop the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3512. On the other hand, if the value of the reel rotation operation counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3511: No), i.e., if it is not time to stop the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R, the MPU 51 executes other processing for the special symbol game presentation other than control of the operation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3504 in FIG. 173), and terminates the special symbol game presentation control processing.

<Steps S3512 to S3514>
If the value of the role rotation operation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3511: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop the rotation of each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R, the MPU 51 stops the rotation of each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3512). That is, the MPU 51 stops the rotation of each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R at a position corresponding to the notification mode A to D (see FIG. 168) set in step S3403, S3404, S3406, or S3408 in the rotating role member operation performance setting process of FIG. 172 described above.

The timing at which the first rotating role element 37, the left second rotating role element 38L, and the right second rotating role element 38R stop rotating may be simultaneous or may be staggered, but it is preferable that they stop rotating simultaneously. This is because when the rotation is stopped with a time lag, the stopping position of the rotating role element 37, 38L, 38R that stopped first makes it easier to infer the information visible through the translucent region 370A of the first rotating role element 37.

Furthermore, when the rotation of the first rotating role member 37, the left second rotating role member 38L, and the right second rotating role member 38R is stopped at different times, it is preferable to stop the rotation of the left second rotating role member 38L and the right second rotating role member 38R first. This is because when the rotation of the first rotating role member 37 is stopped first, it is easy to determine whether the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R is what is visible through the translucent region 370A of the first rotating role member 37.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the reel rotation stop flag, which indicates that the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R has been stopped in the operating position, to ON (step S3513), sets the rotating reel return counter, which indicates the remaining return waiting time T3 (see Figure 170) until each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is returned to its standby position (step S3514), and proceeds to step S3515.

The reel rotation stop flag is referenced in step S3516, described below, to determine whether the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R has been stopped in the operating position. Furthermore, each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R remains in the operating position with its rotation stopped until the return wait time T3 (see FIG. 170) has elapsed, i.e., until the value of the rotating reel return counter reaches 0. As a result, notification modes A to D (see FIG. 168) realized at the stop position of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R are maintained until the return wait time T3 (see FIG. 170) has elapsed, i.e., until the value of the rotating reel return counter reaches 0. Therefore, from the time when each rotating accessory member 37, 38L, 38R is stopped until the return waiting time T3 (see FIG. 170) has elapsed, any of the information display unit 383L (the letters "SMALL"), information display unit 384L (the letters "small") of the left second rotating accessory member 38L, and information display unit 383R (the letters "BIG"), information display unit 384R (the letters "big") of the right second rotating accessory member 38R can be seen through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37. As a result, when the rotation of each rotating accessory member 37, 38L, 38R that has started to rotate is stopped, the player can grasp the type of jackpot as a result of the jackpot lottery for the special game, and in the case of a 16R probability jackpot, can determine whether or not a reserve consecutive win will be executed. Therefore, when the rotation of each rotating accessory member 37, 38L, 38R begins, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the position at which each rotating accessory member 37, 38L, 38R stops and what characters are visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 on the first rotating accessory member 37.

<Step S3515>
In step S3515, the MPU 51 sets the accessory rotation operation flag to OFF. Then, the MPU 51 executes other processes for the special symbol game presentation other than the control related to the operation of each rotating accessory member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3504 in FIG. 173), and ends the special symbol game presentation control process.

<Step S3516>
If the reel rotation operation flag is set to OFF (step S3509: No), that is, if the rotating reel members 37, 38L, 38R are not rotating, the MPU 51 determines whether the reel rotation stop flag is set to ON (step S3516). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the rotation of the rotating reel members 37, 38L, 38R is stopped at the operating position.

If the reel rotation stop flag is set to ON (step S3516: Yes), i.e., if the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is stopped in the operating position, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3517. On the other hand, if the reel rotation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3516: No), i.e., if the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is not stopped in the operating position, the MPU 51 executes other processing for the special symbol game presentation other than control of the operation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3504 in FIG. 173), and terminates the special symbol game presentation control processing.

<Steps S3517 and S3518>
If the reel rotation stop flag is set to ON (step S3516: Yes), that is, if the rotation of each of the rotating reel members 37, 38L, 38R is stopped at the operating position, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the rotating reel return counter set in step S3514 (step S3517), and determines whether the value of the rotating reel return counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3518). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is time to return each of the rotating reel members 37, 38L, 38R to the standby position.

If the value of the rotating role return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3518: Yes), i.e., it is time to return each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R to their standby positions, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3519. On the other hand, if the value of the rotating role return counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3518: No), i.e., it is not time to return each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R to their standby positions, the MPU 51 executes other processing for the special symbol game presentation other than control of the operation of each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3504 in FIG. 173), and terminates the special symbol game presentation control processing.

<Steps S3519 and S3520>
If the value of the rotating role return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3518: Yes), that is, if it is time to return each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R to their standby positions, the MPU 51 shrinks the first rotating role member 37 and returns it to its standby position, and returns the left second rotating role member 38L and the right second rotating role member 38R to their standby positions (step S3519).

The first rotating accessory member 37, the left second rotating accessory member 38L, and the right second rotating accessory member 38R may start returning at the same time, or they may start returning at different times.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the reel rotation stop flag, which indicates that the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R has been stopped in the operating position, to OFF (step S3520), and further executes other processing for the special symbol game presentation other than control of the operation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3504 in FIG. 173), and terminates the special symbol game presentation control processing.

In this way, in this embodiment, there is a first visible state in which the light of a specific area of the pattern display unit 341, which is constituted by an LCD display or the like as an illuminant, is visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37 as the first rotating body; and a second visible state in which the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R as the second rotating body moves to the back side of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37 as the first rotating body, causing the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R as the second rotating body to block the light of the specific area of the pattern display unit 341 as an illuminant, making the left second rotating body or the right second rotating body as the second rotating body visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37 as the first rotating body. In this way, the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating part can move to the back side of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating part. Therefore, the operation of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating part and the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating part can result in two states, a first visible state and a second visible state, which are visible to the player. Therefore, the decorations that are produced by the operation of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating part and the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating part are diversified.

For example, in this embodiment, in the first viewing state in which the light of a specific area of the pattern display unit 341, which is constituted by an LCD display or the like as an illuminant, is visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37 as the first rotating body, a performance can be executed according to the viewing pattern of the light of the specific area of the pattern display unit 341 as viewed through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37. Specifically, depending on the visibility of the light in a specific area of the pattern display unit 341 as an illuminant visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating device member 37 as the first rotating body, it is possible to execute decorations that provide the player with information about the game, such as decorations that notify the player that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot (one-shot announcement effect), decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the likelihood that the jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot, decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the type of jackpot when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the type of decoration to be executed later, and decorations that notify the player that the jackpot lottery result includes a jackpot while the right to play a special symbol game that is executed after the jackpot game has ended is reserved (reserved consecutive win confirmation effect).

In addition, when the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R, which serves as the second rotating body, moves to the back side of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating role member 37, which serves as the first rotating body, the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R blocks the light from a specific area of the pattern display section 341, which is constituted by an LCD display or the like, which serves as an illuminant, and in this second viewing state, the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R is visible through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating role member 37. In this state, a performance can be performed according to the viewing pattern of the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R as viewed through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating role member 37. Specifically, depending on the visibility of the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R, which is visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body, it is possible to execute effects that provide the player with information about the game, such as an effect that notifies the player that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot (one-shot announcement effect), and it is also possible to execute effects that clearly indicate or suggest the likelihood that the jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot.It is also possible to execute effects that clearly indicate or suggest the type of jackpot if the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, and it is also possible to execute effects that clearly indicate or suggest the type of effect to be executed later.It is also possible to execute a reserved consecutive win confirmation effect that notifies the player that the jackpot lottery result includes a jackpot while the right to play a special game to be executed after the jackpot game has ended is reserved.

As described above, in this embodiment, there are two visible states: a first visible state in which the light from the pattern display unit 341, which is configured as an illuminant such as a liquid crystal display, is visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating device member 37 as the first rotating body; and a second visible state in which the left second rotating device member 38L or the right second rotating device member 38R as the second rotating body moves to the back side of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating device member 37 as the first rotating body, causing the left second rotating device member 38L or the right second rotating device member 38R to move to the back side of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating device member 37 as the first rotating body. and a second visible state in which R blocks the light from the pattern display unit 341, which is constituted by an LCD display or the like serving as an illuminant, so that the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R is visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37. This diversifies the decorations performed by the operation of the first rotating role member 37 as the first rotating body and the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R as the second rotating body, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The first rotating body and the second rotating body are movable toward and away from each other, but the first rotating body may be immovable while the second rotating body is movable, allowing them to move toward and away from each other. Conversely, the second rotating body may be immovable while the first rotating body is movable, allowing them to move toward and away from each other. In other words, as long as the first rotating body and the second rotating body are movable toward and away from each other, one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body may be immovable.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the first rotating role member 37 and the left second rotating role member 38L and the right second rotating role member 38R are movable toward and away from each other. However, the first rotating role member 37 may be immobile while the left second rotating role member 38L and the right second rotating role member 38R are movable, thereby allowing them to move toward and away from each other. Conversely, the left second rotating role member 38L and the right second rotating role member 38R may be immobile while the first rotating role member 37 is movable, thereby allowing them to move toward and away from each other. In other words, as long as the first rotating role member 37 and the left second rotating role member 38L and the right second rotating role member 38R are movable toward and away from each other, one of the first rotating role member 37 and the left second rotating role member 38L and the right second rotating role member 38R may be immobile.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first and second rotating bodies are activated during a special symbol game, the light emitted from the light emitter in a specific area toward the front is blocked, thereby enabling a visual state in which the second rotating body behind the first rotating body is visible. However, when a game ball other than that for a special symbol game, such as a jackpot game, is shot onto the game board 31, the light emitted from the light emitter in a specific area toward the front may be blocked, enabling a visual state in which the second rotating body behind the first rotating body is visible. For example, by making the second rotating body behind the first rotating body visible during a jackpot game, it is possible to execute a promotion effect that notifies the player that the actual jackpot lottery result is more favorable to the player than the jackpot lottery result announced in the special symbol game that triggered the jackpot game. It is also possible to execute a reserved consecutive win confirmation effect that notifies the player that the reserved right to play a special symbol game to be executed after the jackpot game ends includes a jackpot result in the jackpot lottery.

Specifically, in this embodiment, in special symbol games, the first rotating role element 37, the left second rotating role element 38L, and the right second rotating role element 38R are activated to block the light in a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 toward the front, thereby realizing a state in which the left second rotating role element 38L or the right second rotating role element 38R behind the first rotating role element 37 can be seen. However, in a state in which a game ball other than a special symbol game, such as a jackpot game, is shot onto the game board 31, the light in a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 toward the front may be blocked to realize a state in which the left second rotating role element 38L or the right second rotating role element 38R behind the first rotating role element 37 can be seen. For example, by making the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R behind the first rotating accessory member 37 visible during a jackpot game, it is possible to execute an advancement effect that notifies the player that the actual jackpot lottery result is more favorable to the player than the jackpot lottery result notified in the special symbol game that triggered the jackpot game, and it is also possible to execute a reserved consecutive win confirmation effect that notifies the player that the reserved right to play the special symbol game that will be played after the jackpot game has ended includes a jackpot result in the jackpot lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, in special symbol games and jackpot games, by making the light of a specific area emitted from the light emitter to the front side visible through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating body, it is possible to execute promotion effects and hold consecutive win confirmation effects depending on the display content in the specific area.Furthermore, in special symbol games, by making the light of a specific area emitted from the light emitter to the front side visible through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating body, it is possible to execute a one-shot announcement effect that notifies the player that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, an effect preview effect that notifies the player of an effect that will be executed later, and an effect stock effect depending on the display content in the specific area.

Specifically, in this embodiment, in special symbol games and jackpot games, by making the light of a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 toward the front visible through the translucent area 370A of the first rotating device member 37, it is possible to execute promotion effects and hold consecutive win confirmation effects depending on the display content in the specific area.Furthermore, in special symbol games, by making the light of a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 toward the front visible through the translucent area 370A of the first rotating device member 37, it is possible to execute a one-shot announcement effect that notifies the player that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, an effect preview effect that notifies the player of an effect that will be executed later, and an effect stock effect depending on the display content in the specific area.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is controlled by the MPU 51, but at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body may be configured to start rotating in response to interference from another body. For example, the first rotating body may be configured to start rotating in response to interference from a second rotating body moving toward the first rotating body, or in response to interference from a game ball moving toward the first rotating body.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the rotation of the first rotating role member 37, the left second rotating role member 38L, and the right second rotating role member 38R is controlled by the MPU 51, but at least one of the first rotating role member 37, the left second rotating role member 38L, and the right second rotating role member 38R may be configured to start rotating in response to interference from another person. For example, the first rotating role member 37 may be configured to start rotating in response to interference from the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R moving toward the first rotating role member 37, or to interference from a game ball moving toward the first rotating role member 37.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to ninth embodiments described above are possible, to the extent applicable.

Furthermore, in each embodiment, it is also possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments to the extent applicable.

[Eleventh embodiment]
As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine is equipped with a ``judgment processing'' as a judgment means, a ``display control'' as a variable display means, a ``hold memory processing'' as a hold means, a ``starting goal entry section'' as a first starting goal entry means or a second starting goal entry means, an ``unfavorable state control'' as an unfavorable state, an ``advantageous state control'' as an advantageous state, ``output information'' as predetermined identification information, an ``information output section'' or ``information output processing'' as a first output means, ``information stop processing'' as an output stop means, a ``hold number memory area'' or ``hold number memory processing'' as a memory means, ``output information'' as specific identification information, an ``information output section'' or ``information output processing'' as a second output means, and an ``output method'' as an output mode.

The determination means may be a process for making various determinations. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the determination means may be, for example, a process for determining whether to transition the game state, a process for determining whether to transition to a jackpot game state, a process for determining whether to transition to a probability variable game state, a process for determining whether to transition to a time-limited game state, a process for determining whether to transition to a normal game state, a jackpot determination process for determining whether to execute a jackpot game, a jackpot determination process for determining whether to execute a jackpot game when a game ball enters the first winning slot, a jackpot determination process for determining whether to execute a jackpot game when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate as a result of a game ball entering the first winning slot, a jackpot determination process for determining whether to execute a jackpot game when a game ball enters the second winning slot, and the like. These include jackpot determination processing to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game when a game ball enters the game slot, jackpot determination processing to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game when the second special symbol starts to change when a game ball enters the second winning slot, determination processing to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot determination process, normal symbol hit determination processing to determine whether or not to execute a normal symbol hit game, normal symbol hit determination processing to determine whether or not to execute a normal symbol hit game when a game ball passes through the through gate, normal symbol hit determination processing to determine whether or not to execute a normal symbol hit game when the normal symbol starts to change when a game ball passes through the through gate, and any combination thereof.

The variable display means may be any display control means for the variable display of patterns on various displays. Examples of variable display means that can achieve the spirit of the present invention include display control for the variable display of patterns on an LCD display, display control for the variable display of patterns on an organic EL display, display control for the variable display of patterns on a dot matrix display, display control for the variable display of patterns on a plasma display, display control for the variable display of patterns on a 7-segment display, display control for the on/off of LED lamps, display control for the variable display of a first special pattern on a first special pattern display unit, display control for the variable display of a second special pattern on a second special pattern display unit, display control for the variable display of a normal pattern on a normal pattern display unit, display control for the variable display of a decorative pattern on a pattern display unit, and any combination thereof.

The reservation means may be any means capable of storing various reservations. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the reservation means may be, for example, a storage process for the first special symbol reservation number, which is the reserved number of rights to play the first special symbol game; a storage process for the increased first special symbol reservation number when the first special symbol reservation number increases as a result of a game ball entering the first winning slot; a storage process for the decreased first special symbol reservation number when the first special symbol reservation number decreases as a result of the first special symbol starting to fluctuate; a storage process for the second special symbol reservation number, which is the reserved number of rights to play the second special symbol game; a storage process for the second special symbol reservation number when the second special symbol reservation number decreases as a result of a game ball entering the second winning slot; Examples include storing the number of reserved second special symbols after an increase when the number of remaining symbols increases, storing the number of reserved second special symbols after a decrease when the number of reserved second special symbols decreases due to the start of the second special symbol fluctuation, storing the number of reserved normal symbol fluctuations which is the number of reserved rights to play normal symbols, storing the number of reserved normal symbol fluctuations after an increase when the number of reserved normal symbol fluctuations increases as a result of the game ball passing through the through gate, storing the number of reserved normal symbol fluctuations after a decrease when the number of reserved normal symbol fluctuations decreases due to the start of the normal symbol fluctuation, and any combination thereof.

The first starting ball entry means or second starting ball entry means may be a ball entry section that triggers the start of a changing pattern display when a gaming ball enters. As long as the purpose of this invention can be realized, examples of the first starting ball entry means or second starting ball entry means include a means that triggers the start of a changing pattern display on various displays (liquid crystal display, dot matrix display, plasma display, 7-segment display, etc.) when a gaming ball enters, a first winning slot that triggers the start of a changing first special pattern display on the first special pattern display section, a second winning slot that triggers the start of a changing second special pattern display on the second special pattern display section, a through gate that triggers the start of a changing normal pattern display on the normal pattern display section, a means that triggers the start of a changing decorative pattern display on the pattern display section, and any combination thereof.

The disadvantageous state may be any control that puts the player at a disadvantage in various games. Examples of disadvantageous states that can realize the intent of this invention include, for example, control that creates a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot lottery result in a jackpot is low, control that restricts the execution of a jackpot game, control that restricts the execution of a regular jackpot game, control that restricts the entry of game balls into a prize slot that triggers the execution of a special game, control that restricts the entry of game balls into a second prize slot that triggers the execution of a second special game using an electric device, control that shortens the allowable ball entry time when game balls are allowed to enter a prize slot that triggers the execution of a special game, and control that shortens the operating time (allowable ball entry time) of an electric device that restricts the entry of game balls into a second prize slot that triggers the execution of a second special game. These include control to reduce the frequency at which game balls are allowed to enter the winning slot that triggers the execution of a special game, control to reduce the frequency at which an electric device that restricts game balls from entering the second winning slot that triggers the execution of a second special game, control to reduce the probability that the result of a regular lottery to determine whether or not to allow game balls to enter the winning slot that triggers the execution of a special game will be a regular win, control to reduce the probability that the result of a regular lottery to determine whether or not to activate an electric device that restricts game balls from entering the second winning slot that triggers the execution of a first special game will be a regular win, control to extend the execution time of a regular game that notifies the result of the regular lottery, and any combination thereof.

The advantageous state may be any control that provides an advantageous state to the player for various games. As long as the purpose of this invention can be realized, advantageous states include, for example, control that creates a state in which the result of a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot game will be played is highly likely to result in a jackpot, control that allows the execution of a jackpot game, control that allows the execution of a regular jackpot game, control that allows a game ball to enter a prize slot that triggers the execution of a special game, control that allows a game ball to enter a second prize slot that triggers the execution of a second special game by using an electric device, control that extends the ball entry time when a game ball is allowed to enter a prize slot that triggers the execution of a special game, and control that extends the operating time (ball entry time) of an electric device that limits the entry of a game ball into the second prize slot that triggers the execution of a second special game. controls to increase the frequency at which game balls are allowed to enter the winning slot that triggers the execution of a special game; controls to increase the frequency at which an electric device that restricts game balls from entering the second winning slot that triggers the execution of a second special game; controls to increase the probability that a regular winning lottery result in a regular winning lottery to determine whether or not to allow game balls to enter the winning slot that triggers the execution of a special game; controls to increase the probability that a regular winning lottery result in a regular winning lottery to determine whether or not to activate an electric device that restricts game balls from entering the second winning slot that triggers the execution of a second special game; controls to shorten the execution time of a regular winning game that notifies the results of the regular winning lottery; and any combination thereof.

The specified identification information may be output information corresponding to a special gaming state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) or an advantageous state (e.g., a high-frequency support mode, such as a special gaming state or a time-saving gaming state). As long as the intent of the present invention can be realized, examples of the predetermined identification information include output information corresponding to the type of special game executed in a special game state, output information corresponding to the type of game state to be entered after the special game ends, output information corresponding to the type of advantageous state, output information corresponding to the start of a special game state, output information corresponding to being in a special game state, output information corresponding to the end of a special game state, information corresponding to the start of an advantageous state, output information corresponding to being in an advantageous state, output information corresponding to the end of an advantageous state, output information corresponding to the start of a high probability game state, output information corresponding to being in a high probability game state, output information corresponding to the end of a high probability game state, output information corresponding to the start of a time-limited game state, output information corresponding to being in a time-limited game state, output information corresponding to the end of a time-limited game state, output information output in response to a change in the game state when a varying display of symbols begins when the game state changes, and any combination thereof.

The first output means may be an output unit that outputs predetermined identification information or a process that outputs predetermined identification information. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the first output means may include, for example, a process of outputting predetermined identification information to an external output terminal board, an output terminal unit provided on an external output terminal board, an input/output interface connected to a processing device such as an MPU or CPU, an information output display unit provided for information output, a process of outputting predetermined identification information by a processing device such as an MPU or CPU, a process of outputting predetermined identification information corresponding to the type of special game played in a special game state, a process of outputting predetermined identification information corresponding to the type of game state to which the game is transitioned after the end of a special game, a process of outputting predetermined identification information corresponding to the type of advantageous state, a process of outputting predetermined identification information corresponding to the start of a special game state, a process of outputting predetermined identification information corresponding to the state of being in a special game state, a special Examples include processing to output predetermined identification information corresponding to the end of a gaming state, processing to output predetermined identification information corresponding to the start of a favorable state, processing to output predetermined identification information corresponding to being in a favorable state, processing to output predetermined identification information corresponding to the end of a favorable state, processing to output predetermined identification information corresponding to the start of a high probability gaming state, processing to output predetermined identification information corresponding to being in a high probability gaming state, processing to output predetermined identification information corresponding to the end of a high probability gaming state, processing to output predetermined identification information corresponding to the start of a time-saving gaming state, processing to output predetermined identification information corresponding to being in a time-saving gaming state, processing to output predetermined identification information corresponding to the end of a time-saving gaming state, and any combination thereof.

The output stopping means may be any process that stops the output of predetermined identification information. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the output stopping means may be, for example, a process that stops the output of predetermined identification information on an information output display unit provided for information output, a process that stops the output of information by a processing device such as an MPU or CPU, a process that stops the output of information corresponding to the type of special game played in a special game state, a process that stops the output of information corresponding to the type of game state to which the game is transitioned after the special game ends, a process that stops the output of information corresponding to the type of advantageous state, a process that stops the output of information corresponding to the start of a special game state, a process that stops the output of information corresponding to the current special game state, or a process that stops the output of information corresponding to the end of a special game state. Examples of such processing include processing to stop the output of information corresponding to the start of an advantageous state, processing to stop the output of information corresponding to being in an advantageous state, processing to stop the output of information corresponding to the end of an advantageous state, processing to stop the output of information corresponding to the start of a high probability game state, processing to stop the output of information corresponding to being in a high probability game state, processing to stop the output of information corresponding to the end of a high probability game state, processing to stop the output of information corresponding to the start of a time-limited game state, processing to stop the output of information corresponding to being in a time-limited game state, processing to stop the output of information corresponding to the end of a time-limited game state, and any combination thereof.

The storage means may be any means capable of storing information regarding various reservations. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the storage means may be, for example, a storage area set in a memory such as RAM, a storage area set in a memory such as RAM of the main control device, a storage area set in a memory such as RAM of the audio lamp control device or display control device, a storage area for storing the special pattern reservation number, which is the reserved number of rights to play a special pattern game, set in a memory such as RAM of the main control device, a storage area set in a memory such as RAM of the main control device that stores the increased special pattern reservation number when the special pattern reservation number increases, a storage area set in a memory such as RAM of the main control device that stores the decreased special pattern reservation number when the special pattern reservation number decreases, a storage area for storing the first special pattern reservation number, which is the reserved number of rights to play a first special pattern game, a storage area for storing ... a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the main control device that stores the increased number of reserved first special symbols when the number of reserved first special symbols increases, a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the main control device that stores the decreased number of reserved first special symbols when the number of reserved first special symbols decreases, a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the main control device that stores the increased number of reserved second special symbols, which is the reserved number of rights to play a second special symbol game, a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the main control device that stores the increased number of reserved second special symbols when the number of reserved second special symbols increases, a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the main control device that stores the decreased number of reserved second special symbols when the number of reserved second special symbols decreases, and a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the main control device that stores the variable reserved number of regular symbols, which is the reserved number of rights to play a regular symbol game a memory area for storing the number of reserved regular symbol variations that is set in a memory such as the RAM of the main control device after an increase when the number of reserved regular symbol variations increases; a memory area for storing the number of reserved regular symbol variations that is set in a memory such as the RAM of the main control device after an increase when the number of reserved regular symbol variations decreases; a memory area for storing the number of reserved regular symbol variations that is set in a memory such as the RAM of the voice lamp control device or the display control device after an decrease when the number of reserved regular symbol variations decreases; a memory area for storing the number of reserved first special symbols that is the number of reserved rights to play a first special symbol game; a memory area for storing the number of reserved first special symbols that is set in a memory such as the RAM of the voice lamp control device or the display control device after an increase when the number of reserved first special symbols increases; a memory area for storing the number of reserved first special symbols that is set in a memory such as the RAM of the voice lamp control device or the display control device after an decrease when the number of reserved first special symbols decreases; a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the voice lamp control device or the display control device that stores the number of reserved second special symbols when the number of reserved second special symbols increases, a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the voice lamp control device or the display control device that stores the number of reserved second special symbols after the increase when the number of reserved second special symbols increases, a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the voice lamp control device or the display control device that stores the number of reserved second special symbols after the decrease when the number of reserved second special symbols decreases, a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the voice lamp control device or the display control device that stores the number of reserved regular symbol variations that are the number of reserved rights to play regular symbols, a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the voice lamp control device or the display control device that stores the number of reserved regular symbol variations after the increase when the number of reserved regular symbol variations increases, a memory area set in a memory such as RAM of a sound lamp control device or a display control device that stores the number of reserved special symbol remaining holds, which is the number of reserved rights to play a special symbol game at the end of a high-frequency support mode (advantageous states such as a probability variable game state and a time-saving game state); a memory area for storing the number of reserved special symbol remaining holds, which is the number of reserved rights to play a special symbol game at the end of a high-frequency support mode (advantageous states such as a probability variable game state and a time-saving game state), after the number of reserved special symbol remaining holds, which is the number of reserved rights to play a special symbol game at the end of a high-frequency support mode (advantageous states such as a probability variable game state and a time-saving game state), a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the main control device that stores the number of reserved special symbols after a decrease in the number of reserved special symbols, which is the reserved number of rights to play a special symbol game; a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the voice lamp control device or the display control device that stores the number of reserved special symbols, which is the reserved number of rights to play a special symbol game at the end of a high-frequency support mode (advantageous states such as a probability variable game state or a time-shortened game state); a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the voice lamp control device or the display control device that stores the number of reserved special symbols after a decrease in the number of reserved special symbols, which is the reserved number of rights to play a special symbol game at the end of a high-frequency support mode (advantageous states such as a probability variable game state or a time-shortened game state); a memory area for storing the first special chart remaining reservation number, which is the number of reserved first special charts; a memory area for storing the first special chart remaining reservation number after the reduction when the first special chart remaining reservation number decreases; a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the main control device for storing the first special chart remaining reservation number, which is the first special chart reservation number for the right to execute the first special chart game; a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the main control device for storing the first special chart remaining reservation number after the reduction when the first special chart remaining reservation number decreases; a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the sound lamp control device or the display control device for storing the first special chart remaining reservation number; a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the sound lamp control device or the display control device for storing the first special chart remaining reservation number after the reduction when the first special chart remaining reservation number decreases; Examples include a memory area that stores the remaining number of second special symbols reserved, which is the number of second special symbols reserved for the right to play the second special symbol game at the time, a memory area that stores the remaining number of second special symbols reserved after the reduction when the remaining number of second special symbols reserved decreases, a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the main control device that stores the remaining number of second special symbols reserved, which is the number of second special symbols reserved for the right to play the second special symbol game, a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the main control device that stores the remaining number of second special symbols reserved after the reduction when the remaining number of second special symbols reserved decreases, a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the audio lamp control device or display control device that stores the remaining number of second special symbols reserved, a memory area set in a memory such as the RAM of the audio lamp control device or display control device that stores the remaining number of second special symbols reserved after the reduction when the remaining number of second special symbols reserved decreases, and any combination thereof.

The specific identification information may be information that is output in response to a change in the game status when the display of changing patterns for various pending items stored in the storage means begins. As the specific identification information, as long as it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention, for example, output information on the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved rights to play the first special symbol game, output information on the number of reserved first special symbols after an increase in the case where the number of reserved first special symbols increases as a result of a game ball entering the first winning port, output information on the number of reserved first special symbols after a decrease in the number of reserved first special symbols when the number of reserved first special symbols decreases as a result of the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, output information on the number of reserved second special symbols, which is the number of reserved rights to play the second special symbol game, output information on the period in which the second special symbol game is played with the right to play the second special symbol game, output information on the number of reserved second special symbols, which is the number of reserved rights to play the second special symbol game when advantageous information (for example, a probability variable game state or a time-saving game state, which is a high-frequency support mode) is shifted to an unfavorable state (a normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode), ... Examples include output information that is output in response to a change in game state when at least a predetermined number of second special symbol games are played using the right to play second special symbol games when the game state transitions from an unfavorable state (a special game state or a time-limited game state in which the game state is a low-frequency support mode) to an unfavorable state (a normal game state which is a low-frequency support mode); output information regarding the increased number of second special symbol reserved when the number of second special symbol reserved increases when a game ball enters the second winning slot; output information regarding the decreased number of second special symbol reserved when the number of second special symbol reserved decreases when the second special symbol starts to change; output information regarding the normal symbol variable reserved number, which is the reserved number for the right to play normal symbol games; output information regarding the increased number of normal symbol variable reserved when the number of normal symbol variable reserved increases when a game ball passes through the through gate; output information regarding the decreased number of normal symbol variable reserved when the number of normal symbol variable reserved decreases when the normal symbol variable reserved number starts to change; and any combination thereof.

The second output means may be an output unit that outputs specific identification information or a process that outputs specific identification information. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the second output means may be, for example, a process that outputs specific identification information to an external output terminal board, an output terminal unit provided on the external output terminal board, an input/output interface connected to a processing device such as an MPU or CPU, an information output display unit provided for information output, a process that outputs specific identification information by a processing device such as an MPU or CPU, a process that outputs specific identification information related to the first special symbol reserved number, which is the reserved number of rights to play the first special symbol game ... and a process that outputs specific identification information related to the first special symbol reserved number after the increase when the first special symbol reserved number increases in response to a game ball entering the first winning slot. A process for outputting specific identification information relating to the number of reserved symbols, a process for outputting specific identification information relating to the number of reserved first symbols after the decrease when the number of reserved first symbols decreases due to the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, a process for outputting specific identification information relating to the reserved number of second special symbols which is the reserved number of rights to play the second special symbol game, a process for outputting specific identification information relating to the period in which the second special symbol game is played with the right to play the second special symbol game, when there is a transition from advantageous information (for example, a guaranteed variable game state or a time-saving game state which is a high-frequency support mode) to an unfavorable state (a normal game state which is a low-frequency support mode). a process for outputting specific identification information relating to the second special symbol reserved number, which is the reserved number of rights to execute the second special symbol game; a process for outputting specific identification information relating to the period in which the second special symbol game is executed with the right to execute the second special symbol game when a transition is made from advantageous information (for example, a probability variable game state or a time-shortened game state which is a high-frequency support mode) to an unfavorable state (a normal game state which is a low-frequency support mode); a process for displaying information on the information output display unit; and an output of specific identification information relating to the increased number of second special symbol reserved when the number of second special symbols increases as a result of a game ball entering the second winning port. processing to output specific identification information regarding the number of reserved second special symbols after the reduction when the number of reserved second special symbols decreases due to the start of the second special symbol fluctuation; processing to output specific identification information regarding the reserved number of regular symbol fluctuations, which is the reserved number of rights to play regular symbols; processing to output specific identification information regarding the reserved number of regular symbol fluctuations after the increase when the reserved number of regular symbol fluctuations increases due to the passing of a gaming ball through a through gate; processing to output specific identification information regarding the reserved number of regular symbol fluctuations after the decrease when the reserved number of regular symbol fluctuations decreases due to the start of the regular symbol fluctuation; and any combination thereof.

The output mode may be any mode that allows different information outputs to be distinguished. As long as the intent of the present invention can be realized, examples of output modes include sound information and light information, sound information and image information, sound information and signal information, light information and image information, light information and signal information, image information and signal information, output period, signal type such as level signal or pulse signal, output interval (output pitch), output level, continuous output period of high-level signal, continuous output period of low-level signal, output start interval of high-level signal, output start interval of low-level signal, level difference between high-level signal and low-level signal, continuous output period of ON signal, continuous output period of OFF signal, output start interval of ON signal, output start interval of OFF signal, level difference between ON signal and OFF signal, and any combination thereof.

In recent gaming machines, various game states are set for each gaming machine's game specifications. To help players understand these diverse game states, various devices installed on the gaming machine and at the amusement parlor are used to provide notifications. Therefore, there is a need for more optimal notifications for each game state. The present invention was invented to address this issue, and aims to provide a gaming machine that more optimally provides notifications for each game state. Specifically, for example, a gaming machine outputs various signals, such as a jackpot signal, to the outside of the gaming machine via an external output terminal board. The various signals output to the outside of the gaming machine are used, for example, in a hall computer installed in the gaming parlor to manage game data, and are also used to display various data, such as the number of jackpots and the number of consecutive jackpots, on a data display attached to the gaming machine.

Some gaming machines transition to a high-frequency support mode, such as a probability variable game mode or a time-saving game mode, after a jackpot game ends. The signal output from the gaming machine to the outside is a jackpot signal, which is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in normal game mode is a jackpot. This signal is output continuously from the start of the jackpot game for the first jackpot, until the transition to normal game mode occurs upon the end of the high-frequency support mode. In other words, the output of the jackpot signal from the gaming machine stops when the machine transitions to normal game mode, and the count of consecutive jackpots displayed on the data display ends when the output of the jackpot signal stops.

Meanwhile, the amusement hall's hall computer uses the jackpot signal to manage the number of consecutive jackpots, which is the number of jackpots played from the first jackpot until the game transitions to normal play. Furthermore, when the amusement hall's hall computer receives a jackpot signal, it outputs a signal corresponding to the jackpot signal to a data display attached to the gaming machine. This allows the data display to display the number of consecutive jackpots by receiving a signal corresponding to the jackpot signal.

In this way, by displaying the number of consecutive jackpots on the data display, players can enjoy playing the game, motivated by the desire to increase the number of consecutive jackpots. For example, players can enjoy playing the game, motivated by the question of whether the number of consecutive jackpots will exceed the expected number of jackpots, or whether they will be able to beat their own record for the number of consecutive jackpots.

Furthermore, when a gaming machine transitions from high frequency support mode to normal gaming mode, a second special symbol reserve, which reserves the right to play a second special symbol game, may remain, and the result of the jackpot lottery for that second special symbol reserve may be a jackpot. If a jackpot game is initiated based on the result of the jackpot lottery for that second special symbol reserve being a jackpot, the output of the jackpot signal to the outside of the gaming machine prior to the start of that jackpot game is stopped based on the transition to normal gaming mode, and therefore the hall computer and data display in the gaming hall will restart counting the number of consecutive jackpots from 1.

However, the second special reserved symbol is a profit obtained by switching to high-frequency support mode when a jackpot game is executed, and a jackpot that is executed based on the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special reserved symbol being a jackpot is also called a pullback or a reserved consecutive jackpot, and from the player's perspective, it is perceived as a continuation of the jackpot streak. Therefore, when a jackpot game is executed based on the second special reserved symbol, if the count of the number of consecutive jackpots starts again from 1, a discrepancy will arise between the player's perception and the number of consecutive jackpots displayed on the data display. As a result, motivation to increase the number of consecutive jackpots displayed on the data display will decrease, raising concerns about a decline in interest and excitement in the game.

In contrast, with this invention, the presence of a predetermined special game state and advantageous state can be determined based on the predetermined identification information output externally by the first output means, and the presence of a period in which a predetermined variable display due to a hold at the end of an advantageous state can be executed based on specific identification information output externally by the second output means in an output format different from the predetermined identification information. Therefore, for example, a data display attached to a gaming machine can display a special game executed based on the predetermined variable display due to a hold at the end of an advantageous state as part of the number of consecutive special games. As a result, when a transition to a predetermined special game state is triggered by a hold at the end of an advantageous state, a discrepancy is prevented between the number of consecutive special games displayed on the data display and the number of consecutive special games recognized by the player. This prevents a decrease in the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive special games displayed on the data display, thereby preventing a decline in interest and amusement in the game.

Furthermore, by being able to recognize that the predetermined variable display is due to the hold at the end of an advantageous state based on the specific identification information output externally by the second output means in an output format different from the predetermined identification information, it is possible to execute an effect indicating that the predetermined variable display due to the hold at the end of an advantageous state is in that execution period, for example, on a data display attached to the gaming machine. This effect makes it clear to the player that even after the advantageous state has ended, the period in which the player can increase the number of consecutive special games, thereby increasing the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive games and making the game more enjoyable.

Specifically, in this embodiment, in the jackpot gaming state and the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, time-limited gaming state) serving as advantageous state control, the MPU 41 performs jackpot signal output processing as information output processing, and the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 serving as output information that can identify the state is continuously output externally via the external output terminal board 101 serving as information output unit. For example, the hall computer 102 of an amusement hall can determine, based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 serving as output information, whether the jackpot gaming state or the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, time-limited gaming state) serving as advantageous state control is in effect. This allows the hall computer 102 to determine the number of consecutive jackpot games from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, time-limited gaming state) serving as advantageous state control. Meanwhile, the data display 103 attached to the gaming machine 10 is able to display the number of consecutive jackpot games from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the high-frequency support mode (probable variable game state, time-saving game state) used for advantageous state control, using information (signals) generated and output based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2, which is output information from the hall computer 102.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the high-frequency support mode (high probability game state, time-limited game state) serving as advantageous state control has ended, the jackpot signal output process by the MPU 41 serving as information output process continues to output an extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information for a predetermined period via the external output terminal board 101 serving as information output unit, which can identify that this is a period during which it is possible to execute a variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved rights stored in at least the second special symbol reservation number storage area NAB of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB set in RAM 412 serving as the reservation number storage area or the special symbol reservation storage area corresponding area set in RAM 512. For example, the hall computer 102 of an amusement hall can understand, based on the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information, that a predetermined variable display based on the reservation at the end of the high-frequency support mode (high probability game state, time-limited game state) serving as advantageous state control has ended. As a result, when the result of the jackpot lottery performed by the MPU 41 as the determination process is to execute a jackpot game, the hall computer 102 can determine, based on the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information, that the predetermined variable display is the predetermined variable display due to the suspension at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-limited game state) as advantageous state control. Therefore, the hall computer 102 can count jackpot games executed based on the predetermined variable display due to the suspension at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-limited game state) as advantageous state control, as part of the number of consecutive jackpot games since the start of the first jackpot game, which is determined based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information. As a result, the data display 103 attached to the gaming machine 10 can display jackpot games executed based on the predetermined variable display due to the suspension at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-limited game state) as advantageous state control, as part of the number of consecutive jackpot games.

In addition, in this embodiment, by continuously outputting the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information for a predetermined period of time, the data display 103 attached to the gaming machine 10, for example, can execute an effect indicating that a period during which a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-limited game state) serving as advantageous state control is possible can be executed. Specifically, after the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-limited game state) serving as advantageous state control ends, the data display 103 can display text images, such as "Consecutive Win Challenge," "Consecutive Win Chance," "Jackpot Challenge," and "Probability Variable Jackpot Chance," indicating or suggesting to the player that an increase in the number of consecutive jackpot wins is possible. This makes it possible to clearly indicate to the player that a period during which an increase in the number of consecutive jackpot wins is possible even after the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-limited game state) serving as advantageous state control is possible, thereby increasing the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive wins and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to determine whether the game is in a jackpot gaming state or a high-frequency support mode (probable variable gaming state, time-limited gaming state) as advantageous state control based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information output via the external output terminal board 101 as an information output unit by the jackpot signal output processing by the MPU 41 as information output processing, and it is possible to determine whether the game is in a predetermined variable display due to the reservation at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probable variable gaming state, time-limited gaming state) as advantageous state control based on the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information output by the MPU 41 and external output terminal board 101 as an information output unit or information output processing.As a result, the data display 103 attached to the gaming machine 10 can display the jackpot game executed based on the predetermined variable display due to the reservation at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probable variable gaming state, time-limited gaming state) as advantageous state control, as part of the number of consecutive jackpot games. Therefore, when a jackpot game is executed in response to a hold at the end of a high-frequency support mode (probability variable game mode, time-limited game mode) that serves as advantageous state control, a discrepancy is prevented between the number of consecutive jackpot games displayed on the data display 103 and the number of consecutive jackpot games recognized by the player. As a result, a decrease in the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive jackpot games displayed on the data display 103 is prevented, preventing a decrease in interest and amusement in the game.

This embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 175 to 189.

[Gaming System]
First, a gaming system including the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 175. Here, Fig. 175 is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a gaming system including the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 175, the gaming system according to this embodiment includes a gaming machine 10, a hall computer 102, and a data display 103.

The gaming machine 10 is equipped with an external output terminal board 101 as an information output unit that outputs game information from the gaming machine 10 to an external device such as a hall computer 102. This external output terminal board 101 has, for example, multiple output terminal units (not shown), and each output terminal unit (not shown) is connected via wiring (not shown) to an input/output I/F 42 that communicates data with the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 so that data can be transmitted (received). As a result, game information from the gaming machine 10 is output to the outside of the gaming machine 10 as various signals via the corresponding output terminal unit (not shown) of the external output terminal board 101. Furthermore, each output terminal unit (not shown) is capable of outputting one predetermined type of signal to the outside. In other words, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the type of output terminal unit (not shown) and the type of signal that can be output to the outside. For example, terminal 1 of the multiple output terminal units (not shown) can output jackpot signal 1, which will be described later, and terminal 2 of the multiple output terminal units (not shown) can output jackpot signal 2, which will be described later.

The multiple output terminals (not shown) are connected to the hall computer 102 at the amusement hall via wiring or other means to enable data communication (transmission). This allows the hall computer 102 to obtain the gaming information of each gaming machine 10, which is output as a signal from each output terminal (not shown) of that gaming machine 10. As a result, the amusement hall can grasp the gaming status and state of each gaming machine 10. The amusement hall can also select the necessary output terminal from the multiple output terminals (not shown) and connect it to the hall computer 102 via wiring or other means. This allows the amusement hall to selectively obtain gaming information managed by the amusement hall by selecting the output terminal (not shown) to connect to the hall computer 102, thereby efficiently managing the necessary gaming information and displaying the necessary gaming information on the data display 103.

Here, the game information signaled from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102 includes, for example, that a game is being played, that a jackpot game has started (that a jackpot game is being played), that the game is in high-frequency support mode (a special game mode, a time-saving game mode), that the game is in low-frequency support mode (a normal game mode), that a special game mode has started (that a special game mode is being played), the number of game balls fired (number of balls out), the number of balls released, and the difference in the number of balls. Therefore, based on the game information output as a signal from the gaming machines 10 to the hall computer 102, the gaming hall can use the hall computer to manage, for example, the number of jackpots on the day and for the past few days, the number of consecutive jackpots on the day and for the past few days, the highest number of previous jackpots, the highest number of consecutive jackpots in the past, the current number of consecutive jackpots, the total number of variable game plays on the day and for the past few days, the number of special game plays between jackpots on the day and for the past few days, the number of special game plays from the previous jackpot on the day to the current variable game, the balls paid out and the difference in balls for the day and for the past few days, and the game status and state of each gaming machine 10, for example, whether it is currently playing, whether it is currently playing a jackpot, whether it is in high-frequency support mode (probable game mode, time-saving game mode), or whether it is in low-frequency support mode (normal game mode).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game information signaled from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102 includes, as described below, information indicating that when a transition is made from high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-limited game state) to low-frequency support mode (normal game state), the special symbol game in the low-frequency support mode is a second special symbol game with the second special symbol reserved at the end of the high-frequency support mode. This enables the hall computer 102 to manage the jackpot game triggered by the second special symbol game with the second special symbol reserved at the end of the high-frequency support mode, by including it in the number of consecutive jackpots.

The data display 103 displays, for example, the game status and game state of the gaming machine 10, and is installed, for example, above each gaming machine 10 in the island equipment of an amusement hall. This data display 103 is connected to the hall computer 102 via wiring or the like to enable data communication (reception), and by receiving game information managed by the hall computer 102, it is able to display the game status and game state based on this game information. Specifically, the data display 103 can display, for example, the number of jackpots on the day and for the past few days, the number of consecutive jackpots on the day and for the past few days, the highest number of previous jackpots, the highest number of consecutive jackpots in the past, the current number of consecutive jackpots, the total number of variable play sessions on the day and for the past few days, the number of special play sessions between jackpots on the day and for the past few days, the number of special play sessions from the previous jackpot on the day to the current variable play session, the number of balls paid out and the difference in balls on the day and for the past few days, whether a game is in progress, whether a jackpot game is in progress, whether a high-frequency support mode (probable variable play mode, time-saving play mode), whether a low-frequency support mode (normal play mode), etc.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game information signaled from the hall computer 102 to the data display 103 includes, as described below, information indicating that when a transition is made from high-frequency support mode (probable game mode, time-limited game mode) to low-frequency support mode (normal game mode), the special symbol game in the low-frequency support mode is a second special symbol game with the second special symbol reserved at the end of the high-frequency support mode. This makes it possible for the data display 103 to display, in the number of consecutive jackpots, the jackpot game executed as a result of the second special symbol game with the second special symbol reserved at the end of the high-frequency support mode.

In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, game information that can identify that a jackpot game is in progress is output to an external device such as the hall computer 102 as jackpot signal 1, and game information that can identify a high-frequency support mode (probability change game state/time-saving game state) is output to an external device such as the hall computer 102 as jackpot signal 2.

Here, Figure 176 is a time chart showing an example of the output of a jackpot signal output from the gaming machine 10 to an external device such as the hall computer 102. Specifically, Figure 176(A) is a time chart showing an example of the output of jackpot signal 1, and Figures 176(B) and 176(C) are time charts showing an example of the output of jackpot signal 2.

As shown in FIG. 176 (A), jackpot signal 1 outputs information indicating that a jackpot game (jackpot game state) is in progress to an external device such as the hall computer 102. For example, it is output from terminal 1 of the multiple output terminals on the external output terminal board 101. This jackpot signal 1 begins to be output as a high-level signal at the start of a jackpot game (when transitioning to the jackpot game state). Furthermore, output of jackpot signal 1 continues throughout the jackpot game (jackpot game state). Furthermore, output of jackpot signal 1 is stopped by becoming a low-level signal at the end of the jackpot (when transitioning to the high-frequency support mode (probable variable game state or time-limited game state)). Therefore, the hall computer 102 can determine that a jackpot game is in progress during the period during which it receives jackpot signal 1. Furthermore, during the period during which it receives jackpot signal 1, the hall computer 102 outputs a signal corresponding to jackpot signal 1 to the data display 103. As a result, the data display 103 can display that a jackpot game is in progress based on a signal corresponding to jackpot signal 1 output from the hall computer 102, and can count up the number of jackpot games and the number of consecutive jackpot games. Possible ways of indicating that a jackpot game is in progress on the data display 103 include displaying text such as "JACKPOT," "JACKPOT," or "BONUS," as well as flashing numbers indicating the number of jackpot games and the number of consecutive jackpot games, or displaying rainbow-colored numbers indicating the number of jackpot games and the number of consecutive jackpot games.

As shown in Figure 176 (B), the jackpot signal 2 includes at least a basic signal, and an extension signal that continues to be output after the output of the basic signal has stopped if there is a second special symbol reserve (remaining reserve of second special symbol reserve), which reserves the right to play the second special symbol game, at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probable variable game state, time-saving game state). This jackpot signal 2, together with the basic signal and extension signal, is output, for example, from terminal 2 of the multiple output terminals on the external output terminal board 101.

The basic signal is output information for outputting information indicating that a jackpot game is in progress (jackpot game state) or in high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state) to an external device such as the hall computer 102, and a level signal is output as the information output method. This basic signal is continuously output as a high-level signal during a jackpot game (jackpot game state) and high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state). Specifically, the basic signal begins output as a high-level signal at the start of a jackpot game, is temporarily halted by becoming a low-level signal at the end of the jackpot game, resumes output as a high-level signal at the start of high-frequency support mode, and becomes a low-level signal at the end of high-frequency support mode. That is, the basic signal is output continuously during jackpot play (jackpot play state) and high frequency support mode (probability variable play state or time-limited play state), and output is temporarily stopped for a short period of time when the play state transitions between the jackpot play state and the probability variable play state or time-limited play state, but overall output is continuous.

Here, in this embodiment, the continued output of the jackpot signal 2 also includes cases where the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped for a specific period of time or less (e.g., one second or less) and the jackpot signal 2 is re-output within that specific period. For example, in this embodiment, if the output of the jackpot signal 2 is temporarily stopped at the end of a jackpot game, the jackpot signal 2 is re-output upon transition to a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency game mode or time-limited game mode). In this case, the jackpot signal 2 is re-output for a short period of time (less than the specific period), which corresponds to the case where the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output. Also, in this embodiment, if the output of the jackpot signal 2 is temporarily stopped at the end of a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency game mode or time-limited game mode), the jackpot signal 2 is re-output upon the start of a jackpot game. In this case, the jackpot signal 2 is re-output for a short period of time (less than the specific period), which corresponds to the case where the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a transition to normal game mode is triggered by the execution of the maximum number of special symbol games (prescribed number) that can be played in high-frequency support mode, and there is a second special symbol reserve (second special symbol remaining reserve), which reserves the right to play a second special symbol game, at the end of high-frequency support mode, jackpot signal 2 continues to be output as an extension signal. This extension signal has a different output method from the basic signal, which is output as a level signal, and is output as a pulse signal or on-off signal in which output periods and output stop periods are set alternately. However, the output stop period of the extension signal is set to be equal to or shorter than the aforementioned specific period. Therefore, although the extension signal is output during the output stop period, it corresponds to a case in which it is continuously output, and as jackpot signal 2, it corresponds to a case in which it is continuously output even while the extension signal is being output. In other words, the stop of jackpot signal 2 as output information means that the jackpot signal is stopped for a predetermined period exceeding the specific period.

If the number of second special symbol games corresponding to the number of reserved second special symbols ends without a jackpot being played, the output of the extension signal is stopped (completely) without the jackpot signal 2 being output again within the specified period mentioned above. This stops the output of the jackpot signal 2.

In addition, if there is no second special symbol reserve (second special symbol remaining reserve), which reserves the right to play the second special symbol game, at the end of the extended signal high frequency support mode, the jackpot signal will not be output, and only the basic signal will be output as the jackpot signal 2.

In contrast, as shown in Figure 176 (C), if the reserved second special symbols include one that results in a jackpot lottery, and the second special symbol game that notifies of the jackpot ends due to the lapse of the fixed display time after the variable display of the second special symbol stops, the output of jackpot signal 2, which is output as an extension signal, will stop, and the basic signal will be re-output at the start of the jackpot game that begins after the end of the second special symbol game. The output stop period from the end of the second special symbol game (stopping of the extension signal) to the start of the jackpot game (output of the basic signal) is short (less than the specified period). Therefore, jackpot signal 2 will continue to be output in the pattern of basic signal → extension signal → basic signal.

In this embodiment, the basic signal of jackpot signal 2 is continuously output to an external device such as the hall computer 102 during jackpot gaming and high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming, time-limited gaming). For example, the hall computer 102 in a gaming hall can determine whether the jackpot gaming state or high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming, time-limited gaming) is active based on the basic signal of jackpot signal 2. This allows the hall computer 102 to determine the number of consecutive jackpot games from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming, time-limited gaming). Meanwhile, the data display 103 attached to the gaming machine 10 can display the number of consecutive jackpot games from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming, time-limited gaming) based on information (signals) generated and output based on the basic signal of jackpot signal 2 output from the hall computer 102.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the right to execute the second special symbol game is reserved at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-limited game state), the extension signal of jackpot signal 2 is output continuously for a predetermined period of time, so that, for example, the hall computer 102 of an amusement hall can determine, based on the extension signal of jackpot signal 2, that the second special symbol game is being executed based on the reservation at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-limited game state). As a result, when a jackpot game is executed after the end of the second special symbol game, the hall computer 102 can determine, based on the extension signal of jackpot signal 2, that the second special symbol game is being executed based on the reservation of the second special symbol at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-limited game state). Therefore, the hall computer 102 can count jackpot games executed based on the second special symbol game with the second special symbol reserved at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-limited game state) as part of the number of consecutive jackpot games since the start of the first jackpot game, as determined based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2. As a result, the data display 103 attached to the gaming machine 10 can display jackpot games executed based on the second special symbol game with the second special symbol reserved at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-limited game state) as part of the number of consecutive jackpot games. This prevents a discrepancy between the number of consecutive jackpot games displayed on the data display 103 and the number of consecutive jackpot games perceived by the player. As a result, the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive jackpot games displayed on the data display 103 is prevented from decreasing, preventing a decline in interest and amusement in the game.

In this embodiment, the basic signal of jackpot signal 2 is output as a level signal, and the extended signal of jackpot signal 2 is output as a pulse signal or on-off signal, but the basic signal and extended signal of jackpot signal 2 may have different output modes that are distinguishable. For example, the basic signal of jackpot signal 2 may be output as a pulse signal or on-off signal, and the extended signal of jackpot signal 2 may be output as a level signal. Furthermore, the basic signal and extended signal of jackpot signal 2 may be output as level signals with different levels, or the basic signal and extended signal of jackpot signal 2 may be output as pulse signals or on-off signals with different output periods or output stop periods.

Furthermore, the signal indicating that the second special symbol game is being executed for the reservation of the right to execute the second special symbol game (remaining reservation of the second special symbol) at the end of the advantageous state (probability change game state or time-limited game state) does not necessarily have to be output as jackpot signal 2 to an external device such as the hall computer 102. The signal indicating that the second special symbol game is being executed for the remaining reservation of the second special symbol only needs to be color-distinguishable from other signals. For example, jackpot signal 1 may be output to the outside from the output terminal unit (terminal 1) from which jackpot signal 1 is output among the multiple output terminal units (not shown) of the external output terminal board 101 serving as the information output unit, or it may be output as a signal separate from jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 from an output terminal unit (other than terminal 1 and terminal 1) from the multiple output terminal units (not shown) of the external output terminal board 101 serving as the information output unit that is different from the output terminal unit (terminal 1) from which jackpot signal 1 is output and the output terminal unit (terminal 2) from which jackpot signal 2 is output among the multiple output terminal units (not shown) of the external output terminal board 101 serving as the information output unit.

[Jackpot type allocation table]
Here, FIG. 177(A) is a diagram showing an example of an allocation table used by the main control device 4 to allocate jackpot types. As shown in FIG. 177(A), when the type of special symbol game is a first special symbol game triggered by winning the first winning slot 314, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R probability variable jackpot is 10 numbers from 0 to 9, the number of random numbers that result in a 16R probability variable jackpot is 5 numbers from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 numbers from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of special symbol game is a second special symbol game triggered by winning the second winning slot 315, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R probability variable jackpot is 10 numbers from 0 to 9, the number of random numbers that result in a 16R probability variable jackpot is 10 numbers from 10 to 19, and there is no random number that results in a 5R normal jackpot. In this embodiment, after the completion of a probability variable jackpot game, which is executed when the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot, the game is transitioned to a probability variable game state, which is a high-frequency support mode and a high-probability mode. After the completion of a normal jackpot game, which is executed when the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the game is transitioned to a time-saving game state, which is a high-frequency support mode and a low-probability mode. That is, after the completion of a jackpot game triggered by a first special symbol game, the game is transitioned to the probability variable game state with a 75% probability, and to the time-saving game state with a 25% probability. On the other hand, after the completion of a jackpot game triggered by a second special symbol game, the game is transitioned to the probability variable game state with a 100% probability, and is not transitioned to the time-saving game state. In this embodiment, the probability variable game state ends when a specified number of special symbol games (e.g., 100) are played consecutively with a jackpot lottery result of a miss, and the game is transitioned to a normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode and a low-probability mode. That is, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is a probability variable machine, but unlike the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment configured as a loop probability variable machine, it is configured as a so-called ST machine in which an upper limit is set on the number of special symbol games that can be executed in the probability variable game state. Also, in this embodiment, the time-saving game state ends when a specified number of special symbol games (for example, 100 times) are executed consecutively with the result of the jackpot lottery being a miss, and the game is transitioned to a normal game state which is a low-frequency support mode and a low-probability mode.

[Normal winning/losing table]
Here, Figures 177 (B) and 177 (C) are diagrams showing examples of a normal winning/losing table. In this embodiment, two types of normal winning/losing tables are set: a low-frequency support mode normal winning/losing table shown in Figure 177 (B) and a high-frequency support mode normal winning/losing table shown in Figure 177 (C). That is, in this embodiment, the normal winning probability differs between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode is set to have a higher normal winning probability than the low-frequency support mode.

The low-frequency support mode normal winning probability table shown in Figure 177 (B) is a table used in the normal winning lottery in the normal game mode, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 177 (B), the low-frequency support mode normal winning probability table is set so that a normal winning probability occurs when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0, and a loss occurs when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is between 1 and 299. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode (normal game mode), the probability of a normal winning probability is set to 1/300, and the operation frequency of the electric device 315b is low.

The high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table shown in Figure 177 (C) is a table used in the normal win lottery in the high-frequency support mode, which is the probability game state and the time-limited game state. As shown in Figure 177 (C), the high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table is the opposite of the low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table; a loss occurs when the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is 0, and a normal win occurs when the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is 1 to 299. In other words, in high-frequency support mode (probability game state and time-limited game state), the probability of a normal win is set to 299/300, which is higher than the probability of a normal win in low-frequency support mode (normal game state), and the operation frequency of the electric device 315b is increased.

Note that the probability of winning a normal low-frequency support mode map and the probability of winning a normal high-frequency support mode map are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 177(B) and 177(C) and can be changed as appropriate.

[General map type allocation table]
Here, Figures 177 (D) and 177 (E) are diagrams showing examples of normal map type allocation tables. In this embodiment, two types of normal map type allocation tables are set: a low-frequency support mode normal map type allocation table shown in Figure 177 (D) and a high-frequency support mode normal map type allocation table shown in Figure 177 (E). That is, in this embodiment, the allocation probability of normal map type (short-open normal map and long-open normal map) differs between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode.

Here, in the case of a short-open normal win, the electric device 315b opens for a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds), resulting in a short-open normal win game in which the game ball can enter the second winning slot 315 for a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds). In this short-open normal win game, the short opening time of the electric device 315b makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315, and in many cases, the game ball does not enter the second winning slot 315.

On the other hand, in the case of a long-opening normal winning game, the electric device 315b is open for a longer period of time (e.g., six seconds) than in a short-opening normal winning game, resulting in a long-opening normal winning game in which the game ball can enter the second winning slot 315 for a longer period of time (e.g., six seconds) than in a short-opening normal winning game. In this long-opening normal winning game, the electric device 315b is open for a longer period of time, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315, and it is possible to reserve up to an upper limit of the right to play the second special winning game (e.g., four).

The low-frequency support mode normal winning type allocation table shown in Figure 177 (D) is a table used in the normal winning lottery in the normal game mode, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 177 (D), the low-frequency support mode normal winning type allocation table is set so that when the value of the normal winning type random number counter C5 is between 0 and 99, a short-open normal winning occurs, and when the value of the normal winning type random number counter C5 is between 100 and 199, a long-open normal winning occurs. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode (normal game mode), the allocation ratio between short-open normal winning and long-open normal winning is set to 1:1. Of course, the distribution ratio between short-opening normal wins and long-opening normal wins in low-frequency support mode (normal game state) does not necessarily have to be 1:1 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is possible to set the distribution ratio for long-opening normal wins to zero (zero values in the normal win type random number counter C5 for long-opening normal wins) or approximately zero (one or two values in the normal win type random number counter C5 for long-opening normal wins).

The high-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table shown in Figure 177 (E) is a table used in the normal win lottery in the high-frequency support mode, which is the probability variable play state and the time-limited play state. As shown in Figure 177 (E), the high-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table is set so that when the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is 0, it is a short-open normal win, and when the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is 1 to 199, it is a long-open normal win. In other words, in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable play state and time-limited play state), it is set so that long-open normal wins are more likely to be allocated than short-open normal wins. Of course, the distribution rate between short-open normal wins and long-open normal wins in high-frequency support mode (probable game mode and time-saving game mode) is not limited to the example shown in Figure 177 (E) and can be changed as appropriate; for example, it is possible to set the distribution rate for short-open normal wins to zero (the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 for short-open normal wins is zero).

The opening of the electric device 315b is not limited to once per game per normal map, but may occur multiple times. In this case, the opening time and opening interval (interval between openings) for each opening of the electric device 315b per game per normal map may be one type or multiple types.

[Main processing of main control device 4]
The main processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment is basically the same as the main processing of the main control device 4 in the first embodiment described above, but differs in that a jackpot signal output process is executed and in some processing procedures, as shown in Fig. 178. The main processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the main processing of the main control device 4 in the first embodiment described above, and the processing necessary for explaining this embodiment.

[Normal winning game control processing]
179 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal winning game control process executed in step S1405 in the main processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment of FIG. 178. In the normal winning game control process of this embodiment, when a transition is made from a high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state) to a low frequency support mode (normal game state) during the execution of a normal winning game, the second winning port 315 is closed by the return of the electric device 315b, and the normal winning game is immediately forcibly terminated.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 179, in the normal symbol winning game control processing of this embodiment, when the normal symbol variation stop display flag indicating that the normal symbol has stopped being displayed (normal symbol game has ended) is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the normal symbol winning game, the MPU 41 executes processing such as opening the electric device 315b if the result of the normal symbol winning lottery is a win, as in the first embodiment described above (steps S1801 to S1812).

On the other hand, if the normal symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol has stopped being displayed (normal symbol play has ended), is off (step S1801: No), i.e., if it is not the right time to start a normal symbol winning game, the MPU 41 determines whether the electric device opening flag, which is set on when the electric device 315b is opened in step S1811 of the normal symbol winning game control process, is set on (step S3401). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether a normal symbol winning game is being played. If the electric device opening flag is set on (step S3401: Yes), i.e., a normal symbol winning game is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3402. On the other hand, if the electric device opening flag is set off (step S3401: No), i.e., if a normal symbol winning game is not being played, the MPU 41 terminates the normal symbol winning game control process.

<Steps S3402 and S3403>
If the electric role device open flag is set to on (step S3401: Yes), that is, if a normal winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the open time counter set in step S1804 or S1807 of the normal winning game control processing (step S3402), and determines whether the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3403). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the electric role device 315b due to the lapse of the operating time of the electric role device 315b. If the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3403: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric role device 315b due to the lapse of the operating time of the electric role device 315b, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3406. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3403: No), that is, if it is not the time to return the electric device 315b due to the elapse of its operating time, the MPU 41 transfers processing to step S3404.

<Steps S3404 and S3405>
If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3403: No), that is, if the operation time of the electric device 315b has elapsed and it is not time to return the electric device 315b, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state transition flag, which indicates a transition from the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state) to the low-frequency support mode (normal game state), is set to ON (step S3404). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to forcibly end the game by returning the electric device 315b and closing the second winning port 315 due to the transition from the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state) to the low-frequency support mode (normal game state). In addition, the normal game state transition flag is set to on when a transition is made from a high frequency support mode (high probability game state or time-limited game state) to a low frequency support mode (normal game state) in step S3635 of the game state transition processing in Figure 183 described below.

If the normal game state transition flag is set to on (step S3404: Yes), i.e., if a transition from high-frequency support mode (high-frequency game state or time-limited game state) to low-frequency support mode (normal game state) is occurring, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to off (step S3405) and transitions to step S3408. On the other hand, if the normal game state transition flag is set to off (step S3404: No), i.e., if a transition from high-frequency support mode (high-frequency game state or time-limited game state) to low-frequency support mode (normal game state) is occurring and it is time to forcibly terminate normal game play, the MPU 41 terminates the normal game play control process.

<Steps S3406 to S3408>
If the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3403: Yes), or if the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3404: Yes) and the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3405), i.e., if it is time to return the electric device 315b, the MPU 41 returns the electric device 315b (step S3406). This closes the second winning opening 315, restricting the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315. The MPU 41 then sets an electric device close command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric device 315b has been closed (step S3407), and sets the electric device open flag, indicating that the electric device 315b is open, to OFF (step S3408), thereby terminating the normal winning game control process.

The electric reel close command is sent to the audio and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see Figure 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, based on the electric reel close command, the audio and lamp control device 5 can end the performance indicating that the electric reel has been opened, which is executed, for example, in the pattern display unit 341 as an information output unit that outputs moving image information.

[Special game control processing]
Here, FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol game control process executed in step S1406 in the main processing of the main control device 4 in FIG. 178 in this embodiment. The special symbol game control process of this embodiment does not end the special symbol game after the special symbol variable display time has elapsed, but includes a step in which the special symbol variable stop state is maintained for a certain period of time (determined display time) after the special symbol variable display has stopped. In other words, in this embodiment, the special symbol game does not end immediately when the special symbol variable display is stopped, but ends after the determined display time has elapsed since the special symbol variable display has stopped. As a result, if a jackpot game starts after the special symbol game ends, the jackpot signal 1 starts to be output after the determined display time has elapsed. Furthermore, if the special symbol game is the last second special symbol game (final remaining reserved game) executed by the second special symbol reserve at the end of the high frequency support mode (probable variable game state or time-saving game state), the output of the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped after the confirmation display time, which is the end condition of the second special symbol game, has elapsed.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 180, in the special chart game control processing of this embodiment, when the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1901: No) and the special chart variable display flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, when it is the timing to start the special chart game, the MPU 41 executes processing to start the special chart game (steps S1904 and S1905), as in the first embodiment described above, provided that the reserved right to play the special chart game is in the special chart reserved storage area set in the RAM 41 of the main control unit 4 as the reserved number storage area (step S1903: Yes). That is, in the special symbol game control process of this embodiment, when the reservation of the right to execute the second special symbol game is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area set in the RAM 41 of the main control device 4 as a reservation number storage area by the reservation number storage process triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning port 315, the second special symbol game is started with priority over the first special symbol game for which the right was reserved by the reservation number storage process triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning port 314. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state), by performing a right hit that launches a game into the right area of the game board 31, it is possible to continuously execute the second special symbol game while maintaining the reservation of the right to execute the second special symbol game.

On the other hand, if the special symbol variation display flag is on (step S1902: Yes), that is, if the first special symbol or second special symbol is being displayed in a varying manner (special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol variation display time for the first special symbol or second special symbol set in the special symbol variation pattern setting process of step S2104 in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 28 has elapsed since the start of the varying display of the first special symbol or second special symbol game (step S3501). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to stop the display of the special symbol that is being displayed in a varying manner.

If the special symbol variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S3501: Yes), i.e., if it is time to stop the variable display of the special symbol, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3502. On the other hand, if the variable display time has not elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S3501: No), i.e., if it is not time to stop the variable display of the special symbol, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3505.

<Steps S3502 to S3504>
When the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first or second special symbol (step S3501: Yes), i.e., when it is time to stop the variable display of the special symbol, the MPU 41 stops the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 in a manner corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game (step S3502). Then, the MPU 41 sets a fixed display flag to ON (step S3503), indicating that the fixed display state of the special symbol is being maintained for a certain period of time (fixed display time), and further sets a fixed display counter indicating the remaining time of the fixed display time (step S3504), thereby terminating the special symbol game control process.

<Step S3505>
If the variable display time has not elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step S3501: No), that is, if it is not the timing to stop the display of the special pattern that is being variable displayed, the MPU 41 determines whether the fixed display in progress flag, which is set to on in step S3503 and indicates that the fixed display is in progress, is set to on (step S3505).

If the confirmation display in progress flag, which indicates that confirmation display is in progress, is set to ON (step S3505: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3506. On the other hand, if the confirmation display in progress flag is set to OFF (step S3505: No), i.e., if confirmation display is not in progress, the MPU 41 terminates the special game control process.

<Steps S3506 and S3507>
If the confirmation display in progress flag indicating that the confirmation display is in progress is set to ON (step S3505: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the confirmation display counter indicating the remaining time of the confirmation display time set in step S3504 (step S3506), and determines whether the value of the confirmation display counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3507). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to end the special symbol game.

If the value of the fixed display counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3507: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3508. On the other hand, if the value of the fixed display counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3507: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process.

<Steps S3508 and S3509>
If the value of the confirmed display counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3507: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol change stop flag, which indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been stopped and displayed, to on (step S3508), and sets the special symbol change display in progress flag, which indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner (the special symbol game is being executed), to off (step S3509), and ends the special symbol game control process.

[Game state transition processing]
181 to 183 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in step S1408 in the main processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment in Fig. 178. The game state transition process in this embodiment includes a step of setting various flags required for outputting jackpot signal 1 or jackpot signal 2 in the jackpot signal output process in Fig. 184 described later.

<Step S3601>
181, in the game state transition process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether a jackpot game start flag indicating the start of a jackpot game is ON (step S3601). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, the jackpot game start flag is set ON in step S2205 when a jackpot game is started, and is set OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game is ended.

If the jackpot game start flag is on (step S3601: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3602. On the other hand, if the jackpot game start flag is off (step S3601: No), i.e., if it is not time to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3615 in FIG. 182.

<Steps S3602 to S3604>
If the jackpot game start flag is on (step S3601: Yes), that is, when starting a jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to off (step S3602) and determines whether the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to on (step S3603). The normal game state flag is set to on when a transition is made from the probability variable game state or the time-limited game state to the normal game state in step S3634 of FIG. 183 of the game state transition process.

If the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in normal game mode, is set to on (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to off (step S3604) and proceeds to step S3613. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3603: No), i.e., the game is not in normal game mode, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3605.

<Steps S3605 to S3607>
If the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S3603: No), that is, if the game is not in the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the probability variable game state flag indicating the probability variable game state is set to ON (step S3605). The probability variable game state flag is set to ON when the game state transition is made to the probability variable game state by the end of the probability variable jackpot game in step S3624 of FIG. 182 of the game state transition process.

If the probability variable game state flag, indicating that the game is in a probability variable game state, is set to ON (step S3605: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the probability variable game state flag to OFF (step S3606) and proceeds to step S3608.

On the other hand, if the probability variable game state flag is set to OFF (step S3605: No), i.e., if the game is not in the probability variable game state, the MPU 41 can determine that the game is in the time-shortened game state, and therefore sets the time-shortened game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the time-shortened game state, to OFF (step S3607), and proceeds to step S3608. Note that the time-shortened game state flag is set to ON in step S3627 of FIG. 182 of the game state transition process when a transition to the time-shortened game state occurs upon the end of a normal jackpot game.

<Steps S3608 to S3610>
In step S3608, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag to ON. The jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag is a flag indicating that the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped when a jackpot game starts.

The MPU 41 also sets the high frequency support mode, which indicates that the game is in high frequency support mode (high probability game mode or time-saving game mode), to off (step S3609), clears the value of the support count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special game modes that can be executed in the high frequency support mode (step S3610), and transitions to step S3611.

<Steps S3611 and S3612>
In step S3611, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game to be started is a variable probability jackpot game (step S3611). Whether the jackpot game to be started is a variable probability jackpot game is determined based on the special symbol win/loss information stored in the special symbol execution area AE (see FIG. 8) of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b set in the RAM 412.

If the jackpot game to be started is a variable probability jackpot game (step S3611: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the variable probability jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a variable probability jackpot game state in which a variable probability jackpot game is being executed, to ON (step S3612), and proceeds to step S3613. The variable probability jackpot game state flag is referenced in step S3621 of FIG. 182 of the game state transition process when the jackpot game is ended to determine whether the game state should be transitioned to a variable probability game state or a normal game state. On the other hand, if the jackpot game to be started is not a variable probability jackpot game (step S3611: No), i.e., if the jackpot game to be started is a normal jackpot game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3613.

<Steps S3613 and S3614>
When the processing of steps S3602 to S3612 is completed in the case where a jackpot game is to be started, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot signal 1 output start flag to ON (step S3613), which starts outputting a jackpot signal 1 to an external device such as the hall computer 102, and proceeds to step S3614. The jackpot signal 1 output start flag is referenced in step S3701 of the jackpot signal output processing in FIG. 184, which will be described later, to determine whether or not to start outputting the jackpot signal 1.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2A output start flag to ON (step S3614), which starts outputting the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 to an external device such as the hall computer 102, and ends the game state transition process. The jackpot signal 2A output start flag is referenced in step S3707 of the jackpot signal output process in Figure 184, which will be described later, to determine whether to start outputting the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2.

<Step S3615>
If the jackpot game start flag is OFF (step S3601: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a jackpot game end flag, which indicates that the jackpot game is ending, is ON (step S3615), as shown in Fig. 182. When the jackpot game ends, the jackpot game end flag is set ON in step S2251 of the jackpot game control process in Fig. 29.

If the jackpot game end flag is on (step S3615: Yes), i.e., if the jackpot game is to be ended, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3616. On the other hand, if the jackpot game end flag is off (step S3615: No), i.e., if it is not the time to end the jackpot game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3628 in FIG. 183.

<Steps S3616 to S3620>
If the jackpot game end flag is on (step S3615: Yes), i.e., when the jackpot game is to end, the MPU 41 sets the high frequency support mode flag to on, indicating that the game is in high frequency support mode (high probability game state or time-limited game state) (step S3616).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a support count counter that indicates the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in high-frequency support mode (step S3617). The support count counter is decremented by one in step S2110 of the special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 28 each time a special symbol game is started in high-frequency support mode (high-probability game state or time-limited game state), and is referenced in step S3629 of the game state transition processing in FIG. 183 to determine whether to transition from high-frequency support mode (high-probability game state or time-limited game state) to normal game state after the specified number of special symbol games have been played.

The MPU 41 then sets the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag to ON, which stops the output of jackpot signal 1 to external devices such as the hall computer 102 (step S3618), and sets the jackpot signal 2A output stop flag to ON, which stops the output of the basic signal for jackpot signal 2 to external devices such as the hall computer 102 (step S3619). The jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is referenced in step S3704 of the jackpot signal output processing in Figure 184, described below, to determine whether to stop the output of jackpot signal 1 to external devices such as the hall computer 102. The jackpot signal 2A output stop flag is referenced in step S3710 of the jackpot signal output processing in Figure 184, described below, to determine whether to stop the output of the basic signal for jackpot signal 2 to external devices such as the hall computer 102.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game end flag, which indicates that the jackpot game has ended, to OFF (step S3620), and sets the jackpot signal 2A output start flag, which starts outputting the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2, to ON (step S3621), and then proceeds to step S3622.

<Step S3622>
In step S3622, the MPU 41 determines whether a probability variable jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a probability variable jackpot game state in which a probability variable jackpot game is executed, is on. The probability variable jackpot game state flag is set to on in step S3612 of FIG. 181 when the game state transition process is performed to transition from the probability variable game state, the normal game state, or the time-limited game state to the probability variable jackpot game state.

If the probability variable jackpot gaming state flag is on (step S3622: Yes), i.e., if the game is in a probability variable jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3623. On the other hand, if the probability variable jackpot gaming state flag is off (step S3622: No), i.e., if the game is in a normal jackpot gaming state rather than a probability variable jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3626.

<Step S3623>
If the probability variable jackpot gaming state flag is on (step S3622: Yes), that is, if the game is in a probability variable jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 sets a probability variable gaming state command that notifies the sound lamp control device 5 that the game is in a probability variable gaming state (step S3623), and proceeds to step S3624. The probability variable gaming state command is sent to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main processing (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to execute special symbol effects including background effects (see FIG. 189 (B1)) corresponding to the probability variable gaming state in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the probability variable gaming state command.

<Step S3624>
In step S3624, the MPU 41 sets a probability variable game state flag indicating that the game is in a probability variable game state to ON, and proceeds to step S3625. The probability variable game state flag is referenced in step S3605 of FIG. 181 in the game state transition process to identify the game state when the jackpot game starts.

<Step S3625>
In step S3625, the MPU 41 sets the probability variable jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a probability variable jackpot game state, to OFF, and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3626>
If the probability variable jackpot gaming state flag is off (step S3622: No), i.e., if the game is in a normal jackpot gaming state rather than a probability variable jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 sets a time-saving gaming state command to notify the sound and lamp control device 5 that the game is in a time-saving gaming state (step S3626), and proceeds to step S3627. The time-saving gaming state command is sent to the sound and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main processing (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound and lamp control device 5 to execute special symbol effects, including background effects (see FIG. 189 (B2)) corresponding to the time-saving gaming state, on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the time-saving gaming state command.

<Step S3627>
In step S3627, the MPU 41 sets the time-shortened game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the time-shortened game state, to ON, and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3628>
If the jackpot game end flag is off (step S3616: No), i.e., if it is not the time to end the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 183, the MPU 41 determines whether the high frequency support mode flag, which indicates that the game is in high frequency support mode (high probability game state or time-limited game state), is on (step S3628).

If the high-frequency support mode flag is on (step S3628: Yes), i.e., if the game is in high-frequency support mode (high-probability game state or time-limited game state), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3629. On the other hand, if the high-frequency support mode flag is off (step S3628: No), i.e., if the game is not in high-frequency support mode (high-probability game state or time-limited game state), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition processing.

<Step S3629>
If the high-frequency support mode flag is on (step S3628: Yes), that is, in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state), the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the support count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special symbols that can be executed in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state), is 0 (step S3629). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to transition from the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state) to the normal game state by executing the specified number of special symbol games.

If the value of the support count counter is 0 (step S3629: Yes), that is, if it is time to transition from high-frequency support mode (high-probability game state or time-limited game state) to normal game state by executing special game play a specified number of times, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3630. On the other hand, if the value of the support count counter is not 0 (step S3629: No), that is, if it is not time to transition from high-frequency support mode (high-probability game state or time-limited game state) to normal game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition processing.

<Step S3630>
If the value of the support count counter is 0 (step S3629: Yes), that is, if it is time to transition from the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state) to the normal game state by executing the special symbol game a specified number of times, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the special symbol game has ended is set to ON (step S3630). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to transition from the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state) to the normal game state by the end of the special symbol game.

If the special symbol variation stop flag is set to ON (step S3630: Yes), that is, if the end of the special symbol game means that it is time to transition from the high-frequency support mode (high-probability game state or time-limited game state) to the normal game state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3631. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3630: No), that is, if the end of the special symbol game means that it is not time to transition from the high-frequency support mode (high-probability game state or time-limited game state) to the normal game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3631 to S3633>
If the special chart change stop flag is set to on (step S3630: Yes), that is, if the end of the special chart game has brought about the timing to transition from the high frequency support mode (high probability game state or time-limited game state) to the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the high probability game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the high probability game state, is set to on (step S3631).

If the high probability game state flag is set to on (step S3631: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the high probability game state flag to off (step S3632) and proceeds to step S3634. On the other hand, if the high probability game state flag is set to off (step S3631: No), the MPU 41 sets the time-limited game state flag, indicating that the game is in the time-limited game state, to off (step S3633) and proceeds to step S3634.

<Steps S3634 to S3638>
In step S3634, the MPU 41 sets a normal game state flag indicating that the game is in the normal game state to ON (step S3634), and also sets a normal game state transition flag indicating that the game will be transitioned to the normal game state to ON (step S3635). The normal game state transition flag is referenced in step S3404 of the normal game win control process in FIG. 179 to determine whether or not to forcibly end the game (forcibly close the second winning port 315) based on the transition to the normal game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets a normal game state command to the audio and lamp control device 5 to notify it that it is in the normal game state (step S3636), and sets the high-frequency support mode flag, which indicates that it is in the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency game state or time-saving game state), to OFF (step S3637).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag, which stops the output of the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 based on the transition to the normal gaming state, to ON (step S3638), and ends the gaming state transition process.

[Jackpot signal output processing]
Here, Figures 184 and 185 are flowcharts showing an example of a jackpot signal output process executed in step S3301 in the main processing of the main control device 4 in Figure 178 in this embodiment.

<Step S3701>
184, in the jackpot signal output process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is on (step S3701). The jackpot signal 1 output start flag is a flag that causes the hall computer 102 to start outputting the jackpot signal 1, which indicates that the jackpot game is in progress (a jackpot game is being executed), and is set to on when a jackpot game starts in step S3613 of the game state transition process of FIG.

If the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is on (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3702. On the other hand, if the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is off (step S3701: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3704.

<Steps S3702 and S3703>
If the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is on (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 41 outputs a high-level jackpot signal 1, indicating a jackpot game state (a jackpot game is being played), from terminal 1 of the multiple output terminals on the external output terminal board 101 (step S3702). By receiving the jackpot signal 1, the hall computer 102 can determine that the gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot game state (a jackpot game is being played). The hall computer 102 then outputs a signal corresponding to the jackpot signal 1 to the data display 103, which indicates that the gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot game state (a jackpot game is being played) and can display the number of jackpot games, including the jackpot game. Furthermore, if the hall computer 102 receives the jackpot signal 1 while receiving the basic signal for the jackpot signal 2, it can determine that the jackpot is being played based on a special game that was started in a high-frequency support mode (a high-frequency game mode or a time-limited game mode). Then, the hall computer 102 outputs to the data display 103 a signal (or a signal that counts up the number of consecutive jackpots) indicating that the jackpot is being started based on a special game that has been started in the high frequency support mode (high probability game mode or time-limited game mode), and the data display 103 can display the number of consecutive jackpots.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 1 output start flag to OFF (step S3703) and ends the jackpot signal output process.

<Step S3704>
If the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is OFF (step S3701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is ON (step S3704). The jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is a flag that stops the output of the jackpot signal 1, which indicates that the jackpot game is in progress (a jackpot game is being executed), to the hall computer 102, and is set ON when the jackpot game is terminated in step S3618 of the game state transition process in FIG. 182.

If the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is on (step S3704: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3705. On the other hand, if the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is off (step S3704: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3707.

<Steps S3705 and S3706>
If the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is on (step S3704: Yes), the MPU 41 stops outputting the jackpot signal 1, which indicates a jackpot gaming state (a jackpot game is being executed), by setting it to a low level (step S3702). This allows the hall computer 102 to grasp that the jackpot gaming state (a jackpot game) of the gaming machine 10 has ended, since the output of the jackpot signal 1 has been stopped. The hall computer 102 then outputs a signal indicating that the output of the jackpot signal 1 has been stopped to the data display 103, thereby allowing the data display 103 to stop displaying that the gaming machine is in a jackpot gaming state (a jackpot game is being executed).

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag to OFF (step S3706) and ends the jackpot signal output process.

<Step S3707>
If the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is OFF (step S3704: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot signal 2A output start flag is ON (step S3707). The jackpot signal 2A output start flag is a flag that causes the hall computer 102 to start outputting the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2, which indicates that the jackpot game is in progress (a jackpot game is being executed) or in a high-frequency support mode (a high-probability game state or a time-limited game state). The flag is set ON when a jackpot game is started in step S3614 of the game state transition process in FIG. 181, or when the jackpot game ends in step S3614 and the game transitions to the high-frequency support mode (a high-probability game state or a time-limited game state).

If the jackpot signal 2A output start flag is on (step S3707: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3708. On the other hand, if the jackpot signal 2A output start flag is off (step S3707: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3710.

<Steps S3708 and S3709>
If the jackpot signal 2A output start flag is on (step S3707: Yes), the MPU 41 outputs the jackpot signal 2 basic signal, indicating high-frequency support mode (high-probability game mode or time-limited game mode), as a high-level signal, for example, from terminal 2 of the multiple output terminals on the external output terminal board 101 (step S3702). By receiving the jackpot signal 2 basic signal, the hall computer 102 can determine whether the gaming machine 10 is in jackpot game mode or high-frequency support mode (high-probability game mode or time-limited game mode). The hall computer 102 then outputs a signal corresponding to the jackpot signal 2 basic signal to the data display 103, allowing the data display 103 to display whether the gaming machine is in jackpot game mode (high-probability game mode or time-limited game mode).

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2A output start flag to OFF (step S3709) and ends the jackpot signal output process.

<Step S3710>
If the jackpot signal 2A output start flag is OFF (step S3707: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag is ON (step S3710). The jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag is a flag that stops the output of the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2, which indicates a jackpot game state (a jackpot game is being executed) or a high-frequency support mode (a probability variable game state or a time-shortened game state), to the hall computer 102 based on the start or end of the jackpot game, and is set ON when a jackpot game starts in step S3608 of the game state transition processing in FIG. 181 or when a jackpot game ends in step S3619 of the game state transition processing in FIG.

If the jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag is on (step S3704: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3705. On the other hand, if the jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag is off (step S3704: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3707.

<Steps S3711 and S3712>
If the jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag is on (step S3710: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the output of the jackpot signal by setting the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2, which indicates a jackpot game state (a jackpot game is being executed) or a high-frequency support mode (a high-probability game state or a time-limited game state), to a low level (step S3711). This allows the hall computer 102 to determine that the high-frequency support mode (a high-probability game state or a time-limited game state) of the gaming machine 10 has ended when the output of the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped and the output stop period exceeds a specific period. The hall computer 102 then outputs a signal to the data display 103 indicating that the high-frequency support mode (a high-probability game state or a time-limited game state) has ended, thereby causing the data display 103 to stop displaying the high-frequency support mode.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag to OFF (step S3712) and ends the jackpot signal output process.

<Step S3713>
If the jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag is off (step S3710: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag is on (step S3713). The jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag is a flag that stops the output of the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2, which indicates a jackpot game state (a jackpot game is being executed) or a high-frequency support mode (a probability variable game state or a time-limited game state) to the hall computer 102, upon the end of the high-frequency support mode (a probability variable game state or a time-limited game state), and is set to on when the high-frequency support mode (a probability variable game state or a time-limited game state) is ended in step S3638 of the game state transition processing of FIG.

If the jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag is on (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3714. On the other hand, if the jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag is off (step S3713: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3722 in FIG. 185.

<Steps S3714 and S3715>
If the jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag is on (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 stops output by information stop processing by setting the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2, which indicates a jackpot game state (a jackpot game is being executed) or a high-frequency support mode (a high-probability game state or a time-limited game state), to a low level (step S3714). This allows the hall computer 102 to determine that the high-frequency support mode (a high-probability game state or a time-limited game state) of the gaming machine 10 has ended when the output of the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped and the output stop period exceeds a specific period. The hall computer 102 then outputs a signal to the data display 103 indicating that the high-frequency support mode (a high-probability game state or a time-limited game state) has ended, thereby causing the data display 103 to stop displaying the high-frequency support mode.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag to OFF (step S3715) and proceeds to step S3716.

<Steps S3716 and S3717>
In step S3716, the MPU 41 specifies the second special symbol reservation number M. The second special symbol reservation number M can be specified by referring to the second special symbol reservation number storage area NAB (see FIG. 8) of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB set in the RAM 41 of the main control device 4.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 determines whether the identified number of reserved second special symbols M is 0 (step S3717). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether there are any reserved second special symbols (remaining reserved second special symbols), which are the reserved rights to play second special symbols when the high-frequency support mode (probability variable play state or time-limited play state) ends.

If the number of reserved second special symbols M is 0 (step S3717: Yes), i.e., if there are no reserved second special symbols (remaining reserved second special symbols) that reserve the right to play second special symbol games at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable play state or time-limited play state), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot signal output process. In other words, if there are no reserved second special symbols (remaining reserved second special symbols) that reserve the right to play second special symbol games at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable play state or time-limited play state), the extension signal for jackpot signal 2 (see FIG. 175), described below, is not output, and the basic signal for jackpot signal 2 is set to a low level in step S3715, maintaining the output in a stopped state. Therefore, if jackpot signal 2 remains low for a specific period of time, the output of jackpot signal 2 is completely stopped. This allows the hall computer 102 to know that the high-frequency support mode (probability change game state or time-saving game state) has ended, and the display on the data display 103 indicating that it is in the high-frequency support mode can be terminated.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols M is not 0 (step S3717: No), that is, if there is a reserved second special symbol (remaining reserved second special symbol) that reserves the right to play second special symbol games at the end of the high-frequency support mode (high probability game mode or time-limited game mode), processing proceeds to step S3718.

<Step S3718>
If the number of reserved second special symbols M is not 0 (step S3717: No), that is, if there is a reserved second special symbol (remaining reserved second special symbol) that reserves the right to play a second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state), the MPU 41 outputs an extension signal for the jackpot signal 2 (see FIG. 175) from, for example, terminal 2 of the multiple output terminal units on the external output terminal board 101 (step S3718), and the process proceeds to step S3719. That is, the extension signal is output from the same output terminal unit as the basic signal on the external output terminal board 101.

In this way, by outputting the extension signal from the same output terminal as the basic signal on the external output terminal board 101, which serves as the information output unit, the hall computer 102 can recognize the extension signal as a jackpot signal 2, just like the basic signal. Furthermore, by outputting the extension signal from the same output terminal as the basic signal on the external output terminal board 101, there is no need to provide a new output terminal or wiring to output the extension signal.

As described below, the extension signal continues to be output until the value of the second special symbol reserved number counter, which indicates the number of unexecuted second special symbol games among the reserved number of rights to play second special symbols (remaining reserved number of second special symbols) at the end of the high frequency support mode, reaches 0, or until a jackpot game is started before the value of the second special symbol reserved number counter reaches 0 (see steps S3727 to S3730 in FIG. 185). Furthermore, as described below, if there are remaining reserved numbers of second special symbols at the end of the high frequency support mode, the second special symbol reserved number counter is set in a memory area, for example, in RAM 412 (see step S3719).

Here, the extension signal of jackpot signal 2 has a different output method than the basic signal of jackpot signal 2. Specifically, while the basic signal of jackpot signal 2 is output as a level signal, the extension signal of jackpot signal 2 is output as a pulse signal or an on-off signal, resulting in different output methods for the basic signal and the extension signal (see Figure 175). Therefore, a hall computer 102 that can distinguish between the output modes of the basic signal and the extension signal of jackpot signal 2, for example, a hall computer 102 that stores a program that can distinguish between the output modes of the basic signal and the extension signal of jackpot signal 2 and that can execute this program, can distinguish between whether jackpot signal 2 is a basic signal or an extension signal when it receives it. As a result, if the hall computer 102 receives jackpot signal 1 indicating a jackpot game state (a jackpot game is being executed) while receiving jackpot signal 2, it can determine whether the jackpot game was initiated based on a special symbol game executed in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state) or based on a special symbol game executed by a second special symbol reserve (second special symbol remaining reserve), which is a reserve of the right to execute a second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the gaming hall can select whether or not to include a jackpot game initiated based on a special symbol game executed by a second special symbol reserve (second special symbol remaining reserve), which is a reserve of the right to execute a second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode, in the number of consecutive jackpots, and can also select whether or not to display it on the data display 103 as part of the number of consecutive jackpots.

Furthermore, by outputting the extension signal of jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer 102 in a manner that is distinguishable from the basic signal, the hall computer 102 can display text images, etc., on the data display 103, as described above, that clearly indicate or suggest to the player that it is possible to increase the number of consecutive jackpots, such as "consecutive jackpot challenge," "consecutive jackpot chance," "jackpot challenge," and "variable jackpot chance," while the second special symbol game is being played in relation to the reservation of the right to play the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state).

In this embodiment, the basic signal and extension signal of jackpot signal 2 are output from the same output terminal on external output terminal board 101, which serves as the information output unit. Therefore, if the parlor's hall computer 102 is not configured to be able to distinguish between the basic signal and the extension signal of jackpot signal 2, such hall computer 102 will not distinguish the extension signal from the basic signal and will simply recognize it as jackpot signal 2. Therefore, even if the parlor's hall computer 102 is not configured to be able to distinguish between the basic signal and the extension signal of jackpot signal 2, if the parlor's hall computer 102 receives jackpot signal 2 while receiving jackpot signal 2, the hall computer 102 will include and count the jackpot in the number of consecutive jackpots. This allows the jackpot game executed as a result of a second special symbol game for the reservation of the right to play the second special symbol game (remaining reservation of the second special symbol) at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probable variable game state or time-saving game state) to be included in the number of consecutive jackpots. Therefore, the hall computer 102 can display on the data display 103 the jackpot game executed as a result of the second special symbol game for the reservation of the right to execute the second special symbol game (remaining reservation of the second special symbol) at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state), including it in the number of consecutive jackpots. In this case, the data display 103 cannot display that the second special symbol game is currently being executed for the reservation of the right to execute the second special symbol game (remaining reservation of the second special symbol) at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state), for example, it cannot display that the special symbol game can add to the number of consecutive jackpots after the end of the high-frequency support mode, but data processing can be simplified to the extent that it is not necessary to distinguish between the basic signal and the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2.

In addition, in this embodiment, the basic signal of jackpot signal 2 is output as a level signal, and the extended signal of jackpot signal 2 is output as a pulse signal or on-off signal, but the basic signal and extended signal of jackpot signal 2 may be output in different output formats. For example, the basic signal of jackpot signal 2 may be output as a pulse signal or on-off signal, and the extended signal of jackpot signal 2 may be output as a level signal. Furthermore, the basic signal and extended signal of jackpot signal 2 may be output as level signals with different levels, or the basic signal and extended signal of jackpot signal 2 may be output as pulse signals or on-off signals with different output periods or output stop periods.

In this embodiment, the basic signal and extension signal of jackpot signal 2 may also be output in the same output format. That is, from the start of the first jackpot game until the execution of the second special symbol game for the reservation of the right to execute the second special symbol game (remaining reservation of the second special symbol) at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability change game mode or time-saving game mode) is completed, jackpot signal 2 may be continuously output in the same output format to an external device such as the store's hall computer 102. Even in this case, the store's hall computer 102 can count the jackpot game triggered by the remaining reservation of the second special symbol in the number of consecutive jackpots using simplified data processing based on jackpot signal 2, just as in the case where the hall computer 102 is not configured to distinguish between the basic signal and the extension signal of jackpot signal 2. Therefore, the number of consecutive jackpots, including the jackpot game triggered by the remaining reservation of the second special symbol, can be displayed on the data display 103 using simple data processing.

<Steps S3719 to S3721>
In step S3719, the MPU 41 sets the second special symbol reserved number counter corresponding to the second special symbol reserved at the end of the high frequency support mode in a storage area set in the RAM 412. Then, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot signal 2B output command indicating that an extension signal for the jackpot signal 2 is being output (step S3720), and sets on a jackpot signal 2B output flag indicating that an extension signal for the jackpot signal 2 is being output (step S3721), and ends the jackpot signal output process.

<Step S3722>
If the jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag is off (step S3713: No), as shown in FIG. 185, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot signal 2B output in progress flag, which indicates that an extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is being output, is set to on (step S3722).

If the jackpot signal 2B output flag is set to ON (step S3722: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3723; if the jackpot signal 2B output flag is set to OFF (step S3722: No), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot signal output process.

<Step S3723>
If the jackpot signal 2B output flag is set to ON (step S3722: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether a special symbol change display flag, which indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being changed, is set to ON (step S3723). The special symbol change display flag is set to ON in step S2107 when the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the special symbol change start processing of FIG. 28, and is set to OFF in step S1909 when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol game control processing.

If the special chart change display flag is set to on (step S3723: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3724; if the special chart change display flag is set to off (step S3723: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3727.

<Step S3724>
If the special symbol variation display flag is set to ON (step S3723: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the subtraction stop flag is set to ON (step S3724). The subtraction stop flag is a flag for stopping subtraction of the value of the second special symbol reserved number counter, which indicates the number of unexecuted second special symbol games among the second special symbol reserved (second special symbol remaining reserved), which is the reservation of the right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state). When the value of the second special symbol reserved number counter is subtracted by the execution of the second special symbol game, the flag is set to ON in step S3726 described below.

If the subtraction stop flag is set to ON (step S3724: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot signal output process; if the subtraction stop flag is set to OFF (step S3724: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3725.

<Steps S3725 and S3726>
If the subtraction stop flag is set to off (step S3724: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the second special chart reserved number counter (step S3725), sets the subtraction stop flag to on (step S3726), and terminates the jackpot signal output process.

<Steps S3727 and S3728>
If the special chart change display flag is set to off (step S3723: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the special chart change stop flag, which indicates that the special chart game has ended, is set to on (step S3727).

If the special chart variation stop flag is set to ON (step S3727: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the subtraction stop flag to OFF (step S3728) and proceeds to step S3729. On the other hand, if the special chart variation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3727: No), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot signal output process.

<Steps S3729 and S3730>
In step S3729, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the finished special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3729). That is, it determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the second special symbol game executed based on the second special symbol reservation (second special symbol remaining reservation), which is the reservation of the right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state), is a jackpot.

If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the completed special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3729: Yes), the MPU 41 clears the second special symbol pending number counter (step S3730) and proceeds to step S3732. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the completed special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3729: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3731.

<Step S3731>
If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the completed special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3729: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game executed based on the second special symbol reserve (second special symbol remaining reserve), which is the reserve of the right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state), is not a jackpot but a miss, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the second special symbol reserve number counter, which indicates the number of unexecuted second special symbol games among the second special symbol reserve (second special symbol remaining reserve), which is the reserve of the right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state), is 0 (step S3731). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the completed second special symbol game is the second special symbol game executed based on the last second special symbol remaining reserve among the second special symbol remaining reserves.

If the value of the second special symbol reserved number counter is 0 (step S3731: Yes), i.e., if the completed second special symbol game is a second special symbol game executed based on the last second special symbol remaining reservation among the remaining second special symbol reservations, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3732. On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol reserved number counter is not 0 (step S3731: No), i.e., if the completed second special symbol game is not a second special symbol game executed based on the last second special symbol remaining reservation among the remaining second special symbol reservations, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot signal output process.

<Steps S3732 to S3734>
If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the completed second special symbol game is a jackpot and the second special symbol reserved number counter is cleared (step S3730), or if the completed second special symbol game is a second special symbol game executed based on the last second special symbol remaining reservation among the second special symbol remaining reservations (step S3731: Yes), the MPU 41 stops outputting the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 (step S3732) and sets a jackpot signal 2B output stop command indicating that the output of the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 has been stopped (step S3733). That is, if a jackpot game is executed after the end of any second special symbol game executed based on the second special symbol reservation (second special symbol remaining reservation), which is the reservation of the right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state), or if the execution of all second special symbol games for the second special symbol remaining reservations has been completed, the output of the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped. In other words, the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output continuously during the execution period of the second special symbol game based on the second special symbol reservation (second special symbol remaining reservation), which is the reservation of the right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 makes it possible to identify that it is the execution period of the second special symbol game based on the second special symbol remaining reservation.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2B output flag, which indicates that an extension signal for the jackpot signal 2 is being output, to OFF (step S3734), and ends the jackpot signal output process.

In this way, in the jackpot signal output process, an extension signal that can identify that this is the execution period of the second special symbol game based on the second special symbol reservation (second special symbol remaining reservation), which is the reservation of the right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode, continues to be output as jackpot signal 2 after the output of the basic signal has stopped. Therefore, by outputting the extension signal of jackpot signal 2 from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102, the hall computer 102 can determine that the second special symbol game is being executed based on the second special symbol remaining reservation during the period in which the extension signal is received. Therefore, if the hall computer 102 receives jackpot signal 1, which indicates a jackpot game state (jackpot game in progress) during the period in which the extension signal is received, it can determine that the jackpot game in question is a jackpot game executed based on the second special symbol remaining reservation. As a result, even if a jackpot game is based on a special symbol game executed in the normal game mode to which the game transitions after the high-frequency support mode ends, if the jackpot game is executed based on a second special symbol game with a second special symbol remaining reserved, the hall computer 102 can manage the jackpot game triggered by the second special symbol remaining reserved as part of the number of consecutive jackpots. This allows the hall computer 102 to include the jackpot game triggered by the second special symbol remaining reserved in the number of consecutive jackpots and display it on the data display 103, preventing a discrepancy between the number of consecutive jackpots displayed on the data display 103 and the number of consecutive jackpots recognized by the player. As a result, a decrease in the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive jackpots displayed on the data display 103 is prevented, preventing a decrease in interest and amusement in the game.

[Processing of the voice and lamp control device 5]
In this embodiment, some steps of the command determination process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 are different from those in the first embodiment described above.

[Command Determination Processing]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, a process is executed to set the type of background effect (stage effect) to be displayed behind the decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341 in a special symbol game depending on the game state, etc. Here, Figures 186 and 187 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the command determination process of this embodiment. The output method when the symbol display unit 341 displays an image as output information is mainly the display of a moving image.

<Step S3801>
186, in the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received (step S3801). If a command has been received (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3802, and if a command has not been received (step S3801: No), the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
When a command is received (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a probability variable game state command indicating a transition to a probability variable game state (step S3802). The probability variable game state command is set in step S3623 in the game state transition process of FIG. 182 when a transition to a probability variable game state occurs.

If the MPU 51 receives a high probability game state command (step S3802: Yes), it sets the high probability game state flag, indicating that the game is in high probability game state, to ON (step S3803) and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 does not receive a high probability game state command (step S3802: No), it proceeds to step S3804.

<Steps S3804 and S3805>
If the MPU 51 has not received the variable probability game state command (step S3802: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a time-shortened game state command indicating a transition to a time-shortened game state (step S3804). The time-shortened game state command is set in step S3627 of the game state transition process in FIG. 182 when a transition to the time-shortened game state has occurred.

If the MPU 51 receives a time-shortened gaming state command (step S3804: Yes), it sets the time-shortened gaming state flag, indicating that the game is in the time-shortened gaming state, to ON (step S3804), and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 does not receive a time-shortened gaming state command (step S3804: No), it proceeds to step S3806.

<Steps S3806 and S3807>
If the time-shortened gaming state command has not been received (step S3804: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a normal gaming state command indicating a transition to the normal gaming state (step S3806). The normal gaming state command is set in step S3636 of the gaming state transition process in FIG. 183 when a transition to the normal gaming state has occurred.

If the MPU 51 receives a time-shortened gaming state command (step S3806: Yes), it sets the normal gaming state flag, indicating that the game is in normal gaming state, to ON (step S3807), and proceeds to step S3808. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 does not receive a normal gaming state command (step S3806: No), it proceeds to step S3812.

<Steps S3808 and S3809>
In step S3808, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the probability variable game state flag is set to ON. The probability variable game state flag is a flag indicating that the game is in the probability variable game state, and is set to ON in step S3803 of the command determination process when the game has transitioned to the probability variable game state.

If the high probability game state flag is set to on (step S3808: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the high probability game state flag to off (step S3809) and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the high probability game state flag is set to on (step S3808: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3810.

<Steps S3810 and S3811>
If the probability variable game state flag is set to ON (step S3808: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the time-shortened game state flag is set to ON (step S3810). The time-shortened game state flag is a flag indicating that the game is in the time-shortened game state, and is set to ON in step S3805 of the command determination process when the game is transitioned to the time-shortened game state.

If the time-shortened game state flag is set to ON (step S3810: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the time-shortened game state flag to OFF (step S3811) and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the time-shortened game state flag is set to OFF (step S3810: No), the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3812>
If the normal game state command has not been received (step S3806: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot signal 2B output command (step S3812). The jackpot signal 2B output command is a command indicating that an extension signal for the jackpot signal 2 has been output, and is set in step S3733 of the jackpot signal output process in FIG. 185 when output of the extension signal is started.

If the MPU 51 receives a jackpot signal 2B output command (step S3812: Yes), it proceeds to step S3813; if it does not receive a jackpot signal 2B output command (step S3812: No), it proceeds to step S3815.

<Steps S3813 and S3814>
When the jackpot signal 2B output command is received (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 sets an extension signal output flag indicating that an extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is being output to ON (step S3813). That is, based on the extension signal output flag, the MPU 51 can determine whether or not the period is one in which a second special symbol game (variable display) is being executed based on a second special symbol reservation (second special symbol remaining reservation), which is a reservation of the right to execute a second special symbol game at the end of the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state).

In addition, the MPU 51 sets the number of reserved second special symbols, which is the number of reserved second special symbols (remaining reserved second special symbols), which are the reserved rights to play second special symbol games at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probable variable game mode or time-limited game mode), in a memory area set in the RAM 512 (step S3814).

As mentioned above, a special symbol reserve storage area corresponding area (not shown) is set in RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5 in correspondence with the special symbol reserve storage area 412b (see FIG. 8) set in RAM 412 of the main control device 4. This special symbol reserve storage area corresponding area (not shown) includes a second special symbol reserve number memory area corresponding area (not shown) that can store the second special symbol reserve number M. Therefore, when the high frequency support mode (probable game mode and time-saving game mode) ends, the MPU 51 can identify the remaining second special symbol reserves by referencing the second special symbol reserve number M stored in the second special symbol reserve number memory area corresponding area (not shown).

<Step S3815>
If the jackpot signal 2B output command has not been received (step S3812: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it has received a jackpot signal 2B output stop command indicating that the output of the jackpot signal 2 extension signal has been stopped (step S3815).

If the MPU 51 receives a jackpot signal 2B output stop command (step S3815: Yes), it proceeds to step S3816; if it does not receive a jackpot signal 2B output stop command (step S3815: No), it proceeds to step S3818 in FIG. 187.

<Steps S3816 and S3817>
If a command to stop output of jackpot signal 2B is received (step S3815: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the extension signal output flag, which indicates that an extension signal for jackpot signal 2 is being output, to off (step S3816), clears the number of second special charts reserved, which indicates the number of unexecuted second special charts remaining reserved (step S3817), and terminates the command judgment process.

<Steps S3818 and S3819>
If the jackpot signal 2B output stop command has not been received (step S3815: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command (step S3818), as shown in Fig. 187. The special symbol variation pattern command is a command that includes the variation display time of the special symbol in the special symbol game to be started, the result of the jackpot lottery, etc., and is set in step S2105 of the special symbol variation start processing in Fig. 28 when the special symbol variation starts (the special symbol game starts).

If the MPU 51 receives a special chart variation pattern command (step S3818: Yes), it proceeds to step S3820. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 does not receive a special chart variation pattern command (step S3818: No), it executes processing based on other commands (step S3819) and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3820>
When the special symbol variation pattern command is received (step S3818: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a normal game state flag indicating that the game is in a normal game state is set to ON (step S3820). When the game is shifted to the normal game state, the normal game state flag is set to ON in step S3807 of the command determination process in FIG. 186.

If the normal game state flag is set to on (step S3820: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3821; if the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3820: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3824.

<Steps S3821 to S3823>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3820: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not an extension signal output flag indicating that an extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is being output is set to ON (step S3821). The extension signal output flag is set to ON in step S3813 of the command determination process in FIG. 186 when output of the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 starts.

If the extension signal output flag is set to ON (step S3821: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the normal game state A effect setting process (step S3822) and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the extension signal output flag is set to OFF (step S3821: No), the MPU 51 executes the normal game state B effect setting process (step S3823) and terminates the command determination process.

In the normal game state A effect setting process and normal game state B effect setting process, the effects to be executed in special symbol games are set by executing processing similar to steps S3103 to S3106 in the command determination process in FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above, based on the variable display time of the special symbol included in the special symbol variable pattern command, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, etc.

In addition, the background image (background effect) displayed behind the decorative symbol in the symbol display section 341 differs between the normal game state A effect and the normal game state B effect.

Here, Figures 188 and 189 show example images such as background images (background effects) that are displayed as output information on the symbol display unit 341 in various game states, etc.

Figure 188 (A) is a diagram showing background effects in normal game mode. As shown in Figure 188 (A), in normal game mode, a predetermined background effect is set from multiple types of background effects and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by the video information output process. The multiple types of background effects include a basic background effect that is set as a basic setting, a look-ahead zone background effect that is set when predetermined conditions are met, and a normal transition background effect that is set when the game transitions from the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency game mode or time-limited game mode) to the normal game mode; different background images are displayed on the symbol display unit 341 for the basic background effect, look-ahead zone background effect, and normal transition background effect.

Basic background effects are background effects that are set except when look-ahead zone background effects and normal transition background effects are set, and include background effect A, background effect B, background effect C, and background effect D. Of course, there is no limit to the number of basic background effects, so they can be set as appropriate.

Except when a pre-reading zone background effect or a background effect at the time of transition to normal play is set, each background effect A-D is set continuously until a predetermined number of special game plays have been played. Once a predetermined number of specific game plays have been played, another background effect A-D is set. Here, the predetermined number of special game plays until another background effect A-D is set may be a fixed number, such as 10 or 15, or may be a non-fixed number set from a predetermined range. Furthermore, a change to another background effect A-D may be made by holding a background effect change lottery and deciding to change the background effect in that change lottery. Alternatively, the change may be made in the special game following a special game in which a super reach effect or special reach effect, which is executed when the jackpot lottery result is a miss, is executed. Alternatively, the change may be made in the special game following a special game in which a pre-reading zone background effect, which is executed when the jackpot lottery result is a miss, is executed.

The setting order of background effects A to D can be set according to a predetermined order, such as background effect A → background effect B → background effect C → background effect D → background effect A → ... In this case, if background effects A to D are changed in an order different from the predetermined order, for example, if a reverse order occurs, such as changing from background effect A to background effect D, or if a skip occurs, such as changing from background effect A to background effect C, it is possible to increase the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation rate). Of course, the setting order of background effects A to D does not have to be a predetermined order, and can be set randomly by lottery, etc.

In addition, there are no particular restrictions on the content of background effects A to D, but possible background effects may be those that reflect the protagonist character's daily activities, such as a school stage background that depicts the protagonist character commuting to school, a school stage background that depicts the protagonist character's activities during class or break at school, an after-school stage background that depicts the protagonist character's activities after school, or a home stage background that depicts the protagonist character's activities at home. Additionally, background effects A to D may also be seasonal backgrounds, such as a spring stage background, summer stage background, autumn stage background, and winter stage background, and may be set as appropriate.

In addition, the look-ahead zone background effect is a background effect that has a higher chance of winning than the basic background effects (background effects A to D), but is set less frequently than the basic background effects. In this look-ahead zone background effect, an image indicating that the look-ahead zone background effect is being executed, such as an image such as "XX Zone," is displayed.

Furthermore, the pre-reading zone background effect can be set, for example, when there are multiple first special symbol reserves, which are reserves of the right to play the first special symbol game, and is set for multiple (e.g., 2 to 4) consecutive special symbol games corresponding to the number of first special symbol reserves (number of first special symbol reserves N). Furthermore, the pre-reading zone background effect can be set, for example, when the first special symbol reserves include a first special symbol with a long variable display time, such as when a special reach effect is executed. Therefore, when the pre-reading zone background effect is executed, there is a high possibility that a special reach effect, which has a high probability of winning a jackpot, will be executed, and in that respect, as mentioned above, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than with the basic background effect.

Note that there may be only one type of look-ahead zone background effect, but multiple types may also be set. In this case, it is preferable to set them so that the probability of a jackpot differs when the look-ahead zone background effect is executed. Furthermore, when multiple types of look-ahead zone background effects are set, it is also possible to change to a different look-ahead zone background effect while the look-ahead zone background effect is being executed. For example, when multiple types of look-ahead zone background effects with different jackpot expectations are set, it is also possible to change (promote) to a look-ahead zone background effect with a higher jackpot expectation while a look-ahead zone background effect with a lower jackpot expectation is being executed.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the background effects during normal transition are background effects that are set when a transition is made from the high-frequency support mode (probability change game mode or time-limited game mode) to normal game mode, and include normal transition background effects A and normal transition background effects B, which are output information in the form of moving images.

Normal transition background effect A is set when there is a second special symbol reservation (second special symbol remaining reservation), which is a reservation of the right to play the second special symbol game, at the end of high frequency support mode. In other words, normal transition background effect A is initiated by the output of image information in response to a change in the game status when the display of the second special symbol game to be played for the second special symbol remaining reservation at the end of high frequency support mode begins. Therefore, the player can distinguish the period during which normal transition background effect A is being executed as a period during which the second special symbol game can be played for the second special symbol remaining reservation at the end of high frequency support mode.

Note that background effect A during normal transition is set when there is a second special symbol reservation (second special symbol remaining reservation), which is a reservation of the right to play second special symbol game, at the end of high-frequency support mode. During the execution period of second special symbol game during which background effect A during normal transition is executed, an extension signal for jackpot signal 2, indicating that this execution period is in progress, is output from the gaming machine 10 to the arcade's hall computer 102, etc. In other words, during execution of background effect A during normal transition, an extension signal for jackpot signal 2 is output from the gaming machine 10 to the arcade's hall computer 102, etc. Therefore, when an extension signal for jackpot signal 2 is output from the gaming machine 10 to the arcade's hall computer 102, etc., and the data display 103 executes the aforementioned effect (e.g., a text image effect such as "Challenge") indicating that this is the period during which the number of consecutive jackpots can be increased after the end of high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state), the execution period of that effect can be linked to the execution period of background effect A during normal transition. This allows the player to understand that this is a period in which the number of consecutive jackpots can be added after the high-frequency support mode has ended, from both the background effect A during normal transition displayed on the symbol display unit 341 and the effect displayed on the data display 103. Therefore, the player can easily and reliably understand that this is a period in which the number of consecutive jackpots can be added after the high-frequency support mode has ended. In particular, even a player who is not aware that the background effect A during normal transition represents a period in which the number of consecutive jackpots can be added after the high-frequency support mode has ended can easily and reliably understand, based on the effect displayed on the data display 103, that this is a period in which the number of consecutive jackpots can be added after the high-frequency support mode has ended.

Normal transition background effect B is set when there is no second special symbol reserve (second special symbol remaining reserve), which is the reserve of the right to play the second special symbol game, at the end of the high-frequency support mode. This normal transition background effect B is set continuously, for example, until a predetermined number of special symbol games have been played, and once the predetermined number of specific games have been played, a basic background effect (background effects A-D) is set. Here, the predetermined number of special symbol games played from normal transition background effect B until the basic background effect (background effects A-D) is set may be a fixed number, such as 10 or 15, or may be a non-fixed number set from a predetermined range. Furthermore, the change from normal transition background effect B to the basic background effect (background effects A-D) may be performed by holding a lottery to end normal transition background effect B, and when the lottery determines to end the setting of normal transition background effect B.

The type of basic background effect initially set when the normal transition background effects (normal transition background effects A and normal transition background effects B) end and the basic background effects (background effects A-D) begin may be fixed (e.g., background effect A) or may be randomly set by lottery or other means. Furthermore, the timing for ending the normal transition background effects (normal transition background effects A and normal transition background effects B) and starting the basic background effects (background effects A-D) is preferably a timing at which all corresponding second special symbol games can be executed, at least if there are any second special symbol remaining in reserve at the end of the high frequency support mode; however, the normal transition background effects (normal transition background effects A and normal transition background effects B) may be displayed for a longer period of time. In this case, the start timing of the basic background effect may be determined by lottery.

In addition, two types of background effects are set for transitioning to normal: normal transition background effect A and normal transition background effect B, depending on whether or not there is a second special symbol reserved (second special symbol remaining reserved) at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probable bonus game state or time-limited game state). However, it is also possible to set one type of background effect for transitioning to normal, and have the same background effect for transitioning to normal be set regardless of whether or not there is a second special symbol remaining reserved.

In this embodiment, a unique background effect is set when transitioning from high-frequency support mode (probable game mode or time-limited game mode) to normal game mode, but it is also possible to set a basic background effect (background effects A to D) when transitioning from high-frequency support mode to normal game mode. In other words, the background effect when transitioning to normal game mode may be omitted. In this case, the basic background effect (background effects A to D) that is initially set when transitioning to normal game mode may be fixed (for example, background effect A), or may be set randomly by lottery, etc.

Here, Figures 188(B), 188(C), and 189(A) are diagrams showing example screens on the symbol display unit 341 during execution of a jackpot game. That is, Figures 188(B), 188(C), and 189(A) are example images on the symbol display unit 341 when a transition is made from a normal game state, a special game state, or a time-limited game state to a jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 188(B), during the opening of a jackpot game, an image indicating that the jackpot game is about to start and an image indicating the number of consecutive jackpots are displayed. In the example shown in Figure 188(B), the text image "Jackpot Game" is the image indicating that the jackpot game is about to start, and the text image "Xth time" is the image indicating the number of consecutive jackpots.

As shown in Figure 188 (C), in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game, images such as the current number of rounds, an image showing the current number of balls dispensed relative to the number of game balls (number of balls dispensed) that can be acquired in the jackpot game, and an image showing the total number of balls dispensed since the first jackpot game began are displayed. In the example shown in Figure 188 (C), the text image "Round X" is an image showing the number of rounds, the text image "800/1200" is an image showing the current number of balls dispensed relative to the number of game balls (number of balls dispensed) that can be acquired in the jackpot game, and the text image "Total 3800 balls" is an image showing the total number of balls dispensed since the first jackpot game began.

As shown in Figure 189 (A), at the end of a jackpot game, an image is displayed indicating that the jackpot game has ended, or an image showing the total number of balls dispensed since the start of the first jackpot game at the end of the jackpot game. In the example shown in Figure 188 (C), the text image "Jackpot Ended" is an image indicating that the jackpot game has ended, and the text image "5200 balls dispensed" is an image showing the total number of balls dispensed since the start of the first jackpot game at the end of the jackpot game.

When the jackpot game ends, the game will transition to a high-frequency support mode, either a high-variant mode or a time-limited mode. Figure 189 (B1) shows an example of a screen in the high-variant mode, and Figure 189 (B2) shows an example of a screen in the time-limited mode.

As shown in Figure 189 (B1), in the probability variable game state, an image indicating that the probability variable game state is in effect and an image showing the maximum number of special game plays that can be performed in that probability variable game state are displayed. In the example shown in Figure 189 (B1), the text image "○○RUSH" is the image indicating that the probability variable game state is in effect, and the text image "ST 50 times" is the image showing the maximum number of special game plays that can be performed in that probability variable game state.

Also, although not clearly shown in Figure 189 (B1), when in the special probability game mode, background effects specific to the special probability game mode are displayed.

As shown in Figure 189 (B2), in the time-shortened play state, an image indicating that the time-shortened play state is in progress and an image indicating the maximum number of special game plays that can be performed in that time-shortened play state are displayed. In the example shown in Figure 189 (B2), the text image "XX mode" is an image indicating that the time-shortened play state is in progress, and the text image "50 time-shortened play remaining" is an image indicating the maximum number of special game plays that can be performed in that time-shortened play state.

Also, although not clearly shown in Figure 189 (B2), when in time-saving play mode, background effects specific to time-saving play mode are displayed.

When a transition is made from the probability variable gaming state or the time-limited gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the same effects are executed as when a transition is made from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state (see Figures 188 (B), 188 (C), and 189 (A)). On the other hand, when a transition is made to the normal gaming state without a transition from the probability variable gaming state or the time-limited gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, as described above, the normal transition background effect A or normal transition background effect B, which is specific to a transition to the normal gaming state, is executed on the symbol display unit 341, depending on whether or not the right to play the second special symbol game is reserved at the end of the probability variable gaming state or the time-limited gaming state.

In addition, although the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a so-called ST, the arrangement of the first winning slot 314, second winning slot 315, through gates 317L and 317R, and variable winning slot 316 is the same as that of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, which is configured as a loop probability variable machine. Therefore, in the normal game state, left-handed shots that launch the game ball into the left region of the game board 31 are more advantageous to the player, and left-handed shots are encouraged. In the probability variable game state and the time-limited game state, right-handed shots that launch the game ball into the right region of the game board 31 are more advantageous to the player, and right-handed shots are encouraged. For this reason, at the start of a jackpot game, for example, during the opening of the jackpot game, an image urging the player to hit right (in Figure 188(B), the text image "Hit Right" and an image of a right-pointing arrow) is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, when transitioning from a probability variable game state or a time-limited game state to a normal game state, as shown in FIG. 188(C), for example, an image encouraging the player to hit to the left (in FIG. 188(C), an image of the text "Hit Left" and an image of an arrow pointing left) is displayed in front of the normal transition background image displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as a background effect during normal transition. In this way, when the recommended launch area for game balls onto the game board 31 changes due to the transition from one game state to another, the recommended launch area on the game board 31 is displayed clearly on the pattern display unit 341, so the player can avoid wasting game balls by shooting game balls that are clearly displayed on the pattern display unit 341.

<Steps S3824 and S3825>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in Fig. 187, if the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S3820: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the probability variable game state flag indicating the probability variable game state is set to ON (step S3824). When the probability variable game state is entered, the probability variable game state flag is set to ON in step S3803 of the command determination process in Fig. 186.

If the high probability game state flag is set to ON (step S3824: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the high probability game state presentation setting process (step S3825) and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the high probability game state flag is set to OFF (step S3824: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3826.

Here, in the probability variable game state effect setting process, the effects to be executed in the special game are set by executing processes similar to steps S3103 to S3106 in the command determination process of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above, based on the variable display time of the special symbol included in the special symbol variation pattern command, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, etc. Furthermore, in the probability variable game state effect setting process, a unique background image (background effect) indicating the probability variable game state described above is set, as well as a text image indicating the current probability variable game state (for example, a text image of "○○RUSH") and an image indicating the maximum number of special symbol games that can be executed in the probability variable game state (for example, a text image of "ST 50 times") (see FIG. 189 (B1)).

<Steps S3826 and S3827>
If the probability variable game state flag is set to OFF (step S3824: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a time-saving game state flag indicating a time-saving game state is set to ON (step S3826). When the game is shifted to the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3805 of the command determination process in FIG. 186.

If the time-shortened game state flag is set to ON (step S3826: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the time-shortened game state presentation setting process (step S3827) and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the time-shortened game state flag is set to OFF (step S3826: No), the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process.

Here, in the time-saving game state effect setting process, the effects to be executed in special game mode are set by executing processes similar to steps S3103 to S3106 in the command determination process of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above, based on the variable display time of the special symbol included in the special symbol variation pattern command, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, etc. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state effect setting process, a unique background image (background effect) indicating the time-saving game mode described above is set, as well as a text image indicating the time-saving game mode (for example, a text image of "XX mode") and an image indicating the maximum number of special symbol games that can be executed in the special game mode (for example, a text image of "50 time-saving games remaining") (see FIG. 189 (B2)).

As described above, in this embodiment, in the jackpot gaming state and the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, time-limited gaming state) serving as advantageous state control, the MPU 41 performs jackpot signal output processing as information output processing, and the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information that can identify the state is continuously output externally via the external output terminal board 101 serving as an information output unit. This allows, for example, the hall computer 102 of an amusement hall to determine whether the jackpot gaming state and the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, time-limited gaming state) serving as advantageous state control are in effect based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 serving as output information. This allows the hall computer 102 to determine the number of consecutive jackpot games from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, time-limited gaming state) serving as advantageous state control. Meanwhile, the data display 103 attached to the gaming machine 10 is able to display the number of consecutive jackpot games from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the high-frequency support mode (probable variable game state, time-saving game state) used for advantageous state control, using information (signals) generated and output based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2, which is output information from the hall computer 102.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the high-frequency support mode (high probability game state, time-limited game state) serving as advantageous state control has ended, the jackpot signal output process by the MPU 41 serving as information output process continues to output an extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information for a predetermined period via the external output terminal board 101 serving as information output unit, which can identify that this is a period during which it is possible to execute a variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved rights stored in at least the second special symbol reservation number storage area NAB of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB set in RAM 412 serving as the reservation number storage area or the special symbol reservation storage area corresponding area set in RAM 512. For example, the hall computer 102 of an amusement hall can understand, based on the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information, that a predetermined variable display based on the reservation at the end of the high-frequency support mode (high probability game state, time-limited game state) serving as advantageous state control has ended. As a result, when the result of the jackpot lottery performed by the MPU 41 as the determination process is to execute a jackpot game, the hall computer 102 can determine, based on the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information, that the predetermined variable display is the predetermined variable display due to the suspension at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-limited game state) as advantageous state control. Therefore, the hall computer 102 can count jackpot games executed based on the predetermined variable display due to the suspension at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-limited game state) as advantageous state control, as part of the number of consecutive jackpot games since the start of the first jackpot game, which is determined based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information. As a result, the data display 103 attached to the gaming machine 10 can display jackpot games executed based on the predetermined variable display due to the suspension at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-limited game state) as advantageous state control, as part of the number of consecutive jackpot games.

In addition, in this embodiment, by continuously outputting the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information for a predetermined period of time, the data display 103 attached to the gaming machine 10, for example, can execute an effect indicating that this is a period in which it is possible to execute variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the pending status at the end of the high-frequency support mode (high probability game mode, time-limited game mode) as advantageous state control. Specifically, after the high-frequency support mode (high probability game mode, time-limited game mode) as advantageous state control ends, the data display 103 can display text images, such as "Consecutive jackpot challenge" and "Jackpot challenge," that clearly indicate or suggest to the player that an increase in the number of consecutive jackpots is possible. This makes it possible to clearly indicate to the player that a period in which an increase in the number of consecutive jackpots is possible even after the end of the high-frequency support mode (high probability game mode, time-limited game mode) as advantageous state control ends, thereby increasing the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive jackpots and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In this way, in this embodiment, by providing more detailed notifications according to each game state, it is possible to more effectively control each game state. Specifically, based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information output via the external output terminal board 101 as an information output unit by the jackpot signal output processing by the MPU 41 as information output processing, it is possible to determine whether the jackpot game state or the high-frequency support mode (probable variable game state, time-limited game state) as advantageous state control is in effect. Based on the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information output by the MPU 41 and external output terminal board 101 as information output unit or information output processing, it is possible to determine whether the predetermined variable display is pending at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probable variable game state, time-limited game state) as advantageous state control is in effect. This allows the data display 103 attached to the gaming machine 10 to display the jackpot game executed based on the predetermined variable display pending at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probable variable game state, time-limited game state) as advantageous state control, as part of the number of consecutive jackpot games. Therefore, when a jackpot game is executed in response to a hold at the end of a high-frequency support mode (probability variable game mode, time-limited game mode) that serves as advantageous state control, a discrepancy is prevented between the number of consecutive jackpot games displayed on the data display 103 and the number of consecutive jackpot games recognized by the player. As a result, a decrease in the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive jackpot games displayed on the data display 103 is prevented, preventing a decrease in interest and amusement in the game.

In this embodiment, the present invention has been described using a so-called ST machine as an example, but the technical concept of the present invention can be applied to gaming machines that transition to at least one of a high-frequency support mode, a probability variable game state, or a time-saving game state, after the end of a jackpot game. For example, in addition to ST machines, the present invention can also be applied to loop probability variable machines and type 1/2 mixed machines.

In a Type 1/2 hybrid machine, in addition to a jackpot or miss, a small jackpot is also set as a result of the jackpot lottery, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a small jackpot, a small jackpot game is executed. In a small jackpot game, for example, a game ball can enter a V entry port, which triggers a jackpot game when the game ball enters, and a jackpot game is executed when a game ball enters the V entry port, in addition to when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. In a Type 1/2 hybrid machine in which such a small jackpot game is executed, the output of jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 is different from that of an ST in which a small jackpot game is not set.

Here, Figure 190 shows an example of the output of jackpot signal 1 on a type 1/type 2 hybrid machine, and Figure 191 shows an example of the output of jackpot signal 2 on a type 1/type 2 hybrid machine. Note that Figures 190 and 191 are examples of when a time-saving game is executed after the end of a jackpot game.

As shown in Figure 190 (A), in small win games on a Type 1/2 hybrid machine, jackpot signal 1 is not output during time-saving play, nor is it output at the start of small win game. Also, as shown in Figure 190 (B), in small win games on a Type 1/2 hybrid machine, jackpot signal 1 begins to be output when the gaming ball enters the V winning slot (V winning). Jackpot signal 1, which begins to be output when the gaming ball enters the V winning slot, continues to be output during the jackpot game that begins after the small win game ends, triggered by the gaming ball entering the V winning slot.

As shown in Figure 191 (A), in small win games on a Type 1/2 hybrid machine, jackpot signal 2 is output during time-saving play and is also output when a small win game is being played. Also, as shown in Figure 190 (B), in small win games on a Type 1/2 hybrid machine, jackpot signal 2 continues to be output during the jackpot game that begins after the small win game ends, triggered by the game ball entering the V winning slot.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the right to execute a variable display is reserved in the reserved number memory area at the end of advantageous state control, specific output information indicating that it is a period in which the specified variable display corresponding to the reserved right can be executed is continuously output to the specified output information that can be used for jackpot game state control and advantageous state control. However, this specific output information may also be continuously output to specific output information other than the specified output information identification information.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when there is a second special symbol reserve (second special symbol remaining reserve), which is a reserve of the right to play a second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state), a specific identification signal that can identify that the second special symbol game is being played on the second special symbol remaining reserve until the execution of the second special symbol game on the second special symbol remaining reserve is completed is output as an extension signal of jackpot signal 2, but this specific identification signal may also be output as jackpot signal 1, or may be output as a signal separate from jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2.

In addition, in this embodiment, the predetermined output information is output as a level signal, and the specific output information is output as a pulse signal or an on-off signal, but the predetermined output information and the specific output information extension signal may be output in different output formats. For example, the predetermined output information may be output as a pulse signal or an on-off signal, and the specific output information may be output as a level signal. Also, the predetermined output information and the specific output information extension signal may be output as level signals with different levels, or the predetermined output information and the specific output information may be output as pulse signals or on-off signals with different output periods or output stop periods.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the basic signal of jackpot signal 2 is output as a level signal, and the extended signal of jackpot signal 2 is output as a pulse signal or on-off signal, but the basic signal and extended signal of jackpot signal 2 may have different output modes. For example, the basic signal of jackpot signal 2 may be output as a pulse signal or on-off signal, and the extended signal of jackpot signal 2 may be output as a level signal. Furthermore, the basic signal and extended signal of jackpot signal 2 may be output as level signals with different levels, or the basic signal and extended signal of jackpot signal 2 may be output as pulse signals or on-off signals with different output periods or output stop periods.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to tenth embodiments described above are possible, to the extent applicable.

Furthermore, in each embodiment, it is also possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments to the extent applicable.

[Twelfth embodiment]
As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine is equipped with a "numerical value storage process" as a first numerical information setting means and a second numerical information setting means, a "subtraction process" as a subtraction means, a "display effect" as a specific effect, an "effect display process" as an effect display means, a "game state" as a specific game state and a predetermined game state, an "update process" as an update means, and a "correspondence display" as a specific correspondence display.

The first numerical information setting means and the second numerical information setting means may be processes for setting (storing) various numerical information related to the game. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the first numerical information setting means and the second numerical information setting means may be, for example, a process for setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to the values of various counters obtained by a start winning entry, a process for setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to the values of various counters obtained by a first special jackpot lottery executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning slot, a process for setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to the values of various counters obtained by a second special jackpot lottery executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning slot, a process for setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the first special symbol for the first special symbol game, a process for setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the second special symbol for the second special symbol game, a process for setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information notified by the first special symbol game, etc. A process for setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to the result of a jackpot lottery, a process for setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to the result of a jackpot lottery announced by a second special symbol game, a process for setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to the values of various counters obtained by a regular symbol lottery, a process for setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of a regular symbol for a regular symbol game, a process for setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to the result of a regular symbol lottery announced by a regular symbol game, a process for setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to the number of rounds played in a jackpot game, a process for setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of times a special symbol game is performed in high support mode (a state in which the frequency or probability of operation of an electric device provided in the second winning slot is high), A process of setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of times a special symbol game can be played in a time-saving game state a, which is a high support mode to which the mode is switched after the end of a jackpot game; a process of setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of times a special symbol game can be played in a time-saving game state b, which is a high support mode to which the mode is switched by playing a specific number of special symbol games after the end of a jackpot game; a process of setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of times a special symbol game can be played in a time-saving game state c, which is a high support mode to which the mode is switched after the end of a special symbol game in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop; a process of setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to the remaining number of times a special symbol game must be played before the mode is switched to the time-saving game state b; setting in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to a first special symbol reserved number N, which is the reserved number of rights to play a first special symbol game. Examples of such processing include a process of setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number M, which is the reserved number of rights to play the second special symbol game, a process of setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to the regular symbol variable reservation number x, which is the reserved number of rights to play the regular symbol game, a process of setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number N displayed on the display device, a process of setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area numerical information corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number M displayed on the display device, a process of setting numerical information corresponding to the regular symbol reservation number x displayed on the display device, a process of setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area the number of first special symbol reservation images displayed on the display device corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number N, a process of setting (storing) in a predetermined memory area the number of second special symbol reservation images displayed on the display device corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number M, and any combination thereof.

The subtraction means may be a process for subtracting various kinds of numerical information. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the subtraction means may be, for example, a process for subtracting numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the first special symbol in a first special symbol game, a process for subtracting numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the second special symbol in a second special symbol game, a process for subtracting numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the normal symbol in a normal symbol game, a process for subtracting numerical information corresponding to the number of rounds played in a jackpot game, a process for subtracting numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of times a special symbol game can be played in a high support mode, a process for subtracting numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special symbol games that can be played in a time-saving game state, b process for subtracting numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special symbol games that can be played in a time-saving game state, c process for subtracting numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special symbol games that can be played in a time-saving game state, b process for subtracting numerical information corresponding to the remaining number of times a game needs to be played before transitioning to the time-saving game state, Examples of such subtraction methods include a process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the number of times a special symbol game has been played, a process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number N, which is the number of reserved rights to play a first special symbol game, a process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number M, which is the number of reserved rights to play a second special symbol game, a process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the regular symbol variable reservation number x, which is the number of reserved rights to play a regular symbol game, a process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number N displayed on the display device, a process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number M displayed on the display device, a process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the regular symbol reservation number x displayed on the display device, a process of subtracting the number of second special symbol reservation images displayed on the display device corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number N, a process of subtracting the number of second special symbol reservation images displayed on the display device corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number M, and any combination thereof.

The updating means may be any process that updates various numerical information. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the updating means may, for example, be a process for updating numerical information in a predetermined memory area that stores numerical information corresponding to the values of various counters obtained by a jackpot lottery; a process for updating numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the first special symbol in a first special symbol game; a process for updating numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the second special symbol in a second special symbol game; a process for updating numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the normal symbol in a normal symbol game; a process for updating numerical information corresponding to the number of rounds played in a jackpot game; a process for updating numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of times a special symbol game can be played in a high support mode; a process for updating numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special symbol games that can be played in a time-saving game state; b process for updating numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special symbol games that can be played in a time-saving game state; c process for updating numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special symbol games that can be played in a time-saving game state. a process of updating numerical information corresponding to the number, b process of updating numerical information corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol games required before transitioning to time-saving game state, a process of updating numerical information corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number N, which is the reserved number of rights to play the first special symbol game, a process of updating numerical information corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number M, which is the reserved number of rights to play the second special symbol game, a process of updating numerical information corresponding to the normal symbol variable reserved number x, which is the reserved number of rights to play normal symbol game, a process of updating numerical information corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number N displayed on the display device, a process of updating numerical information corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number M displayed on the display device, a process of updating numerical information corresponding to the normal symbol reserved number x displayed on the display device, a process of updating the number of second special symbol reserved images displayed on the display device corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number M, which is the reserved number of rights to play the second special symbol game, and any combination thereof.

The specific effects may be effects that are executed in a specified game state. As long as the purpose of this invention can be realized, specific effects may include, for example, effects executed during the first special symbol game, effects executed during the second special symbol game, effects executed during a jackpot game, effects executed during a small jackpot game, effects executed during a regular symbol game, effects executed during a regular jackpot game, effects executed during a low support mode (a state in which the frequency or probability of operation of the electric device provided in the second winning slot is low), effects executed during a high support mode, effects executed in a state in which a jackpot game is likely to occur, and effects executed in a state in which the result of the jackpot lottery is highly likely to result in a jackpot that is favorable to the player. Effects to be executed, effects to be executed in a state where a small win game is likely to occur, effects to be executed in a state where the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a high probability of resulting in a small win that is advantageous to the player, effects to be executed during a time-shortened game state, effects to be executed during b time-shortened game state, effects to be executed during c time-shortened game state, effects to be executed during first special symbol game in normal game state, effects to be executed during second special symbol game in normal game state, effects to be executed during first special symbol game in a time-shortened game state, effects to be executed during second special symbol game in a time-shortened game state, effects to be executed during first special symbol game in b time-shortened game state, An effect executed during the execution of the second special symbol game in the time-saving game state, an effect executed during the execution of the first special symbol game in the time-saving game state c, an effect executed during the execution of the second special symbol game in the time-saving game state c, an effect executed during the execution of the first special symbol game triggered by a game ball entering the first winning slot in the normal game state, an effect executed during the execution of the second special symbol game triggered by a game ball entering the second winning slot in the normal game state, an effect executed during the execution of the first special symbol game triggered by a game ball entering the first winning slot in the time-saving game state a, an effect executed during the execution of the first special symbol game triggered by a game ball entering the second winning slot in the time-saving game state a Examples of such effects include an effect executed during the execution of the second special symbol game triggered by a game ball entering the first winning slot in the b time-saving game state, an effect executed during the execution of the first special symbol game triggered by a game ball entering the second winning slot in the b time-saving game state, an effect executed during the execution of the first special symbol game triggered by a game ball entering the first winning slot in the c time-saving game state, an effect executed during the execution of the second special symbol game triggered by a game ball entering the second winning slot in the c time-saving game state, and any combination thereof.

The effect display means may be a process that displays effects in a predetermined game state. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the effect display means may be, for example, a process that displays effects for first special symbol gameplay, a process that displays effects for second special symbol gameplay, a process that displays effects for jackpot gameplay, a process that displays effects for small jackpot gameplay, a process that displays effects for normal symbol gameplay, a process that displays effects for normal jackpot gameplay, a process that displays effects for low support mode, a process that displays effects for high support mode, a process that displays effects in a state where jackpot gameplay is likely to occur, a process that displays effects in a state where the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is favorable to the player and there is a high probability of a jackpot, a process that displays effects in a state where a small jackpot is likely to occur, a process that displays effects in a state where the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is favorable to the player, a process that displays effects in a state where a small jackpot is likely to occur ... a process for displaying effects in a state where a big win lottery result is likely to result in a small win advantageous to the player, a process for displaying effects in a time-shortened game state, b process for displaying effects in a time-shortened game state, c process for displaying effects in a time-shortened game state, a process for displaying effects in a normal game state, a process for displaying effects for a first special symbol game in a time-shortened game state, a process for displaying effects for a second special symbol game in a time-shortened game state, b process for displaying effects for a first special symbol game in a time-shortened game state, b time-shortened game state a process of displaying an effect for a second special symbol game in a time-saving game state, a process of displaying an effect for a first special symbol game in a time-saving game state, a process of displaying an effect for a second special symbol game in a time-saving game state, a process of displaying an effect for a first special symbol game executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning slot in a normal game state, a process of displaying an effect for a second special symbol game executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning slot in a normal game state, a process of displaying an effect for a first special symbol game executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning slot in a time-saving game state, a a process of displaying an effect for a second special symbol game triggered by a game ball entering the first winning slot in a time-saving game state; b process of displaying an effect for a first special symbol game triggered by a game ball entering the second winning slot in a time-saving game state; c process of displaying an effect for a first special symbol game triggered by a game ball entering the first winning slot in a time-saving game state; c process of displaying an effect for a second special symbol game triggered by a game ball entering the second winning slot in a time-saving game state; and any combination thereof.

A specific gaming state may be any gaming state in which a specific game from among multiple types of games can be played. Specific gaming states may include, as long as they are capable of realizing the intent of this invention, a gaming state in which a first special symbol game can be played, a state in which the right to play a first special symbol game is reserved, a gaming state in which a second special symbol game can be played, a state in which the right to play a second special symbol game is reserved, a gaming state in which a second special symbol game can be played, a gaming state in which a jackpot game can be played, a gaming state in which a small jackpot game can be played, a gaming state in which a normal symbol game can be played, a gaming state in which a normal symbol jackpot game can be played, a gaming state in low support mode, a normal gaming state in low support mode and a low probability mode with a low jackpot probability, a gaming state in high support mode, a high support mode and a jackpot These include a probability variable game state, which is a high probability mode with a high probability of winning, a time-limited game state, which is a high support mode and low probability mode, time-limited game state A, time-limited game state B, time-limited game state C, a game state in which jackpot games are likely to occur, a game state in which the jackpot lottery result is favorable to the player and there is a high probability of the jackpot being a jackpot, a game state in which small jackpot games are likely to occur, a game state in which the jackpot lottery result is favorable to the player and there is a high probability of the jackpot being a small jackpot, a game state in which shooting the game ball into the left area of the game board (so-called left hits) is encouraged, a game state in which shooting the game ball into the right area of the game board (so-called right hits) is encouraged, and any combination thereof.

The specific corresponding display may be a display corresponding to various numerical information. As long as the purpose of this invention can be realized, specific corresponding displays may include, for example, a display corresponding to the number of rounds played in a jackpot game, a display corresponding to the balls won in that jackpot game, a display corresponding to the number of consecutive jackpots, a display corresponding to the total balls won during consecutive jackpots, a display corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in a probability variation game state, a display corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol games required before transitioning to b time-saving game state in normal game state, a display corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in time-saving game state, a display corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in a time-saving game state, a display corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in b time-saving game state, a display corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in c time-saving game state, Examples include a display corresponding to the number of times special symbol games can be played, a display corresponding to the remaining number of times special symbol games can be played in a state where a jackpot game is likely to occur, a display corresponding to the remaining number of times special symbol games can be played in a state where the result of the jackpot lottery is highly likely to result in a jackpot that is favorable to the player, a display corresponding to the remaining number of times special symbol games can be played in a state where a small jackpot game is likely to occur, a display corresponding to the remaining number of times special symbol games can be played in a state where the result of the jackpot lottery is highly likely to result in a small jackpot that is favorable to the player, a display corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number N, which is the number of reserved rights to play the first special symbol game, a display corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number M, which is the number of reserved rights to play the second special symbol game, and any combination thereof.

Gaming machines are equipped with multiple types of game states with different conditions for occurrence and game value. Notifications are sent to indicate that each game state is in effect. While most game states are independent and do not overlap, some types may overlap. For example, in the past, fulfilling certain conditions in a game state with lower value could result in a transition to a game state with higher value. In this case, since this transition is desirable for the player, notifications are switched based on the transition of the game state.

However, if a game state of lower value occurs during a certain game state, the player may not necessarily want the notification to switch to the game state of lower value. Therefore, it is desirable to appropriately control notifications when game states overlap.

The gaming machine may be equipped with a first winning slot that triggers the execution of a first special symbol game and a second winning slot that triggers the execution of a second special symbol game. An electric device 315b is provided in the second winning slot, which switches between a state in which game balls enter the second winning slot and a state in which they are permitted. In this case, the game state is set to a low support mode, in which the frequency or probability of operation of the electric device 315b is low, and a high support mode, in which the frequency or probability of operation of the electric device 315b is high. The game state may be set to a normal game state in which the probability of a jackpot is low and the game is in the low support mode, or a time-saving game state in which the probability of a jackpot is low and the game is in the high support mode. In addition to time-saving game state A, which can be entered after the end of a jackpot game, time-saving game state C, which can be entered if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, may also be set.

On the other hand, gaming machines execute various effects according to the game state and game situation. For example, after a jackpot game ends, an effect (such as a RUSH effect) may be executed to indicate that the jackpot game is in an advantageous state where consecutive jackpot games are likely to occur. In a RUSH effect, the jackpot lottery results are announced through predetermined effects such as battle effects and mission effects. Furthermore, in the c-time-shortened game state, a c-time-shortened game state effect is executed to indicate that the game is in the c-time-shortened game state. In the c-time-shortened game state effect, a background image specific to the c-time-shortened game state and an image indicating that the game is in the c-time-shortened game state are displayed, as well as an image indicating the remaining number of special game plays in the c-time-shortened game state.

However, there are cases where the game transitions to the c-time reduced play state while a RUSH effect is being executed. In this case, if the c-time reduced play state effect for the c-time reduced play state is executed with priority over the RUSH effect, the RUSH effect will end midway and the game will switch to the c-time reduced play state effect. As a result, it will be impossible to check the results of the jackpot lottery during RUSH effects such as battle effects and mission effects. As a result, if the game switches to the c-time reduced play state effect while a RUSH effect is being executed, the RUSH effect will become meaningless, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will decrease.

In contrast, in the present invention, even if a specific condition is met during the execution of the second game operation while a specific effect is being executed, the specific response display is not initiated. Furthermore, in the present invention, even if an update condition is met during the execution of the second game operation while a specific effect is being executed, the updated specific response display is not initiated. In this way, if a specific condition or update condition is met during the execution of the second game operation while a specific effect is being executed, the specific response display is not initiated. This prevents the specific effect from being terminated prematurely by the specific response display, even if a specific condition or update condition is met during the execution of the second game operation while a specific effect is being executed, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the specific effect being terminated prematurely.

On the other hand, in the present invention, a specific correspondence display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the end of the specific effect is initiated based on the end of the specific effect. In this way, by initiating a specific correspondence display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the end of the specific effect, the specific correspondence display can be initiated without terminating the specific effect midway, preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the specific correspondence display not being initiated.

Specifically, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state a to which the transition occurs after the end of the time-saving jackpot game, the second special symbol reserve number M as the first numerical information corresponding to the second reserve number for the right to play the second special symbol game as the second game operation executed based on the game ball into the second winning port 315 as the second ball entry means is set in the second special symbol reserve number memory area NAB as the first counting means in step S1108 (see Figure 200) of the start winning process as the numerical value storage process, and based on the start of the second special symbol game for the second special symbol reserve as the subtraction condition, the second special symbol reserve number M set in the second special symbol reserve number memory area NAB is subtracted in step S3806 (see Figure 209) of the special symbol data setting process as the subtraction process. Furthermore, in this embodiment, for the second special symbol game that is executed based on the game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a, a RUSH effect is set as a display effect in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process that serves as the effect display process.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, based on the end of the special symbol game, which notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery as a specific condition is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, the game state is transitioned to the time-saving symbol c game state, and second numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of special symbol games that can be executed in the time-saving symbol c game state is set in the time-saving symbol c number counter as the second counting means in step S4211 (see FIG. 217) of the game state transition process as the numerical value storage process. Also, in this embodiment, the remaining number of special symbol games that can be executed in the time-saving symbol c game state is updated in step S3724 (see FIG. 208) of the special symbol game control process based on the start of the special symbol game as the update condition, and the remaining number of time-saving symbol c games can be displayed (presented) as a corresponding display based on the value of the time-saving symbol c number counter after the update.

In this embodiment, for the second special symbol game that is executed based on the game ball to the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving symbol a game state to which the transition occurs after the end of the jackpot game, if the game state is transitioned to the time-saving symbol c game state based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a miss for the time-saving symbol stop during the execution of the RUSH effect as a display effect in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process as an effect display process, the remaining number of time-saving symbol c games (effect) as a corresponding display in the time-saving symbol c game state is not executed during the execution of the RUSH effect. In this way, when the game state is transitioned to the c time-saving play state during a RUSH effect, the remaining number of c time-saving play times in the c time-saving play state is not displayed (effect) while the RUSH effect is being executed. Therefore, even if the game state is transitioned to the c time-saving play state because the jackpot lottery result during the RUSH effect is a miss for the time-saving pattern stop, the remaining number of c time-saving play times display (effect) prevents the RUSH effect from ending prematurely, preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the RUSH effect ending prematurely.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the game state transitions to the c-time-saving game state while a RUSH effect is being executed as a display effect, the remaining number of c-time-saving game plays (effect) is displayed after the RUSH effect ends. Therefore, in this embodiment, based on the end of the RUSH effect, a display of the remaining number of special game plays that can be executed in the c-time-saving game state at the time the RUSH effect ends is started. In this way, based on the end of the RUSH effect, a display of the remaining number of special game plays that can be executed in the c-time-saving game state at the time the RUSH effect ends is started, so that the display of the remaining number of special game plays that can be executed in the c-time-saving game state can be started without ending the RUSH effect midway, preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the display of the remaining number of special game plays that can be executed in the c-time-saving game state not being started.

This embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 192 to 229, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above. However, important points in this embodiment may be explained again even if they have already been explained in the first embodiment described above.

[Configuration of gaming machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to Figures 192 to 194. Here, Figure 192 is a front view showing an example of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and Figures 193 and 194 are cross-sectional views showing the main part of the feather role device 83 provided on the gaming board 31 shown in Figure 192.

[Through Gate 317R]
As shown in FIG. 192, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, a through gate 317R is provided only in the right region of the gaming board 31, and no through gate is provided in the left region of the gaming board 31. Here, as described in the first embodiment, a gaming ball launched into the right region of the gaming board 31 can enter the second winning slot 315. The second winning slot 315 is also provided with an electric device 315b that switches between a state in which the entry of the gaming ball into the second winning slot 315 is restricted and a state in which the entry is permitted. The electric device 315b is activated when the result of the normal winning lottery, which is triggered by the passing of the gaming ball through the through gate 317R, is a normal winning lottery (see FIGS. 205 and 206). Therefore, in order to activate the electric device 315b and cause the gaming ball to enter the second winning slot 315, a right-handed shot is required to launch the gaming ball into the right region of the gaming board 31. In this embodiment, since no through gate is provided in the left area of the game board 31, step S1301 is omitted in the through gate processing of FIG.

[Feather accessory device 83]
Unlike the first embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured as a type 1/type 2 mixed machine rather than a loop probability variable machine, and is equipped with a feather role device 83 provided in the right area of the gaming board 31. The feather role device 83 is activated in a small jackpot game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second special symbol game is a small jackpot, and provides an opportunity to execute a type 2 jackpot game by a game ball entering a V winning slot 833 described below in the small jackpot game.

The feather device 83 is located above the variable winning opening 316 and to the right of the symbol display unit 341. As shown in FIG. 83, the feather device 83 has an inlet 831 for introducing the game ball 99 into the feather device 83, and a movable wing 832 that is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between a closed position (solid line position in FIG. 193) that closes the inlet 831 and an open position (dashed line position in FIG. 193) that opens the inlet 831. When the movable wing 832 is in the standby position and the inlet 831 is closed by the movable wing 832, the game ball 99 cannot be introduced into the feather device 83. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 194(A) and FIG. 194(A), when the movable wing 832 is in the open position and the inlet 831 is open, the movable wing 832 can receive the game ball 99. The game balls 99 received by the movable blade portion 832 can be introduced into the inside of the feather device 83 through the introduction port 831. When the result of the big win lottery triggered by a win at the second winning port 315 is a small win (see Figure 198 (A)), the movable blade portion 832 is actuated to the open position and opens the introduction port 831 for a predetermined time, for example, the time it takes for one to three game balls 99 to enter the feather device 83 (1.8 seconds or less). Of course, the opening time of the introduction port 831 in the event of a small win can be set as appropriate and is not limited to the time shown above.

The interior of the feather device 83 is provided with a V winning opening 833, a normal winning opening 834, and a V winning opening opening/closing unit 835. The V winning opening 833 and the normal winning opening 834 are each provided with a ball entry sensor (not shown), which detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning opening 833 or the normal winning opening 834. The V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between a closed position (see Figure 194(A)) that closes the V winning opening 833 and an open position (see Figure 194(B)) that opens the V winning opening 833. The V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 normally waits in the closed position that closes the V winning opening 833, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win, it is activated at a predetermined timing to open the V winning opening 833.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, with reference to Figures 195 to 199, various tables and the like used in the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

[Regular winning/losing table, etc.]
Here, Figure 195 is a diagram showing an example of a normal winning/losing table, etc. In this embodiment, two types of normal winning/losing tables are set: a normal game state normal winning/losing table shown in Figure 195 (A), and a time-saving game state normal winning/losing table shown in Figure 195 (B). That is, in this embodiment, as described later, the normal winning probability differs between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state is set to have a higher normal winning probability than the normal game state.

The normal game state normal win table shown in Figure 195 (A) is a table used in the normal win lottery in the normal game state, which is a low support mode in which the operation frequency or probability of the electric device 315b installed in the second winning slot 315 is low. As shown in Figure 195 (A), the normal game state normal win table is set so that a normal win occurs when the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is 0, and a loss occurs when the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is between 1 and 299. In other words, in the normal game state (low support mode), the probability of a normal win in the normal win lottery is set to 1/300, making it a low-profit state in which the second winning slot 315 is unlikely to open.

The time-saving game state normal win/loss table shown in Figure 195 (B) is a table used in the normal win lottery in the time-saving game state, which is a high support mode in which the operation frequency or probability of the electric device 315b installed in the second winning slot 315 is high. As shown in Figure 195 (B), the time-saving game state normal win/loss table, unlike the normal game state normal win/loss table, is set such that a loss occurs when the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is 0, and a normal win occurs when the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is 1 to 299. In other words, in the time-saving game state (high support mode), the probability of a normal win in the normal win lottery is set to 299/300, which is higher than the normal game state (low support mode), and it is a highly profitable state in which the second winning slot 315 is more likely to open.

As such, in a gaming state in low support mode, the second winning slot 315 is unlikely to open, and therefore the player is unlikely to gain any significant benefit from the second winning slot 315 being opened.

In this embodiment, as described below, the time-saving game states are defined as follows: time-saving game state a, which is entered after the end of a jackpot game; time-saving game state b, which is entered after a specified number of variable game plays (e.g., 1,000 times) have been played after the end of a jackpot game; and time-saving game state c, which is entered if the jackpot lottery result is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop. However, the probability of a normal symbol win is set to be the same in all of time-saving game states a through c. Of course, the probability of a normal symbol win may be set to differ depending on the type of time-saving game state. Furthermore, the normal symbol win probability in the normal game state (low support mode) and the normal symbol win probability in the time-saving game state (high support mode) are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 195(A) and 195(B) and can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the game state in which the short game state normal symbol win/loss table is referenced may be the special symbol probability variable state or the time-saving game state.

Here, Figures 195(C) and 195(D) are diagrams showing examples of normal map fluctuation tables. In this embodiment, two types of normal map fluctuation tables are set: a normal game state normal map fluctuation table shown in Figure 195(C) and a time-saving game state normal map fluctuation table. In other words, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the normal map fluctuation time differs between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and the normal map fluctuation time is set shorter in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 195 (C), in the normal game state normal map fluctuation table, the normal game state normal map fluctuation time is set to 30 seconds when the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 is between 0 and 98, and to 1 second when the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 is 99. In other words, in normal game state, the normal map fluctuation time is set long, and the operation frequency of the electric device 315b (the opening frequency of the second winning slot 315) is set low.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 195 (D), in the time-saving game state normal map fluctuation table, the value is set to 1 second when the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 is between 0 and 99. In other words, in the time-saving game state, the normal map fluctuation time is set to be short, and the operation frequency of the electric device 315b (the opening frequency of the second winning slot 315) is set to be high.

Here, Figure 195 (E) shows an example of the relationship between the type of game state and the opening mode (opening time) of the electric device 315b in a normal winning game that is executed when the result of the normal winning lottery is a normal winning game.

As shown in Figure 195 (E), if the result of the regular winning lottery is a regular winning lottery, as described above, the electric device 315b is opened during the regular winning game, allowing game balls 99 to enter the second winning slot 315, but the opening mode (maximum opening time) of the electric device 315b during the regular winning game is set according to the game state when the regular winning lottery is executed. Note that in this embodiment, even before the maximum opening time has elapsed, if five game balls enter the second winning slot 315, the electric device 315b is closed, and the maximum number of game balls that can enter the second winning slot 315 per opening of the electric device 315b is set to five.

Specifically, in the normal game mode, which is a low support mode, and in the time-saving game mode c, which is triggered by a jackpot lottery result that results in a time-saving symbol stop miss, the maximum opening time of the electric device 315b is set to 0.1 seconds (short opening), which is shorter than the interval between game ball launches (0.6 seconds). In this short opening, even if game balls are continuously shot into the right area of the game board 31, it is set to be impossible or extremely difficult for the game balls to enter the second winning slot 315. Therefore, in the normal game mode and the time-saving game mode c, left-handed shots that shoot game balls into the left area of the game board 31 are encouraged. Furthermore, in the time-saving game mode c, the maximum number of time-saving plays is set to 10, 20, 30, or 40 depending on the type of time-saving symbol stop miss, and the game mode is transitioned to the normal game mode when a special symbol play is executed for the maximum number of time-saving plays that results in a jackpot lottery result that results in a miss.

As mentioned above, the c time-saving game state is entered when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving pattern stop. Also, as will be described later, in special game play when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving pattern stop, decorative patterns are displayed in the pattern display unit 341 in a combination corresponding to the miss for the time-saving pattern stop. Also, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, multiple types (four types) are set as the maximum number of time-saving game plays in the c time-saving game state, and the time-saving pattern corresponding to the maximum number of time-saving game plays is displayed. For example, as described below, in the case of a time-saving symbol stop miss A where the maximum number of time-saving plays is 10, the non-reach numbers "119" or "991" are displayed; in the case of a time-saving symbol stop miss B where the maximum number of time-saving plays is 20, the non-reach numbers "554" or "556" are displayed; in the case of a time-saving symbol stop miss C where the maximum number of time-saving plays is 30, the non-reach numbers "332" or "334" are displayed; and in the case of a time-saving symbol stop miss D where the maximum number of time-saving plays is 40, the non-reach numbers "776" or "778" are displayed (see FIG. 198 (D)). This allows the player to determine from the decorative symbol stop display combination that the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss, and further allows the player to determine the maximum number of time-saving plays in time-saving play state c.

In this embodiment, the maximum number of times time-shortened play is set to four in the c time-shortened play state, but it is also possible to set the maximum number of times time-shortened play in the c time-shortened play state to one to three, or to set multiple types other than four. The maximum number of times time-shortened play in the c time-shortened play state can also be changed in various ways.

On the other hand, in the time-saving game state A, which is entered after the end of a jackpot game, the maximum opening time of the electric device 315b is set to 15 seconds (long opening), which is 25 times the interval between game ball launches. In this long opening, if game balls are continuously shot into the right area of the game board 31, the maximum number of winning balls, five, can enter. Therefore, in the time-saving game state A, right-hand shots that shoot game balls into the right area of the game board 31 are encouraged. Also, in the time-saving game state A, the maximum number of time-saving games is set to one, and the game state is entered after one regular winning game has been executed.

In addition, in the b-time-saving game state, which is entered after a specified number of variable game plays (e.g., 1,000 plays) have been played after the end of a jackpot game, the maximum opening time of the electric device 315b is set to 3 seconds (medium opening), which is five times the interval between game balls being fired. In this medium opening, the expected number of balls that will enter when game balls 99 are shot out consecutively is set to 1 or more; for example, approximately 1 to 3 game balls will enter the second winning slot 315 for one normal win. Therefore, in the b-time-saving game state, right-hand shots that shoot game balls into the right area of the game board 31 are encouraged. In addition, in the b-time-saving game state, the maximum number of time-saving game plays is set to 500, and the game state will be entered after 500 special game plays that result in a loss in the jackpot lottery have been played.

In this embodiment, even if the maximum opening time has not yet elapsed, if five game balls enter the second winning opening 315, the electric device 315b will return to its original position, causing the second winning opening 315 to close.

Note that the maximum opening time and maximum number of openings of the electric device 315b during normal winning games in various game states are not limited to the example shown in Figure 195 (E) and can be changed as appropriate.

In the example shown in Figure 195 (E), only one type of maximum opening time and maximum number of openings of the electric device 315b is set for each game state as a normal winning game, but multiple types of maximum opening times and/or maximum opening times of the electric device 315b for a normal winning game may be set for at least one game state among the normal game state, time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, and time-saving game state c.

[First Special Chart Big Win Table]
The first special chart jackpot winning/losing table is used for the first special chart jackpot lottery that is executed when a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314. Here, FIG. 196(A) is a diagram showing an example of the first special chart jackpot winning/losing table.

As shown in Figure 196 (A), the first special chart jackpot win/loss table includes six jackpot win/loss tables corresponding to six levels of game setting values 1 to 6. In each jackpot win/loss table, the lottery result for the first special chart jackpot lottery is selected as either a jackpot or a loss, depending on the value (random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1. Also, in the first special chart jackpot win/loss table, the probability of the lottery result in the first special chart jackpot lottery being a jackpot increases in the order of game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1 (in descending order of game setting value), providing an advantage to the player.

In the first special chart jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 1, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 ranging from 0 to 65,535, 206 random numbers ranging from 0 to 205 correspond to jackpots, and the other random numbers correspond to losses, with the jackpot probability set at approximately 1/318.1 (206/65,536).

In the first special chart jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 2, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 between 0 and 65,535, 202 random numbers between 0 and 211 correspond to jackpots, and the other random numbers correspond to losses, with the jackpot probability set at approximately 1/309.1 (212/65,536).

In the first special chart jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 3, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 between 0 and 65,535, 218 random numbers between 0 and 217 correspond to jackpots, and the other random numbers correspond to losses, with the jackpot probability set at approximately 1/300.6 (218/65,536).

In the first special chart jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 4, of the 65,536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) between 0 and 65,535, 224 random numbers between 0 and 223 correspond to jackpots, and the other random numbers correspond to losses, with the jackpot probability set at approximately 1/292.6 (224/65,536).

In the first special chart jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 5, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 between 0 and 65,535, 230 random numbers between 0 and 229 correspond to jackpots, and the other random numbers correspond to losses, with the jackpot probability set at approximately 1/284.9 (230/65,536).

In the first special chart jackpot win/loss table for game setting value 6, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 ranging from 0 to 65,535, 236 random numbers ranging from 0 to 235 correspond to jackpots, and the other random numbers correspond to losses, with the jackpot probability set at approximately 1/277.7 (236/65,536).

Then, when the first special jackpot lottery is conducted based on the jackpot win/lose table selected according to the game setting value, the jackpot game is executed if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 indicates a jackpot.

In the first special chart jackpot win/loss table of this embodiment, the jackpot random number values are continuous, but the jackpot random number values may not be continuous and some or all of them may be discrete values.

Furthermore, six first special chart jackpot win/loss tables are provided corresponding to six levels of game setting values, but at least one first special chart jackpot win/loss table is sufficient, and the game setting values are not limited to six levels.

[First special chart jackpot type allocation table]
The first special chart jackpot type allocation table is used to allocate the type of jackpot when the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery, which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the first winning port 314, is a jackpot. Here, Fig. 196(B) is a diagram showing an example of a normal-a time-saving first special chart jackpot type allocation table, and Fig. 196(C) is a diagram showing an example of a b time-saving-c time-saving first special chart jackpot type allocation table.

The normal-a time-saving first special chart jackpot type allocation table shown in Figure 196 (B) is used when the game state at the start of the first special chart fluctuation is the normal game state or the a time-saving game state. In the normal-a time-saving first special chart jackpot type allocation table, of the 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random numbers) from 0 to 19, 12 random numbers from 0 to 11 are 4R time-saving jackpots, and 8 random numbers from 12 to 19 are 4R normal jackpots. In this embodiment, two types of first special chart jackpots are set: 4R time-saving jackpots and 4R normal jackpots, with the allocation rate for 4R time-saving jackpots set to 60% and the allocation rate for 4R normal jackpots set to 40%.

Here, if the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery is a 4R time-saving jackpot or a 4R regular jackpot, an open/close execution mode will be executed, in which the variable prize opening 316 is opened and a round of play is repeated twice.

Furthermore, in the case of a 4R time-saving jackpot, after the jackpot game executed based on this 4R time-saving jackpot ends, the system transitions to the time-saving game state a, which is a high support mode. In this time-saving game state a, the electric device 315b is activated once, but the maximum opening time of the electric device 315b is set to 15 seconds, which is 25 times the 0.6 second interval between game ball launches. Furthermore, the maximum number of game balls that can be won with one opening of the electric device 315b is five. Therefore, when transitioning to the time-saving game state a, a maximum of five second special game plays can be executed. In the case of a 4R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game executed based on this 4R normal jackpot ends, the system transitions to the normal game state, which is a low support mode.

The b-c time-saving first special chart jackpot type allocation table shown in Figure 196 (C) is used when the game state at the start of the first special chart fluctuation is the b time-saving game state or the c time-saving game state. In the b-c time-saving first special chart jackpot type allocation table, all 20 random number values (random number values) of the jackpot type counter C2 from 0 to 19 are 4R time-saving jackpots. In other words, if a first special chart jackpot occurs in the b time-saving game state or the c time-saving game state, the game will always transition to the a time-saving game state after the jackpot game executed based on the first special chart jackpot ends, resulting in a so-called RUSH direct hit jackpot. Note that RUSH is a state in which, as will be described later, the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning slot 315 will be a small jackpot is high (20% in this embodiment (see Figure 198 (A))), and this is advantageous for players who are likely to play consecutive jackpot games triggered by small jackpots.

[First special chart jackpot fluctuation table]
The first special chart jackpot fluctuation table is used to set the first special chart fluctuation pattern (variation display time) of the first special chart in the first special chart game executed for the first special chart jackpot lottery when the lottery result in the first special chart jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Here, Figure 196 (D) is a diagram showing an example of the first special chart jackpot fluctuation table.

As shown in Figure 196 (D), in the first special chart jackpot variation table, special chart variation patterns are pre-associated with the value of the special chart variation type counter CS1. In this first special chart jackpot variation table, one of the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected depending on the value (random number) of the special chart variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special chart jackpot variation table, of the 200 special chart variation type counter CS1 values from 0 to 199, 10 random number values from 0 to 9 correspond to special chart variation pattern "01," which has a variation display time of 30 seconds; 110 random number values from 10 to 119 correspond to special chart variation pattern "02," which has a variation display time of 60 seconds; and 80 random number values from 120 to 199 correspond to special chart variation pattern "03," which has a variation display time of 90 seconds.

Here, if special symbol variation pattern "01" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the variation type (presentation pattern type) as a normal reach presentation pattern in which the special symbol variation display time is 30 seconds, and the normal reach presentation pattern is executed on the symbol display unit 341, etc. The normal reach presentation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the special symbol game presentation is a normal reach presentation. Also, if special symbol variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the variation type (presentation pattern type) as a super reach presentation pattern in which the special symbol variation display time is 60 seconds, and the super reach presentation pattern is executed on the symbol display unit 341, etc. The super reach presentation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the special symbol game presentation is a super reach presentation. Furthermore, if special symbol variation pattern "03" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the variation type (presentation pattern) as a special reach presentation pattern in which the special symbol variation display time is the longest at 90 seconds, and the special reach presentation pattern is executed on the symbol display unit 341, etc. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the special chart game effect is a special reach effect.

[First special drawing miss type allocation table]
The first special symbol loss type allocation table is used to allocate the type of loss when the lottery result in the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a loss. Here, Figure 196 (E) is a diagram showing an example of the first special symbol loss type allocation table.

As shown in Figure 196 (E), in the first special symbol loss type allocation table, loss types are defined according to the value (random number value) of the reach random number counter C3. Specifically, in the first special symbol loss type allocation table, of the 239 reach random number counter C3 values from 0 to 238, 9 random number values from 0 to 8 are reach for a front or rear loss, 30 random number values from 9 to 38 are reach for a non-front or rear loss, and 200 random number values from 39 to 238 are complete losses.

Here, "reach" refers to a variable state in which a decorative symbol combination indicating a jackpot is likely to occur between the time when the variable display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341 begins and the time when the decorative symbols are statically displayed. In one example, the same decorative symbol is statically displayed at two of the three stop positions on the pay line on the symbol display unit 341, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the remaining stop position changes. Furthermore, during the variable reach state on the symbol display unit 341, a story presentation process is executed in which a video of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the level of expectation, or a player-participation operation presentation process is executed in which the player's operation of the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation. Note that during the execution of these presentation processes, the variable display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged form.

A front-to-back miss is a miss in which the final stopping symbol stops just one symbol before or after the reach symbol after a reach due to a decorative symbol has occurred, while a non-front-to-back miss is a miss in which the final stopping symbol stops anywhere other than before or after the reach symbol after a reach due to a decorative symbol has occurred. A complete miss is a miss in which a reach due to a decorative symbol does not occur (a non-reach miss).

Note that in the first special symbol miss type allocation table, a time-saving symbol stop miss that transitions to time-saving game state c is not set as a miss type, but a time-saving symbol stop miss may be set as a miss type.

[First special chart deviation variation table]
The first special chart miss variation table is used to set the first special chart variation pattern (variation display time) of the first special chart in the first special chart game executed for the first special chart jackpot lottery when the lottery result in the first special chart jackpot lottery is a miss. Here, Figure 196 (F) is a diagram showing an example of the first special chart miss variation table.

As shown in Figure 196 (F), the first special chart miss variation table specifies the special chart variation pattern (variation display time) of the first special chart according to the miss type and the value (random number value) of the special chart variation type counter CS1. This first special chart miss variation table includes a miss first special chart miss variation table for miss reaches (front and rear miss reaches and reaches other than front and rear misses), and a first special chart miss variation table for complete misses.

In the first special chart miss variation table for miss reaches (front and rear miss reaches and reaches other than front and rear misses), one of the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected depending on the value (random number) of the special chart variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special chart miss variation table for miss reaches (front and rear miss reaches and reaches other than front and rear misses), of the 200 special chart variation type counter CS1 values from 0 to 199, 100 random number values from 0 to 99 correspond to special chart variation pattern "01," which has a special chart variation display time of 30 seconds, 50 random number values from 100 to 149 correspond to special chart variation pattern "02," which has a special chart variation display time of 60 seconds, and 50 random number values from 150 to 199 correspond to special chart variation pattern "03," which has a special chart variation display time of 90 seconds.

In the first special chart miss variation table for complete misses, either special chart variation pattern "04" or "05" is selected depending on the value (random number) of the special chart variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special chart miss variation table for complete misses, of the 200 special chart variation type counter CS1 values from 0 to 199, 150 random number values from 0 to 149 correspond to special chart variation pattern "04," which has a special chart variation display time of 7 seconds, and 50 random number values from 150 to 199 correspond to special chart variation pattern "05," which has a special chart variation display time of 10 seconds.

[b Time-saving - c Time-saving 2nd special chart jackpot winning/losing table]
The b time reduction-c time reduction second special chart jackpot winning/losing table is used in the b time reduction game state and the c time reduction game state for the second special chart jackpot lottery that is executed when a game ball enters the second winning slot 315. Here, FIG. 197(A) is a diagram showing an example of the b time reduction-c time reduction second special chart jackpot winning/losing table.

As shown in Figure 197 (A), the b time reduction - c time reduction second special chart jackpot win/loss table is the same as the previously described first special chart jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 196 (A)). Note that in this embodiment, the b time reduction - c time reduction second special chart jackpot win/loss table is set separately from the first special chart jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 196 (A)). However, the b time reduction - c time reduction second special chart jackpot win/loss table may be omitted, and the first special chart jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 196 (A)) may be used in the second special chart jackpot lottery in the b time reduction play state and the c time reduction play state.

[b Time-saving - c Time-saving 2nd special chart jackpot type allocation table]
The b time reduction-c time reduction second special chart jackpot type allocation table is used to allocate the type of jackpot when the game state at the start of the second special chart fluctuation is the normal game state or the a time reduction game state, and the result of the lottery in the second special chart jackpot lottery executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning port 315 is a jackpot. Here, Figure 197 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the b time reduction-c time reduction second special chart jackpot type allocation table.

As shown in Figure 197 (B), in the b time reduction - c time reduction second special chart jackpot type allocation table, all 20 random number values (random number values) of the jackpot type counter C2, ranging from 0 to 19, are 4R time reduction jackpots. In other words, if a second special chart jackpot occurs in the b time reduction game state or the c time reduction game state, the game will transition to the a time reduction game state after the jackpot game executed based on the second special chart jackpot ends, resulting in a so-called RUSH direct hit jackpot. Note that RUSH is a state in which the probability of the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the second winning slot 315 resulting in a small jackpot is high (20% in this embodiment (see Figure 198 (A))), as described below, and is advantageous for players who are prone to consecutive jackpot games triggered by small jackpots.

[b Time-saving - c Time-saving 2nd special chart jackpot fluctuation table]
The first special chart jackpot fluctuation table is used to set the special chart fluctuation pattern (variation display time) of the second special chart in the second special chart game executed for the second special chart jackpot lottery when the game state at the start of the fluctuation of the second special chart is the b time-saving game state or the c time-saving game state and the lottery result in the second special chart jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Here, Figure 197 (C) is a diagram showing an example of the b time-saving - c time-saving second special chart jackpot fluctuation table.

As shown in Figure 197 (D), the b time reduction - c time reduction second special chart jackpot fluctuation table is the same as the aforementioned first special chart jackpot fluctuation table (see Figure 196 (D)). Note that in this embodiment, the b time reduction - c time reduction second special chart jackpot fluctuation table is set separately from the first special chart jackpot fluctuation table (see Figure 196 (D)). However, the b time reduction - c time reduction second special chart jackpot fluctuation table may be omitted, and the first special chart jackpot fluctuation table (see Figure 196 (D)) may be used in the second special chart jackpot lottery in the b time reduction game state and the c time reduction game state.

[b Time-saving - c Time-saving second special chart miss type allocation table]
The b time reduction-c time reduction second special chart loss type allocation table is used to allocate the type of loss when the game state at the start of the second special chart fluctuation is the b time reduction game state or the c time reduction game state and the lottery result in the second special chart jackpot lottery is a loss. Here, Figure 197 (D) is a diagram showing an example of the b time reduction-c time reduction second special chart loss type allocation table.

As shown in Figure 197 (D), the b time reduction-c time reduction second special symbol miss type allocation table is the same as the aforementioned first special symbol miss type allocation table (see Figure 196 (E)). Note that in this embodiment, the b time reduction-c time reduction second special symbol miss type allocation table is set separately from the first special symbol miss type allocation table (see Figure 196 (E)). However, the b time reduction-c time reduction second special symbol miss type allocation table may be omitted, and the first special symbol miss type allocation table (see Figure 196 (E)) may be used in the second special symbol jackpot lottery in the b time reduction game state and the c time reduction game state.

Note that in the b time-saving - c time-saving second special symbol miss type allocation table, a time-saving symbol stop miss that transitions to the c time-saving game state is not set as a miss type, but a time-saving symbol stop miss that transitions to the c time-saving game state may be set as a miss type.

[b time reduction - c time reduction second special chart deviation fluctuation table]
The b time reduction-c time reduction second special chart miss variation table is used to set the special chart variation pattern (variation display time) of the second special chart in the second special chart game executed for the second special chart jackpot lottery when the game state at the start of the second special chart variation is the b time reduction game state or the c time reduction game state and the lottery result in the second special chart jackpot lottery is a miss. Here, Figure 197 (E) is a diagram showing an example of the first special chart miss variation table.

As shown in Figure 197 (E), the b time reduction - c time reduction second special chart miss fluctuation table is the same as the aforementioned first special chart miss fluctuation table (see Figure 196 (F)). Note that in this embodiment, the b time reduction - c time reduction second special chart miss fluctuation table is set separately from the first special chart miss fluctuation table (see Figure 196 (F)), but the b time reduction - c time reduction second special chart miss fluctuation table may be omitted, and the first special chart miss fluctuation table (see Figure 196 (F)) may be used in the second special chart jackpot lottery in the b time reduction game state and the c time reduction game state.

[Normal-a time-saving second special chart jackpot winning/losing table]
The normal-a time-saving second special chart jackpot winning/losing table is used in the normal game state and the a time-saving game state for the second special chart jackpot lottery that is executed when a game ball enters the second winning slot 315. Here, FIG. 198(A) is a diagram showing an example of the normal-a time-saving second special chart jackpot winning/losing table.

As shown in Figure 198 (A), the normal-a time-saving second special chart jackpot win/loss table differs from the aforementioned first special chart jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 196 (A)) in that the second special chart jackpot lottery result does not set a "jackpot" but rather two types: a "small win" and a "miss," with the small win probability and miss probability set to the same for all game settings. Specifically, in the normal-a time-saving second special chart jackpot win/loss table, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 between 0 and 65,535, 13,107 random numbers between 0 and 13,106 correspond to jackpots, and the other random numbers correspond to misses, with the small win probability set to approximately 1/5 (13,107/65,536).

Note that the small win probability defined by the normal-a time-saving second special chart big win hit/miss table is not limited to the example shown in Figure 198 (A) and can be changed as appropriate.

Also, a "jackpot" may be set as the result of the second special jackpot lottery in the normal-a time-saving second special jackpot win/loss table. In this case, the jackpot probability may be set to the same as the first special jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 196 (A)) so that the probability varies for each game setting value.

[a Time-saving second special chart miss type allocation table]
The a time-saving second special chart loss type allocation table is used to allocate the type of loss when the game state at the start of the second special chart fluctuation is a time-saving game state a and the lottery result in the second special chart jackpot lottery is a loss. Here, Figure 198 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the a time-saving second special chart loss type allocation table.

As shown in Figure 198 (B), in the a time-saving second special chart loss type allocation table, unlike the aforementioned first special chart loss type allocation table (see Figure 196 (E)), the loss types are not set to front-to-back loss reaches or reaches other than front-to-back losses, and only complete losses are set. Specifically, in the a time-saving second special chart loss type allocation table, all 239 random number values of the reach random number counter C3, from 0 to 238, are set to complete losses.

In addition, in the a time-saving second special symbol miss type allocation table, a forward/backward miss reach and a reach other than a forward/backward miss may be set as the miss type. Also, in the a time-saving second special symbol miss type allocation table, a time-saving symbol stop miss that transitions to the c time-saving game state is not set as the miss type, but a time-saving symbol stop miss may be set as the miss type.

[Normal gaming state second special chart miss type allocation table]
The normal game state second special symbol miss type allocation table is used to allocate the type of miss when the game state at the start of the second special symbol variation is the normal game state and the lottery result in the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a miss. Here, Figure 198 (C) is a diagram showing an example of the normal game state second special symbol miss type allocation table.

As shown in Figure 198 (C), the normal game state second special symbol miss type allocation table differs from the aforementioned first special symbol miss type allocation table (see Figure 196 (E)) in that it does not set miss types as front-to-back miss reaches or reaches other than front-to-back misses, but instead sets complete misses and time-saving symbol stop misses. Specifically, in the normal game state second special symbol miss type allocation table, of the 239 reach random number counter C3 values from 0 to 238, 227 random number values from 0 to 226 are complete misses, and 12 random number values from 227 to 238 are time-saving symbol stop misses (time-saving symbol stop misses A to D) that transition to the time-saving game state c. In other words, in the normal game state second special symbol miss type allocation table, the probability of a time-saving symbol stop miss (time-saving symbol stop misses A to D) is set to approximately 5%.

As shown in Figures 198(C) and 198(D), in this embodiment, there are four types of time-saving symbol stop misses: time-saving symbol stop miss A, time-saving symbol stop miss B, time-saving symbol stop miss C, and time-saving symbol stop miss D, which differ in the maximum number of time-saving games that can be played in time-saving game state c. The probability of each of the time-saving symbol stop misses A to D is set to 3/239 (approximately 1.25%).

Time-saving symbol stop miss A is set when the maximum number of special symbol games that can be played in time-saving game state c (maximum number of time-saving games) is 10 and the value of reach random number counter C3 is between 227 and 229. In the special symbol game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is time-saving symbol stop miss A, the decorative symbol displayed in the symbol display unit 341 stops and displays "119" or "991". In other words, time-saving symbol stop miss A is associated with "119" and "991" as decorative symbol stop display combinations, and "119" and "991" as decorative symbol stop display combinations correspond to time-saving symbols.

Time-saving symbol stop miss B is set when the maximum number of special symbol games that can be played in time-saving game state c (maximum number of time-saving games) is 20 and the value of the reach random number counter C3 is between 230 and 232. In the special symbol game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is time-saving symbol stop miss B, the decorative symbol displayed in the symbol display unit 341 is displayed as "554" or "556". In other words, time-saving symbol stop miss B is associated with "554" and "556" as decorative symbol stop display combinations, and "554" and "556" as decorative symbol stop display combinations correspond to time-saving symbols.

Time-saving symbol stop miss C is set when the maximum number of special symbol games (maximum number of time-saving games) that can be played in time-saving game state c is 30, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 is between 233 and 235. In the special symbol game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is time-saving symbol stop miss C, the decorative symbol displayed in the symbol display unit 341 stops and displays "332" or "334." In other words, time-saving symbol stop miss C is associated with "332" and "334" as decorative symbol stop display combinations, and "332" and "334" as decorative symbol stop display combinations correspond to time-saving symbols.

Time-saving symbol stop miss D is set when the maximum number of special symbol games (maximum number of time-saving games) that can be played in time-saving game state c is 40, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 is between 236 and 238. In the special symbol game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is time-saving symbol stop miss D, the decorative symbol displayed in the symbol display unit 341 is displayed as "776" or "778." In other words, time-saving symbol stop miss D is associated with "776" and "778" as decorative symbol stop display combinations, and "776" and "778" as decorative symbol stop display combinations correspond to time-saving symbols.

In this way, in this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, the decorative symbol displayed variably on the symbol display unit 341 is displayed as a stopped time-saving symbol. Therefore, even in a situation where the decorative symbol is not a reach and the jackpot lottery result is a miss and a jackpot is not expected, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the time-saving symbol will be stopped and displayed. Furthermore, based on the type of time-saving symbol (the type of combination of decorative symbols that will be stopped and displayed), the player can grasp the maximum number of time-saving games that can be played in the time-saving game state. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the time-saving symbol that has the highest maximum number of time-saving games will be stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, four types of time-saving symbol stop misses are set, but the number of time-saving symbol stop misses is not limited to four, and there does not need to be multiple types; for example, there may be only one type. Furthermore, when multiple types of time-saving symbol stop misses are set, the probability (allocation) of each time-saving symbol stop miss does not need to be equal, and the probability (allocation) of some or all time-saving symbol stop misses may be different from the probability (allocation) of other time-saving symbol stop misses.

In addition, in this embodiment, two types of time-saving symbols are associated with one type of time-saving symbol stop miss, but one type of time-saving symbol may be associated with one type of time-saving symbol stop miss, and the number of time-saving symbols associated with some or all of the time-saving symbol stop misses may be different from the number of time-saving symbols associated with other time-saving symbol stop misses. Furthermore, multiple types of maximum number of time-saving game plays may be associated with one type of time-saving symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the jackpot lottery result is a missed time-saving symbol stop, the decorative symbol displayed in the symbol display unit 341 is displayed as a stopped time-saving symbol. However, in addition to or instead of this, a (time-saving) symbol corresponding to a missed time-saving symbol stop may be set as the stopped display symbol for the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363. In this case, the type of stopped display symbol for the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 may be associated with the maximum number of special symbol plays that can be performed in the time-saving play state (maximum number of time-saving plays).

The aforementioned second special symbol miss type allocation table for normal game mode has a time-saving symbol stop miss set, but the other miss type allocation tables do not have a time-saving symbol stop miss set (see Figures 196 (E), 197 (D), and 198 (B)). In other words, the only time the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery will be a time-saving symbol stop miss is the second special symbol jackpot lottery at the start of the second special symbol in normal game mode, which is triggered by the game ball entering second winning slot 315.

Here, in this embodiment, one normal symbol game is executed in the time-saving game state a, and the maximum opening time for this one normal symbol game is set to 15 seconds and the maximum number of winnings is set to five (see Figure 195 (E)). Therefore, when a normal symbol game is executed based on a transition to the time-saving game state a (when the second winning slot 315 is opened by the operation of the electric device 315b), in addition to the variable display of the second special symbol, it is possible to execute a total of five second special symbol games, including the variable display of the second special symbol based on up to four second special symbol reservations (so-called remaining reservations). And while the maximum open time for normal symbol win games in the time-saving game state a is 15 seconds, as will be described later, the variable display time (variation pattern) for the second special symbol game that starts in the time-saving game state a is 40 seconds (see FIG. 199 (A)), so the time-saving game state a transitions to the normal game state because the normal symbol win game ends before the second special symbol game that is first executed after the transition to the time-saving game state a ends. As a result, the second special symbol game based on the second special symbol reserve (remaining reserve) that is executed after the second special symbol game ends starts in the normal game state. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the maximum opening time of the electric device 315b in a normal winning game in the normal game state is 0.1 seconds (see FIG. 195(E)), and since it is impossible or extremely difficult for a game ball to enter the second winning slot 315 in the normal game state and left-handed shots that launch the game ball into the left area of the game board 31 are encouraged, the second special game is not substantially executed by a game ball entering the second winning slot 315 based on a normal winning game in the normal game state. Therefore, the second special game is started in the normal game state by the second special game that was put on hold by a game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in a normal winning game that is executed when the game transitions to the time-saving game state a after the time-saving jackpot game ends. In other words, the normal game state second special symbol miss type allocation table is referenced when starting a second special symbol game that is executed based on the second special symbol reserve (remaining reserve) when the game ball enters the second winning slot 315 due to the operation of the electric device 315b in the time-limited game state a that is entered after the time-limited jackpot game ends, and the number of second special symbols reserved M is 1 or more (if there are remaining reserves).

In this embodiment, as described below, when a normal winning game is executed based on the transition of the display effect to the time-saving game state a (when the second winning slot 315 is opened by the operation of the electric device 315b), in addition to the variable display of the second special symbol, a RUSH effect as a display effect including a battle effect is performed on the symbol display unit 341, etc., in the second special symbol game in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed a total of up to five times based on up to four second special symbol reserves (so-called remaining reserves). Furthermore, the battle effect is a remaining reserve effect that is executed on the second special symbol reserves (remaining reserves) triggered by the transition to the time-saving game state a, as described below. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, the game will transition to the c time-saving game state, and in this c time-saving game state, c time-saving game effects specific to the c time-saving game state (display effects such as unique background effects and effects displaying the number of remaining time-saving turns) that can identify the c time-saving game state will be executed on the symbol display unit 341, etc. (see Figure 225 (C)).

In this way, in the time-saving game state a, a normal winning game is executed only once, but after the normal winning game ends, the game state transitions from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state. If the remaining reserves executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a include a reserve that indicates that the jackpot lottery result is a missed time-saving symbol stop, the game state transitions to the time-saving game state c after the second special symbol game that indicated a missed time-saving symbol stop ends. In other words, in this embodiment, a game state in which a second special symbol game including a remaining reserve that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a can be executed overlaps with the normal game state or the time-saving game state c.

The second special game (a so-called RUSH state, which is a consecutive jackpot state) including the remaining reserves, which is triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a, has a high probability of generating small jackpot games that provide the opportunity for a jackpot game to occur (see Figure 198 (A)), making it a game state with high gaming value because it is easy to generate a jackpot game. In contrast, in the normal game state and the time-saving game state c, it is difficult or impossible for a gaming ball to enter the second winning slot 315, and therefore a jackpot lottery is executed when a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314, making it difficult to generate a jackpot game (see Figure 198 (A)). Therefore, the game state in which the second special game including the remaining reserve, which is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a, is possible, is a game state with higher game value than the normal game state and the time-saving game state c, in that it is easier to generate a jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, a RUSH effect is executed as a display effect in the second special symbol game including the remaining reserve, which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a (see Figures 226 to 228). In particular, a battle effect is executed as a display effect for the second special symbol game corresponding to the remaining reserve. On the other hand, in the normal game state, a unique display effect is executed that clearly indicates or suggests that the game is in the normal game state (see Figure 225 (A)), and in the time-saving game state c, a unique display effect is executed that clearly indicates or suggests that the game is in the time-saving game state c (see Figure 225 (C)). Therefore, if the jackpot lottery result during the remaining reserve includes a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, and the normal game state effect or the time-saving c game state effect executed corresponding to the low game value is prioritized as the display effect over the battle effect executed for the second special symbol game corresponding to the high remaining reserve, the battle effect will be terminated midway, and the result of the battle (whether or not a small win was won) will not be able to be determined from the symbol display unit 341. Therefore, in this embodiment, the battle effect (the RUSH effect as a specific effect) executed in the game state in which the second special symbol game corresponding to the high remaining reserve can be executed is executed, and is executed with priority over the normal game state effect and the time-saving c game effect that can be executed in the normal game state and the time-saving c game state, which have a lower game value than the game state in which the battle effect is executed. In other words, in this embodiment, when game states with different game values are executed at the same time, the display effect for the game state with the higher game value is executed with priority. As a result, when a battle effect is initiated as a display effect, the battle effect is not interrupted due to overlapping game states, and the player can be notified of whether they have won a small win based on the battle results in the battle effect. In particular, even if the result of the jackpot lottery during the remaining reserved period includes a miss on the time-saving symbol stop, and the game transitions to time-saving game state c based on the miss on the time-saving symbol stop, the player can be notified of whether they have won a small win based on the battle results in the battle effect as a display effect.

Also, as mentioned above, in the time-saving game state a, only one normal winning game is executed, and after the normal winning game ends, the game transitions from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state. If the remaining reserves executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a include one that indicates that the jackpot lottery result is a missed time-saving symbol stop, then after the second special symbol game that indicated a missed time-saving symbol stop ends, the MPU 41 game control transitions to the time-saving game state c. In other words, at the end of the battle effect as a display effect, the game is in the normal game state or the time-saving game state c. Therefore, if all the results of the jackpot lottery for the remaining reserves, which is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a, are misses, after the RUSH effect as a display effect ends, either the normal game state effect or the time-saving game state effect c is executed as a display effect, depending on the game state at the end of the RUSH effect (whether or not the time-saving symbol stop miss occurred).

Here, the normal game state and the time-saving c game state have in common the fact that it is difficult to generate a jackpot (see Figure 196 (A)), but while in the normal game state the allocation of time-saving jackpots that trigger RUSH entry (occurrence of a state with a high probability of consecutive jackpots) is 50% (see Figure 196 (B)), in the time-saving c game state the allocation of time-saving jackpots that trigger RUSH entry (occurrence of a state with a high probability of consecutive jackpots) is 100% (see Figure 196 (C)), and a jackpot in the time-saving c game state is a jackpot that is a direct hit on the RUSH. Therefore, in that the allocation of time-saving jackpots that trigger RUSH entry (occurrence of a state with a high probability of consecutive jackpots) is high, the time-saving c game state is a game state with higher play value for players than the normal game state. In other words, after the RUSH effect ends as a display effect, either the normal game state effect or the time-saving c game state effect is executed as a display effect, but from the player's perspective, it is preferable that the time-saving c game state effect be executed after the RUSH effect ends. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the RUSH effect ends as a display effect, a branching effect (described below) is executed as a display effect that clearly indicates or suggests whether the time-saving c game state effect or the normal game state effect will be executed as a display effect (see FIG. 229). Therefore, even if the battle effect executed based on the remaining reserves notifies the player that a small jackpot has not been won, the time-saving c game state effect, which offers a chance to hit the RUSH directly, continues to be executed after the battle effect ends, allowing the player to maintain their interest in the game, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

[V Winning Jackpot Type Allocation Table]
The V winning jackpot type allocation table is used to allocate the type of jackpot game to be executed in a small winning game based on the game ball entering the V winning port 833. Here, Figure 198 (E) is a diagram showing an example of the V winning jackpot type allocation table.

As shown in Figure 198 (E), the V-winning jackpot type allocation table sets the jackpot types as 16R time-saving jackpot and 4R time-saving jackpot. A 16R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which 16 rounds of play are executed in the open/close execution mode, and the game transitions to the a-time-saving game state after the 16R time-saving jackpot play ends. A 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which 4 rounds of play are executed in the open/close execution mode, and the game transitions to the a-time-saving game state after the 4R time-saving jackpot play ends. In addition, in the V-winning jackpot type allocation table, of the jackpot type counter values 0 to 19, 0 to 3 are 16R time-saving jackpots, and 4 to 19 are 4R time-saving jackpots. In other words, in the V-winning jackpot type allocation table, the probability (allocation) of a 16R time-saving jackpot is 20%, and the probability (allocation) of a 4R time-saving jackpot is 80%.

In this embodiment, two types of jackpot games are set up to be executed when a game ball enters the V winning slot 833 during a small jackpot game, but the type of jackpot game may be one type or three or more types, and the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game is not limited to 4R and 16R.

[a Time-saving second special chart change table]
The a time-saving second special chart fluctuation table is used to set the special chart fluctuation pattern (variation display time) of the second special chart in the second special chart game when the game state at the start of the fluctuation of the second special chart is the a time-saving game state. Here, Figure 199 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the a time-saving second special chart fluctuation table.

As shown in Figure 199 (A), the a-time-saving second special symbol fluctuation table differs from the aforementioned first special symbol jackpot fluctuation table (see Figure 196 (D)) and first special symbol loss fluctuation table (see Figure 196 (F)) in that it is a table that is referenced regardless of whether the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot or a loss, and its fluctuation pattern (variation display time) is set to only one type, special symbol fluctuation pattern "08," which is 40 seconds. This ensures a reliable transition from the a-time-saving game state to the normal game state during the first second special symbol game when transitioning to the a-time-saving game state. Also, as mentioned above, when transitioning to the a-time-saving game state, a RUSH effect is executed on the symbol display unit 341, etc., but during the first second special symbol game when transitioning to the a-time-saving game state, a button effect is executed as a one-shot announcement effect (described below) within the RUSH effect (see Figure 226 (D)), and this button effect notifies the player of whether or not a small jackpot has been won. Furthermore, because the time-saving second special chart variation table has only one variation pattern (variation display time) of 40 seconds, the button effects before the start of the battle effects in the RUSH effects can be executed at a good tempo, allowing for a smooth transition to the battle effects.

[Normal game state second special chart reserved second special chart change table]
The normal game state second special symbol reservation second special symbol change table is used to set the special symbol change pattern (change display time) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game when the game state at the start of the change of the second special symbol is the normal game state. In other words, the normal game state second special symbol reservation second special symbol change table is used when starting the second special symbol game for the second special symbol reservation (remaining reservation) triggered by the transition to the time-saving game state a. Here, Figure 199 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the normal game state second special symbol reservation second special symbol change table.

As shown in Figure 199 (B), the normal game state second special chart reserved second special chart change table is different from the aforementioned first special chart jackpot change table (see Figure 196 (D)) and first special chart miss change table (see Figure 196 (F)), in that it is a table that is referenced regardless of whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a miss, and the type of second special chart change pattern (change display time) is set according to the remaining reserve pattern. In this embodiment, eight types of remaining reserve patterns, 1 to 8, are set.

As shown in Figures 199 (C) and 199 (D), remaining reserve pattern 1 is a pattern in which, when transitioning from time-saving play state a to normal play state (when the first second special symbol game started after transitioning to time-saving play state a has ended), the number of remaining second special symbols is one, and the jackpot lottery result for that one remaining second special symbol is a miss. Remaining reserve pattern 2 is a pattern in which, when transitioning from time-saving play state a to normal play state (when the first second special symbol game started after transitioning to time-saving play state a has ended), the number of remaining second special symbols is two, and the jackpot lottery results for all two remaining second special symbol reserves are misses. Remaining reserve pattern 3 is a pattern in which, when transitioning from time-saving play state a to normal play state (when the first second special symbol game started after transitioning to time-saving play state a has ended), the number of remaining second special symbols is three, and the jackpot lottery results for all three remaining second special symbol reserves are misses. Remaining reserve pattern 4 is a pattern in which when transitioning from time-saving play mode a to normal play mode (the first second special game started after transitioning to time-saving play mode a has ended), the number of remaining second special game reserves is four, and the result of the jackpot lottery for those four remaining second special game reserves is a loss.

On the other hand, remaining reserve pattern 5 is a pattern in which the number of remaining reserved second special symbols when transitioning from time-saving game state a to normal game state (when the first second special symbol game started after transitioning to time-saving game state a has ended) is 1 to 4, and the result of the jackpot lottery for the first second special symbol game started while the second special symbol is reserved is a small win. Remaining reserve pattern 6 is a pattern in which the number of remaining reserved second special symbols when transitioning from time-saving game state a to normal game state (when the first second special symbol game started after transitioning to time-saving game state a has ended) is 2 to 4, and the result of the jackpot lottery for the first second special symbol game started while the second special symbol is reserved is a miss, and the result of the jackpot lottery for the second second special symbol game started while the second special symbol is reserved is a small win. Remaining reserve pattern 7 is a pattern in which, when transitioning from time-saving game state a to normal game state (when the first second special symbol game started after transitioning to time-saving game state a has ended), the number of remaining reserved second special symbols is 3 to 4, the jackpot lottery results for the first and second second special symbol games started during the second special symbol game are misses, and the jackpot lottery result for the third second special symbol game started during the second special symbol game is a small win. Remaining reserve pattern 8 is a pattern in which, when transitioning from time-saving game state a to normal game state (when the first second special symbol game started after transitioning to time-saving game state a has ended), the number of remaining reserved second special symbols is 4, the jackpot lottery results for the first through third second special symbol games started during the second special symbol game are misses, and the jackpot lottery result for the fourth second special symbol game started during the second special symbol game is a small win.

As shown in Figures 199(B) and 199(D), in this embodiment, for remaining reserve patterns 1 and 5, special chart change pattern "09" is set as the second special chart change pattern for one remaining reserved second special chart, with a second special chart change display time of 120 seconds, and one 120-second second special chart game is played for the remaining reserved second special chart. For remaining reserve patterns 2 and 6, special chart change pattern "02" is set as the second special chart change pattern for each of the first two remaining reserved second special charts, with a second special chart change display time of 60 seconds, and two 60-second second special chart games are played for the remaining reserved second special chart. For remaining reserve patterns 3 and 7, special chart change pattern "10" is set as the second special chart change pattern for each of the first three remaining reserved second special charts, with a second special chart change display time of 40 seconds, and three 40-second second special chart games are played for the remaining reserved second special chart. For remaining reserve patterns 4 and 8, special chart variation pattern "01" is set as the second special chart variation pattern for each of the first four second special chart remaining reserves, with the second special chart variation display time being 30 seconds, and four 30-second second special chart games are executed for the remaining second special charts. In other words, for each remaining reserve pattern, the total variable display time for the second special chart games executed in each remaining reserve pattern is standardized to 120 seconds. Therefore, the battle effect (remaining reserve effect) of the RUSH effects described below is executed as a display effect that is completed in 120 seconds, making it difficult to determine how many times second special chart games are executed for the remaining second special chart reserves during the battle effect.

The total variable display time of the second special symbol game executed in each remaining hold pattern is not limited to 120 seconds and can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the variable display time of the second special symbol game executed in each remaining hold pattern does not necessarily have to be uniform. Furthermore, the total variable display time of the second special symbol game executed in each remaining hold pattern does not have to be standardized and may differ for each remaining hold pattern, and multiple variable display times may be associated with each remaining hold pattern.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main control unit 4]
The main timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 4 in this embodiment is basically the same as the main timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 4 in the first embodiment described above, but the procedures for the first special chart hold command setting processing and the second special chart hold command setting processing in the start winning processing are different from those in the first embodiment described above.

[Start-up winning process]
Here, Fig. 200 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of Fig. 17. The start winning process will be described below with reference to Fig. 18.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 200, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a win has been made at the first winning slot 314. If the MPU 41 determines that a win has been made at the first winning slot 314 (step S1101: Yes), a specific condition is met and the process proceeds to step S1102, whereas if the MPU 41 determines that a win has not been made at the first winning slot 314 (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the first special symbol reserved number N stored in the first special symbol reserved number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the first special symbol reserved number N is the maximum reserved number (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1106. On the other hand, if the first special symbol reserved number N is not the maximum reserved number (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 executes a process of adding 1 to the first special symbol reserved number N as a numerical value storage process (step S1103). When numerical information is stored in the first special symbol reserved number storage area NAA, the first special symbol reserved game state is entered, in which the first special symbol game can be executed.

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 performs a numerical value storage process by acquiring the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process of Figure 17, and the special chart change type counter CS1, which is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 in the main process of Figure 21 described below, and stores the counter values in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special chart reserve storage area REA of the special chart reserve storage area 412b in RAM 412.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 checks the content of the special symbol hit/miss information for the first special symbol hold acquired in step S1104 before it becomes the target for determining whether or not it is a jackpot in step S2102 or S2103 in the special symbol change start processing in Fig. 28 described later, and executes a first special symbol hold command setting process to set the first special symbol hold command in RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Note that the details of the first special symbol hold command setting process will be described later with reference to Fig. 19.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a win has been made at the second winning slot 315. If the MPU 41 determines that a win has been made at the second winning slot 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and if the MPU 41 determines that a win has not been made at the second winning slot 315 (step S1106: No), the process ends the initial winning process.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether the second special symbol reserved number M stored in the second special symbol reserved number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the second special symbol reserved number M is the maximum reserved number (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process. On the other hand, if the second special symbol reserved number M is not the maximum reserved number (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 executes a process of adding 1 to the second special symbol reserved number M as a numerical value storage process (step S1108). When numerical information is stored in the second special symbol reserved number storage area NAB, the state becomes a first special symbol reserved game state in which a second special symbol game can be executed.

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 performs a numerical value storage process by acquiring the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process of Figure 17, and the special chart change type counter CS1, which is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 in the main process of Figure 21 described below, and stores the counter values in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special chart reserve storage area REB of the special chart reserve storage area 412b in RAM 412.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 checks the content of the special symbol hit/miss information for the second special symbol reservation acquired in step S1109 before it becomes the subject of jackpot hit/miss judgment in step S2102 or S2103 in the special symbol variation start processing of FIG. 28 described later, and executes a second special symbol reservation command setting process to set a second special symbol reservation command in RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Here, the second special symbol reservation command setting process is similar to the first special symbol reservation command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 19, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that the second special symbol reservation command setting process can be performed by replacing the "first special symbol reservation command" with the "second special symbol reservation command" and the "first special symbol reservation number N" with the "second special symbol reservation number M" in the first special symbol reservation command setting process of FIG. 19.

[First special drawing hold command setting process]
201 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol reservation command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start-up winning process of FIG. 200. The first special symbol reservation command includes information indicating that the command is a first special symbol reservation command, as well as information such as the result of the jackpot lottery (jackpot type or loss type), the special symbol variable display time, and the number of first special symbols reserved N. Hereinafter, the first special symbol reservation command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 201.

<Steps S3301 and S3302>
As shown in FIG. 201, in the first special symbol reservation command setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first reads the first special symbol reservation number N from the first special symbol reservation number storage area NAA in the first special symbol reservation storage area REA, and also reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first special symbol reservation from RAM 412 (step S3301). The MPU 41 then references the first special symbol jackpot win/loss table (see FIG. 196(A)) and determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the start-up winning is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (step S3302). If the result of the jackpot lottery for the start-up winning is a jackpot (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3303. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the start-up winning is not a jackpot (step S3302: No), i.e., if the result is a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3305.

<Step S3303>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the start winning is a jackpot (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3303). For example, if the special symbol win/loss information is stored in the third reserved area REA3 in step S1104 of the start winning processing of FIG. 200, the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 included in the special symbol win/loss information stored in the third reserved area REA3 are read. Note that the reserved area in which the special symbol win/loss information is stored in step S1104 of the start winning processing of FIG. 200 among the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 can be determined by the value of the first special symbol reserve number N stored in the first special symbol reserve number memory area NAA.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2 (jackpot type), the special chart change type counter CS1 (special chart change pattern), and the first special chart hold number N to the first special chart hold command, and terminates the first special chart hold command setting process.

<Steps S3305 and S3306>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the start winning is not a jackpot (step S3302: No), that is, if it is a miss, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the reach random number counter C3 and the special symbol fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3305). Next, the MPU 41 sets the reach random number counter C3 (miss type), the special symbol fluctuation type counter CS1 (special symbol fluctuation pattern), and the first special symbol reservation number N to the first special symbol reservation command (step S3306), and ends the first special symbol reservation command setting process.

In this way, the first special symbol hold command set in step S3304 or S3306 includes the first special symbol hold number N read out in step S3301. Therefore, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first special symbol hold command can determine which of the first hold areas REA1 to REA4 the first special symbol win/loss information stored in the first special symbol hold command corresponds to by referencing the first hold number N included in the first special symbol hold command. This enables the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 to control the display of the first special symbol hold image (see Figures 225 (A) and 225 (C)) as a display corresponding to the first special symbol game in the first special symbol hold image display area 76.

The first special symbol hold command set in step S3307 or S3309 of the first special symbol hold command setting process is stored in RAM 412, and is erased after being sent to the voice lamp control device 5 along with other commands in step S1401 of the main process in FIG. 202, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 and will be described later. Furthermore, the content of the first special symbol hold command described here is merely an example, and is not limited to what is described here, as long as the voice lamp control device 5 is able to grasp content similar to that of the first special symbol hold command. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first special symbol hold command may be included in another command.

[Second special chart hold command setting process]
202 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second special symbol reserve command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1110 in the start winning process of FIG. 200. The second special symbol reserve command includes information indicating that the command is a second special symbol reserve command, as well as information such as the result of the jackpot lottery, the special symbol variable display time, and the number of second special symbols reserved M. Hereinafter, the second special symbol reserve command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 202.

<Step S3401>
As shown in Fig. 202, in the second special symbol reserve command setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the game is in a normal game state (step S3401). Whether or not the game is in a normal game state is determined based on the normal game state flag that is set to ON when a time-saving game state (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, or time-saving game state c) is shifted to the normal game state in steps S4216, S4222, and S4228 of the game state shift process of Fig. 218.

If the MPU 41 is in normal gaming mode (step S3401: Yes), it proceeds to step S3409; if the MPU 41 is not in normal gaming mode (step S3401: No), it proceeds to step S3402.

<Step S3402>
If the game is not in the normal game state (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the game is in the time-saving game state a (step S3402). Whether the game is in the time-saving game state a is determined based on the time-saving game state flag a, which is set to ON after the time-saving jackpot game ends in step S4246 of the game state transition processing in FIG. 219.

If the MPU 41 is in the time-shortened play state a (step S3402: Yes), it proceeds to step S3409. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 is not in the time-shortened play state a (step S3402: No), i.e., if the MPU 41 is in the time-shortened play state a or the time-shortened play state c, it proceeds to step S3403.

<Steps S3403 and S3404>
If the game is not in the time-saving game mode a (step S3402: No), that is, if the game is in the time-saving game mode a or the time-saving game mode c, the MPU 41 reads the reserved number M of the second special symbols from the reserved number storage area NAB of the reserved storage area REB of the second special symbols, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each reserved second special symbol from the RAM 412 (step S3403). Then, the MPU 41 refers to the time-saving b-time-saving c-time-saving second special symbol jackpot win/loss table (see FIG. 197(A)) and determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the start-up winning is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (step S3404). If the result of the jackpot lottery for the start-up winning is a jackpot (step S3404: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3405. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the starting prize is not a jackpot (step S3404: No), that is, if it is a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3407.

<Step S3405>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the start winning is a jackpot (step S3404: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3405). For example, if the special symbol win/loss information is stored in the third reserve area REB3 in step S1104 of the start winning processing of FIG. 200, the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 included in the special symbol win/loss information stored in the third reserve area REB3 are read. Note that the reserve area in which the special symbol win/loss information is stored in step S1104 of the start winning processing of FIG. 200 among the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 can be determined by the value of the second special symbol reserve number M stored in the second special symbol reserve number memory area NAB.

<Step S3406>
In step S3406, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2 (jackpot type), the special chart change type counter CS1 (special chart change pattern), and the second special chart hold number M to the second special chart hold command, and terminates the second special chart hold command setting process.

<Steps S3407 and S3408>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the start winning is not a jackpot (step S3404: No), that is, if it is a miss, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the reach random number counter C3 and the special symbol fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3407). Next, the MPU 41 sets the reach random number counter C3 (miss type), the special symbol fluctuation type counter CS1 (special symbol fluctuation pattern), and the second special symbol reservation number M to the second special symbol reservation command (step S3408), and ends the second special symbol reservation command setting process.

<Steps S3409 to S3411>
If the game is in the normal game mode (step S3401: Yes), or if the game is in the time-saving game mode (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation pattern "08" with a variation display time of 40 seconds as the special symbol variation pattern (step S3409). Then, the MPU 41 reads the second special symbol reservation number M from the second special symbol reservation number memory area NAB of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each second special symbol reservation from the RAM 412 (step S3410). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot lottery result (jackpot type, small win, miss type), special symbol variation pattern, and second special symbol reservation number M in the second special symbol reservation command (step S3411), and ends the second special symbol reservation command setting process.

In this way, the second special symbol hold command set in step S3406, S3408, or S3411 includes the second special symbol hold number M read out in step S3403 or S3410. Therefore, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the second special symbol hold command can recognize which of the second hold areas REB1 to REB4 stores the second special symbol win/loss information that the second special symbol hold command corresponds to by referencing the second special symbol hold number M included in the second special symbol hold command. This enables the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 to control the display of the second special symbol hold image (see Figures 225 (B) and 225 (D)) as a display corresponding to the second special symbol game in the second special symbol hold image display area 77.

The second special symbol hold command set in step S3406, S3408, or S3411 of the second special symbol hold command setting process is stored in RAM 412 and is erased after being sent to the voice lamp control device 5 along with other commands in step S1401 of the main process in FIG. 203, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 and will be described later. Furthermore, the content of the second special symbol hold command described here is merely an example, and is not limited to what is described here, as long as the voice lamp control device 5 is able to grasp content similar to that of the second special symbol hold command. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the second special symbol hold command may be included in another command.

[Main processing of main control device 4]
The main processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment is basically the same as the main processing of the main control device 4 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 21), but differs in that a small win game control process is executed and in some of the processing procedures, as shown in FIG. 203. The main processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the main processing of the main control device 4 in the first embodiment described above, and the processing necessary for explaining this embodiment.

[General game control processing]
In this embodiment, the normal game control process executed in step S1404 in the main process of Figure 203 is different from the first embodiment in the normal game fluctuation start process. Below, with reference to Figure 204, the normal game fluctuation start process of this embodiment will be described.

[General map change start processing]
In the normal symbol variation start process of this embodiment, the variation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 361 is started, and if the result of the normal symbol winning lottery is a winning one, a flag related to the normal symbol winning type (opening form of the electric device 315b) is set.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 204, in the normal symbol variation start process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether it is in a normal game state (step S3501). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state when starting the normal symbol variation display (normal symbol game) is in a normal game state. In other words, when the normal symbol variation starts, it determines whether it is in a normal game state in low support mode or a time-saving game state in high support mode, and determines whether it is a normal symbol win or not based on the support mode type when the normal symbol variation starts.

Whether or not the game is in the normal game state is determined in steps S4216, S4222, and S4228 of the game state transition processing in FIG. 218 based on the normal game state flag, which is set to ON when transitioning from a time-saving game state (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, or time-saving game state c) to the normal game state.

If the MPU 41 is in normal gaming mode (step S3501: Yes), it proceeds to step S3402; if the MPU 41 is not in normal gaming mode (step S3402: No), it proceeds to step S3405.

<Steps S3502 to S3504>
If the normal game state flag is set to on (step S3501: Yes), i.e., in low support mode, the MPU 41 makes a win/loss determination for the normal game state winning lottery based on the normal game state winning/loss table (see Figure 195 (A)) (step S3502), and determines whether the result of the win/loss determination is a normal winning lottery (step S3503).

Whether or not the result of the win/loss determination is a normal win is determined based on the normal win random number counter C4, which is obtained when game ball 99 enters 317R and stored in the normal win reserve storage area 412c (see Figure 11).

If the result of the win/loss determination based on the normal game state normal win table is a normal win (step S3503: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the short-open normal win flag to on (step S3504) and proceeds to step S3511. The short-open normal win flag is a flag indicating that the result of the normal win lottery is a short-open win (see Figure 195 (E)), in which the maximum opening time of the electric device 315b is 0.1 seconds, and is referenced in step S3609 of the normal win game control processing in Figure 204 described below when determining whether to set the value of the opening counter to the time corresponding to the short opening as the opening time of the electric device 315b.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss determination based on the normal game state normal hit/miss table is not a normal hit (step S3503: No), i.e., if the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3511.

<Steps S3505 and S3506>
When the game is not in the normal game mode (step S3501: No), that is, when the game is in the time-saving game mode, which is a high support mode (when the game is in any of the time-saving game mode a, b, and c), the MPU 41 makes a win/loss judgment for the normal winning lottery based on the time-saving game mode normal winning/loss table (see Figure 195 (B)) (step S3505), and determines whether the result of the win/loss judgment is a normal winning or not (step S3506).

Whether or not the result of the win/loss determination is a normal win is determined based on the value of the normal win random number counter C4, which is obtained when the game ball 99 enters the through gate 317R, as in step S3502 described above, and stored in the normal win reserve storage area 412c (see Figure 11).

If the result of the hit/miss determination based on the time-limited play state normal hit/miss table is a normal hit (step S3506: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3507; if the result of the hit/miss determination is not a normal hit (step S3506: No), i.e., if the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3509.

<Steps S3507 and S3508>
If the result of the judgment based on the time-saving game state normal symbol win/loss table is a normal symbol win (step S3506: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game is in the time-saving game state a (step S3507). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state when starting the variable display of the normal symbol (normal symbol game) is the time-saving game state a. Whether or not the game is in the time-saving game state a is determined based on the time-saving game state flag a, which is set to ON after the time-saving jackpot game ends, in step S4246 of the game state transition processing of FIG. 219.

If the MPU 41 is in the time-saving game state a (step S3507: Yes), it sets the long-open normal win flag to on (step S3508) and proceeds to step S3511. The long-open normal win flag is a flag that indicates that the result of the normal win lottery is a long-open win (see Figure 195 (E)), in which the maximum opening time of the electric device 315b is 15 seconds, and is referenced in step S3603 of the normal win game control processing in Figure 205, described below, when determining whether to set the value of the opening counter to the time corresponding to the long opening as the opening time of the electric device 315b. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 is not in the time-saving game state a (step S3507: No), it proceeds to step S3509.

<Steps S3509 and S3510>
If the time-saving game state is not "a" (step S3507: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving game state is "b" (step S3509). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state when starting the variable display of the normal symbol (normal symbol game) is "b" (time-saving game state). Whether the game state is "b" (time-saving game state) is determined based on the "b" (time-saving game state flag) that is set to "on" when the normal game state is transitioned to the time-saving game state "b" based on the execution of a specified number of special symbol games (for example, 500 times) in which the jackpot lottery result is a miss after the jackpot game ends in step S4203 of the game state transition processing of FIG. 217.

If the MPU 41 is in the b time-saving game state (step S3509: Yes), it sets the medium-open normal win flag to on (step S3509) and proceeds to step S3511. The medium-open normal win flag is a flag that indicates that the result of the normal win lottery is a medium-open win (see Figure 195 (E)), in which the maximum opening time of the electric device 315b is 3 seconds, and is referenced in step S3606 of the normal win game control processing in Figure 205, described below, when determining whether to set the value of the opening counter to the time corresponding to the medium opening as the opening time of the electric device 315b. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 is not in the b time-saving game state (step S3507: No), it proceeds to step S3509.

<Steps S3511 and S3512>
If the result of the normal symbol winning lottery is a miss (step S3503 or S3506: No), if the short-open normal symbol winning flag is set to on (step S3504), if the long-open normal symbol winning flag is set to on (step S3508), or if the medium-open normal symbol winning flag is set to on (step S3510), the MPU 41 starts the normal symbol variable display in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display unit 36 (step S3511). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the normal symbol variable display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol is being displayed variably, i.e., that a normal symbol game is being executed (step S3512), and ends the normal symbol variable start processing.

[Normal winning game control processing]
205 and 206 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the normal winning game control process executed in step S1405 in the main process of Fig. 203. In the normal winning game control process, when the result of the normal winning lottery is a win, a process is executed to switch between an allowable state that allows the game ball to enter the second winning opening 315 and a restricted state that restricts it by controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory 315b. Below, the normal winning game control process will be explained with reference to Figs. 205 and 206.

<Step S3601>
As shown in Figure 205, in the normal winning game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol has stopped and been displayed (the normal symbol game has ended), is on (step S3601). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to start the normal symbol winning game. The normal symbol variation stop display flag is set to on in step S1511 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol game control process of Figure 22.

If the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S3601: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start a normal map winning game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3602. On the other hand, if the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S3601: No), i.e., if it is not time to start a normal map winning game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3616 in FIG. 206.

<Step S3602>
If the normal game variation stop display flag is on (step S3601: Yes), that is, if it is time to start a normal game, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being executed, is on (step S3602). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S2206 when a jackpot game starts, and is set to off in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3602: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 terminates the normal jackpot game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, if the process is forced to terminate due to the start of a jackpot game, the normal jackpot game will not start even if the result of the normal jackpot lottery for that normal game is a normal jackpot. In other words, in this embodiment, a normal jackpot game will not start while a jackpot game is being played. Of course, a new normal game may be started while a jackpot game is being played.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3602: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3603.

<Step S3603>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3602: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the long-opening normal winning flag is set to on (step S3603). The long-opening normal winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the normal winning lottery is a long-opening normal winning. If the result of the normal winning lottery is a long-opening normal winning, the flag is set to on in step S3508 of the normal winning lottery start processing in FIG. 204. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a long-opening normal winning. If the long-opening normal winning flag is set to on (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3604. If the long-opening normal winning flag is set to off (step S3603: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3606.

<Steps S3604 and S3605>
If the long-open normal winning flag is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), i.e., if the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a long-open normal winning, the MPU 41 executes a numerical value storage process to set the value of the opening time counter to a value corresponding to 15 seconds (see FIG. 195(E)), which is the opening time of the electric device 315b in the long-open normal winning game (the time during which the game ball can enter the second winning slot 315) (step S3604). The opening time counter is referenced in step S3618 of the normal winning game control process to determine the return timing of the electric device 315b. The MPU 41 then sets the long-open normal winning flag to OFF (step S3605) and proceeds to step S3612.

<Step S3606>
If the long-opening normal winning flag is set to OFF (step S3603: No), i.e., if the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is not a long-opening normal winning, the MPU 41 determines whether the medium-opening normal winning flag is set to ON (step S3606). The medium-opening normal winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the normal winning lottery is a medium-opening normal winning. If the result of the normal winning lottery is a medium-opening normal winning, it is set to ON in step S3510 of the normal game change start processing in FIG. 204. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a medium-opening normal winning. If the medium-opening normal winning flag is set to ON (step S3606: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3607. If the medium-opening normal winning flag is set to OFF (step S3606: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3609.

<Steps S3607 and S3608>
If the center opening normal winning flag is set to ON (step S3606: Yes), that is, if the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a center opening normal winning, the MPU 41 executes a numerical value storage process to set the value of the opening time counter to a value corresponding to 3 seconds (see FIG. 195(E)), which is the opening time of the electric device 315b in the center opening normal winning game (the time during which the game ball can enter the second winning slot 315) (step S3607).Then, the MPU 41 sets the center opening normal winning flag to OFF (step S3608), and proceeds to step S3612.

<Step S3609>
If the medium-opening normal winning flag is set to OFF (step S3606: No), that is, if the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is not a medium-opening normal winning, the MPU 41 determines whether the short-opening normal winning flag is set to ON (step S3609). The short-opening normal winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the normal winning lottery is a short-opening normal winning, and if the result of the normal winning lottery is a short-opening normal winning, it is set to ON in step S3504 of the normal variation start processing in FIG. 204. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a short-opening normal winning. If the short-open regular winning flag is set to on (step S3609: Yes), the MPU 41 transfers processing to step S3610, and if the short-open regular winning flag is set to off (step S3609: No), that is, if the result of the regular winning lottery for the completed regular game is a loss, the MPU 41 transfers processing to step S3612.

<Steps S3610 and S3611>
If the short-open normal winning flag is set to ON (step S3609: Yes), that is, if the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a short-open normal winning, the MPU 41 executes a numerical value storage process to set the value of the opening time counter to a value corresponding to 0.1 seconds (see FIG. 195(E)), which is the opening time of the electric device 315b in the short-open normal winning game (the time during which the game ball can enter the second winning slot 315) (step S3610). Then, the MPU 41 sets the short-open normal winning flag to OFF (step S3611), and proceeds to step S3612.

<Steps S3612 to S3614>
If the result of the regular lottery is a win, and the flag indicating the type of regular win (long-open regular win flag, medium-open regular win flag, or short-open regular win flag) is set to OFF (step S3605, S3608, or S3611), the MPU 41 activates the electric device 315b (step S3612). This opens the second winning slot 315, allowing the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315. The MPU 41 then sets an electric device open command to notify the sound and lamp control device 5 that the electric device 315b has been opened (step S3613), sets an electric device open flag indicating that the electric device 315b has been opened to ON (step S3614), and proceeds to step S3615.

The electric reel release command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU 41. Based on the electric reel release command, the audio lamp control device 5 can then initiate a display effect on the symbol display unit 341, for example, indicating that the electric reel 315b has been released.

<Step S3615>
When the result of the regular symbol winning lottery is a winning one and a process such as opening the electric device 315b is executed (steps S3603 to S3614), or when the long opening regular symbol winning flag and the short opening regular symbol winning flag are both set to off (when the result of the regular symbol winning lottery is a losing one) (steps S3602, S3606 and step S3609 are all No), the MPU 41 sets to off the regular symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the regular symbol has stopped being displayed (the regular symbol game has ended) (step S3615), and terminates the regular symbol winning game control process.

<Step S3616>
If the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S3601: No), as shown in FIG. 206, the MPU 41 determines whether the electric device open flag, which is set to on when the electric device 315b is opened in step S3614 of the normal map winning game control processing, is set to on (step S3616). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a normal map winning game is being played. If the electric device open flag is set to on (step S3616: Yes), that is, if a normal map winning game is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3617. On the other hand, if the electric device open flag is set to off (step S3616: No), that is, if a normal map winning game is not being played, the MPU 41 terminates the normal map winning game control processing.

<Steps S3617 and S3618>
If the electric device open flag is set to ON (step S3616: Yes), i.e., if a normal winning game is being played, the MPU 41 executes an update process to subtract 1 from the value of the open time counter set in step S3604, S3607, or S3610 of the normal winning game control process (step S3617), and determines whether the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3618). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the electric device 315b. If the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3618: Yes), i.e., if it is time to return the electric device 315b, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3619. On the other hand, if the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3618: No), i.e., if it is not time to return the electric device 315b, the MPU 41 terminates the normal winning game control process.

<Steps S3619 to S3621>
If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3618: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric role device 315b, the MPU 41 returns the electric role device 315b (step S3619). This closes the second winning opening 315, restricting the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315. The MPU 41 then sets an electric role device closing command that notifies the sound and lamp control device 5 that the electric role device 315b has been closed (step S3620), and sets the electric role device open flag, which indicates that the electric role device 315b is open, to OFF (step S3621), and proceeds to step S3822.

The electric reel close command is sent to the audio and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio and lamp control device 5 can end the display effect indicating that the electric reel has been opened, which is executed, for example, in the pattern display unit 341, based on the electric reel close command.

<Step S3622>

In step S3822, the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving game state flag a, which indicates that the game is in the time-saving game state a, is set to ON. The time-saving game state flag a is set to ON after the time-saving jackpot game ends in step S4246 of the game state transition processing in FIG. 219.

If the time-saving game state flag a, indicating that the game is in the time-saving game state a, is set to on (step S3622: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3823; if the time-saving game state flag a is set to off (step S3622: No), the MPU 41 terminates the normal winning game control process.

<Steps S3623 and S3624>
If the time-saving game state flag a indicating that the game is in the time-saving game state a is set to ON (step S3622: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to ON, which transitions the game state to the normal game state (step S3623). The normal game state transition flag is referenced when determining whether to transition the game state from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state in step S4215 of the game state transition processing of FIG. 218. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag a to OFF (step S3624), and terminates the normal winning game control processing.

Here, in the normal winning control processing of this embodiment, when a normal winning game is executed in the time-saving game state a, based on the end of the normal winning game, the normal game state transition flag that transitions the game state from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state is set to on in step S3623, and the time-saving game state flag a is set to off in step S3624. In other words, in this embodiment, when a normal winning game is started in the time-saving game state a, the game state transitions from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state by executing a normal winning game once (one operation of the electric device 315b). As mentioned above, when a normal winning game is executed based on a transition to the time-saving game state a (when the second winning slot 315 is opened by the operation of the electric device 315b), in addition to the variable display of the second special symbol, it is possible to execute a total of five second special symbol games, with variable displays of the second special symbol based on up to four second special symbol reserves (so-called remaining reserves), and the second special symbol game based on the remaining reserved second special symbols is started in the normal game state transitioned from the time-saving game state a.

[Special game control processing]
207 and 208 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of Fig. 203. In the special symbol game control process, the memory contents of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated, and the progress of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, for example, the variable display and stationary display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363, are controlled. The special symbol game control process will be described below with reference to Figs. 207 and 208.

<Step S3701>
207, in the special symbol game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether a jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being executed, is on (step S3701). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S2206 when a jackpot game starts, and is set to off in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3701: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, if a jackpot game is being played, the special symbol game will not start. Of course, the special symbol game may also be started while a jackpot game is being played.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3701: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3702.

<Step S3702>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3701: No), i.e., if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether a special symbol change display flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being changed (the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is being executed) is on (step S3702). The special symbol change display flag is set on in step S3915 when the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the special symbol change start processing of FIG. 208 described later, and is set off in step S3710 when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed stationary in the special symbol game control processing.

If the special symbol variable display flag is on (step S3702: Yes), i.e., if the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3706. On the other hand, if the special symbol variable display flag is off (step S3702: No), i.e., if the jackpot game is not being played but the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3703.

<Step S3703>
If the special pattern change display flag is off (step S3702: No), that is, if the special pattern is not being displayed in a changing manner when a jackpot game is not being played (special pattern game is being played), the MPU 41 determines whether both the first special pattern reserved number N stored in the first special pattern reserved number memory area NAA of the special pattern reserved storage area 412b and the second special pattern reserved number M stored in the second special pattern reserved number memory area NAB are 0 (step S3703).

If both the first special symbol reserved number N and the second special symbol reserved number M are 0 (step S3703: Yes), i.e., if neither the right to play the first special symbol game nor the right to play the second special symbol game is reserved, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process. On the other hand, if either the first special symbol reserved number N or the second special symbol reserved number M is not 0 (step S3703: No), i.e., if at least one of the right to play the first special symbol game and the right to play the second special symbol game is reserved, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3704.

<Step S3704>
If either the first special symbol reserved number N or the second special symbol reserved number M is not 0 (step S3703: No), that is, if there is at least one of the reserved right to play the first special symbol game and the reserved right to play the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol data setting process for the data of the special symbol win/loss information (special symbol data) stored in the special symbol reserved storage area 412b (step S3704), and proceeds to step S3705. Details of the special symbol data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 209.

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol variation start process to start the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 (to execute the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game), and then ends the special symbol game control process. Details of the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 210.

<Step S3706>
If the special symbol variation display flag is on (step S3702: Yes), that is, if the first or second special symbol is being displayed (special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol variation display time for the first special symbol set in the first special symbol variation pattern setting process in step S3903 of the special symbol variation start process in Figure 210 described below, or the second special symbol set in the second special symbol variation pattern setting process A or B in steps S3907 or S3909 of the special symbol variation start process, has elapsed since the start of the display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game (step S3706). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to stop the display of the special symbol being displayed and end the special symbol game.

If the special symbol variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first or second special symbol (step S3706: Yes), i.e., if it is time to stop the display of the currently variable special symbol and end the special symbol game, the processing proceeds to step S3707. On the other hand, if the variable display time has not elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first or second special symbol (step S3706: No), i.e., if it is not time to stop the display of the currently variable special symbol and end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 ends the special symbol game control processing.

<Steps S3707 to S3710>
If the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first or second special symbol (step S3706: Yes), i.e., if it is time to stop the variable display of the special symbol and end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 stops the special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 in a manner corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game (step S3707).The MPU 41 then turns on a special symbol variable stop flag indicating that the first or second special symbol has been stopped (step S3708), and sets a special symbol game end command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the special symbol game has ended (step S3709). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special pattern variable display flag, which indicates that the first special pattern or the second special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner (special pattern game is being executed), to off (step S3710), and proceeds to step S3711 in FIG. 208.

<Steps S3711 and S3712>
In step S3711 of Fig. 208, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the remaining setting counter is 0. The remaining setting counter indicates the remaining number of second special symbol games (special variations) to be executed for the second special symbol reserve (remaining reserve) due to the game ball entering the second winning slot 315 triggered by the opening of the electric accessory 315b in the time-shortened game state a, and is set in step S4015 of the second special symbol variation pattern setting process B of Fig. 211, or in step S4019 or S4023 of Fig. 212.

If the value of the remaining setting counter, which indicates the remaining number of special variations for the remaining reserve of the second special symbol, is 0 (step S3711: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a special variation end command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the special variation is ending (step S3712), and ends the special symbol game control processing. On the other hand, if the value of the remaining setting counter is not 0 (step S3711: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3713.

<Step S3713>
If the value of the remaining setting counter is not 0 (step S3711: No), the MPU 41 determines whether a ceiling count counter flag indicating that a ceiling count counter indicating the remaining number of special game plays until the game state is transitioned to the b time-saving game state is set is set (step S3713). The ceiling count counter is set when a jackpot game ends in step S4251 of the game state transition processing of FIG. 219, and the ceiling count counter flag is set when the ceiling count counter is set in step S4252 of the game state transition processing.

If the ceiling count counter flag, indicating that the ceiling count counter is set, is set on (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3714; if the ceiling count counter flag is set off (step S3713: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3717.

<Steps S3714 to S3716>
If the ceiling count counter flag, which indicates that the ceiling count counter is set, is set to on (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 executes an update process to subtract 1 from the value of the ceiling count counter, which indicates the remaining number of times special gameplay is to be played until the game state is transitioned to the b time-shortened game state (step S3714), and then transitions the process to step S3715.

In step S3715, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ceiling count counter after subtraction is 0. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to transition the game state to the b time-shortened game state. If the value of the ceiling count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3715: Yes), i.e., it is time to transition the game state to the b time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 sets the b time-shortened game state transition flag, which transitions the game state to the b time-shortened game state, to on (step S3716), and terminates the special game control process. On the other hand, if the value of the ceiling count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3715: No), i.e., it is not time to transition the game state to the b time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 terminates the special game control process.

<Steps S3717 and S3718>
If the ceiling count counter flag indicating that the ceiling count counter is set is set to OFF (step S3713: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the variable display is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop (step S3717). Here, a miss for the time-saving symbol stop is a jackpot lottery result in which the game state transitions to the time-saving game state C after the variable display ends. That is, in step S3717, the MPU 41 determines whether to transition to the time-saving game state C after the variable display stops.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the variable display is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop (step S3717: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the c time-saving game state transition flag, which transitions the game state to the c time-saving game state, to on (step S3718), and terminates the special symbol game control process. The c time-saving game state transition flag is referenced in step S4208 of the game state transition process in FIG. 217 when determining whether or not to transition the game state to the c time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the variable display is not a time-saving symbol stop (step S3717: No), i.e., if the gaming state is not to be transitioned to time-saving gaming state c, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3719.

<Step S3719>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the variable display is not a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S3717: No), that is, if the gaming state is not to be shifted to the time-saving gaming state c, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time-saving gaming state flag b, which indicates that the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state b, is set to ON (step S3719). The time-saving gaming state flag b is set to ON when the gaming state is to be shifted from the normal gaming state to the time-saving gaming state b in step S4203 of the gaming state shift processing in FIG.

If the b time-shortened game state flag, indicating that the game is in the b time-shortened game state, is set to on (step S3719: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3720; if the b time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3719: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3723.

<Steps S3720 to S3722>
If the b time-shortened game state flag indicating the b time-shortened game state is set to ON (step S3719: Yes), the MPU 41 executes, as an update process, a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the b time-shortened game count counter indicating the remaining number of time-shortened game plays that can be executed in the b time-shortened game state (step S3720), and proceeds to step S3721. The b time-shortened game count counter is set when the game state is transitioned from the normal game state to the b time-shortened game state in step S4205 of the game state transition process in FIG.

In step S3721, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the b time-saving count counter after subtraction is 0. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to transition the game state from the b time-saving game state to the normal game state. If the value of the b time-saving count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3721: Yes), i.e., it is time to transition the game state from the b time-saving game state to the normal game state, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the b time-saving game state to the normal game state, to on (step S3722), and terminates the special game control process. On the other hand, if the value of the b time-saving count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3721: No), i.e., it is not time to transition the game state from the b time-saving game state to the normal game state, the MPU 41 terminates the special game control process.

<Step S3723>
If the b time-shortened game state flag is set to OFF (step S3719: No), that is, if the game state is not the b time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the c time-shortened game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the c time-shortened game state, is set to ON (step S3723). The c time-shortened game state flag is set to ON when the game state is shifted from the normal game state to the c time-shortened game state in step S4209 of the game state shift processing in FIG. 217 .

If the c time-saving game state flag, indicating that the game is in the c time-saving game state, is set to on (step S3723: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3724; if the c time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3723: No), the MPU 41 terminates the special game control process.

<Steps S3724 to S3726>
If the time-saving c game state flag indicating the time-saving c game state is set to ON (step S3723: Yes), the MPU 41 executes an update process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time-saving c game state counter indicating the remaining number of time-saving game plays that can be executed in the time-saving c game state (step S3724), and proceeds to step S3725. The time-saving c game state counter is set when the game state is transitioned from the normal game state to the time-saving c game state in step S4211 of the game state transition process in FIG.

In step S3725, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the c time-saving count counter after subtraction is 0. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to transition the game state from the c time-saving game state to the normal game state. If the value of the c time-saving count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3725: Yes), i.e., it is time to transition the game state from the c time-saving game state to the normal game state, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the c time-saving game state to the normal game state, to on (step S3726), and terminates the special game control process. On the other hand, if the value of the c time-saving count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3725: No), i.e., it is not time to transition the game state from the c time-saving game state to the normal game state, the MPU 41 terminates the special game control process.

[Special drawing data setting process]
209 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3704 of the special symbol game control process in FIG. 207. In the special symbol data setting process of this embodiment, the memory contents of the special symbol reserved storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the special symbol data setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 209.

The special symbol reservation storage area 412b in this embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. However, as shown in FIG. 8, the first special symbol reservation storage area REA (first reservation area REA1, second reservation area REA2, third reservation area REA3, fourth reservation area REA4, and first special symbol reservation number memory area NAA) is a memory area for storing information on whether or not the right to play the first special symbol game is reserved for the first start winning triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning port 314, and the right to play the second special symbol game for the second start winning triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning port 315. It is equipped with a second special symbol reserve storage area REB (first reserve area REB1, second reserve area REB2, third reserve area REB3, fourth reserve area REB4, and second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB), which is a memory area for storing win/loss information for reserves, and a special symbol execution area AE, which is a memory area for moving the special symbol win/loss information stored in the first reserve area REA1 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA or the first reserve area REB1 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB, when the variable display of special symbols begins in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36.

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 209, in the special symbol data setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game is 0 (step S3801). If the second special symbol reservation number M is 0 (step S3801: Yes), i.e., if there is no second special symbol reservation for the second special symbol game but there is a first special symbol reservation for the first special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3802. On the other hand, if the second special symbol reservation number M is not 0 (step S3801: No), i.e., if there is a second special symbol reservation for the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3806. In other words, by determining whether the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game is 0, the MPU 41 prioritizes starting the second special symbol game over the first special symbol game.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol game is started before the first special symbol game, but the first special symbol game may be started before the second special symbol game. Alternatively, the special symbol games may be started in the order in which the game balls enter the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315 (in the order in which they are reserved), and either the first or second special symbol game may be executed. Furthermore, without prioritizing the start of the first and second special symbol games, the first and second special symbol games may be executed independently of each other, and the first and second special symbol games may be executed simultaneously (so-called simultaneous special symbol fluctuations).

<Steps S3802 to S3804>
If the second special symbol reserved number M is 0 (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 executes an update process to subtract 1 from the first special symbol reserved number N stored in the first special symbol reserved number memory area NAA of the first special symbol reserved storage area REA (step S3802), and moves the first special symbol hit/miss information from the first reserved area REA1 of the first special symbol reserved storage area REA to the special symbol execution area AE (step S3803). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the first special symbol hit/miss information of the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first special symbol reserved storage area REA one by one (step S3804). Specifically, in step S3804, the first special symbol win/loss information in the second reserved area REA2 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA is moved to the first reserved area REA1, the first special symbol win/loss information in the third reserved area REA3 is moved to the second reserved area REA2, and the first special symbol win/loss information in the fourth reserved area REA4 is moved to the third reserved area REA3. When the processing of step S3804 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3805.

<Step S3805>
In step S3805, the MPU 41 sets a first special symbol shift command in the RAM 412, which indicates that the first special symbol win/loss information of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA has shifted, and ends the special symbol data setting process. This first special symbol shift command is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can change the number of reserved symbols (see FIGS. 225(A) and 225(C)) displayed in the symbol display unit 341 corresponding to the first special symbol reserve, based on the first special symbol shift command.

<Steps S3806 to S3808>
If the second special symbol reservation number M is not 0 (step S3801: No), the MPU 41 executes a subtraction process to subtract 1 from the second special symbol reservation number M stored in the second special symbol reservation number memory area NAB of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB (step S3806), and moves the second special symbol win/loss information from the first reservation area REB1 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB to the special symbol execution area AE (step S3807). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the second special symbol win/loss information in the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB one by one (step S3808). Specifically, in step S3808, the second special symbol win/loss information in the second reserved area REB2 is moved to the first reserved area REB1, the second special symbol win/loss information in the third reserved area REB3 is moved to the second reserved area REB2, and the second special symbol win/loss information in the fourth reserved area REB4 is moved to the third reserved area REB3. When the processing of step S3807 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3809.

<Step S3809>
In step S3809, the MPU 41 sets a second special symbol shift command in the RAM 412, which indicates that the second special symbol win/loss information of the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB has shifted, and ends the special symbol data setting process. This second special symbol shift command is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can change the number of reserved symbols (see FIGS. 225(B) and 225(D)) displayed in the symbol display unit 341 corresponding to the second special symbol reservation, based on the second special symbol shift command.

[Special chart change start processing]
210 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol variation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S3705 of the special symbol game control processing of FIG. 207. In the special symbol variation start processing of this embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 362 starts displaying the first special symbol based on the initial winning of a game ball into the first winning slot 314, or the second special symbol display unit 363 starts displaying the second special symbol based on the initial winning of a game ball into the second winning slot 315, thereby starting the first special game or the second special symbol game (special symbol game), and various processes associated with the start of the special symbol game are executed. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 28.

<Step S3901>
210, in the special symbol variation start process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the special symbol game to be started is the first special symbol game (step S3901). If the special symbol game to be started is the first special symbol game (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3902. If the special symbol game to be started is not the first special symbol game (step S3901: No), that is, if the special symbol game to be started is the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3904.

<Steps S3902 and S3903>
If the special pattern game to be started is the first special pattern game (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 41 conducts a lottery for the first special pattern jackpot based on the first special pattern jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 196 (A)) (step S3902), and further executes the first special pattern variation pattern setting process (step S3903), and transitions the process to step S3910.

In the first special symbol variation pattern setting process, the MPU 41 references the first special symbol jackpot variation table (see Figure 196 (D)) or the first special symbol miss variation table (see Figure 196 (F)) based on the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery in step S3902, and sets the first special symbol variation pattern, which is the variation display time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game that is to be started.

<Step S3904>
If the special symbol game to be started is not the first special symbol game (step S3901: No), that is, if the special symbol game to be started is the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 determines whether the b time-saving game state, which indicates the b time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S3504). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state when starting the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol game) is the b time-saving game state. Note that the b time-saving game state flag is set to ON when, after the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol game in which the jackpot lottery result is a miss is executed a specified number of times (e.g., 500 times) and the normal game state is transitioned to the b time-saving game state in step S4203 of the game state transition processing of FIG. 217.

If the b time-saving game state, which indicates that the b time-saving game state is active, is set to ON (step S3904: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3906. On the other hand, if the b time-saving game state is set to OFF (step S3904: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3905.

<Step S3905>
If the b time-shortened game state indicating the b time-shortened game state is set to OFF (step S3904: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the c time-shortened game state indicating the c time-shortened game state is set to ON (step S3505). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state when starting the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol game) is the c time-shortened game state.

If the time-saving c game state, which indicates that the game is in the time-saving c game state, is set to ON (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3906. On the other hand, if the time-saving c game state is set to OFF (step S3905: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3908. In other words, if the game state when starting the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol game) is not the time-saving b game state or the time-saving c game state, but the normal game state or the time-saving a game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3908.

<Steps S3906 and S3907>
If the b time-shortened game state, which indicates that the game is in the b time-shortened game state, is set to on (step S3904: Yes), or if the c time-shortened game state, which indicates that the game is in the c time-shortened game state, is set to on (step S3905: Yes), that is, if the game state when starting the variable display of the second special chart (second special chart game) is the b time-shortened game state or the c time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 conducts a lottery for a second special chart jackpot based on the b time-shortened-c time-shortened second special chart jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 197 (A)) (step S3906), and further executes the second special chart variable pattern setting process A (step S3907), and proceeds to step S3910.

In the second special chart variation pattern setting process A, the MPU 41 references the b time reduction - c time reduction second special chart jackpot variation table (see Figure 197 (C)) or the b time reduction - c time reduction second special chart miss variation table (see Figure 197 (E)) based on the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery in step S3906, and sets the second special chart variation pattern, which is the variable display time of the second special chart in the second special chart game that is to be started.

<Steps S3908 and S3909>
If the c time-shortened game state is set to off (step S3905: No), that is, if the game state when the variable display of the second special chart (second special chart game) is started is not the b time-shortened game state or the c time-shortened game state, but the normal game state or the a time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 conducts a lottery for the second special chart jackpot based on the normal-a time-shortened second special chart jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 198 (A)) (step S3908), and further executes the second special chart variable pattern setting process (step S3908), and proceeds to step S3910.

In the second special chart variation pattern setting process B, the MPU 41 references the time-saving second special chart variation table a (see Figure 199 (A)) or the normal second special chart variation table (see Figure 199 (B)) based on the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery in step S3908, and sets the second special chart variation pattern, which is the variable display time of the second special chart in the second special chart game that is to be started. Details of the second special chart variation pattern setting process B will be described later with reference to Figures 211 to 213.

<Step S3910>
In step S3910, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a special symbol variation pattern command including the result of the jackpot lottery in step S3902, S3906, or S3908 and the special symbol variation pattern set in step S3903, S3907, or S3909, and proceeds to step S3911. The special symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main processing (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to execute a special symbol game presentation on the symbol display unit 341 or the like as a display presentation based on the special symbol variation pattern command.

If the result of the jackpot lottery is a "4R time-saving jackpot," the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a special chart variation pattern command any of "A01" to "A03," in which "A" indicating a 4R time-saving jackpot is added to the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03," as indicated by the addition of "A" indicating that it is a 4R time-saving jackpot. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a "4R normal jackpot," the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a special chart variation pattern command any of "B01" to "B03," in which "B" indicating a 4R regular jackpot is added to the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03," as indicated by the addition of "B." If the result of the jackpot lottery is a "small jackpot," the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a special chart variation pattern command any of "C01," "C02," or "C08" to "C010," in which "C" indicating a small jackpot is added to the special chart variation patterns "01," "02," or "08" to "010." Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "miss," the MPU 41 sets one of the special chart variation patterns "01" to "05," or "08" to "10" with a "D" added to indicate a miss, such as "D01" to "D05," or "D08" to "D10," as a special chart variation pattern command in RAM 412. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "miss," the MPU 41 includes information indicating the type of miss (reach for a front-to-back miss, reach for a non-front-to-back miss, complete miss, or miss with a time-saving pattern stop) in the special chart variation pattern command.

<Step S3911>
When the special symbol variation pattern command is set, the MPU 41 starts the special symbol game by starting the variable display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 (step S3911). Specifically, if the game is based on the initial winning of a game ball into the first winning slot 314, the MPU 41 starts the first special game by starting the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362, and if the game is based on the initial winning of a game ball into the second winning slot 315, the MPU 41 starts the second special symbol game by starting the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on a special symbol variation display in progress flag indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed (the special symbol game is being executed) (step S3911), and ends the special symbol variation start process.

[Second special chart variation pattern setting process B]
211 to 213 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the second special symbol variation pattern setting process B executed by the MPU 41 in step S3909 of the special symbol variation start process in Fig. 207. In the second special symbol variation pattern setting process B of this embodiment, the memory contents of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the second special symbol variation pattern setting process B will be described with reference to Figs. 211 to 213.

<Step S4001>
As shown in Fig. 211, in the second special symbol variation pattern setting process B of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the time-shortened game state flag a, which indicates that the time-shortened game state is set to ON. The time-shortened game state flag a is set to ON after the time-shortened jackpot game ends in step S4246 of the game state transition process of Fig. 219.

If the time-reduced game state flag a, indicating that the game is in the time-reduced game state a, is set to on (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4002; if the time-reduced game state flag a is set to off (step S4001: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4006.

<Steps S4002 and S4003>
If the time-saving game state flag a, indicating that the game is in the time-saving game state a, is set to on (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a numerical value storage process to set the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game to 40 seconds (see FIG. 199(A)) for the variable pattern "08" (step S4002), and sets a special variation start command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the second special symbol game will start in the time-saving game state a (step S4003), and then proceeds to step S4004. That is, the MPU 41 notifies the sound lamp control device 5 that the probability of the jackpot lottery result being a small jackpot is high and that a special variation that makes it easier to execute a jackpot game will start.

The special variation start command is sent to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, based on the special variation start command, the voice and lamp control device 5 can start a specific effect, a RUSH effect (see FIG. 226), which is a display effect that notifies the player that the probability of the jackpot lottery result being a small jackpot is high and that a special variation is likely to result in a jackpot game.

<Step S4004>
In step S4004, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a small win. If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a small win (step S4004: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the second special symbol variation pattern setting process B. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is not a small win (step S4004: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4005.

<Step S4005>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is not a small win (step S4004: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a loss, the MPU 41 sets a special variation start flag indicating that the special variation is to be started to ON (step S4005), and terminates the second special symbol variation pattern setting process B. The special variation start flag is referenced in the next step S4006 to determine whether the second special symbol game to be started is a second special symbol game (a second special symbol game with a remaining reserve based on a game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a) that is executed consecutively after the second special symbol game with a loss notification that was started in the time-saving game state a).

<Step S4006>
When the time-saving game state flag a indicating the time-saving game state a is set to OFF (step S4001: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the special variation start flag is set to ON (step S4006). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether the second special symbol game to be started is a second special symbol game (a second special symbol game with a remaining reserve based on a game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a) that is executed consecutively after the second special symbol game with a miss notification that was started in the time-saving game state a.

If the special fluctuation start flag is set to ON (step S4006: Yes), that is, if the second special symbol game to be started is a second special symbol game that is executed immediately after a second special symbol game that was started in the time-saving game state a and triggered a loss (a second special symbol game with remaining reserves based on a game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4007. On the other hand, if the special fluctuation start flag is set to OFF (step S4006: No), that is, if the second special symbol game to be started is not a second special symbol game that is executed immediately after a second special symbol game that was started in the time-saving game state a and triggered a loss (a second special symbol game with remaining reserves based on a game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4024 in FIG. 213.

<Steps S4007 and S4008>
If the special variation start flag is set to on (step S4006: Yes), that is, if the second special pattern game to be started is a second special pattern game that is executed consecutively after a miss notification second special pattern game that was started in the a time-shortened game state (a second special pattern game with a remaining reserve based on a game ball entering the second winning port 315 in the a time-shortened game state), the MPU 41 sets the special variation start flag to off (step S4007) and proceeds to step S4008.

<Steps S4008 and S4009>
In step S4008, the MPU 41 identifies the remaining reservation pattern (see Figures 199 (B) to 199 (D)) and the number of remaining reservations for the remaining reservations, which are the reservation of the right to play the second special pattern game at the end of the second special pattern game that was first played based on the game ball entering the second winning port 315 in the time-saving play state a (step S4008), sets a remaining reservation pattern command (step S4009), and proceeds to step S4010.

The remaining hold pattern command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the remaining hold pattern based on the entry of game balls into the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving play state a, and the remaining hold number. This remaining hold pattern command is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can start a battle effect (see FIGS. 227 and 228) from the RUSH effects as a display effect based on the remaining hold pattern command. In addition, the voice lamp control device 5 can manage the remaining hold number based on the remaining hold pattern command, and as a result, it becomes possible to display the remaining hold number on the pattern display unit 341 as a second special symbol hold image, which is a display effect.

<Steps S4010 and S4011>
In step S4010, the MPU 41 determines whether the remaining reservation pattern identified in step S4008 corresponds to either remaining reservation pattern 1 or remaining reservation pattern 5.

If the remaining reserve pattern corresponds to either remaining reserve pattern 1 or remaining reserve pattern 5 (step S4010: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a numerical value storage process to set the second special chart variation display time for the second special chart game, which is the remaining reserve based on the game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving play state a, to 120 seconds, which is special chart variation pattern "08" (step S4011), and terminates the second special chart variation pattern setting process B. On the other hand, if the remaining reserve pattern does not correspond to either remaining reserve pattern 1 or remaining reserve pattern 5 (step S4010: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4012.

<Step S4012>
If the remaining reservation pattern does not correspond to either remaining reservation pattern 1 or remaining reservation pattern 5 (step S4010: No), MPU 41 determines whether the remaining reservation pattern identified in step S4008 corresponds to either remaining reservation pattern 2 or remaining reservation pattern 6 (step S4012).

If the remaining reservation pattern corresponds to either remaining reservation pattern 2 or remaining reservation pattern 6 (step S4012: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4013; if the remaining reservation pattern does not correspond to either remaining reservation pattern 2 or remaining reservation pattern 6 (step S4012: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4016 in FIG. 212.

<Step S4013>
If the remaining reserve pattern corresponds to either remaining reserve pattern 2 or remaining reserve pattern 6 (step S4012: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a numerical storage process to set the second special chart change display time for the second special chart game, which is the remaining reserve based on the game ball entering the second winning port 315 in the time-saving play state a, to 60 seconds, which is special chart change pattern "02" (step S4011), and then proceeds to step S4014.

<Steps S4014 and S4015>
In step S4014, the MPU 41 sets the remaining reservation pattern 2, 6 flag to ON, which indicates that the remaining reservation pattern is either the remaining reservation pattern 2 or the remaining reservation pattern 6. Then, as a numerical value storage process, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting the remaining setting counter, which indicates the remaining number of remaining reservations based on the game ball entering the second winning port 315 in the time-saving game state a, to 1 (step S4015), and ends the second special chart variation pattern setting process B.

<Step S4016>
If the remaining reservation pattern does not correspond to either remaining reservation pattern 2 or remaining reservation pattern 6 (step S4012: No), as shown in FIG. 212, MPU 41 determines whether the remaining reservation pattern identified in step S4008 corresponds to either remaining reservation pattern 3 or remaining reservation pattern 7 (step S4016).

If the remaining reservation pattern corresponds to either remaining reservation pattern 3 or remaining reservation pattern 7 (step S4016: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4017; if the remaining reservation pattern does not correspond to either remaining reservation pattern 3 or remaining reservation pattern 7 (step S4016: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4020.

<Step S4017>
If the remaining reserve pattern corresponds to either remaining reserve pattern 3 or remaining reserve pattern 7 (step S4016: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a numerical storage process to set the second special chart change display time for the second special chart game, which is the remaining reserve based on the game ball entering the second winning port 315 in the a time-saving play state, to 40 seconds, which is special chart change pattern "10" (step S4017), and then proceeds to step S4018.

<Steps S4018 and S4019>
In step S4018, the MPU 41 sets the remaining reservation pattern 3, 7 flag to ON, which indicates that the remaining reservation pattern is either the remaining reservation pattern 3 or the remaining reservation pattern 7. Then, as a numerical value storage process, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting the remaining setting counter, which indicates the remaining number of remaining reservations based on the game ball entering the second winning port 315 in the time-saving game state a, to 2 (step S4019), and ends the second special chart variation pattern setting process B.

<Step S4020>
If the remaining reservation pattern does not correspond to either remaining reservation pattern 3 or remaining reservation pattern 7 (step S4016: No), MPU 41 determines whether the remaining reservation pattern identified in step S4008 corresponds to either remaining reservation pattern 4 or remaining reservation pattern 8 (step S4020).

If the remaining hold pattern corresponds to either remaining hold pattern 4 or remaining hold pattern 8 (step S4020: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4021; if the remaining hold pattern does not correspond to either remaining hold pattern 4 or remaining hold pattern 8 (step S4020: No), the MPU 41 terminates the second special chart variation pattern setting process B.

<Step S4021>
If the remaining reserve pattern corresponds to either remaining reserve pattern 4 or remaining reserve pattern 8 (step S4020: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a numerical storage process to set the second special chart change display time for the second special chart game, which is the remaining reserve based on the game ball entering the second winning port 315 in the time-saving game state a, to 30 seconds, which is special chart change pattern "01" (step S4021), and then proceeds to step S4022.

<Steps S4022 and S4023>
In step S4022, the MPU 41 sets the remaining reservation pattern 4, 8 flag to ON, which indicates that the remaining reservation pattern is either the remaining reservation pattern 4 or the remaining reservation pattern 8. Then, as a numerical value storage process, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting the remaining setting counter, which indicates the remaining number of remaining reservations based on the game ball entering the second winning port 315 in the time-saving game state a, to 3 (step S4023), and ends the second special chart variation pattern setting process B.

<Step S4024>
If the special variation start flag is set to off (step S4006: No), that is, if the second special pattern game to be started is not a second special pattern game that is executed consecutively after a miss notification second special pattern game that was started in the a time-shortened game state (a second special pattern game with remaining reserves based on the game ball entering the second winning port 315 in the a time-shortened game state), as shown in FIG. 212, the MPU 41 determines whether the remaining reserve pattern 2, 6 flag, which indicates that the remaining reserve pattern is either remaining reserve pattern 2 or remaining reserve pattern 6, is set to on (step S4024).

If the remaining hold pattern 2, 6 flag is set to on (step S4024: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4025; if the remaining hold pattern 2, 6 flag is set to off (step S4024: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4029.

<Steps S4025 to S4028>
If the remaining reserve pattern 2, 6 flag is set to on (step S4024: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process of setting 60 seconds, which is the special chart variation pattern "02", as the second special chart variation display time for the second special chart game, which is the remaining reserve based on the game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a, as a numerical value storage process (step S4025). Then, the MPU 41 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the remaining setting counter, which indicates the remaining number of remaining reserves based on the game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a (step S4026), and determines whether the value of the remaining setting counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4027).

If the value of the remaining setting counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4027: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the remaining reserved pattern 2, 6 flag to OFF (step S4028) and terminates the second special chart variation pattern setting process B. On the other hand, if the value of the remaining setting counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4027: No), the MPU 41 terminates the second special chart variation pattern setting process B.

<Step S4029>
If the remaining hold pattern 2, 6 flag is set to off (step S4024: No), MPU 41 determines whether the remaining hold pattern 3, 7 flag, which indicates that the remaining hold pattern is either remaining hold pattern 3 or remaining hold pattern 7, is set to on (step S4029).

If the remaining hold pattern 3, 7 flag is set to on (step S4029: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4030; if the remaining hold pattern 3, 7 flag is set to off (step S4029: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4034.

<Steps S4030 to S4033>
If the remaining reserve pattern 3, 7 flag is set to on (step S4029: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process of setting 40 seconds, which is the special chart change pattern "10", as the second special chart change display time for the second special chart game, which is the remaining reserve based on the game ball entering the second winning port 315 in the time-saving game state a, as a numerical value storage process (step S4030). Then, the MPU 41 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the remaining setting counter, which indicates the remaining number of remaining reserves based on the game ball entering the second winning port 315 in the time-saving game state a (step S4031), and determines whether the value of the remaining setting counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4032).

If the value of the remaining setting counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4032: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the remaining reserved pattern 3, 7 flag to OFF (step S4033) and terminates the second special chart variation pattern setting process B. On the other hand, if the value of the remaining setting counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4032: No), the MPU 41 terminates the second special chart variation pattern setting process B.

<Step S4034>
If the remaining hold pattern 3, 7 flag is set to off (step S4029: No), MPU 41 determines whether the remaining hold pattern 4, 8 flag, which indicates that the remaining hold pattern is either remaining hold pattern 4 or remaining hold pattern 8, is set to on (step S4034).

If the remaining reserved pattern 4, 8 flag is set to on (step S4034: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4035; if the remaining reserved pattern 4, 8 flag is set to off (step S4034: No), the MPU 41 terminates the second special chart variation pattern setting process B.

<Steps S4035 to S4038>
If the remaining reserve pattern 4, 8 flag is set to on (step S4034: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process of setting the second special symbol variation display time for the second special symbol game, which is the remaining reserve based on the game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a, to 30 seconds, which is the special symbol variation pattern "01", as a numerical value storage process (step S4035). Then, the MPU 41 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the remaining setting counter, which indicates the remaining number of remaining reserves based on the game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a (step S4036), and determines whether the value of the remaining setting counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4037).

If the value of the remaining setting counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4037: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the remaining reserved pattern 4, 8 flag to OFF (step S4037) and terminates the second special chart variation pattern setting process B. On the other hand, if the value of the remaining setting counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4037: No), the MPU 41 terminates the second special chart variation pattern setting process B.

In this embodiment, the jackpot lottery is executed based on the game state at the time the special chart starts to change, but the jackpot lottery may also be executed based on the game state at the time the game ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315.

[Small win game control processing]
214 to 216 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the small win game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407-1 in the main process of Fig. 203. In the small win game control process of this embodiment, a process is executed to control the operation of the feather role device 83 in a small win game that is executed based on the result of the big win lottery that is executed in response to the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning port 315 being a small win.

<Step S4101>
214, in the small win game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not a special symbol variation stop flag indicating that the first or second special symbol has been stopped and displayed is set to ON (step S4101). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the timing for starting a small win game has arrived by the first or second special symbol being stopped and displayed. The special symbol variation stop flag is set to ON when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in step S3709 of the special symbol game control process of FIG. 207.

If the special chart variation stop flag is set to ON (step S4101: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start a small win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4102. On the other hand, if the special chart variation stop flag is set to OFF (step S4101: No), i.e., if it is not time to start a small win game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4106.

<Step S4102>
If the special symbol variation stop flag is set to ON (step S4101: Yes), that is, if it is time to start a small prize game, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is a small prize or not (step S4102). Whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a small prize or not is determined based on the result of the jackpot lottery stored in the RAM 413 when the jackpot lottery is held in step S3808 in the special symbol variation start processing of FIG.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a small win (step S4102: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4103. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a small win (step S4102: No), i.e., if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the MPU 41 terminates the small win game control process.

<Steps S4103 to S4105>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a small win (step S4102: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a small win game start flag to ON, indicating that the small win game is started (step S4103).Then, the MPU 41 sets an opening flag to ON, indicating that the opening of the small win game is being executed (step S4104), and executes a process of setting an opening time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the opening, as a numerical value storage process (step S4105), and ends the small win game control process.

<Step S4106>
If the special chart variation stop flag is set to off (step S4101: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the small win game, the MPU 41 determines whether the opening flag, which indicates that the opening of the small win game is being executed, is set to on.

If the opening flag is set to on (step S4106: Yes), i.e., if the opening for a small win game is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4107. On the other hand, if the opening flag is set to off (step S4106: No), i.e., if the opening for a small win game is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4115 in FIG. 215.

<Steps S4107 to S4109>
If the opening flag is set to ON (step S4106: Yes), that is, if the opening of a small win game is being executed, the MPU 41 executes, as an update process, a process of subtracting 1 from the value of an opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening (step S4107), and determines whether the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S4108). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether, in a small win game, it is the timing to end the opening and start operating the movable wing portion 832 of the wing device 83.

If the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4108: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the opening and start operating the movable wing portion 832 of the feather device 83 in a small win game, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed to OFF (step S4105) and proceeds to step S4110. On the other hand, if the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4108: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the opening and start operating the movable wing portion 832 of the feather device 83 in a small win game, the MPU 41 terminates the small win game control process.

<Step S4110>
In a small win game, when it is time to end the opening and start the operation of the movable wing portion 832, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the movable wing portion 832 of the feather role device 83 (step S4110), and proceeds to step S4111 (step S4110). In this way, when the operation of the movable wing portion 832 of the feather role device 83 is started in a small win game, the introduction port 831 of the feather role device 83 is opened, and the game ball can enter the inside of the feather role device 83.

<Steps S4111 and S4112>
In step S4111, the MPU 41 sets the movable feather operation flag, which indicates that the movable feather 832 is being operated, to ON (step S4111).Then, as a numerical value storage process, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting a movable feather operation time counter, which indicates the remaining operation time of the movable feather 832 (step S4112), and proceeds to step S4113.

<Steps S4113 and S4114>
In step S4113, the MPU 41 sets a V prize opening opening/closing unit operation standby flag, which indicates that the V prize opening opening/closing unit 835 is waiting to operate, to ON (step S4113). Then, the MPU 41 executes a numerical value storage process to set a V prize opening opening/closing unit operation standby time counter, which indicates the time remaining until the V prize opening opening/closing unit 835 starts operating (step S4114), and ends the small win game control process.

<Step S4115>
If the opening flag is set to OFF (step S4106: No), i.e., if the opening of the small win game has not been executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a V prize opening/closing unit operation standby flag, which indicates that the V prize opening/closing unit 835 is waiting to operate, is set to ON (step S4115), as shown in Fig. 215. If the V prize opening/closing unit operation standby flag is set to ON (step S4115: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4116, and if the V prize opening/closing unit operation standby flag is set to OFF (step S4115: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4122.

<Steps S4116 and S4117>
If the V prize opening opening/closing section operation standby flag is set to ON (step S4115: Yes), the MPU 41 executes an update process in which it subtracts 1 from the V prize opening opening/closing section operation standby time counter that indicates the time remaining until the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 starts operating (step S4116), and determines whether the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation standby time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4117). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to start the operation of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 and open the V prize opening 833.

If the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation standby time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4117: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start operation of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 and open the V prize opening 833, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4118. On the other hand, if the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation standby time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4117: No), i.e., if it is not time to start operation of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 (open the V prize opening 833), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4130 in FIG. 216.

<Steps S4118 to S4121>
If the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation waiting time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4117: Yes), that is, if it is time to start operating the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 and open the V prize opening 833, the MPU 41 starts operating the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 (step S4118) and sets the V prize opening opening/closing section operation flag, which indicates that the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 is operating, to on (step S4119).

Then, as a numerical value storage process, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting a V prize opening/closing section operation time counter that indicates the remaining operation time of the V prize opening/closing section 835 (step S4120), sets the V prize opening/closing section operation standby flag to off (step S4121), and proceeds to step S4130 in FIG. 216.

<Step S4122>
If the V prize opening opening/closing section operation standby flag is set to OFF (step S4115: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V prize opening opening/closing section operation flag, which indicates that the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 is operated, is set to ON (step S4122). If the V prize opening opening/closing section operation flag is set to ON (step S4122: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2023, and if the V prize opening opening/closing section operation flag is set to OFF (step S4122: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4130 in FIG.

<Step S4123>
If the V winning opening opening/closing section operation flag is set to ON (step S4122: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a V winning flag indicating that a gaming ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather device 83 is set to ON (step S4123). The V winning flag is set to ON in step S4125 when a gaming ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather device 83.

If the V winning flag, which indicates that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather device 83, is set to ON (step S4123: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4126; if the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S4123: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4124.

<Steps S4124 and S4125>
If the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S4123: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather role device 83 (step S4124). Whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather role device 83 is determined by whether or not a ball entry sensor (not shown) detects that the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 833, for example, in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main process of FIG.

If a gaming ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather device 83 (step S4124: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V winning flag to ON (step S4125) and proceeds to step S4126. On the other hand, if a gaming ball has not entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather device 83 (step S4124: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4126.

<Steps S4126 and S4127>
In step S4126, the MPU 41 executes an update process in which it subtracts 1 from the V prize opening opening/closing section operation time counter which indicates the remaining operation time of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83, and furthermore, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S4127). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to restore the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 (close the V prize opening 833).

If the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4127: Yes), i.e., if it is time to return the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather device 83 (close the V prize opening 833), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4128. On the other hand, if the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4127: No), i.e., if it is not time to return the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather device 83 (close the V prize opening 833), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4130 in FIG. 216.

<Steps S4128 and S4129>
If the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4127: Yes), that is, if it is time to restore the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 (close the V prize opening 833), the MPU 41 restores the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 (step S4128), sets the V prize opening opening/closing section operation flag indicating that the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 is operated to off (step S4129), and proceeds to step S4130 of Figure 216.

<Step S4130>
216, in step S4130, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a movable wing operation flag indicating that the movable wing 832 is being operated is set to on. If the movable wing operation flag is set to on (step S4130: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4131, and if the movable wing operation flag is set to off (step S4130: No), the MPU 41 ends the small win game control process.

<Steps S4131 and S4132>
If the movable blade operation flag is set to ON (step S4130: Yes), the MPU 41 executes an update process to subtract 1 from the value of the movable blade operation time counter, which indicates the remaining operation time of the movable blade 832 (step S4131).The MPU 41 then determines whether the value of the movable blade operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4132).In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the movable blade 832 and close the introduction port 831, thereby ending the small win game.

If the value of the movable wing operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4132: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the small win game by returning the movable wing 832 and closing the introduction port 831, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4133. On the other hand, if the value of the movable wing operation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4132: No), that is, if it is not time to end the small win game by returning the movable wing 832 and closing the introduction port 831, the MPU 41 ends the small win game control process.

<Steps S4133 to S4135>
If the value of the movable wing operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4132: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the small win game by returning the movable wing 832 (step S4133). Then, the MPU 41 sets the movable wing operation flag indicating that the movable wing 832 is being operated to OFF (step S4134), and sets the small win game end flag indicating that the small win game has ended to ON (step S4135), and ends the small win game control process.

[Game state transition processing]
217 to 220 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of the main process of Fig. 203. In the game state transition process of this embodiment, a process for transitioning various game states is executed. The game state transition process will be described below with reference to Figs. 217 to 220.

<Step S4201>
217, in the game state transition process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not a normal game state flag indicating a normal game state is set to ON (step S4201). In the game state transition process, when the game state is transitioned to the normal game state, the normal game state flag is set to ON in step S4216, step S4223, or step S4226 of Fig. 218, and when the game state is transitioned from the normal game state, the normal game state flag is set to OFF in step S4207, S4213, step S4238, S4248 of Fig. 219, or step S4263 of Fig. 220.

If the normal game state flag is set to on (step S4201: Yes), i.e., if the game state is normal game state, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S4202. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to off (step S4201: No), i.e., if the game state is other than normal game state, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S4214 in FIG. 218.

<Step S4202>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4201: Yes), that is, if the game state is the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the b time-saving game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the normal game state to the b time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S4202). The b time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3716 of the special symbol game control processing in FIG. 208 if, after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol game in which the jackpot lottery result is a miss is executed a specified number of times (for example, 500 times).

If the b time-saving game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the normal game state to the b time-saving game state, is set to on (step S4202: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S4203; if the b time-saving game state transition flag is set to off (step S4202: No), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S4208.

<Steps S4203 and S4204>
If the b time-shortened game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the normal game state to the b time-shortened game state, is set to on (step S4202: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the b time-shortened game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the b time-shortened game state, to on (step S4203), and sets the b time-shortened game state transition command (step S4204).

The b-time-shortened game state transition command is a command that notifies the sound and lamp control device 5 that the game state has transitioned to the b-time-shortened game state, and further includes information regarding the maximum number of time-shortened game plays that can be played in the b-time-shortened game state. This b-time-shortened game state transition command is sent to the sound and lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, based on the b-time-shortened game state transition command, the sound and lamp control device 5 can initiate effects specific to the b-time-shortened game state (background effects, right-hit display, display of the remaining number of b-time-shortened game plays, chance notification, display of the number of reserved second special symbol games, etc.) (see FIG. 225 (B)). Furthermore, it becomes possible to manage the remaining number of time-shortened game plays that can be played in the b-time-shortened game state through update processing.

In this embodiment, information regarding the maximum number of time-saving game plays that can be performed in the b time-saving game state is included in the b time-saving game state transition command and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, but this information may also be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 as a command separate from the b time-saving game state transition command.

<Steps S4205 to S4207>
In step S4205, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting a b time-shortening number counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-shortening games that can be executed in the b time-shortening game state, as a numerical value storage process. The maximum number of time-shortening games that can be executed in the b time-shortening game state is set to, for example, 500 times (see FIG. 195(E)). Then, the MPU 41 sets the b time-shortening game state transition flag and the normal game state flag to OFF (steps S4206 and S4207), and ends the transition process of the game state.

<Step S4208>
If the b time-saving game state transition flag that transitions the game state from the normal game state to the b time-saving game state is set to OFF (step S4202: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the c time-saving game state transition flag that transitions the game state from the normal game state to the c time-saving game state is set to ON (step S4208). The c time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON when the special symbol game ends with the result of the jackpot lottery being a miss for the time-saving symbol stop in step S3718 of the special symbol game control processing in FIG. 208.

If the time-saving c game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the normal game state to the time-saving c game state, is set to on (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S4209; if the time-saving c game state transition flag is set to off (step S4202: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S4209 and S4210>
If the c-time-shortened game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the normal game state to the c-time-shortened game state, is set to on (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the c-time-shortened game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the c-time-shortened game state, to on (step S4209), and sets the c-time-shortened game state transition command (step S4210).

The c time-shortened play state transition command notifies the sound and lamp control device 5 that the game has transitioned to the c time-shortened play state, and further includes information regarding the maximum number of time-shortened play periods that can be played in the c time-shortened play state. This c time-shortened play state transition command is sent to the sound and lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 of the next main processing (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, based on the c time-shortened play state transition command, the sound and lamp control device 5 can initiate effects specific to the game state when the game state is the c time-shortened play state (background effects, left-hit display, remaining number of c time-shortened play periods display, chance notification, first special symbol play pending display, etc.) (see FIG. 225 (C)). Furthermore, update processing enables the sound and lamp control device 5 to manage the remaining number of time-shortened play periods that can be played in the c time-shortened play state.

In this embodiment, information regarding the maximum number of time-saving games that can be played in the time-saving game state c is included in the time-saving game state c transition command and sent to the voice lamp control device 5, but this information may also be sent to the voice lamp control device 5 as a command separate from the time-saving game state c transition command.

<Steps S4211 to S4213>
In step S4211, the MPU 41 executes a numerical value storage process in which the remaining number of time-saving games that can be executed in the time-saving game state c is set in the time-saving number counter. The maximum number of time-saving games that can be executed in the time-saving game state c is set to 10 times (time-saving symbol stop miss A), 20 times (time-saving symbol stop miss B), 30 times (time-saving symbol stop miss C), or 40 times (time-saving symbol stop miss D) depending on the type of time-saving symbol stop miss (see FIG. 198 (D)). Then, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state transition flag c and the normal game state flag to off (steps S4212 and S4213), and ends the transition process of the game state.

<Step S4214>
If the normal game state flag indicating that the game state is a normal game state is set to off (step S4201: No), that is, if the game state is other than a normal game state, as shown in FIG. 218, the MPU 41 determines whether the a time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game state is an a time-shortened game state is set to on (step S4214).

If the time-saving game state flag a is set to on (step S4214: Yes), i.e., if the game state is the time-saving game state a, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4215. On the other hand, if the time-saving game state flag a is set to off (step S4214: No), i.e., if the game state is neither the normal game state nor the time-saving game state a, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4220.

<Step S4215>
If the time-shortened game state flag is set to ON (step S4214: Yes), that is, if the game state is the time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a normal game state transition flag that transitions the game state from the time-shortened game state to the normal game state is set to ON (step S4215). The normal game state transition flag that transitions the game state from the time-shortened game state to the normal game state is set to ON in step S3623 of the normal game state control process of FIG. 206 when a normal game that started in the time-shortened game state is ended.

If the normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state, is set to on (step S4215: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S4216; if the normal game state transition flag is set to off (step S4215: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S4216 and S4217>
If the normal game state transition flag that transitions the game state from a time-saving game state to a normal game state is set to on (step S4215: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to on, indicating that the game state is a normal game state (step S4216), and sets a normal game state transition command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state has transitioned to the normal game state (step S4217).

The normal game state transition command is sent to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main processing (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice and lamp control device 5 can execute effects specific to the normal game state (background effects, display effects such as a hold display of the first special symbol game (first special symbol hold image)) (see FIG. 225 (A)) based on the normal game state transition command.

<Steps S4218 and S4219>
In step S4218, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF, and further sets the time-reduced game state flag a to OFF (step S4219), thereby terminating the game state transition process.

<Step S4220>
If the a time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game state is the a time-shortened game state is set to off (step S4214: No), that is, if the game state is other than the normal game state or the a time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the b time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game state is the b time-shortened game state is set to on (step S4220).

If the b time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S4220: Yes), i.e., if the game state is the b time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4221. On the other hand, if the b time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S4220: No), i.e., if the game state is not the normal game state, the a time-shortened game state, or the b time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4226.

<Step S4221>
If the b time-shortened game state flag is set to ON (step S4220: Yes), that is, if the game state is the b time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a normal game state transition flag that transitions the game state from the b time-shortened game state to the normal game state is set to ON (step S4221). The normal game state transition flag that transitions the game state from the b time-shortened game state to the normal game state is set to ON in step S3722 of the special symbol game control processing in FIG. 208 when the b time-shortened game special symbol game is executed a specified number of times (for example, 500 times (see FIG. 195(E))).

If the normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the b time-saving game state to the normal game state, is set to on (step S4221: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S4222; if the normal game state transition flag is set to off (step S4221: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S4222 and S4223>
If the normal game state transition flag that transitions the game state from the time-saving game state b to the normal game state is set to on (step S4221: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to on, indicating that the game state is the normal game state (step S4222), and sets a normal game state transition command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state has transitioned to the normal game state (step S4223).

The normal game state transition command is sent to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main processing (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to execute effects (background effects, display effects such as a hold display for the first special symbol game) (see FIG. 225 (A)) specific to when the game state is normal game state, based on the normal game state transition command.

<Steps S4224 and S4225>
In step S4224, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF, and further sets the b time-shortened game state flag to OFF (step S4225), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S4226>
If the b time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game state is the b time-shortened game state is set to off (step S4220: No), that is, if the game state is other than the normal game state, the a time-shortened game state, or the b time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the c time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game state is the c time-shortened game state is set to on (step S4226).

If the time-shortened game state flag c is set to on (step S4226: Yes), i.e., if the game state is the time-shortened game state c, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4227. On the other hand, if the time-shortened game state flag c is set to off (step S4226: No), i.e., if the game state is not the normal game state, the time-shortened game state a, the time-shortened game state b, or the time-shortened game state c, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4232 in FIG. 219.

<Step S4227>
If the time-saving c game state flag is set to ON (step S4226: Yes), that is, if the game state is the time-saving c game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the time-saving c game state to the normal game state, is set to ON (step S4227). The normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the time-saving c game state to the normal game state, is set to ON in step S3726 of the special game control processing of FIG. 208 when the special game of the time-saving c game is executed a specified number of times (10 times, 20 times, 30 times, or 40 times (see FIG. 198 (D))) according to the type of time-saving miss/stop miss.

If the normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the time-saving game state c to the normal game state, is set to on (step S4227: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S4228; if the normal game state transition flag is set to off (step S4227: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S4228 and S4229>
If the normal game state transition flag that transitions the game state from the time-saving game state c to the normal game state is set to on (step S4227: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to on, indicating that the game state is the normal game state (step S4228), and sets a normal game state transition command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state has transitioned to the normal game state (step S4229).

The normal game state transition command is sent to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main processing (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to execute effects (background effects, display effects such as a hold display for the first special symbol game) (see FIG. 225 (A)) specific to when the game state is normal game state, based on the normal game state transition command.

<Steps S4230 and S4231>
In step S4230, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF, and further sets the c time-shortened game state flag to OFF (step S4231), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S4232>
If the c time-shortened game state flag is set to OFF (step S4226: No), that is, if the game state is not the normal game state, the a time-shortened game state, the b time-shortened game state, or the c time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S4232), as shown in Fig. 219. The jackpot game state flag indicates that the game state is a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is executed, and is set to ON in step S4234 when a jackpot game is started.

If the jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game state is a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is being executed, is set to ON (step S4232: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4245. On the other hand, if the jackpot game state flag is set to OFF (step S4232: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4233.

<Steps S4233 and S4234>
If the jackpot game status flag is set to OFF (step S4232: No), the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game is to be started is set to ON (step S4233). When a jackpot game is to be started, the jackpot game start flag is set to ON in step S2205 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 .

If the jackpot game start flag, indicating that a jackpot game is about to start, is set to ON (step S4233: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag, indicating that the game state is a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is being executed, to ON (step S4234), and proceeds to step S4235. On the other hand, if the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S4233: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4253 in FIG. 220.

<Steps S4235 and S4236>
In step S4235, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game to be started is a time-shortened jackpot in which the game state will be transitioned to the time-shortened game state a after the jackpot game ends. If the jackpot game to be started is a time-shortened jackpot in which the game state will be transitioned to the time-shortened game state a after the jackpot game ends (step S4235: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time-shortened game state transition flag a, which transitions the game state to the time-shortened game state a after the jackpot game ends, to on (step S4236), and proceeds to step S4237. If the jackpot game to be started is not a time-shortened jackpot (step S4235: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4237.

<Steps S4237 and S4238>
In step S4237, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the normal game state, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a jackpot game will start based on the result of the jackpot lottery when the game state is the normal game state being a jackpot.

If the normal game state flag indicating that the game state is normal game state is set to ON (step S4237: Yes), that is, if the jackpot game is started based on the result of the jackpot lottery when the game state is normal game state being a jackpot, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to OFF (step S4238) and proceeds to step S4244. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag indicating that the game state is normal game state is set to ON (step S4237: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4239.

<Steps S4239 to S4241>
In step S4239, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the b time-shortened game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the b time-shortened game state, is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a jackpot game is to be started based on the result of the jackpot lottery when the game state is the b time-shortened game state being a jackpot.

When the b time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the b time-saving game state, is set to ON (step S4239: Yes), i.e., when a jackpot game is initiated based on the result of a jackpot lottery when the game state is the b time-saving game state, the MPU 41 sets the b time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4240). Then, as an update process, the MPU 41 executes a process to clear the b time-saving number counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving game plays that can be executed when the game state is the b time-saving game state (step S4241), and proceeds to step S4244.

On the other hand, if the b time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4239: No), that is, if the jackpot game to be started is not based on a jackpot result from the jackpot lottery when the game state is the b time-saving game state, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S4242.

<Steps S4242 and S4243>
In step S4242, the MPU 41 sets the c time-shortened game state flag to off, and further, as an update process, the MPU 41 executes a process of clearing the c time-shortened game number counter, which indicates the remaining number of time-shortened game plays that can be executed when the game state is the c time-shortened game state (step S4243), and then transitions to step S4244.

<Step S4244>
When the MPU 41 performs various processes such as setting off a flag relating to the game state before the start of the jackpot game (steps S4234 to S4243), it sets off the jackpot game start flag (step S4244) and terminates the transition process of the game state.

<Steps S4245 to S4249>
If the jackpot game state flag indicating that the game state is a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is executed is set to ON (step S4232: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game is ending is ON (step S4245). When the jackpot game ends, the jackpot game end flag is set to ON in step S2251 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 29.

If the jackpot game end flag is on (step S4245: Yes), i.e., if the jackpot game is to be ended, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4246. On the other hand, if the jackpot game end flag is off (step S4245: No), i.e., if the jackpot game is not to be ended, the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S4246 to S4252>
If the jackpot game end flag is on (step S4245: Yes), i.e., when the jackpot game is to be ended, the MPU 41 determines whether the a time-saving game state transition flag, which transitions the game state from the jackpot game state to the a time-saving game state based on the end of the jackpot game, is set on (step S4246).

If the time-saving game state transition flag a, which transitions the game state from the jackpot game state to the time-saving game state a based on the end of the jackpot game, is set to ON (step S4246: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag a, indicating that the game state is the time-saving game state a, to ON (step S4247). Then, the MPU 41 sets a time-saving game state transition command a, which notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the game state has transitioned to the time-saving game state a (step S4248), and proceeds to step S4251.

The a-time-shortened game state transition command is sent to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main processing (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, based on the a-time-shortened game state transition command, the sound lamp control device 5 can start effects specific to when the game state is the a-time-shortened game state (display effects such as background effects, RUSH display, right-hit display, display of the remaining number of a-time-shortened games, and display of the number of reserved games for the second special symbol game) (see FIG. 225 (D)).

In this embodiment, the number of time-shortened games (number of times the second winning slot 315 is opened) when the game state is in the time-shortened game state a is set to 1, so the time-shortened game state transition command does not include information indicating the maximum number of time-shortened games that can be played when the game state is in the time-shortened game state a. Of course, the time-shortened game state transition command may also include information indicating the maximum number of time-shortened games that can be played when the game state is in the time-shortened game state a.

On the other hand, if the time-reduced gaming state transition flag a is set to OFF (step S4246: No), the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state flag, indicating that the gaming state is the normal gaming state, to ON (step S4249).Then, the MPU 41 sets a normal gaming state transition command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the gaming state has transitioned to the normal gaming state (step S4250), and proceeds to step S4251.

The normal game state transition command is sent to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to execute effects (background effects, display effects such as a hold display for the first special symbol game) (see FIG. 225 (A)) specific to when the game state is normal game state, based on the normal game state transition command.

<Steps S4251 to S4254>
In step S4251, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game state flag indicating that the game state is a jackpot game state to OFF (step S4251), and sets a jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game is ended to OFF (step S4252). Furthermore, as a numerical value storage process, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting a ceiling number counter indicating the remaining number of special game plays required until the game state is shifted to the b time-saving game state to a specified number (for example, 500 times) (step S4253), and sets a ceiling number counter flag indicating that the ceiling number counter is set to ON (step S4254), and ends the transition process of the game state.

<Step S4255>
If the jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game is about to start is set to OFF (step S4233: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the small jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S4255), as shown in Fig. 220. The small jackpot game state flag indicates that the game state is a small jackpot game state in which a small jackpot game is executed, and is set to ON in step S4257 when a small jackpot game is about to start.

If the small win game state flag, which indicates that the game state is a small win game state in which a small win game is being executed, is set to ON (step S4255: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4259. On the other hand, if the small win game state flag is set to OFF (step S4255: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4256.

<Steps S4256 to S4258>
If the small win game status flag is set to OFF (step S4255: No), the MPU 41 determines whether a small win game start flag indicating that a small win game is to be started is set to ON (step S4256). When a small win game is to be started, the small win game start flag is set to ON in step S4103 of the small win game control process of FIG.

If the small win game start flag, indicating that a small win game will start, is set to ON (step S4256: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the small win game state flag, indicating that the game state is a small win game state in which a small win game is being executed, to ON (step S4257), and sets the small win game start flag, indicating that a small win game will start, to OFF (step S4258), and terminates the transition process for that game state. On the other hand, if the small win game start flag is set to OFF (step S4256: No), the MPU 41 terminates the transition process for that game state.

<Step S4259>
If the small win game state flag indicating that the game state is a small win game state in which a small win game is executed is set to ON (step S4255: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the small win game end flag indicating that the small win game is ended is ON (step S4259). When the small win game ends, the small win game end flag is set to ON in step S4132 of the small win game control process of FIG.

If the small win game end flag is on (step S4259: Yes), i.e., if the small win game is to be ended, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4260. On the other hand, if the small win game end flag is off (step S4259: No), i.e., if the small win game is not to be ended, the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S4260 and S4261>
If the small win game end flag is on (step S4259: Yes), i.e., if the small win game is to be ended, the MPU 41 sets the small win game state flag, which indicates that the game state is a small win game state in which a small win game is being executed, to off (step S4260), and sets the small win game end flag, which indicates that the small win game is to be ended, to off (step S4261), and proceeds to step S4262.

<Step S4262>
In step S4262, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a V winning flag indicating that a gaming ball has entered the V winning hole 833 of the feather device 83 has been set to ON. The V winning flag is set to ON when a gaming ball has entered the V winning hole 833 of the feather device 83 in step S4125 of the small win game control process of FIG.

If the V winning flag, which indicates that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather device 83, is set to ON (step S4262: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4263. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S4262: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4266.

<Steps S4263 and S4264>
If the V entry flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V entry port 833 of the feather device 83 is set to ON (step S4262: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game will start to ON (step S4263), and sets the a time-saving game state transition flag that transitions the game state to the a time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends to ON (step S4264).Then, the MPU 41 sets the V entry flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V entry port 833 of the feather device 83 to OFF (step S4265), and ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S4266 and S4267>
If the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning hole 833 of the feather device 83 is set to OFF (step S4262: No), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating that the game state is the normal game state to ON (step S4266).Then, the MPU 41 sets a normal game state transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state has transitioned to the normal game state (step S4267), and ends the game state transition process.

The normal game state transition command is sent to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to execute effects (background effects, display effects such as a hold display for the first special symbol game) (see FIG. 225 (A)) specific to when the game state is normal game state, based on the normal game state transition command.

[Processing of the voice and lamp control device 5]
221 to 223, the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. In this embodiment, part of the command determination processing of the voice lamp control device 5 is different from the first embodiment.

[Command Determination Processing]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed, but this differs from the command determination process of the first embodiment in that an effect display process is executed to execute a RUSH effect as a specific effect for the second special symbol game executed based on the game ball to the second winning port 315 in the time-shortened game state a. Here, Figures 221 to 223 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2703 of the sub-timer interrupt process in the first embodiment shown in Figure 42.

<Step S4501>
221, in the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received (step S4501). If a command has been received (step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4502, and if a command has not been received (step S4501: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

<Step S4502>
When a command is received (step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a normal gaming state transition command (step S4502). The normal gaming state transition command indicates a transition to the normal gaming state, and is set in steps S4217, S4223, and S4229 of Fig. 218 or step S4250 of Fig. 219 in the gaming state transition process when a transition from another gaming state to the normal gaming state occurs.

If the received command is a normal game state transition command (step S4502: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4503; if the received command is not a normal game state transition command (step S4502: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4505.

<Steps S4503 and S4504>
If the received command is a normal gaming state transition command (step S4502: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a normal gaming state flag indicating the normal gaming state to ON (step S4503). The normal gaming state flag is referenced when determining whether or not to set an effect corresponding to the normal gaming state in step S4618 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in FIG. 224 described later. The MPU 51 then sets the gaming state flag corresponding to the gaming state before transitioning to the normal gaming state to OFF (step S4504), and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S4505>
If the received command is not a normal game state transition command (step S4502: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a b time-shortened game state transition command (step S4505). The b time-shortened game state transition command indicates a transition to the b time-shortened game state, and is set in step S4204 in the game state transition process of FIG. 217 when a transition from the normal game state to the b time-shortened game state occurs.

If the received command is a b time-shortened game state transition command (step S4505: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S4506; if the received command is not a b time-shortened game state transition command (step S4505: No), the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S4509.

<Steps S4506 to S4508>
If the received command is a b time-shortened gaming state transition command (step S4505: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a b time-shortened gaming state flag indicating that the b time-shortened gaming state is active (step S4506). The b time-shortened gaming state flag is referenced when determining whether or not to set an effect corresponding to the b time-shortened gaming state in step S4619 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in FIG. 224, which will be described later.

Furthermore, as a numerical value storage process, the MPU 51 executes a process of setting the maximum number of special symbol games that can be executed in the b time-shortened game state as the value of the b time-shortened game counter in a memory area for the b time-shortened game counter set in RAM 512 (step S4507). When a special symbol is started in the b time-shortened game state, i.e., when a variable pattern command is received in the b time-shortened game state, the value of the b time-shortened game counter is decremented (updated) by 1 in the time-shortened game counter update process of step S4539 of the command determination process. In other words, the value of the b time-shortened game counter set in the memory area for the b time-shortened game counter in RAM 512 indicates the maximum remaining number of special symbol games that can be executed in the b time-shortened game state. The MPU 51 can then determine the maximum remaining number of special symbol games that can be executed in the b time-shortened game state by referencing the value of the b time-shortened game counter. This allows the MPU 51 to display the maximum remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in the b time-saving game state as a display effect on the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 225 (B)).

Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the normal game state flag for the game state before transitioning to the time-saving game state b to OFF (step S4508), and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S4509>
If the received command is not the b time-shortened gaming state transition command (step S4505: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the c time-shortened gaming state transition command (step S4509). The c time-shortened gaming state transition command that satisfies a specific condition indicates a transition to the c time-shortened gaming state, which is a specific gaming state, and is set in step S4210 in the gaming state transition processing of FIG. 217 when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the c time-shortened gaming state.

If the received command is a c time-shortened play state transition command (step S4509: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S4510; if the received command is not a c time-shortened play state transition command (step S4509: No), the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S4513 in FIG. 222.

<Steps S4510 to S4512>
If the received command is a c time-shortened gaming state transition command (step S4509: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a c time-shortened gaming state flag indicating that the game is in the c time-shortened gaming state to ON (step S4510). The c time-shortened gaming state flag is referenced when determining whether or not to set an effect corresponding to the c time-shortened gaming state, which is a specific gaming state, in step S4621 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in FIG. 224, which will be described later.

In addition, as a numerical value storage process, the MPU 51 executes a process of setting the maximum number of special symbol games that can be executed in the c-time-shortened game state (second numerical information) as the value of the c-time-shortened game counter in a memory area for the c-time-shortened game counter set in RAM 512 (step S4511). When a special symbol is started in the c-time-shortened game state, i.e., when a variable pattern command is received in the c-time-shortened game state, the value of the c-time-shortened game counter is decremented (updated) by 1 in the time-shortened game counter update process of step S4539 of the command determination process. In other words, the value of the c-time-shortened game counter set in the memory area for the c-time-shortened game counter in RAM 512 indicates the maximum remaining number of special symbol games that can be executed in the c-time-shortened game state (specific numerical information). The MPU 51 can then determine the maximum remaining number of special symbol games that can be executed in the c-time-shortened game state by referencing the value of the c-time-shortened game counter (second numerical information). This allows the MPU 51 to display the maximum remaining number of special symbol games that can be played in the time-saving c game state as a specific corresponding display on the symbol display unit 341 (see Figure 225 (B)).

In this embodiment, the time-saving game state c is entered when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop. The result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop only for the jackpot lottery (win/lose determination) announced by the second special symbol game that starts in the normal game state (see Figure 198 (C)). In the normal game state, the electric device 315b operates infrequently and for a short time, so it is not possible to expect a game ball to enter the second winning slot 315. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state a, which is entered after the time-saving jackpot game ends, multiple game balls can enter the second winning slot 315 with a single operation of the electric device 315b, and multiple second special symbol games can be played based on game balls entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a. If multiple game balls enter the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a, the first second special symbol game to be executed will begin in the time-saving game state a, and the second special symbol game (second special symbol game based on remaining reserves) to be executed in response to the remaining balls entering the second winning slots 315 will begin in the normal game state. In other words, the time-saving game state c will be entered if the results of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game based on remaining reserves include a miss for the time-saving symbol stop.

Here, if a transition to the time-saving game state a is made after a jackpot game is executed, a RUSH effect is executed as a display effect as a specific effect for the second special symbol game that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a. In the RUSH effect, if multiple game balls enter the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a, a one-shot announcement effect (see FIG. 226) is executed as a display effect for the second special symbol game that begins in the time-saving game state a, and a battle effect (see FIG. 227 and FIG. 228) is executed as a display effect for the second special symbol game (second special symbol game for remaining reserves) that begins after a transition from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state. And, as mentioned above, the time-saving symbol stop can only be missed for a jackpot lottery for remaining reserves that begins in the normal game state. Therefore, while the normal game state may be transitioned to the time-saving c game state during the execution of a battle effect, even if the game state is transitioned to the time-saving c game state during the execution of a battle effect, the battle effect, which is a display effect, is not interrupted, and the battle effect is executed for the second special symbol game corresponding to the predetermined number of remaining reserved games. As a result, even if the game state is transitioned to the time-saving c game state during the execution of a battle effect, the maximum remaining number of special symbol games that can be executed in the time-saving c game state is not displayed as a specific corresponding display on the symbol display unit 341. Furthermore, by prioritizing the execution of the battle effect, the time-saving c game state effect specific to the time-saving c game state is not executed as a display effect. On the other hand, when transitioning to the time-saving c game state is made, the time-saving c count counter is set, and the maximum remaining number of special game plays that can be performed in the time-saving c game state is updated in the time-saving c game state in the time-saving c game state update process in step S4539 of the command determination process described below. This makes it possible, after the battle presentation ends, to display the maximum remaining number of special game plays that can be performed in the time-saving c game state as a specific corresponding display on the pattern display unit 341 based on the value of the time-saving c count counter as specific numerical information, and also makes it possible to start the time-saving c game state presentation.

Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the normal game state flag for the normal game state, which is the game state before transitioning to the time-saving game state c, to OFF (step S4512), and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S4513>
If the received command is not a c time-saving game state transition command (step S4509: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a first special symbol shift command (step S4513). The first special symbol shift command indicates that the first special symbol win/loss information of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA has shifted, and is set in step S3805 in the special symbol data setting process of FIG. 209 when the first special symbol win/loss information of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA has shifted.

If the received command is a first special symbol shift command (step S4513: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4514; if the received command is not a first special symbol shift command (step S4513: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4516.

<Steps S4514 and S4515>
If the received command is a first special chart shift command (step S4513: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a first special chart data update process (step S4514), executes a first special chart data image display process as a performance display process (step S4515), and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S4516>
If the received command is not the first special symbol shift command (step S4513: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a second special symbol shift command (step S4516). The second special symbol shift command indicates that the second special symbol hit/miss information of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB has shifted, and is set in step S3809 in the special symbol data setting process of FIG. 209 when the second special symbol hit/miss information of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB has shifted.

If the received command is a second special image shift command (step S4516: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4517; if the received command is not a second special image shift command (step S4516: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4519.

<Steps S4517 and S4518>
If the received command is a second special chart shift command (step S4516: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a second special chart data update process (step S4517), executes a second special chart data image display process as a performance display process (step S4518), and terminates the command determination process.

Here, a special chart reserve storage area corresponding region (not shown) corresponding to the special chart reserve storage area 412b (see Figure 8) set in the RAM 412 of the main control unit 4 is set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5. This special chart reserve storage area corresponding region (not shown) includes a first special chart reserve storage area corresponding region, a second special chart reserve storage area corresponding region, and a special chart execution area corresponding region, which correspond respectively to the first special chart reserve storage area REA, the second special chart reserve storage area REB, and the special chart execution area AE (see Figure 8) of the special chart reserve storage area 412b (see Figure 8) of the main control device 4. The special chart reserve storage area corresponding region (not shown) of the voice lamp control device 5 stores special chart win/loss information data (special chart data) equivalent to that of the special chart reserve storage area 412b (see Figure 8) of the main control device 4.

Then, in the first special symbol data update process executed in step S4514, the same processes as steps S3802 to S3804 in the special symbol data setting process of FIG. 209 executed by the main control unit 4 are executed as update processes. Specifically, in this first special symbol data setting process, the first special symbol reserved number N stored in the first special symbol reserved number memory area corresponding area of the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area is decremented by 1, the first special symbol hit/miss information (first special symbol data) is moved from the first reserved area corresponding area of the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area to the special symbol execution area corresponding area, and the first special symbol hit/miss information (first special symbol data) in the second reserved area REA2 to fourth reserved area corresponding areas of the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area is shifted one by one.

Furthermore, in the second special symbol data update process executed in step S4517, processes similar to steps S3806 to S3808 in the special symbol data setting process of Fig. 209 executed by the main control unit 4 are executed. Specifically, in the second special symbol data setting process, a subtraction process is executed to subtract 1 from the second special symbol reserved number M stored in the second special symbol reserved number memory area corresponding area of the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area, and an update process is executed in which the second special symbol hit/miss information (second special symbol data) is moved from the first reserved area corresponding area of the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area to the special symbol execution area corresponding area, and the second special symbol hit/miss information (second special symbol data) in the second reserved area REA2 to fourth reserved area corresponding areas of the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area is shifted one by one.

On the other hand, in the first special symbol data image display process executed in step S4515, the image relating to the first special symbol data (first special symbol data image) (see Figures 225(A) and 225(C)) displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is shifted based on the first special symbol data stored in the area corresponding to the special symbol reserve storage area (not shown) of RAM 512 that was shifted (updated) in step S4514.

Here, Figure 225 is an example of a screen in the pattern display unit 341 in various game states. Specifically, Figure 225(A) is an example of a screen in the normal game state excluding the RUSH effect, Figure 225(B) is an example of a screen in the b time-saving game state, Figure 225(C) is an example of a screen in the c time-saving game state, and Figure 225(D) is an example of a screen during the RUSH effect. Special pattern data image display units 75, 76, and 77 corresponding to the various game states are set in the pattern display unit 341. The special chart data image display units 75, 76, 77 correspond to the special chart execution area corresponding area (not shown), the first special chart reserved storage area corresponding area, and the second special chart reserved storage area corresponding area of the above-mentioned special chart reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) set in RAM 512, and include the special chart variable image display area 75, the first special chart reserved image display area 76, and the second special chart reserved image display area 77.

As shown in Figures 225 (A) and 225 (C), in normal game mode and time-saving game mode c excluding during RUSH effects, the special symbol variable image display area 75 and the first special symbol reserved image display area 76 are set as the special symbol data image display areas 75, 76, 77, and the second special symbol reserved image display area 77 is not set. In other words, in normal game mode and time-saving game mode c excluding during RUSH effects, the variable image is displayed in the special symbol variable image display area 75 based on the first special symbol data stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown), the first special symbol reserved image display area 76 displays the first special symbol reserved image as a corresponding display based on the first special symbol data stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area of the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown), and the second special symbol reserved image is not displayed as a corresponding display based on the second special symbol data stored in the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown).

Here, in the normal game mode and the time-saving c game mode, as described above, players are encouraged to hit left, that is, to shoot the game ball into the left area of the game board 31, and enter the first winning slot 314 to win the first special symbol jackpot. Therefore, in the normal game mode and the time-saving c game mode (excluding RUSH performances), the special symbol variable image display area 75 and the first special symbol reserved image display area 76 are set as the special symbol data image display areas 75, 76, 77 (the first special symbol reserved image is displayed as the corresponding display), and the second special symbol reserved image display area 77 is not set (the second special symbol reserved image is not displayed as the corresponding display), thereby suggesting to the player that left-handed hitting is encouraged.

Then, in the first special symbol data image display process of step S4514, which is executed in normal game mode and time-saving game mode c excluding during RUSH effects, the variable image and the first special symbol reserved image as a corresponding display are displayed based on the first special symbol data stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding area (not shown) and the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area of the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown), based on the contents shifted (updated) in the process of step S4514 as an updating means. As a result, the number of first special symbol reserved images as corresponding displays displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is reduced by one since the previous end of the first special symbol game (see Figures 52 (A1) and 52 (B1)).

In addition, in the normal game state and the time-saving c game state (excluding RUSH effects), the first special symbol reserved image is displayed as the variable image and corresponding display, and the second special symbol reserved image is not displayed as the corresponding display. However, in the normal game state and the time-saving c game state (excluding RUSH effects), the second special symbol reserved image may be displayed as the corresponding display. In other words, in the normal game state and the time-saving c game state (excluding RUSH effects), both the first special symbol reserved image and the second special symbol reserved image may be displayed as the corresponding display.

As shown in Figures 225 (B) and 225 (D), in the b time-saving game state and during the RUSH effect, the special symbol variable image display area 75 and the second special symbol reserved image display area 77 are set as the special symbol data image display sections 75, 76, 77, and the first special symbol reserved image display area 76 is not set. In other words, in the b time-saving game state and during the RUSH effect, the variable image is displayed in the special symbol variable image display area 75 based on the second special symbol data stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown), the second special symbol reserved image display area 77 displays the second special symbol reserved image as a corresponding display based on the second special symbol data stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area of the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown), and the first special symbol reserved image is not displayed as a corresponding display based on the first special symbol data stored in the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown).

Here, during the b time-saving game state and RUSH performance, as described above, the player is encouraged to hit the ball to the right side of the game board 31, a so-called right hit, and enter the second special symbol jackpot lottery by having the ball enter the second winning slot 315. Therefore, during the b time-saving game state and RUSH performance, the special symbol variable image display area 75 and the second special symbol reserved image display area 77 are set as the special symbol data image display areas 75, 76, 77 (the second special symbol reserved image is displayed as the corresponding display), and the first special symbol reserved image display area 76 is not set (the first special symbol reserved image is displayed as the corresponding display), thereby suggesting to the player that a right hit is encouraged.

However, during the RUSH effect, right-handed hits that launch the game ball into the right area of the game board 31 are encouraged because they are advantageous to the player, and so as long as the player hits the right side appropriately (intentionally), the game ball will not initially enter the first winning slot 314 unless, for example, there is a problem with the game ball being launched poorly. However, during the RUSH effect, because of the high support mode, the second special symbol reserve number M is likely to reach the maximum reserve number, and when the second special symbol reserve number M is the maximum reserve number, there is no need to have the game ball enter the second winning slot 315. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the second special symbol game is executed with priority over the first special symbol game. Therefore, if the second special symbol reserved number M is the maximum reserved number but the first special symbol reserved number is not the maximum reserved number, the player may intentionally hit left to attempt to place the game ball into the first winning slot 314 in order to set the first special symbol reserved number to the maximum reserved number so that the first special symbol game will be played continuously immediately after the RUSH effect ends. Also, even when a player attempts to launch a game ball into the right area of the game board 31, the game ball may be launched into the left area of the game board 31 against the player's will due to a poor launch. Thus, even during a RUSH effect in which right-handed hits are encouraged, a game ball may be launched into the left area of the game board 31. Therefore, a game ball may enter the first winning slot 314 even during a RUSH effect. Even if a game ball enters the first winning slot 314 due to an unrecommended play (for example, a left hit during a rush), the gaming machine does not invalidate the winning, but processes it as a legitimate ball entry. That is, when a game ball enters the first winning slot 314 as a specific condition, a first special symbol hold command is sent to the sound lamp control device 5, and information is stored in a first special symbol hold storage area corresponding region (not shown) of a special symbol hold storage area corresponding region set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5, and numerical information related to the first special symbol is stored by a numerical value storage process, but the first special symbol hold image is not displayed as a corresponding display during the rush performance. That is, during the RUSH performance, the first special symbol reserved image is not displayed as a corresponding display, but if a game ball enters the first winning slot 314, an update process is executed and the data on the first special symbol win/loss information (first special symbol data) in the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) in the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area is updated.

Then, in the second special symbol data image display process of step S4518, which is executed during the b time-saving game state and the RUSH effect, the variable image and the corresponding second special symbol reserved image are displayed based on the second special symbol data stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding area (not shown) and the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area of the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown), based on the content shifted (updated) in step S4517. As a result, the number of second special symbol reserved images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 decreases by one since the previous end of the second special symbol game (see Figures 52 (A2) and 52 (B2)).

Incidentally, during the b time-saving game state or the RUSH effect, the second special symbol reserved image is displayed as the variable image and corresponding display, and the first special symbol reserved image is not displayed as the corresponding display. This is because even if the first special symbol reserved image is displayed as the corresponding display for the first special symbol game, in which the variable display is not executed, the information obtained from the image is unnecessary, and displaying an image for such unnecessary information would simply impair the player's visibility of the necessary image. However, the first special symbol reserved image may be displayed as the corresponding display during the b time-saving game state or the RUSH effect. In other words, during the normal game state and the c time-saving game state excluding the RUSH effect, both the first special symbol reserved image and the second special symbol reserved image may be displayed as the corresponding display.

In this embodiment, various game state transitions are executed, but the display mode of the first special symbol reserved image and the second special symbol reserved image as corresponding displays in the special symbol data image display units 75, 76, and 77 may differ before and after the game state transition. For example, when the game state transitions from time-saving game state c to the normal game state, the display state of the first special symbol reserved image as corresponding display is maintained, and the non-display state of the second special symbol reserved image as corresponding display is maintained (see Fig. 225(C) → Fig. 225(A)). On the other hand, when the game state transitions from time-saving game state b to the normal game state, the first special symbol reserved image as corresponding display is changed from a non-display state to a display state, and the second special symbol reserved image as corresponding display is changed from a display state to a non-display state (Fig. 225(B) → Fig. 225(A)).

In addition, when the game state transitions from time-saving game state a to normal game state, even in normal game state a, a RUSH effect is executed as a specific effect for the second special symbol game that is executed based on a game ball entering second winning slot 315 in time-saving game state a, and during this RUSH effect, the display state of the second special symbol reserved image as the corresponding display is maintained, and the non-display state of the first special symbol reserved image as the corresponding display is maintained (see FIG. 225 (D)). Of course, during the execution of the RUSH effect, even if a game ball enters first winning slot 314, the non-display state of the first special symbol reserved image as the corresponding display is maintained, but in this case, the first special symbol reserved number N stored in the first special symbol reserved number memory area corresponding area of the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area set in RAM 512 is updated by update processing.

In contrast, if the RUSH effect ends without a jackpot being played, the first special symbol reserved image, which had been in a hidden state as the corresponding display, is made to be displayed based on the first special symbol win/loss information data (first special symbol data) in the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding region (not shown) of the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding region set in RAM 512 at that time, while the second special symbol reserved image, which had been in a displayed state as the corresponding display, is made to be hidden (Fig. 225 (D) → Fig. 225 (A)). In other words, as the RUSH effect as a specific effect ends, the display mode of the first special symbol reserved image and the second special symbol reserved image as the corresponding display in the special symbol data image display sections 75, 76, 77 changes.

<Step S4519>
222, if the received command is not a second special symbol shift command (step S4516: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a first special symbol reserve command (step S4519). The first special symbol reserve command indicates that the information stored in the first special symbol reserve storage area REA1 has been updated, and is set in step S3304 or S3306 in the first special symbol reserve command setting process of FIG. 200 when the information stored in the first special symbol reserve storage area REA1 has been updated in response to a game ball entering the first winning slot 314.

If the received command is a first special drawing hold command (step S4519: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4520; if the received command is not a first special drawing hold command (step S4519: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4522.

<Steps S4520 and S4521>
If the received command is a first special chart reserve command (step S4519: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an update process for the first special chart reserve information as an update process (step S4520), and executes a display process for the first special chart reserve image as a corresponding display as a performance display process (step S4521), and terminates the command determination process.

Here, the first special symbol reserved information update process executed in step S4520 is a process of adding (updating) data on first special symbol hit/miss information (first special symbol data) to the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the above-mentioned special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area. Specifically, in the first special symbol reserved information update process, the first special symbol data corresponding to the first special symbol hit/miss information stored in the first empty reserved area among the first reserved areas REA1 to REA4 (see FIG. 8) of the first special symbol reserved storage area REA of the special symbol reserved storage area 412b in RAM 412 of the main control unit 4 is stored in the first special symbol first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown) set corresponding to the first reserved areas REA1 to REA4 in which the first special symbol hit/miss information is stored. For example, when first special chart win/loss information is stored in the second reserve area REA2 (see FIG. 8) of the first special chart reserve storage area REA in the special chart reserve storage area 412b, the first special chart data is stored in a first special chart second reserve area corresponding area (not shown) set in correspondence with the second reserve area REA2. Also, in the first special chart reserve information update process, 1 is added to the first special chart reserve number N stored in the first special chart reserve number storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special chart reserve storage area corresponding area, and the numerical information added by the numerical value storage process is stored.

On the other hand, the display process of the first special chart reserved image as a corresponding display executed in step S4521 is a process of adding the first special chart reserved image as a corresponding display to the first special chart reserved image display area 76 based on the first special chart data added (updated) to the first special chart reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S4520.

<Step S4522>
If the received command is not the first special symbol reserve command (step S4519: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the second special symbol reserve command (step S4522). The second special symbol reserve command indicates that the information stored in the second special symbol reserve storage area REB1 has been updated, and is set in step S3403, S3406, or S3408 in the second special symbol reserve command setting process of FIG. 202 when the information stored in the second special symbol reserve storage area REA1 has been updated in response to a game ball entering the second winning slot 315.

If the received command is a second special drawing hold command (step S4522: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4523; if the received command is not a second special drawing hold command (step S4522: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4525 in FIG. 223.

<Steps S4523 and S4524>
If the received command is a second special chart reserve command (step S4522: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an update process for the second special chart reserve information as an update process (step S4523), and executes a display process for the second special chart reserve image as a corresponding display as a performance display process (step S4524), and terminates the command determination process.

Here, the update process for the second special symbol reserved information executed in step S4523 is a process of adding (updating) data on the second special symbol hit/miss information (second special symbol data) to the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area described above. Specifically, in the update process for the second special symbol reserved information, the second special symbol data corresponding to the second special symbol hit/miss information stored in the first available reserved area among the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 (see FIG. 8) of the second special symbol reserved storage area REB in the special symbol reserved storage area 412b in RAM 412 of the main control unit 4 is stored in the first special symbol first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown) set corresponding to the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 in which the second special symbol hit/miss information is stored. For example, when second special chart win/loss information is stored in the second reserve area REB2 (see FIG. 8) of the second special chart reserve storage area REB in the special chart reserve storage area 412b, the second special chart data is stored in a second special chart second reserve area corresponding area (not shown) set in correspondence with the second reserve area REB2. Also, in the update process for the second special chart reserve information, 1 is added to the second special chart reserve number M stored in a second special chart reserve number memory area corresponding area (not shown) in the special chart reserve storage area corresponding area.

On the other hand, the display process of the second special chart reserved image as a corresponding display executed in step S4524 is a process of adding the second special chart reserved image as a corresponding display to the second special chart reserved image display area 77 based on the second special chart data added (updated) to the second special chart reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S4523.

<Step S4525>
Returning to the explanation of Fig. 222, if the received command is not a second special symbol hold command (step S4522: No), as shown in Fig. 223, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special variation start command (step S4525). The special variation start command indicates that the second special symbol game is the first to be executed after the transition to the time-saving game state a based on the game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a, and is set in step S4003 in the second special symbol variation pattern setting process B of Fig. 211 when the first second special symbol game is started in the time-saving game state a.

If the received command is a special fluctuation start command (step S4525: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4526; if the received command is not a special fluctuation start command (step S4525: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4527.

<Step S4526>
If the received command is a special fluctuation start command (step S4525: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a RUSH effect start flag to ON (step S4526), which starts a RUSH effect as a specific effect that notifies that the second special game is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state (a state in which the probability of a small win is high and a big win game is likely to be executed), and ends the command determination process. The RUSH effect start flag is referenced in step S4601 of the fluctuation type (effect pattern) setting process in FIG. 224 described later to determine whether or not to set a RUSH effect, and if the RUSH effect start flag is set ON, a RUSH effect is set.

The RUSH effect is set for the second special symbol game that is executed in response to the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a, and is set for the first through fifth second special symbol games as described above. This RUSH effect includes a one-shot announcement effect (see FIG. 226) that is executed for the first second special symbol game executed after transitioning to the time-saving game state a, and a battle effect (see FIGS. 227 and 228) that is executed for the second through fifth second special symbol games executed after transitioning to the time-saving game state a. Furthermore, if all of the second special symbol games that are executed in response to the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a are miss-notice games, the RUSH effect includes a result effect and a branching effect as display effects that are executed after the battle effect ends (see FIG. 229).

Here, Figure 226 shows an example of the one-shot announcement effect that is executed at the beginning of the RUSH effect. As shown in Figure 226, the one-shot announcement effect is executed as a button effect. In this one-shot announcement effect, an image that resembles the operation button 20 is first displayed to prompt the player to operate the operation button 20 (see Figure 226 (A)).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a small win, the player operates the operation button 20 to activate the movable accessory member 39 (see Figure 226 (B)), and after the movable accessory member 39 returns to its original position, the decorative symbols are displayed as a stopped doublet (see Figure 226 (A)), thereby informing the player that the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a small win.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a loss, the movable accessory member 39 will not be activated even by the player's operation of the operation button 20 (see Figure 226 (D)), and the decorative symbols will be displayed as random numbers other than double numbers (see Figure 226 (E)), thereby informing the player that the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a loss.

Figures 227 and 228 are diagrams showing an example of a battle effect that can be executed after the one-shot announcement effect of the RUSH effect. In the battle effect, depending on the outcome of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character, it is announced whether the jackpot lottery result includes a small win among the second special symbol reserves (remaining reserves) for the right to play the second special symbol game at the end of the one-shot announcement effect of the RUSH effect. Note that the battle effect will not be executed if there are no second special symbol reserves (remaining reserves) for the right to play the second special symbol game at the end of the one-shot announcement effect of the RUSH effect, but will be executed if there are one or more such remaining reserves.

As shown in FIG. 227(A), in this embodiment, patterns A to D are set as battle effects. Patterns A and B are selected when an ally character is defeated by an enemy character and the results of the jackpot lottery among the second special symbol reservations (remaining reservations) for the right to play the second special symbol game at the end of the one-shot announcement effect of the RUSH effect are not a small win. Patterns C and D are selected when an ally character wins against an enemy character and the results of the jackpot lottery among the second special symbol reservations (remaining reservations) for the right to play the second special symbol game at the end of the one-shot announcement effect of the RUSH effect are a small win.

In battle presentation pattern A, a text image indicating the start of the battle is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 (see Figure 227 (B)), the enemy character attacks first (see Figure 227 (D)), and the enemy character's attack hits the ally character (see Figure 228 (B2)) → the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (see Figure 228 (B3)).

In battle presentation pattern B, a text image indicating the start of the battle is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 (see Figure 227 (B)), the ally character attacks first (see Figure 227 (C)), the enemy character defends against the ally character's attack (see Figure 228 (B1)) → the enemy character counterattacks (see Figure 227 (D)), the enemy character's attack hits the ally character (see Figure 228 (B2)) → the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (see Figure 228 (B3)).

In battle presentation pattern C, a text image indicating the start of the battle is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 (see Figure 226 (B)), the ally character attacks first (see Figure 226 (C)), and the ally character's attack hits the enemy character (see Figure 228 (A1)) → the ally character defeats the enemy character (see Figure 228 (A3)).

In battle presentation pattern D, a text image indicating the start of the battle is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 (see Figure 226 (B)), the enemy character attacks first (see Figure 227 (D)), the ally character defends against the enemy character's attack (see Figure 228 (A2)), the ally character counterattacks (see Figure 227 (C)), the ally character's attack hits the enemy character (see Figure 228 (A1)) → the ally character defeats the enemy character (see Figure 228 (A3)).

The battle effect is executed according to the number of second special symbol games played, which corresponds to the type of remaining hold pattern. Specifically, in remaining hold patterns 1 and 5, a battle effect is executed for one second special symbol game, in remaining hold patterns 2 and 6, a battle effect is executed for two second special symbol games, in remaining hold patterns 3 and 7, a battle effect is executed for three second special symbol games, and in remaining hold patterns 4 and 8, a battle effect is executed for one second special symbol game. In other words, in remaining hold patterns 2 to 4 and remaining hold patterns 6 to 9, excluding remaining hold patterns 1 and 5, a battle effect is executed for multiple second special symbol games all at once. In this embodiment, as described above, second special symbol games are executed with priority over first special symbol games. Therefore, even if a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 during the execution of a battle effect (when the first special symbol reserved number N stored in the first special symbol reserved number memory area corresponding area of the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area set in RAM 512 is incremented by an update process), the second special symbol game is executed with priority. As a result, until the predetermined number of second special symbol games that are the subject of the execution of the battle effect are completed, that is, until the second special symbol reserved number M stored in the second special symbol reserved number memory area corresponding area of the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area set in RAM 512 is subtracted by a subtraction process due to the execution of the second special symbol game and becomes 0 (the number of second special symbol reserved images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is 0), the first special symbol game based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning slot 314 during the execution of the battle effect as a display effect does not start. As a result, the battle effect is not interrupted by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning slot 314 during the execution of the battle effect. Additionally, the first special game, which is based on a game ball entering the first winning slot 314 while the battle effect is being performed, begins after the battle effect ends.

Also, as shown in Figure 225 (D), in the RUSH effect as a specific effect, for example, an image indicating that a RUSH is in progress (a text image of "JACK WIN RUSH"), an image indicating the number of jackpot RUSHes (a text image of "RUSH x 3"), and an image indicating the total number of balls dispensed in that jackpot RUSH (a text image of "3000 balls") are displayed for at least a portion of the period while the RUSH effect is being executed. Some or all of these images may be omitted, and it is also possible to display an image indicating the remaining number of special game plays that can be executed in the jackpot RUSH.

Figure 229(A) shows an example screen during the result presentation, and Figures 229(B) to 229(D) show example screens during the branch presentation. Figures 229(E) and 229(F) show example screens after the branch presentation has ended.

The result effect and branch effect as display effects shown in FIG. 229 are executed when all of the second special symbol games executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a notify a miss. Specifically, if the number of second special symbol games executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a is one, the result effect and branch effect are executed after the one-shot notification effect (see FIG. 226 (E)) that notifies a miss ends, and if the number of second special symbol games executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a is two to five, the result effect and branch effect are executed after the battle effect (see FIG. 228 (B3)) that notifies a miss ends.

As shown in FIG. 229(A), the result effect displays an image related to the results of a series of jackpot games (consecutive jackpot games) including an initial jackpot game that may be triggered by the initial jackpot game that does not involve a minor jackpot game. Specifically, in the result effect of this embodiment, an image showing the number of consecutive jackpot games (a text image of "RUSH 5 times") and an image showing the total number of balls dispensed in the consecutive jackpot games (a text image of "Total balls dispensed: 2600 balls") are displayed along with a text image of "Results Announcement." This allows the player to grasp the number of consecutive jackpot games and the total number of balls dispensed.

In addition, even when a transition to the time-saving game state a is triggered by a first jackpot game that does not involve a small jackpot game, if all of the second special symbol games that are executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a to which the transition was initially made result in a miss, this will be a so-called single jackpot rather than a consecutive jackpot, but for ease of explanation, a single jackpot will also be referred to as a consecutive jackpot. In the case of a single jackpot, the number of consecutive jackpots will be one, and the text image "RUSH 1" will be displayed to indicate the number of consecutive jackpots.

In addition, the number of consecutive jackpots displayed in the result presentation in this embodiment includes the first jackpot play that does not involve a small jackpot play, but it is also possible to count the number of consecutive jackpots excluding the first jackpot play and display that number.

In addition, in the result presentation of this embodiment, an image (an image of a left-pointing arrow and an image of the words "Hit Left") is displayed encouraging the player to hit left. Here, in this embodiment, if all of the second special symbol games executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a notify a miss, and all of the second special symbol games have ended (when the RUSH presentation has ended), the game state at the end of the last executed second special symbol game (the start of the next executed first special symbol game) will be either the normal game state or the time-saving game state c. In other words, the game state at the end of the last executed second special symbol game (the start of the next executed first special symbol game) will be the normal game state if all of the second special symbol games are complete misses, and will be the time-saving game state c if one of the second special symbol games is a miss due to the time-saving symbol stop. In both the normal game mode and the time-saving game mode c, players are encouraged to hit left, which launches the game ball into the left area of the game board 31. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the game transitions to the time-saving game mode a after the time-saving jackpot game ends (while the RUSH effect is being executed) or during the jackpot game, players are encouraged to hit right, which launches the game ball into the right area of the game board 31, as described above. In other words, when the RUSH effect notifies players that the RUSH is about to end, players are encouraged to switch from hitting right to hitting left. Therefore, by displaying an image encouraging left hitting in the result effect, players can understand that the area from which the game ball is to be launched onto the game board 31, which is encouraged, has changed.

As shown in Figure 229 (B), the branching effect is executed as a button effect. Specifically, in the branching effect of this embodiment, a text image of "Choose Your Fate" is displayed to indicate that a branching effect is being executed, along with an image resembling the operation button 20 and a text image of "Press!!" to encourage the player to operate the operation button 20.

As mentioned above, if all of the second special symbol games executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a notify a miss, and all of the second special symbol games have ended (when the RUSH effect has ended), the game state at the end of the last executed second special symbol game (the start of the next executed first special symbol game) will be the time-saving game state c or the normal game state. In the time-saving game state c, the allocation of time-saving jackpots when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 100% (see Figure 196 (C)), whereas in the normal game state, the allocation of time-saving jackpots when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 50% (see Figure 196 (C)). Therefore, the time-saving game state c is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

As shown in Figure 229 (C), in the branching effect, if all of the second special symbol games executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a notify of a miss, and all of the second special symbol games have ended (when the RUSH effect has ended), if the game state at the end of the last executed second special symbol game (at the start of the next executed first special symbol game) is the time-saving game state c, which is more advantageous than the normal game state, a text image saying "Congratulations!" will be displayed. As a result, if all of the second special symbol games that are executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving c game state notify the player of a miss, and all of the second special symbol games have ended (when the RUSH effect has ended), it will be clearly indicated or suggested to the player that the game state at the end of the last executed second special symbol game (at the start of the next executed first special symbol game) is the time-saving c game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 229 (D), in the branching effect, if all of the second special symbol games executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a notify of a miss, and all of the second special symbol games have ended (when the RUSH effect has ended), if the game state at the end of the last executed second special symbol game (at the start of the next executed first special symbol game) is a normal game state which is less favorable than the time-saving game state c, then a text image saying "Sorry..." will be displayed. As a result, if all of the second special symbol games that are executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving c game state notify the player of a miss, and all of the second special symbol games have ended (when the RUSH effect has ended), it will be clearly indicated or suggested to the player that the game state at the end of the last executed second special symbol game (at the start of the next executed first special symbol game) is a normal game state that is less favorable than the time-saving c game state.

When displaying the text image "Congratulations!" or "Sorry..." during a branching effect, an image urging the player to hit left (an image of a left-pointing arrow and the text image "Hit Left") is also displayed. In other words, the image urging the player to hit left is displayed throughout the execution of the branching effect. Of course, the image urging the player to hit left may be displayed for only part of the execution of the branching effect, or it may even be omitted.

Furthermore, after the branching effect that clearly indicates or suggests that the game is in the time-saving c game state shown in Figure 229 (C) ends, an image related to gameplay in the time-saving c game state is displayed, as shown in Figure 229 (E). The text images "Rush confirmed with big win!!" and "Sudden chance" correspond to images related to gameplay in the time-saving c game state. In this way, by displaying an image related to gameplay in the time-saving c game state, the player can understand that the RUSH effect has ended and that the game is in the time-saving c game state. Furthermore, if the game is in the time-saving c game state and the right to execute the first special symbol is reserved after the RUSH effect ends, a number of first special symbol reserved images corresponding to the number of first special symbol reserved N are displayed as a corresponding display. In other words, if the right to execute the first special symbol is reserved as a result of a game ball entering the first winning slot 314 during the execution of the RUSH effect, a number of first special symbol reserved images corresponding to the number of first special symbol reserved N at the time the RUSH effect ends are displayed as a corresponding display.

An image encouraging the player to hit left (an image of a left-pointing arrow and an image of the words "Hit Left") is also displayed. This allows the player to understand that it is desirable to switch from hitting right to hitting left, and prevents the player from suffering any disadvantages from continuing to hit right. The image encouraging the player to hit left only needs to be displayed for a certain period of time after the image is displayed. For example, it may be displayed continuously until the c-state game state ends, or until a certain number of special game plays have been executed after the image is displayed, or until a certain amount of time has passed since the image is displayed, or until a certain number of game balls have been hit left in succession after the image is displayed.

In addition, while the c time-saving play state presentation is being executed, a display of the remaining c time-saving play count (a text image of "8 plays remaining") will be displayed as a specific corresponding display indicating the remaining number of special play plays that can be executed in the c time-saving play state.

In addition, based on the c time-saving play count display when an image related to play in the c time-saving play state is displayed, the player can determine the number of second special symbol plays in the c time-saving play state that were executed during the execution of the RUSH effect, and can also determine which remaining reserved ball resulted in a jackpot lottery result that did not result in a time-saving symbol stop. For example, in the example shown in Figure 229 (E), a text image of "8 plays remaining" is displayed as the c time-saving play count display, but based on this c time-saving play count display, the player can determine that the initially set number of c time-saving plays was 10, and that two special symbol plays have already been executed in the c time-saving play state. The player can also determine retroactively that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol play executed three times previously was a time-saving symbol stop miss.

On the other hand, after the branching effect that clearly indicates or suggests that the game is in the normal game mode shown in Figure 229 (D) ends, an image related to gameplay in the normal game mode is displayed, as shown in Figure 229 (F). The text images "Rush confirmed with big win!!" and "Sudden chance" correspond to images related to gameplay in the time-saving game mode c. In this way, by displaying an image related to gameplay in the normal game mode, the player can understand that the RUSH effect has ended and that the game is in the normal game mode. Then, in the normal game mode, after the RUSH effect ends, if the right to execute the first special symbol is reserved, a number of first special symbol reserved images corresponding to the number of reserved first symbol N are displayed as the corresponding display. In other words, if the right to execute the first special symbol is reserved as a result of a game ball entering the first winning slot 314 during the execution of the RUSH effect, a number of first special symbol reserved images corresponding to the number of reserved first symbol N at the time the RUSH effect ends are displayed as the corresponding display.

An image encouraging the player to hit left (an image of a left-pointing arrow and an image of the words "Hit Left") is also displayed. This allows the player to understand that it is desirable to switch from hitting right to hitting left, and prevents the player from suffering any disadvantages from continuing to hit right. The image encouraging the player to hit left only needs to be displayed for a certain period of time after the image is displayed. For example, the image may be displayed until a certain number of special game plays have been executed after the image is displayed, or until a certain amount of time has passed since the image is displayed, or until a certain number of game balls have been hit left in succession after the image is displayed.

In this embodiment, the result effect is executed before the branching effect, but the branching effect may also be executed before the result effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the result effect (see Figure 229(A)) and the branching effect (see Figures 229(B) to (F)) are executed separately, but part or all of one of the result effect and the branching effect may be executed overlapping with the other. For example, the example screen of the result effect shown in Figure 229(A) may also display the image shown in Figure 229(B), and the example screens of the branching effects shown in Figures 229(C) and 229(E) may also display the result image shown in Figure 229(A).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the result effect and branch effect are described as part of the RUSH effect, but one or both of the result effect and branch effect may be executed as effects separate from the RUSH effect. In other words, in this embodiment, the result effect and branch effect are executed in the second special symbol game, which is executed last among the remaining reserved symbols, but one or both of the result effect and branch effect may be executed (at the start of) the first special symbol game, which is executed after the end of the second special symbol game, which is executed last among the remaining reserved symbols.

<Step S4527>
Returning to the explanation of Figure 223, if the received command is not a special fluctuation start command (step S4525: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a remaining reserve pattern command (step S4527). The remaining reserve pattern command is set in step S4009 in the second special chart fluctuation pattern setting process B of Figure 211 when a remaining reserve pattern (see Figure 199) based on the game ball entering the second winning port 315 in a time-saving game state is set.

If the received command is a remaining pending pattern command (step S4527: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4528; if the received command is not a remaining pending pattern command (step S4527: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4532.

<Steps S4528 to S4531>
If the received command is a remaining hold pattern command (step S4527: Yes), the MPU 51 stores the remaining hold pattern in RAM 512 based on the remaining hold pattern command (step S4528), and sets a battle effect start flag to ON, which starts a battle effect in the RUSH effect (step S4529). The battle effect start flag is referenced in step S4604 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in Figure 224 described below, to determine whether or not to start a battle effect, and if the battle effect flag is set to ON, a battle effect is set.

Furthermore, based on the information regarding the remaining hold number included in the remaining hold pattern command, the MPU 51 executes a numerical value storage process to set the value of the remaining hold number counter in a storage area for the remaining hold number counter set in RAM 512 (step S4530). Then, the MPU 51 sets the remaining hold number counter flag, which indicates that the remaining hold number counter has been set (that there are remaining holds), to on (step S4531), and terminates the command determination process.

In step S4530 of the command determination process, the value of the remaining reserves counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of rights (remaining reserves) to play the second special symbol game at the end of the second special symbol game that was first played based on the ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving play state a. In this embodiment, the maximum number of reserves for the second special symbol is set to 4, so the remaining reserves will be between 1 and 4. In the memory area for the remaining reserves counter set in RAM 512, if the remaining reserves is 1, the value of the remaining reserves counter is set to 1; if the remaining reserves is 2, the value of the remaining reserves counter is set to 2; if the remaining reserves is 3, the value of the remaining reserves counter is set to 3; and if the remaining reserves is 4, the value of the remaining reserves counter is set to 4.

In addition, the value of the remaining reserve number counter is decremented (updated) by one when a second special symbol game for that remaining reserve ends in step S4542 of the command determination process described below. Therefore, the value of the remaining reserve number counter indicates the number of unexecuted second special symbol games among the second special symbol games that can be executed based on that remaining reserve. As a result, by referencing the remaining reserve number counter, the MPU 51 can display the number of unexecuted second special symbol games for the remaining reserve on the pattern display unit 341.

Here, as will be described in detail later, for second special symbol games executed based on the remaining holds, a battle effect (see FIGS. 227 and 228) is set based on the remaining hold pattern (see FIG. 199(D)) specified based on the remaining hold pattern command in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process described below. For example, in the case of remaining hold pattern 1, a battle effect is executed for one second special symbol game for one remaining hold, in the case of remaining hold pattern 2, a battle effect is executed for two second special symbol games for two remaining holds, in the case of remaining hold pattern 3, a battle effect is executed for three second special symbol games for three remaining holds, and in the case of remaining hold pattern 4, a battle effect is executed for four second special symbol games for four remaining holds. In other words, the value of the remaining hold number counter, which indicates the number of unexecuted second special symbol games among the remaining holds, is decremented (updated) by one when a second special symbol game for the remaining holds ends, and matches the number of unexecuted second special symbol games for which a battle effect is executed. Therefore, the battle performance will continue until the value of the remaining hold counter in the memory area for the remaining hold counter set in RAM 512 reaches 0.

<Step S4532>
If the received command is not a remaining reservation pattern command (step S4527: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special variation end command (step S4532). The special variation end command is set in step S3712 in the special pattern game control process of FIG. 208 when the value of the remaining setting counter indicating the remaining number of special variations for the remaining reservation of the second special pattern based on the game ball entering the second winning port 315 in the time-saving game state a is 0.

If the received command is a special variation end command (step S4532: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4533; if the received command is not a special variation end command (step S4532: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4534.

<Step S4533>
If the received command is a special variation end command (step S4532: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a RUSH effect end flag to ON, which ends the RUSH effect (step S4533), and ends the command determination process. The RUSH effect end flag is referenced in step S4612 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in Figure 224 described later to determine whether or not to end the RUSH effect, and if the RUSH effect end flag is set ON, the RUSH effect is ended.

<Step S4534>
If the received command is not a special variation end command (step S4532: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command (step S4534). The special symbol variation pattern command is set in step S3910 of the special symbol variation start process in FIG. 210 when a special symbol variation pattern for the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is set.

If the received command is a special chart variation pattern command (step S4534: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4535; if the received command is not a special chart variation pattern command (step S4534: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4540.

<Step S4535>
If the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command (step S4534: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a variation type (effect pattern) setting process to set the variation type (effect pattern) to be executed in the symbol display unit 341 or the like in the special symbol game as an effect display process (step S4535), and proceeds to step S4536. Details of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S4536>
In step S4536, the MPU 51 executes a stopping pattern combination setting process to set a pattern combination when multiple decorative patterns (e.g., three) displayed in a variable manner on the pattern display unit 341 in a special pattern game are displayed stopped on an active line, similar to the stopping pattern combination setting process in step S3104 in the command determination process in the first embodiment described above, and then transitions to step S4537.

In this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss, the decorative symbol stop symbol combination is set to one that corresponds to the type of time-saving symbol stop miss (see FIG. 198 (D)). Specifically, the decorative symbol stop symbol combination is set to "119" or "991" for time-saving symbol stop miss A, "554" or "556" for time-saving symbol stop miss B, "332" or "334" for time-saving symbol stop miss C, and "776" or "778" for time-saving symbol stop miss D.

<Step S4537>
In step S4537, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the received special symbol variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the special symbol variable pattern command. The variable display counter is then decremented by one in the counter update process of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42, and the MPU 51 can determine whether the symbol variable display is in progress, the remaining time of the variable display time, etc., based on the variable display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variable display has ended when the variable display counter reaches 0.

<Step S4538>
In step S4538, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 to specify the effect pattern type set in step S4535 of the command determination process and the details of the stopped symbol combination of decorative symbols determined in step S4536, and then ends the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the effect pattern type and the stopped symbol combination of decorative symbols. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores variable images and effect images of decorative symbols corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes variable display and effect display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the stopped symbol combination, variation type, and effect type of decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

<Step S4539>
In step S4539, the MPU 51 executes a time-shortening count counter update process and terminates the command determination process. In this time-shortening count counter update process, one is subtracted from the value of the b time-shortening count counter or the c time-shortening count counter set in a memory area for the b time-shortening count counter or the c time-shortening count counter set in RAM 512, and the value after the subtraction is stored. Specifically, if the b time-shortening game state flag set to on in step S4506 of the command determination process is set to on, that is, if the b time-shortening game state is in the b time-shortening game state, the MPU 51 subtracts one from the value of the b time-shortening count counter set in the memory area for the b time-shortening count counter set in RAM 512. Furthermore, in the time-saving count counter update process, if the c time-saving game state flag, which is set to on in step S4510 of the command determination process, is set to on, i.e., if the game is in the c time-saving game state, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the c time-saving count counter set in the memory area for the c time-saving count counter set in RAM 512.

<Step S4540>
If the received command is not a special symbol variation pattern command (step S4534: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol game end command (step S4540). The special symbol game end command is set in step S3709 of the special symbol game control process in FIG. 207 when a special symbol is displayed in a static state in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display unit 36.

If the received command is a special symbol game end command (step S4540: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4541; if the received command is not a special symbol variation pattern command (step S4540: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4545.

<Steps S4541 to S4544>
If the received command is a special game end command (step S4540: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether a remaining reservation number counter flag indicating that a remaining reservation number counter is set is set on (step S4541). The remaining reservation number counter flag is a flag indicating that a remaining reservation number counter indicating the number of unexecuted second special game games among the remaining reservations that are reservations of the right to execute the second special game at the time of the end of the second special game that was first executed based on the entry of a game ball into the second winning port 315 in the time-saving game state a is set.

If the remaining reserve number counter flag is set to ON (step S4541: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a subtraction process to subtract 1 from the value of the remaining reserve number counter (step S4542). That is, during the execution of the battle effect in the RUSH effect as a specific effect, the MPU 51 updates the value of the remaining reserve number counter stored in the memory area set in RAM 512 at the end of the second special symbol game. In this way, while the battle effect is being executed, the value of the remaining reserve number counter stored in the memory area set in RAM 512 at the end of the second special symbol game is updated (decremented). For example, even if the result of the jackpot lottery during the remaining reserve period includes a miss for the time-saving symbol stop that would result in a transition to the time-saving c game state, by referencing the value of the remaining reserve number counter stored in the memory area set in RAM 512, it is possible to continue executing the battle effect until the value of the remaining reserve number counter reaches 0, and when the time-saving c game state is entered after the value of the remaining reserve number counter reaches 0, it is possible to execute the unique time-saving c game state effect (see FIG. 225 (C)) as a display effect.

On the other hand, if the remaining hold counter flag is set to off (step S4541: No), i.e., if no processing is required for the remaining holds, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process.

Furthermore, the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the remaining hold number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4543). If the value of the remaining hold number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4543: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the remaining hold number counter flag to OFF (step S4544) and terminates the command determination process. In other words, the MPU 51 terminates management (updating) of the remaining hold number when the value of the remaining hold number counter reaches 0. In other words, the battle presentation terminates when the value of the remaining hold number counter reaches 0 in the memory area for the remaining hold number counter set in RAM 512.

On the other hand, if the value of the remaining hold number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4543: No), the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process. That is, if the value of the remaining hold number counter is not 0, the MPU 51 continues managing (updating) the remaining hold number. In other words, the battle presentation continues if the value of the remaining hold number counter in the memory area for the remaining hold number counter set in RAM 512 does not become 0.

In this embodiment, the value of the remaining reserved number counter is updated (decremented) when the special chart variation pattern is received, i.e., when the special chart game begins, but the value of the remaining reserved number counter may also be updated (decremented) when the special chart game ends.

In addition, while the remaining number of reserved balls specified from the remaining reserved ball pattern command is managed (updated), alternatively, the number of second special symbol games to be played in the battle effect may be determined based on the remaining reserved ball pattern specified from the remaining reserved ball pattern command, and the number of second special symbol games may be managed (updated). In this case, the number of second special symbol games to be played in the battle effect can be managed by setting a battle effect counter corresponding to the number of second special symbol games in a memory area set in RAM 512, and updating this battle effect counter at the start (or end) of the second special symbol game. This allows MPU 51 to determine the second special symbol game at which the battle effect will end by referencing the value of the battle effect counter.

<Step S4545>
If the received command is not a special chart variation pattern command (step S4540: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands (step S4545) and terminates the command determination processing.

[Variation type (performance pattern) setting process]
224 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process of this embodiment. In the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process of this embodiment, the variation type (presentation pattern) executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like in special symbol game is set according to the type of game state, etc. The variation type (presentation pattern) setting process of this embodiment includes a process for setting a one-shot announcement effect and a process for setting a battle effect as effect display means for setting a RUSH effect as a specific effect.

<Step S4601>
In the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the RUSH effect start flag is set to ON (step S4601). The RUSH effect start flag is a flag that starts the RUSH effect as a specific effect, and when a special variation start command is received, it is set to ON in step S4524 of the command determination process of FIG.

If the RUSH effect start flag is set to ON (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4602; if the RUSH effect start flag is set to OFF (step S4601: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4604.

In this embodiment, by determining whether the RUSH effect start flag is set to ON in step S4601, it becomes possible to execute a RUSH effect as a specific effect as a display effect, taking priority over the time-saving game state effect b and the time-saving game state effect c. For example, if the remaining reserve of the second special symbol based on the entry of a game ball into the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a is started in the normal game state, and if the remaining reserve includes a jackpot lottery result that results in a time-saving symbol stop miss, the game will transition to the time-saving game state c after the end of the second special symbol game in which the jackpot lottery result is a time-saving symbol stop miss. In this case, when the time-saving game state effect c corresponding to the time-saving game state c is executed as a display effect, the battle effect that had been executed as a RUSH effect up until that point will be terminated midway.

In response to this, by determining whether the RUSH effect flag is set to ON, it becomes possible to execute the RUSH effect as a display effect in priority over the time-saving game state effect C. As a result, the battle effect being executed as a RUSH effect is prevented from ending prematurely.

In this embodiment, the battle effect is prevented from ending prematurely by executing the RUSH effect as a specific display effect before the c time-saving play state effect, but the battle effect can also be prevented from ending prematurely by postponing the transition to the c time-saving play state until the RUSH effect ends (all remaining reserved second special symbol play has ended).

<Steps S4602 and S4603>
If the RUSH effect start flag is set to ON (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 executes processing as an effect display means for setting the above-mentioned one-shot announcement effect (see FIG. 226) included in the RUSH effect (step S4602). Then, the MPU 51 sets the RUSH effect start flag to OFF (step S4603), and ends the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

<Step S4604>
If the RUSH effect start flag is set to OFF (step S4601: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the battle effect start flag is set to ON (step S4604). The battle effect start flag is a flag that starts a battle effect as a RUSH effect when a RUSH effect is executed as a specific effect, and is set to ON in step S4527 of the command determination process of FIG. 223 when a remaining reserve pattern command is received. That is, the battle effect is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game that is executed first after the transition to the time-saving game state is a miss, and when there is a remaining reserve for the second special symbol game at the end of the second special symbol game.

If the battle presentation start flag is set to on (step S4604: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4605. On the other hand, if the battle presentation start flag is set to off (step S4604: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4611.

<Steps S4605 and S4606>
If the battle effect start flag is set to on (step S4604: Yes), the MPU 51 identifies the remaining hold pattern stored in the RAM 512 in step S4526 of the command determination process of Fig. 223 (step S4605). Then, as an effect display process, the MPU 51 executes a process of setting the above-mentioned battle effect (see Figs. 227 and 228) included in the RUSH effect as a specific effect as a display effect based on the remaining hold pattern (step S4606), and proceeds to step S4607.

Here, in this embodiment, among the game balls entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a, a one-shot announcement effect is executed for the first game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a, and a battle effect is set when a remaining reserve pattern is set for the second or subsequent game balls entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a. In other words, a battle effect is executed if there is a second special symbol reserve (remaining reserve) at the end of a second special symbol game based on the first game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a, and if there are multiple such remaining reserves, a battle effect is set collectively for the second special symbol games executed based on multiple second special symbol reserves. Specifically, if the results of the jackpot lottery for the remaining holds are all misses (see FIG. 199(C)), a battle presentation pattern A or battle presentation pattern B (see FIG. 227(A)) in which the ally character is defeated is set, and if the results of the jackpot lottery for the remaining holds are remaining hold patterns 5 to 8 (see FIG. 199(C)) in which a small win is included in the results of the jackpot lottery for the remaining holds, a battle presentation pattern C or battle presentation pattern D (see FIG. 227(A)) in which the ally character wins is set. Then, if there are multiple remaining holds, a battle presentation is set all at once for second special symbol games that are executed based on multiple second special symbol holds, thereby preventing multiple battle presentations from being set for the remaining holds.

<Steps S4607 and S4608>
In step S4607, the MPU 51 sets the battle effect setting flag to ON, and further sets the battle effect start flag to OFF (step S4608), and proceeds to step S4609.

The battle effect already set flag indicates that there are one or more (2 to 4) second special symbol reserves (remaining reserves) at the end of second special symbol play based on the first game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in time-saving play state a, and that a battle effect has been set for those remaining reserves. This flag is referenced in step S4611 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process to determine whether a battle effect has been set.

As mentioned above, when a RUSH effect (one-shot announcement effect and battle effect) is being executed as a specific effect, an image indicating that a RUSH is in progress (a text image of "JACK HITTING RUSH"), an image indicating the number of jackpot RUSHes (a text image of "RUSH x 3"), an image indicating the total number of balls dispensed in that jackpot RUSH (a text image of "3000 balls"), an image indicating the remaining number of special game plays that can be executed in the jackpot RUSH, etc. are displayed (see Figure 225 (D)). These images may be set at the same time as setting the one-shot announcement effect or battle effect, or may be set at a different time than when setting the one-shot announcement effect or battle effect.

<Steps S4609 and S4610>
In step S4609, the MPU 51 determines whether the battle presentation set in step S4606 is battle presentation pattern A or battle presentation pattern B. In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether a battle presentation in which an ally character is defeated in battle (see FIG. 227(A)) has been set.

If the battle presentation set in step S4606 is battle presentation pattern A or battle presentation pattern B (step S4609: Yes), and a battle presentation in which an ally character is defeated in battle (see FIG. 227(A)) is set, the MPU 51 executes a process to set a branching presentation (see FIG. 229) as the display presentation (step S4610) as the presentation display process, and terminates the change type (presentation pattern) setting process.

Here, battle presentation pattern A or battle presentation pattern B (see FIG. 227(A)), in which an ally character loses a battle, is set when all the results of the jackpot lottery for the remaining reserved characters on which the battle presentation is executed are misses. In other words, the branching presentation (see FIG. 229) as a display presentation is executed after the end of the battle presentation when the player is clearly or implied that the high probability of consecutive jackpots has ended due to the ally character's defeat in the battle presentation. As mentioned above, while the battle presentation for the remaining reserved characters is being executed, the game is in the normal game state or the time-saving c game state. The time-saving c game state has a higher game value than the normal game state because the probability of a time-saving jackpot that triggers a transition to the high probability of consecutive jackpots is higher than in the normal game state. Therefore, the branching presentation (see FIG. 229) clearly or implies which of two game states with different game value to the player is currently in, i.e., whether the game is in the time-saving c game state, which has a higher game value to the player. In this way, by executing a branching effect as a display effect that clearly or suggestively indicates whether the player is in the time-shortened c game state, which has high gameplay value for the player, even in situations where the player's interest in the game decreases because the defeat of an ally character in a battle effect clearly or suggestively indicates to the player that the high probability of consecutive jackpots will end, the player can continue to enjoy the game while hoping that the branching effect as a display effect will clearly or suggest that the player is in the time-shortened c game state, which is an advantageous game state for the player, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

On the other hand, if the battle presentation set in step S4606 is not battle presentation pattern A or battle presentation pattern B (step S4609: No), that is, if battle presentation pattern C or battle presentation pattern D (see Figure 227 (A)), in which the ally character wins the battle, is set based on the fact that the results of the jackpot lottery for the remaining reserves based on the game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving play state a include a small jackpot, the MPU 51 terminates the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process.

<Step S4611>
If the battle effect start flag is set to OFF (step S4604: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the battle effect already set flag is set to ON (step S4611). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the battle effect is set for the second special symbol reserve (remaining reserve) at the end of the second special symbol game based on the first entry of the game ball into the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a.

If the battle effect already set flag is set to on (step S4611: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4612; if the battle effect already set flag is set to off (step S4611: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4617.

<Step S4612>
If the battle effect already set flag is set to ON (step S4611: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a RUSH effect end flag, which ends the RUSH effect as a specific effect, is set to ON (step S4612). That is, when a battle effect is being executed, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to end the RUSH effect (battle effect).

If the RUSH effect end flag is set to ON (step S4612: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4613. On the other hand, if the RUSH effect end flag is set to OFF (step S4612: No), that is, if it is not the time to end the RUSH effect (battle effect), the MPU 51 ends the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

<Steps S4613 to S4616>
If the RUSH effect end flag is set to ON (step S4612: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the battle effect already set flag, which indicates that a battle effect has been set, to OFF (step S4613), and sets the RUSH effect end flag, which ends the RUSH effect, to OFF (step S4614), and terminates the variable type (effect pattern) setting process.

Furthermore, as an update process, the MPU 51 executes a process of clearing the remaining hold number counter (step S4615), sets the remaining hold number counter flag to OFF (step S4616), and ends the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process. In other words, when the RUSH presentation (battle presentation) ends, the MPU 51 ends management (updating) of the remaining hold number. In other words, when the MPU 51 ends the battle presentation as a display presentation when the remaining hold number is not 0 (when the remaining holds include a small win as a result of the jackpot lottery), it ends management (updating) of the remaining hold number.

<Steps S4617 and S4618>
If the battle effect already set flag is set to off (step S4611: No), that is, if the battle effect (RUSH effect) is not being executed, the MPU 51 determines whether the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in normal game state, is set to on (step S4617).

If the normal game state flag is set to on (step S4617: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the normal game state effect as the display effect (step S4618) and terminates the variation type (effect pattern) setting process. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to off (step S4617: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4619.

If the RUSH effect ends without a small win being played (if an ally character is defeated in the battle effect), in the normal game state after the RUSH effect ends, the number of second special symbol reserved images corresponding to the number of second special symbol reserved M will not be displayed as the corresponding display, and the number of first special symbol reserved images corresponding to the number of first special symbol reserved N at the time the RUSH effect ends will be displayed as the corresponding display (see Figure 225 (A)). In other words, when the RUSH effect ends, the display of the special symbol reserved image as the corresponding display will switch from the second special symbol reserved image to the first special symbol reserved image. This suggests to the player that they should switch from hitting right to hitting left based on the end of the RUSH effect.

<Steps S4619 and S4620>
If the normal game state flag indicating that the game is in the normal game state is set to off (step S4617: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the b time-saving game state flag indicating that the game is in the b time-saving game state is set to on (step S4619).

If the b time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S4619: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the b time-shortened game state effect as the display effect (step S4620) and terminates the variation type (effect pattern) setting process. On the other hand, if the b time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S4619: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4621.

In addition, in the b time-shortened play state presentation, a background presentation (stage presentation) different from that in other play states is executed as a display presentation, and it is possible to identify that the b time-shortened play state is in effect based on this background presentation (stage presentation). Also, as shown in Figure 225 (B), in the b time-shortened play state presentation, images related to play in the b time-shortened play state are displayed. In the example shown in Figure 225 (B), text images of "Rush confirmed with big win!!", "Right hit", and "Ceiling chance" correspond to images related to play in the b time-shortened play state. Also, while the b time-shortened play state presentation is being executed, a text image of "50 plays remaining" is displayed as a corresponding display indicating the remaining number of special game plays that can be played in the b time-shortened play state.

<Steps S4621 and S4622>
If the b time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game is in the b time-shortened game state is set to off (step S4619: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the c time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game is in the c time-shortened game state is set to on (step S4621).

If the c time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S4621: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the c time-shortened game state effect as the display effect (step S4622) and terminates the variation type (effect pattern) setting process. On the other hand, if the c time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S4621: No), the MPU 51 terminates the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

As mentioned above, the time-saving c game state effect is executed in the time-saving c game state except when the rush effect is being executed, but a background effect (stage effect) different from that of other game states is executed as a display effect, and it is possible to identify that the time-saving c game state is a specific game state based on this background effect (stage effect). Also, as shown in Figure 225(C), the time-saving c game state effect displays images related to gameplay in the time-saving c game state. In the example shown in Figure 225(C), text images such as "Rush confirmed with big win!!", "Hit left", and "Sudden chance" correspond to images related to gameplay in the time-saving c game state. Furthermore, while the time-saving c game state effect is being executed, a text image of "10 times remaining" (remaining number of times of time-saving c game) is displayed as a specific corresponding display indicating the remaining number of special game plays that can be executed in the time-saving c game state.

As described above, in the present invention, even if a specific condition is met during the execution of the second game operation while a specific effect is being executed, the specific response display is not initiated. Furthermore, in the present invention, even if an update condition is met during the execution of the second game operation while a specific effect is being executed, the updated specific response display is not initiated. In this way, if a specific condition or update condition is met during the execution of the second game operation while a specific effect is being executed, the specific response display is not initiated. This prevents the specific effect from being terminated prematurely by the specific response display, even if a specific condition or update condition is met during the execution of the second game operation while a specific effect is being executed, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the specific effect being terminated prematurely.

On the other hand, in the present invention, a specific correspondence display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the end of the specific effect is initiated based on the end of the specific effect. In this way, by initiating a specific correspondence display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the end of the specific effect, the specific correspondence display can be initiated without terminating the specific effect midway, preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the specific correspondence display not being initiated.

Specifically, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state a to which the transition occurs after the end of the time-saving jackpot game, the second special symbol reserve number M as the first numerical information corresponding to the second reserve number for the right to play the second special symbol game as the second game operation executed based on the game ball into the second winning port 315 as the second ball entry means is set in the second special symbol reserve number memory area NAB as the first counting means in step S1108 (see Figure 200) of the start winning process as the numerical value storage process, and based on the start of the second special symbol game for the second special symbol reserve as the subtraction condition, the second special symbol reserve number M set in the second special symbol reserve number memory area NAB is subtracted in step S3806 (see Figure 209) of the special symbol data setting process as the subtraction process. Furthermore, in this embodiment, for the second special symbol game that is executed based on the game ball entering the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a, a RUSH effect is set as a display effect in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process that serves as the effect display process.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, based on the end of the special symbol game, which notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery as a specific condition is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, the game state is transitioned to the time-saving symbol c game state, and second numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of special symbol games that can be executed in the time-saving symbol c game state is set in the time-saving symbol c number counter as the second counting means in step S4211 (see FIG. 217) of the game state transition process as the numerical value storage process. Also, in this embodiment, the remaining number of special symbol games that can be executed in the time-saving symbol c game state is updated in step S3724 (see FIG. 208) of the special symbol game control process based on the start of the special symbol game as the update condition, and the remaining number of time-saving symbol c games can be displayed (presented) as a corresponding display based on the value of the time-saving symbol c number counter after the update.

In this embodiment, for the second special symbol game that is executed based on the game ball to the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving symbol a game state to which the transition occurs after the end of the jackpot game, if the game state is transitioned to the time-saving symbol c game state based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a miss for the time-saving symbol stop during the execution of the RUSH effect as a display effect in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process as an effect display process, the remaining number of time-saving symbol c games (effect) as a corresponding display in the time-saving symbol c game state is not executed during the execution of the RUSH effect. In this way, when the game state is transitioned to the c time-saving play state during a RUSH effect, the remaining number of c time-saving play times in the c time-saving play state is not displayed (effect) while the RUSH effect is being executed. Therefore, even if the game state is transitioned to the c time-saving play state because the jackpot lottery result during the RUSH effect is a miss for the time-saving pattern stop, the remaining number of c time-saving play times display (effect) prevents the RUSH effect from ending prematurely, preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the RUSH effect ending prematurely.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the game state transitions to the c-time-saving game state while a RUSH effect is being executed as a display effect, the remaining number of c-time-saving game plays (effect) is displayed after the RUSH effect ends. Therefore, in this embodiment, based on the end of the RUSH effect, a display of the remaining number of special game plays that can be executed in the c-time-saving game state at the time the RUSH effect ends is started. In this way, based on the end of the RUSH effect, a display of the remaining number of special game plays that can be executed in the c-time-saving game state at the time the RUSH effect ends is started, so that the display of the remaining number of special game plays that can be executed in the c-time-saving game state can be started without ending the RUSH effect midway, preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the display of the remaining number of special game plays that can be executed in the c-time-saving game state not being started.

In this embodiment, a one-shot announcement effect and a battle effect are executed as RUSH effects, but one of the one-shot announcement effect and the battle effect may be omitted, or another effect such as a mission effect may be executed in place of one or both of the one-shot announcement effect and the battle effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, a battle effect is set collectively for the remaining reserves of the second special game, which is executed when a game ball enters the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving game state a. However, if there are multiple remaining reserves, an effect may be set individually for each remaining reserve.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to eleventh embodiments described above are possible, to the extent applicable.

Furthermore, in each embodiment, it is also possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments to the extent applicable.

[Thirteenth embodiment]
As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine is equipped with a "starting ball entry section" as a starting ball entry means, a "lottery process" as a winning/losing lottery means, a "display performance" as a specific performance, a "display control process" as a display control means, a "movable body" as a moving means, a "movable body control process" as a moving control means, "information" as specific information, a "continuous action" as a series of specific actions, a "return side position" as a first position, a "drive side position" as a second position, an "end judgment condition" as an end condition, and an "end judgment" as a judgment means.

The starting ball entry means may be any means provided in the game area that allows game balls to enter. Examples of starting ball entry means that can realize the purpose of the present invention include, for example, an entry port that triggers a special game when a game ball enters, an entry port (first entry port) that triggers a first special game when a game ball enters, an entry port (second entry port) that triggers a second special game when a game ball enters, an entry port (through gate) that triggers a normal game when a game ball enters, an entry port that activates a movable body (electric device, blade device) when a game ball enters, and a small prize. Examples include ball entry ports that allow balls to be entered during play and that trigger a jackpot when a game ball enters, ball entry ports that allow balls to be entered during small win games and that trigger a time-saving game state when a game ball enters, ball entry ports that allow balls to be entered during jackpot games and that trigger a probability variable game state when a game ball enters, ball entry ports that allow balls to be entered during jackpot games and that trigger a time-saving game state when a game ball enters, and any combination thereof.

The winning/losing lottery means may be a process for executing various types of lotteries. Examples of winning/losing lottery means, as long as they can achieve the spirit of the present invention, include a process for executing a lottery to determine whether a big win game will occur, a process for executing a lottery to determine whether a small win game will occur, a process for executing a lottery to determine whether a normal win game will occur, a process for executing a lottery to determine whether a game state in which a moving object (such as an electric device or a vane) is activated with high frequency or high probability will fall to a game state in which a moving object is activated with low frequency or low probability, a process for executing a lottery to determine whether a game state in which a special probability game state will fall to a normal game state, a process for executing a lottery to determine whether a game state in which a time-saving game state will fall to a normal game state, and any combination thereof.

The specific effect may be any effect that is executed by the display means depending on the results of various lotteries. As specific effects, as long as the intent of the present invention can be realized, for example, display effects executed by display means having a liquid crystal display, display effects executed by display means having a dot matrix display, display effects executed by display means having a plasma display, display effects executed by display means having an organic EL display, effects executed by display means depending on the result of a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot game will be generated, effects executed by display means depending on the result of a lottery to determine whether or not a small jackpot game will be generated, effects executed by display means depending on the result of a lottery to determine whether or not a normal jackpot game will be generated, effects executed depending on the result of a lottery to determine whether or not a game state in which a movable body (electric device, vane device, etc.) is operated with high frequency or high probability will be changed to a game state in which a movable body is operated with low frequency or low probability, effects executed depending on the result of a lottery to determine whether or not a game state in which a probability variable game state will be changed to a normal game state, effects executed depending on the result of a lottery to determine whether or not a time-limited game state will be changed to a normal game state, effects executed by display means in a special game depending on the result of a lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot game will be generated, A performance executed by the display means in a first special symbol game, a performance executed by the display means in a second special symbol game depending on the result of a lottery as to whether or not a jackpot game will be generated, a performance executed by the display means in a jackpot game depending on the result of a lottery as to whether or not a jackpot game will be generated, a performance executed by the display means in a special symbol game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot, a performance executed by the display means in a first special symbol game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot, a second special symbol game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot a presentation executed by the display means in a special pattern game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a small win, a presentation executed by the display means in a first special pattern game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a small win, a presentation executed by the display means in a second special pattern game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a small win, a presentation executed by the display means in a special pattern game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a time-saving game state, a presentation executed by the display means in a first special pattern game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a time-saving game state An effect executed by the display means in a special symbol game, an effect executed by the display means in a second special symbol game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a time-saving game state, an effect executed by the display means in a jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot, an effect executed by the display means when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a probability variable jackpot game state (transition to a probability variable game state after the end of the jackpot game), an effect executed by the display means when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a time-saving jackpot game state (transition to a time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game) an opening effect executed by the display means at the opening of a jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot; an opening/closing execution mode effect executed by the display means in the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot; a round game effect executed by the display means in a round game of a jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot; an interval effect executed by the display means in an interval of a jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot; an ending effect executed by the display means at the ending of a jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot; an effect executed by the display means in a normal game depending on the result of a lottery to determine whether or not a normal game will be generated; Examples of such effects include effects that are executed by the display means in a normal winning game when the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to generate a normal winning game is a miss, effects that are executed by the display means in response to the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to fall from a game state in which the movable body is activated with a high frequency or high probability to a game state in which the movable body is activated with a low frequency or low probability, effects that are executed by the display means in response to the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to fall from a special game state to a normal game state, effects that are executed by the display means in response to the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to fall from a time-limited game state to a normal game state, and any combination thereof.

The display control means may be a process that determines and executes an effect from among multiple effect display modes. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the display control means may be, for example, a process that determines and executes a display effect to be executed on a display means having an LCD display from among multiple effect display modes, a process that determines and executes a display effect to be executed on a display means having a dot matrix display from among multiple effect display modes, a process that determines and executes a display effect to be executed on a display means having a plasma display from among multiple effect display modes, a process that determines and executes a display effect to be executed on a display means having an organic EL display from among multiple effect display modes, a process that determines and executes a display effect to be executed on a display means depending on the result of a jackpot lottery to determine whether a jackpot game will be generated from among multiple effect display modes, and a process that determines and executes a display effect to be executed on a display means depending on the result of a lottery to determine whether a small jackpot game will be generated from among multiple effect display modes. a process for determining and executing a performance to be executed by a display means from a plurality of performance display modes in accordance with the result of a lottery as to whether or not to generate a normal winning game; a process for determining and executing a performance to be executed by a display means from a plurality of performance display modes in accordance with the result of a lottery as to whether or not to cause a game state in which a movable body (electric device, vane device, etc.) is operated with high frequency or high probability to be changed to a game state in which a movable body is operated with low frequency or low probability; a process for determining and executing a performance to be executed by a display means in a special game from a plurality of performance display modes in accordance with the result of a lottery as to whether or not to generate a jackpot game a process of determining and executing a presentation to be executed on the display means in a first special symbol game from a plurality of presentation display modes in accordance with the result of a lottery as to whether or not a jackpot game will be generated; a process of determining and executing a presentation to be executed on the display means in a second special symbol game from a plurality of presentation display modes in accordance with the result of a lottery as to whether or not a jackpot game will be generated; a process of determining and executing a presentation to be executed on the display means in a jackpot game from a plurality of presentation display modes in accordance with the result of a lottery as to whether or not a jackpot game will be generated; a process of determining and executing a presentation to be executed on the display means in a special symbol game from a plurality of presentation display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot; a process of determining and executing a presentation to be executed on the display means in a first special symbol game from a plurality of presentation display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot a process for determining and executing a presentation to be executed by the display means in a second special symbol game from among a plurality of presentation display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is one that will result in a jackpot, a process for determining and executing a presentation to be executed by the display means in a special symbol game from among a plurality of presentation display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is one that will result in a small jackpot, a process for determining and executing a presentation to be executed by the display means in a first special symbol game from among a plurality of presentation display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is one that will result in a small jackpot, a process for determining and executing a presentation to be executed by the display means in a second special symbol game from among a plurality of presentation display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is one that will result in a small jackpot, a process for determining and executing a presentation to be executed by the display means in a special symbol game from among a plurality of presentation display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is one that will result in a time-shortened game state a process of determining and executing from among a plurality of effect display modes an effect to be executed by the display means in a first special symbol game when the result of the jackpot lottery is one that will cause a time-saving game state to be generated, a process of determining and executing from among a plurality of effect display modes an effect to be executed by the display means in a second special symbol game when the result of the jackpot lottery is one that will cause a time-saving game state to be generated, a process of determining and executing from among a plurality of effect display modes an effect to be executed by the display means in a jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery is one that will cause a jackpot to be generated, a process of determining and executing from among a plurality of effect display modes an effect to be executed by the display means in a jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery is one that will cause a probability variable jackpot game state (transition to a probability variable game state after the end of the jackpot game), a process of determining and executing from among a plurality of effect display modes an effect to be executed by the display means when the result of the jackpot lottery is one that will cause a time-saving jackpot game state (transition to a probability variable game state after the end of the jackpot game), a process of determining and executing an effect to be executed by the display means from a plurality of effect display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a normal jackpot game state (transition to a normal game state after the end of the jackpot game); a process of determining and executing an opening effect to be executed by the display means in the opening of the jackpot game from a plurality of effect display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot; a process of determining and executing an opening/closing execution mode effect to be executed by the display means in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game from a plurality of effect display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot; a process for determining and executing a round game effect to be executed by the display means in a round game of a jackpot game from a plurality of effect display modes; a process for determining and executing an interval effect to be executed by the display means in an interval of a jackpot game from a plurality of effect display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot; a process for determining and executing an ending effect to be executed by the display means at the ending of a jackpot game from a plurality of effect display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot; a process for determining and executing an effect to be executed by the display means in a normal game from a plurality of effect display modes depending on the result of a lottery as to whether or not a normal win game will be generated; Examples include a process of selecting and executing an effect from multiple effect display modes, a process of selecting and executing an effect to be executed by the display means in a normal winning game when the result of the lottery on whether or not to generate a normal winning game is a miss from multiple effect display modes, a process of selecting and executing an effect to be executed by the display means from multiple effect display modes in accordance with the result of a lottery on whether or not to transition from a game state in which the movable body is activated with a high frequency or high probability to a game state in which the movable body is activated with a low frequency or low probability, a process of selecting and executing an effect to be executed by the display means from multiple effect display modes in accordance with the result of a lottery on whether or not to transition from a special game state to a normal game state, a process of selecting and executing an effect to be executed by the display means from multiple effect display modes in accordance with the result of a lottery on whether or not to transition from a time-limited game state to a normal game state, and any combination thereof.

The movable means may be provided in the game area and operable while the effects are displayed. As long as the purpose of this invention can be realized, movable means may be, for example, one that operates while the effects are displayed in a special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game), one that operates while the effects are displayed in a big win game, one that operates while the effects are displayed in a small win game, one that operates while the effects are displayed in a normal win game, one that can move along a linear path, one that can move along a non-linear path, one that can move along a curved path, one that can move back and forth between two positions, one that can rotate, one that can rotate by moving the tip of the movable means along an arc-shaped path around a fulcrum, one that can change shape, one in which multiple movable members are joined or separated, one in which at least a portion can be enlarged or reduced, one that has a display unit such as an LCD display, one that has a light-emitting unit that can emit light, one that operates as an effect, one that operates as a special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game). those that operate as effects in special symbol games (first special symbol games or second special symbol games), those that operate to notify the player whether a predetermined effect will be executed or not in special symbol games, those that operate to notify the player whether a super reach will be executed or not, those that operate to notify the player whether a special reach will be executed or not, those that operate to notify the player whether the state is more advantageous than the state previously suggested, those that operate to clearly indicate or suggest that there is a high probability of winning, those that operate to notify that it is a probability jackpot, those that operate to notify that it is a probability jackpot with a higher expected value of ball payout after suggesting that it is a regular jackpot, those that operate to notify that it is a probability jackpot after suggesting that it is a regular jackpot , those that operate to announce a time-saving jackpot after suggesting a normal jackpot, those that operate to allow or restrict (open or close) the entry of game balls into the entry port, those that operate to allow or restrict (open or close) the entry port of game balls into the entry port that gives an opportunity to play a special game (first special game or second special game) when a game ball enters, those that operate in special game (first special game or second special game), those that operate in jackpot game, those that operate at the opening of jackpot game, those that operate in the opening and closing execution mode of jackpot game, those that operate in round game of the opening and closing execution mode of jackpot game, those that operate in the interval of the opening and closing execution mode of jackpot game, those that operate at the ending of jackpot game, These include those that operate to open or close a ball entry port (variable entry port) that opens and closes during round play, those that operate to open or close a ball entry port (V entry port) that opens and closes during round play and triggers a transition to a high-frequency support mode (probable variable game mode or time-limited game mode) after the end of a jackpot game when a game ball enters, those that open and close during small jackpot games and operate to open or close a ball entry port that awards prize balls when a game ball enters, those that open and close during small jackpot games and operate to open or close a ball entry port (V entry port) that triggers a jackpot game when a game ball enters after the end of a small jackpot game when a game ball enters, those that operate to switch the flow path of game balls, a launching hammer that is movable to launch game balls, a ball feeding device that moves game balls to a position where they can be launched by the launching hammer, and any combination thereof.

The movement control means may be a process that determines and executes the movement mode of the movable means. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the movement control means may be, for example, a process that determines and executes the movement mode of the movable means while the effects are displayed in special symbol games (first special symbol games or second special symbol games), a process that determines and executes the movement mode of the movable means while the effects are displayed in big win games, a process that determines and executes the movement mode of the movable means while the effects are displayed in small win games, a process that determines and executes the movement mode of the movable means while the effects are displayed in regular win games, a process that determines the movement mode of the movable means moving along a linear path and moves the movable means along the linear path, a process that determines the movement mode of the movable means moving along a non-curved path and moves the movable means along a non-curved path, a process that determines the movement mode of the movable means moving along a curved path, and so on. A process for determining a movable mode for moving along a path and moving the movable means along a curved path, a process for determining a path for the movable means to reciprocate between two positions and moving the movable means reciprocally between the two positions, a process for determining a movable mode for rotating the movable means and rotating the movable means, a process for determining a movable mode for moving the tip of the movable means along an arc-shaped path around a fulcrum and rotating the movable means, a process for determining a movable mode for changing the form of the movable means and changing the form of the movable means, a process for determining a movable mode for connecting or separating a plurality of movable members and connecting or separating the plurality of movable members, a process for determining a movable mode for enlarging or reducing at least a part of the movable means and enlarging or reducing at least a part of the movable means a process for determining the movable mode of a movable means having a display unit such as a liquid crystal display and moving the movable means; a process for determining the movable mode of a movable means having a light-emitting unit capable of emitting light and moving the movable means; a process for determining the movable mode as an effect of the movable means and moving the movable means as an effect; a process for determining the movable mode of the movable means as an effect in a special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) and moving the movable means in the special symbol game; a process for determining the movable mode of the movable means to notify the player whether or not a predetermined effect will be executed in a special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) and moving the movable means; a process for determining the movable mode of the movable means to notify the player whether or not a super reach will be executed and moving the movable means a process of determining a movable mode for notifying the player whether a special reach has been executed and moving the movable means; a process of determining a movable mode for notifying the player whether the movable means is in a more advantageous state than the previously suggested state and moving the movable means; a process of determining a movable mode for moving the movable means in a movable mode that clearly indicates or suggests that the likelihood of a jackpot is high and moving the movable means; a process of determining a movable mode for notifying that it is a probability jackpot and moving the movable means; a process of determining a movable mode for notifying that it is a probability jackpot with a higher expected value of ball payout and moving the movable means after suggesting that it is a probability jackpot; A process of determining a movable mode and moving the movable means, a process of determining a movable mode that indicates a normal jackpot and then notifies a time-saving jackpot and moving the movable means, a process of determining a movable mode that allows or restricts (opens or closes) the entry of a game ball into an entry port and moving the movable means, a process of determining a movable mode that allows or restricts (opens or closes) the entry of a game ball into an entry port that provides an opportunity to play a special game (first special game or second special game) when the game ball enters and moving the movable means, a process of determining a movable mode of the movable means in a special game (first special game or second special game) and moving the movable means in the special game (first special game or second special game), a jackpot a process for determining the movable state of the movable means in a round game in the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game and moving the movable means in the opening; a process for determining the movable state of the movable means in the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game and moving the movable means in the opening and closing execution mode; a process for determining the movable state of the movable means in a round game in the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game and moving the movable means in the round game; a process for determining the movable state of the movable means in an interval in the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game and moving the movable means in the interval; a process for determining the movable state of the movable means in the ending of the jackpot game and moving the movable means in the ending a process of moving the movable means in a round game, a process of determining the movable mode of the movable means that opens or closes the ball entrance (variable winning entrance) that opens and closes in a round game and moving the movable means in a round game, a process of determining the movable mode that allows or restricts (opens or closes the ball entrance) the entry of game balls into the ball entrance by the movable means and moving the movable means, a process of determining the movable mode of the movable means that allows or restricts (opens or closes the ball entrance) the entry of game balls into the ball entrance that gives an opportunity to play a special game (first special game or second special game) when a game ball enters and moving the movable means, a process of switching to a high frequency support mode after the end of a jackpot game when a game ball enters Examples of such processes include a process of determining the movable mode of a movable means that opens or closes a ball entry port (V entry port) that triggers a transition to a special probability game state after a jackpot game ends when a game ball enters the game, and then operating the movable means; a process of determining the movable mode of a movable means that opens or closes a ball entry port (V entry port) that is opened and closed during round play and triggers a transition to a time-limited game state after a jackpot game ends when a game ball enters the game, and then operating the movable means; a process of determining the movable mode of a movable means that opens or closes a ball entry port (V entry port) that is opened and closed during round play and triggers a transition to a time-limited game state after a jackpot game ends when a game ball enters the game, and then operating the movable means; a process of determining the movable mode of a movable means that switches the flow path of game balls and then operating the movable means; and any combination thereof.

Specific information may be a group of data that is set in a single setting process corresponding to various movement modes of the movable means and that enables the movable means to perform a series of operations based on the information set in a single setting process. As specific information, if it is possible to realize the spirit of the present invention, it may include, for example, a task table (drive data 1) that causes the movable means to perform a series of operations through multiple processes, a task table (drive data 1) that controls the drive source (e.g., a motor) of the movable means to perform a series of operations through multiple processes, information that causes the movable means to operate in various movement modes in special symbol games (first special symbol games or second special symbol games), information that causes the movable means to operate in various movement modes in big win games, information that causes the movable means to operate in various movement modes in small win games, Information for operating the movable means in various movable modes in a normal winning game, information for operating the movable means in various movable modes along a linear path, information for operating the movable means in various movable modes along a non-linear path, information for operating the movable means in a movable mode along a curved path, information for operating the movable means in a movable mode that reciprocates the movable means at least once between two positions, information for rotating the movable means in various movable modes, information for rotating the movable means by operating the tip of the movable means in a movable mode along an arc-shaped path around a fulcrum, information for changing the shape of the movable means, information corresponding to various movable modes for enlarging or reducing at least a part of the movable means; information for opening and closing an entrance port through which game balls can enter in various movable modes by the operation of the movable means; information for opening and closing an entry port through which a prize ball is awarded when a game ball enters in various movable modes by the operation of the movable means; information for opening and closing an entrance port through which a prize ball is awarded when a game ball enters in various movable modes by the operation of the movable means; information for opening and closing an entrance port through which a prize ball is awarded when a game ball enters in various movable modes by the operation of the movable means; information for opening and closing in various movable states by the operation of the movable means an entrance port through which prize balls are awarded when game balls enter the game machine (special game mode), information for opening and closing in various movable states by the operation of the movable means an entrance port through which prize balls are awarded when game balls enter the game machine in a jackpot game, information for repeatedly opening and closing in various movable states by the operation of the movable means an entrance port through which prize balls are awarded when game balls enter the game machine in a jackpot game opening and closing execution mode, information for opening and closing in various movable states by the operation of the movable means an entrance port through which prize balls are awarded when game balls enter the game machine in a round game of a jackpot game information for closing or opening a ball, information set corresponding to the operation of all or part of one moving state of the movable means, information corresponding to the operation of the movable means common to a plurality of moving states, information indicating the time-series operation of all or part of one moving state of the movable means (scenario data, drive data), information corresponding to the information indicating the time-series operation of the movable means common to a plurality of moving states (scenario data, drive data), numerical information set corresponding to the movement time of all or part of one moving state of the movable means, numerical information set corresponding to the number of movements of all or part of one moving state of the movable means, numerical information set corresponding to the number of repeated movements included in one moving state of the movable means, numerical information set corresponding to the whole or part of the waiting period until the next movement of one moving state of the movable means is started, numerical information set corresponding to the whole or part of the waiting period until the operation of the movable means is started, numerical information set corresponding to the whole or part of the number of times an entrance opening into which game balls can enter is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means, numerical information set in correspondence with part of the remaining number of times that an entrance into which game balls can enter is to be opened and closed by the operation of the movable means; numerical information set in correspondence with all or part of the number of times that an entrance into which prize balls are awarded when game balls enter is to be opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in a jackpot game; numerical information set in correspondence with all or part of the number of times that an entrance into which prize balls are awarded when game balls enter is to be repeatedly opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in an opening and closing execution mode of a jackpot game; Examples of such information include numerical information set in correspondence with all or part of the number of times that the ball entrance, which awards prize balls when game balls enter, is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in a jackpot game; numerical information set in correspondence with all or part of the maximum number of times that the ball entrance, which awards prize balls when game balls enter, is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in a round of jackpot game; numerical information set in correspondence with all or part of the remaining number of times that the ball entrance, which awards prize balls when game balls enter, is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in a round of jackpot game; and any combination thereof.

The series of specific actions may be actions that are performed within the range of motion of the movable means. Examples of the series of specific actions that can achieve the purpose of the present invention include, for example, continuous actions that are performed within the range of motion of the movable means, actions in which the movable means reciprocates at least once between a starting point (return side position) and a turning position (driving side position), actions in which the movable means reciprocates at least once between a standby position (return side position) when the movable means is in a non-driving state and a maximum movable position (the position farthest from the standby position (driving side position)) when the movable means is in a driving state, actions in which the movable means reciprocates at least once with an intermediate position between the standby position and the maximum movable position as the starting point (return side position) or turning position (driving side position), and actions in which the standby position is the starting point (return side position) and the intermediate position is the turning position (driving side position). an operation in which the movable means reciprocates at least once from the intermediate position as a starting point (return side position) to the maximum movable position as a turning position (drive side position); an operation in which the movable means reciprocates at least once from one of the different intermediate positions as a starting point (return side position) to the other intermediate position as a turning position (drive side position); an operation including movement of the movable means at least once in a direction toward the standby position; an operation including movement of the movable means at least once in a direction toward the maximum movable position; an operation in which the movable means is moved in a direction toward the standby position to position the movable means at the standby position (return side position) or nearby at least once; an operation of moving the movable means in a direction toward the maximum movable position (drive side position) and positioning the movable means at least once at or near the maximum movable position (drive side position); an operation of moving the movable means in a direction toward the standby position (return side position) and positioning the movable means at least once at an intermediate position; an operation of moving the movable means in a direction toward the maximum movable position (drive side position) and positioning the movable means at least once at an intermediate position; a rotation operation of the movable means at a predetermined position; a rotation operation of the movable means at the standby position (return side position); a rotation operation of the movable means at the maximum movable position (drive side position); a rotation operation of the movable means at an intermediate position; an operation of opening and closing the winning slot at least once by operating the movable means; a special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) Examples of such actions include an action of opening and closing the ball entrance at least once by operating the movable means in a jackpot game, an action of opening and closing the ball entrance at least once by operating the movable means in a jackpot game, an action of opening and closing the ball entrance at least once by operating the movable means in an opening and closing execution mode of a jackpot game, an action of opening and closing the ball entrance at least once by operating the movable means in a round game of a jackpot game, an action of opening and closing the ball entrance at least once by operating the movable means in a small jackpot game, an action of opening and closing the ball entrance at least once by operating the movable means in a normal jackpot game, and any combination thereof.

The first position and the second position may be different positions set within the movable range of the movable means. As the first position and the second position, as long as the intent of the present invention can be realized, for example, a standby position (return side position) when the movable means is in a non-driven state, a maximum movable position (position farthest from the standby position (drive side position)) when the movable means is in a driven state, an intermediate position set between the standby position and the maximum movable position (position farthest from the standby position), a position among the intermediate positions closer to the standby position than the maximum movable position, a position among the intermediate positions in the vicinity of the standby position, a position among the intermediate positions closer to the maximum movable position than the standby position, a position among the intermediate positions in the vicinity of the maximum movable position, a starting point (return side position) when the movable means performs a reciprocating motion, a turning back position (drive side position) when the movable means performs a reciprocating motion, a rotation position when the movable means performs a rotational motion, a position where the movable means performs an enlarging or reducing motion, a position where a plurality of movable members perform a connecting or separating motion, a position where an entrance port through which a game ball can enter is closed (return side position) or opened (drive side position), a special symbol game (first special symbol game or a position where a ball can be entered during a jackpot game and a prize ball is awarded when a game ball enters the machine (return side position) or a position where a ball can be entered during a jackpot game and a prize ball is awarded when a game ball enters the machine (drive side position); a position where a ball can be entered during a jackpot game and a prize ball is awarded when a game ball enters the machine (return side position) or a position where a ball can be entered during a jackpot game and a prize ball is awarded when a game ball enters the machine (drive side position); a position where a ball can be entered during a jackpot game and a prize ball is awarded when a game ball enters the machine (drive side position) or a position where a ball can be entered during a jackpot game and a prize ball is awarded when a game ball enters the machine (drive side position) These positions include a position where the ball entry opening is closed (return position) or opened (drive position) to trigger a time-saving game state, a position where the ball can be entered during a small win game and the ball's entry triggers a jackpot game, a position where the ball can be entered during a small win game and the ball's entry triggers a time-saving game state, and any combination thereof.

The termination condition may be any condition that terminates a series of specific operations of the movable means. As for termination conditions, as long as the intent of the present invention can be realized, for example, the maximum operating time of the movable means has elapsed, subtractive numerical information (such as a subtractive counter) set corresponding to the maximum operating time of the movable means is 0 or additive numerical information (such as an additive counter) is at its maximum value, the maximum number of times the movable means has been operated has elapsed, subtractive numerical information (such as a subtractive counter) set corresponding to the maximum number of times the movable means has been operated is 0 or additive numerical information (such as an additive counter) is at its maximum value, all processing specified by the operation data set for the operation of the movable means has been completed, the number of times the movable means has returned to a predetermined position has been completed, subtractive numerical information (such as a subtractive counter) specifying the number of times the movable means has returned to a predetermined position is 0 or additive numerical information (such as an additive counter) is at its maximum value, the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means has been completed, subtractive numerical information (such as a subtractive counter) set corresponding to the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means is 0 or additive numerical information (such as an additive counter) is at its maximum value, the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means has been completed the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in a special game is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is the maximum value; the operating means that can be operated by the player is operated by the player; the operating means is operated by the player within a predetermined period that is set in advance; the predetermined period that is set in advance passes without the operating means being operated by the player; the operating means is operated by the player within a predetermined period that is set as the maximum movable time of the movable means; the specified period that is set as the maximum movable time of the movable means passes without the operating means being operated by the player; the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in a jackpot game is completed; the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) that is set in accordance with the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in a jackpot game is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is the maximum value; the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in a small prize game is completed; the subtractive numerical information ( The subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at its maximum value, the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in a normal winning game has ended, the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in response to the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in a normal winning game has ended, the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in response to the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in a normal winning game has ended, the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in response to the specified number of opening and closing of the winning opening that is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means has ended, the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is the maximum value, the opening and closing of the prize opening that is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in the special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) is completed a specified number of times, the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) that is set in response to the opening and closing of the prize opening by the operation of the movable means in the special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is the maximum value, Examples of such errors include the completion of a specified number of openings and closings for a prize opening that is opened and closed; in a jackpot game, subtractive numerical information (such as a subtractive counter) set in response to the opening and closing of a prize opening a specified number of times by the operation of the movable means (a predetermined number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot) is 0 or additive numerical information (such as an additive counter) is at its maximum value; in a small jackpot game, the completion of a specified number of openings and closings for a prize opening that is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means; in a small jackpot game, subtractive numerical information (such as a subtractive counter) set in response to the opening and closing of a prize opening a specified number of times by the operation of the movable means is 0 or additive numerical information (such as an additive counter) is at its maximum value; in a normal jackpot game, the completion of a specified number of openings and closings for a prize opening that is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means; in a normal jackpot game, subtractive numerical information (such as a subtractive counter) set in response to the opening and closing of a prize opening a specified number of times by the operation of the movable means is 0 or additive numerical information (such as an additive counter) is at its maximum value; an error occurring in the operation of the movable means; and any combination thereof.

The determination means may be any means for determining whether or not the termination condition is met. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the determination means may be, for example, a means for determining whether or not the maximum operating time of the movable means has elapsed, a means for determining whether subtractive numerical information (such as a subtractive counter) set corresponding to the maximum operating time of the movable means is 0 or whether additive numerical information (such as an additive counter) is at its maximum value, a means for determining whether or not the maximum number of times the movable means has been operated has elapsed, a means for determining whether or not subtractive numerical information (such as a subtractive counter) set corresponding to the maximum number of times the movable means is operated is 0 or whether additive numerical information (such as an additive counter) is at its maximum value, or a means for determining whether or not the maximum number of times the movable means has been operated is regulated by operation data set for the operation of the movable means. Determining whether all specified processes have been completed, determining whether the number of times the movable means has returned to a specified position is the specified number, determining whether subtractive numerical information (such as a subtractive counter) that specifies the number of times the movable means has returned to a specified position is 0 or whether additive numerical information (such as an additive counter) is at its maximum value, determining whether the movable means has completed a specified number of reciprocating movements, determining whether subtractive numerical information (such as a subtractive counter) that is set corresponding to the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means is 0 or whether additive numerical information (such as an additive counter) is at its maximum value, determining whether the movable means has reciprocated a specified number of times in special game play Determining whether an operation has ended, determining whether subtractive numerical information (such as a subtractive counter) set in accordance with the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in a special game is 0 or whether additive numerical information (such as an additive counter) is at its maximum value, determining whether an operating means operable by a player has been operated by the player, determining whether an operating means has been operated by the player within a predetermined period of time, determining whether a predetermined period of time has passed without the operating means being operated by the player, determining whether an operating means has been operated by the player within a predetermined period of time set as the maximum operating time of the movable means determination whether the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in a big win game has been completed; determination whether a specified period set in the maximum operating time of the movable means has elapsed without the player operating the operating means; determination whether the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in a big win game has been completed; determination whether subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in correspondence with the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in a big win game is 0 or whether additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at its maximum value; determination whether the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in a small win game has been completed; determination whether a specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in a small win game has been completed; Determination of whether subtractive numerical information (such as a subtractive counter) set in correspondence with the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in a normal winning game is 0 or whether additive numerical information (such as an additive counter) is at its maximum value; Determination of whether subtractive numerical information (such as a subtractive counter) set in correspondence with the specified number of reciprocating movements of the movable means in a normal winning game is 0 or whether additive numerical information (such as an additive counter) is at its maximum value; Determination of whether the specified number of openings and closings of the winning slot that is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means has been completed; Determination of whether the specified number of openings and closings of the winning slot that is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means has been completed; Determination of whether subtractive numerical information (such as a subtractive counter) set in response to the opening and closing of a prize opening a specified number of times by the operation of the movable means in a special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) is 0 or whether additive numerical information (such as an additive counter) is at its maximum value; Determination of whether the opening and closing of a prize opening a specified number of times by the operation of the movable means in a special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) is 0 or whether additive numerical information (such as a subtractive counter) is at its maximum value; Determination of whether the opening and closing of a prize opening a specified number of times by the operation of the movable means in a jackpot game Determining whether the opening and closing of the prize opening that is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means has been completed a specified number of times, determining whether subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in response to the opening and closing of the prize opening by the operation of the movable means a specified number of times (a predetermined number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot) in a jackpot game is 0 or whether additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is at its maximum value, determining whether the opening and closing of the prize opening that is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means has been completed a specified number of times in a small jackpot game, determining whether the opening and closing of the prize opening by the operation of the movable means a specified number of times in a small jackpot game is set in response to the opening and closing of the prize opening by the operation of the movable means a specified number of times These include determining whether subtractive numerical information (such as a subtractive counter) set is 0 or whether additive numerical information (such as an additive counter) is at its maximum value, determining whether the prize slot opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in a normal winning game has been opened and closed a specified number of times, determining whether subtractive numerical information (such as a subtractive counter) set in response to the opening and closing of the prize slot a specified number of times by the operation of the movable means in a normal winning game is 0 or whether additive numerical information (such as an additive counter) is at its maximum value, determining whether an error has occurred in the operation of the movable means, and any combination thereof.

Gaming machines are equipped with movable bodies that are driven in various games. The movable bodies are moved in a movable form that includes continuous motions such as back-and-forth movements in, for example, special game games that announce the results of a jackpot lottery that is triggered by a gaming ball entering a prize slot, and jackpot games that are played when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Furthermore, when controlling the movable bodies, it is desirable to perform operation control and termination control of the movable bodies with more efficient control.

In gaming machines, movable objects are moved while the display means is executing a display effect. To enhance entertainment value, multiple movable forms are provided for the movable object. The movable form here includes the trajectory, number of movements, and amount of movement of the movable object, and naturally also includes combinations thereof. The movable object performs various movements between a predetermined initial position and its limiting movement position. In this case, the control unit that controls the movable object is required to more optimally control the movable object by sharing control and data for common movable forms to simplify control and reduce data volume. This not only reduces the amount of drive data used for each movable form, thereby reducing memory burden, but also the number of times (control burden) the drive data is read and temporarily stored (set) when operating the movable object. When the movable object is operated based on common drive data, after all control processing based on the common drive data is completed, the next movement of the movable object is executed based on drive data that is individually set for each movable form.

However, even when a common movement mode is executed, the termination conditions and timing for ending the common movement mode and transitioning to the next operation may differ depending on the movement mode being executed. For this reason, conventional movable body control has not been able to efficiently control the termination of a specified movement mode and transition to the next operation.

In contrast, the present invention aims to efficiently control the end of a specified movement mode and the transition to the next operation.

Specifically, in gaming machines, for example, while the display means is executing display effects in various games, the performance features, which are a type of movable body, are moved to enhance the performance and increase the enjoyment of the game. For example, while the display means is executing display effects, the movable body is driven to indicate that a special symbol game will develop into a Super Reach (SP Reach) or Special Reach (SPSP Reach), and after announcing a normal jackpot in a special symbol game, it is driven to indicate a probability jackpot in that special symbol game or in the jackpot game that is executed after the end of that special symbol game. In this case, after successive movements such as a reciprocating movement, the movable body will perform an operation to make a notification favorable to the player or an operation to make a notification unfavorable to the player, depending on the content of the subsequent notification (or the movable body will not be operated).

Furthermore, in controlling a stage prop, which is a type of movable body, when the movable body is moved in one of multiple movable modes, a single common drive data (see Figure 269) is used for the common motions in those movable modes (for example, continuous motions such as the aforementioned back-and-forth motion). This drive data is stored in ROM, read from ROM in correspondence with the common motions of the movable body in various movable modes, and set (temporarily stored) in RAM in a single setting process. It is a data group that executes the common continuous motions of the movable body through multiple processes based on the information set in the single setting process. Specifically, in this embodiment, the drive data is set as a task table that controls a stepping motor to execute three types of back-and-forth motions with different movement amounts and motion trajectories of the movable body as continuous motions common to multiple movable modes. By sequentially executing the processes specified by this task table, a continuous motion is executed in which the movable body gradually advances from the top of the display means toward the center while performing a back-and-forth motion, and then returns to its initial position. In this way, by setting a single common drive data for common consecutive movements in multiple movement modes, the amount of drive data used for one movement mode can be reduced, not only reducing the memory burden on the ROM, but also reducing the control burden of reading drive data from ROM and setting it in RAM (temporary storage) when moving the movable body. When the movable body is operated based on the common drive data, after all control processing based on the common drive data is completed, the next movement of the movable body is executed based on drive data that is individually set for each movement mode.

On the other hand, operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be validated during a predetermined period set during the period in which the movable body is performing continuous movements. Even in this case, the next movement of the movable body is executed based on the drive pattern data that is individually set for the subsequent movement of the movable body after all control processing based on the common drive pattern data has been completed, rather than at the time the operation of the operation button 20 is executed.

However, the timing at which the operation button 20 is operated during the specified period during which operation of the operation button 20 is valid is not uniform but variable. As a result, the time from when the operation button 20 is operated to when the control processing of the movable body based on the common drive data is completed is not uniform but variable. In other words, after the operation of the operation button 20 establishes an end determination condition for common consecutive actions in multiple movement modes, the end control of the movable body for the common consecutive actions may not be executed immediately. As a result, the time from when the common action of the movable body is performed until the next action is started is not uniform, and the transition of the movable body's action from the common consecutive action to the next action may not be smooth. As a result, the player may feel uncomfortable with the inability to smoothly transition the action of the movable body. In particular, if the operation button 20 is operated immediately after the start of a predetermined period during which operation of the operation button 20 is valid, the time until the next action of the movable body is executed is longer than when the operation button 20 is operated immediately before the end of that predetermined period, and the next action cannot be immediately performed after the operation of the operation button 20. This makes the player more likely to feel uncomfortable that the next action cannot be immediately performed after the operation of the operation button 20. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the movable body may be operated to determine whether or not to perform various announcements during the display effects in special gameplay or jackpot game, and in this case, the discomfort felt by the player regarding the movement of the movable body can reduce the effect of the effect provided by the movable body.

In contrast, in the present invention, when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means, the movement control means determines one movement mode for the movable means while one specific effect is being displayed on the display means, depending on the result of the lottery by the win/lose lottery means. Also, in the present invention, while one specific effect is being displayed by the display control means, the movement control means executes a series of specific actions for the movable means based on specific information set in correspondence with one movement mode.

Furthermore, in the present invention, when the movement control means executes a series of specific actions on the movable means based on specific information set corresponding to one movement state while the display control means is displaying one specific effect, the determination means determines whether or not the termination condition for the series of specific actions is met when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is on the initial position side. In this way, when the movement control means executes a series of specific actions on the movable means based on specific information set corresponding to one movement state while the display control means is displaying one specific effect, the determination means determines whether or not the termination condition for the series of specific actions is met when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is on the initial position side. Therefore, in the series of specific actions of the movable means executed by the movement control means based on specific information, the determination means determines whether or not the termination condition is met each time the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is on the initial position side, by the movement control means. Furthermore, in the present invention, when the determination means determines that the termination condition is satisfied in a series of specific actions of the movable means performed by the movement control means based on the specific information, the termination means stops the movement of the movable means located at or near the first position, thereby terminating the series of specific actions. That is, in the series of specific actions of the movable means performed by the movement control means based on the specific information, the termination means can stop the movement of the movable means and terminate the series of specific actions each time the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, provided that the termination condition is satisfied, even before all movement control of the movable means based on the specific information has been terminated. As a result, if the termination condition is satisfied during the execution of the series of specific actions of the movable means, the movement of the movable means based on the specific information can be stopped and the series of specific actions can be terminated when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position after the termination condition is satisfied. As a result, when it is determined that the termination condition for the series of specific actions is satisfied, the series of specific actions of the movable means can be immediately terminated, thereby smoothly controlling the termination of the movable means. Therefore, in this invention, a smooth transition from a series of specific actions of the movable means to the next action is possible, and once it is determined that the conditions for ending the series of specific actions have been met, the series of specific actions of the movable means can be ended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when another individual action is subsequently executed after the series of specific actions of the movable means has ended, a smooth transition from the series of specific actions to the other individual action is possible, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when transitioning from the series of specific actions to the other individual action. As a result, even if the movable means is operated for the purpose of creating a specific effect while a specific effect is being displayed by the display control means, the movable means can be operated without impairing the effect of the effect.

More specifically, in this embodiment, in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, which notifies the result of the jackpot lottery executed by the lottery process triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315 as the ball entry starting part, the display effect is set by the special symbol game effect setting process as the display control process, and the display effect is executed on the symbol display unit 341 by processing when a display change pattern command is received by the display control device 6 as the display control process. Also, in this embodiment, the movable state of the movable rotating symbol element 37 as the movable body during the execution of the display effect is determined from multiple movable states A to D by the symbol action effect setting process as the movable body control process, and the movable rotating symbol element 37 as the movable body during the execution of the display effect is moved based on one movable state determined from the multiple movable states A to D by the movable rotating symbol control process as the movable body control process.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, for operations in drive patterns A-C, which are common continuous operations across multiple movable states A-D and for which the timing at which the end determination condition is met may be uncertain, the movable rotating part member 37 as a movable body is moved based on the information in a single drive data 1 (part operation scenario data). After operations in drive patterns A-C are completed, the movable rotating part member 37 as a movable body is moved in one of drive patterns D-G as continuous operations based on the information in individual drive data 2-5 corresponding to each movable state A-D. In this way, for operations in drive patterns A-C, which are common continuous operations across multiple movable states A-D, the movable rotating part member 37 is moved based on the information in a single drive data 1. This not only reduces the amount of drive data used for one movable state A-D, thereby reducing the memory burden, but also reduces the control burden, such as reading and temporarily storing drive data, when operating the movable rotating part member 37.

In this embodiment, when the operations of drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotating device member 37 in multiple movable states A to D and for which the timing of the establishment of the end determination condition may be uncertain, are executed based on information from a single drive data 1 (device operation scenario data), a determination is made as to whether the end determination condition for the operations of drive patterns A to C, which are common operations, is established, i.e., whether the player has operated the operation button 20, at the time when the movable rotating device member 37 returns from the drive-side position, Intermediate Operation Position 1 or Intermediate Operation Position 2, to the return-side position, Standby Position or Intermediate Operation Position 1. If the end determination condition for the operations of drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotating device member 37 in multiple movable states A to D, is not established, the operations of drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotating device member 37 in multiple movable states A to D, continue. On the other hand, if the condition for determining the end of operation in drive patterns A to C, which are the common operation of movable rotating accessory member 37 in multiple moving modes A to D, is met (when the player operates operation button 20), the common operation in drive patterns A to C, which is the common operation of movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the information in drive data 1 (accessory operation scenario data), ends even if the operation is in progress. Then, based on the information in individual drive data 2 to 5 corresponding to each moving mode A to D, which is determined in accordance with the notification content, movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved as a movable body in drive patterns D to G, which are individual operations as continuous operations.

In this embodiment, when the operations of drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotating device element 37 in multiple movable states A to D, are executed based on information from a single drive data 1 (device operation scenario data), a determination is made as to whether the end determination condition for the common operations of drive patterns A to C is met (whether the player has operated the operation button 20) at the time the movable rotating device element 37 returns from the drive side position to the return side position. In other words, in the operation of the movable rotating device element 37 in drive patterns A to C, which are common operations, a determination is made as to whether the player has operated the operation button 20, which indicates whether the end determination condition is met, each time the movable rotating device element 37 is positioned in the return side position. Furthermore, in this embodiment, if it is determined that the end determination condition is met in the operation of the movable rotating device member 37 in the common operation drive patterns A to C (if it is determined that the player has operated the operation button 20), the movement of the movable rotating device member 37 located in the return position is stopped, and the operation in the common operation drive patterns A to C is terminated. As a result, if the end determination condition for the operation in the common operation drive patterns A to C is met during the execution of the operation of the movable rotating device member 37 in the common operation drive patterns A to C, the movement of the movable rotating device member 37 can be stopped when the movable rotating device member 37 is positioned in the return position after the end determination condition is met, and the operation in the common operation drive patterns A to C can be terminated. As a result, if it is determined that the end determination condition for the common operation in the drive patterns A to C is met, the common operation in the drive patterns A to C of the movable rotating device member 37 can be immediately terminated. Therefore, it is possible to immediately transition to the next operation upon the establishment of the end determination condition for consecutive operations that are common to multiple movable modes A to D and whose timing of the establishment of the end determination condition may be uncertain. As a result, once the establishment of the termination determination conditions for multiple movable modes A to D is determined, the operation of the movable rotating device member 37 can be terminated and the movable body can smoothly transition to the next operation without causing the player any discomfort. Therefore, when another individual operation is subsequently performed after the common operation of the movable rotating device member 37 has ended, a smooth transition from the common operation to the other individual operation is possible, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when transitioning from the common operation to the other individual operation. This makes it possible to operate the movable rotating device member 37 without impairing the effect of the operation, even when the movable rotating device member 37 is operated for the purpose of producing a display effect during the execution of a display effect in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game.

This embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 230 to 289, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above. However, important points in this embodiment may be explained again even if they have already been explained in the first embodiment described above.

[Configuration of gaming machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to Figures 230 to 234. Here, Figures 230 to 232 are front views showing an example of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, Figure 233 is a front view showing an example of the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 provided on the gaming board 31, and Figure 234 is a side view showing the periphery of the movable rotating accessory member 37 with a portion cut away.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
As shown in Figures 1 to 3, the front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection/determination section 21, a launch handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an illumination section 27, etc.

The operation button 20 is located in front of the upper tray 23. The operation button 20 is equipped with an operation switch 20a (see Figure 7) that switches the input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, described below, depending on whether the button is pressed. This allows the audio lamp control device 5 to determine the operation state (operated or not) of the operation button 20, as described below (see Figures 256 and 257). This operation button 20 is operated to execute an operation button effect (see Figure 277) that is executed in response to a player's operation of the operation button 20 during a predetermined operation acceptance period in a special game effect executed in a special game that clearly shows the player the results of the jackpot lottery.

The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle that the player operates to launch a gaming ball. In the gaming machine 10, when the player rotates the launch handle 22 as a predetermined gaming operation, a gaming ball is launched from the gaming ball launch mechanism 32 (described below) with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation, thereby performing a basic game. For example, depending on the predetermined gaming operation performed by the player on the launch handle 22, a so-called left hit can be performed, in which the gaming ball is launched into the left area of the gaming board 31, or a so-called right hit can be performed, in which the gaming ball is launched into the right area of the gaming board 31. In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed hits are encouraged to cause the game ball to enter the first winning slot 314, which serves as the starting ball entry section, and execute the first special symbol game; in the probability variable game state and time-limited game state, right-handed hits are encouraged to cause the game ball to enter the through gate 317R and the second winning slot 315, which serves as the starting ball entry section, and execute the second special symbol game; and in the jackpot game state, right-handed hits are encouraged to cause the game ball to enter the variable winning slot 316. Therefore, the player can prevent disadvantages by performing the prescribed game operations encouraged according to the game state on the launch handle 22.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in Figures 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game ball launching mechanism 32, a game board 31, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 comprises a launching rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launching rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and guides game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 23 one by one onto the launching rail 321 by performing a continuous reciprocating motion of a movable body between a return side position and a drive side position. The solenoid 323 is a driving means that causes a launching hammer, which is a movable body, to perform a continuous reciprocating motion between a return side position and a drive side position, thereby launching game balls supplied onto the launching rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, when a player performs a predetermined gaming operation on the launch handle 22, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the player's operation of the launch handle 22, and one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area every 0.6 seconds. Note that the gaming ball launching mechanism 32 may also be a mechanism that launches gaming balls using other driving means, such as a motor, instead of the solenoid 323.

As shown in Figure 230, the game board 31 is provided with an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314 and a second winning opening 315 as starting winning means, a variable winning opening 316, through gates 317L and 317R, an outlet 318, a variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, and a movable rotating accessory member 37 as a moving means.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending launched game balls toward the game area on the surface of the game board 31. After being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that do not enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the outlet 318. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316, a preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when a ball enters the general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when a ball enters the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is 3, and the number of prize balls when a ball enters the variable winning opening 316 is 10.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters through gates 317L and 317R, no prize balls are paid out. However, the entry of a game ball into through gates 317L and 317R triggers the execution of a regular winning lottery, which is a winning/losing lottery process. If the result of the regular winning lottery is a regular winning, a regular winning game is played. In this regular winning game, the movable electric device 315b is activated to open the second winning opening 315, which is the starting ball entry section. In other words, the execution of the movement control process for electric device 315b determines one of multiple movement modes (short opening of 0.1 seconds, long opening of 6 seconds). In the regular winning game, depending on the movement mode, electric device 315b is continuously moved back and forth between a standby position (return side position) that closes second winning opening 315 and an operating position (drive side position) that opens second winning opening 315. In this way, the second winning slot 315 is opened during a normal winning game, allowing the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315.

In this embodiment, two movement modes are set: one in which the second winning opening 315 is open for 0.1 seconds, making it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second winning opening 315; and one in which the second winning opening 315 is open for 6 seconds, making it easy for a game ball to enter the second winning opening 315 (see Figures 240 (C) and 240 (D)). Therefore, in the movement control process for the electric role device 315b, one movement mode is determined from the two movement modes that differ in the ease with which a game ball can enter the second winning opening 315, and the timing at which the end determination condition is met may be uncertain, and continuous operation of the electric role device 315b is executed in the determined one movement mode.

Furthermore, when a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, which serve as the starting winning slots, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41 of the main control device 4), which executes the winning/losing lottery means, executes processing related to the jackpot lottery as a winning/losing lottery process. The result of the jackpot lottery conducted by the main control unit 331 is notified by a special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) in which the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed after the special symbol game ends. In this jackpot game, a predetermined number of rounds (e.g., 5 or 16 rounds) are repeatedly executed in the opening/closing execution mode. During each round, the movable opening/closing door 319 reciprocates between a standby position (return position) that closes the variable winning slot 316 and an operating position (drive position) that opens the variable winning slot 316. In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the movement control process for the opening/closing door 319 determines the number of rounds of play from multiple numbers of rounds (for example, 5 or 16) based on the results of a jackpot lottery, and the determined number of rounds of play is executed, resulting in continuous reciprocating movement of the opening/closing door 319. In this way, during a jackpot game, the variable winning opening 316 is repeatedly opened by the continuous movement of the opening/closing door 319, so a large number of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

As shown in Figures 230 to 234, the movable rotating accessory element 37, which is a movable body, can move up and down, rotate, and expand and contract by an accessory drive mechanism 37a (see Figure 235), details of which will be described later, and is operated to provide the player with predetermined information regarding the game during special symbol games. In this embodiment, the movable rotating accessory element 37 is operated in one of a plurality of movable positions to notify the player whether a predetermined effect (super reach effect or special reach effect) will be executed, or to notify the player whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot after suggesting a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot. Furthermore, in this embodiment, various notifications are issued to the player depending on the movable position of the movable rotating accessory element 37, as will be described later, and four movable positions are set corresponding to the content of the notification. Specifically, there are four movable modes: movable mode A (SP development notification) which notifies the player that a Super Reach effect will be executed; movable mode B (SPSP development notification) which notifies the player that a Special Reach effect will be executed; movable mode C (probability variable upgrade notification) which notifies the player that a probability variable jackpot has been reached; and movable mode D (no development notification, no probability variable upgrade notification) which notifies the player that a specified effect (Super Reach effect or Special Reach effect) will not be executed, or that the result of the jackpot lottery is not a probability variable jackpot (a normal jackpot) (see FIG. 266).

The movable rotating accessory element 37, which is a movable body, may be moved to provide the player with predetermined information about the game during a jackpot game. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery during a special symbol game is clearly indicated as a regular jackpot, the movable rotating accessory element 37 may be moved to perform a probability jackpot promotion effect during the jackpot game, announcing that the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability jackpot. Furthermore, when the right to play a special symbol game is reserved, the movable rotating accessory element 37 may be moved during a jackpot game to notify the player that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the reserved special symbol game played after the end of the jackpot game is a jackpot (a so-called reserved consecutive win announcement).

In addition, by moving the movable rotating accessory member 37 during special symbol play, it is possible to notify, depending on the state of movement, whether the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol play is a jackpot, or whether there is a high expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol play will be a jackpot.

The movable rotating device member 37 has a shape resembling a flower when viewed from the front in the contracted state, and is positioned in front of the symbol display unit 341. The installation location of the movable rotating device member 37 is not limited to the front of the symbol display unit 341, and can be changed as long as the movable rotating device member 37 is movable and visible to the player. The movable rotating device member 37 comprises multiple plate-shaped members 370, a rotation axis 372, and multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373.

The multiple plate-shaped members 370 have the same or approximately the same shape resembling flower petals, and are formed entirely from resin, for example. Of course, at least one of the multiple plate-shaped members 370 may have a different shape. Furthermore, the multiple plate-shaped members 370 do not necessarily have to be shaped like flower petals.

The rotation shaft 372 is the part to which rotational drive force is input from the accessory drive mechanism 37a (see Figure 235), which will be described later, and extends in the front-to-rear direction of the game board 31 toward the symbol display unit 341. The rotation shaft 372 is put into a rotating state when rotational force is input from the accessory drive mechanism 37a under the control of the MPU 51, and is put into a non-rotating state when the input of rotational force from the accessory drive mechanism 37a is stopped under the control of the MPU 51.

The rotational speed of the rotating shaft 372 (multiple plate-like members 370) in the rotating state, i.e., the rotational speed of the movable rotating accessory member 37, is not particularly limited and may be constant or variable, and the rotational speed and direction may also be variable.

Multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 are fixed radially to the rotation shaft 372 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 can rotate around the rotation shaft 372 as the rotation shaft 372 rotates. The rotation shaft 372 is rotatably supported by a support ring 375 fixed to the lift shaft 374, and its movement in the front-to-back direction is restricted by a restriction ring 376. Here, the lift shaft 374 moves the rotation shaft 372 up and down, and the rotation shaft 372 is moved up and down by a driving force input from the role drive mechanism 37a (see Figure 235), described below. As a result, the entire movable rotating role member 37 can move up and down as the rotation shaft 372 moves up and down.

Each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 supports one plate-like member 370 and is capable of sliding the supported plate-like member 370 along the radial direction of the rotation shaft 372. Each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 converts rotational force input from, for example, the accessory drive mechanism 37a (see Figure 235) described below into linear force, thereby sliding the supported plate-like member 370 along the radial direction of the rotation shaft 372. Each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 can be a known mechanism that converts rotational force into linear force. Specifically, each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 can be an actuator including one or more components such as a rack, screw shaft, ball screw, endless belt, wire, chain, various gears such as spur gears and bevel gears, and rollers. Each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 may also utilize magnetic or electromagnetic force.

In this way, in the movable rotating role member 37, the rotation axis 372 is rotatably supported by the lifting shaft 374, and the plate-like members 370, 371 are slidably supported by multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 arranged radially from the rotation axis 372. Therefore, the first rotating role member 37 can move up and down on the front side of the pattern display unit 341, can rotate around the rotation axis 372, and can expand and contract around the rotation axis 372.

Here, Figure 235 is a block diagram showing an example of the main parts of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10.

As shown in Figure 235, the movable rotating prop member 37 is controlled for up and down movement, rotation, and expansion/contraction via a prop drive mechanism 37a controlled by the MPU 51. The prop drive mechanism 37a is connected to the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 via the input/output I/F 52. This prop drive mechanism 37a has, for example, multiple motors, a return detection unit for detecting when the movable rotating prop member 37 has returned to the standby position, and a motor driver.

The multiple motors are, for example, stepping motors, DC motors, etc., and the return detection unit is, for example, an optical sensor, a contact sensor, etc. Each motor is connected to the rotation shaft 372, multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373, and lift shaft 374 of the movable rotating device member 37 via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear, and driving force is input to the rotation shaft 372, multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373, and lift shaft 374. By inputting driving force from the lift shaft 374, the movable rotating device member 37 can be moved up and down in front of the pattern display unit 341 between a standby position (position shown by phantom lines in Figure 231), which is a predetermined return side position shown in Figure 230 where the movable rotating device member 37 is exposed from the opening 31A, and an operating position (drive side position shown by solid lines in Figure 231), which is a position where the movable rotating device member 37 is moved downward to the furthest position and where the entire movable rotating device member 37 is exposed. As shown in FIG. 233 , the movable rotating device member 37 can rotate counterclockwise on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 by inputting a rotational force to the rotation shaft 372. The rotation position of the movable rotating device member 37 can be anywhere between the standby position and the operating position, but in this embodiment, the movable rotating device member 37 rotates in the operating position. Furthermore, the movable rotating device member 37 can expand and contract by inputting a driving force to the expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373, causing each plate-shaped member 370 to slide in the radial direction of the rotation shaft 372 on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. The movable rotating device member 37 can rotate on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 in either a contracted state (see FIG. 233(A)) or an expanded state (see FIG. 233(B)).

In addition, the motor driver of the prop drive mechanism 37a is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5. The motor driver controls each motor according to control instructions from the audio lamp control device 5. The motor driver is also capable of acquiring the detection results of the return detection unit and transmitting them to the audio lamp control device 5. Note that the motor driver may be omitted, with each motor and return detection unit directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5 and controlled by the audio lamp control device 5.

There are no particular limitations on the configuration for moving the movable rotating accessory member 37 up and down, rotating, and expanding and contracting. For example, the driving force for rotating and expanding and contracting the movable rotating accessory member 37 is not limited to that provided by a motor, but may also be provided by other driving sources such as a solenoid.

Here, referring to Figure 236, we will explain the memory areas used by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform the jackpot lottery and regular symbol winning lottery. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter memory area 412a, special symbol reserve storage area 412b, and regular symbol reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412 to execute processing related to the jackpot lottery, which is a win/lose lottery process, and set the variable display time for the special symbol, and execute processing related to the regular symbol winning lottery, which is a win/lose lottery process, and set the variable display time for the regular symbol.

The lottery counter memory area 412a stores the following lottery counters used to execute the jackpot lottery process, which is a win/lose lottery process: a jackpot random number counter C1 used in the jackpot lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot game will be played; a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot; and a reach random number counter C3 used to determine the type of loss when the jackpot lottery result is a loss.

In addition, the lottery counter memory area 412a stores, as lottery counters, a jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a special symbol variation type counter CS1 used to determine the variation display time of the special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36.

Furthermore, the lottery counter memory area 412a stores the following lottery counters used to execute the process related to the regular winning lottery, which is the winning/losing lottery process: a regular winning random number counter C4 used in the regular winning lottery to determine whether or not the electric device 315b of the second winning slot 315 will be in the electric opening state; and a regular winning type random number counter C5 used to assign the regular winning type (short opening or long opening) when the result of the regular winning lottery is a regular winning.

In addition, the lottery counter memory area 412a stores the following lottery counters: a normal win random number initial value counter CIN2, which is used to set the initial value of the normal win random number counter C4, and a normal symbol variation type counter CS2, which is used to determine the variable display time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36.

The MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value of each lottery counter C1-C5, CIN1, CIN2, CS1, and CS2 at short intervals, and each counter is used as a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated value is recorded in each lottery counter C1-C5, CIN1, CIN2, CS1, and CS1, and is referenced by the MPU 41 when executing processes related to the jackpot lottery, which is the win/lose lottery process, setting the variable display time for special symbols and setting the jackpot type and loss type, and when executing processes related to the jackpot lottery, which is the win/lose lottery process, setting the variable display time for normal symbols and setting the normal symbol win type.

The special symbol reserve storage area 412b includes a first special symbol reserve storage area REA, a second special symbol reserve storage area REB, and a special symbol execution area AE. The first special symbol reserve storage area REA includes a first reserve area REA1, a second reserve area REA2, a third reserve area REA3, a fourth reserve area REA4, and a first special symbol reserve number storage area NAA. The second special symbol reserve storage area REB includes a first reserve area REB1, a second reserve area REB2, a third reserve area REB3, a fourth reserve area REB4, and a second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB.

When a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314, which serves as the starting ball entry section, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and special symbol variation type counter CS1 stored in RAM 412 is acquired as special symbol win/loss information used in the jackpot lottery and stored in one of the first reserve areas REA1 to REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA. When a gaming ball enters the second winning slot 315, which serves as the starting ball entry section, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and special symbol variation type counter CS1 stored in RAM 412 is acquired as special symbol win/loss information used in the jackpot lottery and stored in one of the first reserve areas REB1 to REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB. In addition, a lottery counter memory area 412a (such as a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, and a special chart change type counter CS1) may be provided separately for each of the first special chart reserve storage area REA and the second special chart reserve storage area REB.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, the special symbol change type counter CS1 is stored in one of the first reserve area REA1 to fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA, and the first reserve area REB1 to fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB.

Therefore, in addition to the results of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, which is executed based on the special symbol win/loss information stored in the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA and the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB, it is possible to determine in advance the display time (special symbol change pattern) for the special symbol (decorative symbol in the symbol display unit 341) on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 during the special symbol game.

Specifically, when a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314, which serves as the starting ball entry point, the special symbol win/loss information is stored in the first special symbol reserve storage area REA in the order of priority: first reserve area REA1, second reserve area REA2, third reserve area REA3, and fourth reserve area REA4, whichever is available. The first special symbol reserve number storage area NAA stores the number of first reserve areas REA1 to REA4 in which special symbol win/loss information is stored as the first special symbol reserve number N.

In addition, when a gaming ball enters the second winning slot 315, which serves as the starting ball entry point, the special symbol win/loss information is stored in the available area of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB in the order of priority: first reserve area REB1, second reserve area REB2, third reserve area REB3, and fourth reserve area REB4. The second special symbol reserve number storage area NAB stores the number of first reserve area REB1 to fourth reserve area REB4 in which special symbol win/loss information is stored as the second special symbol reserve number M.

In other words, the gaming machine 10 can store up to four pieces of special symbol win/loss information as winning history for the first winning slot 314 and second winning slot 315, which act as starting winning areas, using a total of eight memory areas corresponding to the maximum number of reserves in the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA and the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB.

In another embodiment, a holding area with a maximum holding capacity of eight can be provided in common for the first winning slot 314 and the second winning slot 315 as the starting entry points. In this case, it is possible to hold a total of up to eight pieces of special winning/losing information as winning history. The special winning/losing information is stored by the MPU 41 by executing processing in accordance with the control program.

The special symbol execution area AE is a memory area used to move the special symbol win/loss information stored in the first reserve area REA1 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA or the first reserve area REB1 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB when the variable display of the special symbol begins in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36. Specifically, the special symbol win/loss information in the first reserve area REB1 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB is moved to the special symbol execution area AE with priority, and when there is no special symbol win/loss information in the first reserve area REB1 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB and the second special symbol reserve number M stored in the second special symbol reserve number memory area NAB is 0, the special symbol win/loss information in the first reserve area REA1 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA is moved to the special symbol execution area AE. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the second special symbol game is executed in priority over the first special symbol game, and in the high-frequency support mode of the probability variation game state and time-saving game state, the second special symbol game is mainly executed by executing a right hit, which launches the game ball into the right area of the game board 31.

In addition, in another embodiment, if the difference between the first special symbol reservation number N stored in the first special symbol reservation number memory area NAA of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA and the second special symbol reservation number M stored in the second special symbol reservation number memory area NAB of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB is 2 or more, the value of the reservation area with the larger number is given priority and moved to the special symbol execution area AE.In another embodiment, the special symbol win/loss information of the first reservation area REA1 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA and the first reservation area REB1 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB is moved alternately to the special symbol execution area AE.

At the start of a single special symbol game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery and the like based on the numerical information stored as special symbol win/loss information in the special symbol execution area AE. At this time, if the first reserved area REA1 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA is moved to the special symbol execution area AE, the special symbol win/loss information stored in the second reserved area REA2 shifts to the first reserved area REA1, the special symbol win/loss information stored in the third reserved area REA3 shifts to the second reserved area REA2, and the special symbol win/loss information stored in the fourth reserved area REA4 shifts to the third reserved area REA3.

Similarly, when the first reserved area REB1 of the second special chart reserved storage area REB is moved to the special chart execution area AE, the special chart win/loss information stored in the second reserved area REB2 shifts to the first reserved area REB1, the special chart win/loss information stored in the third reserved area REB3 shifts to the second reserved area REB2, and the special chart win/loss information stored in the fourth reserved area REB4 shifts to the third reserved area REB3.

In step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process shown in Figure 17, the jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated by incrementing it by one within the range of 0 to 637, for example, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated in the same way as the jackpot random number counter C1. The first to fourth reserve areas REA1 to REA4 and REB1 to REB4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA1 or the second special symbol reserve storage area REA2 store the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the time the gaming ball enters the first prize slot 314 or the second prize slot 315, which serve as the starting ball entry point.

The random number value that results in a jackpot is set to two types according to the win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area in ROM 411, corresponding to the low probability mode, which is the normal game mode or time-limited game mode, and the high probability mode, which is the special game mode. Here, Figure 237(A) shows an example of a low probability mode win/loss table corresponding to the low probability mode, and Figure 237(B) shows an example of a high probability mode win/loss table corresponding to the high probability mode.

In the examples shown in Figures 237(A) and 237(B), multiple win/loss tables are provided as low probability mode win/loss tables and high probability mode win/loss tables, each with a different probability of the lottery result in a jackpot (jackpot probability) depending on the game setting value. The low probability mode win/loss table and high probability mode win/loss table each include six win/loss tables corresponding to the six game setting values 1 to 6. The jackpot probability of the lottery result in a jackpot increases in the order of game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1, providing an advantage to the player.

For game setting value 1, of the 65,536 random number values between 0 and 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 206 (0-205) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 821 (0-820) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, for game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/318.1 (206/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/79.9 (820/65,536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

For game setting value 2, of the 65,536 random number values between 0 and 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 212 (0-211) for the low probability mode win/lose table and 845 (0-844) for the high probability mode win/lose table. In other words, for game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/309.1 (212/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/77.6 (845/65,536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

For game setting value 3, of the 65,536 random number values between 0 and 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 218 (0-217) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 869 (0-868) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, for game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/300.6 (218/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/75.4 (869/65,536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

At game setting value 4, of the 65,536 random number values between 0 and 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 224 (0-223) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 893 (0-892) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/292.6 (224/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/73.4 (893/65,536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

At game setting value 5, of the 65,536 random number values between 0 and 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 230 (0-229) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 917 (0-916) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/284.9 (230/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/71.5 (917/65,536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

At game setting value 6, of the 65,536 random number values between 0 and 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 236 (0-235) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 941 (0-940) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/277.7 (236/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/69.6 (941/65,536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a random number other than the ones that result in a jackpot win, the result of the jackpot lottery will be a loss.

Here, the low probability mode win/lose table and the high probability mode win/lose table share the same random numbers that result in a jackpot in a jackpot lottery for the same game setting value, but it is also possible that the random numbers that result in a jackpot are not the same. Furthermore, the random numbers that result in a jackpot may not be consecutive values, but may be partially or entirely discrete values.

Furthermore, six low-probability mode win/loss tables and six high-probability mode win/loss tables are provided, corresponding to the six game setting values, but there only needs to be one win/loss table for each mode. In other words, the game setting values are not limited to six levels. It is also possible to provide multiple low-probability mode win/loss tables corresponding to multiple game setting value levels, while providing one high-probability mode win/loss table. In other words, it is also possible to provide multiple game setting value levels for the low probability mode, and not provide multiple game setting value levels for the high probability mode, with a uniform jackpot probability. Of course, it is also possible to provide a uniform jackpot probability in the low probability mode, and multiple game setting value levels for the high probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by one within the range of 0 to 19, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the special symbol reserve storage area 412b when a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two jackpot types, special jackpot and normal jackpot, is set by the allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area in ROM 411.

Here, Figure 237(C) is a diagram showing an example of an allocation table. In the example shown in Figure 237(C), when the type of special symbol game is a first special symbol game triggered by winning the first winning slot 314 as the starting ball entry, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R special symbol jackpot is 10 numbers from 0 to 9, the number of random numbers that result in a 16R special symbol jackpot is 5 numbers from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that result in a 5R regular jackpot is 5 numbers from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of special symbol game is a second special symbol game triggered by winning the second winning slot 315 as the starting ball entry, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R special symbol jackpot is 5 numbers from 0 to 4, the number of random numbers that result in a 16R special symbol jackpot is 10 numbers from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that result in a 5R regular jackpot is 5 numbers from 15 to 19.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a guaranteed jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is set to the same at 75%, but the probability of a 16R guaranteed jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than in the first special symbol game. That is, in the guaranteed jackpot game state (high probability mode and high-frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric device 315b) and the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode), the expected number of game balls to be acquired if the lottery results in a jackpot is set higher than in the normal game state (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode with a low probability of opening the electric device 315b).

In either the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variable jackpot, the game will transition to a probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the jackpot game ends. The gaming machine 10 does not have an upper limit on the number of special symbol games that can be executed in the probability variable game state, and is configured as a so-called loop probability variable machine.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the game will transition to a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the jackpot game ends. In the gaming machine 10, an upper limit (100 times in this embodiment) is set for the number of special symbol games (number of time-saving games) that can be played in the time-saving game state, and if the result of the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot within this upper limit of special symbol games, the game will transition to a normal game state, which is a low frequency support mode, after the upper limit of special symbol games has been played. Note that the number of special symbol games in the time-saving game state is not limited to 100 and may be any other number.

The transition from the probability variable game state to the normal game state is not limited to when the maximum number of special symbol games is played, but may also be performed when, for example, a state transition lottery (fall-down lottery) is won. In this case, the probability variable game state will not transition (fall) to the normal game state until a predetermined number of special symbol games have been played, and it is possible to guarantee that the minimum number of special symbol games played in the probability variable game state will be the predetermined number. This prevents the number of special symbol games played in the probability variable game state from decreasing significantly.

In addition, in this embodiment, individual allocation tables are set for the first winning slot 314, which serves as the starting ball entry section that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game upon winning, and the second winning slot 315, which serves as the starting ball entry section that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game upon winning. The allocation probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, but it is also possible for the allocation probability of the jackpot type to be the same for the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop probability variable machine, and it is also possible for it to be configured as an ST machine, including a V-ST machine, or a type 1/2 mixed machine.

Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the special chart execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R variable jackpot," a "16R variable jackpot," a "5R normal jackpot," or a "miss."

If the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened in a predetermined manner five times during the jackpot game, based on the movable body configuration of the opening/closing door 319, which is the movable body set for the 5R jackpot. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened in a predetermined manner five times during the jackpot game, based on the movable body configuration of the opening/closing door 319, which is the movable body set for the 16R jackpot. In other words, during the jackpot game, information corresponding to the movable body configuration is set according to the number of rounds of play in the jackpot game, which is determined based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process. Based on this information, the movable opening/closing door 319, which is the movable body, is continuously reciprocated between a standby position, which is the return side position where the variable winning opening 316 is closed, and an operating position, which is the drive side position where the variable winning opening 316 is opened, depending on the number of rounds of play in the jackpot game.

Furthermore, as described below, each round of play ends when the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 316 has elapsed, or when the player performs an appropriate, predetermined game operation on the launch handle 22, resulting in the maximum number of winning balls entering the opening before the maximum opening time has elapsed. Therefore, the timing at which the end determination condition for each round of play is met may be uncertain. Because the timing at which the end determination condition is met may be uncertain, the period during which the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, is moved to the operating position (drive side position) during each round of play may be uncertain. In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 319 operates continuously, the period during which the opening/closing door 319 is moved to the operating position (drive side position) includes at least a first period (e.g., when the maximum number of winning balls enter the opening before the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 316 has elapsed) and a second period longer than the first period (e.g., when the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 316 has elapsed).

Furthermore, because the timing at which the termination determination condition is met may be uncertain, the timing at which the opening and closing execution mode (jackpot game) ends may also be uncertain, and as a result, the execution period of the opening and closing execution mode (jackpot game) may also be uncertain. In other words, the execution period of the opening and closing execution mode (jackpot game) includes, depending on the type of jackpot game, at least a first period corresponding to the execution period of the opening and closing execution mode (jackpot game) for 5R special jackpot game and 5R normal jackpot game, and a second period longer than the first period corresponding to the execution period of the opening and closing execution mode (jackpot game) for 16R special jackpot game.

In this embodiment, as described below, in one round of play during a jackpot game, the movable opening/closing door 319 moves back and forth once between a standby position (return side position) that closes the variable winning opening 316 and an operating position (drive side position) that opens the variable winning opening 316. However, in at least one of the multiple rounds of play executed during one jackpot game, the movable opening/closing door 319 moves back and forth multiple times between the standby position (return side position) that closes the variable winning opening 316 and the operating position (drive side position) that opens the variable winning opening 316. By adopting a movable mode of continuous operation in which the timing at which the end determination condition is met may be uncertain, it is also possible to set multiple opening/closing modes of the variable winning opening 316 for a jackpot game (movable modes of the movable opening/closing door 319).

In addition, in this embodiment, as described below, the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening is uniform for each round of play in a jackpot game, but by setting multiple maximum opening times for the variable winning opening for each round of play, it is also possible to set multiple opening and closing modes of the variable winning opening 316 for a jackpot game (movable modes of the opening and closing door 319, which is a movable body).

Furthermore, in the case of a 5R or 16R probability variable jackpot, after the jackpot game ends in which the movable opening/closing door 319 is positioned in the standby position, which is the return position, the first control transitions to a probability variable game state, which is a high probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is high and a high frequency support mode in which the movable electric device 315b is highly likely to open. In this embodiment, the probability variable game state continues until the result of the jackpot lottery executed by the lottery process executed by the MPU 41 is determined to be a "5R probability variable jackpot," "16R probability variable jackpot," or "5R normal jackpot."

On the other hand, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends with the movable opening/closing door 319 positioned in the standby position, which is the return position, the second control switches to a time-saving game state, which is a low-probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is low and a high-frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the movable electric device 315b is high. In this embodiment, the time-saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) continues until the player is notified of the results of the jackpot lottery process a predetermined number of times, such as 100 times, or ends when the player is notified of the results of the jackpot lottery process before the specified number of times has elapsed.

Another possible embodiment is to perform a lottery process to determine whether or not to transition from the special game mode to the time-limited game mode or the regular game mode during special game play. Note that if the result of the jackpot lottery performed through the lottery process is a miss, the game mode will not transition from the special game mode to the jackpot game mode or the time-limited game mode. In this embodiment, an example will be given in which the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpots: a 5R special game mode jackpot, a 16R special game mode jackpot, and a 5R regular game mode. However, this is not limiting, and other jackpot types, such as a 2-round special game mode jackpot, a 2-round regular game mode, or a 16R regular game mode, are also possible.

Furthermore, in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in Figure 17 described above, the reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated by sequentially incrementing it by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and is reset to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. The value of the reach random number counter C3 at the time the gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or second winning slot 315, which is the starting ball entry area, is stored in the first to fourth holding areas REA1 to REA4, REB1 to REB4 of the first special symbol holding storage area REA1 or the second special symbol holding storage area REA2.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stopping result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss. Specifically, the miss type table stored in the miss type table storage area in ROM 411 sets the values of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to three types of misses: a front-to-back miss reach, in which the final stopping symbol stops just one symbol before or after the reach symbol after a reach has occurred; a non-front-to-back miss reach, in which the final stopping symbol stops anywhere other than before or after the reach symbol after a reach has occurred; and a complete miss, in which no reach occurs.

Here, Figure 237(D) is a diagram showing an example of a miss type table. In the example shown in Figure 237(D), the random number value that results in a reach with a miss before or after is 0 to 8, the random number value that results in a reach other than a miss before or after is 9 to 38, and the random number value that results in a complete miss is 39 to 238. Note that in special symbol games that result in a 5R special symbol jackpot, a 16R special symbol jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot, i.e., in special symbol games that transition to a jackpot game state, the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Here, "reach" refers to a variable state in which a decorative symbol combination indicating a jackpot is likely to occur between the time when the variable symbol display on the symbol display unit 341 begins and the time when the symbol is statically displayed. In one example, the same symbol is statically displayed at two of the three decorative symbol stop positions on the pay line on the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining stop position changes. Furthermore, during the variable reach state on the symbol display unit 341, a story presentation process is executed in which a video of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, and a player-participation operation presentation process is executed in which the player's operation of the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation. Note that during these presentation processes, the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged form.

The special symbol variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one in sequence, for example, within the range of 0 to 199, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Specifically, the special symbol variation type counter CS1 determines the special symbol variation pattern type (special symbol variation display time) indicating the variation display time of the special symbol (decorative symbol in symbol display unit 341) in the first special symbol display unit 362 or second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery. The special symbol variation pattern type (special symbol variation display time) is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 as a special symbol variation pattern command, along with the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. The sound and lamp control device 5 executes display control processing and movement control processing based on the special symbol variation pattern command, thereby controlling the display effects on the variable display unit 34 (pattern display unit 341) and the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, during the special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) and the jackpot game. Specifically, when the special symbol game starts, the display control processing is executed according to the result of the jackpot lottery, thereby determining the display effects to be executed in the special symbol game, and the determined display effects are executed on the pattern display unit 341 during the special symbol game. Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the display control processing is executed when the jackpot starts, thereby determining the display effects to be executed in the jackpot game, and the determined display effects are executed on the pattern display unit 341 during the jackpot game. Also, during the display effects during the jackpot game, sound effects are executed on the speaker 26 and lamp effects are executed on the illumination unit 27. Furthermore, by executing a movement control process according to the result of the jackpot lottery when a special symbol game is started, the continuous movement of the movable rotating symbol member 37 to be executed in the special symbol game can be determined from multiple movement modes, and if the continuous movement of the movable rotating symbol member 37 is determined, the continuous movement of the movable rotating symbol member 37 is executed in the special symbol game. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, by executing a movement control process when the jackpot starts, the display effect to be executed in the jackpot game can be determined, and if the continuous movement of the movable rotating symbol member 37 is determined, the continuous movement of the movable rotating symbol member 37 is executed in the jackpot game.

The special symbol variation type counter CS1 is updated at least once in step S1402 each time the MPU 41 executes the main processing of FIG. 241 (described later), and is also repeatedly updated in step S1414 during the remaining time within the main processing. The first to fourth reserve areas REA1 to REA4, REB1 to REB4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA1 or the second special symbol reserve storage area REA2 store the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1 at the time the game ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, which are the starting ball entry areas.

The MPU 41 then determines the special symbol variation pattern, which indicates the variable display time of the special symbol, based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and a variation table (see Figures 238(A) to 238(C)) that is preset according to the result of the jackpot lottery performed by the lottery process. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the special symbol variation pattern type by referring to the normal jackpot variation table (see Figure 238(A)), the special jackpot variation table (see Figure 238(B)), or the miss variation table (see Figure 238(C)) that are pre-stored in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these variation tables may be provided separately for the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Furthermore, separate special jackpot variation tables may be provided for the 5R special jackpot and the 16R special jackpot.

238(A), 238(B), and 238(C) are diagrams showing examples of variation tables. In the normal jackpot variation table shown in FIG. 238(A), the special jackpot variation table shown in FIG. 238(B), and the loss variation table shown in FIG. 238(C), special jackpot variation patterns are pre-associated with the value of the special jackpot variation type counter CS1. The MPU 41 then refers to the normal jackpot variation table shown in FIG. 238(A) when the result of the jackpot lottery by the lottery process is a "5R normal jackpot," the special jackpot variation table shown in FIG. 238(B) when the result of the lottery process is a "5R special jackpot" or a "16R special jackpot," and the loss variation table shown in FIG. 238(C) when the result of the lottery process is a "loss," and identifies the type of special jackpot variation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in Figures 238(A) and 238(B), in the normal jackpot variation table and the special jackpot variation table, one of the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected depending on the value of the special chart variation type counter CS1.

Here, if the normal jackpot fluctuation table or the special jackpot fluctuation table is referenced and the special symbol fluctuation pattern "01" is selected, the display control process by the sub-control unit 332 determines the normal reach effect pattern, with a fluctuation display time of 30 seconds, as the fluctuation type (effect pattern type), and the special game effect is executed according to the normal reach effect pattern on the symbol display unit 341, etc. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the special symbol game effect is a normal reach effect.

Furthermore, when the normal jackpot fluctuation table or the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table is referenced and the special symbol fluctuation pattern "01" is selected, the movement control processing by the sub-control unit 332 determines that the movement mode of the movable rotating accessory member 37 when an effect corresponding to a normal reach effect pattern is executed as a display effect on the pattern display unit 341 is either movement mode C (see FIG. 266(C)) as a continuous movement to notify that a probability variable jackpot has occurred or movement mode D (see FIG. 266(D)) as a continuous movement to notify that a normal jackpot has occurred, and while an effect corresponding to the normal reach effect pattern is being executed on the pattern display unit 341, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is operated in movement mode C (see FIG. 266(C)) or movement mode D (see FIG. 266(D)).

Furthermore, if the special chart variation pattern "02" is selected when the normal jackpot variation table or the special jackpot variation table is referenced, the display control process by the sub-control unit 332 will determine a super reach variation pattern with a variation display time of 60 seconds as the variation type (presentation pattern type) in the sound lamp control device 5, and the special game presentation will be executed in accordance with the super reach presentation pattern in the symbol display unit 341, etc. The super reach presentation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the special chart game presentation is a super reach presentation.

Furthermore, when the normal jackpot variation table or the special symbol variation table is referenced and special symbol variation pattern "02" is selected, the sub-control unit 332 performs movement control processing to determine the movement mode of the movable rotating accessory member 37 when a display corresponding to a super reach presentation pattern is executed as a display presentation on the pattern display unit 341. The movement mode is determined to be movable mode A (see FIG. 266(A)) as a continuous movement to notify that a super reach presentation will develop, movable mode C (see FIG. 266(C)) as a continuous movement to notify that a probable jackpot has occurred, or movable mode D (see FIG. 266(D)) as a continuous movement to notify that a normal jackpot has occurred, and while a presentation corresponding to the super reach presentation pattern is being executed on the pattern display unit 341, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is operated in movable mode A (see FIG. 266(A)), movable mode C (see FIG. 266(C)), or movable mode D (see FIG. 266(D)).

Furthermore, if the special chart variation pattern "03" is selected when the normal jackpot variation table or the special jackpot variation table is referenced, the display control process by the sub-control unit 332 determines the special reach variation pattern, which has the longest variation display time of 90 seconds, as the variation type (presentation pattern), and the special game presentation is executed in accordance with the special reach variation pattern on the symbol display unit 341, etc. The special reach variation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the special chart game presentation is a special reach variation.

In addition, when the normal jackpot fluctuation table or the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table is referenced and the special pattern fluctuation pattern "03" is selected, the sub-control unit 332 performs a movement control process to execute a display effect corresponding to the special reach effect pattern on the pattern display unit 341. The movement state of the movable rotating role member 37 when the display effect corresponding to the special reach effect pattern is executed is as follows: movement state A (see Figure 266 (A)) as a continuous action that notifies that the effect will develop into a super reach effect; and movement state B (see Figure 266 (A)) as a continuous action that notifies that the effect will develop into a special reach effect. The movable rotating accessory member 37 is determined to be movable mode A (see FIG. 266(A)), movable mode B (see FIG. 266(C)) as a continuous action announcing a probability variable jackpot, or movable mode C (see FIG. 266(C)) as a continuous action announcing a normal jackpot, and while the symbol display unit 341 is executing an effect corresponding to the super reach effect pattern, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is operated in movable mode A (see FIG. 266(A)), movable mode B (see FIG. 266(B)), movable mode C (see FIG. 266(C)), or movable mode D (see FIG. 266(D)).

As shown in Figure 238 (C), the miss variation table defines a correspondence between the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the special symbol variation pattern in accordance with the type of decorative symbol stop display at the time of a miss (reach for a front-to-back miss, reach other than a front-to-back miss, complete miss) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. More specifically, if the type of decorative symbol stop display at the time of a miss is reach for a front-to-back miss or reach other than a front-to-back miss, one of the special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the special symbol variation type counter CS1. Then, when the miss variation table is referenced and one of the special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected, just as when the normal jackpot variation table or the special jackpot variation table described above is referenced and one of the special symbol variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected, the sub-control unit 332 performs movable control processing to determine the variation type (presentation pattern) as a predetermined reach presentation pattern (normal reach presentation pattern, super reach presentation pattern, or special reach presentation pattern) according to the type of special symbol variation pattern "01" to "03," and the special game presentation is executed in accordance with the predetermined reach presentation pattern on the symbol display unit 341, etc.

Furthermore, when the miss variation table is referenced and the special symbol variation pattern "01" is selected, the sub-control unit 332 performs a movement control process to determine the movement mode of the movable rotating role element 37 when a display corresponding to a normal reach presentation pattern is executed as a display presentation on the pattern display unit 341. This determines movement mode D (see Figure 266 (D)) as a continuous operation that notifies that the presentation will not progress to a super reach presentation, and the movable rotating role element 37 operates in movement mode D (see Figure 266 (D)) while a presentation corresponding to a normal reach presentation pattern is being executed on the pattern display unit 341.

Furthermore, when the miss variation table is referenced and the special symbol variation pattern "02" is selected, the sub-control unit 332 performs a movement control process to determine the movement mode of the movable rotating role element 37 when a display corresponding to a super reach presentation pattern is executed as a display effect on the pattern display unit 341. The movement mode is determined to be movable mode A (see FIG. 266(A)) as a continuous movement to notify that the performance will develop into a super reach presentation, and movable mode D (see FIG. 266(D)) as a continuous movement to notify that the performance will not develop into a special reach presentation, and the movable rotating role element 37 is operated in movable mode A (see FIG. 266(A)) and movable mode D (see FIG. 266(D)) during the execution of a presentation corresponding to a normal reach presentation pattern on the pattern display unit 341.

Furthermore, when the miss variation table is referenced and the special symbol variation pattern "03" is selected, the sub-control unit 332 performs a movement control process to determine the movement mode of the movable rotating role element 37 when a display corresponding to a special reach presentation pattern is executed as a display presentation on the pattern display unit 341. The movement mode is determined to be movable mode A (see FIG. 266(A)) as a continuous movement that notifies that the presentation will progress to a super reach presentation, and movable mode B (see FIG. 266(B)) as a continuous movement that notifies that the presentation will progress to a special reach presentation, and the movable rotating role element 37 operates in movable mode A (see FIG. 266(A)) and movable mode B (see FIG. 266(B)) during the execution of a presentation corresponding to a normal reach presentation pattern on the pattern display unit 341.

On the other hand, if the stop display type at the time of a miss is a complete miss, either special symbol change pattern "04" or "05" is selected depending on the value of the special symbol change type counter CS1. If special symbol change pattern "04" is selected, the sub-control unit 332 performs display control processing to determine a no-reach display pattern (7-second non-reach display pattern) with a change display time of 7 seconds as the change type (display pattern type), and the special symbol game display is executed according to the 7-second non-reach display pattern on the symbol display unit 341, etc. If special symbol change pattern "05" is selected, the sub-control unit 332 performs display control processing to determine a no-reach display pattern (10-second non-reach display pattern) with a change display time of 10 seconds as the change type (display pattern type), and the special symbol game display is executed according to the 10-second non-reach display pattern on the symbol display unit 341, etc. If the stop display type at the time of a miss is a complete miss, the movable rotating role member 37 is not moved.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, as a variation display at the time of a loss corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern "04," a variation display of a loss pattern is executed in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped at a combination of loss symbols without any advance notice such as the display of characters or messages. Also, in the gaming machine 10, as a variation display at the time of a loss corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern "05," a variation display of a loss pattern is executed in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped at a combination of loss symbols accompanied by advance notice such as the display of characters or messages. Also, when a variation display at the time of a loss corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern "05," a player-participation operation display that reflects the player's operation of the operation button 20 may be executed as a preview effect.

Note that the types of special chart variation patterns are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 238(A), 238(B), and 238(C).

For example, in gaming machine 10, multiple types of normal reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to special chart variation pattern "01," and one of these normal reach effects selected will be executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of super reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super reach effects executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to special chart variation pattern "02," and one of these super reach effects is selected and executed. The super reach effect is a reach effect with a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, and is executed to suggest to the player that the probability (expectation) of the lottery result being a jackpot is higher than with the normal reach effect, but lower than with the special reach effect.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 provides multiple types of special reach effects with different characters and stories as special reach effects that are executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to special chart variation pattern "03," and one of these special reach effects is selected and executed. A special reach effect is a reach effect with a longer variation time than a normal reach effect, and is an effect that develops from, for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. A special reach effect is executed to suggest to the player that the probability (expectation level) of winning a jackpot is higher than with a normal reach effect or a special reach effect.

Note that the presentation patterns corresponding to the special chart variation patterns may include player-participation type presentations, such as presentations in which the operation status of the player on the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation, such as a single operation presentation in which a single operation is reflected in the presentation, a rapid-fire operation presentation in which the player's rapid pressing of the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation, and a long-press operation presentation in which the player's long-press operation of the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation.

In this embodiment, as described below, a single operation effect is executed when informing the player of whether or not a 16R probability variable jackpot has been reached. Specifically, when movable mode C (see FIG. 266(C)) or movable mode D (see FIG. 266(D)) is set as the movable mode of the movable rotating accessory member 37 to notify the player of a 16R probability variable jackpot, a single operation effect is executed on the symbol display unit 341 until it is determined that the valid period end determination condition (operation of the operation button 20 or passage of the valid period) set during the execution of the operation of drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of movable mode C and movable mode D, is met (see FIG. 277(C)).

Then, when the MPU 41 identifies the variable display time of the special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 (the variable display time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display section 341), it inputs the special symbol variable display time and a special symbol variable pattern command indicating the result of the jackpot lottery by the lottery process to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R normal jackpot," the MPU 41 outputs one of the special symbol variable pattern commands "A01" to "A03," in which an "A" indicating a 5R normal jackpot is added before the special symbol variable pattern "01" to "03." Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R special jackpot," the MPU 41 outputs one of the special symbol variable pattern commands "B01" to "B03," in which a "B" indicating a 5R special jackpot is added before the special symbol variable pattern "01" to "03." Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "16R probability variable jackpot," the MPU 41 outputs one of the special symbol variation pattern commands "C01" to "C03," in which a "C" indicating a 16R probability variable jackpot is added before the special symbol variation pattern "01" to "03." Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "miss," the MPU 41 outputs one of the special symbol variation pattern commands "D01" to "D05," in which a "D" indicating a miss is added before the special symbol variation pattern "01" to "05." In other words, the special symbol variation pattern command includes not only the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol game time), which is the variable display time of the special symbol, but also information specifying the result of the jackpot lottery by the lottery process. Based on the special symbol variation pattern command, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine not only the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol play time), which is the duration of the special symbol variation display, but also the result of the jackpot lottery. Based on the duration of the special symbol variation display (special symbol play time) and the result of the jackpot lottery, the audio lamp control device 5 determines details such as the variation type (presentation pattern) displayed on the symbol display unit 341 and the combination of stationary decorative symbol displays. Based on the determined variation type (presentation pattern) and other details, the audio lamp control device 5 controls the symbol display unit 341 to display the varying and stationary decorative symbols and executes image effects in accordance with the varying decorative symbol displays. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 5 controls the speaker 26 to execute audio effects in accordance with the varying decorative symbol displays, the illumination unit 27 to execute illumination effects (lamp effects), and, as necessary, moves the movable rotating accessory member 37 in predetermined movement modes A to D.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process that determines the variable display time of the decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341 based on the special symbol variable type counter CS1 and the variable table. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured with an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the jackpot lottery. Furthermore, because the details of the variable mode of the decorative symbols actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variable modes.

The fluctuation tables shown in Figures 238 (A) to 238 (C) are commonly used in various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, and special probability game state), but individual fluctuation tables may be set for each game state, and individual fluctuation tables may be set for the high-frequency support mode (time-saving game state and special probability game state) and the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, when individual fluctuation tables are set for each game state or support mode, the average value of the fluctuation display time is set longer, for example, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode) than in the time-saving game state and special probability game state (high-frequency support mode). Furthermore, when different fluctuation tables are set for the time-saving game state and the special probability game state, the average value of the fluctuation display time may be set longer in the time-saving game state than in the special probability game state, or may be set longer in the special probability game state than in the time-saving game state.

Here, Figure 239 is a block diagram showing an example of the general map reservation storage area 412c in the memory area of the main control device 4 shown in Figure 236. As shown in Figure 239, the general map reservation storage area 412c includes a first general map reservation area SE1, a second general map reservation area SE2, a third general map reservation area SE3, a fourth general map reservation area SE4, a general map variable reservation number storage area SNA, and a general map execution area SAE.

Regular ticket first reserve area SE1 to regular ticket fourth reserve area SE4 are memory areas that store the regular ticket random number counter C4, regular ticket type random number counter C5, and regular ticket variation type counter CS2, which are acquired as regular ticket win/loss information used in the regular ticket win lottery, which is executed in the lottery process to determine whether a regular ticket wins when a gaming ball passes through through gates 317L and 317R.

The regular map variable reserve number storage area SNA stores the number of regular map first reserve areas SE1 to SE4 in which regular map win/loss information is stored. In other words, the regular map variable reserve number storage area SNA is a storage area that stores the number of reserved rights to play regular map games.

The normal symbol execution area SAE is a memory area used to move the normal symbol win/loss information in the first normal symbol holding area SE1 when the display of normal symbol fluctuations begins in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display unit 36. At the start of a normal symbol game, the MPU 41 performs a normal symbol win lottery using the normal symbol win/loss table (see Figures 240(A) and 240(B)) and the normal symbol win type allocation table (see Figures 240(C) and 240(D)) described below, based on the numerical information (values of the normal symbol win random number counter C4, the normal symbol type random number counter C5, and the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2) stored in the normal symbol execution area SAE, and determines the normal symbol fluctuation display time for the normal symbol using the normal symbol fluctuation table (not shown). At this time, if the normal map correct/incorrect information stored in the normal map first holding area SE1 is moved to the normal map execution area SAE, the normal map correct/incorrect information stored in the normal map second holding area SE2 is shifted to the normal map first holding area SE1, the normal map correct/incorrect information stored in the normal map third holding area SE3 is shifted to the normal map second holding area SE2, and the normal map correct/incorrect information stored in the normal map fourth holding area SE4 is shifted to the normal map third holding area SE3.

Normal win random number counter C4 is periodically updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in Figure 17, for example, by being incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 299, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The value of normal win random number counter C4 at the time when the game ball enters through gates 317L, 317R is stored in normal win random number counter C4 first hold area SE1 to normal win random number counter C4 fourth hold area SE4 of normal win hold storage area 412c. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing, a normal win lottery is held to determine whether or not electric device 315b will be opened for a predetermined period of time based on the value of normal win random number counter C4 stored in normal win hold storage area 412c.

Here, Figures 240(A) and 240(B) are diagrams showing examples of normal winning/losing tables. In this embodiment, two types of normal winning/losing tables are set: a low-frequency support mode normal winning/losing table shown in Figure 240(A), and a high-frequency support mode normal winning/losing table shown in Figure 240(B). In other words, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a normal lottery in the normal winning lottery performed in the lottery process to determine whether or not a normal lottery has been won differs between low-frequency support mode and high-frequency support mode, and the probability of winning a normal lottery is set higher in high-frequency support mode than in low-frequency support mode.

The low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table shown in Figure 240 (A) is a table used in the normal win lottery that is executed in the lottery process to determine whether or not there is a normal win in the normal game mode, which is the normal game mode. As shown in Figure 240 (A), the low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table is set so that a normal win occurs when the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is 0, and a loss occurs when the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is between 1 and 299. In other words, in the normal game mode (low-frequency support mode), the probability of a normal win is set to 1/300, and the operation frequency of the electric device 315b is low.

The high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table shown in Figure 240 (B) is a table used in the normal win lottery executed in the lottery process to determine whether or not a normal win has occurred in the high-frequency support mode, which is the probability of a game being played in the special mode and time-limited mode. As shown in Figure 240 (B), the high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table, unlike the low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table, is set such that a loss occurs when the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is 0, and a normal win occurs when the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is 1 to 299. In other words, in the probability of a game being played in the special mode and time-limited mode (high-frequency support mode), the probability of a normal win is set to 299/300, which is higher than the normal play mode (low-frequency support mode), and the operation frequency of the electric device 315b is increased.

Note that the probability of winning a normal low-frequency support mode map and the probability of winning a normal high-frequency support mode map are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 240(A) and 240(B) and can be changed as appropriate.

The normal win type random number counter C5 is periodically updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process shown in Figure 17, for example, by being incremented by one within the range of 0 to 199, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The normal win type random number counter C5 value at the time the game ball enters the through gates 317L and 317R is stored in the normal win first reserve area SE1 to normal win fourth reserve area SE4 of the normal win reserve storage area 412c. Furthermore, if the value of the normal win type random number counter C4 stored in the normal win first reserve area SE1 to normal win fourth reserve area SE4 indicates a normal win, the type of normal win (short-open normal win or long-open normal win), i.e., the opening time of the electric device 315b, is determined by the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 stored in the normal win first reserve area SE1 to normal win fourth reserve area SE4.

Here, Figures 240(C) and 240(D) are diagrams showing examples of normal win type allocation tables. In this embodiment, two types of normal win type allocation tables are set: a low-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table shown in Figure 240(C) and a high-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table shown in Figure 240(D). That is, in this embodiment, the allocation probability of normal win types (short-open normal win and long-open normal win) differs between low-frequency support mode and high-frequency support mode. Also, in this embodiment, two maximum opening times for the second winning slot 315 during normal win play are set, thereby setting two types of opening/closing modes for the second winning slot 315 during normal win play (moving modes of the electric device 315b, which is a movable body) that may result in uncertain timing for the establishment of the end determination condition. Of course, there may be three or more opening/closing modes for the second winning slot 315 during normal win play.

Here, in the case of a short-open normal win, the movable electric device 315b is opened for a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds), allowing the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315, the starting ball entry slot, for a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds). In this short-open normal win, information corresponding to the opening time (e.g., 0.1 seconds) of the electric device 315b is set, and the movable electric device 315b is moved from the standby position, which is the return side position, to the operating position, which is the drive side position. After that, if the end determination condition is met due to the lapse of the opening time of the electric device 315b, the game is determined to have ended, and the electric device 315b is returned from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position. In a short-open normal win, the short opening time of the electric device 315b makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315, and in many cases, the game ball does not enter the second winning slot 315.

On the other hand, in the case of a long-opening normal win, the movable electric device 315b is left open for a longer period (e.g., six seconds) than in a short-opening normal win game, resulting in a long-opening normal win game in which the game ball can enter the second winning slot 315, the starting ball entry point, for a longer period (e.g., six seconds) than in a short-opening normal win game. In this long-opening normal win game, information corresponding to the opening time (e.g., six seconds) of the electric device 315b is set, and the movable electric device 315b is moved from the standby position, which is the return side position, to the operating position, which is the drive side position. Thereafter, if the opening time of the electric device 315b has elapsed and it is determined that the end determination condition is met, the electric device 315b is returned from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position. In a long-open normal game, the long opening time of the electric device 315b makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315, and it is possible to reserve up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second special game.

The low-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table shown in Figure 240 (C) is a table used in the normal win lottery executed in the lottery process to determine whether or not a normal win has occurred in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 240 (C), the low-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table sets a short-open normal win when the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is between 0 and 99, and a long-open normal win when the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is between 100 and 199. In other words, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the allocation ratio between short-open normal wins and long-open normal wins is set to 1:1. Of course, the distribution ratio between short-open normal wins and long-open normal wins in normal game mode (low frequency support mode) does not necessarily have to be 1:1 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is possible to set the distribution ratio for long-open normal wins to zero (zero values in the normal win type random number counter C5 for long-open normal wins) or approximately zero (one or two values in the normal win type random number counter C5 for long-open normal wins).

The high-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table shown in Figure 240 (D) is a table used in the normal win lottery executed in the lottery process to determine whether or not a normal win has occurred in the high-frequency support mode, which is the probability variable play state and the time-limited play state. As shown in Figure 240 (D), the high-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table is set so that when the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is 0, a short-open normal win has occurred, and when the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 is between 1 and 199, a long-open normal win has occurred. In other words, in the probability variable play state and the time-limited play state (high-frequency support mode), it is set so that long-open normal wins are more likely to occur than short-open normal wins. Of course, the distribution rate between short-open normal wins and long-open normal wins in the probability variable game mode and time-saving game mode (high frequency support mode) is not limited to the example shown in Figure 240 (D) and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is possible to set the distribution rate for short-open normal wins to zero (the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 for short-open normal wins is zero).

The movable state of the electric device 315b, which is a movable body, is not limited to once per normal play, but may be multiple times. In this case, the opening time and opening interval (interval between openings) of each opening of the electric device 315b during a normal play may be one type or multiple types. In other words, the movable state of the electric device 315b during a normal play is not limited to the two types of short opening and long opening mentioned above, but can be changed in various ways.

The normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 is incremented by one in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and is updated at least once in step S1402 each time the main processing of FIG. 241 described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated in step S1414 during the remaining time in the main processing. The value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 at the time when the game ball enters the through gates 317L and 317R, which are the starting ball entry areas, is stored in the normal map first holding area SE1 to normal map fourth holding area SE4 of the normal map holding storage area 412c. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing, the normal map fluctuation display time is determined by referring to a normal map fluctuation display table (not shown) based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 stored in the normal map holding storage area 412c.

The normal map change display table (not shown) includes, for example, a high-frequency support mode normal map change table that is referenced when in high-frequency support mode, and a low-frequency support mode normal map change display table that is referenced when in low-frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode normal map change display table and the low-frequency support mode normal map change display table, multiple normal map change display times are set, for example, corresponding to the value of the normal map change type counter CS2. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode normal map change display table is typically set to have a shorter average normal map change display time than the low-frequency support mode normal map change display table. For example, some of the change display times set in the high-frequency support mode normal map change display table may be set to be longer than some of the change display times set in the low-frequency support mode normal map change display table, or all of the change display times set in the high-frequency support mode normal map change display table may be set to be longer than all of the change display times set in the low-frequency support mode normal map change display table.

In addition, a common normal map change display table may be set for both the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, and the normal map change display time set in at least one of the high-frequency support mode normal map change display table and the low-frequency support mode normal map change display table may be one type. Also, the normal map change display time may be set according to the number of reserved normal map changes X; for example, the normal map change display time may be set to be shorter the more reserved normal map changes X there are, and the normal map change display time may be set to be longer the less reserved normal map changes X there are.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described below, in a normal winning game, the movable electric device 315b moves back and forth once between a standby position (return position) where it closes the second winning opening 315 and an operating position (drive position) where it opens the second winning opening 315. However, by adopting a continuous movement mode in which the movable electric device 315b moves back and forth multiple times between the standby position (return position) where it closes the second winning opening 315 and the operating position (drive position) where it opens the second winning opening 315 in a single normal winning game, it is possible to set multiple opening and closing modes (movement modes of the movable electric device 315b) for a normal winning game, which may result in an uncertain timing for the establishment of the end determination condition.

[Processing of main control device 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to Figures 241 to 252. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 executes a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, an NMI interrupt process that is executed in the event of a power outage, etc. In this embodiment, only the main process will be described.

[Main processing of main control device 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to Fig. 241. In the main processing, the main control processing for the progress of the normal game, the special game, and the jackpot game is executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1401 to S1411 is executed as a periodic processing, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S1413 and S1414 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing of steps S1401 to S1411 until the next cycle.

<Step S1401>
241, in step S1401, the MPU 41 executes external output processing to transmit output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 17 or the previous main processing to a control device such as the sub-control unit 332 or the peripheral control unit 140. For example, when commands such as a normal symbol fluctuation pattern command, an electric role device open command, an electric role device close command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern command, a first special symbol hold command, a second special symbol hold command, a special symbol shift command, a jackpot game start command, an opening start command, an opening end command, an opening/closing execution mode start command, a round game start command, a round game end command, an interval start command, an interval end command, an opening/closing execution mode end command, an ending start command, an ending end command, a jackpot game end command, and a game setting value change command are set in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 transmits the commands to the voice lamp control device 5. In addition, if a prize ball command is set in RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 described below in the main process, that prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 updates the values of the special chart fluctuation type counter CS1 and the regular chart fluctuation type counter CS2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the special chart fluctuation type counter CS1 and the regular chart fluctuation type counter CS2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether a prize has been won in the general prize opening 313, the first prize opening 314, the second prize opening 315, the variable prize opening 316, etc., based on the winning detection information stored in RAM 412. If a prize has been won, the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with that prize. At this time, in the normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), if a prize has been won in the general prize opening 313 or the first prize opening 314, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the general prize opening or the number of balls paid out from the first prize opening, which is stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412, to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current prize. Furthermore, in the time-saving game mode (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the guaranteed variable game mode (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), if a win occurs in the second winning slot 315, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the second winning slot stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out from the current winning. Furthermore, in the jackpot game mode, if a win occurs in the variable winning slot 316, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the variable winning slot stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out from the current winning.

<Step S1404>
In step S1404, the MPU 41 executes a normal game control process for controlling the progress of the normal game. Details of the normal game control process will be described later with reference to Figures 242 to 244.

<Step S1405>
In step S1405, the MPU 41 executes a normal winning game control process as a movable body control process that controls the progress of the normal winning game, which is executed when the result of the normal winning lottery is a winning. The details of the normal winning game control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1406>
In step S1406, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol game control process that controls the progress of the special symbol game. Details of the special symbol game control process will be described later with reference to Figures 246 to 248. In the special symbol game control process, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, a special symbol variation pattern command required for the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variable display time in the RAM 412 based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of Figure 17, and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of this process.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process as a movable body control process for controlling the progress of a jackpot game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Details of the jackpot game control process will be described later with reference to Figures 249 to 252.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process that controls the transition of various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, probability variable game state, probability variable jackpot game state, and normal jackpot game state). Note that the game state transition process of this embodiment is similar to the game state transition process of the first embodiment described above with reference to Figures 33 and 34, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

<Step S1409>
In step S1409, the MPU 41 executes a game setting value change process. In this game setting value change process, a process is executed to display or hide the setting values or to control the change of the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d in accordance with an operation on the setting value change operation unit 46. Note that the game setting value change process of this embodiment is similar to the game setting value change process of the first embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 35, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game setting value change process is executed during the main process, but it is also possible to limit its execution to the startup process that is activated when the power is turned on, or the period from the startup process until the game ball starts being shot. This prevents the game setting values from being changed after the player starts playing until the next time the power is turned on, preventing the game setting values from being changed during the game hall's business hours.

<Step S1410>
In step S1410, the MPU 41 executes a process for updating specific performance information included in the game information. In this embodiment, base information and the like are updated as the specific performance information. Note that the specific performance information update process of this embodiment is similar to the specific performance information update process of the first embodiment described above with reference to Figures 36 and 37, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

<Step S1411>
In step S1411, the MPU 41 executes display control processing for the performance display monitor 43. In this display control processing for the performance display monitor 43, processing is executed to display the base information updated in the specific performance information update processing in step S1410 on the performance display monitor 43. Note that the display control processing for the performance display monitor 43 in this embodiment is similar to the display control processing for the performance display monitor 43 in the first embodiment described above with reference to Figures 38 to 41, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

<Step S1412>
In step S1412, the MPU 41 determines whether the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. If the MPU 41 determines that the timing for executing the next main process has arrived (step S1412: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1401 and executes the processes from step S1401 onward. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the timing for executing the next main process has not arrived (step S1412: No), the MPU 41 repeatedly executes steps S1413 and S1414 until the timing for executing the next main process arrives, i.e., for the remaining time until the timing for executing the next main process arrives (step S1412: Yes), until the MPU 41 determines that the timing for executing the next main process has arrived.

<Step S1413>
In step S1413, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal win random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal win random number initial value counter CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Step S1414>
In step S1414, the MPU 41 updates the special chart variation type counter CS1 and the regular chart variation type counter CS2. Specifically, the counter values of the special chart variation type counter CS1 and the regular chart variation type counter CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values, the counter values are cleared to 0. After updating the special chart variation type counter CS1 and the regular chart variation type counter CS2, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1412.

[General game control processing]
Here, Fig. 242 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal symbol game control process executed in step S1404 in the main process of Fig. 241. In the normal symbol game control process, processes are executed to control the variable display and stop display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36. Hereinafter, the normal symbol game control process will be described with reference to Fig. 242.

<Step S3201>
As shown in Figure 242, in the normal game control process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal symbol variable display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol is being displayed (normal symbol game is being executed), is on (step S3201). The normal symbol variable display flag is set to on in step S3411 when the normal symbol variable display (normal symbol game) starts in the normal symbol variable start process of Figure 244 described later, and is set to off in step S3210 in the normal symbol game control process when the normal symbol is displayed stationary (normal symbol game is ended).

If the normal map change display flag is on (step S3201: Yes), i.e., if a normal map game is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3207. On the other hand, if the normal map change display flag is off (step S3201: No), i.e., if a normal map game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3202.

<Step S3202>
If the normal map variable display flag is off (step S3201: No), that is, if the normal map game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the electric device open flag, which indicates that the movable electric device 315b is open (a normal map winning game is being played), is on (step S3202). The electric device open flag is set to on in step S3511 when the movable electric device 315b is opened (when the movable electric device 315b is positioned at the operating position, which is the drive side position), in the normal map winning game control process as the movable body control process of FIG. 245 described later, and is set to off in step S3518 when the electric device 315b is closed (when the movable electric device 315b is positioned at the standby position, which is the return side position).

If the electric device open flag is on (step S3202: Yes), i.e., if a normal winning game is being played, the MPU 41 ends the normal game control process. On the other hand, if the electric device open flag is off (step S3202: No), i.e., if a normal winning game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3203.

<Step S3203>
If the electric accessory opening flag is OFF (step S3202: No), that is, if a normal winning game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being played, is ON (step S3203). The jackpot game in progress flag is set ON in step S3906 when a jackpot game starts in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 249 described later, and is set OFF in step S3952 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3203: Yes), and a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 terminates the normal game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, normal game play does not start while a jackpot game is being played.

Of course, normal game play may be started while a jackpot game is being played. In this case, the win/loss determination for the normal lottery is made based on the win/loss information (values of the normal lottery win random number counter C4, the normal lottery win type random number counter C5, and the normal lottery win type counter CS2) moved from the normal lottery first reserve area SE1 in the normal lottery reserve storage area 412c to the normal lottery execution area SAE, according to the type of support mode (high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode) before the jackpot game was started, i.e., according to the game state before the transition to the jackpot game state. In other words, if the game state before the jackpot game is executed is a high-frequency support mode, which is a probability variable game state or a time-limited game state, the normal game lottery (normal game win or loss), normal game win type (long-open normal game win or short-open normal game win), and normal game change display time are set based on the normal game win/loss table (see FIG. 240(B)), normal game win type table (see FIG. 240(D)), and normal game change table (not shown) for the high-frequency support mode. On the other hand, if the game state before the jackpot game is executed is a low-frequency support mode, which is a normal game state, the normal game lottery (normal game win or loss), normal game win type (long-open normal game win or short-open normal game win), and normal game change display time are set based on the normal game win/loss table (see FIG. 240(A)), normal game win type table (see FIG. 240(C)), and normal game change table (not shown) for the low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3203: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3204.

<Step S3204>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3203: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal map change reserve number X stored in the normal map change reserve number memory area SNA set in the normal map reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412 is 0 (step S3204). If the normal map change reserve number X is 0 (step S3204: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the normal map game control process, and if the normal map change reserve number X is not 0 (step S3204: No), the process proceeds to step S3205.

<Step S3205>
If the number of reserved normal map changes X is not 0 (step S3204: No), the MPU 41 executes the normal map data setting process for the normal map correctness information stored in the normal map reserved storage area 412c (step S3205), and the process proceeds to step S3206. Details of the normal map data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3206>
In step S3206, the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol variation start process to cause the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 to execute a normal symbol variation display based on the information stored in the normal symbol reserve storage area 412c, and ends the normal symbol game control process. Details of the normal symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3207>
If the normal map variable display flag is on (step S3201: Yes), that is, if a normal map game is being played, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being played, is on (step S3207). The jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S3906 when a jackpot game starts in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 249 described later, and is set to off in step S3952 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3207: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3209. On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3207: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3208.

<Step S3208>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is OFF (step S3207: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal symbol variable display time has elapsed since the start of the normal symbol variable display (step S3208). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to stop the normal symbol variable display in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (to end the normal symbol game).

If the normal symbol variable display time has elapsed (step S3208: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop the normal symbol displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ending normal symbol play), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3209. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variable display time has not elapsed (step S3208: No), that is, if it is not time to stop the normal symbol displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ending normal symbol play), the MPU 41 ends the normal symbol play control process.

<Steps S3209 to S3211>
If the normal symbol variable display flag is on (step S3201: Yes) and the jackpot game flag is on (step S3207: Yes), that is, if a jackpot game starts during normal symbol game play, or if the normal symbol variable display time for the normal symbol has elapsed (step S3208: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop the normal symbol variable display (end normal symbol game), the MPU 41 stops the normal symbol display on the symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol winning lottery corresponding to the normal symbol game (step S3209), and sets the normal symbol variable display flag indicating that the normal symbol variable display is in progress (normal symbol game is being executed) to OFF (step S3210). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol variable stop display flag to ON (step S3211), indicating that the normal symbol has stopped display, that is, that the normal symbol game has ended, and ends the normal symbol game control process.

The normal map fluctuation stop display flag is referenced in step S3501 of the normal map winning game control processing in Figure 245 described below to determine whether it is time to start normal map winning game (opening the movable electric device 315b).

In addition, in this embodiment, the timing for the normal symbol variable display time to elapse and the variable normal symbol to be displayed in a static state (normal symbol game ending) is not limited to when the normal symbol variable display time for the normal symbol has elapsed, but also when a jackpot game is started while normal symbol game is being played, the variable normal symbol will be displayed in a static state (normal symbol game ending). In other words, when a jackpot game is started, normal symbol game is forcibly ended before the normal symbol variable display time for the normal symbol has elapsed. Of course, normal symbol game may be continued until the normal symbol variable display time for the normal symbol has elapsed, even when a jackpot game is started.

[General map data setting process]
Here, Figure 243 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the general map data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3205 of Figure 242. In the general map data setting process, the contents stored in the general map reserve storage area 412c in the memory area of the main control device 4 of Figure 239 are updated. Below, the general map data setting process will be explained with reference to Figure 243.

<Steps S3301 to S3303>
As shown in FIG. 243, in the normal map data setting process, first, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the normal map change reserve number X stored in the normal map change reserve number storage area SNA (step S3301), and then moves the normal map correct/incorrect information from the normal map first reserve area SE1 to the normal map execution area SAE (step S3302). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the normal map correct/incorrect information stored in the normal map second reserve area SE2 to the normal map fourth reserve area SE4 one by one (step S3303). Specifically, in step S3303, the normal map correct/incorrect information in the normal map second reserve area SE2 is moved to the normal map first reserve area SE1, the normal map correct/incorrect information in the normal map third reserve area SE3 is moved to the normal map second reserve area SE2, and the normal map correct/incorrect information in the normal map fourth reserve area SE4 is moved to the normal map third reserve area SE3.

[General map change start processing]
Here, Figure 244 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal map variation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S3206 of Figure 242. In the normal map variation start processing, the normal pattern variation display in the normal pattern display unit 361 is started, and various commands and flags are set based on the results of the normal map winning lottery. Below, the normal map variation start processing will be explained with reference to Figure 244.

<Step S3401>
As shown in Fig. 244, in the normal game change start processing, the MPU 41 determines whether the high frequency support mode flag indicating the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state) is on (step S3401). The high frequency support mode flag is set to on in step S2313 of Fig. 34 when the jackpot game ends in the above-mentioned game state transition processing, and is set to off in step S2307 of Fig. 33 when the game state transitions from the probability variable game state or time-limited game state to the probability variable jackpot game state or normal jackpot game state, or in step S2326 of Fig. 34 when the game state transitions from the time-limited game state to the normal game state.

If the high-frequency support mode flag is on (step S3401: Yes), i.e., the game is in a high-frequency support mode, such as a guaranteed variable play state or a time-limited play state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3402; if the high-frequency support mode flag is off (step S3401: No), i.e., the game is in a low-frequency support mode, such as a normal play state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3403.

<Steps S3402 and S3403>
If the high-frequency support mode is in a probability variable game state or a time-limited game state (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a normal win/loss determination based on the high-frequency support mode (step S3402). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether the values of the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5 included as numerical information in the normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c correspond to a normal win based on the high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see FIG. 240 (B)) and the high-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table (see FIG. 240 (D)). In other words, when in high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 performs a lottery process to determine whether the normal win is determined based on the high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table and the high-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table.

On the other hand, if the game is in normal game mode, which is low-frequency support mode (step S3401: No), a normal win determination is made based on the low-frequency support mode (step S3403). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal win random number counter C4 and normal win type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c, are values corresponding to a normal win, based on the low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see FIG. 240(A)) and the low-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table (see FIG. 240(C)). In other words, when in low-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 executes a lottery process to determine whether or not a normal win has occurred, based on the low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table and the low-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table.

<Steps S3404 and S3405>
When the MPU 41 determines whether or not a normal winning ticket is selected by a lottery process to determine whether or not a normal winning ticket is selected (step S3402 or S3403), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the winning/losing determination is a long-open normal winning ticket in which the second winning slot 315, which is the starting winning ticket, is long-open (step S3404). If the result of the winning/losing determination is a long-open normal winning ticket (step S3404: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the long-open normal winning flag, which indicates that the result of the winning/losing determination is a long-open normal winning ticket, to on (step S3405), and proceeds to step S3408. On the other hand, if the result of the winning/losing determination is not a long-open normal winning ticket (step S3404: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3406.

<Steps S3406 and S3407>
If the result of the hit/miss judgment is not a long-opening normal hit (step S3404: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the hit/miss judgment is a short-opening normal hit in which the second winning port 315, which is the starting ball entry portion, is short-opened (step S3406). If the result of the hit/miss judgment is a short-opening normal hit (step S3406: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the short-opening normal hit flag, which indicates that the result of the hit/miss judgment is a short-opening normal hit, to on (step S3407), and proceeds to step S3408. On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss judgment is not a short-opening normal hit (step S3406: No), that is, if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3408.

<Steps S3408 and S3409>
If the long-open normal winning flag is set to on (step S3405), if the short-open normal winning flag is set to on (step S3407), or if the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss (step S3406: No), the MPU 41 executes a normal winning pattern setting process to set the normal winning pattern, which is the normal winning pattern display time in the normal winning pattern display section 361 of the main display unit 36 during normal winning game play, by referring to a normal winning pattern display table (not shown). As described above, the normal winning pattern display table (not shown) includes a high-frequency support mode normal winning pattern table that is referenced when in high-frequency support mode, and a low-frequency support mode normal winning pattern display table that is referenced when in low-frequency support mode. Therefore, in the normal winning pattern setting process, the normal winning pattern is set based on the normal winning pattern display table corresponding to the support mode type. In addition, the high frequency support mode normal symbol variation display table is set so that the average time for displaying normal symbol variations is shorter than that of the low frequency support mode normal symbol variation display table, so in the high frequency support mode, the time for normal symbol play is shorter than in the low frequency support mode.

Then, the MPU 41 sets a normal map fluctuation pattern command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the result of the lottery process to determine whether or not the normal map is a winning lottery in step S3402 or S3403 (the result of the normal map winning lottery) and the type of support mode (high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode) in addition to the normal map fluctuation pattern set in step S3408 (step S3409), and then proceeds to step S3410.

The normal symbol variation pattern command is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU 41. In response, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341, etc., to execute an effect corresponding to normal symbol play, such as an effect indicating that normal symbol play is being played or an effect indicating the result of a normal symbol winning lottery, based on the normal symbol variation pattern command.

Furthermore, the normal map fluctuation pattern command is sufficient as long as it is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of at least the normal map fluctuation pattern, and the result of the normal map winning lottery or the type of support mode does not necessarily have to be notified to the voice lamp control device 5 as a normal map fluctuation pattern command. For example, the result of the normal map winning lottery may be notified to the voice lamp control device 5 by setting a normal map winning lottery result command when a win/loss determination is made in step S3402 or S3403, and the type of support mode may be notified to the voice lamp control device 5 by setting a support mode type command that can identify the type of support mode after transition when transitioning to high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode.

<Steps S3410 and S3411>
In step S3410, the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (step S3410). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol variable display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol is being variably displayed, i.e., that a normal symbol game is being executed, to ON (step S3411), and ends the normal symbol variable start process.

The normal symbol variation display flag is referenced in step S3201 of the normal symbol game control processing in Figure 242 to determine whether normal symbol gameplay is in progress (normal symbol variation display).

[Normal winning game control processing]
Here, Figure 245 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal winning game control process executed in step S1405 in the main process of Figure 241. In the normal winning game control process, if the result of the normal winning lottery by the lottery process that determines whether or not there is a normal winning is a win, a movable body control process is executed to switch between an allowable state that allows the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315, which is the starting ball entry section, and a restricted state that restricts it, by performing opening and closing control by continuous operation of the movable electric device 315b. Below, the normal winning game control process will be explained with reference to Figure 245.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 245, in the normal symbol winning game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol has stopped and been displayed (the normal symbol game has ended), is on (step S3501). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to start the normal symbol winning game, which causes the movable electric device 315b to perform continuous operation. The normal symbol variation stop display flag is set to on in step S3211 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol game control process of FIG. 242.

If the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S3501: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start a normal map winning game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3502. On the other hand, if the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S3501: No), i.e., if it is not time to start a normal map winning game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3513.

<Step S3502>
If the normal game fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S3501: Yes), that is, if it is time to start a normal game, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being executed, is on (step S3502). The jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S2906 when a jackpot game starts in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 249 described later, and is set to off in step S3952 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3502: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 terminates the normal jackpot game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, if the process is forced to terminate due to the start of a jackpot game, the normal jackpot game will not start even if the result of the normal jackpot lottery for that normal game is a normal jackpot. In other words, in this embodiment, a normal jackpot game will not start while a jackpot game is being played. Of course, a new normal jackpot game may be started while a jackpot game is being played.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3502: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3503.

<Step S3503>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3502: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the long-opening normal winning flag is set to on (step S3503). The long-opening normal winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the normal winning lottery performed by the lottery process to determine whether or not a normal winning is a long-opening normal winning. If the result of the normal winning lottery is a long-opening normal winning, the flag is set to on in step S3405 of the normal winning lottery start process of FIG. 244. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a long-opening normal winning. If the long-opening normal winning flag is set to on (step S3503: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3504. If the long-opening normal winning flag is set to off (step S3503: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3506.

<Steps S3504 and S3505>
If the long-open normal win flag is set to ON (step S3503: Yes), i.e., if the result of the normal win lottery for the completed normal game is a long-open normal win, the MPU 41 executes a movable body control process to set the value of the open time counter to execute the long-open operation of the electric device 315b (the movable body) based on information corresponding to 6 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric device 315b during the long-open normal win game (the time during which the game ball can enter the second winning slot 315) (step S3504). The open time counter is referenced in step S3515 of the normal win game control process to determine the timing for returning the electric device 315b from the operating position (the drive side position) to the standby position (the return side position). The MPU 41 then sets the long-open normal win flag to OFF (step S3505) and proceeds to step S3509.

<Step S3506>
If the long-opening normal winning flag is set to OFF (step S3503: No), that is, if the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is not a long-opening normal winning, the MPU 41 determines whether the short-opening normal winning flag is set to ON (step S3506). The short-opening normal winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the normal winning lottery by the lottery process that determines whether or not a normal winning is a short-opening normal winning. If the result of the normal winning lottery is a short-opening normal winning, it is set to ON in step S1707 of the normal variation start processing of FIG. 24. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a short-opening normal winning. If the short-open regular winning flag is set to on (step S3506: Yes), the MPU 41 transfers processing to step S3507, and if the short-open regular winning flag is set to off (step S3506: No), that is, if the result of the regular winning lottery for the completed regular game is a loss, the MPU 41 transfers processing to step S3512.

<Steps S3507 and S3508>
If the short-open normal win flag is set to ON (step S3506: Yes), i.e., if the result of the normal win lottery for the completed normal game is a short-open normal win, the MPU 41 executes a movable body control process to set the value of the open time counter to execute the short-open operation of the electric device 315b (the movable body) based on information corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric device 315b in the short-open normal win game (the time during which the game ball can enter the second winning slot 315) (step S3507). The open time counter is referenced in step S3515 of the normal win game control process to determine the timing for returning the electric device 315b from the operating position (the drive side position) to the standby position (the return side position). The MPU 41 then sets the short-open normal win flag to OFF (step S3508) and proceeds to step S3509.

<Steps S3509 to S3511>
If the result of the lottery process for a normal winning combination is a winning combination, and the flag indicating the type of normal winning combination (long-open normal winning combination flag or short-open normal winning combination flag) is set to OFF (step S3505 or S3508), the MPU 41 executes a movable body control process to operate the movable electric device 315b, which is the movable body, from the standby position (return side position) to the operating position (drive side position) (step S3509). This opens the second winning hole 315, which is the starting ball entry section, and sets the state to allow a game ball to enter the second winning hole 315. The MPU 41 then sets an electric device release command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the electric device 315b has been released (step S3510), sets the electric device release flag indicating that the electric device 315b has been released to ON (step S3511), and proceeds to step S3512.

The electric reel release command is sent to the audio and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU 41. Based on the electric reel release command, the audio and lamp control device 5 can then initiate a performance that indicates to the symbol display unit 341, for example, that the electric reel 315b has been released.

<Step S3512>
When the result of the lottery process for winning a regular symbol is a win, and a movable body control process is executed to open the movable electric device 315b (steps S3503 to S3511), or when the long-open regular symbol win flag and the short-open regular symbol win flag are both set to off (when the result of the lottery process for winning a regular symbol is a miss) (both steps S3503 and S3506 are No), the MPU 41 sets to off the regular symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the regular symbol has stopped being displayed (the regular symbol game has ended) (step S3512), and terminates the regular symbol win game control process.

<Step S3513>
If the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S3501: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the electric device open flag, which is set to on when the electric device 315b is opened in step S3511 of the normal map winning game control processing, is set to on (step S3513). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a normal map winning game is being played. If the electric device open flag is set to on (step S3513: Yes), that is, if a normal map winning game is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3514. On the other hand, if the electric device open flag is set to off (step S3513: No), that is, if a normal map winning game is not being played, the MPU 41 terminates the normal map winning game control processing.

<Steps S3514 and S3515>
If the electric role device open flag is set to on (step S3513: Yes), that is, if a normal winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the open time counter set in step S3504 or S3507 of the normal winning game control process (step S3514), and determines whether the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S3515). That is, as a movable body control process, the MPU 41 performs an end determination of whether it is time to return the electric role device 315b, which is the movable body, from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position, due to the establishment of the end determination condition.

If the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3515: Yes), i.e., if it is time to return the electric device 315b to its standby position, which is the return position, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3516. On the other hand, if the value of the open time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3515: No), i.e., if it is not time to return the electric device 315b to its standby position, which is the return position, the MPU 41 terminates the normal winning game control process.

<Steps S3516 to S3518>
If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3515: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric device 315b to its standby position (return side), the MPU 41 returns the electric device 315b, which is a movable body, from its operating position (drive side) to its standby position (return side) (step S3516). This closes the second winning hole 315, which is the starting ball entry section, and restricts the entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315. The MPU 41 then sets an electric device closing command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric device 315b has been closed (step S3517), and sets the electric device open flag, which indicates that the electric device 315b is open, to off (step S3518), thereby terminating the normal winning game control process.

The electric reel close command is sent to the audio and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio and lamp control device 5 can end the performance indicating that the electric reel, executed in the pattern display unit 341, for example, has been opened, based on the electric reel close command.

In addition, in this embodiment, we have described a case where the movable electric device 315b is driven to the drive side position only once during a single normal winning game (where the second winning slot 315 is opened once). However, the electric device 315b may be driven to the drive side position multiple times during a single normal winning game (where the second winning slot 315 is opened multiple times). In this case, an end determination is made to determine whether the end determination condition for ending the normal winning game is met when the second winning slot 315 is closed (when the movable electric device 315b is in the standby position, which is the return position). The end determination condition for the normal winning game is set when the second winning slot 315 is opened, and the end determination is not made when the second winning slot 315 is opened. This is because the normal winning game cannot be ended while the second winning slot 315 is open, and therefore, from a control perspective, the second winning slot 315 would be opened even though the normal winning game had ended, causing a malfunction. Furthermore, addressing this problem through control would result in an increase in unnecessary control. Therefore, by making an end determination as to whether the end determination condition for ending a normal winning game is met when the second winning opening 315 is closed (when the electric device 315b, which is a movable body, is in the standby position, which is the return position), it becomes possible to efficiently perform movement control and end control of the electric device 315b, which is a movable body. Of course, even if the electric device 315b, which is a movable body, is driven to the drive side position only once during one normal winning game, an end determination as to whether the end determination condition for ending a normal winning game is met when the second winning opening 315 is closed may also be performed.

[Special game control processing]
246 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of Fig. 241. In the special symbol game control process, the memory contents of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated, and the progress of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, for example, the variable display and stationary display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363, are controlled. The special symbol game control process will be described below with reference to Fig. 246.

<Step S3601>
246, in step S3601, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being executed, is on. In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 249 described later, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S3906 when a jackpot game starts, and is set to off in step S3552 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3601: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, if a jackpot game is being played, the special symbol game will not start. Of course, the special symbol game may also be started while a jackpot game is being played.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3601: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3602.

<Step S3602>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3601: No), i.e., if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol variable display flag, which indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is being executed), is on (step S3602). The special symbol variable display flag is set to on in step S3807 when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the special symbol variable start processing of FIG. 248 described later, and is set to off in step S3609 when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in a static manner in the special symbol game control processing.

If the special symbol variable display flag is on (step S3602: Yes), i.e., if the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3606. On the other hand, if the special symbol variable display flag is off (step S3602: No), i.e., if the jackpot game is not being played but the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3603.

<Step S3603>
If the special pattern change display flag is off (step S3602: No), that is, if the special pattern is not being displayed in a changing manner when a jackpot game is not being played (special pattern game is being played), the MPU 41 determines whether both the first special pattern reserved number N stored in the first special pattern reserved number memory area NAA of the special pattern reserved storage area 412b and the second special pattern reserved number M stored in the second special pattern reserved number memory area NAB are 0 (step S3603).

If both the first special symbol reserved number N and the second special symbol reserved number M are 0 (step S3603: Yes), i.e., if neither the right to play the first special symbol game nor the right to play the second special symbol game is reserved, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process. On the other hand, if either the first special symbol reserved number N or the second special symbol reserved number M is not 0 (step S3603: No), i.e., if at least one of the right to play the first special symbol game and the right to play the second special symbol game is reserved, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3604.

<Step S3604>
If either the first special symbol reserved number N or the second special symbol reserved number M is not 0 (step S3603: No), that is, if there is at least one of the reserved right to play the first special symbol game and the reserved right to play the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol data setting process for the data of the special symbol win/loss information (special symbol data) stored in the special symbol reserved storage area 412b (step S3604), and proceeds to step S3605. Details of the special symbol data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 247.

<Step S3605>
In step S3605, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol variation start process to start the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 (to execute the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game), and then ends the special symbol game control process. Details of the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 248.

<Step S3606>
If the special symbol variation display flag is on (step S3602: Yes), that is, if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed (a special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol variation display time for the first special symbol or the second special symbol set in the special symbol variation pattern setting process of step S3804 in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 248 described later has elapsed since the start of the display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game (step S3606). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to stop the display of the special symbol being displayed and end the special symbol game.

If the special symbol variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first or second special symbol (step S3606: Yes), i.e., if it is time to stop the display of the currently variable special symbol and end the special symbol game, the processing proceeds to step S3607. On the other hand, if the variable display time has not elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first or second special symbol (step S3606: No), i.e., if it is not time to stop the display of the currently variable special symbol and end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 ends the special symbol game control processing.

<Steps S3607 to S3609>
When the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first or second special symbol (step S3606: Yes), i.e., when it is time to stop the variable display of the special symbol and end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 stops the special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 in a manner corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game (step S3607).The MPU 41 then turns on a special symbol variable stop flag indicating that the first or second special symbol has been stopped (step S3608), and turns off a special symbol variable display flag indicating that the first or second special symbol is being changed (the special symbol game is being executed) (step S3609), thereby ending the special symbol game control process.

[Special drawing data setting process]
Here, Fig. 247 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special drawing data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3604 of Fig. 246. In the special drawing data setting process, the memory contents of the special drawing reserved storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the special drawing data setting process will be described with reference to Fig. 247.

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 247, in step S3701, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of second special symbols reserved M for the second special symbol game is 0. If the number of second special symbols reserved M is 0 (step S3701: Yes), i.e., there are no second special symbols reserved for the second special symbol game but there are first special symbols reserved for the first special symbol game (see step S3603 in the special symbol game control processing of FIG. 246), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3702. On the other hand, if the number of second special symbols reserved M is not 0 (step S3701: No), i.e., there are second special symbols reserved for the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3705. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of second special symbols reserved M for the second special symbol game is 0, thereby prioritizing the start of the second special symbol game over the first special symbol game.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol game is started before the first special symbol game, but the first special symbol game may be started before the second special symbol game. Alternatively, the special symbol games may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (reserved order) the first or second special symbol game, which is the starting ball entry section, and either the first or second special symbol game may be executed. Furthermore, without prioritizing the start of the first or second special symbol game, the first and second special symbol games may be executed independently of each other, and the first and second special symbol games may be executed simultaneously (so-called simultaneous special symbol fluctuations).

<Steps S3702 to S3704>
If the second special symbol reservation number M is 0 (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol reservation number N stored in the first special symbol reservation number memory area NAA of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA (step S3702), and moves the special symbol hit/miss information from the first reservation area REA1 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA to the special symbol execution area AE (step S3703). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol hit/miss information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA one by one (step S3704). Specifically, in step S3704, the special symbol winning/losing information of the second reserved area REA2 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA is moved to the first reserved area REA1, the special symbol winning/losing information of the third reserved area REA3 is moved to the second reserved area REA2, and the special symbol winning/losing information of the fourth reserved area REA4 is moved to the third reserved area REA3. When the processing of step S3704 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3708.

<Steps S3705 to S3707>
If the second special symbol reservation number M is not 0 (step S3701: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the second special symbol reservation number M stored in the second special symbol reservation number memory area NAB of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB (step S3705), and moves the special symbol hit/miss information from the first reservation area REB1 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB to the special symbol execution area AE (step S3706). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol hit/miss information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB one by one (step S3707). Specifically, in step S3707, the special drawing win/loss information in the second reserved area REB2 is moved to the first reserved area REB1, the special drawing win/loss information in the third reserved area REB3 is moved to the second reserved area REB2, and the special drawing win/loss information in the fourth reserved area REB4 is moved to the third reserved area REB3. When the processing of step S3707 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3708.

<Step S3708>
In step S3708, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol shift command in the RAM 412, which indicates that the special symbol win/loss information of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA, or the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB, and ends the special symbol data setting process. This special symbol shift command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can change the number of reserved symbols displayed corresponding to the first special symbol reserve or the second special symbol reserve displayed on the symbol display unit 341 based on the special symbol shift command.

[Special chart change start processing]
248 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol variation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S3605 of Fig. 246. In the special symbol variation start processing, the first special game or the second special symbol game (special symbol game) is started by starting the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363, and various processes associated with the start of the special symbol game are executed. The special symbol variation start processing will be described below with reference to Fig. 248.

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 248, in step S3801, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state is a high probability mode, i.e., a high probability mode. Whether the gaming state is a high probability mode or not is determined by whether a high probability mode gaming state flag, which indicates that the gaming state is a high probability mode, is set to on. In the gaming state transition process described above, the high probability mode gaming state flag is set to on when the gaming state is transitioned from a high probability mode jackpot gaming state to a high probability mode gaming state in step S2317 of FIG. 34, and is set to off when the gaming state is transitioned from a high probability mode gaming state to a high probability mode jackpot gaming state or a normal jackpot gaming state in step S2309 of FIG.

If the gaming state is a high-probability mode, or a variable-rate gaming state (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3802. If the gaming state is not a high-probability mode, or a variable-rate gaming state (step S3801: No), i.e., if the gaming state is a low-probability mode, or a time-limited gaming state or a normal gaming state, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3803.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
If the game state is a high probability mode, which is a special game state (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the high probability mode hit/miss table (see Figure 237 (B)) saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 of the game setting value change processing of Figure 35 described above, and performs a hit/miss judgment based on that high probability mode hit/miss table (step S3802).

On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a high-probability mode, or a guaranteed bonus gaming state (step S3801: No), that is, if the gaming state is a low-probability mode, or a time-limited gaming state or a normal gaming state, the MPU 41 reads the low-probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 237(A)) saved according to the gaming setting value in step S2410 of the gaming setting value change processing in FIG. 35 described above, and performs a hit/miss determination based on that low-probability mode hit/miss table (step S3803).

In steps S3802 and S3803, a win/loss determination is made based on the high probability mode win/loss table or low probability mode win/loss table saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 of the game setting value change process in Figure 35 described above. However, in steps S3802 and S3803, the game setting value saved in step S2408 of the game setting value change process in Figure 35 described above may be read, and the high probability mode win/loss table or low probability mode win/loss table corresponding to that game setting value may be selected one by one to make a win/loss determination.

<Step S3804>
When a win/loss determination is made in step S3802 or S3803, the MPU 41 sets the variable display time of the first special pattern or the second special pattern in the first special pattern display section 362 or the second special pattern display section 363 of the main display section 36 during the special pattern game as the special pattern variable pattern (step S3804).

The variation display time (special symbol variation pattern) of the first or second special symbol is set based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 238(A)) if the result of the hit/miss determination in step S3802 or S3803 is a normal jackpot; it is set based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 238(B)) if the result of the hit/miss determination in step S3802 or S3803 is a special jackpot; and it is set based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the special jackpot variation table (see FIG. 238(C)) if the result of the hit/miss determination in step S3802 or S3803 is a miss.

<Step S3805>
In step S3805, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a special symbol variation pattern command including the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, which is the result of the win/loss determination in step S3802 or S3803, and the special symbol variation pattern set in step S3804, and proceeds to step S3806. The special symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main processing (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to execute a special symbol game presentation on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the special symbol variation pattern command.

As mentioned above, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "normal jackpot," the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a special chart variation pattern command one of "A01" to "A03," in which "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is added to the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03," as a special chart variation pattern command. Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R variable probability jackpot," the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a special chart variation pattern command one of "B01" to "B03," in which "B" indicating that it is a 5R variable probability jackpot is added to the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03." Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "16R variable probability jackpot," the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a special chart variation pattern command one of "C01" to "C03," in which "C" indicating that it is a 16R variable probability jackpot is added to the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03." Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "miss," the MPU 41 sets one of the special chart variation patterns "01" to "08" with a "D" added to indicate a miss, "D01" to "D08," as a special chart variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "miss," the MPU 41 includes information indicating the type of miss (reach for a miss before or after, reach for a miss other than a miss before or after, or complete miss) in the special chart variation pattern command.

<Step S3806>
In step S3806, the MPU 41 starts the special pattern game by starting the changing display of the special pattern in the first special pattern display section 362 or the second special pattern display section 363 of the main display section 36, and then proceeds to step S3807.

When the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the special symbol, it adds 1 to the "cumulative number of jackpot draws" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss determination based on the low probability mode win/loss table in step S3803 is a miss, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "number of consecutive losses" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and if the result is a jackpot, it clears the "number of consecutive losses" to 0.

<Step S3807>
In step S3807, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol variable display flag, which indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (a special symbol game is being executed), to ON, and proceeds to step S3808. The special symbol variable display flag is referenced in step S3602 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 246 to determine whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (a special symbol game is being executed) in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36.

<Step S3808>
In step S3808, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol variation stop flag, which indicates that the variation of the special symbol has stopped (the special symbol game has ended), to OFF, and proceeds to step S3809. The special symbol variation stop flag is set to ON when the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display unit 36 is stopped and displayed in step S3608 in the special symbol game control processing of Fig. 246, and is referenced to determine whether or not it is the timing to start a jackpot game in step S3902 of the jackpot game control processing of Fig. 249 described later.

<Step S3809>
In step S3809, the MPU 41 determines whether a time-saving game state flag indicating a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) is on. The time-saving game state flag is set to on when the normal jackpot game ends in step S2321 of Fig. 34 in the game state transition process described above, and is set to off when the game state transitions from the time-saving game state to the jackpot game state or the normal game state in step S2310 of Fig. 33 or step S2325 of Fig. 34.

If the time-saving game state flag is on (step S3809: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3810. On the other hand, if the time-saving game state flag is off (step S3809: Yes), i.e., if the game is not in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 terminates the special chart variation start process.

<Step S3810>
If the time-saving game state flag is on (step S3809: Yes), that is, if the game is in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving count counter, which indicates the remaining number of special game plays that can be executed in the time-saving game state (step S3810), and ends the special game change start process. Note that the time-saving count counter is set when the game state is transitioned from the jackpot game state to the time-saving game state in step S2320 of the game state transition process in Figure 34 described above.

In this embodiment, the time-saving counter is set when the game state transitions from a jackpot game state to a time-saving game state, but the time-saving counter may also be set when the game state transitions from a jackpot game state to a probability variable game state. In other words, by setting the maximum number of special game plays executed in the probability variable game state to a finite number, the gaming machine 10 can be configured as a so-called ST machine.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can also be configured to transition from the jackpot game state to the normal game state without transitioning to the time-saving game state when the normal jackpot game ends, which is executed based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a normal jackpot. In this case, the time-saving count counter will not be set after the normal jackpot game ends.

[Jackpot Game Control Processing]
249 to 252 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control process executed in step S1407 of the main process in Fig. 241. In the jackpot game control process, processes are executed to control the progress of the jackpot game, such as a movable body control process that opens and closes the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body provided in the variable winning opening 316. The jackpot game control process will be described below with reference to Figs. 249 to 252.

<Step S3901>
249, in step S3901, the MPU 41 determines whether a jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being executed, is on. The jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S3906 of the jackpot game control processing when a jackpot game is started, and is set to off in step S3952 of the jackpot game control processing when the jackpot game is ended.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3901: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3911. On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3901: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3902.

<Step S3902>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3901: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether a special symbol variation stop flag, which indicates that a special symbol has been statically displayed, is on. The special symbol variation stop flag is set to on in step S3608 of the special symbol game control processing of FIG. 246 when a special symbol has been statically displayed, and is set to off in step S3808 of the special symbol variation start processing of FIG. 248 when the variable display of the special symbol has begun. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether the timing is right to start a jackpot game by determining whether a special symbol game that was started when a jackpot game was not being executed has ended.

If the special symbol variation stop flag is on (step S3902: Yes), i.e., if the jackpot game can be started because the special symbol is statically displayed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3903. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation stop flag is off (step S3902: No), i.e., if the jackpot game cannot be started because the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

In this embodiment, the jackpot game does not start (execute) when the special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner (while the special symbol game is being executed), but it may be possible to start (execute) the jackpot game while the special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner (while the special symbol game is being executed). For example, the jackpot game may be started (executed) while the first special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner, and conversely, the jackpot game may be started (executed) while the second special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner. Specifically, by allowing the first and second special symbols to change simultaneously as described above, the second special symbol game may be executed while the jackpot game for the first special symbol game is being executed, and the first special symbol game may be executed while the jackpot game for the second special symbol game is being executed. Furthermore, the jackpot game for the first special symbol game and the jackpot game for the second special symbol game may be executed simultaneously, or if the start condition for one of the jackpot games for the first special symbol game and the jackpot game for the second special symbol game is met while the other jackpot game is being executed, the other jackpot game may start after the completion of one jackpot game.

<Step S3903>
If the special symbol variation stop flag is on (step S3902: Yes), that is, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery by the lottery process for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot. Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot is determined based on the special symbol win/loss information for the jackpot lottery stored in the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b set in the RAM 41, for example.

If the result of the jackpot lottery performed by the lottery process for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3904. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is not a jackpot (step S3903: No), i.e., if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Step S3904>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command that notifies the sound and lamp control device 5 of the start of the jackpot game and the type of jackpot game (probability jackpot game or normal jackpot game) (step S3904), and proceeds to step S3905. The jackpot game start command is transmitted to the sound and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main processing (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound and lamp control device 5 to execute jackpot game effects, such as display effects executed by the symbol display unit 341 according to the jackpot game type, based on the jackpot game start command.

<Step S3905>
In step S3905, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is to be started, to ON, and proceeds to step S3906. The jackpot game start flag is referenced when determining whether to transition the game state to a variable jackpot game state or a normal jackpot game state in step S2301 of the game state transition process in FIG. 33 described above.

<Step S3906>
In step S3906, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being executed, to ON, and proceeds to step S3907. The jackpot game in progress flag is referenced in step S3901 of the jackpot game control processing, as well as in step S3203 of the regular game control processing in FIG. 242 and step S3601 of the special game control processing in FIG. 246, in order to determine whether a jackpot game is being executed.

<Step S3907>
In step S3907, the MPU 41 executes a movable body control process to set a subtractive round number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds to be played based on information (round number information) set corresponding to the maximum number of rounds to be played in the opening/closing execution mode in accordance with the type of jackpot, and then proceeds to step S3908. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round number counter to "5" if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, and sets the round number counter to "16" if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot. As a result, in round play, the movable body control process is executed in which the opening/closing door 319, which is the movable body, is reciprocated between a standby position, which is the return side position, and an operating position, which is the drive side position, by a number of times corresponding to the type of jackpot, based on the information set as the round number counter in accordance with the type of jackpot, and a continuous operation is performed in which the timing at which the end determination condition is met is variable depending on the type of jackpot.

In this embodiment, the round number counter is set as a subtractive counter, but the round number counter may also be set as an additive counter. If the round number counter is set as an additive counter, for example, when the value of the round number counter reaches a number corresponding to the maximum number of rounds played, the termination determination condition for the opening/closing execution mode is met, and the opening/closing execution mode is terminated when the MPU 51 determines that the termination determination condition has been met. In other words, when the termination determination condition for the opening/closing execution mode, whose timing of fulfillment is indefinite, is determined to have been met, the MPU 41 executes movable body control processing to terminate the continuous operation of the movable body, the opening/closing door 319.

<Step S3908>
In step S3908, the MPU 41 sets an opening start command to notify the voice and lamp control device 5 that an opening of a jackpot game has started, and proceeds to step S3909. The opening start command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to start opening effects such as display effects executed in the symbol display unit 341 based on the opening start command.

<Step S3909>
In step S3909, the MPU 41 sets a subtractive opening time counter as information indicating the remaining time of the opening based on information (opening time information) set corresponding to the maximum opening time executed in the jackpot game, and proceeds to step S3910. The opening time counter is referenced in step S3913 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 250 to determine whether it is time to end the opening.

In this embodiment, the opening time counter is set as a subtractive counter, but it may also be set as an additive counter. If the opening time counter is set as an additive counter, for example, when the value of the opening time counter reaches a maximum value set corresponding to the maximum opening time, the opening termination determination condition is met, and the opening is terminated when the MPU 41 determines that the termination determination condition has been met.

<Step S3910>
In step S3910, the MPU 41 sets an opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed to ON, and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening flag is referenced in step S3911 in the jackpot game control process to determine whether the opening is being executed.

<Step S3911>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3901: Yes), i.e., if the jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the opening in progress flag, which indicates that the opening is being played, is on (step S3911).

If the opening flag is on (step S3911: Yes), i.e., if opening is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3912 in FIG. 250. On the other hand, if the opening flag is off (step S3911: No), i.e., if opening is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3922.

<Steps S3912 and S3913>
If the opening in progress flag is on (step S3911: Yes), that is, if the opening is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter, which is information indicating the remaining time of the opening (step S3912), and performs an end determination to determine whether the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0, which is the end determination condition for the opening (step S3913), as shown in Fig. 250. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to end the opening.

If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3913: Yes), that is, if it is determined that it is time to end the opening based on the determination that the opening end determination condition is met, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3914. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3913: No), that is, if it is determined that it is not time to end the opening based on the determination that the opening end determination condition is not met, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3914 and S3915>
If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3913: Yes), that is, if it is determined that it is time to end the opening based on the end determination that the opening end determination condition is met, the MPU 41 sets an opening end command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game has ended (step S3914). The opening end command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to end opening effects, such as display effects executed in the symbol display unit 341, based on the opening end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the opening in progress flag to OFF, indicating that opening is in progress (step S3915), and proceeds to step S3916.

<Step S3916>
In step S3916, the MPU 41 sets an opening/closing execution mode start command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that an opening/closing execution mode in which multiple rounds (5 or 16) of gameplay are executed has begun, i.e., that the opening and closing of the opening/closing door 319, which is the continuous movement of the movable body, is executed in a movable state determined according to the type of jackpot, and then proceeds to step S3917. The opening/closing execution mode start command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see FIG. 241 ) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice and lamp control device 5 can start opening/closing execution mode effects, such as display effects executed in the symbol display unit 341, based on the opening/closing execution mode start command.

<Step S3917>
In step S3917, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command to notify the voice and lamp control device 5 that a round game will start, and proceeds to step S3918. The round game start command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 241 ) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to start a round game presentation, such as a display presentation executed in the symbol display unit 341, based on the round game start command, and also to display the number of rounds in each round game on the symbol display unit 341.

In this embodiment, a round game effect is executed individually for each round game, but the round game effect may execute a series of display effects in the open/close execution mode, and display the number of rounds in each round game in addition to the display effect. In this case, interval effects do not need to be executed between round games, and an effect displaying the number of rounds in the next round game to be executed may be executed as an interval effect.

<Steps S3918 and S3919>
In step S3918, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of a subtractive round number counter, which is information indicating the remaining number of rounds to be played in the opening and closing execution mode, and then executes a movable body control process to open the variable winning opening 316 by moving the opening and closing door 319, which is a movable body, from the standby position, which is the return side position, to the operating position, which is the drive side position (step S3919), and then transitions to step S3920.

<Steps S3920 and S3921>
In step S3920, the MPU 41 sets a round game in progress flag to ON, indicating that a round game is being played, and further executes a movable body control process (step S3921) that sets a subtractive round game time counter as information indicating the remaining time of the round game based on information about the round game time set corresponding to the maximum time of the round game (maximum movable time of the opening/closing door 319, which is the movable body), and then ends the jackpot game control process. The round game time counter is referenced in step S3924 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 351 to execute an end determination of whether or not an end determination condition for ending the round game upon the passage of a specified time in the movable body control process is met (returning the opening/closing door 319, which is the movable body, from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position).

In this embodiment, the round play time counter is set as a subtractive counter, but it may also be set as an additive counter. If the round play time counter is set as an additive counter, for example, in the movable body control process, when the value of the round play time counter reaches the maximum value set corresponding to the maximum round play time, the round play termination determination condition is met, and the round play is terminated when the MPU 41 determines that the termination determination condition has been met.

<Step S3922>
249, if the opening flag is off (step S3911: No), that is, if the opening is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the round game flag indicating that a round game is being executed is set to on (step S3922). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a round game is being executed.

If the round play in progress flag is on (step S3922: Yes), i.e., if a round play is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3923 in FIG. 251. On the other hand, if the round play in progress flag is off (step S3922: No), i.e., if a round play is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3926.

<Steps S3923 and S3924>
If the round game in progress flag is on (step S3922: Yes), that is, if a round game is being played, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of a round game time counter, which is information indicating the remaining time of the round game, as shown in Fig. 251. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3924). That is, as a movable body control process, the MPU 41 performs an end determination of whether an end determination condition is met for ending the round game upon the lapse of a specified time (returning the open/close door 319, which is a movable body, from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position).

If the value of the round play time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3924: Yes), that is, if the movable body control process determines that the round play will end due to the passage of a specified time and the establishment of an end determination condition for returning the movable body door 319 from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3928. On the other hand, if the value of the round play time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3924: No), that is, if the movable body control process determines that the round play will not end due to the non-establishment of an end determination condition for returning the movable body door 319 from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3925.

<Step S3925>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3924: No), that is, if it is determined that the round game will not end because the end determination condition for ending the round game due to the passage of a specified time (returning the movable opening/closing door 319 from the operating position which is the drive side position to the standby position which is the return side position) is not satisfied, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning opening 316 (step S3925). Whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning opening 316 is determined based on the winning detection information stored in RAM 412 when a game ball has entered the ball entry sensor 316a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17.

If a gaming ball has entered the variable winning opening 316 (step S3925: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3926; if a gaming ball has not entered the variable winning opening 316 (step S3925: No), the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3926 and S3927>
If a game ball enters the variable winning opening 316 (step S3925: Yes), the MPU 41 increments the value of an additive-type ball entry counter, which indicates the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning opening 316 during that round of play (step S3926). The MPU 41 then determines whether the value of the ball entry counter after the increment reaches 10 (step S3927), i.e., whether an end determination condition for ending the round of play (returning the movable body door 319 from its operating position, which is its drive side position, to its standby position, which is its return side position) is met, as a movable body control process. The end determination conditions for the round of play are the passage of a specified time and the entry of the maximum number of game balls into the variable winning opening 316. Since the timing of the fulfillment of the end determination condition for the round of play is uncertain, an end determination is performed during the round of play to determine whether any of these end determination conditions is met.

If the value of the ball entry counter after addition reaches 10 (step S3927: Yes), that is, if the termination judgment in the movable body control process determines that the termination judgment condition for ending the round of play due to the maximum number of game balls entering the variable winning opening 316 (returning the movable body opening door 319 from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position) is met, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3928. On the other hand, if the value of the ball entry counter after addition does not reach 10 (step S3927: No), that is, if the termination judgment in the movable body control process determines that the termination judgment condition for ending the round of play due to the maximum number of game balls entering the variable winning opening 316 (returning the movable body opening door 319 from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position) is not met, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

In this embodiment, the entered ball count counter is set as an additive counter, but it may also be set as a subtractive counter. If the entered ball count counter is set as a subtractive counter, for example, in the movable body control process, when the value of the entered ball count counter reaches the maximum value set corresponding to the maximum number of entered balls, the end determination condition for the round game is met, and the round game is ended when the MPU 41 makes an end determination that the end determination condition has been met.

<Step S3928>
If the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3924: Yes), or if the value of the ball number counter reaches 10 (step S3927: Yes), the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening by returning the opening/closing door 319, which is the movable body, from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position, as a movable body control process (step S3928), and proceeds to step S3929. In other words, if the MPU 41 determines that the end determination condition for ending the round game is met based on the end determination in the movable body control process, the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening 316 by returning the opening/closing door 319, which is the movable body, from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position, and ends the round game.

<Steps S3929 to S3931>
In step S3929, the MPU 41 sets a round game end command to notify the voice and lamp control device 5 that the round game is ending. The round game end command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 241 ) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to end the round game presentation, such as the display presentation executed in the symbol display unit 341, based on the round game end command.

Then, the MPU 41 clears the ball entry counter, which is information indicating the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning opening 316 during that round of play (step S3930), sets the round play in progress flag to off, indicating that a round of play is currently being played (step S3930), and proceeds to step S3932.

<Step S3932>
In step S3932, the MPU 41 performs an end determination as to whether the round number counter, which is information indicating the remaining number of rounds of play in the opening and closing execution mode, is 0 (step S3932), that is, as a movable body control process, whether the end determination condition for terminating the opening and closing execution mode is met.

If the round number counter is 0 (step S3932: Yes), that is, if the end determination in the movable body control process determines that the end determination condition for ending the opening and closing execution mode is met (there are no unexecuted rounds of play), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3941. On the other hand, if the round number counter is not 0 (step S3932: No), that is, if the end determination in the movable body control process determines that the end determination condition for ending the opening and closing execution mode is not met (there are unexecuted rounds of play), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3933.

The reason why the end determination condition for the opening/closing execution mode is set (opening on the 5th or 16th round) when the variable winning opening 316 is opened (when the opening/closing door 319 as a movable body is in the operating position, which is the drive side position) and the end determination is not performed when the variable winning opening 316 is opened is that the opening/closing execution mode cannot be ended while the variable winning opening 316 is open, so from a control perspective, the variable winning opening 316 would be opened even though the opening/closing execution mode had ended, causing a malfunction. Furthermore, addressing this malfunction through control would result in an increase in unnecessary control. Therefore, by performing an end determination to determine whether the end determination condition for ending the opening/closing execution mode is met when the variable winning opening 316 is closed (when the opening/closing door 319 as a movable body is in the standby position, which is the return side position), it is possible to efficiently control the movement and end control of the opening/closing door 319 as a movable body.

<Step S3933>
If the round number counter is not 0 (step S3932: No), that is, if it is determined that the termination determination condition for terminating the opening/closing execution mode is not satisfied (there is an unexecuted round of play) based on the termination determination in the movable body control process, the MPU 41 sets an interval start command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 of the start of an interval between rounds of play (step S3933), and proceeds to step S3934. The interval start command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 241 ) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to start interval effects, such as display effects, executed in the symbol display unit 341, based on the interval start command.

In this embodiment, interval effects such as display effects are executed during the intervals between rounds of play, but the interval effects may be omitted and round game effects such as display effects for the previously executed round of play may be executed continuously during the interval, or round game effects such as display effects for the next round of play may be executed.

<Steps S3934 and S3935>
In step S3934, the MPU 41 sets an interval flag to ON, which indicates that an interval between rounds of play is being executed.Then, the MPU 41 sets a subtractive interval time counter as information indicating the remaining time of the interval (step S3935), and ends the jackpot game control process.The interval time counter is referenced in step S3938 of FIG. 252 in the jackpot game control process as a movable body control process to determine whether or not an end determination condition for ending the interval (starting a round of play) is established.

<Step S3936>
249, if the round game in progress flag is off (step S3922: No), that is, if a round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the interval in progress flag, which indicates that an interval between round games is being executed, is on (step S3936). The interval in progress flag is set to on in step S3934 of Fig. 251 in the jackpot game control processing when an interval starts, and is set to off in step S3940 of Fig. 252 in the jackpot game control processing when the interval ends.

If the interval flag is on (step S3936: Yes), i.e., if an interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3937 in FIG. 252. On the other hand, if the interval flag is off (step S3936: No), i.e., if an interval between rounds is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3945.

<Steps S3937 and S3938>
If the interval flag is on (step S3936: Yes), that is, if an interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the interval time counter, which is information indicating the remaining time of the interval (step S3937), as shown in Fig. 252. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3938), that is, whether the end determination condition for ending the interval (starting a round of play) is established as an end determination in the movable body control processing.

If the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3938: Yes), that is, if it is determined in the end determination of the movable body control process that the end determination condition for ending the interval (starting a round of play) is met, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3939. On the other hand, if the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3938: No), that is, if it is determined in the end determination of the movable body control process that the end determination condition for ending the interval (starting a round of play) is not met, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3939 and S3940>
If the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3938: Yes), that is, if it is determined in the end determination in the movable body control processing that the end determination condition for ending the interval (starting a round of play) is met, the MPU 41 sets an interval end command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that the interval will end. The interval end command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see FIG. 241 ) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to end interval effects such as display effects executed in the symbol display unit 341 based on the interval end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the interval flag, indicating that an interval between rounds of play, to OFF (step S3940), and proceeds to step S3917 described above. By proceeding to step S3917 in FIG. 250 described above, steps S3917 to S3921 related to the start of rounds of play are executed, and the jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Step S3941>
Returning to FIG. 251 , if the round number counter is 0 (step S3932: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the termination determination condition for terminating the opening and closing execution mode is met (there are no unexecuted rounds of play) based on the termination determination in the movable body control process, the MPU 41 sets an opening and closing execution mode termination command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that the opening and closing execution mode for the jackpot game is to be terminated (step S3941), and the process proceeds to step S3942. The opening and closing execution mode termination command is sent to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice and lamp control device 5 can terminate the round game effects (opening and closing execution mode effects), such as the display effects executed in the symbol display unit 341, based on the opening and closing execution mode termination command.

<Step S3942>
In step S3942, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command to notify the voice and lamp control device 5 that the ending of the jackpot game will start, and proceeds to step S3943. The ending start command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to start ending effects such as display effects executed in the symbol display unit 341 based on the ending start command.

<Steps S3943 and S3944>
In step S3943, the MPU 41 sets an ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed to ON. Then, the MPU 41 sets a subtractive ending time counter as information indicating the remaining time of the ending (step S3944), and ends the jackpot game control process. The ending time counter is referenced in step S3947 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 252 to determine whether or not to end the ending (jackpot game) when the ending (jackpot game) end determination condition is met.

In this embodiment, the ending time counter is set as a subtractive counter, but it may also be set as an additive counter. If the ending time counter is set as an additive counter, for example, when the value of the ending time counter reaches a maximum value set corresponding to the maximum opening time, the ending end determination condition is met, and the ending is ended when the MPU 41 makes an end determination that the end determination condition has been met.

<Step S3945>
Returning to FIG. 249, if the interval flag is off (step S3936: No), i.e., if the interval between rounds is not being executed, it is determined whether the ending flag, which indicates that the ending is being executed, is on (step S3945).

If the ending in progress flag is on (step S3945: Yes), i.e., if the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3946 in FIG. 252. On the other hand, if the ending in progress flag is off (step S3945: No), i.e., if the ending is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3950.

<Steps S3946 and S3947>
If the ending flag is on (step S3945: Yes), that is, if the ending is being performed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the ending time counter, which is information indicating the remaining time of the ending, as shown in FIG. 252 (step S3946). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3947). That is, the MPU 41 performs an end determination by determining whether the ending end determination condition is met.

If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3947: Yes), i.e., if the end judgment determines that the ending end judgment condition is met, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3948. On the other hand, if the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3947: No), i.e., if the end judgment determines that the ending end judgment condition is not met, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3948 and S3949>
If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3947: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 sets an ending end command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that the ending of the jackpot game is to end. The ending end command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to end ending effects such as display effects executed in the symbol display unit 341 based on the ending end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending flag, which indicates that the ending is being executed, to OFF (step S3949), and ends the jackpot game control process.

<Step S3950>
249 , if the ending flag is off (step S3945: No), that is, if the game is not in the opening mode, the round mode, the interval mode, or the ending mode, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game end command to notify the sound and lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is ending (step S3950), and proceeds to step S3951. The jackpot game end command is transmitted to the sound and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 241 ) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound and lamp control device 5 to end the jackpot game effects, such as the display effects executed in the symbol display unit 341, based on the jackpot game end command.

<Steps S3951 and S3952>
In step S3951, a jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game is over is set to ON. The jackpot game end flag is referenced in step S2312 of the game state transition process in FIG. 34 to determine whether to transition from the jackpot game state to the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state).

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is being played, to OFF (step S3952), and ends the jackpot game control process.

[Processing of the voice and lamp control device 5]
Next, with reference to Figures 253 to 287, we will explain the processing performed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5.

In another embodiment, some or all of the processing performed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 in this embodiment may be performed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In addition, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also performs control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, startup processing when the voice lamp control device 5 is started up, and NMI interrupt processing in the event of a power outage, but a description of these processes will be omitted.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of voice lamp control device 5]
253 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes the sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process with a cycle of 1 msec, for example.

As shown in FIG. 253, in the sub-timer interrupt processing, the MPU 51 executes counter update processing (step S2701), operation detection processing (step S2702), command determination processing (step S2703), special game presentation control processing (step S2704), and jackpot game presentation control processing (step S2705).

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2701), the MPU 51 updates the effect pattern type counter, the first stop symbol type counter, the variable display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the effect type counter and the first stop symbol type counter, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values. The effect pattern type counter is used to determine the variable type (effect pattern) based on the special symbol variable pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. The first stop symbol type counter is used to determine the type of decorative symbol that will be stopped first based on the special symbol variable pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Meanwhile, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the variable display counter. This variable display counter is used to measure the variable display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time reaches 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variation display counter, it is possible to know the remaining variation display time, whether a variation is in progress, whether the variation display on the pattern display section 341 has ended, and so on.

[Operation detection process]
Next, we will explain an example of the procedure for the operation detection process executed in step S2702 of the sub timer interrupt process in Fig. 253. Here, Fig. 254 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the operation detection process.

As shown in FIG. 254, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 executes operation button operation detection process (step S4001), operation detection pattern determination process (step S4002), selection button operation detection process (step S4003), selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S4004), decision button operation detection process (step S4005), and decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S4006).

[Operation button operation detection process]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S4001 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 41, whereby whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated is determined at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt period of the sub-timer interrupt process. Here, FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIG. 255.

<Steps S4101 to S4103>
255, in the operation button operation detection process, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag (step S4101). Next, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag (step S4102). After that, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the third detection flag to the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a (step S4103), and ends the operation detection process.

In this way, in the operation button operation detection process, steps S4101 to S4103 are executed, and the operation states of the most recent three operations at 1 msec intervals are stored in RAM 512 as the first to third detection flags as the operation history of the operation button 20. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the operation state two operations ago is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern determination process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 254 , in the operation detection pattern determination process of step S4002 in the operation detection process, an operation pattern flag is set to determine the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. The operation pattern flags consist of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of on and off of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 is continuing (see FIG. 257(A)). When only the second operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has started (see FIG. 257(A)). When only the third operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has ended (see FIG. 257(A)). When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has not been performed (see FIG. 257(A)). Here, Fig. 256 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for operation detection pattern determination processing. Fig. 257(A) is a table showing the relationship between the detection pattern and the operation status for the operation button 20. Hereinafter, the operation button operation detection processing will be described with reference to Fig. 256 and Fig. 257(A).

<Step S4201>
256 , in the operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines whether a first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three operations ago is set to on (step S4201). If the first operation detection flag is on (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4202, and if the first operation detection flag is off (step S4201: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4205.

<Step S4202>
If the first operation detection flag is on (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether a second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two operations ago is set to on (step S4202). If the second operation detection flag is on (step S4202: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4203, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S4202: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4208.

<Step S4203>
If the second operation detection flag is on (step S4202: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is set to on (step S4203). If the third operation detection flag is on (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4204, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S4203: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4210.

<Step S4204>
If the third operation detection flag is on (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to on and the second and third operation pattern flags to off (step S4204), and terminates the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation patterns "ON,""ON," and "ON" occur as three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to on and sets the second and third operation pattern flags to off (see FIG. 257(A)). The first operation pattern flag can be used as an indicator for determining whether the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to on, the MPU 41 may set a continuation operation button operation command in the RAM 412 and transmit this operation button operation continuation command to the voice lamp control device 5. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to determine that the operation of the operation button 20 is continuing, and therefore, the duration for which the operation button 20 is being continuously operated can be determined based on the number of consecutive transmissions of the operation button operation continuation command. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 20 based on the time that the operation button 20 has been continuously operated, making it possible to execute an operation button performance based on a long press operation.

<Step S4205>
If the first operation detection flag is off (step S4201: No), the MPU 41 determines whether a second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two operations ago is on (step S4205). If the second operation detection flag is on (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4206, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S4205: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4210.

<Step S4206>
If the second operation detection flag is on (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is on (step S4206). If the third operation detection flag is on (step S4206: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4207, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S4206: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4210.

<Step S4207>
If the third operation detection flag is on (step S4206: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to on and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to off (step S4207). That is, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to on and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to off (see FIG. 257(A)), and terminates the operation detection pattern determination process. The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the operation button 20 has started). In this way, by using the second operation pattern flag to determine whether the operation button 20 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, three operation states of the operation button 20 are reflected, thereby preventing erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as radio waves or static electricity, and preventing the start of operation of the operation button 20 from being reflected in the performance display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S4208>
If the second operation detection flag is off (step S4202: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is on (step S4208). If the third operation detection flag is on (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4210, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S4208: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4209.

<Step S4209>
If the second operation detection flag is off (step S4208: No), the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to on and the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to off (step S4209), and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation patterns of "ON,""OFF," and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to on and sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to off (see FIG. 257(A)). The third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (whether operation of the operation button 20 has ended).

<Step S4210>
If the third operation detection flag is off (step S4203: No), if the second operation detection flag is off (step S4205: No), if the third operation detection flag is off (step S4206: No), or if the third operation detection flag is on (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to off (step S4210) and terminates the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, if an operation pattern other than "OFF,""OFF," and "OFF" occurs as the three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third operation pattern flags to off (see FIG. 257A). Note that if all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operated state.

[Selection button operation detection process]
Returning to the explanation of Figure 254, in the selection button operation detection process (step S4003), the MPU 41 executes up selection button operation process, down selection button operation process, left selection button operation process, and right selection button operation process.

<Up selection button operation processing>
In the up selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the up selection button 211 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the up selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of Fig. 255, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the up selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "up selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of Fig. 255.

<Down selection button operation processing>
In the lower selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, the lower selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of Fig. 255, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the lower selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "lower selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of Fig. 255.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the left selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of Fig. 255, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the left selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "left selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of Fig. 255.

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the right selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of Fig. 255, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the right selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "right selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of Fig. 255.

[Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process]
Returning to the explanation of Figure 254, in the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S4004), the MPU 41 executes an up selection operation detection pattern determination process, a down selection operation detection pattern determination process, a left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and a right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Up Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process>
In the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets an up operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the up selection button 211 from the operation history of the up selection button 211 determined based on the first up selection operation detection flag, the second up selection operation detection flag, and the third up selection operation detection flag. Here, the up selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 256 , and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "up selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "up selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 256 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 257(B), in the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, if the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs as three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the first up selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second up selection operation pattern flag and the third up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first up selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator for determining whether the operation state of the up selection button 211 is continuing.

In addition, when the operation patterns "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the second up selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first up selection operation pattern flag and the third up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second up selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the up selection button 211 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the up selection button 211 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the third up selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first up selection operation pattern flag and the second up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third up selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator for determining whether the up selection button 211 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether operation of the up selection button 211 has ended).

Furthermore, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF," "OFF," and "OFF," occurs as the three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third up selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third up selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the up selection button 211 is in a non-operated state.

<Down Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process>
In the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a down operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the down selection button 212 from the operation history of the down selection button 212 determined based on the first down selection operation detection flag, the second down selection operation detection flag, and the down selection operation detection flag. Here, the down selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 256 , and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "down selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "down selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 256 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 257(C), in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, if the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs as three operation states of the down selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the first down selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second down selection operation pattern flag and the third down selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first down selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator for determining whether the operation state of the down selection button 212 is continuing.

In addition, when the operation patterns "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the lower selection button 212 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the lower selection button 212 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the lower selection button 212 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (whether operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended).

In addition, if the three operation patterns of the lower selection button 212 are "OFF," "OFF," "OFF," or any other operation pattern other than those described above, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third lower selection operation detection flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in a non-operated state.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the left selection button 213 from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. Here, the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 256 , and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "left selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "left selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 256 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 257(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, if the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the first left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first left selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continuing.

In addition, when the operation patterns "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the left selection button 213 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (whether operation of the left selection button 213 has ended).

Furthermore, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF," "OFF," and "OFF," occurs as the three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operated state.

<Right Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the right selection button 214 from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 256 , and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "right selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" can be read as the "right selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 256 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 257(E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, if the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the first right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first right selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator for determining whether the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continuing.

In addition, when the operation patterns "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the right selection button 214 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (whether operation of the right selection button 214 has ended).

Furthermore, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF," "OFF," and "OFF," occurs as the three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in a non-operated state.

[Decision button operation detection process]
Returning to the explanation of Fig. 254, in the decision button operation detection process (step S4005), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the decision button 21B and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the decision button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 255, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the decision button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "decision button operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 255.

[Decision Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process]
In the deciding operation detection pattern determination process (step S4006), the MPU 41 sets an operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the deciding button 21B from the operation history of the deciding button 21B determined based on the first deciding operation detection flag, the second deciding operation detection flag, and the third deciding operation detection flag. Here, the deciding operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 255 , and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the deciding operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "deciding operation detection flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 255 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 257(F), in the decision operation detection pattern determination process, if the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs as three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the first decision operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second decision operation pattern flag and the third decision operation pattern flag to OFF. The first decision operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator for determining whether the operation state of the decision button 21B is continuing.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the Confirm button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the second Confirm operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and third Confirm operation pattern flags to OFF. The second Confirm operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the Confirm button 21B has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the Confirm button 21B has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the Confirm button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the third Confirm operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first Confirm operation pattern flag and the second Confirm operation pattern flag to OFF. The third Confirm operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator for determining whether the Confirm button 21B has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (whether operation of the Confirm button 21B has ended).

Furthermore, if the three operation states of the decision button 21B are "OFF," "OFF," "OFF," or any other operation pattern other than those described above, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the decision button 21B is in a non-operated state.

[Command Determination Process]
Next, there will be described an example of the procedure for the command determination process executed in step S2703 of the sub-timer interrupt process in Fig. 253. Here, Fig. 258 and Fig. 259 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the command determination process.

<Step S4301>
258, in the command determination process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4 (step S4301). If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S4301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4302. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S4301: No), the command determination process ends.

Note that commands received from the main control unit 4 are stored in the unprocessed command storage area of RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received by referencing the unprocessed command storage area. Furthermore, if a command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have been received in step S4301 and is to be processed, it is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area and stored, for example, in a processing work storage area.

<Step S4302>
When a command is received (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command (step S4302). The special symbol variation pattern command is a command that indicates the variation display time of the special symbol (special symbol variation pattern) in the special symbol game and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery.

Here, if the received command is a special chart variation pattern command (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4303; if the received command is not a special chart variation pattern command (step S4302: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4307.

<Steps S4303 and S4304>
If the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a stop symbol combination setting process (step S4303) and a variation type (presentation pattern) setting process (step S4304) based on the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For details of the stop symbol combination setting process, see Figures 260 and 261, and for details of the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process,
The following description will be given with reference to Figures 262 to 275.

<Step S4305>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in Fig. 258, in step S4305, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the received special symbol variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the special symbol variable pattern command. The variable display counter is then decremented by one in the counter update process of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt process in Fig. 253, and the MPU 51 can determine whether the symbol variable display is in progress, the remaining time of the variable display time, etc., based on the variable display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variable display has ended when the variable display counter reaches 0.

<Step S4306>
In step S4306, the MPU 51 outputs to the display control device 6 the content of the stopped symbol combination of decorative symbols determined in step S4303 of the command determination process and a display variation pattern command for identifying the effect pattern type set in step S4304, and then terminates the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the effect pattern type and the stopped symbol combination of decorative symbols. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores variable images and effect images of decorative symbols corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes display effects such as variable displays and effect displays on the symbol display unit 341 according to the stopped symbol combination, variation type, and effect type of decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variable display of multiple decorative symbols (e.g., three) until a preset variable display time has elapsed, and causes the multiple decorative symbols to display statically in sequence. While the variable decorative symbols are being displayed, various effects corresponding to the type of variation (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27, etc.

In addition, when the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, it sets, for example, a special game performance flag to ON. This special game performance flag is a flag that indicates that a special game performance is being executed.

<Step S4307>
If the received command is not a special symbol variation pattern command (step S4302: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol shift command (step S4307). The special symbol shift command is a command indicating that the special symbol win/loss information indicating the result of the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA or the first special symbol reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB (see FIG. 236) has shifted when the first special symbol reserve number N or the second special symbol reserve number M decreases due to the start of a special symbol game (special symbol variation display).

If the received command is a special chart shift command (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4308; if the received command is not a special chart shift command (step S4307: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4310.

<Steps S4308 and S4309>
If the received command is a special drawing shift command (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a special drawing data setting process (step S4308) and a special drawing data image display process (step S4309), and terminates the command determination process.

Here, the special chart data setting process executed in step S4308 is a process of shifting (updating) the data (special chart data) of special chart success/failure information stored in the special chart pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) set in RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5. The special chart pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) is an area corresponding to the special chart pending storage area 412b (see Figure 236) set in RAM 412 of the main control device 4, and stores special chart data equivalent to that of the special chart pending storage area 412b. The special chart pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) includes a first special chart pending storage area corresponding area, a second special chart pending storage area corresponding area, and a special chart execution area corresponding area, which correspond respectively to the first special chart pending storage area REA, the second special chart pending storage area REB, and the special chart execution area AE (see Figure 236) of the special chart pending storage area 412b. Furthermore, the area corresponding to the first special chart reserve storage area includes areas corresponding to the first to fourth special chart reserve areas (not shown) corresponding to the first to fourth reserve areas REA1 to REA4 (see FIG. 236) of the first special chart reserve storage area REA in the special chart reserve storage area 412b, and an area corresponding to the first special chart reserve number memory area (see FIG. 236). Furthermore, the area corresponding to the second special chart reserve storage area includes areas corresponding to the second special chart reserve areas 1 to 4 corresponding to the first to fourth reserve areas REB1 to REB4 (see FIG. 236) of the second special chart reserve storage area REB in the special chart reserve storage area 412b, and an area corresponding to the second special chart reserve number memory area (see FIG. 236).

On the other hand, the special chart data image display process executed in step S4309 is a process of shifting the image related to the special chart data (special chart data image) displayed on the pattern display unit 341 based on the special chart data stored in the special chart reserve storage area corresponding area (not shown) of RAM 512 that was shifted (updated) in step S4308.

Here, the special chart data image is displayed in a special chart data image display section (not shown) set in the pattern display section 341. The special chart data image display section includes a special chart variable image display area, a first special chart reserved image display area, and a second special chart reserved image display area, corresponding to the special chart execution area corresponding area (not shown), the first special chart reserved storage area corresponding area, and the second special chart reserved storage area corresponding area of the above-mentioned special chart reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) set in RAM 512.

The special symbol variable image display area is an area that displays the special symbol game image for that special symbol game based on the special symbol data stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the special symbol reserve storage area corresponding area described above, which corresponds to the special symbol execution area AE (see FIG. 236) of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control unit 4. When special symbol data is stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding area, the special symbol game image is displayed in the special symbol variable image display area; however, when special symbol data is not stored in the special symbol execution area corresponding area, the special symbol game image is not displayed. In other words, the special symbol game image is displayed while the special symbol is changing and is hidden when the special symbol is stopped. In other words, the display of the special symbol game image indicates that the special symbol game is in progress, and the non-display of the special symbol game image indicates that the special symbol game has ended.

The first special symbol reserved image display area 76 is an area that displays the first special symbol reserved image for the first special symbol game based on the special symbol data stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area described above, which corresponds to the first special symbol reserved storage area REA (see FIG. 236) of the special symbol reserved storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control unit 4. This first special symbol reserved image display area includes a first special symbol reserved image first display area, a first special symbol reserved image second display area, a first special symbol reserved image third display area, and a first special symbol reserved image fourth display area, which correspond to the first special symbol first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown) of the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area in the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area described above. The first special symbol reserved image display area displays the first special symbol reserved image when special symbol data is stored in any of the first special symbol 1st to 4th reserved area corresponding areas (not shown), but does not display the first special symbol reserved image when special symbol data is not stored in any of the first special symbol 1st to 4th reserved area corresponding areas (not shown). In other words, when there is a reservation for the first special symbol game, the number of first special symbol reserved images corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number N is displayed, and when there is no reservation for the first special symbol game, no first special symbol reserved image is displayed. In other words, the first special symbol reserved number N for the first special symbol game is clearly indicated based on the number of first special symbol reserved images displayed.

The second special symbol reserved image display area is an area that displays the second special symbol reserved image for the second special symbol game based on the special symbol data stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area described above, which corresponds to the second special symbol reserved storage area REB (see FIG. 236) of the special symbol reserved storage area 412b set in RAM 412 of the main control unit 4. This second special symbol reserved image display area includes a second special symbol reserved image first display area, a second special symbol reserved image second display area, a second special symbol reserved image third display area, and a second special symbol reserved image fourth display area, which correspond to the second special symbol reserved area first to fourth corresponding areas (not shown) of the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area in the special symbol reserved storage area corresponding area described above. The second special symbol reserved image display area displays a second special symbol reserved image when special symbol data is stored in any of the second special symbol first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown), but does not display a second special symbol reserved image when special symbol data is not stored in any of the second special symbol first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown). In other words, when there is a reserved symbol for the second special symbol game, second special symbol reserved images are displayed in a number corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number M, and are not displayed when there is no reserved symbol for the second special symbol game. In other words, the second special symbol reserved number M for the second special symbol game is clearly indicated based on the number of second special symbol reserved images displayed.

Then, in the special chart data image display process, if the received special chart shift command is for the first special chart, i.e., if the first special chart game is to be started, the special chart game image is displayed in the special chart variable image display area 75 based on the special chart data stored in the special chart execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the special chart reserve storage area corresponding area, and further, the first special chart reserved image is displayed in the first special chart reserved image display area 76 based on the special chart data stored in the first special chart reserve storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special chart reserve storage area corresponding area.

On the other hand, in the special chart data image display process, if the received special chart shift command is for the second special chart, i.e., if the second special chart game is to be started, the special chart game image is displayed in the special chart variable image display area 75 based on the special chart data stored in the special chart execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the special chart reserve storage area corresponding area, and further, the second special chart reserve image is displayed in the second special chart reserve image display area 77 based on the special chart data stored in the second special chart reserve storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special chart reserve storage area corresponding area.

<Step S4310>
258, if the received command is not a special symbol shift command (step S4307: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a first special symbol reservation command (step S4310). The first special symbol reservation command includes information indicating that the first special symbol reservation number N for the first special symbol game will increase, information about the first special symbol reservation number N after the increase, and information about the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) for the increased first reservation and the result of the jackpot lottery.

If the received command is a first special drawing hold command (step S4310: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4311; if the received command is not a first special drawing hold command (step S4310: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4313.

<Steps S4311 and S4312>
If the received command is a first special drawing reservation command (step S4310: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a first special drawing reservation information update process (step S4311) and a first special drawing reservation image display process (step S4312), and terminates the command determination process.

Here, the first special chart reserved information update process executed in step S4311 is a process of adding (updating) special chart win/loss information data (special chart data) to the first special chart reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the above-mentioned special chart reserved storage area corresponding area. Specifically, in the first special chart reserved information update process, the special chart data corresponding to the special chart win/loss information stored in the first empty reserved area among the first reserved areas REA1 to REA4 (see FIG. 236) of the first special chart reserved storage area REA of the special chart reserved storage area 412b in RAM 412 of the main control unit 4 is stored in the first special chart first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown) set corresponding to the first reserved areas REA1 to REA4 in which the special chart win/loss information is stored. For example, when special chart win/loss information is stored in the second reserve area REA2 (see FIG. 236) of the first special chart reserve storage area REA in the special chart reserve storage area 412b, the special chart data is stored in a first special chart second reserve area corresponding area (not shown) set in correspondence with the second reserve area REA2. Also, in the first special chart reserve information update process, 1 is added to the first special chart reserve number N stored in the first special chart reserve number memory area corresponding area (not shown) of the special chart reserve storage area corresponding area.

On the other hand, the first special chart reserved image display process executed in step S4312 adds the first special chart reserved image to the first special chart reserved image display area based on the special chart data added (updated) to the first special chart reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S4312.

<Step S4313>
If the received command is not a first special symbol reservation command (step S4310: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a second special symbol reservation command (step S4313). The second special symbol reservation command includes information indicating that the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game will increase, information about the second special symbol reservation number M after the increase, and information about the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation display time) for the increased second reservation and the result of the jackpot lottery.

If the received command is a second special drawing hold command (step S4313: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4314; if the received command is not a second special drawing hold command (step S4313: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4316.

<Steps S4314 and S4315>
If the received command is a second special drawing reservation command (step S4313: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a second special drawing reservation information update process (step S4314) and a second special drawing reservation image display process (step S4315), and terminates the command determination process.

Here, the second special chart reserved information update process executed in step S4314 is a process of adding (updating) data on special chart win/loss information (special chart data) to the second special chart reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the aforementioned special chart reserved storage area corresponding area. Specifically, in the second special chart reserved information update process, the special chart data corresponding to the special chart win/loss information stored in the first empty reserved area among the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 (see FIG. 236) of the second special chart reserved storage area REB in the special chart reserved storage area 412b in RAM 412 of the main control unit 4 is stored in the second special chart first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown) set corresponding to the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 in which the special chart win/loss information is stored. For example, when special chart win/loss information is stored in the third reserve area REB3 (see FIG. 236) of the second special chart reserve storage area REB in the special chart reserve storage area 412b, the special chart data is stored in the first special chart third reserve area corresponding area (not shown) set in correspondence with the third reserve area REB3. Also, in the second special chart reserve information update process, 1 is added to the second special chart reserve number M stored in the second special chart reserve number memory area corresponding area (not shown) in the special chart reserve storage area corresponding area.

On the other hand, the second special chart reserved image display process executed in step S4315 adds a second special chart reserved image to the second special chart reserved image display area 77 based on the special chart data added (updated) to the second special chart reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S4314.

<Step S4316>
If the received command is not the second special symbol hold command (step S4313: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S4316). The jackpot game start command is a command indicating the start of a jackpot game, and is set when a jackpot game is started in step S3904 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 249 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S4316: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4317; if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S4316: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4319.

<Steps S4317 and S4318>
If a jackpot game start command is received (step S4316: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a jackpot game presentation setting process (step S4317), sets the jackpot game in progress flag to on (step S4318), and terminates the command determination process.

The jackpot game effect setting process executes processing to set the jackpot effects that are executed during jackpot play, including the opening effect, open/close execution mode effect (round game effect and interval effect), and ending effect. The opening effect and ending effect are display effects executed by display control processing in the pattern display unit 341, which is a control object separate from the open/close door 319, when the variable winning opening 316 is closed by the open/close door 319, which is a movable body. Specifically, the opening effect is executed in the pattern display unit 341 before the open/close door 319 begins to open or close by the movable body control processing, and the ending effect is executed in the pattern display unit 341 after the open/close door 319 has finished opening or closing by the movable body control processing. The open/close execution mode effect (round game effect and interval effect) is display effect executed when the variable winning opening 316 is opened or closed by the movement of the open/close door 319 by the movable body control processing. In other words, the opening and closing of the variable winning opening 316 by the opening and closing door 319 is performed while the opening and closing execution mode effect is displayed as a display effect on the symbol display unit 341.

This jackpot game effect setting process executes a display control process that sets the display effects to be executed on the symbol display unit 341 in the opening, open/close execution mode (round play and interval), and ending of the jackpot game, and also executes a process that sets the audio effects on the speaker 26 and the lamp effects on the illumination unit 27 to be executed in the opening, open/close execution mode (round play and interval), and ending of the jackpot game. Furthermore, during the execution of the effects in the open/close execution mode (round play and interval), the movable opening/closing door 319 opens and closes.

The opening effect, open/close execution mode effect (round game effect and interval effect), and ending effect may be of one type or multiple types. For example, if multiple types of opening effect, open/close execution mode effect (round game effect and interval effect), and ending effect are set, it is possible to set effects for a special jackpot, effects for a normal jackpot, effects for when the special jackpot state continues, etc.

The jackpot game in progress flag indicates that a jackpot game is currently being played, and is referenced in step S5201 of the jackpot game presentation control processing in Figure 289, which will be described later, to determine whether a jackpot game is currently being played, i.e., whether to control the progress of the jackpot game presentation.

<Step S4319>
If the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S4316: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening start command (step S4319). The opening start command is a command indicating the start of the opening of a jackpot game, and is set when the opening is started in step S3908 of the jackpot game control process of Fig. 249 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is an opening start command (step S4319: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4320; if the received command is not an opening start command (step S4319: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4321.

<Step S4320>
If an opening start command is received (step S4319: Yes), the MPU 52 sets an opening effect start flag to ON (step S4320) and terminates the command determination process. The opening effect start flag is a flag for starting the opening effect of a jackpot game, and is referenced in step S5202 of the jackpot game effect control process shown in FIG. 289, which will be described later, to determine whether or not to start the opening effect.

<Step S4321>
If the received command is not an opening start command (step S4319: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening end command (step S4321). The opening end command is a command indicating that the opening of a jackpot game is to be ended, and is set when the opening is to be ended in step S3914 of the jackpot game control process of Fig. 250 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is an opening end command (step S4321: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4322; if the received command is not an opening end command (step S4321: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4323 in FIG. 259.

<Step S4322>
If an opening end command is received (step S4321: Yes), the MPU 41 sets an opening effect end flag to ON (step S4322) and ends the command determination process. The opening effect end flag is a flag that ends the opening effect of a jackpot game, and is referenced in step S5205 of the jackpot game effect control process in Fig. 289 described later to determine whether or not to end the opening effect.

<Step S4323>
If the received command is not an opening end command (step S4321: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command (step S4323), as shown in Fig. 259. The round game start command indicates the start of a round game in the opening/closing execution mode and indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time, and is set when a round game in the opening/closing execution mode is to be started in step S3917 in the jackpot game control process of Fig. 250 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is a round game start command (step S4323: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4324; if the received command is not a round game start command (step S4323: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4326.

<Steps S4324 and S4325>
If a round game start command is received (step S4323: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a round game effect start flag to ON (step S4324), sets round number information indicating which round the round game is in in the RAM 512 (step S4325), and ends the command determination process. The round game effect start flag is referenced to determine whether or not to start each round game effect of the open/close execution mode effect in step S5208 of the jackpot game effect control process in FIG. 289, which will be described later.

<Step S4326>
If the received command is not a round game start command (step S4323: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command (step S4326). The round game end command is a command indicating that the round game in the open/close execution mode is to be ended, and is set when the round game is to be ended in step S3929 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 251 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is a round game end command (step S4326: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4327; if the received command is not a round game end command (step S4326: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4328.

<Step S4327>
If the round game end command is received (step S4326: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S4327) and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referenced when determining whether or not to end the round game effect in step S5211 of the jackpot game effect control process in FIG. 289, which will be described later.

<Step S4328>
If the received command is not a round game end command (step S4326: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval start command (step S4328). The interval start command is a command indicating the start of an interval between round games in the open/close execution mode, and is set when an interval is to be started in step S3933 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 251 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

Here, if the received command is an interval start command (step S4328: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4329; if the received command is not an interval start command (step S4328: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4330.

<Step S4329>
If the received command is an interval start command (step S4328: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect start flag to ON (step S4329) and ends the command determination process. The interval effect start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to start the interval effect in step S5214 of the jackpot game effect control process in FIG. 289, which will be described later.

<Step S4330>
If the received command is not an interval start command (step S4328: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval end command (step S4330). The interval end command is a command indicating the end of the interval between rounds of play in the open/close execution mode, and is set when the interval is to be ended in step S3939 of the jackpot game control process of Fig. 252 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

Here, if the received command is an interval end command (step S4330: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4331; if the received command is not an interval end command (step S4330: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4332.

<Step S4331>
If the received command is an interval end command (step S4330: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect end flag to ON (step S4331) and ends the command determination process. The interval effect end flag is referenced when determining whether or not to end the interval effect in step S5217 of the jackpot game effect control process in FIG. 289, which will be described later.

<Step S4332>
If the received command is not an interval end command (step S4330: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command (step S4332). The ending start command is a command that indicates the start of an ending in a jackpot game, and is set when starting an ending in step S3942 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 251 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

Here, if the received command is an ending start command (step S4332: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4333; if the received command is not an ending start command (step S4332: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4334.

<Step S4333>
If the received command is an ending start command (step S4332: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag to ON (step S4333) and ends the command determination process. The ending effect start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to start the ending effect in step S5220 of the jackpot game effect control process shown in FIG. 289, which will be described later.

<Step S4334>
If the received command is not an ending start command (step S4332: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending end command (step S4334). The ending end command is a command indicating that the ending of the jackpot game is to end, and is set when the ending is to be ended in step S3948 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 252 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

Here, if the received command is an ending end command (step S4334: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4335; if the received command is not an ending end command (step S4334: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4336.

<Step S4335>
If the received command is an ending end command (step S4334: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect end flag to ON (step S4335) and ends the command determination process. The ending effect end flag is referenced when determining whether or not to end the ending effect in step S5223 of the jackpot game effect control process shown in FIG. 289, which will be described later.

<Step S4336>
If the received command is not an ending end command (step S4334: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S4336). The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set when the jackpot game is to be ended in step S3950 of the jackpot game control process of Fig. 249 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S4336: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4337; if the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S4336: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4339.

<Step S4337>
If the received command is a command to end a jackpot game (step S4336: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is currently being played, to off (step S4337), and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S4338>
If the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S4336: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4 (step S4338) and terminates the command determination processing.

[Stop symbol combination setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure for the stop symbol combination setting process executed in step S4303 of the command processing in FIG. 258 will be described. In the stop symbol combination setting process, a symbol combination is set when multiple decorative symbols (e.g., three) displayed variably on the symbol display unit 341 in a special symbol game are stopped and displayed on an active line. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the stop symbol combination based on the special symbol variable pattern command by referring to the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 260), which will be described later. Here, FIG. 260 is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table, and FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the stop symbol combination setting process. Below, the stop symbol combination setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261.

As shown in Figure 260, the first stop symbol selection table determines the decorative symbol (first stop symbol) that will be first displayed in the symbol display unit 341. Note that Figure 260 assumes that the decorative symbols are "1" to "9," that "333" is a symbol combination indicating a probability jackpot (either a 5R probability jackpot or a 16R probability jackpot), that "777" is a symbol combination indicating a 16R probability jackpot, and that any number other than "333" or "777" is a symbol combination indicating a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability jackpot, or a 16R probability jackpot.

If the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot," the first stopping symbol is not "3" or "7," and the first stopping symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from decorative symbols other than "3" and "7." In other words, if the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot," the symbol combinations "333" or "777," which indicate a 5R probability variable jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot (probability variable jackpot), will not be displayed.

In addition, if the lottery result is a "5R jackpot," there is no allocation of "7" as the first stopping symbol, and the first stopping symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from decorative symbols other than "7." In other words, if the lottery result is a "5R jackpot," the "777" symbol combination, which indicates a 16R jackpot, will not be displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is a "5R jackpot," a double-digit symbol combination other than the "333" symbol combination, which indicates a 5R jackpot, may be displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is a "5R jackpot," a double-digit symbol combination other than the "333" symbol combination, which indicates a 5R regular jackpot, may be displayed as a decorative symbol.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "16R probability jackpot," all decorative symbols from "1" to "9" are allocated, and the first stopping symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. In other words, even if the lottery result is a "16R probability jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "777" symbol combination indicating a 16R probability jackpot may be displayed as a stopped symbol. In other words, even if the lottery result is a "16R probability jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "777" symbol combination indicating a 5R probability jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot may be displayed as a stopped symbol.

Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol if the lottery result is a jackpot, it determines the second and final stop symbols to be the same as the previously determined first stop symbol. This determines the combination of stop symbols that will be displayed on the pay line of the symbol display unit 341 during that special symbol game.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is a "miss," all decorative symbols from "1" to "9" are allocated, and the first stopping symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stopping symbol when the lottery result is a "miss," it determines the second stopping symbol based on the loss type selected based on the loss type table (see Figure 237 (D)) and the previously determined first stopping symbol. For example, if the loss type is a front-to-back loss reach, the second stopping symbol is determined to be the same as the first stopping symbol, and the final stopping symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stopping symbol. Furthermore, if the loss type is a reach other than a front-to-back loss, the second stopping symbol is determined to be the same as the first stopping symbol, and the final stopping pattern is determined to be a symbol different from the first stopping symbol and the symbol before and after the first stopping symbol. Furthermore, if the loss type is a complete loss, the second stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first and second stop symbols. The stop symbol combination of decorative symbols may be determined by the display control device 6, or only the first stop symbol may be determined by the sound and lamp control device 5, and the second and final stop symbols may be determined by the display control device 6.

Here, Figure 261 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a combination of stopped symbols. Below, we will explain an example of the procedure for setting a combination of stopped symbols with reference to Figure 261.

<Steps S4401 to S4403>
261, in the first stop symbol selection table, the MPU 51 first specifies the value of the first stop symbol type counter (step S4401) and specifies the result of the jackpot lottery (step S4402). Then, the MPU 51 sets a stop symbol combination based on the value of the first stop symbol type counter specified in step S4401 and the result of the jackpot lottery specified in step S4402 (step S4403), and proceeds to step S4404.

<Step S4404>
In step S4404, the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery determined in step S4402 is a 16R probability variable jackpot. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot (step S4404: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4405, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a 16R probability variable jackpot (step S4404: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4406.

<Step S4405>
If the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot (step S4404: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the stopping symbol combination set in step S4403 is "777," which indicates a 16R probability variable jackpot. If the stopping symbol combination is "777" (step S4405: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4406, and if the stopping symbol combination is not "777" (step S4405: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4407.

<Step S4406>
If the result of the jackpot lottery is not a 16R special jackpot (step S4404: No), or if the stopping symbol combination is "777" (step S4405: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the 16R special non-promotion flag to on (step S4406) and terminates the stopping symbol combination setting process. The 16R non-promotion flag is a flag that executes a 16R promotion effect by moving the movable rotating role element 37, which is a movable body, in drive pattern G (see Figures 266 (D) and 274), and also executes a button effect (see Figure 277) before executing this 16R promotion effect, and is referenced to determine whether or not to move the movable rotating role element 37 in drive pattern G (see Figures 266 (D) and 274) in step S4945 of Figure 281 or step S4953 of Figure 282 in the movable rotating role element control processing described below, or to determine whether or not to execute a button effect in step S4702 in the button effect setting processing in Figure 276 described below.

<Step S4407>
If the stopping symbol combination set in step S4403 is not "777" which indicates a 16R special jackpot (step S4405: No), the MPU 51 sets the 16R special promotion flag to on and terminates the stopping symbol combination setting process. The 16R probability variable promotion flag is a flag that executes a 16R probability variable promotion effect by moving the movable rotating role element 37, which is a movable body, with drive pattern F (see Figures 266 (C) and 272), and also executes a button effect (see Figure 277) before executing this 16R probability variable promotion effect, and is referenced to determine whether or not to set drive data 4 that moves the movable rotating role element 37 with drive pattern F (see Figures 266 (C) and 272) in step S4942 of Figure 281 or step S4950 of Figure 282 in the movable rotating role element control processing described below, or to determine whether or not to execute a button effect in step S4701 in the button effect setting processing of Figure 276 described below.

[Variation type (performance pattern) setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure for the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process executed in step S4304 of the command processing in Fig. 258 will be described. In the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process, special symbol game presentations to be executed by various presentation means (pattern display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27, movable rotating accessory member 37) in special symbol games are set. Below, the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process will be described with reference to Figs. 262 to 277.

<Step S4501>
As shown in Figure 262, in the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process, the MPU 51 first sets the variation type (presentation pattern) and variation display time based on the special chart variation pattern command by referring to the variation type table (see Figure 263), and then sets the presentation pattern type based on the presentation pattern type selection table (see Figure 264) corresponding to the variation type (presentation pattern) (step S4501).

Here, Figure 263 shows an example of a variation type table referenced by the MPU 51 when determining the variation type (effect pattern).

As shown in Figure 263, the variation type table defines the variation display time and variation type (presentation pattern) corresponding to the special chart variation pattern command. For example, the special chart variation pattern command "A01," for which the lottery result is a "normal jackpot" and the special chart variation pattern is "01," is associated with a variation display time of "30 seconds" and a variation type of "normal reach presentation pattern." Furthermore, the special chart variation pattern command "B02," for which the lottery result is a "5R certain jackpot" and the special chart variation pattern is "02," is associated with a variation display time of "60 seconds" and a variation type of "super reach presentation pattern." Furthermore, the special chart variation pattern command "C03," for which the lottery result is a "16R certain jackpot" and the special chart variation pattern is "03," is associated with a variation display time of "90 seconds" and a variation type of "special reach presentation pattern." Furthermore, the special chart fluctuation pattern command "D04", where the lottery result is "miss" and the special chart fluctuation pattern is "04", is associated with a fluctuation display time of "7 seconds" and a fluctuation type of "non-reach presentation pattern", and the special chart fluctuation pattern command "D05", where the lottery result is "miss" and the special chart fluctuation pattern is "05", is associated with a fluctuation display time of "10 seconds" and a fluctuation type of "non-reach presentation pattern".

Furthermore, Figures 264(A) to 264(C) are diagrams showing examples of presentation pattern type selection tables. Presentation pattern type selection tables are set for each variation type (presentation pattern). Specifically, Figure 264(A) is a normal reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in a special chart game presentation is a normal reach presentation, Figure 264(B) is a super reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in a special chart game presentation is a super reach presentation, and Figure 264(C) is a special reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in a special chart game presentation is a special reach presentation.

In this embodiment, an example is given in which there are five types of effect types corresponding to each variation type, but there may be six or more types of effect types. Also, in Figure 264, the effect type table for when the variation type is not a reach is omitted.

In the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table shown in Figure 264 (A), "presentation pattern X1" to "presentation pattern X5" are defined as presentation pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the presentation pattern type counter depending on the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R special jackpot, 16R special jackpot, or miss). If the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (presentation pattern) is a normal reach presentation pattern, it selects the presentation pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the presentation pattern type counter from the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table depending on the lottery result. Here, presentation patterns X1 to X3 included in the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table are presentations in which, for example, a normal reach presentation is executed in which the decorative symbols reach a reach state after the end of a high-speed variation presentation in which the decorative symbols rapidly fluctuate, and the final individual presentation type is a normal reach presentation.

In addition, the super reach effect pattern type selection table shown in Figure 264 (B) defines "effect pattern Y1" to "effect pattern Y5" as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter depending on the lottery results. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is a super reach effect pattern, it selects the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter from the super reach effect pattern type selection table depending on the lottery results. Here, effect patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super reach effect pattern type selection table are, for example, effects in which a normal reach effect is executed after the end of a high-speed variation effect, and then the final individual effect type develops into a super reach effect, which has a higher probability of winning than a normal reach effect and a longer effect execution time than a normal reach effect. The super reach effect pattern type selection table may also include a super reach effect pattern that develops into a super reach effect after the end of a high-speed variation effect without going through a normal reach effect.

Furthermore, the special reach presentation pattern type selection table shown in Figure 264 (C) defines "presentation pattern Z1" through "presentation pattern Z5" as presentation pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the presentation pattern type counter based on the lottery results. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (presentation pattern) is a special reach presentation pattern, it selects the presentation pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the presentation pattern type counter from the special reach presentation pattern type selection table based on the lottery results. Here, presentation patterns Z1 through Z3 included in the special reach presentation pattern type selection table are presentations in which, for example, a normal reach presentation and a super reach presentation are executed after the end of a high-speed variation presentation, and the final individual presentation type develops into a special reach presentation, which has a higher jackpot expectation than a normal reach presentation or a super reach presentation and a longer presentation execution time than a normal reach presentation. The special reach presentation pattern type selection table may also include special reach presentation patterns that develop into a special reach presentation after the end of a high-speed variation presentation or a normal reach presentation, without passing through at least one of a normal reach presentation or a super reach presentation.

<Steps S4502 and S4503>
Returning to the explanation of Figure 262, in step S4502, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the presentation pattern set in step S4501 is a normal reach presentation pattern. If the presentation pattern set in step S4501 is a normal reach presentation pattern (step S4502: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a normal reach flag (step S4503) and proceeds to step S4508. The normal reach flag is referenced in step S4601 of the role device operation presentation setting process in Figure 275, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the presentation pattern set in step S4501 is not a normal reach presentation pattern (step S4502: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4504.

<Steps S4504 and S4505>
If the presentation pattern set in step S4501 is not a normal reach presentation pattern (step S4502: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the presentation pattern set in step S4501 is a super reach presentation pattern (step S4504). If the presentation pattern set in step S4501 is a super reach presentation pattern (step S4504: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a super reach flag (step S4505) and proceeds to step S4508. The super reach flag is referenced in step S4606 of the role device operation presentation setting process in FIG. 275, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the presentation pattern set in step S4501 is not a super reach presentation pattern (step S4504: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4506.

<Steps S4506 and S4507>
If the effect pattern set in step S4501 is not a super reach effect pattern (step S4504: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect pattern set in step S4501 is a special reach effect pattern (step S4506). If the effect pattern set in step S4501 is a special reach effect pattern (step S4506: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a special reach flag (step S4507) and proceeds to step S4508. The special reach flag is referenced in step S4614 of the role device operation effect setting process in FIG. 275, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the effect pattern set in step S4501 is not a special reach effect pattern (step S4506: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4508.

<Step S4408>
In step S4408, the MPU 51 executes a role operation effect setting process, and moves the process to step S4409. In the role operation effect setting process, details will be described later, when a super reach effect or a special reach effect is executed in the special symbol game effect, and when the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a jackpot, a movable body control process is executed to set the operation of the movable rotating role member 37, which is a movable body in the special symbol game effect.

<Step S4409>
In step S4409, the MPU 51 executes a button effect setting process and ends the special symbol game setting process. The button effect setting process will be described in detail later, but during the execution period of the special symbol game effect, from the time when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped on the activated line with double numbers until the decorative symbols are fixedly stopped, an effect is set to prompt the player to operate the operation button 20 before informing the player whether or not to upgrade to a 16R probability variable jackpot by the operation of the movable rotating role member 37.

[Gem operation performance setting processing]
Next, we will explain the special device operation performance setting process executed in step S4508 of the special device game performance setting process in Figure 262, but before that, we will first explain the operation timing and moving state of the movable rotating device member 37, which is a movable body.

Here, Figure 265 shows an example of the activation timing of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body. In this embodiment, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is activated to notify that a Super Reach performance will develop, that a Super Reach performance will not develop, that a Special Reach performance will develop, that a Special Reach performance will not develop, that a 16R probability jackpot has occurred, and that a 16R probability jackpot has occurred.

As shown in Figure 265, the operation timing of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is set according to the effect type (effect pattern) set in step S4501 of the special game effect setting process in Figure 262.

Specifically, if the effect type (effect pattern) is a complete miss effect pattern, the activation timing of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is not set. In other words, if the effect type (effect pattern) is a complete miss, the movable rotating accessory member 37 will not be activated.

When the presentation type (presentation pattern) is a normal reach presentation pattern, the operation timing of the movable rotating role element 37 is set as role element operation timing A. Role element operation timing A is set at the end of the normal reach presentation and begins when time T1 has elapsed since the start of the special symbol game.

Then, at accessory activation timing A in the case of a normal reach presentation pattern, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is activated in movable mode C (see FIG. 266 (C)), described below, to notify that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot (promotion to 16R probability variable), and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, it is activated in movable mode D (see FIG. 266 (D)), described below, to notify that it is not a 16R probability variable jackpot (non-promotion to 16R probability variable), and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, it is activated in movable mode D (see FIG. 266 (D)), described below, to notify that it will not develop into a special reach (non-SP development).

When the presentation type (presentation pattern) is a super reach presentation pattern, feature activation timing A and feature activation timing B are set as the activation timings of the movable rotating feature member 37. Feature activation timing A is set at the end of the normal reach presentation and starts when time T1 has elapsed since the start of the special symbol game. Feature activation timing B is set at the end of the super reach presentation and starts when time T2 has elapsed since the start of the special symbol game.

Then, at the timing A when the Super Reach presentation pattern is activated, the movable rotating accessory element 37, which is a movable body, is activated in the movable mode A (see Figure 266 (A)) described below, which notifies the player that the game will progress to a Super Reach (SP development), regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process.

In addition, at accessory activation timing B in the case of a super reach presentation pattern, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is activated in movable mode C (see FIG. 266 (C)), described below, to notify that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot (promotion to 16R probability variable), and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot, it is activated in movable mode D (see FIG. 266 (D)), described below, to notify that it is not a 16R probability variable jackpot (non-promotion to 16R probability variable), and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, it is activated in movable mode D (see FIG. 266 (D)), to notify that it will not develop into a special reach (non-SPSP development).

When the presentation type (presentation pattern) is a special reach presentation pattern, the operation timings of the movable rotating role element 37 are set as role element operation timing A, role element operation timing B, and role element operation timing C. Role element operation timing A is set at the end of the normal reach presentation and starts when time T1 has elapsed since the start of special symbol play. Role element operation timing B is set at the end of the super reach presentation and starts when time T2 has elapsed since the start of special symbol play. Role element operation timing C is set at the end of the special reach presentation and starts when time T3 has elapsed since the start of special symbol play.

Then, at the timing A when the special reach performance pattern is selected, the movable rotating accessory element 37, which is a movable body, is operated in the movable mode A (see Figure 266 (A)) described below, which notifies the player that the game will progress to a super reach (SP development), regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process.

Furthermore, at the timing B when the special reach presentation pattern is selected, the movable rotating accessory element 37, which is a movable body, is operated in the movable mode A (see Figure 266 (A)) described below, which notifies the player that the game will progress to a special reach (SPSP development), regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process.

In addition, at accessory activation timing C in the case of a special reach presentation pattern, the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is activated in movable mode C (see Figure 266 (C)) described below to notify players that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot (promoted to 16R probability variable) if the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R probability variable jackpot, and is activated in movable mode D (see Figure 266 (D)) described below to notify players that it is not a 16R probability variable jackpot (not promoted to 16R probability variable) if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot.

Here, Figures 266(A) to 266(D) are diagrams showing examples of the movable forms of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body. As shown in Figures 266(A) to 266(D), in this embodiment, the movable forms of the movable rotating accessory member 37 are set to movable form A, movable form B, movable form C, and movable form D.

Moving mode A shown in Figure 266 (A) notifies that a Super Reach effect will develop, and after the movable body control process has finished controlling the movable rotating role member 37 in moving mode A, control is executed to display the Super Reach effect as a display effect by display control processing in the pattern display unit 341, which is a control object different from the movable rotating role member 37. Movable mode B shown in Figure 266 (B) notifies that a Special Reach effect will develop, and after the movable body control process has finished controlling the movable rotating role member 37 in moving mode B, control is executed to display the Special Reach effect as a display effect by display control processing in the pattern display unit 341, which is a control object different from the movable rotating role member 37. Movable mode C shown in Figure 266 (C) notifies that a 16R probability variable jackpot has occurred, and for example, after the movable body control process has finished controlling the movable rotating role member 37 in moving mode C, control is executed to display a display effect notifying that a 16R probability variable jackpot has occurred in the pattern display unit 341, which is a control object different from the movable rotating role member 37.

On the other hand, the movable mode D shown in Figure 266 (D) notifies that the effect will not progress to a super reach effect, will not progress to a special reach effect, or is not a 16R guaranteed jackpot. Even in this case, after the control of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in movable mode D by the movable body control process is completed, control may be executed to display a display effect by the display control process in the pattern display unit 341, which is a control object different from the movable rotating accessory member 37.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the control executed after the series of specific actions of the movable rotating role member 37, which is a movable body, is completed includes a control object other than the movable rotating role member 37. In this manner, the control executed after the series of specific actions of the movable rotating role member 37 is completed includes a control object other than the movable rotating role member 37, making it possible to re-impart information provided by the movable rotating role member 37 to a control object other than the movable rotating role member 37 after the series of specific actions of the movable rotating role member 37 is completed. This makes it possible to re-impart information to the player to a control object other than the movable rotating role member 37, even if the player misses the action of the movable rotating role member 37 or does not understand the content provided by the action of the movable rotating role member 37. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the control executed after the series of specific actions of the movable rotating role member 37, which is a movable body, is completed includes a control object other than the movable rotating role member 37, making it possible to clearly indicate or suggest a performance to be executed later depending on the action of the movable rotating role member 37. This allows the player to focus on the movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 and enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that an advantageous effect for the player will be clearly or implied, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Movable modes A, B, C, and D include a common continuous movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body. In this common continuous movement, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved according to drive pattern A, B, and C, which will be described later. In movable mode A shown in FIG. 266(A), the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved according to drive pattern D, which will be described later, after the common continuous movement (drive pattern A, B, and C). In movable mode B shown in FIG. 266(B), the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved according to drive pattern E, which will be described later, after the common continuous movement (drive pattern A, B, and C). In movable mode C shown in FIG. 266(C), the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved according to drive pattern F, which will be described later, after the common continuous movement (drive pattern A, B, and C). In movable mode D shown in Figure 266 (D), the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved according to drive pattern G, which will be described later, after a common series of operations (drive pattern A, drive pattern B, and drive pattern C).

Also, as shown in FIG. 266 (E), the ROM 511 of the sound lamp control device 5 has a drive data memory area that stores drive data as information for operating the movable rotating prop member 37, which is a movable body, in a predetermined movement mode. This drive data memory area stores drive data 1 (prop movement scenario data 1), drive data 2 (prop movement scenario data 2), drive data 3 (prop movement scenario data 3), drive data 4 (prop movement scenario data 4), and drive data 5 (prop movement scenario data 5). When controlling the movement of the movable rotating prop member 37, which is a movable body, based on drive data 1, drive data corresponding to the movement mode of the movable rotating prop member 37 is read from the drive data memory area set in the ROM 511, and the read drive data is set in a temporary storage area provided in the RAM 512. The MPU 51 then controls the movement of the movable rotating prop member 37, which is a movable body, based on drive data 1 set in the temporary storage area of the RAM 512. Here, ROM 511 is non-volatile memory and therefore suitable for storing drive data, but its slow read speed makes it unsuitable for directly reading drive data from ROM 511 to control the operation of movable rotating role member 37. Therefore, by setting drive data read from the drive data storage area of ROM 511 in a temporary storage area of RAM 512 and controlling the operation of movable rotating role member 37, it is possible to improve the operating speed of movable rotating role member 37 compared to when drive data is directly read from the drive data storage area of ROM 511 to control the operation of movable rotating role member 37.

The details of drive data 1 (role-playing device operation scenario data 1), described later with reference to Figure 269, are information that causes a common continuous operation to be performed on the movable rotating device element 37, which is a movable body, in movement modes A through D of the movable rotating device element 37. In other words, when it is decided to operate the movable rotating device element 37, which is a movable body, in movement modes A through D, drive data 1 read from the drive data storage area of ROM 511 can be set once in the temporary storage area of RAM 512 to cause the movable rotating device element 37 to perform a common continuous operation. Furthermore, by controlling the common continuous operation of the movable rotating device element 37 based on drive data 1, it is possible to simplify the control of the movable rotating device element 37 and reduce the amount of data. This not only reduces the amount of drive data used for one movement mode, thereby reducing the memory burden, but also reduces the control burden of reading and temporarily storing drive data when operating the movable rotating device element 37, which is a movable body. When the movable rotating accessory member 37 is operated based on common drive data 1, after all control processing based on common drive data 1 is completed, the next operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is executed based on drive data 2 to 5, which are individually set according to each movement state for the subsequent operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37.

The details of drive data 2 (reel operation scenario data 2) will be described later with reference to Figure 270 (B), but it is information that, in the movement mode A of the movable rotating reel element 37 that notifies development to a super reach (SP development), moves the movable rotating reel element 37 with drive pattern D (see Figure 270 (A)) described below as an individual movement after a common continuous movement (drive patterns A to C).

The details of drive data 3 (reel operation scenario data 3) will be described later with reference to Figure 271 (B), but in movement mode B of the movable rotating reel element 37, which notifies development to a special reach (SPSP development), it is information that moves the movable rotating reel element 37 with drive pattern E (see Figure 271 (A)) described below as an individual operation after common continuous operations (drive patterns A to C).

The details of drive data 4 (apparatus operation scenario data 4) will be described later with reference to Figure 273, but in movement mode C of the movable rotating apparatus member 37 which notifies of a 16R probability jackpot (promotion to 16R probability jackpot), it is information that causes the movable rotating apparatus member 37 to move in drive pattern F (see Figure 272) described below as an individual operation after a common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C).

The details of the drive data 5 (reel operation scenario data 5) will be described later with reference to Figure 274 (B), but in the movement mode D of the movable rotating reel element 37, which notifies that it will not develop into a Super Reach (no SP development), will not develop into a Special Reach (no SPSP development), or will not be a 16R probability jackpot (no promotion to 16R probability jackpot), it is information that causes the movable rotating reel element 37 to move in a separate movement, drive pattern G (see Figure 274 (A)), which will be described later, after a common continuous movement (drive patterns A to C).

In this way, movable states A, B, C, and D include a common continuous motion as the motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body. Of movable states A to D, movable states A, B, and C provide advantageous notifications to the player through the motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37. On the other hand, of movable states A to D, movable state D provides disadvantageous notifications to the player through the motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37. In other words, in this embodiment, after control of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body that is controlled by the continuous motion common to movable states A to D, is completed, a first control is executed in movable states A to C to provide advantageous notifications to the player, and a second control is executed in movable state D to provide disadvantageous notifications to the player.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, at the end of the continuous operation common to movable modes A to D, the movable rotating device element 37, which is the movable body, is stopped from moving while positioned in the standby position, which is the return position. That is, in this embodiment, after the control of the movable rotating device element 37, which is the movable body, by the continuous operation common to movable modes A to D is completed, the operation of the movable rotating device element 37 is started while positioned in the standby position, which is the return position, in both cases where the first control that provides a notification advantageous to the player is executed in movable modes A to C, and where the second control that provides a notification unfavorable to the player is executed in movable mode D. Therefore, when the continuous operation common to movable modes A to D is completed, the subsequent control of the movable rotating device element 37 can be started smoothly and without any sense of discomfort, regardless of whether the subsequent control of the movable rotating device element 37 is the first control or the second control. As a result, if the condition for determining whether a continuous operation has ended is met, even if the timing of the end determination is uncertain, the continuous operation can be transitioned to the next operation using drive patterns D to G executed by the first control and second control.

Here, Figure 267(A) is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in drive pattern A, which is a common continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body; Figure 267(B) is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in drive pattern B, which is a common continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body; and Figure 268 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in drive pattern C, which is a common continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body.

As shown in Figure 267 (A), drive pattern A, which is the common continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating accessory member 37 makes two reciprocating movements between the standby position (see Figure 267 (A1)), which is the return side position, and intermediate operating position 1 (see Figure 267 (A2)), which is the drive side position (see Figure 267 (A3)). Note that intermediate operating position 1 is set to a position closer to the standby position (near the standby position) between the standby position and maximum operating position (the position farthest from the standby position) of the movable rotating accessory member 37.

As shown in Figure 267 (B), drive pattern B, which is a common continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating accessory member 37 moves back and forth twice between the standby position (see Figure 267 (B1)), which is the return side position, and intermediate operating position 2 (see Figure 267 (B2)), which is the drive side position (see Figure 267 (B3)). Note that intermediate operating position 2 is set at a position closer to the maximum operating position than intermediate operating position 1 between the standby position and maximum operating position (the position farthest from the standby position) of the movable rotating accessory member 37.

As shown in Figure 268, drive pattern C, which is a common continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved from the standby position (see Figure 268 (A1)) to intermediate operating position 1 (see Figure 268 (A2)), then makes two reciprocating movements between intermediate operating position 1 (see Figure 268 (A2)), which is the return side position, and intermediate operating position 2 (see Figure 268 (A3)), which is the drive side position, and then returns from intermediate operating position 1 (see Figure 268 (A2)) to the standby position (see Figure 268 (A4)).

As mentioned above, the common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) of the movable rotating prop member 37, which is a movable body, is realized based on drive data 1 (prop operation scenario data 1), which is information stored in the drive data memory area set in RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5. Figure 269 is a diagram showing an example of drive data 1 (prop operation scenario data 1), which is information stored in the drive data memory area. Note that drive data 1 (prop operation scenario data 1) shown in Figure 269 is a data group that specifies the control content and control sequence for performing the common continuous operation of the movable rotating prop member 37, which is a movable body, and is an example of a case where the up and down movement of the movable rotating prop member 37 is controlled by a stepping motor for raising and lowering.

As shown in FIG. 269, drive data 1 (gimmick operation scenario data 1) operates the movable rotating gimbal member 37 with drive patterns A to C in accordance with process No. 01 to process No. 29. Of process No. 01 to process No. 29, process No. 01 to process No. 09 correspond to drive pattern A, process No. 10 to process No. 17 correspond to drive pattern B, and process No. 18 to process No. 29 correspond to drive pattern C.

In Process No. 01 to Process No. 09 for Drive Pattern A, which is a continuous operation, Drive Data 1 (Gift Operation Scenario Data 1) is first set in the temporary storage area of RAM 512, and the lifting/lowering stepping motor is then stopped for 200 msec (Process No. 01), after which the lifting/lowering stepping motor is rotated 12 steps in the forward direction (Process No. 02). This causes the movable rotating prop member 37 to move downward 12 mm, positioning the movable rotating prop member 37 at intermediate operating position 1, which is the drive side position. Then, after the lifting/lowering stepping motor is stopped for 12 msec (Process No. 03), the lifting/lowering stepping motor is rotated 12 steps in the reverse direction (Process No. 04). As a result, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is maintained in a stopped state at the intermediate operating position 1 for 12 msec, and then the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved upward by 12 mm, thereby positioning the movable rotating accessory member 37 at the standby position, which is the return side position. As a result, the movable rotating accessory member 37 makes one reciprocating movement between the standby position, which is the return side position, and the intermediate operating position 1, which is the drive side position. After that, the rotation of the lifting stepping motor is maintained in a stopped state for 40 msec (Process No. 05), and then, by executing Process No. 06 to Process No. 09, the movable rotating accessory member 37 makes one reciprocating movement between the standby position, which is the return side position, and the intermediate operating position 1, which is the drive side position, as in the case of executing the above-mentioned Process No. 02 to Process No. 05. As a result, Process No. 01 to Process No. 06 are performed. By executing process 09, the operation of drive pattern A is executed, in which the movable rotating accessory member 37 makes two reciprocating movements between the standby position (see Figure 267 (A1)), which is the return side position, and intermediate operating position 1 (see Figure 267 (A2)), which is the drive side position.

In Process No. 10 to Process No. 17 for Drive Pattern B, which is a continuous operation, the lifting stepping motor is first rotated 36 steps in the forward direction (Process No. 10). This moves the movable rotating accessory member 37 downward 36 mm, positioning it at intermediate operating position 2, which is the drive side position. After the lifting stepping motor is stopped for 36 msec (Process No. 11), the lifting stepping motor is rotated 36 steps in the reverse direction (Process No. 12), and the lifting stepping motor is stopped for 40 msec (Process No. 13). This moves the movable rotating accessory member 37 upward 36 mm, positioning it at the standby position, which is the return side position, and the movable rotating accessory member 37 makes one reciprocating motion between the standby position, which is the return side position, and intermediate operating position 2, which is the drive side position. Furthermore, Process No. By executing processes No. 14 to No. 17, the movable rotating accessory member 37 makes one reciprocating movement between the standby position, which is the return side position, and intermediate operating position 2, which is the drive side position, just as when processes No. 10 to No. 13 described above are executed. As a result, by executing processes No. 10 to No. 17, the operation of drive pattern B is executed, in which the movable rotating accessory member 37 makes two reciprocating movements between the standby position, which is the return side position (see FIG. 267 (B1)), and intermediate operating position 2, which is the drive side position (see FIG. 267 (B2)).

In Processes No. 18 to No. 29 for Drive Pattern C, which is a continuous operation, the lift stepping motor is first rotated 12 steps in the forward direction (Process No. 18), and the lift stepping motor's rotation is maintained stopped for 40 msec (Process No. 19). This moves the movable rotating accessory member 37 downward by 12 mm, and the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved from the standby position (see FIG. 268 (A1)) to intermediate operating position 1 (see FIG. 268 (A2)). As described above, intermediate operating position 1 in Drive Pattern C is the return position in the reciprocating operation between intermediate operating positions 1 and 2 in Drive Pattern C. The lift stepping motor is then rotated an additional 24 steps in the forward direction (Process No. 20), and the lift stepping motor's rotation is maintained stopped for 24 msec (Process No. 21). As a result, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved downward by an additional 24 mm, and the movable rotating accessory member 37 is positioned at intermediate operating position 2 (see FIG. 267 (A3)). As described above, intermediate operating position 2 in drive pattern C is the drive-side position in the reciprocating motion between intermediate operating positions 1 and 2 in drive pattern C. Furthermore, the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is rotated 24 steps in the reverse direction (processing No. 22), and the rotation-stop state of the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is maintained for 40 msec (processing No. 23). As a result, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved upward by 24 mm, and the movable rotating accessory member 37 is positioned at intermediate operating position 1 (see FIG. 268 (A2)), which is the return-side position, and the movable rotating accessory member 37 makes one reciprocating motion between intermediate operating position 1, which is the return-side position, and intermediate operating position 2, which is the drive-side position. Thereafter, by executing processes No. 24 to No. 27, the above-described process No. As in the case of executing the processes of Process No. 20 to Process No. 23, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is caused to reciprocate once between the intermediate operating position 1 (see FIG. 268(A2)), which is the return side position, and the intermediate operating position 2 (see FIG. 268(A3)), which is the drive side position. As a result, by executing the processes of Process No. 20 to Process No. 27, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is caused to reciprocate twice between the intermediate operating position 1 (see FIG. 268(A2)), which is the return side position, and the intermediate operating position 2 (see FIG. 268(A3)), which is the drive side position. Furthermore, the lifting stepping motor is rotated another 12 steps in the reverse direction (Process No. 28), and the lifting stepping motor's rotation stop state is maintained for 40 msec (Process No. 29). This returns the movable rotating accessory member 37 to the standby position (see FIG. 268(A1)). As a result, the processes of Process No. 18 to Process No. By executing process 29, the operation of drive pattern C is performed on the movable rotating accessory member 37.

In drive data 1, the period during which the movable rotating part member 37, which is the movable body, is stopped at intermediate operating position 1, which is the drive side position when operated with drive pattern A, is set to 12 msec, corresponding to the number of steps (12 steps) of upward and downward movement in the reciprocating motion of the movable rotating part member 37. Also, in drive data 1, the period during which the movable rotating part member 37, which is the movable body, is stopped at intermediate operating position 2, which is the drive side position when operated with drive pattern B, is set to 36 msec, corresponding to the number of steps (36 steps) of upward and downward movement in the reciprocating motion of the movable rotating part member 37. Furthermore, in drive data 1, the period during which the movable rotating part member 37, which is the movable body, is stopped at intermediate operating position 2, which is the drive side position when operated with drive pattern C, is set to 24 msec, corresponding to the number of steps (24 steps) of upward and downward movement in the reciprocating motion of the movable rotating part member 37. That is, in the continuous operation of the movable rotating part member 37 executed based on the drive data 1, the stop time at the drive-side position is set according to the amount of movement of the movable rotating part member 37 in its reciprocating motion, and the stop time at the drive-side position is set longer the greater the amount of movement of the reciprocating motion. In other words, in this embodiment, three types of periods are set for the period in which the movable rotating part member 37 is moved to the drive-side position in the continuous operation of the movable rotating part member 37 executed based on the drive data 1, including at least a first period and a second period longer than the first period. And, in the continuous operation of the movable rotating part member 37 executed based on the drive data 1, the stop time at the drive-side position is set longer the greater the amount of movement of the reciprocating motion, so that the drive pattern in which the movable rotating part member 37 moves more slowly is achieved as the amount of movement of the movable rotating part member 37 in its reciprocating motion in the continuous operation increases. In other words, by setting multiple periods during which the movable rotating device member 37 is moved to the drive side position in the continuous operation of the movable rotating device member 37 executed based on the drive data 1, for example, by including at least a first period and a second period in the continuous operation that is longer than the first period, the movable rotating device member 37 can be operated in a variety of drive patterns, making it possible to diversify the continuous operation. This makes it possible to improve the performance when the movable rotating device member 37 is moved for the purpose of creating a display effect on the symbol display unit 341, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the period during which the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved to the drive side position during continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on drive data 1 may include at least a first period and a second period that is longer than the first period, and may be set regardless of the amount of movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 during its reciprocating motion.

In addition, in this embodiment, while the processes of Process No. 05, Process No. 09, Process No. 13, Process No. 17, Process No. 23, Process No. 27, and Process No. 29 defined in Drive Data 1 (Gem Operation Scenario Data 1) are being executed, an end determination is made to determine whether an end determination condition for terminating the continuous movement of the movable rotating gem member 37, which is a movable body based on Drive Data 1, is met. That is, end determinations are made multiple times at different times from the start of the continuous movement of the movable rotating gem member 37 based on Drive Data 1. Then, as will be described in detail below, if an end determination is made that the end determination condition for the continuous movement of the movable rotating gem member 37 based on Drive Data 1 is met, the continuous movement is terminated. In other words, the end timing of the continuous movement of the movable rotating gem member 37 based on Drive Data 1 is indefinite. As a result, the period during which the movable rotating accessory member 37 performs continuous operation based on the drive data 1 is indefinite, and the period during which the movable rotating accessory member 37 performs continuous operation based on the drive data 1 includes at least a first period and a second period that is longer than the first period.

On the other hand, the execution time of the continuous operation of the movable rotating device member 37 based on the drive data 1 for the special symbol game is a period set at the start of the special symbol fluctuation and does not change during the special symbol fluctuation. As a result, the execution time of the continuous operation of the movable rotating device member 37 based on the drive data 1 becomes indefinite. If the execution time of the continuous operation of the movable rotating device member 37 based on the drive data 1 includes at least a first period and a second period longer than the first period, the period after the end of the continuous operation of the movable rotating device member 37 based on the drive data 1, i.e., the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol game, also becomes indefinite. This makes it possible to execute display effects in the symbol display unit 341 according to the indefinite remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol game. For example, it becomes possible to differentiate the display effects when the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol game is long from the display effects when the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol game is short. Furthermore, if the condition for determining the end of the continuous operation of the movable rotating device member 37 based on the drive data 1 is the player's operation of the operation button 20, the earlier the player operates the operation button 20, the longer the remaining change time of the special symbol game. Therefore, a default display effect can be executed as a display effect when the remaining change time of the special symbol game is short, for example, when the player operates the operation button 20 late and the continuous operation execution period is a second period longer than the first period, while a premium effect can be executed as a display effect when the remaining change time of the special symbol game is long, for example, when the player operates the operation button 20 early and the continuous operation execution period is the first period. This makes it possible to encourage the player to operate the operation button 20 in order to execute the premium effect as a display effect.

Here, the movable body has various movement modes consisting of multiple actions, and the movement mode to be executed is determined by lottery or other means. Meanwhile, the movable body's movement modes share common actions. In this case, if drive data were set separately for each of the movable body's movement modes (e.g., moving slightly downward from the initial position, returning from that downward position to the initial position, etc.), a series of processes would be required for each action, including identifying the next action to be executed, reading the drive data for that next action from ROM and setting it in RAM, setting the termination condition for the currently executing action, and determining whether it has terminated. Because the movable body's movement modes include multiple actions, executing the aforementioned series of processes for each action included in the currently executing movement mode would increase the processing time and the control burden. Furthermore, if one action in one of the movable body's movement modes is common to actions in other movement modes, storing the same drive data redundantly in ROM would result in a large amount of data, which would be wasteful. Therefore, by storing common drive data (data list, task data) in ROM for operations common to multiple movement modes of the movable body, it is possible to cause the movable body to perform a common operation by reading the common drive data from ROM once and setting the common drive data in RAM once. This reduces the amount of data required in ROM when causing the movable body to perform a common operation, and simplifies control such as reading drive data from ROM and setting drive data in RAM.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the movable rotating part member 37 is provided with multiple movable positions (moving positions A-D), and the operation of drive patterns A-C among these moving positions A-D is common. In this embodiment, drive data 1 for the continuous operation (drive patterns A-C) common to the multiple moving positions A-D of the movable rotating part member 37, which is a movable body, is stored in ROM. Therefore, when a continuous operation common to the multiple moving positions A-D of the movable rotating part member 37 is executed, drive data 1 is read once from ROM and set once in RAM. This reduces the amount of drive data required to realize each moving position A-D, thereby not only reducing the memory burden but also reducing the control burden, such as reading and temporarily storing (setting) drive data when operating the movable rotating part member 37.

Even when a series of consecutive actions common to multiple movement modes of a movable body are executed based on a single common drive data, some of the multiple movement modes may have different end determination conditions than the other movement modes. That is, the timing at which the end determination condition for a series of consecutive actions common to multiple movement modes of a movable body is met may be uncertain. For example, the end determination condition may be set to the player operating the operating means within a predetermined period set during the execution of the common series of actions. That is, the timing at which the series of actions common to multiple movement modes of a movable body end, and the timing at which the series of actions transition from the common series of actions to the next action, are uncertain. However, when a series of actions common to multiple movement modes of a movable body are executed based on a single common drive data, the common series of actions cannot end, and it is not possible to transition to the next action, until all processing (actions) defined by the single common drive data are completed.

Furthermore, in order to deal with termination conditions that are met at irregular times, if an end determination is made for each operation in a common series of operations to see if the end determination condition is met, the next operation is identified, drive data for the next operation is read from ROM, and drive data for the next operation is set in RAM, then even if the termination condition is met at irregular times, it would be possible to move on to the next operation immediately after the termination determination condition is met, but this would result in a greater burden on control and data volume, just as would occur if drive data were provided for each operation.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the movable rotating device element 37 is operated based on drive data 1 (device operation scenario data) using drive pattern A, which may result in uncertainty as to the timing at which the termination determination condition is met, and when the processes of process No. 05 and process No. 09 are executed to position the movable rotating device element 37, which is the movable object, in the standby position, which is the return position of the reciprocating motion, an termination determination is made to determine whether the termination determination condition for the continuous motion of the movable rotating device element 37 based on drive data 1 (device operation scenario data) is met. Specifically, in this embodiment, when it is determined in step S4948 of the movable rotating device control processing in FIG. 282 that the processes of process No. 05 and process No. 09 have been executed, an termination determination is made in step S4949 of the movable rotating device control processing to determine whether the player has operated the operation button 20, which is the termination determination condition. Then, when process No. 05 or process No. If it is determined that the termination condition is met in the termination determination during execution of process No. 09, control of the movable rotating accessory member 37 (stepping motor for raising and lowering) based on drive data 1 is terminated without executing all of the processes specified by drive data 1. In other words, if it is determined that the termination condition is met in the termination determination during execution of process No. 05 or process No. 09, the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, based on drive data 1 is terminated with the movable rotating accessory member 37 positioned in the standby position, which is the return position.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the movable rotating device element 37 is operated based on drive data 1 (device operation scenario data) as a movable object control process using drive pattern B, which may result in uncertainty as to the timing at which the termination determination condition is met, and when the movable rotating device element 37, which is a movable object, is positioned in a standby position, which is the return position of its reciprocating motion, as a result of the execution of processes No. 13 and No. 17, a termination determination is made to determine whether the termination determination condition for the continuous movement of the movable rotating device element 37 based on drive data 1 (device operation scenario data) is met. Specifically, in this embodiment, when it is determined in step S4948 of the movable rotating device control process in FIG. 282 that processes No. 13 and No. 17 have been executed, a termination determination is made in step S4949 of the movable rotating device control process to determine whether the player has operated the operation button 20, which is the termination determination condition. Then, when process No. 13 or process No. If it is determined that the termination condition is met in the termination determination during execution of process No. 17, control of the movable rotating accessory member 37 (stepping motor for raising and lowering) based on drive data 1 is terminated without executing all of the processes specified by drive data 1. In other words, if it is determined that the termination condition is met in the termination determination during execution of process No. 13 or process No. 17, the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, based on drive data 1 is terminated with the movable rotating accessory member 37 positioned in the standby position, which is the return position.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the movable rotating device element 37 is operated based on drive data 1 (device operation scenario data) using drive pattern C, which may result in uncertainty as to the timing at which the termination determination condition is met, and the processes of process No. 23 and process No. 27 are executed to position the movable rotating device element 37, which is the movable body, at intermediate operating position 1, which is the return position of the reciprocating motion, an termination determination is made to determine whether the termination determination condition for the continuous motion of the movable rotating device element 37 based on drive data 1 (device operation scenario data) is met. Specifically, in this embodiment, when it is determined in step S4948 of the movable rotating device control process in FIG. 282 that process No. 23 and process No. 27 are being executed, an termination determination is made in step S4949 of the movable rotating device control process to determine whether the player has operated the operation button 20, which is the termination determination condition. Then, when process No. 23 or process No. If the termination determination during execution of process No. 27 determines that the termination condition is met, the process proceeds to process No. 28, and processes No. 28 and 29 are executed, thereby terminating control of the movable rotating accessory member 37 (stepping motor for raising and lowering) based on drive data 1. In other words, if the termination determination during execution of process No. 23 or process No. 27 determines that the termination condition is met, the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is returned from intermediate operating position 1, which is the return position of its reciprocating motion, to the standby position, and then the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on drive data 1 is terminated.

In other words, when the movable rotating part element 37 is operated using drive patterns A to C based on drive data 1 (part operation scenario data), which may result in uncertainty as to when the end determination condition is met, the continuous operation of the movable rotating part element 37, which is common to multiple movement modes A to D executed based on drive data 1, ends with the movable rotating part element 37, which is the movable body, positioned in the standby position, which is the return position, regardless of the timing at which the end determination condition is met.

In this way, in this embodiment, the movable body control process is common to multiple movement modes A to D for the movable rotating role member 37, which is a movable body, and sequential operations (drive patterns A to C) for which the timing at which the end determination condition is met may be uncertain are executed based on information corresponding to a single common drive data 1 (role-playing action scenario data 1). Therefore, as described above, the burden of control and data volume can be reduced compared to when drive data is set for each action included in each movable mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a movable body control process, when a continuous operation (driving patterns A to C) that is common to multiple moving modes A to D for the movable rotating role member 37, which is a movable body, and the timing at which the end determination condition is met may be uncertain, is executed based on information corresponding to one driving data 1 (role member operation scenario data 1), when the movable rotating role member 37 is positioned at the return position, which is the return position of the reciprocating operation, or at intermediate operating position 1, an end determination is made as to whether the end determination condition for the continuous operation of the movable rotating role member 37 based on driving data 1 (role member operation scenario data 1) is met. As a result, the termination determination as to whether or not the termination determination condition for the continuous operation of the movable rotating part member 37 based on the drive data 1 (part operation scenario data 1) is satisfied is performed at the return position of the reciprocating operation of the movable rotating part member 37, and if it is determined that the termination determination condition is satisfied in the termination determination, when terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotating part member 37 based on the drive data 1 (part operation scenario data 1), there is no need to move the movable rotating part member 37, which is a movable body, or the movement distance of the movable rotating part member 37 can be reduced. Also, the termination determination as to whether or not the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation based on the drive data 1 (part operation scenario data 1) is satisfied is performed each time the movable rotating part member 37 is positioned at the return position of the reciprocating operation, and therefore, the termination determination is repeatedly performed multiple times in the continuous operation. As a result, when the termination determination determines that the termination determination condition for the continuous movement of the movable rotating role element 37 based on drive data 1 (role element movement scenario data 1) is met, the continuous movement can be terminated not only immediately after it is determined that the termination determination condition is met, but also immediately after the termination determination condition is met. Therefore, it is possible to transition to the next movement immediately after the termination determination condition is met for continuous movements that are common to multiple movement modes A to D and whose timing of meeting the termination determination condition may be uncertain.

Furthermore, by being able to transition to the next action immediately upon the establishment of the end determination condition for a continuous action that is common to multiple moving modes A-D and whose timing of establishment of the end determination condition may be uncertain, when a transition is made from a continuous action common to multiple moving modes A-D to an individual next action for each moving mode A-D, the transition between the common continuous action and the different next action can be made smoothly, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable with the previous action transition. As a result, even when the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is operated for the purpose of creating a dramatic effect, it is possible to operate the movable rotating accessory member 37 without compromising the dramatic effect.

In this embodiment, drive data 1 is configured as a data group that controls a stepping motor, identifies the process number being executed in drive data 1, and determines whether it is time to perform an end determination based on the identified process number. However, drive data 1 may also be configured as a data group that executes a process that performs an end determination. For example, as shown in FIG. 300, drive data 1 can be configured as a data group in which an end determination is performed while the movable rotating device member 37, which is a movable body, is returned to the standby position, which is the return position of its reciprocating motion, i.e., in processes 06, 11, 16, 21, 28, 34, and 37. Even with this type of drive data 1, an end determination is performed each time the movable rotating device member 37 is returned to the standby position. Therefore, even if the end determination condition is met at an irregular timing, the control and data burden can be reduced, and the next operation of the movable rotating device member 37 can be immediately initiated after the end determination condition is met. Additionally, simply by executing the processes in the order specified in Drive Data 1, it is possible to determine whether the end determination conditions for the common consecutive actions are met, which has the advantage that there is no need to specify the process number being executed in Drive Data 1 in order to determine whether the end determination conditions for the common consecutive actions are met.

Here, Figures 270(A) and 270(B) are diagrams for explaining drive pattern D. Drive pattern D is an individual movement pattern that is executed after the continuous movement of the movable rotating role element 37 common to each of movable modes A to D has ended in movable mode A, which notifies development to a super reach (SP development). Note that drive data 2 (role element movement scenario data 2) shown in Figure 270(B) is an example of a case where the up and down movement of the movable rotating role element 37 is controlled by a stepping motor for lifting and lowering.

As shown in Figure 270 (A), drive pattern D is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating part element 37, which is the movable body, moves back and forth from the standby position (see Figure 270 (A1)), which is the return position, to the maximum operating position of the movable rotating part element 37, which is the drive position, and stops for a certain period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) (see Figure 270 (A2)), and then returns to the standby position (see Figure 270 (A3)). In other words, in this embodiment, after the continuous operation of the movable rotating part element 37 common to each of movable modes A to D is completed, an operation is performed in which the movable rotating part element 37 is moved to the maximum operating position and stopped for a certain period of time, thereby announcing that a super reach will occur (SP development).

As shown in Figure 270 (B), drive pattern D is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is operated based on information corresponding to drive data 2 (accessory operation scenario data 2). This drive data 2 (accessory operation scenario data 2) is used to control the stepping motor for lifting and lowering in accordance with process No. 01 to process No. 05.

In process No. 01, the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is stopped for 10 msec after drive data 2 (prop movement scenario data 2) is read. This keeps the movable rotating prop member 37 in the standby position, which is the return position (see Figure 270 (A1)).

In process No. 02, the lifting stepping motor is rotated 72 steps in the forward direction. Furthermore, in process No. 03, the lifting stepping motor is kept stopped for 2000 msec. This causes the movable rotating accessory member 37 to move downward 72 mm, positioning the movable rotating accessory member 37 at its maximum operating position, which is the drive side position, and maintaining the movable rotating accessory member 37 at its maximum operating position for 2 seconds (see Figure 270 (A2)).

In process No. 04, the lifting stepping motor is rotated 72 steps in the reverse direction. Furthermore, in process No. 05, the lifting stepping motor is kept stopped for 10 msec. This causes the movable rotating accessory member 37 to move upward 72 mm, positioning it at the standby position, which is the return position. As a result, in drive pattern D, the movable rotating accessory member 37 makes one reciprocating motion between the standby position, which is the return position, and the maximum operating position, which is the drive position.

Here, Figures 271(A) and 271(B) are diagrams for explaining drive pattern E. Drive pattern E is an individual movement pattern that is executed after the continuous movement of the movable rotating role element 37 common to each of movable modes A to D is completed in movable mode B, which notifies development to a special reach (SPSP development). Note that drive data 3 (role element movement scenario data 3) shown in Figure 271(B) is an example of a case where the up and down movement of the movable rotating role element 37 is controlled by a stepping motor for lifting and lowering, and the expansion and contraction of the movable rotating role element 37 is controlled by a stepping motor for expansion and contraction.

As shown in Figure 271 (A), drive pattern E is similar to the aforementioned drive pattern D in that it involves a reciprocating motion in which the movable rotating paraphernalia member 37, which is a movable body, moves from a standby position (see Figure 271 (A1)), which is the return side position, to the maximum operating position of the movable rotating paraphernalia member 37, which is the drive side position, and is then stopped for a certain period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) (see Figures 270 (A2) to 270 (A4)), after which it returns to the standby position (see Figure 270 (A5)), which is the return side position. However, it differs from drive pattern D in that the movable rotating paraphernalia member 37 expands and contracts (see Figures 270 (A2) to 270 (A4)) while it is stopped for a certain period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) at the maximum operating position. That is, in this embodiment, after the continuous movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 common to each of movable modes A to D is completed, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved to the maximum operating position and expanded/contracted at the maximum operating position, thereby announcing that a special reach will occur (SPSP development).

As shown in Figure 271 (B), drive pattern E is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is operated based on information corresponding to drive data 3 (accessory operation scenario data 3). This drive data 3 (accessory operation scenario data 3) is used to control the stepping motor for lifting and the stepping motor for expanding and contracting in accordance with process No. 01 to process No. 07.

In process No. 01, the stepping motor for lifting is stopped for 10 msec after drive data 3 (prop movement scenario data 3) is read. This keeps the movable rotating prop member 37 in the standby position, which is the return position (see Figure 271 (A1)).

In process No. 02, the lifting stepping motor is rotated 72 steps in the forward direction. This moves the movable rotating accessory member 37 downward 72 mm, and the movable rotating accessory member 37 is positioned at the maximum operating position, which is the drive side position (see Figure 271 (A2)).

In addition, in Process No. 01 and Process No. 02, the stepping motor for zooming remains stopped.

In process No. 03, the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is stopped for 2000 msec, and the stepping motor for zooming is rotated 50 steps in the forward direction. Furthermore, in process No. 04, the stepping motor for zooming is stopped for 1900 msec. This causes the movable rotating accessory member 37 to expand to the maximum operating position, which is the drive side position, and this expanded state is maintained (see Figure 271 (A3)).

In process No. 05, the stepping motor for expansion and contraction is rotated 50 steps in the reverse direction. This returns the movable rotating accessory member 37 to its contracted state at the maximum operating position, which is the drive side position (see Figure 271 (A4)).

In process No. 06, the lifting stepping motor is rotated 72 steps in the reverse direction. Furthermore, in process No. 07, the lifting stepping motor is kept stopped for 10 msec. This causes the movable rotating accessory member 37 to return to its standby position, which is its return position (see Figure 271 (A5)).

In addition, in processes No. 06 and 07, the stepping motor for zooming remains stopped.

Here, Figures 272 and 273 are diagrams for explaining drive pattern F. Drive pattern F is an individual operation pattern that is executed after the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 common to each of movable modes A to D is completed in movable mode B, which notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R probability variable jackpot (promotion to probability variable). Note that drive data 4 (accessory operation scenario data 4) shown in Figure 273 is an example of a case where the up and down movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is controlled by a lifting stepping motor, the expansion and contraction of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is controlled by an expansion and contraction stepping motor, and the rotation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is controlled by a rotation stepping motor.

As shown in Figure 272, drive pattern F is similar to the aforementioned drive patterns D and E in that it involves a reciprocating movement of the movable rotating prop member 37, which is a movable body, from a standby position (see Figure 271 (A1)) that is the return side position to the maximum operating position of the movable rotating prop member 37 that is the drive side position, where it is stopped for a certain period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) (see Figures 270 (A2) to 270 (A4)), and then returning to the standby position that is the return side position (see Figure 270 (A5)). However, it differs from drive pattern D in that the movable rotating prop member 37 expands and contracts and rotates (see Figures 270 (A3) and 270 (A4)) while it is stopped at the maximum operating position for a certain period of time (e.g., 2 seconds), and it differs from drive pattern E in that the movable rotating prop member 37 rotates (see Figures 270 (A3) and 270 (A4)) while it is stopped at the maximum operating position for a certain period of time (e.g., 2 seconds). That is, in this embodiment, after the continuous movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 common to each of movable modes A to D is completed, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved to the maximum operating position, and the movable rotating accessory member 37 expands, contracts, and rotates at the maximum operating position, thereby announcing that the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R probability jackpot (promotion to probability jackpot).

As shown in Figure 273, drive pattern F is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is operated based on information corresponding to drive data 4 (accessory operation scenario data 4). This drive data 4 (accessory operation scenario data 4) is used to control the stepping motor for lifting and lowering, the stepping motor for expansion and contraction, and the stepping motor for rotation in accordance with process No. 01 to process No. 07.

In process No. 01, the stepping motor for lifting is stopped for 10 msec after drive data 4 (prop movement scenario data 4) is read. This keeps the movable rotating prop member 37 in the standby position, which is the return position (see Figure 273 (A1)).

In process No. 02, the lifting stepping motor is rotated 72 steps in the forward direction. This moves the movable rotating accessory member 37 downward 72 mm, and the movable rotating accessory member 37 is positioned at the maximum operating position, which is the drive side position (see Figure 272 (A2)).

In addition, in Process No. 01 and Process No. 02, the stepping motor for zooming and the stepping motor for rotation remain stopped.

In process No. 03, the stepping motor for lifting and lowering is kept stopped for 2000 msec, the stepping motor for zooming is rotated 50 steps in the forward direction, and the stepping motor for rotation is rotated 2000 steps in the forward direction. Furthermore, in process No. 04, the stepping motor for zooming is kept stopped for 1900 msec. As a result, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is rotated in an expanded state at the maximum operating position, which is the drive side position, and rotation in this expanded state is maintained (see Figure 272 (A3)).

In process No. 05, the zoom stepping motor is rotated 50 steps in the reverse direction, and the rotation stepping motor is stopped. This places the movable rotating accessory member 37 in a non-rotating, expanded state at the maximum operating position, which is the drive side position (see Figure 272 (A4)).

In process No. 05, the stepping motor for expansion and contraction is rotated 50 steps in the reverse direction. This returns the movable rotating accessory member 37 to its contracted state at the maximum operating position, which is the drive side position (see Figure 271 (A4)).

In process No. 06, the lifting stepping motor is rotated 72 steps in the reverse direction. Furthermore, in process No. 07, the lifting stepping motor is kept stopped for 10 msec. This causes the movable rotating accessory member 37 to return to its standby position, which is its return position (see Figure 272 (A5)).

In addition, in processes No. 06 and 07, the stepping motor for zooming remains stopped.

Drive pattern D is a drive pattern that is executed after the sequential operations of drive patterns A to C have been completed in movable mode A (see FIG. 266(A)), and processing begins when the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is the movable body, is positioned in the standby position, which is the return position (see FIG. 270(B)). Drive pattern E is a drive pattern that is executed after the sequential operations of drive patterns A to C have been completed in movable mode B (see FIG. 266(B)), and processing begins when the movable rotating accessory member 37 is positioned in the standby position, which is the return position (see FIG. 271(B)). Drive pattern F is a drive pattern that is executed after the sequential operations of drive patterns A to C have been completed in movable mode C (see FIG. 266(C)), and processing begins when the movable rotating accessory member 37 is positioned in the standby position, which is the return position (see FIG. 273). Drive pattern G is executed after the sequential operations of drive patterns A through C are completed in moving mode D (see Figure 266 (D)). The process begins with the movable rotating accessory member 37 positioned in its standby position, which is the return position (see Figure 274 (B)). In other words, the individual operations executed after the sequential operations common to multiple moving modes A through D are all executed with the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is the movable body, positioned in its standby position, which is the return position.

On the other hand, the continuous motion common to multiple movable modes A-D ends when the movable rotating device member 37, which is the movable body, is positioned in the standby position, which is the return position, as described above. In other words, the position of the movable rotating device member 37 when the continuous motion common to multiple movable modes A-D ends and the position of the movable rotating device member 37 when the individual motion executed for each movable mode A-D begins after the continuous motion ends are both the same standby position. Therefore, when the continuous motion common to multiple movable modes A-D ends, the individual motion executed for each movable mode A-D can be started smoothly and without any sense of discomfort. As a result, when the movable rotating device member 37 is caused to execute a continuous motion common to multiple movable modes A-D based on drive data 1, where the timing of the establishment of the end determination condition may be uncertain, it is possible to transition from the continuous motion common to movable modes A-D to an motion specific to each movable mode A-D, regardless of the timing at which the end determination condition is established.

Here, Figures 274(A) and 274(B) are diagrams for explaining drive pattern G. Drive pattern G is a pattern of individual actions that are executed after the end of the continuous action of the movable rotating accessory member 37 common to each of movable modes A to D in movable mode D, which notifies that there will be no development into a Super Reach (no SP development), no development into a Special Reach (no SPSP development), or that the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is not a 16R probability variable jackpot (no promotion to 16R probability variable). Note that drive data 5 (apparatus action scenario data 5) shown in Figure 271(B) is an example of a case where the up and down movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is controlled by a stepping motor for lifting and lowering.

As shown in FIG. 274(A), drive pattern G is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating device element 37, which is a movable body, moves back and forth from the standby position (see FIG. 274(A1)), which is the return position, to the intermediate operating position 1, which is the drive position, for a certain period of time (e.g., 0.04 seconds) (see FIG. 274(A2)), and then returns to the standby position (see FIG. 274(A1)). In other words, in this embodiment, after the continuous movement of the movable rotating device element 37 common to each of the movable modes A to D is completed, the movable rotating device element 37 moves back and forth between the standby position and the intermediate operating position 1. In other words, the movable rotating device element 37 is not moved to the maximum movable position. This indicates that the game will not progress to a Super Reach (no SP development), a Special Reach (no SPSP development), or that the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is not a 16R guaranteed jackpot (no promotion to a 16R guaranteed jackpot).

As shown in Figure 274 (B), drive pattern G is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is operated based on information corresponding to drive data 5 (accessory operation scenario data 5). This drive data 5 (accessory operation scenario data 5) is used to control the stepping motor for lifting and lowering in accordance with process No. 01 to process No. 05.

In process No. 01, the stepping motor for lifting is stopped for 10 msec after drive data 5 (prop movement scenario data 5) is read. This keeps the movable rotating prop member 37 in the standby position, which is the return position (see Figure 274 (A1)).

In process No. 02, the lifting stepping motor is rotated 12 steps in the forward direction. Furthermore, in process No. 03, the lifting stepping motor is kept stopped for 40 msec. This causes the movable rotating accessory member 37 to move downward by 12 mm, and the movable rotating accessory member 37 is positioned in intermediate operating position 1, which is the drive side position (see Figure 274 (A2)).

In process No. 04, the lifting stepping motor is rotated 12 steps in the reverse direction. Furthermore, in process No. 05, the lifting stepping motor is stopped for 10 msec. This causes the movable rotating accessory member 37 to return to its standby position, which is its return position (see Figure 274 (A1)).

Here, Figure 275 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the reel operation effect setting process executed in step S4508 of the special game effect setting process of Figure 262. In the reel operation effect setting process of this embodiment, a movable body control process is executed to set the movement timing and movement mode of the movable rotating reel member 37. Below, an example of the procedure for the reel operation effect setting process of this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 275.

<Step S4601>
275, in the role activation effect setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a normal reach flag indicating that a normal reach effect pattern is set as the special symbol game effect for the special symbol game is set (step S4601). If it is determined that a normal reach effect pattern is set in step S4502 in the special symbol game effect setting process of FIG. 262, the normal reach flag is set to on in step S4503 in the special symbol game effect setting process.

If the normal reach flag is set to on (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4602; if the normal reach flag is set to off (step S4601: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4606.

<Steps S4602 and S4603>
If the normal reach flag is set to ON (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the T1 counter (step S4602), and further sets the T1 drive flag to ON (step S4603), and proceeds to step S4604.

The T1 counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time until the start of the reel activation timing A, which is set at the end of the normal reach performance. The T1 drive flag is a flag that starts driving the movable rotating reel element 37, which is a movable body, at time T1, which is the start timing of the reel activation timing A. In other words, when a normal reach performance pattern is set, the drive of the movable rotating reel element 37 is started when the T1 drive flag is on and the value of the T1 counter is 0, and the movable rotating reel element 37 is moved at the reel activation timing A (see Figure 265).

<Steps S4604 and S4605>
In step S4604, the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a miss. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss (step S4604: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the SP non-development flag, which indicates a miss that will not develop into a super reach (a miss in a normal reach), to on (step S4604), and terminates the relevant role activation presentation setting process. That is, by setting the SP non-development flag to on, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a miss when a normal reach presentation pattern is set, the movable rotating role member 37 is moved at role activation timing A to notify that development into a super reach will not occur.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a miss (step S4604: No), i.e., if there is a jackpot, the device activation effect setting process is terminated. Note that if a normal reach effect pattern is set and the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is not a miss (if there is a jackpot), the movable rotating device member 37 is moved at device activation timing A to announce that it is a 16R probability jackpot or that it is not a 16R probability jackpot, depending on the type of jackpot.

<Step S4606>
If the normal reach flag is set to OFF (step S4601: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the super reach flag, which indicates that a super reach effect pattern is set as the special symbol game effect for the special symbol game, is set to ON (step S4606). The super reach flag is set to ON in step S4505 in the special symbol game effect setting process when it is determined in step S4504 in the special symbol game effect setting process of FIG.

If the Super Reach flag is set to on (step S4606: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4607; if the Super Reach flag is set to off (step S4606: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4614.

<Steps S4607 to S4609>
If the Super Reach flag is set to ON (step S4606: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the T1 counter (step S4607) and sets the T1 drive flag to ON (step S4608). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the SP development flag, which indicates development to a Super Reach, to ON (step S4609), and proceeds to step S4610.

The T1 counter indicates the remaining time until the start of reel activation timing A, which is set at the end of a normal reach effect. The T1 drive flag is a flag that starts the drive of the movable rotating reel element 37, which is a movable body, at time T1, which is the start timing of reel activation timing A. The SP development flag is a flag that indicates development to a super reach, and is referenced in step S4930 of the movable rotating reel control processing in Figure 281 described below to determine whether or not to notify development to a super reach by the operation of the movable rotating reel element 37. In other words, when a super reach effect pattern is set, if the T1 drive flag is on and the value of the T1 counter is 0, the drive of the movable rotating reel element 37 is started, and the movable rotating reel element 37 is moved to notify development to a super reach at reel activation timing A (see Figure 265).

<Steps S4610 and S4611>
In step S4610, the MPU 51 sets the T2 counter, and further sets the T2 drive flag to ON (step S4611), and proceeds to step S4612.

The T2 counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time until the start of the reel activation timing B, which is set at the end of the super reach performance. The T2 drive flag is a flag that starts the drive of the movable rotating reel element 37, which is a movable body, at time T2, which is the start timing of the reel activation timing B. In other words, when a super reach performance pattern is set, the drive of the movable rotating reel element 37 is started when the T2 drive flag is on and the value of the T2 counter is 0, and the movable rotating reel element 37 is moved at the reel activation timing B (see Figure 265).

<Steps S4612 and S4613>
In step S4612, the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a miss. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss (step S4612: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the SPSP non-development flag to on (step S4613) and terminates the relevant role activation presentation setting process. The SPSP non-development flag is a flag indicating a miss that will not develop into a special reach (a miss in a super reach), and is referenced in step S4941 of the movable rotating role control process in FIG. 281 described below to determine whether to notify development into a super reach by the operation of the movable rotating role member 37. In other words, by setting the SPSP non-development flag to on, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a miss when a special reach presentation pattern is set, the movable rotating role member 37 is moved at role activation timing B to notify development into a special reach.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a miss (step S4612: No), i.e., if it is a pattari, the device activation effect setting process is terminated. Note that if a super reach effect pattern is set and the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is not a miss (a jackpot), the movable rotating device member 37 is moved at device activation timing B to announce either that it is a 16R probability jackpot or that it is not a 16R probability jackpot, depending on the type of jackpot.

<Step S4614>
If the super reach flag is set to OFF (step S4606: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the special reach flag, which indicates that a special reach effect pattern is set as the special reach effect for the special symbol game, is set to ON (step S4614). The special reach flag is set to ON in step S4507 in the special symbol game effect setting process when it is determined in step S4506 in the special symbol game effect setting process of FIG.

If the special reach flag is set to on (step S4614: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4615. On the other hand, if the super reach flag is set to off (step S4614: No), the MPU 51 terminates the relevant role activation performance setting process. In other words, when a non-reach performance pattern that is not a reach performance pattern is set, the flag for activating the movable rotating role member 37, which is a movable body, is not set to on, and the timing for activating the movable rotating role member 37 is not set. As a result, in a non-reach performance pattern, the movable rotating role member 37 is not moved.

<Steps S4615 to S4617>
If the special reach flag is set to ON (step S4614: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the T1 counter (step S4615) and sets the T1 drive flag to ON (step S4616). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the SP development flag, which indicates that the special reach will develop into a super reach, to ON (step S4617), and proceeds to step S4618.

The T1 counter indicates the remaining time until the start of reel activation timing A, which is set at the end of a normal reach performance. The T1 drive flag is a flag that starts the drive of the movable rotating reel element 37, which is a movable body, at time T1, which is the start timing of reel activation timing A. The SP development flag is a flag that indicates development to a super reach, and is referenced in step S4930 of the movable rotating reel control processing in Figure 281 described below to determine whether or not to notify development to a super reach by the operation of the movable rotating reel element 37. In other words, when a special reach performance pattern is set, if the T1 drive flag is on and the value of the T1 counter is 0, the drive of the movable rotating reel element 37 is started, and the movable rotating reel element 37 is moved to notify development to a super reach at reel activation timing A (see Figure 265).

<Steps S4618 to S4620>
In step S4618, the MPU 51 sets the T2 counter. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the T2 drive flag to ON (step S4619), sets the SPSP development flag indicating that the game will develop into a special reach to ON (step S4620), and proceeds to step S4621.

The T2 counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time until the start of reel activation timing B, which is set at the end of the super reach effect. The T2 drive flag is a flag that starts the drive of the movable rotating reel element 37, which is a movable body, at time T2, which is the start timing of reel activation timing B. In other words, when a special reach effect pattern is set, the drive of the movable rotating reel element 37 is started when the T2 drive flag is on and the value of the T2 counter is 0, and the movable rotating reel element 37 is moved to notify that the reel will develop into a special reach at reel activation timing B (see Figure 265).

<Steps S4621 and S4622>
In step S4621, the MPU 51 sets the T3 counter. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the T3 drive flag to ON (step S4622), and ends the role object operation performance setting process.

The T3 counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time until the start of the reel activation timing C, which is set at the end of the special reach performance. The T3 drive flag is a flag that starts driving the movable rotating reel element 37, which is a movable body, at time T3, which is the start timing of the reel activation timing C. In other words, when a special reach performance pattern is set, the drive of the movable rotating reel element 37 is started when the T3 drive flag is on and the value of the T3 counter is 0, and the movable rotating reel element 37 is moved at the reel activation timing C (see Figure 265).

[Button effect setting process]
Next, the button effect setting process executed in step S4509 of the special game effect setting process of Fig. 262 will be described. Here, Fig. 276 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the button effect setting process of this embodiment. Below, the button effect setting process of this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 276.

<Step S4701>
As shown in FIG. 276, in the button effect setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the 16R probability variable promotion flag is set to ON (step S4701). The 16R probability variable promotion flag is a flag that executes a 16R probability variable promotion effect by moving the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, in drive pattern F (see FIG. 266(F) and FIG. 272), and also executes a button effect (see FIG. 277) before executing this 16R probability variable promotion effect. This 16R probability variable promotion flag is set to ON in step S4407 of the stop symbol combination setting process of FIG. 261 when the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R probability variable jackpot and a combination other than "777" is set as the combination of the decorative symbols to be stopped.

If the 16R probability variable promotion flag is set to on (step S4701: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4703; if the 16R probability variable promotion flag is set to off (step S4701: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4702.

<Step S4702>
If the 16R probability variable promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4701: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 16R non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4702). The 16R non-promotion flag is a flag that executes a 16R probability variable promotion effect by moving the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, in drive pattern G (see FIGS. 266(D) and 274), and executes a button effect (see FIG. 277) before executing the 16R probability variable promotion effect. This 16R non-promotion flag is set to ON in step S4406 of the stop symbol combination setting process of FIG. 261 when the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, or when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot and a combination other than "777" is set as the combination of the decorative symbols stopped.

If the 16R non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4702: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4703; if the 16R non-promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4702: No), the MPU 51 terminates the button effect setting process.

<Steps S4703 and S4704>
If the 16R probability variable promotion flag is set to ON (step S4701: Yes), or if the 16R probability variable non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4702: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4703). The T3 drive flag is a flag that starts the drive of the movable rotating role element 37, which is a movable body, at time T3 (see FIG. 265), which is the start timing of the role element activation timing C set at the end of the special reach performance. When a special reach performance pattern is set, the flag is set to ON in step S4622 of the role element activation performance setting process of FIG. 275. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the timing at which the movable rotating role element 37 set in the role element activation performance setting process of FIG. 275 is finally moved is the role element activation timing C set at the end of the special reach performance.

If the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4703: Yes), that is, if the timing for finally moving the movable rotating device member 37 set in the device activation effect setting process of FIG. 275 is device activation timing C set at the end of the special reach effect, the MPU 51 sets the T3 button effect flag to ON (step S4704) and terminates the button effect setting process. The T3 button effect flag is a flag that causes a button effect to be executed at device activation timing C (see FIG. 265) when time T3 has elapsed since the start of the special game, and is referenced in step S5107 of the button effect setting process of FIG. 287 described below to determine whether it is the timing to execute a button effect.

On the other hand, if the T3 drive flag is set to off (step S4703: No), that is, if the timing for finally moving the movable rotating device member 37 set in the device activation performance setting process of FIG. 275 is not device activation timing C, which is set at the end of the special reach performance, the MPU 51 transitions to step S4705.

Here, the button effect includes a display effect in which a predetermined image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 to prompt the player to operate the operation button 20 during the device activation timings A to C (see FIG. 265) at which the 16R probability variable promotion effect or the 16R non-promotion effect is executed when the movable rotating device member 37, which is a movable body, is moved. The button effect is executed during the period (button operation valid period) during which pressing the operation button 20 as a predetermined game operation is valid. The button operation valid period is set to the device activation timings A to C (see FIG. 265) at which the 16R probability variable promotion effect or the 16R non-promotion effect is executed. The button effect is initiated when the button operation valid period begins and ends when the player presses the operation button 20 during the button operation valid period, or when the button operation valid period has elapsed. For example, as shown in FIG. 277, in the button effect, an image imitating the operation button 20 and an image indicating the remaining valid button operation period are displayed in the symbol display section 341. Of course, the image in the button effect shown in FIG. 277 is just one example, and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, if the player presses the operation button 20 as a specified game operation while a button effect is being executed (within the valid button operation period), the continuous operation of the movable rotating device element 37, which is common to movable modes A to D, is terminated upon establishment of an end determination condition for the continuous operation of the movable rotating device element 37, and then the movable rotating device element 37, which is a movable body, is moved to execute a 16R continuous variable promotion effect or a 16R continuous variable non-promotion effect.In addition, if the player does not operate the operation button 20 while a button effect is being executed (within the valid button operation period), the movable rotating device element 37, which is a movable body, is moved after the valid button operation period has elapsed, to execute a 16R continuous variable promotion effect or a 16R continuous variable non-promotion effect.

<Steps S4705 and S4706>
If the T3 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4703: No), that is, if the timing at which the movable rotating device member 37 set in the device operation performance setting process of FIG. 275 is finally moved is not device operation timing C set at the end of the special reach performance, the MPU 51 determines whether the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4703). The T2 drive flag is a flag that starts the drive of the movable rotating device member 37, which is a movable body, at time T2 (see FIG. 265), which is the start timing of device operation timing B set at the end of the super reach performance, and is set to ON in step S4611 of the device operation performance setting process of FIG. 275 when a super reach performance pattern is set. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the timing at which the movable rotating device member 37 set in the device operation performance setting process of FIG. 275 is finally moved is device operation timing B set at the end of the super reach performance.

If the T2 drive flag is set to on (step S4705: Yes), that is, if the timing for finally moving the movable rotating device member 37 set in the device activation effect setting process of FIG. 275 is device activation timing B set at the end of the super reach effect, the MPU 51 sets the T2 button effect flag to on (step S4705) and terminates the button effect setting process. The T2 button effect flag is a flag that causes a button effect to be executed at device activation timing B (see FIG. 265), when time T2 has elapsed since the start of the special symbol game, and is referenced in step S5104 of the button effect setting process of FIG. 287 described below, to determine whether it is the timing to execute a button effect.

On the other hand, if the T2 drive flag is set to off (step S4705: No), that is, if the timing for finally moving the movable rotating device member 37 set in the device activation performance setting process of FIG. 275 is not device activation timing B, which is set at the end of the super reach performance, the MPU 51 transitions to step S4707.

<Steps S4707 and S4708>
If the T2 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4705: No), that is, if the timing at which the movable rotating device member 37 set in the device operation performance setting process of FIG. 275 is finally moved is not device operation timing B set at the end of the super reach performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the T1 drive flag is set to ON (step S4707). The T1 drive flag is a flag that starts the drive of the movable rotating device member 37, which is a movable body, at time T1 (see FIG. 265), which is the start timing of device operation timing A set at the end of the normal reach performance, and is set to ON in step S4603 in the device operation performance setting process of FIG. 275 when a normal reach performance pattern is set. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the timing at which the movable rotating device member 37 set in the device operation performance setting process of FIG. 275 is finally moved is device operation timing A set at the end of the normal reach performance.

If the T1 drive flag is set to on (step S4707: Yes), that is, if the timing for finally moving the movable rotating device member 37 set in the device activation effect setting process of FIG. 275 is device activation timing A, which is set at the end of the normal reach effect, the MPU 51 sets the T1 button effect flag to on (step S4708) and terminates the button effect setting process. The T1 button effect flag is a flag that causes a button effect to be executed at device activation timing A (see FIG. 265), when time T1 has elapsed since the start of the special symbol game, and is referenced in step S5101 of the button effect setting process of FIG. 287, described below, to determine whether it is the timing to execute a button effect.

On the other hand, if the T1 drive flag is set to off (step S4707: No), that is, if the timing for finally moving the movable rotating role element 37 set in the role element activation effect setting process of FIG. 275 is not role element activation timing A, which is set at the end of the normal reach effect, the MPU 51 terminates the button effect setting process.

[Special game performance control processing]
Next, the special symbol game presentation control process executed in step S2704 in the sub-timer interrupt process of Fig. 53 will be described. In the special symbol game presentation control process of this embodiment, the special symbol game presentation executed in the special symbol game is controlled based on the special symbol game presentation set in the special symbol game presentation setting presentation process of Fig. 262. Here, Fig. 278 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol game presentation control process. Below, an example of the special symbol game presentation control process will be described with reference to Fig. 278.

<Step S4801>
In the special symbol game performance control process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first executes a movable rotating symbol control process as a movable body control process that controls the operation of the movable rotating symbol member 37, which is a movable body in the special symbol game, based on the symbol operation performance set in the symbol operation performance setting process as the movable body control process of Figure 275 (step S4801). Details of the movable rotating symbol control process will be described later with reference to Figures 279 to 286.

<Step S4802>
In step S4802, the MPU 51 executes a button effect control process for controlling the execution of the button effect in the special symbol game based on the button effect set in the button effect setting process of Fig. 276. Details of the button effect control process will be described later with reference to Figs. 287 and 288.

<Step S4803>
In step S4803, the MPU 51 executes other effect control processing related to effects other than the role activation effects and button effects in the special chart game.

[Movable rotating accessory control processing]
Next, an example of the movable rotating accessory control process executed in step S4801 of the special symbol game performance control process of Fig. 278 will be described. In the movable rotating accessory control process of this embodiment, a movable body control process is executed to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, based on the accessory operation performance set in the accessory operation performance setting process of Fig. 275. Here, Figs. 279 to 286 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the movable rotating accessory control process. Below, the movable rotating accessory control process will be described with reference to Figs. 279 to 286.

<Steps S4901 and S4902>
279, in the movable rotating accessory control process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the T1 drive flag is set to on (step S4901). The T1 drive flag is a flag that starts driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T1, which is the start timing of the accessory operation timing A (see FIG. 265) set at the end of the normal reach performance.

If the T1 drive flag is set to on (step S4901: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the T1 counter, which indicates the remaining time until reel activation timing A begins (step S4902), and proceeds to step S4903. On the other hand, if the T1 drive flag is set to off (step S4901: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4903.

<Steps S4903 and S4904>
In step S4903, the MPU 51 determines whether the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4903). The T2 drive flag is a flag that starts driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T2, which is the start timing of accessory operation timing B (see FIG. 265) set at the end of the super reach effect.

If the T2 drive flag is set to on (step S4903: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the T2 counter, which indicates the remaining time until reel activation timing B begins (step S4904), and proceeds to step S4905. On the other hand, if the T2 drive flag is set to off (step S4903: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4905.

<Steps S4905 and S4906>
In step S4905, the MPU 51 determines whether the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4905). The T3 drive flag is a flag that starts driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T3, which is the start timing of the accessory operation timing C (see FIG. 265) set at the end of the special reach effect.

If the T3 drive flag is set to on (step S4905: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the T3 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the reel activation timing C starts (step S4906), and proceeds to step S4907. On the other hand, if the T3 drive flag is set to off (step S4905: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4907.

<Step S4907>
In step S4907, the MPU 51 determines whether the T1 drive flag is set to ON. If the T1 drive flag is set to ON (step S4907: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4908. On the other hand, if the T1 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4907: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4910.

<Steps S4908 and S4909>
If the T1 drive flag is set to ON (step S4907: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the T1 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the start of the accessory operation timing A, is 0 (step S4908). That is, it determines whether it is the timing to start driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is the movable body.

If the value of the T1 counter is 0 (step S4908: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, the MPU 51 sets the T1 drive flag to OFF (step S4908) and proceeds to step S4916. On the other hand, if the value of the T1 counter is not 0 (step S4908: No), i.e., if it is not time to start driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4910>
If the T1 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4907: NO), the MPU 51 determines whether the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4910). If the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4910: YES), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4911. On the other hand, if the T2 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4910: NO), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4913.

<Steps S4911 and S4912>
If the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4910: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the T2 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the start of the accessory operation timing B, is 0 (step S4911). That is, it determines whether it is the timing to start driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is the movable body.

If the value of the T2 counter is 0 (step S4910: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, the MPU 51 sets the T2 drive flag to OFF (step S4912) and proceeds to step S4916. On the other hand, if the value of the T2 counter is not 0 (step S4911: No), i.e., if it is not time to start driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4913>
If the T2 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4910: NO), the MPU 51 determines whether the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4913). If the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4913: YES), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4914. On the other hand, if the T3 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4913: NO), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4920 in FIG. 280.

<Steps S4914 and S4915>
If the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4914: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the T3 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the start of the accessory operation timing C, is 0 (step S4914). That is, it determines whether it is the timing to start driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is the movable body.

If the value of the T3 counter is 0 (step S4914: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, the MPU 51 sets the T3 drive flag to OFF (step S4915) and proceeds to step S4916. On the other hand, if the value of the T3 counter is not 0 (step S4914: No), i.e., if it is not time to start driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4916>
When it is time to start driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, the MPU 51 sets drive data 1 (accessory operation scenario data 1) (see FIG. 269) (step S4916). The drive data 1 is information that causes the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, to execute a common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) in the moving modes A to D of the movable rotating accessory member 37. In other words, the MPU 51 controls the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the common drive data 1, regardless of the moving mode.

As such, in this embodiment, the continuous motions (drive patterns A-C) common to multiple movement modes A-D for the movable rotating role element 37, which is a movable body, are executed based on information corresponding to a single common drive data 1 (role element movement scenario data 1). Furthermore, as described above, drive data 1 is stored in ROM, and when a continuous motion common to multiple movement modes A-D for the movable rotating role element 37 is executed, drive data 1 is read once from ROM and set once in RAM. Then, by reading drive data 1 once from ROM and setting drive data 1 once in RAM, the movable rotating role element 37 is moved by the continuous motions common to multiple movement modes A-D. This reduces the amount of drive data required to achieve each of movement modes A-D, thereby not only reducing the memory burden but also reducing the control burden, such as reading and temporarily storing drive data, when operating the movable rotating role element 37.

<Steps S4917 to S4919>
In step S4917, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 1 scenario timer to cause the movable rotating accessory member 37 to perform successive operations (drive patterns A to C) according to the processing procedure defined in the drive data 1 (see FIG. 269) (step S4917), and sets the drive data 1 set flag, which indicates that the drive data 1 is set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, to on (step S4918). Then, the MPU 51 starts process No. 1 of the drive data 1 (see FIG. 269) (step S4919), and ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4920>
If the T3 drive flag is set to off (step S4913: No), as shown in FIG. 280, the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 1 set flag, which indicates that drive data 1 is set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, is set to on (step S4920).

If the drive data 1 set flag is set on (step S4920: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4921; if the drive data 1 set flag is set off (step S4920: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4961 in FIG. 283.

<Steps S4921 to S4923>
If the drive data 1 set flag is set on (step S4920: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the drive data 1 scenario timer (step S4921) and, based on the value of the updated drive data 1 scenario timer, determines whether it is time to move on to the next processing specified in drive data 1 (step S4922).

If it is time to move on to the next process specified in Drive Data 1 (step S4922: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the next process specified in Drive Data 1 (step S4923) and ends the movable rotating device control process. For example, as shown in FIG. 269, when Process No. 5 in Drive Data 1 is being executed, i.e., when the lifting stepping motor is stopped from rotating, the process moves to Process No. 6, which rotates the lifting stepping motor 12 steps in the forward direction.

In this way, by referencing the drive data 1 scenario timer updated in step S4921 and sequentially executing the next process in drive data 1, all processes No. 1 to No. 29 in drive data 1 are executed. This executes continuous operations (drive patterns A to C) common to multiple movement modes A to D for the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body.

On the other hand, if it is not time to proceed to the next process specified in Drive Data 1 (step S4922: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4924.

<Step S4924>
If it is not the time to proceed to the next process specified in the drive data 1 (step S4922: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the process No. 28 execution flag is set to ON (step S4924). The process No. 28 execution flag is a flag that executes process No. 28 in the drive data 1 (see FIG. 269). If it is determined that the condition for determining the end of the continuous operation common to the multiple moving modes A to D is met (if it is determined that the operation button 20 has been operated) while the movable rotating device member 37, which is the movable body, is stopped in the intermediate operating position 1, which is the return position, the process No. 28 execution flag is set to ON in step S4959 of FIG. 282 (described later) of the movable rotating device control process. In other words, the process No. 28 execution flag is set to ON in step S4959 of the drive data 1 when the continuous operation of the movable rotating device member 37 is to be ended while the movable rotating device member 37 is stopped in the intermediate operating position 1. This flag causes the continuous operation to end with the movable rotating accessory member 37 returned to the standby position by skipping the process to 28. As a result, even if the movable rotating accessory member 37 is not in the standby position, the movable rotating accessory member 37 can be immediately returned to the standby position to end the continuous operation.

If the process No. 28 execution flag is set to ON (step S4924: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4925; if the process No. 28 execution flag is set to OFF (step S4924: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4927 in FIG. 281.

<Steps S4925 and S4926>
If the process No. 28 execution flag is set to ON (step S4924: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the process No. 28 of the drive data 1 (step S4925). Then, the MPU 51 resets the drive data 1 scenario timer (step S4926) and ends the movable rotating device control process. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer to the value at the start of process No. 28 when all processes of drive data 1 are executed. This allows the processes of process No. 28 and process No. 29 of drive data 1 (see FIG. 269) to be executed sequentially, and the process of the movable rotating device member 37 based on drive data 1 can be ended with the movable rotating device member 37 returned to the standby position.

<Step S4927>
If it is not the time to move on to the next process defined in the drive data 1 (step S4922: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4927), as shown in Fig. 281. That is, the MPU 51 performs an end determination as to whether it is the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1, when the end determination condition based on the completion of all processes defined by the drive data 1 is met.

If the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4927: Yes), that is, if the MPU 51 determines that it is time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating role member 37 based on the drive data 1 because the end determination condition is met based on all processing defined by the drive data 1 having been completed, the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S4928. On the other hand, if the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer is not at its maximum value (step S4927: No), that is, if the MPU 51 determines that it is not time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating role member 37 based on the drive data 1 because the end determination condition is not met based on all processing defined by the drive data 1 having not been completed, the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S4948 in FIG. 282.

<Steps S4928 and S4929>
If the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4927: Yes), that is, if the establishment of the end determination condition determines that it is time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1, the MPU 51 clears the drive data 1 scenario timer for causing the movable rotating accessory member 37 to execute the continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) in accordance with the processing procedure defined in the drive data 1 (see FIG. 269) (step S4948). Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 1 set flag, indicating that drive data 1 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, to OFF (step S4929), and proceeds to step S4930. That is, if the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4927: Yes), the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is ended.

<Step S4930>
In step S4930, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the SP development flag, which indicates that the game will develop into a super reach, is set to ON.

If the SP development flag, indicating that the game will develop into a Super Reach, is set to ON (step S4930: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4931; if the SP development flag is set to OFF (step S4930: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4933.

<Steps S4931 and S4932>
If the SP development flag indicating development to a super reach is set to ON (step S4930: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 2 not set flag to ON (step S4931). The drive data 2 not set flag is a flag that causes drive data 2 to be set, and is referenced in step S4961 of FIG. 283 described below to determine whether or not to set drive data 2.

In addition, drive data 2 is information that, in movement mode A of the movable rotating accessory element 37 that notifies development to a super reach (SP development), moves the movable rotating accessory element 37 with drive pattern D (see Figures 266(A) and 270) as an individual operation after the common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) based on drive data 1.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the SP development flag to OFF (step S4932) and ends the movable rotating device control process.

<Step S4933>
If the SP development flag, which indicates that the game will develop into a Super Reach, is set to off (step S4930: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the SP non-development flag, which indicates that the game will not develop into a Super Reach, is set to on (step S4933).

If the SP non-development flag, indicating that the game will not develop into a Super Reach, is set to ON (step S4933: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4934; if the SP non-development flag is set to OFF (step S4933: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4936.

<Steps S4934 and S4935>
If the SP non-development flag, which indicates that the game will not develop into a super reach, is set to ON (step S4933: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 not set flag to ON (step S4934). The drive data 5 not set flag is a flag that causes drive data 5 to be set, and is referenced in step S5000 of FIG. 286 to be described later to determine whether or not to set drive data 5.

In addition, drive data 5 is information that, in the movement mode D of the movable rotating accessory member 37 that notifies that development will not occur to a Super Reach (SP non-development), moves the movable rotating accessory member 37 with drive pattern G (see Figures 266 (D) and 274) as an individual operation after the common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) based on drive data 1.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the SP non-development flag to OFF (step S4935) and ends the movable rotating device control process.

<Step S4936>
If the SP non-development flag is set to OFF (step S4933: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the SPSP development flag, which indicates that the game will develop into a special reach, is set to ON (step S4936).

If the SPSP development flag, indicating that the game will develop into a special reach, is set to on (step S4936: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4937; if the SPSP development flag is set to off (step S4936: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4939.

<Steps S4937 and S4938>
If the SPSP development flag indicating development to a special reach is set to ON (step S4936: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 3 not set flag to ON (step S4937). The drive data 3 not set flag is a flag that causes drive data 3 to be set, and is referenced in step S4974 of FIG. 284 described later to determine whether or not to set drive data 3.

In addition, drive data 3 is information that, in movement mode B of the movable rotating accessory element 37 that notifies development to a special reach (SPSP development), moves the movable rotating accessory element 37 with drive pattern E (see Figures 266 (B) and 271) as an individual operation after the common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) based on drive data 1.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the SPSP development flag to OFF (step S4938) and terminates the movable rotating device control process.

<Step S4939>
If the SPSP development flag is set to off (step S4936: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the SPSP non-development flag, which indicates that the game will not develop into a special reach, is set to on (step S4939).

If the SPSP non-development flag, indicating that the bonus will not develop into a special reach, is set to on (step S4939: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4940; if the SPSP non-development flag is set to off (step S4939: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4942.

<Steps S4940 and S4941>
If the SPSP non-development flag, which indicates that the special reach will not be developed, is set to ON (step S4939: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 not set flag to ON (step S4940). The drive data 5 not set flag is a flag that causes drive data 5 to be set, and is referenced in step S5000 of FIG. 286 described later to determine whether or not to set drive data 5.

In addition, drive data 5 is information that, in movement mode D of the movable rotating accessory element 37, which notifies that development will not occur to a special reach (SPSP non-development), moves the movable rotating accessory element 37 with drive pattern G (see Figures 266 (D) and 274) as an individual operation after the common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) based on drive data 1.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the SPSP non-development flag to OFF (step S4941) and terminates the movable rotating device control process.

<Step S4942>
If the SPSP non-development flag is set to OFF (step S4939: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 16R probability variable promotion flag is set to ON (step S4942). The 16R probability variable promotion flag is a flag that executes a 16R probability variable promotion effect by moving the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, with the drive pattern F (see FIG. 266 (C) and FIG. 272), and also executes a button effect (see FIG. 277) before the execution of this 16R probability variable promotion effect.

If the 16R probability variable promotion flag is set to on (step S4942: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4943; if the 16R probability variable promotion flag is set to off (step S4942: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4945.

<Steps S4943 and S4944>
If the 16R probability variable promotion flag is set to ON (step S4942: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 4 not set flag to ON (step S4943). The drive data 4 not set flag is a flag that causes drive data 4 to be set, and is referenced in step S4987 of FIG. 285 described later to determine whether or not to set drive data 4.

In addition, drive data 4 is information that, in movement mode C of the movable rotating accessory element 37, which notifies that development will not occur to a special reach (SPSP non-development), moves the movable rotating accessory element 37 with drive pattern F (see Figures 266 (C) and 272) as an individual operation after the common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) based on drive data 1.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the 16R probability promotion flag to OFF (step S4944) and ends the movable rotating device control process.

<Step S4945>
If the 16R probability variable promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4942: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 16R probability variable non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4945). The 16R probability variable non-promotion flag is a flag that executes a 16R probability variable promotion effect by moving the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, in the drive pattern G (see Fig. 266 (D) and Fig. 274), and also executes a button effect (see Fig. 277) before executing this 16R probability variable promotion effect.

If the 16R non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4945: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4946; if the 16R non-promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4945: No), the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating device control process.

<Steps S4946 and S4947>
If the 16R non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4945: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 not set flag to ON (step S4946). The drive data 5 not set flag is a flag that causes drive data 5 to be set, and is referenced in step S5000 of FIG. 286 described later to determine whether or not to set drive data 5.

In addition, drive data 5 is information that, in the movement mode D of the movable rotating accessory element 37 that notifies that there will be no promotion to a 16R probability variable jackpot (non-promotion to 16R probability variable), moves the movable rotating accessory element 37 with drive pattern G (see Figures 266 (D) and 274) as an individual operation after the common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) based on drive data 1.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the 16R non-promotion flag to OFF (step S4947) and ends the movable rotating device control process.

<Step S4948>
If the value of the driving data 1 scenario timer is not the maximum value (step S4927: No), as shown in Fig. 282, the MPU 51 determines whether it is time to make an end determination to see whether the end determination condition is met (step S4948). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether the processing executed based on driving data 1 is any of processing No. 05, processing No. 09, processing No. 5, processing No. 13, processing No. 17, processing No. 23, processing No. 27, and processing No. 29 (see Fig. 269).

If it is time to make an end determination as to whether the end determination conditions are met (step S4948: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4949; if it is not time to make an end determination as to whether the end determination conditions are met (step S4948: No), the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating device control process.

Here, as shown in FIG. 269, process No. 05, process No. 09, process No. 5, process No. 13, process No. 17, process No. 23, process No. 27, and process No. 29 (see FIG. 269), which are executed based on drive data 1, are executed at the timing when the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body and is a continuous operation in drive patterns A to C executed based on drive data 1, moves from the drive side position to the return side position, which is the standby position or intermediate operating position 1, during its reciprocating movement. That is, in this embodiment, as a movable body control process, when continuous operations (drive patterns A to C) common to multiple movable states A to D for the movable rotating role member 37, which is a movable body, are executed based on information corresponding to one drive data 1 (role member operation scenario data 1), when the movable rotating role member 37 is positioned at the return position, which is the return side position of the reciprocating operation, or at intermediate operating position 1, an end determination is made as to whether or not the end determination condition for the continuous operation of the movable rotating role member 37 based on the drive data 1 (role member operation scenario data 1) is met. As a result, the termination determination as to whether or not the termination determination condition for the continuous operation of the movable rotating part member 37 based on the drive data 1 (part operation scenario data 1) is satisfied is performed at the return position of the reciprocating operation of the movable rotating part member 37, and if it is determined that the termination determination condition is satisfied in the termination determination, when terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotating part member 37 based on the drive data 1 (part operation scenario data 1), there is no need to move the movable rotating part member 37, which is a movable body, or the movement distance of the movable rotating part member 37 can be reduced. Also, the termination determination as to whether or not the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation based on the drive data 1 (part operation scenario data 1) is satisfied is performed each time the movable rotating part member 37 is positioned at the return position of the reciprocating operation, and therefore, the termination determination is repeatedly performed multiple times in the continuous operation. As a result, when it is determined in the end determination that the end determination condition for the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 (accessory operation scenario data 1) is satisfied, the continuous operation can be ended not only immediately after it is determined that the end determination condition is satisfied, but also immediately after the end determination condition is satisfied. Therefore, after it is determined in the end determination that the end determination condition is satisfied, and after the end determination condition is satisfied, the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 can be ended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 (accessory operation scenario data 1) is completed and then the individual operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is executed using the drive patterns D-G specific to each of the movable states A-D, a smooth transition can be made from the continuous operation common to multiple movable states A-D to the individual operation of each of the other movable states A-D. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when the continuous operation common to multiple movable states A-D is transitioned to the individual operation of each of the other movable states A-D when the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved in each of the movable states A-D. This makes it possible to operate the movable rotating accessory member 37 without compromising the effect of the performance, even when the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is operated for the purpose of creating a performance.

In this embodiment, when the movable rotating part member 37, which is a movable body, is positioned in the return position or intermediate operating position 1 during a continuous operation common to multiple movement modes A to D, an end determination is made to determine whether the end determination condition for the continuous operation is met. However, while the movable rotating part member 37 is being moved toward the drive side position during the continuous operation, an end determination is not made to determine whether the end determination condition is met. This is because if the movable rotating part member 37 were to be stopped immediately while it is being moved toward the drive side position, in order to start the next operation in the continuous operation, it would be necessary to move the movable rotating part member 37 to the start position of the next operation at the start of the next operation, or to start the movable stopping position on the drive side position at the time of the end determination for the continuous operation and start the movement of the movable rotating part member 37 for the next operation. This would require unnecessary or complex control and could prevent a smooth transition from one continuous operation to the next. Therefore, while the movable rotating accessory member 37 is being moved to the drive position during the continuous operation, no end determination is made to determine whether the end determination condition is met. This eliminates the need for unnecessary or complex control, allowing for appropriate end control of the movable rotating accessory member 37 during the continuous operation, and also allows for smooth transitions from one continuous operation to the next, allowing for appropriate movement control of the movable rotating accessory member 37.

<Step S4949>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 269 , if it is time to make an end determination as to whether or not the end determination condition is met (step S4948: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed a predetermined game operation, i.e., a pressing operation, on the operation button 20 (step S4949). That is, the MPU 51 makes an end determination as to whether or not the end determination condition is met based on the player's pressing operation, i.e., a predetermined game operation, on the operation button 20, during the execution of the continuous movements (drive patterns A to C) of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body based on the drive data 1. Note that whether or not the player has operated the operation button 20 is determined by whether or not the operation patterns "OFF,""ON," and "ON" have occurred as the three operation states of the operation button 20 in the operation detection pattern setting process of FIG. 256 .

In this way, the condition for determining whether the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body based on drive data 1, is a predetermined game operation, namely, a pressing operation of the operation button 20, performed by the player. Meanwhile, as mentioned above, the timing for determining whether the termination condition is met is during the execution of process No. 05, process No. 09, process No. 5, process No. 13, process No. 17, process No. 23, process No. 27, and process No. 29 (see FIG. 269), which are executed based on drive data 1, and is the timing when the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body and is a continuous operation in drive patterns A to C executed based on drive data 1, is positioned from the drive-side position to the return-side position, which is the standby position or intermediate operating position 1. Therefore, even if the condition for determining whether the continuous motion is terminated is met before all control processes for the continuous motion of the movable rotating device member 37, which is a movable body, are completed by the player pressing the operation button 20, it is determined whether the condition for determining whether the continuous motion is terminated is when the movable rotating device member 37 is positioned at the standby position or intermediate operating position 1, which is the return position. Therefore, if the condition for determining whether the continuous motion is terminated is met before all control processes for the continuous motion of the movable rotating device member 37 are completed by the player pressing the operation button 20, the continuous motion can be terminated when the movable rotating device member 37 is positioned at the standby position or intermediate operating position 1 after the termination condition is met. As a result, when the condition for determining whether the continuous motion is terminated is met, the continuous motion of the movable rotating device member 37 can be terminated immediately, so the continuous motion of the movable rotating device member 37 can be terminated without causing the player to feel uncomfortable after the condition for determining whether the continuous motion is terminated is met. Therefore, when the next operation (operation of drive pattern C or drive pattern D) is executed after the continuous operation of the movable rotating device member 37 has ended, a smooth transition from the continuous operation to the next operation is possible, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when transitioning from the continuous operation to another operation. As a result, even when the movable rotating device member 37 is operated for the purpose of a display effect while the symbol display unit 341 is displaying a display effect, the movable rotating device member 37 can be operated without impairing the effect of the display effect.

If the player presses the operation button 20 as a predetermined game operation (step S4949: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4950. If the player does not press the operation button 20 as a predetermined game operation (step S4949: No), the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating device control process.

<Step S4950>
When the player presses the operation button 20 as a predetermined game operation (step S4949: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the 16R probability variable promotion flag is set to ON (step S4950). The 16R probability variable promotion flag is a flag that executes a 16R probability variable promotion effect by moving the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, in the drive pattern F (see Fig. 266(C) and Fig. 272), and also executes a button effect (see Fig. 277) before executing the 16R probability variable promotion effect.

If the 16R probability variable promotion flag is set to on (step S4950: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4951; if the 16R probability variable promotion flag is set to off (step S4950: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4953.

<Steps S4951 and S4952>
If the 16R probability variable promotion flag is set to ON (step S4950: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 4 not set flag to ON (step S4951). The drive data 4 not set flag is a flag that causes drive data 4 to be set, and is referenced in step S4987 of FIG. 285 described later to determine whether or not to set drive data 4.

In addition, drive data 4 is information that, in movement mode C of the movable rotating accessory element 37 that notifies of a 16R probability jackpot (promotion to 16R probability jackpot), moves the movable rotating accessory element 37 with drive pattern F (see Figures 266(C) and 272) as an individual operation after the common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) based on drive data 1.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the 16R probability promotion flag to OFF (step S4952) and ends the movable rotating device control process.

<Step S4953>
If the 16R probability variable promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4950: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 16R probability variable non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4953). The 16R probability variable non-promotion flag is a flag that executes a 16R probability variable promotion effect by moving the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, in the drive pattern G (see Fig. 266 (D) and Fig. 274), and also executes a button effect (see Fig. 277) before executing this 16R probability variable promotion effect.

If the 16R non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4953: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4954; if the 16R non-promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4953: No), the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating device control process.

<Steps S4954 and S4955>
If the 16R non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4953: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 not set flag to ON (step S4954). The drive data 5 not set flag is a flag that causes the drive data 5 to be set, and is referenced in step S5000 of FIG. 286 described later to determine whether or not to set the drive data 5.

In addition, drive data 5 is information that, in the movement mode D of the movable rotating accessory element 37 that notifies that there will be no promotion to a 16R special jackpot (non-promotion to 16R special jackpot), moves the movable rotating accessory element 37 with drive pattern G (see Figures 266 (D) and 274) as an individual operation after the common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) based on drive data 1.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the 16R non-promotion flag to OFF (step S4955) and proceeds to step S4956.

<Step S4956>
In step S4956, the MPU 51 determines whether the process of drive data 1 for which the termination determination was performed is any of processes No. 05, No. 09, No. 13, and No. 17 (see FIG. 269). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the movable rotating accessory member 37 is stopped in the standby position at the timing when it is determined that the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is satisfied (the operation button 20 is operated).

If the processing of drive data 1 for which the termination determination was made is any of process No. 05, No. 09, No. 13, or No. 17 (step S4956: Yes), that is, if the movable rotating role member 37 is stopped in the standby position at the time when it is determined that the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous movement of the movable rotating role member 37 common to multiple movable modes A to D has been met (the operation button 20 has been operated), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4956. On the other hand, if the processing of drive data 1 for which the termination determination was made is any of process No. 05, No. 09, No. 13, or No. If the answer is not one of 17 (step S4956: No), that is, if the movable rotating accessory member 37 is not stopped in the standby position at the time when it is determined that the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 common to multiple movable modes A to D is met (the operation button 20 has been operated), processing proceeds to step S4959.

<Steps S4957 and S4958>
If the drive data 1 process for which the termination determination was performed is any of processes No. 05, No. 09, No. 13, or No. 17 (step S4956: Yes), that is, if the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotating device member 37 common to the multiple movable modes A to D is determined to be satisfied (operation of the operation button 20 is performed), and the movable rotating device member 37 is stopped in the standby position according to the timing, the MPU 51 clears the drive data 1 scenario timer for causing the movable rotating device member 37 to perform the continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) according to the processing procedure defined in the drive data 1 (see FIG. 269) (step S4957). Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 1 set flag, indicating that drive data 1 is set to control the operation of the movable rotating device member 37, to OFF (step S4958), and terminates the movable rotating device control process. In other words, if the movable rotating part member 37 is stopped in a standby position at the time when it is determined that the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotating part member 37, which is a movable body, is met (an operation is performed on the operation button 20), the processing based on the drive data 1 is terminated by setting the drive data 1 set flag to off, and the continuous operation of the movable rotating part member 37 common to the multiple movable modes A to D is terminated with the movable rotating part member 37 stopped in the standby position.

<Step S4959>
If the process of the drive data 1 for which the termination determination was made is not one of processes No. 05, No. 09, No. 13, or No. 17 (step S4956: No), that is, if the movable rotating accessory member 37 is not stopped in the standby position at the time when it is determined that the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 common to the multiple movable modes A to D is satisfied (the operation button 20 is operated), the MPU 51 determines whether the process of the drive data 1 for which the termination determination was made is one of processes No. 23 or No. 27 (see FIG. 269) (step S4959). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the movable rotating accessory member 37 is stopped in the intermediate operating position 1 at the time when it is determined that the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 common to the multiple movable modes A to D is satisfied (the operation button 20 is operated).

If the process of drive data 1 for which the termination determination was made is either process No. 23 or No. 27 (see FIG. 269) (step S4959: Yes), that is, if the movable rotating role member 37 is stopped in intermediate operating position 1 at the time it is determined that the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotating role member 37 common to multiple movable modes A to D has been met (the operation button 20 has been operated), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4960.

On the other hand, if the processing of drive data 1 for which the termination determination was made is neither process No. 23 nor No. 27 (see FIG. 269) (step S4959: No), that is, if the movable rotating role member 37 is not stopped in intermediate operating position 1 at the time when it is determined that the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotating role member 37 common to multiple movable modes A to D is met (the operation button 20 is operated), the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating role member control process.

<Step S4960>
If the process of the drive data 1 for which the termination determination was made is either process No. 23 or No. 27 (see FIG. 269) (step S4959: Yes), that is, if the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotating role member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is established (operation of the operation button 20 is performed), and the movable rotating role member 37 is stopped at the intermediate operating position 1, the MPU 51 sets the process No. 28 execution flag to on (step S4960), and terminates the movable rotating role member control process.

As mentioned above, the Process No. 28 execution flag is a flag that ends the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 common to multiple movable modes A to D when the movable rotating accessory member 37 is returned to its standby position by executing Process No. 28 in Drive Data 1 (see FIG. 269). This flag is referenced in step S4924 of the movable rotating accessory control process in FIG. 280 to determine whether to return the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body stopped in intermediate operating position 1, to its standby position and end the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 common to multiple movable modes A to D.

<Step S4961>
If the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer is not the maximum value (step S4927: No), that is, if the end determination condition is not met because all processing specified by the drive data 1 has not been completed, and it is determined that it is not time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1, the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 2 not set flag is set to on (step S4961), as shown in Fig. 283. The drive data 2 not set flag is a flag that sets the drive data 2.

If the drive data 2 not set flag is set to on (step S4961: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4962; if the drive data 2 not set flag is set to off (step S4961: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4967.

<Steps S4962 to S4966>
If the drive data 2 not set flag is set to on (step S4961: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 2 not set flag to off (step S4962) and sets drive data 2 (reel operation scenario data 2) (see FIG. 270(B)) (step S4963). The drive data 2 is information for moving the movable rotating reel member 37 with drive pattern D (see FIG. 270(A)) as an individual operation after the common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) in the movable mode A (see FIG. 266(A)) of the movable rotating reel member 37 that notifies the development to a super reach (SP development).

Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 2 scenario timer to move the movable rotating accessory member 37 with drive pattern D in accordance with the processing procedure defined in drive data 2 (see Figure 270 (B)) (step S4964), and sets the drive data 2 set flag, indicating that drive data 2 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, to ON (step S4965). Furthermore, the MPU 51 starts process No. 1 of drive data 2 (step S4966), and ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4967>
If the drive data 2 not set flag is set to off (step S4961: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 2 set flag, which indicates that drive data 2 is set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, is set to on (step S4967).

If the drive data 2 set flag is set on (step S4967: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4968; if the drive data 2 set flag is set off (step S4967: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4974 in FIG. 284.

<Steps S4968 to S4970>
If the drive data 2 set flag is set to on (step S4967: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the drive data 2 scenario timer (step S4968) and, based on the value of the updated drive data 2 scenario timer, determines whether it is time to proceed to the next processing specified in drive data 2 (step S4969).

If it is time to move on to the next process specified in Drive Data 2 (step S4969: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the next process specified in Drive Data 2 (step S4970) and ends the movable rotating device control process. For example, as shown in FIG. 270(B), when Process No. 3 in Drive Data 2 is being executed, i.e., when the lifting stepping motor is stopped from rotating, the process moves to Process No. 4, which rotates the lifting stepping motor in the reverse direction by 72 steps.

In this way, by referencing the drive data 2 scenario timer updated in step S4968 and sequentially executing the next processes in drive data 2, all processes No. 01 to No. 05 in drive data 2 are executed. As a result, the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is executed using drive pattern D (see Figure 270 (A)) as an individual operation.

On the other hand, if it is not time to proceed to the next process specified in Drive Data 2 (step S4969: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4971.

<Step S4971>
If it is not the time to move on to the next process defined in the drive data 2 (step S4969: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the drive data 2 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4971). That is, the MPU 51 performs an end determination as to whether it is the time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 2 when the end determination condition based on the completion of all processes defined by the drive data 2 is met.

If the value of the drive data 2 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4971: Yes), that is, if the MPU 51 determines that it is time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating role member 37 based on the drive data 2 because the end determination condition is met based on the completion of all processing defined by the drive data 2 (see FIG. 270(B)), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4972. On the other hand, if the value of the drive data 2 scenario timer is not at its maximum value (step S4971: No), that is, if the MPU 51 determines that it is not time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating role member 37 based on the drive data 2 because the end determination condition is not met based on the completion of all processing defined by the drive data 2, the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating role member control process.

<Steps S4972 and S4973>
If the value of the drive data 2 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4971: Yes), that is, if the end determination condition is met and it is determined that it is time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 2, the MPU 51 clears the drive data 2 scenario timer to move the movable rotating accessory member 37 with drive pattern D in accordance with the processing procedure defined in the drive data 2 (see FIG. 270(B)) (step S4972). Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 2 set flag, which indicates that drive data 2 is set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, to OFF (step S4973), and ends the movable rotating accessory control process. That is, if the value of the drive data 2 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4971: Yes), the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is ended.

<Step S4974>
If the drive data 2 set flag is set to OFF (step S4967: NO), the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 3 not set flag is set to ON (step S4974), as shown in Fig. 284. The drive data 3 not set flag is a flag that causes drive data 3 to be set.

If the drive data 3 not set flag is set to on (step S4974: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4975; if the drive data 3 not set flag is set to off (step S4974: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4980.

<Steps S4975 to S4979>
If the drive data 3 not set flag is set to on (step S4974: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 3 not set flag to off (step S4975) and sets drive data 3 (reel operation scenario data 3) (see FIG. 271 (B)) (step S4976). The drive data 3 is information that moves the movable rotating reel member 37 in drive pattern E (see FIG. 271 (A)) as an individual operation after the common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) in the movable mode B (see FIG. 266 (B)) of the movable rotating reel member 37 that notifies the development to a special reach (SPSP development).

Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 3 scenario timer to move the movable rotating accessory member 37 with drive pattern E in accordance with the processing procedure defined in drive data 3 (see FIG. 271 (B)) (step S4977), and sets the drive data 3 set flag, indicating that drive data 3 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, to on (step S4978). Furthermore, the MPU 51 starts process No. 1 of drive data 3 (step S4979), and ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4980>
If the drive data 3 not set flag is set to off (step S4974: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 3 set flag, which indicates that drive data 3 is set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, is set to on (step S4980).

If the drive data 3 set flag is set on (step S4980: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4981; if the drive data 3 set flag is set off (step S4980: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4987 in FIG. 285.

<Steps S4981 to S4983>
If the drive data 3 set flag is set on (step S4980: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the drive data 3 scenario timer (step S4981) and, based on the value of the updated drive data 3 scenario timer, determines whether it is time to move on to the next processing specified in drive data 3 (step S4982).

If it is time to move on to the next process specified in drive data 3 (step S4982: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the next process specified in drive data 3 (step S4983) and ends the movable rotating device control process. For example, as shown in FIG. 271 (B), when process No. 2 in drive data 3 is being executed, i.e., when the lifting stepping motor is rotating in the forward direction, the process moves to process No. 3, causing the lifting stepping motor to stop rotating.

In this way, by referencing the drive data 3 scenario timer updated in step S4981 and sequentially executing the next process in drive data 3, all processes No. 01 to No. 07 in drive data 3 are executed. As a result, the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is executed using drive pattern E (see Figure 271 (A)) as an individual operation.

On the other hand, if it is not time to proceed to the next process specified in Drive Data 3 (step S4982: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4984.

<Step S4984>
If it is not the time to move on to the next process defined in the drive data 3 (step S4982: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the drive data 3 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4984). That is, the MPU 51 performs an end determination as to whether it is the time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 3 when the end determination condition based on the completion of all processes defined by the drive data 3 is met.

If the value of the drive data 3 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4984: Yes), that is, if the MPU 51 determines that it is time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating role member 37 based on the drive data 3 due to the establishment of the end determination condition based on all processing defined by the drive data 3 (see FIG. 271 (B)) being completed, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4985. On the other hand, if the value of the drive data 3 scenario timer is not at its maximum value (step S4984: No), that is, if the MPU 51 determines that it is not time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating role member 37 based on the drive data 3 due to the establishment of the end determination condition based on all processing defined by the drive data 3 not being completed, the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating role member control process.

<Steps S4985 and S4986>
If the value of the drive data 3 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4984: Yes), that is, if the establishment of the termination determination condition determines that it is time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 3, the MPU 51 clears the drive data 3 scenario timer to move the movable rotating accessory member 37 with drive pattern E in accordance with the processing procedure defined in the drive data 3 (see FIG. 271(B)) (step S4985). Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 3 set flag, which indicates that drive data 3 is set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, to OFF (step S4986), and terminates the movable rotating accessory control process. In other words, if the value of the drive data 3 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4984: Yes), the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is terminated.

<Step S4987>
If the drive data 3 set flag is set to OFF (step S4980: NO), the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 4 not set flag is set to ON (step S4987), as shown in Fig. 285. The drive data 4 not set flag is a flag that causes drive data 4 to be set.

If the drive data 4 not set flag is set to on (step S4987: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4988; if the drive data 4 not set flag is set to off (step S4987: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4993.

<Steps S4988 to S4992>
If the drive data 4 not set flag is set to ON (step S4987: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 4 not set flag to OFF (step S4988) and sets drive data 4 (apparatus operation scenario data 4) (see FIG. 273) (step S4989). The drive data 4 is information for moving the movable rotating apparatus member 37 in drive pattern F (see FIG. 272) as an individual operation after the common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) in the movable mode C (see FIG. 266 (C)) of the movable rotating apparatus member 37 that notifies the 16R probability variable jackpot (promotion to 16R probability variable).

Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 4 scenario timer to move the movable rotating accessory member 37 with drive pattern F in accordance with the processing procedure defined in drive data 4 (see FIG. 273) (step S4990), and sets the drive data 4 set flag, indicating that drive data 4 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, to on (step S4991). Furthermore, the MPU 51 starts process No. 1 of drive data 4 (step S4992), and ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4993>
If the drive data 4 not set flag is set to off (step S4987: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 4 set flag, which indicates that drive data 4 is set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, is set to on (step S4993).

If the drive data 4 set flag is set on (step S4993: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4994; if the drive data 4 set flag is set off (step S4993: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5000 in FIG. 286.

<Steps S4994 to S4996>
If the drive data 4 set flag is set to on (step S4993: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the drive data 4 scenario timer (step S4994) and, based on the value of the updated drive data 4 scenario timer, determines whether it is time to move on to the next processing specified in drive data 4 (step S4995).

If it is time to move on to the next process specified in drive data 4 (step S4995: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the next process specified in drive data 4 (step S4996) and ends the movable rotating device control process. For example, as shown in FIG. 273, when process No. 2 in drive data 4 is being executed, i.e., when the lifting stepping motor is rotating in the forward direction, the process moves to process No. 3, thereby stopping the lifting stepping motor from rotating.

In this way, by referencing the drive data 4 scenario timer updated in step S4994 and sequentially executing the next processes in drive data 4, all processes No. 01 to No. 07 in drive data 4 are executed. As a result, the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is executed using drive pattern F (see FIG. 272) as an individual operation.

On the other hand, if it is not time to proceed to the next process specified in Drive Data 4 (step S4995: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4997.

<Step S4997>
If it is not the time to move on to the next process defined in the drive data 4 (step S4995: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the drive data 4 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4997). That is, the MPU 51 performs an end determination as to whether it is the time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 4 when the end determination condition based on the completion of all processes defined by the drive data 4 is met.

If the value of the drive data 4 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4997: Yes), that is, if the MPU 51 determines that it is time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating role member 37 based on the drive data 4 because the end determination condition is met based on the completion of all processing defined by the drive data 4 (see FIG. 273), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4998. On the other hand, if the value of the drive data 4 scenario timer is not at its maximum value (step S4997: No), that is, if the MPU 51 determines that it is not time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating role member 37 based on the drive data 4 because the end determination condition is not met based on the completion of all processing defined by the drive data 4, the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating role member control process.

<Steps S4998 and S4999>
If the value of the drive data 4 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4997: Yes), that is, if the end determination condition is met and it is determined that it is time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 4, the MPU 51 clears the drive data 4 scenario timer to move the movable rotating accessory member 37 with drive pattern F in accordance with the processing procedure defined in the drive data 4 (see FIG. 273) (step S4998). Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 4 set flag, which indicates that drive data 4 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, to OFF (step S4999), and ends the movable rotating accessory control process. In other words, if the value of the drive data 4 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S4997: Yes), the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is ended.

<Step S5000>
If the drive data 4 set flag is set to OFF (step S4993: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 5 not set flag is set to ON (step S5000), as shown in Fig. 286. The drive data 5 not set flag is a flag that causes drive data 5 to be set.

If the drive data 5 not set flag is set to on (step S5000: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5001; if the drive data 5 not set flag is set to off (step S5000: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5006.

<Steps S5001 to S5005>
If the drive data 5 unset flag is set to on (step S5000: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 unset flag to off (step S5001) and sets drive data 5 (apparatus operation scenario data 5) (see FIG. 274 (B)) (step S5002). The drive data 5 is information that moves the movable rotating apparatus member 37 with drive pattern G (see FIG. 274 (A)) as an individual operation after a common continuous operation (drive patterns A to C) in the movable mode D (see FIG. 266 (D)) of the movable rotating apparatus member 37 that notifies that it will not develop into a super reach (non-SP development), will not develop into a special reach (non-SPSP development), or will not be a 16R probability variable jackpot (16R probability variable non-promotion).

Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 scenario timer to move the movable rotating accessory member 37 with drive pattern F in accordance with the processing procedure defined in drive data 5 (see Figure 274 (B)) (step S5003), and sets the drive data 5 set flag, indicating that drive data 5 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, to on (step S5004). Furthermore, the MPU 51 starts process No. 1 of drive data 5 (step S5005), and ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S5006>
If the drive data 5 not set flag is set to off (step S5000: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 5 set flag, which indicates that drive data 5 is set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, is set to on (step S5006).

If the drive data 4 set flag is set on (step S5006: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5007; if the drive data 5 set flag is set off (step S5006: No), the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating device control process.

<Steps S5007 to S5009>
If the drive data 5 set flag is set to on (step S5006: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the drive data 5 scenario timer (step S5007) and, based on the value of the updated drive data 5 scenario timer, determines whether it is time to move on to the next processing specified in drive data 5 (step S5008).

If it is time to move on to the next process specified in drive data 5 (step S5008: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the next process specified in drive data 5 (step S5009) and ends the movable rotating device control process. For example, as shown in FIG. 274 (B), when process No. 03 in drive data 5 is being executed, i.e., when the lifting stepping motor is stopped, the process moves to process No. 04, causing the lifting stepping motor to rotate 12 steps in the reverse direction.

In this way, by referencing the drive data 5 scenario timer updated in step S5007 and sequentially executing the next process in drive data 5, all processes No. 01 to No. 05 in drive data 5 are executed. As a result, the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is executed using drive pattern G (see Figure 274 (B)) as an individual operation.

On the other hand, if it is not time to proceed to the next process specified in Drive Data 5 (step S5008: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5010.

<Step S5010>
If it is not the time to move on to the next process defined in the drive data 5 (step S5008: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the drive data 5 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S5010). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 5 when the end determination condition based on the completion of all processes defined by the drive data 5 is met.

If the value of the drive data 5 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S5010: Yes), that is, if the MPU 51 determines that it is time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating role member 37 based on the drive data 5 due to the establishment of the end determination condition based on all processing defined by the drive data 5 (see FIG. 274 (B)) being completed, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5011. On the other hand, if the value of the drive data 5 scenario timer is not at its maximum value (step S5010: No), that is, if the MPU 51 determines that it is not time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotating role member 37 based on the drive data 5 due to the establishment of the end determination condition based on all processing defined by the drive data 5 not being completed, the MPU 51 terminates the movable rotating role member control process.

<Steps S5011 and S5012>
If the value of the drive data 5 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S5010: Yes), that is, if the establishment of the termination determination condition determines that it is time to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 5, the MPU 51 clears the drive data 5 scenario timer to move the movable rotating accessory member 37 with drive pattern G in accordance with the processing procedure defined in the drive data 5 (see FIG. 274(B)) (step S5011). Then, the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 set flag, which indicates that drive data 5 has been set to control the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, to OFF (step S5012), and terminates the movable rotating accessory control process. In other words, if the value of the drive data 5 scenario timer is at its maximum value (step S5010: Yes), the continuous operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is terminated.

[Button effect control processing]
Next, the button effect control process. Here, Fig. 287 and Fig. 288 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the button effect control process of this embodiment. Hereinafter, the button effect control process will be described with reference to Fig. 287 and Fig. 288.

<Step S5101>
287, in the button effect control process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the T1 button effect flag is set to ON (step S5101). The T1 button effect flag is a flag that causes a button effect to be executed at the role activation timing A (see FIG. 265) when the time T1 has elapsed since the start of the special symbol game, and is set to ON in step S4708 of the button effect setting process of FIG. 276 when a 16R probability variable promotion effect or a 16R probability variable non-promotion effect is executed at the role activation timing A.

If the T1 button effect flag is set to on (step S5101: Yes), i.e., if a button effect is to be executed at reel activation timing A (see FIG. 265), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5102. On the other hand, if the T1 button effect flag is set to off (step S5101: No), i.e., if a button effect is not to be executed at reel activation timing A (see FIG. 265), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5104.

<Steps S5102 and S5103>
When the T1 button effect flag is set to ON (step S5101: Yes), that is, when a button effect is to be executed at the role activation timing A (see FIG. 265), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the T1 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the role activation timing A set at the end of the normal reach effect starts, is 0 (step S5102). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the timing to start the button effect.

If the value of the T1 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the start of the role activation timing A set at the end of the normal reach effect, is 0 (step S5102: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start the button effect, the MPU 51 sets the T1 button effect flag to OFF (step S5103) and proceeds to step S5110 in FIG. 288.

On the other hand, if the value of the T1 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the start of the role activation timing A set at the end of the normal reach effect, is not 0 (step S5102: No), i.e., if it is not the timing to start the button effect, the MPU 51 terminates the button effect control process.

<Step S5104>
If the T1 button effect flag is set to OFF (step S5101: No), that is, if the button effect is not executed at the role activation timing A (see FIG. 265), the MPU 51 determines whether the T2 button effect flag is set to ON (step S5104). The T2 button effect flag is a flag that executes a button effect at the role activation timing B (see FIG. 265) when the time T2 has elapsed since the start of the special symbol game, and is set to ON in step S4706 of the button effect setting process of FIG. 276 when a 16R probability variable promotion effect or a 16R probability variable non-promotion effect is executed at the role activation timing B.

If the T2 button effect flag is set to on (step S5104: Yes), i.e., if a button effect is to be executed at reel activation timing B (see FIG. 265), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5105. On the other hand, if the T2 button effect flag is set to off (step S5104: No), i.e., if a button effect is not to be executed at reel activation timing B (see FIG. 265), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5107.

<Steps S5105 and S5106>
If the T2 button effect flag is set to ON (step S5104: Yes), that is, if a button effect is to be executed at the role activation timing B (see FIG. 265), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the T2 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the role activation timing B set at the end of the super reach effect is started, is 0 (step S5105). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the timing to start the button effect.

If the value of the T2 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the start of the role activation timing B set at the end of the super reach effect, is 0 (step S5105: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start the button effect, the MPU 51 sets the T2 button effect flag to off (step S5106) and proceeds to step S5110 in FIG. 288.

On the other hand, if the value of the T2 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the start of the special feature activation timing B set at the end of the super reach effect, is not 0 (step S5105: No), i.e., if it is not the timing to start the button effect, the MPU 51 terminates the button effect control process.

<Step S5107>
If the T2 button effect flag is set to OFF (step S5104: No), that is, if the button effect is not executed at the role activation timing B (see FIG. 265), the MPU 51 determines whether the T3 button effect flag is set to ON (step S5107). The T3 button effect flag is a flag that executes a button effect at the role activation timing C (see FIG. 265) when the time T3 has elapsed since the start of the special symbol game, and is set to ON in step S4702 of the button effect setting process of FIG. 276 when a 16R probability variable promotion effect or a 16R probability variable non-promotion effect is executed at the role activation timing C.

If the T3 button effect flag is set to on (step S5107: Yes), i.e., if a button effect is to be executed at reel activation timing C (see FIG. 265), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5108. On the other hand, if the T3 button effect flag is set to off (step S5107: No), i.e., if a button effect is not to be executed at reel activation timing C (see FIG. 265), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5114 in FIG. 288.

<Steps S5108 and S5109>
If the T3 button effect flag is set to ON (step S5107: Yes), that is, if a button effect is to be executed at the role activation timing C (see FIG. 265), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the T3 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the role activation timing C set at the end of the special reach effect is started, is 0 (step S5108). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the timing to start the button effect.

If the value of the T3 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the start of the special device activation timing C set at the end of the special reach effect, is 0 (step S5108: Yes), i.e., if it is the timing to start the button effect, the MPU 51 sets the T3 button effect flag to OFF (step S5109) and proceeds to step S5110 in FIG. 288.

On the other hand, if the value of the T3 counter, which indicates the remaining time until the start of the special device activation timing C set at the end of the special reach effect, is not 0 (step S5108: No), i.e., if it is not the timing to start the button effect, the MPU 51 terminates the button effect control process.

<Steps S5110 and S5111>
288, the MPU 51 sets a button effect start command for starting the button effect (step S5110) and transmits this button effect start command to the display control device 6 (step S5111). As a result, in the symbol display unit 341, the button effect as a display effect is started under the control of the display control device 6.

<Steps S5112 and S5113>
In step S5112, the MPU 51 sets a button operation valid period timer corresponding to the period (button operation valid period) during which the player's operation of the operation button 20 is valid. Then, the MPU 51 sets an operation valid period timer flag indicating that the button operation valid period timer has been set to ON (step S5113), and ends the button effect control process.

<Step S5114>
In step S5114, the MPU 51 determines whether an operation valid period timer flag indicating that the button operation valid period timer is set is set to ON. If the operation valid period timer flag is set to ON (step S5114: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5115. On the other hand, if the operation valid period timer flag is set to OFF (step S5114: No), the MPU 51 ends the button performance control process.

<Steps S5115 and S5116>
If the operation valid period timer flag is set to ON (step S5114: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the button operation valid period timer (step S5115), and determines whether the value of the button operation valid period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step S5116). That is, it determines whether the button effect will end due to the expiration of the button operation valid period.

If the value of the button operation valid period timer after subtraction is 0 (step S5116: Yes), i.e., if the button operation valid period has elapsed, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5119. On the other hand, if the value of the button operation valid period timer after subtraction is not 0 (step S5116: No), i.e., if the button operation valid period has not elapsed, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5117.

<Steps S5117 and S5118>
If the value of the button operation valid period timer after subtraction is not 0 (step S5116: No), that is, if the button operation valid period has not elapsed, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the operation button 20 (step S5117). Whether or not the player has operated the operation button 20 is determined by whether or not the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" have occurred as the operation states of the operation button 20 three times in the operation detection pattern setting process of FIG. 256.

If the player operates the operation button 20 before the valid button operation period has elapsed (step S5117: Yes), the MPU 51 clears the button operation valid period timer (step S5118) and proceeds to step S5119. On the other hand, if the player does not operate the operation button 20 before the valid button operation period has elapsed (step S5117: No), the MPU 51 terminates the button effect control process.

<Steps S5119 to S5121>
If the value of the button operation valid period timer after subtraction is 0 (step S5116: Yes), that is, if the button effect ends due to the expiration of the button operation valid period, or if the player operates the operation button 20 before the expiration of the button operation valid period (step S5117: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the operation valid period timer flag, which indicates that the button operation valid period timer has been set, to off (step S5119).

Then, the MPU 51 sets a button effect end command to end the button effect (step S5120), and sends this button effect end command to the display control device 6 (step S5121), ending the button effect control process. As a result, in the symbol display unit 341, the button effect as a display effect is ended under the control of the display control device 6.

[Jackpot Game Presentation Control Processing]
Next, an example of the procedure for the jackpot game presentation control process executed in step S2705 of the sub-timer interrupt process of Fig. 253 will be described. In the jackpot game presentation control process, a process is executed to control the jackpot game presentation according to the progress of the jackpot game based on the jackpot game presentation set in the jackpot game presentation setting process of step S4317 of the command determination process of Fig. 258. Here, Fig. 289 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game presentation control process. The jackpot game presentation control process will be described below with reference to Fig. 289.

<Step S5201>
289, in the jackpot game presentation control process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S5201). The jackpot game in progress flag is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed, and is set to ON when a jackpot game start command is received in step S4318 of the command determination process of FIG. 258. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a jackpot game is being executed.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S5201: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5202. On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S5201: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 51 terminates the jackpot game presentation control process.

<Step S5202>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S5201: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the opening effect start flag is set to ON (step S5202). The opening effect start flag is a flag that starts the opening effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when an opening start command is received in step S4320 of the command determination process of FIG. 258. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to start the opening effect.

If the opening performance start flag is set to on (step S5202: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start the opening performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5203. On the other hand, if the opening performance start flag is set to off (step S5202: No), i.e., if it is not time to start the opening performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5205.

<Steps S5203 and S5204>
If the opening effect start flag is set to ON (step S5202: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the opening effect, the MPU 51 executes processing to start the opening effect (step S5203). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes display control processing to start the display effect in the symbol display unit 341, audio control processing to start the audio effect in the speaker 26, and lamp control processing to start the lamp effect in the decoration unit 27, among the opening effects set in the jackpot game effect setting processing in step S4317 of the command determination processing of FIG.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the opening effect start flag to OFF (step S5204) and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S5205>
If the opening effect start flag is set to OFF (step S5202: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the opening effect, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the opening effect end flag is set to ON (step S5205). The opening effect end flag is a flag that ends the opening effect of a jackpot game, and is set to ON when an opening end command is received in step S4322 of the command determination process of FIG. 258. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the opening effect.

If the opening performance end flag is set to ON (step S5205: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the opening performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5206. On the other hand, if the opening performance end flag is set to OFF (step S5205: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the opening performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5208.

<Steps S5206 and S5207>
If the opening effect end flag is set to ON (step S5205: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the opening effect, the MPU 51 executes processing to end the opening effect (step S5206). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes display control processing to end the display effect in the symbol display unit 341, audio control processing to end the audio effect in the speaker 26, and lamp control processing to end the lamp effect in the decoration unit 27, among the opening effects set in the jackpot game effect setting processing in step S4317 of the command determination processing of FIG.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the opening effect end flag to OFF (step S5207) and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S5208>
If the opening effect end flag is set to OFF (step S5205: No), that is, if it is not the time to end the opening effect, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect start flag is set to ON (step S5208). The round game effect start flag is a flag that starts the round game effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when a round game start command is received in step S4324 of the command determination process of FIG. 259. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the time to start the round game effect.

If the round game effect start flag is set to ON (step S5208: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start the round game effect, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5209. On the other hand, if the round game effect start flag is set to OFF (step S5208: No), i.e., if it is not time to start the round game effect, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5211.

<Steps S5209 and S5210>
If the round game effect start flag is set to ON (step S5208: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the round game effect, the MPU 51 executes a process to start the round game effect of the jackpot game effect (step S5209). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process to start the display effect on the symbol display unit 341, an audio control process to start the audio effect on the speaker 26, and a lamp control process to start the lamp effect on the decoration unit 27, among the round game effects set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG. 258 .

Then, the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to OFF (step S5210) and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S5211>
If the round game effect start flag is set to OFF (step S5208: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the round game effect, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect end flag is set to ON (step S5211). The round game effect end flag is a flag that ends the round game effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when a round game end command is received in step S4327 of the command determination process of FIG. 259. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the round game effect.

If the round game effect end flag is set to ON (step S5211: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the round game effect, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5212. On the other hand, if the round game effect end flag is set to OFF (step S5211: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the round game effect, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5214.

<Steps S5212 and S5213>
If the round game effect end flag is set to ON (step S5211: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the round game effect, the MPU 51 executes a process to end the round game effect (step S5212). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process to end the display effect in the symbol display unit 341, an audio control process to end the audio effect in the speaker 26, and a lamp control process to end the lamp effect in the decoration unit 27, among the round game effects set in the jackpot game effect setting process in step S4317 of the command determination process of FIG. 258 .

Then, the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to OFF (step S5213) and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S5214>
If the round game effect end flag is set to OFF (step S5211: No), that is, if it is not the time to end the round game effect, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the interval effect start flag is set to ON (step S5214). The interval effect start flag is a flag that starts the interval effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when an interval start command is received in step S4329 of the command determination process of FIG. 259. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the time to start the round game effect.

If the interval performance start flag is set to on (step S5214: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start the interval performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5215. On the other hand, if the interval performance start flag is set to off (step S5214: No), i.e., if it is not time to start the interval performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5217.

<Steps S5215 and S5216>
If the interval effect start flag is set to ON (step S5214: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the interval effect, the MPU 51 executes processing to start the interval effect of the jackpot game effect (step S5215). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes display control processing to start the display effect in the symbol display unit 341, audio control processing to start the audio effect in the speaker 26, and lamp control processing to start the lamp effect in the decoration unit 27, among the interval effects set in the jackpot game effect setting processing in step S4317 of the command determination processing of FIG.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the interval effect start flag to OFF (step S5216) and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S5217>
If the interval effect start flag is set to OFF (step S5214: No), that is, if it is not the time to start the interval effect, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the interval effect end flag is set to ON (step S5217). The interval effect end flag is a flag that ends the interval effect of a jackpot game, and is set to ON when an interval end command is received in step S4331 of the command determination process of FIG. 259. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the time to end the interval effect.

If the interval performance end flag is set to on (step S5217: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S5218. On the other hand, if the interval performance end flag is set to off (step S5217: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S5220.

<Steps S5218 and S5219>
If the interval effect end flag is set to ON (step S5217: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the interval effect, the MPU 51 executes processing to end the interval effect (step S5218). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes display control processing to end the display effect in the symbol display unit 341, audio control processing to end the audio effect in the speaker 26, and lamp control processing to end the lamp effect in the decoration unit 27, among the interval effects set in the jackpot game effect setting processing in step S4317 of the command determination processing of FIG.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the interval effect end flag to OFF (step S5219) and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S5220>
If the interval performance end flag is set to OFF (step S5217: No), i.e., if it is not the time to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending performance start flag is set to ON (step S5220). The ending performance start flag is a flag that starts the ending performance, and is set to ON when an ending start command is received in step S4333 of the command determination process in Fig. 259. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the time to start the ending performance.

If the ending performance start flag is set to ON (step S5220: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start the ending performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5221. On the other hand, if the ending performance start flag is set to OFF (step S5220: No), i.e., if it is not time to start the ending performance, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5223.

<Steps S5221 and S5222>
If the ending effect start flag is set to ON (step S5220: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 executes a process to start the ending effect of the jackpot game effect (step S5221). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process to start the display effect on the symbol display unit 341, an audio control process to start the audio effect on the speaker 26, and a lamp control process to start the lamp effect on the decoration unit 27, among the ending effects set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG.

The ending effect is a display effect executed by the symbol display unit 341, which is a separate control object from the opening/closing door 319, after the end of an opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 319, a movable body, performs a series of specific operations by reciprocating between a standby position (return side position) and an operating position (drive side position) depending on the number of rounds played corresponding to the type of jackpot during a jackpot game. This ending effect can display, for example, information identifying the type of jackpot that triggered the jackpot game, the number of balls dispensed in the jackpot game, the number of consecutive jackpots, and the total number of balls dispensed during the consecutive jackpots. The ending effect may also display information identifying the type of jackpot that triggered the jackpot game. For example, the ending effect may display information identifying whether the type of jackpot that triggered the jackpot game was a special jackpot (a transition to a special jackpot game state after the jackpot game ends) or a regular jackpot (a transition to a time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends). The former information is displayed, for example, by a text image such as "Entering XX RUSH" when the first control is performed after the opening/closing execution mode is ended by stopping the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, when it is positioned in a standby position that is the return side. On the other hand, the latter information is displayed, for example, by a text image such as "Entering XX Chance Mode" when the second control is performed after the opening/closing execution mode is ended by stopping the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, when it is positioned in a standby position that is the return side. In this way, by displaying information that can identify the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the jackpot game in the ending presentation, even if the player has forgotten the type of jackpot, the ending presentation allows the player to re-recognize the type of jackpot.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag to OFF (step S5222) and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S5223>
If the ending effect start flag is set to OFF (step S5220: No), that is, if it is not the time to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect end flag is set to ON (step S5223). The ending effect end flag is a flag that ends the ending effect of a jackpot game, and is set to ON when an ending end command is received in step S4335 of the command determination process of FIG. 259. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the time to end the ending effect.

If the ending effect end flag is set to ON (step S5223: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the ending effect, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5224. On the other hand, if the ending effect end flag is set to OFF (step S5223: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the ending effect, the MPU 51 terminates the jackpot game effect control process.

<Steps S5224 and S5225>
If the ending effect end flag is set to ON (step S5223: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the ending effect, the MPU 51 executes a process to end the ending effect (step S5224). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process to end the display effect on the symbol display unit 341, an audio control process to end the audio effect on the speaker 26, and a lamp control process to end the lamp effect on the decoration unit 27, among the ending effects set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG. 258 .

Then, the MPU 51 sets the ending effect end flag to OFF (step S5225) and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

As described above, in this invention, when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means, the movement control means determines one movement mode for the movable means while one specific effect is being displayed on the display means, depending on the lottery result of the win/lose lottery means. Also, in this invention, while one specific effect is being displayed by the display control means, the movement control means executes a series of specific actions for the movable means based on specific information set in correspondence with one movement mode.

Furthermore, in the present invention, when the movement control means executes a series of specific actions on the movable means based on specific information set corresponding to one movement state while the display control means is displaying one specific effect, the determination means determines whether or not the termination condition for the series of specific actions is met when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is on the initial position side. In this way, when the movement control means executes a series of specific actions on the movable means based on specific information set corresponding to one movement state while the display control means is displaying one specific effect, the determination means determines whether or not the termination condition for the series of specific actions is met when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is on the initial position side. Therefore, in the series of specific actions of the movable means executed by the movement control means based on specific information, the determination means determines whether or not the termination condition is met each time the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is on the initial position side, by the movement control means. Furthermore, in the present invention, when the determination means determines that the termination condition is satisfied in a series of specific actions of the movable means performed by the movement control means based on the specific information, the termination means stops the movement of the movable means located at or near the first position, thereby terminating the series of specific actions. That is, in the series of specific actions of the movable means performed by the movement control means based on the specific information, the termination means can stop the movement of the movable means and terminate the series of specific actions each time the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, provided that the termination condition is satisfied, even before all movement control of the movable means based on the specific information has been terminated. As a result, if the termination condition is satisfied during the execution of the series of specific actions of the movable means, the movement of the movable means based on the specific information can be stopped and the series of specific actions can be terminated when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position after the termination condition is satisfied. As a result, when it is determined that the termination condition for the series of specific actions is satisfied, the series of specific actions of the movable means can be immediately terminated, thereby smoothly controlling the termination of the movable means. Therefore, in this invention, a smooth transition from a series of specific actions of the movable means to the next action is possible, and once it is determined that the conditions for ending the series of specific actions have been met, the series of specific actions of the movable means can be ended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when another individual action is subsequently executed after the series of specific actions of the movable means has ended, a smooth transition from the series of specific actions to the other individual action is possible, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when transitioning from the series of specific actions to the other individual action. As a result, even if the movable means is operated for the purpose of creating a specific effect while a specific effect is being displayed by the display control means, the movable means can be operated without impairing the effect of the effect.

More specifically, in this embodiment, in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, which notifies the result of the jackpot lottery executed by the lottery process triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315 as the ball entry starting part, the display effect is set by the special symbol game effect setting process as the display control process, and the display effect is executed on the symbol display unit 341 by processing when a display change pattern command is received by the display control device 6 as the display control process. Also, in this embodiment, the movable state of the movable rotating symbol element 37 as the movable body during the execution of the display effect is determined from multiple movable states A to D by the symbol action effect setting process as the movable body control process, and the movable rotating symbol element 37 as the movable body during the execution of the display effect is moved based on one movable state determined from the multiple movable states A to D by the movable rotating symbol control process as the movable body control process.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, for operations in drive patterns A-C, which are common continuous operations across multiple movable states A-D and for which the timing at which the end determination condition is met may be uncertain, the movable rotating part member 37 as a movable body is moved based on the information in a single drive data 1 (part operation scenario data). After operations in drive patterns A-C are completed, the movable rotating part member 37 as a movable body is moved in one of drive patterns D-G as continuous operations based on the information in individual drive data 2-5 corresponding to each movable state A-D. In this way, for operations in drive patterns A-C, which are common continuous operations across multiple movable states A-D, the movable rotating part member 37 is moved based on the information in a single drive data 1. This not only reduces the amount of drive data used for one movable state A-D, thereby reducing the memory burden, but also reduces the control burden, such as reading and temporarily storing drive data, when operating the movable rotating part member 37.

In this embodiment, when the operations of drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotating device member 37 in multiple movable states A to D and for which the timing of the establishment of the end determination condition may be uncertain, are executed based on information from a single drive data 1 (device operation scenario data), a determination is made as to whether the end determination condition for the operations of drive patterns A to C, which are common operations, is established, i.e., whether the player has operated the operation button 20, at the time when the movable rotating device member 37 returns from the drive-side position, Intermediate Operation Position 1 or Intermediate Operation Position 2, to the return-side position, Standby Position or Intermediate Operation Position 1. If the end determination condition for the operations of drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotating device member 37 in multiple movable states A to D, is not established, the operations of drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotating device member 37 in multiple movable states A to D, continue. On the other hand, if the condition for determining the end of operation in drive patterns A to C, which are the common operation of movable rotating accessory member 37 in multiple moving modes A to D, is met (when the player operates operation button 20), the common operation in drive patterns A to C, which is the common operation of movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the information in drive data 1 (accessory operation scenario data), ends even if the operation is in progress. Then, based on the information in individual drive data 2 to 5 corresponding to each moving mode A to D, which is determined in accordance with the notification content, movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved as a movable body in drive patterns D to G, which are individual operations as continuous operations.

In this embodiment, when the operations of drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotating device element 37 in multiple movable states A to D, are executed based on information from a single drive data 1 (device operation scenario data), a determination is made as to whether the end determination condition for the common operations of drive patterns A to C is met (whether the player has operated the operation button 20) at the time the movable rotating device element 37 returns from the drive side position to the return side position. In other words, in the operation of the movable rotating device element 37 in drive patterns A to C, which are common operations, a determination is made as to whether the player has operated the operation button 20, which indicates whether the end determination condition is met, each time the movable rotating device element 37 is positioned in the return side position. Furthermore, in this embodiment, if it is determined that the end determination condition is met in the operation of the movable rotating device member 37 in the common operation drive patterns A to C (if it is determined that the player has operated the operation button 20), the movement of the movable rotating device member 37 located in the return position is stopped, and the operation in the common operation drive patterns A to C is terminated. As a result, if the end determination condition for the operation in the common operation drive patterns A to C is met during the execution of the operation of the movable rotating device member 37 in the common operation drive patterns A to C, the movement of the movable rotating device member 37 can be stopped when the movable rotating device member 37 is positioned in the return position after the end determination condition is met, and the operation in the common operation drive patterns A to C can be terminated. As a result, if it is determined that the end determination condition for the common operation in the drive patterns A to C is met, the common operation in the drive patterns A to C of the movable rotating device member 37 can be immediately terminated. Therefore, it is possible to immediately transition to the next operation upon the establishment of the end determination condition for consecutive operations that are common to multiple movable modes A to D and whose timing of the establishment of the end determination condition may be uncertain. As a result, once the establishment of the termination determination conditions for multiple movable modes A to D is determined, the operation of the movable rotating device member 37 can be terminated and the movable body can smoothly transition to the next operation without causing the player any discomfort. Therefore, when another individual operation is subsequently performed after the common operation of the movable rotating device member 37 has ended, a smooth transition from the common operation to the other individual operation is possible, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when transitioning from the common operation to the other individual operation. This makes it possible to operate the movable rotating device member 37 without impairing the effect of the operation, even when the movable rotating device member 37 is operated for the purpose of producing a display effect during the execution of a display effect in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to twelfth embodiments described above are possible, to the extent applicable.

Furthermore, in each embodiment, it is also possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments to the extent applicable.

[Fourteenth embodiment]
In gaming machines, various game states with different profit conditions are set to increase the interest in the game. In gaming machines, it is desirable to control the transition between each game state appropriately and to control it so as not to cause unnecessary disadvantages to the player.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
The game machine is provided with a launching means that allows a player to adjust the launching force to launch a game ball into a game area,
A first game in which a game ball is launched in a first direction and a second game in which a game ball is launched in a second direction different from the first direction can be executed;
A display means capable of executing a variable symbol game;
A plurality of starting means capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
an assisting means for assisting the establishment of the starting condition;
a special game execution means for executing a special game as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine capable of switching a control state for the auxiliary means to generate a specific gaming state when the number of times that the predetermined variable games are executed reaches a predetermined number of times without executing the special games,
a first ball entry means provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path;
a second ball entry means having an opening/closing means that can be switched between an open state and a closed state and a specific ball entry area;
an opening execution means for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means;
A specific period game execution means for executing a specific period game for a specific period different from the special game as the profit game based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period;
Equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state, when the predetermined specific period of play ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state that corresponds to the specific gaming state.

Profitable games are any games that can provide some kind of benefit to the player. As profit-generating games, as long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, games in which a large prize opening (variable prize opening) is opened, games in which a V prize opening provided in a large prize opening can be opened, jackpot games, probability variable jackpot games that generate a probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), time-saving jackpot games that generate a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), normal jackpot games that generate a normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), latent probability variable jackpot games that generate a latent probability variable game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode), jackpot games that generate a probability variable game state by a game ball entering a V prize opening provided in a large prize opening, jackpot games that generate a time-saving game state by a game ball entering a V prize opening provided in a large prize opening, round games in which a large prize opening is opened in jackpot games, These include round games in which a V entry port is opened when a large entry port is opened, small win games in which a large entry port is opened for a short period of time, small win games in which a large win is generated when a game ball enters a V entry port located in the large entry port, games played based on a game ball entering a specific entry area located outside the large entry port (variable entry port), special electric start games in which a special electric entry port is opened based on a game ball entering a special electric start port, games played based on a game ball entering an entry port that is opened by the operation of an electric device, variable special pattern games played based on a game ball entering an entry port that is opened by the operation of an electric device, variable decorative pattern games played based on a game ball entering an entry port that is opened by the operation of an electric device, variable regular pattern games played based on a game ball entering a through gate, and any combination thereof.

A special game may be any game that can be awarded when the result of a variable game is a predetermined result. Special games may include, as long as they can realize the spirit of the present invention, games in which a large prize slot (variable prize slot) is opened, games in which a V prize slot provided in a large prize slot can be opened, jackpot games, probability variable jackpot games that generate a probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), time-saving jackpot games that generate a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), regular jackpot games that generate a regular game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and latent probability variable game states (high probability mode and low frequency support mode). These include latent probability variable jackpot games in which a probability variable game state is generated when a game ball enters a V entry port located in the large prize entry port, jackpot games in which a time-saving game state is generated when a game ball enters a V entry port located in the large prize entry port, round games in which the large prize entry port is opened during jackpot games, round games in which the V entry port located in the large prize entry port is opened, small prize games in which the large prize entry port is opened for a short period of time, small prize games in which a jackpot is generated when a game ball enters a V entry port located in the large prize entry port, and any combination thereof.

Specific period games are different from special games, and may be games that are executed based on a gaming ball entering a specific entry area while an opening/closing device that can be switched between an open state and a closed state is open. Examples of specific period games that can achieve the purpose of this invention include, for example, games that are executed based on a gaming ball entering a specific entry area located outside the large prize opening (variable prize opening), special electric start games that open the special electric large prize opening based on a gaming ball entering the special electric start opening, games that are executed based on a gaming ball entering an entry opening that is opened by the operation of an electric device, variable special pattern games that are executed based on a gaming ball entering an entry opening that is opened by the operation of an electric device, variable decorative pattern games that are executed based on a gaming ball entering an entry opening that is opened by the operation of an electric device, variable regular pattern games that are executed based on a gaming ball entering a through gate, and any combination thereof.

The specific game state may be any game state that is generated when a predetermined number of variable game plays reaches a predetermined number of times without a special game being played. As specific game states, as long as the intent of the present invention can be realized, there may be mentioned, for example, a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) that is generated when a predetermined number of variable game plays reaches a predetermined number of times without a special game being played, a time-saving game state that is generated when a predetermined number of variable game plays reaches a predetermined number of times without a jackpot game being played, a time-saving game state that is generated when a predetermined number of variable game plays reaches a predetermined number of times without a special game being played in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), a time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) that is generated when a predetermined number of variable game plays reaches a predetermined number of times without a jackpot game being played in the normal game state, and a time-saving game state with a specified upper limit. Examples include a normal gaming state that occurs when the number of times a predetermined variable game is executed reaches the upper limit without executing a special game in a probability variable gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), a normal gaming state that occurs when the number of times a predetermined variable game is executed reaches the upper limit without executing a jackpot game in a probability variable gaming state with a specified upper limit, a normal gaming state that occurs when the number of times a predetermined variable game is executed reaches the upper limit without executing a special game in a time-saving gaming state with a specified upper limit, a normal gaming state that occurs when the number of times a predetermined variable game is executed reaches the upper limit without executing a jackpot game in a time-saving gaming state with a specified upper limit, and any combination thereof.

The predetermined gaming state may be any gaming state different from the specific gaming state. As long as the intent of the present invention can be realized, the predetermined gaming state may be, for example, a probability variable gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), a time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), a latent probability variable gaming state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode), a normal gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), a probability variable gaming state to which a game is transitioned after a jackpot game ends, a probability variable gaming state with an upper limit on the number of variable games, a probability variable gaming state with no upper limit on the number of variable games, a time-saving gaming state with a upper limit on the number of variable games, a time-saving gaming state with no upper limit on the number of variable games, a time-saving gaming state to which a game is transitioned after a jackpot game ends (time-saving gaming state a), a time-saving gaming state to which a game is transitioned from a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state which is generated when a predetermined number of variable games are played without a jackpot game being played in the normal gaming state (time-saving gaming state b). state), a time-saving game state to which a specific symbol stops during variable gameplay with special symbols or decorative symbols (time-saving game state c), a normal game state to which a jackpot game is entered after the end of a jackpot game, a normal game state to which a time-saving game state is entered, a normal game state to which a time-saving game state is entered, a normal game state to which a time-saving game state is entered, a normal game state to which a time-saving game state is entered, a normal game state to which a time-saving game state is entered, a jackpot game state to which a time-saving game state is entered, a jackpot game state to which a time-saving game state is entered, a jackpot game state to which a time-saving game state is entered, a jackpot game state to which a time-saving game state is entered, a jackpot game state to which a time-saving game state is entered, a jackpot game state to which a time-saving game state is entered, a jackpot game state to which a time-saving game state is entered, a small jackpot game state to which a time-saving game state is entered, a small jackpot game state to which a time-saving game state is entered, a small jackpot game state to which a time-saving game state is entered, and any combination thereof.

The first control state may be a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the establishment of the start conditions that does not correspond to a specific game state. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the first control state may include, for example, a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the establishment of the start conditions in a start means that corresponds to a probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the start conditions at the ball entrance, a control state for a probability variable game state that assists in the establishment of the start conditions for variable game at the ball entrance, a control state for a probability variable game state that assists in the establishment of the start conditions for special game at the ball entrance, and a control state that corresponds to a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) that assists in the establishment of the start conditions in the start means. a control state for an auxiliary means for starting a game in a time-saving mode, a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state and for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the start conditions at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state and for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the start conditions at the ball entrance for variable game; a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state and for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the start conditions at the ball entrance for special game; a control state corresponding to a latent probability change game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode) and for an auxiliary means that assists in the establishment of the start conditions at the start means; a control state corresponding to a latent probability change game state and for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the start conditions at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to the normal game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) and a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the establishment of the start conditions in the start means; a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the start conditions in the start means; a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the start conditions in the start means; a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the start conditions in the start Control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of start conditions, a control state corresponding to the probability variable game state to which a transition is made after the end of a jackpot game and a control state for an assisting means that assists in the establishment of start conditions at the start means, a control state corresponding to the probability variable game state to which a transition is made after the end of a jackpot game and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of start conditions at the ball entrance, a control state corresponding to the probability variable game state to which a transition is made after the end of a jackpot game and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of start conditions for variable game at the ball entrance, a control state corresponding to the probability variable game state to which a transition is made after the end of a jackpot game and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of start conditions for special game at the ball entrance, a control state corresponding to a probability variable game state with a limit on the number of variable games and a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the establishment of the start condition in the start means; a control state corresponding to a probability variable game state with a limit on the number of variable games and a control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of the start condition at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to a probability variable game state with a limit on the number of variable games and a control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of the start condition of variable games at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to a probability variable game state with a limit on the number of variable games and a control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of the start condition of special game at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to a probability variable game state with no limit on the number of variable games and an auxiliary means that assists in the establishment of the start condition in the start means a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions at the ball entrance, a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for variable games ... A control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the start conditions, a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state in which there is an upper limit to the number of variable games, and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the start conditions for variable games at the ball entrance, a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state in which there is an upper limit to the number of variable games, and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the start conditions for special game at the ball entrance, a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state in which there is no upper limit to the number of variable games, and a control state for an assisting means that assists in the establishment of the start conditions at the start means, a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state in which there is no upper limit to the number of variable games, and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the start conditions at the ball entrance ... A control state corresponding to the time-saving game state in which there is no upper limit to the number of times of variable play, and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the start conditions for a special game at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state (time-saving game state a) to which the transition is made after the end of a jackpot game, and a control state for an assisting means that assists in the establishment of the start conditions in the start means; a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state a, and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the start conditions for a variable game at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state a, and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the start conditions for a variable game at the ball entrance; a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for a special game at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state to which a transition is made from a normal game state and a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions in the starting means; a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state to which a transition is made from a normal game state and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state to which a transition is made from a normal game state and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for a variable game at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state to which a transition is made from a normal game state and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for a special game at the ball entrance; A control state corresponding to a time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) that occurs when a predetermined number of times a variable game is executed reaches a predetermined number without executing a jackpot game in a normal game state, and is a control state for an assisting means that assists in the establishment of a starting condition in a starting means; a control state corresponding to the b time-saving game state, and is a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of a starting condition at a ball entrance; a control state corresponding to the b time-saving game state, and is a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of a starting condition for a variable game at a ball entrance; a control state corresponding to the b time-saving game state, and is a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of a starting condition for a special symbol game at a ball entrance; a control state corresponding to the b time-saving game state, and is a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of a starting condition for a special symbol game at a ball entrance; a control state corresponding to the time-shortened game state (c time-shortened game state) to be executed, which is a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions in the starting means; a control state corresponding to the c time-shortened game state, which is a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions in the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to the c time-shortened game state, which is a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for variable game at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to the c time-shortened game state, which is a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for special game at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to the normal game state to be shifted to after the end of a jackpot game, which is a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions in the starting means; a control state corresponding to the normal game state to which the game is transferred after the end of a jackpot game and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for variable game at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to the normal game state to which the game is transferred after the end of a jackpot game and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for special game at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to the normal game state to which the game is transferred after the end of a jackpot game and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for special game at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to the normal game state to which the game is transferred from the time-saving game state and a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions in the starting means; a control state corresponding to the normal game state to which the game is transferred from the time-saving game state and an electric device that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions at the ball entrance a control state for an electric device, a control state corresponding to the normal game state to which a time-saving game state is transitioned from a time-saving game state and which assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for a variable game at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to the normal game state to which a time-saving game state is transitioned from a time-saving game state and which assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for a special game at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to the normal game state to which a time-saving game state is transitioned from a time-saving game state and which assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for a variable game at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to the normal game state to which a time-saving game state is transitioned from a time-saving game state and which assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for a variable game at the ball entrance; a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the start conditions at the ball entrance, a control state corresponding to the normal game state to which a time-saving game state is transitioned from, a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the start conditions for a special game at the ball entrance, b a control state corresponding to the normal game state to which a time-saving game state is transitioned from, a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the establishment of the start conditions in the start means, b a control state corresponding to the normal game state to which a time-saving game state is transitioned from, a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the start conditions for a variable game at the ball entrance, b a time-saving game state a control state corresponding to the normal game state transitioned from a time-saving game state, a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for a special game at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to the normal game state transitioned from a time-saving game state, a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions in the starting means; a control state corresponding to the normal game state transitioned from a time-saving game state, a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for a variable game at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to the normal game state transitioned from a time-saving game state, a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the starting conditions for a special game at the ball entrance Examples include a control state for an electric device that assists in starting, a control state corresponding to a jackpot game state transitioned from a variable probability game state and a control state for an assisting means that assists in the establishment of start conditions in the start means, a control state corresponding to a jackpot game state transitioned from a variable probability game state and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of start conditions at the ball entrance, a control state corresponding to a jackpot game state transitioned from a variable probability game state and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of start conditions for variable game at the ball entrance, a control state corresponding to a jackpot game state transitioned from a variable probability game state and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of start conditions for special game at the ball entrance, and any combination thereof.

The second control state may be a control state for the auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the start condition, as long as it is capable of realizing the intent of the present invention. Examples of the second control state include, for example, a control state for the auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the start condition in the start means, which corresponds to a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) that occurs when a predetermined number of times a variable game is executed without executing a special game, a control state for an electric device that assists in the fulfillment of the start condition at the ball entrance, a control state for a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of times a variable game is executed without executing a special game, which corresponds to a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of times a variable game is executed without executing a special game, which corresponds to a control state for an electric device that assists in the fulfillment of the start condition for a variable game at the ball entrance, a control state for a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of times a variable game is executed without executing a special game, which corresponds to a control state for an electric device that assists in the fulfillment of the start condition for a variable game at the ball entrance, and a control state for a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of times a variable game is executed without executing a special game, which corresponds to a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of times a variable game is executed without executing a special game, which corresponds to a control state for an electric device that assists in the fulfillment of the start condition for a special game at the ball entrance. a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of times a variable game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without executing a jackpot game, and the control state is for an assisting means that assists in the establishment of a start condition in a start means; a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of times a variable game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without executing a jackpot game, and the control state is for an electric device that assists in the establishment of a start condition at a ball entrance; a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of times a variable game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without executing a jackpot game, and the control state is for an electric device that assists in the establishment of a start condition for a variable game at a ball entrance; a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state that occurs when a predetermined number of times a variable game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times without executing a jackpot game, and the control state is for an electric device that assists in the establishment of a start condition for a special game at a ball entrance; a control state for an auxiliary means for assisting the establishment of a start condition in a start means; a control state for an electric device for assisting the establishment of a start condition at a ball entrance; a control state for an electric device for assisting the establishment of a start condition at a ball entrance; a control state for an electric device for assisting the establishment of a start condition at a ball entrance; a control state for an electric device for assisting the establishment of a start condition at a ball entrance; a control state for an electric device for assisting the establishment of a start condition at a ball entrance; a control state for an electric device for assisting the establishment of a start condition at a ball entrance; a control state for an electric device for assisting the establishment of a start condition at a ball entrance; a control state for an electric device for assisting the establishment of a start condition at a ball entrance; a control state for an electric device for assisting the establishment of a start condition at a ball entrance; A control state corresponding to a time-shortened game state (b time-shortened game state) generated when the number of times a variable game is executed reaches a predetermined number, and which is a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the establishment of a start condition in a start means; a control state corresponding to the b time-shortened game state, and which is a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of a start condition at a ball entrance; a control state corresponding to the b time-shortened game state, and which is a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of a start condition for a variable game at a ball entrance; a control state corresponding to the b time-shortened game state, and which is a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of a start condition for a special game at a ball entrance; a control state corresponding to a normal game state generated when the number of times a predetermined variable game is executed reaches the upper limit number without executing a special game in a probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) in which the upper limit number of times is specified, and which is a control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the establishment of a start condition in a start means; A control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the limited number of times is reached, and is a control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of a start condition at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of times a predetermined variable game is executed reaches the maximum number of times without executing a special game in a probability variable game state in which the maximum number of times is specified, and is a control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of a start condition for a variable game at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of times a predetermined variable game is executed reaches the maximum number of times without executing a special game in a probability variable game state in which the maximum number of times is specified, and is a control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of a start condition for a special chart game at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of times a predetermined variable game is executed reaches the maximum number of times without executing a jackpot game in a probability variable game state in which the maximum number of times is specified, and is a control state for an assisting means that assists in the establishment of a start condition at the starting means; probability variable game with a specified maximum number of times a control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of a start condition at the ball entrance; a control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of a start condition at the ball entrance; a control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of a start condition at the ball entrance; a control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of a start condition at the ball entrance; a control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of a start condition at the ball entrance; a control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of a start condition at the ball entrance; a control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of a start condition at the ball entrance; a control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of a start condition at the ball entrance; a control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of a start condition at the ball entrance; a control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of a start condition at the ball entrance; a control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of a start condition at the ball entrance; a control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of a start condition at the ball entrance; a control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of a start condition at the ball entrance; a control state for an electric accessory that assists in the establishment of a start condition at the ball entrance A control state for an auxiliary means that assists in the establishment of conditions; a control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of times a predetermined variable game is executed reaches the maximum number of times without executing a special game in a time-saving game state with a specified maximum number of times, and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of a start condition at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of times a predetermined variable game is executed reaches the maximum number of times without executing a special game in a time-saving game state with a specified maximum number of times, and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of a start condition for a variable game at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of times a predetermined variable game is executed reaches the maximum number of times without executing a special game in a time-saving game state with a specified maximum number of times, and a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of a start condition for a special game at the ball entrance; a control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of times a predetermined variable game is executed reaches the maximum number of times without executing a special game in a time-saving game state with a specified maximum number of times a control state for an assisting means that assists in the establishment of the start conditions in the start means; a control state for an electric device that assists in the establishment of the start conditions at the ball entrance ...

Incidentally, some gaming machines transition to a time-saving gaming state (so-called time-saving b gaming state as first-profit gaming state control) when the number of special symbol fluctuations in the normal gaming state reaches a specified number without a special symbol jackpot game being executed as a big-profit game. The time-saving b gaming state ends when a special symbol jackpot game is executed, or when the special symbol jackpot game is executed the maximum number of times. Also, if the time-saving b gaming state ends because the maximum number of special symbol games have been executed without a special symbol jackpot game being executed, the machine transitions to the normal gaming state.

However, in gaming machines, when the normal game state is entered from the b time-saving game state, even if the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches the specified number of times without a special symbol jackpot game being played since the transition to the normal game state, the machine will not enter the b time-saving game state again. In other words, the b time-saving game state does not occur in the normal game state entered from the b time-saving game state (first auxiliary state control), but the b time-saving game state can occur in the normal game state entered after the end of a special symbol jackpot game or the end of a special symbol game state (second auxiliary state control). Therefore, the b time-saving game state can only occur once between the first special symbol jackpot game and the next special symbol jackpot game.

In contrast, in this invention, when a specific period of play, which is different from the special game as a profit game, ends based on a game ball entering a specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for a specific period in a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a variable symbol game is a first control state that does not correspond to a specific game state, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state that corresponds to the specific game state. In other words, in this invention, even when the control state of the auxiliary means is in the predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is the first control state that does not correspond to a specific game state, it is possible to generate a specific game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is the second control state by allowing a game ball to enter a specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open and playing for a specific period. This makes it possible to generate a specific game state again even after the specific game state has ended, preventing the gaming machine from being left unused because the specific game state has ended and no specific game state has occurred, and suppressing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

More specifically, in this embodiment, a player may be awarded gaming profits in the form of a special jackpot game, which is a large-profit game, and a V-winning jackpot game, which is a small-profit game. The special jackpot game as a large-profit game is executed when the result of the special jackpot lottery, which is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, which serves as the starting means, is a jackpot, and is a highly profitable game for the player, as it allows the player to win a large number of game balls by opening and closing the variable winning slot 316 multiple times. On the other hand, the V-entry jackpot game as a small-profit game is executed when a game ball enters the special electric start port 37 as the first ball entry means, and the special electric V-entry port 383 as a specific ball entry area provided by the second ball entry means, which is opened by the operation of the special electric opening/closing door 382 as the opening/closing means provided by the second ball entry means, in the special electric start game executed based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start port 37 as the first ball entry means. Although game balls can enter the special electric large-entry port 381, the number of game balls that can be won by entering the special electric large-entry port 381 is small, so the game is a game with little profit for the player. Also, in this embodiment, the special electric start port 37, the special electric large-entry port 381, and the special electric V-entry port 383 are located at positions where game balls flowing down the second flow path 392 as a specific flow path set in the right area of the game board 31 can enter. In other words, a V-winning jackpot game as a small-profit game can be executed by shooting a game ball into the second flow path 392.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a V-winning jackpot game as a small-profit game ends, a maximum value is set as the number of special symbol games as a variable game that can trigger the b-time-saving game state, which is the first-profit game state control. Here, the b-time-saving game state, which is the first-profit game state control, is a time-saving game state with a specified upper limit (e.g., 1,000 times) to which the state is transitioned when a predetermined number of special symbol games (e.g., 1,000 times) are executed without a special symbol jackpot game as a large-profit game being executed in the low-frequency support mode, which is the second auxiliary state control in which the opening and closing frequency of the electric device 315b as an auxiliary means for opening and closing the second winning opening 315 (the frequency with which the electric device 315b supports the ball entering the second winning opening 315) is low. In other words, in this embodiment, a maximum value is set as the number of special symbol games that can trigger a transition to the b-time-saving game state, which is the first-profit game state control, by the player continuing to shoot game balls toward the second flow path 392.

In this embodiment, a maximum value is set as the number of special symbol games that can be played to generate the b time-shortened game state, which is the first profit game state control, by the player continuing to shoot game balls toward the second flow path 392. Therefore, if the maximum number of special symbol games is played in the b time-shortened game state, which is the first profit game state control, without a special symbol jackpot game being played as a large profit game, the b time-shortened game state is transitioned to the normal game state, and the first auxiliary state control is entered, in which the b time-shortened game state, which is the first profit game state control, does not occur.However, by continuing to shoot game balls toward the second flow path 392, the player can intentionally generate a state in the second auxiliary state control, which is the first profit game state control, that can generate the b time-shortened game state, which is the first profit game state control. In this way, in this embodiment, the player can generate the second auxiliary state control state that can generate the b time-saving game state, which is the first profitable game state control, thereby improving the operating rate of gaming machines that have completed the b time-saving game state, which is the first profitable game state control, without executing a special jackpot game as a big profit game.

In addition, in this embodiment, a maximum value is set as the number of special symbol games that can trigger the b time-saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, by the player continuing to shoot game balls toward the second flow path 392. Therefore, if the player ends play in the second auxiliary state control, which can trigger the b time-saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, the player can clear the number of special symbol games played by the player in the second auxiliary state control, which can trigger the b time-saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, by continuing to shoot game balls toward the second flow path 392 before ending play, thereby executing a V prize winning jackpot game as a small profit game. This allows the player to prevent the disadvantage suffered by the player as a result of playing in the second auxiliary state control, which can trigger the b time-saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, from becoming an advantage for others. In other words, the player invests time, money, effort, etc. in the number of special symbol games played in the second auxiliary state control state, which can generate the time-saving game state b, which is the first profitable game state control, and by continuing to shoot game balls toward the second flow path 392, the player can intentionally prevent such investment from benefiting others who play on the gaming machine later (i.e., from becoming the target of so-called hyena behavior).

This embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 291 to 327, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above. However, important points in this embodiment may be explained again even if they have already been explained in the first embodiment described above.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine is equipped with a "game profit" as a profitable game, a "large profit game" as a special game, a "small profit game" as a specific period game, a "first profit game state control" as a specific game state, a "second profit game state control" as a predetermined game state, a "first auxiliary state control" as a first control state, and a "second auxiliary state control" as a second control state.

[Configuration of gaming machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to Figures 291 to 293. Here, Figure 291 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and Figures 292 and 293 are diagrams for explaining the special large winning device 38 of the gaming machine 31 shown in Figure 291.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
As shown in Figures 1 to 3, the front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection/determination section 21, a launch handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an illumination section 27, etc.

The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to launch a gaming ball. In the gaming machine 10, when the player rotates the launch handle 22, a gaming ball is launched from the gaming ball launch mechanism 32, which serves as a launching means, with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation, thereby performing a basic game. For example, depending on the player's predetermined game operation on the launch handle 22, a left-hand hit game can be executed as a first game in which the gaming ball is launched to the left side of the gaming board 31, which is the first direction, and a right-hand hit game can be executed as a second game in which the gaming ball is launched to the right side of the gaming board 31, which is the second direction. In addition, in this embodiment, as right-hand hit games, a strong right-hand hit game in which the gaming ball is launched to the right of the separation unit 393, which will be described later, and a weak right-hand hit game in which the gaming ball is launched to the left of the separation unit 393, which will be described later, can be executed.

In this embodiment, in the normal game mode, left-handed play is encouraged to cause the game ball to enter the first winning slot 314, which serves as the starting means, and execute the first special symbol game as a variable game. In the probability variable game mode and various time-saving game modes (time-saving game mode a, time-saving game mode b), strong right-handed play is encouraged to cause the game ball to enter the through gate 317 and the second winning slot 315, which serves as the starting means, and execute the second special symbol game as a variable game. In the special symbol jackpot game, which is a big profit game that provides the player with a gaming profit, strong right-handed play is encouraged to cause the game ball to flow down the first flow path 391, described below, and enter the variable symbol game slot 316. Additionally, weak right-hand play is encouraged to allow a game ball to enter the special electric start port 37 (described below) to execute a special electric start game, and to allow a game ball to enter the special electric V entry port 383 of the special electric big entry device 38 (described below) to execute a V entry jackpot game. Therefore, the player can prevent disadvantages by performing predetermined game operations on the launch handle 22 that are encouraged depending on the game status.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in Figure 230, the game board 31 is provided with an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, left and right general winning openings 313, a first winning opening 314 and a second winning opening 315 as starting means, a through gate 317, an outlet 318, a pattern display unit 341 as display means, a main display unit 36 having a first special pattern display unit 362 and a second special pattern display unit 363 as display means, a special electric starting opening 37, a special electric large winning device 38, a variable winning opening 316, a first flow path 391, and a second flow path 392 as a specific route.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending launched game balls toward the game area on the surface of the game board 31. After being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls flowing down the left side of the game board 31 can enter the left general winning opening 313 and the first winning opening 314, while game balls flowing down the right side of the game board 31 can enter the right general winning opening 313, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, the through gate 317, the special electric starting opening 37, and the special electric large winning device 38. Meanwhile, game balls that do not enter the left or right general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, or the specific winning areas of the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, the special electric starting opening 37, or the special electric large winning device 38 are discharged from the outlet 318. When a game ball enters the left or right general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, the special electric starting opening 37, or the special electric large winning device 38, a preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, as shown in FIG. 294(B), the number of prize balls when the ball enters the left or right general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when the ball enters the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is 3, the number of prize balls when the ball enters the variable winning opening 316 is 10, the number of prize balls when the ball enters the special electric starting opening 37 is 1, and the number of prize balls when the ball enters the special electric large winning device 38 (the special electric V winning opening 383 or the special electric normal winning opening 384 as the specific winning area described below) is 1. Note that the number of prize balls when the game ball enters the through gate 317 is 0.

In addition, when a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41 of the main control device 4) executes processing related to the special jackpot lottery. When the special jackpot lottery is conducted by the main control unit 331, a special jackpot game is executed as a small-profit game for a specific period different from the large-profit game as a gaming profit for the player, and the result of the special jackpot lottery is announced. Specifically, the result of the special jackpot lottery triggered by a gaming ball entering the first winning slot 314 is announced in the first special symbol game for a specific period as a small-profit game in which the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display unit 362. On the other hand, when a gaming ball enters the through gate 317, the opening/closing execution means opens the electric device 315b, which is the opening/closing means, for a predetermined period of time, and the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery, which is executed based on the gaming ball entering the second winning opening 315, is announced by the specific period game execution means in a specific period second special symbol game as a small profit game in which the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display unit 363.

Furthermore, if the result of the special jackpot lottery is a jackpot, after the special jackpot game as a small-profit game ends, a special jackpot game as a large-profit game is executed as the player's gaming profit. In this special jackpot game, a predetermined number of rounds (e.g., 5 or 16) are repeatedly executed in the open/close execution mode. In each round, the open/close door 319, which serves as the opening/closing means, is switched between a standby position in which the variable winning opening 316 is closed and an operating position in which the variable winning opening 316 is open. In other words, in the open/close execution mode, the number of rounds is determined from multiple rounds (e.g., 5 or 16) based on the result of the jackpot lottery, and the determined number of rounds is executed, causing the open/close door 319 to repeatedly operate. In this way, in the special jackpot game, the variable winning opening 316 is repeatedly opened by the open/close door 319, making the special jackpot game a large-profit game in which a large number of prize balls can be expected to be paid out as gaming profit.

The right-hand area of the gaming board 31, where right-hand play as the second game can be played, is separated into two game areas by a separation section 393 made of resin or the like. Note that the separation section 393 can also be created by driving in multiple nails. The two game areas in the right-hand area of the gaming board 31 define specific paths along which game balls flow during right-hand play, and each game area is provided with a first ball entry means and a second ball entry means.

In the first area, which serves as a play area and is set to the right of the separation section 393 in the right area of the game board 31, a first flow path 391 is defined as a specific path. The first area is also provided with a through gate 317 as a first ball entry means, and a second winning opening 315 as a specific ball entry area provided by the second ball entry means. Therefore, during right-hand play, a game ball flowing down the first flow path 391 can enter the through gate 317 and the second winning opening 315. The second winning opening 315 is also provided with an electric device 315b as an opening/closing device provided by the second ball entry means. This electric device 315b switches the second winning opening 315 between a closed state and an open state.

When a gaming ball enters through gate 317, no prize balls are paid out, but the entry of the gaming ball into through gate 317 triggers the execution of a regular winning lottery process, and the regular symbols are displayed in a variable manner, executing a regular winning game as a profit game that notifies the result of the regular winning lottery. If the result of the regular winning lottery is a regular winning, the opening/closing execution means executes processing for a regular winning game as a profit game in which second winning port 315 is opened for a predetermined period of time. In this regular winning game, electric device 315b is activated to open second winning port 315. In other words, by executing the opening/closing control process for the electric device 315b, one movement mode is determined from multiple movement modes (for example, a short opening of 0.1 seconds, a long opening of 6 seconds (see Figures 12(A) and 12(B))), and during a normal winning game, the electric device 315b is operated between a standby position where the second winning opening 315 is closed and an operating position where the second winning opening 315 is opened according to the one movement mode, thereby switching the second winning opening 315 between a closed state and an open state. In this way, during a normal winning game, the second winning opening 315 is opened, allowing a gaming ball to enter the second winning opening 315.

In addition, multiple nails are driven into the through gate 317, and a flow path through which game balls can enter the through gate 317 and a flow path through which game balls cannot enter the through gate 317 are set up, and some of the game balls that are shot into the right area of the game board 31 and flow down the first flow path 391 enter the through gate 317. In addition, multiple nails are driven into the second winning opening 315, and a flow path through which game balls can enter the second winning opening 315 and a flow path through which game balls cannot enter the second winning opening 315 are set up, and some of the game balls that are shot into the right area of the game board 31 and flow down the first flow path 391 enter the second winning opening 315 when the second winning opening 315 is opened based on the game ball entering the through gate 317. As mentioned above, the number of prize balls when a game ball enters the through gate 317 is zero. As mentioned above, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the number of winning balls is three (see FIG. 294(B)), and the time that the second winning opening 315 is open is 0.1 seconds in the short opening state and 6 seconds in the long opening state (see FIGS. 12(C) and 294(D)). In this embodiment, in both the high frequency support mode (probability change game state, a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state) and the low frequency support mode (normal game state), when a game is executed in which game balls are shot into the right area of the game board 31 and caused to flow down the first flow path 391, which is a specific path, if a specific number of game balls are caused to flow down the first flow path 391 by successively shooting game balls, the number of profit game balls that the player can acquire is configured to be less than the specific number. This prevents the number of game balls from increasing by flowing them down the first flow path 391 in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, a time-limited game state, b time-limited game state) and the low-frequency support mode (normal game state). In other words, the game ball flow area can be freely adjusted by the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 by the player, so the player can freely launch game balls at any time so that they flow down the specific path of the first flow path 391. However, since the system is configured so that the number of balls held by the player does not increase even if game balls are flowed down the first flow path 391, the method of launching game balls down the first flow path 391 is prevented from becoming a strategy.

A second flow path 392 is defined as a specific path in the second area, which serves as a play area set to the left of the separation section 393 in the right area of the playboard 31. The second area also has a special electric start port 37 as a first ball entry means, and a special electric large winning device 38 as a second ball entry means below the special electric start port 37. Therefore, during right-hand play, game balls flowing down the second flow path 392 can enter the special electric start port 37 and the special electric large winning device 38.

The special electric start port 37 activates the special electric large winning device 38 when a game ball enters it, and provides an opportunity to execute a special electric start game in which the game ball can enter the special electric V winning port 383 of the special electric large winning device 38 described below. The special electric start port 37 is equipped with a ball entry sensor 37a (see Figure 294) that detects when a game ball enters the special electric start port 37.

In addition, when a game ball enters the special electric V entry port 383 during the special electric start game, that is, when the game ball is detected by the ball entry sensor 37a (see Figure 294), a V entry jackpot game, which is a small profit game, will be executed as the game profit, as described below.

Here, Figure 232(A) is a front view of the special electric grand prize winning device 38, Figure 232(B) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the special electric grand prize winning device 38, Figure 232(C) is a cross-sectional view of the special electric grand prize winning device 38 along the X1-X1 line in Figure 232(A), Figure 232(D) is a cross-sectional view of the special electric grand prize winning device 38 along the X2-X2 line in Figure 232(A), and Figure 233(A) is a cross-sectional view of the special electric grand prize winning device 38 when the special electric opening and closing door 382 of the special electric grand prize winning device 38 is opened and the special electric V prize winning port 3 233(B) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 232(C) in a state in which game balls can enter special electric opening/closing door 382 of special electric large winning device 38 and game balls cannot enter special electric V winning port 383, and FIG. 233(C) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 232(D) in a state in which special electric opening/closing door 382 of special electric large winning device 38 and game balls cannot enter special electric V winning port 383.

As shown in Figures 232(A) and 232(B), the special electric large prize winning device 38 comprises a special electric large prize winning opening 381, a special electric opening/closing door 382, a special electric V prize winning opening 383 which is a specific winning area, a special electric normal prize winning opening 384, and a V prize winning opening/closing door 385 which is an opening/closing means.

The special large winning slot 381 opens to the front side of the game board 31. The special large winning slot door 382 switches between a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the special large winning slot 381 as shown in Figures 232 (C) and 232 (D), and an open state in which game balls can enter the special large winning slot 381 as shown in Figures 232 (A) and 232 (C).

As shown in Figure 232 (A), when the special electric V winning opening 383 is opened by the V winning opening opening door 385, which is an opening/closing means, game balls that have entered through the special electric large winning opening 381 can enter the special electric V winning opening 383. In addition, the special electric V winning opening 383 is provided with a ball entry sensor 383a (see Figure 294) that detects when a game ball has entered the special electric V winning opening 383.

Also, as shown in Figure 232 (B), when the special electric V prize opening 383 is closed by the V prize opening opening door 385, game balls that have entered through the special electric large prize opening 381 cannot enter the special electric V prize opening 383, whereas, as shown in Figure 232 (C), game balls that have entered through the special electric large prize opening 381 can enter the special electric normal prize opening 384. Also, the special electric normal prize opening 384 is provided with a ball entry sensor 384a (see Figure 294) that detects when a game ball has entered the special electric V prize opening 383.

The special electric large winning device 38 is activated to execute a special electric start game, which is a small-profit game, when a gaming ball enters the special electric start port 37, which is the first ball entry means. In this special electric start game, the special electric large winning port 381 can be switched between a closed state and an open state by the special electric opening/closing door 382, allowing the gaming ball to enter the special electric large winning port 381.

In addition, the special electric large winning device 38 is activated to execute a V-winning jackpot game, which is a small-profit game, based on a game ball entering the special electric V-winning port 383 of the special electric large winning device 38 during the special electric start game. In this V-winning jackpot game, the special electric large winning port 381 can be switched between a closed state and an open state by the special electric opening/closing door 382, allowing a game ball to enter the special electric large winning port 381.

Here, multiple nails are driven into the special electric start port 37, and flow paths through which game balls can enter the special electric start port 37 and flow paths through which game balls cannot enter the special electric start port 37 are set. Therefore, some of the game balls that are shot into the right area of the gaming board 31 and flow down the second flow path 392 will enter the special electric start port 37. As mentioned above, the number of winning balls when a game ball enters the special electric start port 37 is one (see Figure 294 (B)). Therefore, when a game ball is shot toward the special electric start port 37 to trigger a special electric start game, the number of game balls that the player can win will be fewer than the number of game balls shot out necessary to trigger the special electric start game.

Also, as mentioned above, when a gaming ball entered through the special large winning slot 381 enters the special V winning slot 383, the number of winning balls is one, and when a gaming ball entered through the special large winning slot 381 enters the special normal winning slot 384, the number of winning balls is one (see Figure 294 (B)). Therefore, in special start-up games and V winning jackpot games, it is not possible to expect an increase in the player's gaming balls.

As such, when game balls are shot toward the special electric start port 37 to trigger a special electric start game, the number of profitable game balls that a player can acquire is smaller than the number of game balls (specific number of balls) required to trigger the special electric start game, and an increase in the player's game balls is not expected in the special electric start game and V prize jackpot game. Therefore, in this embodiment, in both the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state) and the low-frequency support mode (normal game state), when a game is executed in which game balls are shot into the right area of the game board 31 and caused to flow down the specific path, second flow path 392, as the first game, if a specific number of game balls are caused to flow down the second flow path 392 by continuously shooting game balls, the number of profitable game balls that a player can acquire is configured to be smaller than the specific number of balls. This prevents the number of game balls from increasing by flowing them down the second flow path 392 in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state) and the low-frequency support mode (normal game state). In other words, the game ball flow area can be freely adjusted by the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 by the player, so the player can always freely launch game balls so that they flow down the specific path, which is the second flow path 392. However, since the player's ball holdings do not increase even when game balls are flowed down the second flow path 392, the method of launching game balls down the second flow path 392 is prevented from becoming a strategy.

As shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning opening 316, which serves as a specific ball entry area, is located below the first and second ball entry means provided in two play areas in the right area of the game board 31. The variable winning opening 316 is also provided with an opening/closing door 319, which serves as an opening/closing means. As described above, this opening/closing door 319 repeatedly switches the variable winning opening 316 between a closed and open state during the special jackpot game. In other words, the variable winning opening 316 and the opening/closing door are a third ball entry means different from the first and second ball entry means. A game ball can enter this variable winning opening 316 by performing a right-hand play as a second game, in which a game ball is shot into the right area of the game board 31. Specifically, a game ball can enter the variable winning opening 316 regardless of whether the game ball is shot into the play area to the right of the separation section 393 in the right area of the game board 31 or the play area to the left of the separation section 393.

In this way, because the third ball entry means, which is equipped with a variable winning opening 316 and an opening/closing door, is different from the first and second ball entry means, it is possible to award the player a special jackpot game, which is a large-profit game, as a gaming profit that is different from the regular jackpot game and V-winning jackpot game, which are small-profit games. Furthermore, because the third ball entry means is different from the first and second ball entry means, it is possible to execute the special jackpot game, V-winning jackpot game, and regular jackpot game independently, thereby realizing a gameplay feature in which the special jackpot game, V-winning jackpot game, and regular jackpot game are executed simultaneously, or conversely, in which two or more of the special jackpot game, V-winning jackpot game, and regular jackpot game are not executed simultaneously. For example, it is conceivable to prevent a small profit game from being executed while a large profit game is being executed, to enable a large profit game to be executed while a small profit game is being executed, to prevent another small profit game from being executed while a small profit game is being executed, and to enable another small profit game to be executed while a small profit game is being executed. Specifically, by preventing the special electric opening and closing door 382 as an opening and closing means from being operated while a special chart jackpot game is being executed, a V winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game, is not started while a special chart jackpot game, which is a large profit game, is being executed, and by preventing the electric device 315b as an opening and closing means from being operated while a special chart jackpot game is being executed, a normal chart jackpot game, which is a small profit game, is not started while a special chart jackpot game, which is a large profit game, is being executed, and to prevent the special electric opening and closing door 382 as an opening and closing means for a small profit game from being operated while a special chart game, which is a small profit game, is being executed. In this way, a V winning jackpot game is prevented from being executed, and by enabling the special electric opening and closing door 382 as an opening and closing means during the execution of a special symbol game, which is a small profit game, a V winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game, a game can be started; by preventing the electric device 315b as an opening and closing means from being activated during the execution of a special symbol game, which is a small profit game, a game can be started of a normal symbol game, which is a small profit game, a game can be started; and by enabling the electric device 315b as an opening and closing means during the execution of a special symbol game, which is a small profit game, a game can be started of a normal symbol game, which is a small profit game, a game can be started.

In this way, by preventing small profit games from being executed while large profit games are being executed, and by allowing large profit games to be executed while small profit games are being executed, gameplay can be realized in which the profit from large profit games can be reliably obtained as game profits. Furthermore, by preventing other small profit games from being executed while small profit games are being executed, gameplay can be realized in which the profit from one type of small profit game can be obtained as game profits. Furthermore, by allowing other small profit games to be executed while small profit games are being executed, gameplay can be realized in which the profit from multiple small profit games can be obtained as game profits.

[Gaming System]
First, a gaming system including the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 294(A) and Fig. 294(C). Here, Fig. 294(A) is a block diagram showing an example of a part of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in Fig. 291, and Fig. 294(C) is a diagram showing the types of signals output to the outside of the gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 294 (A), the gaming system according to this embodiment includes a gaming machine 10, a hall computer 102, and a data display 103.

The gaming machine 10 is equipped with an external output terminal board 101 as a signal output means for outputting game information from the gaming machine 10 to an external device such as a hall computer 102. This external output terminal board 101 has, for example, multiple output terminal units (not shown), and each output terminal unit (not shown) is connected via wiring (not shown) to an input/output I/F 42 that communicates data with the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 so as to enable data communication (reception). As a result, game information from the gaming machine 10 is output to the outside of the gaming machine 10 as various signals via the corresponding output terminal unit (not shown) of the external output terminal board 101. Furthermore, each output terminal unit (not shown) is capable of outputting one predetermined type of signal to the outside. In other words, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the type of output terminal unit (not shown) and the type of signal that can be output to the outside. For example, as shown in Figure 294 (C), of the multiple output terminal units (not shown), terminal 1 can output jackpot signal 1 as a special signal, terminal 2 can output jackpot signal 2, terminal 3 can output a V-winning jackpot game signal as an identification signal, and terminal 4 can output a special chart variation stop signal as an identification signal.

As shown in Figure 295 (A), jackpot signal 1 is a signal that is continuously output while a special jackpot game, which is a highly profitable game, is being played. This jackpot signal 1 makes it possible to identify that a special jackpot game is being played.

As shown in Figure 295 (B), jackpot signal 2 is a signal that is continuously output during the execution of a special jackpot game, which is a highly profitable game, and during the execution of a high-frequency support mode (probable variable game state, time-limited game state) to which the mode transitions at the end of the jackpot game. This jackpot signal 2 makes it possible to identify whether the special jackpot game is being executed or the high-frequency support mode to which the mode transitions at the end of the special jackpot game. Furthermore, by comparing jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2, for example, if both jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 are output, it can be identified that the special jackpot game is being executed, and if jackpot signal 1 is not output but jackpot signal 2 is output, it can be identified that the mode transitions at the end of the special jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 296 (A), the V prize winning jackpot game signal is a signal that is continuously output while a V prize winning jackpot game, which is a small-profit game, is being played. This V prize winning jackpot game signal makes it possible to identify that a V prize winning jackpot game is being played. The V prize winning jackpot game signal may be a pulse signal that is output only at the start of a V prize winning jackpot game, in which case the V prize winning jackpot game signal makes it possible to identify that a V prize winning jackpot game has started. The V prize winning jackpot game signal may also be a pulse signal that is output only at the end of a V prize winning jackpot game. In this case, the V prize winning jackpot game signal makes it possible to identify that a V prize winning jackpot game has ended.

In this embodiment, the jackpot games include a special jackpot game as a large-profit game that is executed when the result of the special jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and a V-entry jackpot game as a small-profit game that is executed when a game ball enters the special V-entry port 383 in a special electric start game that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start port 37. In this embodiment, when a special jackpot game is executed, jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 are output, and a V-entry jackpot game signal different from jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 is not output. On the other hand, when a V-entry jackpot game is executed, jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 are not output, and a V-entry jackpot game signal is output.

In this way, when a V-winning jackpot game is executed, jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 are not output, which prevents the gaming parlor from recognizing a V-winning jackpot game that a player can freely generate in the hall computer 102 as a special jackpot game. This allows the gaming parlor to accurately manage the number of times a special jackpot game has been executed in the hall computer 102, and to accurately display the number of times a special jackpot game has been executed on the data display 103.

Furthermore, when a V-winning jackpot game is executed, a V-winning jackpot game signal different from jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 is output, allowing the amusement parlor to know that the hall computer 102 has executed a V-winning jackpot game, i.e., that the number of special symbol games to be executed before the b-time-saving game state is triggered has been reset. This allows the amusement parlor to know the remaining number of special symbol games required from the end of the previous normal jackpot game until the b-time-saving game state is triggered, even when a V-winning jackpot game is executed in the hall computer 102. Therefore, the amusement parlor can use the remaining number of special symbol games required until the b-time-saving game state is triggered, as determined by the hall computer 102, as a reference for determining whether to reset the number of special symbol games to the maximum value before the b-time-saving game state is triggered by clearing the RAM before the amusement parlor opens.

As shown in Figure 296 (B), the special symbol variation stop signal is a pulse signal that is output when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state. This special symbol variation stop signal makes it possible to identify that the special symbol game has ended. Therefore, the number of times the special symbol game has been played can be identified based on the special symbol variation stop signal. Note that instead of the special symbol variation stop signal, a pulse signal may be output as a special symbol variation start signal when the special symbol variation display has started. This special symbol variation start signal makes it possible to identify that the special symbol game has started, so the number of times the special symbol game has been played can be identified based on the special symbol variation start signal. Also, instead of the special symbol variation stop signal, the special symbol variation signal may be output continuously while the special symbol is being displayed in a changed state. This special symbol variation signal makes it possible to identify that the special symbol game is being played, so the number of times the special symbol game has been played can be identified based on the special symbol variation signal.

As shown in Figure 294 (A), multiple output terminals (not shown) are connected to the hall computer 102 at the amusement hall via wiring or other means to enable data communication (transmission). This allows the hall computer 102 to obtain gaming information corresponding to the gaming situation and gaming state of each gaming machine 10 based on various signals output from each output terminal (not shown) of the gaming machine 10. As a result, the amusement hall can grasp the gaming situation and gaming state of each gaming machine 10 based on the various signals received by the hall computer 102. In addition, the amusement hall can select the necessary output terminal from the multiple output terminals (not shown) and connect it to the hall computer 102 via wiring or other means. This allows the amusement hall to selectively obtain gaming information managed by the amusement hall by selecting the output terminal (not shown) to connect to the hall computer 102, thereby efficiently managing the necessary gaming information and displaying the necessary gaming information on the data display 103.

Here, the game information signaled from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102 includes, for example, that a game is being played, that a jackpot game has started (that a jackpot game is being played), that the game is in high-frequency support mode (a special game mode, a time-saving game mode), that the game is in low-frequency support mode (a normal game mode), that a special game mode has started (that a special game mode is being played), the number of game balls fired (number of balls out), the number of balls released, and the difference in the number of balls. Therefore, based on the game information output as a signal from the gaming machines 10 to the hall computer 102, the gaming hall can use the hall computer to manage, for example, the number of jackpots on the day and for the past few days, the number of consecutive jackpots on the day and for the past few days, the highest number of previous jackpots, the highest number of consecutive jackpots in the past, the current number of consecutive jackpots, the total number of variable game plays on the day and for the past few days, the number of special game plays between jackpots on the day and for the past few days, the number of special game plays from the previous jackpot on the day to the current variable game, the balls paid out and the difference in balls for the day and for the past few days, and the game status and state of each gaming machine 10, for example, whether it is currently playing, whether it is currently playing a jackpot, whether it is in high-frequency support mode (probable game mode, time-saving game mode), or whether it is in low-frequency support mode (normal game mode).

The data display 103 displays, for example, the game status and game state of the gaming machine 10, and is installed, for example, above each gaming machine 10 in the island equipment of an amusement hall. This data display 103 is connected to the hall computer 102 via wiring or the like to enable data communication (reception), and by receiving game information managed by the hall computer 102, it is possible to directly or indirectly display the game status and game state based on this game information. Specifically, the data display 103 can directly or indirectly display, for example, the number of jackpots on the day and for the past few days, the number of consecutive jackpots on the day and for the past few days, the highest number of previous jackpots, the highest number of consecutive jackpots in the past, the current number of consecutive jackpots, the total number of variable play sessions on the day and for the past few days, the number of special play sessions between jackpots on the day and for the past few days, the number of special play sessions from the previous jackpot on the day to the current variable play session, the number of balls paid out and the difference in balls on the day and for the past few days, whether a game is in progress, whether a jackpot game is in progress, whether a high-frequency support mode (probable variable play mode, time-saving play mode), whether a low-frequency support mode (normal play mode), etc.

[Processing of main control device 4]
Next, with reference to Figures 297 to 321, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
The main timer interrupt processing of this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in some of the procedures of the through gate processing, since the through gate 317 of this embodiment is provided only in the right area of the game board 31.

[Through gate processing]
297 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the through gate processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1006 in the main timer interrupt processing of Fig. 17. In the through gate processing, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 317, the MPU 41 updates the information stored in the regular ball reserve storage area 412c (see Fig. 11) of the RAM 412. The through gate processing will be explained below with reference to Fig. 297.

<Step S1301>
297, in the through gate processing of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 317, which is the first ball entry means (step S1301). Whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 317 is determined based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17. If the MPU 41 determines that the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 317L (step S1301: Yes), it proceeds to step S1302, and if it determines that the gaming ball has not passed through the through gate 317L (step S1301: No), it terminates the through gate processing.

<Step S1302>
When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the through gate 317L (step S1301: Yes), it determines whether the normal map variable reserve number X stored in the normal map variable reserve number memory area SNA set in the normal map reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserve number (4 in this embodiment) (step S1302). When the normal map variable reserve number X is the maximum reserve number (step S1302: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the through gate processing, and when the normal map variable reserve number X is not the maximum reserve number (step S1302: No), the processing proceeds to step S1303.

<Steps S1303 and S1304>
If the number of reserved normal map variations X is not the maximum number (step S1302: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reserved normal map variations X (step S1303), obtains the counter values of the normal hit random number counter C4 and the normal hit type random number counter C5 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17, and the value of the normal map variation type counter CS2 updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main processing in Figure 300 described below, and stores the counter values in the first empty reservation area among the first normal map reservation area SE1 to the fourth normal map reservation area SE4 in the normal map reservation storage area 412c in RAM 412 (step S1304), and terminates the through gate processing.

[Main processing of main control device 4]
Next, referring to FIG. 300, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described. The main processing of this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a special game play count management process (step S1406-1), a special electric start game control process (step S1407-2), a V winning jackpot game control process (step S1407-3), and a signal output process (step S1408-1) are executed. These processes will be described below, but the processes necessary for understanding this embodiment will also be described as appropriate.

Before explaining the main processing of the main control unit 4, we will explain the transition of game states in this embodiment with reference to Figure 298. Here, Figure 298 is a diagram showing an example of transition of game states.

As shown in Figure 298 (A), in this embodiment, the basic game states include the normal game state, the probability game state, the time-limited game state A, the time-limited game state B, and the special jackpot game state, and the game state is changed when a predetermined condition is met.

The normal game state is a low-probability mode in which the special jackpot lottery is executed based on a low-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9 (A)), which indicates a low probability of winning the special jackpot lottery, and is a mode that is unlikely to transition to the special jackpot game state. The normal game state is also a low-frequency support mode in which the electric device 315b operates infrequently, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315. Therefore, in the normal game state, left-handed play is encouraged as the first game, in which the game ball is shot into the left side area of the game board 31, which is the first direction, in order to cause the game ball to enter the first winning slot 314 and execute the first special game. The normal game state is entered when a specified number of special game games have been executed in the time-saving game state a or the time-saving game state b without transitioning to the special jackpot game state. Specifically, a transition to the normal game state occurs when, for example, 100 special symbol games are played in the time-saving game state a without transitioning to the special symbol jackpot game state, or when, for example, 1,000 special symbol games are played in the time-saving game state b without transitioning to the special symbol jackpot game state. The normal game state transitioned from the time-saving game state a is a second auxiliary state control that can transition to the time-saving game state b by playing special symbol games a specified number of times (for example, 1,000 times) after the end of a normal jackpot game without transitioning to the special symbol jackpot game state. On the other hand, the normal game state transitioned from the time-saving game state b is a first auxiliary state control that does not transition to the time-saving game state b even if a specified number of special symbol games (for example, 1,000 times) are played after transitioning to the normal game without transitioning to the special symbol jackpot game state.

The probability variable game state is a high-probability mode in which the special jackpot lottery is executed based on a high-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9 (B)), which indicates a high probability of winning the jackpot as a result of the special jackpot lottery, and is a mode that is likely to transition to the special jackpot game state. The probability variable game state is also a high-frequency support mode in which the electric device 315b operates frequently, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315. Therefore, in the probability variable game state, a second game, a strong right-hand hit game, is encouraged in which the game ball is shot to the right of the separation section 393 in the right area of the game board 31, which is the second direction, in order to cause the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315 and execute the second special game. A transition to this probability variable game state is made from the probability variable jackpot game state after the high-profit game of the probability variable jackpot game ends.

The time-saving game state a is a low-probability mode in which the special jackpot lottery is conducted based on a low-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9 (A)), which indicates a low probability of winning the jackpot as a result of the special jackpot lottery, and is a mode that is difficult to transition to the special jackpot game state. The time-saving game state a is also a high-frequency support mode in which the electric device 315b operates frequently, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315. Therefore, in the time-saving game state a, in order to cause the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315 and play the second special game, players are encouraged to play by hitting the game ball hard to the right in the game area where the through gate 317 and second winning slot 315 are located, i.e., the game area to the right of the separation section 393 in the right area of the game board 31. The time-saving game state a is transitioned to from the normal jackpot game state after the end of the normal jackpot game, which is a highly profitable game.

The b time-saving game state is a low-probability mode in which the special jackpot lottery is conducted based on a low-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9 (A)), which indicates a low probability of winning the jackpot as a result of the special jackpot lottery, and is a mode that is unlikely to transition to the special jackpot game state. The b time-saving game state is also a high-frequency support mode in which the electric device 315b operates frequently, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315. Therefore, in the b time-saving game state, in order to cause the game ball to enter the second winning slot 315 and play the second special game, players are encouraged to hit the game ball hard to the right into the game area where the through gate 317 and second winning slot 315 are located, i.e., the game area to the right of the separation section 393 in the right area of the game board 31. This b time-saving game state is entered by playing special jackpot games a specified number of times (e.g., 1,000 times) after the end of a regular jackpot game, which is a big-profit game, without transitioning to the special jackpot game state.

The special jackpot game state is a game state in which a special jackpot game is executed, which is a big-profit game in which a predetermined number of rounds are played, with the variable prize entry port 316, serving as the third ball entry means, remaining open until a predetermined time has elapsed or until an upper limit number of game balls (e.g., nine) or more have entered. The special jackpot game state includes a 5R regular jackpot game state, a 5R special jackpot game state, and a 16R special jackpot game state. The 5R regular jackpot game state is a game state in which a 5R regular jackpot game is executed in which five rounds of play are played, and after the 5R regular jackpot game ends, the game state transitions to a time-saving game state. The 5R special jackpot game state is a game state in which a 5R special jackpot game is executed in which five rounds of play are played, and after the 5R special jackpot game ends, the game state transitions to a special jackpot game state. The 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state is a gaming state in which a 16R probability variable jackpot game is played 16 times, and the game transitions to the probability variable gaming state after the 16R probability variable jackpot game ends.

As shown in Figure 298 (B), in this embodiment, the gaming state further includes a V-winning jackpot gaming state. This V-winning jackpot gaming state is a gaming state in which a V-winning jackpot gaming, which is a small-profit gaming, is executed. A V-winning jackpot gaming is executed when a gaming ball enters the special electric V-winning port 383, which is a specific ball entry area provided by the second ball entry means and is opened by the operation of the special electric opening/closing door 382, which is an opening/closing means provided by the second ball entry means, in a special electric start gaming that is executed based on a gaming ball entering the special electric start port 37, which serves as the first ball entry means, in the normal gaming state, the special variable gaming state, the time-limited gaming state a, and the time-limited gaming state b. In other words, if a game ball enters the special electric start port 37 during the execution of a special symbol game, which is a small-profit game (while the special symbol is changing), the special electric start game is executed, and the operation of the special electric opening/closing door 382 allows a game ball to enter the special electric V entry port 383, making it possible for a V entry jackpot game to occur. Therefore, while the special symbol game is being executed (while the special symbol is changing), a V entry jackpot game can be executed simultaneously with the special symbol game. As a result, the V entry jackpot game state occurs separately from and independently of the normal game state, the probability variable game state, the time-saving game state A, and the time-saving game state B.

In this embodiment, the game state is the same before and after the V prize winning jackpot game. Specifically, if a V prize winning jackpot game state occurs in the normal game state, the normal game state is maintained from before the V prize winning jackpot game starts until its end. If a V prize winning jackpot game state occurs in the probability variable game state, the probability variable game state is maintained from before the V prize winning jackpot game starts until its end. If a V prize winning jackpot game state occurs in the time-limited game state a, the time-limited game state a is maintained from before the V prize winning jackpot game starts until its end. If a V prize winning jackpot game state occurs in the time-limited game state b, the time-limited game state b is maintained from before the V prize winning jackpot game starts until its end. In other words, the game state does not change before and after the V prize winning jackpot game, which is a small-profit game, and the player's game profit does not change.

In this way, by not changing the game state before and after the execution of a V-winning jackpot game, the player is prevented from suffering any disadvantages as a result of the V-winning jackpot game, and the player's vested interests prior to the execution of the V-winning jackpot game are continued to be protected after the execution of the V-winning jackpot game. Specifically, if the game state before the execution of a V-winning jackpot game is a probability variable game state, the high-probability mode, in which the special jackpot probability of the special jackpot lottery is high, is maintained even after the execution of the V-winning jackpot game, and the high-frequency support mode, in which the normal jackpot probability of the normal jackpot lottery is high, is maintained. Furthermore, if the game state before the execution of a V-winning jackpot game is a time-saving game state a or a time-saving game state b, the high-frequency support mode, in which the normal jackpot probability of the normal jackpot lottery is high, is maintained even after the execution of the V-winning jackpot game, without affecting the remaining number of time-saving games. This prevents players from suffering disadvantages when they intentionally trigger a V-winning jackpot game, and protects their existing benefits.

Here, in this embodiment, in the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state, a time-saving game state, or b time-saving game state), by flowing the game ball down the first flow path 391, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the through gate 317 and the second winning port 315, thereby executing the second special game. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, a strong right hit game is encouraged, in which the game ball is shot to the right of the separation section 393 in the right area of the game board 31. However, even if a player shoots the game ball with the intention of executing a strong right hit game, it is expected that the game ball will flow down the second flow path 391 against the player's will due to a poor launch of the game ball, mutual interference between game balls, etc. In this case, it is assumed that the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path 391 will enter the special electric start port 37 against the player's will, thereby executing a special electric start game in which the gaming ball can enter the special electric V entry port 383, and furthermore, when the gaming ball enters the special electric V entry port 383 in the special electric start game, a V entry jackpot game will be executed. If the number of times the special game is executed until the b time-shortened game state is generated is reset by the special electric V entry port 383 being executed based on the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path 391 against the player's will, and the game state is changed before and after the execution of the V entry jackpot game, this will cause a great disadvantage to the player. For example, if a V-winning jackpot game is executed in the most advantageous probability variable game state for the player, and the game state is transitioned to another game state (i.e., a game state less advantageous to the player than the probability variable game state (i.e., a low probability mode for the special jackpot lottery), the player would lose the benefit of the high probability mode for the special jackpot lottery, which would be a major disadvantage to the player. In contrast, in this embodiment, by preventing the game state from changing before and after the execution of a V-winning jackpot game, the player's advantage of being in the high frequency support mode or high probability mode can be maintained even after the V-winning jackpot game is executed, preventing a major disadvantage to the player.

In this embodiment, the V-winning jackpot gaming state occurs separately from (simultaneously with) the normal gaming state, the probability variable gaming state, the time-limited gaming state a, and the time-limited gaming state b. However, it is also possible to prevent the V-winning jackpot gaming state from occurring simultaneously with the normal gaming state, the probability variable gaming state, the time-limited gaming state a, or the time-limited gaming state b, so that the gaming state does not change even when a V-winning jackpot game is played. Even in this case, the player's gaming profit does not change before and after the V-winning jackpot game, which is a small-profit game, and the gaming profit before the V-winning jackpot game is played is maintained even after the V-winning jackpot game is played.

In addition, if the game state before the V-winning jackpot game, which is a small-profit game, is the normal game state, the normal game state is maintained even after the V-winning jackpot game is executed, but after the V-winning jackpot game is executed, a maximum number of special game executions required to generate the b-time-saving game state, which is the first-profit game state control, is set.

If the game state before the V-winning jackpot game is executed is the normal game state under the first auxiliary state control transitioned from the b-time-saving game state, i.e., the normal game state under the second-benefit game state control in which the b-time-saving game state cannot be generated, the maximum number of special game plays required to generate the b-time-saving game state is set, thereby changing to the second auxiliary state control in which the b-time-saving game state can be generated. In other words, in this embodiment, if the normal game state in which the b-time-saving game state cannot be generated transitioned from the b-time-saving game state is executed, the V-winning jackpot game is executed, and the normal game state is changed to one in which the b-time-saving game state can be generated after the V-winning jackpot game is executed. Furthermore, the V-winning jackpot game is executed by having a game ball enter the special electric start port 37, which is the first ball entry means, and then having the game ball enter the special electric V entry port 383, which is the specific ball entry area of the special electric large entry device 38, which is the second ball entry means. The special power start port 37 and the special power large winning device 38 are located in the second area, which is a play area set to the left of the separation section 393 in the right area of the game board 31. Therefore, a player can intentionally execute a V-winning jackpot game by shooting a game ball toward the second area and causing the game ball to flow down the second flow path 392 with a weak right-hand hit. This allows a player to change to a normal game state in which the b-time-saving game state cannot occur by shooting a game ball toward the second area during normal game mode in which the b-time-saving game state cannot occur. As a result, the b-time-saving game state ends without executing a special power jackpot game, motivating players to start playing on a gaming machine in which the b-time-saving game state cannot occur, thereby improving the utilization rate of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, if the game state before the V-winning jackpot game is executed is the normal game state under the second auxiliary state control transitioned from the a-time-saving game state, i.e., the normal game state in which the b-time-saving game state can be generated, then after the V-winning jackpot game is executed, the second auxiliary state control is maintained in the normal game state. However, just as in the normal game state in which the b-time-saving game state cannot be generated, a maximum number of special game plays required to generate the b-time-saving game state is set after the V-winning jackpot game is executed. Therefore, if a player ends play in a state in which the b-time-saving game state can be generated, the player can execute a V-winning jackpot game by shooting the game ball toward the second area and causing the game ball to flow down the second flow path 392 with a weak right hit, thereby clearing the number of special game plays executed by the player in a state in which the b-time-saving game state can be generated. This allows the player to prevent any disadvantage suffered by the player due to playing in a state where the time-shortened game state b can be generated from becoming a benefit to others. In other words, the player invests time, money, effort, etc. in the number of special symbol games played in a state where the time-shortened game state b can be generated, and by shooting the game ball toward the second area and using a weak right hit to cause the game ball to flow down the second flow path 392, the player can intentionally prevent this from becoming a benefit to others who play on the gaming machine later (i.e., becoming the target of so-called hyena behavior).

Furthermore, if a game ball enters the special electric start port 37 during the execution of a special chart jackpot game, which is a large profit game, the special electric start game will not be executed and the special electric opening/closing door 382 of the special chart large winning device 38 will not be operated. In this way, no game ball will enter the special electric V winning port 383 during the execution of a special chart jackpot game, and a V winning jackpot game will not occur, so there is no transition from the special chart jackpot game state to the V winning jackpot game state. In this way, since a V winning jackpot game will not occur during the execution of a special chart jackpot game, the profits that the player can gain from the large profit game of the special chart jackpot game are prevented from being lost due to the V winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game.

It should be noted that while a V-winning jackpot game is being played, a special jackpot game can also be played. In this way, since a special jackpot game can be played while a V-winning jackpot game is being played, it is possible to prevent the profits from the special jackpot game, which is a large profit game, from being lost due to the V-winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game, being played, and the profits from the special jackpot game can be properly obtained.

Here, Figure 299 shows an example of a table used by the main control unit 4. Specifically, Figure 299(A) shows an example of a special power start success/failure table, Figure 299(B) shows an example of a low-frequency support mode special power start type allocation table, Figure 299(C) shows an example of a high-frequency support mode special power start type allocation table, and Figure 299(D) shows an example of a V-winning jackpot type allocation table.

As shown in Figure 299 (A), the special electric start win/loss table is a table referenced by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 to determine whether to execute a special electric start game in which the special electric large winning device 38, the second ball entry means, is activated based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start port 37, the first ball entry means, and is stored in the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 in the main control device 4. In this special electric start win/loss table, 16 special electric start random number counters ranging from 0 to 15 are set, and the values of all of the special electric start random number counters are wins. In other words, if a win/loss determination is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start port 37, a special electric start game is executed as a small profit game in which the special electric large winning device 38 is activated.

However, if a game ball enters the special electric start port 37 during the execution of a special jackpot game, which is a game with a large profit, a win/loss determination is not made. Therefore, the special electric start game is not executed while the special jackpot game is being executed, and as a result, the V entry jackpot game is not executed while the special jackpot game is being executed. Also, in this embodiment, the result of the win/loss determination on whether to execute the special electric start game based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start port 37 is a win at 1/1, but it is also possible to set the probability of a win to be set at a predetermined probability other than 1/1, and it is also possible to set the probability of the win resulting from the win determination to vary depending on the game status, etc.

Here, in the special electric start game, the special electric large winning opening 381 of the special electric large winning device 38, which is the second ball entry means, is switched between a closed state and an open state by the special electric opening/closing door 382, which is an opening/closing means, allowing game balls to enter the special electric large winning opening 381. Furthermore, when the special electric large winning opening 381 is opened during the special electric start game, game balls can enter the special electric V winning opening 383, which is a specific ball entry area. Therefore, by executing the special electric start game, a V winning jackpot game based on game balls entering the special electric V winning opening 383 can be executed as a specific period game. In this embodiment, two types of special electric start game are set, which have different maximum opening times for the special electric large winning opening 381 and the special electric V winning opening 383 (see Figures 299 (B) and 299 (C)). Specifically, in this embodiment, the special electric start game includes a short-open special electric start game in which the maximum opening time of the special electric large winning port 381 and the special electric V winning port 383 is 0.1 seconds, making it difficult for game balls to enter the special electric large winning port 381 and the special electric V winning port 383, and a long-open special electric start game in which the maximum opening time of the special electric large winning port 381 and the special electric V winning port 383 is 1.2 seconds, making it easy for game balls to enter the special electric large winning port 381 and the special electric V winning port 383. In the short-open special electric start game, it is difficult for game balls to enter the special electric V winning port 383, so it is difficult for a V-entry jackpot game to occur when the short-open special electric start game is executed. On the other hand, in the long-open special electric start game, it is easy for the game ball to enter the special electric V entry port 383, so the execution of the long-open special electric start game is likely to trigger a V entry jackpot game.

The low-frequency support mode special power start type allocation table shown in Figure 299 (B) and the high-frequency support mode special power start type allocation table shown in Figure 299 (C) are tables referenced by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 to allocate the type of special power start game when the result of the win/loss determination based on the game ball entering the special power start port 37 is a win, and are stored in the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 in the main control device 4.

The low-frequency support mode special electric start type allocation table is used to allocate the type of special electric start game when the result of the hit/miss determination based on the game ball entering the special electric start port 37 in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, is a hit. In this low-frequency support mode special electric start type allocation table, all values of the special electric start type random number counter from 0 to 49 are long-open special electric start games. In other words, special electric start games based on the game ball entering the special electric start port 37 in the normal game state make it easy for the game ball to enter the special electric V entry port 383, making it easy to generate a V entry jackpot game. Therefore, in a normal game state in which left-hand play as the first game in which the game ball is shot into the left area of the game board 31, which is the first direction, is encouraged, by changing from left-hand play to weak right-hand play in which the game ball is shot to the left of separation section 393 in the right area of the game board 31, which is the second direction, it is possible to easily trigger a V-winning jackpot game and change the number of times the special game is executed to the maximum value in order to trigger the b-time-saving game state.

On the other hand, the high-frequency support mode special electric start type allocation table is used to allocate the type of special electric start game when the result of the hit/miss judgment based on the game ball entering the special electric start port 37 in the high-frequency support mode, which is the probability variable game state, the time-limited game state a, or the time-limited game state b, is a hit. In this high-frequency support mode special electric start type allocation table, all values of the special electric start type random number counter from 0 to 49 are short-open special electric start games. In other words, in a special electric start game based on the game ball entering the special electric start port 37 in the probability variable game state, the time-limited game state a, or the time-limited game state b, which is the high-frequency support mode, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the special electric V entry port 383, making it difficult to generate a V entry jackpot game.

In the high-frequency support modes of the probability variable play state, the time-limited play state a, and the time-limited play state b, a strong right-hand hit play is encouraged, which launches the game ball to the right of the separation section 393 in the right region of the game board 31, which is the second direction. On the other hand, a V-winning jackpot game can be generated by a weak right-hand hit play, which launches the game ball to the left of the separation section 393 in the right region of the game board 31, which is the second direction. However, even when attempting to execute a strong right-hand hit play, which is encouraged in the high-frequency support modes of the probability variable play state, the time-limited play state a, and the time-limited play state b, it is quite possible that a stray ball or the like will drift down the left side of the separation section 393. In this case, a special electric start game is executed when a game ball enters the special electric start port 37, and a V-winning jackpot game may be executed against the player's will when a game ball enters the special electric V-winning port 383 during this special electric start game. Therefore, by making it more difficult for a V-winning jackpot to occur in the high-frequency support modes of the probability variation game state, time-saving game state A, or time-saving game state B, it is possible to prevent the number of special game plays required to trigger time-saving game state B from being changed to the maximum value against the player's will.

In this embodiment, two different types of special power start type allocation tables are set depending on whether the low frequency support mode or high frequency support mode is selected, i.e., whether the encouraged game ball is launched from the left or right. However, the same table may be used in both the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, i.e., whether the encouraged game ball is launched from the left or right, or three or more types of tables may be set depending on the game status.

As shown in Figure 299 (D), the V entry jackpot type allocation table is a table referenced by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 to allocate the type of V entry jackpot game to be executed based on the entry of a gaming ball into the special electric V entry port 383 in the special electric start game, and is stored in the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 in the main control device 4. In this V entry jackpot type allocation table, all values of the jackpot type random number counter from 0 to 19 are set to jackpots, and no misses are set. Therefore, when a gaming ball enters the V entry jackpot game of the special electric large entry device 38 in the special electric start game, a V entry jackpot game is executed with a 100% probability. In this V-entry jackpot game, the special electric large entry port 381 of the special electric large entry device 38, which is the second ball entry means, is switched between a closed state and an open state by the special electric opening/closing door 382, which is the opening/closing means, allowing game balls to enter the special electric large entry port 381, but the special electric V entry port 383, which is the specific ball entry area of the special electric large entry device 38, which is the second ball entry means, is not opened. Therefore, in the V-entry jackpot game, game balls cannot enter the special electric V entry port 383, and the generation of a new V-entry jackpot game based on a game ball entering the special electric V entry port 383 is restricted. Of course, it is also possible to allow game balls to enter the special electric V entry port 383 in the V-entry jackpot game, in which case a new V-entry jackpot game will not be generated even if a game ball enters the special electric V entry port 383.

Incidentally, the number of prize balls awarded to the special electric large prize winning device 38, which is the second ball entry means, is one when game balls enter the special electric V prize winning port 383 and the special electric normal prize winning port 384. Therefore, the maximum recovery rate of game balls in a V prize winning game is 100% (zero difference balls) when all of the game balls shot out enter the special electric V prize winning port 383 and the special electric normal prize winning port 384, so an increase in game balls cannot be expected in a V prize winning game. Furthermore, the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball enters the special electric start port 37, which is the second ball entry means, is also one. Furthermore, by performing a weak right-hand hit game as a second game in which game balls are shot into the game area to the left of the separation section 393 in the right area of the game board 31, some of the game balls flowing down the second flow path 392 enter the special electric start port 37. As a result, when a weak right-hand hit is performed to cause game balls to flow down the second flow path 392, the player's game balls are not expected to increase, and the player's balls will decrease. This prevents game balls from flowing down the second flow path 392 from being used as a strategy.

In the V-winning jackpot type allocation table of this embodiment, the jackpot allocation is set to 100%, but although the jackpot allocation is set to 100%, the jackpot allocation may be other than 100%.

[General game control processing]
Here, Fig. 301 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal symbol game control process executed in step S1404 in the main process of Fig. 300. The normal symbol game control process is a process related to the normal symbol game, which is a small-profit game. In this normal symbol game control process, processes are executed to control the variable display and stop display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 361, which serves as the display means of the main display unit 36. Below, the normal symbol game control process will be explained with reference to Fig. 301.

<Step S1501>
As shown in Fig. 301, in the normal game control process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game variable display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol is being displayed (the normal game as a profit game is being executed), is on (step S1501). The normal game variable display flag is set to on in step S1711 when the normal symbol variable display (normal game) starts in the normal game variable start process of Fig. 303 described later, and is set to off in step S1510 in the normal game control process when the normal symbol is displayed stationary (the normal game ends).

If the normal map change display flag is on (step S1501: Yes), i.e., if a normal map game is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1507. On the other hand, if the normal map change display flag is off (step S1501: No), i.e., if a normal map game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1502.

<Step S1502>
If the normal map variable display flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, if the normal map game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the electric device open flag, which indicates that the electric device 315b, which is the opening and closing means of the second ball entry means, is open (the normal map winning game as a profit game is being played), is on (step S1502). The electric device open flag is set to on in step S1811 when the electric device 315b is opened in the normal map winning game control processing of Figure 304 described below, and is set to off in step S1818 when the electric device 315b is closed.

If the electric feature opening flag is on (step S1502: Yes), that is, if a normal winning game is being played and a game profit is awarded based on the result of the normal winning lottery, the MPU 41 ends the normal game control process. On the other hand, if the electric feature opening flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, if a normal winning game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1503.

<Step S1503>
If the electric device opening flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, if a normal winning game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether a special winning game flag indicating that a special winning game, which is a big profit game, is being played is on (step S1503). The special winning game flag is set to on in step S3406 when a special winning game starts in the special winning game control process of FIG. 310 described later, and is set to off in step S3452 when the special winning game ends.

If the special jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1503: Yes), i.e., if a special jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 terminates the normal game control process. That is, in this embodiment, normal game as a profit game does not start while a special jackpot game is being played. Therefore, in this embodiment, normal game as a profit game does not start while a special jackpot game is being played. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the through gate 317, which is the first acquisition means, the electric device 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means, is not switched from a closed state to an open state while the special jackpot game is being played, and the second winning opening 315 of the second ball entry means is maintained in a closed state.

Of course, a regular game, which is a small-profit game, and a regular win game, which is a small-profit game, may be started during the execution of a jackpot game. In this case, during regular game play, a win/loss determination for the regular win lottery is made based on the win/loss information (values of the regular win random number counter C4, regular win type random number counter C5, and regular win variable type counter CS2) moved from the regular first reserve area SE1 in the regular reserve storage area 412c to the regular execution area SAE according to the type of support mode (high-frequency support mode or low-frequency support mode) before the special jackpot game, which is a large-profit game, was started, i.e., according to the game state before the transition to the special jackpot game state. In other words, when the game state before the special jackpot game is executed is a guaranteed variable game state or a time-limited game state (a time-limited game state, b time-limited game state), which is a high-frequency support mode that is the first auxiliary state control, the normal game lottery (normal game win or miss), normal game win type (long-open normal game win or short-open normal game win), and normal game change display time are set based on the normal game win/loss table (see Figure 12 (B)), normal game win type table (see Figure 12 (D)), and normal game change table (not shown) for the high-frequency support mode. On the other hand, if the game state before the special chart jackpot game is executed is the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, which is the second auxiliary state control, the normal chart win lottery (normal chart win or loss), normal chart win type (long-open normal chart win or short-open normal chart win), and normal chart fluctuation display time are set based on the normal chart win/loss table (see FIG. 12(A)), normal chart win type table (see FIG. 12(C)), and normal chart fluctuation table (not shown) for the low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, if the special jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1503: No), i.e., if the special jackpot game, which is a high-profit game, is not currently being played, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S1504.

<Step S1504>
If the special jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, if the special jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal map variable reserve number X stored in the normal map variable reserve number memory area SNA set in the normal map reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412 is 0 (step S1504). If the normal map variable reserve number X is 0 (step S1504: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the normal map game control process, and if the normal map variable reserve number X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the process proceeds to step S1505.

<Step S1505>
If the number of reserved normal map changes X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the MPU 41 executes the normal map data setting process for the normal map correctness information stored in the normal map reserved storage area 412c (step S1505), and proceeds to step S1506. Details of the normal map data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1506>
In step S1506, the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol variation start process to cause the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 to execute a normal symbol variation display based on the information stored in the normal symbol reserve storage area 412c, and ends the normal symbol game control process. Details of the normal symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1507>
If the normal game display flag is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, if a normal game, which is a small-profit game, is being played, the MPU 41 determines whether a special game jackpot game flag, which indicates that a special game jackpot game, which is a large-profit game, is being played, is on (step S1507). The special game jackpot game flag is set to on in step S3406 when a special game jackpot game starts in the special game jackpot game control process of FIG. 310 described later, and is set to off in step S3452 when the special game jackpot game ends.

If the special jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1507: Yes), i.e., if a special jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, if the special jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1507: No), i.e., if a special jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
If the special symbol jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1507: No), that is, if the special symbol jackpot game, which is a big profit game, is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal symbol variable display time has elapsed since the start of the normal symbol variable display (step S1508). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to stop the normal symbol displayed variable on the normal symbol display unit 361 as the display means of the main display unit 36 (to end the normal symbol game).

If the normal symbol variable display time has elapsed (step S1508: Yes), i.e., if it is time to stop the normal symbol displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ending normal symbol play), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variable display time has not elapsed (step S1508: No), i.e., if it is not time to stop the normal symbol displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ending normal symbol play), the MPU 41 ends the normal symbol play control process.

<Steps S1509 to S1511>
If the normal symbol variable display flag is on (step S1501: Yes) and the special symbol jackpot game flag is on (step S1507: Yes), that is, if a special symbol jackpot game is started during normal symbol game play, or if the normal symbol variable display time for the normal symbol has elapsed (step S1508: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop the variable displayed normal symbol (end normal symbol game), the MPU 41 stops the normal symbol display on the symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol winning lottery corresponding to the normal symbol game (step S1509), and sets the normal symbol variable display flag indicating that the normal symbol variable display is in progress (normal symbol game is being executed) to OFF (step S1510). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol variable stop display flag to ON (step S1511), indicating that the normal symbol has stopped display, that is, that the normal symbol game has ended, and ends the normal symbol game control process.

The normal map fluctuation stop display flag is referenced in step S1801 of the normal map winning game control processing in Figure 304 described below to determine whether it is time to start a normal map winning game as a profit game (open the electric device 315b).

In addition, in this embodiment, the timing for stopping the display of the variable normal symbols (ending normal symbol game) is not limited to when the normal symbol variable display time for the normal symbol has elapsed, but also when a special symbol jackpot game is started while normal symbol game is being played, the variable normal symbols are stopped (normal symbol game is ended). In other words, when a special symbol jackpot game is started, the normal symbol game as a gaming profit is forcibly ended before the normal symbol variable display time for the normal symbol has elapsed. Of course, normal symbol game may be continued until the normal symbol variable display time for the normal symbol has elapsed, even when a special symbol jackpot game is started.

[General map data setting process]
Here, Figure 302 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the general map data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1505 of Figure 301. In the general map data setting process, the contents stored in the general map reserve storage area 412c in the memory area of the main control device 4 in Figure 11 are updated. Below, the general map data setting process will be explained with reference to Figure 302.

<Steps S1601 to S1603>
As shown in FIG. 302, in the normal map data setting process, first, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the normal map change reserve number X stored in the normal map change reserve number storage area SNA (step S1601), and then moves the normal map correct/incorrect information from the normal map first reserve area SE1 to the normal map execution area SAE (step S1602). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the normal map correct/incorrect information stored in the normal map second reserve area SE2 to the normal map fourth reserve area SE4 one by one (step S1603). Specifically, in step S1603, the normal map correct/incorrect information in the normal map second reserve area SE2 is moved to the normal map first reserve area SE1, the normal map correct/incorrect information in the normal map third reserve area SE3 is moved to the normal map second reserve area SE2, and the normal map correct/incorrect information in the normal map fourth reserve area SE4 is moved to the normal map third reserve area SE3.

[General map change start processing]
Here, Figure 303 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal map variation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1506 of Figure 301. In the normal map variation start processing, the normal pattern variation display in the normal pattern display unit 361 is started, and various commands and flags are set based on the results of the normal map winning lottery. Below, the normal map variation start processing will be explained with reference to Figure 303.

<Step S1701>
As shown in Figure 303, in the normal game variation start process, the MPU 41 determines whether the electric device 315b, which is the opening and closing means of the second ball entry means, is in a high frequency support mode (probability variable game state, a time-saving game state, or b time-saving game state) as the first profit game state control, which is the first auxiliary state control (step S1701). Whether it is a high frequency support mode is determined by whether any of the probability variable game state flag, a time-saving game state flag, and b time-saving game state flag is set to on.

The probability variable game state flag is set to ON when transitioning from another game state to the probability variable game state in the game state transition process described below with reference to Figures 316 to 320, and is set to OFF when transitioning from the probability variable game state to another game state. Furthermore, the time-limited game state a is set to ON when transitioning from another game state to the time-limited game state a in the game state transition process described below with reference to Figures 316 to 320, and is set to OFF when transitioning from the time-limited game state a to another game state. Furthermore, the time-limited game state b flag is set to ON when transitioning from another game state to the time-limited game state b in the game state transition process described below with reference to Figures 316 to 320, and is set to OFF when transitioning from the time-limited game state b to another game state.

If the MPU 41 is in high-frequency support mode (step S1701: Yes), i.e., in the guaranteed variable play state, a time-limited play state, or b time-limited play state, it transitions processing to step S1702. If the MPU 41 is not in high-frequency support mode (step S1701: No), i.e., in the normal play state in which the electric device 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means, is in low-frequency support mode as the second profit play state control, which is the second auxiliary state control, it transitions processing to step S1703.

<Steps S1702 and S1703>
If the high-frequency support mode is in a probability variable game state or a time-saving game state (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a normal win/loss judgment based on the high-frequency support mode (step S1702). Specifically, the MPU 41 performs a normal win/loss judgment based on the high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see FIG. 12 (B)) and the high-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table (see FIG. 12 (D)). The normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c is stored in the normal win/loss information area SAE. The MPU 41 determines whether the values of the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5 are values corresponding to the normal win.

On the other hand, if the game is in normal game mode, which is low-frequency support mode (step S1701: No), a normal win determination is made based on the low-frequency support mode (step S1703). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal win random number counter C4 and normal win type random number counter C5, which are included as numerical information in the normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c, are values corresponding to a normal win, based on the low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see FIG. 12(A)) and the low-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table (see FIG. 12(C)).

<Steps S1704 and S1705>
When the MPU 41 determines whether or not the winning or losing is a normal winning (step S1702 or S1703), the result of the winning or losing determination is whether or not the second winning port 315, which is the specific winning area in the second winning means, is a long-open normal winning (step S1704). If the result of the winning or losing determination is a long-open normal winning (step S1704: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the long-open normal winning flag, which indicates that the result of the winning or losing determination is a long-open normal winning, to on (step S1705), and proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the winning or losing determination is not a long-open normal winning (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1706.

<Steps S1706 and S1707>
If the result of the hit/miss judgment is not a long-opening normal winning (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the hit/miss judgment is a short-opening normal winning in which the second winning port 315, which is a specific winning area in the second winning means, is short-opened (step S1706). If the result of the hit/miss judgment is a short-opening normal winning (step S1706: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the short-opening normal winning flag, which indicates that the result of the hit/miss judgment is a short-opening normal winning, to on (step S1707), and proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss judgment is not a short-opening normal winning (step S1706: No), that is, if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708.

<Steps S1708 and S1709>
If the long-open normal winning flag is set to on (step S1705), if the short-open normal winning flag is set to on (step S1707), or if the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss (step S1706: No), the MPU 41 executes a normal winning pattern setting process to set the normal winning pattern, which is the normal pattern variation display time on the normal pattern display unit 361, which is the display means in the main display unit 36, by referring to a normal winning pattern display table (not shown). As described above, the normal winning pattern display table (not shown) includes a high-frequency support mode normal winning pattern table that is referenced when in high-frequency support mode, and a low-frequency support mode normal winning pattern display table that is referenced when in low-frequency support mode. Therefore, in the normal winning pattern setting process, the normal winning pattern is set based on the normal winning pattern display table corresponding to the support mode type. In addition, the high frequency support mode normal symbol fluctuation display table is set so that the average time for displaying the normal symbol fluctuation is shorter than that of the low frequency support mode normal symbol fluctuation display table, so in the high frequency support mode, the time for which the normal symbol game, which is awarded as a game profit based on the game ball entering the through gate 317, is executed is shorter than in the low frequency support mode.

Then, in addition to the normal map fluctuation pattern set in step S1708, the MPU 41 sets a normal map fluctuation pattern command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the result of the win/loss judgment in step S1702 or S1703 (the result of the normal map winning lottery) and the type of support mode (high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode) (step S1709), and proceeds to step S1710.

The normal symbol variation pattern command is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. In response, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341, etc., to execute an effect corresponding to normal symbol play, such as an effect indicating that normal symbol play is being played or an effect indicating the result of a normal symbol winning lottery, based on the normal symbol variation pattern command.

Furthermore, the normal map fluctuation pattern command is sufficient as long as it is a command that at least notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the normal map fluctuation pattern, and the result of the normal map winning lottery or the type of support mode does not necessarily have to be notified to the voice lamp control device 5 as a normal map fluctuation pattern command. For example, the result of the normal map winning lottery may be notified to the voice lamp control device 5 by setting a normal map winning lottery result command when a win/loss determination is made in step S1702 or S1703, and the type of support mode may be notified to the voice lamp control device 5 by setting a support mode type command that can identify the type of support mode after transition when transitioning to high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode.

<Steps S1710 and S1711>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 starts a normal game, which is a small profit game, by starting the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (step S1710). Then, the MPU 41 sets a normal symbol variable display flag to ON (step S1711), which indicates that the normal symbol is being displayed variably, that is, that a normal symbol game that has been awarded as a game profit based on the entry of a gaming ball into the through gate 317 is being executed, and ends the normal symbol variable start process.

The normal symbol variation display flag is referenced in step S1501 of the normal symbol game control process in Figure 300 to determine whether normal symbol gameplay is in progress (normal symbol variation display).

[Normal winning game control processing]
Here, FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal winning game control process executed in step S1405 of the main processing of FIG. 300. The normal winning game control process is a process related to the normal winning game, which is a profit game. In this normal winning game control process, when the result of the normal winning lottery is a win, the opening and closing control of the electric device 315b, which is the opening and closing means of the second ball entry means, is performed to switch between a closed state that restricts the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315, which is the specific ball entry area of the second ball entry means, and an open state that allows the game ball to enter the second winning opening 315. Below, the normal winning game control process will be explained with reference to FIG. 304.

<Step S1801>
As shown in FIG. 304, in the normal symbol winning game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal symbol variation stop display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol has stopped and been displayed (the normal symbol game has ended), is on (step S1801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to start the normal symbol winning game, which is a small profit game. The normal symbol variation stop display flag is set to on in step S1511 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol game control process of FIG.

If the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start a normal map winning game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1802. On the other hand, if the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), i.e., if it is not time to start a normal map winning game that is awarded as a gaming profit based on the result of the normal map winning lottery being a normal map winning, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1813.

<Step S1802>
If the normal symbol fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the normal symbol winning game, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that the special symbol jackpot game, which is a big profit game, is being executed, is on (step S1802). The special symbol jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S3406 when the special symbol jackpot game starts in the special symbol jackpot game control process of FIG. 310 described later, and is set to off in step S3452 when the special symbol jackpot game ends.

If the special jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1802: Yes), i.e., if a special jackpot game is in progress, the MPU 41 terminates the normal jackpot game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, if a special jackpot game, which is a large-profit game, is in progress, a normal jackpot game, which is a small-profit game, is not initiated, even if the result of the normal jackpot lottery based on a game ball entering the through gate 317, which is the first ball entry means, is a normal jackpot. In other words, in this embodiment, a normal jackpot game is not initiated while a special jackpot game is in progress, and the second winning slot 315, which is the specific ball entry area of the second ball entry means, is not switched between a closed state and an open state by the electric device 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means. Of course, a new normal game or a normal jackpot game may be initiated during a jackpot game. In contrast, a regular winning game can be started while a special game is being played, and a game ball can enter the second winning slot 315. This means that the right to play the second special game can be reserved when a game ball enters the second winning slot 315 while a special game is being played, making it possible to repeatedly play the second special game in high-frequency support modes (probability change game state, time-saving game state A, time-saving game state B) without causing excessive stress to the player.

On the other hand, if the special jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1802: No), i.e., if the special jackpot game is not currently in progress, the MPU 41 transitions to step S1803.

<Step S1803>
If the special jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1802: No), i.e., if the special jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the long-opening regular win flag is set to on (step S1803). The long-opening regular win flag is a flag indicating that the result of the regular win lottery is a long-opening regular win. If the result of the regular win lottery is a long-opening regular win, it is set to on in step S1705 of the regular win start processing in FIG. 304. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the regular win lottery for the completed small-profit game, which is a regular game, is a long-opening regular win. If the long-opening regular win flag is set to on (step S1803: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1804. If the long-opening regular win flag is set to off (step S1803: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1806.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
If the long-open normal winning flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), i.e., if the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a long-open normal winning, the MPU 41 sets the opening time counter to a value corresponding to 6 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric device 315b, which is the opening and closing means of the second ball entry means in the long-open normal winning game (the time during which a game ball can enter the second winning slot 315, the specific ball entry area of the second ball entry means), and the game profit is awarded (step S1804). The opening time counter is referenced in step S1815 of the normal winning game control process to determine the return timing of the electric device 315b. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long-open normal winning flag to OFF (step S1805) and proceeds to step S1809.

<Step S1806>
If the long-opening normal winning flag is set to OFF (step S1803: No), that is, if the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is not a long-opening normal winning, the MPU 41 determines whether the short-opening normal winning flag is set to ON (step S1806). The short-opening normal winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the normal winning lottery is a short-opening normal winning, and if the result of the normal winning lottery is a short-opening normal winning, it is set to ON in step S1707 of the normal variation start processing of FIG. 304. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed small-profit normal game is a short-opening normal winning. If the short-open regular winning flag is set to on (step S1806: Yes), the MPU 41 transfers processing to step S1807, and if the short-open regular winning flag is set to off (step S1806: No), that is, if the result of the regular winning lottery for the completed regular game is a loss, the MPU 41 transfers processing to step S1812.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
If the short-open normal winning flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), that is, if the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a short-open normal winning lottery, the MPU 41 sets the opening time counter to a value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric device 315b, which is the opening and closing means of the second ball entry means in the short-open normal winning game (the time during which a game ball can enter the second winning slot 315, which is the specific ball entry area of the second ball entry means), and the game profit is awarded based on the result of the normal winning lottery being a normal winning lottery (step S1807).Then, the MPU 41 sets the short-open normal winning flag to OFF (step S1808) and proceeds to step S1809.

<Steps S1809 to S1811>
If the result of the regular lottery is a win, and the flag indicating the regular win type (long-open regular win flag or short-open regular win flag) is set to OFF (step S1805 or S1808), the MPU 41 activates the electric device 315b, which is the opening/closing means (step S1809). This switches the second winning hole 315, which is the specific ball entry area, from a closed state to an open state, allowing game balls to enter the second winning hole 315. The MPU 41 then sets an electric device opening command to notify the audio/lamp control device 5 that the electric device 315b has been opened (step S1810), sets an electric device opening flag indicating that the electric device 315b has been opened to ON (step S1811), and proceeds to step S1812.

The electric reel release command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. Based on this electric reel release command, the audio lamp control device 5 can then start a performance that indicates that the electric reel 315b has been released, for example, on the pattern display unit 341 as a display means.

<Step S1812>
When the result of the regular symbol winning lottery is a winning one and a process such as opening the electric device 315b is executed (steps S1803 to S1811), or when the long opening regular symbol winning flag and the short opening regular symbol winning flag are both set to off (when the result of the regular symbol winning lottery is a losing one) (both steps S1803 and S1806 are No), the MPU 41 sets to off the regular symbol variation stop display flag (step S1812), which indicates that the regular symbol has been stopped and displayed (the regular symbol game, which is awarded as a game profit based on the game ball entering the through gate 317, has ended), and terminates the regular symbol winning game control process.

<Step S1813>
If the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the electric device open flag, which is set to on when the electric device 315b is opened in step S1811 of the normal map winning game control processing, is set to on (step S1813). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a normal map winning game, which is a small-profit game, is being played. If the electric device open flag is set to on (step S1813: Yes), that is, if a normal map winning game is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1814. On the other hand, if the electric device open flag is set to off (step S1813: No), that is, if a normal map winning game is not being played, the MPU 41 terminates the normal map winning game control processing.

<Steps S1814 and S1815>
If the electric device open flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, if a normal winning game is being played, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the open time counter set in step S1804 or S1807 of the normal winning game control processing (step S1814), and determines whether the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the electric device 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second winning means, and switch the second winning opening 315, which is the specific winning area of the second winning means, from an open state to a closed state. If the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric device 315b, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1816. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), that is, if it is not the timing to return the electric device 315b, the MPU 41 terminates the game control process for the normal winning combination.

<Steps S1816 to S1818>
If the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric device 315b, the MPU 41 returns the electric device 315b (step S1816). This switches the second winning opening 315, which is a specific ball entry area, from an open state to a closed state, thereby restricting the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315. The MPU 41 then sets an electric device closing command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric device 315b has been closed (step S1817), and sets the electric device open flag, which indicates that the electric device 315b is open, to OFF (step S1818), thereby terminating the normal winning game control process.

The electric reel close command is sent to the audio and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio and lamp control device 5 can end the performance indicating that the electric reel, executed in the pattern display unit 341, for example, has been opened, based on the electric reel close command.

[Special game control processing]
FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol game control process executed in step S1406 of the main process of FIG. 300. The special symbol game control process is a process related to the special symbol game, which is a small-profit game. In this special symbol game control process, the memory contents of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated, and the progress of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is controlled, for example, the variable display and static display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362, which is a display means, or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363, which is a display means. The special symbol game control process will be described below with reference to FIG. 305.

<Step S1901>
305, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether a special jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a special jackpot game, which is a big profit game, is being executed, is on. The special jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S3406 when a special jackpot game starts in the special jackpot game control process of FIG. 310 described later, and is set to off in step S3452 when the special jackpot game ends.

If the special jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1901: Yes), i.e., if a special jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 terminates the special jackpot game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, if a special jackpot game, which is a large-profit game, is being played, a special jackpot game, which is a small-profit game, will not be started. Of course, a special jackpot game may also be started while a special jackpot game is being played.

On the other hand, if the special jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1901: No), i.e., if the special jackpot game is not currently in progress, the MPU 41 transitions to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the special symbol jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1901: No), i.e., if the special symbol jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol variable display flag, which indicates that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is being played), is on (step S1902). The special symbol variable display flag is set to on in step S2107 when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the special symbol variable start processing of FIG. 307 described below, and is set to off in step S1910 when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in a static manner in the special symbol game control processing.

If the special symbol variable display flag is on (step S1902: Yes), i.e., if the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1906. On the other hand, if the special symbol variable display flag is off (step S1902: No), i.e., if the special symbol jackpot game is not being played but the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
If the special pattern change display flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, if the special pattern is not being displayed in a changing manner (special pattern game is being played) when the special pattern jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 determines whether both the first special pattern reserved number N stored in the first special pattern reserved number memory area NAA of the special pattern reserved storage area 412b and the second special pattern reserved number M stored in the second special pattern reserved number memory area NAB are 0 (step S1903).

If both the first special symbol reserved number N and the second special symbol reserved number M are 0 (step S1903: Yes), i.e., if neither the right to play the first special symbol game nor the right to play the second special symbol game is reserved, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol game control process. On the other hand, if either the first special symbol reserved number N or the second special symbol reserved number M is not 0 (step S1903: No), i.e., if at least one of the right to play the first special symbol game and the right to play the second special symbol game is reserved, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If either the first special symbol reserved number N or the second special symbol reserved number M is not 0 (step S1903: No), that is, if there is at least one of the reserved right to play the first special symbol game and the reserved right to play the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol data setting process for the data of the special symbol win/loss information (special symbol data) stored in the special symbol reserved storage area 412b (step S1904), and proceeds to step S1905. Details of the special symbol data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 306.

<Step S1905>
In step S1905, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol variation start process to start the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 (to execute the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game), and then ends the special symbol game control process. Details of the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 307.

<Step S1906>
If the special symbol variation display flag is on (step S1902: Yes), that is, if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed (a special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol variation display time for the first special symbol or the second special symbol set in the special symbol variation pattern setting process of step S2104 in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 307 described later has elapsed since the start of the display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game (step S1906). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to stop the display of the special symbol being displayed and end the special symbol game, which is a small-profit game.

If the special symbol variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first or second special symbol (step S1906: Yes), i.e., if it is time to stop the display of the currently variable special symbol and end the special symbol game, the processing proceeds to step S1907. On the other hand, if the variable display time has not elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first or second special symbol (step S1906: No), i.e., if it is not time to stop the display of the currently variable special symbol and end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 ends the special symbol game control processing.

<Steps S1907 to S1910>
When the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first or second special symbol (step S1906: Yes), i.e., when it is time to stop the variable display of the special symbol and end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 stops the special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, which are the display means of the main display unit 36, in a manner corresponding to the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game (step S1907).The MPU 41 then sets a special symbol variable stop flag indicating that the first or second special symbol has been stopped and displayed (step S1908) and sets a special symbol game count flag to on (step S1909). This special symbol play count flag is referenced in step S3301 of the special symbol play count management process (see FIG. 308, described below) to determine whether to subtract the remaining number of special symbol plays in the time-saving play state a or the time-saving play state b, or the remaining number of special symbol plays until the time-saving play state b is triggered. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation stop signal output flag to ON (step S1909). This special symbol variation stop signal output flag is referenced in step S3819 of the signal output process (described below) to determine whether to output the special symbol variation stop signal as an identification signal to the outside of the gaming machine 10 via terminal No. 4 of the multiple output terminal sections (not shown) of the external output terminal board 101 (see FIG. 294(A)). The special symbol variation display flag, indicating that the first or second special symbol is being displayed (a special symbol game is being executed), is then set to OFF (step S1910), and the special symbol game control process is terminated.

[Special drawing data setting process]
Here, Fig. 306 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1904 of the special symbol game control process in Fig. 305. In the special symbol data setting process, the memory contents of the special symbol reserved storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the special symbol data setting process will be described with reference to Fig. 306.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 306, in step S2001, the MPU 41 determines whether the number M of reserved second special symbols for the second special symbol game, which is a small-profit game, is 0. If the number M of reserved second special symbols is 0 (step S2001: Yes), i.e., there is no second special symbol reserved for the second special symbol game but there is a first special symbol reserved for the first special symbol game, which is a small-profit game (see step S1903 in the special symbol game control processing of FIG. 305), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2002. On the other hand, if the number M of reserved second special symbols is not 0 (step S2001: No), i.e., there is a second special symbol reserved for the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2005. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether the number M of reserved second special symbols for the second special symbol game is 0, thereby prioritizing the start of the second special symbol game over the first special symbol game.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol game is started before the first special symbol game, but the first special symbol game may be started before the second special symbol game. Alternatively, the special symbol games may be started in the order in which the game balls enter the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315 (in the order in which they are reserved), and either the first or second special symbol game may be executed. Furthermore, without prioritizing the start of the first and second special symbol games, the first and second special symbol games may be executed independently of each other, and the first and second special symbol games may be executed simultaneously (so-called simultaneous special symbol fluctuations).

<Steps S2002 to S2004>
If the second special symbol reservation number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the first special symbol reservation number N stored in the first special symbol reservation number memory area NAA of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA (step S2002), and moves the special symbol hit/miss information from the first reservation area REA1 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA to the special symbol execution area AE (step S2003). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol hit/miss information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA one by one (step S2004). Specifically, in step S2004, the special symbol winning/losing information of the second reserved area REA2 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA is moved to the first reserved area REA1, the special symbol winning/losing information of the third reserved area REA3 is moved to the second reserved area REA2, and the special symbol winning/losing information of the fourth reserved area REA4 is moved to the third reserved area REA3. When the processing of step S2004 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2008.

<Steps S2005 to S2007>
If the second special symbol reservation number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the second special symbol reservation number M stored in the second special symbol reservation number memory area NAB of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB (step S2005), and moves the special symbol win/loss information from the first reservation area REB1 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB to the special symbol execution area AE (step S2006). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special symbol win/loss information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB one by one (step S2007). Specifically, in step S2007, the special drawing win/loss information in the second reserved area REB2 is moved to the first reserved area REB1, the special drawing win/loss information in the third reserved area REB3 is moved to the second reserved area REB2, and the special drawing win/loss information in the fourth reserved area REB4 is moved to the third reserved area REB3. When the processing of step S2007 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2008.

<Step S2008>
In step S2008, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol shift command in the RAM 412, which indicates that the special symbol win/loss information of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA, or the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB, and ends the special symbol data setting process. This special symbol shift command is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can change the number of reserved symbols displayed corresponding to the first special symbol reserve and the second special symbol reserve displayed on the symbol display unit 341 based on the special symbol shift command.

[Special chart change start processing]
307 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special symbol variation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1905 of the special symbol game control processing in FIG. 305. In the special symbol variation start processing, the first special game or second special symbol game (special symbol game), which is a small-profit game, is started by starting the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362, which is a display means, or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363, and various processes associated with the start of the special symbol game are executed. The special symbol variation start processing will be described below with reference to FIG. 307.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 307, in step S2101, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state is in the high probability mode. The high probability mode is a high probability mode gaming state in which the control state of the electric device 315b, which is the opening and closing means of the second ball entry means, is in the high frequency support mode of the first auxiliary state control. Whether the gaming state is in the high probability mode is determined by whether the high probability mode gaming state flag, which indicates that the gaming state is in the high probability mode gaming state, is set to ON. The high probability mode gaming state flag is set to ON when the gaming state is transitioned from the high probability mode jackpot gaming state to the high probability mode gaming state in step S3722 of FIG. 316 in the gaming state transition process described below, and is set to OFF when the gaming state is transitioned from the high probability mode gaming state to the high probability mode jackpot gaming state or the normal jackpot gaming state in step S3713 of FIG. 316.

If the game state is a high-probability mode, i.e., a variable-rate game state (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2102. If the game state is not a high-probability mode, i.e., a variable-rate game state (step S2101: No), i.e., the game state is a low-probability mode, i.e., a time-limited game state (a), a time-limited game state (b), or a normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2103.

In the time-saving game state a and the time-saving game state b, the control state of the electric device 315b, which is the opening and closing means of the second ball entry means, is the high-frequency support mode of the first auxiliary state control. On the other hand, in the normal game state, the control state of the electric device 315b, which is the opening and closing means of the second ball entry means, is the low-frequency support mode of the second auxiliary state control.

<Steps S2102 and S2103>
If the game state is a high probability mode, which is a special game state (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the high probability mode hit/miss table (see Figure 9 (B)) saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 of the game setting value change processing of Figure 35, and performs a hit/miss judgment based on the high probability mode hit/miss table (step S2102).

On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a high-probability mode, or a guaranteed bonus gaming state (step S2101: No), that is, if the gaming state is a low-probability mode, or a time-limited gaming state, or a normal gaming state, the MPU 41 reads the low-probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 9(A)) saved according to the gaming setting value in step S2410 of the gaming setting value change processing in FIG. 35, and performs a hit/miss determination based on that low-probability mode hit/miss table (step S2103).

In this way, in this embodiment, the special jackpot lottery (win/lose determination) is executed based on whether the mode for the special jackpot lottery when the special jackpot game is started is high probability mode or low probability mode. In other words, in this embodiment, high and low probabilities are set as the probability of a jackpot resulting from the special jackpot lottery (special jackpot probability), but the special jackpot probability is not affected by the execution of specific period games, such as special electric start games, V prize jackpot games, or regular jackpot games. Therefore, in this embodiment, the execution of specific period games prevents players from suffering disadvantages in terms of the special jackpot probability.

In steps S2102 and S2103, a win/loss determination is made based on the high probability mode win/loss table or low probability mode win/loss table saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 of the game setting value change process in Figure 35. However, in steps S2102 and S2103, the game setting value saved in step S2408 of the game setting value change process in Figure 35 may be read, and the high probability mode win/loss table or low probability mode win/loss table corresponding to that game setting value may be selected one by one to make a win/loss determination.

<Step S2104>
When a win/loss determination is made in step S2102 or S2103, the MPU 41 sets the variable display time of the first special pattern or the second special pattern in the first special pattern display section 362 or the second special pattern display section 363 of the main display section 36 during that special pattern game as the special pattern variable pattern (step S2104).

The variation display time (special symbol variation pattern) of the first or second special symbol, which is a small profit game, is set based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 10(A)) if the result of the hit/miss determination in step S2102 or S2103 is a normal jackpot; it is set based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 10(B)) if the result of the hit/miss determination in step S2102 or S2103 is a probability jackpot; and it is set based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the probability jackpot variation table (see FIG. 10(C)) if the result of the hit/miss determination in step S2102 or S2103 is a miss.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a special symbol variation pattern command including the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, which is the result of the win/loss determination in step S2102 or S2103, and the special symbol variation pattern set in step S2104, and proceeds to step S2106. The special symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main processing (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to execute a special symbol game presentation on the symbol display unit 341, which is a display means, based on the special symbol variation pattern command.

As mentioned above, if the result of the special chart jackpot lottery is a "normal jackpot," the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a special chart variation pattern command one of "A01" to "A03," in which "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is added to the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03," as a special chart variation pattern command. Also, if the result of the special chart jackpot lottery is a "5R special chance jackpot," the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a special chart variation pattern command one of "B01" to "B03," in which "B" indicating that it is a 5R special chance jackpot is added to the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03," as a special chart variation pattern command. Also, if the result of the special chart jackpot lottery is a "16R special chance jackpot," the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a special chart variation pattern command one of "C01" to "C03," in which "C" indicating that it is a 16R special chance jackpot is added to the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03." Furthermore, if the result of the special chart jackpot lottery is a "miss," the MPU 41 sets one of the special chart variation patterns "01" to "08" with a "D" added to indicate a miss, "D01" to "D08," as a special chart variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the result of the special chart jackpot lottery is a "miss," the MPU 41 includes information indicating the type of miss (reach for a miss before or after, reach for a miss other than a miss before or after, or complete miss) in the special chart variation pattern command.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 41 starts a special pattern game, which is a small profit game, by starting the changing display of the special pattern on the first special pattern display unit 362 or the second special pattern display unit 363, which are display means in the main display unit 36, and then transitions to step S2107.

<Step S2107>
In step S2107, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol change display flag, which indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner (a special symbol game is being executed), to ON, and ends the special symbol change start process. The special symbol change display flag is referenced in step S1902 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 305 to determine whether the special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner (a special symbol game is being executed) in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36.

[Special game count management process]
Here, Fig. 308 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol game count management process executed in step S1406-1 in the main process of Fig. 300. In the special symbol game count management process, based on the execution of the special symbol game, which is a small profit game, a process is executed to manage the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state (time-saving game state a and time-saving game state b) and the remaining number of special symbol games, which is the second auxiliary state control until the time-saving game state b, which is the first profit game state control, is generated. Hereinafter, the special symbol game count management process will be described with reference to Fig. 308.

<Steps S3301 and S3302>
308, in the special symbol game count management process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the special symbol fluctuation count flag is set to ON (step S3301). The special symbol fluctuation count flag is set to ON when the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 is stopped and displayed in step S1909 of the special symbol game control process of FIG.

If the special symbol variation count flag is set to on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variation count flag to off (step S3302) and proceeds to step S3303. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation count flag is set to off (step S3301: No), the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol play count management process.

<Step S3303>
In step S3303, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game whose fluctuation has been stopped is a normal jackpot. If the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery for the special symbol game whose fluctuation has been stopped is a normal jackpot (step S3303: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3304, and if the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery for the special symbol game whose fluctuation has been stopped is not a normal jackpot (step S3303: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3311.

<Steps S3304 and S3305>
If the result of the special jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the fluctuation has been stopped is a normal jackpot (S3303: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the value of the ceiling activation remaining counter, which indicates the number of special symbol games remaining until the b time-saving game state is triggered, to the maximum value of 1000 (step S3304). In other words, in this embodiment, the second auxiliary state control is activated after the end of the normal jackpot game, and the b time-saving game state is triggered when 1000 special symbol games are played as small-profit games without the special symbol jackpot game being executed (without transitioning to the special symbol jackpot game state) after the end of the normal jackpot game. The MPU 41 also sets the ceiling activation remaining counter set flag, indicating that the ceiling activation remaining counter is set (the second auxiliary state control), to ON (step S3305), and proceeds to step S3306.

<Steps S3306 and S3307>
In step S3306, the MPU 41 sets the value of the a-time-saving remaining number counter, which indicates the remaining number of special symbol games that can be executed in the a-time-saving game state as the second-profit game state control, to the maximum value of 100. That is, in this embodiment, after the normal jackpot game ends, the game is transitioned to the a-time-saving game state, in which a game profit is awarded, and if 100 special symbol games are executed without executing the special symbol jackpot game, which is a big-profit game (without transitioning to the special symbol jackpot game state), the a-time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state as the first-profit game state control. In addition, the MPU 41 sets the a-time-saving remaining number counter set flag, which indicates that the a-time-saving remaining number counter is set, to on (step S3307), and proceeds to step S3308.

<Step S3308>
In step S3308, the MPU 41 determines whether a b time-saving remaining number counter set flag, which indicates that the b time-saving remaining number counter is set, is set to on. If the b time-saving remaining number counter set flag is set to on (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3309, and if the b time-saving remaining number counter set flag is set to off (step S3308: No), the MPU 41 ends the special game count management process.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
If the b time-saving remaining number counter set flag is set to on (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 41 clears the value of the remaining b time-saving remaining number counter that can be executed in the b time-saving play state as the first profit play state control (step S3309), sets the b time-saving remaining number counter flag, which indicates that the b time-saving remaining number counter is set, to off (step S3310), and terminates the special chart play number management process.

<Step S3311>
If the result of the special jackpot lottery for the special game whose fluctuation has been stopped is not a normal jackpot (S3303: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the special jackpot lottery for the special game whose fluctuation has been stopped is a probability variable jackpot (5R probability variable jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot) (step S3311). If the result of the special jackpot lottery for the special game whose fluctuation has been stopped is a probability variable jackpot (S3311: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3312, and if the result of the special jackpot lottery for the special game whose fluctuation has been stopped is not a probability variable jackpot (S3311: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3318 in FIG.

<Step S3312>
If the result of the special jackpot lottery for the special game in which the fluctuation has been stopped is a probability jackpot (S3311: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag, which indicates that the second auxiliary state control in which the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set, is on (step S3312). If the result of the special jackpot lottery for the special game in which the fluctuation has been stopped is a normal jackpot (step S3303: Yes), and the second auxiliary state control in which the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set (step S3304), the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is set on in step S3305 of the special game count management process.

If the ceiling activation remaining count counter set flag is on (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3313; if the ceiling activation remaining count counter set flag is off (step S3312: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3315.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
If the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is on (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 41 clears the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which indicates the remaining number of special game plays that need to be executed before the b time-shortened game state occurs (step S3313), and sets the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag, which indicates that the second auxiliary state control is in which the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set, to off (step S3314), and proceeds to step S3315.

<Step S3315>
If the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is set to off (step S3314), or if the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is off (step S3311: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the a time-saving remaining number counter set flag, which indicates that the a time-saving remaining number counter is set, is set to on (step S3315: Yes).

If the a time-saving remaining count counter set flag is set to on (step S3315: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3316. On the other hand, if the a time-saving remaining count counter set flag is set to off (step S3315: No), the MPU 41 executes the processing of steps S3308 to S3310 described above. If the b time-saving remaining count counter is set, the b time-saving remaining count counter is cleared, the b time-saving remaining count counter set flag is set to off, and the special chart variation count management processing ends.

<Steps S3316 and S3317>
If the a time-saving remaining number counter set flag is set to on (step S3315: Yes), the MPU 41 clears the value of the a time-saving remaining number counter that can be executed in the a time-saving play state (step S3316), sets the a time-saving remaining number counter flag indicating that the a time-saving remaining number counter is set to off (step S3317), and executes the processing of the aforementioned steps S3308 to S3310, thereby clearing the b time-saving remaining number counter if the b time-saving remaining number counter is set, and setting the b time-saving remaining number counter set flag to off, and terminating the special chart play number management processing.

<Step S3318>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game in which the fluctuation has been stopped is not a guaranteed jackpot (step S3311: No), as shown in Figure 309, it is determined whether the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag, which indicates that the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set, is set to on (step S3318).

If the ceiling activation remaining count counter set flag is on (step S3318: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3319; if the ceiling activation remaining count counter set flag is off (step S3318: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3325.

<Steps S3319 and S3320>
If the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is on (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter (step S3319), and determines whether the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3320). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether to generate the b time-shortened gaming state, which is the first profit gaming state control.

If the value of the ceiling activation remaining count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3320: Yes), i.e., if the b time-shortened game state is to be generated, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3321. On the other hand, if the value of the ceiling activation remaining count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3320: No), i.e., if the b time-shortened game state is not to be generated, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3325.

<Steps S3321 to S3324>
If the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3320: Yes), that is, if the b time-saving game state is to be generated, the MPU 41 sets the value of the b time-saving remaining number counter, which indicates the remaining number of special game plays that can be executed in the b time-saving game state, to the maximum value of 1000 (step S3321). That is, in this embodiment, 1000 times is set as the maximum number of special game plays that can be executed in the b time-saving game state. Then, the MPU 41 sets the b time-saving remaining number counter set flag, which indicates that the b time-saving remaining number counter is set, to on (step S3322).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the b time-shortened game state transition flag to ON to transition the game state to the b time-shortened game state (step S3323). This b time-shortened game state transition flag is referenced to determine whether to transition to the b time-shortened game state in step S3726 of the game state transition process in Figure 317, which will be described later. The MPU 41 then sets the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag to OFF (step S3324), and terminates the special game number management process.

<Step S3325>
If the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is off (step S3318: No), or if the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3320: Yes), i.e., if the b time-saving game state is not to be generated, the MPU 41 determines whether the a time-saving remaining number counter set flag, which indicates that the a time-saving remaining number counter is set, is set on (step S3325).

If the a time-saving remaining count counter set flag is on (step S3325: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3326; if the a time-saving remaining count counter set flag is off (step S3325: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3330.

<Steps S3326 and S3327>
If the a-time-saving remaining number counter set flag is on (step S3325: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the a-time-saving remaining number counter (step S3326), and determines whether the value of the a-time-saving remaining number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3327). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to end the a-time-saving gaming state and transition to the normal gaming state.

If the value of the a-time-saving remaining number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3327: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the a-time-saving game state and transition to the normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3328. On the other hand, if the value of the a-time-saving remaining number counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3327: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the a-time-saving game state, the MPU 41 terminates the special game count management process.

<Steps S3328 and S3329>
If the value of the a time-saving remaining number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3327: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the a time-saving game state and transition to the normal game state, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to ON (step S3328), which transitions the game state to the normal game state. This normal game state transition flag is referenced in step S3731 of the game state transition process in Figure 318 described below to determine whether to transition to the normal game state. Then, the MPU 41 sets the a time-saving remaining number counter set flag to OFF (step S3329), and terminates the special game number management process.

<Step S3330>
If the a time-saving remaining number counter set flag is off (step S3325: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the b time-saving remaining number counter set flag, which indicates that the b time-saving remaining number counter is set, is set on (step S3330).

If the b time-saving remaining number counter set flag is on (step S3330: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3331; if the b time-saving remaining number counter set flag is off (step S3325: No), the MPU 41 terminates the special game count management process.

<Steps S3331 and S3332>
If the b time-saving remaining number counter set flag is on (step S3330: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the b time-saving remaining number counter (step S3331), and determines whether the value of the b time-saving remaining number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3332). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether to end the b time-saving gaming state and transition to the normal gaming state.

If the value of the b time-saving remaining count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3332: Yes), i.e., if the b time-saving play state is to be terminated and the normal play state is to be transitioned to, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3333. On the other hand, if the value of the b time-saving remaining count counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3332: No), i.e., if the b time-saving play state is not to be terminated, the MPU 41 terminates the special game count management process.

<Steps S3333 and S3334>
If the value of the b time-saving remaining number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3332: Yes), that is, if the b time-saving game state is to be terminated and the game state is to be transitioned to the normal game state, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag, which transitions the game state to the normal game state, to ON (step S3333). This normal game state transition flag is referenced in step S3731 of FIG. 318 or step S3737 of FIG. 319 of the game state transition process described below to determine whether to transition to the normal game state. Then, the MPU 41 sets the b time-saving remaining number counter set flag to OFF (step S3334), and ends the special game number management process.

In this embodiment, the remaining ceiling activation counter is set when the special chart variation (special chart game) ends and the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, but the remaining ceiling activation counter may also be set when the special chart variation (special chart game) ends and the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variable jackpot. Furthermore, the remaining ceiling activation counter may be set not at the end of the special chart variation (special chart game) but at the end of the normal jackpot game (when transitioning from the jackpot game state to the time-saving game state a).

[Special chart jackpot game control processing]
310 to 313 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the special symbol jackpot game control process executed in step S1407-1 in the main process of FIG. 300. In the special symbol jackpot game control process, a process is executed to control the progress of the special symbol jackpot game, such as the opening and closing control of the opening and closing door 319 provided in the variable winning opening 316. Hereinafter, the special symbol jackpot game control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 310 to 313.

<Step S3400>
310, in the special jackpot game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether a special jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a special jackpot game as a big profit game is being executed, is on (step S3400). The special jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S3406 of the special jackpot game control process when the special jackpot game is started, and is set to off in step S3452 of the special jackpot game control process when the special jackpot game is ended.

If the special jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3400: Yes), i.e., if a special jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3411. On the other hand, if the special jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3400: No), i.e., if a special jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3401.

<Step S3401>
If the special symbol jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3400: No), i.e., if the special symbol jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol variation stop flag, which indicates that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed, is on (step S3401). The special symbol variation stop flag is set to on in step S1908 of the special symbol game control processing of FIG. 305 when the special symbol has been stopped and displayed, and is set to off in step S2108 of the special symbol variation start processing of FIG. 307 when the variable display of the special symbol has begun. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol game as a small profit game that was started when the special symbol jackpot game was not being executed has ended, thereby determining whether it is the right time to start the special symbol jackpot game as a large profit game.

If the special symbol variation stop flag is on (step S3401: Yes), i.e., if the special symbol is displayed stationary and the special symbol jackpot game can be started, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3402. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation stop flag is off (step S3401: No), i.e., if the special symbol jackpot game cannot be started because the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the MPU 41 terminates the special symbol jackpot game control process.

In this embodiment, while the special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner (while a special symbol game as a small-profit game is being executed), the special symbol jackpot game as a large-profit game does not start (execute); however, it may be possible to start (execute) the special symbol jackpot game while the special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner (while a special symbol game is being executed). For example, the special symbol jackpot game may be started (executed) while the first special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner, and conversely, the special symbol jackpot game may be started (executed) while the second special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner. Specifically, by allowing the first and second special symbols to change simultaneously as described above, the second special symbol game may be executed while the special symbol jackpot game for the first special symbol game is being executed, and the first special symbol game may be executed while the special symbol jackpot game for the second special symbol game is being executed. Furthermore, the special jackpot game for the first special symbol game and the special jackpot game for the second special symbol game may be executed simultaneously, or if the start condition for one of the special jackpot games for the first special symbol game and the special jackpot game for the second special symbol game is met while the other special jackpot game is being executed, the other special jackpot game may start after the end of one special symbol game.

<Step S3402>
If the special pattern variation stop flag is on (step S3401: Yes), that is, if the special pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the MPU 41 sets the special pattern variation stop flag to off (step S3402) and proceeds to step S3403.

<Step S3403>
In step S3403, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a special symbol jackpot. Whether the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a special symbol jackpot is determined based on the special symbol win/loss information for the special symbol jackpot lottery stored in the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol reserve storage area 412b set in the RAM 41, for example.

If the result of the special jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a special jackpot (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3404. On the other hand, if the result of the special jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is not a special jackpot (step S3403: No), i.e., if the result of the special jackpot lottery is a miss, the MPU 41 terminates the special jackpot game control process.

<Step S3404>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a special symbol jackpot (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a special symbol jackpot game start command that notifies the sound lamp control device 5 of the start of the special symbol jackpot game and the type of special symbol jackpot game (probability variable jackpot game or normal jackpot game) (step S3404), and proceeds to step S3405. The special symbol jackpot game start command is sent to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to execute a special symbol jackpot game presentation according to the special symbol jackpot game type based on the special symbol jackpot game start command.

<Step S3405>
In step S3405, the MPU 41 sets a special jackpot game start flag, which indicates that a special jackpot game as a big profit game is to be started, to ON, and proceeds to step S3406. The special jackpot game start flag is referenced when determining whether to transition the game state to a special jackpot game state or a normal jackpot game state in step S3701 of the game state transition process in FIG. 316, which will be described later.

<Step S3406>
In step S3406, the MPU 41 sets a special jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a special jackpot game is being executed, to ON, and proceeds to step S3407. The special jackpot game in progress flag is referenced in step S3400 of the special jackpot game control processing, as well as steps S1503 and S1507 of the normal game control processing in FIG. 301, step S1802 of the normal game control processing in FIG. 304, and step S1901 of the special game control processing in FIG. 305, in order to determine whether a special jackpot game is being executed.

<Step S3407>
In step S3407, the MPU 41 sets a round number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds of play in the open/close execution mode, and proceeds to step S3408. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round number counter to "5" if the result of the special jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, and sets the round number counter to "16" if the result of the special jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot.

<Step S3408>
In step S3408, the MPU 41 sets an opening start command to notify the sound and lamp control device 5 that the opening of the special symbol jackpot game has started, and proceeds to step S3409. The opening start command is sent to the sound and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound and lamp control device 5 to start the opening presentation of the special symbol jackpot game in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the opening start command.

<Step S3409>
In step S3409, the MPU 41 sets an opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening, and proceeds to step S3410. The opening time counter is referenced in step S3413 of FIG. 311 of the special jackpot game control process to determine whether it is time to end the opening.

<Step S3410>
In step S3410, the MPU 41 sets an opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed to ON, and ends the special jackpot game control process. The opening flag is referenced in step S3411 in the special jackpot game control process to determine whether the opening is being executed.

<Step S3411>
If the special chart jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3400: Yes), that is, if a special chart jackpot game as a big profit game is being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the opening in progress flag, which indicates that an opening is being executed, is on (step S3411).

If the opening flag is on (step S3411: Yes), i.e., if opening is in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3412 in FIG. 312. On the other hand, if the opening flag is off (step S3411: No), i.e., if opening is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3422.

<Steps S3412 and S3413>
If the opening flag is on (step S3411: Yes), that is, if the opening is being performed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening (step S3412), and determines whether the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3413), as shown in Fig. 312. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to end the opening.

If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3413: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the opening, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3414. On the other hand, if the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3413: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the opening, the MPU 41 ends the special jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3414 and S3415>
If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3413: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the opening, the MPU 41 sets an opening end command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening of the special symbol jackpot game has ended (step S3414). The opening end command is sent to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to end the opening presentation of the special symbol jackpot game executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the opening end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the opening in progress flag to OFF, indicating that opening is in progress (step S3415), and proceeds to step S3416.

<Step S3416>
In step S3416, the MPU 41 sets an opening and closing execution mode start command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that an opening and closing execution mode will be started as a game profit in which multiple rounds (5 or 16) of play are executed, and proceeds to step S3417. The opening and closing execution mode start command is sent to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice and lamp control device 5 can start the opening and closing execution mode presentation of the special symbol jackpot game executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the opening and closing execution mode start command.

<Step S3417>
In step S3417, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command to notify the sound and lamp control device 5 that a round game is about to start, and proceeds to step S3418. The round game start command is transmitted to the sound and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound and lamp control device 5 to start a round game presentation corresponding to each round game of the special jackpot game, including a round number display, on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the round game start command.

In this embodiment, a round game effect is executed individually for each round game, but the round game effect may be executed as a series of effects in the open/close execution mode, and the number of rounds in each round game may be displayed. In this case, interval effects may not be executed between round games, or an interval effect may be executed to display the number of rounds in the next round game to be executed.

<Steps S3418 and S3419>
In step S3418, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the round number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds to be played in the opening and closing execution mode, and then opens the variable winning opening 316 by operating the opening and closing door 319 (step S3419), and proceeds to step S3420.

<Steps S3420 and S3421>
In step S3420, the MPU 41 sets the round game in progress flag, which indicates that a round game is being played, to ON, and further sets a round game time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the round game (step S3421), and ends the special jackpot game control process. The round game time counter is referenced in step S3424 of FIG. 312 of the special jackpot game control process to determine whether it is time to end the round game (return the opening/closing door 319 and close the variable winning opening 316) due to the elapse of a specified time.

<Step S3422>
310, if the opening flag is off (step S3411: No), that is, if the opening is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the round game flag, which indicates that a round game is being executed, is set to on (step S3422). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a round game is being executed.

If the round play in progress flag is on (step S3422: Yes), i.e., if a round play is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3423 in FIG. 312. On the other hand, if the round play in progress flag is off (step S3422: No), i.e., if a round play is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3436.

<Steps S3423 and S3424>
If the round game in progress flag is on (step S3422: Yes), that is, if a round game is being played, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the round game time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the round game, as shown in FIG. 312. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3424). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to end the round game (close the variable winning opening by returning the opening/closing door 319) due to the elapse of a specified time.

If the value of the round play time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3424: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the round play due to the passage of the specified time (the variable winning opening is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3428. On the other hand, if the value of the round play time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3424: No), that is, if it is not time to end the round play due to the passage of the specified time (the variable winning opening is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3425.

<Step S3425>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3424: No), that is, if it is not time to end the round game due to the passage of the specified time (the variable winning opening is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning opening 316 (step S3425). Whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning opening 316 is determined based on the winning detection information stored in RAM 412 when a game ball has entered the ball entry sensor 316a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17.

If a gaming ball has entered the variable winning opening 316 (step S3425: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3426; if a gaming ball has not entered the variable winning opening 316 (step S3425: No), the MPU 41 terminates the special jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3426 and S3427>
If a game ball has entered the variable winning opening 316 (step S3425: Yes), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the ball number counter, which indicates the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning opening 316 in that round of play (step S3426).The MPU 41 then determines whether the value of the ball number counter after the increment has reached 10 (step S3427), that is, whether it is time to end the round of play due to the upper limit number of game balls having entered the variable winning opening 316 (the variable winning opening is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319).

If the value of the ball entry counter after addition reaches 10 (step S3427: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the round of play due to the upper limit number of game balls entering the variable winning opening 316 (the variable winning opening is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3428. On the other hand, if the value of the ball entry counter after addition does not reach 10 (step S3427: No), that is, if it is not time to end the round of play due to the upper limit number of game balls entering the variable winning opening 316 (the variable winning opening is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 ends the special jackpot game control process.

<Step S3428>
If the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3424: Yes), or if the value of the ball number counter reaches 10 (step S3427: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the round game, the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening by returning the opening/closing door 319 (step S3428) and proceeds to step S3429. In other words, if it is time to end the round game because a specified time has passed or the upper limit number of game balls has entered the variable winning opening 316, the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening 316 and ends the round game.

<Steps S3429 to S3431>
In step S3429, the MPU 41 sets a round game end command that notifies the sound and lamp control device 5 that the round game is ending. The round game end command is transmitted to the sound and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound and lamp control device 5 can end the round game presentation of the special symbol jackpot game executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the round game end command.

Then, the MPU 41 clears the ball entry counter, which indicates the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning opening 316 during that round of play (step S3430), sets the round play in progress flag, which indicates that a round of play is in progress, to OFF (step S3431), and proceeds to step S3432.

<Step S3432>
In step S3432, the MPU 41 determines whether the round number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds of play in the opening and closing execution mode is 0 (step S3432), i.e., whether it is time to end the opening and closing execution mode (whether there are any unexecuted rounds of play).

If the round number counter is 0 (step S3432: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the open/close execution mode, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3441. On the other hand, if the round number counter is not 0 (step S3432: No), i.e., if there is an unexecuted round of play, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3433.

<Step S3433>
If the round number counter is not 0 (step S3432: No), that is, if there is an unexecuted round of play, the MPU 41 sets an interval start command to notify the sound and lamp control device 5 of the start of an interval between rounds of play (step S3433), and proceeds to step S3434. The interval start command is transmitted to the sound and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound and lamp control device 5 to start the interval presentation of the special jackpot game in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the interval start command.

In this embodiment, interval effects are executed during the intervals between rounds of play, but the interval effects may be omitted and the round effect for the previously executed round of play may be continued during the interval, or the round effect for the next round of play may be executed.

<Steps S3434 and S3435>
In step S3434, the MPU 41 sets an interval flag to ON, which indicates that an interval between rounds of play is being executed. Then, the MPU 41 sets an interval time counter indicating the remaining time of the interval (step S3435), and ends the special jackpot game control process. The interval time counter is referenced in step S3438 of FIG. 313 in the special jackpot game control process to determine whether it is time to end the interval (start a round of play).

<Step S3436>
310, if the round game in progress flag is off (step S3422: No), that is, if the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the interval in progress flag, which indicates that an interval between round games is being executed, is on (step S3436). The interval in progress flag is set to on in step S3434 of FIG. 312 in the special jackpot game control processing when the interval starts, and is set to off in step S3440 of FIG. 313 in the special jackpot game control processing when the interval ends.

If the interval flag is on (step S3436: Yes), i.e., if an interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3437 in FIG. 313. On the other hand, if the interval flag is off (step S3436: No), i.e., if an interval between rounds is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3445.

<Steps S3437 and S3438>
If the interval flag is on (step S3436: Yes), i.e., if an interval between rounds is being played, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the interval time counter indicating the remaining time of the interval (step S3437), as shown in Fig. 313. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3438), i.e., whether it is time to end the interval (start a round of play).

If the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3438: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the interval and start a round of play, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3439. On the other hand, if the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3438: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the interval (start a round of play), the MPU 41 terminates the special jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3439 and S3440>
If the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3438: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the interval and start a round of play, the MPU 41 sets an interval end command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that the interval will end. The interval end command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 310) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to end the interval presentation of the jackpot game executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the interval end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the interval flag, indicating that an interval between rounds of play, to OFF (step S3440), and proceeds to step S3417 described above. By proceeding to step S3417 in FIG. 311 described above, steps S3417 to S3421 related to the start of rounds of play are executed, and the special jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Step S3441>
Returning to FIG. 312, if the round number counter is 0 (step S3432: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the open/close execution mode, the MPU 41 sets an open/close execution mode end command that notifies the sound lamp control device 5 that the open/close execution mode of the special symbol jackpot game is to be ended (step S3441), and proceeds to step S3442. The open/close execution mode end command is sent to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401 in the next main processing (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, when the sound lamp control device 5 is executed in the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the open/close execution mode end command, it can end the round game presentation (open/close execution mode presentation) of the special symbol jackpot game.

<Step S3442>
In step S3442, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command to notify the sound and lamp control device 5 that the ending of the special symbol jackpot game is about to begin, and proceeds to step S3443. The ending start command is sent to the sound and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound and lamp control device 5 to start the ending presentation of the special symbol jackpot game in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the ending start command.

<Steps S3443 and S3444>
In step S3443, the MPU 41 sets an ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed to ON. Then, the MPU 41 sets an ending time counter indicating the remaining time of the ending (step S3444), and ends the special jackpot game control process. The ending time counter is referenced in step S3447 in FIG. 313 of the special jackpot game control process to determine whether it is time to end the ending (special jackpot game).

<Step S3445>
Returning to FIG. 310, if the interval flag is off (step S3436: No), i.e., if the interval between rounds is not being executed, it is determined whether the ending flag, which indicates that the ending is being executed, is on (step S3445).

If the ending in progress flag is on (step S3445: Yes), i.e., if the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3446 in FIG. 313. On the other hand, if the ending in progress flag is off (step S3445: No), i.e., if the ending is not being executed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3450.

<Steps S3446 and S3447>
If the ending flag is on (step S3445: Yes), that is, if the ending is being executed, as shown in FIG. 313, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the ending time counter indicating the remaining time of the ending (step S3446). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3447). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to end the ending (special chart jackpot game).

If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3447: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the ending (special jackpot game), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3448. On the other hand, if the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3447: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the ending (special jackpot game), the MPU 41 terminates the special jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3448 and S3449>
If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3447: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the ending (special symbol jackpot game), the MPU 41 sets an ending end command that notifies the sound lamp control device 5 that the ending of the special symbol jackpot game is to end. The ending end command is sent to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can end the ending presentation of the special symbol jackpot game executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the ending end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending flag, which indicates that the ending is being executed, to OFF (step S3449), and ends the special jackpot game control process.

<Step S3450>
Returning to FIG. 310, if the ending flag is off (step S3445: No), that is, if the game is not in the opening, round play, interval, or ending mode, the MPU 41 sets a special jackpot game end command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the special jackpot game is ending (step S3450), and proceeds to step S3451. The special jackpot game end command is sent to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to end the special jackpot game presentation executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the special jackpot game end command.

<Steps S3451 and S3452>
In step S3451, a special jackpot game end flag indicating that the special jackpot game has ended is set to ON. The special jackpot game end flag is referenced in step S3717 of the game state transition process in FIG. 316 described later to determine whether to transition from the special jackpot game state to the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state).

Then, the MPU 41 sets the special jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that the special jackpot game is currently being played, to OFF (step S3452), and ends the special jackpot game control process.

[Special line start game control processing]
Here, Fig. 314 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the special electric start game control process executed in step S1407-2 in the main process of Fig. 300. In the special electric start game control process of this embodiment, a process is executed to control the progress of the special electric start game as a small profit game in which the special electric large winning device 38, which is the second ball entry means, is activated based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start hole 37, which is the first ball entry means. Hereinafter, the special electric start game control process of this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 314.

<Step S3501>
314, in the special electric start game control process of this embodiment, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the special electric start port 37 (step S3501). Whether or not a game ball has entered the special electric start port 37 is determined based on winning detection information stored in RAM 412 when a game ball has entered the ball entry sensor 37a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG.

If a game ball has entered the special line starting port 37 (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3502; if a game ball has not entered the special line starting port 37 (step S3501: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3512.

<Step S3502>
When a game ball enters the special electric start port 37 (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether a special jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a special jackpot game, which is a big profit game, is being executed, is set to ON (step S3502). In the special jackpot game control process of FIG. 310, the special jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S3406 when the special jackpot game starts, and is set to OFF in step S3452 when the special jackpot game ends.

If the special jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3502: Yes), i.e., if a special jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 ends the special electric start game. In other words, in this embodiment, the special electric start game does not start while a special jackpot game is being played. In this way, by preventing the special electric start game as a small profit game from being started while a special jackpot game as a large profit game is being played, the start of a V-winning jackpot game as a small profit game is prevented, and the execution of a small profit game is prevented from interfering with the profit obtained from the large profit game.

Here, in this embodiment, if the result of the special jackpot lottery is a regular jackpot, the remaining number of special games (value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter) required to trigger the b time-saving game state is set to the maximum value of 1000, and the a time-saving game state is triggered after the normal jackpot game ends. In other words, after the special jackpot game ends, the a time-saving game state is triggered with the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter set to the maximum value of 1000.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the value of the ceiling activation remaining count counter is set to its maximum value of 1000 not only at the time of a normal jackpot, but also after the end of a V entry jackpot game, which is triggered by a game ball entering the special electric V entry port 383 during a special electric start game, triggered by a game ball entering the special electric start port 37. In other words, the special electric start game and the V entry jackpot game are executed to set the value of the ceiling activation remaining count counter to its maximum value of 1000.

As a result, in a situation where a time-saving game state a is expected to occur in which the value of the ceiling activation remaining count counter is set to its maximum value of 1000, i.e., when a special jackpot game is in progress, there is no point in executing a special electric start game or a V-winning jackpot game to set the value of the ceiling activation remaining count counter to its maximum value of 1000. In fact, starting a special electric start game or a special jackpot game while a special jackpot game is in progress has the disadvantage of complicating the processing required to progress the game, as it requires the unnecessary execution of processes to execute the special electric start game, the V-winning jackpot game, and the setting of the ceiling activation remaining count counter to its maximum value of 1000.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the special electric start game does not start during the execution of a special chart jackpot game in which a time-saving game state A is expected to occur in which the value of the ceiling activation remaining count counter is set to its maximum value of 1000. This prevents the unnecessary execution of the process to execute the special electric start game, the process to execute the V prize jackpot game, and the process to set the value of the ceiling activation remaining count counter to its maximum value of 1000, preventing the processes necessary for game progress from becoming complicated.

On the other hand, if the special jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3502: No), i.e., if the special jackpot game is not currently in progress, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3503.

<Step S3503>
If the special jackpot game in progress flag is OFF (step S3502: No), that is, if the special jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the V prize winning jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that the V prize winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game, is being executed, is set ON (step S3503). The V prize winning jackpot game in progress flag is set ON in step S3606 when the V prize winning jackpot game starts in the V prize winning jackpot game control process of FIG. 315 described later, and is set OFF in step S3620 when the V prize winning jackpot game ends.

If the V-winning jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S3503: Yes), i.e., if a V-winning jackpot game is in progress, the MPU 41 ends the special power start game. In other words, in this embodiment, the special power start game does not start while a V-winning jackpot game is in progress. On the other hand, if the V-winning jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3503: No), i.e., if a V-winning jackpot game is not in progress, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3504.

<Step S3504>
If the V winning jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S3503: No), that is, if the V winning jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the special electric start game in progress flag, which indicates that the special electric start game, which is a small profit game, is being executed, is set to on (step S3504). The special electric start game in progress flag is set to on in step S3507 when the special electric start game starts in the special electric start game control process described later, and is set to off in step S3516 when the special electric start game ends.

If the special electric start game in progress flag is on (step S3504: Yes), i.e., if the special electric start game is being played, the MPU 41 ends the special electric start game. In other words, in this embodiment, the special electric start game does not start while the special electric start game is being played. On the other hand, if the special electric start game in progress flag is off (step S3504: No), i.e., if the special electric start game is not being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3505.

<Step S3505>
If the special electric start game in progress flag is off (step S3504: No), i.e., if the special electric start game is not being executed, the MPU 41 operates the special electric opening/closing door 382, which is the opening/closing means of the special electric large winning device 38, which is the second ball entry means, to switch the special electric large winning opening 381 from a closed state to an open state (step S3505). This allows game balls to enter the special electric large winning opening 381. The MPU 41 also operates the V winning opening opening/closing door 385, which is the opening/closing means of the special electric large winning device 38, which is the second ball entry means, to switch the special electric V winning opening 383, which is a specific ball entry area, from a closed state to an open state (step S3506). This allows game balls to enter the special electric V winning opening 383, making it possible to start the V winning jackpot game, which is a small-profit game.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special electric start game in progress flag, which indicates that the special electric start game is being executed, to ON (step S3507), and proceeds to step S3508. The special electric start game in progress flag is referenced in step S3504 or S3515 of the special electric start game control processing, and in step S3802 of the V-winning jackpot game control processing in Figure 315 described below, to determine whether the special electric start game is being executed.

In this way, the special electric start game will not start during the execution of a special symbol jackpot game, a V entry jackpot game, or a special electric start game, and the V entry jackpot game will not start during the execution of a special symbol jackpot game, a V entry jackpot game, or a special electric start game. On the other hand, the special electric start game and the V entry jackpot game can be started during the execution of a special symbol game. This allows the special electric start game and the V entry jackpot game to start without waiting for the end of the special symbol game, so if you want to reset the number of times a special symbol game is played before the b time-saving game state is triggered, you can do so immediately. For example, if the right to play a special symbol game is reserved or if a reach effect is executed, it may take a long time for all special symbol games to be completed. Even in such cases, the number of times a special symbol game is played before the b time-saving game state is triggered can be reset immediately. Furthermore, by being able to instantly reset the number of times a special symbol game is played before the b time-saving game state is triggered, if a reset occurs during the execution of a special symbol game, that special symbol game can also be counted as the number of times a special symbol game is played after the reset.Furthermore, if the right to play a special symbol game is reserved, the number of times a special symbol game related to the reservation that is played after the reset can also be counted as the number of times a special symbol game is played after the reset.Therefore, for example, when the b time-saving game state is triggered and the b time-saving game state cannot be triggered, if the number of times a special symbol game is played by the player before the b time-saving game state is triggered is reset and a new b time-saving game state can be triggered, the right to play the special symbol game triggered by the player can be counted effectively and efficiently as the number of special symbol games required to trigger the b time-saving game state.

<Step S3508>
In step S3508, the MPU 41 determines whether the electric device 315b, which is the opening and closing means of the second ball entry means, is in a high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, a time-saving game state, or b time-saving game state) as the second profit game state control, which is the first auxiliary state control (step S3508). Whether it is a high-frequency support mode is determined by whether any of the probability variable game state flag, a time-saving game state flag, and b time-saving game state flag is set to on.

If the MPU 41 is in high frequency support mode (step S3508: Yes), i.e., if the game is in a guaranteed variable mode, a time-limited mode, or b time-limited mode, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3509; if the game is not in high frequency support mode (step S3508: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3509.

<Step S3509>
If the mode is the high frequency support mode (step S3508: Yes), that is, if the mode is the probability variable game mode, the time-limited game mode a, or the time-limited game mode b, the MPU 41 sets a special power operation time counter indicating the remaining time until the special power opening/closing door 382 is restored and the special power large winning port 381 is switched from the open state to the closed state (step S3509), and ends the special power start game control process. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the value of the special power operation time counter to a value corresponding to the time set based on the high frequency support mode special power start type allocation table (see FIG. 299(C)), that is, a value corresponding to 0.1 seconds.

The special power activation time counter is referenced in step S3514 of the special power activation game control process to determine whether it is time to close the special power large prize opening 381.

<Step S3510>
If it is not the high frequency support mode (step S3508: No), the MPU 41 determines whether it is the low frequency support mode (normal game state) (step S3510). That is, if the electric device 315b, which is the opening and closing means of the second ball entry means, is in the low frequency support mode as the first profit game state control, which is the second auxiliary state control, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1703.

If the MPU 41 is in low-frequency support mode (step S3510: Yes), i.e., in normal game mode, it proceeds to step S3511; if the MPU 41 is not in low-frequency support mode (step S3510: No), it terminates the special power start game control process.

<Step S3511>
If the mode is the low frequency support mode (step S3510: Yes), i.e., if the game is in normal mode, the MPU 41 sets a special power operation time counter indicating the remaining time until the special power opening/closing door 382 is restored and the special power large winning opening 381 is switched from the open state to the closed state (step S3511), and ends the special power start game control process. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the value of the special power operation time counter to a value corresponding to the time set based on the low frequency support mode special power start type allocation table (see FIG. 299(B)), i.e., a value corresponding to 1.2 seconds.

The special power activation time counter is referenced in step S3514 of the special power activation game control process to determine whether it is time to close the special power large prize opening 381.

<Step S3512>
If no game ball has entered the special electric start opening 37 (step S3501: No), the MPU 41 determines whether a special electric start game in progress flag, which indicates that the special electric start game is being executed, is set to ON (step S3512). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the special electric start game is being executed. Note that, in the special electric start game control process, the special electric start game in progress flag is set to ON in step S3507 when the special electric start game is started, and is set to OFF in step S3516 when the special electric start game is ended.

If the special power start game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3512: Yes), i.e., if the special power start game is being played, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3513. On the other hand, if the special power start game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S3512: No), i.e., if the special power start game is not being played, the MPU 41 terminates the special power start game control process.

<Steps S3513 and S3514>
If the special power start game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3512: Yes), that is, if the special power start game is being played, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the special power operation time counter, which indicates the remaining time until the special power opening/closing door 382 is restored and the special power large winning opening 381 is switched from the open state to the closed state (step S3513), and determines whether the value of the special power operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3514). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the timing to restore the special power opening/closing door 382 and switch the special power large winning opening 381 from the open state to the closed state.

If the value of the special power operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3514: Yes), i.e., if it is time to return the special power opening/closing door 382 and switch the special power large prize opening 381 from the open state to the closed state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3519. On the other hand, if the value of the special power operation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3514: No), i.e., if it is not time to return the special power opening/closing door 382 and switch the special power large prize opening 381 from the open state to the closed state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3515.

<Step S3515>
If the value of the special power operation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3514: No), that is, if it is not time to return the special power opening/closing door 382 and switch the special power large winning opening 381 from the open state to the closed state, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening flag, which indicates that a gaming ball has entered the special power V winning opening 383, is set to ON (step S3515). When a gaming ball enters the special power V winning opening 383, the V winning opening flag is set to ON in step S3517 of the special power start game control processing.

If the V entry flag, indicating that a game ball has entered the special line V entry port 383, is set to ON (step S3515: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the special line start game control process; if the V entry flag is set to OFF (step S3515: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3516.

<Step S3516>
If the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S3515: No), the MPU 41 determines (step S3516) whether or not a gaming ball has entered the special V winning port 383. Whether or not a gaming ball has entered the special V winning port 383 is determined based on winning detection information stored in RAM 412 when a gaming ball has entered the ball entry sensor 383a (see FIG. 294) in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17.

If a game ball has entered the special electric V winning slot 383 (step S3516: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3517; if a game ball has not entered the special electric V winning slot 383 (step S3516: No), the MPU 41 terminates the special electric start game control process.

<Steps S3517 and S3518>
If a game ball enters the special line V winning port 383 (step S3516: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V winning flag to on, indicating that a game ball has entered the special line V winning port 383 (step S3517), and sets a V winning command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that a game ball has entered the special line V winning port 383 (step S3518), and terminates the special line start game control processing.

The V winning command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. In response to this, the audio lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341, etc., to execute a presentation that clearly indicates to the player that a game ball has entered the special electric V winning port 383 during the special symbol start game, based on the V winning command.

<Steps S3519 to S3521>
If the value of the special power operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3514: Yes), that is, if it is time to restore the special power opening/closing door 382 and switch the special power large winning opening 381 from the open state to the closed state, the MPU 41 restores the special power opening/closing door 382 and switches the special power large winning opening 381 from the open state to the closed state (step S3519), and restores the V winning opening opening/closing door 385 and switches the V winning opening 383 from the open state to the closed state (step S3520). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special power start game in progress flag, which indicates that the special power start game is being executed, to OFF (step S3521), and ends the special power start game control process.

[V Winning Jackpot Game Control Processing]
Here, Figure 315 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the V prize winning jackpot game control process executed in step S1407-3 in the main process of Figure 300. In the V prize winning jackpot game control process of this embodiment, a process is executed to control the progress of the V prize winning jackpot game as a small profit game in which the special large winning device 38, which is the second ball entry means, is activated. Below, with reference to Figure 315, the V prize winning jackpot game control process of this embodiment will be explained.

<Step S3601>
315, in the V prize winning jackpot game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether a V prize winning jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a V prize winning jackpot game is being executed, is set to ON (step S3601). The V prize winning jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S3606 of the V prize winning jackpot game control process when a V prize winning jackpot game is started, and is set to OFF in step S3620 of the V prize winning jackpot game control process when the V prize winning jackpot game is ended.

If the V-winning jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3611; if the V-winning jackpot game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S3601: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3602.

<Step S3602>
If the V winning jackpot game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the special electric start game in progress flag, which indicates that a special electric start game as a small profit game is being executed, is set to ON (step S3602). The special electric start game in progress flag is set to ON in step S3507 of the special electric start game control processing of FIG. 314 when the special electric start game is started, and is set to OFF in step S3521 of the special electric start game control processing of FIG. 314 when the special electric start game is ended.

If the special power start game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), i.e., if the special power start game is being played, the MPU 41 terminates the V prize winning jackpot game control process without starting the V prize winning jackpot game. On the other hand, if the special power start game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S3602: No), i.e., if the special power start game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3603.

<Step S3603>
If the special electric start game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S3602: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a V entry flag indicating that a game ball has entered the special electric V entry port 383 of the special electric large entry device 38, which is the second ball entry means, in the special electric start game as a small profit game is set to ON (step S3603). The V entry flag is set to ON in step S3517 of the special electric start game control process of FIG. 314 when a game ball enters the special electric V entry port 383 in the special electric start game.

If the V winning flag is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3604; if the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S3603: No), the MPU 41 terminates the V winning jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3604 to S3607>
If the V prize flag is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 sets ON a V prize jackpot game start flag indicating that a V prize jackpot game will start (step S3604).

The V-winning jackpot game start flag is referenced in step S3741 of the game state transition processing in FIG. 320 to determine whether or not to trigger a V-winning jackpot game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the value of the round number counter, which indicates the number of remaining rounds to be played in the V-winning jackpot game, to 2 (step S3605). That is, in the V-winning jackpot game of this embodiment, two rounds are played as described above (see Figure 299 (D)).

The MPU 41 also sets the V-winning jackpot game in progress flag to ON, indicating that a V-winning jackpot game is being played (step S3606), and sets the V-winning flag to OFF, indicating that a game ball has entered the special electric V-winning slot 383 during the special electric start game (step S3607), and then proceeds to step S3608.

<Steps S3608 to S3610>
In step S3608, the MPU 41 activates the special electric opening/closing door 382 of the special electric large winning device 38, which is the second ball entry means, to switch the special electric large winning opening 381 from a closed state to an open state, thereby opening the special electric large winning opening 381 (step S3608), and then subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds to be played in the V prize winning jackpot game (step S3609).The MPU 41 then sets a special electric large winning opening opening time counter indicating the remaining open time of the special electric large winning opening 381 (step S3610), and terminates the V prize winning jackpot game control process.In this embodiment, the value of the special electric large winning opening opening time counter is set to a value corresponding to 30 seconds (see FIG. 299 (D)).

<Steps S3611 and S3612>
If the V prize winning jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), that is, if a V prize winning jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the special large prize winning opening opening time counter, which indicates the remaining opening time of the special large prize winning opening 381 (step S3611), and determines whether the value of the special large prize winning opening opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3612). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the maximum opening time of the special large prize winning opening 381 has elapsed.

If the value of the special large prize opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3612: Yes), i.e., if the maximum opening time of the special large prize opening 381 has elapsed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3618. On the other hand, if the value of the special large prize opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3612: No), i.e., if the maximum opening time of the special large prize opening 381 has not elapsed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3613.

<Step S3613>
If the value of the special large winning opening opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3612: No), that is, if the maximum opening time of the special large winning opening 381 has not elapsed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the special large winning opening 384 of the special large winning device 38, which is the second ball entry means (step S3613). Whether or not a game ball has entered the special large winning opening 384 is determined based on the winning detection information stored in RAM 412 when a game ball has entered the ball entry sensor 384a (see FIG. 294(A)) provided in the special large winning opening 384 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17.

Note that in a V-winning jackpot game, unlike a special-power start game, the special-power V-winning port 383 of the special-power large winning device 38 is not opened, and no game balls enter the special-power V-winning port 383. Therefore, in the V-winning jackpot game control process, no process is executed to confirm that a game ball has entered the special-power V-winning port 383.

If a gaming ball has entered the special normal winning slot 384 (step S3613: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3614; if a gaming ball has not entered the special normal winning slot 384 (step S3613: No), the MPU 41 terminates the V winning jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3614 and S3615>
If a gaming ball has entered the special normal winning opening 384 (step S3613: Yes), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the ball number counter, which indicates the number of gaming balls that have entered the special normal winning opening 384 (step S3614). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ball number counter after the addition is 10 (step S3615). In other words, it determines whether the maximum number of gaming balls that can enter the special normal winning opening 384, which is set for a round game of a V-winning jackpot game, have entered the special normal winning opening 384.

If the value of the ball entry counter after the addition is 10 (step S3614: Yes), and the maximum number of game balls set for the round play of the V prize winning jackpot game enters the special electric normal prize opening 384, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3616. On the other hand, if the value of the ball entry counter after the addition is not 10 (step S3615: No), the MPU 41 terminates the V prize winning jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3616 and S3617>
If the value of the ball entry counter after the addition is 10 (step S3614: Yes), when the maximum number of game balls that can be entered into the special electric normal entry port 384 set for a round of play in a V-winning jackpot game enters the special electric normal entry port 384, the MPU 41 clears the value of the ball entry counter (step S3616), clears the special electric large entry port opening time counter that indicates the remaining open time of the special electric large entry port 381 (step S3617), and proceeds to step S3618.

<Step S3618>
In step S3618, the MPU 41 restores the special electric opening/closing door 382 of the special electric large prize winning device 38, which is the second ball entry means, switches the special electric large prize winning opening 381 from an open state to a closed state, and closes the special electric large prize winning opening 381 (step S3618), and then transitions to step S3619. In other words, if the value of the special large winning port opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (if the maximum opening time of the special large winning port 381 has elapsed) (step S3612: Yes), or if the value of the ball count counter is 10 due to a game ball entering the special normal winning port 384 (if the maximum number of game balls set for a round of play in a V winning jackpot game have entered the special normal winning port 384) (step S3614: Yes), the MPU 41 closes the special large winning port 381, thereby ending the round of play in the V winning jackpot game.

<Step S3619>
In step S3619, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the round number counter, which indicates the remaining number of rounds to be played in the V prize winning jackpot game, is 0, i.e., whether it is time to end the V prize winning jackpot game.

If the value of the round number counter, which indicates the number of remaining rounds to be played in the V-winning jackpot game, is 0 (step S3619: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the V-winning jackpot game, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3620.

On the other hand, if the value of the round number counter, which indicates the number of remaining rounds to be played in the V-winning jackpot game, is not 0 (step S3619: No), i.e., if it is not the time to end the V-winning jackpot game, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3608 and executes the next round of play.

<Steps S3620 and S3621>
If the value of the round number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds to be played in the V prize winning jackpot game is 0 (step S3619: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the V prize winning jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets the V prize winning jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that the V prize winning jackpot game is being played, to OFF (step S3620), and sets the V prize winning jackpot game end flag, which indicates that the V prize winning jackpot game has ended, to ON (step S3621), and ends the V prize winning jackpot game control processing.

[Game status transition processing]
316 to 320 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the game state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main process in FIG. 300. In the game state transition process of this embodiment, processing is executed to control the transition of various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, probability variable game state, probability variable jackpot game state, and normal jackpot game state). Below, the game state transition process of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 316 to 320.

<Step S3701>
316, in the game state transition process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether a special jackpot game start flag indicating the start of a special jackpot game is on (step S3701). The special jackpot game start flag is set to on in step S3405 when a special jackpot game is started in the special jackpot game control process of FIG. 310, and is set to off in step S3451 when the special jackpot game is ended.

If the special jackpot game start flag is on (step S3701: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start the special jackpot game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3702. On the other hand, if the special jackpot game start flag is off (step S3701: No), i.e., if it is not time to start the special jackpot game, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3716.

<Steps S3702 and S3703>
If the special jackpot game start flag is on (step S3701: Yes), that is, when starting a special jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets a special jackpot game state flag indicating that the special jackpot game state is on (step S3702). The special jackpot game state flag is referenced in step S3716 of FIG. 316 of the game state transition process to determine whether or not the special jackpot game state is in effect.

The MPU 41 also sets the jackpot signal 1 output start flag to ON (step S3703), which starts the output of jackpot signal 1 (see FIG. 295(A)) as a special signal from terminal 1 of the external output terminal board 101. The jackpot signal 1 output start flag is referenced in step S3801 of the signal output processing in FIG. 321 to determine whether or not to start outputting jackpot signal 1.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the special jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S3704) and proceeds to step S3705.

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, the MPU 41 determines whether the special jackpot game to be started is a variable probability jackpot game. Whether the special jackpot game to be started is a variable probability jackpot game is determined based on the special jackpot win/loss information stored in the special jackpot execution area AE (see FIG. 8) of the special jackpot reserve storage area 412b set in the RAM 412.

If the MPU 41 determines that a special jackpot game is to be started (step S3705: Yes), it proceeds to step S3706. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that a special jackpot game is not to be started (step S3705: No), i.e., if a regular jackpot game is to be started, it proceeds to step S3707.

<Step S3706>
When starting a probability variable jackpot game (step S3705: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a probability variable game state transition flag to ON (step S3706), which transitions to a probability variable jackpot game state after the probability variable jackpot game ends, and proceeds to step S3707. The probability variable game state transition flag is referenced in step S3721 of FIG. 316 of the game state transition process to determine whether the game state should transition to a probability variable game state or a normal game state when the special jackpot game ends.

<Steps S3707 and S3708>
In step S3707, the MPU 41 determines whether a normal gaming state flag indicating a normal gaming state is on. The normal gaming state flag is set to on when transitioning from another gaming state to the normal gaming state (step S3732 in FIG. 318 or step S3738 in FIG. 319 of the gaming state transition processing), and is set to off when transitioning from the normal gaming state to another gaming state (step S3708 in FIG. 316 or step S3728 in FIG. 317 of the gaming state transition processing).

If the normal game state flag is on (step S3707: Yes), i.e., if the game is in normal game state, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to off (step S3708) and proceeds to step S3711. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is off (step S3707: No), i.e., if the game is in a high-frequency support mode (high-variant game state, a time-saving game state, or b time-saving game state) that is not in normal game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3709.

<Steps S3709 and S3710>
If the normal game state flag is off (step S3707: No), that is, if the game is not in the normal game state of the high-frequency support mode, which is the second auxiliary state control, but in the high-frequency support mode, which is the first profit game state control (probability variable game state, a time-saving game state, or b time-saving game state), the MPU 41 determines whether the b time-saving game state flag, which indicates the b time-saving game state, is on (step S3709). The b time-saving game state flag is set to on when transitioning from the normal game state to the b time-saving game state (step S3727 in FIG. 317 of the game state transition processing), and is set to off when transitioning from the b time-saving game state to the normal game state or the special jackpot game state (step S3710 in FIG. 316 or step S3739 in FIG. 319 of the game state transition processing).

If the b time-shortened game state flag is on (step S3709: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the b time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 sets the b time-shortened game state flag to off (step S3710) and proceeds to step S3711. On the other hand, if the b time-shortened game state flag is off (step S3709: No), i.e., if the game is not in the b time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3712.

<Step S3711>
In step S3711, the MPU 41 sets on a jackpot signal 2 output start flag that starts output of the jackpot signal 2 (see FIG. 295(A)) from terminal 2 of the external output terminal board 101. The jackpot signal 2 output start flag is referenced in step S3804 of the signal output processing in FIG. 321 to determine whether or not to start output of the jackpot signal 2.

Here, step S3711 is entered when a special symbol game started in the normal game mode or the b time-saving game mode notifies that the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot. In other words, in this embodiment, when a special symbol game started in the normal game mode or the b time-saving game mode notifies that the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot, output of jackpot signal 2 is initiated at the end of the special symbol game (at the start of the special symbol jackpot game).

In addition, since the jackpot signal 2 is being output during the probability variable game state and the time-limited game state a (see Figure 295 (B)), even if a special game started during the probability variable game state or the time-limited game state a notifies the player that the result of the special game jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the output of the jackpot signal 2 will not be initiated at the end of the special game (at the start of the special game jackpot).

<Steps S3712 and S3713>
If the b time-saving gaming state flag is off (step S3709: No), i.e., if the b time-saving gaming state is not in, the MPU 41 determines whether the probability variable gaming state flag is on, i.e., whether the game is in a probability variable gaming state. The probability variable gaming state flag is set to on when a game state is transitioned from a jackpot gaming state to a probability variable gaming state (see step S3722 in FIG. 316 for the game state transition processing), and is set to off when a game state is transitioned from a probability variable gaming state to a jackpot gaming state (see step S3713 in FIG. 316 for the game state transition processing).

If the high probability game state flag is on (step S3712: Yes), i.e., if the game is in a high probability game state, the MPU 41 sets the high probability game state flag to off (step S3713) and proceeds to step S3741 in FIG. 320. On the other hand, if the high probability game state flag is off (step S3712: No), i.e., if the game is not in a high probability game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3714.

<Steps S3714 and S3715>
If the probability variable game state flag is off (step S3712: No), i.e., if the game is not in the probability variable game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving game state flag a is on (step S3714), i.e., whether the game is in the time-saving game state a. The time-saving game state flag a is set to on when the game is transitioning from the jackpot game state to the time-saving game state a (see step S3724 in FIG. 316 for the game state transition processing), and is set to off when the game is transitioning from the time-saving game state a to the jackpot game state or the normal game state (see step S3715 in FIG. 316 or step S3734 in FIG. 318 for the game state transition processing).

If the time-shortened game state flag a is on (step S3714: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the time-shortened game state a, the MPU 41 sets the time-shortened game state flag a to off (step S3715) and proceeds to step S3741 in FIG. 320. On the other hand, if the time-shortened game state flag a is off (step S3714: No), i.e., if the game is not in the time-shortened game state a, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3741 in FIG. 320.

<Step S3716>
If the special jackpot game start flag is off (step S3701: No), that is, if it is not the time to start the special jackpot game, the MPU 41 determines whether the special jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the special jackpot game state is on, is on (step S3716). When transitioning to the special jackpot game state, the special jackpot game state flag is set to on in step S3702 of FIG. 316 of the game state transition process.

If the special jackpot game state flag is on (step S3716: Yes), i.e., if the special jackpot game state is in progress (if a special jackpot game is currently in progress), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3717. On the other hand, if the special jackpot game state flag is off (step S3716: No), i.e., if the special jackpot game state is not in progress (if a special jackpot game is not currently in progress), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3725 in FIG. 317.

<Step S3717>
If the special jackpot game state flag is on (step S3716: Yes), that is, if the special jackpot game state is in (if the special jackpot game is being executed), the MPU 41 determines whether the special jackpot game end flag, which indicates that the special jackpot game is to end, is on (step S3717). When the special jackpot game ends, the special jackpot game end flag is set to on in step S3451 of the special jackpot game control process of FIG. 310.

If the special jackpot game end flag is on (step S3717: Yes), i.e., if the special jackpot game is to end, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3718. On the other hand, if the special jackpot game end flag is off (step S3717: No), i.e., if it is not the time to end the special jackpot game, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3741 in FIG. 320.

<Steps S3718 to S3720>
If the special jackpot game end flag is on (step S3717: Yes), that is, when the special jackpot game is to be ended, the MPU 41 sets on a jackpot signal 1 output stop flag (step S3718) that stops the output of the jackpot signal 1 (see FIG. 295(A)) being output from terminal 1 of the external output terminal board 101. The jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is referenced in step S3807 of the signal output processing in FIG. 321 to determine whether or not to stop the output of the jackpot signal 1.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the special jackpot game state flag, indicating that the special jackpot game state is active, to OFF (step S3719), and sets the jackpot game end flag, indicating that the special jackpot game has ended, to OFF (step S3720), and proceeds to step S3721.

<Steps S3721 to S3724-1>
In step S3721, the MPU 41 determines whether a probability variable game state transition flag that transitions from the special jackpot game state to the probability variable game state after the special jackpot game ends is set to ON. The probability variable game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3706 of FIG. 316 of the game state transition process when the probability variable jackpot game starts.

When the probability variable game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3721: Yes), i.e., when transitioning from the special chart jackpot game state to the probability variable game state, the MPU 41 sets the probability variable game state flag, indicating that the game is in the probability variable game state, to ON (step S3722), and sets a probability variable game state command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the game is in the probability variable game state (step S3722-1).

The probability variable game state command is sent to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to execute special symbol effects corresponding to the probability variable game state on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the probability variable game state command (see Figure 326 (B1)).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the guaranteed game state transition flag to OFF (step S3723) and transitions processing to step S3741 in FIG. 320.

On the other hand, if the probability variable game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3721: No), i.e., if the special chart jackpot game state is to be transitioned to the a-time-limited game state rather than the probability variable game state, the MPU 41 sets the a-time-limited game state flag, indicating that the a-time-limited game state is in effect, to ON (step S3724), and sets the a-time-limited game state command, which notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the a-time-limited game state is in effect (step S3724-1), and proceeds to step S3741 in FIG. 320.

The time-saving game state command a is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main processing (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to execute a special symbol effect corresponding to the time-saving game state command a on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the time-saving game state command a (see FIG. 326 (B2)).

<Step S3725>
If the special jackpot game state flag is off (step S3716: No), that is, if the game is not in a special jackpot game state (if the special jackpot game is not being executed), as shown in FIG. 317, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a normal game state, is set to on (step S3725).

If the normal game state flag is set to on (step S3725: Yes), i.e., if the game is in normal game mode, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3726. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3725: No), i.e., if the game is not in normal game mode, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3730 in FIG. 318.

<Step S3726>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3725: Yes), that is, in the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the b time-shortened game state transition flag for transitioning the game state to the b time-shortened game state is set to ON (step S3726). When the normal jackpot game ends, the b time-shortened game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3323 of FIG. 316 of the game state transition process.

If the b time-shortened game state transition flag is set to on (step S3726: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3727; if the b time-shortened game state transition flag is set to off (step S3726: No), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3741 in FIG. 320.

<Steps S3727 to S3729>
If the b time-shortened play state transition flag is set to on (step S3726: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the b time-shortened play state flag to on, indicating that the b time-shortened play state is in effect (step S3727), and also sets the b time-shortened play state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the b time-shortened play state is in effect (step S3727-1).

The b time-shortened game state command is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main processing (see Figure 300) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to execute a special symbol effect corresponding to the b time-shortened game state command on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the b time-shortened game state command (see Figure 327 (B1)).

Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the normal game state, to OFF (step S3728), sets the b time-saving game state transition flag to OFF (step S3729), and proceeds to step S3741 in FIG. 320.

<Step S3730>
If the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3725: No), i.e., if the game is not in the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 318, the MPU 41 determines whether the a time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the a time-saving game state, is set to on (step S3730).

If the time-shortened game state flag a is set to on (step S3730: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the time-shortened game state a, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3731. On the other hand, if the time-shortened game state flag a is set to off (step S3731: No), i.e., if the game is not in the time-shortened game state a, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3736 in FIG. 319.

<Step S3731>
If the time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3730: Yes), that is, if the game is in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether a normal game state transition flag for transitioning the game state to the normal game state is set to ON (step S3731). The normal game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3328 of the special game count management process of FIG. 309 when the time-saving game state a is terminated and transition is made to the normal game state.

If the normal game state transition flag is set to on (step S3731: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3732; if the normal game state transition flag is set to off (step S3731: No), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3741 in FIG. 320.

<Steps S3732 to S3733>
If the normal game state b time-shortened game state transition flag is set to on (step S3731: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag, indicating that the game is in the normal game state, to on (step S3732), and sets a normal game state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game is in the normal game state (step S3732-1).

The normal game state command is sent to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main processing (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to execute a special symbol effect corresponding to the normal game state command in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the normal game state command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag to ON (step S3733), which stops the output of the jackpot signal 2 (see FIG. 295 (B)) currently being output from terminal 2 of the external output terminal board 101, and proceeds to step S3734. The jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is referenced in step S3810 of the signal output processing in FIG. 321 to determine whether or not to stop the output of the jackpot signal 2.

<Steps S3734 to S3735>
In step S3734, the MPU 41 sets the a time-shortened game state flag, which indicates that the a time-shortened game state is active, to off, and further sets the normal game state transition flag to off (step S3735), and transitions the processing to step S3741 of FIG. 320.

<Step S3736>
If the a time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3730: No), i.e., if the game is not in the a time-shortened game state, as shown in FIG. 319, the MPU 41 determines whether the b time-shortened game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the b time-shortened game state, is set to on (step S3736).

If the b time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S3736: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the b time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3737. On the other hand, if the b time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3736: No), i.e., if the game is not in the b time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3741 in FIG. 320.

<Step S3737>
If the b time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3736: Yes), that is, if the game is in the b time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a normal game state transition flag for transitioning the game state to the normal game state is set to ON (step S3737). The normal game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3333 of the special game count management process of FIG. 309 when the b time-saving game state is terminated and transition is made to the normal game state.

If the normal game state transition flag is set to on (step S3737: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3738; if the normal game state transition flag is set to off (step S3737: No), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S3741 in FIG. 320.

<Steps S3738 and S3738-1>
If the normal game state transition flag is set to on (step S3737: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to on, indicating that the game is in the normal game state (step S3738), and sets a normal game state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game is in the normal game state (step S3738-1), and then transitions processing to step S3739.

The normal game state command is sent to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main processing (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to execute a special symbol effect corresponding to the normal game state command in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the normal game state command.

<Steps S3739 and S3740>
In step S3739, the MPU 41 sets the b time-shortened game state flag to off, indicating that the game is in the b time-shortened game state, and further sets the normal game state transition flag to off (step S3740), and transitions processing to step S3741 of FIG. 320.

<Step S3741>
In step S3741, the MPU 41 determines whether a V prize winning jackpot game start flag, which indicates that a V prize winning jackpot game is about to start, is set to ON. When a V prize winning jackpot game is about to start, the V prize winning jackpot game start flag is set to ON in step S3604 of the V prize winning jackpot game control process of FIG.

If the V-winning jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S3741: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3742; if the V-winning jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S3741: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3744.

<Steps S3742 and S3743>
If the V winning jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S3741: Yes), the MPU 41 sets ON the V winning jackpot game signal output start flag (step S3742) to start outputting a V winning jackpot game signal as an identification signal from terminal 3 of the external output terminal board 101. Then, the MPU 41 sets OFF the V winning jackpot game start flag (step S3743) and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3744>
If the V prize winning jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S3741: No), the MPU 41 determines whether a V prize winning jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that a V prize winning jackpot game is being executed, is set to ON (step S3744). The V prize winning jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON when a V prize winning jackpot game starts in step S3606 of the V prize winning jackpot game control process of FIG.

If the V-winning jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3744: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3745; if the V-winning jackpot game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S3744: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3745>
If the V prize winning jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3744: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a V prize winning jackpot game end flag, which indicates that the V prize winning jackpot game is to end, is set to ON (step S3745). The V prize winning jackpot game end flag is set to ON when the V prize winning jackpot game is to end in step S3621 of the V prize winning jackpot game control processing of FIG.

If the V-winning jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S3745: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3746; if the V-winning jackpot game end flag is set to OFF (step S3745: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3746>
If the V winning jackpot game end flag is set to on (step S3745: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V winning jackpot game signal output stop flag to on (step S3746), which stops the output of the V winning jackpot game signal being output as an identification signal from terminal 3 of the external output terminal board 101, and proceeds to step S3747.

<Steps S3747 and S3748>
In step S3747, the MPU 41 sets the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which indicates the number of remaining special symbol games until the b time-saving game state is generated, to the maximum value of 1000. That is, in this embodiment, when the V prize winning game ends, the ceiling activation remaining number counter is reset to the maximum value of 1000. In addition, the MPU 41 sets the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag, which indicates that the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set, to ON (step S3748), and proceeds to step S3749.

In this embodiment, when a V-winning jackpot game ends, the value of the ceiling activation remaining count counter is reset to its maximum value of 1000, and the ceiling activation remaining count counter set flag is set to ON. This allows the normal game state, under the first auxiliary state control in which the b-time-saving game state cannot occur, to be changed to the normal game state under the second auxiliary state control in which the b-time-saving game state can occur. This allows the player to trigger a V-winning jackpot game to trigger the normal game state under the second auxiliary state control, thereby enabling a new b-time-saving game state to occur, thereby motivating the player to start playing in the normal game state under the first auxiliary state control in which the b-time-saving game state cannot occur. Meanwhile, in the normal game state under the second auxiliary state control in which the b-time-saving game state can occur, the number of special symbol game plays required to trigger the b-time-saving game state can be changed to the maximum value. As a result, by executing a V-winning jackpot game when the gaming machine is ended in a normal gaming state, which is the second auxiliary state control that can cause the b time-saving gaming state, the number of special symbol games executed up to the end of play will not be reflected in the number of special symbol games executed until the b time-saving gaming state is triggered, and play can be ended, preventing the machine from becoming the target of so-called hyena behavior by others.

<Steps S3749 and S3750>
In step S3749, the MPU 41 sets a ceiling activation remaining count counter reset command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the remaining number of ceiling activations has been reset (step S3749). The ceiling activation remaining count counter reset command is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute a special symbol effect corresponding to the resetting of the remaining number of ceiling activations in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the ceiling activation remaining count counter reset command (see FIG. 327 (B2)).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the V-winning jackpot game end flag to OFF (step S3750) and ends the game state transition process.

[Signal output processing]
Here, Fig. 321 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for signal output processing executed in step S1408-1 of the main processing of Fig. 300. In the signal output processing of this embodiment, processing is executed for outputting various signals to the outside of the gaming machine 10. The signal output processing of this embodiment will be described below with reference to Fig. 321.

<Step S3801>
321, in the signal output process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not a jackpot signal 1 output start flag, which starts the output of a jackpot signal 1 (see FIG. 295(A)) as a special signal from terminal 1 of the external output terminal board 101, is set to ON (step S3801). The jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to ON when a special jackpot game is started in step S3703 of the game state transition process of FIG.

If the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to on (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3802; if the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to off (step S3801: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3804.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
If the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to ON (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 starts outputting the jackpot signal 1 (see FIG. 295(A)) as a special signal from terminal 1 of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3802). Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 1 output start flag to OFF (step S3803) and ends the signal output process.

<Step S3804>
If the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to OFF (step S3801: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag, which stops the output of the jackpot signal 1 (see FIG. 295(A)) as a special signal output from terminal 1 of the external output terminal board 101, is set to ON (step S3804). The jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to ON when the special jackpot game is terminated in step S3718 of the game state transition processing in FIG.

If the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to on (step S3804: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3805; if the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to off (step S3804: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3807.

<Steps S3805 and S3806>
If the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to ON (step S3804: Yes), the MPU 41 stops output of the jackpot signal 1 (see FIG. 295(A)) as a special signal output from terminal No. 1 of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3805). Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag to OFF (step S3806), and ends the signal output process.

<Step S3807>
If the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to OFF (step S3804: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot signal 2 output start flag, which starts the output of the jackpot signal 2 (see FIG. 295(B)) from terminal 2 of the external output terminal board 101, is set to ON (step S3807). In step S3711 of the game state transition processing in FIG. 316, if a special symbol jackpot is announced by a special symbol game started in the normal game state or the b time-saving game state, the jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set to ON when the special symbol game is ended.

If the jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set to on (step S3807: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3808; if the jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set to off (step S3807: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3810.

<Steps S3808 and S3809>
If the jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set to ON (step S3807: Yes), the MPU 41 starts outputting the jackpot signal 2 (see FIG. 295(B)) from terminal No. 2 of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3808). Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2 output start flag to OFF (step S3809) and ends the signal output process.

<Step S3810>
If the jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set to OFF (step S3807: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a jackpot signal 2 output stop flag that stops the output of the jackpot signal 2 (see FIG. 295(B)) output from terminal 2 of the external output terminal board 101 is set to ON (step S3810). The jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is set to ON when a transition from the time-limited gaming state a to the normal gaming state is made in step S3733 of the gaming state transition processing in FIG.

If the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is set to on (step S3810: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3811; if the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is set to off (step S3810: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3813.

<Steps S3811 and S3812>
If the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is set to ON (step S3810: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the output of the jackpot signal 2 (see FIG. 295(B)) output from terminal 2 of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3811). Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag to OFF (step S3812) and ends the signal output process.

<Step S3813>
If the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is set to OFF (step S3810: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a V win jackpot game signal output start flag, which starts output of a V win jackpot game signal (see FIG. 296(A)) as an identification signal from terminal 3 of the external output terminal board 101, is set to ON (step S3813). The V win jackpot game signal output start flag is set to ON when a V win jackpot game is started (when a V win jackpot game state is generated) in step S3742 of the game state transition processing in FIG.

If the V-winning jackpot game signal output start flag is set to ON (step S3813: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3814; if the V-winning jackpot game signal output start flag is set to OFF (step S3813: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3816.

<Steps S3814 and S3815>
If the V winning jackpot game signal output start flag is set to ON (step S3813: Yes), the MPU 41 starts outputting the V winning jackpot game signal (see FIG. 296(A)) as an identification signal from terminal 3 of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3814). Then, the MPU 41 sets the V winning jackpot game signal output start flag to OFF (step S3815), and ends the signal output process.

<Step S3816>
If the V winning jackpot game signal output start flag is set to OFF (step S3813: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning jackpot game signal output stop flag, which stops the output of the V winning jackpot game signal (see FIG. 296(A)) as an identification signal output from terminal 3 of the external output terminal board 101, is set to ON (step S3816). The V winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to ON when the V winning jackpot game is terminated (when the V winning jackpot game state is terminated) in step S3746 of the game state transition processing in FIG.

If the V-winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to ON (step S3816: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3817; if the V-winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to OFF (step S3816: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3819.

<Steps S3817 and S3818>
If the V winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to ON (step S3816: Yes), the MPU 41 stops output of the V winning jackpot game signal (see FIG. 296(A)) as the identification signal output from terminal 3 of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3817). Then, the MPU 41 sets the V winning jackpot game signal output stop flag to OFF (step S3818), and ends the signal output process.

<Step S3819>
If the V winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to OFF (step S3816: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special symbol fluctuation stop signal output flag, which outputs a special symbol fluctuation stop signal as an identification signal from terminal 4 of the external output terminal board 101, is set to ON (step S3819). The special symbol fluctuation stop signal output flag is set to ON when the special symbol game is terminated in step S1909 of the special symbol game control process in FIG.

If the special chart change stop signal output flag is set to on (step S3819: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3820; if the special chart change stop signal output flag is set to off (step S3819: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3823.

<Step S3820>
If the special pattern variation stop signal output flag is set to ON (step S3819: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special pattern variation stop signal output flag, which indicates that the special pattern variation stop signal is being output, to ON (step S3820), and proceeds to step S3821. The special pattern variation stop signal output flag is referenced in step S3823 of the signal output process to determine whether or not to stop the output of the special pattern variation stop signal.

<Steps S3821 and S3822>
In step S3821, the MPU 41 starts outputting a special pattern variation stop signal as an identification signal from the fourth terminal of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3821). Then, the MPU 41 sets the special pattern variation stop signal output flag to OFF (step S3822), and ends the signal output process.

<Step S3823>
If the special chart change stop signal output flag is set to off (step S3819: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the special chart change stop signal output flag, which indicates that the special chart change stop signal is being output, is set to on (step S3823).

If the special chart change stop signal output flag is set to on (step S3823: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3824; if the special chart change stop signal output flag is set to off (step S3823: No), the signal output process ends.

<Steps S3824 and S3825>
If the special pattern variation stop signal output flag is set to ON (step S3823: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the output of the special pattern variation stop signal as the identification signal output from terminal 4 of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3824). Then, the MPU 41 sets the special pattern variation stop signal output flag to OFF (step S3825) and terminates the signal output process. That is, in this embodiment, the special pattern variation stop signal is output from the execution of step S3820 of the previously executed signal output process until the execution of step S3824 of the next signal output process. In other words, the output period of the special pattern variation stop signal corresponds to or approximately corresponds to the execution cycle of the main process of FIG. 300, and the special pattern variation stop signal is output as a pulse signal having a pulse width of, for example, 2 msec or approximately 2 msec.

Of course, when the special pattern variation stop signal is output as a pulse signal, the pulse width does not have to be 2 msec or approximately 2 msec, and it may have another pulse width, for example, an integer multiple or approximately an integer multiple of two or more of the execution cycle of the main processing of FIG. 300. Furthermore, the special pattern variation stop signal may be output as a signal other than a pulse signal.

[Processing of the voice and lamp control device 5]
In this embodiment, some steps of the command determination process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 are different from those in the first embodiment described above.

[Command Determination Process]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, processing is performed to execute background effects (stage effects) corresponding to various game states (e.g., jackpot game state, probability variable game state, time-limited game state A, time-limited game state B, and normal game state) as game state information displayed behind decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341 serving as display means during special symbol game play, and processing is also performed to execute a ceiling remaining number reset effect indicating that the number of remaining times for ceiling activation has been reset as game state information on the symbol display unit 341 serving as display means when the V prize jackpot game ends. Here, FIGS. 322 to 324 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the command determination process of this embodiment. The output method used when the symbol display unit 341 displays images as output information is primarily the display of moving images.

<Step S3901>
322, in the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received (step S3901). If a command has been received (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3902, and if a command has not been received (step S3901: No), the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3902>
When a command is received (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special jackpot game start command (step S3902). The special jackpot game start command is a command indicating the start of a special jackpot game as a big profit game, and is set when a jackpot game is started in step S3404 of the special jackpot game control process of FIG. 310 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is a special jackpot game start command (step S3902: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3903; if the received command is not a special jackpot game start command (step S3902: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3905.

<Steps S3903 and S3904>
If a special jackpot game start command is received (step S3902: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the special jackpot game presentation setting process (step S3903), sets the jackpot game in progress flag to on (step S3904), indicating that the special jackpot game is currently being played, and terminates the command determination process.

The jackpot game in progress flag is referenced to control the jackpot game presentation in the jackpot game presentation control process executed in step S2705 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. 42 (see step S3201 in FIG. 54). The jackpot game presentation control process of this embodiment is similar to the jackpot game presentation control process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 54), so a detailed description will be omitted.

Here, Figure 325 shows an example of a special jackpot game presentation displayed on the symbol display unit 341, which serves as a display means.

Figure 325 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the opening effect of the special symbol jackpot game effect displayed on the symbol display unit 341. As shown in Figure 325 (A), in the opening effect, when the special symbol game, which is a small-profit game as a specific period game in which the special symbol is variably displayed for a specific period, ends on the symbol display unit 341, a notification display corresponding to the newly set game state being a special symbol jackpot game state is executed based on the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery notified by the special symbol game being a jackpot. Specifically, in the opening effect of this embodiment, the symbol display unit 341 displays a text image of "jackpot," which is game state information, and also displays the number of consecutive jackpots (a text image of "Xth time").

Figure 325 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round game presentation of a special jackpot game presentation displayed on the symbol display unit 341. As shown in Figure 325 (B), in a round game presentation, the symbol display unit 341 displays a notification that a round game is being played and indicates which round of round game the round game is in the open/close execution mode. Specifically, in the round game presentation of this embodiment, the symbol display unit 341 displays a text image of "ROUND X" indicating the number of rounds being played in the jackpot game, and also displays an image relating to the number of game balls (number of balls paid out) in the jackpot game ("800/1200" indicating the current number of balls paid out relative to the number of balls that can be won in the jackpot game, and a text image of "TOTAL 3800" indicating the total number of balls paid out in the jackpot streak including the jackpot game).

Figure 325 (C) is a diagram showing an example of the ending presentation of the special jackpot game presentation displayed on the symbol display unit 341. As shown in Figure 325 (C), in the ending presentation, the symbol display unit 341 indicates the end of the jackpot game and clearly indicates the transition destination of the game state after the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, in the ending presentation of this embodiment, the symbol display unit 341 displays a notification image of the text "Entering XX RUSH" as game state information when transitioning to a special jackpot game state, and displays a notification image of the text "Entering XX mode" as game state information when transitioning to a time-saving game state. In addition, in the ending presentation, instead of or in addition to the example shown, it is also possible to display a text image of "JACKPOT END" indicating that the jackpot game has ended, a text image of "RUSH X times" indicating the number of jackpot games including the jackpot game, and a text image of "△△△△ balls" indicating the total number of balls dispensed in the jackpot series including the jackpot game.

<Step S3905>
If the received command is not a special jackpot game start command (step S3902: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening start command (step S3905). The opening start command is a command indicating that the opening of the special jackpot game is to be started, and is set when the opening is to be started in step S3408 of the special jackpot game control process of FIG. 310 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is an opening start command (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3906; if the received command is not an opening start command (step S3905: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3907.

<Step S3906>
If an opening start command is received (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 52 sets an opening effect start flag to ON (step S3906) and terminates the command determination process. The opening effect start flag is a flag that starts the opening effect of a special jackpot game as a big profit game, and is referenced in step S3202 of the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 54 to determine whether or not to start the opening effect.

<Step S3907>
If the received command is not an opening start command (step S3905: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening end command (step S3907). The opening end command is a command indicating that the opening of the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set when the opening is to be ended in step S3414 in the special jackpot game control process of FIG. 311 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is an opening end command (step S3907: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3908; if the received command is not an opening end command (step S3907: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3909.

<Step S3908>
If an opening end command is received (step S3907: Yes), the MPU 51 sets an opening effect end flag to ON (step S3908) and ends the command determination process. The opening effect end flag is a flag that ends the opening effect of a jackpot game, and is referenced in step S3205 of the jackpot game effect control process of Figure 54 to determine whether or not to end the opening effect.

<Step S3909>
If the received command is not an opening end command (step S3907: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command (step S3909). The round game start command indicates the start of a round game in the opening/closing execution mode and indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time, and is set when a round game in the opening/closing execution mode is to be started in step S3417 of the special chart jackpot game control process of FIG. 311 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is a round game start command (step S3909: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3910; if the received command is not a round game start command (step S3909: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3912.

<Steps S3910 and S3911>
When a round game start command is received (step S3909: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a round game effect start flag to ON (step S3910), sets round number information indicating the number of rounds in the round game in the RAM 512 (step S3911), and ends the command determination process. The round game effect start flag is referenced in step S3208 of the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 54 to determine whether or not to start each round game effect in the open/close execution mode effect.

<Step S3912>
If the received command is not a round game start command (step S3909: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command (step S3912). The round game end command is a command indicating that the round game in the open/close execution mode is to be ended, and is set when the round game is to be ended in step S3429 in the special chart jackpot game control process of FIG. 312 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is a round game end command (step S3912: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3913; if the received command is not a round game end command (step S3912: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3914.

<Step S3913>
If the round game end command is received (step S3912: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S3913) and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referenced when determining whether or not to end the round game effect in step S3211 of the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 54.

<Step S3914>
If the received command is not a round game end command (step S3912: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval start command (step S3914). The interval start command is a command indicating the start of an interval between round games in the open/close execution mode, and is set when the interval is started in step S3433 of the special chart jackpot game control process of FIG. 312 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

Here, if the received command is an interval start command (step S3914: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3915; if the received command is not an interval start command (step S3914: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3916.

<Step S3915>
If the received command is an interval start command (step S3914: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect start flag to ON (step S3915) and ends the command determination process. The interval effect start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to start the interval effect in step S3214 of the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 54.

<Step S3916>
If the received command is not an interval start command (step S3914: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an interval end command (step S3916). The interval end command is a command indicating the end of the interval between rounds of play in the open/close execution mode, and is set when the interval is to be ended in step S3439 of the special jackpot game control process of FIG. 313 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

Here, if the received command is an interval end command (step S3916: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3917; if the received command is not an interval end command (step S3916: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3918 in FIG. 323.

<Step S3917>
If the received command is an interval end command (step S3916: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect end flag to ON (step S3917) and ends the command determination process. The interval effect end flag is referenced when determining whether or not to end the interval effect in step S3217 of the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 54.

<Step S3918>
If the received command is not an interval end command (step S3916: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command (step S3918), as shown in Fig. 323. The ending start command is a command indicating the start of an ending in a jackpot game, and is set when starting an ending in step S3442 in the special jackpot game control process of Fig. 31 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

Here, if the received command is an ending start command (step S3918: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3919; if the received command is not an ending start command (step S3918: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3920.

<Step S3919>
If the received command is an ending start command (step S3918: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag to ON (step S3919) and ends the command determination process. The ending effect start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to start the ending effect in step S3220 of the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 54.

<Step S3920>
If the received command is not an ending start command (step S3918: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending end command (step S3920). The ending end command is a command indicating that the ending of the jackpot game is to end, and is set when the ending is to be ended in step S3448 of the special jackpot game control process of FIG. 313 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

Here, if the received command is an ending end command (step S3920: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3921; if the received command is not an ending end command (step S3920: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3922.

<Step S3921>
If the received command is an ending end command (step S3920: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect end flag to ON (step S3921) and ends the command determination process. The ending effect end flag is referenced when determining whether or not to end the ending effect in step S3223 of the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 54.

<Step S3922>
If the received command is not an ending end command (step S3920: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special jackpot game end command (step S3922). The special jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the special jackpot game is to be ended, and is set when the special jackpot game is to be ended in step S3450 of the special jackpot game control process of FIG. 310 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

Here, if the received command is a special jackpot game end command (step S3922: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3923; if the received command is not a special jackpot game end command (step S3922: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3924.

<Step S3923>
If the received command is a command to end the special jackpot game (step S3922: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that the special jackpot game as a big profit game is currently being executed, to off (step S3923), and terminates the command determination process.

<Steps S3924 and S3925>
If the received command is not a special jackpot game end command (step S3922: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a probability variable game state command indicating a transition to a probability variable game state (step S3924). The probability variable game state command is set in step S3722-1 in the game state transition process of FIG. 316 when a transition to a probability variable game state occurs.

If the MPU 51 receives a high probability game state command (step S3924: Yes), it sets the high probability game state flag, indicating that the game is in high probability game state, to ON (step S3925), and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 does not receive a high probability game state command (step S3924: No), it proceeds to step S3926.

<Steps S3926 and S3927>
If the MPU 51 has not received the probability variable game state command (step S3924: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a time-shortened game state command indicating that the game has transitioned to the time-shortened game state as the second profit game state control (step S3926). The time-shortened game state command is set in step S3724-1 in the game state transition process of FIG. 316 when the game has transitioned to the time-shortened game state.

If the MPU 51 receives the time-shortened gaming state command a (step S3926: Yes), it sets the time-shortened gaming state flag, indicating that the time-shortened gaming state is a, to ON (step S3927) and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 does not receive the time-shortened gaming state command a (step S3926: No), it proceeds to step S3928.

<Steps S3928 to S3930>
If the time-shortened gaming state command a has not been received (step S3926: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a time-shortened gaming state command b indicating that the game has transitioned to the time-shortened gaming state b, which is the second profit gaming state control (step S3928). The time-shortened gaming state command b is set in step S3727-1 in the game state transition process of FIG. 317 when the game has transitioned to the time-shortened gaming state b.

If the MPU 51 receives the time-shortened game state command b (step S3928: Yes), it sets the time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game is in the time-shortened game state b on (step S3929), sets the normal game state flag indicating that the game is in the normal game state off (step S3930), and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 does not receive the time-shortened game state command b (step S3928: No), it proceeds to step S3931.

<Steps S3931 to S3933>
If the time-shortened gaming state command has not been received (step S3928: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a normal gaming state command indicating a transition to the normal gaming state, which is the first-profit gaming state control (step S3931). The normal gaming state command is set in step S3732-1 of FIG. 318 or step S3738-1 of FIG. 319 in the gaming state transition process when a transition to the normal gaming state has occurred.

When the MPU 51 receives a normal game state command (step S3931: Yes), it sets the normal game state flag indicating that the game is in the normal game state to ON (step S3932), and sets the other game state flag corresponding to the game state before transitioning to the normal game state (a time-saving game state flag or b time-saving game state) to OFF (step S3933), and terminates the command determination process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a normal game state command (step S3931: No), it transitions to step S3934 in FIG. 324.

<Steps S3934 and S3919>
If the normal game state command has not been received (step S3931: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command (step S3934), as shown in Fig. 324. The special symbol variation pattern command is a command including the variation display time of the special symbol in the special symbol game to be started, the result of the jackpot lottery, etc., and is set in step S2105 of the special symbol variation start processing in Fig. 307 when the special symbol variation starts (the special symbol game starts).

If the MPU 51 receives a special chart variation pattern command (step S3934: Yes), it proceeds to step S3935. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 does not receive a special chart variation pattern command (step S3934: No), it proceeds to step S3943.

<Step S3935>
When the special symbol variation pattern command is received (step S3934: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a normal game state flag indicating that the game is in a normal game state is set to ON (step S3935). When the game is shifted to the normal game state, the normal game state flag is set to ON in step S3932 of FIG. 324 in the command determination process.

If the normal game state flag is set to on (step S3935: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3936; if the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3935: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3937.

<Step S3936>
If the normal game state flag is set to on (step S3935: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a normal game state presentation setting process corresponding to the normal game state (step S3936), and terminates the command determination process.

Here, in the normal game mode effect setting process, the effects to be executed in special game mode are set by executing processing similar to steps S3103 to S3106 in the command determination process of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above, based on the variable display time of the special symbol included in the special symbol variation pattern command, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, etc. Furthermore, in the normal game mode effect setting process, a unique background image (background effect, stage effect) indicating that the game is in normal game mode is set. Therefore, the player can identify that the game is in normal game mode based on the notification and display of game mode information such as the background image (background effect, stage effect) unique to the normal game mode.

<Steps S3937 and S3938>
If the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S3935: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the probability variable game state flag indicating the probability variable game state is set to ON (step S3937). When the probability variable game state is entered, the probability variable game state flag is set to ON in step S3925 of FIG. 323 in the command determination process.

If the high probability game state flag is set to ON (step S3937: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the high probability game state presentation setting process (step S3938) and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the high probability game state flag is set to OFF (step S3937: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3939.

Here, in the probability variable game state effect setting process, the effects to be executed in the special game are set by executing processes similar to steps S3103 to S3106 in the command determination process of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above, based on the variable display time of the special symbol included in the special symbol variation pattern command, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, etc. Furthermore, in the probability variable game state effect setting process, a unique background image (background effect, stage effect) indicating the probability variable game state is set, and a text image indicating the current probability variable game state (for example, a text image of "○○RUSH") is set (see FIG. 326 (B1)). Therefore, the player can identify that the game state is in the probability variable game state based on the notification and display of game state information such as the background image (background effect, stage effect) unique to the probability variable game state and the text image indicating the current probability variable game state. Note that in the probability variable game state, the symbol display unit 341 may also display the number of consecutive jackpots and the number of balls dispensed.

As mentioned above, when the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery, which is executed when a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or when a gaming ball enters the second winning slot 315 by activating the electric device 315b based on the entry of a gaming ball into the through gate 317, is a probability jackpot, the game enters the probability jackpot mode after the execution of the special symbol game as a specific period game, which is a small-profit game in which the special symbol is displayed variably for a specific period. The game enters the probability jackpot mode after the probability jackpot game ends. Therefore, the symbol display unit 341 displays game status information as the ending image of the probability jackpot game (see FIG. 326 (A1)), and then, when the game enters the probability jackpot mode, displays game status information indicating that the game is in the probability jackpot mode (see FIG. 326 (B1)).

<Steps S3939 and S3940>
If the probability variable game state flag is set to OFF (step S3937: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the time-shortened game state flag indicating the time-shortened game state is set to ON (step S3939). When the time-shortened game state is entered, the time-shortened game state flag is set to ON in step S3724 of FIG. 316 in the game state transition process.

If the time-shortened game state flag a is set to on (step S3939: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the time-shortened game state presentation setting process a (step S3940) and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the time-shortened game state flag a is set to off (step S3939: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3941.

Here, in the a-time-saving game state effect setting process, the effects to be executed in the special symbol game are set by executing processes similar to steps S3103 to S3106 in the command determination process of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above, based on the variable display time of the special symbol included in the special symbol variable pattern command, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, etc. Furthermore, in the a-time-saving game state effect setting process, a unique background image (background effect, stage effect) indicating the a-time-saving game state is set, and a text image indicating the a-time-saving game state (e.g., a text image of "XX mode"), as well as the remaining number of special symbol game plays that can be executed in the a-time-saving game state (e.g., a text image of "100 time-saving plays remaining") are set (see FIG. 326 (B2)). Therefore, the player can identify that they are in the a-time-saving game state based on the notification and display of game state information, such as the background image (background effect, stage effect) unique to the a-time-saving game state and the text image indicating the a-time-saving game state. In addition, during the probability variation game state, the symbol display unit 341 may display the number of consecutive jackpots and the number of balls dispensed.

As mentioned above, when the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery, which is executed when a game ball enters first winning slot 314 or when a game ball enters second winning slot 315 by activating electric device 315b based on the game ball entering through gate 317 of the electric device, is a normal jackpot, the game transitions to the normal jackpot after the execution of the special symbol game as a specific period game, which is a small-profit game in which the special symbol is displayed variably for a specific period. The game transitions to the special symbol game state after the special symbol game ends. Therefore, on the symbol display unit 341, after the game status information is displayed as the ending image of the normal jackpot game (see FIG. 326 (A2)), if the game transitions to time-limited game state a, game status information indicating that time-limited game state a is in progress is displayed (see FIG. 326 (B2)).

In addition, the time-saving play state presentation setting process for the time-saving play state a determines whether or not this is the last special symbol play in the time-saving play state a. If this is the last special symbol play in the time-saving play state a, and the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery announced by that special symbol play is a miss, at the end of that special symbol play as a specific period play, an a-time-saving end display is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as game state information indicating the end of the time-saving play state a (see FIG. 327 (A)). In this embodiment, for example, a text image of "RUSH end" is displayed to indicate the end of the time-saving play state a. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time-saving play state a end display is also used as a result screen for consecutive jackpot wins, and the results of the consecutive jackpot wins, such as a text image of "RUSH Y times" indicating the number of consecutive jackpot wins and a text image of "7,500 balls" indicating the number of balls dispensed in that consecutive jackpot win, are displayed.

<Steps S3941 and S3942>
If the time-shortened gaming state flag a is set to OFF (step S3939: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the time-shortened gaming state flag b, which indicates that the game is in the time-shortened gaming state b, which is the first profit gaming state control, is set to ON (step S3941). When the game is shifted to the time-shortened gaming state b, the time-shortened gaming state flag b is set to ON in step S3727 of FIG. 317 in the game state shift processing.

If the b time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S3941: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the b time-shortened game state presentation setting process (step S3942) and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, if the b time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3941: No), the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process.

Here, in the b time-saving game state effect setting process, the effects to be executed in the special symbol game are set by executing processes similar to steps S3103 to S3106 in the command determination process of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above, based on the variable display time of the special symbol included in the special symbol variable pattern command, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, etc. Furthermore, in the b time-saving game state effect setting process, a unique background image (background effect, stage effect) indicating the b time-saving game state is set, and a text image indicating the b time-saving game state (e.g., a text image of "Ceiling RUSH") as well as the remaining number of special symbol games that can be executed in the b time-saving game state (e.g., a text image of "1000 games remaining") are set (see FIG. 327 (B1)). Therefore, the player can identify that they are in the b time-saving game state based on the notification and display of game state information, such as the background image (background effect, stage effect) unique to the b time-saving game state and the text image indicating the b time-saving game state. In addition, during the probability variation game state, the symbol display unit 341 may display the number of consecutive jackpots and the number of balls dispensed.

As mentioned above, when the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery, which is executed when a game ball enters first winning slot 314 or when a game ball enters second winning slot 315 by activating electric device 315b based on the game ball entering through gate 317 of the electric device, is a normal jackpot, the game transitions to the normal jackpot after the execution of the special symbol game as a specific period game, which is a small-profit game in which the special symbol is displayed variably for a specific period. The game transitions to the special symbol game state after the special symbol game ends. Therefore, on the symbol display unit 341, after the game status information is displayed as the ending image of the normal jackpot game (see FIG. 326 (A2)), if the game transitions to time-limited game state a, game status information indicating that time-limited game state a is in progress is displayed (see FIG. 326 (B2)).

<Steps S3943 and S3944>
If the received command is not a special symbol variation pattern command (step S3934: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command indicating that the ceiling activation remaining number counter has been set (step S3943). The ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command is set in step S3748 of FIG. 320 in the game state transition process when the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which indicates the number of special symbol games remaining until the b time-saving game state is generated, is reset based on the execution of a V winning jackpot game, which is a small-profit game.

If the received command is a ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command indicating that the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which indicates the number of times the special game remains until the b time-saving game state is triggered, has been reset (step S3943: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3944. On the other hand, if the received command is not a ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command (step S3941: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3945.

<Step S3944>
If the received command is a ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command (step S3943: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a ceiling activation remaining number reset display on the symbol display unit 341, indicating that the ceiling activation remaining number has been reset (step S3944). For example, in this embodiment, a text image of "ceiling activation remaining number reset" is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 327 (B2)). Therefore, the player can recognize that the ceiling activation remaining number has been reset based on the notification display of the ceiling activation remaining number reset display, which indicates that the ceiling activation remaining number has been reset, as game status information.

Here, the remaining ceiling activation counter is reset after the V entry jackpot game, which is a specific period game that is a small-profit game, ends. Furthermore, the V entry jackpot game is executed based on the special electric V entry port 383, which is a specific ball entry area and serves as the second ball entry means, in the special electric start game based on the game ball entering the special electric start port 37, which serves as the first ball entry means. In other words, by executing a weak right-hand hit game that shoots the game ball to the left of the separation section 393 in the right area of the game board 31, which is the second direction, the player can trigger a V entry jackpot game and intentionally reset the remaining ceiling activation count, and can confirm that the remaining ceiling activation count has been reset based on the remaining ceiling activation count reset display, which serves as game status information, on the pattern display section 341.

The remaining number of times to activate the ceiling may be reset and displayed for a certain period of time after the V-winning jackpot game has ended. The remaining number of times to activate the ceiling may also be displayed on the standby screen (demo screen) to which the player is transitioned when neither the special symbol game nor the special symbol jackpot game is being played, or may be displayed when the player performs a specified operation on the operation button 20 or the selection button 21A. This allows the player to know that the remaining number of times to activate the ceiling has been reset before starting play on the gaming machine 10.

Players' knowledge and understanding of the gaming machine's 10 functions and gameplay methods may vary. For example, some players may fully understand that the gaming machine 10 has a ceiling function that triggers the b-time-saving game state, a high-frequency support mode, after a predetermined number of special symbol plays; that the gaming machine 10 has a ceiling activation remaining number reset function that sets the number of special symbol plays required to trigger the b-time-saving game state to a maximum value when a game ball enters the special symbol V entry port 383 of the special symbol large winning device 38; and that this ceiling activation remaining number reset function can be activated by weak right-hand play to cause a game ball to flow down the second flow path 392. However, it is anticipated that there may be players who do not fully understand some of the gaming machine's 10 functions and gameplay methods. Because the ceiling function is widely available, it is believed that many players understand it, and it is common for gaming halls to clearly indicate that a gaming machine has a ceiling function by using notations such as "Yu-Time." On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 has a function for resetting the remaining number of times that the ceiling is activated by weak right-hand play, but such a distinctive function is difficult for players to immediately understand until it becomes widely used by players, and some players may play without knowing about the function or how to reset the remaining number of times that the ceiling is activated.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine 10 allows the player to freely reset the remaining number of times to activate the ceiling by using a weak right-hand play that launches the gaming ball to the left of the separation section 393, causing the gaming ball to flow down the second flow path 392. However, it is possible for a gaming ball to flow down the second flow path 392 against the player's will due to a poor launch or interference between gaming balls, causing the remaining number of times to activate the ceiling. Therefore, a player who does not understand the gaming machine 10's remaining number of times to activate the ceiling, or how to reset the remaining number of times to activate the ceiling, will not understand what has happened based solely on the remaining number of times to activate the ceiling (see Figure 327 (B2)). As a result, they may continue playing while mistakenly believing that the remaining number of times to execute the special game required to activate the b time-saving game state is the number before the remaining number of times to activate the ceiling. In this case, even though the player has executed the intended special symbol game, the ceiling will not be activated (the time-saving game state b will occur). This can lead to the player becoming distrustful of the gaming machine 10 and the display on the data display 103 (displaying the number of times the special symbol game has been executed since the normal jackpot game ended), which can lead to a loss of interest in the gaming machine 10 and a distrust of the gaming hall, which is undesirable. To solve this problem, instead of or in addition to the ceiling activation remaining number reset display (see FIG. 327 (B2)), it is preferable to display, for example, on the symbol display unit 341, a message indicating that the ceiling activation remaining number has been reset by the player's own action. Specifically, the symbol display unit 341 could clearly indicate, using text images or moving or still images including an image of the special symbol winning device 38, that the ceiling activation remaining number has been reset based on the game ball entering the special symbol V winning slot 383 of the special symbol winning device 38. Furthermore, not only when the remaining number of times to activate the ceiling is reset, but also when the special game is being played or when the demo screen is not playing, it is also possible to provide a game explanation in advance that the remaining number of times to activate the ceiling will be reset when a game ball enters the special electric V winning port 383 of the special electric large winning device 38.

<Step S3945>
If the received command is not a ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command (step S3941: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on another command (step S3945) and terminates the command determination processing.

As described above, in this invention, when a specific period of play, which is different from the special game as a profit game, ends based on a game ball entering a specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for a specific period in a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a variable symbol game is the first control state that does not correspond to a specific game state, the control state is changed from the first control state to the second control state that corresponds to the specific game state. In other words, in this invention, even when the control state of the auxiliary means is the first control state that does not correspond to a specific game state, it is possible to generate a specific game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is the second control state by allowing a game ball to enter the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open and playing for a specific period. This makes it possible to generate a specific game state again even after the specific game state has ended, preventing the gaming machine from being left unused because the specific game state has ended and no specific game state has occurred, and suppressing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

More specifically, in this embodiment, a player may be awarded gaming profits in the form of a special jackpot game, which is a large-profit game, and a V-winning jackpot game, which is a small-profit game. The special jackpot game as a large-profit game is executed when the result of the special jackpot lottery, which is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, which serves as the starting means, is a jackpot, and is a highly profitable game for the player, as it allows the player to win a large number of game balls by multiple opening and closing of the variable winning slot 316, which serves as the third ball entry means. On the other hand, the V-entry jackpot game as a small-profit game is executed when a game ball enters the special electric start port 37 as the first ball entry means, and the special electric V-entry port 383 as a specific ball entry area provided by the second ball entry means, which is opened by the operation of the special electric opening/closing door 382 as the opening/closing means provided by the second ball entry means, in the special electric start game executed based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric start port 37 as the first ball entry means. Although game balls can enter the special electric large-entry port 381, the number of game balls that can be won by entering the special electric large-entry port 381 is small, so the game is a game with little profit for the player. Also, in this embodiment, the special electric start port 37, the special electric large-entry port 381, and the special electric V-entry port 383 are located at positions where game balls flowing down the second flow path 392 as a specific flow path set in the right area of the game board 31 can enter. In other words, a V-winning jackpot game as a small-profit game can be executed by shooting a game ball into the second flow path 392.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a V-winning jackpot game as a small-profit game ends, a maximum value is set as the number of special symbol games as a variable game that can trigger the b-time-saving game state, which is the first-profit game state control. Here, the b-time-saving game state, which is the first-profit game state control, is a time-saving game state with a specified upper limit (e.g., 1,000 times) to which the state is transitioned when a predetermined number of special symbol games (e.g., 1,000 times) are executed without a special symbol jackpot game as a large-profit game being executed in the low-frequency support mode, which is the second auxiliary state control in which the opening and closing frequency of the electric device 315b as an auxiliary means for opening and closing the second winning opening 315 (the frequency with which the electric device 315b supports the ball entering the second winning opening 315) is low. In other words, in this embodiment, a maximum value is set as the number of special symbol games that can trigger a transition to the b-time-saving game state, which is the first-profit game state control, by the player continuing to shoot game balls toward the second flow path 392.

In this embodiment, a maximum value is set as the number of special symbol games that can be played to generate the b time-shortened game state, which is the first profit game state control, by the player continuing to shoot game balls toward the second flow path 392. Therefore, if the maximum number of special symbol games is played in the b time-shortened game state, which is the first profit game state control, without a special symbol jackpot game being played as a large profit game, the b time-shortened game state is transitioned to the normal game state, and the first auxiliary state control is entered, in which the b time-shortened game state, which is the first profit game state control, does not occur.However, by continuing to shoot game balls toward the second flow path 392, the player can intentionally generate a state in the second auxiliary state control, which is the first profit game state control, that can generate the b time-shortened game state, which is the first profit game state control. In this way, in this embodiment, the player can generate the second auxiliary state control state that can generate the b time-saving game state, which is the first profitable game state control, thereby improving the operating rate of gaming machines that have completed the b time-saving game state, which is the first profitable game state control, without executing a special jackpot game as a big profit game.

In addition, in this embodiment, a maximum value is set as the number of special symbol games that can trigger the b time-saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, by the player continuing to shoot game balls toward the second flow path 392. Therefore, if the player ends play in the second auxiliary state control, which can trigger the b time-saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, the player can clear the number of special symbol games played by the player in the second auxiliary state control, which can trigger the b time-saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, by continuing to shoot game balls toward the second flow path 392 before ending play, thereby executing a V prize winning jackpot game as a small profit game. This allows the player to prevent the disadvantage suffered by the player as a result of playing in the second auxiliary state control, which can trigger the b time-saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, from becoming an advantage for others. In other words, the player invests time, money, effort, etc. in the number of special symbol games played in the second auxiliary state control state, which can generate the time-saving game state b, which is the first profitable game state control, and by continuing to shoot game balls toward the second flow path 392, the player can intentionally prevent such investment from benefiting others who play on the gaming machine later (i.e., from becoming the target of so-called hyena behavior).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to thirteenth embodiments described above are possible, to the extent applicable.

Furthermore, in each embodiment, it is also possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments to the extent applicable.

[Summary of the Invention]
Below, an outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described. Note that, for the sake of convenience, reference numerals may be used to explain the correspondence between each reference numeral and each embodiment, but the invention related to the reference numeral is not limited to the specific configurations to which the reference numerals are assigned. Furthermore, it is possible to select and combine the respective configurations and processing functions described below in any desired manner.

[Appendix A1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that establishes the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a restricted state in which game balls are restricted from entering,
The gaming machine is
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) is a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315).
The notification game execution means
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) consecutively in the first notification game (first special symbol game) a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific effect image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special game games that are executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific effect image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special symbol game executed for the reservation of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special symbol game),
A gaming machine characterized in that when a specific condition is met in the specific first notification game (first special pattern game), the specific effect image (e.g., an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (e.g., an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, a specific effect image is continuously displayed in a specific first notification game that is executed after the completion of a predetermined second notification game that is executed after the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning port in the first determination state, and is triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning port. If a specific condition is met in the specific first notification game, the specific effect image can be switched to a predetermined effect image. In this way, a specific effect image is continuously displayed in a specific first notification game that is executed after the completion of a predetermined second notification game that is executed after the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning port in the first determination state, and is triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning port. If a specific condition is met in the specific first notification game, the specific effect image can be switched to a predetermined effect image. This makes it possible to select whether to continue displaying the specific effect image or to switch to the predetermined effect image based on whether a specific condition is met. For example, if the continued execution of a specific effect image does not cause any inconvenience, the specific effect image can be continued, and if the continued execution of a specific effect image causes any inconvenience, it is possible to switch to a predetermined effect image and execute it. As a result, inconvenience caused by the continued execution of a specific effect image can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, it is possible to select whether to continue displaying a specific effect image or to switch to displaying a predetermined effect image based on whether a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first determination state. This reduces the possibility that when a specific effect image ends and a predetermined effect image is displayed, the player will feel uncomfortable when the specific effect image resumes, or conversely, will feel uncomfortable with the presentation of the game as it progresses because the specific effect image does not resume, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the player feeling uncomfortable with the presentation of the game as it progresses.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, if a specific condition is not met in a specific first notification game in the first determination state, the specific effect image continues to be displayed, so that the specific effect image displayed in the first notification game can also be useful in the second notification game.

[Appendix A2]
A bonus awarding means (41) is provided for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific effect image is displayed consecutively in the notification game a specific number of times or more,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1, characterized in that the specific conditions include no bonus being granted to the player when the specific presentation image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game more than the specific number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2, the specific conditions include the fact that no special benefit will be awarded to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specific number of notification games or more. In this way, by including the fact that no special benefit will be awarded to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specific number of notification games or more, if the specific effect image continues to be displayed when the specific conditions are not met, it is possible to prevent the specific effect image from being displayed consecutively for a specific number of notification games or more, even though no special benefit will be awarded to the player. This prevents a situation from occurring in which a special benefit is not awarded to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a special benefit will be awarded.

[Appendix A3]
The permissible state of the second winning port (315) includes a first permissible state (short opening) in which the time during which the second winning port (315) is in the permissible state is a first time, and a second permissible state (long opening) in which the time during which the second winning port (315) is in the permissible state is longer than the first time,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A2 is characterized in that the specific condition includes a gaming ball entering the second winning port (315) that is in the first permissive state (short open) during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific presentation image is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A3, this is the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning slot, which is in the first permissible state during the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed. In this way, by having a gaming ball enter the second winning slot, which is in the first permissible state during the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed, if the specific effect image is continuously displayed by opening the second winning slot in the first permissible state, this prevents the specific effect image from being displayed consecutively for more than a predetermined number of notification games, even though no bonus is being awarded to the player. This prevents a situation from occurring in which a bonus is not awarded to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by a display during the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A2, characterized in that the specific condition includes that a specific number of game balls greater than 0 enters the second winning slot (315) that is in the allowed state during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A4, this includes the entry of a specific number of game balls (greater than 0) into the second winning slot, which is set to an allowable state during the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means. In this way, by including the entry of a specific number of game balls (greater than 0) into the second winning slot, which is set to an allowable state during the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means, if the number of second notification games executed in the allowable state in response to game balls entering the second winning slot is less than a specific number (greater than 0), causing the specific effect image to be continuously displayed, this prevents the specific effect image from being displayed consecutively for more than a predetermined number of notification games, even though no bonus is being awarded to the player. This prevents a situation in which a bonus is not awarded to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by a display in the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix A5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A2 to Appendix A4, wherein the benefit is the execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A5, the bonus is the execution of a special game. By having the bonus be the execution of a special game, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a special game is not executed despite the notification game clearly indicating that a special game will be executed.

[Appendix A6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols that are variably displayed on the display means (341),
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A5, wherein the specific effect image is an image of the combination of the symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A6, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, because the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This also makes it easy for the player to understand that specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix A1 to Appendix A6, characterized in that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A7, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image will be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to the special gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix A8]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A7, characterized in that in the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game), the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A8, if a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first determination state, the specific effect image can be switched to a predetermined effect image in a specific second notification game. In this way, if a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game, the specific effect image can be switched to a predetermined effect image in the specific second notification game. This prevents inconveniences from occurring in the specific second notification game due to the specific effect image being continuously executed when a specific condition is met in the specific first notification game. Furthermore, even if an inconvenience occurs in the first notification game that is resumed after the end of the specific second notification game, the inconvenience can be avoided in advance before the first notification game is executed.

[Appendix A9]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A8 is characterized in that the specified second notification game (second special symbol game) is the second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed after the specific first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A9, the predetermined second notification game is a second notification game that is executed following a specific first notification game in which a specific condition is met. In this way, by the predetermined second notification game being a second notification game that is executed following a specific first notification game in which a specific condition is met, the occurrence of an inconvenience is immediately avoided once it is recognized that continuing to display the specific effect image would cause an inconvenience.

[Appendix A10]
A bonus awarding means (41) is provided for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific effect image is displayed consecutively in the notification game a specific number of times or more,
The specific condition includes that no benefit is given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game the specific number of times or more,
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A9, characterized in that the specified second notification game (second special symbol game) is the second notification game (second special symbol game) of the specified number of times in which the specific presentation image is executed consecutively.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A10, if a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specific number of notification games or more and there is no bonus awarded to the player, and the notification game executed the specific number of times is the second notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the second notification game. In this way, if a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specific number of notification games and there is no bonus awarded to the player, and the notification game executed the specific number of times is the second notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the second notification game, allowing the specific effect image to be displayed for the maximum number of consecutive games. This maximizes the player's anticipation due to the specific effect image being displayed consecutively, thereby reducing the loss of interest in the game caused by the specific effect image being switched to the predetermined effect image, and preventing a loss of interest in the game.

[Appendix A11]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A7, characterized in that in a predetermined first notification game (first special chart game) executed in the specific first notification game, the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A11, if a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first determination state, the specific effect image can be switched to a predetermined effect image in the specified first notification game. In this way, if a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first determination state, the specific effect image can be switched to a predetermined effect image in the specified first notification game, thereby avoiding inconvenience in the first notification game caused by continuing to execute a specific effect image when a specific condition is met.

Furthermore, by switching from a specific effect image to a specific effect image in the first notification game that resumes after the completion of a specific second notification game, a large number of notification games in which specific effect images are displayed consecutively are ensured in cases where the continued execution of specific effect images would cause inconvenience. In this way, by maximizing the number of notification games in which specific effect images are displayed consecutively, players can enjoy the specific effect images to the fullest, even in cases where the continued execution of specific effect images would cause inconvenience due to the fulfillment of specific conditions.

[Appendix A12]
A bonus awarding means (41) is provided for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific effect image is displayed consecutively in the notification game a specific number of times or more,
The specific condition includes that no benefit is given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game the specific number of times or more,
The specific first notification game (first special symbol game) is the specific number of times the specific presentation image is executed consecutively, characterized in that the gaming machine described in Appendix A11.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A12, if a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specific number of notification games or more and there is no bonus awarded to the player, and the notification game executed the specific number of times is the first notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the first notification game. In this way, if a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specific number of notification games and there is no bonus awarded to the player, and the notification game executed the specific number of times is the first notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the first notification game, allowing the specific effect image to be displayed for the maximum number of consecutive games. This maximizes the player's anticipation due to the specific effect image being displayed consecutively, thereby reducing the loss of interest in the game caused by the specific effect image being switched to a predetermined effect image, and preventing a loss of interest in the game.

[Appendix A13]
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A12, wherein the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are set to have the same or substantially the same expectation level.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A13, the degree of expectation that a specific effect image will transition to a special game state is set to be the same or approximately the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image. In this way, by setting the degree of expectation that a specific effect image will transition to a special game state to be the same or approximately the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image, even when the predetermined image displayed on the display means is switched from a specific effect image to a predetermined effect image, the switching of the predetermined image can maintain the player's expectations for the display of the predetermined image without lowering them, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest due to the switching of the predetermined image and preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix A14]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A13, wherein the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -5% to +5%.

[Appendix A15]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A14, wherein the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -2.5% to +2.5%.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes A14 and A15, the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%. In this way, by setting the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%, the player's expectations for the display of the predetermined image can be more appropriately maintained, thereby more appropriately preventing a decrease in the player's interest due to the switching of the predetermined image and more appropriately preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix A16]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A13 to Appendix A15, characterized in that the probability that the specific effect image will be displayed on the display means (341) during the first notification game (first special game) in the first judgment state (normal game state) is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image will be displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A16, the probability that a specific effect image will be displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first determination state is set to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image will be displayed. In this way, by setting the probability that a specific effect image will be displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first determination state to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image will be displayed, inconveniences caused by the continuous display of specific effect images, which have a high probability of causing inconvenience if played continuously, are appropriately avoided.

[Appendix A17]
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A12, wherein the predetermined effect image is set to have a higher expectation level than the specific effect image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A17, the degree of expectation that the predetermined effect image after switching will result in a transition to a special game state is set higher than the degree of expectation that the specific effect image before switching. In this way, by setting the degree of expectation that the predetermined effect image after switching will result in a transition to a special game state higher than the degree of expectation that the specific effect image before switching will result in a transition to a special game state, when the specific image is switched to a specific effect image, the degree of expectation suggested to the player by the switch to the specific effect image is increased. As a result, when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect image will be switched to the predetermined effect image, and when the image is switched to the predetermined effect image, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game while holding high hopes that the result of the transition determination for the notification game in which the predetermined effect image is displayed will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game by switching the predetermined image from a specific effect image to a predetermined effect image.

[Appendix A18]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A17 is characterized in that the difference between the expectation level when the specified presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game and the expectation level when the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game is set to 10% or more.

[Appendix A19]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A18 is characterized in that the difference between the expectation level when the specified presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game and the expectation level when the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game is set to 25% or more.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes A18 and A19, the difference in expectation between the predetermined effect image and the specific effect image is set to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more. In this way, by setting the difference in expectation between the predetermined effect image and the specific effect image to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more, when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the game while looking forward to switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image. Furthermore, when the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, the result of the transition determination for the notification game in which the predetermined effect image is displayed will transition to a special game state, so the player can enjoy the notification game with great anticipation. Therefore, the switching of the predetermined image from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image further enhances the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A20]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A17 to Appendix A19, characterized in that the probability that the specific effect image will be displayed on the display means (341) during the first notification game (first special game) in the first judgment state (normal game state) is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image will be displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A20, the probability that a specific effect image will be displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first determination state is set to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image will be displayed. In this way, by setting the probability that a specific effect image will be displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first determination state to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image will be displayed, the frequency with which the specific effect image will be displayed increases, increasing the opportunities for the player to expect the specific effect image to be switched to the predetermined effect image, further enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Also, by setting the probability that the predetermined effect image after switching is selected low, the frequency with which the predetermined effect image will be displayed decreases, further enhancing the player's enjoyment when the predetermined effect image is displayed, further enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A21]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A20, characterized in that when the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) is switched to the predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect), in an announcement game executed between the announcement game before the switch and the announcement game after the switch, a specific information image different from the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image, which explicitly or suggest specific information, is displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A21, a specific information image that clearly indicates or suggests specific information is displayed in an announcement game that is executed between an announcement game before the predetermined image is switched and an announcement game after the predetermined image is switched. In this way, by displaying a specific information image that clearly indicates or suggests specific information in an announcement game that is executed between an announcement game before the predetermined image is switched and an announcement game after the predetermined image is switched, specific effect images and predetermined effect images are not displayed consecutively in multiple announcement games, and the continuity between the display of the specific effect image and the display of the predetermined effect image is interrupted. This gives the player the illusion that the display of the predetermined effect image was executed independently of the display of the specific effect image after the display of the specific effect image ended, rather than switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image. This makes it appear as if the switch from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image did not occur. This avoids the inconvenience that would arise from the continued execution of specific effect images without the player realizing it.

However, if a switch is made from a specific effect image to a predetermined effect image to avoid the inconvenience that would arise from continuing to execute a specific effect image, the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the switched predetermined effect image is executed will not result in a transition to a special game state. Therefore, when a switch is made from a specific effect image to a predetermined effect image, there is a concern that the player will realize that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the switched predetermined effect image is displayed will not result in a transition to a special game state. Therefore, by disguising it as if a switch from a specific effect image to a predetermined effect image did not occur, it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the switched predetermined effect image is displayed will not result in a transition to a special game state.

[Appendix B1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that establishes the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a restricted state in which game balls are restricted from entering,
The gaming machine is
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) is a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315).
The notification game execution means
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) consecutively in the first notification game (first special symbol game) a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific effect image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special game games that are executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific effect image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special symbol game executed for the reservation of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special symbol game),
When a specific condition is met in the specific first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the predetermined second notification game (second special symbol game), the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, if a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first determination state, the specific effect image can be switched to a predetermined effect image in a specific second notification game. In this way, if a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game, the specific effect image can be switched to a predetermined effect image in the specific second notification game. This prevents inconveniences from occurring in the specific second notification game due to the specific effect image being continuously executed when a specific condition is met in the specific first notification game. Furthermore, even if an inconvenience occurs in the first notification game that is resumed after the end of the specific second notification game, the inconvenience can be avoided in advance before the first notification game is executed.

[Appendix B2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1 is characterized in that the specified second notification game (second special symbol game) is the second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed after the specific first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2, the predetermined second notification game is a second notification game that is executed following a specific first notification game in which a specific condition is met. In this way, by the predetermined second notification game being a second notification game that is executed following a specific first notification game in which a specific condition is met, the occurrence of an inconvenience is immediately avoided once it is recognized that continuing to display the specific effect image would cause an inconvenience.

[Appendix B3]
A bonus awarding means (41) is provided for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific effect image is displayed consecutively in the notification game a specific number of times or more,
The specific condition includes that no benefit is given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game the specific number of times or more,
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1, characterized in that the specified second notification game (second special symbol game) is the second notification game (second special symbol game) for the specified number of times in which the specific presentation image is executed consecutively.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B3, if a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specific number of notification games or more and there is no bonus awarded to the player, and the notification game executed the specific number of times is the second notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the second notification game. In this way, if a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specific number of notification games and there is no bonus awarded to the player, and the notification game executed the specific number of times is the second notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the second notification game, allowing the specific effect image to be displayed for the maximum number of consecutive games. This maximizes the player's anticipation due to the specific effect image being displayed consecutively, thereby reducing the loss of interest in the game caused by the specific effect image being switched to the predetermined effect image, and preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix B4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols on the display means (341),
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix B1 to Appendix B3, wherein the specific effect image is an image of the combination of the symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B4, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, because the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This also makes it easy for the player to understand that specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix B5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix B1 to Appendix B4, characterized in that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B5, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, allowing the player to enjoy the game while hoping that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image will be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, the player can enjoy the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix C1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that establishes the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a restricted state in which game balls are restricted from entering,
The gaming machine is
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) is a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315).
The notification game execution means
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) consecutively in the first notification game (first special symbol game) a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific effect image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special game games that are executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific effect image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special symbol game executed for the reservation of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special symbol game),
When a specific condition is met in the specific first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a predetermined first notification game (first special symbol game) executed in the specific first notification game, the specific presentation image can be switched to the predetermined presentation image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, if a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first determination state, the specific effect image can be switched to a predetermined effect image in the specified first notification game. In this way, if a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first determination state, the specific effect image can be switched to a predetermined effect image in the specified first notification game, thereby avoiding inconveniences in the first notification game caused by continuing to execute a specific effect image when a specific condition is met.

Furthermore, by switching from a specific effect image to a specific effect image in the first notification game that resumes after the completion of a specific second notification game, a large number of notification games in which specific effect images are displayed consecutively are ensured in cases where the continued execution of specific effect images would cause inconvenience. In this way, by maximizing the number of notification games in which specific effect images are displayed consecutively, players can enjoy the specific effect images to the fullest, even in cases where the continued execution of specific effect images would cause inconvenience due to the fulfillment of specific conditions.

[Appendix C2]
A bonus awarding means (41) is provided for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific effect image is displayed consecutively in the notification game a specific number of times or more,
The specific condition includes that no benefit is given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game the specific number of times or more,
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1 is characterized in that the specific first notification game (first special symbol game) is the specific number of first notification games (first special symbol games) in which the specific presentation image is executed consecutively.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C2, if a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specific number of notification games or more and there is no bonus awarded to the player, and the notification game executed the specific number of times is the first notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the first notification game. In this way, if a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specific number of notification games and there is no bonus awarded to the player, and the notification game executed the specific number of times is the first notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the first notification game, allowing the specific effect image to be displayed for the maximum number of consecutive games. This maximizes the player's anticipation due to the specific effect image being displayed consecutively, thereby reducing the loss of interest in the game caused by the specific effect image being switched to a predetermined effect image, and preventing a loss of interest in the game.

[Appendix C3]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols that are variably displayed on the display means (341),
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1 or Appendix C2, wherein the specific effect image is an image of the combination of the symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C3, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, because the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This also makes it easy for the player to understand that specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix C4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix C1 to Appendix C3, characterized in that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C4, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination means's transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination means's transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, allowing the player to enjoy the game while hoping that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image will be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, the player can enjoy the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix D1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that establishes the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a restricted state in which game balls are restricted from entering,
The gaming machine is
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) is a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315).
The notification game execution means
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) consecutively in the first notification game (first special symbol game) a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific effect image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special game games which are executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific effect image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special symbol game executed for the reservation of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special symbol game),
When a specific condition is met in the specific first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image have the same or substantially the same expectation level.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, the degree of expectation that a specific effect image will transition to a special game state is set to be the same or approximately the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image. In this way, by setting the degree of expectation that a specific effect image will transition to a special game state to be the same or approximately the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image, even when the predetermined image displayed on the display means is switched from a specific effect image to a predetermined effect image, the switching of the predetermined image can maintain the player's expectations for the display of the predetermined image without lowering them, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest due to the switching of the predetermined image and preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix D2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix D1 is characterized in that the difference in expectation level between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -5% to +5%.

[Appendix D3]
The gaming machine described in appendix D2 is characterized in that the difference in expectation level between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -2.5% to +2.5%.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes D2 and D3, the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%. In this way, by setting the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%, the player's expectations for the display of the predetermined image can be more appropriately maintained, thereby more appropriately preventing a decrease in the player's interest due to the switching of the predetermined image and more appropriately preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix D4]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix D1 to Appendix D3, characterized in that the probability that the specific effect image will be displayed on the display means (341) during the first notification game (first special game) in the first judgment state (normal game state) is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image will be displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D4, the probability that a specific effect image will be displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first determination state is set to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image will be displayed. In this way, by setting the probability that a specific effect image will be displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first determination state to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image will be displayed, inconveniences caused by the continuous display of specific effect images, which have a high probability of causing inconvenience if played continuously, are appropriately avoided.

[Appendix D5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols on the display means (341),
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D4, characterized in that the specific effect image is an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D5, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, because the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This also makes it easy for the player to understand that specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix E1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a restricted state in which game balls are restricted from entering,
The gaming machine is
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) is a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315).
The notification game execution means
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) consecutively in the first notification game (first special symbol game) a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific effect image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special game games that are executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific effect image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special symbol game executed for the reservation of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special symbol game),
When a specific condition is met in the specific first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined effect image is set to have a higher expectation level than the specific effect image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, the degree of expectation that the predetermined effect image after switching will result in a transition to a special game state is set higher than the degree of expectation that the specific effect image before switching. In this way, by setting the degree of expectation that the predetermined effect image after switching will result in a transition to a special game state higher than the degree of expectation that the specific effect image before switching will result in a transition to a special game state, when the specific image is switched to a specific effect image, the degree of expectation suggested to the player by the switch to the specific effect image is increased. As a result, when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the specific effect image will switch to the specific effect image, and when the specific effect image is switched to the specific effect image, the player can enjoy playing the notification game while hoping that the result of the transition determination for the notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game by switching the predetermined image from a specific effect image to a specific effect image.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1 is characterized in that the difference between the expectation level when the specified presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game and the expectation level when the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game is set to 10% or more.

[Appendix E3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E2 is characterized in that the difference between the expectation level when the specified presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game and the expectation level when the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game is set to 25% or more.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix E2 and Appendix E3, the difference in expectation between the predetermined effect image and the specific effect image is set to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more. In this way, by setting the difference in expectation between the predetermined effect image and the specific effect image to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more, when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the game while looking forward to switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image. Furthermore, when the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, the result of the transition determination for the notification game in which the predetermined effect image is displayed will transition to a special game state, so the player can enjoy the notification game with great anticipation. Therefore, the switching of the predetermined image from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image further enhances the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix E4]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix E1 to Appendix E3, characterized in that the probability that the specific effect image will be displayed on the display means (341) during the first notification game (first special image game) in the first judgment state (normal game state) is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image will be displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E4, the probability that a specific effect image will be displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first determination state is set to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image will be displayed. In this way, by setting the probability that a specific effect image will be displayed on the display means during the first notification game in the first determination state to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image will be displayed, the frequency with which the specific effect image will be displayed increases, increasing the opportunities for the player to expect the specific effect image to be switched to the predetermined effect image, further enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Also, by setting the probability that the predetermined effect image after switching is selected low, the frequency with which the predetermined effect image will be displayed decreases, further enhancing the player's enjoyment when the predetermined effect image is displayed, further enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix E5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols on the display means (341),
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E4, wherein the specific effect image is an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E5, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, because the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This also makes it easy for the player to understand that specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix F1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that establishes the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a restricted state in which game balls are restricted from entering,
The gaming machine is
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) is a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315).
The notification game execution means
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) consecutively in the first notification game (first special symbol game) a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific effect image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special game games that are executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific effect image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special symbol game executed for the reservation of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special symbol game),
When a specific condition is met in the specific first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
When the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) is switched to the predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect), a specific information image different from the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image, which clearly indicates or suggests specific information, is displayed on the display means (341) in an announcement game executed between the announcement game before the switch and the announcement game after the switch.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F1, a specific information image that clearly indicates or suggests specific information is displayed in the notification game that is executed between the notification game before the predetermined image is switched and the notification game after the predetermined image is switched. In this way, by displaying a specific information image that clearly indicates or suggests specific information in the notification game that is executed between the notification game before the predetermined image is switched and the notification game after the predetermined image is switched, specific effect images and predetermined effect images are not displayed consecutively in multiple notification games, and the continuity between the display of the specific effect image and the display of the predetermined effect image is interrupted. This gives the player the illusion that the display of the predetermined effect image was executed independently of the display of the specific effect image after the display of the specific effect image ended, rather than switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image, making it appear as if the switch from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image did not occur. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences that would arise from the continued execution of specific effect images without the player realizing it.

However, if a switch is made from a specific effect image to a predetermined effect image to avoid the inconvenience that would arise from continuing to execute a specific effect image, the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the switched predetermined effect image is executed will not result in a transition to a special game state. Therefore, when a switch is made from a specific effect image to a predetermined effect image, there is a concern that the player will realize that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the switched predetermined effect image is displayed will not result in a transition to a special game state. Therefore, by disguising it as if a switch from a specific effect image to a predetermined effect image did not occur, it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the switched predetermined effect image is displayed will not result in a transition to a special game state.

[Appendix F2]
A bonus awarding means (41) is provided for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific effect image is displayed consecutively in the notification game a specific number of times or more,
The gaming machine described in Appendix F1, characterized in that the specific conditions include the fact that no bonus will be given to the player when the specific presentation image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game more than the specific number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F2, the specific conditions include the fact that no special benefit will be awarded to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specific number of notification games or more. In this way, by including the fact that no special benefit will be awarded to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specific number of notification games or more, if the specific effect image continues to be displayed when the specific conditions are not met, it is possible to prevent the specific effect image from being displayed consecutively for a specific number of notification games or more, even though no special benefit will be awarded to the player. This prevents a situation from occurring in which a special benefit is not awarded to the player despite the fact that a special benefit will be awarded based on the display in the notification game.

[Appendix F3]
The permissible state of the second winning port (315) includes a first permissible state (short opening) in which the time during which the second winning port (315) is in the permissible state is a first time, and a second permissible state (long opening) in which the time during which the second winning port (315) is in the permissible state is longer than the first time,
The gaming machine described in Appendix F2, characterized in that the specific condition includes a gaming ball entering the second winning port (315) that is in the first permissive state (short open) during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific presentation image is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F3, this is the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning slot, which is in the first permissible state during the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed. In this way, by having a gaming ball enter the second winning slot, which is in the first permissible state during the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed, if the specific effect image is continuously displayed by opening the second winning slot in the first permissible state, this prevents the specific effect image from being displayed consecutively for more than a predetermined number of notification games, even though no bonus is being awarded to the player. This prevents a situation from occurring in which a bonus is not awarded to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by a display during the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix F4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix F2, characterized in that the specific condition includes that a specific number of game balls greater than 0 enters the second winning slot (315) that is in the allowed state during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F4, this includes the entry of a specific number of game balls (greater than 0) into the second winning slot, which is in an allowed state during the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means. In this way, by including the entry of a specific number of game balls (greater than 0) into the second winning slot, which is in an allowed state during the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means, if the number of second notification games executed in an allowed state in response to game balls entering the second winning slot is less than a specific number (greater than 0), causing the specific effect image to be continuously displayed, this prevents the specific effect image from being displayed consecutively for more than a predetermined number of notification games, even though no bonus is being awarded to the player. This prevents a situation in which a bonus is not awarded to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by a display in the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix F5]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices F2 to F4, wherein the benefit is the execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F5, the bonus is the execution of a special game. By having the bonus be the execution of a special game, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a special game is not executed despite the notification game clearly indicating that a special game will be executed.

[Appendix F6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols that are variably displayed on the display means (341),
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F5, characterized in that the specific effect image is an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F6, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, because the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This also makes it easy for the player to understand that the specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix F7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix A1 to Appendix F6, characterized in that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F7, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image will be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix G1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that establishes the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a restricted state in which game balls are restricted from entering,
The gaming machine is
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) is a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315).
The notification game execution means
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) consecutively in the first notification game (first special symbol game) a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific effect image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special game games that are executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific effect image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special symbol game executed for the reservation of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special symbol game),
When a specific condition is met in the specific first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols that are variably displayed on the display means (341),
The specific effect image is an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, because the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This also makes it easy for the player to understand that specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix G2]
A bonus awarding means (41) is provided for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific effect image is displayed consecutively in the notification game a specific number of times or more,
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1 is characterized in that the specific conditions include the fact that no bonus will be given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game more than the specific number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G2, the specific conditions include the fact that no special benefit will be awarded to the player if the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specific number of notification games or more. In this way, by including the fact that no special benefit will be awarded to the player if the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specific number of notification games or more, if the specific condition is not met and the specific effect image continues to be displayed, it is possible to prevent the specific effect image from being displayed consecutively for a specific number of notification games or more, even though no special benefit will be awarded to the player. This prevents a situation from occurring in which a special benefit is not awarded to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a special benefit will be awarded.

[Appendix G3]
The permissible state of the second winning port (315) includes a first permissible state (short opening) in which the time during which the second winning port (315) is in the permissible state is a first time, and a second permissible state (long opening) in which the time during which the second winning port (315) is in the permissible state is longer than the first time,
The gaming machine described in Appendix G2 is characterized in that the specific condition includes a gaming ball entering the second winning port (315) that is in the first permissive state (short open) during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific presentation image is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G3, this is the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning slot, which is in the first permissible state during the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed. In this way, by having a gaming ball enter the second winning slot, which is in the first permissible state during the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed, if the specific effect image is continuously displayed by opening the second winning slot in the first permissible state, this prevents the specific effect image from being displayed consecutively for more than a predetermined number of notification games, even though no bonus is being awarded to the player. This prevents a situation from occurring in which a bonus is not awarded to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by a display during the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix G4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix G2 is characterized in that the specific condition includes a specific number of game balls exceeding 0 entering the second winning slot (315) that is in the permissible state during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G4, this includes the entry of a specific number of game balls (greater than 0) into the second winning slot, which is in an allowed state, in the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means. In this way, by including the entry of a specific number of game balls (greater than 0) into the second winning slot, which is in an allowed state in the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means, if the number of second notification games executed in an allowed state triggered by game balls entering the second winning slot is less than a specific number (greater than 0), causing the specific effect image to be displayed continuously, this prevents the specific effect image from being displayed consecutively for more than a predetermined number of notification games, even though no bonus is to be awarded to the player. This prevents a situation in which a bonus is not awarded to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by a display in the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix G5]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices G2 to G4, wherein the benefit is the execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G5, the bonus is the execution of a special game. In this way, by having the bonus be the execution of a special game, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a special game is not executed even though the display in the notification game clearly indicates that a special game will be executed.

[Appendix G6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices G1 to G5, characterized in that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G6, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image will be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to the special gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix H1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that establishes the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to execute the notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a restricted state in which game balls are restricted from entering,
The gaming machine is
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) is a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315).
The notification game execution means
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) consecutively in the first notification game (first special symbol game) a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific effect image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of predetermined second notification games (second special game games that are executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific effect image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special symbol game executed for the reservation of the first special symbol game after the end of the second special symbol game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special symbol game),
When a specific condition is met in the specific first notification game (first special symbol game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image will be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to the special gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix H2]
A bonus awarding means (41) is provided for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific effect image is displayed consecutively in the notification game a specific number of times or more,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H1, characterized in that the specific conditions include no bonus being granted to the player when the specific presentation image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game more than the specific number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H2, the specific conditions include the fact that no special benefit will be awarded to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specific number of notification games or more. In this way, by including the fact that no special benefit will be awarded to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively for a specific number of notification games or more, if the specific effect image continues to be displayed when the specific conditions are not met, it is possible to prevent the specific effect image from being displayed consecutively for a specific number of notification games or more, even though no special benefit will be awarded to the player. This prevents a situation from occurring in which a special benefit is not awarded to the player despite the fact that a special benefit will be awarded as clearly indicated by the display in the notification game.

[Appendix H3]
The permissible state of the second winning port (315) includes a first permissible state (short opening) in which the time during which the second winning port (315) is in the permissible state is a first time, and a second permissible state (long opening) in which the time during which the second winning port (315) is in the permissible state is longer than the first time,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H2, characterized in that the specific condition includes a gaming ball entering the second winning port (315) that is in the first permissive state (short open) during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific presentation image is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H3, this is the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning slot, which is in the first permissible state during the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed. In this way, by having a gaming ball enter the second winning slot, which is in the first permissible state during the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed, if the specific effect image is continuously displayed by opening the second winning slot in the first permissible state, this prevents the specific effect image from being displayed consecutively for more than a predetermined number of notification games, even though no bonus is being awarded to the player. This prevents a situation from occurring in which a bonus is not awarded to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by a display during the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix H4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix H2, characterized in that the specific condition includes that a specific number of game balls greater than 0 enters the second winning slot (315) that is in the allowed state during the first notification game (first special game) in which the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H4, this includes the entry of a specific number of game balls (greater than 0) into the second winning slot, which is in an allowed state during the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means. In this way, by including the entry of a specific number of game balls (greater than 0) into the second winning slot, which is in an allowed state during the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means, if the number of second notification games executed in an allowed state in response to game balls entering the second winning slot is less than a specific number (greater than 0), causing the specific effect image to be displayed continuously, this prevents the specific effect image from being displayed consecutively for more than a predetermined number of notification games, even though no bonus is to be awarded to the player. This prevents a situation in which a bonus is not awarded to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by a display in the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix H5]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices H2 to H4, wherein the benefit is the execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H5, the bonus is the execution of a special game. By having the bonus be the execution of a special game, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a special game is not executed despite the fact that the notification game clearly indicates that a special game will be executed.

[Appendix H6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols that are variably displayed on the display means (341),
The gaming machine described in any one of appendices H1 to H5, wherein the specific effect image is an image of the combination of the symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H6, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, because the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This also makes it easy for the player to understand that specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix I1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that establishes the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a restricted state in which game balls are restricted from entering,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information about the probability of winning a jackpot due to the reserved continuous presentation regarding the probability of winning a jackpot) in the predetermined first notification game (first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous presentation is executed);
a reserve means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning port (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long opening), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuation display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special symbol game);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, when a specific effect image is displayed in the second notification game, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. By continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information when a specific effect image is displayed in the second notification game, the player can understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends. This prevents the player from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and allows the player to understand in advance that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the second notification game ends, due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game. This prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.
[Appendix I2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continues to display the specified suggestion information without changing it when the specified suggestion information is continuously displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I2, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information continues to be displayed without any changes. In this way, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information continues to be displayed without any changes, allowing the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends. This further prevents the player from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows the player to know in advance that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends. As a result, the player is more likely to feel uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the second notification game ends, due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and therefore less likely to lose interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix I3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix I2 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed after the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the specified suggestion information was displayed, while maintaining the format that was displayed in the first notification game (first special symbol game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I3, in the second notification game that is executed following the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information was displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in the same manner as it was displayed in the first notification game, allowing the player to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed in the first notification game before the second notification game was executed. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the second notification game has ended, thereby preventing a further decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix I4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays the specified suggestion information in a manner different from that of the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the second notification game (second special symbol game) executed after the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the specified suggestion information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I4, in the second notification game that is executed after the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a different manner than in the first notification game. In this way, in the second notification game that is executed after the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a different manner than in the first notification game. This allows the player to understand in a variety of ways that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends, and allows the player to understand this without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game.

[Appendix I5]
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1 to Appendix I4 is characterized in that when the specified suggestion information is continuously displayed, the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continues to display the specified suggestion information without changing the display position of the specified suggestion information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I5, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the display position of the predetermined suggestive information remains unchanged. In this way, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the display position of the predetermined suggestive information remains unchanged, allowing the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends. This further prevents the player from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows the player to understand in advance that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends. As a result, the player is more likely to feel uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the second notification game ends, due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and this further prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix I6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix I1 to Appendix I5, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a capture image 78) the specified suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I6, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game, the player can understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends, without obstructing the visibility of the changing display of the symbols executed during the second notification game.

[Appendix I7]
The gaming machine described in Appendix I6 is characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a capture image 78) the specified suggestive information in a position adjacent to the variable display area of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I7, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the pattern change during the second notification game to more easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows the player to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix I8]
a first reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to a first upper limit number (for example, four) of rights to play the first notification game (first special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the first winning port (314);
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix I1 to Appendix I7, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the specified suggestion information when the right to execute the first notification game (first special chart game) is reserved by the first reservation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I8, when the right to play the first notification game, which is triggered by a gaming ball entering the first winning slot, is reserved, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. In this way, when the right to play the first notification game, which is triggered by a gaming ball entering the first winning slot, is reserved, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. This prevents the predetermined suggestive information from being displayed for the first notification game if the right to play the first notification game is reserved while the second notification game is being played in the specific gaming state. This prevents the predetermined suggestive information from being displayed for the first notification game a number of times after the specific gaming state ends that exceeds the number of consecutive predetermined suggestive information set before the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, in cases where a player is awarded a bonus by having predetermined suggestion information displayed consecutively in a specific number of first notification games or more, the predetermined suggestion information is prevented from being displayed consecutively in a specific number of first notification games or more even though there is no bonus to be awarded to the player, thereby preventing a situation in which a bonus is not awarded to a player even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix I9]
an allowable frequency control means for switching between a first frequency state in which the frequency at which the second winning opening (315) is set to the allowable state is a first frequency and a second frequency state in which the frequency at which the second winning opening (315) is set to the allowable state is a second frequency higher than the first frequency;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix I1 to Appendix I8, characterized in that the specific game state generation means (41) generates the specific game state in at least one of the first frequency state and the second frequency state.

[Appendix I10]
The gaming machine described in Appendix I9, wherein the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the first frequency state.

[Appendix I11]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I9 or I10, wherein the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the second frequency state.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes I9 to I11, a specific gaming state is generated in at least one of a first frequency state, in which the second winning port is placed in an allowable state at a first frequency, with a low frequency, and a second frequency state, in which the second winning port is placed in an allowable state at a second frequency, with a high frequency. In the first frequency state, the second winning port is placed in an allowable state at a low frequency. Therefore, in the first frequency state, the specific gaming state is generated less frequently, and the specific gaming state is generated as a special state. On the other hand, in the second frequency state, the second winning port is placed in an allowable state at a high frequency. Therefore, in the second frequency state, the specific gaming state is generated more frequently, and the specific gaming state is generated as a non-special state. In this way, the frequency with which the specific game state occurs differs between the first frequency state and the second frequency state, and the specific game state is positioned differently. Therefore, different gameplay characteristics are provided when the specific game state occurs in the first frequency state, where the second winning port is placed in the permissible state at a first frequency that is low, and when the specific game state occurs in the second frequency state, where the second winning port is placed in the permissible state at a second frequency that is high. This increases the player's attention and interest in the game, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix I12]
a first display means (341) for displaying the specific effect image by the specific effect image display means (51);
a second display means (39, etc.) different from the first display means (341) on which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by the suggestive information continuous display means (51);
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I11, comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I12, the first display means on which a specific effect image corresponding to a second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific game state is displayed is different from the second display means on which predetermined suggestive information is displayed. In this way, by having the first display means on which a specific effect image corresponding to a second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific game state and the second display means on which predetermined suggestive information is displayed being different, the predetermined suggestive information can be displayed on the second display means without interfering with the display of the specific effect image on the first display means. This allows both the specific effect image and the predetermined suggestive information to be displayed reliably and appropriately without interfering with each other's visibility.

[Appendix I13]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix I1 to Appendix I12, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed on the display means (341) as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I13, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and makes it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display format (type) of the specified suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix I14]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix I1 to Appendix I13, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I14, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and makes it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix I15]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix I1 to Appendix I14, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I15, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix I16]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix I1 to Appendix I15, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the specified suggestive information in front of or behind the variable-displayed pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I16, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the symbols that are being displayed in a changing manner during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the symbols that are being displayed in a changing manner during the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the changing symbols during the second notification game to easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously. This allows the player to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix I17]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix I1 to Appendix I16, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special image game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I17, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix I18]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix I1 to Appendix I17, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of patterns displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I18, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, because the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix I19]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix I1 to Appendix I18, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I19, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, allowing the player to enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix J1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that establishes the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a restricted state in which game balls are restricted from entering,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information about the probability of winning a jackpot due to the first special symbol reserve continuous performance regarding the probability of winning a jackpot) in the predetermined first notification game (first special symbol game in which the first special symbol reserve continuous performance is executed);
a reserve means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning port (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long opening), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuation display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special symbol game);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the specified suggestion information without changing it when the specified suggestion information is continuously displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information continues to be displayed without any changes. In this way, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information continues to be displayed without any changes, allowing the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends. This further prevents the player from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows the player to know in advance that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends. As a result, the player is more likely to feel uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the second notification game ends, due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and therefore less likely to lose interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix J2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1 is characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a captured image 78) the specified suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J2, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game, the player can understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends, without obstructing the visibility of the changing display of the symbols executed during the second notification game.

[Appendix J3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1 or Appendix J2 is characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a capture image 78) the specified suggestive information at a position adjacent to the variable display area of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J3, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game, it becomes easier for a player who focuses on the pattern change during the second notification game to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This makes it easier and more reliable for the player to understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix J4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1 is characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the specified suggestive information in front of or behind the variable-displayed pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J4, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the symbols that are being displayed in a changing manner during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the symbols that are being displayed in a changing manner during the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the changing symbols during the second notification game to easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously. This allows the player to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix J5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to J4, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J5, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, because the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix J6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices J1 to J5, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J6, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, allowing the player to enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix K1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a restricted state in which game balls are restricted from entering,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information about the probability of winning a jackpot due to the reserved continuous presentation regarding the probability of winning a jackpot) in the predetermined first notification game (first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous presentation is executed);
a reserve means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning port (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long opening), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuation display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special symbol game);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special symbol game) executed after the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the specified suggestion information was displayed, while maintaining the format that was displayed in the first notification game (first special symbol game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K1, in the second notification game that is executed following the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information was displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in the same manner as it was displayed in the first notification game, allowing the player to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed in the first notification game before the second notification game was executed. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the second notification game has ended, thereby preventing a further decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix K2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in Appendix K1 is characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a capture image 78) the specified suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K2, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game, the player can understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends, without obstructing the visibility of the changing display of the symbols executed during the second notification game.

[Appendix K3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix K2 is characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a capture image 78) the specified suggestive information at a position adjacent to the variable display area of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K3, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game, it becomes easier for a player who focuses on the pattern change during the second notification game to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This makes it easier and more reliable for the player to understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix K4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in Appendix K1 is characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the specified suggestive information in front of or behind the variable-displayed pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K4, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the symbols that are being displayed in a changing manner during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the symbols that are being displayed in a changing manner during the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the changing symbols during the second notification game to easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously. This allows the player to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix K5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K4, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K5, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, because the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix K6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices K1 to K5, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K6, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, allowing the player to enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix L1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that establishes the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a restricted state in which game balls are restricted from entering,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information about the probability of winning a jackpot due to the first special symbol reserve continuous performance regarding the probability of winning a jackpot) in the predetermined first notification game (first special symbol game in which the first special symbol reserve continuous performance is executed);
a reserve means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning port (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long opening), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuation display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special symbol game);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that when the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the specified suggestion information, it continues to display the specified suggestion information without changing the display position of the specified suggestion information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix L1, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the display position of the predetermined suggestive information remains unchanged. In this way, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the display position of the predetermined suggestive information remains unchanged, allowing the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends. This further prevents the player from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows the player to understand in advance that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends. As a result, the player is more likely to feel uncomfortable when the display of the predetermined suggestive information resumes after the second notification game ends, due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and this further prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix L2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1 is characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the specified suggestive information in front of or behind the variable-displayed pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix L2, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the symbols that are being displayed in a changing manner during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the symbols that are being displayed in a changing manner during the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the changing symbols during the second notification game to easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously. This allows the player to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix L3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix L1 or Appendix L2 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix L3, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and makes it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display format (type) of the specified suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix L4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix L1 to Appendix L3, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix L4, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and makes it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix L5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix L1 to Appendix L4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix L5, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix L6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix L1 to Appendix L5, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special image game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix L6, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix L7]
A gaming machine described in any one of appendices L1 to L6, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of patterns displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix L7, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, because the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix L8]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices L1 to L7, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix L8, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, allowing the player to enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix M1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that establishes the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a restricted state in which game balls are restricted from entering,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information about the probability of winning a jackpot due to the reserved continuous presentation regarding the probability of winning a jackpot) in the predetermined first notification game (first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous presentation is executed);
a reserve means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning port (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long opening), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuation display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special symbol game);
Equipped with
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a captured image 78) the specified suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix M1, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game, the player can understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends, without obstructing the visibility of the changing display of the symbols executed during the second notification game.

[Appendix M2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix M1 is characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a capture image 78) the specified suggestive information in a position adjacent to the variable display area of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix M2, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game, it becomes easier for a player who focuses on the pattern change during the second notification game to notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This makes it easier and more reliable for the player to understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix M3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix M1 or Appendix M2 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix M3, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and makes it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display format (type) of the specified suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix M4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix M1 to Appendix M3, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix M4, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and makes it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix M5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix M1 to Appendix M4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix M5, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix M6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix M1 to Appendix M5, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special image game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix M6, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix M7]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices M1 to M6, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix M7, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, because the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix M8]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices M1 to M7, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix M8, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, allowing the player to enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix N1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that establishes the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a restricted state in which game balls are restricted from entering,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information about the probability of winning a jackpot due to the first special symbol reserve continuous performance regarding the probability of winning a jackpot) in the predetermined first notification game (first special symbol game in which the first special symbol reserve continuous performance is executed);
a first reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to a first upper limit number (for example, four) of rights to execute the first notification game (first special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the first winning port (314);
a second reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to a second upper limit number (for example, four) of rights to execute the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning port (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the second upper limit number based on the second winning port (315) being in the predetermined permissible state (long opening),
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuation display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special symbol game);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) continues to display the specified suggestion information when the right to execute the first notification game (first special chart game) is reserved by the first reservation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N1, when the right to play the first notification game, which is triggered by a gaming ball entering the first winning slot, is reserved, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. In this way, when the right to play the first notification game, which is triggered by a gaming ball entering the first winning slot, is reserved, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. This prevents the predetermined suggestive information from being displayed for the first notification game if the right to play the first notification game is reserved while the second notification game is being played in the specific gaming state. This prevents the predetermined suggestive information from being displayed for the first notification game a number of times after the specific gaming state ends that exceeds the number of consecutive predetermined suggestive information set before the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, in cases where a player is awarded a bonus by having predetermined suggestion information displayed consecutively in a specific number of first notification games or more, the predetermined suggestion information is prevented from being displayed consecutively in a specific number of first notification games or more even though there is no bonus to be awarded to the player, thereby preventing a situation in which a bonus is not awarded to a player even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix N2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix N1 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and makes it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display format (type) of the specified suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix N3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix N1 or Appendix N2 is characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N3, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and makes it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix N4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix N1 to Appendix N3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N4, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix N5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix N1 to Appendix N4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special image game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N5, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix N6]
A gaming machine described in any one of appendices N1 to N5, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of patterns displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, because the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix N7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices N1 to N6, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, allowing the player to enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix O1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that establishes the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a restricted state in which game balls are restricted from entering,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information about the probability of winning a jackpot due to the first special symbol reserve continuous performance regarding the probability of winning a jackpot) in the predetermined first notification game (first special symbol game in which the first special symbol reserve continuous performance is executed);
a reserve means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning port (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long opening), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuation display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special symbol game);
an allowable frequency control means for switching between a first frequency state in which the frequency at which the second winning opening (315) is set to the allowable state is a first frequency and a second frequency state in which the frequency at which the second winning opening (315) is set to the allowable state is a second frequency higher than the first frequency;
Equipped with
The specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in at least one of the first frequency state and the second frequency state.

[Appendix O2]
The gaming machine according to appendix O1, wherein the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the first frequency state.

[Appendix O3]
The gaming machine according to appendix O1 or O2, wherein the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the second frequency state.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes O1 to O3, a specific gaming state is generated in at least one of a first frequency state, in which the second winning port is placed in an allowable state at a first frequency, with a low frequency, and a second frequency state, in which the second winning port is placed in an allowable state at a second frequency, with a high frequency. In the first frequency state, the second winning port is placed in an allowable state at a low frequency. Therefore, in the first frequency state, the specific gaming state is generated less frequently, and the specific gaming state is generated as a special state. On the other hand, in the second frequency state, the second winning port is placed in an allowable state at a high frequency. Therefore, in the second frequency state, the specific gaming state is generated more frequently, and the specific gaming state is generated as a non-special state. In this way, the frequency with which the specific game state occurs differs between the first frequency state and the second frequency state, and the specific game state is positioned differently. Therefore, different gameplay characteristics are provided when the specific game state occurs in the first frequency state, where the second winning port is placed in the permissible state at a first frequency that is low, and when the specific game state occurs in the second frequency state, where the second winning port is placed in the permissible state at a second frequency that is high. This increases the player's attention and interest in the game, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix O4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix O1 to Appendix O3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O4, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and makes it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display format (type) of the specified suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix O5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix O1 to Appendix O4, characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O5, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and makes it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix O6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices O1 to O5, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O6, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix O7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices O1 to O6, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special image game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O7, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix O8]
A gaming machine described in any one of appendices O1 to O7, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of patterns displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O8, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, because the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix O9]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices O1 to O8, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O9, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, allowing the player to enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix P1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that establishes the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a restricted state in which game balls are restricted from entering,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information about the probability of winning a jackpot due to the first special symbol reserve continuous performance regarding the probability of winning a jackpot) in the predetermined first notification game (first special symbol game in which the first special symbol reserve continuous performance is executed);
a reserve means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning port (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long opening), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuation display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special symbol game);
a first display means (341) for displaying the specific effect image by the specific effect image display means (51);
a second display means (39, etc.) different from the first display means (341) on which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by the suggestive information continuous display means (51);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P1, the first display means on which a specific effect image corresponding to a second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific game state is displayed is different from the second display means on which predetermined suggestive information is displayed. In this way, by having the first display means on which a specific effect image corresponding to a second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific game state and the second display means on which predetermined suggestive information is displayed being different, the predetermined suggestive information can be displayed on the second display means without interfering with the display of the specific effect image on the first display means. This allows both the specific effect image and the predetermined suggestive information to be displayed reliably and appropriately without interfering with each other's visibility.

[Appendix P2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix P1 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and makes it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display format (type) of the specified suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix P3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix P1 or Appendix P2 is characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P3, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and makes it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix P4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix P1 to Appendix P3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P4, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix P5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix P1 to Appendix P4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special image game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P5, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and changing symbol display executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix P6]
The gaming machine described in any one of appendices P1 to P5, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, because the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix P7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix P1 to Appendix P6, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, allowing the player to enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix Q1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that establishes the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a restricted state in which game balls are restricted from entering,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information about the probability of winning a jackpot due to the reserved continuous presentation regarding the probability of winning a jackpot) in the predetermined first notification game (first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous presentation is executed);
a reserve means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning port (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long opening), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuation display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special symbol game);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays the specified suggestion information in a manner different from that of the first notification game (first special symbol game) in the second notification game (second special symbol game) executed after the first notification game (first special symbol game) in which the specified suggestion information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Q1, in the second notification game that is executed after the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a different manner than in the first notification game. In this way, in the second notification game that is executed after the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a different manner than in the first notification game. This allows the player to understand in a variety of ways that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends, and allows the player to understand this without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game.

[Appendix Q2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix Q1 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Q2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and makes it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display format (type) of the specified suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix Q3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix Q1 or Appendix Q2 is characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Q3, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and allows the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix Q4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix Q1 to Appendix Q3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Q4, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and changing pattern display executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix Q5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix Q1 to Appendix Q4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special image game).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Q5, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix Q6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
A gaming machine described in any one of appendices Q1 to Q5, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of patterns displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Q6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, because the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This also makes it easy for the player to understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix Q7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix Q1 to Appendix Q6, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Q7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, allowing the player to enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix R1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a restricted state in which game balls are restricted from entering,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information about the probability of winning a jackpot due to the reserved continuous presentation regarding the probability of winning a jackpot) in the predetermined first notification game (first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous presentation is executed);
a reserve means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning port (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long opening), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuation display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special symbol game);
Equipped with
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the specified suggestive information in front of or behind the variable-displayed pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R1, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the symbols that are being displayed in a changing manner during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the symbols that are being displayed in a changing manner during the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the changing symbols during the second notification game to easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously. This allows the player to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix R2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix R1 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and makes it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display format (type) of the specified suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix R3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix R1 or Appendix R2 is characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R3, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and makes it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix R4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix R1 to Appendix R3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R4, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix R5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix R1 to Appendix R4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special image game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R5, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix R6]
The gaming machine described in any one of appendices R1 to R5, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, because the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that will be stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix R7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices R1 to R6, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, allowing the player to enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix S1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that establishes the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a restricted state in which game balls are restricted from entering,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information about the probability of winning a jackpot due to the reserved continuous presentation regarding the probability of winning a jackpot) in the predetermined first notification game (first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous presentation is executed);
a reserve means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning port (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long opening), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuation display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special symbol game);
Equipped with
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note S1, the result of the transition determination made by the transition determination means is notified by the static display of the fluctuating symbols, and the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are statically displayed, allowing the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix S2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix S1 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note S2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and makes it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display format (type) of the specified suggestive information that will resume in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix S3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix S1 or Appendix S2 is characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note S3, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and makes it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix S4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix S1 to Appendix S3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note S4, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and makes it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix S5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix S1 to Appendix S4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special image game).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note S5, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix S6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix S1 to Appendix S5, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note S6, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, allowing the player to enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix T1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that establishes the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (probability variable gaming state) in which the probability of determining that the game will be transitioned to the special gaming state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which game balls are allowed to enter and a restricted state in which game balls are restricted from entering,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314), and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information about the probability of winning a jackpot due to the reserved continuous presentation regarding the probability of winning a jackpot) in the predetermined first notification game (first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous presentation is executed);
a reserve means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning port (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long opening), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuation display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special symbol game);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T1, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special game state, allowing the player to enjoy the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special game state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix T2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix T1 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and makes it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix T3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix T1 or Appendix T2 is characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T3, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. This makes it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and makes it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix T4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix T1 to Appendix T3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T4, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix T5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix T1 to Appendix T4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays a character image corresponding to the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T5, a text image corresponding to the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a text image corresponding to the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without interfering with the visibility of the effects and variable display of symbols executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix T6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in any one of appendices T1 to T5, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note T6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, because the predetermined suggestive information is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-shortened game state) capable of providing a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first trigger (a type 1 jackpot as a result of a jackpot lottery in a normal game state);
a state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-shortening game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is validated (a third time-shortening game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger (a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is a miss of the time-saving pattern stop) different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state;
a means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the specified second trigger is established, there is a specified or longer period of time that can be executed after the specified state ends among the execution periods that can be executed based on the specified specific value (a state in which the number of time-saving games set in response to the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state being a miss for the time-saving pattern stop is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, if a second trigger different from the first trigger is established in a predetermined state executed by the fulfillment of a first trigger, the second state, which offers higher profits than the first state, is executed if a specific state is established, while the first state is executed if the specific state is not established. In this way, if a second trigger different from the first trigger is established in a predetermined state executed by the fulfillment of a first trigger, the second state, which offers higher profits than the first state, is executed if the specific state is established, while the first state is executed if the specific state is not established, thereby providing new gameplay characteristics in which the execution of a predetermined state by the fulfillment of the first trigger, the fulfillment of a second trigger in the predetermined state, and the fulfillment of a specific state when the second trigger is established are conditions for the execution of the more profitable second state. This allows players to enjoy the game while hoping that the first trigger will occur, enjoy the game while focusing on whether the second trigger will occur in a predetermined state that is executed after the first trigger occurs, and, if the second trigger occurs, enjoy the game while focusing on whether a specific condition is met, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, an execution period that can be executed is set based on a predetermined specific value that is determined when the second trigger is realized. In this way, by setting an execution period that can be executed based on a predetermined specific value that is determined when the second trigger is realized, the period of the second state is set as a value that depends on the predetermined specific value. Therefore, when the second trigger is realized, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the predetermined specific value, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, the specific state is a state in which, within the execution period in which the specific state can be executed based on a specific specific value at the stage when the specific second trigger is established, there is a specific or longer period in which the specific state can be executed after the end of the specific state. In this way, by the specific state being a state in which, within the execution period in which the specific state can be executed based on a specific specific value at the stage when the specific second trigger is established, there is a specific or longer period in which the specific state can be executed after the end of the specific state, the stage in which the specific state can be established and the criteria for the success or failure of the specific state are clarified, making it easier to grasp the stage in which the specific state can be established and the success or failure of the specific state. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the specific specific value at the stage when the specific second trigger is established, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix B1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-shortened game state) capable of providing a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first trigger (a type 1 jackpot as a result of a jackpot lottery in a normal game state);
a state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-shortening game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is validated (a third time-shortening game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger (a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is a miss of the time-saving pattern stop) different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state;
a means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state is more than a predetermined period (a state in which the number of time-saving games set when the jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving pattern stop miss is greater than the number of time-saving games remaining in the second time-saving game state),
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of the second trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state not stopping the time-saving pattern) occurring in the specified state (second time-saving game state) is the same throughout the entire specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, the probability that the second trigger will occur in a predetermined state is the same throughout the entire predetermined period. In this way, because the probability that the second trigger will occur in a predetermined period of a predetermined state is the same throughout the entire predetermined period, the timing at which the second trigger will occur in that predetermined period is random, and the second trigger can occur throughout the entire predetermined period of a predetermined state. As a result, it can be expected that the second trigger will occur throughout the entire predetermined period of a predetermined state, and the player will not be disadvantaged by the second trigger not occurring during part of the predetermined period of a predetermined state, and can enjoy playing throughout the entire predetermined period of a predetermined state.

[Appendix B2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1 is characterized in that when the second trigger is established (the time-saving pattern does not stop) during the specified period of the specified state (second time-saving gaming state), the shorter the remaining period of the specified state (the remaining number of time-saving events), the more likely it is that the specific state will be established.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2, when the second trigger is realized in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the more likely the specific condition is realized. In this way, when the second trigger is realized in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the more likely the specific condition is realized. As a result, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state (the closer the end of the predetermined period), the more likely the specific condition is realized, providing a gameplay experience that increases the expectation that the second state will be executed. This allows players to enjoy the game while feeling anxious about the approaching end of the predetermined period, and with the hope that the second trigger will be realized as the end of the predetermined period approaches, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix B3]
A gaming machine as described in Appendix B1 or Appendix B2, characterized in that when the second trigger is established (the time-saving pattern does not stop) in the specified state (second time-saving gaming state) and the specific condition is established, the amount of profit (number of time-saving games) in the second state (third time-saving gaming state) differs depending on the remaining period of the specified state (remaining number of time-saving games).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B3, if a specific condition is met when the second trigger is met in a predetermined state, the magnitude of the profit in the second state varies depending on the remaining period of the predetermined state. In this way, if a specific condition is met when the second trigger is met in a predetermined state, the magnitude of the profit in the second state varies depending on the remaining period of the predetermined state. This allows players to enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the timing when the second trigger is met during the specified period of the specified state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix B4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B3 is characterized in that when the second trigger is established (the time-saving pattern does not stop) in the specified state (second time-saving game state) and the specific condition is established, the shorter the remaining period of the specified state (the remaining number of time-saving games), the greater the profit (the number of time-saving games) in the second state (third time-saving game state).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B4, if a specific condition is met when the second trigger is met in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining time of the predetermined state, the greater the profit in the second state. In this way, if a specific condition is met when the second trigger is met in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining time of the predetermined state, the greater the profit in the second state. This provides a gameplay feature that makes it easier to receive a high profit in the second state as the remaining time of the predetermined state gets shorter (as the end of the predetermined period approaches). This allows the player to enjoy the game while feeling anxious about the approaching end of the predetermined period, but with the hope that the second trigger will be met and they will receive a high profit in the second state as the end of the predetermined period approaches, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix C1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-shortened game state) capable of providing a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first trigger (a type 1 jackpot as a result of a jackpot lottery in a normal game state);
a state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-shortening game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is validated (a third time-shortening game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger (a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is a miss of the time-saving pattern stop) different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state;
a means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state is more than a predetermined period (a state in which the number of time-saving games set when the jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving pattern stop miss is greater than the number of time-saving games remaining in the second time-saving game state),
The predetermined period is set to be longer than the execution period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, the predetermined period is set longer than the execution period. In this way, by setting the predetermined period longer than the execution period, a situation can arise in which, when the second trigger is realized in a predetermined state, a specific state is realized, or a specific state is not realized. Therefore, whether or not a specific state is realized in a predetermined state is given a gameplay characteristic that depends on the timing at which the second trigger is realized within the predetermined period from the start to the end of the predetermined state. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game while paying attention to the timing at which the second trigger is realized, while hoping that the second trigger will be realized in the predetermined state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix C2]
a plurality of types of the specific value are set including the predetermined specific value,
a plurality of execution periods are set corresponding to the specific values;
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1, characterized in that the specific value determination means sets the predetermined specific value from the plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C2, when the second trigger is realized, the execution period is set from among multiple execution periods based on a predetermined specific value that is set from among multiple specific values. In this way, by setting the execution period from among multiple execution periods based on a predetermined specific value that is set from among multiple specific values when the second trigger is realized, the execution period differs depending on the type of predetermined specific value, and therefore the success or failure of a specific state depends on the type of predetermined characteristic value. As a result, when the second trigger is realized, it becomes difficult to determine whether a specific state has been achieved from the predetermined specific value. Therefore, when the second trigger is realized, the player can enjoy playing the game while paying attention to the type of predetermined characteristic value and hoping that a specific state will be achieved, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix C2, characterized in that the multiple types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods that have different benefits when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C3, the multiple execution periods include two or more execution periods with different benefits when the second state is executed. In this way, the multiple execution periods include two or more execution periods with different benefits when the second state is executed, so that the benefits when the second state is executed are set according to the execution period. Therefore, by focusing on the execution period set at the stage when the second trigger is realized, the player can grasp the level of benefits when the second state is executed. This makes it possible to further increase attention and interest in the execution period set at the stage when the second trigger is realized, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix C4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix C3 is characterized in that the two or more types of execution periods have a higher probability of realizing the specific state when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C4, the probability of a specific state being established increases the higher the profit when the second state is executed for two or more types of execution periods. In this way, the probability of a specific state being established increases the higher the profit when the second state is executed for two or more types of execution periods. This allows players to enjoy playing the game while hoping that an execution period with a high profit when the second state is executed will be set, and to enjoy playing the game while hoping that a specific state will be established when an execution period with a high profit is set, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix C5]
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1 is characterized in that the execution period is of one type.

The gaming machine according to Appendix C5 has one type of execution period. As such, because there is only one type of execution period, the execution period when the second trigger is realized is set as a fixed period. This makes it easier to understand whether a specific state has been achieved based on the timing at which the second trigger is realized in a predetermined state. As a result, players can enjoy playing the game while paying attention to the timing at which the second trigger is realized in a predetermined state, hoping that the specific state will be achieved, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix D1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-shortened game state) capable of providing a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first trigger (a type 1 jackpot as a result of a jackpot lottery in a normal game state);
a state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-shortening game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is validated (a third time-shortening game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger (a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is a miss of the time-saving pattern stop) different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state;
a means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state is more than a predetermined period (a state in which the number of time-saving games set when the jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving pattern stop miss is greater than the number of time-saving games remaining in the second time-saving game state),
a specific timing determination means (41) for determining whether or not it is a specific timing in the predetermined period in which the predetermined state is executed;
A performance execution means (51) for executing a predetermined performance in the predetermined state;
Equipped with
The performance execution means (51)
a means for executing a first effect as the predetermined effect from the start of execution of the predetermined state by the predetermined state execution means (41) until it is determined by the specific timing determination means (41) that it is the specific timing;
a means for executing a second effect different from the first effect as the predetermined effect during the predetermined period after the specific timing determination means (41) determines that the specific timing has arrived;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, a first effect is executed from the start of execution of a predetermined state until a specific timing within a predetermined period, and a second effect different from the first effect is executed after the specific timing. In this way, by executing a first effect from the start of execution of a predetermined state until a specific timing within a predetermined period, and executing a second effect different from the first effect after the specific timing, the player is prevented from feeling bored or losing interest in the game during the specified period when the predetermined state is executed, and therefore a loss of interest in the game is prevented.

[Appendix D2]
A gaming machine as described in Appendix D1, characterized in that during the specified period in which the specified state is executed, the profit state granted to the player differs between up to the specific timing and after the specific timing.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D2, during the specified period in which the specified state is executed, the payout state awarded to the player differs between up to the specific timing and after the specific timing. Furthermore, during the specified period, a first effect is executed until the specific timing, and after the specific timing, a second effect different from the first effect is executed. Therefore, the player can know that the specific timing has arrived when the specified effect executed during the specified period switches from the first effect to the second effect. In other words, the player can know that the payout state awarded has changed when the effect switches from the first effect to the second effect. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by noticing the change in payout state while paying attention to the switch from the first effect to the second effect during the specified period in which the specified state is executed, further enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix D3]
A gaming machine as described in Appendix D2, characterized in that during the specified period in which the specified state is executed, the profit state is higher after the specific timing than up to the specific timing.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D3, during the specified period in which the specified state is executed, the profit state is higher after the specified timing than before the specified timing. In other words, when switching from the first effect to the second effect during the specified period, the profit state is higher when the second effect is executed than when the first effect is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the switch to the second effect, which is executed when the profit state is higher than when the first effect is executed during the specified period, will occur, further increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix D4]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix D1 to Appendix D3, characterized in that the specific timing is the timing at which the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D4, the specific timing is the timing at which the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the specified state. In this way, because the specific timing is the timing at which the specific state is established, the player can understand, based on the type of specified effect, that when the first effect is executed within the specified period, the first state is established, and when the second effect is executed within the specified period, the second state is established, which is more profitable than the first state. In other words, the player can understand that when the first effect is switched to the second effect within the specified period, the first state has been transitioned to the more profitable second state. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game while anticipating the switch from the first effect to the second effect within the specified period, further enhancing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix E1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-shortened game state) capable of providing a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first trigger (a type 1 jackpot as a result of a jackpot lottery in a normal game state);
a state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-shortening game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is validated (a third time-shortening game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger (a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is a miss of the time-saving pattern stop) different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state;
a means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is
A state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state is more than a predetermined period (a state in which the number of time-saving games set in response to the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state not being a time-saving symbol stop is greater than the number of time-saving games remaining in the second time-saving game state),
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined second trigger is not established even if it is established from the time when the execution of the predetermined state is started by the predetermined state execution means (41) until a predetermined timing.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, the specific state is not established from the start of execution of the specific state until the specified timing, even if the specified second trigger is established. In this way, the specific second trigger is not established from the start of execution of the specific state until the specified timing, even if it is established. This can lead to situations in which the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the specific state, or situations in which the specific state is not established. Therefore, a gameplay feature is imparted in which whether or not the specific state is established in the specific state depends on the timing of the second trigger being established during the specified period from the start to the end of the specific state. This allows players to enjoy the progress of the game while paying attention to the timing of the second trigger being established, while hoping that the second trigger will be established in the specific state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix E2]
a plurality of types of the specific value are set including the predetermined specific value,
a plurality of execution periods are set corresponding to the specific values;
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1, wherein the specific value determination means sets the predetermined specific value from the plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E2, when the second trigger is realized, the execution period is set from among multiple execution periods based on a predetermined specific value that is set from among multiple specific values. In this way, by setting the execution period from among multiple execution periods based on a predetermined specific value that is set from among multiple specific values when the second trigger is realized, the execution period differs depending on the type of predetermined specific value, and therefore the success or failure of a specific state depends on the type of predetermined characteristic value. As a result, when the second trigger is realized, it becomes difficult to determine whether a specific state has been achieved from the predetermined specific value. Therefore, when the second trigger is realized, the player can enjoy playing the game while paying attention to the type of predetermined characteristic value and hoping that a specific state will be achieved, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix E3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E2, characterized in that the multiple types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods that have different benefits when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E3, the multiple execution periods include two or more execution periods with different benefits when the second state is executed. In this way, the multiple execution periods include two or more execution periods with different benefits when the second state is executed, so that the benefits when the second state is executed are set according to the execution period. Therefore, by focusing on the execution period set at the stage when the second trigger is realized, the player can grasp the level of benefits when the second state is executed. This makes it possible to further increase attention and interest in the execution period set at the stage when the second trigger is realized, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix E4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E3 is characterized in that the two or more types of execution periods have a higher probability of realizing the specific state when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E4, the probability of a specific state being established increases the higher the profit when the second state is executed for two or more types of execution periods. In this way, the probability of a specific state being established increases the higher the profit when the second state is executed for two or more types of execution periods. This allows players to enjoy playing the game while hoping that an execution period with a high profit when the second state is executed will be set, and to enjoy playing the game while hoping that a specific state will be established when an execution period with a high profit is set, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix E5]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1, characterized in that the execution period is of one type.

The gaming machine according to Appendix E5 has one type of execution period. As such, because there is only one type of execution period, the execution period when the second trigger is realized is set as a fixed period. This makes it easier to understand whether a specific state has been achieved based on the timing at which the second trigger is realized in a predetermined state. As a result, players can enjoy playing the game while paying attention to the timing at which the second trigger is realized in a predetermined state, hoping that the specific state will be achieved, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix F1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-shortened game state) capable of providing a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first trigger (a type 1 jackpot as a result of a jackpot lottery in a normal game state);
a state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-shortening game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is validated (a third time-shortening game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger (a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is a miss of the time-saving pattern stop) different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state;
a means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is
A state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state is more than a predetermined period (a state in which the number of time-saving games set when the jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving pattern stop miss is greater than the number of time-saving games remaining in the second time-saving game state),
a plurality of types of the specific value are set including the predetermined specific value,
a plurality of execution periods are set corresponding to the specific values;
The specific value determination means sets the predetermined specific value from the plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, an execution period is set from among multiple execution periods based on a predetermined specific value that is set from among multiple specific values when the second trigger is realized. In this way, by setting an execution period from among multiple execution periods based on a predetermined specific value that is set from among multiple specific values when the second trigger is realized, the execution period differs depending on the type of predetermined specific value, and therefore the success or failure of a specific state depends on the type of predetermined characteristic value. As a result, when the second trigger is realized, it becomes difficult to determine whether a specific state has been achieved from the predetermined specific value. Therefore, when the second trigger is realized, the player can enjoy playing the game while paying attention to the type of predetermined characteristic value and hoping that a specific state will be achieved, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix F2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix F1, characterized in that the multiple types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods that have different benefits when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F2, the multiple execution periods include two or more execution periods with different benefits when the second state is executed. In this way, the multiple execution periods include two or more execution periods with different benefits when the second state is executed, so that the benefits when the second state is executed are set according to the execution period. Therefore, by focusing on the execution period set at the stage when the second trigger is realized, the player can grasp the level of benefits when the second state is executed. This makes it possible to further increase attention and interest in the execution period set at the stage when the second trigger is realized, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix F3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix F2, characterized in that the two or more types of execution periods have a higher probability of realizing the specific state when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F3, the probability of a specific state being established increases the higher the profit when the second state is executed for two or more types of execution periods. In this way, the probability of a specific state being established increases the higher the profit when the second state is executed for two or more types of execution periods. This allows players to enjoy playing the game while hoping that an execution period with a high profit when the second state is executed will be set, and to enjoy playing the game while hoping that a specific state will be established when an execution period with a high profit is set, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix G1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-shortened game state) capable of providing a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first trigger (a type 1 jackpot as a result of a jackpot lottery in a normal game state);
a state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-shortening game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is validated (a third time-shortening game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger (a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is a miss of the time-saving pattern stop) different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state;
a means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state is more than a predetermined period (a state in which the number of time-saving games set when the jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving pattern stop miss is greater than the number of time-saving games remaining in the second time-saving game state),
A gaming machine characterized in that the second trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss of the time-saving pattern stop) can be realized during the entire period of the specified state (second time-saving game state).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, the second trigger can be realized throughout the entire predetermined period in the predetermined state. In this way, because the second trigger can be realized throughout the entire predetermined period in the predetermined state, the timing at which the second trigger is realized within that predetermined period is random, and the second trigger can be realized throughout the entire predetermined period in the predetermined state. As a result, it can be expected that the second trigger will be realized throughout the entire predetermined period in the predetermined state, and the player will not be disadvantaged by the second trigger not being realized during part of the predetermined period in the predetermined state, and can enjoy playing throughout the entire predetermined period in the predetermined state.

[Appendix G2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1 is characterized in that when the second trigger is established (the time-saving pattern does not stop) during the specified period of the specified state (second time-saving gaming state), the shorter the remaining period of the specified state (the remaining number of time-saving times), the more likely it is that the specific state will be established.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G2, when the second trigger is realized in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the more likely the specific condition is realized. In this way, when the second trigger is realized in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the more likely the specific condition is realized. As a result, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state (the closer the end of the predetermined period), the more likely the specific condition is realized, providing a gameplay experience that increases the expectation that the second state will be executed. This allows players to enjoy the game while feeling anxious about the approaching end of the predetermined period, and with the hope that the second trigger will be realized as the end of the predetermined period approaches, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix G3]
A gaming machine as described in Appendix G1 or Appendix G2, characterized in that when the second trigger is established (the time-saving pattern does not stop) in the specified state (second time-saving gaming state) and the specific condition is established, the magnitude of the profit (number of time-saving games) in the second state (third time-saving gaming state) differs depending on the remaining period of the specified state (remaining number of time-saving games).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G3, if a specific condition is met when the second trigger is met in a predetermined state, the magnitude of the profit in the second state differs depending on the remaining period of the predetermined state. In this way, if a specific condition is met when the second trigger is met in a predetermined state, the magnitude of the profit in the second state differs depending on the remaining period of the predetermined state. This allows players to enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the timing when the second trigger is met during the specified period of the specified state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix G4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix G3 is characterized in that when the second trigger is established (the time-saving pattern does not stop) in the specified state (second time-saving gaming state) and the specific condition is established, the shorter the remaining period of the specified state (the remaining number of time-saving games), the greater the profit (the number of time-saving games) in the second state (third time-saving gaming state).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G4, if a specific condition is met when the second trigger is met in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining time of the predetermined state, the greater the profit in the second state. In this way, if a specific condition is met when the second trigger is met in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining time of the predetermined state, the greater the profit in the second state. This provides a gameplay feature that makes it easier to receive a high profit in the second state as the remaining time of the predetermined state gets shorter (as the end of the predetermined period approaches). This allows the player to enjoy the game while feeling anxious about the approaching end of the predetermined period, but with the hope that the second trigger will be met and they will receive a high profit in the second state as the end of the predetermined period approaches, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix H1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-shortened game state) capable of providing a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first trigger (a type 1 jackpot as a result of a jackpot lottery in a normal game state);
a state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-shortening game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is validated (a third time-shortening game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger (a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is a miss of the time-saving pattern stop) different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state;
a means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state is more than a predetermined period (a state in which the number of time-saving games set when the jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving pattern stop miss is greater than the number of time-saving games remaining in the second time-saving game state),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined state execution means (41) executes the predetermined state until the predetermined period set in advance expires, regardless of whether the specific state is achieved or not during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1, the predetermined state is executed until the expiration of the preset period, regardless of whether the specific state is achieved during the preset period. In this way, by executing the predetermined state until the expiration of the preset period, regardless of whether the specific state is achieved during the preset period, the player can enjoy the benefits of the predetermined state for the entire duration of the preset period.

Furthermore, by continuing to execute a predetermined state until the end of a preset period, regardless of whether the specific state is achieved during that period, it is possible to add a game feature that notifies the player that a specific state has been achieved, for example, at the end of the predetermined period. In this case, the player can determine whether the specific state was achieved during the predetermined period during which the specific state was executed at the end of the predetermined period. This allows the player to enjoy the game as they wait for the end of the predetermined period in the hope that the specific state was achieved during that period, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix H2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix H1 is characterized in that the state execution means (41) executes the second state after the specified period has expired if a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the specified state.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H2, if a specific state is established when a second trigger is established in a predetermined state, the second state is executed after the predetermined period has expired. In this way, if a specific state is established when a second trigger is established in a predetermined state, the second state is executed after the predetermined period has expired, allowing the player to enjoy the benefits of the predetermined state for the entire predetermined period, and then enjoy the benefits of the second state again after the predetermined period has expired.

[Appendix I1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-shortened game state) capable of providing a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first trigger (a type 1 jackpot as a result of a jackpot lottery in a normal game state);
a state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-shortening game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is validated (a third time-shortening game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger (a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is a miss of the time-saving pattern stop) different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state;
a means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state is more than a predetermined period (a state in which the number of time-saving games set when the jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving pattern stop miss is greater than the number of time-saving games remaining in the second time-saving game state),
A gaming machine characterized by having a resetting means capable of resetting the profit in the second state (third time-shortened gaming state) when the second trigger is established in the second state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, if the second trigger is realized in the second state, the profit in the second state can be reset. In this way, by resetting the profit in the second state if the second trigger is realized in the second state, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable when no profit is awarded when the second trigger is realized in the second state, and a decrease in interest in the game is prevented.

[Appendix I2]
When the second opportunity is realized in the second state (third time-shortened gaming state), a profit determination means is provided for determining a predetermined profit for the realization of the second opportunity;
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1 is characterized in that the resetting means resets the profit in the second state to the predetermined profit if the predetermined profit determined by the profit determination means when the second trigger is established in the second state (third time-shortened gaming state) is greater than the profit in the second state at the time the second trigger is established.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I2, if the predetermined profit determined for the realization of the second trigger when the second trigger is realized in the second state is greater than the profit in the second state at the time the second trigger is realized, the profit in the second state is reset to the predetermined profit. In this way, if the predetermined profit determined for the realization of the second trigger when the second trigger is realized in the second state is greater than the profit in the second state at the time the second trigger is realized, the profit in the second state is reset to the predetermined profit. Therefore, whenever the profit in the second state is reset due to the realization of the second trigger, the profit in the second state is always increased. This allows the player to enjoy the game while hoping for the realization of the second trigger even in the second state, and if the second profit is realized, the player can enjoy the game while focusing on the profit resulting from the realization of the second trigger, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, if the predetermined profit determined when the second trigger occurs in the second state is greater than the profit when the second trigger occurs in the second state, the profit in the second state is reset to the predetermined profit, preventing a decrease in the profit in the second state when the profit in the second state is reset. This prevents the player from suffering a disadvantage when the profit in the second state is reset, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix I3]
The profit determination means determines the predetermined profit as a profit period of the second state (third time-shortened gaming state),
The gaming machine described in Appendix I2 is characterized in that the resetting means resets the remaining period of the second state to the profit period determined by the profit determination means when the profit period determined by the profit determination means is longer than the remaining period of the second state at the time the second trigger is established.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I3, if the profit period for the second state determined when the second trigger is realized in the second state is longer than the remaining period for the second state at the time the second trigger is realized, the remaining period for the second state is reset to that profit period. In this way, if the profit period for the second state determined when the second trigger is realized in the second state is longer than the remaining period for the second state at the time the second trigger is realized, the remaining period for the second state is reset to that profit period, so that when the profit period for the second state is reset, the profit period is always longer. This allows the player to enjoy playing in the second state while hoping for the second trigger to be realized, and if the second profit is realized, the player can enjoy playing while focusing on the profit period resulting from the realization of the second trigger, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, if the benefit period for the second state, which is determined when the second trigger is established in the second state, is longer than the remaining period for the second state at the time the second trigger is established, the remaining period for the second state is reset to that benefit period, thereby preventing the benefit period for the second state from being shortened when it is reset. This prevents the player from being disadvantaged by the resetting of the benefit period for the second state, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix I4]
When the second opportunity is realized in the second state (third time-shortened gaming state), a profit determination means is provided for determining a predetermined profit for the realization of the second opportunity;
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix I1 to Appendix I3, characterized in that the resetting means resets the predetermined profit determined by the profit determination means when the second trigger is established in the second state (third time-shortened gaming state) as the profit in the second state, regardless of the profit in the second state at the time the second trigger is established.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I4, the predetermined profit determined when the second trigger is realized in the second state is reset as the profit in the second state, regardless of the profit in the second state at the time the second trigger is realized. In this way, the predetermined profit determined when the second trigger is realized in the second state is reset as the profit in the second state, regardless of the profit in the second state at the time the second trigger is realized, so that the profit in the second state increases or decreases when the second trigger is realized in the second state. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the predetermined profit when the second trigger is realized and the level of the profit in the second state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix I5]
The profit determination means determines the predetermined profit as a profit period of the second state (third time-shortened gaming state),
The gaming machine described in Appendix I4 is characterized in that the resetting means resets the profit period determined by the profit determination means when the second trigger is established in the second state (third time-shortened gaming state) as the remaining period in the second state, regardless of the remaining period in the second state at the time the second trigger is established.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I5, the profit period determined when the second trigger is realized in the second state is reset as the profit period in the second state, regardless of the profit period in the second state at the time the second trigger is realized. In this way, the profit period determined when the second trigger is realized in the second state is reset as the profit period in the second state, regardless of the profit period in the second state at the time the second trigger is realized, so that the profit period in the second state is lengthened or shortened when the second trigger is realized in the second state. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the profit period when the second trigger is realized and the length of the profit period in the second state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix J1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-shortened game state) capable of providing a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first trigger (a type 1 jackpot as a result of a jackpot lottery in a normal game state);
a state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-shortening game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is validated (a third time-shortening game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger (a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is a miss of the time-saving pattern stop) different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state;
a means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state is more than a predetermined period (a state in which the number of time-saving games set when the jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving pattern stop miss is greater than the number of time-saving games remaining in the second time-saving game state),
a predetermined ball entry means (315) that allows a game ball to enter the ball by opening in a predetermined opening mode selected from a plurality of opening modes (short opening, long opening);
A gaming machine characterized in that the first state (second time-shortened game state) and the second state (third time-shortened game state) have different predetermined opening modes of the predetermined ball entry means (315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J1, the opening mode of the predetermined ball entry means differs between the first and second states. In this way, the opening mode of the predetermined ball entry means differs between the first and second states, resulting in a gameplay in which the opening mode of the ball entry means differs depending on whether a specific condition is met when the second trigger is established; in other words, the ease with which game balls can enter the predetermined ball entry means differs depending on whether the specific condition is met. This means that the benefits in the first and second states are linked to the ease with which game balls can enter the predetermined ball entry means, i.e., the direct benefits to the player obtained by entering game balls into the predetermined ball entry means (e.g., the number of jackpot draws, prize balls), thereby increasing attention and interest in the game and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix J2]
The plurality of opening modes include a first opening mode (short opening) and a second opening mode (long opening) in which the game ball is more likely to enter than the first opening mode,
In the first state (second time-shortened game state), the predetermined ball entry means (315) is opened in the first opening mode,
A gaming machine as described in Appendix J1, characterized in that in the second state (third time-shortened gaming state), the specified ball entry means (315) is opened in the second opening mode.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J2, it is easier for a gaming ball to enter the predetermined entry means in the second state than in the first state. In this way, because it is easier for a gaming ball to enter the predetermined entry means in the second state than in the first state, it is easier for a gaming ball to enter the predetermined entry means in the second state, which is executed when a specific condition is met when the second trigger is met, and it is harder for a gaming ball to enter the predetermined entry means in the first state, which is executed when a specific condition is not met when the second trigger is met. As a result, the second state provides a gameplay that makes it easier to enjoy the benefits obtained from a gaming ball entering the predetermined entry means compared to the first state, which increases attention and interest in the game and improves the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix K1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-shortened game state) capable of providing a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first trigger (a type 1 jackpot as a result of a jackpot lottery in a normal game state);
a state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-shortening game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-shortening games is validated (a third time-shortening game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger (a jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is a miss of the time-saving pattern stop) different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state;
a means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, among the execution periods that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state is more than a predetermined period (a state in which the number of time-saving games set when the jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving pattern stop miss is greater than the number of time-saving games remaining in the second time-saving game state),
A predetermined ball entry means (315) is provided which is opened in a predetermined opening manner to allow game balls to enter the ball entry means;
In the first state (second time-shortened game state) and the second state (third time-shortened game state), a predetermined win/loss judgment (jackpot lottery) is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means (315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K1, a predetermined win/loss determination is made when a gaming ball enters a predetermined entry means in the first state and the second state. In this way, by making a predetermined win/loss determination when a gaming ball enters a predetermined entry means in the first state and the second state, it is possible to provide gameplay in which the frequency (probability) of making a predetermined win/loss determination and the probability of winning a predetermined win/loss determination differ between the first state and the second state depending on whether or not a specific condition is met when the second trigger is met. This increases attention and interest in the game, and improves the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix K2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix K1 is characterized in that the second trigger can be established on the condition that the result of the predetermined win/loss judgment by the win/loss judgment means (41) is a predetermined result (missing the time-saving pattern stop).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K2, the second trigger can be established on the condition that the result of a predetermined hit/miss determination, which is executed in response to a gaming ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, is a predetermined result. In this way, the second trigger can be established on the condition that the result of a predetermined hit/miss determination, which is executed in response to a gaming ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, is a predetermined result. Therefore, whether the second trigger is established and the benefits in the first and second states are determined by the predetermined ball entry means. Therefore, in this gaming machine, the success or failure of the second trigger can be determined and benefits can be awarded in the first and second states using an existing ball entry means (e.g., a second winning slot) that executes a hit/miss determination, thereby adding new gameplay features to the gaming machine without adding any new means.

[Appendix A1]
A first game means (41) for performing a first game operation (first special game) based on the establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 314);
A second game means (41) for performing a second game operation (a second special game) based on the establishment of a second start condition different from the first start condition (a game ball entering the second winning hole 315);
Equipped with
A gaming machine in which a variable display is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when the end of the variable display is the end of a predetermined period of notification of the game result of the variable display at the end of the variable display, the first gaming means and the second gaming means are capable of simultaneously executing the variable display by predetermined display means,
A setting means is provided for setting a variable display time (long-term variable) for a predetermined period of time when the first start condition is established during a predetermined game state (time-saving game state A) which is more advantageous than a normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving symbol stop miss) is obtained,
The second game operation can be completed a predetermined number of times during the variable display time set by the setting means,
The predetermined gaming state ends when the second gaming action is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state execution means (41) for executing the predetermined game state continuously when the first game action corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state;
means for awarding a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game operation during the predetermined variable display time;
a means (41) for ending the predetermined game state and executing the normal game state when a predetermined second game action (a second special game that ends the time-saving game state) that is executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time is completed;
a means (41) capable of granting a specific game value (a transition to a time-shortened game state c) different from the predetermined game value when the predetermined variable display time has ended after the predetermined second game operation has ended and the game has entered the normal game state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, if a first gaming operation corresponding to a specific lottery result is completed during a specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is maintained, and if the first gaming operation corresponding to a specific lottery result is completed after a specific second gaming operation is completed and the game enters the normal gaming state, a specific gaming value different from the specific gaming value that would be awarded if the specific lottery result is achieved is awarded. In this way, if a first gaming operation corresponding to a specific lottery result is completed during a specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is maintained, and if the first gaming operation corresponding to a specific lottery result is completed after a specific second gaming operation is completed and the game enters the normal gaming state, a specific gaming value different from the specific gaming value that would be awarded if the specific lottery result is achieved is awarded, thereby providing a game feature in which whether or not a specific gaming value is awarded is determined by the timing of the completion of the first gaming operation corresponding to a specific lottery result. As a result, in a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first game operation and the variable display of the second game operation can be executed simultaneously, the player can enjoy each second game operation while hoping that a predetermined number of second game operations will end early, and can enjoy the first game operation while focusing on when the first game operation corresponding to a specific lottery result will end, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix B1]
A first game means (41) for performing a first game operation (first special game) based on the establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 314);
A second game means (41) for performing a second game operation (a second special game) based on the establishment of a second start condition different from the first start condition (a game ball entering the second winning hole 315);
Equipped with
A gaming machine in which a variable display is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when the end of the variable display is the end of a predetermined period of notification of the game result of the variable display at the end of the variable display, the first gaming means and the second gaming means are capable of simultaneously executing the variable display by predetermined display means,
A setting means is provided for setting a variable display time (long-term variable) for a predetermined period of time when the first start condition is established during a predetermined game state (time-saving game state A) which is more advantageous than a normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving symbol stop miss) is obtained,
The second game operation can be completed a predetermined number of times during the variable display time set by the setting means,
The predetermined gaming state ends when the second gaming action is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state execution means (41) for executing the predetermined game state continuously when the first game action corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state;
means for awarding a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game operation during the predetermined variable display time;
a means (41) for ending the predetermined game state and executing the normal game state when a predetermined second game action (a second special game that ends the time-saving game state) that is executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time is completed;
a means (41) capable of granting a specific game value (a transition to a time-shortened game state c) different from the predetermined game value when the predetermined variable display time has ended after the predetermined second game operation has ended and the game has entered the normal game state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of specific variable display times are set for the second game operation (second special chart game) started by the second game means (41) in the specified game state (a time-shortened game state), and the longer the specific variable display time, the higher the expectation (jackpot expectation) of the specified lottery result (jackpot) that will award the specified game value (execution of jackpot game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, multiple specific variable display times are set for the second gaming operation in a predetermined gaming state, and the longer the specific variable display time, the higher the expectation of a predetermined lottery result in which a predetermined gaming value will be awarded. Incidentally, the longer the specific variable display time, the more unfavorable it is for the game to enter the normal gaming state in which a specific gaming value can be awarded upon completion of a predetermined number of second gaming operations. In contrast, the longer the specific variable display time, the higher the expectation of a predetermined lottery result in which a predetermined gaming value will be awarded. Therefore, in situations where a long specific variable display time is unfavorable to the player and could reduce their interest in the game, increasing the expectation of a predetermined gaming value being awarded can prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Rather, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping for a predetermined lottery result, thereby increasing their enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix C1]
A first game means (41) for performing a first game operation (first special game) based on the establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 314);
A second game means (41) for performing a second game operation (a second special game) based on the establishment of a second start condition different from the first start condition (a game ball entering the second winning hole 315);
Equipped with
A gaming machine in which a variable display is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when the end of the variable display is the end of a predetermined period of notification of the game result of the variable display at the end of the variable display, the first gaming means and the second gaming means are capable of simultaneously executing the variable display by predetermined display means,
A setting means is provided for setting a variable display time (long-term variable) for a predetermined period of time when the first start condition is established during a predetermined game state (time-saving game state A) which is more advantageous than a normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving symbol stop miss) is obtained,
The second game operation can be completed a predetermined number of times during the variable display time set by the setting means,
The predetermined gaming state ends when the second gaming action is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state execution means (41) for executing the predetermined game state continuously when the first game action corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state;
means for awarding a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game operation during the predetermined variable display time;
a means (41) for ending the predetermined game state and executing the normal game state when a predetermined second game action (a second special game that ends the time-saving game state) that is executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time is completed;
a means (41) capable of granting a specific game value (a transition to a time-shortened game state c) different from the predetermined game value when the predetermined variable display time has ended after the predetermined second game operation has ended and the game has entered the normal game state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that whether or not to award the specific gaming value (transition to a time-shortened gaming state c) as the gaming result for the first gaming operation (first special symbol game) is determined by referring to predetermined gaming state information (e.g., high probability mode, low probability mode) at the end of the first gaming operation (first special symbol game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, whether or not to award a specific gaming value as a gaming result for a first gaming operation is determined by reference to predetermined gaming state information at the end of the first gaming operation. When the predetermined gaming state ends with the end of a predetermined number of second gaming operations and the normal gaming state is executed, the first gaming operation corresponding to a specific lottery result may end in the predetermined gaming state or in the normal gaming state. That is, the gaming state at which the first gaming operation started and the gaming state at which the first gaming operation ended may be the same or different. Therefore, whether or not to award a specific gaming value as a gaming result for a first gaming operation is determined by reference to predetermined gaming state information at the end of the first gaming operation. Therefore, whether or not to award a specific gaming value is determined at a consistent time, regardless of whether the gaming state at which the first gaming operation started and the gaming state at which the first gaming operation ended are the same or different. This makes it possible to easily determine whether or not to award a specific gaming value as a gaming result for the first gaming action, while also improving the reliability of that determination process.

[Appendix D1]
A first game means (41) for performing a first game operation (first special game) based on the establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 314);
A second game means (41) for performing a second game operation (a second special game) based on the establishment of a second start condition different from the first start condition (a game ball entering the second winning hole 315);
Equipped with
A gaming machine in which a variable display is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when the end of the variable display is the end of a predetermined period of notification of the game result of the variable display at the end of the variable display, the first gaming means and the second gaming means are capable of simultaneously executing the variable display by predetermined display means,
A setting means is provided for setting a variable display time (long-term variable) for a predetermined period of time when the first start condition is established during a predetermined game state (time-saving game state A) which is more advantageous than a normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving symbol stop miss) is obtained,
The second game operation can be completed a predetermined number of times during the variable display time set by the setting means,
The predetermined gaming state ends when the second gaming action is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state execution means (41) for executing the predetermined game state continuously when the first game action corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state;
means for awarding a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game operation during the predetermined variable display time;
a means (41) for ending the predetermined game state and executing the normal game state when a predetermined second game action (a second special game that ends the time-saving game state) that is executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time is completed;
a means (41) capable of granting a specific game value (a transition to a time-shortened game state c) different from the predetermined game value when the predetermined variable display time has ended after the predetermined second game operation has ended and the game has entered the normal game state;
Equipped with
The predetermined gaming value is higher than the specific gaming value.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, the predetermined game value is higher than the specific game value. In this way, because the predetermined game value is higher than the specific game value, a predetermined game value higher than the specific game value that would be awarded by executing a normal game state upon completion of a predetermined number of second game operations can be awarded before the end of a predetermined number of second game operations. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of each second game operation while hoping for a predetermined lottery result until the end of a predetermined number of second game operations. Furthermore, even if the second game operation does not correspond to the predetermined lottery result, the likelihood of executing the second game operation to enter a normal game state in which a specific game value can be awarded is increased. Therefore, in the second game operation, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping for a predetermined lottery result, and even if the predetermined lottery result is not achieved, no game value is gained. Rather, even if the game value is lower than the predetermined game value, by repeating this a predetermined number of times, a specific game value can be gained, thereby reducing the loss of interest in the game when the second game operation does not correspond to the predetermined lottery result.

[Appendix D2]
The predetermined game value is that a special game (jackpot game) having a higher expected value for the number of game balls acquired than the normal game state and the predetermined game state (time-saving game state) is executed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix D1 is characterized in that the specific gaming value increases the chance of the second starting condition being met (a gaming ball entering the second winning slot 315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D2, the predetermined game value is the execution of a special game with a higher expected value for the number of game balls acquired than in the normal game state and the predetermined game state, and the specific game value is the increase in the chances of the second start condition being met. In this way, the predetermined game value is the execution of a special game with a higher expected value for the number of game balls acquired than in the normal game state and the predetermined game state, and the specific game value is the increase in the chances of the second start condition being met. Therefore, a special game with a high expected value for the number of game balls acquired can be executed before the end of the predetermined number of second game operations. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of each second game operation until the end of the predetermined number of second game operations, hoping that a special game will be executed based on the predetermined lottery result. Furthermore, even if the second game operation does not correspond to the predetermined lottery result, the execution of the second game operation increases the chances of obtaining game value that increases the chances of the second start condition being met. Therefore, in the second game operation, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping for a predetermined lottery result, and even if the predetermined lottery result is not achieved, no game value is gained. Rather, as the second game operation is repeated a predetermined number of times, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping for the possibility of gaining game value as the chances of the second start condition being met increase, thereby reducing the loss of interest in the game when the second game operation does not correspond to the predetermined lottery result.

[Appendix E1]
A first game means (41) for performing a first game operation (first special game) based on the establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 314);
A second game means (41) for performing a second game operation (a second special game) based on the establishment of a second start condition different from the first start condition (a game ball entering the second winning hole 315);
Equipped with
A gaming machine in which a variable display is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when the end of the variable display is the end of a predetermined period of notification of the game result of the variable display at the end of the variable display, the first gaming means and the second gaming means are capable of simultaneously executing the variable display by predetermined display means,
A setting means is provided for setting a variable display time (long-term variable) for a predetermined period of time when the first start condition is established during a predetermined game state (time-saving game state A) which is more advantageous than a normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving symbol stop miss) is obtained,
The second game operation can be completed a predetermined number of times during the variable display time set by the setting means,
The predetermined gaming state ends when the second gaming action is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state execution means (41) for executing the predetermined game state continuously when the first game action corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state;
means for awarding a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game operation during the predetermined variable display time;
a means (41) for ending the predetermined game state and executing the normal game state when a predetermined second game action (a second special game that ends the time-saving game state) that is executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time is completed;
a means (41) capable of granting a specific game value (a transition to a time-shortened game state c) different from the predetermined game value when the predetermined variable display time has ended after the predetermined second game operation has ended and the game has entered the normal game state;
A means (51) for notifying the remaining period (number of time-shortening games) of the predetermined game state (time-shortening game state a) in a predetermined manner (number);
A means (51) for informing the remaining period of the second game operation (second special game) by emphasizing (for example, color, size, pattern, effect, or a combination thereof) more than the predetermined manner during the predetermined game state (a time-shortened game state);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, the remaining time of a predetermined gaming state is notified in a predetermined manner, and during the predetermined gaming state, the remaining time of the second gaming operation is notified in a more emphasized manner than in a predetermined manner. In this way, by notifying the remaining time of the predetermined gaming state in a predetermined manner and notifying the remaining time of the second gaming operation in a predetermined manner during the predetermined gaming state, it becomes easier to grasp the numerical value of the remaining time of the first gaming operation. This makes it easier for a player to predict, based on information obtained from the numerical value of the remaining time of the first gaming operation, whether the first gaming operation corresponding to a specific lottery result will end after the end of a predetermined number of second gaming operations (whether the predetermined number of second gaming operations can be completed during the execution of the first gaming operation corresponding to a specific lottery result). Therefore, by focusing on the remaining period of the second game action, which is announced more emphatically than in a predetermined manner, the player can predict the end timing of the first game action or the end timing of a predetermined number of second game actions and enjoy the progress of the game, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix F1]
A first game means (41) for performing a first game operation (first special game) based on the establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 314);
A second game means (41) for performing a second game operation (a second special game) based on the establishment of a second start condition different from the first start condition (a game ball entering the second winning hole 315);
Equipped with
A gaming machine in which a variable display is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when the end of the variable display is the end of a predetermined period of notification of the game result of the variable display at the end of the variable display, the first gaming means and the second gaming means are capable of simultaneously executing the variable display by predetermined display means,
A setting means is provided for setting a variable display time (long-term variable) for a predetermined period of time when the first start condition is established during a predetermined game state (time-saving game state A) which is more advantageous than a normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving symbol stop miss) is obtained,
The second game operation can be completed a predetermined number of times during the variable display time set by the setting means,
The predetermined gaming state ends when the second gaming action is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state execution means (41) for executing the predetermined game state continuously when the first game action corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state;
means for awarding a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game operation during the predetermined variable display time;
a means (41) for ending the predetermined game state and executing the normal game state when a predetermined second game action (a second special game that ends the time-saving game state) that is executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time is completed;
a means (41) capable of granting a specific game value (a transition to a time-shortened game state c) different from the predetermined game value when the predetermined variable display time has ended after the predetermined second game operation has ended and the game has entered the normal game state;
Equipped with
The variable display time of the second game operation (second special symbol game) started during the predetermined game state (a time-shortened game state) includes a predetermined variable display time longer than the longest variable display time set for the first game operation (first special symbol game) started during the predetermined game state (a time-shortened game state),
A gaming machine characterized in that the second game operation in which the predetermined variable display time is set has a high expectation (jackpot expectation) of the predetermined lottery result (jackpot) that will award the predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F1, the variable display time of the second game operation initiated during a predetermined game state includes a predetermined variable display time longer than the longest variable display time set for the first game operation initiated during the predetermined game state, and the second game operation for which the predetermined variable display time is set is set to have a high expectation of being a predetermined lottery result for which a predetermined game value is awarded. Meanwhile, the longer the specific variable display time, the more disadvantageous it is for the game to enter a normal game state in which a specific game value can be awarded upon completion of a predetermined number of second game operations. In contrast, the second game operation for which the predetermined variable display time is set is set to have a predetermined variable display time longer than the longest variable display time set for the first game operation initiated during the predetermined game state, and is set to have a high expectation of being a predetermined lottery result for which a specific game value is awarded. Therefore, in situations where a specific variable display time is long and disadvantageous to the player, and interest in the game may decrease, increasing the expectation of being awarded a predetermined game value can prevent a decrease in interest in the game, and instead, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping for a predetermined lottery result, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix G1]
A first game means (41) for performing a first game operation (first special game) based on the establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 314);
A second game means (41) for performing a second game operation (a second special game) based on the establishment of a second start condition different from the first start condition (a game ball entering the second winning hole 315);
Equipped with
A gaming machine in which a variable display is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when the end of the variable display is the end of a predetermined period of notification of the game result of the variable display at the end of the variable display, the first gaming means and the second gaming means are capable of simultaneously executing the variable display by predetermined display means,
A setting means is provided for setting a variable display time (long-term variable) for a predetermined period of time when the first start condition is established during a predetermined game state (time-saving game state A) which is more advantageous than a normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving symbol stop miss) is obtained,
The second game operation can be completed a predetermined number of times during the variable display time set by the setting means,
The predetermined gaming state ends when the second gaming action is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state execution means (41) for executing the predetermined game state continuously when the first game action corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state;
means for awarding a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game operation during the predetermined variable display time;
a means (41) for ending the predetermined game state and executing the normal game state when a predetermined second game action (a second special game that ends the time-saving game state) that is executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time is completed;
a means (41) capable of granting a specific game value (a transition to a time-shortened game state c) different from the predetermined game value when the predetermined variable display time has ended after the predetermined second game operation has ended and the game has entered the normal game state;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined gaming state execution means (41) awards a predetermined gaming value (for example, execution of a small winning game, opening of the second winning slot 315 by operating the electric device 315b, displaying a premium image or executing a premium performance, opening of a specific song, etc.) when continuing to execute the predetermined gaming state after the first gaming operation corresponding to the specific lottery result has ended during the predetermined gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1, if the first game operation corresponding to a specific lottery result ends during a predetermined game state and the predetermined game state continues, a third game value different from the predetermined game value and the specific game value is awarded. In this way, if the first game operation corresponding to a specific lottery result ends during a predetermined game state and the predetermined game state continues, a third game value different from the predetermined game value and the specific game value is awarded. By doing so, even if the timing of the end of the first game operation corresponding to a specific lottery result results in an unfavorable outcome for the player, the awarding of the third game value can reduce the loss of interest in the game caused by this unfavorable outcome.

[Appendix A1]
a light emitting means (341) visible when viewed from the front of the game board (31);
An information acquisition means (41) for acquiring special information (jackpot random number) when an acquisition condition is met (a game ball enters the winning slots 314, 315);
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether the special information is a jackpot random number for executing a jackpot game);
a first rotating means (37);
Second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising:
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) that is rotatable around a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to be able to visually recognize the light from the light emitting means (341) located on the rear side, and is configured to be able to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, it is displaceable between a first position where it can be seen without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) and a second position where it can be seen through the rotating plate portion (370);
This gaming machine is
a first state in which light from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position is visible through the rotating rotary plate part (370) in a predetermined game state;
a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion (370), thereby blocking the light of the light emitting means (341) at the specific position, and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370); and
A gaming machine characterized by having:

The gaming machine according to Appendix A1 has a first state in which the light from the light-emitting means is visible through the rotating plate portion of the rotating first rotating means, and a second state in which the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion, blocking the light from the light-emitting means and making the second rotating means visible through the rotating plate portion. This allows for two states, the first state and the second state, to be established depending on the operation of the first rotating means and the second rotating means, thereby diversifying the effects that can be executed by the operation of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. For example, in the first state in which the light from the light-emitting means is visible through the rotating plate portion of the rotating first rotating means, effects can be executed according to the visibility of the light from the light-emitting means as seen through the rotating plate portion. Specifically, depending on the visibility of the light of the light-emitting means visible through the rotating plate, it is possible to execute an effect that provides the player with information about the game, for example, an effect that clearly indicates or suggests the degree of expectation that the special information will satisfy a predetermined condition, an effect that clearly indicates or suggests the game value that will be granted to the player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and further, an effect that clearly indicates or suggests the type of effect to be executed later. Also, in a second state in which the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate, blocking the light of the light-emitting means and making the second rotating means visible through the rotating plate, it is possible to execute an effect that corresponds to the visibility of the second rotating means visible through the rotating plate. Specifically, depending on the visibility of the light visible through the rotating plate portion of the first rotation means, it is possible to execute effects that provide the player with information about the game, such as effects that clearly indicate or suggest the degree of expectation that the special information will satisfy a predetermined condition, effects that clearly indicate or suggest the game value that will be awarded to the player when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and even effects that clearly indicate or suggest the type of effect that will be executed later. In this way, by having a first state and a second state, the effects executed by the operation of the first rotation means and second rotation means are diversified, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1, wherein at least a portion of the rotating plate portion (370) is translucent.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A2, at least a portion of the rotating plate is translucent. This allows for a first state in which the light from the light-emitting means is visible through the translucent portion, while also allowing for a second state in which the first rotating means is visible through the translucent portion.

[Appendix A3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A2, wherein the rotating plate portion (370) is entirely translucent.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A3, the entire rotating plate is translucent. In this way, the entire rotating plate is translucent, which makes it easier to form the rotating plate compared to when only a portion of the rotating plate is formed as translucent.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A2, wherein the rotating plate portion (370) has a translucent area that is more translucent than other areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A4, the rotating plate has a translucent area that is more translucent than other areas. By having the rotating plate have a translucent area that is more translucent than other areas, it is possible to set the translucent area as the area where the light from the light-emitting means is visible in the first state, and the area where the second rotating means is visible in the second state. This makes it clear that the area to which the player should pay attention in the effects executed in the first and second states is the translucent area. This allows the player to enjoy the game by focusing on the translucent area when the effects are executed in the first and second states. Furthermore, when part of the rotating plate is a translucent area, it is also possible to make the parts other than the translucent area a non-translucent area, thereby improving the decorativeness of the rotating plate.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A4, wherein the translucent area is a magnifying lens.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A5, the translucent area is a magnifying lens. By using a magnifying lens in this way, the translucent area can emphasize and display the light from the light-emitting means visible through the rotating plate and the information about the game provided by the second rotating means. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the information about the game provided in the first state and the second state, making it easier for the player to enjoy the effects executed in the first state and the second state.

[Appendix A6]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A4, wherein the translucent area is a through hole.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A6, the translucent region is a through-hole. Using a through-hole as the translucent region makes it easier to form the translucent region. For example, if the rotating plate portion is formed by resin molding, the translucent region can be formed without complicating the shape of the molding die, and the translucent region can be formed without employing techniques such as insert molding.

[Appendix B1]
a light emitting means (341) visible when viewed from the front of the game board (31);
An information acquisition means (41) for acquiring special information (jackpot random number) when an acquisition condition is met (a game ball enters the winning slots 314, 315);
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether the special information is a jackpot random number for executing a jackpot game);
a first rotating means (37);
Second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising:
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) that is rotatable around a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to be able to visually recognize the light from the light emitting means (341) located on the rear side, and is configured to be able to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, it is displaceable between a first position where it can be seen without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) and a second position where it can be seen through the rotating plate portion (370);
This gaming machine is
a first state in which light from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position is visible through the rotating rotary plate part (370) in a predetermined game state;
a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion (370), thereby blocking the light of the light emitting means (341) at the specific position, and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370); and
and
The first rotating means (37) is rotatable at a predetermined position,
the second rotating means (38L, 38R) can move toward and away from the first rotating means (37) that rotates at the predetermined position;
the first state can be realized when the second rotation means (38L, 38R) moves away from the predetermined position;
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1, characterized in that the second state can be realized when the second rotation means (38L, 38R) approaches the predetermined position.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, the first state can be realized by moving the second rotation means away from the first rotation means rotating at a predetermined position, and the second state can be realized by moving the second rotation means close to the first rotation means rotating at a predetermined position. In this way, the first state can be realized by moving the second rotation means away from the first rotation means rotating at a predetermined position, and the second state can be realized by moving the second rotation means close to the first rotation means rotating at a predetermined position, so that the first and second states can be realized by simple control of moving the second rotation means close to or away from the first rotation means rotating at a predetermined position.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, when the first rotation means rotates at a predetermined position, the player can determine the timing when the first state will be reached and the timing when the second state will be reached by focusing on the second rotation means. This allows the player to determine the timing when the effect will be executed in the first state and the timing when the effect will be executed in the second state. In other words, by clarifying the timing to pay attention to during play, the player can easily and reliably enjoy the effects executed in the first state and the second state.

[Appendix C1]
a light emitting means (341) visible when viewed from the front of the game board (31);
An information acquisition means (41) for acquiring special information (jackpot random number) when an acquisition condition is met (a game ball enters the winning slots 314, 315);
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether the special information is a jackpot random number for executing a jackpot game);
a first rotating means (37);
Second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising:
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) that is rotatable around a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to be able to visually recognize the light from the light emitting means (341) located on the rear side, and is configured to be able to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, it is displaceable between a first position where it can be seen without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) and a second position where it can be seen through the rotating plate portion (370);
This gaming machine is
a first state in which light from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position is visible through the rotating rotary plate part (370) in a predetermined game state;
a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion (370), thereby blocking the light of the light emitting means (341) at the specific position, and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370); and
and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a plurality of second rotation means (38L, 38R) capable of realizing the second state.

The gaming machine according to Appendix C1 is provided with a plurality of second rotation means capable of realizing the second state. In this way, by providing a plurality of second rotation means capable of realizing the second state, it becomes possible to realize the second state using each of the plurality of second rotation means. This makes it possible to execute a variety of effects based on the visual appearance of the second state realized by each of the plurality of second rotation means.

[Appendix C2]
the plurality of second rotation means (38L, 38R) include a specific second rotation means (38L) and a predetermined second rotation means (38R) different from the specific second rotation means (38L);
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1 is characterized in that a first visual appearance of the specific second rotation means (38L) that is visible through the rotating plate portion (370) when the specific second rotation means (38L) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370) to be in the second state is different from a second visual appearance of the specific second rotation means (38R) that is visible through the rotating plate portion (370) when the specific second rotation means (38R) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370) to be in the second state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C2, the first visual appearance of the specific second rotation means viewed through the rotating plate when the specific second rotation means is brought into the second state is different from the second visual appearance of the specific second rotation means viewed through the rotating plate when the specific second rotation means is brought into the second state. In this way, the first visual appearance of the specific second rotation means viewed through the rotating plate when the specific second rotation means is brought into the second state is different from the second visual appearance of the specific second rotation means viewed through the rotating plate when the specific second rotation means is brought into the second state. This makes it possible to execute effects in the second state that correspond to the first visual appearance of the specific second rotation means and the second visual appearance of the specific second rotation means. This makes it possible to execute a variety of effects based on the first and second visual appearances in the second state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix C3]
A gaming machine as described in Appendix C1, characterized in that first information regarding a game is provided in the first viewing mode, and second information regarding a game that is different from the first information is provided in the second viewing mode.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C3, first information about the game is provided in the first visual mode, and second information about the game that is different from the first information about the game is provided in the second visual mode. In this way, by providing first information about the game in the first visual mode and providing second information about the game that is different from the first information about the game in the second visual mode, the player can obtain information that is visually recognized according to the type of second rotation means in the second state. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game based on the information about the game provided from the visual mode of the second rotation means, while focusing on the type of second rotation means that is in the second state.

[Appendix D1]
a light emitting means (341) visible when viewed from the front of the game board (31);
An information acquisition means (41) for acquiring special information (jackpot random number) when an acquisition condition is met (a game ball enters the winning slots 314, 315);
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether the special information is a jackpot random number for executing a jackpot game);
a first rotating means (37);
Second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising:
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) that is rotatable around a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to be able to visually recognize the light from the light emitting means (341) located on the rear side, and is configured to be able to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, it is displaceable between a first position where it can be seen without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) and a second position where it can be seen through the rotating plate portion (370);
This gaming machine is
a first state in which light from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position is visible through the rotating rotary plate part (370) in a predetermined game state;
a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion (370), thereby blocking the light of the light emitting means (341) at the specific position, and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370); and
and
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second rotation means (38L, 38R) can move along a plurality of different paths.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, the second rotation means can move along multiple different paths. In this way, since the second rotation means can move along multiple different paths, it is possible to execute effects according to the type of path along which the second rotation means moves, thereby enabling a variety of effects.

[Appendix E1]
a light emitting means (341) visible when viewed from the front of the game board (31);
An information acquisition means (41) for acquiring special information (jackpot random number) when an acquisition condition is met (a game ball enters the winning slots 314, 315);
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether the special information is a jackpot random number for executing a jackpot game);
a first rotating means (37);
Second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising:
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) that is rotatable around a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to be able to visually recognize the light from the light emitting means (341) located on the rear side, and is configured to be able to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, it is displaceable between a first position where it can be seen without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) and a second position where it can be seen through the rotating plate portion (370);
This gaming machine is
a first state in which light from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position is visible through the rotating rotary plate part (370) in a predetermined game state;
a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion (370), thereby blocking the light of the light emitting means (341) at the specific position, and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370); and
and
A means (41) for executing a notification game (special game) for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means as to whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied;
a first switching means (51) capable of switching the rotating plate portion (370) between the predetermined rotating state and the predetermined stopped state when a predetermined trigger (a jackpot lottery result) is established in the notification game;
a second switching means (51) that moves the second rotating means (38L, 38R) to the rear side of the rotating plate portion (370) when a specific opportunity (a jackpot lottery result) is established in the notification game, and that can switch from the first state to the second state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, in a notification game in which the determination means determines whether a predetermined condition is met, the rotating plate can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state when a predetermined trigger is established, and the second rotating means can be moved to the back side of the rotating plate when a specific trigger is established, thereby switching from the first state to the second state. In this way, in a notification game in which the determination means determines whether a predetermined condition is met, the rotating plate can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state when a predetermined trigger is established, and the second rotating means can be moved to the back side of the rotating plate when a specific trigger is established, thereby switching from the first state to the second state. Therefore, the first state and the second state can be established depending on the operation of the first rotating means and the second rotating means, and therefore the presentations executed in the notification game can be diversified depending on the operation of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. For example, in a notification game, in at least one of the first and second states, it is possible to execute an effect that provides the player with information about the game, such as an effect that clearly indicates or suggests the degree of expectation that the special information will satisfy a predetermined condition, an effect that clearly indicates or suggests the game value that will be granted to the player when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and even an effect that clearly indicates or suggests the type of effect that will be executed later. In this way, by realizing the first and second states in a notification game, the effects executed by the operation of the first rotation means and the second rotation means are diversified, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix F1]
a light emitting means (341) visible when viewed from the front of the game board (31);
An information acquisition means (41) for acquiring special information (jackpot random number) when an acquisition condition is met (a game ball enters the winning slots 314, 315);
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether the special information is a jackpot random number for executing a jackpot game);
a first rotating means (37);
Second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising:
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) that is rotatable around a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to be able to visually recognize the light from the light emitting means (341) located on the rear side, and is configured to be able to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, it is displaceable between a first position where it can be seen without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) and a second position where it can be seen through the rotating plate portion (370);
This gaming machine is
a first state in which light from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position is visible through the rotating rotary plate part (370) in a predetermined game state;
a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion (370), thereby blocking the light of the light emitting means (341) at the specific position, and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370); and
and
means (41) for executing a special game advantageous to a player when the determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied;
a first switching means (51) capable of switching the rotating plate portion (370) between the predetermined rotating state and the predetermined stopped state when a predetermined opportunity (a jackpot lottery result) is established in the special game;
a second switching means (51) that moves the second rotating means (38L, 38R) to the rear side of the rotating plate portion (370) when a specific opportunity (a jackpot lottery result) is established in the special game, and that can switch from the first state to the second state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, in a special game advantageous to a player that is executed when the determination means determines that a predetermined condition is met, the rotating plate can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state when a predetermined trigger is established, and when a specific trigger is established, the second rotating means is moved to the back side of the rotating plate, thereby switching from the first state to the second state. In this way, in a special game advantageous to a player that is executed when the determination means determines that a predetermined condition is met, the rotating plate can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state when a predetermined trigger is established, and when a specific trigger is established, the second rotating means is moved to the back side of the rotating plate, thereby switching from the first state to the second state. Therefore, two states, the first state and the second state, can be established depending on the operation of the first rotating means and the second rotating means, and therefore the effects executed in the special game can be diversified depending on the operation of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. For example, in a special game, in at least one of the first and second states, it is possible to execute an effect that provides the player with information about the game, such as an effect that clearly indicates or suggests the degree of expectation that the special information will satisfy a predetermined condition, an effect that clearly indicates or suggests the game value that will be granted to the player when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and even an effect that clearly indicates or suggests the type of effect that will be executed later. In this way, by realizing the first and second states in a special game, the effects executed by the operation of the first rotation means and the second rotation means are diversified, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix G1]
a light emitting means (341) visible when viewed from the front of the game board (31);
An information acquisition means (41) for acquiring special information (jackpot random number) when an acquisition condition is met (a game ball enters the winning slots 314, 315);
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether the special information is a jackpot random number for executing a jackpot game);
a first rotating means (37);
Second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising:
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) that is rotatable around a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to be able to visually recognize the light from the light emitting means (341) located on the rear side, and is configured to be able to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, it is displaceable between a first position where it can be seen without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) and a second position where it can be seen through the rotating plate portion (370);
This gaming machine is
a first state in which light from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position is visible through the rotating rotary plate part (370) in a predetermined game state;
a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion (370), thereby blocking the light of the light emitting means (341) at the specific position, and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370); and
and
The rotating plate portion (370) starts to rotate when a member (38L, 38R) other than the first rotating means (37) interferes with the first rotating means (37).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, rotation of the rotating plate begins when a member other than the first rotating means interferes with the first rotating means. In this way, rotation of the rotating plate begins when a member other than the first rotating means interferes with the first rotating means, allowing the player to grasp the timing at which rotation of the rotating plate begins. This allows the player to grasp the timing at which the second state will occur, i.e., the timing at which the second rotating means will become visible through the rotating plate, by focusing on the movement of the first rotating means and the member that may interfere with the first rotating means. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the first rotating means and the member that may interfere with the first rotating means, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix G2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1, characterized in that the member that can interfere with the first rotation means (37) is the second rotation means (38L, 38R).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G2, the member that may interfere with the first rotation means is the second rotation means. Because the member that may interfere with the first rotation means is the second rotation means, the player can focus on the movement of the first and second rotation means to grasp the timing when the second state will occur, i.e., the timing when the second rotation means will become visible through the rotating plate portion. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the first and second rotation means, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix G3]
The gaming machine according to appendix G1 or G2, wherein the member that can interfere with the first rotation means (37) is a gaming ball.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G3, the member that may interfere with the first rotation means is the gaming ball. In this way, because the member that may interfere with the first rotation means is the gaming ball, the player can grasp the timing when the second state will occur, that is, the timing when the second rotation means will become visible through the rotating plate portion, by focusing on the movement of the first rotation means and the gaming ball. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the first rotation means and the gaming ball, which increases the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix H1]
a light emitting means (341) visible when viewed from the front of the game board (31);
An information acquisition means (41) for acquiring special information (jackpot random number) when an acquisition condition is met (a game ball enters the winning slots 314, 315);
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether the special information is a jackpot random number for executing a jackpot game);
a first rotating means (37);
Second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising:
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) that is rotatable around a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to be able to visually recognize the light from the light emitting means (341) located on the rear side, and is configured to be able to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable, and when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, it is displaceable between a first position where it can be seen without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) and a second position where it can be seen through the rotating plate portion (370);
This gaming machine is
a first state in which light from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position is visible through the rotating rotary plate part (370) in a predetermined game state;
a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion (370), thereby blocking the light of the light emitting means (341) at the specific position, and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370); and
and
A gaming machine characterized in that, depending on the positional relationship between the first rotation means (37) and the second rotation means (38L, 38R), it is possible to generate an advantageous first mode (e.g., notification mode A) and a second mode (e.g., notification mode D) that is less advantageous than the first mode.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1, the positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means can create an advantageous first mode and a second mode that is less advantageous than the first mode. Because the positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means can create an advantageous first mode and a second mode that is less advantageous than the first mode, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means when they are activated. In other words, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are activated, the first rotation means and the second rotation means will be in the positional relationship that is the advantageous first mode, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix H2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix H1, wherein the first aspect and the second aspect can occur in the second state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H2, the first and second modes can occur in the second state. Because the first and second modes can occur in the second state, when the second rotation means moves to the rear side of the rotating rotating plate, the player can enjoy the game while hoping that the first and second rotation means will assume the advantageous positional relationship of the first mode, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A1]
a determination means (41) for determining whether or not a transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) will occur in which a predetermined special game advantageous to a player (5R normal jackpot game, 5R probability variable jackpot game, or 16R probability variable jackpot game) is executed when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315);
a variable display means (41, 51) for displaying a variable display of predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol) when the determination means (41) determines whether or not to transition to the special game state;
a reservation means (41, 51) for reserving the right to execute the variable display of the predetermined pattern executed by the variable display means (41, 51);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball-entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball-entry means (314) and a second starting ball-entry means (315) different from the first starting ball-entry means (314) for switching between an unfavorable state (normal game state) in which game ball entry is restricted and an advantageous state (probable game state, time-limited game state) in which game ball entry is easier than the unfavorable state,
After the predetermined special game ends, the advantageous state is executed until a predetermined condition is met (start of a jackpot game, execution of a specified number of special game),
a first output means (41) for continuously outputting predetermined identification information (basic signal of jackpot signal 2) that can identify the predetermined special game state and the advantageous state to the outside in the predetermined special game state and the advantageous state;
an output stopping means (41) for stopping the output of the predetermined identification information by the first output means (41) when the advantageous state ends;
A storage means (41) for storing the number of reserved rights to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbol triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means (315) at the end of the advantageous state;
a second output means (41) for continuously outputting, for a predetermined period after the advantageous state has ended, specific identification information (an extension signal of the big win signal 2) that can identify that this is a period in which a predetermined variable display of the predetermined pattern corresponding to at least the reserved right stored in the storage means (41) can be executed;
Equipped with
The second output means (41) continuously outputs the specific identification information (extension signal of jackpot signal 2) in an output manner different from the output manner of the predetermined identification information (basic signal of jackpot signal 2) by the first output means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, when a predetermined special game state or advantageous state is in progress, the first output means continuously outputs predetermined identification information that can identify the state to the outside. This allows, for example, a hall computer in an amusement hall to determine that the predetermined special game state or advantageous state is in progress based on the predetermined identification information. This allows the hall computer to determine the number of consecutive special games from the start of the first special game to the end of the advantageous state. Meanwhile, a data display attached to the gaming machine can display the number of consecutive special games from the start of the first special game to the end of the advantageous state based on information generated based on the predetermined identification information output from the hall computer.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, after the end of the advantageous state, the second output means continuously outputs, for a predetermined period of time, specific identification information that can identify that this is a period during which a predetermined variable display of a predetermined symbol corresponding to at least the reserved right stored in the storage means can be executed in an output mode different from the predetermined identification information. For example, a hall computer in an amusement hall can determine, based on the specific identification information, that a predetermined variable display based on the reserved display at the end of the advantageous state is being executed. As a result, if the determination result of the determination means is to transition to a special game state, the hall computer can determine, based on the specific identification information, that the predetermined variable display is a predetermined variable display due to the reserved display at the end of the advantageous state. Therefore, the hall computer can count special games executed based on the predetermined variable display due to the reserved display at the end of the advantageous state as part of the consecutive number of special games since the start of the first special game, as determined based on the predetermined identification information. As a result, a data display attached to the gaming machine can display special games executed based on the predetermined variable display due to the reserved display at the end of the advantageous state as part of the consecutive number of special games.

In this way, the gaming machine according to Appendix A1 can determine whether it is in a predetermined special game state or an advantageous state based on the predetermined identification information output by the first output means, and can determine whether it is a predetermined variable display due to the hold at the end of the advantageous state based on the specific identification information output by the second output means. This allows the data display attached to the gaming machine to display the special game executed based on the predetermined variable display due to the hold at the end of the advantageous state as part of the consecutive number of special games. Therefore, when a transition to a predetermined special game state is triggered by the hold at the end of an advantageous state, a discrepancy is prevented between the number of consecutive special games displayed on the data display and the number of consecutive special games recognized by the player. As a result, a decrease in the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive special games displayed on the data display is prevented, and a decrease in interest and amusement in the game is prevented.

[Appendix A2]
The first output means (41) outputs the predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) as a level signal,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1, characterized in that the second output means (41) continuously outputs the specific identification information (extension signal of jackpot signal 2) as a pulse signal or an on/off signal.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2, the predetermined identification information is output as a level signal, and the specific identification information is output as a pulse signal or an on-off signal. In this way, by outputting the predetermined identification information as a level signal and the specific identification information as a pulse signal or an on-off signal, an external device such as the player's hall computer 102 that receives the predetermined identification information and the specific identification information can easily and reliably distinguish and identify the predetermined identification information from the specific identification information.

[Appendix A3]
A gaming machine as described in Appendix A1 or Appendix A2, which gives priority to the variable display of the predetermined pattern, which is triggered by the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means (315), over the variable display of the predetermined pattern, which is triggered by the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means (314).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A3, the display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means is executed with priority over the display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the first start ball entry means. Therefore, if the right to execute the display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means is reserved at the end of an advantageous state, the display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means is executed with priority even after the end of the advantageous state. As a result, after the end of an advantageous state in which the right to execute the display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state is reserved, the specific identification information is output during the period in which the display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means during the advantageous state can be executed. This allows the gaming machine to output specific identification information, which indicates the period during which a variable display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means in an advantageous state, not only during the advantageous state but also for a predetermined period after the output of the predetermined identification state has stopped after the advantageous state ends.As a result, the gaming machine can output to an external device such as the arcade's hall computer the right to variable display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means in an advantageous state, i.e., the profit state obtained from the advantageous state.This allows the external device such as the arcade's hall computer to grasp the profit state obtained from the advantageous state even after the advantageous state has ended, making it easy to include special games started in that profit state in the number of consecutive wins.

[Appendix B1]
a determination means (41) for determining whether or not a transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) will occur in which a predetermined special game advantageous to a player (5R normal jackpot game, 5R probability variable jackpot game, or 16R probability variable jackpot game) is executed when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315);
a variable display means (41, 51) for displaying a variable display of predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol) when the determination means (41) determines whether or not to transition to the special game state;
a reservation means (41, 51) for reserving the right to execute the variable display of the predetermined pattern executed by the variable display means (41, 51);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball-entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball-entry means (314) and a second starting ball-entry means (315) different from the first starting ball-entry means (314) for switching between an unfavorable state (normal game state) in which game ball entry is restricted and an advantageous state (probable game state, time-limited game state) in which game ball entry is easier than the unfavorable state,
The variable display of the predetermined symbol, which is triggered by the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means (315), is given priority over the variable display of the predetermined symbol, which is triggered by the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means (314),
After the predetermined special game ends, the advantageous state is executed until a predetermined condition is met (start of a jackpot game, execution of a specified number of special game),
a first output means (41) for continuously outputting predetermined identification information (basic signal of jackpot signal 2) that can identify the predetermined special game state and the advantageous state to the outside in the predetermined special game state and the advantageous state;
an output stopping means (41) for stopping the output of the predetermined identification information by the first output means (41) when the advantageous state ends;
A storage means (41) for storing the number of reserved rights to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbol triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means (315) at the end of the advantageous state;
a second output means (41) for continuously outputting specific identification information (an extension signal of the big win signal 2) for identifying a period during which predetermined variable display of the predetermined pattern can be executed a predetermined number of times corresponding to at least the reserved number stored in the storage means (41) after the advantageous state ends;
Equipped with
The second output means (41) continuously outputs the specific identification information (extension signal of jackpot signal 2) in a manner different from the manner in which the first output means (41) outputs the predetermined identification information (basic signal of jackpot signal 2).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, when a predetermined special game state or advantageous state is in progress, the first output means continuously outputs predetermined identification information that can identify the state to the outside. This allows, for example, a hall computer in an amusement hall to determine that the predetermined special game state or advantageous state is in progress based on the predetermined identification information. This allows the hall computer to determine the number of consecutive special games from the start of the first special game to the end of the advantageous state. Meanwhile, a data display attached to the gaming machine can display the number of consecutive special games from the start of the first special game to the end of the advantageous state based on information generated based on the predetermined identification information output from the hall computer.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, after the end of the advantageous state, the second output means continues to output, for a predetermined period of time, specific identification information that can identify that this is a period during which a predetermined variable display of a predetermined symbol corresponding to at least the reserved right stored in the storage means can be executed in an output mode different from the predetermined identification information. For example, a hall computer in an amusement hall can determine, based on the specific identification information, that a predetermined variable display based on the reserved display at the end of the advantageous state is being executed. As a result, if the determination result of the determination means is to transition to a special game state, the hall computer can determine, based on the specific identification information, that the predetermined variable display is a predetermined variable display due to the reserved display at the end of the advantageous state. Therefore, the hall computer can count special games executed based on the predetermined variable display due to the reserved display at the end of the advantageous state as part of the consecutive number of special games since the start of the first special game, as determined based on the predetermined identification information. As a result, a data display attached to the gaming machine can display special games executed based on the predetermined variable display due to the reserved display at the end of the advantageous state as part of the consecutive number of special games.

In this way, the gaming machine according to Appendix B1 can determine whether it is in a predetermined special game state or advantageous state based on the predetermined identification information output by the first output means, and can determine whether it is a predetermined variable display due to the hold at the end of the advantageous state based on the specific identification information output by the second output means. This allows the data display attached to the gaming machine to display the special game executed based on the predetermined variable display due to the hold at the end of the advantageous state as part of the consecutive number of special games. Therefore, when a transition to a predetermined special game state is triggered by the hold at the end of an advantageous state, a discrepancy is prevented between the number of consecutive special games displayed on the data display and the number of consecutive special games recognized by the player. As a result, a decrease in the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive special games displayed on the data display is prevented, and a decrease in interest and amusement in the game is prevented.

[Appendix B2]
The first output means (41) outputs the predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) as a level signal,
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1, wherein the second output means (41) continuously outputs the specific identification information (extension signal of the jackpot signal 2) as a pulse signal.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2, the predetermined identification information is output as a level signal, and the specific identification information is output as a pulse signal or an on-off signal. In this way, by outputting the predetermined identification information as a level signal and the specific identification information as a pulse signal or an on-off signal, an external device such as the player's hall computer 102 that receives the predetermined identification information and the specific identification information can easily and reliably distinguish and identify the predetermined identification information from the specific identification information.

[Appendix B3]
A gaming machine as described in Appendix B1 or Appendix B2, which gives priority to the variable display of the predetermined pattern, which is triggered by the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means (315), over the variable display of the predetermined pattern, which is triggered by the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means (314).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B3, the display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means is executed with priority over the display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the first start ball entry means. Therefore, if the right to execute the display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means is reserved at the end of an advantageous state, the display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means is executed with priority even after the end of the advantageous state. As a result, after the end of an advantageous state in which the right to execute the display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state is reserved, the specific identification information is output during the period in which the display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means during the advantageous state can be executed. This allows the gaming machine to output specific identification information, which indicates the period during which a variable display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means in an advantageous state, not only during the advantageous state but also for a predetermined period after the output of the predetermined identification state has stopped after the advantageous state ends.As a result, the gaming machine can output to an external device such as the arcade's hall computer the right to variable display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means in an advantageous state, i.e., the profit state obtained from the advantageous state.This allows the external device such as the arcade's hall computer to grasp the profit state obtained from the advantageous state even after the advantageous state has ended, making it easy to include special games started in that profit state in the number of consecutive wins.

[Appendix C1]
a determination means (41) for determining whether or not a transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) will occur in which a predetermined special game advantageous to a player (5R normal jackpot game, 5R probability variable jackpot game, or 16R probability variable jackpot game) is executed when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315);
a variable display means (41, 51) for displaying a variable display of predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol) when the determination means (41) determines whether or not to transition to the special game state;
a reservation means (41, 51) for reserving the right to execute the variable display of the predetermined pattern executed by the variable display means (41);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball-entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball-entry means (314) and a second starting ball-entry means (315) different from the first starting ball-entry means (314) for switching between an unfavorable state (normal game state) in which game ball entry is restricted and an advantageous state (probable game state, time-limited game state) in which game ball entry is easier than the unfavorable state,
The variable display of the predetermined symbol, which is triggered by the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means (315), is given priority over the variable display of the predetermined symbol, which is triggered by the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means (314),
After the predetermined special game ends, the advantageous state is executed until a predetermined condition is met (start of a jackpot game, execution of a specified number of special game),
a first output means (41) for continuously outputting predetermined identification information (basic signal of jackpot signal 2) that can identify the predetermined special game state and the advantageous state to the outside in the predetermined special game state and the advantageous state;
an output stopping means (41) for stopping the output of the predetermined identification information by the first output means (41) when the advantageous state ends;
A storage means (41) for storing the number of reserved rights to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbol triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means (315) at the end of the advantageous state;
a second output means (41) for continuously outputting, for a predetermined period after the advantageous state has ended, specific identification information (an extension signal of the big win signal 2) that can identify that this is a period in which a predetermined variable display of the predetermined pattern corresponding to at least the reserved right stored in the storage means (41) can be executed;
Equipped with
The second output means (41)
The specific identification information (extension signal of the jackpot signal 2) is continuously output in an output mode different from the output mode of the predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) by the first output means (41),
A gaming machine characterized in that it can continue to output the specific identification information until a specific period has elapsed after the last of the specified variable displays executed in accordance with the reserved number stored in the memory means is stopped.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, when a predetermined special game state or advantageous state is in progress, the first output means continuously outputs predetermined identification information that can identify the state to the outside. This allows, for example, a hall computer in an amusement hall to determine that the predetermined special game state or advantageous state is in progress based on the predetermined identification information. This allows the hall computer to determine the number of consecutive special games from the start of the first special game to the end of the advantageous state. Meanwhile, a data display attached to the gaming machine can display the number of consecutive special games from the start of the first special game to the end of the advantageous state based on information generated based on the predetermined identification information output from the hall computer.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, after the end of the advantageous state, the second output means continuously outputs, for a predetermined period of time, specific identification information that can identify that this is a period during which a predetermined variable display of a predetermined symbol corresponding to at least the reserved right stored in the storage means can be executed in an output mode different from the predetermined identification information. For example, a hall computer in an amusement hall can determine, based on the specific identification information, that a predetermined variable display based on the reserved display at the end of the advantageous state is being executed. As a result, if the judgment result of the judgment means indicates that the predetermined variable display will transition to a special game state, the hall computer can determine, based on the specific identification information, that this is a predetermined variable display due to the reserved display at the end of the advantageous state. Therefore, the hall computer can count special games executed based on the predetermined variable display due to the reserved display at the end of the advantageous state as part of the consecutive number of special games since the start of the first special game, as determined based on the predetermined identification information. As a result, a data display attached to the gaming machine can display special games executed based on the predetermined variable display due to the reserved display at the end of the advantageous state as part of the consecutive number of special games.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, the specific identification information is output until a specific period has elapsed after the last of the specific variable displays of the specific symbols corresponding to the reserved rights stored in the storage means at the end of the advantageous state is stopped. This allows external devices such as the arcade's hall computer to distinguish and determine whether the specific identification information was temporarily unable to be received due to, for example, noise generation, or whether the output of the specific identification information was stopped. Therefore, even if the external devices such as the arcade's hall computer are temporarily unable to receive the specific identification information due to, for example, noise generation, they can determine that this is the period during which the specific variable display of the specific symbols corresponding to the reserved rights stored in the storage means can be executed after the end of the advantageous state.

In this way, the gaming machine according to Appendix C1 can determine whether it is in a predetermined special game state or advantageous state based on the predetermined identification information output by the first output means, and can determine whether it is a predetermined variable display due to the hold at the end of the advantageous state based on the specific identification information output by the second output means. This allows the data display attached to the gaming machine to display the special game executed based on the predetermined variable display due to the hold at the end of the advantageous state as part of the consecutive number of special games. Therefore, when a transition to a predetermined special game state is triggered by the hold at the end of an advantageous state, a discrepancy is prevented between the number of consecutive special games displayed on the data display and the number of consecutive special games recognized by the player. As a result, a decrease in the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive special games displayed on the data display is prevented, and a decrease in interest and amusement in the game is prevented.

[Appendix C2]
A gaming machine as described in Appendix C1, which gives priority to the variable display of the predetermined pattern, which is triggered by the gaming ball entering the second starting ball entry means (315), over the variable display of the predetermined pattern, which is triggered by the gaming ball entering the first starting ball entry means (314).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C2, the display of a predetermined pattern triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means is executed with priority over the display of a predetermined pattern triggered by a gaming ball entering the first start ball entry means. Therefore, if the right to execute the display of a predetermined pattern triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means is reserved at the end of an advantageous state, the display of a predetermined pattern triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means is executed with priority even after the end of the advantageous state. As a result, after the end of an advantageous state in which the right to execute the display of a predetermined pattern triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state is reserved, the specific identification information is output during the period in which the display of a predetermined pattern triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means during the advantageous state can be executed. This allows the gaming machine to output specific identification information, which indicates the period during which a variable display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means in an advantageous state, not only during the advantageous state but also for a predetermined period after the output of the predetermined identification state has stopped after the advantageous state ends.As a result, the gaming machine can output to an external device such as the arcade's hall computer the right to variable display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means in an advantageous state, i.e., the profit state obtained from the advantageous state.This allows the external device such as the arcade's hall computer to grasp the profit state obtained from the advantageous state even after the advantageous state has ended, making it easy to include special games started in that profit state in the number of consecutive wins.

[Appendix D1]
a determination means (41) for determining whether or not a transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) will occur in which a predetermined special game advantageous to a player (5R normal jackpot game, 5R probability variable jackpot game, or 16R probability variable jackpot game) is executed when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315);
a variable display means (41, 51) for displaying a variable display of predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol) when the determination means (41) determines whether or not to transition to the special game state;
a reservation means (41, 51) for reserving the right to execute the variable display of the predetermined pattern executed by the variable display means (41);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball-entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball-entry means (314) and a second starting ball-entry means (315) different from the first starting ball-entry means (314) for switching between an unfavorable state (normal game state) in which game ball entry is restricted and an advantageous state (probable game state, time-limited game state) in which game ball entry is easier than the unfavorable state,
The variable display of the predetermined symbol, which is triggered by the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means (315), is given priority over the variable display of the predetermined symbol, which is triggered by the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means (314),
After the predetermined special game ends, the advantageous state is executed until a predetermined condition is met (start of a jackpot game, execution of a specified number of special game),
a first output means (41) for continuously outputting predetermined identification information (basic signal of jackpot signal 2) that can identify the predetermined special game state and the advantageous state to the outside in the predetermined special game state and the advantageous state;
an output stopping means (41) for stopping the output of the predetermined identification information by the first output means (41) when the advantageous state ends;
A storage means (41) for storing the number of reserved rights to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbol triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means (315) at the end of the advantageous state;
a second output means (41) for continuously outputting, for a predetermined period after the advantageous state has ended, specific identification information (an extension signal of the big win signal 2) that can identify that this is a period in which a predetermined variable display of the predetermined pattern corresponding to at least the reserved right stored in the storage means (41) can be executed;
When the predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol) are displayed in a variable manner, an image display means (341) displays an image during the variable display;
a performance execution means (51) for executing a predetermined background performance in which a predetermined background image is displayed on the image display means (341) in the unfavorable state, and for executing a specific background performance in which a specific background image different from the predetermined background image is displayed on the image display means (341) in the advantageous state;
Equipped with
The second output means (41) continuously outputs the specific identification information (extension signal of jackpot signal 2) in an output manner different from the output manner of the predetermined identification information (basic signal of jackpot signal 2) by the first output means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, a predetermined background effect is executed in which a predetermined background image is displayed on the image display means when the player is in an unfavorable state, and a specific background effect is executed in which a specific background image different from the predetermined background image is displayed on the image display means when the player is in an advantageous state. In this way, by executing a predetermined background effect in which a predetermined background image is displayed on the image display means when the player is in an unfavorable state, and executing a specific background effect in which a specific background image different from the predetermined background image is displayed on the image display means when the player is in an advantageous state, the player can easily visually determine whether the player is in an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state based on the background image displayed on the image display means.

[Appendix D2]
The predetermined conditions include a first predetermined condition for transitioning from the advantageous state to the disadvantageous state, and a second predetermined condition for transitioning from the advantageous state to the special game state,
The gaming machine described in Appendix D1 is characterized in that, when the advantageous state is transitioned to the unfavorable state due to the establishment of the first predetermined condition, the effect execution means (51) executes a predetermined initial background effect as the predetermined background effect from the transition to the unfavorable state until the specified condition is established.

[Appendix D3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix D2 is characterized in that the specified condition is that after the advantageous state is transitioned to the disadvantageous state, the variable display of the specified pattern is executed a specific number of times.

[Appendix D4]
The gaming machine according to appendix D2 or D3, wherein the specified condition is winning a lottery to determine whether or not to end the execution of the specific background effect.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes D2 to D4, a predetermined initial background effect is executed as a specified background effect from the time a game state transitions from an advantageous state to an unfavorable state until a specified condition is met. In this way, by executing a predetermined initial background effect as a specified background effect from the time a game state transitions from an advantageous state to an unfavorable state until a specified condition is met, the player can easily visually understand that they have transitioned from an advantageous state to an unfavorable state.

[Appendix D5]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix D2 to Appendix D4, characterized in that the specific background effect is a unique background effect that is executed only between the transition from the advantageous state to the disadvantageous state and the establishment of the specified condition.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D5, the specific background effect is a unique background effect that is executed only from the time a game state transitions from an advantageous state to an unfavorable state until a specified condition is met. In this way, because the specific background effect is a unique background effect that is executed only from the time a game state transitions from an advantageous state to an unfavorable state until a specified condition is met, even in situations where the player's interest in the game may decrease due to the transition to an unfavorable state that is unfavorable to the player, the player's interest in the game is prevented from decreasing by being able to view the unique background effect.

[Appendix D6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix D1 to Appendix D5, which gives priority to the variable display of the predetermined pattern, which is triggered by the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means (315), over the variable display of the predetermined pattern, which is triggered by the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means (314).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D6, the display of a predetermined pattern triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means is executed with priority over the display of a predetermined pattern triggered by a gaming ball entering the first start ball entry means. Therefore, if the right to execute the display of a predetermined pattern triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means is reserved at the end of an advantageous state, the display of a predetermined pattern triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means is executed with priority even after the end of the advantageous state. As a result, after the end of an advantageous state when the right to execute the display of a predetermined pattern triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state is reserved, the specific identification information is output during the period in which the display of a predetermined pattern triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means during the advantageous state can be executed. This allows the gaming machine to output specific identification information, which indicates the period during which a variable display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means in an advantageous state, not only during the advantageous state but also for a predetermined period after the output of the predetermined identification state has stopped after the advantageous state ends.As a result, the gaming machine can output to an external device such as the arcade's hall computer the right to variable display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means in an advantageous state, i.e., the profit state obtained from the advantageous state.This allows the external device such as the arcade's hall computer to grasp the profit state obtained from the advantageous state even after the advantageous state has ended, making it easy to include special games started in that profit state in the number of consecutive wins.

[Appendix E1]
a determination means (41) for determining whether or not a transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) will occur in which a predetermined special game advantageous to a player (5R normal jackpot game, 5R probability variable jackpot game, or 16R probability variable jackpot game) is executed when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315);
a variable display means (41, 51) for displaying a variable display of predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol) when the determination means (41) determines whether or not to transition to the special game state;
a reservation means (41, 51) for reserving the right to execute the variable display of the predetermined pattern executed by the variable display means (41, 51);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball-entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball-entry means (314) and a second starting ball-entry means (315) different from the first starting ball-entry means (314) for switching between an unfavorable state (normal game state) in which game ball entry is restricted and an advantageous state (probable game state, time-limited game state) in which game ball entry is easier than the unfavorable state,
The variable display of the predetermined symbol, which is triggered by the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means (315), is given priority over the variable display of the predetermined symbol, which is triggered by the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means (314),
After the predetermined special game ends, the advantageous state is executed until a predetermined condition is met (start of a jackpot game, execution of a specified number of special game),
a first output means (41) for continuously outputting predetermined identification information (basic signal of jackpot signal 2) that can identify the predetermined special game state and the advantageous state to the outside in the predetermined special game state and the advantageous state;
an output stopping means (41) for stopping the output of the predetermined identification information by the first output means (41) when the advantageous state ends;
A storage means (41) for storing the number of reserved rights to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbol triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means (315) at the end of the advantageous state;
a second output means (41) for continuously outputting, for a predetermined period after the advantageous state has ended, specific identification information (an extension signal of the big win signal 2) that can identify that this is a period in which a predetermined variable display of the predetermined pattern corresponding to at least the reserved right stored in the storage means (41) can be executed;
a third output means (41) for continuously outputting, in the predetermined special game state, predetermined identification information (basic signal of jackpot signal 2) by which the state can be identified to the outside, and third identification information (jackpot signal 1) different from the specific identification information (extension signal of jackpot signal 2);
Equipped with
The second output means (41) continuously outputs the specific identification information (extension signal of jackpot signal 2) in an output manner different from the output manner of the predetermined identification information (basic signal of jackpot signal 2) by the first output means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, in addition to predetermined identification information that can identify a predetermined special gaming state and an advantageous state, third identification information that can identify a predetermined special gaming state is output. In this way, by outputting third identification information that can identify a predetermined special gaming state, an external device such as the arcade's hall computer can determine that the predetermined special gaming state is in place based on the third identification information. This allows the external device such as the arcade's hall computer to determine the number of times the game has transitioned to the predetermined special gaming state (the number of times a special game has been played), and can display the number of times the game has transitioned to the predetermined special gaming state (the number of times a special game has been played) on a data display, etc.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, it is possible to determine whether a transition from an advantageous state to a predetermined special gaming state has occurred, or whether a transition from an unfavorable state to a predetermined special gaming state has occurred, depending on whether or not the predetermined identification information has been received when the third identification information is received. Specifically, if the predetermined identification information has been received when the third identification information is received, it is possible to determine whether a transition from an advantageous state to a predetermined special gaming state has occurred, and if the predetermined identification information has not been received when the third identification information is received, it is possible to determine whether a transition from an unfavorable state to a predetermined special gaming state has occurred. As a result, an external device such as the arcade's hall computer can determine the number of times a transition from an advantageous state to a special gaming state has occurred, as well as the number of consecutive transitions to a predetermined special gaming state (number of consecutive special game plays), and can display the number of consecutive transitions to a predetermined special gaming state (number of consecutive special game plays) on a data display or the like.

[Appendix E2]
A gaming machine as described in Appendix E1, which gives priority to the variable display of the predetermined pattern, which is triggered by the gaming ball entering the second starting ball entry means (315), over the variable display of the predetermined pattern, which is triggered by the gaming ball entering the first starting ball entry means (314).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E2, the display of a predetermined pattern triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means is executed with priority over the display of a predetermined pattern triggered by a gaming ball entering the first start ball entry means. Therefore, if the right to execute the display of a predetermined pattern triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means is reserved at the end of an advantageous state, the display of a predetermined pattern triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means is executed with priority even after the end of the advantageous state. As a result, after the end of an advantageous state in which the right to execute the display of a predetermined pattern triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state is reserved, the specific identification information is output during the period in which the display of a predetermined pattern triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means during the advantageous state can be executed. This allows the gaming machine to output specific identification information, which indicates the period during which a variable display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means in an advantageous state, not only during the advantageous state but also for a predetermined period after the output of the predetermined identification state has stopped after the advantageous state ends.As a result, the gaming machine can output to an external device such as the arcade's hall computer the right to variable display of a predetermined symbol triggered by a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means in an advantageous state, i.e., the profit state obtained from the advantageous state.This allows the external device such as the arcade's hall computer to grasp the profit state obtained from the advantageous state even after the advantageous state has ended, making it easy to include special games started in that profit state in the number of consecutive wins.

[Appendix A1]
a determination means (41) for determining whether or not a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player is to be generated when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315), and performing a jackpot lottery;
a game operation execution means (41) for executing a game operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed when the determination means (41) determines whether or not to generate the special game state;
A reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game operation executed by the game operation execution means (41);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball-entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball-entry means (314) and a second starting ball-entry means (315) different from the first starting ball-entry means (314) for switching between an unfavorable state in which the game ball is restricted from entering the game and an advantageous state in which the game ball is easier to enter the game than the unfavorable state,
The predetermined symbols include a first symbol (first special symbol) which is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the first starting ball entry means (314), and a second symbol (second special symbol) which is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the second starting ball entry means (315),
The game operation includes a first game operation (first special symbol game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and a second game operation (second special symbol game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed,
The reservation of the right to execute the game rotation operation by the reservation means (41) includes a first reservation (first special symbol reservation) which is a reservation of the right to execute the first game rotation operation, and a second reservation (second special symbol reservation) which is a reservation of the right to execute the second game rotation operation,
a first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting first numerical information in a first counting means (a second special symbol reserved number storage area NAB, a second special symbol reserved number storage area corresponding area) capable of counting corresponding to the second reserved number (second special symbol reserved number M) in a predetermined game state (a state in which a continuation effect such as a RUSH effect can be executed, a state in which a second special symbol game based on a game ball to the second winning port 315 in a time-saving game state can be executed);
A subtraction means (41, 51) that subtracts the first numerical information set in the first counting means when a subtraction condition is met (when a second special symbol game is started);
An effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot announcement effect, battle effect) during execution of the variable display of the second symbol in the predetermined game state;
a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of times of special symbol games that can be executed in the c time-shortening game state) different from the first numerical information in a second counting means (c time-shortening number counter) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game when a specific condition (missing the time-shortening symbol stop) that can generate a specific game state (c time-shortening game state) in which a specific game can be executed is established;
An update means (41, 51) that updates the second numerical information set in the second counting means when an update condition is met (when a special game is started);
means (41, 51) for continuously executing the specific presentation during the predetermined game state when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific presentation, until at least the first numerical information set in the first counting means is subtracted by the subtraction means due to the establishment of the subtraction condition to become a specific value (for example, 0);
means (51) for setting specific numerical information (the remaining number of times of time-shortened games in the c time-shortened game state) in the second counting means when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific effect is being executed, but not executing a specific corresponding display (remaining number of times of time-shortened games in the c time-shortened game state (effect)) corresponding to the specific numerical information of the set second counting means, for updating the specific numerical information of the second counting means when the update condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific effect is being executed, but not executing the specific corresponding display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and for executing the specific corresponding display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, even if a specific condition is met during the execution of the second game operation while a specific effect is being executed, a specific response display is not initiated. Furthermore, in the present invention, even if an update condition is met during the execution of the second game operation while a specific effect is being executed, the updated specific response display is not initiated. In this way, if a specific condition or update condition is met during the execution of the second game operation while a specific effect is being executed, the specific response display is not initiated. Therefore, even if a specific condition or update condition is met during the execution of the second game operation while a specific effect is being executed, the specific response display is not initiated, thereby preventing the specific effect from being terminated prematurely, thereby preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the specific effect being terminated prematurely.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, a special correspondence display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the end of the special effect is initiated based on the end of the special effect. In this way, by initiating a special correspondence display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the end of the special effect, the special correspondence display can be initiated without terminating the special effect midway, preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the special correspondence display not being initiated.

[Appendix B1]
a determination means (41) for determining whether or not a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player is to be generated when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315), and performing a jackpot lottery;
a game operation execution means (41) for executing a game operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed when the determination means (41) determines whether or not to generate the special game state;
A reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game operation executed by the game operation execution means (41);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball-entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball-entry means (314) and a second starting ball-entry means (315) different from the first starting ball-entry means (314) for switching between an unfavorable state in which the game ball is restricted from entering the game and an advantageous state in which the game ball is easier to enter the game than the unfavorable state,
The predetermined symbols include a first symbol (first special symbol) which is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the first starting ball entry means (314), and a second symbol (second special symbol) which is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the second starting ball entry means (315),
The game operation includes a first game operation (first special symbol game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and a second game operation (second special symbol game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed,
The reservation of the right to execute the game rotation operation by the reservation means (41) includes a first reservation (first special symbol reservation) which is a reservation of the right to execute the first game rotation operation, and a second reservation (second special symbol reservation) which is a reservation of the right to execute the second game rotation operation,
a first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting first numerical information in a first counting means (a second special symbol reserved number storage area NAB, a second special symbol reserved number storage area corresponding area) capable of counting corresponding to the second reserved number (second special symbol reserved number M) in a predetermined game state (a state in which a continuation effect such as a RUSH effect can be executed, a state in which a second special symbol game based on a game ball to the second winning port 315 in a time-saving game state can be executed);
A subtraction means (41, 51) that subtracts the first numerical information set in the first counting means when a subtraction condition is met (when a second special symbol game is started);
An effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot announcement effect, battle effect) during execution of the variable display of the second symbol in the predetermined game state;
a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of times of special symbol games that can be executed in the c time-shortening game state) different from the first numerical information in a second counting means (c time-shortening number counter) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game when a specific condition (missing the time-shortening symbol stop) that can generate a specific game state (c time-shortening game state) in which a specific game can be executed is established;
An update means (41, 51) that updates the second numerical information set in the second counting means when an update condition is met (when a special game is started);
means (41, 51) for continuously executing the specific presentation during the predetermined game state when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific presentation, until at least the first numerical information set in the first counting means is subtracted by the subtraction means due to the establishment of the subtraction condition to become a specific value (for example, 0);
means (51) for setting specific numerical information (the remaining number of times of time-shortened games in the c time-shortened game state) in the second counting means when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific effect is being executed, but not executing a specific corresponding display (remaining number of times of time-shortened games in the c time-shortened game state (effect)) corresponding to the specific numerical information of the set second counting means, for updating the specific numerical information of the second counting means when the update condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific effect is being executed, but not executing the specific corresponding display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and for executing the specific corresponding display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect;
When the specific effect is ended, a means (51) for executing an effect (branch effect, left hit display, etc.) that clearly indicates or suggests the game state after the specific effect is ended;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, when a specific effect ends, an effect is executed that clearly indicates or suggests the game state after the end of the specific effect. In this way, when a specific effect ends, an effect that clearly indicates or suggests the game state after the end of the specific effect is executed, allowing the player to understand the game state after the end of the specific effect based on that effect. As a result, even in situations where the end of a specific effect clearly indicates or suggests the end of a state advantageous to the player, causing the player's interest in the game to decrease, the player can enjoy playing the game while wondering what effect will be executed or not, i.e., hoping that the game state after the end of the specific effect will be advantageous to the player.

[Appendix B2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1, characterized in that the effect that indicates or suggests the game state after the specific effect ends includes an effect that indicates or suggests the launch area of the game ball on the game board (31).

In the gaming machine pertaining to Appendix B2, the effect that clearly indicates or suggests the game state after the end of a specific effect includes an effect that clearly indicates or suggests the game ball launch area on the game board. In this way, the effect that clearly indicates or suggests the game state after the end of a specific effect includes an effect that clearly indicates or suggests the game ball launch area on the game board, allowing the player to understand the game ball launch area on the game board after the end of the specific effect based on the effect. This allows the player to launch the game ball appropriately after the end of the specific effect, preventing unnecessary loss of game balls due to inappropriate launching of game balls (so-called wasted shots) and making it possible to appropriately secure the player's profits.

[Appendix C1]
a determination means (41) for determining whether or not a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player is to be generated when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315), and performing a jackpot lottery;
a game operation execution means (41) for executing a game operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed when the determination means (41) determines whether or not to generate the special game state;
A reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game operation executed by the game operation execution means (41);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball-entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball-entry means (314) and a second starting ball-entry means (315) different from the first starting ball-entry means (314) for switching between an unfavorable state in which the game ball is restricted from entering the game and an advantageous state in which the game ball is easier to enter the game than the unfavorable state,
The predetermined symbols include a first symbol (first special symbol) which is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the first starting ball entry means (314), and a second symbol (second special symbol) which is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the second starting ball entry means (315),
The game operation includes a first game operation (first special symbol game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and a second game operation (second special symbol game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed,
The reservation of the right to execute the game rotation operation by the reservation means (41) includes a first reservation (first special symbol reservation) which is a reservation of the right to execute the first game rotation operation, and a second reservation (second special symbol reservation) which is a reservation of the right to execute the second game rotation operation,
a first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting first numerical information in a first counting means (a second special symbol reserved number storage area NAB, a second special symbol reserved number storage area corresponding area) capable of counting corresponding to the second reserved number (second special symbol reserved number M) in a predetermined game state (a state in which a continuation effect such as a RUSH effect can be executed, a state in which a second special symbol game based on a game ball to the second winning port 315 in a time-saving game state can be executed);
A subtraction means (41, 51) that subtracts the first numerical information set in the first counting means when a subtraction condition is met (when a second special symbol game is started);
An effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot announcement effect, battle effect) during execution of the variable display of the second symbol in the predetermined game state;
a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of times of special symbol games that can be executed in the c time-shortening game state) different from the first numerical information in a second counting means (c time-shortening number counter) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game when a specific condition (missing the time-shortening symbol stop) that can generate a specific game state (c time-shortening game state) in which a specific game can be executed is established;
An update means (41, 51) that updates the second numerical information set in the second counting means when an update condition is met (when a special game is started);
means (41, 51) for continuously executing the specific presentation during the predetermined game state when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific presentation, until at least the first numerical information set in the first counting means is subtracted by the subtraction means due to the establishment of the subtraction condition to become a specific value (for example, 0);
means (51) for setting specific numerical information (the remaining number of times of time-shortened games in the c time-shortened game state) in the second counting means when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific effect is being executed, but not executing a specific corresponding display (remaining number of times of time-shortened games in the c time-shortened game state (effect)) corresponding to the specific numerical information of the set second counting means, for updating the specific numerical information of the second counting means when the update condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific effect is being executed, but not executing the specific corresponding display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and for executing the specific corresponding display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the game method (the recommended launching of gaming balls) after the end of the specific performance is the same in both cases where the specific condition is met during the execution of the specific performance and where the specific condition is not met during the execution of the specific performance.

In the gaming machine pertaining to Appendix C1, the game method after the end of a special effect is the same whether a special condition is met during the execution of the special effect or not. In this way, the game method after the end of a special effect is the same whether a special condition is met during the execution of the special effect or not, allowing the player to play using the same game method regardless of whether a special condition is met during the execution of the special effect. This prevents the game method after the end of a special effect from becoming too complicated and prevents the player from being disadvantaged.

[Appendix C2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1, wherein the gaming method relates to a method of launching a gaming ball onto a gaming board that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine according to Appendix C2 relates to a method of launching game balls onto the gaming board that is advantageous to the player. In this way, by relating to a method of launching game balls onto the gaming board that is advantageous to the player, the method of launching game balls that is advantageous to the player after the end of a specific effect is standardized, regardless of whether a specific condition is met while the specific effect is being executed. This prevents the method of launching game balls that is advantageous to the player after the end of a specific effect from becoming complicated, and prevents the player from being disadvantaged.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming method includes a first gaming method in which a player is encouraged to make a gaming ball enter the first starting ball entry means (314), and a second gaming method in which a player is encouraged to make a gaming ball enter the second starting ball entry means (315),
The gaming machine described in Appendix C2, wherein the gaming method after the specific performance ends is the first gaming method.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C3, the gaming method includes a first gaming method in which players are encouraged to score a gaming ball into the first start scoring means, and a second gaming method in which players are encouraged to score a gaming ball into the second start scoring means, and the gaming method after the specific effect ends is the first gaming method. In this way, the gaming method includes the first gaming method in which players are encouraged to score a gaming ball into the first start scoring means, and the second gaming method in which players are encouraged to score a gaming ball into the second start scoring means, and the gaming method after the specific effect ends is the first gaming method. Therefore, regardless of whether a specific condition is met during the execution of the specific effect, it is sufficient to practice the first gaming method in which players are encouraged to score a gaming ball into the first start scoring means after the specific effect ends. This simplifies the method of shooting the gaming ball, which is advantageous to the player, after the specific effect ends, and prevents the player from being disadvantaged.

[Appendix D1]
a determination means (41) for determining whether or not a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player is to be generated when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315), and performing a jackpot lottery;
a game operation execution means (41) for executing a game operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed when the determination means (41) determines whether or not to generate the special game state;
A reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game operation executed by the game operation execution means (41);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball-entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball-entry means (314) and a second starting ball-entry means (315) different from the first starting ball-entry means (314) for switching between an unfavorable state in which the game ball is restricted from entering the game and an advantageous state in which the game ball is easier to enter the game than the unfavorable state,
The predetermined symbols include a first symbol (first special symbol) which is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the first starting ball entry means (314), and a second symbol (second special symbol) which is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the second starting ball entry means (315),
The game operation includes a first game operation (first special symbol game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and a second game operation (second special symbol game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed,
The reservation of the right to execute the game rotation operation by the reservation means (41) includes a first reservation (first special symbol reservation) which is a reservation of the right to execute the first game rotation operation, and a second reservation (second special symbol reservation) which is a reservation of the right to execute the second game rotation operation,
a first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting first numerical information in a first counting means (a second special symbol reserved number storage area NAB, a second special symbol reserved number storage area corresponding area) capable of counting corresponding to the second reserved number (second special symbol reserved number M) in a predetermined game state (a state in which a continuation effect such as a RUSH effect can be executed, a state in which a second special symbol game based on a game ball to the second winning port 315 in a time-saving game state can be executed);
A subtraction means (41, 51) that subtracts the first numerical information set in the first counting means when a subtraction condition is met (when a second special symbol game is started);
An effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot announcement effect, battle effect) during execution of the variable display of the second symbol in the predetermined game state;
a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of times of special symbol games that can be executed in the c time-shortening game state) different from the first numerical information in a second counting means (c time-shortening number counter) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game when a specific condition (missing the time-shortening symbol stop) that can generate a specific game state (c time-shortening game state) in which a specific game can be executed is established;
An update means (41, 51) that updates the second numerical information set in the second counting means when an update condition is met (when a special game is started);
means (41, 51) for continuously executing the specific presentation during the predetermined game state when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific presentation, until at least the first numerical information set in the first counting means is subtracted by the subtraction means due to the establishment of the subtraction condition to become a specific value (for example, 0);
means (51) for setting specific numerical information (the remaining number of times of time-shortened games in the c time-shortened game state) in the second counting means when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific effect is being executed, but not executing a specific corresponding display (remaining number of times of time-shortened games in the c time-shortened game state (effect)) corresponding to the specific numerical information of the set second counting means, for updating the specific numerical information of the second counting means when the update condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific effect is being executed, but not executing the specific corresponding display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and for executing the specific corresponding display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific corresponding display is a display that can identify the second game operation in which the specific condition is met among the second game operations executed during the execution of the specific performance.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, the specific correspondence display is a display that enables identification of the second gaming action executed during the execution of the specific effect in which the specific condition was met. In this way, because the specific correspondence display is a display that enables identification of the second gaming action executed during the execution of the specific effect in which the specific condition was met, the player can determine in which second gaming action executed during the execution of the specific effect the specific condition was met. As a result, when the specific correspondence display is displayed after the end of the specific effect, the player can enjoy playing after the end of the specific effect by guessing in which second gaming action during the execution of the specific effect the specific condition was met.

[Appendix E1]
a determination means (41) for determining whether or not a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player is to be generated when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315), and performing a jackpot lottery;
a game operation execution means (41) for executing a game operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed when the determination means (41) determines whether or not to generate the special game state;
A reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game operation executed by the game operation execution means (41);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball-entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball-entry means (314) and a second starting ball-entry means (315) different from the first starting ball-entry means (314) for switching between an unfavorable state in which the game ball is restricted from entering the game and an advantageous state in which the game ball is easier to enter the game than the unfavorable state,
The predetermined symbols include a first symbol (first special symbol) which is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the first starting ball entry means (314), and a second symbol (second special symbol) which is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the second starting ball entry means (315),
The game operation includes a first game operation (first special symbol game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and a second game operation (second special symbol game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed,
The reservation of the right to execute the game rotation operation by the reservation means (41) includes a first reservation (first special symbol reservation) which is a reservation of the right to execute the first game rotation operation, and a second reservation (second special symbol reservation) which is a reservation of the right to execute the second game rotation operation,
a first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting first numerical information in a first counting means (a second special symbol reserved number storage area NAB, a second special symbol reserved number storage area corresponding area) capable of counting corresponding to the second reserved number (second special symbol reserved number M) in a predetermined game state (a state in which a continuation effect such as a RUSH effect can be executed, a state in which a second special symbol game based on a game ball to the second winning port 315 in a time-saving game state can be executed);
A subtraction means (41, 51) that subtracts the first numerical information set in the first counting means when a subtraction condition is met (when a second special symbol game is started);
An effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot announcement effect, battle effect) during execution of the variable display of the second symbol in the predetermined game state;
a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of times of special symbol games that can be executed in the c time-shortening game state) different from the first numerical information in a second counting means (c time-shortening number counter) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game when a specific condition (missing the time-shortening symbol stop) that can generate a specific game state (c time-shortening game state) in which a specific game can be executed is established;
An update means (41, 51) that updates the second numerical information set in the second counting means when an update condition is met (when a special game is started);
means (41, 51) for continuously executing the specific presentation during the predetermined game state when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific presentation, until at least the first numerical information set in the first counting means is subtracted by the subtraction means due to the establishment of the subtraction condition to become a specific value (for example, 0);
means (51) for setting specific numerical information (the remaining number of times of time-shortened games in the c time-shortened game state) in the second counting means when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific effect is being executed, but not executing a specific corresponding display (remaining number of times of time-shortened games in the c time-shortened game state (effect)) corresponding to the specific numerical information of the set second counting means, for updating the specific numerical information of the second counting means when the update condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific effect is being executed, but not executing the specific corresponding display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and for executing the specific corresponding display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect;
When the specific performance is finished, a means for executing different performances depending on whether the specific condition is met during the execution of the specific performance or not;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, when a special effect ends, different effects are executed depending on whether a special condition was met during the execution of the special effect or whether the special condition was not met during the execution of the special effect. In this way, when a special effect ends, different effects are executed depending on whether a special condition was met during the execution of the special effect or whether the special condition was not met during the execution of the special effect. This allows the player to understand whether a special condition was met during the execution of the special effect based on the effect executed when the special effect ends. This allows the player to enjoy playing the game while hoping that when the special effect ends, an effect will be executed that will allow the player to understand that a special condition was met, and that a special response display will be displayed.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1, characterized in that the effects that can be executed when the specific effect ends include effects that clearly indicate or suggest the profit state at the time the specific effect ends.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E2, the effects that can be executed when a specific effect ends include effects that clearly indicate or suggest the profit state at the time the specific effect ends. In this way, by including effects that clearly indicate or suggest the profit state at the time the specific effect ends, the player can understand the profit state after the end of the specific effect based on these effects. As a result, even in situations where the end of a specific effect clearly indicates or suggests the end of a state advantageous to the player, causing the player's interest in the game to decrease, the player can enjoy playing the game while looking forward to seeing what kind of effect will be executed, that is, hoping that the profit state after the end of the specific effect will be advantageous to the player.

[Appendix F1]
a determination means (41) for determining whether or not a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player is to be generated when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315), and performing a jackpot lottery;
a game operation execution means (41) for executing a game operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed when the determination means (41) determines whether or not to generate the special game state;
A reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game operation executed by the game operation execution means (41);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball-entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball-entry means (314) and a second starting ball-entry means (315) different from the first starting ball-entry means (314) for switching between an unfavorable state in which the game ball is restricted from entering the game and an advantageous state in which the game ball is easier to enter the game than the unfavorable state,
The predetermined symbols include a first symbol (first special symbol) which is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the first starting ball entry means (314), and a second symbol (second special symbol) which is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the second starting ball entry means (315),
The game operation includes a first game operation (first special symbol game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and a second game operation (second special symbol game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed,
The reservation of the right to execute the game rotation operation by the reservation means (41) includes a first reservation (first special symbol reservation) which is a reservation of the right to execute the first game rotation operation, and a second reservation (second special symbol reservation) which is a reservation of the right to execute the second game rotation operation,
a first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting first numerical information in a first counting means (a second special symbol reserved number storage area NAB, a second special symbol reserved number storage area corresponding area) capable of counting corresponding to the second reserved number (second special symbol reserved number M) in a predetermined game state (a state in which a continuation effect such as a RUSH effect can be executed, a state in which a second special symbol game based on a game ball to the second winning port 315 in a time-saving game state can be executed);
A subtraction means (41, 51) that subtracts the first numerical information set in the first counting means when a subtraction condition is met (when a second special symbol game is started);
An effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot announcement effect, battle effect) during execution of the variable display of the second symbol in the predetermined game state;
a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of times of special symbol games that can be executed in the c time-shortening game state) different from the first numerical information in a second counting means (c time-shortening number counter) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game when a specific condition (missing the time-shortening symbol stop) that can generate a specific game state (c time-shortening game state) in which a specific game can be executed is established;
An update means (41, 51) that updates the second numerical information set in the second counting means when an update condition is met (when a special game is started);
means (41, 51) for continuously executing the specific presentation during the predetermined game state when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific presentation, until at least the first numerical information set in the first counting means is subtracted by the subtraction means due to the establishment of the subtraction condition to become a specific value (for example, 0);
means (51) for setting specific numerical information (the remaining number of times of time-shortened games in the c time-shortened game state) in the second counting means when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific effect is being executed, but not executing a specific corresponding display (remaining number of times of time-shortened games in the c time-shortened game state (effect)) corresponding to the specific numerical information of the set second counting means, for updating the specific numerical information of the second counting means when the update condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific effect is being executed, but not executing the specific corresponding display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and for executing the specific corresponding display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specified gaming state is a state in which the special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) is likely to occur (a state in which a second special game is executed based on a gaming ball entering the second winning port 315 in the time-saving gaming state c).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F1, the predetermined gaming state is a state in which a special gaming state is likely to occur. Here, in the predetermined gaming state, even if a specific condition is met, the specific effect continues to be executed until the first numerical information reaches a specific value. Therefore, by the predetermined gaming state being a state in which a special gaming state is likely to occur, it is possible to make the player aware that the state is likely to cause the special gaming state to occur while the specific effect is continuously executed. This allows the player to determine whether or not the state is in which a special gaming state is likely to occur by paying attention to whether or not the specific effect continues, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix G1]
a determination means (41) for determining whether or not a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player is to be generated when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315), and performing a jackpot lottery;
a game operation execution means (41) for executing a game operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed when the determination means (41) determines whether or not to generate the special game state;
A reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game operation executed by the game operation execution means (41);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball-entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball-entry means (314) and a second starting ball-entry means (315) different from the first starting ball-entry means (314) for switching between an unfavorable state in which the game ball is restricted from entering the game and an advantageous state in which the game ball is easier to enter the game than the unfavorable state,
The predetermined symbols include a first symbol (first special symbol) which is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the first starting ball entry means (314), and a second symbol (second special symbol) which is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the second starting ball entry means (315),
The game operation includes a first game operation (first special symbol game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and a second game operation (second special symbol game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed,
The reservation of the right to execute the game rotation operation by the reservation means (41) includes a first reservation (first special symbol reservation) which is a reservation of the right to execute the first game rotation operation, and a second reservation (second special symbol reservation) which is a reservation of the right to execute the second game rotation operation,
a first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting first numerical information in a first counting means (a second special symbol reserved number storage area NAB, a second special symbol reserved number storage area corresponding area) capable of counting corresponding to the second reserved number (second special symbol reserved number M) in a predetermined game state (a state in which a continuation effect such as a RUSH effect can be executed, a state in which a second special symbol game based on a game ball to the second winning port 315 in a time-saving game state can be executed);
A subtraction means (41, 51) that subtracts the first numerical information set in the first counting means when a subtraction condition is met (when a second special symbol game is started);
An effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot announcement effect, battle effect) during execution of the variable display of the second symbol in the predetermined game state;
a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of times of special symbol games that can be executed in the c time-shortening game state) different from the first numerical information in a second counting means (c time-shortening number counter) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game when a specific condition (missing the time-shortening symbol stop) that can generate a specific game state (c time-shortening game state) in which a specific game can be executed is established;
An update means (41, 51) that updates the second numerical information set in the second counting means when an update condition is met (when a special game is started);
means (41, 51) for continuously executing the specific presentation during the predetermined game state when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific presentation, until at least the first numerical information set in the first counting means is subtracted by the subtraction means due to the establishment of the subtraction condition to become a specific value (for example, 0);
means (51) for setting specific numerical information (the remaining number of times of time-shortened games in the c time-shortened game state) in the second counting means when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific effect is being executed, but not executing a specific corresponding display (remaining number of times of time-shortened games in the c time-shortened game state (effect)) corresponding to the specific numerical information of the set second counting means, for updating the specific numerical information of the second counting means when the update condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific effect is being executed, but not executing the specific corresponding display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and for executing the specific corresponding display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect;
Equipped with
The specific presentation is a presentation that clearly indicates or suggests that the state is one in which the special game state (jackpot game state) is likely to occur (a state in which a second special game is executed based on a game ball entering the second winning port 315 in the time-saving game state c).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1, the specific effect is an effect that clearly indicates or suggests that a state is in which a special game state is likely to occur. In this way, by having the specific effect be an effect that clearly indicates or suggests that a state is in which a special game state is likely to occur, the player can understand that a state is in which a special game state is likely to occur while the specific effect is being executed. This allows the player to understand whether a state is in which a special game state is likely to occur by paying attention to whether the specific effect continues, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix H1]
a determination means (41) for determining whether or not a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player is to be generated when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315), and performing a jackpot lottery;
a game operation execution means (41) for executing a game operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed when the determination means (41) determines whether or not to generate the special game state;
A reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game operation executed by the game operation execution means (41);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball-entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball-entry means (314) and a second starting ball-entry means (315) different from the first starting ball-entry means (314) for switching between an unfavorable state in which the game ball is restricted from entering the game and an advantageous state in which the game ball is easier to enter the game than the unfavorable state,
The predetermined symbols include a first symbol (first special symbol) which is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the first starting ball entry means (314), and a second symbol (second special symbol) which is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the second starting ball entry means (315),
The game operation includes a first game operation (first special symbol game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and a second game operation (second special symbol game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed,
The reservation of the right to execute the game rotation operation by the reservation means (41) includes a first reservation (first special symbol reservation) which is a reservation of the right to execute the first game rotation operation, and a second reservation (second special symbol reservation) which is a reservation of the right to execute the second game rotation operation,
a first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting first numerical information in a first counting means (a second special symbol reserved number storage area NAB, a second special symbol reserved number storage area corresponding area) capable of counting corresponding to the second reserved number (second special symbol reserved number M) in a predetermined game state (a state in which a continuation effect such as a RUSH effect can be executed, a state in which a second special symbol game based on a game ball to the second winning port 315 in a time-saving game state can be executed);
A subtraction means (41, 51) that subtracts the first numerical information set in the first counting means when a subtraction condition is met (when a second special symbol game is started);
An effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot announcement effect, battle effect) during execution of the variable display of the second symbol in the predetermined game state;
a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of times of special symbol games that can be executed in the c time-shortening game state) different from the first numerical information in a second counting means (c time-shortening number counter) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game when a specific condition (missing the time-shortening symbol stop) that can generate a specific game state (c time-shortening game state) in which a specific game can be executed is established;
An update means (41, 51) that updates the second numerical information set in the second counting means when an update condition is met (when a special game is started);
means (41, 51) for continuously executing the specific presentation during the predetermined game state when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific presentation, until at least the first numerical information set in the first counting means is subtracted by the subtraction means due to the establishment of the subtraction condition to become a specific value (for example, 0);
means (51) for setting specific numerical information (the remaining number of times of time-shortened games in the c time-shortened game state) in the second counting means when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific effect is being executed, but not executing a specific corresponding display (remaining number of times of time-shortened games in the c time-shortened game state (effect)) corresponding to the specific numerical information of the set second counting means, for updating the specific numerical information of the second counting means when the update condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific effect is being executed, but not executing the specific corresponding display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and for executing the specific corresponding display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect;
In the predetermined game state (a state in which a second special symbol game is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the second winning opening 315 in the time-saving game state c), a means for displaying an image (second special symbol reservation image) that allows the number of the second reservations (second special symbol reservations) to be recognized;
In a specific game state to which the game can be transitioned after the end of the predetermined game state, a means for displaying an image (first special symbol reservation image) that allows the number of the first reservation (first special symbol reservation) to be recognized;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1, an image that allows the player to recognize the number of second reserves is displayed in a predetermined gaming state, and an image that allows the player to recognize the number of first reserves is displayed in a specific gaming state to which the game can be transitioned after the predetermined gaming state has ended. In this way, by displaying an image that allows the player to recognize the number of second reserves in the predetermined gaming state, it becomes possible for the player to understand that it is preferable to have gaming balls enter the second start ball entry means and execute a second gaming round. Meanwhile, by displaying an image that allows the player to recognize the number of first reserves in a specific gaming state to which the game can be transitioned after the predetermined gaming state has ended, it becomes possible for the player to understand that it is preferable to have gaming balls enter the first start ball entry means and execute a first gaming round. Therefore, when transitioning from a predetermined gaming state to a specific gaming state, it becomes possible for the player to understand, based on the display type of the number of reserves, that the game has transitioned from a state in which it is preferable to have gaming balls enter the second start ball entry means to a state in which it is preferable to have gaming balls enter the first start ball entry means. This allows the player to understand, based on the display type of the reserved number, whether the game ball launch method that is advantageous to the player is a launch method that makes it easier for the game ball to land into the first start ball entry means or a launch method that makes it easier for the game ball to land into the second start ball entry means. As a result, by paying attention to the display type of the reserved number, the player can enjoy the progress of the game without being disadvantaged.

[Appendix I1]
a determination means (41) for determining whether or not a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player is to be generated when a game ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315), and performing a jackpot lottery;
a game operation execution means (41) for executing a game operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed when the determination means (41) determines whether or not to generate the special game state;
A reservation means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game operation executed by the game operation execution means (41);
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball-entry means (314, 315) includes a first starting ball-entry means (314) and a second starting ball-entry means (315) different from the first starting ball-entry means (314) for switching between an unfavorable state in which the game ball is restricted from entering the game and an advantageous state in which the game ball is easier to enter the game than the unfavorable state,
The predetermined symbols include a first symbol (first special symbol) which is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the first starting ball entry means (314), and a second symbol (second special symbol) which is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the second starting ball entry means (315),
The game operation includes a first game operation (first special symbol game) in which the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and a second game operation (second special symbol game) in which the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed,
The reservation of the right to execute the game rotation operation by the reservation means (41) includes a first reservation (first special symbol reservation) which is a reservation of the right to execute the first game rotation operation, and a second reservation (second special symbol reservation) which is a reservation of the right to execute the second game rotation operation,
a first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting first numerical information in a first counting means (a second special symbol reserved number storage area NAB, a second special symbol reserved number storage area corresponding area) capable of counting corresponding to the second reserved number (second special symbol reserved number M) in a predetermined game state (a state in which a continuation effect such as a RUSH effect can be executed, a state in which a second special symbol game based on a game ball to the second winning port 315 in a time-saving game state can be executed);
A subtraction means (41, 51) that subtracts the first numerical information set in the first counting means when a subtraction condition is met (when a second special symbol game is started);
An effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot announcement effect, battle effect) during execution of the variable display of the second symbol in the predetermined game state;
a second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of times of special symbol games that can be executed in the c time-shortening game state) different from the first numerical information in a second counting means (c time-shortening number counter) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game when a specific condition (missing the time-shortening symbol stop) that can generate a specific game state (c time-shortening game state) in which a specific game can be executed is established;
An update means (41, 51) that updates the second numerical information set in the second counting means when an update condition is met (when a special game is started);
means (41, 51) for continuously executing the specific presentation during the predetermined game state when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific presentation, until at least the first numerical information set in the first counting means is subtracted by the subtraction means due to the establishment of the subtraction condition to become a specific value (for example, 0);
means (51) for setting specific numerical information (the remaining number of times of time-shortened games in the c time-shortened game state) in the second counting means when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific effect is being executed, but not executing a specific corresponding display (remaining number of times of time-shortened games in the c time-shortened game state (effect)) corresponding to the specific numerical information of the set second counting means, for updating the specific numerical information of the second counting means when the update condition is established during the execution of the second game operation while the specific effect is being executed, but not executing the specific corresponding display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and for executing the specific corresponding display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect;
a means for switching between a first state (normal game state) in which the probability that the second starting ball entry means (315) will be in the advantageous state is a first probability, and a second state (time-shortened game state including a time-shortened game state) in which the probability that the second starting ball entry means (315) will be in the advantageous state is a second probability higher than the first probability;
Equipped with
At least a portion of the period in the predetermined gaming state is the second state (time-shortened gaming state a).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, the probability that the second start ball scoring means will be in an advantageous state is high for at least a portion of the specified gaming state. Here, in the specified gaming state, even if a specific condition is met, the specific effect continues to be executed until the first numerical information reaches a specific value. Therefore, by having the specified gaming state be in a state in which the probability that the second start ball scoring means will be in an advantageous state for at least a portion of the specified gaming state, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the probability that the second start ball scoring means will be in an advantageous state is high while the specific effect is being executed continuously. This allows the player to determine whether the probability of the second start ball scoring means being in an advantageous state is high by paying attention to whether the specific effect continues, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix A1]
A plurality of starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area;
A winning/losing lottery means (41) for performing a winning/losing lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
a display control means (51) for determining and executing one specific effect to be executed on a display means (341) provided in the game area from a plurality of effect display modes (effect patterns) according to the lottery result of the winning/losing lottery means (41);
a movement control means (51) provided in the game area, for determining one of a plurality of movement modes (movement modes A to D) of the movement means (37) that operates while the one specific performance is being displayed on the display means (341), and for executing the movement control means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The moving control means (51) causes the moving means (37) to perform a series of specific actions (for example, up-down movement, reciprocating movement) based on specific information (driving data 1 to 5) set in correspondence with the one moving mode (moving modes A to D) determined from the plurality of moving modes, based on the establishment of predetermined operating conditions (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability variable promotion, 16R probability variable non-promotion),
The movable means (37) is controlled to move between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1) which is an initial position side in the series of specific operations, and a second position (operating position) which is the most moved position,
the series of specific actions is configured to execute a predetermined action to position the movable means at the first position (operation position) or in the vicinity of the first position (intermediate operation position 1) a plurality of times,
The movable control means (51)
a determination means (51) for determining whether or not a termination condition for the series of specific actions is met (completion of all processes based on the drive data 1, button operation) when the predetermined action is executed during the movement control of the series of specific actions based on the specific information;
a termination means (51) for stopping the movement of the movable means (37) located at the first position or in the vicinity of the first position when it is determined based on the determination means (51) that the termination condition is satisfied, and terminating the series of specific operations;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, when the movement control means executes a series of specific actions on the movable means based on specific information set corresponding to one movement state while the display control means is displaying one specific effect, the determination means determines whether or not the end condition for the series of specific actions is met when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position on the initial position side. In this way, when the movement control means executes a series of specific actions on the movable means based on specific information set corresponding to one movement state while the display control means is displaying one specific effect, the determination means determines whether or not the end condition for the series of specific actions is met when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position on the initial position side. Therefore, in the series of specific actions of the movable means executed by the movement control means based on specific information, the determination means determines whether or not the end condition is met each time the movable means is positioned at or near the first position on the initial position side by the movement control means. Furthermore, in this gaming machine, when the determination means determines that a termination condition is satisfied in a series of specific actions of the movable means by the movement control means based on the specific information, the termination means stops the movement of the movable means located at or near the first position, thereby terminating the series of specific actions. That is, in this gaming machine, in a series of specific actions of the movable means by the movement control means based on the specific information, the termination means can stop the movement of the movable means and terminate the series of specific actions, provided that the termination condition is satisfied, each time the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, even before all movement control of the movable means based on the specific information has been terminated. As a result, if the termination condition is satisfied during the execution of a series of specific actions of the movable means, the movement of the movable means based on the specific information can be stopped and the series of specific actions can be terminated when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position after the termination condition is satisfied. As a result, when it is determined that the termination condition for the series of specific actions is satisfied, the series of specific actions of the movable means can be immediately terminated, thereby smoothly controlling the termination of the movable means. As a result, this gaming machine allows for a smooth transition from a series of specific actions of the movable means to the next action, and once it is determined that the conditions for ending the series of specific actions have been met, the series of specific actions of the movable means can be ended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, if another individual action is subsequently executed after the series of specific actions of the movable means has ended, a smooth transition from the series of specific actions to the other individual action is possible, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when transitioning from the series of specific actions to the other individual action. As a result, even if the movable means is operated for the purpose of creating a specific effect while the display control means is displaying one specific effect, the movable means can be operated without compromising the effect of the effect.

[Appendix B1]
A plurality of starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area;
A winning/losing lottery means (41) for performing a winning/losing lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
a display control means (51) for determining and executing one specific effect to be executed on a display means (341) provided in the game area from a plurality of effect display modes (effect patterns) according to the lottery result of the winning/losing lottery means (41);
a movement control means (51) provided in the game area, for determining one of a plurality of movement modes (movement modes A to D) of the movement means (37) that operates while the display means (341) displays the one specific effect, and for executing the movement control means (51);
A gaming machine comprising:
The moving control means (51) causes the moving means (37) to perform a series of specific actions (for example, up-down movement, reciprocating movement) based on specific information (driving data 1 to 5) set in correspondence with the one moving mode (moving modes A to D) determined from the plurality of moving modes, based on the establishment of predetermined operating conditions (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability variable promotion, 16R probability variable non-promotion),
The movable means (37) is controlled to move between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1) which is an initial position side in the series of specific operations, and a second position (operating position) which is the most moved position,
the series of specific actions is configured to execute a predetermined action to position the movable means at the first position (operation position) or in the vicinity of the first position (intermediate operation position 1) a plurality of times,
The movable control means (51)
a determination means (51) for determining whether or not a condition for ending the series of specific actions is met (completion of all processes based on the drive data 1, button operation) when the predetermined action is executed during the movement control of the series of specific actions based on the specific information;
a termination means (51) for stopping the movement of the movable means (37) located at the first position or in the vicinity of the first position when it is determined based on the determination means (51) that the termination condition is satisfied, and terminating the series of specific operations;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the period for executing the series of specific operations includes a first period (for example, operation based on drive data 1 is completed by operating a button) and a second period that is longer than the first period (for example, operation based on drive data 1 is completed by executing all processing).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1, the period during which the movable means performs a series of specific actions includes a first period and a second period longer than the first period. That is, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1, at least two modes with different operation times are set as the series of specific actions performed by the movable means. By setting at least two modes with different operation times as the series of specific actions performed by the movable means in this way, it becomes possible to provide various information (e.g., display effects) to the player depending on the operation times of the series of specific actions performed by the movable means. For example, by performing the series of specific actions from the first period, it becomes possible to provide advantageous information to the player (e.g., premium display effects), and by performing the series of specific actions from the second period, it becomes possible to provide disadvantageous information to the player (e.g., default display effects). As a result, the player can focus on the period during which the series of specific actions are performed and enjoy the game while hoping to receive advantageous information, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix C1]
A plurality of starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area;
A winning/losing lottery means (41) for performing a winning/losing lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
a display control means (51) for determining and executing one specific effect to be executed on a display means (341) provided in the game area from a plurality of effect display modes (effect patterns) according to the lottery result of the winning/losing lottery means (41);
a movement control means (51) provided in the game area, for determining one of a plurality of movement modes (movement modes A to D) of the movement means (37) that operates while the one specific performance is being displayed on the display means (341), and for executing the movement control means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The moving control means (51) causes the moving means (37) to perform a series of specific actions (for example, up-down movement, reciprocating movement) based on specific information (driving data 1 to 5) set in correspondence with the one moving mode (moving modes A to D) determined from the plurality of moving modes, based on the establishment of predetermined operating conditions (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability variable promotion, 16R probability variable non-promotion),
The movable means (37) is controlled to move between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1) which is an initial position side in the series of specific operations, and a second position (operating position) which is the most moved position,
the series of specific actions is configured to execute a predetermined action to position the movable means at the first position (operation position) or in the vicinity of the first position (intermediate operation position 1) a plurality of times,
The movable control means (51)
a determination means (51) for determining whether or not a termination condition for the series of specific actions is met (completion of all processes based on the drive data 1, button operation) when the predetermined action is executed during the movement control of the series of specific actions based on the specific information;
a termination means (51) for stopping the movement of the movable means (37) located at the first position or in the vicinity of the first position when it is determined based on the determination means (51) that the termination condition is satisfied, and terminating the series of specific operations;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the period during which the movable means (37) is moved to the second position includes a first period (processing No. 03, No. 06 of drive data 1) and a second period (processing No. 11, No. 15 of drive data 1) that is longer than the first period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, the period during which the movable means is moved to the second position includes a first period and a second period longer than the first period. In other words, in the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, at least two types of modes in which the movable means is positioned at the second position for different periods are set as a series of specific actions by the movable means. In this way, by setting at least two types of modes in which the movable means is positioned at the second position for different periods as a series of specific actions by the movable means, the movable means can be moved in different modes depending on the period during which the movable means is moved to the second position. This makes it possible to diversify the actions of the movable means in a series of specific actions. Furthermore, when the movable means is moved for the purpose of dramatic effect, the dramatic effect can be enhanced, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix D1]
A plurality of starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area;
A winning/losing lottery means (41) for performing a winning/losing lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
a display control means (51) for determining and executing one specific effect to be executed on a display means (341) provided in the game area from a plurality of effect display modes (effect patterns) according to the lottery result of the winning/losing lottery means (41);
a movement control means (51) provided in the game area, which determines one of a plurality of movement modes (movement modes A to D) of the movement means (37) which operates while the display means (341) displays the one specific effect, and executes the movement control means (51);
A gaming machine comprising:
The moving control means (51) causes the moving means (37) to perform a series of specific actions (for example, up-down movement, reciprocating movement) based on specific information (driving data 1 to 5) set in correspondence with the one moving mode (moving modes A to D) determined from the plurality of moving modes, based on the establishment of predetermined operating conditions (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability variable promotion, 16R probability variable non-promotion),
The movable means (37) is controlled to move between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1) which is an initial position side in the series of specific operations, and a second position (operating position) which is the most moved position,
the series of specific actions is configured to execute a predetermined action of positioning the movable means at the first position (operation position) or in the vicinity of the first position (intermediate operation position 1) a plurality of times,
The movable control means (51)
a determination means (51) for determining whether or not a termination condition for the series of specific actions is met (completion of all processes based on the drive data 1, button operation) when the predetermined action is executed during the movement control of the series of specific actions based on the specific information;
a termination means (51) for stopping the movement of the movable means (37) located at the first position or in the vicinity of the first position when it is determined based on the determination means (51) that the termination condition is satisfied, and terminating the series of specific operations;
Equipped with
As a control to be executed after the series of specific operations is completed, a first control (SP development, SPSP development, 16R probability variable promotion) and a second control (SP non-development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability variable non-promotion) different from the first control can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that the control executed after the series of specific actions is completed is started with the movable means (37) positioned on the first position side, regardless of whether it is the first control or the second control.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, the control executed after the completion of a series of specific actions is initiated with the movable means positioned at the first position, regardless of whether it is the first control or a second control different from the first control. On the other hand, if the termination condition for the series of specific actions is met, the series of specific actions is terminated by stopping the movable means positioned at or near the first position. In other words, the position of the movable means when the series of specific actions is terminated and the starting positions of the first control and second control executed after the series of specific actions are both on the first position side. Therefore, when the series of specific actions is terminated, whether the subsequent control of the movable means is the first control or the second control, the subsequent control of the movable means can be started smoothly and without any sense of discomfort. As a result, when it is determined that the termination condition for the series of specific actions is met and the series of specific actions is terminated, it is possible to transition from the series of specific actions to the next action executed by the first control or the second control, even if the timing of the termination determination is uncertain.

[Appendix E1]
A plurality of starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area;
A winning/losing lottery means (41) for performing a winning/losing lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
a display control means (51) for determining and executing one specific effect to be executed on a display means (341) provided in the game area from a plurality of effect display modes (effect patterns) according to the lottery result of the winning/losing lottery means (41);
a movement control means (51) provided in the game area, which determines one of a plurality of movement modes (movement modes A to D) of the movement means (37) which operates while the display means (341) displays the one specific effect, and executes the movement control means (51);
A gaming machine comprising:
The moving control means (51) causes the moving means (37) to perform a series of specific actions (for example, up-down movement, reciprocating movement) based on specific information (driving data 1 to 5) set in correspondence with the one moving mode (moving modes A to D) determined from the plurality of moving modes, based on the establishment of predetermined operating conditions (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability variable promotion, 16R probability variable non-promotion),
The movable means (37) is controlled to move between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1) which is an initial position side in the series of specific operations, and a second position (operating position) which is the most moved position,
the series of specific actions is configured to execute a predetermined action of positioning the movable means at the first position (operation position) or in the vicinity of the first position (intermediate operation position 1) a plurality of times,
The movable control means (51)
a determination means (51) for determining whether or not a termination condition for the series of specific actions is met (completion of all processes based on the drive data 1, button operation) when the predetermined action is executed during the movement control of the series of specific actions based on the specific information;
a termination means (51) for stopping the movement of the movable means (37) located at the first position or in the vicinity of the first position when it is determined based on the determination means (51) that the termination condition is satisfied, and terminating the series of specific operations;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the conditions for ending the series of specific actions is met based on a predetermined gaming operation (operation of an operation button) by the player.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, at least one of the termination conditions for the series of specific actions of the movable means is satisfied based on a predetermined gaming operation by the player. In this way, because at least one of the termination conditions for the series of specific actions of the movable means is satisfied based on a predetermined gaming operation by the player, even if the termination condition for the series of specific actions is satisfied before all control processes for the series of specific actions of the movable means are completed by the player's predetermined gaming operation, the determination means determines whether the termination condition for the series of specific actions is satisfied when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is the initial position. Therefore, if the termination condition for the series of specific actions is satisfied before all control processes for the series of specific actions of the movable means are completed by the player's predetermined gaming operation, the series of specific actions can be terminated when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position after the termination condition is satisfied. As a result, when the termination condition for the series of specific actions is satisfied, the series of specific actions of the movable means can be terminated immediately, so the series of specific actions of the movable means can be terminated without causing the player any discomfort after the termination condition for the series of specific actions is satisfied. Therefore, when another action is subsequently performed after the completion of a series of specific actions by the movable means, a smooth transition from the series of specific actions to the other action is possible, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when transitioning from the series of specific actions to the other action. As a result, even if the movable means is operated for the purpose of creating a special effect while one special effect is being displayed by the display control means, the movable means can be operated without impairing the effect of the effect.

[Appendix F1]
A plurality of starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area;
A winning/losing lottery means (41) for performing a winning/losing lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
a display control means (51) for determining and executing one specific effect to be executed on a display means (341) provided in the game area from a plurality of effect display modes (effect patterns) according to the lottery result of the winning/losing lottery means (41);
a movement control means (51) provided in the game area, which determines one of a plurality of movement modes (movement modes A to D) of the movement means (37) which operates while the display means (341) displays the one specific effect, and executes the movement control means (51);
A gaming machine comprising:
The moving control means (51) causes the moving means (37) to perform a series of specific actions (for example, up-down movement, reciprocating movement) based on specific information (driving data 1 to 5) set in correspondence with the one moving mode (moving modes A to D) determined from the plurality of moving modes, based on the establishment of predetermined operating conditions (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability variable promotion, 16R probability variable non-promotion),
The movable means (37) is controlled to move between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1) which is an initial position side in the series of specific operations, and a second position (operating position) which is the most moved position,
the series of specific actions is configured to execute a predetermined action to position the movable means at the first position (operation position) or in the vicinity of the first position (intermediate operation position 1) a plurality of times,
The movable control means (51)
a determination means (51) for determining whether or not a termination condition for the series of specific actions is met (completion of all processes based on the drive data 1, button operation) when the predetermined action is executed during the movement control of the series of specific actions based on the specific information;
a termination means (51) for stopping the movement of the movable means (37) located at the first position or in the vicinity of the first position when it is determined based on the determination means (51) that the termination condition is satisfied, and terminating the series of specific operations;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the control executed after the series of specific actions is completed includes a control object (pattern display unit 341, display performance) different from the movable means (37).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, the control executed after the series of specific actions of the movable means is completed includes a control object other than the movable means. In this way, by including a control object other than the movable means in the control executed after the series of specific actions of the movable means, it is possible to provide the player with new information in a control object other than the movable means after the series of specific actions of the movable means is completed. This makes it possible to provide the player with new information in a control object other than the movable means, even if the player misses the action of the movable means or does not understand the content provided by the action of the movable means. Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, by including a control object other than the movable means in the control executed after the series of specific actions of the movable means is completed, it is possible to clearly indicate or suggest an effect to be executed later depending on the action of the movable means. This allows the player to enjoy the game while focusing on the action of the movable means and hoping that an effect advantageous to the player will be clearly indicated or suggested, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix G1]
A plurality of starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area;
A winning/losing lottery means (41) for performing a winning/losing lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
a display control means (51) for determining and executing one specific effect to be executed on a display means (341) provided in the game area from a plurality of effect display modes (effect patterns) according to the lottery result of the winning/losing lottery means (41);
a movement control means (51) provided in the game area, which determines one of a plurality of movement modes (movement modes A to D) of the movement means (37) which operates while the display means (341) displays the one specific effect, and executes the movement control means (51);
A gaming machine comprising:
The moving control means (51) causes the moving means (37) to perform a series of specific actions (for example, up-down movement, reciprocating movement) based on specific information (driving data 1 to 5) set in correspondence with the one moving mode (moving modes A to D) determined from the plurality of moving modes, based on the establishment of predetermined operating conditions (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability variable promotion, 16R probability variable non-promotion),
The movable means (37) is controlled to move between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1) which is an initial position side in the series of specific operations, and a second position (operating position) which is the most moved position,
the series of specific actions is configured to execute a predetermined action of positioning the movable means at the first position (operation position) or in the vicinity of the first position (intermediate operation position 1) a plurality of times,
The movable control means (51)
a determination means (51) for determining whether or not a termination condition for the series of specific actions is met (completion of all processes based on the drive data 1, button operation) when the predetermined action is executed during the movement control of the series of specific actions based on the specific information;
a termination means (51) for stopping the movement of the movable means (37) located at the first position or in the vicinity of the first position when it is determined based on the determination means (51) that the termination condition is satisfied, and terminating the series of specific operations;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that when the movement control means (51) executes control to move the moving means (37) toward the second position during the series of specific actions, it does not determine whether the termination condition for the series of specific actions has been met.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1, when control is executed to move the movable means toward the second position during a series of specific actions of the movable means, no determination is made as to whether the end condition for the series of specific actions is met. In this way, when control is executed to move the movable means toward the second position during a series of specific actions of the movable means, no determination is made as to whether the end condition for the series of specific actions is met. This prevents the end of the series of specific actions of the movable means from being determined to be met when the movable means is moved toward the second position. Therefore, the series of specific actions of the movable means is prevented from ending when the movable means is moved toward the second position, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when transitioning from a series of specific actions to another action. This makes it possible to operate the movable means without impairing the effect of the action, even when the movable means is operated for the purpose of a specific effect while one effect is being displayed by the display control means.

[Appendix A1]
The game machine is provided with a launching means (32) that allows a player to adjust the launching force to launch a game ball into a game area,
A first game (a game played by hitting with the left hand) in which a game ball is shot in a first direction, and a second game (a game played by hitting with the right hand) in which a game ball is shot in a second direction different from the first direction, can be executed.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable play (special play) of patterns (special patterns, decorative patterns);
A plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
an assisting means (315b) for assisting the establishment of the starting condition;
A special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special chart jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of times that the predetermined variable game is executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means is switched to generate a specific game state (b time-shortened game state),
a first ball entry means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) having an opening/closing means (382) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state and a specific ball entry area (383);
an opening execution means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means;
a specific period game execution means (41) for executing a specific period game (V winning jackpot game) for a specific period different from the special game as the profit game based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state (for example, a normal gaming state after the end of a b time-shortened gaming state) that does not correspond to the specific gaming state, when the specified specific period of gaming ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state (b time-shortened gaming state) that corresponds to the specific gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, when a specific period of play, which is different from the special game as a profit game, ends based on a game ball entering a specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for a specific period in a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means that assists in the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a variable symbol game is a first control state that does not correspond to a specific game state, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state that corresponds to the specific game state. In other words, in this invention, even when the control state of the auxiliary means is in the predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is the first control state that does not correspond to a specific game state, it is possible to generate a specific game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is the second control state by causing a game ball to enter a specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open and playing for a specific period. This makes it possible to generate a specific game state again even after the specific game state has ended, preventing the gaming machine from being left unused because the specific game state has ended and no specific game state has occurred, and suppressing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

[Appendix B1]
The game machine is provided with a launching means (32) that allows a player to adjust the launching force to launch a game ball into a game area,
A first game (a game played by hitting with the left hand) in which a game ball is shot in a first direction, and a second game (a game played by hitting with the right hand) in which a game ball is shot in a second direction different from the first direction, can be executed.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable play (special play) of patterns (special patterns, decorative patterns);
A plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
an assisting means (315b) for assisting the establishment of the starting condition;
A special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special chart jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of times that the predetermined variable game is executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means is switched to generate a specific game state (b time-shortened game state),
a first ball entry means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) having an opening/closing means (382) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state and a specific ball entry area (383);
an opening execution means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means;
a specific period game execution means (41) for executing a specific period game (V winning jackpot game) for a specific period different from the special game as the profit game based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is
In a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state (for example, a normal gaming state after the end of a b time-shortened gaming state) that does not correspond to the specific gaming state, when the predetermined specific period of gaming ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state (b time-shortened gaming state) that corresponds to the specific gaming state;
A signal output means (101) capable of outputting a signal according to a game state to the outside of the gaming machine is provided,
The signal output means outputs a special signal (jackpot signal 1) when the special game is executed as the profit game, and does not output the special signal when the specific period game is executed as the profit game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, the signal output means capable of outputting a signal corresponding to the gaming state to an external device of the gaming machine outputs a special signal when a special game is executed as a profit game, and does not output a special signal when a specific-period game is executed as a profit game. In this way, the signal output means capable of outputting a signal corresponding to the gaming state to an external device of the gaming machine outputs a special signal when a special game is executed as a profit game, and does not output a special signal when a specific-period game is executed as a profit game. This allows the gaming parlor's hall computer to determine, based on the special signal, that a special game is being executed and the number of times that a special game has been executed. Furthermore, by not outputting a special signal when a specific-period game is being executed, the specific-period game is prevented from being added to the number of times that a special game has been executed. This makes it possible for a so-called data display, installed, for example, on top of the gaming machine, to display the accurate number of times that a special game has been executed, without reflecting the number of times that a specific-period game has been executed.

[Appendix C1]
The game machine is provided with a launching means (32) that allows a player to adjust the launching force to launch a game ball into a game area,
A first game (a game played by hitting with the left hand) in which a game ball is shot in a first direction, and a second game (a game played by hitting with the right hand) in which a game ball is shot in a second direction different from the first direction, can be executed.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable play (special play) of patterns (special patterns, decorative patterns);
A plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
an assisting means (315b) for assisting the establishment of the starting condition;
A special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special chart jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of times that the predetermined variable game is executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means is switched to generate a specific game state (b time-shortened game state),
a first ball entry means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) having an opening/closing means (382) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state and a specific ball entry area (383);
an opening execution means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means;
a specific period game execution means (41) for executing a specific period game (V winning jackpot game) for a specific period different from the special game as the profit game based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period;
Equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state (for example, a normal gaming state after the end of a b time-shortened gaming state) that does not correspond to the specific gaming state, when the predetermined specific period of gaming ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state (b time-shortened gaming state) that corresponds to the specific gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying, when the execution of the specific period game is completed, game status information for the game status corresponding to the completion of the execution of the specific period game on the display means.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, when the execution of a specific period game, which is executed based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means is open, is completed, game state information for the game state corresponding to the completion of the execution of the specific period game is displayed on the display means capable of executing a variable symbol game. In other words, in the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, when the execution of the specific period game is completed, game state information indicating that the control state of the assisting means that assists in the establishment of the start conditions for the variable symbol game is in the second control state corresponding to the specific game state is displayed on the display means capable of executing a variable symbol game. This allows the player to understand that the second control state corresponding to the specific game state is in effect, i.e., that a specific game state can occur when the specified variable symbol game has been executed a specified number of times without executing a special game.

[Appendix D1]
The game machine is provided with a launching means (32) that allows a player to adjust the launching force to launch a game ball into a game area,
A first game (a game played by hitting with the left hand) in which a game ball is shot in a first direction, and a second game (a game played by hitting with the right hand) in which a game ball is shot in a second direction different from the first direction, can be executed.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable play (special play) of patterns (special patterns, decorative patterns);
A plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
an assisting means (315b) for assisting the establishment of the starting condition;
A special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special chart jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of times that the predetermined variable game is executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means is switched to generate a specific game state (b time-shortened game state),
a first ball entry means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) having an opening/closing means (382) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state and a specific ball entry area (383);
an opening execution means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means;
a specific period game execution means (41) for executing a specific period game (V winning jackpot game) for a specific period different from the special game as the profit game based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is
In a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state (for example, a normal gaming state after the end of a b time-shortened gaming state) that does not correspond to the specific gaming state, when the predetermined specific period of gaming ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state (b time-shortened gaming state) that corresponds to the specific gaming state;
A signal output means (101) capable of outputting a signal according to a game state to the outside of the gaming machine is provided,
The signal output means outputs an identifiable identification signal when the specific period game is executed as the profit game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, the signal output means capable of outputting a signal according to the gaming status to the outside of the gaming machine outputs an identifiable identification signal when a specific period game is executed as a profit game. In this way, the signal output means capable of outputting a signal according to the gaming status to the outside of the gaming machine outputs an identifiable identification signal (V-winning jackpot game signal) when a specific period game is executed, and the gaming parlor's hall computer can determine, based on the identification signal, that a specific period game is being executed and the number of times the specific period game has been executed.

[Appendix E1]
The game machine is provided with a launching means (32) that allows a player to adjust the launching force to launch a game ball into a game area,
A first game (a game played by hitting with the left hand) in which a game ball is shot in a first direction, and a second game (a game played by hitting with the right hand) in which a game ball is shot in a second direction different from the first direction, can be executed.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable play (special play) of patterns (special patterns, decorative patterns);
A plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
an assisting means (315b) for assisting the establishment of the starting condition;
A special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special chart jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of times that the predetermined variable game is executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means is switched to generate a specific game state (b time-shortened game state),
a first ball entry means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) having an opening/closing means (382) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state and a specific ball entry area (383);
an opening execution means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means;
a specific period game execution means (41) for executing a specific period game (V winning jackpot game) for a specific period different from the special game as the profit game based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period;
Equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state (for example, a normal gaming state after the end of a b time-shortened gaming state) that does not correspond to the specific gaming state, when the predetermined specific period of gaming ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state (b time-shortened gaming state) that corresponds to the specific gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized by having a third ball entry means (316) different from the second ball entry means as a ball entry means that is in a specific opening/closing state during the special game.

The gaming machine according to Appendix E1 is provided with a third ball entry means, different from the second ball entry means, that is a ball entry means that enters a specific open/close state during a special game as a profit game. Here, the second ball entry means has a specific ball entry area, and triggers the execution of a specific period game as a profit game based on a game ball entering this specific ball entry area. In other words, in the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, the third ball entry means that opens and closes during a special game is provided as a means different from the second ball entry means that triggers the execution of a specific period game. This makes it possible for the special game to award a player a gaming benefit that differs from that of the specific period game. Furthermore, because the third ball entry means is different from the second ball entry means, the special game and the specific period game can be executed independently, thereby realizing a gameplay in which the special game and the specific period game are executed simultaneously, or conversely, the special game and the specific period game are not executed simultaneously. For example, it is possible to allow special games to be played while specific period games are being played, while disallowing specific period games to be played while special games are being played.

[Appendix F1]
The game machine is provided with a launching means (32) that allows a player to adjust the launching force to launch a game ball into a game area,
A first game (a game played by hitting with the left hand) in which a game ball is shot in a first direction, and a second game (a game played by hitting with the right hand) in which a game ball is shot in a second direction different from the first direction, can be executed.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable play (special play) of patterns (special patterns, decorative patterns);
A plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
an assisting means (315b) for assisting the establishment of the starting condition;
A special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special chart jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of times that the predetermined variable game is executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means is switched to generate a specific game state (b time-shortened game state),
a first ball entry means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) having an opening/closing means (382) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state and a specific ball entry area (383);
an opening execution means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means;
a specific period game execution means (41) for executing a specific period game (V winning jackpot game) for a specific period different from the special game as the profit game based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period;
Equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state (for example, a normal gaming state after the end of a b time-shortened gaming state) that does not correspond to the specific gaming state, when the predetermined specific period of gaming ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state (b time-shortened gaming state) that corresponds to the specific gaming state;
The gaming machine is configured so that when a specific number of gaming balls are shot toward the specific flow path in the specified gaming state, the number of profitable gaming balls that the player can obtain is less than the specific number of balls.

The gaming machine according to Appendix F1 is configured so that, in a predetermined gaming state, when a specific number of gaming balls are launched toward a specific flow path through which gaming balls can enter the first ball entry means, the number of profitable gaming balls that a player can obtain is less than the specific number of balls. Here, the control state of the auxiliary means is changed from a first control state that does not correspond to the specific gaming state to a second control state that corresponds to the specific gaming state when a specific period of profitable gaming has ended, and this specific period of gaming is executed based on a gaming ball entering the specific ball entry area of the second ball entry means while the opening/closing means is open, by opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means based on a gaming ball that has flown down the specific flow path entering the first ball entry means. Therefore, in order to execute a game for a specific period of time in order to change the control state of the auxiliary means from the first control state to the second control state, it is necessary to launch game balls toward a specific flow path to have the game balls enter the first ball entry means. However, if the number of game balls that can be acquired is greater than the number of game balls launched when the control state of the auxiliary means is changed from the first control state to the second control state due to the player's convenience, launching game balls toward the specific flow path will increase the player's ball holdings, which may induce so-called "strategic shots." Therefore, as with the gaming machine described in Appendix F1, when a specific number of game balls are launched toward a specific flow path that can allow game balls to enter the first ball entry means in a specified game state, the number of profitable game balls that the player can obtain is configured to be less than the specific number of balls. This makes it possible to reduce the number of game balls that can be acquired compared to the number of game balls launched when the control state of the auxiliary means is changed from the first control state to the second control state, thereby preventing so-called "strategic shots."

[Appendix G1]
The game machine is provided with a launching means (32) that allows a player to adjust the launching force to launch a game ball into a game area,
A first game (a game played by hitting with the left hand) in which a game ball is shot in a first direction, and a second game (a game played by hitting with the right hand) in which a game ball is shot in a second direction different from the first direction, can be executed.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable play (special play) of patterns (special patterns, decorative patterns);
A plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
an assisting means (315b) for assisting the establishment of the starting condition;
A special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special chart jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of times that the predetermined variable game is executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means is switched to generate a specific game state (b time-shortened game state),
a first ball entry means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) having an opening/closing means (382) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state and a specific ball entry area (383);
an opening execution means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means;
a specific period game execution means (41) for executing a specific period game (V winning jackpot game) for a specific period different from the special game as the profit game based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period;
Equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state (for example, a normal gaming state after the end of a b time-shortened gaming state) that does not correspond to the specific gaming state, when the predetermined specific period of gaming ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state (b time-shortened gaming state) that corresponds to the specific gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for setting the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means so that when a specified gaming ball enters the first ball entry means during the execution of the special game as the profit game, the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means will not be opened for the specified period in response to the ball.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, if a specified gaming ball enters the first ball entry means while a special game as a profit game is being played, the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means is set not to open for a specified period of time in response to the ball entering. In this way, if a specified gaming ball enters the first ball entry means while a special game as a profit game is being played, the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means is set not to open for a specified period of time in response to the ball entering. As a result, no gaming ball will enter the specific ball entry area of the second ball entry means while the special game is being played, and therefore a specific period game as a profit game will not be played while the special game is being played. As a result, the specific period game will not end while the special game is being played, and the control state of the auxiliary means is prevented from changing from the first control state to the second control state while the special game is being played.

[Appendix H1]
The game machine is provided with a launching means (32) that allows a player to adjust the launching force to launch a game ball into a game area,
A first game (a game played by hitting with the left hand) in which a game ball is shot in a first direction, and a second game (a game played by hitting with the right hand) in which a game ball is shot in a second direction different from the first direction, can be executed.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable play (special play) of patterns (special patterns, decorative patterns);
A plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
an assisting means (315b) for assisting the establishment of the starting condition;
A special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special chart jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of times that the predetermined variable game is executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means is switched to generate a specific game state (b time-shortened game state),
a first ball entry means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) having an opening/closing means (382) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state and a specific ball entry area (383);
an opening execution means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means;
a specific period game execution means (41) for executing a specific period game (V winning jackpot game) for a specific period different from the special game as the profit game based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period;
Equipped with
In a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state (for example, a normal gaming state after the end of a b time-shortened gaming state) that does not correspond to the specific gaming state, when the predetermined specific period of gaming ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state (b time-shortened gaming state) that corresponds to the specific gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized in that the opening execution means is capable of opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for the specified period based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means while the variable game is being executed based on the establishment of the start condition.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H1, the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means can be opened for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means while a variable game is being executed based on the satisfaction of a start condition. In this way, the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means can be opened for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means while a variable game is being executed based on the satisfaction of a start condition. This allows a game ball to enter the specific ball entry area of the second ball entry means while a variable game is being executed, and therefore a specific period game can be executed as a profit game while the variable game is being executed. As a result, since the specific period game may end while the variable game is being executed, it becomes possible to change the control state of the auxiliary means from the first control state to the second control state while the variable game is being executed.

[Appendix I1]
The game machine is provided with a launching means (32) that allows a player to adjust the launching force to launch a game ball into a game area,
A first game (a game played by hitting with the left hand) in which a game ball is shot in a first direction, and a second game (a game played by hitting with the right hand) in which a game ball is shot in a second direction different from the first direction, can be executed.
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing variable play (special play) of patterns (special patterns, decorative patterns);
A plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
an assisting means (315b) for assisting the establishment of the starting condition;
A special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special chart jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of times that the predetermined variable game is executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means is switched to generate a specific game state (b time-shortened game state),
a first ball entry means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) having an opening/closing means (382) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state and a specific ball entry area (383);
an opening execution means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means;
a specific period game execution means (41) for executing a specific period game (V winning jackpot game) for a specific period different from the special game as the profit game based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is
In a predetermined gaming state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state (for example, a normal gaming state after the end of a b time-shortened gaming state) that does not correspond to the specific gaming state, when the predetermined specific period of gaming ends, the control state is changed from the first control state to a second control state (b time-shortened gaming state) that corresponds to the specific gaming state;
A first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability are provided as the probability that the result of the variable game becomes the predetermined result and the special game is executed as the profit game,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the probability is one of the first probability and the second probability before the specific period of play is executed, the probability is configured so that it is not changed from one of the first probability and the second probability to the other probability different from one of the first probability and the second probability based on the execution of the specific period of play.

The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1 is configured so that if the probability that the result of a variable game before the execution of a specific-period game will become a predetermined result and a special game as a profit game will be executed is one of a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability, the probability will not be changed to the other probability different from either the first probability or the second probability based on the execution of a specific-period game. In other words, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1, the probability that the result of a variable game will become a predetermined result is the same before and after the execution of a specific-period game. In this way, because the probability that the result of a variable game will become a predetermined result is the same before and after the execution of a specific-period game, the probability is prevented from changing from the second probability, which is advantageous to the player, to the first probability, which is lower and disadvantageous to the player, after the end of the specific-period game, thereby preventing the player from suffering a disadvantage as a result of the execution of a specific-period game.

10: gaming machine 31: gaming board 314: first winning slot 315: second winning slot 316: variable winning slots 317L, 317R: through gate 341: symbol display unit 4: main control device 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
5: Audio and lamp control device 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM

Claims (1)

a first execution means for executing a first game operation based on the establishment of a first starting condition;
a ball entry assisting means for switching between an unfavorable state in which entry of the game ball is restricted and an easy state in which entry of the game ball is easier than the unfavorable state, and a second execution means for executing a second game operation when a second starting condition different from the first starting condition is established;
A gaming machine equipped with
This gaming machine is
a predetermined numerical information setting means for setting predetermined numerical information in a first counting means capable of counting corresponding to the second game action in a predetermined game state that can be executed after a game state that is advantageous to a player;
a subtraction means for subtracting the predetermined numerical information of the first counting means when a subtraction condition is satisfied;
A specific effect that can be executed when the second game rotation operation is performed in the predetermined game state;
and specific numerical information setting means for setting specific numerical information in a second counting means capable of counting corresponding to the specific game state when a specific state that can cause the specific game state to occur is established during the second game operation performed while the specific effect is being executed.
the specific numerical information of the second counting means is configured to be updated based on the establishment of an update condition,
This gaming machine is
The specific numerical information set in the second counting means is updated by subtraction based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition,
During the second game operation performed during the execution of the specific effect, even if the specific state is established, the specific effect can be continuously executed until a predetermined period has elapsed after the predetermined numerical information set in the first counting means is subtracted and becomes 0 ,
When the predetermined specific state is established during the second game operation performed while the specific effect is being executed, the predetermined specific numerical information is set in the second counting means, but a specific corresponding display corresponding to the predetermined specific numerical information set in the second counting means is not executed; during the second game operation in which the predetermined specific numerical information is set in the second counting means, the predetermined specific numerical information of the second counting means may be updated, but the specific corresponding display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is not executed; and when the specific effect is finished, the specific corresponding display corresponding to the specific numerical information of the second counting means at that time may be executed .
This gaming machine is
a configuration in which the numerical value of the specific numerical information set in the second counting means can be increased based on the establishment of the specific update condition,
This gaming machine is
The game method includes a first game method in which the first start condition is satisfied to execute the first game operation, and a second game method in which the second start condition is satisfied to execute the second game operation,
The gaming method to be executed in the advantageous gaming state is the second gaming method,
The gaming method to be executed after the specific performance ends is configured to be the first gaming method in both cases where the specific state is established and where the specific state is not established during the second gaming operation performed during the execution of the specific performance,
This gaming machine is
During the second game operation performed during the execution of the specific performance, the case where the specific update condition is established and the case where the specific update condition is not established are determined at least in accordance with the state of a lottery by a predetermined lottery means,
This gaming machine is
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to identify the second game action in which the specific state is established among the multiple second game actions executed during the execution of the specific presentation .